Department of State bulletin

I

t

une-

Given By
V S. SITT^' -T DOCUMKNTS

Jne/ u)e^a/)^7ne^ ^ C/iate^

AN ANALYSIS OF THE SCHUMAN PLAN . .

CONGRESSIONAL RESOLUTION URGING JUST

AND LASTING PEACE ENDORSED 556

1950 WORLD ECONOMIC SITUATION • by Isador

Lubin 538

INVESTIGATION OF FORCED LABOR CONDITIONS
IN U.S.S.R. AND SATELLITES URGED • by

Walter Kotschnig 544

For index see back cover

Vol. XXIV, No. 613
April 2, 1951

,jAe z/^efut/yt^ervt ^£ ^/laCe Yj W 1 1 \j L i 1 1

Vol. XXIV, No. 613 • Publication 4170

April 2, 1951

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D.C.

Peice:

62 Issues, domestic $7.60, foreign $10.25

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Depautment
or State Bulletin as the source will bo
appreciated*

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a iceekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the uork of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as tcell as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to uhich the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, a3
tvellas legislative tnaterial in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

U. S. SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS

APR 11 1951
AN ANALYSIS OF THE SCHUMAN PLAN

Introduction

On May 9, 1950 Eobert Schmnan, the French
Foreign Minister, announced his Government's
proposal to merge the coal and steel industries
of France and Germany, together with those of
any other European country, in a single market.
His announcement was a major development in
the political and economic life of Western Europe.

Mr. Schuman's invitation to develop a treaty
was extended to all European nations. Five na-
tions accepted his invitation — Belgium, the Neth-
erlands, Italy, Luxembourg, and Western Ger-
many. These five nations, together witli France,
have now developed a detailed treaty in imple-
mentation of the original proposals; except for
a few remaining issues which have been held in
abeyance for negotiation among ministers of the
six countries, the treaty is now ready for rati-
fication by national parliaments. The treaty
projjoses that any necessary governmental powers
over these industries be vested in new institutions
akin to those of a federal government. The key-
note in the administration of these industries
would be the elimination of national barriers to
trade and of private restrictive agreements. The
'(discriminatory devices heretofore frequently em-
ployed in the sale of coal and steel in member
country markets would be removed. Coal and
steel products and coal and steel workers would
move freely among the member countries. When
critical shortages or other crises required gov-
ernmental controls, these emergencies would be
leveloped and administered by the new supra-
lational institutions.

I

The single market, created by these provisions,
vould not be isolated from the rest of the world,
ffonmember producers would also have access to
jhe market, without any increased trade barriers
^eing interposed to the import of their products.

pril 2, 7951

Statement by Secretary Acheson

[Released to the press March 2i]

The United States Government welcomes the ac-
tion taken by the six Western European countries
in initialing the provisions of the Schuman Plan
treaty last Monday in Paris. In developing this
unprecedented agreement, the six countries liave
provided dramatic evidence of their will to merge
their national interests in order to contribute to
the peace and well-being which are the objectives
of the free nations of the Western World. The
United States is confident that, in the same spirit,
the six countries will be able to settle any remaining
issues on which agreement must be reached before
the Schuman Plan can be put into actual operation.

Furthermore, countries which import from pro-
ducers in the single market would be assured
equitable treatment and reasonable prices.

These revolutionary agreements and institutions
deserve the most careful study. The summary
which follows indicates the chief provisions of the
plan and how it can be expected to operate.

Historical Background

Throughout the present century, the coal and
steel industries of France and Germany have had
an important effect on their political and economic
relations. One reason why these two basic indus-
tries have figured so prominently in French-Ger-
man relations has been their location. The bulk
of the coal and steel industry of France and Ger-
many lies in a compact area close to the border
dividing the two countries, an area which includes
Lorraine, the Saar, and the Ruhr.

Within this small area, divided by the French-
German border, lie the raw materials essential
for the development of a modern steel industry.
The iron ore on which the French and German
industries were originally built lies largely in
Lorraine, an area which was a part of France

523

until the Franco-Prussian War of the 1870's,
which Germany controlled until World War I,
and which France thereafter regained. The coal
deposits which initially led to the creation of the
French and German steel industries lie largely in
the Kuhr area, and to a lesser extent in the Saar
region ; both of these areas are close by the western
German border, and the status of the latter area
has frequently been in dispute between the two
countries.

The explosive nature of French-German rela-
tions in the past century led each of these countries
to use her possession of raw materials, which the
other needed, as a prime bargaining weapon and
retaliatory device.

From the end of World War I until the time of
Mr. Schuman's proposals, the one development
which might have been characterized as French-
German cooperation in the field of steel produc-
tion was the creation of the European Steel Cartel
in the middle 1920's, an organization which en-
joyed a checkered but increasingly significant role
up to World War II. The European Steel Cartel,
however, was basically a negotiated truce among
the steel industries of the Western European coun-
tries. Particularly in its later versions, it was an
agreement among producers and sellers of steel on
the terms under which each national group would
sell in the markets of any other group and in the
market of third countries. The emphasis was
primarily on avoiding market situations that
would cause a decline in the price of steel. Far
from promoting increased efficiency and wiping
out national barriers, the cartel froze Europe's
steel industry and national markets into a rigid
mold, which was a major reason for the inefficiency
which has handicapped the industry since. After
the initial enthusiastic reactions to the cartel,
which were expressed in 1926 and 19'27, little was
heard of its contribution to political harmony be-
tween France and Germany.

Schuman's proposals were broached at a time
when, with a revival in her industrial capacity,
Germany was seeking to be freed of any restraints
imposed upon her freedom of action. Meanwhile,
most of the Western World was becoming increas-
ingly convinced that the long-run solution to the
German problem lay in the closer integration of
the German economy with the West, rather than in
isolation and restraint. Accordingly, Schuman's
proposals, which are based upon the principle of
a pooling of German resources on a basis of equal-

ity with other Western European countries, were
greeted by large segments of the Western World
as a welcome and courageous development in
French national policy.

Schuman Plan Principles

The principles of the Schuman Plan, as enun-
ciated in the French Foreign Minister's statement
of May 9, 1950, were without precedent. A group
of supranational institutions would be created and
would be endowed with broad powers of a sov-
ereign nature over the coal and steel industries of
the member countries. The basic purpose of these
institutions would be to achieve the elimination of
all elements of nationalism in the conduct of the '
coal and steel industries of the member countries ;
among other things, this arrangement would I
mean the elimination of all barriers to trade i
among the member countries. The new institu- <
tions also would have the means of encouraging i
the modernization and improvement of mine and J
plant facilities. They would also be charged withi
improving and equalizing the living standards of 1
coal and steel workers. Finally, provision would
have to be made for transitional measures to ease
the shock of merging into a single market are
the coal and steel economies of countries with
widely varying cost structures.

INSTITUTIONAL ARRANGEMENTS

The constitution of the Schuman Plan reflect
the delegation of sovereignty through a numbei
of basic provisions. An executive body will bef '
created under the agreement with power to enforc
most of the substantive provisions. The mem-^
bers of this executive body, known as the Higt
Authority, will be elected for a 6-year tenure bj
the member governments acting together, from si
slate of nominees drawn up by them ; and no mem-f
her of this Authority would report to or receive in
structions from the national Government of an}
participating country.

The powers proposed for the High Authority
are extensive. They include the right to tax th
production of enterprises under their jurisdiction
to issue directives relating to coal and steel whicl
are binding on the individual enterprises an(
states to wliich they are addressed ; to fine enter
prises in violation of their ordere and to offset th
effects of any illegal acts by member states by fine
on the production of the enterprises in their area

524

Department of State Bulloti

to borrow and to lend; and to make studies and
suggestions to the enterprises and states under
their jurisdiction. Member states are bound to
use their respective police powers to enforce the
directions of the High Authority.

The High Authority will report periodically to
a Common Assembly, made up of representatives
drawn in agreed proportions from each of the
member countries. The Assembly will review the
Authority's work annually. By a two-thirds vote,
the Assembly will be able to censure the Authority
and compel its members to resign. The Assembly
also will have the right to review and approve, as
a whole, an annual budget proposed by the High
Autliority.

A third institution basic to the Plan is the spe-
cial Council of Ministers. The concept of a Coun-
cil arose out of a need to find some means whereby
the work of the High Authority in the coal and
steel sectors of the economies of the member coun-
tries could be tied in closely with the measures
being taken by these Governments in the rest of
their economies. The impact of actions by the
High Authority in coal and steel upon such na-
tional problems as the maintenance of an adequate
defense, the control of inflation, the balance of ex-
ternal accounts, and similar problems, was recog-
nized early in the negotiations.

Accordingly, the Council of Ministers, which is
to consist of ministers drawn from the Govern-
ments of each of the signatory countries, will be
endowed with the powers necessary to insure this
coordination. For example, the Council will have
the right to initiate proposals and will have a voice
in the determinations of the High Authority when-
ever the question of market control is involved,
5uch as the possibility of the fixing of maximum
prices or allocations to meet a shortage situation.
The Council of Ministers also will be directly con-
'erned in the process whereby the tariff rates of
he six countries applicable to coal and steel
shipped in from outside sources are set.

Another element in the structure created by the
Schuman Plan is the proposed Court of Justice,
n most typical intergovernmental agreements,
lifferences over interpretation ordinarily are set-
led by agreement among the signatory Govern-
nents, with pi-ovisions sometimes included for the
ight of appeal by Governments to the Interna-
ional Court. Tlie Schuman Plan provides for its
wn Court to deal with the juridical problems
rising out of the relations among the constituent

organs created by the plan and arising out of
complaints by aggrieved Governments, enter-
prises, or individuals. The Court's membership
will be determined by very much the same process
as that provided for the membership of the High
Authority. The Court's most important power is
the right to nullify the decisions of the High
Authority, in much the same way and on much
the same grounds as the courts of the United
States may declare laws of Congress imconstitu-
tional or nullify the decisions of administrative
bodies of the Government. In short, if the Au-
thority were exceeding its powers under the treaty
or were acting capriciously, the Court would have
a basis for reversal. The Court could also nullify
acts of the Council of Ministers or the Common
Assembly, where these bodies were exceeding their
powers.

The system of institutions is completed with
one final organ, the Consultative Committee. The
Committee is to provide a direct link between the
High Authority, on the one hand, and producer,
labor, and consumer groups, on the other. It will
consist of 30 to 50 representatives, drawn in equal
numbers from the three groups, and will have
advisory functions of a general character.

ARRANGEMENTS FOR REMOVING TRADE BARRIERS

The dominant principle of the Schuman Plan
is that the coal and steel industries of the member
countries are to be treated as if no national bound-
aries existed among them. The countries of
Western Europe are to abandon their efforts to be
self-sufficient in coal and steel and are to allow
these industries to develop in a common market
embracing all the member countries.

Accordingly, the principal operative provisions
of the plan deal with the elimination of existing
national barriers to trade. They call for the im-
mediate suspension of virtually all tariffs applic-
able by any member country to the coal and steel
products of any other member country. The pro-
visions also require the suspension of quantitative
restrictions on imports and exports of coal and
steel products among the member countries, and
the elimination of various other restrictive or dis-
criminatory devices.

These proposals, which are not unlike those
typically associated with a customs union, are sup-
plemented by more revolutionary provisions with
respect to restrictive arrangements among pro-
ducers of coal and steel. Any agreements among

pril 2, J 95 1

525

producers which restrict competition, whether by
fixing prices, allocating customers, limiting the
introduction of new technology, or other means,
are outlawed. Joint selling agreements or agi-ee-
ments among companies to promote specialization
in the manufacture of particular products may
be permitted in some circumstances; however, any
such agreements would require the prior approval
of the Authority, which is only to be granted if
the Authority has found that the agreement would
make a positive contribution to the efficiency of
the enterprises in question and would not signifi-
cantly affect the degree of competition in the mar-
kets concerned.

Additional provisions are aimed at reducing the
possibility on the part of enterprises in the single
market, through stock ownership, interlocking
directorates, and similar devices, to circumvent
the prohibition against restrictive business prac-
tices. Transactions which, in effect, would merge
or affiliate previously independent enterprises in
the area under the Authority's jurisdiction, re-
quire the prior approval of the High Authority,
which must act under standards similar to those
by whicli it judges joint selling and specialization
agreements.

Under the High Authority's general powers to
prevent or offset governmental measures which
have a discriminatory effect upon the coal and
steel enterprises in its jurisdiction, the High
Authority can bring about a change in discrimi-
natory freight rate structures imposed by the pub-
lic carriers operating in the area. The negotiat-
ing countries intend that the High Authority
would exercise this power early in its life, thereby
ending a long-standing source of friction.

Once the provisions were in force, it is expected
that producers in the common market would be
exposed to a considerable degree of price competi-
tion. The expectation is that the long-run im-
pact of this release of competitive forces would be
to increase productivity, cut costs, and lower prices
of coal and steel in the single market. Unless
some safeguards were provided, however, the dan-
ger would exist that producers might develop
pricing practices which generally fall under the
head of "unfair competition." They might, for
example, seek to drive competition out of a local
market by selling temporarily in that market alone
at a greatly depressed price. Another possibil-
ity is that producers might follow the practice of
favoring customei-s of one nationality over those

526

of another. Possibilities such as these have led
to provisions vesting in the Authority the power
to impose rules which would govern the pricing
practices (not the prices) of the producers in the
area. The general objective of the Authority
would be to enforce a nondiscriminatory pricing
pattern without unnecessarily inhibiting price
competition and price flexibility.

The provisions of the agi'eement also allow for
more direct intervention by the Authority in the
market for coal and steel under certain special
circumstances. Current European thinking on
the subject of coal and steel is, of course, greatly
influenced by the recurrent shortages of recent
years and the strong inflationary pressures which
such shortages have created. Accordingly, pro-
vision has been made for dealing with such situa-
tions ; the agreement would permit the High
Authority, acting in concert with the Council of I
Ministers, to impose price controls or to initiate a i
system of allocations for coal and steel in periods (
of shortage. At the other extreme, the Authority, ,
acting together with the Council of Ministers, isi
empowered to limit production and to introduce^
minimum prices in a jieriod of "manifest crisis."

Relations With Outside Countries

At present, each of the prospective members o:
the pool has undertakings to many countries out-
side the pool to grant the latter most-favored-na-
tion treatment in trade matters ; that is to say, eac
of the prosjiective participants is now bound b;
agreements which require them, for example, ti
apply the same tariff rate to coal or steel import©
from the United Kingdom or the United States a
is applied to coal or steel imported from othei
countries participating in the Schuman Plan.
The participating countries will have to negotiate]
for the modification of these commitments in or
der to be able to eliminate coal and steel tariffs!
among themselves while continuing to apply theni l
to imports from nonparticipating countries. Un-I
til the negotiations associated with these waiver5|
are completed and the terms of the waivers an'
known, any discussion of the commercial relations'
of the Schuman Plan countries with outside coun!
tries is bound to be tentative in nature. Mean'
while, the High Authority is not empowered t<i
take any measures inconsistent with the intemaj kpi
tional obligations of the participating countries.

Despite the luiresolved state of the trade rela

Sif

Deporfmenf of State Bulleth

.'

tions between the six countries and the outside
world, a few basic points are clear. Although the
dominant theme of the Schuman Plan is the crea-
tion of a single market ainong the participating
countries, the agreement also stresses the principle
that the single market should not be an area which
enjoys heavy protection from the coal and steel
exports of the rest of the world. This intention
will be put to the test initially in connection with
the process of harmonizing the tariff structures
of the participating countries. This problem of
harmonization is an unavoidable consequence of
tlie agreement to suspend tariffs on coal and steel
among the participating countries. If Germany
iiiil^osed a very much higher tariff rate on imports
of British steel tlian Belgium imposed on its im-
ports of British steel, German importers of British
s-teel would be likely to bring their products
tlirough Belgium and thereby avoid the high Ger-
man tariff. Similar problems would arise if the
countries had very different policies regarding
other types of import restrictions. To deal with
these problems, therefore, member countries would
have to develop arrangements whereby the import
restrictions which each of them applied to outside
countries were not sufficiently different to encour-
age needless transshipments among them.

The member countries would reserve one im-
portant right to the High Authority, however,
which might in some circumstances reduce the im-
port of the products of other countries. In the
event that a "manifest crisis" developed, justify-
ing the imposition of production quotas on coal
or steel in the single market area, and, in the event
that imports were being effected in such relatively
increased quantities and under such conditions as
seriously to injure producers of competitive coal
and steel products in the single market, the Au-
thority would be authorized to impose import
luotas. This power, it should be noted, is di-
-ectly analogous to the so-called escape-clause
"ights wliich participating countries reserve to
hemselves under the General Agreement on Tar-
ffs and Trade.

The treaty says little regarding the treatment to
)e accorded by the pool to outside countries which
mport their coal and steel. Such provisions as
^xist, however, are of a constructive nature. The
ibjective of the group is to be the development of
ales practices which would produce equitable
)rices for exported coal and steel. Among other
hings, the Authority will have the means of pre-

\pnl 2, 1951

I

venting companies in its jurisdiction from "dump-
ing" coal or steel abroad, that is, selling these
products at a price below their sale price in the
single market or below their cost of production.

Influencing Coal and Steel Investment

In general, competitive forces are expected to
determine the location of coal and steel facilities
in the single market and to encourage the expan-
sion and modernization of these facilities. The
High Authority will have no direct power to close
down high-cost mines or steel plants, nor can it
compel investments in added coal or steel facili-
ties; in these fields, the Authority will have to
rely upon market forces to bring about the results
it desires.

On the other hand, the Authority could influence
the pattern of investment in several other ways.
To begin with, the Authority could veto a pro-
posed investment in coal or steel facilities which
a company proposed to finance from funds other
than its own reserves, if the Authority concluded
that the proposed facilities could not be expected
to survive without subsidies or other artificial
means of support. In addition, the Authority
could make loans to enterprises to help in the ex-
pansion of their facilities. Finally, the Authority
will have the obligation of making continuing
studies of the coal and steel facilities of the com-
plex, to point out the needs and opportunities for
added investment in the area.

Protecting Labor's Interests

In the course of negotiating the provisions of
the Schuman Plan, it became increasingly ap-
parent that the project for a single market might
well involve shifts in coal and steel facilities
among the participating countries. These shifts,
in turn, might require the migration or displace-
ment of some workers engaged in those industries.
Accordingly, the High Authority was given re-
sponsibility for assisting workers in the readjust-
ments which might be involved. This assistance
may take any of several forms. It may include
liberal separation pay, retraining courses, or pay-
ment of resettlement expenses and similar pay-
ments. It might also include the financing of
new industries in the affected areas which could
absorb the displaced workers.

The High Authority's obligations with respect
to labor also have certain more positive objectives.

527

One of the High Authority's major purposes is to
eliminate the deliberate use of wage reductions as
a technique of competition. One provision of the
treaty prohibits any reduction in wages, except in
certain defined circumstances, such as when living
costs also had declined. In addition, the Au-
thority may enter into consultation with Govern-
ments with a view to correcting abnormally low
wage situations already in existence.

The treaty also contains other commitments
which have few precedents in international labor
history. The participating countries will be com-
mitted to the development of a detailed agree-
ment to eliminate virtually all restrictions in the
hiring of experienced steel and coal workers who
are nationals of any of the other countries. Par-
ticular efforts are to be made to eliminate barriers
to the reemployment of workers displaced in other
countries. Any discriminations practiced against
coal or steel workers of other member countries,
whether they are experienced or not, also will have
to be eliminated by the treaty.

Transitional Measures

From the first, the drafters of the plan consid-
ered that certain special measures would have to be
taken, during a relatively short period at the out-
set of the plan's operation, in order to deal with
the differences in costs which existed among the
coal and steel industries of the various nations.
It appeared that free trade among the coal and
steel industries of the six countries might force
shifts in production in the merged area on so
large a scale as to be intolerable for some of the
countries concerned. The most difficult prob-
lems in this category are those presented by the
relatively high cost Belgium coal industry and
by the Italian steel industry.

To deal with the Belgian coal problem, provi-
sion is made for the operation of a so-called coal
equalization fund which would operate during a
transitional period of 5 years. The fund would
be raised by levies on the coal and steel produc-

tion of the low cost producers in the area and
would be paid to the highest cost segment of the
Belgian producers. These subsidies would taper
off at a rapid rate, the exact pace depending on
the speed with which Belgian industry can adjust
itself to the situation.

The solution for Italian steel takes a different
form. The negotiators concluded that for tech-
nical reasons it was not practicable to operate an
equalization fund for the steel industry. Accord-
ingly, if the High Authority considers it necessary,
the Italian industry can be protected by tariffs
during the transitional period. However, the
duties involved cannot in any case be higher than
those which prevailed at the beginning of the
plan and would be reduced by some fixed per-
centage in each of the transitional years, until the
duty was eliminated.

Next Steps

Six countries have participated in the develop-
ment of the Schuman Plan treaty — Belgium,
France, Western Germany, the Netherlands, Italy,
and Luxembourg. Ratification by the parlia-
ments of the signatory Governments will put the
plan in operation. The discussions on ratification
will raise political issues of the first importance
in most of the countries concerned. Each country
is bound to test the plan for its impact on its do-
mestic economy and to explore the effects of par-
ticipation on other international issues.

Ratification of the plan will be a tribute to their
imagination and courage. It will represent an ex-
periment in new concepts of sovereignty and of
international organization, which will help to knit
the free nations of the world with stronger and
more enduring ties.

Note. — TJie Schuman Plan Constituting a European
Coal and Steel Communiti/: Draft Treaty Constituting the
European Coal and Steel Communitu and Draft Conven-
tion Containing the Tran»itional Provisions has been
printed by the Department of State as publication 4173
anfl is avaihible from the Suiterintendent of Documents,
U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C,
at 55i a copy.

I

528

Deparfment of State Bulletin

L

Report of the Air Coordinating Committee for 1950'

I. INTRODUCTION

History and Background

The Air Coordinating Committee (ACC) is a
Federal interdepartmental committee which was
established by interdepartmental agreement in

1945, and subsequently formalized by the Presi-
dent under Executive Order 9781, September 19,

1946, with responsibility for coordinating Federal
policy in the field of aviation. The Committee is
authorized to

examine aviation problems and developments affecting
more than one participating agency ; develop and recom-
mend integrated policies to be carried out and actions to
be taken by the participating agencies or by any other
Government agency charged with responsibility in the
aviation field ; and, to the extent permitted by law, coordi-
nate the aviation activities of such agencies except activi-
ties relating to the exercise of quasi-judicial function.

It coordinates interdepartmental views and rec-
ommends general policy directives and instruc-
tions to the Department of State for the guidance
of the United States representatives to the Inter-
national Civil Aviation Organization (IcAo). The
ACC is also responsible for making recommenda-
tions to the President concerning major aviation
Solicy and for submitting to him for decision any
isagreement on important aviation questions.
The ACC is concerned with many aspects of
aviation policy, including both highly technical
policies and problems, such as involved in the all-
weather-flying progi'am and the longer-range eco-
nomic and industrial problems, such as are found
in the mobilization of the Nation's air power.
Major attention is given to civil-aviation matters
with military or international implications, but
the facilities of the Committee are available for
the coordination of any aviation problem affecting
more than one of its member agencies. Since rec-
ommendations of the ACC can be made only by
unanimous agreement, its member agencies are
assured of an opportunity for full discussion and
consideration of all aviation matters affecting
them. The means is thereby provided for the

' Message from the President of the United States trans-
mitting the annual report of the Air Coordinating Com-
mittee for the calendar year 1950. H. Doc. 55, 82d Cong.
Feb. 8, 1951.

achievement of an integrated and coordinated Fed-
eral aviation policy.

Aviation policy matters may be submitted to the
ACC by individual Federal departments and
agencies. States and other non-Federal jurisdic-
tions, the aviation industry, and the United States
representative to the International Civil Aviation
Organization. These matters are then referred to
an ACC committee or subcommittee or one of
the member agencies for study and analysis and
the preparation of a position which will be accept-
able to the member agencies and carried out by
them. The complete coordination of all inter-
ested areas of the Government is in this fashion
assured.

The Air Coordinating Committee membership
at present includes the Departments of State,
Navy, Air Force, Treasury, Post Office, Commerce,
the Civil Aeronautics Board, National Security
Resources Board, and the Bureau of the Budget,
a nonvoting member. The representatives of
these departments are from the sub-Cabinet level.
All major policy decisions are made by the mem-
bers of the Committee (appendix A).^ On ques-
tions affecting the interests of nonmember Federal
agencies, their representatives are consulted and
given full voting participation. The ACC em-
ploys a system of standing committees (divisions),
panels, subcommittees, ad hoc committees, and
working groups, to perform its work, possessing
varying degrees of responsibility. Technical,
legal, economic, and other personnel in a wide
variety of fields, drawn from the member agen-
cies, make up the subcommittees which provide the
basic study and coordination of a problem before
it is referred to the Committee. In limited cases,
however, where it is consistent with sound admin-
istration, direct authority to take final ACC action
has been conferred upon certain committees,
panels, or subcommittees. There are approxi-
mately 24 standing subcommittees and several
special purpose committees. (See list, appendix
B.)^ A permanent secretariat under the direc-
tion of the Executive Secretary provides facilities
and services necessary to the performance of the
Committee's functions.

' Not printed.

April 2, 7 95 J

529

Organizational Changes in 1950

A new Chairman was selected for the Air Coord-
inating Committee on September 27, 1950, with the
appointment of Mr. Delos W. Rentzel, Chairman
of the Civil Aeronautics Board. Mr. Rentzel suc-
ceeded Mr. Joseph J. O'Connell, Jr., former Chair-
man of the CAB, who resigned July 8, 1950.

Mr. E. H. Foley, Jr., Under Secretary of the
Treasury, was appointed Vice Chairman on Au-
gust 28, 1950, and presided at ACC meetings
during the interval between the resignation of Mr.
O'Connell and the appointment of Mr. Rentzel.

Mr. Thomas W. S. Davis, Assistant Secretary
of Commerce, was appointed as Commerce mem-
ber to succeed Mr. C. V. Whitney, former Under
Secretary of Commerce.

The National Security Resources Board was
added as a member of the ACC in recognition of
the increased emphasis on air-mobilization plan-
ning. Participation by the NSRB extends and
strengthens coordination of aviation policy in the
Government in accordance with the Executive
oi'der.

II. SUMMARY OF MAJOR ACTIVITIES OF 1950

The year 1950 provided numerous opportunities
for the coordination of Government-wide aviation
policy and the development of agreements on both
domestic and international matters by the mem-
ber agencies of the ACC.

The Committee considered various technical
aspects of domestic air navigation.

The all-weather-flying program conceived by
the S031 Report of the Radio Technical Com-
mission for Aeronautics can be realized and
speeded up because of the establishment of opera-
tional policies and detailed operational needs for
the integi-ation of air-traffic-control operations
within the United States, to permit a safe and
orderly transition to the common system.

The member agencies developed and recom-
mended a national policy and program with re-
gard to the selection and establishment of long-
distance aids to air navigation.

In response to a request from the President's
Communications Policy Board, the Committee de-
veloped a broad policy statement covering current
United States aeronautical communications, in-
cluding indications of unsolved problems in this
field.

A continuing large volume of decisions were
reached with regard to air-s])ace utilization.

Member agencies ajijiroveil and rerommended to
Congress proposed legislation for security control
of the air space by positive identification of all
aircraft in certain zones, enacted in Public Law
778, Eighly-first Congress.

The Conunittee considered problems of aircraft
production and aii- transport mobilization plan-
ning. In an effort to promote United States

530

leadership in the production of new and improved
turbine-powered aircraft, a program to provide
Government assistance to aircraft manufacturers
for the testing of certain prototypes was formu-
lated and became Public Law 867, the Prototype
Testing Act.

To prevent impairment of the civil air transport
industry as a result of expanding military aircraft
production, a policy was recommended to the
National Production Authority whereby spare
parts and new equipment necessary for the proper
functioning of civil air transport would be given
equal priority with military production.

The member agencies on the basis of a previous
agreement between the ACC and the NSRB con-
tinued working on mobilization plans and studies
of the Nation's civil air resources to provide ade-
quate aeronautical potential for an emergency.
During the current year a series of detailed mobili-
zation plans for the air transport industry were
completed and transmitted to NSRB.

In the field of international air policy the Com-
mittee continued to perform the ground work for
United States participation in the International
Civil Aviation Organization and to develop
answers for technical, economic, and legal policy
problems.

The Committee cleared United States positions
of policy relative to the development, adoption,
amendment, and implementation of the technical
annexes ( Standards and Recommended Practices)
to the Convention on International Civil Aviatioi
in the following fields: personnel licensing; rul
of the air; aeronautical charts; dimensional units
to be used in air-ground communications; oper*
tion of aircraft — scheduled international ai:
services; airworthiness of aircraft; aeronautica
telecommunications; air traffic services; searcl
and rescue; aircraft accident investigation!
(AIG) ; and aerodromes, air routes and groum
aids (AGA). In addition. United States posi
tions for the 1950 session of the Icao Assembly an
for other Icao meetings were developed and c
ordinated. At these meetings many matters o
major importance to national and internationa.
aviation were considered, the majority of whicl
were technical in character.

The Committee continued to work on the eCi
nomic policy problems involved in internationa
rights to fly under article 5 of the Chicago con
vention, international air mail, burdensome taxa
tion on international airlines, facilitation ol
international air travel, and the i)rovision of in
ternational air-navigation facilities.

An inqiortant area in which the Committee wa;
particularly active was the establishment of ;i
policy to reduce deficiencies in international air
navigation facilities. The Committee developet
a current listing of important facility deficiencie.'
and indicated possible nu^thods of implomentatioi
requii-ed for Tnitod States flag carriers whose op
erations along cert ilicated international routes arc
vital to national interests.

Deparfment of Sfate Bulletir

The major endeavor in the legal field centered
upon efforts to revise the Rome Convention on
Damage Caused by Aircraft to Third Parties on
the Surface. Other problems in international law-
were considered, and positions were prepared on
the Convention for the Unification of Certain
Rules Relative to International Transportation by
Air (AVarsaw convention) and the Draft Conven-
tion on Aerial Collisions.

A statement of policies to cover landing and
parking fees at CAA-operated airports in the Pa-
cific area was submitted by the CAA to the Com-
mittee for coordination. The attention of the
Committee centered primarily around the provi-
sion of a standard landing charge. It was decided,
that this charge sliould be fixed at 16 cents per
thousand pounds of aircraft weight.

The ACC continued its review of United States
civil air policy for Germany and other occupied
countries, deciding, among other things, that air
service for Germany should be restricted to the
minimum required for economic recovery.

IV. INTERNATIONAL AIR POLICY

The international air policies which are fol-
lowed by the United States Government are an
important phase of our foreign policy. For this
reason the work of the Air Coordinating Commit-
tee, which combines and reflects the views of the
various governmental departments and agencies
in assuring full support and coordination of the
policy eventually advanced by the Department of
State on behalf of this Government, continues to
be one of its major assignments.

A. International Civil Aviation Organization

The United States is one of 58 states which are
members of the International Civil Aviation Or-
ganization, and one of the 20 states which sit on
its Council. The Assembly of all member states
of IcAO meets annually and is concerned with major
policy matters. The Council, which is the Or-
ganization's permanent executive body, is in ses-
sion about 7 months of the year, and the three
major committees of the Council — Air Navigation,
Air Transport, and Joint (Financial) Support are
in session concurrently with it. The Legal Com-
mittee of IcAO meets twice a year, subject to ap-
proval of the Council. There are 13 specialized
divisions which are responsible to the Air Naviga-
tion and Air Transport Committees, and there are
meetings for 10 different air-navigation regions.
The United States participates in the work of
IcAO through its resident representatives and
through special delegations.

The part that ACC plays in United States par-
ticipation in IcAO is twofold : first, developing the
United States position on matters being considered
by the Organization; and, second, coordinating

April 2, 1951

the development of an integrated program for the
implementation by the agencies of this Govern-
ment of decisions reached by Icao.

In addition to formulating policies for the use
of the United States representative on the Icao
Council, the Committee during 1950 developed the
United States positions to be presented at 16 Icao
conferences. (A list of these conferences is at-
tached to this report as appendix C.) The Com-
mittee also made recommendations to the Depart-
ment of State on the composition of the United
States delegations to the Icao conferences.

TECHNICAL POLICY DECISIONS

The Convention on International Civil Aviation,
under wluch Icao was organized and now operates,
was ratified by the United States and has the effect
of law. Under the convention each contracting
state undertakes to promote the highest practicable
degree of uniformity in technical standards and
procedures. To this end, the convention provides
that Icao shall adopt and amend from time to
time international standards and recommended
practices (technical annexes), and provides fur-
ther that any state having standards or practices
differing from those established under the con-
vention shall so notify Icao. The position of the
United States Government on cooperating with
Icao in establishing uniform standards and prac-
tices is reflected in the following memorandum
which the ACC issued :

The ACC favors and encourages compliance in all
respects with the Convention on International Civil Avia-
tion and recommends that Icao standards and recom-
mended practices and other pertinent Icao decisions be
applied to United States national aviation practices as
soon as practicable after adoption, except when it is im-
practicable to do so because of any of the following
reasons :

(a) Implementation would be detrimental to the na-
tional interest;

(6) Implementation cannot be effected without obtain-
ing new or amended legislation ;

(c) Necessary funds are not available;

(d) Implementation would work a substantial hard-
ship on the various aviation activities of the United States ;

(e) Existing national practices provide a greater degree
of safety.

The ACC recommends that insofar as is compatible
with the national interest, agencies exert every effort to
remove obstructions to the application of any Icao stand-
ard or recommended practice which cannot be applied
immediately.

During 1950 the ACC continued to perform a
large volume of work in connection with the de-
velopment of United States positions concerning
the adoption, amendment, and implementation of
the technical annexes to the Chicago convention.
Positions regarding the amendment of existing
annexes (international standards and recom-
mended practices) were developed, as well as posi-
tions with regard to the adoption of four new
annexes. A large volume of work was also per-
formed by the ACC in connection with United
States preparation for Icao divisional, regional,

531

and otlier technical meetings and approval of their
recommendations. Further technical policy coord-
ination was accomplished in the preparation of
replies to letters from Icao on many air-naviga-
tion questions.

FOURTH SESSION OF THE ASSEMBLY (JUNE 19S0)

The fourth session of the Icao Assembly was
held in an atmosphere of international good will
and understanding. Several of the participating
nations expressed the hope that Icao would serve
as a much-needed example for international co-
operation in other fields.

Through its examination of the annual report
of the Council and through its debate on specific
technical, economic, legal, and administrative
items appearing on its agenda, the Assembly re-
viewed all phases of the Organization's work.
Eesolutions adopted by this session of the Assem-
bly provided policy guidance and directives to the
Council on such matters as amendment of the
Chicago convention, activities of Icao and obliga-
tions of contracting states in the field of accident
investigation, recognition of certificates of air-
worthiness for the purpose of import and export,
the Icao aviation training program, the role of
Icao in the United Nations expanded technical
assistance program, commercial rights in interna-
tional air transport, and a new Draft Convention
on Damage Caused by Aircraft to Third Parties
on the Surface.

As in the case of previous sessions of the
Assembly, the position of the United States on all
items appearing on the pi'ovisional agenda was
drawn up and cleared with all United States Gov-
ernment agencies concerned through the mecha-
nism of the interdepartment.al Air Coordinating
Committee. Definite instructions on all agenda
items, either with or without latitude for the dele-
gation to use its own discretion, were given to the
chairman of the United States delegation prior to
departure for Icao headquarters in Montreal,
where the Assembly was held. Members of the
United States delegation, with few exceptions,
consisted of those who regularly represent their
agencies in the various components of the Air
Coordinating Committee. The United States
position was completely or substantially sustained
on most of the agenda items.

RECOGNITION OF NATIONAL CERTIFICATES
OF AIRWORTHINESS

At the fourth session of the Assembly of Icao,
the United States proposed that national certifi-
cates of airworthiness conforming to Icao stand-
ards should be recognized by all other member
nations of the Organization as being valid for
purposes of export and import of aircraft. This
proposal is still under consideration by Icao, and
the ACC is consequently still concerned with the
problem.

ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION

Another proposal of significance was made by
the United States at the fourth session of the Icao
Assembly. This involved discussion of the inter-
pretation of article 26 of the Chicago convention
with relation to aircraft-accident investigations
and the obligations of the member nations there-
under. The ACC is still occupied with formula-
tion of United States positions for international
negotiations on this subject.

INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION RIGHTS

UNDER ARTICLE 5 OF THE CHICAGO CONVENTION

Under the terms of the Chicago convention,
rights of one country's scheduled international
services to fly into another country are dependent
upon special arrangements between the govern-
ments concerned. In framing article 5, the
Chicago Conference attempted to secure freedom
of the air, subject only to limited restrictions, for
the various types of aircraft engaged in other than
scheduled services, including those engaged in both
commercial and noncommercial operations.

A major effort has been made by Icao during
the past year to reach a basis for agreement on the
meaning and application of article 5. In connec-
tion with United States participation in this work
in Icao, recommendations have been made by the
Air Coordinating Committee toward defining
"scheduled international air services" as well as
formulating concepts thereof for use in the practi-
cal application of the definition. It is hoped that
a definition can be obtained which will neither
open the door to destructive competition with
scheduled services on the one hand nor undulj' re-
strict the development of valuable types of aux-i
iliary services on the other.

INTERNATIONAL AIR MAIL

For some time Icao has been studying various
aspects of international air-mail service and has
recently received a request fi'om the Universal
Postal Union (Upu) to present views on the prin-
ciples for setting international air-mail-transpor-
tation charges. This matter is of great importance
to international air carriers, to postal administra-
tions, and to the users of air mail. A proposed
reply to Upu was submitted to Icao member states
for consideration and comment. Major topics of
discussion involved separation of mail costs from
other costs, principles of categorizing air-mail
services, "all up" air-mail services (sending all
first-class (LC) mail by air without surcharge up
to some specified distance where an improvement
in delivery time would thereby be effected), and i
the resultant patterns of transportation charges. '

The Air Coordinating Committee has reviewed }
the projioscd Icao communication to Uru and has i
reconnnended among other things that the average ;
level of Uru rates sliould be maintained at present i
in view of the fact that practically without excep-

532

Department of State Bulletin

tion international airlines are operating under
deficit conditions which may well be intensified by
the present trend of increasing costs. Under the
circumstances there is no apparent justification for
lowering foreign mail transportation charges.
The United States, in accordance with a decision
of the Air Coordinating Committee, has also sug-
gested to IcAO that the existing category system be
retained until definite substitute arrangements can
be agreed upon.

BURDENSOME TAXATION ON INTERNATIONAL AIRLINES

During ID.^O a joint United Nations-IcAo Secre-
tariat woi-king group undertoolc a study for the
purpose of (1) expanding the factual and legal
background material on multiple, discriminatory,
and unduly burdensome taxes levied on interna-
tional air carriers and (2) analyzing and inter-
preting the material and problems presented
from the point of view of international taxation
theoi-y and practice. The United States along
with other Icao member states, was requested to
submit views on certain of the problems involved.
These views and the results of the joint Secretariat
study were the basis of final recommendations of
the Icao Air Transport Committee to the Icao
Council.

Particular attention has been given by the Icao
Council to three forms of taxation on which action
by Icao appears justified : (a) Taxation of aircraft
fuel, lubricants, and similar supplies; (b) taxes
on income and property of airlines; and (c) taxes
related to the sale or use of international air trans-
portation. Recommendations formulated by the
ACC were designed to remove the most onerous
practices found to exist in these three forms of
taxation.

FACILITATION OF INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT

The ACC has continued its efforts in connection
with the removal of barriers, such as certain pro-
cedures required by customs, immigration, public
health, and quarantine authorities which were pre-
venting full exi^loitation of international air
transport.

One of the most outstanding achievements of
the ACC was its work in obtaining approval and
implementation by the United States Government
of practically all of the provisions of annex 9
to the Convention on International Civil Aviation.
The value of this annex in the facilitation of in-
ternational air transportation is already reflected
in the reduced cost of operating the United States
airlines through savings in man-hours and reduc-
tion in the number of forms used in connection
with international flights. As member states in
the International Civil Aviation Organization im-
plement to a greater degree the provisions of an-
nex 9, further savings to all carriers may be
expected.

To lend impetus to this effort, the United States
is endeavoring, through Icao, to influence other

states to take more expeditious action to remove
obstacles which are preventing the elimination of
deviations in the implementation of annex 9 in
areas under their control.

CHARGES FOR THE USE OF AIR NAVIGATION FACILITIES

During 1950 the Air Coordinating Committee,
after consultation with airlines, airport operators,
and other interested parties, recommended that thft
United States take an active and constructive role
with other members of Icao in attempting to reach
a satisfactory solution to the many outstanding
issues involved in establishing a program of inter-
national airway-user charges as a prelude to the
formulation of an international policy. Many
substantial pi-oblems remain to be solved before
such a policy can be obtained or satisfactorily ad-
ministered. The Icao Council is continuing its
consideration of the principles underlying such
charges. The United States does not favor adop-
tion by Icao of an international policy until these
many problems have been solved.

A statement of policies to cover landing and
parking fees at CAA-operated airports in the
Pacific area was submitted by CAA to the Air
Coordinating Committee for coordination. The
attention of the Committee centered primarily
around the provision of a standard landing charge.
It was decided that this charge should be fixed at
16 cents per thousand pounds of aircraft weight.

PROVISION AND MANNING OF
AIR-NAVIGATION FACILITIES

The Icao Assembly in 1948 requested the Coun-
cil to establish a program for providing and
manning indispensable air-navigation facilities
arranged in the order of their priority to interna-
tional air transport. The various contracting
states were requested to specify their own national
programs for which they would individually as-
sume the costs. During 1950 a review of the fa-
cilities to be provided by and requirements of the
United States has been made by the Air Coordi-
nating Committee in 4 of the 10 Icao regions. This
has involved a comprehensive study of all facili-
ties in territory controlled by the United States
that were recommended for installation, improve-
ment, or retention as well as an indication of ap-
parent deficiencies. Studies of other areas are
presently under way.

JOINT INTERNATIONAL FINANCING
OF AIR-NAVIGATION FACILITIES

The Convention on International Civil Aviation
provides that member nations should insofar as
practicable furnish facilities and services required
in their territory for safe, regular, efficient, and
economic international civil aviation. The con-
vention further provides that when the individual
nations are unable to furnish such facilities and
services the Icao Council may arrange for their

April 2, 1951

533

joint support (joint international financing) by
the nations benefiting therefrom.

Joint international operating or financing ar-
rangements are now in effect for ( 1 ) North Atlan-
tic Ocean stations, (2) air-navigation services in
Iceland, and (3) air-navigation services in Green-
land and the Faroes. Eecently considered was the
removal of the main meteorological station from
Keykjavik to Keflavik, Iceland. Necessary
weather services at Keflavik have been provided
by the United States Weather Bureau using its
own fimds. The Air Coordinating Committee
agreed that the Weather Bureau should phase out
its activities at Keflavik and recommended that
the United States representative to Icao advocate
that Keflavik be designated the main meteorolog-
ical ofhce, rather than Reykjavik; also that it be
included in the joint-support project for Iceland.

During 1950 Switzerland agreed to join the
group of user nations contributing toward the cost
of operating the North Atlantic air-safety services
under Icao auspices. To the extent that these and
similar projects can be made the subject of joint
support the cost to the United States, as the prin-
cipal user of the air routes of the world, will be
reduced.

A bilateral arrangement with Canada for the
establishment and maintenance of a minimum
number of ocean stations in the North Pacific has
been agreed upon and the United States contribu-
tion thereto is now being implemented within the
limits of available funds. This network of ocean
stations lias been and still is under constant re-
vision in order to meet requirements in the area.

INTERNATIONAL LEGAL CONVENTIONS

During 1950 a substantial portion of the legal
work of the Air Coordinating Committee was cen-
tered upon the Draft Convention on Damage
Caused by Aircraft to Third Parties on the Sur-
face, the so-called Rome surface-damage conven-
tion. It was the major legal item on the agenda
of the fourth session of the Icao Assembly and the
United States positions on the problems involved
were prepared in the ACC. In preparing these
and later positions, the assistance of various non-
governmental experts and interested organizations
was invited and received, and public meetings were
held at which many helpful views were expressed.
The convention was not finalized at the fourth
session of the Assembly as had been hoped, but a
new draft was adopted by the Legal Commission
of the Assembly, and has been placed on the
agenda of tiie seventli session of the Icao Legal
Committee convening in Mexico City on January
2, 1951. United States positions were prepared
for the delegation to this session of the Legal Com-
mittee and for the delegates to two subcommittees
of the Icao I>egal (Committee which were created
to work on the insurance and the jurisdictional
problems of the convention.

534

United States positions were also prepared on
revision of the Warsaw convention for the unifica-
tion of certain rules relating to international trans-
portation by air and the Draft Convention on
Aerial Collisions for the fourth session of the
Assembly, although work on the Rome convention

6 laced these two conventions in the background,
[owever, consideration of the Rome convention
necessarily involved detailed analysis of the colli-
sions convention in order to make the two consist-
ent in their treatment of collisions situations
involving damage to persons and property on the
surface.

PROBLEMS IN INTERNATIONAL LAW

In addition to the private international air-law
conventions mentioned above, the ACC took action
on other problems in the international law field.
In response to a request from the Shipping Coordi-
nating Committee for advice concerning changes
in the United States law which would be advisable
if proposed international regulations for prevent-
ing collisions at sea were adopted, a draft bill was
forwarded to the Shipping Coordinating Com-
mittee covering the aviation aspects of the prob-
lem. Termination of the 1935 Air Navigation
Agreement between the United States and Great
Britain was approved after determination that all
provisions of this agreement of any value to the
United States were covered by the Chicago con-
vention. Proposed Icao procedures for reporting
of breaches of, or noncompliance with national
laws and regulations were formulated for submis-
sion to the Icao Council by the United States
representative and are being coordinated for ACC
approval. The United States position on a United
Kingdom proposal for amendment of article 94
of the Chicago convention was established, and
alternative courses of action open to the Assembly
in dealing with proposed amendments to the Chi-
cago convention under the existing article 94 were
presented. The legal implications of a 200-mile
offshore zone of interception were investigated.

B. Other International Air Policy

(

EXPORT-IMPORT BANK LOANS

The Air Coordinating Committee has continued i
to advise the Export-Import Bank regarding pro-
posals for financing by the bank of foreign air
services and the export of aeronautical equipment.
This is in accordance with established policy where
pertinent aviation problems have been involved.

CIVIL AVIATION POLICY IN OCCUPIED COUNTRIES

The Air Coordinating Committee early in 1947 : ]
undertook the development of a civil-aviation [
policy for Germany, giving consideration to the I
part civil aviation could have in the economic
recovery of that country but keeping within the

Department of State Bulletins

dictates of security interest. In 1948 and 1949
agreement was reached with the British and
French, substantially in accord with earlier poli-
cies developed by ACC, making the policy with
respect to civil aviation in Western Germany uni-
form. In 1950 the ACC reviewed a proposed law
drafted by the Tripartite Civil Aviation Panel
regarding participation of Germans in aviation
activities. It was determined that the panel's
proposal conformed with the United States policy
with respect to aviation in Germany.

In 1950 a United States policy with regard to
civil aviation in Austria was formulated.

1950IICAO Conference

[APPENDIX C]

Jan. 5 to Jan. 21

Feb. 14 to Mar. 25—

Mar. 21 to Apr. 7__.

Mar. 21 to Apr. 11.
Apr. 11 to Apr. 27_

Apr. 11 to May 2___
Apr. 18 to May 10—
Apr. 24 to Apr. 28—

May 30 to June 17-

May 30 to June 20.
June 6 to June 26

Sept. 14 to Oct. 2_.
Oct. 17 to Nov. 7___

Nov. 8 to Dec. 1

Nov. 14 to Dec. 13—

Dec. 4 to Dec. 8—

Fifth Session, Legal Commit-
tee— Taormina, Rome.

Third Session of the Meteor-
ological Division — Paris.
[BLTLLEmN of Aug. 7, 1930,
p. ZiG]

Africa-Indian O c e a n/Mlddle
East Frequency Assign-
ment Planning Meeting —
Paris.

Afrita-Indian Ocean and Mid-
dle East Special Meeting
on Fixed Services — Paris.

Caribbean/S o u t h American/
South Atlantic Regional
Frequency Assignment
Planning Meeting — Ha-
bana.

Second Caribbean Regional Air
Navigation Meeting — Ha-
bana.

South East Asia Regional Fre-
quency Assignment Plan-
ning Meeting — New Delhi.

Informal Altimeter Setting
Meeting, European-Medi-
terranean Region — Paris.

Sixth Session, Legal Commit-
tee— Montreal.

Fourth Session of the Assem-
bly— Montreal.

European-Mediterranean Re-
gional Frequency Assign-
ment Planning Meeting —
Paris.

Air\vorthiness/0 perations
Meeting on Performance —
Paris.

Second Middle East Regional
Air Navigation Meeting —
Istanbul.

Special Met Meeting for Ari,
EuMED, and Nat Regions — '
Paris.

Fourth Session, Rules of the
Air and Air Traffic Con-
trol (Rag Division) —
Montreal.

Meeting of the Subcommittee
on Insurance and Other
Security — Paris.

U.S. and France Agree
on New Air Routes

[Released to the press March 21]

The Franco-American aeronautical negotiations
which have been taking place in Paris since the
fifth of February have been concluded today.

The two delegations, after a carefid examina-
tion of tlie results experienced by tiie carriers of
the two countries in accordance with the Franco-
American agreement of March 27, 1946, have ex-
pressed tlie satisfaction of their respective Gov-
ernments with the conduct of past operations.

Looking to the future, the representatives of
the two (iovernments expressed their conviction
that the principles of the agreement will insure
the continued orderly development of interna-
tional air transport. They agreed that such prin-
ciples, combined with the nuitual confidence of the
two Governments, will effectively promote the best
interests of the carriers of both countries in the
spirit of the agreement.

Since this objective can be obtained only
through more frequent contacts, the American
delegation and the French delegation have recog-
nized the desirability of more frequent consulta-
tions between the aeronautical authorities of the
two countries.

The routes, the commercial operations of which
have been previously granted by one or the other
of the two parties to the companies of the other
party, have been subjected in the light of experi-
ence to a new examination.

The Government of the United States has au-
thorized the inclusion of Houston as an inter-
mediate point on the route between France and
Mexico, via New York, as well as the establish-
ment of a new route between Martinique and
Guadeloupe and New York, a route which will
permit French air services to connect metropolitan
France with the French Department in the Carib-
bean through New York.

On its part, the French Government has author-
ized the substitution of Rome for Milan on one of
the authorized United States routes which will
permit the operation of services from the United
States across the North Atlantic and Spain, via
Marseilles or Nice, and beyond, via Eome to
Southern Europe, the Near and Far East.

Alonzo G. Moron Named
U.S. Caribbean Commissioner

On March 19, President Truman appointed Alonzo G.
Mor6n as a United States Commissioner on the Caribbean
Commission for a period of 2 years. The Caribbean
Commission is an advisory and consultative body on social
and economic matters to the Governments of France, the
Netherlands, the United Kingdom, and the United States,
and their 15 non-self-governing territories in the
Caribbean.

E

April 2, 1 95 1

535

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Calendar of Meetings '

Adjourned During March 1951

United Nations:

Trusteeship Council: Eighth Session Lake Success Jan. 29-Mar. 16

Economic and Social Council:

Twelfth Session Santiago Feb. 20-Mar. 21

Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East: Seventh Lahore Feb. 28-Mar. 7

Session.

Economic Commission for Europe: Transport Committee, Geneva Mar. 5-9

Working Partv on Statistical Information.

IcAO Council: Twelfth "Session Montreal Jan. SO-Mar. 22

Motion Picture Festival Punta del Este, Uruguay . . Feb. 15-Mar. 15,

*Nato (North Atlantic Treaty Organization): Working Group of Washington Mar. 12-16

North Atlantic Planning Board for Ocean Shipping: Second

Meeting.

Ilo Governing Body: 114th Session Geneva Feb. 26-Mar. 10

Agricultural Machinery Show Paris Feb. 27-Mar. 4

Itu (International Telecommunication Union): Meetings of Inter- Geneva Mar. 6-22.

national Telegraph Consultative Committee Study Groups.

♦Third Inter-American Conference on Social Security Buenos Aires Mar. 12-31

Imo (International Meteorological Organization): Extraordinary Paris Mar. 15-17

Conference of Directors.
Interparliamentary Union, Meeting of Council Monaco Mar. 7-30

In Session as of March 31, 1951

United Nations:

General Asseml)ly: Fifth Session Lake Success Sept. 19-

CoUeotive Measures Committee New York Mar. 5-

Peace Observation Commission New York Mar. 16-

Economic and Social Council: Social Commission Geneva Mar. 19-

Gatt (General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade) :

Third Set of Tariff Negotiations of the Contracting Parties . . . Torquay Sept. 28-

Special Session of Contracting Parties Torquay Mar. 29-

International Materials Conference Washington Feb. 26-

Council of Foreign Ministers, Meeting of Deputies Paris Mar. 5-

Four Power Conference on Swiss Allied Accord Bern Mar. 5-

First Congress of the World Meteorological Organization Paris Mar. 19-

IcAO (International Civil Aviation Organization) :

.\irworthiness Division: Fourth Session Montreal Mar. 20-

Operations Division: Fourth Session Montreal Mar. 27-

Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of Foreign Affairs of Washington Mar. 26-

American States

Lyon International Trade Fair, 33rd Lyon Mar. 31-

Scheduled April 1-June 30, 1951

Cannes Film Festival Cannes Apr. 2-

First Meeting of the International Commission for Northwest Atlantic Washington Apr. 2-

Fisheries.

South Pacific Quarantine Conference Suva, Fiji Islands Apr. 2-

' Prepared in the Division of International Conferences, Department of State.
♦Tentative

536 Department of State Bulletin

i

Calendar of Meetings — Continued
Scheduled April 1-June 30, 1951 — Continued

United Nations:

Economic and Social Council:

Ad Hoc Committee on Slavery: Second Session New York Apr. 2-

Economic Commission for Europe:

Timber Committee Geneva Apr. 9-

Sixth Session Geneva May 29-

Commission on Narcotic Drugs: Sixth Session Lake Success Apr. 10-

Human Rights Commission: Seventh Session Geneva Apr. 16-

Population Commission: Sixth Session Lake Success Apr. 23-

Commission on the Status of Women: Fifth Session Lake Success Apr. 30-

Fiscal Commission: Third Session Geneva May 7-

Statistical Commission: Sixth Session Lake Success May 7-

Economic, Elmployment and Development Commission .... Lake Success May 14-

Economic Commission for Latin America: Fourth Session . . . Mexico City May 28-

Draft Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees, Confer- Geneva May 28*-

ence of Plenipotentiaries.

Subcommission on Prevention of Discrimination and Protection Geneva June 18*-

of Minorities: Fourth Session.

Council Committee on Non-Governmental Organizations . . . Lake Success June 19-

Agenda Committee Geneva June 26-

International Law Commission: Third Session Geneva May 15-

Permanent Central Opium Board and Narcotic Drugs Super- Geneva June 5*-

visory Body: Fifth Joint Session.

Trusteeship Council: Ninth Session Lake Success June 11-

Intergovernmental Study Group on Germany (Continuation of London Apr. 3-

Fourth Phase).
Ibo (International Refugee Organization):

Executive Committee: Ninth Session Geneva Apr. 4-

General Council: Seventh Session Geneva Apr. 9-

Nato (North Atlantic Treaty Organization): Planning Board for London Apr. 23

Ocean Shipping, Third Meeting.
Ilo (International Labor Organization):

Meeting of Experts on Payments by Results Geneva Apr. 10-

Coal Mines: Fourth Session Geneva May 7-

Joint Maritime Commission Geneva May 21-

Governing Body: 115th Session Geneva May 28-

Nutrition, Fag/Who Joint Expert Committee on: Second Session . . Rome Apr. 10-

XXIX International Milan Fair Milan Apr. 12-

Fao (Food and Agriculture Organization):

Working Party on Fertilizers: First Meeting Bogor, Indonesia Apr. 14-

Council: T%velfth Session Rome June 11-

Rubber Study Group: Eighth Session Rome Apr. 16-

Itd (International Telecommunication Union):

Administrative Council: Sixth Session Geneva Apr. 16-

International Radio Consultative Committee (Ccik) : Sixth Plenary Geneva June 5-

Meeting.

Pan American Sanitary Organization, Thirteenth Meeting of Execu- Washington Apr. 23-

tive Committee.
IcAO (International Civil Aviation Organization) :

Air Navigation Commission Communications Division: Fourth Montreal Apr. 24-

Session.

Fifth Assembly Montreal June 5-

Unesco:

International Committee of Bibliographic Experts London Apr. 24—

General Conference: Sixth Session Paris June 18-

South Pacific Commission: Seventh Session Noumea, New Caledonia . . Apr. 28-

Textile Exposition, International Lille Apr. 28-

Second Inter-American Indigenist Exposition Rio de Janeiro April

Festival of Britain, 1951 England May 3-

Arts and Modern Architecture, Ninth International Exhibition of Milan May 5-

Decorative and Industrial.
Who (World Health Organization) :

Fourth World Health Assembly Geneva May 7-

Executive Board: Eighth Session Geneva June 4-

First Pan American Congress on Medical Education Lima May 14-

Third Regional Seminar on Social Aifairs P6rto Alegre, Brazil .... May 14-

First Pan American Congress on Veterinary Medicine Lima May 20-

Upu (Universal Postal Union) :

Meeting of the Executive and Liaison Committee St. Gallen, Switzerland . . . May 21-

Teohnical Transit Committee: Second Meeting Pontresina, Switzerland . . June 6-

Caribbean Commission: Twelfth Meeting Barbados May

Diplomatic Conference on Maritime Law Brussels June 6-

Military Medicine and Pharmacy, Thirteenth International Congress . Paris June 17-

Fifth Session of the International Wheat Council London June

*Tentative
April 2, 1951 537

937623—51 3

m

1950 World Economic Situation

Statement hy Isador Lxibin

U. S. Representative to ECOSOC ^

I. Introduction

Since the Economic and Social Council made its
review a year ago, major changes have taken place
in the world economic situation.^ Today, one
basic fact dominates the world economic situation.
That fact is the world political situation.

During World War II and the 51/2 years that
have elapsed since that war ended, people every-
where have hoped and prayed that all Govern-
ments would cooperate, through the United Na-
tions, in maintaining the peace of the world and
in promoting economic and social progress. Thus
far, these hopes and prayers liave been in vain.

Why does the fear of war dominate the minds
of people today ? The answer lies in the fact that
people everywhere see aggression and threats of
aggression — in Korea, in Tibet, in Malaya, in
Yugoslavia. Only yesterday it was Berlin,
Greece, Turkey, and Iran. In the face of these
threats, what alternatives are there to the free
peoples of the world? Are they to sit back su-
pinely and accept aggression and the sacrifice of
their freedom as inevitable? Or are they to as-
sert their determination to remain free and be
masters of their own destiny?

They have chosen to be free. They have deter-
mined to undertake once again the painful task
of building up their military strength so that they
can deter and, if necessary, resist and thwart fur-
ther subversion and aggression.

This is an unwelcome task. But it is a neces-
sary one.

The United Nations, in the face of Soviet ob-
jections and despite the intervention of the Chinese
Communist military forces, has acted to repel
Commiuiist aggression in Korea. Free countries,
acting under the United Nations Charter, are to-
day cooperating in establishing mutual defense

'Made before the Council at Santiago on Mar. 1 and
released to the press by the U.S. mission to the U.N. In
New York on Mar. 6.

' For the 1049 review by Assistant Secretary Thorp, see
Bulletin of Mar. 13, 1950, p. 407.

arrangements through the Inter-American de-
fense pact of 1948, the North Altantic Treaty of
1949, and in many other ways. These free coun-
tries are determined to preserve their national
freedom. They know that their liberties and the
liberties of their children are at stake. They
know that if they are threatened by force they
must be prepared to meet that threat.

The free nations of the world know that their
combined resources are greater than the sum of
their individual resources. They know that, act-
ing together, they have the moral, the economic,
and the military resources to meet anj' threat of
aggression. They know that a threat to one free
country is a threat to all free countries. To para-
phrase the great philosopher of the North Ameri-
can Revolution, Benjamin Franklin, they know
that to act separately is to hang separately.

If those who seek by aggression to control and
dominate the lives of free mankind are confronted
with the combined and effective military and eco-
nomic power of those whom they seek to dominate,
there is hope that they will choose the course of
wisdom and cease their aggression and sub-
version. The way would then be open for all
nations to join together in programs of dis-
armament and peaceful economic cooperation
within the spirit and framework of the United
Nations. In these happy circumstances, the costs
of defense mobilization that will have been borne
by the peoples of the free world will indeed turn
out to be small when compared with the infinite
gains that will result from a world freed from the
threat of slaverj' and war. But if, on the other
hand, those who seek by aggression and sub-
version to control and dominate the lives of free
mankind should choose to continue their course.
of imperialistic conquest and aggression, they
should know from experience that the free world
will resist.

There is only one way by which the free nationsj
can avoid the cost of war. That is by assuming,'
the burden of rearmament. If there are anj' who

538

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin i'

„ liope tliat they can avoid this burden and at the
same time be assured against aggression, one can
only conckide that they are. ahis, being guided
by wishful thinking.

II. Economic Situation in United States

Since the middle of 11)50, under the impact of
Communist aggression in Korea and the threats
of aggression elsewhere, there have been impor-
tant changes both in the economic situation in the
United States and in the economic program of
the United States Government. These changes
grow out of our policy of rebuilding our defenses.

Let me make it clear that our program has only
one purpose. That purpose is to prevent war.
Our program is based on the premise that a rapid
building of defenses by the free nations can act
as an effective deterrent to aggressors; can serve
as a basis for negotiation with those who respect
only force; and, if necessary, can serve as a pro-
tective shield against their possible further ag-
gressions.

We do not assume that war is inevitable, nor
do we seek to develop a war economy.

This fact governs our economic policies, both
in the domestic and in the international fields.
We are striving rather to create defensive strength
for an uncertain but possibly long period ahead.
We conceive of defensive strength in the very
broadest sense. We conceive of it not only in
terms of mobilized armed forces but also in terms
of reserves of manpower and capacity to produce.
We conceive of defensive strength in terms of an
altert, productive citizenry, and an expanded eco-
nomic plant in all the free nations.

The long-range defense program, upon which
the United States and other free nations have now
embarked, necessarily changes the priority of
many desirable programs and the pace at which
they can be pursued. But because our progi-am
is a defense progi-am and not a war mobilization
program, it not only permits but calls for our
continuing concern for long-range economic and
social progress both at home and abroad.

We are confident that we can continue to carry
out such a long-range program of economic prog-
ress. This confidence is based upon the recent
record of our economic growth. Without going
into too much detail, I should like, Mr. President,
to sketch the magnitudes of growth recorded dur-
ing the decade of the forties.

GROWTH DURING THE 1940's

During the decade from 1940 to 1950, a decade
of both war and peace, the total output of the
United States economy rose by more than 50 per-
cent. Gross national production, measured in 1950
prices, rose from 184 billion dollars in 1940, to
280 billion in 1950. Civilian employment in-
creased by over 12 million — from less than 48 mil-
lion to 60 million — and our civilian workers had

far better tools and equipment to work with. Oil-
refining capacity increased by 40 percent. Elec-
trical power capacity increased by C5 percent.
Steel capacity rose by 20 percent — to over 100
million tons. In 1950, United States farmers had
two and a half times as many tractors and more
than twice as many trucks as they had in 1940,
and the proportion of farms that had electricity
rose from 34 percent of the total to 86 percent.

The gains registered during the second half of
the 1940's, that is, in the 5 years from the Japanese
surrender to the Communist aggression in Korea,
were especially impressive particularly in view of
the many forecasts of depression which all of you
heard so much about.

After the Japanese surrender, the United States
demobilized with dramatic speed. In the space
of 1 year, from 1945 to 1946, we cut our armed
forces from a peak of over 12 million to 2i/2 mil-
lion— a cut of 91/2 million. By 1947 our armed
forces were down to 1.3 million. These millions
of people were absorbed into peacetime jobs by
a rapid expansion of civilian economic activity.

Hand in hand with the absorption of these
workers went tremendous investments in plant and
equipment by private business. Between 1945
and 1950, total manufacturing capacity increased
by more than 25 percent. In some basic indus-
tries, expansion far exceeded this rate.

ECONOMIC SITUATION IN EARLY 1950

The moderate recession in 1949, which some
people feared — and, indeed, some even hoped —
would become a major depression, was short-lived.
The economy exhibited considerable resiliency and
recovery was well under way when 1950 began.

This recovery was partly a result of Govern-
ment policies. As the Secretariat's report points
out in discussing the economic situation in the
United States during the second half of 1949,

While the decline in business Investment in plant and
equipment also continued, there was a sharp upturn in
residential construction, owing in part to the reduction
in costs of new housing, l)ut mainly to the easing of
terms of down payments, the reduction in interest rates,
and other credit policies which were furthered by the
liberalization of the National Housing Act. (p. 15 of the
Secretariat's report.)

The Secretariat's report goes on to say that :

In the first half of 1950, economic activity rose consid-
erably over the level of the preceding half year and, in
fact, reached a new postwar peak.

The fact is that, in the second quarter of 1950,
gross national production exceeded the level in the
peak quarter of 1948 by about 4 percent, after ad-
justment for price changes.

Before midyear, industrial production had also
surpassed the previous postwar record, established
in the highest months of 1948. The index, which
had reached 195 percent of the 1935-39 average
in October and November of 1948, rose to 199 by
June 1950.

April 2, J 95 1

539

Civilian employment had also recovered from
the reduced levels of 1949. By June 1950, it was
more than 1% million above June of 1949. It was
also above June of 1948.

In short by June 1950, recovery was well on the
way toward completion.

It is worth emphasizing that this recovery was
not built upon an expansion of exports. Indeed,
as made evident by the Secretariat's report, tliis
recovery took place in the face of a drop in ex-
ports of goods and services. In the space of 1
year, our exports fell by an annual rate of 5 bil-
lion dollars — a cut of nearly 30 percent.

Nor was it caused by an accelerated defense
program. Before the aggression on South Korea
by the North Korean forces, the economy had
reached tlie highest levels in its peacetime history.
Far from providing a support for our national
economy, the new defense burdens subjected it to
unwanted strains.

ECONOMIC ACTIVITY SINCE MID-1950

The North Korean aggression, then, found the
United States in excellent economic health. The
next 6 months was a period of rapid economic ad-
justment to a grave international situation. The
people of the United States were jolted into full
comprehension of the dangers confronting both
themselves and all other democratic peoples. In
recognition of their responsibilities, they moved
rapidly to play their part in the security program
which the new circumstances demanded of the free
world.

The new international developments were
quickly reflected in our economic activity. Al-
though the money actually spent by the Federal
Government on national security programs, both
domestic and international, increased by an an-
nual rate of only about 2 billion dollars from the
whole fiscal year 1949-1950, to December 1950, the
response of business and consumers was much
greater than the increase in defense spending alone
would account for. The reason for this response
was that both sellers and buyers were anticipating
scarcities and higher prices.

There was a 6 percent rise in the physical quan-
tity of total national output between the second
and fourth quarter of 1950. Between June 1950
and January 1951, industrial production rose by
about 10 percent. Between the second and fourth
quarters of 1950 private domestic investment in
construction, equipment, and additions to inven-
tory rose rapidly, reaching an all-time record of
60 billion dollars at a seasonally adjusted annual
rate. This level of new private investment was
equal to one-fifth of our total national production.

During this period, personal incomes also rose.
Despite rises in retail prices and Federal taxes,
there was a modest gain in consumer's real pur-
chasing power. Wages and salaries and other
labor income rose throughout 1950. In many
cases, the gains achieved by organized labor

tlirough collective bargaining considerably ex-
ceeded the increase in the cost of living. From
June to December, average weekly earnings for
manufacturing industries as a whole, after adjust-
ment for the rise in the cost of living, rose by 4
percent.

The spread of pension and other welfare plans
through free collective bargaining, which had been
particularly noteworthy in the first half of 1950,
also continued during the second half.

The improvement in welfare was further greatly
reinforced by legislation liberalizing the Social Se-
curity Act, enacted by an overwhelming vote of
the United States Congress. Under this new legis-
lation, benefit payments have been raised on the
average by about 78 percent. The average hus-
band-and-wife benefit for aged couples was raised
from $41 to about $75 a month. The increases
enacted by Congress range from a 50 percent rise
for the groups that were getting the highest bene-
fits to a 100 percent rise for those who were re-
ceiving minimum benefits. In addition, 10 million
more people were brought into the Old Age and
Survivors Insurance system, raising the number
covered from about 35 million workers to about 45
million, that is, nearly three-quarters of the civil-
ian labor force. Let me point out that there
are also 7% million people, including railroad
workers, employees of Federal, State, and local
governments, and others, under other public re-
tirement systems.

The new amendments to the Social Security
Act also increase the amount of Federal funds
available for state and local maternal and child
health services, for services to crippled children,
for child welfare services, and for care of the dis-
abled and blind.

Let no one be deceived by the distorted charge
that our rearmament program is undermining our
Government social welfare services.

III. The Task of Defense

SIZE OF IMMEDIATE DEFENSE EXPANSION

I have already pointed out that, at the end of
1950, expenditures by the United States Govern-
ment for defense and directly related purposes,
both at home and abroad, were running at the rate
of about 20 billion dollars annually. This rate
represented about 7 percent of the total national
output. By the end of the calendar year 1951, it
is expected that such expenditures may be absorb-
ing goods and services at a rate in excess of 45
billion dollars a year, an amount eq>ial to about
15 percent of our total national output; although,
the authorit}' of the President to obligate funds for
defense purposes will be nnicli larger. According
to the President's Budget ^lessage, we expect to
achieve a virtiuil doubling of our pre-Korea army,
an increase of more than one-half in our active
naval fleet, and an expansion in the air force from
48 to 84 wings.

540

Department of State Bulletin

I

Despite the size of our present defense program,
may I point out that we are in a position to expand
it much more if total war should nuvke that neces-
sary. The jiroportion of total output which we
expect our defense profirani to absorb is consid-
erably smaller than the proportion absorbed by
our military effort durin<i World AVar II. Within
a year after Pearl Harbor, we were devoting about
38 percent of our national output to the war and,
at the peak, 45 percent. This is in marked con-
trast to the 15 percent which we expect defense
to absorb by the end of this year.

Even though the current defense program in the
United States is far from what total mobilization
would require, it will nevertheless have a great
impact on our economy. During the next 2 or 3
years, production for defense will have to be in-
creased faster than we can expect to increase total
production. As a result, substantial cuts will have
to be made in certain goods and services available
for nondefense uses. In short, our defense pro-
gram will involve very substantial shifts in the
use of many resources. It will involve strong in-
flationary pressures. It will involve — as the peo-
ple of the United States clearly recognize — sizable
sacrifices throughout the economy.

IMPLICATION OF LONG-RANGE SECURITY PROGRAM

In addition to the immediate implications of
our defense program, there are certain longer-
range implications that must be considered.

First, the free world must increase its power
to deter or, if need be, to resist aggression until
there is reasonable assurance of lasting security.
If the threat of aggi-ession subsides, a larger pro-
portion of the free world's growing resources can
then be devoted to economic progress and develop-
ment.

Second, security over the years ahead implies
not merely the maintenance of a given stock of
weapons and of personnel capable of using them.
It requires also a constant improvement in these
weapons and a manpower reserve trained to use
them. This in turn implies an economy with the
utmost stamina, constantly renewing and expand-
ing its productive plant and resources.

Thus, the defense program requires not only
growing and effective military forces in the free
nations, for as long a period as they may be
needed; it also requires the development of an
industrial capacity which will permit the rapid
enlargement of such forces, in the event that the
would-be aggressors are not deterred and the
world is again plunged into total war. Accord-
ingly, we are placing great emphasis on invest-
ment in an enlarged productive capacity — large
enough for any eventuality.

As a result, cuts will be required in nonessential
civilian production during the period immedi-
ately ahead. These cuts will be greater than
would be necessary simply to build up the im-
mediately planned defenses.

April 2, 1 95 1

Third, the basic purpose of any security pro-
gram among free nations must be to protect their
free institutions, to preserve their opportunity to
develop these institutions, and, through them, to
advance their social and economic well-being. At
the same time, the constant improvement of these
free institutions, and continued social and eco-
nomic progress, are essential to long-run security.
Thus, the development and strengthening of po-
litical liberty and the widespread extension of
education and improvements in health, have great
security significance for all of us. And for ex-
actly the same reasons, progi'ams to aid the im-
provement of productive facilities and tech-
niques— in both developed and underdeveloped
countries — are fundamental elements of common
strength, even where the fruits of such programs
may not be expected to materialize immediately.
Security is neither solely military nor solely short-
range.

Of course, this is not to say that all economic
and social needs are equally important, nor does
it imply that everything can be done at once nor
that all peacetime social programs can go for-
ward unimpeded. It is to say, however, that in
assigning priorities among various needs, simple
classifications into military and nonmilitary, or
into short-range and long-range programs will
not suffice. Military and nonmilitary programs
are not necessarily mutually exclusive, and pro-
grams serving social needs do not necessarily have
to be shelved. To attain our objectives, the as-
signment of priorities must be much more selective
than any oversimplified distinction between de-
fense and welfare.

[Mr. Lubin continued with a discussion of the domestic
economic program of the United States.]

V. International Aspects of U.S. Economic Policies

I turn now to the international aspects of our
economic policies. In framing the economic pro-
gram to build up our national strength, we are
keenly aware that our own strength is bound up
with the strength of the other free nations. This
is true both for the immediate future and for the
long run. Our economic program is being formu-
lated in the light of the combined militaiy pro-
grams of all the free nations and of their com-
bined needs, productive resources, and
potentialities.

With our economic resources strained by the
burden of defense, every use of these resources
implies the sacrifice of some alternative use. We
must be certain that our foreign aid program, like
our democratic program, serves high-priority pur-
poses. Accordingly, these programs must be kept
under continuing review and adapted to changing
conditions. We are fully aware that the joint
strength of the free nations requires not only mili-
tary strength but also moral strength, economic
strength and above all, unity of ultimate purpose.

541

All of these factors must be taken into account
in determining the priorities among various
programs.

The immediate need for stronger defenses, and
the greatly increased strain on the resources of
the free world, make it necessary to reappraise
and, in some cases, to alter some of our assistance
programs. In some respects, we shall not be able
to go as fast as we should like in aiding others,
just as we cannot make progi-ess as rapidly as
we should like in certain domestic fields. I should
be misleading you, if I failed to make this clear.
It is the consequence of the fact and the threat
of Communist aggression.

Recent events have conclusively shown that this
threat is a threat to all free nations. This is a
hard fact. It must be recognized. Without mili-
tary strength to resist this threat, there can be
neither progress nor common security and free-
dom. Wishful thinking that halfway defense
measures are enough, will only make more diffi-
cult the task of estaolishing real security. Honest
differences of views in the free world on this
subject must not blind us to these basic truths.

EXPANDING PRODUCTION

The first problem facing us is to expand the
production of commodities which will be scarce
in relation to vital demands. This means con-
centrating on expansion programs which yield
quick results in the form of many military itenis
and raw materials. In some cases, it means proj-
ects which will yield their results only after a
few years. In still other cases, the expansion of
production, even of goods unrelated to military
strength can, by improving economic and social
conditions, contribute to the common security.

All free countries can make a substantial con-
tribution to the common strength. The develop-
ment of their productive capacity is a vital factor,
both directly as a source of goods required for the
defense effort and indirectly as a means of im-
proving their economic strength and increasing
their stake in maintaining the free way of life.

In recognition of this fact, the United States
Government is prepared to provide technical and
financial assistance to help expand production in
other countries.

UTILIZING RESOURCES EFFICIENTLY

The second problem facing us is to utilize exist-
ing resources efficiently. Even with vigorous ef-
forts to expand foreign and domestic production,
there are certain to be some cases of severe short-
ages, sharp price rises, and maldistribution of
supplies. For some conunodities, these conditions
are already with us. To improve the distribution
of important products in short supply, so that
nonessential uses in some countries do not inter-
fere with essential uses in others, international
collaboration is needed.

For this purpose, we have joined in creating an
International Materials Conference. It includes
representatives of both producing and consuming
countries most concerned with the particular com-
modities in question. The first of these commit-
tees, concerned with copper, lead, and zinc, is meet-
ing in Washington. It includes Australia, Bel-
gium (acting for herself, the Netherlands, and
Luxembourg), Canada, Chile, the Federal Repub-
lic of Germany, France, Italy, Mexico, Xorway,
Peru, the United Kingdom, and the United States.
A Sulphur Committee is also meeting to be fol-
lowed by meetings of committees on cotton and
cotton linters; tungsten and molybdenum; man-
ganese, nickel, and cobalt ; and wool.

Altogether, at least 23 countries will take part
in putting the j^roduction and distribution of one
or another of these important materials on an
international cooperative basis. The creation of
additional committees for other scarce materials
is under consideration.

We, in the United States, recognize that the com-
modity requirements of other countries will have
to be taken into account in the operation of our
domestic controls. This is most clearly the case
in connection with our export controls. Export
controls are being used by the United States to
protect the national security and to limit the in-
flationary impact on the domestic economy of ex-
ports of commodities in short supply. During
World War II, it was the policy of the United
States to help friendly countries maintain their
economic stability by recognizing and providing
for their essential needs, on the basis of equal and
proportionate consideration with our own needs.
In the present emergency, the needs of friendly
and cooperating countries will again be given full
consideration. Insofar as such nations are de-
pendent on the United States for their supplies,
every attempt will be made to assure that export
licenses are available, to the extent permitted by
the common defense and other security require-
ments.

At the same time, we shall continue our present
policy of restricting exports in cases where the
importing country is shipping identical or equiva-
lent goods to aggressors and potential aggressors.

Priorities and allocations within our domestic
economy also will be coordinated with the com-
modity requirements of friendly countries. We
shall limit nonessential domestic use of some com-
modities in the United States not only to meet
high-priority requirements at home but also to
give positive assistance in meet in"; the high-pri-
ority needs of other countries. "\A e shall use do-
mestic priority or allocation controls, wliere nec-
essary, to avoid taking more than our fair share
of world imports, and to make goods available for
necessary exports. To the extent permitted by
security and supply considerations, we shall make
available those conunodities required by other
friendly nations to help increase their productivity
and help maintain their stability.

542

Department of State Bulletin

PREVENTING INFLATION

The international aspects of our economic pol-
icy are also affected by the trend in the prices of
the goods we import. The rise in these prices has
been much greater than the rise in the prices of our
exports. From the Korean outbreak to early Feb-
ruary 1951, tin had risen 139 i)ercent, rubber 162
percent, and wool tops 107 percent. Coffee had
already approximately doubled in price during
the year preceding the Korean outbreak. In
terms of average unit values, which lag far behind
current market prices, the average price of United
States imports rose 23 percent between the first
half of 1950 and last December. Unit values of
exports had risen much less. The increase be-
tween the first half of 1950 and December for all
exports was only 11 percent, and, for finished
manufactured goods alone, it was only 9 percent.

The United States is prepared, through the in-
ternational commodity control arrangements I
mentioned earlier, to participate in negotiations
with the producing and consuming countries, in
order to limit the price increases for important
scarce commodities during the present emergency.

It is obvious that, if inflationary rises of goods
moving into international trade are to be re-
strained, action to restrain them must also be
taken by individual national governments. The
United States has recently undertaken to fulfill
its obligations in this respect by establishing con-
trol over the prices of most goods and services, in
the form of a freeze, based upon prices prevailing
in the period December 19, 1950, to January 26,
1951. This freeze applies not only to domestic
goods sold at home but also to goods that are
exported and, to the domestic resale of goods that
are imported.

I should like to emphasize the levels at which
export and import prices have been frozen in the
United States.

I have several times called attention to various
respects in which the present defense program
differs from a war program and have pointed out
how misleading it would be to assume that the
economic effects of the defense program will neces-
sarily repeat those of World War II. The fact
is, that when prices were frozen in the United
States in 1942, the prices of raw materials impor-
tant in world trade were at a relatively low level.
When they were frozen 6 weeks ago, the level of
most of these prices was at, or close to, their his-
torical peaks.

Moreover, the ratio between our average unit
values of import and export prices, at the time of
the recent price freeze in the United States, also
appears to have been very favorable to foreign
suppliers, judged by any past standard. For our
foreign trade as a whole, the December 1950 ratio
of import-to-export unit values was 46 percent
more favorable to suppliers of our imports than in
1943, the war year most favorable for them. It

April 2, 1 95 1

was 11 percent more favorable than in the first
half of 1950.

When the average unit values of our imports
of crude materials and crude foodstuffs on the one
hand are compared with the unit values of our
exports of finished manufactures on the other
hand, we find that their ratio in December 1950
was nearly twice as favorable to foreign suppliers
in such trade as in 1943, and 19 percent more
favorable than it was in the first half of 1950.

The present price ceilings in the United States
will undergo changes, mostly in the form of refine-
ments designed to meet the special problems of
particular commodities. I can assure you that,
whatever changes are made, we intend to control
prices of exports as long as prices for domestic
sales are controlled.

It is to be hoped that other Governments will
do the same. A factual study of export-price con-
trol in the United States during World War II
shows that much of the increase that consumers in
other countries had to pay for goods imported
from the United States resulted from increased
margins charged on these goods after then had left
our shores.

The problem of the immediate future will not
be merely one of prices. Equally important will
be the availability of certain types of goods. Con-
cern has already been expressed by representatives
of underdeveloped countries concerning the ability
of such countries to get capital goods. On this
score, there are great differences between the out-
look for the next few years and the situation in
World War II. I have already indicated the atti-
tude of the United States Government regarding
exports of goods in short supply. But I should
also like to question the assumption that shortages
will be as acute as they were during the war period.
Here, too, I am afraid we are likely to be misled
if we simply assume that the conditions of World
War II will be duplicated in the next few years.
There are many important differences. To me,
they suggest that the situation may be far less
difficult.

First, may I repeat that the proportion of
United States resources which will be devoted
to defense is expected to be far smaller, under
present plans, than the proportion tlian devoted
to war. Moreover, the aosolute level of the gross
national product that we expect to attain in the
next few years will exceed the absolute levels pre-
vailing during World War II.

Second, most of the countries of Western
Europe are also in a better position to export
capital goods than during World War II. Their
resources were then fully devoted to war. In-
dustrial plants were very severely damaged.
Some countries were occupied by the enemy.
Furthermore, during World War II, the indus-
trial output of Germany and Japan was unavail-
able to the underdeveloped countries.

A third difference is in the shipping situation.

543

No difficulties comparable to those of World War
II are expected. Ships themselves are not so
scarce. Sea lanes are open. And, if we succeed
in our eflForts to deter aggression, they will remain
open.

Fourth, some of the underdeveloped countries
themselves have a greater industrial capacity
than they had 10 years ago. This reduced their
dependence on imports of some commodities.

Taking these considerations into account, it
seems doubtful that there will be as serious a
decline of essential imports into the underde-
veloped countries as might at first appear. So
far as one can judge at the present time, the gen-
eral availability of goods is likely to be much
greater than it was in World War II.

I do not want to leave the impression that these
factors will make sacrifice unnecessary. They
will not. There will inevitably be shortages.
The common defense requires both common sac-
rifice and common effort— getting along with less
and contributing more.

The costs of defense will be very great not only
in terms of time and money but even more in the
disruption of peaceful pursuits, and the slowing
down of social progress. This disruption and
slowing-down results soley from the Communist
threat to peace. And let us, at this moment, re-
member the sacrifices that the thousands of men,
under the United Nations banner, are making in
Korea.

Security has the prime claim on our economic
resources, and it will require more of these re-
sources.

We look forward to the time when it will be
possible to devote a greater portion of our com-
mon efforts to speeding up the process of economic
development and raising standards of living. The
sooner certain countries free the world from the
fear of aggression, the sooner can we all take
from our shoulders the heavy burdens of arma-
ment. Then, we of the United States of America,
feel that we and many other members of the
United Nations will be in a position to join in a
greatly expanded program of development.

We think our economic and political system is
well-suited to this purpose. Our system is called
"capitalistic." It is. But, paraphrasing the
words of a great American philosopher, our larand
of capitalism is the servant of our democracy.
To us, it means an abundance and wide distribu-
tion of material goods. More important, it means
individual opportunity and individual choice, for
men at the bottom, as well as the top, of the
economic and social scale.

Our beliefs set us against authoritarianism.
They are suited for men who have in some degree
acquired tolerance, good will, and a sense of per-
sonal responsibility to society. We may not al-
ways live up to these beliefs. In fact, we know
we do so imperfectly. But we aspire to our be-
liefs, we criticize ourselves by them; we try to
live up to them. And we will make whatever
sacrifices are necessary — pay whatever price we
must — to preserve our freedom to do so.

Investigation of Forced Labor Conditions
in U.S.S.R. and Satellites Urged

Statement hy Walter Kotschnig

Deputy V. S. Representative to ECOSOC ^

On August 15, 1950, 1 had the honor to address
this Council on the subject of forced labor in
certain parts of the world and to introduce, to-

f ether with the distinguished representative of the
Inited Kingdom, a resolution on that subject.
This resolution provides for the establishment,
jointly with the International Labor Organiza-
tion, of an ad hoc Committee on Foi'ced Labor to
undertake an impartial inquiry into the existence
and extent of forced labor in the contemporary
world. The resolution is now before the Council
for action. In order not to abuse the time of the

' Made before the Economic and Social Council at San-
tiago, Chile, on Mar. 15 and released to the press by the
U.S. Mission to the U.N. on the same date.

Council by repeating earlier statements, I have
taken the liberty of distributing to the members
of the Council the text of my earlier remarks on
this subject.

I would greatly prefer to rest our case at this
point and to let the Council reach its own deci-
sion without any further debate. However, there
are certain elements in the situation which make
it necessary to enter once again upon the sub-
stance of the matter before us.

First, the Council has had no indication what-
soever that the U.S.S.R. and the states within its
orbit are willing to permit an impartial inquiry.
This forces us to establish a prima facie case in
this Council in the hope that the Soviet Union
and its satellite states may yet be willing to de-

544

Department of State Bulletin

fend themselves before the conscience of the world
by more than denials or irrelevant and spurious
counter accusations. In other words, we still hope
that the Soviet Union and its followers will, in
tlieir own interest, not refuse to participate in an
impartial inquiry.

Second, there is every evidence that the evil of
forced labor, far from receding, is actually spread-
ing to every new country in the Soviet orbit.
Forced labor appears to follow wherever the Red
flag is lioisted.

Third, no time is to be lost if this Council is to
do its share in saving from their own folly addi-
tional potential victims of Communist propa-
ganda. Speaking from personal experience, I re-
member all too many men and women in various
parts of the world, but particularly in Europe,
who espoused the Fascist or Communist creed and
who paid with their happiness, or even their lives,
for the assistance which they lent to Fascist and
Communist propagandists and leaders. Some of
them may have had justifiable grievances Avhich
made them vulnerable to Fascist or Communist
blandishments. Others may have been prompted
by idealistic and humanitarian motives only to
discover that P^ascist or Communist reality is
worlds apart from Fascist or Communist propa-
ganda. We have to do everything possible to
show those who at this time may be flirting with
totalitarian disaster the ugly realities of Fascist
or Communist rule — and there are few realities as
ugly as the concentration camps which are the
tools both of Fascist and Communist dictatorship.

Fourth, by turning the searchlight of public
discussion on prevailing conditions in the Soviet
bloc we might, I say, we might help to alleviate
the sorry plight of the victims of forced labor in
those countries.

Fifth, it is essential for all of us to recognize
that we are dealing here with basic issues on which
no compromise is possible. Here is an evil which
cannot be overcome or bypassed by formulas or
pious resolutions. We have to face it squarely and
irankly, or we shall rightly be accused by suc-
ceeding generations of having failed in upholding
the great and sacred values on which our civiliza-
tion is built.

These are considerations which compel me to
speak when I would much rather remain silent.
It is out of deep compassion for all the peoples of
the world who have gone through so much suffer-
ing during the last 40 years that I am lifting my
voice, that my Government is lifting its voice to
challenge the present rulers of the U.S.S.R. for
having instituted on their territories, and those of
the countries under their control, an inhuman
system of forced or corrective labor which is em-
ployed as a means of political coercion or of pun-
ishment for holding or expressing dissident politi-
cal views and which is on such a scale as to consti-
tute an important, nay, an essential element in
their economy. These are grave charges to be
leveled against any member of the United Nations,

April 2, J 95 1

and we are fully conscious of our responsibility
in making them.

Examples of Forced Labor in U. S. S. R.

Let me first explain what we mean by forced
labor in the U.S.S.R. In a totalitarian state like
the Soviet Union, a considerable amount of co-
ercion exists in the relationship between the state
as the almighty employer and the individual
worker. I will give but a few examples of such
coercion for the purpose of demarcating the field
of this investigation.

First, compulsory inductions are made for the
vocational training system. The decree of Oc-
tober 2, 1940, establishing labor reserve schools
specifically authorizes the use of the draft if the
number of volunteers falls below the desired quota.
To what extent compulsion is used to provide stu-
dents for the factory-training schools is shown by
the following quotation from the Moscow Bol-
shevik (February 14, 1947) :

There is an increasing desire among Soviet youth to
enter these schools, as is proved by the fact that during
the last call-up more than one-third of the trainees were
volunteers.

In other words, almost two-thirds were pressed
into the system. However, this is not the forced
labor we propose to study.

Second, graduates of the labor reserve schools
as well as of universities and other specialized
schools are compelled to work for a specified num-
ber of years — 3 or 4, as a rule — at whatever job
is assigned to them by the authorities. Again, I
exclude this type of involuntary work from our
examination.

Third, a Soviet worker may not leave his job
without a specific authorization by his employer, in
other words, the state. The decree of June 26,
1940, which continued in force after the war and
is still in force, forbids under threat of imprison-
ment

. . . the voluntary departure of wage earners and sal-
aried workers from State, cooperative and communal en-
terprises and institutions, and also voluntary transfer
from one enterprise to another or from one institution
to another. Only the director of an enterprise or the
chief of an institution may permit departure from an en-
terprise or institution, or transfer from one enterprise
to another, or from one institution to another.

But workers forced to stay on jobs they have rea-
son to quit, are not included in any definition of
forced laborers in the sense of this inquiry.

Fourth, large numbers of peasants are con-
scripted annually to do obligatory work in repair-
ing roads and the like. This remnant of the Mid-
dle Ages will be omitted from our inquiry.

Fifth, punishment for absenteeism in factories
may consist in compulsory work at a low wage in
the same enterprise for up to 6 months. We ex-
clude also this type of forced labor.

Sixth, persons who, for some reason or other,

545

have incurred the wrath of the regime, may be
exiled to some remote j)hice inside the U.S.S.R.
Working opportunities in sucli a place may be
limited to a single factory or mine; the exile be-
comes automatically a forced laborer. Still, cases
of this type are not being considered here.

"When we speak of forced labor we have in mind
only those unfortunates who, for political or eco-
nomic reasons, are confined to prisons and concen-
tration camps and who are compelled to work in
or near their enclosures. They are the people
who have fallen victims to the provisions of the
coi'rective labor code of the Russian Federalist
Socialist Soviet Republic as approved on August
1, 1933, and to similar laws enacted before and
since that date.

Number of Forced Laborers in U.S.S.R.

There are, of course, evildoers everywhere in
the world, and society has to protect itself against
them. My country, for instance, publishes exact
statistics on the prison population which show
that roughly one person out of 1000 or approxi-
mately 150,000 people out of a total population of
150 million are in jail. If we apply the same
percentage to the U.S.S.R., we would arrive at
a prison population of around 200,000 people. I
am fully aware that in the eyes of every good
Communist this calculation does injustice to the
motherland of socialism. iVren't we told — and
I am quoting an article which appeared some time
ago in Bolshevik (No. 4, 1947, p. 54) that —

Under conditions of bourgeois society crime is inevitable
. . . The victory of socialism signifies the liquidation of
the main source of crime, private capital ownership . . .
The elimination of capitalism in our country has led to a
sharp decline in the types of crime most typical of capital-
istic .society, to the dying off of such "professions" wide-
spread in bourgeois society as the card-sharper, gigolo,
procurer, safebreaker, etc. . . .

By now, Russia has been educated in the spirit
of Marx, Lenin, and Stalin for fully a third of a
century; as a result, we should expect a prison
population of far less than 200,000. The Soviet
Government, unfortunately, does not see fit to
publish statistics on its prisoners, and so the out-
side world has to rely on its own computations.
These calculations differ among themselves, but
they have one thing in common : not a single
estimate places the number of Soviet prisoners at
less than several million people.

The most cautious observers, those who prefer
to err on the lower side are of the opinion that
there are at least 2-3 million forced laborers in
the Soviet Union; 5 years ago, a generally con-
servative student of the Soviet economy came out
with an estimate of 5-7 million people ; one scholar
thought tliat certain discrepancies in Soviet sta-
tistics jiointed to a prison labor force of 13 mil-
lion; others believe that there are more than 20
million forced laborers.

I do not pretend to know the exact figure; it

must have varied over the years, and the diver-
gence in estimates reflects to some degree the dif-
ferent periods to which they refer. But I am
impressed by the height of even the most cautious
estimates. If the number of forced laborers were
only 2 to 3 million, it still would be 10 to 15 times
as much as can be found in what the Communists
call a rotten bourgeois society. And, if the maxi-
mum estimate were correct, the difference would
be a hundredfold.

CONTRAST WITH TSARIST REGIME

Since we do not believe that the incidence of
crime among the Russian people differs much from
other nations, there are only two explanations for
this unsavory Soviet world record. One is that
the Soviet regime in its infinite bounty punishes
with forced labor people who under cruel capital-
ism would, at worst, be fined or called to order.
The second explanation is that the Kremlin de-
tains millions of people on purely political
gi-ounds. Again, let us keep the magnitudes in
mind. It is well known that under the Tsars
political opponents were dealt with in a way that
made the Western World shudder. According to
a Soviet source, namely, the Small Soviet Encyclo-
pedia^ published in 1936 (vol. 5, col. 361), Tsarist
penal labor reached its highest point in 1913 with
33,000, of which 5,000 were political prisoners.
The number of people confined in regidar prisons
reached a maximum, in 1912, with 184,000 on the
authority of Andrei Vyshinsky (in his book
Prisons in Capitalist Countries, ^Moscow, 1937, p.
54). This figure includes common criminals and
political prisoners. The highest number of po-
litical exiles reached in prerevolutionarj' days was
17,000 in 1907 (according to Soviet Penal Repres-
sion, Moscow, 1934, p. 108). Please note that
this is a Soviet publication. I am the last person
to defend tsarism, but Tsarist Russia was a free
country compared to what it is now.

EVIDENCE CITED

What evidence do we have of forced labor on
a large scale in the U.S.S.R.? I will divide my
materials into two parts. In the first part. I will
rely entirely on printed Soviet sources; the sec-
ond one will consist of statements by persons who
escaped Soviet prisons and concentration camps.
Before turning to the first part, I would like to
direct a warning to my distinguished colleagues
from the Soviet bloc. It has become routine with
them to accuse me of "scandalous slander" and
"malicious calumnies"; as long as I am quoting
Soviet sources, their ]iotshots will fly past me at
the heads of Soviet lawnuikers, writers, and states-
men such as Andrei Vyshinsky.

"F«r every outspoken and honest word in Rus-
sia" and I am now quoting Lenin, "a person may
be seized by a single edict of the police and thrown
into prison, or deported to Siberia without court

546

Department of State Bulletin

trial and investigation". Lenin's words refer to
Tsarist Russia. But they are equally true of
Soviet Russia. Fact is that the Soviet police is
authorized by law to imprison individuals in so-
called "camps of corrective labor," to exile them
to a specific community somewhere in the U.S.S.R.,
or to bar them from residence in certain areas.
These are facts which were brought out in earlier
discussions of this Council and they have never
been denied, let alone refuted.

During the farm collectivization drive in the
late twenties and early thirties and during the
many purges that have characterized the Soviet
political scene, there was ample opportunity to
fill the prisons and the many concentration camps
through administrative processes only and in cir-
cumvention of the courts. Collectivization alone
cost millions of persons liberty and life. In Rus-
sia, you may recall, a well-to-do peasant had the
derogatory name of kulak, or "fist," and the Gov-
ernment's policy was the "liquidation of the kulak
as class." In practice, everybody was considered
a kulak who had antagonized the local Commu-
nists. "V^^lat the elimination of the kulaks meant
in terms of social disruption and human suffer-
ing has been revealed by the great Andrei Vyshin-
sky himself, who, in his book. The Law of the
Soviet /State, has ]5ointed out that kulaks repre-
sented not less than 12.3 percent of the Soviet
population in 1913 (p. 117) and probably not
fewer in 1928 when their "extinction" (p. 669)
began. In the course of this drive for extermina-
tion, says Vyshinsky "many kulak families dis-
integrated. Some of the kulak children entered
an honorable life of toil" (p. ()69). One cannot
escape the horrifying significance of Vyshinsky's
offliand observation that of the millions of kulak
children only "some" were allowed to work their
way back to "an honorable life."

Soviet publications occasionally give a glimpse
of what happened to those kulaks, who were not
immediately killed during the collectivization
drive, and to other political prisoners. On March
8, 1931, Molotov tried to refute foreign charges
of forced labor in the U.S.S.R. in a report to the
All-Union Congress of Soviets; in his paper, he
admitted, however, that there were "about 60,000
persons" performing corrective labor on three
highways, a railway, and the A^liite Sea-Baltic
Canal. That this figure was too low was revealed
in 1933 when, on completion of the "Wliite Sea-
Baltic Canal, about 72,000 of the prisoners who
had worked on the project were freed (12,484) or
received shortened terms (59,516) by government-
al decree (Pravda, August 5, 1933). Similar de-
crees in 1937 released 55,000 prisoners who worked
on the Moscow-Volga Canal and 10,000 who

' Oosudarstrennyi plan razvUiya narodnoffo khozyaist
va SSSR a 19.',1 god (State Plan for the Development of
the National Economy of the U.S.S.R. in 1941), Supple-
ment to Decree No. 127 of the Central Committee of the
Communist Party and the U.S.S.R. Council of the People's
Commissars, January 17, 1941.

■worked on the double-tracking of the Karymskoye-
Khabarovsk railwa}'. But those released were a
fraction only of the corrective labor force, as evi-
dencetl by the oflicial Soviet economic plan for
1941.

SOVIET ECONOMIC PLAN FOR 1941 REVEALED

This 1941 plan,^ which the Soviet authorities
mai'ked confidential, is a most revealing and in-
criminating document and is in the hands of the
United States Government at this moment. This
plan presents official data on the contribution of
forced labor to economic activities in the U. S. S. R.
as planned for 1941. Let me limit myself here to
a few significant statistics. According to this
plan, the total volume of capital construction in
the U. S. S. R. for that year is fixed at 46-47 billion
rubles expressed in 1926-27 prices. The People's
Commissariat of Internal Affairs, NKVD, now
renamed Ministry, MVD, in other words the
agency assigned to administer the prison camps,
is responsible for 6.81 billion rubles' worth of
capital construction. This means, more than 14
percent of the capital construction planned for
the U. S. S. R. in 1941 was to be the work of forced
labor. No other Peoj)le's Commissariat listed in
the plan, has such a high share. Of those 6.81
billion rubles, the largest portion, namely 2,675
millions, was assigned to the so-called Main Ad-
ministration of Corrective Labor Camps, abbrevi-
ated Gulag. Gulag constructed camp buildings,
mining facilities, logging camps, military build-
ings, and some housing. The Main Administra-
tion of Railroad Construction, abbreviated
Glavzheldorstroi, another part of the NKVD, had
the responsibility for 1,350 million rubles' worth
of capital construction. It built railroad lines
through isolated regions of the Soviet LTnion.
There are indications that the NKVD farmed out
some of its forced labor to the construction organs
of the Commissariat (and now Ministry) of
Transport with the result that capital construction
based on forced labor was financed by funds be-
yond those allotted to the NKVD which means
that the share of forced labor in total construction
went beyond 14 percent. This remark applies
also to a third Main Administration under the
NKVD, namely the Main Administration of
Paved Highways. Gushodor. Its plan for 1941
provided .550 million rubles' worth of capital
construction.

It is, of course, impossible to give in this con-
text more than a few highlights of the 1941 plan.
Let me quote from the official Soviet document.
The U.S.S.R. planned to produce 291 million
cubic meters of industrial timber and firewood of
which the NKVD share was 34.73 million or 12
percent. The NKVD share of railroad ties to
be produced was 22.5 percent. It is, of course,
understandable that the NKVD plays a large role
in timber production ; the timber is cut in remote

April 2, 1957

547

regions with a harsh climate, and unskilled labor
can be copiously used. For the same reasons, it
is not surprising that NKVD laborers were sup-
posed to launch 17 percent of all the timber floated
in the U.S.S.R. and were planned to have a 25
percent share in Arctic freight towing. These
Arctic operations were under the direction of
Dalstroi, a huge police administration in the Soviet
Far East. Dalstroi workers are said to have pro-
duced about three quarters of the Soviet gold ex-
tracted in the last years before the war, but this
figure is not based on official Soviet data ; in fact,
the 1941 plan does not indicate the NKVD goals
in the gold industry. Nor does it say much of the
ore mining activities of the NKVD in general.
It only states that Gulag, the aforementioned
Main Administration of Corrective Labor Camps,
was mining chrome ore and was expected to pro-
vide 40.5 percent of the total Soviet output of

that ore.

The NKVD also had a production quota of cer-
tain types of machinery, much of which was in-
tended for its own activities. Gulag, for instance,
was assigned production of auto-tractor trailers,
and other organs of the NKVD were responsible
for the manufacture of road equipment and metal
testing machinery. The NKVD was, further-
more, active in the fishing industry; it operated
farms and food processing plants to supply many
of its own consumption needs; and it had a con-
siderable share in the production of certain con-
sumers' items such as divans and mattresses, stoves
and ovens, film cassettes, and spoons. When our
distinguished colleague from the U.S.S.R. is home
again and resting in his bed or eating his soup,
well may he ponder as to who were the hapless
wretches whose toil produced his mattress or his
spoon.

Mr. President, I could produce many more de-
tails from this Soviet economic plan — the NKVD
share in other fields of production, the distribution
of its output by regions, etc. but our time is lim-
ited. One final word only: let nobody call this
statement calumny and slander. It is the Govern-
ment of the U.S.S.R. itself which, in its official
economic plan, has revealed the enormous extent
to which police-controlled labor contributes to
Soviet production.

In the years after the war, NKVD, now MVD,
has maintained its economic functions especially
in the field of capital construction. It is no coin-
cidence that the leading engineers of some of the
most important power, railroad, and canal proj-
ects of recent years are well-known forced labor
specialists spawned by the OGPU, the NKVD,
and the MVD. The whole Soviet economy is shot
through with police activities. Projects, pro-
claimed as evidence for the Kremlin's love for
peace and progress, are actually directed by forced
labor specialists, and slave labor has become part
and parcel of the Soviet economic life.

548

Testimonies of Victims of Soviet Slave Labor

"WTiat does all this mean in human terms — in
terms of Pavel, Mikhail, Dimitry, and Igor, the
inmates of the so-called corrective labor camps?

A prisoner's lot is tragic, even under the most
favorable conditions. Even a golden cage is a
cage. But the Soviet concentration camps are not
places where lawbreakers are given useful work
to do under humane conditions until they are re-
educated into useful citizens. A large number of
former inmates of Soviet prisons and concentra-
tion camps have testified about the harsh, the cruel
conditions, the starvation, overwork, and misery
that characterize these places. This type of edu-
cation has an appalling death rate. I freely ad-
mit that, among the thousands of witnesses against
the Soviet forced labor systems, there may be some
liars ; quite a few may have exaggerated their suf-
fering and that of their fellow prisoners, some in-
tentionally, some unconsciously. But there are
enough honest men and women among these ex-
prisoners ; there are enough eyewitnesses whose ac-
counts have the ring of veracity. And their voices
combine to a horrible chorus of accusation.

I shall try not to take up too much of your time
with the stories of these eyewitnesses. Their ac-
counts are infinitely moving if you really try to
understand what they went through, and, yet, if
you listen to many of them, your feelings will be-
come blunted because it is time and again the same
story of people punished without having commit-
ted a crime and without having been tried by a
court, of people starved, sick, freezing to death,
and, above all, mercilessly exploited.

Listen, first, to some of the witnesses of the
Rousset trial. It will be remembered that Rous-
set, a French writer who had suffered for years in
a German concentration camp, denounced the
Soviet forced labor system out of compassion with
concentration camp inmates anywhere. When a
French Communist paper accused Rousset of hay-
ing falsified his evidence, he brought a libel suit
against it and vindicated his honor in a trial which
took place in Paris in November and December
of last year.

It was the common experience of Rousset 's wit-
nesses that they were either sentenced to forced
labor without atrial and often without knowledge
of their "offense" or that they were accorded only
a most summary trial before judges without the
benefit of defense. Let me give just a few ex-
amples.

Mrs. Buber-Neumann, M'ho with her husband
had sought refuge in the U.S.S.R. in 1935, told
of her experience with Soviet-style trials. Her
husband was arrested in 1937 and —

my turn came in 1938. I was condtnnned to serve five
yours of forced Inbor. The whole trial — if one can speak
of a trial when only jiulnes were present — lasted about
two minutes.

Valentin Gonzales, who, under the nickname
El Campesino (The Peasant), was a general of

Deparfmenf of Slate Bulletin

the Spanish Republican Army during: the Civil
War, added further evidence to the arbitrariness
of the Soviet legal system when he testified that —

I will not insist on my own personal case because It
is only part of tile Krim story. Here, I am in France be-
fore a tribunal, and I think back and realize that in the
Soviet Union a piece of paper is enoush to condemn
thousands and thousands in complete disregard of the
existence of laws, of courts and judges.

Wliat Rousset's witnesses tell about life in
Soviet labor camps follows the familiar pattern
of hunger, cold, and overwork. Elinor Lipper
recalled conditions in the Kolyma gold fields in
northeastern Siberia where she spent more than
10 years although under sentence for only 5 :

Up there they work twelve to fourteen hours a day in
temjieratures of 15 degrees below zero . . . [Even] dur-
ing the eight months of winter the men work and dig in
the mines . . . [and] the women are also used as diggers
or cut wood, up to tlie waist in snow, and the little piece
of bread that you receive each day depends on the work
that you have done. If you haven't completed a suffi-
cient amount of work, you receive less bread ; when you
receive less bread, you become weak and you do less work.
Thus, you end up in one of the large hospitals where
the majority of people die of starvation.

During the hearing on December 16, Jerzy
Gliksman. a former leader of the Jewish Socialist
Bund in Poland, described his rude awakening to
the realities of Soviet camp life. He mentioned
that as a tourist in Moscow in 1936 he had been
shown a model camp staged for naive persons
like himself. He soon lost his naiveness after the
Soviet authorities had arrested him in 1939 dur-
ing the partition of Poland and sent him to a camp
near the Arctic Circle. Thousands of Jews he
testified,

. . . were deported to the camps under terrible con-
ditions in cattle cars during the winter under deplorable
hygienic conditions. After several months in prisons,
they sent us to the camps. What we got to eat depended
on what we produced. Then, there were the barracks with
swinging hammocks for beds, without covering, without
cushions, without mattresses or pallets, you slept in your
clothes . . . And then twelve hours in the forests and
then sickness.

Tikhon Charikov, a Ukrainian woodcutter,
evoked the memory of similar experiences. He
said tliat the food ration was 1,000 grams of bread
and a little soup when the work quota was fulfilled
by the prisoner, but only 600 grams of bread when
the quota was not fulfilled. Clothes were a pair
of pants, a light jacket, and shabby shoes. "Re-
education," Charikov added, "was simply annihi-
lation of prisoners."

I now pass on to the case of the Rev. Julius
Jihkental, former minister of St. Charles, Tallinn,
Estonia. He made a solemnly sworn deposition
on July 7, 1948, at the London Legation of the
Republic of Estonia. Together with many of his
countrymen and without being accused of any
violation of Soviet laws, he was shipped to a lum-
ber camp in northern Russia which his group
reached after harrowing marches. I will now

quote the Reverend Jihkental without any change
of his somewhat awkward English :

Finally we arrived in a remote lumber camp In the
north. First of all we saw there a few rows of plain
wooden crosses. We were told that these belonged to the
Poles who had died while working there. It was late in
the autumn and as on the last lap of our journey we had
to move along a fire lane we were scarcely able to move
on at all. The ground was so soft that it was .ilmo.st
impassable. Then in a wet and muddy hollow we saw
a small group of huts. Two of them were to accommodate
our group of 250 men. The first day we spent in making
bunks and settling down. Nest day the work began. As
I have said before, we had no proper footwear. Only
those who had nothing to put on were given flimsy sandals
made of bark. They were not waterproof at all although
we had to wade in water the whole day long. For food
we got 800 grams of bread and 2 plates of soup i>er
day — one in the morning and the other in the evening.
One can be sure it was most insufficient for such a hard
work we had to do there. I must add that the supiwsed
to be soup was only two plates of boiled water. Our
work was to fell trees, the hardest toil the majority
of us had ever done under such poor conditions and
under such an enormous pressure. As to sanitary ar-
rangements and hygiene none whatsoever were made.
No doctor was on the spot, only a female nurse who
seemed to have no medical training. Medicines were
missing. Even that poor arrangement that had been made
was a matter of form as the.v had no intention and no
interest in looking after our health and well-being. Their
only interest was to get out of us the greatest possible
amount of work. There was an incredibly high fixed
standard of work for each of us to be done daily and if
one failed to do it his food was cut accordingly. It was
clear that in the long run we could not possibly put up
with those inhuman conditions. Our health deteriorated
day by day. Bodily strength and in connection with that
our spiritual strength and willpower diminished to such
an extent that in about 2 months' time we were looking
like human wrecks and skeletons. Even those who had
been doing physical work throughout their whole life
could not stand it. As already said in 2 months' time
we were so exhausted and our health was so much under-
mined with insufficient food of the worst quality and
unbelievably high pressure of work that death began his
work. It was quite common that every day 4-6 of us
died. The main diseases which ended with death were
pneumonia and dysentery. We had to work 12 hours per
day — from 6 o'clock in the morning until 6 o'clock in the
evening. That winter was extraordinarily cold. It was
not exceptional and happened often that the temperature
was —50° C. There was an order that if the tempera-
ture was — 30° C. there was no working in the forest,
but that order, however, was not applicable to us.

It is really difficult for me to describe the most pitiable
sights I saw there how every morning persons who were
seriously ill were forced to go to work being beaten and
otherwise ill treated, how a row of tired and exhausted
creatures was stumbling to their working places, how
coming back from their work in the evening many of them
fainted and collapsed on their way.

You have heard before that the Soviet Govern-
ment looks at such concentration camps as educa-
tional institutions. This is what Juhkental has to
say about their education, an education which, I
hasten to add, was entirely free :

It was a horrifying trial in what way they wanted to
find out our political mentality and reeducate us to become
loyal Soviet subjects. One political meeting followed
another, ordinarily called at nights, at which we were
threatened to be shot if the output of our work would
not reach the target expected from us, or not to be al-
lowed to return home if we would not change our political
views regarding the Soviet Union and Communism.

April 2, 1951

549

In concluding tliis part of nn* exposition, I shall
add only one further testimony from a very differ-
ent kind of source. It fully corroborates the earlier
testimony which I have cited and eliminates all
doubt that the cancerous evil of forced labor has
become a basic element of Soviet economy. In De-
cember of last year, 13 Japanese nationals who
had only recently been repatriated from the Soviet
Maritime Province or from newly acquired Soviet
territories in the Far East made sworn deposi-
tions before the Consul of the United States at
Tokyo.

These illustrate the reliance on forced labor in
the U.S.S.R. to settle new areas and develop new
industries. Not only did these Japanese citizens
see hundreds of Soviet convicts doing heavy labor
but they themselves were forced to remain in the
Soviet Union and to perform designated work
against their will. Some were prisoners of war
captured during the last phases of the Second
World War, others were fishermen and other types
of workers living in Southern Sakhalin or the
Kuriles and a few who had migrated to the Soviet
Union under contract to work only a year. The
delay in returning both the civilians and the pris-
oners of war to Japan was not caused by a shortage
of ships, as claimed, but by the shortage of labor
in the Soviet Far East and by the desire of Soviet
officials to indoctrinate these "foreigners with Com-
munist ideology for transplantation to their
homeland.

I shall read to you as a sample only one of these
13 Japanese affidavits :

Affidavit

JAPAN

CITY OF TOKYO

AMERICAN CONSULAR SERVICE

Before me, James V. Martin, Jr., Consul of the United
States of America in and for Tokyo, Japan, duly com-
missioned and qualified, personally appeared Yoshiyuki
Ikehara, who, being duly sworn, deposes and says :

I, Yoshiyuki Ikehara, was a soldier In the Japanese
Army. I was taken prisoner by the Russians at Komozan,
Korea, on August 2(i, 1945, and was repatriated on August
20, 1948. While a prisoner of war I was confined in
Voroshilov from April 5, 1946, to March 14, 1948, and in
Ohurkina (near Vladivostok) from March 14, 1948, to
August 20, 1948.

While at Voroshilov, I worked in a brick factory, along
with some 400 other prisoners of war. This work was
forced, as if we did not work we received no food. We
were not paid for our work. Before the prisoners of war
went to woi-k in the brick yards, the work was done by
Russian convicts. We had a production norm liut I can-
not romemlier the particulars except that we could not
quit work until it was reached and that often we were
r('(|Uired to work 12 hours to reach it.

At ("hurkina, most of the i)risoners of war were em-
ployed in or in connection with :\ cannery. This cannery
handled various types of fish includiiif; crabmeat. I was
employed In m;ikiiii,' barrels fur (be use of the cannery.
There were allnLjetlier about 1,000 prisoners of war worjc-
ing in or about the <'annery. .Ml these were working under
comimlslon, as if they did not work they received no food.
The )iro(luclion norm was said to be liased on Kusslan
Standards, but It was very hard for tis to keep up with
It. When we did not we got less food. We received no

550

pay for our work. We were supposed to have Sundays
off, but actually only had every other Sunday as a holiday.
If we were sick, we were examined by a Japanese doctor
who decided if we were fit to work or not, but the finding
of the Japanese doctor had to be approved by a Russian
doctor, who often disagreed with the finding ; in this
case no matter how sick the man was he had to work.
When we tried to rest at work, we were often beaten by
Russian guai-ds.

In addition to the Japanese prisoners of war, there were
about 200 Russian civilians employed in the cannery.
I do not know their pay or condition of work. In busy
.seasons, there were also employed gangs of 50 to 60
Russian convicts, who worked temporarily.

When I was repatriated there were still about 200 Japa-
nese prisoners of war working in the cannery.

(Yoshiyuki Ikehara)

Subscribed and sworn to before me this fourteenth day
of December, A.D. 1950.

(Sl^L)

James V. Martin, Jr.
Consul of the Vnifed States of America

Gentlemen, enough of this utterly depressing
story, this chorus of Poles and Germans, Lithu-
anians and Ukrainians and Japanese, who like
actors in a Greek tragedy voice the anguish and
the despair of the millions behind barbed wires in
the Soviet Union whose voice is muted.

Every nation has its prisons and prisoners; in
a civilized country, they form an insignificant seg-
ment at the periphery of society. But, in tliis
particular case, we are faced with a dictatorship
which has imprisoned an abnormally large por-
tion of the population; we deal with a society
which relies on forced labor for an important per-
centage of the national product. Under such
circumstances, we are inclined to ask : who are the
real criminals, the innocent victims of the forced
labor camps or the jailers themselves? Wlio is
in need of a reeducation, tliose who are mercilessly
starved and exploited or those who have invented i
this system and are now spreading it all over their
sphere of influence ?

Forced Labor Conditions in Satellite Countries

It is this latter aspect, the spreading of the'
disease, which I have to dwell on shortly. It is
well-known that the countries under Soviet con
trol are being patterned after the Soviet model
and that the Soviet forced labor system is one of
the institutions which have been copied. In my
remarks last summer, I specifically referred to
Rumania, which according to tiie WFTU is a jiara^
dise of the people, to Czechoslovakia, ami the
Eastern zone of Germany. Today, I shall limit
myself to giving a few additional fact.s.

Bulgaria introduced forcetl labor cainjis by two
decree-laws of January 20, 194,5. These regula-
tions, which underwent minor changes in later
years, were finally rei)laced bv the law on the PeO'
Isle's Militia (i. *e. police) dated March 25, 1948.
In its section 69. it deals with what is eu]ihemis-
t ically called "communities for educational labor."
Subject to confinement in such camps are "politi-
cally dangerous persons," namely people who have

Department of State Bulletii

inuiiifosted an "anti-populai-" attitude, and also
blackmailers, defrauders, procurers, prostitutes,
•gamblers, etc. It is one oi the characteristics of
botli Fascist and Conununist legislation that politi-
cal o]>poncnts are defamed and debased by lump-
ing them together with connnon criminals. Un-
der the law, the period of confinement in Bulgaria
is at least 1 year, and it is the Minister of the
Interior who is authorized to condemn a person
to forced labor ; in political cases, he needs the con-
currence of the chief prosecutor. The law of
March 1*5, 1948, also introduced the "internment
(of politically dangerous persons) in a new place
of residence," i. e., banishment to a remote locality.

There exists, incidentally, another Bulgarian
law, dated April 30 ,1946, which establishes special
labor camps for persons ''who have taken to loaf-
ing and vagrancy and spend most of their time in
saloons, coffee houses, bars, pastry shops, and the
like." It was broadened on May 9, 1949, to in-
clude men and women '"fit for work who do not per-
form socially useful work." According to its
section 9, "appropriate measures shall be taken
for their systematic enlightenment and re-educa-
tion." I need hardly point out that any person
who, for some reason or another, has antagonized
the Communist authorities can easily be accused
of frequenting a coffee house and avoiding so-
cially useful woi-k. Even members of this Coun-
cil have frequently been seen in coffee houses.
Again, it is the Ministry of Interior who is author-
ized to condemn such a person to "systematic en-
lightenment."

Czechoslovakia has one distinction. The Czech-
oslovaks are honest enough to speak of forced labor
without throwing up a smoke screen about "re-
education"' or "communities for educational labor."
Their law of October 25, 1948, concerning forced
labor places the camps under the Ministry of the
Interior. Again, confinement takes place through
administrative procedures. In each province, the
so-called People's Committees, i.e.. Communist-
controlled administrative authorities, appoint a
special board which may condemn persons to
forced labor from 3 months to 2 years. Liable to
such confinement are. among others, persons who
"threaten the establishment of the j)eople's demo-
cratic order or economic life," a definition broad
and vague enough to cover any possible political
opponent.

On July 12. 1950, a new criminal code and a
new code of administrative criminal law and ad-
ministrative criminal procedure were adopted in
Czechoslovakia. They provide for forced labor,
either as a result of the judgment of a court or
of the decision of a People's Committee. It is a
specialty of the new penal laws that they confer
the authority to punish certain offenses entirely
upon the Peoples Committees. These commit-
tees have jurisdiction in cases of offenses against
the present economic order, economic planning,
economic operations, against health and social in-
surance, price control regulations, against public

April 2, J 95 J

aulhoi-ities, offenses against culture and social life,
and the general safety. In all such cases, the
People's Committees may impose confinement in
prison for (> months. If, however, the People's
Committee finds that the offender manifested, or
had the intention to manifest, his enmity against
"the ])cople's democratic order or against the es-
tablishment of socialism," it is authorized to con-
fine him for a period up to 2 years in a forced
labor camp — and I again emphasize that this is
the term which the Czechoslovaks themselves are
using. It is, as a rule, the Security Division of a
County People's Committee which decides such
cases, and it is worth while mentioning that a hear-
ing is not mandatory before these purely political
bodies.

If you read the Czechoslovak press, you will
find numberless reports of heavy sentences im-
jjosed by courts and People's Committees on per-
sons who objected to fann collectivization along
the customai-y Soviet lines or who showed any
lack of enthusiasm for similar Communist activ-
ities. On a single day (September 30, 1950), it
was reported that in Vlasim 24 persons were sen-
tenced from 1 to 25 years of imprisonment be-
cause they "obstructed rural development," while
in Moravsky Krumlov 13 farmers were sentenced
up to 7 years each for "agricultural sabotage."

Points in U.S. -U.K. Draft Resolution Empliasized

Mr. President: These quotations and citations
could be continued ad nauseam. In deference to
the heavy schedule of work still before the Coun-
cil, I shall desist from introducing any additional
data. Besides, and as stated earlier, my task at
this point was only to establish a prima facie case.
I feel certain that the Council will agree with me
that such a case has been established. Conditions
have been brought to light which constitute a
blatant violation of the Charter of the United
Nations and the moral and legal obligations sol-
enmly assumed by all members states of the
United Nations. We cannot become accessories
to these alleged crimes against humanity by re-
maining silent.

This brings me to the resolution jointly spon-
sored by the United Kingdom and the United
States. This resolution was introduced last Au-
gust, and, in order to save time, I take the liberty
of referring the Council to the explanations which
I offered at that time and which can be found in
my mimeographed speech of August 15, 1950. I
shall confine myself to a few major points which
require emphasis and indicate our thinking as to
the implementation of this resolution if it is
passed — and, I am sure, that it will be passed.

The rational approach to the solution of any
problem is first to obtain the facts, all the facts.
The resolution therefore proposes the establish-
ment of a fact-finding committee in cooperation
with the Ilo which has an obvious and direct
interest in the struggle against forced labor.

551

A committee of not more than five independent
members is proposed as allowing adequate repre-
sentation of the type of professional experts —
juridical, labor, social science — required. It
would certainly be unwise to go beyond five mem-
bers if the committee is to work effectively. As a
matter of fact, it may well be found that a com-
mittee of only three members would be more satis-
factory for the simple reason that it may be
difficult to secure the services of as many as five
persons with outstanding personal qualifications
who would be able and ready to give the major
part of 1 year to their work. Miich of the ef-
fectiveness of the committee will depend on the
persons who compose it. They should be inter-
nationally known for their concern with and de-
votion to human welfare. Their reputations for
expert knowledge, personal ability, and impartial-
ity should be beyond the shadow of a doubt. We
are thinking of such men as Mr. Spaak of Bel-
gium, Judge Aung Khine of Burma or Sir
Eanaswami Mudaliar of India, Justice Sund-
strom of Sweden, Mr. Aranha of Brazil, or Dr.
Ralph Bundle of the United States. I am not
making any nominations, and I am afraid that
several of the persons mentioned would not be
available. I am simply citing the names of these
men as illustrative of the high international stand-
ing that the members of this committee must
enjoy.

The selection of the members of the committee
is not a matter of election but of careful selection
to secure persons possessing those high intellec-
tual and moral qualifications required to examine
the problem in complete objectivity. The best
readily available method of selection is to leave
the naming of the committee to the Secretary-
General of the United Nations and the Director
General of the International Labor Office, in whose
experience and judgment the Council has com-
plete confidence. To arrange for the joint election
of the committee by the Council and the Govern-
ing Body of the International Labor Organiza-
tion would be a prolonged and difficult procedure.

The resolution provides that the committee
"survey the field of forced labor ... in any part
of the world." There is, hence, no geographic
limitation. The committee will be free to survey
forced labor anywhere in the world. There are,
however, certain restrictions. The resolution
provides that the committee "assess the nature
and extent of the problem at the present time."
The survey is not to be concerned with historical
developments but with the existence of forced
labor "at the present time."

Furthermore, the committee is asked to inquire,
in particular, into systems of forced labor "which
are on such a scale as to constitute an important
element in the economy of a given country." This
phrase coupled with the earlier phrase which
speaks of "systems of forced or corrective labor
which are employed as a means of political coer-
cion or punishment for holding or expressing po-

litical views" clearly indicates the intent of this
resolution. While the inquiry envisaged is to
extend to all parts of the world, it is evident that
little useful purpose would be served if the com-
mittee dissipated its efforts in tracking down iso-
lated cases of forced labor which may be found
here and there as remnants of earlier economic
or social practices and mores. This is particu-
larly important in view of the fact that the Coun-
cil has already at work a committee which deals
with the remnants of slavery. Any overlapping
of functions of that committee with the function
of the committee here contemplated should be
avoided.

It will be noted that the resolution does not
provide specific instructions as to how the com-
mittee should perform its work. Any such group
of internationally distinguished persons, as pro-
posed here, should be left to organize itself in a
manner which it considers most appropriate for
the task to be performed. The committee would
decide for itself such matters as the place and time
of its meetings ; the nature of its proceedings, pri-
vate and public ; whether or not to establish panels ;
the nature of the evidence to be examined, both
written and oral ; which witnesses to be heard ; the
on-the-spot investigations to be made by the com-
mittee or its staff, and all other related matters.
On-the-spot investigations would be made, of
course, only with the consent of the Government
concerned.

In the opinion of my Government, the commit-
tee might do well to begin its work by the collec-
tion and a searching juridical scrutiny of all avail-
able texts, laws, decrees, administrative orders,
etc. in order to get a clear idea of the juridical
basis, if any, on which the systems of forced labor
are built.

At the same time, it is evident that, as has been
so forcibly brought out by the distinguished repre-
sentative of India in an earlier discussion, consti-
tutions and laws are frequently a very poor indi-
cation of what actually exists in a country. Con-
stitutional safeguards and laws frequently are not
applied or blatantly violated. Any inquiry,
therefore, which does not attempt to get at the
application of laws and at prevailing administra-
tive practices is bound to remain sterile or might
even become misleading. Therefore, as a second
step the committee, in the opinion of my delega-
tion, would have to assemble and analyze all
available data regarding prevailing practices.

After the completion of these first two phasea
of the inquiry, it will be up to the committee to
decide to what extent it should obtain additional
evidence by way of hearings or by other methods.
AVe still hope t:hat the Communist countries will
be willing to allow on-the-spot investigations.
Any refusal to do so will, I am sure, be taken by
world o]iinion as an obvious confession of guilt.

Tlio committee will need an able and competent
staff which could undertake mucli of the basic

552

Department of State Bulletin

research needed for the work of the committee.
We assume that this staff would be provided by
the Secretary-General of the United Nations and
the Director General of the International Labor
Office, with the concurrence of the members of
the committee. The expenses of the committee
would also bo shared equally, I assume, by the
United Nations and the International Labor Of-
fice in a manner to be agi'eed by the Secretary-
General and the Director General. In this con-
nection, it appears to my delegation that the fi-

I nancial estimates provided by the Secretary-Gen-
eral in document E/L.104/Add.l are utterly in-
adequate. They provide for a total expenditure
of only $21,000 at the most, which would hardly
be enough to investigate conditions in a county
jail. If the committee is to accomplish its pur-
pose, it must meet for more than 2 months. It
might, in fact, have to meet for 6 to 8 months over
a period of a full year. The $25.00 subsistence
allowance proposed for members of the committee
may have to be supplemented by consultants' fees.
No provision is made in the estimates for the
travel expense and subsistence allowance of pos-
sible witnesses. A larger specialized staff than
the two substantive staff members referred to in

j the financial estimates will be required, with
higher transportation and subsistence costs. This
will be especially true if the committee decides to
conduct hearings or investigations in the field.
Provision should be made for wider distribution
of the report or summaries thereof and in more
languages than is contemplated in the Secretariat's
estimates. Wlaile details of the organization and
operations of the committee cannot be set forth at

I this time, it is clear that, for the success of the
committee's work, adequate funds are essential.
The United States delegation therefore would be
willing, in view of the transcending importance
of the task of the committee, to support financial
estimates for the calendar year 1951 of up to $150,-
000 to be divided between the United Nations and
the International Labor Office. We would hope
that, with the help of such funds, the work of

' the committee could be pushed sufficiently vig-
orously as to allow the committee to submit at
least an interim report by the time of the four-
teenth session of the Council.

There is just one further point to which I
should like to draw the attention of the Council.
In document E/188-1, the Secretary-General dis-
tributed to the Council the text of a letter re-
ceived from the Director General of the Interna-
tional Labor Office. This letter shows that the
Governing Body of the International Labor Of-
fice has already decided by an overwhelming ma-
jority to cooperate with the Council in imple-
menting the arrangements envisaged in the
joint United Kingdom-United States resolution.

Mr. President: In conclusion, I should simply
like to repeat what I said last August. I com-

w

April 2, 1951

mend this draft resolution to you and to my dis-
tinguished colleagues on this Council. I com-
mend it for your careful consideration.

Peace Observation Commission's Role
in Universal Collective Security

Statement by Ernest A. Gross

U.S. Representative on Peace Commission ^

The creation of the Peace Observation Commis-
sion is a step in the strengthening of the United
Nations. It is an important part of the growth
and development of the collective security system.
The Commission should not be viewed merely as a
thing in itself, but in conjunction with the other
elements of the uniting-for-peace resolution.

It is only by strengthening the United Nations
collective security machinery that world peace
can be assured. This is so because peace rests upon
three things — agreement to refram from aggres-
sion, the willingness to carry out that agreement,
and the means to prevent violations of the agree-
ment. The Charter embodies such an agreenient
in its most solemn form. The free world is united
in its determination to carry it out. We are today
taking another step in the effort to develop means
for preventing or deterring violation.

The uniting-for-peace resolution contains three
major elements: preparation, investigation, and
action. These are the elements which should be
found in an effective collective security system, as
they must be found in an effective government or in
any effective enterprise for the furtherance of the
objectives of a community.

The element of preparation is contained in two
provisions of the uniting-for-peace resolution.
The first of these is the invitation to member states
to create and maintain armed forces so that they
can promptly be made available for service as
United Nations units. The second is the estab-
lishment of the Collective Measures Committee,
which has now started its study of methods which
might be used to maintain and strengthen inter-
national peace and security.

The element of investigation in the uniting-for-
peace resolution is, of coui-se, this Peace Observa-
tion Commission.

The element of action is the provision in the
resolution that, if the Security Council fails to
exercise its primary responsibility for the mainte-
nance of international peace and security, the
General Assembly can meet in emergency special
session within 24 hours and make appropriate
recommendations to the members for collective
measures.

These elements are part of the framework of the
collective security system we are building in the

' Made before the Peace Observation Commission on
Mar. 16 and released to the press by the U.S. Mission to
the U.N. on the same date.

553

United Nations. That system, my Government
believes, should serve both as a deterrent to fur-
ther acts of aggression and, should aggression
unfortunately recur, as a means of meeting it.
The elements serve different but related functions ;
thus, the elements of preparation and investiga-
tion are preventive medicine in the international
society, while the element of action is the surgery
■which becomes necessary if preventive medicine
fails.

Under its terms of reference, the Peace Ob-
servation Commission is to be used by the Security
Council, the General Assembly, or the Interim
Committee to —

observe and report on the situation in any area where
there exists international tension tlie continuance of
which is likely to endanger the maintenance of inter-
national peace and security.

Thus, its substantive activities are to be initiated
by one of these principal organs. Because its
function is preventive, its use would not neces-
sarily imply any belief on the part of the members
of the United Nations that aggression was immi-
nent. International tension is widespread today.
There are areas of tension where observation
might prove to be useful. The decision to take
preventive action is concerned as much with the
needs and interest of the world community as it
is with the individual area or problem concerned.
The mere presence of United Nations observers
can, in itself, help to make aggression unlikely.
This Commission, we believe, should, therefore,
be prepared to provide promptly for the dispatch
of such observers at any time of need.

Previous United Nations experience with ob-
server groups shows how useful they can be. The
decision by a United Nations body to send ob-
servers to an area indicates at once the interest of
the world community in that area. This was very
much the case, for example, in Greece, where as-
sistance was being given from neighboring coun-
tries to the forces attempting to overthrow the
Greek Government. The sending into the area
of the United Nations Special Committee on the
Balkans demonstrated that the United Nations
was concerned about the tension in this area. The
presence of the Committee, giving tangible evi-
dence of this concern, was, in itself, a source of
comfort and support to the Greek people. Its
presence was, no doubt, a deterrent to aggi-ession
from beyond the Greek borders.

Our experience with the United Nations Com-
mission on Korea provides another example of
the usefulne.ss of observers. In this case, aggres-
sion did occur. The United Nations Commission
was on the spot and immediately reported the
facts. On (he basis of these reports, the Security
Council could and did act promptly in recom-
mending to the members that they take steps to
restore peace and security to the area. Without
the prompt action which followed upon the receipt
of this information from the observers on the spot,

the Republic of Korea might have been overrun.
Because of the prompt action and the prompt re-
sponse of United Nations members, the attack was
met and repulsed.

These two examples, I think, show the poten-
tialities of the Peace Observation Commission and
suggest why the General Assembly voted to estab-
lish on a permanent basis the observation fimc-
tions of the United Nations.

One final word. The Peace Oliservation Com-
mission, like the other elements of the uniting- for-
peace resolution, is a part of a universal collective
security system. It is aimed against no power
or group of powers. It is designed to guard
against and report upon the outbreak of aggres-
sion no matter what its source.

Central Group of International
Materials Conference Enlarged

The International Materials Conference (Isic)
announced on March 22 that the enlarged Central
Group met on that date for the first time. The
new, permanent Central Group now constituted
is composed of the three Governments originating
the temporary Group — France, the United King-
dom, and the United States — plus the Governments
of Australia, Brazil, Canada. India, and Italy and
the Organization of American States and the
Organization for European Economic Coopera-
tion.

The new members were welcomed by the United
States representative, Edwin T. Gibson, who was
asked to act as temporary chairman. He ex-
pressed the appreciation of the three Govern-
ments forming the temporary Group at having the
cooperation of the five new countries and two
large regional organizations. He referred to the
valuable studies of the problems of scarce raw
materials which have already been made by the
Oeec and the Oas. Mr. Gibson cited the pur-
poses and aims of this new international body,
the Imc. and emphasized the urgency of the mat-
ter. The Connnittee will meet again on Friday,
March 30.

The meeting was composed of the following:

AUSTRALIA — F. A. Meere, First Assistant Comptroller
General. Department of Trade and Customs

BRAZIL — Walder L. Sarmanho, Minister, Brazilian Em-
bassy

CANADA — John H. English, Commercial Counselor, Em-
bassy of Canada

FRANCE — JI. J. Vaclu'r-Desvcrnais, Commercial Counselor,
Ministry of Finance and E<'onomic Affairs

INDIA — P. Vaidyanathan, Economic Attach^, Embassy of
India

ITALY — Erfdio Ortona, Chief, Italian Technical Delegation,
Eml)assy of Italy

UNITED KiNta)0M — Viscouiit Kuollys, Minister in Charge of
IJaw Materials, Hritish Embassy

unit™ st.\tes — Edwin 'I". (Jilison. Pefense Administrator,
Defense Production .\dminisl ration

554

Department of State Bulletin

oAS — Dr. Alberto I^leras. Secretary General

(ir.ix- — P. Storrs, Administrator

iMf — C. W. Jeffers, Kxecutive Secretary; Rcn^ Larre, As-
sistant Executive Secretary ; J. Hubert Penson,
Assistant Executive Secretary

U.S. Delegations

to International Meetings

Fourth Airworthiness Session (ICAO)

On March 'JO, the Departiiient of State an-
nounced that tlie fourth session of the Airworthi-
ness (Air) Division of the International Civil
Aviation Organization (icao) convened on that
date at Montreal, Canada. The United States
delegation is as follows:

Delegate and Chairman

Georse W. Haldeman, Chief, Aircraft Division, Civil Aero-
nautics Administration, Department of Commerce

Advisers

Joliu Bosliar, Structural Loads EtiRineer, Aircraft Divi-
sion, Civil Aeronautics Administration, Department
of Commerce

John A. Carran, Chief, Aerodynamics Section, Aircraft
Division, Civil Aeronautics Administration, Depart-
ment of Commerce

Philip Donely, National Advisory Committee for Aero-
nautics, Langley Aeronautical Laboratory, Langley,
Va.

Hu.i,'h B. Freeman, Aeronautical Engineer, Airworthiness
Division, Civil Aeronautics Board

Franklin W. Kolk, Manager, Aircraft Analysis Division,
American Airlines

W. Edmund Koneczny, Chief, Airworthiness Division,
Civil Aeronautics Board

Raymond B. JIaloy, Chief, Engineering Flight Test Branch,
Civil Aeronautics Administration, Department of
Commerce

Josepli Matulaitis, International Airworthiness Adviser,
Aircraft Division, Office of Aviation Safety, Civil
Aeronautics Administration, Department of Com-
merce

David Posner, Chief, Installation Section, Civil Aeronau-
tics Administration, Department of Commerce

Harry Press, Aeronautical Research Scientist, Dynamic
Loads Division, National Advisory Committee for
Aeronautics, Langley, Va.

Robert Rosenbaum, Chief, Dynamics Section, Civil Aero-
nautics Administration, Department of Commerce.

Stephen H. Rolle, Chief, Power Plant Engineering Branch,
Aircraft Division, Civil Aeronautics Administration,
Department of Commerce

William T. Shuler, Chief, Structures Section, Civil Aero-
nautics Administration, Department of Commerce.

M. B. Spaulding, Jr., Assistant Director of the Engineer-
ing Division, Air Transport Association

Burdell L. Springer, Deputy Chief, Airframe and Equip-
ment Engineering Branch. Civil Aeronautics Adminis-
tration, Department of Commerce.
I Omer Welling, Deputy Chief, Aircraft Division, Civil Aero-
I nautics Administration, Department of Commerce

The Airworthiness Division is one of ten tech-
nical Divisions of the Air Navigation Commission,
as established by the Icao Council. These Divi-
sions are responsible for formulating for the Com-
mission and eventual Council action recommenda-

tions on standards, procedures, and facilities
which api^ear to be necessary or desirable for the
safety, regularity, or efficiency of international air
navigation. The Divisions function in practice
as teclniical or specialized conferences open to
delegations from all Icao contracting states. The
tliird session of the Airworthiness Division was
held at Montreal from February 22-]March 29,
1949.

Tlie principal objectives of this meeting are the
consideration of power plant items as proposed by
the Am Division at its last session ; the exchange
of views on structures and flight subjects related
to the advent of high speed, high altitude air-
planes equipped with reciprocating and turbine
engines; and the preparation of proposals for
waterload standards for seaplanes. In addition,
discussions will be continued with respect to per-
formance requirements for transport category type
airplanes, a subject whicli has proved to be the
most difficult of all items relating to the interna-
tional airworthiness standards.

United Nations Documents:
A Selected Bibliography^

Economic and Social Council

Directory of Building Research Organizations in Europe.

E/ECE/121, lM/HOU/BR/3, September, 1950. 108

pp. with annexes, mimeo.
Trade Trends and Policies of Latin American Countries.

E/CN.12/165, May 1, 1950. 133 pp. mimeo.
United Nations Programme of Technical Assistance for

Economic Development. Report by the Executive

Secretary. E/CN.12/171, May 15, 1950. 33 pp.

mimeo.
Draft of Resolutions on Economic Development and Anti-
Cyclical Policy. Approved by Committee I. E/CN.12/

194, June 18, 1950. 4 pp. mimeo.
United Nations International CThildren's Emergency Fund.

Approved Plans of Operations for Asia. E/ICEF/153,

October 20, 19.50. 65 pp. mimeo.
United Nations International Children's Emergency Fund.

Approved Plans of Operatinns for Latin America.

E/ICEF/154, October 24, 1950. 44 pp. mimeo.
Disposition of Agenda Items. Tenth Session, February 7-

Marcb 6, 1950. E/INF/38, August 31, 1950. 147 pp.

mimeo.

^ Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27, N. Y. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.

The United Nations Secretariat has established an Offi-
cial Records series for the General Assembly, the Security
Council, the Economic and Social Council, the Trusteeship
Council, and the Atomic Energy Commission which in-
cludes summaries of proceedings, resolutions, and reports
of the various commissions and committees. Publications
in the Official Records series will not be listed in this
department as heretofore, but information on securing
subscriptions to the series may be obtained from the In-
ternational Documents Service.

April 2, 1951

555

Congressional Resolution Urging Just and Lasting Peace Endorsed

The following is the text of a letter from Secretary
Acheson to Senator Tom Connally, Chairman, Senate
Committee on Foreign Relations, dated March 20, 1951.

Your letter of February 9, 1951, gives me oppor-
tunity to endorse explicitly and emphatically the
McMahon-Ribicoflf resolution reaffirming the abid-
ing friendsliip of the American people for all
other peojjles, including the peoples of the Soviet
Union.

I wish to commend the legislative initiative in
this vital matter. I hope that it will prove pos-
sible to have favorable action completed by the
Congress in the near future. I am sending a simi-
lar letter to the Chairman of the Committee on
Foreign Affairs of the House of Representatives.

Three aspects of the resolution impress me par-
ticularly.

The first is the voicing of the American people's
fervent, profound desire for peace. The resolu-
tion well expresses this as our goal now and ever.
After taking note of the "terrible danger to all
free peoples as the circumstance compelling us re-
luctantly to rearm, the resolution affirms that we
"desire neither war with the Soviet Union nor the
terrible consequences of such a war." It notes our
preference "to devote our energies to peaceful pur-
suits." It finds cogent support of this in our will-
ingness "to share all that is good in atomic en-
ergy, asking in return only safeguards against
the evil in the atom."

I note that the resolution proclaims our aim not
simply in the word "peace" but as "just and last-
ing peace." It links this with "the dignity of
man" and "the moral principles which alone lend
meaning to his existence." This concept is echoed
in a reference to our determination to defend
freedom.

It is well that the resolution makes clear that
while we covet peace, we will not sell our souls for
it. The peace we seek is not simply the absence of
war but a sound and free collaboration among
nations in a pattern of responsibility based on mu-
tual respect. Peace in the first sense might be
obtained by moral capitulation. Peace in the
sense of our seeking can be achieved and held only
by long, hard eil'ort. We and our allies with us
are determined to create that kind of peace. The
goal would be brought incalculably nearer with

help rather than hindrance from the Soviet Union.

That brings me to the second point of special
significance. It is well that in affirming our
friendship for all peoples the resolution specifies
the peoples of the Soviet Union. That special
concern to express our friendship extends, I am
sure, to all other jieoples in Europe and Asia, in-
cluding China, now suffering the tragedy of life
behind the iron curtain. The gi'eat structure of
peace which the United States and its allies are
building will never be complete until all the
peoples now under domination by the Kremlin
participate in full partnership. Here, however,
we speak specifically of the peoples within the
Soviet Union proper.

AVere the truth available to them and were they
free to speak their minds and register their will,
I am sure they would answer us in the same spirit.

They are capable and hard-working peoples who
love their homeland. "We recall with fresh ad-
miration their sacrifice and courage under the
ordeals of the Nazi invasion. We are in constant
awareness of their gifts to civilization and of their
potential for still further gifts to enrich other
cultures. The wall which the Soviet rulers, im-
pelled by inward fears, maintain around their
dominion represents tragedy for those within it.
To those outside it represents real and deep
deprivation.

It will be well if the peoples within can be
caused to know that those beyond regard them,
not with hostility as represented to them bv their
rulers, but with an inherent friendliness. It will
be well for them to know that we understand the
heavy burdens they bear, particularly in the cir-
cumstance that the course determined upon by the
group in control bars them from the fruits of the
secure and steady peace which they have so greatly
earned.

A.s the tliird point of special significance, I refer
to the closing lines of the resolution expressing
the idea —

That the Congress request the President of the United
States to call tipon the Government of the Union of Soviet
Socialist Republics to acquaint the p(^)ple of the Soviet
Union with tlie contents of this resolution.

These words point to the opportunity which the
men of the Kremlin have for setting affairs on a

556

Department of State Bulletin

I better course. No others are in such a position
! to say the words and perform the acts whicli can
either strengtlien or confound men's hopes.

In a curious way they mirror themselves in tlieir
interpretation of tlie outside workl. As monopo-
lists of power, tliey profess to see in other govern-
ments the evil of monopoly. Dominated by hos-
tility toward all contrasting systems, they profess
to see that characteristic reflected in the systems
they fear and hate. Maintaining in readiness
armaments of such excess as to be explained not
(111 a basis of defense but only by the desire to
intimidate othei-s, they pretend to regard other
nations as bent upon aggression.

If the men of the Kremlin could but conquer
their inward fears and resolve their contradic-
tions, if they could but bring themselves to the
comity which is the foundation of peace, great bur-
dens would be lifted from the shoulders of peoples
everywliere.

A start could be made by letting the truth flow
freely into and within the Soviet Union. This
would mean an end to the practice of systemati-
cally distorting to the peoples of the Soviet Union
the policies and intentions of governments free
of its domination and the conditions of life beyond
tlie Soviet orbit. It would reduce the dangerous
disparity of public information now obtaining as
within and beyond the span of Kremlin control.

In our own country, for example, the press, radio
and television are free to present all sides of every
issue. The Soviet case is fully reported. Atti-
tudes and pronouncements originating in the
capitals of the Soviet system are made freely avail-
able to our people, who are left free to resolve
their wills on the basis of full possession of essen-
tial facts. In contrast, the monopolistic system
of information within the Soviet area makes avail-
able only the ruling group's side of every issue.
There, truth is made the servant of jjolicy rather
than policy the servant of truth.

It is significant, for illustration, that the plan
for international control of atomic energy, ap-
: proved in the United Nations General Assembly
in the fall of 1948 by a vote of 40 to 6, was never
imparted to the peoples who get their information
through the Soviet monopoly. This plan for
j)lacing atomic energy under international control,
limiting its uses to peaceful purposes and estab-
lishing an adequate system of inspection and con-
trol to neutralize its destructive potential, was
opposed by the governments of the Soviet system.
This fact has been withheld from the peoples
within that system.

The same occurred with respect to the General
Assembly Resolution on the Essentials of Peace,
realBrming the principles of the Charter and en-
dorsed in 1949 by a unanimous vote of all nations
other than those within the Soviet orbit. Its prin-
ciples and the implications of the clear division

April 2, 1951

on them have never been explained to the peoples
behind the iron curtain.

The same applies to the action of the General
Assembly last fall in support of the Resolution
on Uniting for Peace. This plan for strengthen-
ing the General Assembly with respect to security
matters, supported by 62 nations, drew implacable
hostility from the Kremlin and the governments
under its control. The facts and their enormous
implications have not been imparted by the Krem-
lin to the peoples whom it professes to represent.

These three examples chosen from many in-
stances illustrate that the walls impeding the flow
of information are also obstacles of crucial im-
portance in the course to a sound and lasting peace.

A Declaration of Friendship From the Ameri-
can People to all the Peoples of the World,
Including the Peoples of the Soviet Union

Whereas the goal of the American people is now,
and ever has been a just and lasting peace ; and

Whereas the deepest wish of our Nation is to
join with all other nations in preserving the dignity
of man, and in observing those moral principles
which alone lend meaning to his existence ; and

Whereas in proof of this, the United States has
offered to share all that is good in atomic energy,
asking in return only safeguards against the evil
in the atom; and

Whebeas this Nation has likewise given of its
substance and resources to help those peoples
ravaged by war and poverty ; and

Whereas terrible danger to all free peoples com-
pels the United States to undertake a vast program
of armaments expenditures ; and

Whereus we rearm only with reluctance and
would prefer to devote our energies to peaceful
pursuits : Now, therefore, be it

Resolved by the Senate ( the House of Representa-
tives concurring) , That the Members of this Con-
gress reaffirm the historic and abiding friendship
of the American people for all other peoples, in-
cluding the peoples of the Soviet Union, by de-
claring—

That the American people deeply regret the arti-
ficial barriers which separate them from the peo-
ples of the U. S. S. R., and which keep the Soviet
peoples from learning of America's desire to live
in friendship with all other peoples, and to work
with them in advancing the ideal of human brother-
hood ; and

That the American people desire neither war with
the Soviet Union nor the terrible consequences of
such a war; and

That although they are firmly determined to de-
fend their freedom and security, the American peo-
ple welcome all honorable efforts to compose the
differences standing between them and the Soviet
Government ; be it further

Resolved, That the Congress request the Presi-
dent of the United States to call upon the Govern-
ment of the Union of Socialist Soviet Republics to
acquaint the peoples of the Soviet Union with the
contents of this resolution.

557

Expanded World Economy Urged in Report
of International Development Advisory Board

[Releaged to the press by the White Bouse March IZ]

LETTER FROM PRESIDENT

TO THE CHAIRMAN OF THE BOARD

The following letter was sent hy the President from
the Little White Hoxise, V. S. Naval Station, Key West,
Florida, to Nelson Rockefeller, chairman of the Inter-
national Development Advisory Board.

I am impressed by the report of the Advisory
Board on International Development. It demon-
strates, clearly and forcefully, the reasons why a
lasting peace can be attained only by a wise combi-
nation of strong military defenses and an effective
campaign of international economic development.

A broad program of economic development is
necessary, as I pointed out in my inaugural ad-
dress, to cari-y out this country's international
objectives of peace and freedom. Since that ad-
dress, international problems have become critical
and we are now engaged in a tremendous mobiliza-
tion program. More than ever, greater produc-
tion, particularly in the underdeveloped areas, is
essential to the stability and freedom of those areas
and to the peace of the whole world. Recent events
in economically underdeveloped areas have dem-
onstrated that men will defend the cause of free-
dom when they know from experience that it is
the true way to economic and social progress.
Economic stagnation is the advance guard of
Soviet conquest.

The Point 4 concept, properly carried out, is
essential to the successful defense of the free world.
In the words of your report, "strengtheniijg the
economies of the underdeveloped regions and an
improvement in their living levels must be
considered a vital part of our own defense
mobilization."

Moreover, economic development is the spear-
head of the forces of freedom. The building of
military strength is not enough to win the peace
we seek. We must press the attack in tlie battle
of raising the living standards and fullilling the
hopes of mankind for a better future.

The task, as you have pointetl out, is one that
the United States cannot undertake alone. We
depend, in many respects, on the otiier free nations,
and they on us. International partnership is

558

necessary to build an expanding world economy in
which all can have a fair share.

It is a great satisfaction to me that a non-
partisan group, such as your Board, representing
labor, education, business, agriculture and other
aspects of our national life, should reach unani-
mous agreement on matters of such concern to the
future of our country. I am sure that your report
will do a great deal to put the problem of inter-
national economic development in its proper
perspective.

In the near future, I shall send recommenda-
tions to the Congress concerning the legislation
required for foreign defense and economic assist-
ance for 1952. I know that your report will be of
great help in enabling the Congress and the Ex-
ecutive Branch to develop the kind of program
which is needed to carry out our national
objectives.

I am sending your report innnediately to the
chairmen and the ranking minority members ol
the Senate Foreign Relations Committee and the
House Foreign Affairs Committee, and I hope
that you will be able to give them further infor-
mation on this important subject, if they so desire'
I am also directing the Government agencies con-
cerned to give your report their immediat(
consideration.

Please accept my deepest personal appreciatior ot(
for tlie task which your Board has accom]ilishe(:
and the leadership which you have contributec|!rf;
to it. You, your Board, and your staff can takt
great pride in the contribution which you hav(|
made toward a solution of some of the critical
problems which this Nation faces.

LETTER TO MEMBERS OF CONGRESS

Copies of the report of the IntertKitional Developmen 'B
Advisory Board, accompanied by letters from the PreM Jk
dent, vrrc sent to Tom Connally, chairman, Senat<
Forciyn Relations Committee : John Krr, chairman, //oiw<
Forcifin Affairs Committee; Arthur II. Vaiidenbcry, Sen
ate Foreiijn Relations Committee: Alexander Wilel "*■
Senate Foreiyn Retatitms Commillce ; James P. RichartU
House Foreiyn Affairs Committee : and Charles A. EatO* ifj
House Foreiyn Affairs Committee.' The text of tft (s*
President's accompanying letter follows. m,

Deparfmenf of Slate Bulletii ^|

\

Yoli will reciill that on November twenty-
fourth, I iijipointed the menibers of the Interna-
ticinal Development Advisory Board established
by tlie Con<iress under Section 40'J of the Act for
International Develo])ment. I nominated Mr.
Nelson Rockefeller as the Chairman of the Board.

At that time I requested the Board to under-
take as its first task a consideration of the pro-
posals of the Gordon Gray Report concerning our
policy toward the underdeveloped areas. The
International Development Advisory Board has
now completed that task and has submitted a
report to me, a copy of which I am enclosing
herewith.

I am sure you will find, as I have, that this is a
most thoughtful and stimulating report. In this
report, the group of distinguished citizens who
make up the Board has done us all a great service
liy analyzing the ways and means of making the
I'l onomic part of our foreign policy more effective
in building the strength of the free world. I know
this report will be most helpful in completing the
legislative recommendations on foreign aid I shall
shortly submit to the Congress. I am sure that
you and tlie members of your Committee will find
it valuable in your consideration of the economic
aspects of our foreign policy. I have asked Mr.
Rockefeller to supply you with any further infor-
mation and backgi'ound about the work of his
Board that you may desire.

\etter to heads

£0f governivsent agencies

The following letter of transmittal accompanied copies
(Ijlof the report sent to the Secretaries of State, Treasury,
Defense, the Attorney Oenernl, and the Secretaries of In-
erior, Ayriculture, Commerce, and Laior; to the Director,
Bureau of the Budget ; the Administrator, Economic Coop-
in eration Administration; the Director, Office of Defense
Mobilization; and the Administrator, Defense Production
Administration.

I am sending you herewith the Report of the
[nternational Development Advisory Board on
lii Foreign Economic Policy for the Underdeveloped
A.reas. You will recall that I asked this Board
111 Dii November 24, 1950, to undertake as its first task
la' I study of the recommendations on this subject
if nade by Mr. Gordon Gray in his report on Foreign
iconomic Policy.

I am also sending you a copy of the letter I have
ivritten to Mr. Nelson Rockefeller, Chairman of
he Board.
The recommendations made by the Board will,
01' '. believe, prove of great value in the task of pre-
'^■'l )aring the Foreign Aid Program.

IF* ,

l,f| The report of the International Development Advisory

fill Joard also was transmitted to Alben \V. Barkley, Vice

'resident of the United States, and to Sam Ra.vburu,

Speaker of the House of Representatives.

IpW; 2, 1 95 1

THE DEPARTMENT

Charles E. Bohlen Confirmed
as Counselor

On March 12, 1951, the Senate confirmed the nomination
of Charles E. Bohlen to be Counselor of the Department
of State.

Herschel D. Newsom Confirmed
to Public Advisory Board

On March 12, 1951, the Senate confirmed the nomination
of Herschel D. Nevrsom as a member of the Public Ad-
visory Board of the Foreign Assistance Act of 1948.

THE FOREIGN SERVICE

Confirmations

On March 12, 1951, the Senate confirmed the nomination
of EUsworlh Bunker to be American Ambassador Extraor-
dinary and Plenipotentiary to Argentina.

On March 12, 1951, the Senate confirmed the nomination
of Rudolf E. Schoefeld to be American Ambassador Ex-
traordinary and Plenipotentiary to Guatemala.

On .March 21, 1951, the Senate confirmed the nomination
of Richard C. Patterson, Jr., to be American Envoy Ex-
traordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary to Switzerland.

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Oovernment
Printing Office, Washington 25, D.O. Address requests di-
rect to the Superintendent of Documents, except in the case
of free publications, which may be obtained from the
Department of State.

Recent Soviet Pressures on Germany. European and
British Commonwealth Series 18. Pub. 4123. 4 pp.
Free.

A background summary.

The Joint Defense of Western Europe. European and

British
Free.

Commonwealth Series 19. Pub. 4126.

pp.

Statements by Secretary of State Acheson, Secretary
of Defense Marshall, and Chairman of Joint Chiefs
of Staff Bradley before the Senate Foreign Relations
and Anned Services Committee, February 15 and 16,
1951.

559

April 2, 1951

Index

Vol. XXIV, No. 613

Aid to Foreign Countries P^se

Public Advisory Board (Newsom Appointed) . . 559

American Republics

Caribbean Commission: U.S. Commissioner Ap-
pointed (Moron) 535

Asia

JAPAN: Forced Labor Conditions (Kotschnlg) . 544
KOREA: Peace Observation Commission in Col-
lective Security (Gross) 553

Aviation

Air Coordinating Committee Report, 1950 . . . 529

ICAO: Fourth Airworthiness Session .... 555

FRANCE: New Air Routes Agreement .... 535

Communism

World Economic Situation, 1950 (Lubln) . . . 538

Congress

Air Coordinating Committee Report, 1950 . . . 529
International Development Advisory Board
Urges Expanded World Economy (Letters,
Truman to Rockefeller, Congress, etc.) . . 558
McMahon-Riblcoff Resolution:

Endorsement (Letter, Acheson to Connally) . 556

Text of Resolution 657

World Economic Situation, 1950 (Lubln) . . . 538

Europe

AUSTRIA: Air Coordinating Committee Report,

1950 531

FRANCE: New Air Routes Agreement, U.S. . . 535
GB21MANT: Air Coordinating Committee Re-
port, 1950 531

GREECE: Peace Observation Commission In Col-
lective Security (Gross) 553

ICELAND: Air Coordinating Committee Report,

1950 534

Schuman Plan:

Analysis 523

Statement (Acheson) 523

U.S.S.R.:

Congressional Resolution Urging Peace:

Endorsement (Letter, Acheson to Connally) . 556

Text of Resolution 557

U.S.S.R. and Satellites: Forced Labor Conditions

(Kotschnlg) 544

Foreign Service

Ambassadors: Appointments Confirmed . . . 559

Human Rights

Violations: Forced Labor Conditions In U.S.S.R.

(Kotschnlg) 544

Industry

Schuman Plan:

Analysis 623

Statement (Acheson) 523

International Meetings

Calendar of Meetings 536

ICAO:

Fourth Airworthiness Session 555

1950 Conference 535

International Materials Conference (IMC) : Cen-
tral Group Enlarged 554

Labor

Schuman Plan:

Analysis 523

Statement (Acheson) 523

U.S.S.R.: Forced Labor Conditions (Kotschnlg) . 544

Mutual Aid and Defense Page

World Economic Situation, 1950 (Lubln) . . . 538

Prisoners of War

JAPAN: Forced Labor Conditions (Kotschnlg) . 544

Publications

Recent Releases 569

State, Department of

Appointments:

Bohlen as Counselor 559

Newsom to Public Advisory Board 559

Taxation

Air Coordinating Committee Report, 1950 . . . 633

Technical Cooperation and Development

International Development Advisory Board Urges
Expanded World Economy (Letters, Truman
to Rockefeller, Congress, etc.) 558

World Economic Situation, 1950 (Lubln) . . . 538

Trade

Schuman Plan:

Analysis 523

Statement (Acheson) 523

Transportation

Air Coordinating Committee Report, 1950 . . . 529

Treaties and Other International Agree-
ments

Air Coordinating Committee Report, 1950 . . . 529

EUROPE: Schuman Plan:

Analysis 523

Statement (Acheson) 523

FRANCE: New Air Routes Agreement, U.S. . . . 535

Trust Territories

Caribbean Commission: U.S. Commissioner Ap-
pointed (Moron) 535

Strategic Materials

International Materials Conference (IMC) : Cen-
tral Group Enlarged 554

Schuman Plan:

Analysis 523

Statement (Acheson) 523

World Economic Situation, 1950 (Lubin) . . . 538

United Nations

Air Coordinating Committee Report, 1950 . . . 529
Peace Observation Commission in Collective

Security (Gross) 553

D.N. Documents: Selected Bibliography .... 555

U.S.S.R.: Forced Labor Conditions (Kotschnlg) . 544

World Economic Situation, 1950 (Lubln) . . . 538

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 523, 556

Bohlen, Charles E 559

Bunker, Ellsworth 559

Connally, Senator Tom 656

Gibson, Edwin T 554

Gross, Ernest A 553

Haldeman, George W 555

Kotschnlg, Walter 544

Lubln, Isador 538

Mor6n, Alonzo G 535

Newsom, Herschel D 559

Patterson, Richard C, Jr 559

Rockefeller, Nelson 558

Schoefeld, Rudolf E 569

Schuman, Robert 523

Truman, President Harry S 529, 658

I

U. S. OOVERNHENT PfllNTINa OFFlCCt 1911

tJrie/ ^eha/^tme7i(/ ^ t/iaie^

ADDRESS BY PRESIDENT AURIOL OF FRANCE TO

THE CONGRESS OF THE UNITED STATES ... 563

FOURTH MEETING OF CONSULTATION OF MIN-
ISTERS OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS OF AMERICAN
STATES 566

ESSENTIALS OF A PEACE WITH JAPAN • hy John

Foster Dulles 576

THE PROVISIONAL FREQUENCY BOARD IN RET-

ROSPECT • article by Marie Louise Smith 593

For index see back cover

April 9, 1951

-VVeN-r Ofr

SI

e

Qje/ia^eme^ ^/ ^'ta^ JOUllGtiri

Vol. XXIV, No. 614 • Publication 4174
April 9, 1951

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Oovernment Printing OfBce

Washington 25, D.C.

Price :

62 issues, domestic $7.60, foreign $10.25

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has

been approved by the Director of the

Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

^ote: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and Items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Depaetuent
OF State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the tcorfe of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as urell as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to tchich the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

U. S. SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS

APR 26 1951
Address by President Auriol of France to the Congress of the United States

The ^oUowing is the text of an address made on April
2 by Vincent Auriol, President of the French Republic,
to the Congress of the United States. The address was
released to the press jointly by ttie Embassy of France
and the Department of State on April 2.
[Translation]

I am deeply moved by the exceptional honor
you are rendering me in allowing me to appear
before this Assembly and to address you from this
glorious rostrum. It will touch the heart of the
jjeople of France to whom, through me, this
homage and this warm welcome are directed.

I am the more deeply moved that my visit is
the first one made by a President of the French
Republic, in tlie name of France to the Republic
of the United States and that it recalls to me two
historic visits to our country made by two of your
illustrious statesmen : Benjamin Franklin in 1776,
and, a century and a half later, after the First
World War, President Wilson.

It gives me an opportunity to pay tribute to
your heroic young men who under the command
of their glorious leaders twice rushed to our
ravaged country to share with our own sons in the
fight.

These memories illustrate our common history,
and this history already long and always friendly
is a history of freedom.

In recalling these memories in the presence of
the Congress of the great American democracy,
I want to express our constant and heartfelt sym-
pathy to all the families whose sons have died
for our common ideal and are resting forever in
French soil, side by side with the sons of France
and of the other Allied nations. Through you
representing the 48 States of the Union, I wish
to tell the American people of our grateful and
loyal friendship and of our unshakable attach-
ment to the great human principles France has
always proclaimed — principles embodied both in
your Declaration of Indej^endence and in our Dec-
laration of the Rights of Man and of the Citizen,
principles which, 3 years ago, after so many trials
and contests, have received the unanimous conse-
cration of the United Nations.

These sacred achievements of man which are
not only the most precious values in our civiliza-
tion but also the conditions for all future improve-
ment, for all individual and social progress, are

today threatened — we are sorrowfully obliged to
admit this — only 6 years after our two peoples
made sacrifices never before equaled in history,
for the attainment and organization of a just and
tranquil i:)eace.

Confronted with this situation, far different
from what we had wanted and expected, with our
security threatened, any nation worthy of her
freedom must face reality and take stock of her
own responsibilities. Today I have come to tell
you what France thinks and what France seeks.

Gentlemen, you ai-e the representatives of a
people who insist upon truth. Your opinions are
based on facts and your judgments on acts and not
on words.

This is why I will ask you this question : When
in the defense of her independence and the sacred
cause of liberty a nation has lost, 357,000 men from
1914 to 1918, 575,000 dead from 1939 to 1945—
(240,000 perished in uniform in the first and the
last battles for freedom — 112,000 were shot or were
killed by bombing — 182,000 died deported to Ger-
many for belonging to the underground, and
40,000 died in enemy labor camps) ; when, for the
same cause, the same nation, fighting at the door to
Southeastern Asia, in Indochina, a war which has

[Released to the press by the White House
March 29}

The President of the French Republic outlined to
the President of the United States conditions in
France, the progress of the French rearmament pro-
gram and the present situation in Indochina where
French forces and the forces of the Associated States
(of Indochina) are successfully opposing Com-
munist aggression.

The remarks of the President of the French Re-
public included a statement that the French people
were determined to defend themselves against for-
eign aggression and that, in this spirit, they are
giving all out support to the North Atlantic Treaty
Organization. He emphasized that all these efforts
were directed toward the maintenance and strength-
ening of peace.

The President of the United States stated that he
was encouraged by President Auriol's remarks and
expressed his confidence that peace could and would
be maintained and that the democratic peoples
would preserve unshakable unity in pursuit of their
great objective ; peace for all the world.

April 9, 1 95 1

563

lasted more than 4 j'ears, does not hesitate to
reaffirm lior faith in international law by sending
to Korea officers and men whose heroism makes
them the worthy comrades of your officers and
men ; then I ask you, who could seriously question
lier determination ? In fact, what nation has ever
])roved better her love for independence and for
peace and her will to defend both?

The attitude which has been given the barbarous
name of "neutralism" has always been foreign to
the French soul, not only because it is a moral
absurdity — can anyone be neutral between servi-
tude and liberty, between good and evil ? — but be-
cause it is geographical and historical nonsense.
Our people have experienced the frailty of their
exposed land and sea frontiers. Almost alone in
1914 and again in 1939 they have met the first
shock of armies so powerful that each time it has
taken 4 years of ceaseless effort and a coalition of
the world's forces to defeat them. Therefore they
know that right without might is powerless. They
know that isolation is death. They know that
neutrality, whether declared, armed or disarmed,
has protected neither Belgium, the Netherlands,
Norway nor Denmark and that an aggressor would
never stop at a frontier post, even should it be
surmounted with a dove holding the branch of an
olive tree !

P'inally, they know that France is not simply
the western extremity of Europe in the Mediter-
ranean and the Atlantic, but that the French
Union extends its influence and civilization to all
parts of the world and that in the common strategy
for freedom and peace, France has courageously
accepted the tasks and responsibilities of a great
world power. They know also that once France
has fallen, the whole of Europe will be in chains
with all her potential strength in the service of the
invader and that the whole world, indeed civiliza-
tion itself, will be in mortal danger.

I shall always remember the clear warning
when, in 1919, as a young deputy, I heard it stated
from the rostrum of our own Parliament by the
President of the United States that France still
stands at the frontier.

. . . here is where the blow fell because the rulers of
the world did not sooner see how to prevent it . . . they
know that the only way to do this is to make it certain
that the same thing will not always happen that has hap-
pened this time, that there never shall be any doubt or
waiting or surmise, but that whenever France or any free
people is threatened, the whole world will be ready to
vindicate its liberty . . .

Because they did not establish this union in
time, because they did not organize soon enough
and at the most vulnerable points a collective de-
fense prepared for instant action, the democratic
nations with tiieir decisions delayed by the inter-
play of their institutions or by the scruples and
indiscipline of freedom were once more thrown
into the most destructive of wai-s. One after the
other, nations fell which would have been saved
had they joined their forces. And France herself

who entered the fight faithful to her word, was
wounded on the ramparts, imprisoned for 4 years
and almost destroyed.

If our people had given up, if for a single mo-
ment they had hesitated between resistance and
collaboration with the enemy, if they had not
been willing to subject themselves to an implaca-
ble oppression, had not chosen to destroy, often
with their own hands, their properties and their
tools, rather than work for the enemy, if they had
permitted him at times when the fortunes of war
were in the balance to have a free disposition of
their remaining resources and forces in Metropoli-
tan France and in her overseas territories, what
would Europe and the world be today?

After such common fights and sacrifices, the
acliievement of the final victory must not make us
forget the perils to which we were led by an unco-
ordinated diplomacy and strategy. It is the very
old story of the Horatii and the Curiatii. For the
goal t« be reached is not to liberate a Europe
which may once more be occupied, enslaved, ex-
ploited and ravaged and whose name, you may be
sure, would only recall the final ruin of a civiliza-
tion, but rather, by shielding her against aggres-
sion, to protect the whole community of the free
nations and in this way to save peace.

In putting into practice an effective union, iu
which risks as well as efforts must be shared,
France has a clear understanding of her duties
and of her rights.

Her contribution to the defense of freedom and
of peace is first of all her own recovei^y.

Undoubtedly, Gentlemen, our people are some-
times disparaged and they are sometimes guilty
of self-disparagement. But those of you whom
we have had the joy of welcoming in our country
have been able to see the road covered since the
liberation.

In 1944, the country was bled white, the state
disrupted, 90 percent of our departments were in
ruins, our lands were laid fallow, our industrial
equipment was pillaged or obsolete, our ports, our
means of communication were in shambles, more
than two million houses were destroyed or dam-
aged, our economy and our finances were ruined.

In 1951, there is an increased population, repub-
lican institutions are reestablished, our production
has been raised to the level of 133 as compared
with a 100 in 1938, our commercial balance is in
equilibrium and our currency stabilized before the
rise in prices of raw materials could compromise
the equilibrium thus gradually attained, our homes
have been built again and the specter of social
troubles and of despair has been pushed aside.

Gentlemen, it is with pride that I speak of the
accomplishments of our workers, of our engineers,
of our leaders of enterprise, of our farmers, of
our administrators, of all Frenrliinen and of their
reitresentatives. The generous aid that you have
given us through the Mar.^hall Plan, for which
I am happy to thank you today publicly, has not
been extended to us in vain. In giving a decisive

564

Department of State Bulletin

impulse to our paralyzed economy, it has again
opened for us the way to work and to hope, and
by driving away the threat of unemployment and
misery, it has preserved us from those social up-
heavals which are the breeding ground for adven-
ture and tyranny.

Though a great deal remains to be done, this
first balance sheet of our recovery testifies to the
courage of our people, supported by your broth-
erly assistance.

Our next contribution to the cause of freedom
and peace is our rearmament effort which our
Parliament has voted by a huge majority without
hesitation or reservations. This has been done
in spite of the already enormous burden of our
reconstruction and reequipment and of our mili-
tary expenditures. It is certainly not the fault
of our two nations if world collective security
has not been organized, though we consider this
failure as merely temporary. The spirit of ag-
gression is foreign to both Americans and French-
men. But in the face of threats of totalitarian
expansion and the formation of cei'tain mighty
groups of powers whose policies and armaments
are not subject to the free control of the people,
we have turned thoughtfully and inflexibly to
regional pacts and especially to the regional pact
of the North Atlantic which, conforming to the
statutes of the United Nations, has but one aim —
to deter aggression and to strengthen the peace.
Thus, by our reciprocal undertakings that we shall
from now on pool together our resources of arms
and troops at all threatened and strategic points,
we have made the Atlantic community a solid
foundation of our common security and of peace.

For us, indeed, the effort for peace and the effort
for defense are not contradictory; they comple-
ment each other. With the prudence and firm-
ness dictated by our said experience, we shall
never cease to answer negation, procedural ob-
structionism and propaganda in the language of
right, of truth and of sincerity.

Let us not fail to speak clearly, frankly and
firmly. Let us put at the service of peace and
freedom, side by side with our material forces
as long as those are needed, the invincible moral
forces which always animate free people aware
of the righteousness of their cause.

"We shall not tire, on our part, of repeating the
conditions that are necessary for the reestablish-
ment of trust and cooperation among all peoples.
Does everyone sincerely want peace ? In that case,
everyone must respect the commitments subscribed
to in the Charter of the United Nations by all the
allies of yesterday ; in that case, certain countries
must stop interfering in the internal affairs of
others in an effort to weaken their freely chosen
regimes, to provoke troubles, to paralyze produc-
tion and to pour daily insults upon their Govern-
ments.

In that case, international and permanent con-
trol by the United Nations Organization of arma-
ments, of all armaments, in all countries, must be

April 9, 7 95 J

accepted, in order to limit fairly and later to
destroy all classic or atomic weapons.

In that case, the national armies must be pro-
gressively replaced by a United Nations army as
provided by the common Charter.

In tliat case, every country must agree to the
free movement of wealth, ideas, and persons as
well as the free and sincere expression of view,
under international control of peoples on whom
regimes have been imposed by force.

Here are, among so many others, the questions
to which answers must be found. And so that
they may be answered clearly, I am asking them
here, clearly and publicly, before the Legislature
of a great nation which is ridiculously accused
every day, as is ours, of warmongering, and I am
certain that I speak in the name of all the men
who want peace with liberty, the only peace worth
living for.

Finally, our effort to unite and organize Europe
must be considered a contribution to the defense
of peace and liberty by all who believe that it is
not sufficient to guarantee the security of nations
and of individuals but that we must also, by
assuring welfare and justice, enrich their existence
and increase their attachment to society.

France is working toward this goal by the crea-
tion of communities of production of which the
coal and steel pool, that bears the name of its
moving spirit. President Schuman, is but a begin-
ning and a preface for others that we are prepar-
ing. France is working toward this goal through
the Council of Europe and the Strasbourg As-
sembly which she initiated. She is working to-
ward it in seeking the formation of a European
army — the nucleus of a future international
army — to take its place, first of all, in the great
Atlantic army whose illustrious leader General
Eisenliower I wish to salute here today.

Passionately devoted to the realization of a
European federation which will put on end to
secular antagonisms, France has put aside her
legitimate resentment against the enemy of yester-
day, demanding of it only that it bring to the
cause of cooperation the admission of its responsi-
bilities as well as the proof of its redemption
through the repudiation of its old regime and the
sincere attachment to the cause of democracy.
Convinced of the need for supranational institu-
tions, France has declared herself prepared to
grant to those bodies, in conformity with her Con-
stitution and under condition of reciprocity, part
of her sovereignty. And she hopes to convince the
still hesitant nations that they will not curtail
their sovereignty but on the contrary strengthen
it by associating it with others, by uniting their
resources and labor to increase their forces, by
developing and coordinating their industrial and
agricultural economies, by widening their mar-
kets, by raising the standard of living of their
workers, in a word, by making of the old divided
Europe, slow of decision, torn with antagonisms,
(Continued on paye 575)

565

FOURTH MEETING OF CONSULTATION OF MINISTERS OF FOREIGN

AFFAIRS OF AMERICAN STATES

Cooperation in World Struggle for Freedom

Address hy the President^

It is an honor to open this meeting of the Min-
isters of Foreign Affairs of the American Repub-
lics. I am happy to extend to you a wholehearted
welcome to our country and to our capital city.
On behalf of the United States, I hope that this
will be a most satisfactory and successful meeting.

This is the fourth meeting of the Ministers of
Foreign Affairs of the American Republics. This
meeting, like the earlier ones, is lield at a time of
international danger. Wlien the first meeting was
held, in 1939, war had just broken out in Europe.
As that conflict spi'ead to nation after nation and
threatened to extend to all parts of the world, the
Foreign Ministers of the American Republics held
two more meetings, in 1940 and in 1942, to plan a
common coui-se of action against the common
danger.

As a result of our concerted efforts, our countries
did not become a theater of war. The nations of
this hemisphere succeeded in protecting the Ameri-
can continents from invasion. And, as a result of
our common efforts, the people of the Americas
were able to contribute power and resources which
turned the tide against aggression and brought
victory to the forces of freedom.

Today, we meet again to consider our common
defense. We meet again to work out ways and
means by whicli our united strength may be em-
ployed in the struggle for freedom throughout the
world.

The Heritage of Common Principles

The American republics all owe their national
beginnings to (he same set of ideals — the same con-
cepts of human and international freedom. AVe

' Made before the opening session of the Fourth Con-
sultative Meeting of the Foreign Ministers of the Ameri-
can Kepublics at Washington on Mar. 2() and released to
the press hy tlie Wliite House on the same date.

have all followed and we will continue to follow
two basic principles. First, we believe that inter-
national affairs should be based upon cooperation
among free and independent nations, and not upon
coercion or force. Second, we believe that the aim
and purpose of government is to promote the wel-
fare of all the people — not just the privileged few.

These principles have long been tlie basis of rela-
tions among the American Republics. The same
principles are now embodied in the Charter of the
United Nations, where they have become the
foundation of a new society of nations. The
statesmen of the American Republics have shown
their continuing devotion to these principles by
the great and constructive work they have done in
creating and strengthening the United Nations.

Today, these principles are under relentless at-
tack from a center of power which denies the whole
concept of human freedom — whether it be spirit-
ual freedom, or economic freedom, or political
freedom.

World Threat of Soviet Expansion

Communist imperialism attacks and undermines
national independence and international coopera-
tion. In their place, it substitutes the rule of force.
Communist imperialism also seeks to destroy the
system of government that serves the welfare of
the people. Instead, it sets up a system mider
which the people exist only to serve the purposes
of the government. As a result, the Soviet system
is one of unbridled power, imposing slavery at
liome and aggression abroad.

The aggressive expansion of Soviet power
threatens the wliole world. In Europe, we see it
trying to engulf the nations from which we have
drawn our cultural heritage. If Soviet subversion
and Soviet armed force were to overthrow these
nations, the consequences for all of us in the West-
ern Hemisphere would be disastrous. We would

566

OepaT\men\ of State Bulletin

1

lose those cultural and religious ties which mean so
much to us. Tlie international trade on which
we are so dependent would be violently disrupted.
Worst of all, we would be confronted by a hostile
power on the shores of the Atlantic, capable of
using the great economic resources of our con-
quered friends to strike across the ocean at our
own independence.

^Ye must not and will not let that happen. We
in tlie Western Hemisphere must help the free
men of Europe who are resisting Soviet expansion.

In the Far East, Communist imperialism pre-
sents us with another threat. There, we see many
new nations emerging, as our own countries once
did, from colonial status to full independence.
For these new nations, we of the Western Hemi-
sphere have the greatest feeling of fellowship.
But Communist imperialism has fallen upon these
new nations with its weapons of internal subver-
sion and external attack. It seeks to overpower
them before they are strong enough to stand alone.

If Soviet communism were to be successful in
this venture, it would be a terrible blow to the
bright promise of the principles of freedom and
peace which we uphold. The great manpower of
Asia would become one of the instruments of the
aggressive expansion of the Soviet system toward
our own hemisphere.

Both to the East, therefore, and to the West, we
are confronted by great perils. Our future prog-
ress, our very survival, lie in the defense of the
•world order of free nations of which we are a part.
Our very existence depends upon the success of
those principles which our countries stand for, and
■which we have supported in the United Nations.
There is no safety for any of us in abandoning
these principles. There will be no security in the
■world without the United Nations. Powerful and
productive as the Western Hemisphere is, we can-
not make it safe by building a wall around it.

Instead of withdrawing into our hemisphere in
a hopeless attempt to find security through retreat,
we must concert our defenses and combine our
strength in order to support men in Europe and
Asia who are battling for freedom. That is the
only course that can lead to security or peace or
freedom for us or for men anywhere in the world.

Recognition of this fact lies behind the aid
the United States has given to the rebuilding of
Europe. It lies behind the struggle the free na-
tions are now waging in the hills of Korea. The
resistance of the United Nations to aggression in
Korea — a resistance that has the firm approval of
all the nations represented here — is of momentous
importance. It has shown that the free nations
are determined to defend their ideals of national
independence and human welfare.

The issue in Korea is the survival of the prin-
ciples on which we have built our countries. The
principle of national independence and self-gov-
ernment is at stake there, as well as the principle
that government shall be for the welfare of the

April 9, 1 95 1

people. If justice and order do not prevail in
Korea, they will be in danger everywhere.

Heroic sacrifices are being made in Korea to
check the forces of aggression and protect us
against the terrible destruction and vastly greater
sacrifices of a world conflict. By standin<j firm in
Korea and by preparing to meet aggression else-
where, we are doing our best to prevent a third
world war.

Steps To Establish World Peace

This meeting in Washington, therefore, must
consider not only what should be done to improve
the clefense of this hemisphere but also what meas-
ures we can best undertake to support and
strengthen the United Nations in its effort to estab-
lish world peace.

We meet here as a region which has already, in
the solemn treaty of Rio de Janeiro, announced its
intention to defend itself through cooperative
action. We are pledged to resist the common foe.

We must now plan as a primary task for the
strengthening and the coordinated use of our de-
fense forces in this hemisphere. We must also
consider how we may best use our strength to
support the cause of freedom against aggression
throughout the world.

The success of our defense program depends
upon our economic strength. In these troubled
times, defense production must have prior claim
upon our economic resources. We shall have to
increase the production of strategic materials. We
shall have to divert manufacturing capacity to
defense purposes.

These necessities will create many diiUcult prac-
tical problems for our countries to solve. There
will be shortages of basic materials and other com-
modities. There will be limitations on certain
kinds of capital expansion.

The first step in solving these problems is to face
them in a spirit of cooperation. We must recog-
nize that we are engaged, as good neighbors, in a
common enterprise that is vital to our survival as
free and democratic nations. We must establish
the principle of sharing our burdens fairly. We
must act together to meet essential civilian needs,
and, at the same time, we must act together to be
sure that scarce supplies are limited to essential
uses. We must try to prevent wild and speculative
price movements in our international trade,
whether in raw materials or manufactured
products.

Our defense needs are not, of course, limited to
the things that go into the making of weapons.
We need to build up our economic strength in a
much broader way. It is essential to our security
that we constantly enlarge our economic capacity.
Our defense needs include, in many areas, more
food, better education, and better health services.
They include, in certain cases, the building of
roads, dams, or power plants.

We must remember that the real strength of the

567

free nations lies in the will and determination of
their peoples. The free nations stand for economic
progress and social advancement. They grow in
strength by going forward along the road of
greater economic opportunity for all.

Over the last 10 years, our countries have made
great economic progress. In most of the countries
represented here, national income is at least twice
what it was in 19.39.

An important factor in our advance is the pro-
gram of teclinical cooperation which we have
joined together to carry out. Joint projects for
spreading technical knowledge have already made
notable achievements in improving the health,
education, and living standards of our people.
We intend to press on with this kind of activity.

The American Republics are full of breath-
taking possibiliti&s for future economic develop-
ment. These possibilities can be made realities
only if we work and plan together for a long time
ahead. I like to think, for example, of the possi-
bility of developing vast areas of wilderness, such
as the eastern slopes of the Andes, and turning
them into new and fertile farm land.

I like to think of a project about which I talked
to the President of Chile, which contemplates the
diversion of water from those high mountain lakes
between Bolivia and Peru for making a garden
on the coast of South America to the west for
Chile and Peru, and in return, giving Bolivia a
seaport on the Pacific.

I had a very pleasant convei-sation with the
President of Chile on that subject, and I like to
think of the development of the Parana, Para-
guay, and Uruguay rivers. Think that wonder-
ful possibilities are in those great waterways for
development, and those are only samples, for all
over the continent of South America there are
greater resources undeveloped than were ever in
these United States of America. And I know
that we can develop them for the welfare of the
whole world, as well as for ourselves.

I like to think of the possibilities of industrial
development in your countries. I remember with
pride the part which this country played, even dur-
ing the troubled times of the last war, in helping
to create a steel industry in Brazil. I think with
satisfaction of the progress that has been nuide by
Chile and other countries in setting up factories
and hydroelectric projects in recent years.

Our countries do not have unlimited resources
to devote to creative developments such as these.
We cannot do as much, in the midst of a defense
emergency, as we could in normal times. But we
must do all we can.

Our Goal— A Better World

It is the genius of our democratic type of society
that we are constantly creative and constantly
advancing. We hold out to all people the pros-
pect of bettering their condition, not in the dim

568

Agenda

[Approved by the Council of the Organization on February
7 and 14, 1951]

I. Political and military cooperation for the de-
fense of the Americas, and to prevent and repel
aggression, in accordance with inter-American
agreements and with the Charter of the United Na-
tions and the resolutions of that organization.

II. Strengthening of the internal security of the
American Republics.

III. Emergency economic cooperation :

a) Production and distribution for defense pur-
poses.

b) Production and distribution of products in
.short supply and utilization of necessary services to
meet the requirements of the internal economies of
the American Republics ; and measures to facilitate
in so far as possible the carrying out of programs
of economic development.

future, not after some terrible and bloody up-
heaval, but steadily through the years, in the
simple activities of their daily life.

In our countries, we do not measure our pros-
perity by the power of the state. We do not
measure the progress of our society in terms of
military might. We do not measure our advance-
ment in terms of the profits or the luxuries of the
few. Our yardstick is the welfare of the many.
We think in terms of the average man — how he
lives, what he can buy, and the freedom he enjoys.
These are the standards by which we measure our
development.

And, by these standards, we are marching
steadily forward. We shall continue that march !

Our vision of progress is not limited to our own
countries. We extend it to all the peoples of the
world.

We know that people are very much alike in
their basic aspirations, wherever they may be or
whatever language they may speak. We recog-
nize that the people of Russia, the people of the
Soviet satellite states, are very much like us in
what they want for themselves and their children.
We hope that some day they will find it possible
to turn their leaders from their present path of
tyranny and aggression.

Our goal is self-development, not imperialism.

Our goal is peace, not war.

Our goal, not only for ourselves but for all
peoples, is a better world — materially, morally,
and spiritually.

Editor's Note : Joao Neves de Fontoura, Minister of
Forei^rn Affairs of the United States of Brazil then re-
plied to President Truman. For text of a translation of
the Forei^'n Minister's ndilress. see news release 2, March
2(), of the Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foieign Affairs of Amerie;in States.

Department of Stale Bulletin

Freedom— the Key to Hemisphere Solidarity and World Peace

Address hy Secretary Acheson ^

I look forward with considerable pleasure to
the prospect of working closely together with my
colleagues of the Americas in this important
meeting.

Our distinguished Brazilian colleague, Minister
Neves da Fontoura, has already eloquently set
before us the significance of this meeting in terms
of our long inter-American tradition. That tradi-
tion dates back to the first International Con-
ference of the American States to which this coun-
try had the honor to be host 60 years ago. Since
then we have managed, by our determination, to
preserve and greatly strengthen our freedom in
spite of all perils.

More than that, we have built up a brotherhood
of nations that time has tested. In the course of
the decades, the foundations of our system have
had time to set. Can anyone doubt that the men
who worked to bring us together in the first Wash-
ington Conference would find their vision more
than vindicated by the great Organization of
American States as it exists today?

The significance of this meeting is appreciated,
I believe, by free men all over the world.

It rests not alone on the work we have come
together to do, as important as that is to our
future and to theirs. Even more important than
this is the fraternal way in which the American
Republics have grown accustomed to working
together.

We meet freely. We talk frankly, as people
who understand each other and like each other.
We have problems between us, and some of them
are difficult. But there are no problems between
us that will not yield to the good will and friend-
ship we all bring to this meeting.

It is our hope that our consultations here and
our cooperative actions will have a dual effect.

We hope that what we do here will produce
sound and constructive results. We 'hope also —

'Made before the opening regular session of the fourth
meeting of Consultation of Ministers of Foreign Affairs
of the American States at Washington on Mar. 27 and
released to the press on the same date.

indeed we know — that this meeting, as a demon-
stration of the kind of friendship among nations
which may someday prevail universally, will con-
vey inspiration ancl encouragement to men every-
where.

Partnership of the Free World

The larger significance of our meeting arises
from the fact that we are a part, inescapably, of
the partnership of the free world.

miat is the partnership of the free world? It
is something new in the world, and its meaning
should be made clear to all.

Is it an alliance, like those which crisscrossed
Europe in the last century? No, it is not like the
old alliances, because it is not directed against
anyone, nor does it aspire to rule or to conquest.

is it a sphere of influence arrangement or a
satellite system? No, it most assuredly is not,
for no rulers in a master state dictate to the free
nations.

The partnership of the free world is something
different from any of these. It is a spiritual con-
federation of peoples as well as nations. It is a
partnership which encompasses many differences.
The states in it do not all have the same political
or social institutions. They do not conform to
any standard pattern. They do not have a single
"way of life."

Each has its own set of hopes and anxieties,
its own domestic problems, its own national tra-
ditions and desires.

What binds the nations of the free world to-
gether into a partnership is that they have a
powerful interest in common : their concern for
freedom.

Freedom is the key. This is what free nations
have, and other nations do not. This is the heart
of the matter, for without freedom, neither real
peace, nor real security, nor any real progress
is possible.

To the nation, freedom means national inde-
pendence, freedom to work out its destinies in
its own ways.

April 9, ?95I

569

To the people, freedom is not only the very
breath of life itself but it is also the gateway of
opportunity. Free men have the opportunity to
better their lives, to abolish poverty, and to live
in human dignity.

Freedom is the climate in which men can work to
fulfill all the affirmative aspirations and values of
their lives.

When people ask us, "What is it you are for,
you men of the free world ?" Then we say, "We're
for freedom, because freedom is the key to every-
thing else we want."

Where there is freedom, we can make peace pre-
vail, we can govern ourselves the way we want,
we can improve our land and grow more food.
We can live side by side with people who think
differently, who worship differently, who talk a
different language — so long as they and we are
both free, we have that one important thing in
common.

This is not to say that any of us has fully
realized our ideals of a free society. Our progress
toward this goal is not always even, from week
to week, or from month to month. But it is the
ideal and the objective toward which, over the
decades and the generations, we have been moving
steadily forward.

The Communist Threat to Freedom

And now this freedom of ours is faced with a
mortal threat.

The small group of men who rule the Soviet
Union and pull the strings of the international
Communist movement have a doctrine which is
opposed to freedom.

Their doctrine is a blueprint for a Communist
world, governed from the Kremlin.

This is the new imperialism. Its instruments
are a formidable machine of war and the inter-
national Communist movement. With one or the
other, and sometimes both, the new imperialism
reaches out for more power and for rule over more
people.

Never before have we faced a menace of this
magnitude. Never before has there been so great a
challenge to our determination to preserve our
independence as nations.

But it is not only against the independence of
governments tliat this new imperialism is directed.
The freedom of people, of the individual man, is
also its target.

Although the Communists have played upon
the hopes of people for a better life, they have in
practice been the enemies of progress. The new
imperialists have contributed nothing but propa-
ganda to the great cooperative efforts to improve
standards of living among the peoples of the
world. Instead, tliey use human misery as a politi-
cal tool, callous to the cost.

This is tlie threat which jeopardizes freedom.
It is a threat which has for us the greatest urgency,
a threat which calls upon us as i)eople and as
nations to defend our freedom.

570

It calls upon us for action now.

No free man anywhere can safely disregard this
threat. There is no free nation anywhere, large
or small, whose freedom is secure. Freedom does
not come in different sizes. Large states do not
have more of it, nor small states less, according to
their size. The defense of freedom is an obliga-
tion which falls upon all who are worthy of it.

And it is in this sense that the partnership of
the free world is a spiritual confederation among
those who value their freedom, and each, according
to his capacity, will do his utmost to defend it.

This is the meaning of the gi-eat effort which
the free nations ai'e making. Its purpose is to
assemble sufficient force to make it plain in ad-
vance that further aggression will not succeed.

In the face of the challenge of the new imperial-
ism, the rapid increase of this deterrent force is
the only real road to peace — the kind of peace in
which the survival and growth of our free insti-
tutions will be possible.

The task is a great one. To perform it, each
must do his full share. AVe are well begun, but the
greater part lies still ahead of us.

Progress in the Defense of Freedom

In Korea, the principle of collective security has
been put to the test. It has stood the test. Aggi-es-
sion has not been allowed to succeed. This is a
history-making battle, a landmark, we may hope,
on the road to world peace.

The forces of the United Nations are fighting
a battle which is of vital significance to the secur-
ity of all free nations. The cause of freedom owes
a great debt to the men of many lands who are
bearing arms in Korea and making heavy sacri-
fices under the banner of the United Nations. And
the lessons learned in the defense of Korea should
enable the United Nations to develop a collective
security system that will be better prepared to meet
aggression in the future, if it occurs.

Heartening progress is also being made in an-
other sector in the defense of freedom : in recent
months, major steps have been taken toward
strengthening the defenses of free Europe. The
M'ork that is now going forward to build an inte-
grated and effective defense organization under
General Eisenhower contributes to the security
of this hemisphere.

It is a happy and a significant coincidence that
the visit of the President of France, M. Auriol, to
this country comes while this meeting is in prog-
ress and that we shall have the pleasure of hearing
him address this assembly. This fortunate cir-
cumstance symbolizes to the world the relation-
sliiji between our efforts in this heinisjihere and
those of our brothers in Europe, in behalf of our
common aspirations for peace and freedom.

Impact of Mobilization on Economy

In this country, the mobilization of our strength i
is beginning to have a substantial impact upon our :

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

I

economy and upon the lives of our citizens. By
last week, the size of our armed forces had been
doubled over the level that prevailed before the
attack upon Korea, and many more young men
and women are being called into military service.

Although total production is increasing, the re-
quirements of defense are such that curtailment of
many goods and sei"vices has been necessary. The
burden of taxation is being heavily increased. We
are seeking to hold in check the strong inflationary
pressures which have been generated by the de-
fense program.

It is our intention to prepare an economic base
that will have the stamina to sustain this substan-
tial defense program over as long a period as may
be necessary, and which would be capable of fur-
ther rapid expansion if war should be forced upon
us.

The scale and complexity of this endeavor, sido-
by-side with the changes wrought throughout the
hemisphere by the defense mobilization, inevitably
creates many difficulties for us all.

We in the United States have been mindful of
the many difficult questions raised for our neigh-
bors of this hemisphere by our mobilization
progi'am.

Looking ahead to the intensification of this pro-
gram in the future, it is evident that the closest
working relationship must be established among
all of us in the Americas in order that our common
effort for our common defense may realize the best
that is in all of us. Together, we must seek ways
of avoiding any uncontrolled and unfair distribu-
tion of the sacrifices that our peoples face.

With this in mind, on the day that the United
States entered upon its emergency program of
economic and military preparedness, it made
known its proposal that this emergency meeting
of consultation be held.

We have before us, at this meeting, a realistic
agenda that sets forth the questions to which we,
the American Republics, must jointly find the
answers.

We shall find these answers in the spirit of co-
operation that is basic to our inter-American tradi-
tion. We are cooperators. Our great tradition
illustrates the principle that the spirit of coopera-
tion and the spirit of bargaining are mutually in-
compatible. They exclude each other. For in
bargaining, each man tries to reap advantage for
himself to the detriment of the man he deals with.
It is the genius of our inter-American system —
and the effectiveness of our defense rests on it —
that mutual cooperation, instead, has been the
means by which all have benefited.

This is the spirit with which we address our-
selves to the problems on our agenda.

Measures Necessary for Defense

One question which each of us faces, in the light
of our hemispheric position, is : In what way can
each of us best develop our military capabilities

in order that we may have the most effective in-
dividual and collective self-defense against armed
attack?

We may wish to consider measures which can be
taken by our res]^ective Governments to enable the
Inter-American Defense Board to carry on its
functions most efficiently and to prepare, at the
earliest possible time, a coordinated defense for
this hemisphere.

In considering the military defensive strength
of the hemisphere, it is evident that any disturb-
ances to the peaceful relations among the Ameri-
can Republics can only have the effect of weaken-
ing our total defensive capabilities. As part of the
effort to bulwark our defenses against aggression,
it may serve a useful purpose for us to strengthen
our determination to make fullest use of available
machinery for the peaceful settlement of disputes.

In view of the effect upon our hemispheric secu-
rity of the danger of aggression in other parts of
the world, a related question requires our atten-
tion. That is, how we, the American Republics,
can best support the United Nations in strengthen-
ing its capacity to deal with aggression.

The interests of the Republics of this hemisphere
in the building of a world of law and order are
greatly served by the progress which the United
Nations has been making in strengthening its col-
lective security system. The success of this effort
depends upon our willingness to back up the
United Nations.

Our deliberations here will measurably
strengthen our common security if they lead to
action on the part of the American Republics in
helping to fulfill the purposes of the uniting-for-
peace resolution of the United Nations.

The use of subversion and other forms of in-
direct aggression by the international Communist
movement requires us, as a vital part of our de-
fense program, to examine carefully our present
internal security procedures and improve them
where necessary.

It is equally important that we should consult
as to the practical steps we may take, together
and individually, to insure the maximum protec-
tion and strengthening of our basic democratic
institutions. They are the heart of what we are
seeking to defend against Communist undermin-
ing, and to safeguard these institutions, while we
prevent their abuse, requires our constant
vigilance.

These are some of the matters which are
involved, either directly or indirectly, in strength-
ening our militai"y security.

Economic Problems

The economic problems before us pervade our
whole effort and touch upon the life of every in-
dividual in the hemisphere. We must gather up
our joint economic forces for the common defense,
not only in one country or some countries but
throughout our interlocking economic community.

April 9, 1951

571

Tliis means vital adjustments for all of us.
These would fall to us even though some among
us did not participate in our endeavor. For the
sacrifices that the United States and its people are
now making inevitably have their effect upon all
whose economies are related to our own.

Are these effects, then, to fall indiscriminately
and without control on peoples everywhere? Or
are we going to provide, by cooperation, that the
essential needs of all our peoples are met; that
production for defense is pushed to a level which
will serve to accomplish the purpose of averting
a third world war; and that the sacrifice of un-
essentials is fairly distributed? The Govern-
ment of the United States hud this question very
much in mind when it requested the convening of
this meeting.

In this country, we are ali'eady allocating ma-
terials required for defense production so that
they will be available only in limited quantities
for normal civilian demands.

Your countries, I know, are also facing the
problems of increased production for the defense
of our hemisphere, production on which the sur-
vival of freedom for every one of us depends. In
most cases, your chief problem is to effect emer-
gency increases in the production of essential
materials without, at the same time, inviting dis-
aster when a more normal situation returns. The
United States understands this problem. AVe do
not underestimate it. Certainly, we must con-
sider what practicable means there may be, within
the terms of our great purpose, to deal with this
risk together.

The problem of curbing inflation is no less
important to each of our countries and to our
common purpose. The danger of uncontrolled
inflation in any country threatens its people. It
also weakens the economic stability of the hemi-
sphere as a whole. We must make the most
strenuous effort together to take the steps that are
necessary to keep inflationary tendencies under
control. This must be done not only by interna-
tional action but by each of our Governments
within its own jurisdiction.

Undoubtedly, we shall not be able to foresee all
the measures which our respective Governments
will find it necessary to take in dealing with the
economic defense program. As much as circum-
stances permit, we should endeavor to consult
with one another and act cooperatively in this
field, particularly, to our mutual and our common
benefit.

In his address to the meeting yesterday, Presi-
dent Truman spoke of the concern felt by this
country for the need of carrying forward the pro-
grams of economic cooperation.

It is my hope that we shall all continue to give
as much support as we can to these measures by
which our ]ieo])]e are enabled to improve the con-
ditions of their life.

The programs of economic development and

Pan American Day, 19S1 1

A PROCLAMATION

Whereas April 14, 1951, will marli the sixty-first
anniversary of the founding of tlie Pan American
Union, whlcli now serves as the General Secretariat
of the Organization of American States; and

Whereas the Organization of American States has
demonstrated its effectiveness in the maintenance
of peace in the Western Hemisphere; and

Whereas the inter-American system may serve
as an example of progress in the achievement of
peace, .security, and cooperation ; and

Whereas the Fourth Meeting of Consultation of
tlie Ministers of Foreign Affairs of American States
will convene at Washington on March 26, 1951, to
consider action to be taken in the common defense
of these republics and of the free world :

Now, Theeeeore, I, Harry S. Truman, President of
the United States of America, do hereby proclaim
Saturday, April 14, 1951, as Pan American Day, and
I direct the appropriate ofiBcials of the Government
to arrange for the display of the flag of the United
States on all public buildings on that day.

I also invite the Governors of the States, Terri-
tories, and possessions of the United States to issue
similar proclamations for the observance of Pan
American Day. And I urge all interested organiza-
tions, and the people generally, to unite In suitable
ceremonies commemorative of the founding of the
Pan American Union, thereby testifying to the close
bonds of friendship existing between the i)eopIe of
the United States and those of the other American
republics.*

In Witness Whebi';of, I have hereunto set my
hand and caused the Seal of the United States of
America to be affixed.

Done at the City of Washington this twenty-third
day of March in the year of our Lord nineteen hun-
dred and fifty-one, and of the Independ-

[seal] ence of the United States of America the
one hundred and seventy-fifth.

By the President:
De:an Achesox

Secretary of State.

' Proc. 2920, 16 Fed. Reg. 2697.

technical cooperation, in many ways, effectively
support the emergency defense proOTam. Such
programs as tliose which increase food supply,
conibat disease, increase the output of materials in
short supply, and improve working conditions and
labor standards are of double importance in this
period.

572

DeparlmenI of Slafe Bulletin

Insofar as we can, we must seek to fulfill both
the immediate requirements of the defense pro-
gram and our long-range objective of economic
development and social progress.

High Purpose of Meeting

We must always keep our goals in mind. 'Wliile
we work together here to find solutions for these
difficult problems with which the rapid develop-
ment of our political, economic, and military
strength confronts us, we must never allow our-
selves to forget the real nature of the endeavor
which brings us together.

Our cause is above all the cause of freedom, of
international morality. It is, therefore, the cause
of peace, and of the well-being of man himself.

So that the world at large and our own peoples
shall not mistake the greatness of our purpose, it
is my hope that this historic meeting will ci'eate a
declaration of the principles for which we stand
and which we are determined to defend.

May our meeting send forth a beacon of hope
and inspiration from the New World to all man-
kind.

Draft Resolutions

Project on Internal Security

Doc. 35

Submitted Mar. 27, 1951

Submitted liy Bolivia, Ecuador, United States, and
Uruguay

The Fourth Meeting of Con.suItation of the Foreign Min-
isters of the American Republics

CONSIDEEINO :

That the American Republics at the Ninth International
Conference of American States with specific reference to
"the preservation and defense of democracy in America"
resolved to adopt, within their respective territories and
in accordance with their respective constitutional .provi-
sions, the measures necessary to eradicate and prevent
activities directed, assisted or instigated by foreign gov-
ernments, organizations or individuals tending to over-
throw their institutions by violence, to foment disorder
in their domestic political life, or to disturb, by means of
pressure, subversive propaganda, threats or by any other
means, the free and sovereign right of their peoples to
govern themselves in accordance with their democratic
aspirations;

That, to complement measures of mutual cooperation
which may as.sure the defense as well as the economic and
social well-being of the people, it is necessary to adopt
laws and regulations for internal security ;

That in their concern to combat the action of interna-
tional comunmist imperialist action, they are deeply con-
scious of and desire to reaffirm their determination to
preserve, strengthen and safeguard the basic democratic
institutions of the peoples of the American Republics
which the agents of international communist imperialism
are attempting to abolish through the exploitation and
abuse of the self same democratic freedoms which they
seek to subvert ;

That, within each of the American Republics there ex-
ists a vast body of laws laboriously worked out over
generations, designed to assure its political defense;

That it is In accordance with the highest interests of
the American Republics to assure that each of them may
be able to meet the special and immediate threat of inter-
national communist imperialism;

That, since international communist imperialism
recognizes no boundaries, the present emergency requires,
in addition to strictly internal measures, a high degree
of international cooperation among the American Re-
publics, looking to the eradication of any threat of sub-
versive activity menacing the free and democratic way
of life of the American Republics ;
Recommends:

That, mindful of their unity of purpose, each of the
American Republics examines its respective laws and
regulations and puts into effect those modifications which
it may consider necessary to assure that subversive activi-
ties of the agents of international communist imperialism
directed against each respective American Republic may
be effectively prevented and appropriately punished ; and
Resolves:

a) To recommend that, in accordance with their re-
spective constitutional provisions, they enact the neces-
sjiry measures in the respective American countries to
regulate transit across international boundaries of those
aliens who there is reason to expect will attempt to carry
out subversive acts against the defense of the American
Continent ; and

b) To bear in mind, in the application of this resolu-
tion, the necessity of guaranteeing and defending by the
most etficacious means the rights of the human person
as well as their firm determination to preserve, defend
and safeguard the basic democratic institutions of the
people of the American Republics ;

c) To request the Secretary General of the Organiza-
tion of American States that, for the purjiose of facilitat-
ing the fulfillment of the ends of this resolution and, in
accordance with Articles 51, 83f and 84 of the Charter of
the Organization of American States, be set up within
the administrative framework of the Secretariat a tech-
nical staff with the following duties :

1. To make technical studies concerning the definition,
prevention, and punishment as crimes, of sabotage and
espionage with respect to acts against an American
Republic and directed from abroad or against the defense
of America ;

2. To make technical studies of measures by means of
which the respective American Republics may better pro-
tect, maintain and defend their national security against
treason, sedition and other subversive acts directed from
abroad or against the defense of America ;

3. To make technical studies concerning measures to
prevent the abuse of freedom of transit within the hemi-
sphere including clandestine and illicit travel and the
misuse of travel documents, designed to weaken the
defense of America.

This technical staff will transmit the reports and con-
clusions resulting from its studies to the Council of the
Organization of American States, which in turn will
transmit them to the respective American States ; if one of
these States so requests and the Council by a simple
majority of votes so decides, a specialized conference of
the governments of the American Republics will be called
on the matter in conformity with the terms of Article
93 of the Charter of the Organization of American States.

Examination of Defense Resources

Doc. 42

Submitted Mar. 27, 1951

Submitted by Brazil, Colombia, Cuba, Paraguay, United
States, and Uruguay

Whereas :

The American Republics, as Members of the United
Nations, have pledged themselves to unite their efforts
with those of other States to maintain international peace
and security and take effective collective measures for the
suppression of acts of aggression ;

April 9, 1951

573

International peace and security has been threatened
by the acts of aggression in Korea, and the United Nations,
pursuant to resolutions of the Security Council and the
General Assembly, has taken action to restore peace in
that area ; and

In order to ensure that the United Nations has at its
disposal means for maintaining international peace and
security, the General Assembly on November 3, 1950,
adopted the resolution entitled "Uniting for Peace",

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of

Foreign Affairs of American States

D''chires:

That the present world situation requires the positive
supiwrt by the American Republics of: (1) The collective
defense of the Western Hemisphere through the Organi-
zation of American States. (2) The prevention and sup-
pression of aggression in other parts of the v^orld through
the United Nations; and
Recommends :

1. That each of the American Republics should imme-
diately examine its resources and determine what steps
it can take to contribute to the defense of the Western
Hemisphere and to United Nations collective security
efforts and to the accomplishment of the aims and pur-
poses of the Uniting for Peace Resolution of the General
Assembly.

2. That each of the American Republics should give
particular attention to the development and maintenance
of elements within its national armed forces so trained,
organized and equipped that they could, in accordance
with its capabilities and constitutional processes, promptly
be made available, for (1) the defense of the Western
Hemisphere and (2) for service in support of action taken
by the United Nations.

Inter-American Military Cooperation

Doc. 45

Submitted Mar. 27, 1951

Submitted by Brazil, Colombia, El Salvador, Paraguay,
United States, and Uruguay

Whereas :

The American Republics have assumed obligations under
the Charter of the Organization of American States and
in the Inter-American Treaty of Reciprocal Assistance to
assist any American State subjected to an armed attack
and to act together for the common defense and for the
maintenance of the peace and security of the Continent;

The peace and security of all the American Republics
are threatened by the expansionist designs of international
communism ; and

It is urgently necessary for the sovereign states of
America to develop their military capabilities for individ-
ual and collective self-defense against armed attack in
order to be in a position to c-ontribute effectively to action
by the Organization of American States against aggression.
The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of For-
eign Affairs of American States

Resolves :

That the American Republics, in accordance with their
capabilities and constitutional processes, should so direct
their national military policies that, through self-help and
mutual aid :

I. Each will strengthen those armed forces and re-
sources best adapted to the collective defense and main-
tain those armed forces in such status that they could bo
deployed promptly in the defense of the hemisphere, and

II. Kacli will cooperate with the otlicrs in military mat-
ters to tlie end that the necessary collective strength of
the hemisphere is developed to combat aggression.

Re<iuCHts:

Tlie Inter-American Defense I'.oard to present promptly
to the (Jovernnients plans for the preparation of the armed
forces of the American Republics for effective collective
defense of the hemispliere, and

574

Agrees:

That each American Government should support actively
the work of the Iadb and should consider promptly all
plans and other recommendations of that body, and

That the respective Delegations of the American Repub-
lics to the Iadb shall carry on such consultations as may
be necessary to facilitate approval and implementation by
the Governments of the Board's plans and other recom-
mendations in the shortest possible time.

Importance of Peaceful Relations Among
American States

Doc. 57

Submitted Mar. 28, 1951

Submitted by Mexico and United States

Whereas :

It is desirable that the energies of each American
Republic be devoted to strengthening its ability to con-
tribute to international peace and security in the Western
Hemisphere and to the prevention and suppression of
international communist aggression, and

Any breach of friendly relations among the American
Republics can only serve to provide aid and comfort to
the leaders of such aggression as well as to weaken the
peace and security of the Western Hemisphere,
The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs of American States
Reafflrms:

The solemn obligations undertaken by all the Ameri-
can Republics to refrain in their international relations
from the threat or use of force in any manner incon-
sistent with the Charter of the United Nations or the
Inter-American Treaty of Reciprocal Assistance, and to
settle their international disputes by peaceful means ; and
Resolves:

That the American Republics will make every effort to
settle any disputes between them which threaten friendly
relations, in the shortest possible time, by direct bilateral
negotiations, and will promptly submit such disputes as
they may he unable to settle by negotiation to other avail-
able procedures for the peaceful settlement of disputes,
and
Declares:

That the faithful observance by the American Republics
of the commitments not to intervene in the internal or
external affairs of other States and to settle any disputes
among them by peaceful means makes it possible for
each of the Republics to concentrate the development of
its capabilities upon the tasks best adapted to the role
each is most qualified to assume in the collective defense
against aggression.

U.S. Delegation

On March 26, the Department of State an-
nounced the United States delegation to the
fourth meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs of the American States, which
convened at Washington on that date, as follows :

Member

Dean Acheson, Secretary of State

Princival Adviser

Edward G. Miller, Jr., Assistant Secretary for Inter-
American Affairs, Department of State

Department of State Bvlletin

Advisers

Edward W. Barrett. Assistant Secretary for Public Affairs,
Department of State

Willard L. Rea lilac, United States Ambassador to Colombia

Henry G. Bennett, Administrator, Technical Cooperation
Administration, Department of State

W. Taple.v Bennett, Jr., otticer in Charge, Central Amer-
ican and Panama Affairs, Bureau of Inter-American
Affairs, Department of State; ^crrctari/ Ocnrral

Merwin L. Bohan, United States Representative on the
Inter-American Economic and Social Council

Lt. Gen. Charles L. Bolt(5, Chairman, Inter-American
Defense Board

Winthrop G. Brown, Director, Office of International
Trade Policy, Department of State

Paul C. Daniels, United States Ambassador to Ecuador

John C. Dreier, United States Representative on the Coun-
cil of the Organization of American States

Ralph Hilton, Public Affairs Adviser, Bureau of Inter-
American Affairs, Department of State

Edward A. Jamison, Officer in Charge, Special Political
Problems. Office of Regional American Affairs, Bureau
of Inter-American Affairs, Department of State

Richard N. Johnson, Foreign Trade Policy Adviser, OfBee
of the Special Assistant to the President

Philip M. Kaiser, Assistant Secretary, Department of
Labor

Charles F. Knox, Jr., Consul General, Curacao

John M. Leddy, Deputy Director, Office of International
Trade Policy, Department of State

William McChesney Martin, Jr., Assistant Secretary of
the Treasury

Michael J. McDermott, Special Assistant for Press Rela-
tions, Department of State: Press Relations Officer

Rear Admiral Milton E. Miles, USN, United States Dele-
gate to the Inter-American Defense Board

Rafael Pico, Member, United States Section, Caribbean
Commission

Fred J. Rossiter, Associate IMrector, Office of Foreign
Agricultural Relations, Department of Agriculture

William Sanders, Special Assistant to the Assistant Sec-
retary of State for United Nations Affairs, Depart-
ment of State

H. F. Arthur Schoenfeld, Office of International Security
Affairs, Department of State

Kenneth Iverson, President, Institute of Inter-American
Affairs

Hobart A. Spalding, Intelligence Adviser, Bureau of Inter-
American Affairs, Department of State

Lynn U. Stambaugh, Member, Board of Directors, Export-
Import Bank

Leroy D. Stinebower, Director, Office of Financial and
Development Policy, Department of State

Charles A. Sullivan, Office of International Programs,
Munitions Board, Department of Defense

Willard L. Thorp, Assistant Secretary for Economic
Affairs, Department of State

Francis A. Truslow, Consultant, Department of State

Maj. Gen. Robert L. Walsh, USAP, United States Delegate
to the Inter-American Defense Board

Ivan B. White, Director, Office of Regional American
Affairs, Department of State

Marjorie M. Whiteman, Assistant Legal Adviser for Inter-
American Affairs, Department of State

Frederick Winant, Director. Foreign Coordination Divi-
sion. Defense Production Administration

Herbert A. Woolley, Chief, Trade Analysis Branch, Finan-
cial Policy, Trade Development Division, Economic
Cooperation Administration

George Wythe, Director, American Republics Division,
Office of International Trade, Department of Com-
merce
Thomas C. Baker, Chief, Foreign Branch, Supplies Divi-
sion, Department of Interior
WiUiam E. Foley, Chief, Internal Securities Section,
Criminal Division, Federal Bureau of Investigation

President Confers With Irisli
Foreign Minister, Sean MacBride

[Released to the press by the White House March 23]

Scan MacBride, Minister for External Affairs
for Ireland, today paid a courtesy call on the Presi-
dent at the White House prior to his return to
Ireland. President Truman and Mr. MacBride
had a friendly discussion concerning the present
state of relations between the United States and
Ireland. The Secretary of State was present dur-
ing the interview.

Mr. MacBride has been on an unofficial visit to
the United States since March 10. The primary
purpose of his trip was to address the Friendly
Sons of St. Patrick at Philadelphia on St. Pat-
rick's Day. While in Washington, Mr. MacBride
saw various Government officials and attended an
official luncheon given in his honor at Prospect
House.

Letters of Credence

Uruguay

The newly appointed Ambassador of Uruguay,
Jose A. Mora, presented his credentials to the
President on March 26. For a translation of the
Ambassador's remarks and the text of the Presi-
dent's reply, see Department of State press release
228 of March 26.

Auriol — Continued from page 5G5

distrustful of herself, a new and harmonious or-
ganism animated by one soul and adapted to the
needs and exigencies of the modern world.

Patiently and untiringly, we shall pursue the
realizatioia of these United States of a free
Europe which, with full respect for the independ-
ence and dignity of all nations, will join the
United States of America to work still more
effectively for the welfare and peace of the world.
In this way, we shall translate into actuality the
prophecy of Victor Hugo who said, 75 years ago,
on the eve of the Philadelphia Exhibition :

The Future is already foreseeable. It belongs to a
united and peaceful democracy. And you, our delegates
to the Philadelphia Exhibition, you are beginning under
our eyes the superb realization which the Twentieth Cen-
tury will witness : the union of the United States of
America and of the United States of Europe . . . Go,
workers of France, go, workers of Paris who know how
to think, go, girl artisans of Paris who know how to fight,
useful men, brave women, go and carry the good news,
go and tell the New World that the Old World is young.
You are the ambassadors of fraternity. The two con-
tinents will exchange not only their products, their trade,
their industries, but also their ideas and the progress
they make in justice as well as in prosperity.

Gentlemen, I would be happy if, today, I could
have been one of those useful ambassadors of
friendship and of peace.

April 9, J 95 1

575

Essentials of a Peace With Japan

hy John Foster Dulles ^

I AM GRATEFUL to Whittier College for giving me
this opportunity to make a progress report on
peace in the Pacific. That subject is, I sup-
pose, of particular interest to Americans who live
on our west coast. Actually peace in the Pacific
is equally important to all of us, for danger and
effort can no longer be localized.

Two principal postwar goals of the Soviet Com-
munists are Japan and Germany. If Russia's
rulers could exploit the industrial and human po-
tential of either Japan or Germany, it would be a
sad day for peace. That would involve such a
shift in the balance of world power that these new
imperialists might calculate that they could start
a general war with good prospect of success. They
know that Japan, even alone, was able seriously
to menace the free world in the Pacific and they
imagine vast possibilities out of a combination,
under their direction, of the Asiatic power of Rus-
sia, China, and Japan.

Fortunately the Japanese people do not want
that combination, which would make them the
front line of a new aggression which in the end
would mean disaster far greater than that which
they have already suffered. They are in a mood
to reject militarism in all of its aspects, and tl\ey
want fellowship with the nations which genuinely
seek peace through collective security in accord-
ance with the principles of the United Nations.
Thus there is the opportunity to make a Japanese
peace which will not only end the old war but
give new strength and hope to those who strive
to prevent another war.

To achieve that kind of peace is the President's
mandate to the mission which I have the honor
to head, and President Truman, Secretary Ache-
son, and Secretary Marshall are each of them giv-
ing this effort their close personal attention, to the
end that this great goal shall be achieved.

Since our mission was established last January,

'Addros.s made at Wliitficr Colloge, Whittipr, Calif, (in
Mar. 31 and rolca.scd lo tln' i>i-i>ss (in tho same d.-itc. Also
printed a.s Departnu'iit of State pulilicatioii 4171.

we have had a busy time. All or some of us
have been to Japan, the Philippines, Australia,
New Zealand, and England. We have consulted
in Washington with ambassadors of other na-
tions and also with the many in the executive and
legislative branches of our Government whose
wisdom, judgment, and special knowledge can be
helpful. The Foreign Relations Committee of
the Senate, its Far Eastern subcommittee, and the
Foreign Affairs Committee of the House have ex-
tended the utmost cooperation. As a result of all
this, we have seen the possibility of formulating
peace terms which should command general sup-
port here at home, which should involve no in-
soluble differences with our allies, and which
should be acceptable to Japan, which we consider
has now earned the right to be consulted.

So this week we have begun to discuss, with
our allies principally concerned in the Pacific war,
actual texts which might be incorporated in an
eventual treaty. These texts are still "working
papers," tentative and suggestive only.

We contemplate a simple document, limited to
the essentials of peace.

PREAMBLE

Our present thought is to have a preamble to
the treaty which would afford the Japanese people
the opportunity to express their intentions as to
matters which are important but which for one
reason or another do not lend themselves to abso-
lute contractual undertakings.

For example, Japan might indicate its inten-
tion to apply for membership in the United Na-
tions. There is no doubt about the reality of
that intention, but we think that Japan's applica-
tion for membership, when it comes, should bear
the unmistakable imprint of Japan's own desire
without the slightest taint of external compulsion.
Similarly the Japanese may want to express their

k

576

Department of State Bulletin

intention to carry forward the new ideals as to
human rights and like matters which are hirgely
embodied in Japanese legislation under the occu-
pation and which are the subject of the United
Nations Universal Declaration of Human Rights.
They may want to declare their intention, in pub-
lic and private tirade and connnerce, to conform to
international accepted fair practices.

Japan's intentions in these respects are vitally
important and go to the heart of our future rela-
tions. But except as these matters have already
been spelled out in international conventions which
Japan could and would adopt, they do not lend
themselves to peace-treaty obligations, which
should only be such as can be precisely formulated
so that the parties will clearly know just what are
their rights and duties.

tempt to define what should be the future per-
manent relations between the allies and Japan.
These might better be left for subsequent negotia-
tion between a free Japan and other friendly na-
tions. However, to prevent confusion and to
minimize discrimination immediately following
tl>e coming into force of the treaty, Japan might,
for such a period as 3 years, agree to accord most-
favored-nation treatment to the Allied Powers,
except that Japan would not, in any matter, be
required to extend more favorable treatment than
is accorded it. Similarly, as regards civil air-
traffic rights, Japan might for 3 years, and pend-
ing the conclusion of civil air-transport agree-
ments, grant the Allied Powers not less favorable
conditions than those prevailing at the time of the
coming into force of the treaty.

TERRITORY

PROPERTY AND CLAIMS

The treaty proper would prescibe the territory
over which the Japanese will hereafter be sov-
ereign. It is contemplated generally speaking
that Japan's sovereignty should be limited in ac-
cordance with the agreed surrender terms. That
would mean sovereignty over the four home islands
and minor adjacent islands. There would be a
renunciation by Japan of all rights, titles, and
claims to Korea, Formosa, the Pescadores, and the
Antarctic area. Also the treaty might contem-
plate that in the Ryukyu and Bonin islands there
could be United Nations trusteesliip and continu-
ing United States administrative responsibility.

The South Saklialin and Kurile Islands were
allotted to Russia at Yalta and are actually in
Russian possession. Any peace-treaty validation
of Russia's title should, we suggest, be dependent
upon Russia's becoming a party to that treaty.

SECURITY

The security of Japan itself should, we think,
be worked out through individual and collective
self-defense arrangements authorized by the
United Nations Charter. Thus the peace treaty
itself need only affirm that, upon the coming into
force of the peace, Japan would in fact possess
what the Charter of the United Nations refers to
as the "inherent right" of sovereign nations in
these respects.

COMMERCIAL

As regards commercial arrangements, we do not
think that the treaty of peace should itself at-

April 9, J 95 7

938741—51 3

With respect to property and claims, the treaty
of peace might give the Allied Powers the right
generally to vest, retain, and dispose of Japanese
property within their territory, while Japan
should return prewar allied property in Japan
and validate prewar claims belonging to Allied
Powers and their nationals.

The foregoing matters can, we believe, now be
dealt with with considerable precision. There
are others which are still subject to exploration
and development.

JAPAN'S SECURITY

Since Japan is now thoroughly disarmed and
materially and legally unable to maintain armed
forces, there is need for provisional security meas-
ures. Accordingly, with the authority of the
President, and following conversations with com-
mittees of Congress, I stated publicly in Japan
that, if the Japanese wanted it, the United States
would sympathetically consider the retention of
United States armed forces in and about Japan,
so that the coming into force of a treaty of peace
would not leave Japan a vacuum of power and, as
such, an easy prey to such aggression as has already
shown itself in nearby Korea. This suggestion of
mine was warmly welcomed by the Japanese Gov-
ei'iunent and the people generally so that it is
now in order to study the implementation of such
an arrangement.

Since Japan is an island, its security is strongly
influenced by sea and air power — power which
the United States is in a position to exercise in
the Pacific. The defense of Japan need not re-
quire, either now from the United States or ul-
timately from Japan, as large ground forces as

577

might be thought to be necessary if Japan had
common land boimdaries with militaristic powers.

PACIFIC SECURITY

Bound up with the problem of Japan's security
is the broader problem of security in the Pacific.
Japan should hereafter make some contribution
of its own to security, but this should never be
the pretext for militarism that could be an ag-
gressive threat. Thus the problem has a dual
aspect.

No nation able to make a dependable contribu-
tion to security should get a "free ride." In our
Senate, the Vandenberg Resolution has laid down
for the United States the basic proposition that
collective-security arrangements should be based
upon "continuous and effective self-help and mu-
tual aid." The United Nations Charter also estab-
lishes that all peace-loving states should stand
ready to contribute armed forces, assistance, and
facilities for the purpose of maintaining interna-
tional peace and security. That is one aspect of
the problem. The other side of the problem is
that Japan should never again develop armament
which could be an offensive threat or serve other
than to promote peace and security in accordance
with the purposes and principles of the United
Nations Charter. The peace we seek is one which
will for all time liberate Japan's neighbors and
indeed the Japanese people from the nightmare
of militarism.

Wlien we were in Canberra, Australia, our mis-
sion had significant discussions on this subject
with the Governments of Australia and New Zea-
land. They made convincingly clear the attitude
of their peoples on this subject. Now we are work-
ing actively to find the ways to secure the desired
results.

We believe that out of our discussions, which
are now well advanced, there will emerge a series
of arrangements which on the one hand will enable
the Japanese to make their own indispensable
contribution to preventing their nation's being
forced into the service of the new imperialism
that ominously threatens from the mainland and
which on the other hand will effectively assure
that there will be no unbridled rearmament which
could become an offensive threat.

The United States is able and daily growing
more able to exert a mighty influence for peace
and to make peace in the Pacific more secure than
it has ever been before. We can see the way to
remove the pall of fear which results from Japan's
past conduct and from the present Communist
menace. But that is not a task which we would
or should undertake single-handed and alone.
In the Pacific, as elsewhere, security is a coopera-
tive enterprise. Those who wish to cooperate for
security can share the protection of immense deter-
rent power which, in the words of the United

578

Nations Charter, "shall not be used, save in the
common interest."

Since the arrangements for peace and security
in the Pacific will in part be outside of the peace
treaty and since the whole problem is not yet
fully explored, we consider that any presently
suggested treaty provisions are to be supplemented
in the light of the outcome of the promising
exchanges of views which are now taking place
and to which we attach the utmost importance. No
one should assume that the United States takes this
problem lightly or that we shall accept a solution
that will be illusory.

REPARATIONS

As regards reparations, the United States does
not question the inherent justice of the proposi-
tion that Japan should make good the damage done
to others by its aggression. Reparation is, how-
ever, not merely a matter of what is just but of
what is economically practicable, without disas-
trous consequences. We have closely examined
this problem. Considerable industrial machinery
has already been removed from Japan and given
to countries having reparation claims. Also there
is substantial Japanese property within allied
countries which, as indicated, should be applicable
to the satisfaction of claims. It is, however, not
easy to see the possibility of Japan's providing
future reparation out of her remaining capital as-
sets or as a surplus from her current economic
activity over coming years.

One of the gravest problems which confront
Japan, and it equally concerns the reparation
creditors, is whether japan, deprived of its for-
merly owned sources of raw material and with a
population of 85 million on four relatively small
and ban-en islands, can maintain the standard of
living and employment necessary to prevent wide-
spread social unrest. This, if it occurred, would
inevitably give rise to dangerous expansionist and
explosive tendencies, which Japan's Communist
neighbors would joyously exploit.

The United States, to prevent social and eco-
nomic unrest within Japan since the occupation be-
gan, has advanced about 2 billion dollars for re-
lief and economic assistance. That is a realistic
measure of how seriously the United States views
this jiroblem and its responsibility as principal
occuping power. However, the United States is
not prepared after the occupation ends to continue
indefintel_v such economic relief. Neither is it
willing in effect to pay Japanese reparations by
putting into Japan what reparation creditors
would take out. The United States considers in-
deed that its postwar advances have a certain pri-
ority status.

We doubt that it is practicable to get the es-
sential over-all and long-range results which are
sought, if the treaty also seeks to extract repara-

Department of State Bulletin

tion payments other than in terms of the Japa-
nese assets ah-eady received from Japan or with-
in the territory of the Allied Powers. However,
the United States has not closed its mind on this
subject, and it is, with an open mind, actively ex-
chanfjing views with countries which were most
gi-ievously damaged by Japanese aggression.

ECONOMIC DISABILITIES

Some suggestions have been made as to impos-
ing upon the Japanese economic disabilities as, for
example, requiring a dismantling of a part of
Japan's industrial plants, particularly her ship-
building capacity. As experience in Germany has
shown, such provisions cannot be carried out with-
out arousing great public bitterness. If the peace
treaty required the first postwar Japanese Gov-
ernment physically to decimate Japan's indus-
trial equipment, it would impose an almost in-
human burden, and the consequences would almost
surely be against the best interests of the Allied
Powers.

FISHERIES

It has been suggested, particularly along the
Pacific coast, that the treaty of peace might itself
attempt permanently to regulate the problem of
Japanese participation in high-seas fisheries. To
attempt that would almost surely postpone indefi-
nitely both the conclusion of peace and the obtain-
ing of the results which are desired.

There is, I believe, a considerable possibility
of agreement betw-een the United States and Jap-
anese fishing interests. However, the treaty of
peace is not a treaty merely between the United
States and Japan; it is a treatj^ which we hope
will be signed by all of the 53 allies. Most of these
nations have their own fishing problems and their
own theories of solution, which differ widely. No
quick results can be won by attempting to make
the peace treaty into a universal convention on
high-seas fishing.

'\^nien I was in Japan, the Prime Minister ad-
vised me that the Japanese Government stood
ready to negotiate fisheries agreements as soon as
peace restores to Japan the possibility of inde-
pendent sovereign action. He said that in the
meantime the Japanese Government would pro-
hibit Japanese nationals and Japanese vessels
from going into conserved fisheries in all waters,
and he mentioned specifically those off the coasts
of the United States, Canada, and Alaska.

The Japanese now see the importance of avoid-
ing practices which in the past brought Japan
much ill will, and, if we can hold to our tentative
timetable, there can, I believe, be an early and
equitable settlement of this thorny problem.

A PEACE OF RECONCILIATION

From the foregoing it can be seen that the Jap-
anese peace settlement we seek, wliile it would
confirm the cut-back of Japan's territory to her
home islands, would contemplate that Japan
would be a sovereign and sustaining member of
the free world. She would contribute in clue
course to collective security in accordance with
her means but without developing armament
which could bo an offensive threat. Also, from
an economic standpoint, Japan would be expected
to get along without such subsidies as the United
States has been providing during the occupation.
Un the other hand Japan would be i-estored to a po-
sition of equality, free of burdensome and dis-
criminatory conditions. In essence the peace
would be one of reconciliation.

That is not the kind of peace which victors
usually grant to a vanquished nation which has
committed armed aggression on a vast scale. It
is not surprising that some, made bitter and dis-
trusting by Jajoan's past conduct, would hke to
impose upon Japan continuing burdens and re-
strictions. Some of these taken separately seem
to have justification, and perhaps no one of them
alone would be of decisive historical significance.
In the aggregate, however, they would fundamen-
tally change the character of the peace settle-
ment.

The major objective of any Japanese peace
treaty is to bring the Japanese people hereafter
to live with others as good neighbors. That does
not require that the Japanese people should be
pampered. It does mean that the victors should
not take advantage of Japan's present helpless
state to impose for the future unequal conditions.
It means that the peace settlement should restore
the vanquished to a position of dignity and equal-
ity among the nations.

The peace would be a peace of trust, not because
the past justifies trust but because the act of ex-
tending trust usually evokes an effort to merit
trust. It would be a peace of opportunity, in that
it would afford the Japanese people the same op-
portunity to develop peacefully their domestic
economy and their international relations as are
enjoyed by most of the other free nations of the
world.

UNITED STATES RESPONSIBILITY

In proposing that kind of peace, the United
States assumes a serious responsibility, for the re-
sults cannot be guaranteed. We have, however,
a duty to exercise our best judgment as to the kind
of peace which will endure. Circumstances have
made our duty inescapable.

In the great war in the Pacific, we had valiant
allies who, through long, hard years, poured out

April 9, J 95 1

579

life and treasure according to their means. But
the United States possessed most of the means
required for victory in the Pacific. The United
States has carried the responsibility of occupa-
tion, and the accomplishments of General Mac-
Arthur as Supreme Commander represent a
moral investment to which his countrymen can-
not honorably be indifferent. The United States
has contributed the economic aid which has pre-
vented the postwar misery which would have
exposed Japan to capture by communism. The
United States is the member of the free world
which possesses large present and prospective
military power in the western Pacific, and today
we are the principal contributor to the United Na-
tions effort in Korea, which fends off danger to
Japan, to our Pacific allies, as well as to ourselves.

These are some of the circumstances which re-
quire the United States to exercise an initiative
for peace; to do so while there is still time; and
to shape that initiative with all of the wisdom and
all of the vision that is available. For a misjudg-
ment as to timing or as to substance can bring
incalculable disaster to all mankind.

The United States does not consider that it has
any monopoly of responsibility nor any monopoly
of experience, wisdom, and enlightenment that
are required. We have no desire to "go it alone,"
nor have we the slightest thought of dictating.
We continuously have sought and shall seek the
views of others, and indeed our present sugges-
tions are a composite, not deriving from any single
source. They reflect the ideas of many, and the
United Kingdom and Australia are two import-
ant sources of actual language that we accept.
However, iii the last analysis the United States
cannot, in justice to our own people or indeed to
others, become cosponsor of a peace settlement
which in our judgment, made after ample consid-
eration without arrogance and in humbleness of
spirit, would throw unnecessary and intolerable
burdens of a military or economic character upon
the United States and jeopardize the lasting peace
that the war was fought to win.

NO VETO

Happily the exchanges of views which have
taken place have, with one exception, been alto-
gether cordial, and no basic disagreements have
developed. The Government of the Soviet Union
IS i)erhaps an exception. For 3 months its repre-
sentative joined with us in full and frank discus-
sions. But now that a peace treaty with Japan
seems actually to be in the offing, the Soviet lead-
ers seem to have taken fright. The Soviet Gov-
ernment has i)ub]ic]y announced that it will not
resume discussions with us.

Wlien peace is far off, the Russian leaders speak
lovingly of peace. But when peace comes near,
they shun peace like tlie plague.

We continue to hope that the Soviet leaders will
join in a treaty of peace which would cost them
nothing and which would start a relaxing of
tensions which would be felt all around the globe.
We are ready to give scrupulously full considera-
tion to any views they may express. We shall
steadily urge that they join in the Japanese peace.

Fortunately, however, Soviet participation is
not indispensable. The Soviet Union has no legal
power to veto. It has no moral due bills, for its
vast takings in Manchuria, Port Arthur, Dairen,
Sakhalin, and the Kuriles repay it a thousandfold
for its 6 days of nominal belligerency. Japan,
unlike Germany and Austria, is not divided by
zones of occupation.

In relation to Japan there is the opportunity to
show which of the Allies of World War II now
have the genuine will for peace. There is the
opportunity for them to make peace so righteous
that the example will hearten and uplift men
everywhere. That is the opportunity ; and to its
challenge we are determined worthily to respond.

Procedure for Filing Claims
Against Closed institutions in Japan

[Released to the press March 27]

The Closed Institutions Liquidation Commis-
sion (CILC), an agency of the Japanese Govern-
ment, has invited the filing of certain types of
claims arising outside Japan against closed finan-
cial institutions now being liquidated by the CILC.
This invitation relates only to a limited class of
claims against approximately 800 institutions
which are undergoing liquidation, and claims re-
ceived by the CILC no later than July 16, 1951,
will be paid in yen to the extent permitted by
available assets. The closed institutions are in
general banks, development companies, and war-
time financial institutions concerned with colonial
or other overseas expansion or war production.
The complete list of institutions against which
claims may be filed appears in the Official Gazette
of the Japanese Government for Januai-y 24, 1951,
No. 1446, English language edition, which is avail-
able in the United States in approximately 225
college, university, and public libraries, and other
public and semipublic institutions. In addition,
tlie Department has available a limited number
of copies of the January 24 issue of the Official
Gazette.

Depositors, debenture holders, and stockholders
arc specifically requested by the CILC not to file,
since their claims are known and will be paid in
accordance with CILC procedures without the fil-
ing of a claim. Unnecessary filing of known
claims, it is felt by the Japanese agency, would
merely serve to encumber its macliinery for
processing claims.

580

Department of State Bulletin

No information is available as to the extent to
which realizable assets may permit the satisfac-
tion of claims now to be received. It should be
noted, however, that whereas this category of
claims includes those originating outside Japan,
the resources available to the CILC are necessarily
limited to the assets in Japan of the financial
institutions which it is liquidating.

Neither the Department of State, the United
States Political Adviser for Japan, nor the General
Headquarters of the Supreme Commander for the
Allied Powers is equipped to be of any assistance
in the filing of claims. It should be clearly under-
stood by persons having claims that any previous
filinfr of papers with any United States, Allied,
or Japanese agency does not constitute a proper
filing for the purpose of obtaining payment under
the CILC procedures.

All communications regarding these claims
should be sent directly to the Closed Institutions
Liquidating Commission, Tokyo Office, Sanwa
Building, No. 2, Marunouchi 1-chome, Chiyoda-
ward, Tokj'o, Japan, or to the Osaka office of the
Commission, Bank of Tokyo, Osaka Branch Build-
ing, No. 5 Kitahama 5-chome, Higashi-ward,
Osaka, except that claims against the Taihei
Lumber Co., Ltd., should be sent to the C. I. Taihei
Lumber Co., Ltd., Liquidation Office, No. 7
Komagata 1-chome, Asakusa, Daito-ward, Tokyo,
and claims against the Japan Publications Dis-
tributing Co., Ltd., to the Liquidation Office of
that company, at No. 9 Awaji-cho 2-chome, Kanda,
Chiyoda-ward, Tokyo.

The substance of the information made available
by the CILC is summarized below :

1. Pursuant to Imperial Ordinance 74 of 1947
and implementing Ministerial Ordinances, the
CILC has been ejecting liquidation of Japanese
closed institutions. Such liquidation is limited to
the realization of assets in Japan and the payment
of the liabilities of offices of closed institutions in
Japan. In these liquidations, provision is made
for the payment of all known legitimate claims
to the extent permitted by the realization of avail-
able assets. Known claimants have not been re-
quired to file their claims. Claimants other than
depositors, debenture holders, or stockholders have
been requested to file their claims with the CILC
in a period of two months following public invita-
tion by the CILC for such filing, in order to assure
consideration of their claims in the event that they
are not known claimants or if the amount of claim
is in dispute.

2. Prior to amendments to Imperial Ordinance
74 and its implementing Ministerial Ordinances,
issued and effective December 26, 1950, the ai'ea of
recognized claims payable in the liquidation of
closed institutions was limited to claims against
the respective offices in Japan pursuant to trans-
actions which had occurred in Japan and were
payable in Japan in Japanese currency. Recent
amendments have expanded the area of recog-

nized claims payable in the liquidation of the
Japanese closed institutions. This expansion has
occasioned a renewed invitation by the CILC for
the filing of claims in the expanded area. Claims
are to be filed with the CILC no later than July
16, 1951.

3. It is emphasized that, although claims against
ofliccH in Japan expressed in foreign currency will
now be recognized, settlement of such claims can
currently be made by the CILC only in yen. Re-
cipients of such settlement who desire the conver-
sion of yen into foreign exchange will be required
to follow procedures established bv the Japanese
Foreign Exchange Control and Foreign Trade
Control Law.

4. The newly recognized area of claims against
Japanese closed institutions which will hereafter
be paid to the extent permitted by realizable assets
is as follows :

A. Claims against offices in Japan which were
payable abroad.

B. Claims against offices in Japan which were
expressed in foreign currency.

C. Claims against offices in Japan which were
payable in Japan, originating from transactions
abroad.

(1) Goods purchased abroad.

(2) Services performed abroad.

(3) Loans made abroad.

D. Claims against overseas offices of closed
institutions secured by assets in Japan.

5. The treatment of claims in the newly recog-
nized area will be similar to that accorded to pre-
viously recognized claims. All known claims will
receive consideration whether or not filing is made.
Depositors, debenture holders, and stockholders
are requested not to file, since their claims are
known. Other claimants should file with the
CILC no later than July 16, 1951, to insure con-
sideration of their claims. Unknown claimants
who file at a later date will receive consideration
only after full payment has been made, to the
extent permitted by realizable assets, to all other
claimants whose priority in liquidation is higher
than that of debenture holders and stockholders,
namely, secured claims, preferred claims, claims
originating from transactions subsequent to Au-
gust 10, 1946, and general claims.

6. The amount of compensation and the date
of settlement which claimants in the newly recog-
nized area of claims can anticipate cannot be pre-
dicted at present. Newly recognized claims will
have to be integrated subsequent to July 16, 1951,
for each closed institution with previously recog-
nized but as yet unsettled claims. Thereafter,
the amount of compensation w^ill depend upon the
ratio of the total valid claims to the total realiz-
able assets. The date of settlement will depend
upon the liquidity of assets. It is currently esti-
nuited that most existing claims against closed
institutions will have been settled by August
1952.

April 9, 7951

581

The nature of tlie claim statement desired by
the CILC is as follows :

1. Name of the closed institution against which
claim is to be filed.

2. Name and location of the oiSce against which
claim originated.

3. Date at which claim originated.

4. Description of claim, with full particulars.
Principal and interest should be clearly dis-
tinguished, and the period for which interest is
calculated should be stated.

5. Description and present location of any pub-
lic bonds, debentures, stocks, shares, or other items
which were offered as security.

6. Listing and description of any documentary

evidence (deeds, passbooks, contracts, certificates,
acknowledgement of claims, etc.) which claim-
ant may wish to attach in verification of his claim.

7. Amount of claim. If the claim is expressed
in a foreign currency, it should be stated only in
that particular foreign currency, without recalcu-
lating to yen or other currencies.

8. The claimant may submit any other infor-
mation which he considers necessary.

9. The claim should include the full name and
address of the creditor, and a statement along the
following lines:

The undersigned hereby declares that the statement
given above is true and correct, and acljiiowledges that no
payment or settlement of the above-mentioned claims
has been made up to the present.

Communist ''Land Reform" in North Korea Brings Disillusionment

[Released to the press March 28]

A recently completed study has brought to light
the workings of the North Korean "land reform"
program, some details of which had long been
known to the Department. The study involved
an on-the-spot check of farm conditions in North
Korea, interviews with farmers, and an analysis
of a mass of decrees and land laws issued by Soviet
and Pyongyang authorities from 1946 to 1950.
Its objective was to discover just what the North
Korean farmers got out of the land distribution
plan, and what the average farmer thought of it.

Effect of Totalitarian State on Land Reform

The answer to both questions is summarized
in a single statement: Landless farm laborers and
poor tenant farmers, the chief beneficiaries of the
program, found that land ownership in a totali-
tarian police state was largely a delusion. There
was no margin of profit and a heavy margin of
compulsory unpaid labor by the farmer and his
household for the benefit of the Communist
regime.

In place of the former landlords, mainly Jap-
anese, who got rentals of 55 to 60 percent in kind
annually, but paid for in cash, the Communist
regime and its countless subsidiaries confiscated
as much or more in various forms of tax-in-kind,
assessments, and "voluntary" contributions. In
addition, the farmer found that instead of one
boss he had many — township and county and
provincial petty officials, plus the ever-present
police, who told him what to do, what to raise,
and how much. At the end of the crop year, ex-

cept for subsistence, the farmer and his household
had worked harder than ever, with nothing to
show for it, not even enough to purchase their
quota of cotton goods from the Communist-run
mills.

Above all, the study reveals the unremitting
efforts of the Conununist regime, in the course of
5 years, to remove the last shreds of independence
from the new class of farm "owners'' and ruth-
lessly force them to become cogs in the lumbering
machinery of the planned state economy. In
1950, the last step — collectivization — appears to
have been in the offing. Thus, in the long range,
North Korean "land reform" would have been
found to be a complete delusion, not only in that
the farmers' economic condition had not improved
but also in that even technical ownership of the
land would have proved only a transitory phase.
In the end, the whole of the farming class would
have been made an agricultural proletariat.

Soviet "Land Reform" Policies

This is how "land reform" under Soviet occupa-
tion and the Pyongyang regime worked:

At the end of the war, in August 1945, when the
Soviet authorities clamped down an iron curtain
over North Korea, they began almost at once to
consider the farm problem both for political and
economic reasons. The problem of Korean farm
tenants and farm workers, who under 35 years of
Japanese rule had been reduced practically to
peonage, was common to all Korea.

In 1945, about one-half of the 3 million farm

582

Deparimenf of State Bulletin

households in Korea owned no land at all and an
additional one-third rented part of the land they
tilled. Only 17.3 percent owned all the land they
cultivated. Because of the exorbitant farm ren-
tals, the average tenant, after expenses connected
with cultivation, had left as little as 20 to 25 per-
cent of his total crop for maintaining his house-
Ihold until the next harvest.
In North Korea, the proportion of tenancy
was somewhat less than in the South, where the
highly productive irrigated rice paddies offered
more profitable returns to absentee landlords. But
in the North, the bait of "land ownership" held
out by the Communist authorities was a necessary
I inoredient of the whole Soviet economic program.

I By transforming landless farm workers and
poor tenants into private landowners, in theory at
least, the Soviet authorities expected to win the al-
legiance of the largest "depressed" class. More
important, farm production could be geared to the
rest of the program, farm income would be tapped
for a major part of government expenditures, and
farm labor would offer a reservoir from which to
draw labor for industry.

The first Soviet land-reform decree, issued in
March 1946, stated that the purpose of the pro-
gram was to destroy the "feudalist land system of
thousands of years standing" and replace it with
one "based on individual management by in-
dependent farmers."

Under this decree, all Japanese land holdings
were confiscated, as well as all the tenant-worked
land of Korean landlords. Also confiscated were
the land of farmers in excess of five chungho (12.3
j acres) and the land of religious institutions ex-
! Deeding the same amount of tillable land. Alto-
gether, some 2,800,000 acres of land were confis-
cated and distributed to almost 800,000 landless
farm workers, tenant, and part-tenant farmers.
The average size of the plots distributed was
slightly more than three acres, but the grants
varied according to a schedule based on the labor
power and consumption of each household.

Since the land redistribution brought "free"
land to more than 70 percent of North Korea's
farm population, half of the total population of
the region at one stroke was given to believe that
they had a stake in the regime.
I Land ownership was the bait, but the real pur-

I I pose of the reform was to lay the foundation for a
' rigid system of controls over the farmer and his

output. The first step was to secure control at the
village level. In every village, a "people's com-
mittee" was set up to work out a local land dis-
tribution plan. These special committees were
made up exclusively of former hired laborers and
tenant farmers. The previous village headmen
were kept out of the committees and prevented
from exercising any further authority. Korean
landlords were either removed to a different
' county, where they were permitted to work a small
plot of land under surveillance, or they were
driven to day labor in the cities.

I I April 9, J 95 J

The new land proprietors were given certificates
which stated that their parcels of land were per-
manently given to the recipients, but the land
could not be bought, sold, rented, or mortgaged.
Their right to the land, therefore, was confined to
its utilization, and, for this by the first decree, they
paid a tax-in-kind of 25 percent. In 1947, the
land tax was fixed at 27 percent on paddy land, 23
percent on dry land, and 10 percent on "fire fields"
or untilled land.

Results of False Promises

Tlie Soviet authorities made much of the low tax
rate for propaganda purposes, but the effective
rate was far higher than the book rate. This was
because the total assessment for all farms was
computed by the central authorities in order to
determine the rural share in financing the whole
economic plan. Starting from the top, the assess-
ment was broken down by province, county, town-
ship, and village, and at each level a "people's
committee" set the amount to be collected by the
units within its jurisdiction.

By the time the assessment rate reached the
village, it was already inflated — since it was based
on unrealistic estimates of expected yields — and
this inflation was passed on to the individual
farmer. The farmer's rate of tax-in-kind was
further inflated by the fact that he was required
to deliver only the best quality grain or other pro-
duce. In other words, in terms of value, he paid a
higher rate. In addition^ the tax was collected on
his entire output, including vegetables, livestock,
and industrial crops, regardless of the small
amount of any one product grown.

An inflated land tax, however, was only part of
what the farmer had to deliver. There were spe-
cial taxes, assessments and "voluntary" contribu-
tions ; his ox and cart were taxed, and he paid taxes
for irrigation, schools, the army, local autonomy,
and whatnot. Besides the increasing burden of
grain collections, the Korean farmers in 1950 were
compelled to purchase their allocated share of the
national bond issue.

Farmers in Noi'tli Korea consistently expressed
the opinion that, contrary to official figures, the
total agricultural production under the Commu-
nist regime did not reach preliberation levels and
fell far short of the ambitious goals set by the
regime's central planning. Nevertheless, the pres-
sure on the farmer was stepped up in every con-
ceivable way. In the beginning, the farmer was
free to dispose of his output in the free market,
but as collections became more severe, his market-
able surplus above consumption gradually disap-
peared. In 1949-50, there was increasing pressure
on the farmer to dispose of a lar^e share of mar-
keted crops through government channels at prices
lower than in the free market.

Under the national economic plan, the individ-
ual farmer became merely a producing unit subject
to rigid state supervision. Farmers were told

583

what crops to plant, what the yields should be,
how much fertilizer to use, and when to complete
the planting and harvesting. Assessments kept
pace with the growirig season, and the crop could
not be harvested until the last of three assessments
was completed.

As assessments fell short of over-all goals, the
crops were reassessed to the planned levels, re-
gardless of the farmers' ability to meet them. In
theory, a farmer could protest his assessment, but
since the case was always decided against him and
the result would be a higher assessment for the
following year, protests ceased to be made.

The Communist machinery of planned produc-
tion and pressurized collections required a horde
of officials for its operations. In addition to in-
spectors from township, county, and provincial
authorities, the police played an increasing role
not only in enforcing the central government's
decrees but also in cliecking on the loyalty of
farmers to the regime.

County police chiefs relayed to the township
police stations under their jurisdiction instruc-
tions regarding the assessment program and the
ideological trend of the village committees. Local
police conducted secret investigations of village
assessments and collections, inquired what the
farmers thought of the tax program, and looked
for signs of sabotage or activities by unreliable
elements.

Demand on Farmers for Public Labor

But grain was not all that the Communist
regime extracted from the North Korean farm-
ers; it also needed their labor on projects outside
of farming. The farming community offered the
largest pool of labor for executing the regime's
economic plan. Each farm household, therefore,
had to contribute 1 or 2 months of voluntary
labor time for local construction projects, such
as roads, bridges, and schools. In addition, the
entire farm population, between the ages of 18
and 55, excepting invalids and pregnant women,
was subject to 20 days of compulsory, uncompen-
sated labor service a year in national construction
projects or nationalized mines and factories.

So great was the regime's demand for free labor
that compulsory devices increased as time went
on. There were cases of farmers mobilized for
20 days' labor in nearby mines who had to stay
on the job for 6 months.

Beginning in 1949, the regime launched an in-
tensive campaign to induce members of farm
households to migrate to industrial centers, espe-
cially unmarried young women and widows. Spe-
cial agents of the Ministry of Labor were sent on
recruiting campaigns to the villages, where postere
and radio broadcasts promised a "livelihood for
two winters" to those who engaged in factory
work. Under a directive issued in 1949, all free
labor on farms and all farmers working dry land
with an incline of 15 degrees were ordered to the

584

cities as pennanent factory workers. The farm-
ers, however, clung to their dry, rolling acres and
the order produced meager results.

Five Years of Disillusionment

Up to the opening of hostilities in 1950, the
Communist regime approached the question of
collectivization cautiously. It had created a new
class of small land holders without great difficulty,
but it would not be easy to force these yeomen
into the collective pattern. There were a few state
farms, three to six, derived from submarginal land
formerly held by Japanese, but larger agricultural
units called for mechanization and agricultural
machinery was at a premium in North Korea.

There is evidence that the Pyongyang regime
planned to introduce collective farms on the heels
of the projected conquest of the Republic of Korea.
In 1950, professional writers in the Literary
League were assigned to picture the advantages
of collective farming, and lecturers on agriculture
extolled the collectives and national farms of the
U.S.S.R. as models for Korea. The Communist
authorities believed that the new farming class,
deprived of the "profit motive" by its inability to
accumulate any margin over the barest subsistence,
would voluntarily give up its shadowy claims on
the land and surrender the last of its slender inde-
pendence to collective dictation. The roar of
United Nations guns halted this gi-andiose
program.

The testimony of the North Korean farmers in-
terviewed was conclusive: None of them wanted
to see the return of the outworn system of absentee
landlordism with its usurious rentals. Their ex-
perience with Communist "land reform," on the
other hand, left them bitterly disillusioned. The
new masters had inflicted unbearable burdens and
had reduced them to slaves of the soil and vic-
tims of a ruthless bureaucracy. Their promised
"independence" had not materialized. They were
herded into unpaid labor for the regime and their
households threatened with dismemberment by
conscription into industrial servitude. Five years
of heartbreaking, unrewarded labor had taught
them the true meaning of the Communist dictator-
ship.

Japanese Treaty Discussed

With American Officials in London

John M. Allison, deputy to John Foster Dulles
for Japanese peace-treaty matters, departed on
March 19 for a brief visit to the American Em-
bassy, London. The purpose of Mr. Allison's trip
was to bring the Ambassador and Embassy staff
up to date on the exchanges of views which have
been taking place with respect to a treaty of peace
with Japan.

Department of State Bulletin

Workshops of Liberty

Remarks iy Dr. Henry G. Bennett
Technical Cooperation Administrator ^

It is a useful and comforting thing for us to
remember that we are living in the stream of his-
tory. The great issues of our time were handed
down to us through many generations, and we,
in turn, will hand them on. We cannot hope to
decide these issues — I doubt if they will ever be
finally decided. But we can make it our solemn
duty to keep these issues alive and to throw our
full weight to the side that we believe is right.

The issue I have in mind to discuss with you
today was probably best stated a hundred and
twenty-five years ago. It concerns our place, as
Americans, in the world community. And the
remarkable thing, as I see it, is that as long ago
as 1826, when this young Republic was faced with
tremendous domestic problems, a leading Ameri-
can was thinking of his country's obligation of
leadership to the world's people.

On January 23, 1826, James Madison wrote to
a friend :

Our country, if it does justice to itself, will be the
Officina Liliertatis (workshop of liberty) to the Civil-
ized World, and do more than any other for the un-
civilized.

Challenging Questions

"The workshop of liberty": let's explore the
meaning of those words. Most of us think of
America as the home of liberty; we regard our-
selves as the defenders of liberty. Madison de-
liberately called upon our country to be a work-
shop of liberty. Thus, he challenged Americans
to become artisans, continuously experimenting
and faithfully fashioning the great idea of human
freedom into a reality. Have we accepted that
challenge? Are we accepting it today?

I do know that the opportunities for our coun-
try to be a workshop of liberty are greater today
than ever before. The people of other countries

" Made liefore the Forum on "Great Issues," Tulane Uni-
versity, New Orleans, La., on Mar. 28 and released to
the press on the same date.

are aware that we have something to offer the
world — not just dollars or the products of our
farms and factories — but something infinitely more
valuable. We can extend a helping hand to those
who want to help themselves — something they
can accept with confidence and self-respect and
friendship. And they are reaching out eagerly
to clasp that helping hand. They are looking
to America as a workshop of liberty.

Desire for Technical Assistance in Africa

A few days ago, I received an envelope contain-
ing several letters, all of them from a place I had
never heard of before — the town of Ogbomosho in
Nigeria, West Africa. These letters are so ex-
pressive of the hope with which people in far-off
places look to the United States that I want to
I'ead you excerpts from one of them :

We the undersigned, representing the Baptist Pastors
of Ogbomosho, Nigeria, West Africa, seize this opportunity
to communicate you for the first time at the inception of
this New Tear, 1951.

Over a century ago, the Gospel message was brought to
Nigeria from the Southern Baptist Convention of the
United States of America. We are grateful unto God and
our thanlis to the Missionaries who helped in the past,
who help now, and who will help in the future. . . .

For the past five years, the Baptist Churches of Ogbomo-
sho, the Missionaries, and the town-people have been con-
templating on improving the agricultural resources of the
town. . . . Joy filled our hearts when we learned of the
plan of the American Government as regards the develop-
ment scheme for certain remote parts in the world, which
is entrusted to your care. We hereby appeal to you to
"Come over into Macedonia (Ogbomosho) and help us."
We shall be grateful if Ogbomosho will be included in your
programme in developing the agricultural resources of the
town.

This need is felt by all the populace of Ogbomosho.
Here is our call from Ogbomosho to America through
Dr. H. G. Bennett as we have been privileged to obtain
spiritual security tlirough the Gospel of Christ brought
from America to us in Africa, we earnestly crave for help
for economic security.

"Economic security." To most Americans, that
means earning enough money to live comfortably,
and saving enough to live on in our old age. To

April 9, ?957

585

millions of people in other parts of the world, eco-
nomic security means something much more imme-
diate and urgent. It means their daily bread —
where the next meal is coming from. They don't
want charity from us — they want our help in
learning how to produce more food and other
necessities for themselves. Whether they are going
to receive that kind of help — enough of it and in
time — is one of the great issues of our day.

And these people are concerned not only with
improving their material welfare, with getting
enough food to eat. They also feel a spiritual and
intellectual hunger, and they are reaching out for
help to satisfy those wants as well.

Visit to Soutli American Training Scliooi

I recently returned from a short trip to 10 of
our neighboring countries to the south, in Latin
America. I saw and learned many things of in-
terest and value, but one of the things I will
remember longest is an incident that occurred in a
little village high in the Andes.

There, I went to see a training school conducted
by a few American educators for teachers who
serve the schools in that area. The surrounding
country is 2i/^ to 3 miles above sea level and, to all
appearances, is a cold, bleak, hostile land. Yer,
people live there by choice and endure hardships
in order to make their home there. They are pure-
blooded Indians and have lived in that environ-
ment for generations and have adjusted to it.

Near the building in which the training center
was held was another building, about half com-
pleted. That was a handsome new school, which
the people of that community were building on
their own initiative, with their own resources, so
that their children could enjoy opportunities for
a better education. Each of them contributed a
peck of potatoes, a sheep, or something else from
their scant production, from time to time, to the
building fund.

While we were there, a delegation of the village
elders called on me — the chiefs, the leaders of their
people. They were simply dressed in the costume
of the country, and their faces showed the patience
and stoicism of their race. But they were any-
thing but stolid in arguing the case for their
school.

One of the older chiefs, speaking through an
interpreter, said he had begun to work for the new
school 38 years ago and foretold then that someday
a sti'anger would appear and offer to help the com-
munity with the project. Now, he felt that his
prediction was coming true. He said he would die
happy if he could see the roof put on the new
school.

It was a moving occasion, and I felt that the
least I could do wiis to res])ond that, as a repre-
sentative of President Truman and as an elected
chief of the Comanche tribe, I had come to offer
the cooperation of tlie United States in their effort
to achieve a better life.

Further Facts on American Aid

A few miles from that school is an experiment
station, where local technicians under the direc-
tion of an American agi-icultural scientist are
carrying on research on land provided by the Gov-
ernment. The ])rogress that has been made there
in only 2 years convinced me that this cooperative
project, if continued and expanded, can revolu-
tionize farm life in this region and make life better
for the people even in that forbidding environ-
ment.

These were some of the things I saw and ex-
perienced on my trip, the purpose of which was
to get some first-hand knowledge of the work being
done by about 175 American technicians in those
10 Latin American countries under President Tru-
man's Point 4 Program.

We call this work "technical cooperation." Let
me give you an idea of what those words mean.
To understand them, we must remember, first, that
these neighbors of ours to the south have for gen-
erations been burdened with intense poverty, with
epidemic disease, and with lack of educational op-
portunities. There you have people living among
rich mineral and agricultural resources. But those
resources are still largely untapped and unused
for their own benefit.

There, you have people who are hungry living
among fields that could yield abundant food. I
am convinced that the food supplies of Peru,
Bolivia, and other countries I visited could be
doubled within 5 years — with the application of
water, improved seed, and more modern methods
of tilling and preserving the soil, and bringing
more land under cultivation.

There, you have people who are intelligent,
alert, and thirsty for education. But, because they
don't have adequate schools and teachers, the
majority of them cannot read or write.

Against this background, a handful of Ameri-
can technicians are carrying on a work of technical
cooperation. First of all, they are helping the
people to stamp out disease. That is a basic need.
Clean water is the first requisite, and it takes only
the skill of a sanitary engineer and some simple,
inexpensive equipment to show people how to
build a safe water system. Once that is done, j'ou
have practically wiped out typhoid and dysentery.

It takes the same sort of sKill and a little more
equipment to show people how to build modern
sewage systems. A community in Chile recently
celebrated the completion of a sewage system,
built with the help of a young American sanitary
engineer. The townfolk had a ceremony. They
raised the American flag and unveiled a tablet
commemorating what was for them a great event.

American technicians are demonstrating other
kinds of health practices. They are helping to
set up clinics among people deep in the jungle
who have never known medical care. They are
training nurses and niidwivos, who, in turn, are
teaching women how to bear and raise healthy
children.

586

Department of State Bulletin

Now, second, American agricultural specialists
are helping these neighbors of ours to grow more
food. They are showing them the advantages of
improved seed, contour plowing, of crop rota-
tion, and of growing legumes to enrich their soil.
They are helping the people to organize farm ex-
tension services and -i-H Clubs. I had the rare
pleasure of meeting with a group of youngsters
and their own 4-H leader — not an American —
but one who had profited by the knowledge of an
American extension man.

Having been in the business of agricultural edu-
cation most of my life, I got the greatest thrill
out of this work of helping people fight hunger.
And what I saw convinced me that these neighbors
of ours to the south can not only feed themselves
adequately and well within a very few years —
they can help to feed the world.

We hear a lot these days about the importance
of strategic materials. Well, food is the most im-
portant of all such materials. It is the key to
individual productivity. It provides the energy
to work, to get ahead, and to build a better life.

Health, food, and education: these are three of
the keys to economic development which is the
aim of the Point 4 Program. As I watched this
work of technical cooperation, which is nothing
more or less than helping people to help them-
selves, I realized that these Point 4 projects are
really miniature workshops of liberty. They are
helping people to free themselves from the bond-
age of poverty, ignorance, and disease.

Now you may say : "These are fine words." Let
us explore exactly what they mean and do not
mean. American technicians do not go out to
other countries to preach democracy. They do not
think of themselves as salesmen of the American
way of life. Their job is to work with people who
are ready and eager to profit by certain kinds of
knowledge and certain skills which they have.
Their job is to help people do the things they want
to do.

where a farm family cannot by its combined labors
expect to feed itself decently.

It is a good thing to have individual liberty
written into a constitution. It is a necessary thing
to have laws which safeguard the rights of the
individual.

But the practice of liberty begins with hope and
a sense of growing independence. These are
among tlie products of the workshops I have
described.

The Point 4 Program is not confined to Latin
America. Today, there are American technicians
at work in some 30 countries whose Governments
and people have expressed a desire to cooperate
with the United States. In Africa, the Middle
East, and South Asia this growing cooperation
acts as a kind of j'east, stimulating a new growth
of economic and social progress.

The ferment had already begvm when Point 4
came along. The people were ready for change.
They were ready to break out of the vicious circle
of poverty, disease, and ignorance. This ferment
was a good and healthy uiing, and we welcomed
it. It took the form of a drive for national inde-
pendence. We understood this drive, and we have
given it a helping hand where we could.

It is taking the form also of a search for new
skills, new tools, and new ideas. We understand
this search, and we welcome it too. The Point 4
Program comes at a psychological moment. We
Americans have no monopoly, but we are relatively
well equipped with skills and tools. Moreover, we
have had some experience in experimenting with
ideas — most important of all, with the idea of
liberty.

So, I believe, we have an opportunity here to
take up the challenge that Madison offered to our
country. What we do now may not decide the
issue in our generation. But we can, at least, make
certain that workshops of liberty are kept in op-
eration for generations to come.

The Psychological Moment for Point 4 Program

The method of the Point 4 Program is coopera-
tion. The subject matter of this cooperation may
be a problem in health, food supply, education or
mineral development, or to survey the economic
needs of a whole country. The immediate purpose
of this cooperation is to enable people to become
economically self-supporting and independent of
outside help.

Economic self-support and independence is a
basic and essential ingredient of liberty. The
sense of opportunity and hope that comes with
economic independence is another essential ingre-
dient of liberty.

We speak of the free world. But those words
have little reality where people are captives of
habitual hunger, disease, and ignorance ; where a
child cannot expect to live beyond the age of 30;

April 9, J 951

Civil Defense Mutual Aid Agreement
With Canada

The United States and Canada exchanged notes which
constitute a Civil Defense Mutual Aid Agreement tetween
the two countries. Simultaneous announcement of the
agreement was made on March 21 in Washington and
Ottawa by Millard Caldwell, Federal Civil Defense Admin-
istrator of the United States, and by Paul Martin, Minister
of National Health and Welfare of Canada.

March 27, 1951

Sir, I have the honour to refer to the conference
held in Ottawa on February 21, 1951, of Civil
Defence authorities of the Governments of the
United States of America and Canada.

Pursuant to the unanimous recommendation of
that conference, I am instructed by the Canadian

587

Government to propose that an agreement in the
following terms be concluded between our Govern-
ments :

As far as possible, Civil Defence activities in the United
States and Canada should be co-ordinated for the protec-
tion of persons and property from the result of enemy
attack as if there were no border. The following arrange-
ments are made to ensure such co-ordination in matters
of Civil Defence.

Except as regards matters of broad government policy,
for which the diplomatic channels would be appropriate,
the normal channel of communication between the two
countries with regard to civil defence matters will be
between the Co-ordinator of Civil Defence in Canada (or
any successor authority) and the Administrator, Federal
Civil Defence Administration in the United States (or
any succe.ssor authority), referred to hereafter as the
"Federal Civil Defence Authority" or "Authorities." This
will not prevent the use of other channels where appro-
priate, or as may be authorized by the Federal Civil De-
fence Authorities, but in the event of other channels of
communication or agencies of co-operation being used,
the Federal Civil Defence Authority in each country will
be informed immediately.

The Federal Civil Defence Authority in each country
will keep the other Informed about developments under
consideratioto and action taken regarding:

(a) Organization, legislation and regulations (includ-
ing federal, state and provincial) for Civil Defence.

(b) Material, equipment, supplies and facilities (re-
search, development, standardization and availability).

(c) Training (schools, courses, pamphlets, methods,
etc.).

(d) Arrangements with state, provincial and munic-
ipal authorities and other agencies.

(e) Public information and education.

The Federal Civil Defence Authority of each country
will:

(a) Exchange personnel at a working level.

(b) Offer training facilities to students designated
by the other country.

So that all civil defence supplies, equipment and facili-
ties (including medical, hospital, fire-fighting, police, res-
cue, evacuation, welfare, transportation, communication
and other similar services) may be utilized to the fullest
extent in connection with civil defence preparations, exer-
cises and action, appropriate legislation will be sought,
regulations made or instructions given in connection with
customs, immigration, integration of services and facilities
and other matters whether under federal, state, provincial
or municipal jurisdiction.

State and provincial Civil Defence authorities in adja-
cent jurisdictions will be authorized by the Federal Civil
Defence authorities to confer together to insure co-opera-
tion between them on civil defence. Similarly, state and
provincial authorities will be empowered by the Federal
Civil Defence authorities to authorize co-operation be-
tween border municipalities to co-ordinate planning and
provide for immediate warning and action in the event of
attack. Such co-operation will be in accordance with the
policy laid down in each country by tlie Federal Civil
Defence Authority.

The cost of civil defence assistance furnished by one
country in connection with an attack upon the other
country shall be reimbursed by the country attacked. The
Federal Civil Defence Authorities will co-operate in rec-
ommending to their respective governments a detailed
financial agreement to give effect to this policy.

A Joint United States/Canadian Civil Defence Commit-
tee is liereby established. The Committee will consist of
the Federal Civil Defence Authorities and such other
members as may be designated by them. The Committee
may establish, from time to time, such working groups and
sutvcommittei's as may be necessary. This Committee
will recommend, jointly, to their resjiective governments

588

such action as is considered desirable to Insure the closest
co-operation.

If this proposal is acceptable to your Govern-
ment, this Note and your reply will constitute an
agreement between our two Governments on this
subject which shall enter into force on the date
of your note and which may be terminated on six
months notice by either Government.

Accept [etc.]

H. Hume Wrong

March £7, 1951
Excellency : I have the honor to refer to your
note No. 161 of March 27, 1951 containing recom-
mendations for civil defense cooperation whichf
have been agreed upon by the civil defense au-
thorities of the Government of the United States
of America and the Government of Canada.

The proposals contained in your note are accept-
able to the Government of the United States of
America, and it is agreed that your note and this
reply thereto shall constitute an agreement be-
tween our two Governments on this subject which
shall enter into force on the date of this note and
which may be terminated on six months notice by
either Government.
Accept [etc.]

Dean Aciieson

U. S.-Liberian Agreement Provides
Amateur Radio Communications

[Released to the press March 20]

By means of an exchange of notes between th«^
American Embassy in Liberia and the Liberiarl
Department of State, dated November 9, 1950
and January 8, 1951, a bilateral agreement be-^
tween the United States and the Republic oJ|
Liberia directly affecting licensed amateurs of th«|
two countries has been concluded. Under th(
terms of this agreement, amateur radio stationsi
of the Republic of Liberia and of the Uniteci
States may exchange international messages oi|
other communications from or to third partie."
provided :

1. No compensation may be directly or indi
rectly paid on such messages or communications

2. Such communications shall be limited to con
versations or messages of a technical or persona
nature for which, by reason of their unimportuiicc
recourse to the public telecommunications servict
is not justified. To the extent that in the event o1
disaster, the public telecommunications service h
not readily available for expeditious handlinj:
of communications relating directly to safety ot
life or property, such comnuinications may bt i
handled by amateur stations of the respective I

countries. jM

(Continued on page 592) I

Department of State Bulletin

ECA and Schuman Plan Advance European Recovery

THIRD ANNIVERSARY OF ECA

Statement hy the President

[Released to the press bij the White House April 2]

On this third anniversary, it gives me great
pleasure to congratulate you who have carried out
so well the aims of the European Recovery Pro-
gram.

^Vhen General Marshall first made his pro-
posal, tlie shadow of economic collapse, with its
attendant evils of unemployment, of hunger and
political unrest, liung over the countries of West-
ern Europe. The great question in 1947 was
whether free institutions could survive.

Today, thanks primarily to their own efforts,
the people of Western Europe, together with our
help, have rebuilt the economies of their countries
and have developed a new spirit of confidence in
themselves and in their free institutions. To my
mind, this spirit, this rising confidence in the
hearts of the people, is one of the greatest sources
of strength in the free world.

By working together, economic recovery has
been substantially achieved. However, with the
present threat to world peace, new tasks have been
imposed upon us. The free nations are now com-
bining to convert their resources into military
strength to preserve the peace and defend our
freedoms.

The splendid organization which has been de-
veloped under the Economic Cooperation Admin-
istration can make an important contribution in
lelping develop this strength. Accordingly, I
ntend to recommend to the Congress that ECA
36 maintained on a continuing basis to help carry
)ut the programs essential to the security of the
free world.

There is much to be done in Europe, in Asia,
md in other parts of the world, to help the free
;ountries build their military, economic and spir-
tual defenses against aggression from without and
subversion from within. One of our essential
objectives is to develop, in cooperation with other
Tee nations, an expanding world economy, the
benefits of which can be shared by us all.

On this anniversary, I extend to all of you my
sincere thanks for what you have done. I am
confident that in its new tasks the ECA will con-
tinue to make a vital contribution in helping to
build the strength of the free world upon which
security and freedom rest.

Remarhs hy Secretary Acheson ^

One of the most inspiring developments of our
time is the phenomenal progress made by the
people of Europe in recovering from the ravages
of war.

This recovery, although it may be measured or
described in material terms, is above all a triumph
of the spirit. The character and determination
of the people, the courage and vision of their
leaders — this is what the recovery of Europe is
built on.

The importance of this recovery to the rest of
the world was foreseen and stated for us by Presi-
dent Truman and General Marshall in 1947. They
foresaw that it was not only the well-being of the
people of Europe which was at stake but it was
something even more. It was also world peace
which was hanging in the balance, for the power
of Europe is crucial to the peace of the world.

The Economic Cooperation Administration,
built upon this vision, today celebrates its third
anniversary. It is a matter of pride to the people
of America that we have been able, through the
Economic Cooperation Administration, to play
a role in supporting the great achievements of
the people of Europe. By assisting in the return
and further growth of economic vitality in
Europe, we have measurably advanced our com-
mon security.

It is fitting, on the occasion of this anniversary,
that we should honor the distinguished Foreign
Minister of France, Robert Schuman. Truly a

' Made at Washington at ceremonies commemorating
the third anniversary of the European Cooperation Ad-
ministration on Apr. 2 and released to the press on the
same date.

\pt\l 9, 7951

589

statesman, in the fullest sense of the word, M.
Schuman stands at the forefront of the leaders of
Europe whose creative imagination and coura-
freous initiative helped to spark the miracle of
European recovery.

As the father of the plan for the pooling of coal
and iron production in Europe, M. Schuman has
pointed the way toward a solution of Europe's
most grievous and most critical problem — the
rivalry which has existed between his country
and Germany.^

More than this, the Schuman Plan, when it has
been converted into reality by the favorable action
of the parliaments of the six participating coun-
tries, will help to further the process whereby the
people of Germany may be brought more closely
within the European community as equal partners
with the people of other nations.

The plan of M. Schuman carries forward the
fundamental concept of the European Recovery
Program — a joint effort among the nations of
Europe toward greater freedom of trade, leading
to higher standards of living for their people.

For this vision, and the leadership which has
inspired the development of this plan, the name of
Robert Schuman deserves and receives our pro-
found respect.

Address hy Robert Schuman
French Foreign Minister '

A happy coincidence has afforded me the honor
of attending this celebation of the third birthday
anniversay of EGA. and of addressing this meet-
ing in the name of the European countries which
are the beneficiaries of this splendid American
initiative.

First, as Minister of Finances, and then as
Prime Minister, I have taken part in the negotia-
tion, later in the signature of the agi'eements and
arrangements which were concluded on this sub-
ject between the United States and France.

Before going further, I wish to render grateful
homage to the man whose name will be forever
associated with the policy of international solid-
arity. Having prepared the ground for economic
cooperation between the nations of the two con-
tinents, he is now again the leader of a military
cooperation for Atlantic defense. General Mar-
shall belongs to that line of American statesmen
who never seek to avoid their country's call, nor to
shirk difficult international duties even though it
would seem that their past great accomplishments
and personal considerations would entitle them to
decline such an accumulation of responsibilities
and sacrifices.

The Marshall Plan has been more than a gesture
of human brotherhood. It has been the expression

' For an article on the Schuman Plan, see Bulletin of
Apr. 2, 1951, p. 523.

"Made on Apr. 2 upon the occasion of tlio third an-
niversary of the Economic Cooperation Administration.

590

of a farsighted policy. You have never wanted
the countries of Europe to sink in misery and in
despair. Having saved them from Hitlerism, you
have protected them from communism. You have
clearly understood that should Western Europe he
lost for our civilization, a sinister threat, perhaps g
beyond remedy, would overwhelm all of humanity.
Whoever rules Europe rules the world. Without
a free Europe, there is no assurance of liberty for
any other country.

Our destinies are obviously bound together.
We must, in the same way, be bound together in
our efforts and sacrifices. No country can be
saved in spite of itself. No country can be saved
unless it cooperates, unless it participates in the
struggle, unless it contributes all its resources
and energies for its own salvation.

In order to be effective, the American aid could
not and should not have been merely a generous
gift of alms. It was conceived as the initial en-
dowment of a vast plan for European recovery.

You did not bring us merely financial help, but
also an idea, a program of which we were to be
not only the beneficiaries but also the artisans.
The aim was not only to help us through a criti-
cal period but also to provide us with protection
from further crises, to make us strong enough to
face and overcome them by our own means. In
a word, your aim was to provide again to our*
ruined and devastated continent the possibility
of living by its own labor, in free cooperation withi
other Nations.

After its political liberation, Europe was thus
able to recover the freedom of its economic initia-
tive. Here is the deep and durable meaning oj
the Marshall Plan. The people of Europe havf
understood it.

Today, we are proud to say that not only havf
you saved us from starvation and unemployment
by sending us bread and raw materials, but that
you have enabled us to rebuild a Europe fully 1
capable of supporting itself by its work and its^
commerce.

Indeed, other problems have meanwhile been
added to the earlier ones. In 1948, our task was
to adapt our activity to the normal needs of the
country. The urgent requirements of security and
the rise in the prices of raw materials are upsetting
the equilibrium that we were on the point oi
achieving.

Furthermore, the future of underdeveloped
countries for which we are responsible must mort'
and more become the object of our concern and of
our planning, as President Truman has stressed.

Europe is not discoiu'aged by the new effort
which has been asked of her. The restdts already
achieved, thanks to tlie implementation of the
Marshall Plan, in improving our economic situa-
tion over the last 3 years permit Europe to envisage
her futiu-e with confidence.

Europe feels herself regenerated not only
cause of the effort put forth by each individui

;age ,
bJ

Deparfmeni of Sfafe Bulletin

country, but because the European nations are
organizing and uniting among themselves. This
is ii,sain a result of the Marshall Plan.

The European Organization for Economic Co-
operation was created in aid of the execution of
this plan. It groups the 18 free countries of
Western Europe in a common endeavor of re-
construction, modernization, and expansion. It is
the body M'hich most represents the whole of
European production.

In addition to this continental organization, re-
gional initiatives remain possible and desirable,
provided they are in accordance with a general
coherent plan. In this framework appears the
imminent creation by six European countries, com-
prising 160 million inhabitants, of a single market
for coal and steel, luider the control of an inde-
pendent supranational authority. The objective
is to increase production, to produce and to sell
at the lowest possible prices, to improve at the
same time the general welfare, especially that of
the workers of every category.

In place of a divided Europe, exhausting her-
self in isolation and sterile rivalries, we are pro-
gressively substituting a United Europe, animated
with a European spirit.

In the course of two centuries, you Americans
have forged your own unity. Our wish is that, at
the side of a strong America, the citadel of world
freedom, and in a close friendship with her, a
Europe conscious of her own destiny should arise,
a Europe determined to develop fully, and to
share, all its material and spiritual resources, in
a freely organized European community.

Together, we will thus pursue the work under-
taken 3 years ago, faithful to the spirit of those
■who have conceived and implemented it. This will
be the best way in which we can express our grati-
tude, this will be for them the supreme reward.

Remar'ks hy A. Averell Uarriman
Special Assistant to the President

[Released to the press Ijii Ihc White House April 2]

It is a great satisfaction for me to be here today
with my old colleagues of the EGA. You men and
women and your associates abroad have contrib-
uted so greatly to the success of the Marshall Plan.

It is good to have with us Paul Hoffman, who
gave us all such inspired leadership. And we are
especially fortunate in the presence of the Foreign
Minister of France, Robert Schuman. With his
broad vision and human understanding, he has
given effective leadership to the cause of European
unity.

The Marshall Plan will go down in history as a
great accomplishment in cooperation among free
nations and free men. On the material side, there
have been outstanding achievements. But of even
greater importance has been the development of
! the sense that men of many nations can work to-

getlier for common purpose — for common welfare.
I think it is no exaggeration to say that the strong
bonds which today unite the nations of the North
Atlantic community, would not exist had it not
been for the successful experience of working to-
gether during tliese last 3 years under the Euro-
pean Recovery Program. This unity, this sense
of interdependence in the North Atlantic com-
munity, is one of the greatest assets of the free
world as a whole in its present struggle.

You men and women can take great satisfaction
in the part tliat you have played in these events.

Export- Import Bank Loan to Spain
for Temporary Wheat Purchases

[Released to the press by the Export-Import Bank
March 16]

Spain has been granted a credit of up to 5 mil-
lion dollars by the Export-Import Bank with the
approval of the Economic Cooperation Adminis-
trator on the basis of an authorization in title 1,
chapter XI of the General Appropriations Act
of 1951.

The present credit is to permit the purchase of
wheat and, thereby, ameliorate the temporary
shortage of wheat prevailing in Spain prior to
the harvests.

Of the four credits previously established by the
Bank, three were for the purpose of assisting Spain
to revive her agricultural output, thus enabling
her to be less dependent on foreign sources for
foodstuffs by providing her with an increased sup-
ply of fertilizers, tractors, and spare parts; the
fourth credit was" for raw cotton to be used in
the major industry of the coiuitry for production
both for the domestic market and for export.^

Food Situation in India Critical

[Released to the press March SO]

The Department has received a report from the
American Embassy at New Delhi underscoring the
critical food situation in the densely populated
rural areas of northern Bihar Province in north-
eastern India.

According to this report, Clifford C. Taylor,
Counselor of the Embassy at New Delhi, visited
Bihar Province during the past week on a per-
sonal tour of the area inspecting conditions there
and discussing the situation with Indian officials
in the province. Taylor personally inspected ra-

"BtTLLETiN of Mar. 5, 1951, p. 380.

April 9, J 95 J

591

tion shops, stocks of foodstuflfs in Indian Govern-
ment warehouses, crop conditions, and privately
owned stocks.

In tlie noi-theastern district of the province,
Taylor found that drought had reduced the rice
crop by 50 j^erccnt. In the Purnea area, in the
northeast corner of the province which is most
acutely affected by the drought, Taylor found ex-
tremely meager stocks of recently harvested rice.
Barley and wheat were being harvested, but
yields — due partially to unimportant acreage — but
chiefly due to drought conditions, ranged between
150 to 300 pounds to the acre. Farmers and offi-
cials of the area pointed out that no important
crop harvest was possible before December of this
year. Moreover, the soil was found to be too dry
to plant corn.

Taylor observed that although an 8-ounce ration
had been authorized for the most needy portion of
the population in the Purnea district, stocks avail-
able in ration shops were insufficient to meet half
this meager ration. Supplies on hand, Taylor
found, consisted mainly of grain sorghums, pur-
chased and imported from the United States, and
wheat imported from various sources. The Amer-
ican grain sorghums, Taylor found, were very
popular among the local population of the area.

The seriousness of the situation, Taylor was
informed, lay in the fact that this heavily popu-
lated area, stricken by drought and with inade-
quate reserve supplies of foodstuffs available, was
becoming increasingly dependent upon imported
supplies. Officials emphasized that this condition,
already serious, might become critical unless suffi-
cient supplies could be imported to tide over the
population until the next harvest. And it was
pointed out that the monsoon season with its tor-
rential rains would begin in June when roads
would become virtually impassable. Conse-
quently, Taylor was informed, supplies must be
imported and distributed before the monsoon
season sets in.

Immediate Legislation Urged
To Provide Grain for India

Statement by the President

[Released to the press hy the White House March 20]

India has an urgent need for grain to prevent
suffering and starvation. This I pointed out in
my message of February twelfth to the Congress.^
My views have not changed. We can, at some
sacrifice, spare the grain. We should do so — firet,
to save human lives and, secondly, to strengthen
freedom and democracy in an important area of

' BuLiJmN of Feb. 26, 1951, p. .'WO.
592

Asia. Moreover, we should provide the first mil-
lion tons promptly as a grant. We can then ex-
plore in greater detail the situation with respect
to the remaining million tons.

India must have 6 million tons of grain in order
to meet the famine conditions caused by severe
drought. India has made arrangements to buy
4 million tons through ordinary sources including
United States suppliers. To pay for the addi-
tional 2 million tons of grain would place too
great a strain on the financial resources of India
and would prevent the carrying out of its essen-
tial development program. In addition, with the
provision of grain to India as a grant, the Indian
Government will deposit the local currency com-
ing from the distribution of the grain to the Indian
people into a special account which can be used
for agricultural development projects in India
agreed to by us. These projects will help alleviate
the recurrence of such conditions as the present.

The House Foreign Affairs Committee care-
fully investigated this matter and. on March fifth,
favorably reported a bill to provide the grain to
India. This bill has bipartisan support. It re-
flects the desire of the American people to help
the Indian people in their present emergency.

Prompt action is vital. The monsoon season
occurs in India during the summer. Many roads
are then made impassable and gi'ain shipments to
remote areas are greatly impaired. Each day's
delay after April first in starting shipments will
leave a serious gap in India's food supply later
this summer and cause great suffering. I hope,
therefore, that the Congress will enact the neces-
sary legislation as soon as possible after its recess.

U.S.-Liberia — Continued from pape 588

3. This arrangement shall apply to all the con-
tinental and insular territory of Liberia and to
the United States and its territories and posses-
sions, including Alaska, the Hawaiian Islands,
Puerto Eico, and the Virgin Islands, and to the
Panama Canal Zone. It shall also be applicable
to the case of amateur stations licensed by the
United States authorities to United States citi-
zens in other areas of the world in which the
United States exercises licensing authority.

4. This arrangement shall be subject to termi-
nation by either Government on 60 days notice to
the other Government, by further arrangement
between the two Governments dealing with the
same subject, or by the enactment of legislation in
either country inconsistent therewith.

As a matter of related interest, amateur sta-
tions licensed by the Federal Communications
Commission hei-etofore have been able, under and
in accordance with the terms of the previously
effected arrangements, to exchange international
messages or other communications from or to
third parties with amateur stations of Canada,
Chile, Peru, and Ecuador.

Department of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

The Provisional Frequency Board in Retrospect

AN EFFORT TO SATISFY MODERN NEEDS FOR RADIO FREQUENCIES

iy Mane Louise Smith

One of the most significant postwar efforts to
satisfy equitably modern world needs for radio
frequencies was that of the Provisional Frequency
Board (Pfb). Little known outside technical
circles, the activities of this Board constituted one
of the quietest yet most important chapters in the
continuing effort to finalize a new world-wide
radio frequency list covei'ing that portion of the
spectrum which has been opened for use to date.
Although the Board did not fully achieve its
objective of preparing a di"aft list, for reasons
beyond the control of any international body in
the present restive world, the concept embodied
in its formation has special significance to inter-
national relations in the telecommunication field.
It represented a new approach to the baffling task
of finding some means for a fair sharing by all
countries of available radio frequencies — an item
in scarce supply. Under this approach, nations
would obligate themselves to the predetermined
usage of every frequency in the radio spectrum.

The Board's technical task was unprecedented,
in view of the almost unbelievable advancement in
the science of electronics during the last decade
with resulting increased uses and corresponding
claimants for space in the radio spectrum. These
increased demand for frequencies could not be met
under the outmoded system ^ for registration of
frequency usage provided for at the Cairo Radio

' Undt^r this system, rountrifs notifiecl the Bern Bureau
of the Itu of frequency assignments to stations, relying
upon a rather ill-tlefined priority system as the determin-
ing factor in cases where more than one national adminis-
tration claimed the same frequency. Also, there was no
machinery to determine in advance whether a-ssifoiments
registered were likely to create international interference.

Conference in 1938. The limited achievements of
the Pfb have been under study by member coun-
tries of the International Telecommunication
Union (Itu) during the last 9 months, and its
findings and conclusions will largely determine
the next step toward the finalization of a new
international radio frequency list — for which a
1951 tentative target date has been set.

Background

At the initiative of the United States, the Pfb
was created by the Atlantic City Radio Conference
in 1947 to continue the work commenced by one
of the Conference committees." Comprised of the
technical experts of the radio world, the Pfb
was assigned the task of reengineering operating
radio frequency assignments throughout the world
to conform with the new table of allocations
adopted at Atlantic City, thereby conserving spec-
trum space and eliminating interference. The
Atlantic City table allotted blocks of frequencies
to each type of radio communication, including
fixed services, aeronautical and maritime services,
and amateur, standard band and high frequency

^ Committee 6 of the International Radio Conference of
Atlantic City in 1947 undertook to prepare plans based
on engineering principles for use as a guide in making
frequency assignments to the radio stations of the various
services and, based upon these plans, to compile for the
approval of the Conference the first edition of the Official
International Frequency List. The List would cover fre-
quencies up to .30,000 kc. Because of the delay in obtain-
ing an accurate indication of each country's circuit and
frequency requirements and the time required to complete
necessary technical studies concerning the engineering
phases of the project, it was necessary to establish a
special Board to carry on the undertaking.

Aprii 9, J 95 J

593

broadcasting. Tlie Pfb was to transfer existing
and projected radio services of all countries to the
bands of frequencies allotted for each service by
the new table. In so doing, the Pfb was to try
to make adequate provision for future develop-
ment of new radio services and expansion of exist-
ing services so that all countries might improve
and increase their radio communications to the
fullest extent practicable. Communication serv-
ices interrupted by World War II were to be
treated on the same basis as existing services.
Special consideration was to be given to the needs
of countries where natural development had been
impeded, especially as a result of the war.

The Pfb was to deal specifically with the assign-
ment of frequencies to fixed, tropical broadcasting
and land stations within the frequency band in-
cluded between 10 kilocycles and 30 megacycles.
Starting with requirements submitted by the vari-
ous national administrations at Atlantic City, the
Pfb had authority to request from any country
additional information regarding the operation
of any circuit, if deemed necessary in furtherance
of its work.

In cases which could not be resolved satisfac-
torily on a sound engineering basis, the Pfb was to
give consideration to the dates of notification to
the Bern Bureau as well as to the priority of estab-
lishment of the circuits under consideration. Any
such frequency assignment, which the Pfb was
unable to settle satisfactorily, was to be dealt with
by the extraordinary conference.

In order to relieve the Pfb of some of the work
involved in this prodigious undertaking, the At-
lantic City Conference assigned certain frequency
bands to be dealt with by special conferences con-
cerned with sta,ndard band broadcasting, high
frequency broadcasting and tlie aeronautical serv-
ices, and by Itu regional conferences to deal with
the geographic apportionment of frequencies.
Any assignment bands prepared by the service
and regional conferences were to be turned over
to the Pfb as a package for incorporation into the
draft of the new international frequency list.
Once a complete draft list was prepared, it would
then be submitted to an extraordinary administra-
tive radio conference, to be convened by the Ittj
for the purpose of approving the new list and
establishing appropriate machineiy for its imple-
mentation. The Pfb was scheduled for dissolu-
tion upon the dat« the new list was accepted.

The Pfb convened on January 15, 1948.
Originally scheduled to complete a draft list by
November 15, 1948, the deadline was extended
twice, and, after 25 months of continuous work,
the Board ceased operations on February 28, 1950.
Although the task was not entirely completed, the
Pfb compiled frequency lists for certain bands.^
In other bands, wliere the requirements were so
excessive as not to fit within the allotted space, the
Pfb prepared for transmission to the extraordi-

594

nary radio conference a tabulation of channels and
accompanying sharing plans.

Obstacles

From the outset, Pfb was beset by serious dif-
ficulties in carrying out the Atlantic Cit}' direc-
tives. As in the case of the Copenhagen, Mexico
City, and other international conferences dealing
with radio frequency matters, political considera-
tions were interjected into an essentially technical
undertaking; east-west differences arose to compli-
cate relations among the delegations; unrealistic
and padded requirements were submitted by par-
ticipants; and there was no willingness to make
the concessions necessary to reach agreement.
Some of the countries whose services luad been
impeded during the occupation and others where
radio development was in its infancy seized upon
the directives, which were designed to protect
legitimate services and used them to submit in-
flated requirements based upon national prestige
interests and the pipe dreams of their technical
administrations. Delegates lacked authority to
reduce national statements of frequency require-
ments and could not agree upon principles for
their consolidation. Disgruntled and wearied by
months of futile debate, delegates, at times, lost
patience with efforts to reconcile stated require-
ments within the confines of the allotted bands of
the spectrum, and, on several occasions, moves
were initiated by dissident groups to call for dis-
solution of the Pfb.

Wliile the Pfb was working on the new list, the
Itu continued to register frequency assignments
in conformity with the Cairo radio regulations.
Parallel notices of these registrations were sent
to the Pi'TJ. The extraordinary conference will
have to determine the procedure for incorporating
into the international list new assignments, which
were activated during the period between the clos-
ing date for submission of counti-y requirements
and the convening of the extraordinary conference.

The work of the Board was seriously handi-
capi>ed by refusal of the Soviet Union to submit a
statement of radio circuit requirements since the
U.S.S.R. is a large user of the spectrum. In view
of the absence of any Soviet report of require-
ments, the Pfb considered no frequencies for the
U.S.S.R. except those required to complete exist-
ing international circuits with other countries ter-

' World frequency lists suitable for study by the estra-
onliiuuy conference were developed only for the portion
of the .spectrum lyinR between 9 and 27..") Mc/s. Although (
a list was develoix-d fur the portion near 5 Mc/s, the value
of this list is larsely nullified since no results were ob-
tained in the resions immediately above and below. The
I'Fii did not get around to preparing recommendations on
the procedure to be followed in order to give effect to the
new list nor the manner in which additional requirements
submitted by administrations after the closing date of
February 25, 1948, should be incorporated into the list.

Department of State Bulletin

minating in the U.S.S.R. and tliose which the
Board had reason to believe were in operation do-
mestically. The Soviet delegation walked out of
tlie Pfb in October 1949 after protracted debate
m every issue raised. Their formal break fol-
lowed a decision by the Board to proceed with its
frequency engineering task under the interna-
ional radio regulations adopted at Atlantic City
II 1947. Even though the U.S.S.R. participated
n the adoption of these regulations, at Geneva
hey advocated instead that the old priority sys-
jem of operating assignment be retained, using
;he 1939 Bern list wherein they have an excessive
lumber of frequency registrations.

The United Kingdom maintained a large and
7ery active delegation at the Pfb from the begin-
ling until about June 15, 1949, at which time the
Jnited Kingdom delegation was temporarily with-
Irawn. This action came during the most trying
period of the Board's work. At this point, con-
dderable sentiment developed that the final com-
)ilation of an acceptable list was an impossible
ask. There was substantial support for a pro-
)osal calling for gradual shifting of all services
ow operating outside the allotted bands to in-band
"requencies, using the lists prepared as a guide
vherever possible and notifying the Ittj. The Itu
vould then study each shifted operation case by
ase and accord registration status if it detennined
hat no harmful interference would result. This
ivolutionary procedure would take from 5 to 20
?ears for completion.

The United States, which was the leading advo-
:ate for the Pfb concept of obtaining advance
nternational agreement on frequency lists for all
adio services, led the resistance to this line of
hinking. After lengthy discussion, the Board
lecided to continue work toward its objective of a
[raft frequency list and to inform the Itu Admin-
strative Council that, in those portions of the
pectrum where the requirements exceed the al-
otted space by a substantial amount, the Board
ould not complete frequency assignment plans
»ecause the reduction of requirements to the neces-
ary amount was beyond its scope.

cientific Value

The work of the Pfb has made a substantial
ontribution to the world's technical literature.
TNot only will its studies contribute materially to
he enlightenment of students in the field of radio
ommunication but, until further contributions
re made to man's technical knowledge, the reports
'f the Pfb will also be used extensively by all na-
ional administrations in the study of their com-
aunication problems. The reports, partial plans,
nd completed plans of the Pfb, which indicate the
requency bands and areas of the world in which
ongestion is most pronounced, have laid the
■roundwork for future attempts to produce an
intirely new list. Its experiences point up the

\pril 9, 795?

H

difficulties which must be overcome before a new
international frequency list can be evolved.

The Pfb succeeded in concluding lists only in
those instances in which there was less pretext for
political manifestations. Where plans have not
been finalized it has been duo in good part to the
selfish national interests of participating coun-
tries. It is unfortunate that these elements figure
so prominently in an undertaking that has an
immediate bearing upon the safety, welfare, and
cultural benefits of man. The Pfb has left an in-
delible impression — the recognition that a scien-
tific approach is essential to achieve orderliness in
the spectrum. Among those who are close to the
problem, a grim realization exists that without
such orderliness the only alternative is chaos in
the radio spectrum.

• Marie Louise Smithy author of the foregoing
article, is Policy Reports officer, T elecomvvwrdca-
tions Policy Staff, Department of State.

United States Delegations
to International Conferences

Northwest Atlantic Fisheries

The Department of State announced on March
29 that the first meeting of the International Com-
mission for the Northwest Atlantic Fisheries will
convene at Washington on April 2. The United
States Government will be represented at the
meeting by the following delegation:

Commissioners

Hilary J. Deason, Chief, Office of Foreign Activities, Fish
and Wildlife Service, Department of the Interior

Bernhard Knollenberg, Chester, Conn.

Francis W. Sargent, Director, Division of Marine Fisher-
ies, Department of Conservation, Commonwealth of
Ma.ssachusetts, Boston

Advisers

Edwin H. Dahlgren, Chief, Section of Marine Fisheries,
Branch of Fishery Biology, Fish and Wildlife Service,
Department of the Interior

Fred H. Taylor, Foreign Affairs Specialist, Fisheries and
Wikllife, Department of State

Mary B. Trenary, Division of International Administra-
tion, Department of State

Richard T. Whiteletter, Assistant Chief, Branch of Com-
mercial Fisheries, Fish and Wildlife Service, Depart-
ment of the Interior

Adviser and Secretary

Edward Castleman, Chief, Section of International Agree-
ments Office of Foreign Activities, Fish and Wildlife
Service, Department of the Interior

The northwest Atlantic fisheries are the oldest
in the AVestem Hemisphere, having been harvested
for more than 300 years. They have, during that
whole time, been especially important in the econ-

595

omy of New England and, recently, have shown
increasing evidences of depletion, with especially
acute declines in the banks off the New England
shores.

Recognition of the existing and potential de-
pletion of fish, not only in the western Atlantic
but also on the European side, prompted the con-
vening of three conferences, held at London in
1937, 1943, and 1946, to seek remedies for the
problem. None of the agreements concluded at
those conferences has as yet entered into force.

The United States Government, which had
taken the position that the northwest Atlantic
should for conservation purposes be considered
as separate from the northeast Atlantic, did not
participate in the 1937 conference and was repre-
sented simply by obsen^er delegations at the 1943
and 1946 conferences. On its own initiative, the
Senate of the United States voted $25,000 for the
fiscal years 1948 and 1949 for the study by the
Department of State of the desirability of a new
fisheries convention. As a result of this study, a
conference was held at Washington in Januaj"y
1949 of those nations having an interest in the
northwest Atlantic fisheri&s. That conference re-
sulted in the opening for signature on February
8, 1949, of the International Convention for the
Northwest Atlantic Fisheries and in the adoption
of a final act wherein the United States Govern-
ment was charged with the duty of convening, as
soon as possible after the entry into force of the
convention, of the first meeting of the International
Commission for the Northwest Atlantic Fisheries.

The Commission, in accordance with the terms
of the convention, will provide the machinery for
international cooperation in the scientific investi-
gation and development of the fishery resources of
the waters off the west coast of Greenland and the
east coasts of Canada and New England. While
the Commission is given no direct regulatory
powers, it may make recommendations to the re-
spective Governments regarding regulatory
measures which it considers necessary for main-
taining the stocks of fish which support the inter-
national fisheries in the convention area. Upon
a]iproval by the Governments directly concerned,
regulations will become applicable to all member
countries.

The convention entered into force on July 3,
1950, after the deposit of instruments of ratifica-
tion by four signatory Governments (Canada, Ice-
land, U. K., and the U. S.) . It entered in force on
December 14, 1950, with respect to Denmark, on
the date of deposit of its instrument of ratifica-
tion. It has not yet entered into force with respect
to tlic following other signatory countries : France,
Italy, Norway, Portugal, and "Spain.

Invitations have been extended, accordingly, by
the United States Government to the parties to
the convention and also to those countries which
have signed but not yet ratified the convention to
particij^ate in the first meeting of the International
Commission for the Northwest Atlantic Fisheries.

596

Invitations have also been extended to the Food
and Agriculture Organization of the United Na-
tions and the International Council for the Ex-
ploration of the Sea.

The first meeting is expected to be primarily
organizational in nature. Rules of procedure for
the Commission will be adopted. Officers of the
Commission will be elected. A headquarters site
and an executive secretary for the Commission
will be selected. A Panel will be organized foi
each of the five subareas defined in the convention
in order to keep under review the fisheries of that
subarea and all scientific and other informatior
relating thereto. In addition, since many fisher\
research biologists will be in attendance, it is pos
sible that one or more infoi-mal technical seminar-
will be scheduled apart from the formal session
of the Commission in order to discuss such genera
topics as "What scientific knowledge is lacking ii
the fisheries of the Northwest Atlantic and ho?
should such knowledge be acquired?"

U.S. Contribution to U.N. Relief
Works Agency for Palestine

[Released to the press by the U.S. Mission to the I7J1
March 20]

Ambassador Ernest A. Gross, acting representa
tive of the United States to the United Nations
today announced the contribution to the Unitei
Nations of a check for $5,250,000 representing
further contribution to the United Nations Relii
Works Agency for Palestine Refugees in the N
East. The contribution brings the total of Unit(
States contributions to $24,450,000, out of $27
450,000 pledged for the fiscal year ending Jun
30, 1951.

The contribution is separate and distinct frocj
funds being sought for relief and integration o
Palestine refugees in the Near East in negotiation!
conducted by a special committee of the Genera
Assembly.

Communiques Regarding Korea
to the Security Council

General Douglas MacArthur, Commander ii
Chief of United Nations command, has transmit
ted communiques regarding Korea to the Sec:
tary-General of the United Nations under tb
following United Nations document numbers

S/2010, February 14; S/2011, Fobruai-y I
S/2014, February 16; S/2019, February 2.
S/2020, Februai-V 21; S/2022, February "
S/2023, Fehruar'v 27; S/2024, February
S/2035, Marcli 13; 8/2036, March 13.

■

1

Department of Stale BuUelii

The United States in tlie United Nations

[March 23-Aprll 5, 1951]

ieneral Assembly

Committee of Twelve. — This Committee, which
*as set up by the General Assembly to consider
he advisability of merging the Atomic Energy
I'onimission and the Commission for Conventional
irmaments, held its third meeting on March 28.
it the outset of the meeting, the chairman, Djura
y'iiicic (Yugoslavia) paid tribute to the late R. G.
liddell (Canada) who had been serving as
■I'lnianent rapixirteur of the Committee. Dr.
. .M. A. H. Luns (Netherlands) was unanimously
U'.ted to replace Mr. Riddell.

The United States representative, Frank C.
,'ash, citing President Truman's statement on
'iiited Nations Day, as evidence of United States
illingness to persist in the effort to solve the
roblem of armaments, stated that the United
tates intended to submit proposals on coordina-
on of the two Commissions in line with the Presi-
ent"s views. These proposals would deal with
le status, membership, terms of reference, and
le program of work of such a new committee or
ommission. He suggested that the Secretariat
repare a summary of the experience of the League
f Nations in the field of disarmament. However,
ie Committee agreed to defer a decision on this
iixgestion until the next meeting, which will be
illed following the distribution of the United
tates working paper.

Collective Measures Commiftee. — The 14-mem-
er Committee held its third meeting on March 30.
.fter general debate, the chairman, Mr. Muniz
Brazil) appointed a temporary 5-member sub-
iimnittee (Brazil, France, U.K., U.S., and Yugo-
avia) to draw up a concrete plan to submit to
le full Committee within 10 days. It was also
istructed to draft recommendations on the ques-
on of addressing a communication to United Na-
ons members to indicate what consideration they
ave given toward implementing the collective
•curity provisions under section C of the uniting-
)r-peace resolution. These provisions recom-
end : ( 1 ) That member nations survey their re-
)urces to determine the nature and scope of aid
ley can give the United Nations in maintaining
bace and security ; (2) that member nations main-
un special armed units for United Nations
rvice.

:onomic and Social Council

[Transport and C om.munications Coynmisftion. —
he Commission concluded its fifth session, March
\ after adopting (10-0-3) its final report to the

Economic and Social Council (Ecosoc). This re-
port contains a summary of the discussion on the
various agenda items covering international travel,
road transport, and shipping matters; a review
of the Commission's past activities and accom-
plishments, and problems which are expected to
continue in the future; and the following 11 reso-
lutions: (1) Driver Licensing — Recommends to
the Council that a small committee of experts be
set up to advise the Commission whether the es-
tablishment of uniform minimum proficiency re-
quirements for the licensing of motor vehicle
drivers is desirable and to what extent it is pos-
sible. (2) Pollution of Sea Water — Recommends
that the Governments possessing the necessary
teclmical facilities be invited to undertake scien-
tific studies on the subject and to communicate
the results to the Secretary-General for appropri-
ate handling^ (3) Discrimination in Transport
Insurance — -Requests the Secretary-General to
conduct a survey on the extent to which such
restrictions are being applied and recommends
that the Council ask the Governments to adopt
"in so far as possible" a policy of nondiscrimina-
tion. (4) Unification of Maritime Tonnage Meas-
urement— Recommends that this should be among
tlie first problems to be considered by the Inter-
governmental Maritime Consultative Organiza-
tion (Imco) when it has started to function. (5)
Imco Convention — Notes "with satisfaction" that
an inquiry would be made by the Secretary-Gen-
eral among the Governments which had not so far
ratified the Convention. (6) Transport Statis-
tics— Recommends that a statistical series on ton-
nage of goods loaded and net ton-kilometers per-
formed by road motor vehicle transport be added
to the existing statistical series. (7) Road acci-
dent statistics — Requests the Secretary-General to
coordinate the work done on road accident statis-
tics by various United Nations bodies. (8) Cus-
toms formalities for international road transport
and touring — Recommends that the Secretary-
General circulate to the Governments invited to
the United Nations Conference on Road and Motor
Transport held in Geneva in 1949 the draft Inter-
national Customs Convention on Touring and re-
quest them to submit their views at the Commis-
sion's next session on the desirability of consid-
ering the conclusion, on a world-wide basis, of
two conventions relating to customs formalities.
(9) Transport of Dangerous Goods — Requests
the Secretary-General to consult with all the
organizations, both national and international,
which are concerned with the subject to examine
the various aspects of the problem such as classi-
fication, labeling, and packaging, with a view to
making specific suggestions as to uniform regu-

pt\\ 9, J 95?

597

lations in this matter covering the whole field of
transport. (10) Coordination of Inland Trans-
port— Requests the Secretary-General to make
available to all regional bodies of the United Na-
tions the results of the various studies made on
this problem. (11) Passports and Frontier For-
malities— Notes the report prepared by the Secre-
tary-General and requests that he continue to
follow the progress made in this field. In addition,
that any general inquiry to the Governments on
these matters should be postponed until after the
Commission's sixth session.

Ad Hoc Gomviittee on Slavery. — The special
committee on slavery set up by the General Assem-
bly in 1949, at the request of the Economic and
Social Council, opened its second 4-week session
on April 2. The four membei-s on the Committee
are Prof. Moises Poblete Troncoso (Chile), chair-
man; Senator Jane Vialle (France), Charles
W. W. Greenidge (U.K.), and Bruno Lasker
(U.S.). The following agenda was adopted: (1)
Study and definition of slavery and other institu-
tions or customs resembling slavery ; evaluation of
the nature and extent of these problems at the
present time; (2) suggestions as to methods of
attacking and resolving these problems; (3) adop-
tion of the Committee's report to be submitted for
consideration of the Council at its thirteenth
session.

The Committee sent out a questionnaire on slav-
ery to 83 nations and has received replies from 49
countries, 33 of which are members of the United
Nations. In addition, the Committee will have at
its disposal extensive information supplied by non-
governmental organizations and private individ-
uals. The remainder of the session will be closed.

Security Council

At the meeting on March 30, the Security Coun-
cil adopted, by a vote of 8-0-3 (India, U.S.S.R.,
Yugoslavia), the revised United Kingdom-United
States resolution on Kashmir submitted on March
21. Sir Benegal N. Rau (India) stated his Gov-
ernment had no objection to a new United Nations
representative visiting India and Pakistan "to
make a fresh attempt to assist, by suggestion,
advice and mediation, in determining how the
proposals regarding demilitarization under the
resolutions of 13 August 1948 and 5 January 1949
should be implemented, with due regard to the
assurances given to my Government in connection
therewith." However, his Government could not
accept the resolution as a whole. He particularly
objected (a) to the Preamble statement that the
projected Kashmir Constituent Assembly in the
Indian-controlled area of the state, and any action
by this Assembly to pass upon the question of
Kashmir's affiliation wotild be in conflict with the
parties' commitments; (b) to the arbitration para-
gra[)li of tlie revised resolution, claiming it was a
violation of the resolution of August 1948.

Statements strongly favoring the resolution

598

were made by the representatives of Brazil, Tur-
key, the Netherlands, Ecuador, France, and China,
all of whom supported the concept of arbitration
as a logical step in order to settle unresolved issues i
between the parties.

Ambassador Ernest A. Gross stated that the
August 1948 and January 1949 resolutions pro-
vided a framework, not a complete plan, for ac-
complishing demilitarization and a plebiscite.
The parties still had to develop and consider with
the United Nations representative the details in
order to honor their commitment to settle the issue
of Kashmir's accession to India or Pakistan by a i
fair and impartial plebiscite under United Nations )
auspices. "If the parties do not agree upon these t
details in filling out the framework established I
by the two United Nations Commission resolu- \
tions," Mr. Gross said, "it will be because the
parties give differing interpretations. In such a
case, there must be some way of resolving the
dilemma, and we have suggested arbitration as that
way." The commitment of the parties and the
legitimate interest of the Security Council in see-
ing this dispute settled did not stop with the two
Uncip resolutions, Mr. Gross declared. "They are
not the end of the road." A procedure had to be
found to enable "the parties to carry out their
basic and ultimate commitment ... to create the
conditions whereby the people of Kashmir cai
vote without fear of intimidation upon the ques-
tion of accession. If resort to arbitration of am
matters which stand in the way of this result i; i
objected to, how can the dangerous deadlock b»
broken?" The resolution, he said, had been of-
fered in the "sincere belief that the Security Coun-
cil must aid the parties to advance toward a solu-
tion of the dispute, by providing reasonable meai
through which issues, which the parties cannot
themselves resolve, may be brought to a speed]
and mutually acceptable solution."

Sir Gladwyn Jebb (U.K.) explained that hia
Government's approach was to concentrate on tht
principle that the future accession of the statt
of Jammu and Kashmir should be settled by a
United Nations plebiscite, held under condition?
enabling a vote free from improper influence. He
doubted that it would be fruitful for the Council
to consider tlie Indian claim that legal accessioi
had already taken place, since both parties haii
agreed to settle the accession question by a plebis-
cite. He urged that arbitration provides the onl\
suitable means of determining points of disagree
ment between the parties. J

Following the adoption of the resolution, Sirl
Moliammed Zafrulla Khan (Pakistan) advised
that he had been instructed to accept the resolu-
tion on behalf of his Government and to voice it-
determination to afford the fullest cooperation to,,
the United Nations representative and, if diffeHI
ences arose, to the arbitration formula.

Ambassador Daniel J. von Balluseck (Nether
lands) continues as President of the Council dur-
ing the month of April.

Department of Slate Bulletin

THE FOREIGN SERVICE

Irregularities at Hong Kong Post —
Four Foreign Service Dismissials

[Released to the press March 27J

Over a year ago, the Department of State re-
ceived reports of irregularities in connection witli
the issuance of visas and citizen certificates at
Honp Kong.

The then Deputy Under Secretary, Jolin Peuri-
foy, sent inspectors to Hong Kong to look into the
matter. Despite careful investigation, no evi-
dences of irregularities were turned up. However,
the post was kept under constant scrutiny by the
Security Division and the Foreign Inspection
Corps. Later, last summer, a second report came
in to the Department from Consul General James
K. Wilkinson, indicating that he felt that there
were irregularities taking place and involving the
office of Vice Consul John Wayne Williams but
' that he had not been able to develop evidence to
! substantiate his suspicions. The Consul General
asked for help from the Department.

Deputy Under Secretary, Carl Humelsine,
deputized Julian F. Harrington, a veteran
Foreign Service officer, who has had wide experi-
ence in consular work, and sent him to Hong Kong
to stay until the case was resolved one way or the
other. As a result of Mr. Harrington's inspec-
tion, an admission of bribery was obtained from
John Wayne Williams in that he had accepted
money in the form of gifts or presents from per-
sons outside the consulate to expedite visas to
Chinese to visit the United States or transit the
United States enroute to some other country. Mr.
Harrington obtained a full confession from Mr.
Williams, including the fact that he had accepted
bribes and that the presents he had accepted totaled
in the neighborhood of $10,000.

In the course of Mr. Harrington's investigation,
it developed that there were homosexual aspects to
this case. In addition to Mr. Williams, three
other homosexual cases were uncovered in Hong
Kong. None of these three persons were found to
be involved in the visa irregularities. After the
Department secured their confessions, they were
discharged.

Mr. Williams was immediately suspended in
Hong Kong and ordered back to the Department.
Upon his arrival in Washington, November 24,
1950, he was met by agents of the Security Divi-
sion of the Department of State and interrogated
by them for several days. A fuller confession was
obtained from him, after which his services as a
Foreign Service officer was terminated December
1, 1950.

On November 28, 1950, Deputy Under Secretary
Humelsine turned this matter over to the Depart-
ment of Justice for action and possible prosecu-
tion. The matter is under the jurisdiction of that
Department and is being actively pursued.

In addition, the details were reported by Mr.
Humelsine to the Chairmen of the Senate and
House Subcommittees on Appropriations, Sena-
tor Pat McCarran and Representative John J.
Eooney. Full details of the matter have been
made a matter of record with the Subcommittee
of the House Appropriations Committee during
the recent hearings under the chairmanship of
Representative John J. Rooney.

United Nations Documents:
A Selected Bibliography^

General Assembly

Freedom of Information : Report of the Third Committee.
A/1630, December 6, 1950. 12 pp. mimeo.

Information From Non-Self-Governing Territories. Re-
port of the Fourth Committee. A/163S, December 8,
lO.'JO. 15 pp. mimeo.

Report of the International Law Commission on the Work
of Its Second Session. Report of the Sixth Committee.
A/1639, December 8, 1950. 22 pp. mimeo.

Question of South West Africa : Advisory Opinion of the
International Court of Justice. Report of the Fourth
Committee. A/1648. December 8, 1950. 23 pp. mimeo.

Palestine: (c) Repatriation of Palestine Refugees and
Payment of Compensation Due to Them ; Implementa-
tion of General Assembly Resolutions Regarding This
Question — (d) Report of the United Nations Concili-
ation Commission for Palestine. Report of the Ad Hoc
Political Committee. A/1646, December 9, 1950. 7
pp. mimeo.

Letter Dated 11 December 1950 Addressed to the Secretary-
General by the Permanent Representative of Poland
to the United Nations. A/1660, December 11, 1950.
0 pp. mimeo.

Scale of Assessments for the Apportionment of the Ex-
penses of the United Nations : Report of the Com-
mittee on Contributions. Report of the Fifth Com-
mittee. A/1669, December 12, 1950. 9 pp. mimeo.

Supplementary Estimates for the Financial Year 1950.
Report of the Fifth Committee. A/1677, December 12,
1950. 7 pp. mimeo.

Refugees and Stateless Persons: Report of the Third
Committee. A/1682, December 12, 1950. 17 pp.
mimeo.

I

April 9, J 95 1

' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27, N. Y. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.

The United Nations Secretariat has established an Offl-
cial Records series for the General Assembly, the Security
Council, the Economic and Social Council, the Trusteeship
Council, and the Atomic Energy Commission; which in-
cludes summaries of proceedings, resolutions, and reports
of the various commisions and committees. Publications
in the Official Records series will not be listed in this
department as heretofore, but information on securing
subscriptions to the series may be obtained from the In-
ternational Documents Service.

599

April 9, 1951

Index

Vol. XXIV, No. 614

Africa

LIBERIA : Radio Communications Agreement . . 588
Workshops of Liberty (Bennett. New Or-
leans) 685

Agriculture

INDIA: Food Situation Critical 591

KOREA : Communist "Land Reform" Program . 582

Workshops of Liberty (Bennett, New Orleans) . 585

Aid to Foreign Countries

EUROPE:

ECA and Schuman Plan Advance Recovery —
Third ECA Anniversary:

Address (Schuman) 590

Remarks (Harrlman) 591

Statements (Acheson, Truman) 589

INDIA:

Food Situation Critical 591

Legislation Urged for Grain (Truman) . . 592

SPAIN: Export-Import Bank Loan for Wheat . . 591

American Republics

4th Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of For-
eign Affairs of American States:

Agenda 568

Cooperation In World Struggle for Freedom

(Truman) 566

Draft Resolutions 573

Freedom — Key to Hemisphere Solidarity and

World Peace (Acheson) 569

U.S. Delegation 574

Pan American Day (Pres. Proc. 2920) .... 572
URUGUAY: Ambassador to U.S., credentials . . 575
Workshops of Liberty (Bennett, New Orleans) . 585

Asia

CHINA: Foreign Service Dismissals at Hong

Kong 599

INDIA:

Pood Situation Critical 591

Legislation Urged for Grain (Truman) . . . 592
JAPAN:
Claims-Filing Procedure vs Closed Institu-
tions 580

Essentials of Peace Treaty (Dulles) .... 576
Peace Treaty Discussed With U.S. Officials . . 584
KOREA:

Communiques to Security Council 596

Communist "Land Reform" Program . . . 582
PALESTINE: U.S. Contribution to U.N. Relief

Works Agency 596

Canada

Civil Defense Mutual Aid Agreement. Exchange

of Notes. (Acheson, Hume) 587

Claims and Property

JAPAN:
Claims-Piling Procedure vs Closed Institu-
tions 580

Essentials of Peace Treaty (Dulles) . . . .577,578

Communism

American Republics: Foreign Ministers Meet.

See American Republics
KOREA : Communist "Land Reform" Program . 582

Congress

FRANCE: President Aurlol Addresses Congress . 563
INDIA: Legislation Urged for Grain (Truman) . 592

Europe

ECA and Schuman Plan Advance Recovery — 3d
ECA Anniversary:

Address (Schuman) 590

Remarks (Harrlman) 591

Statements (Acheson, Truman) 589

FRANCE: President Aurlol Addresses Congress . 563

IRELAND: Foreign Minister Visits U.S 575

Provisional Frequency Board (Smith) .... 593

SPAIN: Export-Import Bank Loan for Wheat . . 591
U.S.S.R. : Japan Peace Treaty, Noncooperatlon

(Dulles) 576

Finance

INDIA: Legislation Urged for Grain (Truman) . 592
JAPAN: Claims-Piling Procedure vs Closed In-
stitutions 580

SPAIN: Export-Import Bank Loan for Wheat . . 591

Fisheries

International Commission for the Northwest

Atlantic Fisheries, First Meeting 595

JAPAN: Essentials of Peace Treaty (Dulles) . . 579

Foreign Service

Dismissals : Officers at Hong Kong 599

International Meetings

Provisional Frequency Board (Smith) .... 693

U.S. Delegations:

Consultation of Ministers of Foreign Affairs

of American States, 4th Meeting 574

International Commission for Northwest At-
lantic Fisheries First Meeting 595

^"Mutual Aid and Defense

American Republics: Foreign Ministers Meet.
See American Republics

Civil Defense Mutual Aid Agreement with
Canada. Exchange of Notes. (Acheson,
Hume) 587

FRANCE: President Aurlol Addresses Congress . 563

JAPAN: Essentials of Peace Treaty (Dulles) . . 576

Presidential Documents

Proclamations: Pan American Day (No. 2920). . 572

Refugees and Displaced Persons

PALESTINE: U.S. Contribution to U.N. Relief

Works Agency . 596

Strategic Materials

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers
Meet. See American Republics

Technical Cooperation and Development

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers

Meet. See American Republics
ECA and Schuman Plan Advance European Re-
covery— 3d ECA Anniversary:

Address (Schuman) 590

Remarks (Harrlman) 591

Statements (Acheson, Truman) 589

POINT 4: Workshops of Liberty (Bennett,

Tulane Univ., New Orleans) 585

Telecommunications

Provisional Frequency Board (Smith) .... 593
Radio Communications Agreement, U.S.-Llberla . 588

Treaties and Other International Agreements
CANADA: Civil Defense Aid Agreement, Ex-
change of Notes. (Acheson, Hume) . . . 587
JAPAN:

Essentials of Peace Treaty (Dulles) .... 576
Peace Treaty, U.S. Officials Discussion . . . 584
LIBERIA: Radio Communications Agreement,

Provisions 588

Northwest Atlantic Fisheries, 1st meeting of In-
ternational Commission 595

United Nations

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers

Meet. See American Republics
Relief Works Agency for Palestine: U.S. Con-
tribution 596

Security Council : Communiques on Korea . . . 596
U.N. Bibliography: Selected Documents . . . . 599
U.S. in U.N. (Weekly Summary) 597

Name Index
Acheson, Secretary Dean .... 569, 574, 588, 589

Allison, John M 584

Aurlol. President 563

Bennett. Henry G 584

Dulles. John Poster 576

Fontoura. Joao Neves da 568

Gross. Ernest A 596

Harrlman. W. Averell 591

MacArthur, Gen. Douglas 596

MacBrlde. Sean 575

Miller. Edward G., Jr 574

Mora, Jos6 A 575

Schuman, Robert 590

Smith. Marie Louise 593

Taylor. Clifford 591

Truman. President Harry S . 563. 566, 572, 575, 689, 592

Williams. John Wayne 599

Wrong, H. Hume 588

^ne/ u)e^a/)it7nenl/ xw t/tate^

PREVENTING A NEW WORLD WAR • Address by the

President 603

FOURTH MEETING OF CONSULTATION OF MINIS-
TERS OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS OF AMERICAN
STATES:

Final Act 606

Outstanding Achievements • Informal Remarks by

Secretary Acheson 616

U.S. SOLICITS OPINIONS OF AMERICAN REPUB-
LICS ON JAPANESE SETTLEMENT • By John

Foster Dulles 617

U.S.-U.K.-FRANCE ANNOUNCE AGREEMENT ON
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS IN ALLIED ZONES
IN GERMANY 621

For index see back cover

Vol. XXIV, No. 615
April 16, 1951

•ates o*

tJAe zlefia/ytment iC£^ C/tate Jky W 1 1 \J L J. 1 X

Vol. XXIV, No. 615 • Publication 4185
April 16, 1951

For sale by the SuperiDtendcnt of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 26, D.C.

Price:

52 issues, domestic $7.60 foreign $10.25
Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this pulilication are not
copyrigliIe<l and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

I

U. S. SUPERlNTfNOcNT OF DOCUMENTS

MAY 1 1951

Preventing a New World War

Address by President Trwman '

I WANT to talk plainly to you tonight about
what we are doing in Korea and about our
policy in the Far East.

In the simplest terms, what we are doing in
Korea is this : AVe are trying to prevent a third
world war.

I think most people in this country recognized
that fact last June. And they warmly supported
he decision of the Government to help the Re-
lublic of Korea against the Communist aggres-
sors. Now, many persons, even some who ap-
;)lauded our decision to defend Korea, have f orgot-
en the basic reason for our action.

It is right for us to be in Korea. It was right
ast June. It is right today.

I want to remind you why this is true.

The Communist Threat to Freedom

The Communists in the Kremlin are engaged
n a monstrous conspiracy to stamp out freedom all
)ver the world. If they were to succeed, the United
kates would be numbered among their principal
ictims. It must be clear to everyone that the
Jnited States cannot — and will not — sit idly by
nd await foreign conquest. The only question is :
Vhen is the best time to meet the threat and how ?

The best time to meet the threat is in the be-
;irming. It is easier to put out a fire in the be-
;inning when it is small than after it has become

roaring blaze.

And the best way to meet the threat of aggres-
ion is for the peace-loving nations to act together,
f they don't act together, they are likely to be
icked off, one by one.

If they had followed the right policies in the
930's — if the free countries had acted together, to
rush the aggression of the dictators, and if they
ad acted in the beginning, when the aggression

' BroiKlcast from the White House at 10 : 30 p.m., e. s. t.,
1 Apr. 11 and released to the press by the White House
1 the same date. Also printed as Department of State
ibhcation 4195.

9t\\ 16, 1951

was small — there probably would have been no
World War II.

If history has taught us anything, it is that
aggression anywhere in the world is a threat to
peace everywhere in the world. Wlien that ag-
gression is supported by the cruel and selfish rulers
of a powerful nation who are bent on conquest, it
becomes a clear and present danger to the security
and independence of every free nation.

This is a lesson that most people in this country
have learned thoroughly. This is the basic reason
why we joined in creating the United Nations.
And since the end of World War II we have been
putting that lesson into practice — we have been
working with other free nations to check the ag-
gressive designs of the Soviet Union before they
can result in a third world war.

That is what we did in Greece, when that nation
was threatened by the aggression of international
communism.

The attack against Greece could have led to gen-
eral war. But this country came to the aid of
Greece. The United Nations supported Greek
resistance. With our help, the determination and
efforts of the Greek people defeated the attack
on the spot.

Another big Communist threat to peace was the
Berlin blockade. That too could have led to war.
But again it was settled because free men would
not back down in an emergency.

The Communist Plan for Conquest

The aggression against Korea is the boldest and
most dangerous move the Communists have yet
made.

The attack on Korea was part of a greater plan
for conquering all of Asia.

I would like to read to you from a secret in-
telligence report which came to us after the at-
tack. It is a report of a speech a Communist army
officer in North Korea gave to a group of spies
and saboteurs last May, one month before South

603

Korea was invaded. The report shows in great
detail how this invasion was part of a carefully
prepared plot. Here is part of what the Com-
munist officer, who had been trained in Moscow,
told his men : "Our forces," he said, "are sched-
uled to attack South Korean forces about the
middle of June. . . . The coming attack on South
Korea marks the first step toward the liberation
of Asia." .

Notice that he used the word "liberation."
That is Communist double-talk meaning "con-
quest."

I have another secret intelligence report here.
This one tells what another Communist officer
in the Far East told his men several months be-
fore the invasion of Korea. Here is what he
said : "In order to successfully undertake the long
awaited world revolution, we must first unify
Asia. . . . Java, Indochina, Malaya, India, Tibet,
Thailand, Philippines, and Japan are our ulti-
mate targets. . . . The United States is the only
obstacle on our road for the liberation of all coun-
tries in southeast Asia. In other words, we niust
unify the people of Asia and crush the United
States."

That is what the Communist leaders are tell-
ing their people, and that is what they have been
trying to do.

They want to control all Asia from the Krem-
lin.

This plan of conquest is in flat contradiction to
what we believe. We believe that Korea belongs
to the Koreans, that India belongs to the Indians —
that all the nations of Asia should be free to work
out their affairs in their own way. This is the
basis of peace in the Far East and everywhere
else.

The whole Communist imperialism is back of
the attack on peace in the Far East. It was the
Soviet Union that trained and equipped the North
Koreans for aggression. The Chinese Commu-
nists massed 44 well-trained and well-equipped
divisions on the Korean frontier. These were the
troops they threw into battle when the North Ko-
rean Communists were beaten.

Stopping Short of General War

The question we have had to face is whether the
Communist plan of conquest can be stopped with-
out general war. Our Government and other
countries associated with us in the United Na-
tions believe that the best chance of stopping it
without general war is to meet the attack in Korea
and defeat it there.

That is what we have been doing. It is a diffi-
cult and bitter task.

But so far it has been successful.

So far, we have prevented World War III.

So far, by fighting a limited war in Korea, we
have prevented aggression from succeeding and
bringing on a general war. And the ability of

604

the whole free world to resist Communist ag-
gression has been greatly improved.

We have taught the enemy a lesson. He ha3
found out that aggression is not cheap or easy.
Moreover, men all over the world who want to
remain free have been given new courage and
new hope. They know now that the champions
of freedom can stand up and fight and that they
will stand up and fight.

Our resolute stand in Korea is helping the
forces of freedom now fighting in Indochina and
other countries in that part of the world. It has
already slowed down the timetable of conquest.

In Korea itself, there are signs that the enemy
is building up his ground forces for a new mass
offensive. We also know that there have been '
large increases in the enemy's available air forces.

If a new attack comes, I feel confident it will
be turned back. The United Nations fighting
forces are tough and able and well equipped.
They are fighting for a just cause. They are
proving to all the world that the principle of col-
lective security will work. We are proud of all
these forces for the magnificent job they have done
against heavy odds. We pray that their efforts
may succeed, for upon their success may hinge
the peace of the world.

The Communist side must now choose its course
of action. The Communist rulers may press the
attack against us. Tliey may take further action
which will spread the conflict. They have that
choice, and with it the awful responsibility for
what may follow. The Communists also have the
choice of a peaceful settlement which could lead
to a general relaxation of tensions in the Far East.
The decision is theirs, because the forces of the
United Nations will strive to limit the conflict
if possible.

We do not want to see the conflict in Korea ex-
tended. We are trying to prevent a world war —
not to start one. The best way to do that is to
make it plain that we and the other free countries
will continue to resist the attack.

The Best Course to Follow

But you may ask : Wliy can't we take other steps
to punish the aggressor? Why don't we bomb
Manchuria and China itself? \Vliy don't we as-
sist Chinese Nationalist troops to land on the
mainland of China?

If we were to do these things we would be run-
ning a very grave risk of starting a general war.
If that were to happen, we would have brought
about the exact situation we are trying to prevent.

If we were to do these things, wo would become
entangled in a vast conflict on the continent of
Asia and our task would become immeasurably
more difficult all over the world.

Wliat would suit the ambitions of the Kremlin
better than for our military forces to be committed
to a full-scale war with Red China ?

Department of State Bulletin

It may well be that, in spite of our best efforts,
the Communists may spread the war. But it
would be wrong — tragically wrong — for us to take
the initiative in extending the war.

The dangers are great. Make no mistake about
it. Behind the North Koreans and Chinese Com-
munists in the front lines stand additional millions
of Chinese soldiers. And behind the Chinese stand
the tanks, the planes, the submarines, the soldiers,
and the scheming rulers of the Soviet Union.

Our aim is to avoid the spread of the conflict.

The course we have been following is the one best
calculated to avoid an all-out war. It is the course
consistent with our obligation to do all we can to
maintain international peace and security. Our
experience in Greece and Berlin shows that it is
the most effective coui-se of action we can fol-
low.

Fii-st of all, it is clear that our efforts in Korea
can blunt the will of the Chinese Communists to
continue the struggle. The United Nations forces
have put up a tremendous fight in Korea and have
inflicted very heavy casualties on the enemy. Our
forces are stronger now than they have been before.
These are plain facts which may discourage the
Chinese Communists from continuing their at-
tack.

Second, the free world as a whole is growing
in military strength every day. In the United
States, in Western Europe, and throughout the
world, free men are alert to the Soviet threat and
are building their defenses. This may discourage
the Communist rulers from continuing the war in
Korea — and from undertaking new acts of aggres-
sion elsewhere.

If the Communist authorities realize that they
cannot defeat us in Korea, if they realize it would
be foolhardy to widen the hostilities beyond Korea,
then they may recognize the folly of continuing
their aggression. A peaceful settlement may then
be possible. The door is always open.

Then we may achieve a settlement in Korea
which will not compromise the principles and pur-
poses of the United Nations.

I have thought long and hard about this ques-
tion of extending the war in Asia. I have dis-
cussed it many times with the ablest military
advisers in the country. I believe with all my
heart that the course we are following is the best
course.

I believe that we must try to limit the war to
Korea for these vital reasons : to make sure that
the precious lives of our fighting men are not
wasted ; to see that the security of our country and
the free world is not needlessly jeopardized; and
to prevent a third world war.

Avoiding Confusion Over U.S. Policy

A number of events have made it evident that
General MacArthur did not agree with that policy.

I have therefore considered it essential to relieve
General MacArthur so that there would be no
doubt or confusion as to the real purpose and aim
of our policy.

It was with the deepest personal regret that I
found myself compelled to take this action. Gen-
eral MacArthur is one of our greatest military
commanders. But the cause of world peace is
more important than any individual.

The change in commands in the Far East means
no change whatever in the policy of the United
States. We will carry on the fight in Korea with
vigor and determination in an effort to bring the
war to a speedy and successful conclusion.

The new commander, Lt. Gen. Matthew Ridg-
way, has already demonstrated that he has the
great qualities of military leadership needed for
this task.

We are ready, at any time, to negotiate for a
restoration of peace in the area. But we will not
engage in appeasement. We are only interested
in real peace.

Real peace can be achieved through a settlement
based on the following factors:

One: the fighting must stop.
Two: concrete steps must be taken to insure
that the fighting will not break out again.
Three : there must be an end to the aggression.

A settlement founded upon these elements
would open the way for the unification of Korea
and the withdi"awal of all foreign forces.

In the meantime, I want to be clear about our
military objective. We are fightings to resist an
outrageous aggression in Korea. We are trying
to keep the Korean conflict from spreading to
other areas. But at the same time we must con-
duct our military activities so as to insure the
security of our forces. This is essential if they are
to continue the fight until the enemy abandons
its ruthless attempt to destroy the Republic of
Korea.

That is our military objective — to repel attack
and to restore peace.

In the hard fighting in Korea, we are proving
that collective action among nations is not only
a high principle but a workable means of resisting
aggression. Defeat of aggression in Korea may
be the turning point in the world's search for a
practical way of achieving peace and security.

The struggle of the IJnited Nations in Korea
is a struggle for peace.

The free nations have united their strength in
an effort to prevent a third world war.

That war can come if the Communist rulers
want it to come. But this Nation and its allies
will not be responsible for its coming.

We do not want to widen the conflict. We will
use every effort to prevent that disaster. And in
so doing we know that we are following the great
principles of peace, freedom, and justice.

April 16, 1951

605

FOURTH MEETING OF CONSULTATION OF MINISTERS OF FOREIGN

AFFAIRS OF AMERICAN STATES

Final Act: Signed at Washington on April 7, 1951'

Excerpts from Doc. 145
Dated Apr. 6, 1U51

I. Declaration of Washington

Whekeias :

The pre.seut Meeting was called because of the need for
prompt action by the Republics of this Hemisphere for
common defen.se against the aggressive activities of in-
ternational communism ;

Such activities, in disregard of the principle of non-
intervention, which is deeply rooted in the Americas,
disturb tlie tranquility of the peoples of this Hemisishere
and endanger the liberty and democracy on which their
institutions are founded ;

All the said Republics have stated, in formal acts and
agreements, their will to cooperate against any threat
to or aggression against the peace, security, and terri-
torial integrity or independence of any one of them ;

It will be impossible for such cooperation to be effective
unless it is carried out in a true spirit of harmony and
conciliation ;

In view of the common danger, the present moment
is propitious for a reaffirmation of inter-American
solidarity ;

That danger becomes more serious as a consequence of
certain social and economic factors ;

In this last connection there is now, more than ever,
need for the adoption of measures designed to improve
the living conditions of the peoples of this Hemisphere ;
and.

On the other hand, in any action for the defense of
the Hemisphere and its institutions, the essential rights
of man, solemnly proclaimed by the American Republics,
should not be lost sight of,

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of For-
eign Affairs

Declares:

1. The firm determination of the American Republics
to renuiiu steadfastly united, both spiritually and ma-
terially, in the present emergency or in the face of any
aggression or threat against any one of them.

' The first portion of the document contained list of
representatives, officers, and agenda. The Secretary of
State, Dean Ailieson, was elected permanent president of
the meeting, and William Manger, Assistant Secretary
General of the Oas, served as Secretary General. The
following is the statement of reservation made by the
United States:

With regard to references in this Pinal Act to the Inter-
American Charter of Social Guarantees, the United States
wishes to call attention to its reservation to that Charter
which was stated and explained at the time of the ailop-
tion of that document at the Ninth Inlci-nalional Confer-
ence of American States.

606

2. A reaffirmation of the faith of the American Re-
publics in the efficacy of the principles set forth in the
Charter of the Organization of American States and other
inter-American agreements to maintain peace and security
in the Hemisphere, to defend them.selves against any
aggression, to settle their disputes by peaceful means,
imijrove the living conditions of their peoples, promote
their cultural and economic progress, and ensure respect
for the fundamental freedoms of man and the principles
of social justice as the bases of their democratic system.

3. Its conviction that strong support of the action of
the United Nations is the most effective means of main-
taining the peace, security, and well-being of the peoples
of the world under the rule of law, justice, and inter-
national cooperation.

II. Preparation of the Defense of the American
Republics and Support of the Action
of the United Nations

Whereas :

The American Republics, as Members of the United
Nations, have pledged themselves to unite their efforts
with those of other States to maintain international
peace and security, to settle international disputes by
peaceful means, and to take effective collective measures
to ijrevent and suppress acts of aggression ;

International peace and security have been breached
by the acts of aggression in Korea, and the United Na-
tions, despite its efforts to find a peaceful solution, was
obliged, pursuant to resolutions of the Security Council
and the General Assembly, to take action to restore peace
in that area ; and

In order to ensure that the United Nations has at its
disposal means for maintaining international peace and
security, the General Assembly, on November 3, 1950,
adopted the resolution entitled "Uniting for Peace",

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of

Foreign Affairs of American States

Declares:

That the present world situation requires positive sup-
port by the American Republics for: (1) achievement of
the collective defense of the Continent through the Organ-
ization of American States, and (2) cooiieration. within
the United Nations Organization, to prevent and sup-
press aggression in other parts of the world; and
lieco))i)nc)uls:

1. That each of the American Republics should immedi-
ately e.Kamine its resources and determine what steps
it can take to contribute to the defense of the Hemisphere
and to United Nations collective security elTorts, in order
to accomplish the aims and purposes of the "Uniting for i|
Peace" resolution of the General Assembly.

2. That each of the American Repulilics, without prej-

Departmenl of Sfafe Bulletin

"i

udice to attending to national self-defense, should give
particular attonti<in to tlie development and maintenance
of elements williiii its national armed forces so trained,
organized and ('(luipped tliat tliey could, in accordance
witli its constituti(mal norms, and to the full extent that,
in its judgment, its capabilities permit, promptly be made
available, (1) for the defense of the Hemisphere, and (2)
for service as I'nited Nations unit or units, in accordance
with the "Uniting for Peace" resolution.

III. Inter-American Military Cooperation

WHEKI'iXS :

The militiiry defense of the Continent is essential to
the stability of its democratic institutions and the well-
being of its peo])les ;

The American Republics have assumed obligations un-
der the Charter of the Organization of American States
and the Inter-xVmerican Treaty of Reciprocal Assistance
to assist any American States subjected to an armed
attack, and to act together for the common defense and
for the maintenance of the peace and security of the
Continent ;

The expansionist activities of international communism
require the immediate adoption of measures to safe-
guard the peace and the security of the Continent;

The present grave international situation imposes on
the American Republics the need to develop their mili-
tary capabilities in order, in conformity with the Inter-
American Treaty of Reciprocal Assistance: 1) to assure
their individual and collective self-defense against
armed attaclss; 2) to contribute effectively to action by
the Organization of American States against aggression
directed against any of them; and, .3) to make provision,
as quickly as possible, for the collective defense of the
Continent ; and

The Ninth International Conference of American
States, in its Resolution XXXIV, charged the prepara-
tion of collective self-defense against aggression to the
Inter-American Defense Board, which, as the only inter-
American technical-military organ functioning, is the
suitable organ for the iireparation of military plans for
collective self-defense against aggression,

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Resoli-C'S:

1. To reconuuend to the American Republics that they
orient their military preparation in such a way that,
through self-help and mutual aid, and in accordance with
their capabilities and with their constitutional norms,
and in conformity with the Inter-American Treaty of
Reciprocal Assistance, they can, without prejudice to
their individual self-defense and their internal security :
a) increase those of their resources and strengthen those
of their armed forces best adapted to the collective de-
fense, and maintain those armed forces in such status
that they can be immediately available for the defense
of the Continent; and, b) cooperate with each other, in
military matters, in order to develop the collective
strength of the continent necessary to combat aggression
against any of them.

2. To charge the Inter-American Defense Board with
preparing, ;is vigorously as possible, and keeping up-to-
date, in close liaison with the Governments through their
respective Delegations, the military planning of the
common defense.

3. That the plans formulated by the Inter-American
Defense Board shall be submitted to the Governments for
their consideration and decision. To the end of facilitat-
ing such consideration and decision, the Delegations of
the American Republics to the Inter-American Defense
Board shall be in continuous consultation with their
Governments on the projects, plans, and recommendations
of the Board.

4. To recommend to the Governments of the American
Republics : a ) that they maintain adequate and continu-
ous representation of their armed forces on the Council of

Delegates, on the Staff of the Inter-American Defense
Board, and on any other organ of that organization that
may he established in the future; b) that they actively
supp(U-t the work of the Board, and consider promptly
all the projects, plans, and recommendations of that
agency; and c) that they cooperate in the organization,
within the Board, of a coordinated system of exchange of
appropriate information.

IV. Importance of Maintaining Peaceful Relations
Among American States

Whereas :

It is desirable that the energies of each American R'e-
pnl)lic be devoted to strengthening its ability to con-
tribute to international peace and security in the Western
Hemisphere and to the prevention and .suppression of
international communist aggression ; and

Any breach of friendly relations among the American
Republics can only serve to provide aid and comfort to
the leaders of such aggression as well as to weaken the
peace and security of the Western Hemisphere,
The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs
Rrafflnns:

The solemn obligations undertaken by all the American
Republics to refrain in their international relations from
the threat or use of fcvrce in any manner inconsistent with
the Charter of the United Nations or the Inter- American
Treaty of Reciprocal Assistance, and to settle their in-
ternational disputes by peaceful means;
Recommends:

That the American Republics will make every effort to
settle any disputes between them which threaten friendly
relation.?, in the shortest possible time, by direct bilateral
negotiations, and will promptly submit such disputes as
they may be unable to settle by negotiation to other avail-
able procedures for the peaceful .settlement of disputes ;
and
Declares:

That the faithful observance by the American Republics
of the commitments not to intervene in the internal or
external affairs of other States and to settle any disputes
among them by peaceful means makes it possible for each
of the Republics to concentrate the development of its
capabilities upon the ta.sks best adapted to the role each
is most qualified to assume in the collective defense
against aggression.

V. Provisions Concerning Mi
of Students

itary Conscription

WHE2!EAS :

The strengthening of the cultural ties between the
American countries is one of the most effective means to
promote their knowledge of one another, and therefore,
sentiments of union and friendship among them ;

Student exchange has proved to be a positive contribu-
tion in the realization of this high purpose ;

Likewise, the exchange of professional men and
women, technical experts, and skilled workers who are
to carry out advanced studies in scientific or industrial
establishments, is equally desirable not only because of
the cultural ties thus created, but al.so because of the
benefits accruing therefrom to the development of pro-
ductive activities in the various countries ; and

In order to continue providing encouragement and
facilities for this exchange, which is contemplated in
various Pan American instruments and bilateral treaties,
this exchange should be carried out under conditions
which would make it more effectual and continuous rather
than hindering it.

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Recomtnends :
1) That the Governments of the American Republics

April 16, J 95 1

607

consider in connection with programs of military service
the (lesiraliilitv of adopting or continuing measures to
assure that students from other American Republics who
have enrolled in duly recognized centers of education
may be permitted to continue their programs of studies
witliout interruption;

2) That the Governments of the American Republics
consult among themselves regarding their respective legal
provisions concerning military conscription to assure, in-
sofar as possible, that these provisions will not affect ad-
vanced studies being carried out in scientific or industrial
establislinients in one American country by students,
trainees, teachers, guest instructors, professors and
leaders in fields of specialized knowledge or skills of
another, when their stay is temporary and has as its
purpose the above-mentioned professional or technical
training objectives :

3) The recommendations contained in the two fore-
going paragraphs in no way change the obligations
arising under the Convention on the Status of Aliens,
signed at the Sixth International Conference of American
States.

VI. Reaffirmation of Inter-American Principles
Regarding European Colonies and Possessions
in the Americas

Whereas :

The first Meeting of Consultation, held In Panama dur-
ing October 1939, approved Resolution XVII, which con-
tains provisions to be applied in case of a transfer of
sovereignty in geographic regions of the Americas under
the .iurisdiction of non-American States ;

At the Second Meeting of Consultation, held in Habana
during July 1940, the Governments of the American Re-
publics signed the "Act of Habana", which provided
emergency measures to determine the action those Repub-
lics should take in the face of any situation that might,
because of World War II, affect the status of non-Amer-
ican possessions located in this Hemisphere;

At that Second Meeting of Consultation the "Convention
on the Provisional Administration of European Colonies
and Possessions in the Americas" was also signed, which
later entered into force as prescribed in the Convention ;
and

The American Republics declared, in Resolution
XXXIII of the Ninth International Conference of Amer-
ican States, the Continental aspiration that colonialism
would be brought to an end in the Americas,

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Declares:

The firm adherence of the American Republics to the
following principles adopted at the First and Second
Meetings of Consultation :

1. The non-recognition and non-acceptance of transfers
or attempts at transferring or acquiring interest or right,
directly or indirectly, in any territory of this Hemispliere
held by non-American States, in favor of another State
outside the Hemisphere, whatever the form used to ac-
complish this purpose ;

2. That in case it should be necessary to apply the
measures prescribed in the "Convention on the Provisional
Administration of European Colonies and Pos.sessions in
the Americas", the interests of the inhabitants of those
territories should be taken into account, so that the
gradual development of their political, economic, social,
and educational life may be promoted.

Vil. The Strengthening and Effective
Exercise of Democracy

Wherf;as :

Topic II of the program of the Meeting is "Strengthen-
ing of llie internal security of the American Republics",
and, for the achievement of tliat purpose and the appli-

608

cation of the proper measures, it is essential for each
Government, as the mandatory of its people, to have
their confidence and support;

In order to achieve such identification of the people
with their government, it is imperative that each country
have an effective system of representative democracy that i
will put into practice both the rights and duties of man
and social justice ; and

The American Republics and their origin and reason
for being in the desire to attain lllierty and democracy,
and their harmonious association is basetl primarily on
these concepts, the effectiveness of which it is desirable
to strengthen In the international field, without prejudice
to the principle of nonintervention.

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Declarea:

That the solidarity of the American Republics requires
the effective exercise of representative democracy, social
justice, and respect for and the observance of the rights
and duties of man, principles which must be increasingly
strengthened in the international field and which are
found in Article .5 (d) of the Charter of the Organization
of American States and Resolutions XXXII (The Preser-
vation and Defense of Democracy in America) and XXX '.
(American Declaration of the Rights and Duties of Man) |
adopted by the Ninth International Conference of Ameri- '
can States; and

Resolves: \

1. To suggest that the Tenth Inter-American Confer-
ence consider, within the framework of Articles 13 and
15 of the Charter of the Organization of American States,
the provisions necessary in order for the purposes stated
in Resolutions XXX and XXXII of the Ninth Interna-
tional Conference of American States to acquire full
effectiveness in all the countries of America.

2. To Instruct the Inter-American Council of Jurists to
draw up, as a technical contribution to the ends contem-
plated In the i)receding paragraph, draft Conventions
and other Instruments; and. to that end, likewise to in-
struct the Inter-American Juridical Committee to make
the pertinent preliminary studies, which it will submit
to the said Council at its next meeting.

3. To urge the Governments of America, pending the
adoption and entry into force of the aforementioned pro-
visions, to maintain and apply. In accordance with their
constitutional procedures, the precepts contained In the
aforementioned Resolutions XXX and XXXII of the
Ninth International Conference of American States.

Vill. Strengthening of Internal Security

Whereas :

The American Republics at the Ninth International
Conference of American States, with specific reference
to "the preservation and defense of democracy in Amer-
ica" and using as a basis Resolution VI of the Second
Meeting of Consultation, resolved to condemn the meth-
ods of every system tending to suppress political and
civil rights and liberties, and in particular the action of
international Communism or an.v other totalitarian doc-
trine, and, consequently, to adojit, witliln their respective
territories and in accordance with their respwtive con-
stitutional provisions, the measures necessary to eradi-
cate and ]irevent activities directed, assisted or insti-
gated by foreign governments, organizations or indi-
viduals tending to ovcrtlirow tlieir institutions by vio-
lence, to foment disorder in their domestic polilical life,
or to distuilt, by means of pressure, subversive propa-
ganda, threats or by ottier means, the free and sovereign
right of their peoples to govern themselves in accordance
with their (Icmocratic aspirations;

To supi)lenient those measures of mutual cooperation
assuring cDllective defense as well as the economic and
social well-being of the people, upon which the vitality
of political institutions so nuuh depends, it is necessary
to adopt laws and regulations for internal security;

Department of State Bulletin

In thpir concern to counteract the subversive activity
of intpruational Communism, tliey are imbued with the
desire to reaffirm their dptennination to preserve and
strengthen the basic democratic institutions of the peo-
ples of the American Heputilics, whicli tlie agents of
interii:iti<iiial Comiunnisin are altcmiitin^' to al)olish
through the exploitation and abuse of the democratic
freedoms themselves ;

Within each one of the American Republics there lias
been and is being developed through democratic pro-
cedures a body of laws designed to assure its political
defense;

It is in accordance with the high common and Indi-
vidual Interests of the American Republics to ensure
that each of them will be able to meet the special and
immediate threat of the subversive activities of inter-
national Communism; and

Since the said subversive activities recognize no
boundaries, the present situation requires, in addition
to suitable internal measures, a higli degree of inter-
national cooperation among the American Republics,
looking to the eradication of any threat of subversive
activity endangering democracy and the free way of life
in the American Republics,

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Jlinisters of
Foreign Affairs

Resolves:

1. To recommend to the Governments of the American
States ;

(a) That, mindful of their unity of purpose and
taking account of the contents of Resolution VI of the
Second Meeting of Consultation in Habana and Resolu-
tion XXXII of the Ninth International Conference of
American States in Bogota, eacli American Republic ex-
amine its respective laws and regulations and adopt
sucli changes as it considers necessary to ensure that
subversive activities of the agents of international Com-
munism, directed against any of them, may be ade-
quately forestalled and penalized ;

(b) That, in accordance with their respective con-
stitutional provisions, they enact tliose measures nec-
essary to regulate in the countries of the Americas the
transit across international boundaries of those for-
eigners who there is reason to expect will attempt to
perform subversive acts against the defense of the
American Hemisphere ; and

(c) That, in the application of this resolution, they
bear in mind the necessity of guaranteeing and defend-
ing by the most efficacious means the rights of the indi-
vidual as well as their firm determination to preserve
and defend the basic democratic institutions of the
peoples of the American Republics.

2. To instruct tlie Pan American Union, for the purpose
of facilitating the fulfillment of the objectives of this
resolution, to assign to the proper Department, which
might be the Department of International Law and Or-
ganization, with the assistance, if deemed advisable, of
experts on the subject, the following duties :

(a) To make technical studies concerning the defi-
nition, prevention, and punisliment, as crimes, of sabo-
tage and espionage with respect to acts against the Amer-
ican Republics and directed from abroad or against tlie
defense of the Americas ;

(b) To make technical studies of general measures
by means of which the American Republics may better
maintain the integrity and efficacy of the rights of the
individual and of the democratic system of their institu-
tions, protecting and defending them from treason and
any other subversive acts instigated or directed by for-
eign iwwers or against the defense of the Americas;

(c) To make technical studies concerning measures
to prevent the abuse of freedom of transit, within the
Hemisphere, including clandestine and Illicit travel and
the misuse of travel documents, aimed at weakening the
defense of the Americas.

The Pan American Union shall transmit the reports
and conclusions resulting from its studies to the Ameri-

April 16, 195?

can Governments for their information, through their
representatives on the Council of the Organization of
American States, and should any of the said Governments
so re<iupst and the Council Ijy a simple majority of votes
so decide, a specialized conference on the matter shall
l)e called pursuant to the terms of Article 93 of the Char-
ter of the Organization of American States.

IX. Improvement of; the Social, Economic, and
Cultural Levels of the Peoples of the Americas

Whereas :

In the name of their peoples, the States represented
at the Ninth International Conference of American States
declared their conviction that the historic mission of
America is to offer to man a land of liberty and a favor-
able environment for the development of his personality
and the realization of his just aspirations, and for that
reason they set forth in the Charter of the Organization
of American States as one of their basic principles that
of promoting, through cooperative action, their economic,
social, and cultural development ;

The aforesaid Charter entrusts to the Inter-American
Economic and Social Council and to the Inter-American
Cultural Council the promotion of such well-being in
their respective fields, and these Councils, in turn, should
carry out the activities assigned to them by the Meeting
of Consultation of Ministers of Foreign Affairs ;

It is a right of man to obtain the satisfaction of the
economic, social, and cultural needs essential to his dignity
and to the free development of his personality ;

Tlie failure to satisfy this right produces a discontent
that may mistakenly lead men to accept doctrines in-
compatible with their own interests and the rights of
others, tlie security of all, the general well-being, and
democratic ideals,

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of For-
eign Affairs of American States

Resolves:

1. To recommend to the American Republics that, in
order to strengthen their internal security, they act with
due decision to forward the great undertaking of raising
the social, economic, and cultural levels of their own
peoples, taking care that, to the greate.st degree possible,
they satisfy the rights set forth in this regard in the
American Declaration of the Rights and Duties of Man,
the Universal Declaration of the Rights of Man, and the
Inter-.\merican Charter of Social Guarantees.

2. To recommend to the Inter-American Economic and
Social Council and to the Inter-American Cultural Coun-
cil that, within their respective spheres, they prepare as
soon as possible plans and programs of action for pro-
moting effective cooperation among the American Re-
publics in order to raise the economic, social, and cul-
tural levels of their peoples. These Councils shall
present periodically to the General Secretariat of the
Organization of American States, for the same ends, a
report on the execution of the aforesaid plans and pro-
grams, and their opinion regarding any changes that
might be made in them.

3. The aforesaid plans, programs, and reports shall
also be transmitted to the American Governments through
the Secretary General of the Organization of American
States.

X. Economic and Social Betterment
of the Working Classes

Whebej^s :

The democratic institutions that have been inherent
characteristics of the American Republics since the be-
ginning of their life as free States are based upon the
principles of human equality and solidarity and upon the
principle of the welfare of their inhabitants; and

The propagation of ideologies alien to the spirit of
America and its civil liberties finds favorable develop-
ment in materially and culturally underdeveloped coun-

609

tries, for which reason it is necessary to fight poverty and
ifrnorance as an effective means of protecting Democracy
and the Rights of Man,

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of For-
eign Affairs

Resolves:

To repeat and broaden the resolutions adopted at
previous inter-American meetings in such a way that in
the measures introduced during the present international
emergency, as well as in permanent peacetime economic
programs, the ecr)noniic and social betterment of the
working classes of America shall be a matter of constant
concern, by securing for them a satisfactory wage level,
protecting them from unemployment, and making every
effort to assure the progressive improvement of their
culture and the hygienic and sanitary conditions in their
homes and places of work.

XI. Betterment of the American Worker

Whereas :

Many Resolutions adopted by the American Republics
in the Seventh, Eighth and Ninth International Confer-
ences of American States as well as Resolution LVIII
of the Inter-American Conference on Problems of War and
Peace, have manifested the great concern of the Govern-
ments to raise the standard of living of their peoples ;

The objective proposed is of transcendental importance
because the internal security of the American Republics,
based on the proper functioning of a representative de-
mocracy, cannot be permanently strengthened unless it
is based on an increasing production, the yields from which
are distributed equitably among the members of the com-
munity ; and

The Inter-American Charter of Social Guarantees, ap-
proved at Bogota, establishes, in general terms, the mini-
mum standards governing the conditions under which
American workers shall carry out their work.

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Recommends :

1. That those American nations that have not already
done so, and within the limitations imposed by their
respective Constitutions, adopt in their respective legisla-
tions appropriate measures to give effect within each such
country to the principles contained in the Inter-American
Charter of Social Guarantees approved at Bogota.

2. That each American nation inform the Inter-Ameri-
can Economic and Social Council annually of any legis-
lative and administrative measures it has put into effect.

XII. Economic Development

Whereas :

The present international state of emergency and the
dangers it contains for all free countries demand effi-
cacious cooiJeration among the American Republics for
the effective defense of the Hemisphere ;

One of the most serious factors in social decline, one
that best suits the purposes of aggression, is the existence
of low standards of living in many countries that have
been unable to attain the benefits of modern techniques;

It is therefore necessary to establish rational bases that
will make it possible to maintain the equilibrium and, to
the extent that the emergency permits, the development
of the economies of the underdeveloped American Re-
publics and to improve the standard of living of their
peoples in order to increase their individual and collective
capacities for the defense of the Hemisphere and con-
triliute to the strengthening of their internal security ; and

The programs of economic development and technical
cooperation have proven to be the most successful in-
struments for strengthening internal economies and im-
proving living standards ; and the present emergency situa-
tion and the greater needs for defense that it imposes are

additional and urgent reasons for increasing international
cooijeiation in this field of activity,

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Declares:

That the economic development of underdeveloped
countries should be considered as an essential factor in
the total concept of Hemisphere defense, without disre-
garding the fact that it is the prime duty of the American
States in the present emergency to strengthen their de-
fenses and maintain their essential civilian activities ; and

Resolves:

1. That the American Republics should continue to
collaborate actively and with even greater vigor in pro-
grams of economic development and programs of technical
cooperation with a view to building economic strength and
well-being in the underdeveloped regions of the Americas
and to improving the living levels of their inhabitants.

2. To this end, the American Republics shall supply,
sub.lect to the provisions of Resolution No. XVI, the ma-
chinery, mechanical equipment, and other materials
needed to increase their productive capacity, diversify
their production and distribution, facilitating in appro-
priate cases financial and technical cooperation for carry-
ing out plans for economic development.

3. Such financial and technical collaboration shall be
carried forward with the purpose of modernizing agricul-
ture, increasing food production, developing mineral and
power resources, increasing industrialization, improving
transportation facilities, raising standards of health and
education, encouraging the investment of public and
private capital, stimulating employment and raising
managerial capacity and technical skills, and bettering
the conditions of labor.

4. During the present emergency period, preference
among economic development pro.iects should be given in
the following order : Projects useful for defense pui^poses
and projects designed to satisfy the basic requirements of
the civilian economy ; projects already begim, the interrup-
tion of which would entail serious losses of materials,
money, and effort; and other projects for economic
development.

.">. Each American state will take steps to coordinate
its respective plans and programs for economic develop-
ment with the emergency economic plans, bearing in mind
its own tendencies and possibilities, for the continuity of
its development.

Xlli. Increase of Production and Processing
of Basic and Strategic Materials

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Rrsohyrs:

That the American Republics should adopt in their
respective countries practical and feasible measures for
increasing the production and processing of basic and
strategic materials required for the defense emergency,
for the essential netxls of the civilian population, and for
oi)eration of basic public services. To achieve this end
they undertake :

a) To accord one another, by means of administra-
tive measures, the priorities and licenses required to ob-
tain necessary machinery and material to increa.se the
production, processing, and transportation of these
neces.sary basic and strategic materials ;

b) To render one another special and adequate tech-
nical and financial assistance when necessary and appro-
I)ri.ite, by means of bilateral negotiations or multilateral
au'reements, when necessary, or through special joint
organs, in order to increase the i>roduclion. processing,
and transiKirtation of these basic and strategic materials;

c) To be prepariHl to enter into long-term or medium-
term purchase and sale contracts at reasonable prices for
these basic and strategic materials, and in conformity

610

Department of State Bulletin

with liny international agrocment of general scope in
which they might have participated.

XIV. Production, Utilization and Distribution
of Scarce Essential Products

Whereas :

Some nations have sponsored the creation of intor-
national orjranizations for the purpuse of obtaining the
cooperation of the free countries, in order to increase the
production of scarce essential products during the present
emergency situation and to make the best distribution
and use thereof ; and

The activities of those organizations will of necessity
affect the economy of the Western Hemisphere, for which
reason the American Republics should have suitable and
adequate representation therein.

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Declares:

Tliat the American States shall have suitable and ade-
quate representation in any international organization
created during the emergency to deal with the production,
utilization and distribution of scarce essential products,
it being necessary that the different geographical regions
and the relative importance of their production and
population be taken into account.

XV. Defense and Security Controls

Whereas :

It is essential for the American Republics, as a part
of the free world, to build up their economic strength
relative to that of the forces supporting international
aggression,

' The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of For-
I eign Affairs

Declares:

1. That the American Republics agree to cooperate fully
with one another in the adoption of effective measures
of economic defense and security controls in the field of
their international economic relations, including measures
to increase the availability of products in short supply
to the countries of the free world.

2. That where one country imposes security controls
which affect activities of private entities located in an-
other country, full opportunity for consultation shall be
afforded between the two countries with the purpose of
developing cooperative measures to attain the objective
of the security controls with a minimum of economic dis-
location in the country where the affected private activi-
ties are carried on or the respective asset is located.

3. During the emergency and the period of adjustment
following it, the principle of relative equality of sacritice
shall apply in the reduction or limitation of civilian needs,
and an endeavor shall be made not to impair the living
standards of the low-income population groups. Allo-
cations and priorities for elements of production and
consumption shall be established, in accordance with
the principles contained in the General Statement of this
Resolution, in such a manner as not to impair productive
activity and economic development unnecessarily, or
jeopardize political and social stability and effective
collaboration among the American nations.

4. When producer countries establish export allocations
to meet essential foreign requirements, such countries
should adopt effective administrative measures to facili-
tate the fulfillment of such allocations for export.

5. Once export quotas have been established, it .shall
be the responsibility of the importing country to determine
the essentiality of the use of the products and to control
their distribution. It shall be the responsibility of the
exporting country to distribute the quota among exporters
from the exjwrting country. In case of conflicts or diffi-

culties in the operation of the controls, there shall be
consultation between the interested Governments.

XVI. Allocations and Priorities

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Resolves:

General Statement

That in order to meet the emergency situation and the
subsequent period of adjustment, the American States
shall do all in their power to provide one another with
the products and services necessary to sustain the com-
mon defense effort, and declare that the maintaining of
essential civilian activities and public services and the
economic development of underdeveloped countries are
considered as an essential element in the total concept
of defense of the American Hemisphere, without disre-
garding the fact that the strengthening of their defenses
is the principal duty of the American States in the present
emergency.

Specific Principles

Whenever the emergency situation makes it imperative
to apply the system of allocations and priorities, the
American States will observe the following principles:

1. The essential needs for the functioning of civilian
economic activities should he met.

2. In the case of products which are the subject of
allocations, or priorities affecting their domestic con-
sumption and export, priority be given to the utilization
of such products for defense production in the common
cause, including the maintenance of adequate stockpiles
of strategic materials, pursuant to the principles of the
General Statement.

3. The Governments of the American Republics shall
accord one another ample opportunity for consultation
concerning the effect of the establishment of substantial
revision of allocations and priorities on international
trade. Whenever, owing to special circumstances caused
by the emergency, it is impossible for an American Gov-
ernment to hold a consultation before establishing allo-
cations or priorities, such measures shall be discussed,
after their adoption, immediately upon the request by any
country for their reexamination on the ground that its
interests are adversely affected, for the purpose of en-
deavoring to make an adjustment by mutual agreement.

XVII. Prices

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of For-
eign Affairs

Resolves:

1. That the Governments of the American Republics
should adopt adequate internal measures and controls,
including reciprocal measures to make them more effec-
tive, in order to prevent inflationary tendencies which
would endanger the common defense progi'am and basic
economic stability and which would be detrimental to
mutual economic relations. In addition, they will con-
sider those international actions or cooperative measures
which may be necessary to mitigate inflationary pressures.

2. That, with a view to assuring the proper administra-
tion of price regulations in such a way as to provide
equitable treatment for both imported and exported prod-
ucts subject to controls, any American Republic which
maintains a price control system will afford to any other
member nation full opportunity to be heard with reference
to any measures of price control affecting its products,
and shall give consideration to such adjustments as may
be pertinent, on the basis of data submitted by the mem-
ber nation, but without being limited thereto. Such in-
formation may include increases or decreases in the cost
of production (including the cost of manufactured articles,
raw materials, wages, and any other elements making up
an integral part of the cost of production), in the cost of

April 16, J 95 J

611

transportation, and in the margin of profit, and the effect
of the price regulation on the supply available to the
country of importation.

Whenever, owing to special circumstances, it is not
feasible for an American Government to hold consulta-
tion iirior to the establishment of such price controls,
such measures shall he the subject of consultation, after
their adoption, immediately upon the request by any
country for their re-examination on the ground that its
interests have been prejudiced.

3. When a Government adopts a general price control
system, it should apply such controls to the prices of raw
materials as well as to those of manufactured products,
and if it applies them to imports, it should also apply them
to exports.

4. The establishment and administration of price con-
trols, whether general or selective, shall conform to the
principles of national and most-favored-nation treatment.

5. With respect to policies governing price controls dur-
ing the emergency period, there should be taken into
account the desirability of establishing in international
commerce an equitable relationship between the prices of
raw materials, foodstuffs, strategic materials, and the
price of manufactured products. It is understood that
the obligations under this resolution are directed toward
international consultation regarding appropriate means
of solving such problems. As a result of such consulta-
tion it may be agreed to take appropriate measures to
solve those problems.

6. That, having in view the maintenance of the pur-
chasing power of the currencies of the American Repub-
lics and the real incomes of their peoples, recognition
should be accorded to the principle that price stabilization
measures .should be continued so long as the threat of
serious inflation persists.

The Inter-American Economic and Social Council should
convoke as soon as possible and ad hoc committee of
technical experts from central banks, treasuries or similar
fiscal agencies, which, in collaboration with the appro-
priate organs and .specialized agencies of the United Na-
tions, .should study, making pertinent recommendations
to the Governments of the American States, the problem
of maintaining the purchasing power of their currencies
and monetary reserves.

7. That the Inter-American Economic and Social Coun-
cil, in collaboration with the appropriate organs and spe-
cialized agencies of the United Nations, should study,
making pertinent recommendations to the Governments
of the American States, the continued operation and ad-
ministration of systems of price control instituted by the
American Republics, their effect on the economies of the
American Republics, and the need for appropriate adjust-
ments in the operation of such systems.

XVIII. Study Groups on Scarce Raw Materials

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of

Foreign Affairs

Resolves:

1. To recommend to the Inter-American Economic and
Social Council, which will hold an Extraordinary Meet-
ing within two months following the closing of the
Fourth Meeting of Consultation, the special considera-
tion of the different basic aspects imposed by the present
emergency situation on the future economy of the coun-
tries of the Americas, and particularly the policy to be
followed by the American countries with respect to the
International Materials Conference.

2. To instruct the Inter-American Economic and Social
Council to make a preliminary study of the status of
those raw materials that are of particular importance to
the American Republics, in their capacity as exporters
or importers, in order to determine whether it is
desirable:

(a) In the case of raw materials for which an in-
ternational conimittet? already exists, to establish an
Inter-American Study Group for each one, to draft

recommendations whenever necessary for transmittal to
the pertinent international committee;

(b) In the case of raw materials for which there
is no international committee, to establish Inter-Ameri-
can Study Groups to decide whether the Central Group
of the International Materials Conference should be sent
a recommendation on the establishment of the pertinent
international committees.

3. To recommend that the Inter-American Economic
and Social Council convoke the necessary Inter-American
Study Groups, in accordance with the considerations of
paragraph 2 above.

4. To recommend that for this purpose the Inter-
American Economic and Social Council decide that the
members of the said Study Groups may be the members
of the Organization of American States having a sub-
stantial interest as producers of the corre.sponding scarce
raw materials or indicating that they have a national
interest in the consumption of those materials.

5. To recommend that the Inter-American Economic
and Social Council request the interested Governments
to appoint technical representatives to the Inter-Ameri-
can Study Groups on scarce raw materials that are
organized pursuant to this resolution, so that the work
of those Groups may be done on a sound technical level.

(J. To suggest to the Inter-American Economic and
Social Council that the recommendations made by the
Study Groups referred to in this resolution be trans-
mitted to the Central Group by the representative of
the Organization of American States thereto, and in tlie
case of recommendations to any Commodity Committee.
that it be requested to call a Special Meeting or a series
of meetings so that a representative of the appropriate
Study Group may have an opportunity to present such
recommendations personally and with all the necessary
details.

XIX. Transportation

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of

Foreign Affairs

Resolves:

1. That the American States shall collaborate to ensure
the availability and most efficient utilization of inter-
American transportation facilities and cooperate in their
improvement when necessary.

2. That the Inter-American Economic and Social Coun-
cil be requested to undertake immediate studies in order
to prepare and recommend to the Governments of the
American Republics, for their adoption, in case of an
emergency, measures leading to the most effective equi-
table utilization of all transportation facilities of the
America.s. In particular, such measures shall include
Information as to the availabiltiy of transportation facil-
ities, the minimum requirements for the defense jirogram
and for the essential civilian needs of each Republic.

3. With a view to maintaining the equilibrium neces-
sary to the economy of the maritime transportation sys-
tem, the Inter-American Economic and Social Council,
through appropriate channels, shall study the system of
freight aiui insurance rates applicable to inter-American
trade, and make recommendations on the pertinent prob-
lems and their solution.

4. If the state of emergency causes difflcultit^ in the
trade of the American States, bilateral and multilateral
adjustments shall be made to assure as far as possible
the flow of exports from the countries supplying raw
materials and foodstuffs, and the correlative importation
of essential materials. |l

5. If the state of emergency should make it necessary fl
to establish transportation quolas, not oidy shall the vol-
ume of their trailt- be taken into account to assure such
quotas, hut also the special characteristics of the prin-
cipal export i>roducts used to uuiintaiu their trade and
monetary equilibriiun, so that, in so far as possible, the
means of transi>iprtati(Ui that may be counted on will be
adequate to their i)articular national needs.

612

Department of State Bulletin

XX. Gradual Absorption of Production Factors
Applied to Activities of a Temporary Nature

The Foiirtli M(>eting of Consultation of Ministers of

Foreign Affairs

Resolves:

That the Inter-American Economic and Social Council
stuily measures to assure that once the emergency is over,
production factors applied to activities of a temporary
nature will be gradually absorbed in permanent activities.

XXI. Temporary Nature of Restriction and
Control Measures

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of

Foreign Affairs

Declares:

Tliat the emergency restriction and control measures
contemplated in various resolutions of this Fourth Meet-
ing of Consultation should be considered as temixirary
measures required because of the common defense effort,
and therefore recognizes the advisability of tlieir being
eliminated as soon as the circumstances that gave rise
to their establishment no longer exist.

XXII. Liquidation of Emergency Stocks

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of

Foreign Affairs

Resolves:

To establish a common policy so that the return to
normalcy will not cause dangerous disturbances in the
markets and prices of the products of American coun-
tries accunuilated by the Governments during the emer-
gency. The li(iuidation of the emergency stocks shall be
carried out gradually and step by step, in consultation
witli the producer countries, in order to avoid abnormal
disturbances in the world markets of the aforesaid
products.

XXIII. Study on the Shortage and Distribution
of Newsprint

Whekeas :

The scarcity of newsprint gravely affects the normal
development of the organs of the press in the American
countries, which is the foundation on which freedom of
expression must rest ;

It is neces.sary to join forces to give every possible
facility to the newspapers of America, in order that they
may participate in the struggle to perfect the democratic
system in America ;

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs

Recommends:

1. That the Secretariat of the Organization of Ameri-
can States prepare, with the advice of the newspaper
organizations of the Western Hemispliere, a technical
report containing recommendations for facilitating the
access of newspaper publishers to the sources of produc-
tion and distribution of newsprint under price conditions
that are equitable for all the American countries, with
no discrimination whatsoever. The conclusions of the
said study shall be submitted to the American States for
consideration.

2. That governmental measures for the distribution
and tran.sportation of newsprint must be applied with due
regard for the social function of journalism and with the
same fundamental sense of general sacrifice as that un-
derlying the system of allocations and priorities, and
without preference or limitation that would affect the
freedom of the press.

XXIV. Plants Producing Synthetics

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of For-
eign Affairs
Resolves:

In disposing of Government-owned industrial plants
for the production of substitute or synthetic products
built for defense purposes, due consideration should be
given to the effects of the terms of such disposal upon
the countries producers of natural materials, in order to
avoid unfair competition.

XXV. Manufacturing Plants and Rubber
Plantations

The Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of For-
eign Affairs
Recommends:

That the Inter-American Economic and Social Council
study and submit reports to the interested American
Governments dealing with the increase of natural-rubber
production in the Hemisphere and the encouragement of
plantations of rubber-producing trees and plants ; and
with economic and technical assistance for: (a) the
establishment of plants manufacturing tires, inner tubes
and other articles of rubber whether or not they have
the raw material for meeting the needs for these prod-
ucts; (b) the expansion of manufacturing plants in
tlie American countries that already possess such plants;
and (c) the installation and extension of plants produc-
ing natural-rubber goods.

April 16, 7 95 J

613

Emergency Economic Cooperation

Draft Resolutions Submitted iy the United States

Doc. 8

SuhmittPd Mar. 24, 1951

EXPLANATORY STATEMENT

The United States representative to the Fourth
Meeting of Considtation of Ministers of Foreign
Affairs of American States hereby submits for tTie
consideration of his colleagues the following draft
resolutions :

1. Draft General Declaration

2. Draft Resolution on Emergency Economic Coopera-

tion

3. Draft Resolution on Economic Development and

Technical Cooperation Programs

In presenting these documents, the United
States representative makes the following explan-
atory statement:

During the period of more than 3 months since the
United States took the initiative to convene the present
Meeting of Consultation, and indeed prior to the taking
of such initiative, the United States Government has
consulted with a number of other Governments with re-
gard to their aspirations and concerns in the economic
field, with particular regard to preoccupations arising
from the effect of the current rearmament program on
the rate of economic activity and of economic develop-
ment in the countries of this hemisphere. The Inter-
American Economic and Social Council meeting in Wash-
ington preparatory to the Meeting of Consultation, has
made studies concerning the economic aspects of the
Conference.

In order to facilitate the undertaking of discussions
of the economic items of the agenda, the United States
Government, having in mind the points of view expressed
to it by Governments of the other American nations, and
the pre-Conference consultations above referred to, and
In the work of the Inter-American Economic and Social
Council, and having al.so in mind the substantial cur-
tailment of civilian consumption in the United States
as a result of the rearmament effort upon which the
United States has been required to embark in defense of
our mutual liberties, has prepared and transmits here-
with the attached drafts of resolutions. In preparing
these drafts, the United States has made a determined
effort to reconcile the various points of view, harmoniz-
ing them into a set of principles and policies which can
serve as a basis for economic relationships during this
emergency period.

In a real sense, therefore, the United States representa-
tive hopes that the attached drafts may be looked upon
as reflecting in so far as possible the common view-
points of the American Republics.

3. That strengthening the defenses of the American
Republics re(juires the maximum production, distribution,
and utilization of defense materials, the maintenance
and stabilization of the civilian economies, and the devel-
opment of essential productive facilities ;

The Fourth Meeting of the Ministers of Foreign Affairs
of the American Republics
Declares:

That the American Republics solemnly pledge, each to
tlie other, and in tlie interest of the free world, their
mutual cooperation in strengthening their common de-
fense by effective measures of economic cooperation.

ECONOMIC RESOLUTION NO. II

Draft Economic Resolutions
CUnder Sub A and B)

Considering :

1. That the imperialistic design of the leaders of inter-
national Communist aggression has as an objective the
dislocation and subversion of the economic systems of
the free world as a prelude to the imposition of political
and military control ;

2. That resistance to this inimical design is of vital
concern to the American Republics ;

3. That it is necessary for each American State to
play its full part in contributing to the common defense
and in sustaining the economic stability of the free world ;

4. That the mutual effort in the common defense may
occasion economic adjustments requiring appropriate
measures and controls to prevent serious inflation ;

5. That the mobilization of economic resources, goods,
and services to assure their maximum production, distri-
bution, and utilization, and the adoption of measures of
economic defense, are essential to the common purpose of
achieving security.

The Fourth Meeting of Ministers of Foreign Affairs of
the American Republics
Agrees :

INCREASED PRODUCTION

1. That the Governments of the American Republics
should facilitate in every practicable way, including the
adoption of necessary and appropriate Internal measures,
increased production of basic materials needed for defense
programs and for essential civilian requirements.

2. That special financial assistance should be provided
on reasonable terms where such assistance is necessary
to increase emergency production of basic materials in
short supply which are needed in the common defense
effort.

3. That where it may be necessary to induce producers
of basic materials in short supply to undertake an emer-
gency expansion of jn'oduction. the tiovernments of the
importing countries should be prepared to undertake
medium or long-term commitments with producers for the
purchase of such basic materials at reasonable prices and
consistent with any broad international allocution
agreements.

ECONOMIC RESOLUTION NO. I
Proposed General Declaration

C<)NSII)EEINO :

1. That the American Republics and oilier countries
of the free world are confronted with the inunediate
necessity of strengthening their defenses against the
forces of International Conununist Imperialism;

2. Tliat the conunon defense of their political sover-
eignty, their territorial integrity, anil their human liber-
ties is of vital concern to each, and all, of the American
Republics;

ALLOCATIONS AND PRIORITIES

1. That the minimum requirements for the operation of
essential civilian wonomic activities must be met.

2. That in reducing or liniiting less essential civilian
needs, the principle of relative equality of sacrifice among
countries should prevail, and accordingly, each country
sh<mld make its full contribution in reducing its demand
for such products.

3. That where producing countries establish export
allocations to meet essential foreign requirenu^nts, such
countries, should, if necessary, adopt positive administra-
tive measures to facilitate the fulfillment of such alloca-
tions tor export.

614

DepartmenI of State Bulletin

4. That in the case of those products which aro made
subject to allocations or priorities affecting tlieir domestic
consumption and expoit, highest priority must be given
to the utilization of such products for defense production
in the common cause. Including the maintenance of ade-
quate strategic stockpiles.

5. That Governments should cooperate, through such
international arrangements as may be established, in the
adoption of measures looking toward the allocation of
basic conunodities in order to assure their most effective
distriliution and utilization.

(>. That in the administration of allocations related to
development programs, measures of special supply facilita-
tion should be granted for materials and equipment re-
quired to niainlain or increase the production of basic
materials essential to the defense program. Other eco-
nomic development programs should proceed to the extent
that materials and equipment can be made available
without reducing other more essential requirements.

PRICE CONTROLS

1. That the Governments of the American Republics
should adopt appropriate internal measures and controls
to prevent inflationary tendencies which would endanger
the Common defen.se program and basic economic stability
and which would be detrimental to mutual economic
relations.

2. That each Government should recognize the recipro-
cal benefits deriving from controls designed to prevent
inflation and be prepared to cooperate with other Gov-
ernments which impose price controls on Imports or ex-
ports with a view to the adoption of corollary measures
designed to make such controls more effective.

3. That each Government adopting a system of price
control should apply controls both to the prices of raw
materials and manufactured goods. If price controls are
impo.sed on imported products they should also be im-
posed on exported products. Price policies should be
such as to accord to imported products treatment no less
favorable than the treatment accorded like domestic
commodities.

INTERGOVERNtVIENTAL CONSULTATION
AND COOPERATION

1. That the Governments of the American Republics
will provide each other with full opportunity to consult
with regard to the effect of emergency controls on in-
ternational trade. It is recognized that consultation in
advance of the imposition of controls will not always be
possible owing to circumstances arising out of the
emergency.

2. That the American Republics agree to cooperate fully
with one another in the adoption of effective measures of
economic defen.se and security controls in the field of
their international economic relations, including measures
to increase the availability of products in short supply
to the countries of the free world.

3. That the Inter-.\merican Economic and Social Coun-
cil is requested t<i study, on a continuing basis, the resolu-
tions of emergency economic cooperation approved by
this Fourth Meeting of Ministers of Foreign Affairs of
the American Republics in the interest of reviewing the
cooperation achieved by the American Republics with
regard to those resolutions.

TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES

1. That the American States should be prepared to take
prompt action to insure the continued availability and
most efficient utilization of Inter-American transportation
facilities.

2. That the Inter-American Economic and Social Coun-
cil is retjuested to undertake immediate studies for the
formulation, and recommendation to the Governments of
the American Republics for their adoption, in case of
emergency, of measures for the most effective equitable
use of all Inter-American transportation facilities. In
particular, these measures should include informatiim on
the availability of transportation facilities, the minimum
traffic requirements for the defense iirogram and for
essential civilian needs of each of the Reimblics.

ECONOMIC RESOLUTION NO. Ill

Economic Development and Technical
Cooperation Programs

CONSIUEKINQ :

1. That the true faith of the peoples of the free world
in their future and in the democratic way of life re-
quires evidence that steps are being taken to improve their
economic and social welfare through concrete measures
to help them help themselves.

2. That programs of economic development and tech-
nical cooperation have proven to be among the most
successful instruments in providing the conditions and
facilities which are necessary to expand production, raise
living standards and fulfill the hopes of mankind for a
better future.

3. That the present emergency situation constitutes an
additional and urgent reason for increasing international
cooperation in these fields, within the limitations imposed
by the defense responsibilities of the American Republics.

The Fourth Meeting of Ministers of Foreign Affairs of
the American Republics

Recommends.

1. That the American Republics, with increased vigor,
should continue to collaborate actively in progratns of
economic development and technical cooperation with a
view to building economic strength and well-being in the
economically underdeveloped regions of the Americas and
to improving the living levels of the people therein.

2. That such collaboration should be carried forward,
through planned and integrated programs, including
those having joint application to more than one country,
which are designed to modernize agriculture and increase
food production, raise standards of health and education,
develop mineral and power resources, increase industrial-
ization, improve transportation facilities, encourage the
investment of private capital and the use of related man-
agerial capacity and technical skills, and better the con-
ditions of labor.

3. That during the present emergency period, priority
should be given, within the limitations imposed by the
emergency, to the immediate execution of projects for
expanding the production of food, for increasing the out-
put of materials in short supply, for improving nutritional
standards and reducing the incidence of communicable
and infectious diseases, and for bettering working condi-
tions and labor standards.

April 16, 7957

615

Outstanding Achievements

Informal Remarks hy Secreta/ry Acheson ^

Mr. President, Your Excellencies — we come to
the end of our meeting. And it falls to my lot,
as your President who has received such outstand-
ing remarks of kindness at your hands, to utter the
final words.

I can do no better at this moment than to be
inspired and guided by the four notable addresses
which you have heard from our colleagues this
morning. At the outset of this meeting, I ven-
tured the hope, a hope in which I had a great
confidence, unlimited confidence, that this meet-
ing would have a dual success. That, in the first
place, what we did here, our actual accomplish-
ment, would make a great contribution to the
peace and prosperity of the world.

I also ventured the hope that the manner in
which we conducted this meeting, the great demon-
stration of democratic and brotherly approach to
common problems and of the cooperation in solv-
ing common problems, would be an inspiration in
a world in which there is all too little of that. You
have heard from the addresses this morning how
gloriously our hopes have been achieved. So far
as our work is concerned, our agi'eement, the con-
clusions which are embodied in our final act, the
judgment upon those will be made by our peoples
and by the peoples of the world and by history.
It is not for us to utter that final judgment, nor
is it for us to overpraise what we have clone. I
am happy to see already that the judgments,
which are being reached about our work, are that
it has been outstanding. I am sure that will be
the continued judgment. But, I may perhaps say
a little about the method in which our work has
been conducted and the example which has come
from our work to this troubled world.

And I might pause at this moment, before our
final farewell, to examine for a moment why it is
that we have been able to work upon these prob-
lems, difficult problems which have come before us,
in such a cooperative and brotherly way. Wliy

'Made before the closing session of the meeting on
Apr. 7.

is that? There are two great reasons. We meet
here in a meeting of Consultation as Foreign
Ministers. But Foreign Ministei's are also men.
So let us examine for a moment our duties and
our efforts as Foreign Minister and then our asso-
ciation as men. As Foreign Ministers, every per-
son at this table has come to this meeting and
has acted throughout this meeting in devoted
loyalty to the interests of his country. And, in
examining the interests of his country, each one
of these Foreign Ministers has found, as their
predecessors have found and as their successors
will find, that fundamental in the interests of each
of our countries is devotion and loyalty to our
common American system, to our common Amer-
ican ideals, to our common American interests,
and to our common American organization.

Therefore, we find, as we work, that we are
bound together with such bands of iron that no
individual interests can ever tear us apart. And,
therefore, as Foreign Ministers, we find ourselves
inevitably colleagues, working as colleagues at
common problems which are connnon to all of
us, the solution of which is necessary to all of
us. And, therefore, as we work, we have worked
as colleagues. There has been no rivalry between
us. In a gathering such as the one we have had
there are no stars and no satellites. There have
been no issues where there are victors and van-
quished. There have been no points at which
there are winners and losers. ^\ e have all won.
We have all won through a great achievement be-
cause we are colleagues and because our funda-
mental interests are common interests.

But, we are also men, as well as Foreign
Ministers. And the relations between men are,
in my judgment (and I am sure you will agree) fl
foumled, if they are to be successful, u]K)n nuitual '|
respect and mutual regard. Those emotions can-
not be pretended. They must be founded on
reality.

During this past 2 weeks, our mutual respect
has grown because of the performance of every

616

Department of State Bulletin

single Minister at this table. Each of you, I
know, could do what I could do. And that is to
look around this table and point out instance
after instance where every single one of Your
Excellencies has contributed with great ability
and with great skill to the solution of some thorny
problem or to easing the way over sticky points.

And so, as we have worked together, we have
a solid foundation for respect. We have seen
performances here by every one of you which in-
spire respect, and our mutual respect has grown
in these weeks to great lieight. But respect is not
enough. In adclition to respect, to have the
proper relationships between men, there must be
regard. And during these 2 weeks that, in turn,
has grown.

Many of us here are old friends. Some of us
here are new friends. But, in every case, during
these weeks, we find that the warmth of our re-
gard has gi-own. It has grown and it has flour-
ished, so that as we return home and conununicate
with one another, and as we come to the final
formal closing words of diplomatic correspond-
ence, and we read, each one to the other, those

words "Accept Excellency, the renewed assurance
of m_v highest regard" tliat will mean to us some-
tliing real.

It will mean that it is the communication from
a friend wiio really has high regard and for whom
we each have high regard, and we will know that
we are communicating with friends.

I said that we have come to the end of our
meeting, but we have not come to tlie end of our
work. Our work never ends. We turn now from
our agreement upon future action, which we have
reached so unanimously here in Washington, to
the carrying out of that action each in his own
country. And each of us will encounter difficul-
ties— that is inevitable. But all of us, as a band
of brothers, will have our hearts and minds going
with each person here, sympathizing in his diffi-
culties, anxious to be helpful for their solution,
watching, always hopefully, for his greater and
greater success.

We have come to the final moment: Your Ex-
cellencies— no, that word is too cold for this final
moment. May I say to you, "my friends," I bid
to each one of you a most affectionate farewell.

U.S. Solicits Opinions of American Republics on Japanese Settlement

by Ambassador John Foster Dulles
Consultant to the Secretary ^

We are living in dangerous days. It is a time
when each of us has the obligation to contribute
to the preservation of peace with justice. The con-
tributions to be made are not merely material —
military and economic. There is a moral contri-
bution to be made, because only as our cause is
righteous will it prevail.

It is in this respect that our sister Republics of
the Americas can make a great and a distinctive
contribution to the cause of the free world. The
very fact that you have no selfish interest in Eu-
rope, Asia, and Africa enables you to bring to bear
a clarity and a purity of judgment which is wel-
comed by a nation such as the United States which,
as set out in the opening sentence of our Declara-
tion of Independence, possesses "a decent respect
to the opinions of mankind."

The United States invites the opinion of all of
the American Republics with respect to its inter-
national policies, because we recognize that those

' Summary of remarks made before the World Trade
Committee of the Washington Board of Trade in honor of
the Foreign Ministers and Ambassadors of the American
Republics at the Fourth Consultative Meeting of the For-
eign Ministers on Apr. 3 and released to the press on the
same date.

April 16, 1 95 J

940013—51 3

opinions reflect the type of public opinion by which
international policies ought to be judged.

You, your Governments, and your people, pre-
dominantly accept a religious view of the world.
You believe that there is a Divine Creator Who is
the ruler of men and of nations and that He has
established a moral order, disregard of which
sooner or later, but inexorably, brings disaster.
You believe tliat there are external verities of
truth, mercy, and justice and that law, national
and international, ought to reflect those verities
rather than the self-will and self-seeking of man.

It is in this matter that there exists the greatest
gulf between the Cf^mmunist world and the free
world of those who b lieve that man has his origin
and destiny in God. The Communist world, fol-
lowing the precept of Stalin, refuses to evaluate
human and national conduct by standards of "eter-
nal justice" and considers that law, national and
international, is merely the means whereby those
in power achieve their political ends and destroy
their class enemies.

The United States has, I repeat, a "decent re-
spect" for the opinions of others, but it is not in-
terested in opinions which derive from this athe-

617

istic view of our world. We are interested in
opinions wliich reflect a moral judgment.

That is why the United States welcomes the im-
portant voice' which the American Republics have
in the United Nations. That is why we always
consciously try to make our policies such as wdl
commend themselves to your opinion.

The Soviet bloc constantly charges that there
is unity between the United States and our sister
Republics because you are "dominated" by our
power. Only those who are fully blind to reality
could make such a charge. If there is unity, and
I am happy to say that there generally is, it is
because the United States has a respect for your
opinion and because we consciously seek to win
its approbation.

That is one of the reasons, in fact the principal
reason, why I welcome this opportimity to talk
with you about the possibilities of peace with
JajDan. There are, of course, other reasons. All
of you showed your solidarity with the United
States by entering the war against Japan. All
of you joined the economic effort that was required
to win that war, and one of you made an appre-
ciable military contribution in the Pacific. There-
fore, in this matter you are more than an academic
audience. You represent Governments which, I
hope, will be parties to a peace.

There is a group of nations which, by common
consent, have a special interest in the Japanese
peace settlement. Those are the nations repre-
sented upon the Far Eastern Commission which
was set up in 1945 and which has been responsible
for the over-all occupation policies. Three other
nations in the western Pacific area have come into
being since 1945 and they have a similar concern.
We are having preliminary talks with these Gov-
ernments and with Japanese leaders. I assure you
they are only preliminary. They are, however,
not secret talks. The whole world knows what
we are talking about, and we welcome and receive
advice from all who are sincerely and legitimately
concerned.

Perhaps the most diflBcult single problem is that
of security — security for Japan and security
against a possible revival of militarism in Japan.
We believe that that should be worked out as far
as possible in accordance with the collective se-
curity principles of the United Nations. The Jap-
anese Government and people want that also.
Japan, undoubtedly, will apply as promptly as
possible for membei-ship in the United Nations.
But their application may be vetoed, as has been
the application of Italy and other peace-loving
states.

This is an aspect of the problem which I am
sure you will want to consider, both as belligerents
in the Jajjanese war and as members of the United
Nations. It is becoming increasingly intolerable
that the Soviet veto is preventing the realization
of the United Nations Charter provision that mem-
bership should be open to all peace-loving states

which accept the obligations contained in the
Charter and which are able and willing to carry
out those obligations. Denial of membership to
such nations makes it difficult to develop a genu-
ine collective security system, such as is needed
in the case of Japan. I believe that the United
Nations Assembly should, at an early date, give
consideration to how this problem can be prac-
tically resolved.

Erroneous Versions of Japanese
Peace Treaty in Foreign Press

[Released to the press April 6]

It seems that there are appearing in the press
abroad versions of a draft of Japanese peace
treaty attributed to the United States.

As previously announced, the United States
some clays ago did hand confidentially to repre-
sentatives of Allied Powers a tentative and sug-
gestive dra,ft. of a peace treaty which it was
understood M'as a working paper, subject to alter-
ation and changes which the United States itself
might want to propose and, of course, subject to
considerations advanced by other Governments.
Since this first tentative draft was circulated, the
United States has itself decided to recommend
certain changes and additions so that texts pres-
ently circulated, although in general substance
reflecting the type of treaty which Ambassador
Dulles described in considerable detail in his Los
Angeles address of March 31,^ do not in respect
to details and concrete language necessarily re-
flect the final views of the United States, much
less those of other Governments whose comments
are now being awaited.

Philippine War Damage Commission
Completes Task on War Claims

[Released to tlie press hy the White House Mareh 29]

The President today sent the following letter to each
of the three members of the Philippine War Damage
Commissian on the termination of the activities of the
Commission.

De.m{ : As the Philippine War

Damage Commission terminates its work, I wish
lo connnend you and the other membei-s of the
Commission on the outstanding manner in which
you have discharged your responsibilities. It is
partii'ularly notewortiiy, and something all too
rare in govermnent annals, that the Conunission,
in advance of the time prescribed by Congress, has
been able to complete the tremendous task of con-

' Bulletin of Apr. 9. 1951, p. 577.

618

Department of State Bulletin

sideriiiji; 1,248,901 claims and paying out more than
$388 million at an administrative cost well below
that provided by law.

The program which yonr Connnission undertook
following the passage of the act of Congress of
April ;!(), 194() rejn-esented something new in the
history of the United States because this Govern-
ment had never before assumeil the responsibility
of restoration of private property destroyed in
time of war. The j^rogram was one, however, that
the American people, wiio were themselves still
mourning the loss of some 300,000 of their own sons
and daughters and who then, as now, were con-
fronted with staggering post-war problems, never
questioned. In recognition of the loyalty and
friendship of the people of the Philippines, all
were agreed that we should assist them in getting
a firm start on the road back toward the reestab-
lishment of a normal economy. Your Commission
has played a vital role in helping the people of
the Philippines in this task. Your program has
strengthened the Philippine ecouonn', it has helped
restore many imjioi-tant buildings and facilities
throughout the Islands, and it has enabled tho)i-
sands of people to reestablish themselves in busi-
ness, in agriculture, and in other pursuits.

The Philippine and American people have been
closely associated for more than fifty years and
it is my earnest hope that the two nations will
continue that close association and cooperation in
meeting the great problems which confront all
freedom-loving people today. I believe that the
work of the Commission has contributed materially
to the realization of that hope.

In accepting your resignation on completion of
a task well done, I wish to express my pereonal
appreciation for your outstanding services as a
member of the Phili])pine War Damage Commis-
sion, and to conunend the Philippine and American
membei-s of your staff for their splendid contri-
bution.

Very sincerely 3'ours,

Harrt S. Truman

FoUomng is the text of the letter to the President from
the members of the Commission.

March 26, 1961
My Dear Mr. President : It is our privilege to
transmit to you the Ninth Semiannual and Final
Report of the Philippine War Damage Commis-
sion.^ This report, as required by statute, has also
been sent to the President of the Senate and
Speaker of the House of Representatives. It con-
tains an account of the activities of the Commis-
sion since its inception.

The Commission received 1,248,901 claims val-
ued by the claimants at $1,225,()00,(X)0. All of
these claiuLs have now been adjudicated, with an
average rate of disallowance of 55.7 percent. To-
tal payments have aggregated $388,150,000. As
prescribed hy law, all claims approved for $500 or

'Available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S.
Government Printing OlHee, Washington 2.5, D. C.

less were paid in full, and all claims approved in
excess of $500 were paid that amount plus 52.5 per-
cent of the remainder. Small claimants have re-
stored their homes and equipment, thus becoming
more productive and hence more useful citizens.
Claimants witli claims apjiroved in excess of
$25,000 received $100,000,000 from the Commis-
sion, but invested $500,000,000 in the Philippine
economy.

The task of the Commission has been concluded
in advance of April 30, 1951, the termination date
fixed by Congress. Moreover, the Connnission is
able to return to the United States Treasury
$2,500,000, most of which represents administra-
tive funds which were not required because of econ-
omy in administration. The cost of administration
was less than 2.5 percent of the total sum appro-
priated.

For the payment of war damage to public prop-
erty, the Commission was allocated $56,800,000.
Of this sum $55,250,000 has been distributed for
reconstruction. The remainder was iised for ad-
ministrative expense at a ration of 2.5 percent.
Through this i^hase of the rehabilitation program,
hospitals were provided for 3,200 bed patients,
schools for 3,200,000 students, and waterworks for
6,700,000 people. In addition, appropriate build-
ings were reconstructed for the Philippine Con-
gress, the Supreme Court, certain executive de-
partments of the national Government and provin-
cial and municipal Governments. The University
of the Philippines was given substantial aid, as
were the Culion Leper Sanitorium and the Quezon
Institute for tuberculous patients.

Although the funds authorized and appropri-
ated were inadequate fully to repair the ravages of
war in the Philippines, they were of tremendous
assistance. Without them the very existence of
the new ReiDublic would have been endangered.
Yet, despite supplemental appropriations by the
Philippine Government, much rehabilitation re-
mains to be done. The Commission is pleased to
report, however, the deep gratitude of the Philip-
pine people for this unprecedented act of generos-
ity by the people of the United States.

Now that the work is concluded, we, the mem-
bers of the Philippine AVar Damage Commission,
offer to you our resignations, to become effective
at the close of business March 31, 1951. In so do-
ing, we wnsh to express our deep appreciation of
the opportunity accorded us to serve the Philip-
pine and American people, and to acknowledge
our indebtedness for your able leadership and un-
failing support. You have our best wishes for
continued health, happiness, and success.

Respectfully,

Fr,\nk a. Waring

Chairman
Francisco A. Delgado

Commissioner
John A. O'Donnell

C ommissioner

April 76, J 95/

619

Second Anniversary of NAT Marks Progress

Statement by the President

[Released to the press by the White House April S]

On the second birthday of the North Athintic
Treaty, it is appropriate that we take stock of our
progress.

The most encouraging fact which stands out
today is that Europe is stronger and in a better
position to defend itself than it was a year ago.

This stems from the determination of the free
peoples of Europe to help themselves. Their de-
termination as well as their strength has been in-
creased by the assistance which we have been able
to give them. Even more important, our joint
efforts have acquired greater effectiveness through
the establishment of General Eisenhower's unified
command. For the first time in history, there
exists in peace an integrated international force
whose object is to maintain peace through
strength. Six years ago, General Eisenhower led
such a force to victory, but we devoutly pray that
our present course of action will succeed and main-
tain peace without war.

The armed forces of the North Atlantic Treaty
countries will grow more rapidly in the future as
stepped-up training and production programs
begin to bear fruit. An enormous military pro-
duction program is under way in the United
States, and our allies, despite limited facilities and
resources, have already more than doubled their
rate of military production.

Just as important as the forces which we are
building together is the spirit of cooperation and
joint effort which has been greatly strengthened.
This is a solid achievement which will bring re-
wards of happiness and prosperity to our peoples
long after the passing of the present emergency.

The events of the past 2 years have proved be-
yond question the wisdom of the course we adopted
in signing tJie North Atlantic Treaty. Develop-
ments since the war have made it more clear than
ever before that no nation can find safety behind
its own frontiers — that the only security lies in
collective security.

While we have reason to take pride in our ac-
complishments, we cannot forget that the road
ahead is still long and hard. The people of the

United States and the people of Europe must ac-
cept heavy burdens with both determination and
patience. I am confident that we will march for-
ward together with speed and vigor. Above all,
I feel certain that we will not relax the great effort,
which is now under way.

Message From Secretary Acheson
to Chairman van Zeeland

[Released to the press April 4]

Folloirinff is the text of a niessnfie from Secretary
Dean Acheson to Forci/in Minister Paul O. van Zeeland
of Belyiuin, Chairman of the Council of Nato, on the oc-
casion of the second annirersary of the signing of the
North Atlantic Treaty.

On this second anniversary of the signing of the
North Atlantic Treaty, I wish to extend to you, as
Chairman of the North Atlantic Council, the sin-
cere greetings of the Government and people of
the United States.

Two j'ears ago, 12 nations of the North Atlantic
community joined together in a great cause — the
cause of peace and security. These nations have
reason to take pride in the progress which has
been made since that time. We are proving once
again that free people possess the spirit, the cour-
age, the skill, and the capacity for cooperation
which, in the long run, will make them far
stronger than any would-be aggi'essor.

Today, the people of the United States have
undertaken the greatest peacetime defense pro-
gram in their history. In accepting the burdens
and sacrifices which such a program inevitably
requires the}' are comforted and insi)ire(l by the
knowledge that 1 1 other free nations are also con-
tributing their skills and resources to the connnon
purpose. The future will demand continued ef-
forts and sacrifices from all of us, but I am con-
fident that we will succeed in meeting these de-
mands. Upon our success dejicnds not only the
peace and security of the iieoples of this genera-
tion, but also the preservation of freedom, human
dignity, and social justice for future generations.

620

Department of State Bulletin

U.S.-U.K.-France Announce Agreement on Industrial Controls
in Allied Zones of Germany

[Releaaed to the press April 4]

Attached is the text of an agreement concerning in-
dustrial controls in the French, United Kingdom, and
United States areas of occupation in Germany, which was
announced April 3 in Frankfort by the three AUied> High
Commissioners.

This agreement replaces the agreement concerning pro-
hibited and limited industries of lO^O.^ Also attached
is the text of a letter from the High Commission to
Chancellor Adenauer summarizing the provisions of the
new agreement.

These documents have 'been released in Germany and
in Washington, Paris, and London.

TEXT OF AGREEMENT

CONCERNING INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS

The High Commissioners of France, the United King-
dom and the United States of America, duly authorised
thereto by tlieir respective Governments, hereby con-
clude on behalf of those Governments the following
agreement concerning industrial controls in the French,
United Kingdom, and United States Areas of Occupation
in Germany.

Article I

1. The provisions of this Agreement shall be reviewed
on the request of any two of the Governments parties to
the Agreement and in any event not later than 31st
December, 1951.

2. Except as may be subsequently agreed among the
Governments parties to this Agreement, the prohibitions
laid down in this Agreement shall remain in force until
the peace settlement.

3. Except as may be subsequently agreed among the
Governments parties to this Agreement, the limitations
laid down in this Agreement shall remain in force until
1st January, 19.53, or until the peace settlement, which-
ever is the earlier, and thereafter as may be agreed.

Article II

Except with the authorisation of the Allied High
Commission the manufacture, production, installation,
import, export, transport, storage, possession, ownership
or use of any of the following articles or products is
prohibited :

(a) items listed in Annex A to this Agreement;

(b) primary magnesium.

Article III

Materials, products, facilities and etiuipment relating
to atomic energy shall continue to be subject to Allied
High Commission legislation.

' Bulletin of Apr. 24, 1949, p. 526.

Article IV

1. The manufacture of electronic valves shall be un-
restricted in respect of types included in a list of per-
mitted types as established, and modified as required,
liy the Allied High Commission. These permitted types
shall not exceed .50 watts anode dissipation, or a fre-
quency of 250 megacycles per second.

2. The manufacture of electronic valves included in
the categories listed in Annex B to this Agreement is
prohibited. This Annex is sub.iect to review and revision
by the Allied High Commission.

3. The manufacture of all other categories or specific
types of electronic valves is prohibited except under
license from the Allied High Commission.

Article V

1. Control shall be maintained over capacity in the fol-
lowing industries :-

(a) Steel

(b) Electric arc and high frequency furnace steel

(c) Shipbuilding

(d) Synthetic rubber

(e) Synthetic petrol, oil and lubricants, produced
directly or indirectly from coal or brown coal

(f) Ball and roller bearings, except equipment only
capable of producing non-precision bearings.

2. No enterprise shall be permitted, except under
license from the Allied High Commission, to increase the
productive capacity of any of its ijlant or equipment that
is engaged or partly engaged in the industries listed in
this Article, or of the industry as a whole, whether it is
proposed to effect the increase by extension of existing
facilities, the construction of new facilities, or the addi-
tion of new equipment. Such licenses shall not be granted
unless the Allied High Commission are satisfied with the
arrangements made for the disposal of the capacity
replaced.

Article VI

1. Subject to the provisions of paragraph 2 of this
Article the production of crude steel shall be limited to
11.1 million tons a year.

2. The Allied High Commission will allow crude steel to
he produced outside the foregoing limitation where this
will facilitate the defence effort.

Article VII

1. The construction and acquisition of ships which in-
clude the military features, characteristics and equipment
listed in Annex C to this Agreement and the modification
of ships to include such features, characteristics and
e<iuipment shall be prohibited except under license from
the Allied High Commission.

2. The term "acquisition" as used in this Article in-
cludes bare-boat chartering.

April 16, 1 95 1

621

Article VIII

Nothin>; in this Agreement sliall 1)8 interpreted as im-
Iiairing or reducing tlie powers with which the Military
Security Board is vested.

Article IX

This Agreement shall come into force from the date
of signature and shall replace the Agreement concerning
Prohibited and Limited Industries approved by the
Foreiun Ministers of France, the United Kingdom and the
United States and signed by the Military Governors of
the French, United Kingdom and United States Zones of
Occupation in Germany in April, 1&49.

Annex A

Group I

(a) All weapons Including atomic means of warfare
or apparatus of all calibres and natures capable of jiro-
jecting lethal or destructive projectiles, liquids, gases or
toxic substances, their carriages and mountings.

(b) All projectiles for the above and their means of
projection or propulsion.

(c) All military means of destruction including but
not limited to grenades, bombs, toriiedoes, mines, depth
mines, depth and demolition charges and self-propelled
charges, all types of fu.ses therefor and all apparatus for
the guiding, control and operation thereof including tim-
ing, sensing and homing devices.

(d) All military cutting or piercing weapons.

Group II

(a) All vehicles specially equipped or designed for mili-
tary purposes including but not limited to tanks, armoured
cars, tank-carrying trailers and armoured railway rolling
stock.

(b) Armour of all types for military purposes.

Group III

(a) Instruments and devices of the following classes,
de.signed for military purposes, irrespective of the form
of energy or the part of the spectrum used :

(i) Range-finding ai)paratus of all kinds;
(ii) Aiming, guiding and computing devices for Are
control ;

(iii) Locating devices of all kinds;

(iv) Instruments for observation of fire;

(v) Instruments for the remote control of objects.

(b) All signalling and inter-communication equipment
and installations specially designed for military purjioses ;
all apparatus intended specifically for the purpose of pro-
ducing radio interference.

Oroup IV

(a) Warships of all classes. All ships and floating
equipment specially designed for war purposes including
the servicing of warships. All ships designed or con-
structed for conversion into warships or for military use.

(b) Special machinery, e<|uipnient and installations
which in time of peace are normally used solely in
warship.s.

( c) Submersible craft of all kinds ; submersible devices
of all kinds, designed for military puriK)ses. Special
equipment i>crtaining to these craft and devices.

(d) All military landing devices.

(e) Material, equipment and installations for the
military defense of coastal areas and harbours.

Group V

(a) Aircraft of all types, heavier or lighter than air:
with or without means of pidinilsion, and all auxiliary
equipment, including aircraft engines and component

622

parts, accessories and spare parts specifically designed for
aircraft use.

(b) Ground equipment and installations for servicing,
testing or aiding the o[)eration of aircraft, including but
not limited to catapults, winches and beacons. Material
for the rapid construction or preparatiim of airfields.

Group VI

All drawing, specifications, designs, models and repro-
duction directly relating to the development, manufacture,
testing or inspection of the war material, or to experi-
ments or research in connection with war material.

Group VII

(a) Machine tools or other manufacturing equipment
specifically designed for the development, manufactui-e,
testing and inspection of weapons, ammunition or other
war materials listed in this Annex.

(b) Attachments, devices, tools or other objects having
no normal peacetime use and specifically designed to con-
vert or adapt machine tools or other manufacturing equip-
ment to the development, manufacture, testing and inspec-
tion of weapons, ammunition or other war materials listed
in this Annex.

Oroup VIII

(a) (i) Explosives and accessories.

(ii) Double base propellants (i. e. nitrocellulose pro-
pellants containing nitroglycerine, diethyleneglycol di-
nitrate or analogous substances).

(iii) Single base proijellants for any weapons.

(iv) Nitroguanidine.

(v) Chemicals particularly useful as poison war
gasses (including liquids and solids customarily included
In this term).

(vi) Hydrogen peroxide of 37% concentration or
higher.

(vii) Hydrazine hydrate.

(viii) Alkyl nitrates.

(ix) Other chemicals particularly useful as rocket
fuels.

(x) Highly toxic products from bacteriological or
plant sources, with the exception of those bacteriological
and plant products which are used for therapeutic
jjurposes.

(xi) White phosphorous.

(xii) Incendiaries and incendiary compositions, in-
cluding but not limited to thermites and gell fuels.

(b) All special means for individual and collective
defence used in peace exclusively by Armed Forces.

Group IX

All apparatus, devices and material specially designed
for training and instructing personnel in the use. handling,
manufacture and maintenance of war material.

Group X

Spare parts, accessories and component parts of the
articles and products listed in this annex.

Annex B

Cattyorics of Electronic Valves the Miinii fact lire uf ichieh |
is Prohibited

(i) Velocity modulated valves, e.g. Kylstrons.

(ii) Magnetrons.

(iii) Valves employing direct coupling of the electron
stream to the output circuit.

(iv) Valves designed uiechanieally to fit wave guide,
cavity, coaxial or parallel wire line resonant circuits or
having such circuits built into the valves.

(v) Jlemor.v or storage valves.

(vi) Triggered spark-gap valves.

Department of Stale Bulletin

(vii) Subminiature valves (i. e. valves capable of beinj;
passed tlirou;;!! a hole one-half inch in diameter, or spe-
cially designed to withstand Kreat acceleration or the
shock of departnre of projectiles).

(viii) t'uthode ray tubes, except those specifically de-
sifined and produced for television receiver purposes.

(ix) Germanium, silicon, and other semiconductor
crystal rectifiers, or modifications tlieroof capable of opera-
tion at radio frequencies.

(X) Speci:il pui-pose valves having no known commer-
cial application or valves designed for optimum perform-
ance above 250 megacycles.

Annex C

Features, Characteristics and Equipment which may
not be Constructed or Installed in any Ship except under
Incense from the Allied High Commission

(a) Any special features or characteristics which
render it readily convertible :-

(i) for amphibious assault operations;

(ii) to an aircraft carrier or for operating aircraft;

(iii) to a repair or depot ship for submarines, air-
craft or coastal forces craft ;

(iv) to a fl.s,'hter direction vessel;

(V) to any other combatant or naval auxiliary type
of vessel.

(b) Any of the following weapons, equipment and
material :-

(i) all items listed in Annex A of this Agreement
(except radio direction and position finders and radar
equipment of normal commercial marine type) ;

(ii) paravanes;

(iii) minesweeping gear of any description;

(iv) catapults for aircraft launching;

(v) rocket or missile launching devices, except such
as may be in normal commercial usage for emergency
signallins; and rescue purposes ;

(vi) smoke-making equipment or apparatus of spe-
cial devices for concealment purposes ;

(vii) high concentration hydrogen peroxide or spe-
cial submarine fuels or supplies;

(viii) depth sounding gear and radio and gyrocom-
pass «iuipment which do not conform to normal commer-
cial marine tyi^es.

(c) Any special titting-s or special structures readily
adaptable for mounting, carrying or storing any of the
items listed in paragraph (b) above.

(d) Any of the following machinery or features of ship
design, and provisions therefor, which in relation to the
type of vessel in which they are installed, do not conform
to normal commercial marine practice, or which in time
of peace are normally used solely in warships, and which
in the opinion of the Military Security Board also con-
stitute a security threat :-

(i) main and auxiliary machinery, notably that with
characteristics such as would give abnormally long range
in miles at speeds other than service speed or that which
would result in speed substantially greater than that
normal to the type of vessel and for the services intended ;

(ii) gas jet propulsion or atomic propulsion;

(iii) auxiliary electrical generating machinery and
equipment of capacity in excess of that normal to the
type of vessel ;

(iv) cargo lifting gear in excess of that normal to
the type of vessel ;

(V) subdivision significantly different from that
normal to the type of vessel ;

(vi) evaporators of capacity in excess of that normal
to the type of ves.sel and for the services intended ;

(vii) fuel and fresh water capacity in excess of that
normal to the type of vessel and for the services in-
tended ;

(viii) hull and deck openings in excess of those
normal to the type of vessel ;

(ix) unobstructed deck space in excess of that nor-
mal to the type of vessel.

TEXT OF LETTER FROM
ALLIED HIGH COMMISSION
TO CHANCELLOR ADENAUER

I have the honor ot inform Your Excellency that, fol-
lowing upon the decision taken by the three I<\)reign Min-
isters in September, VXiU to institute a review of the Pro-
liiliited and Limited Industries Agreement, my colleagues
and I liave today signed an Agreement on Industrial Con-
trols. I enclose a copy of this document which shall,
!is from today, replace the Agreement concluded be-
tween tlie three Military Governors in April, 1949.

-. You will observe that the new agreement, which is
subject to review at the request of any two of the sig-
natory Governments, and in any event, not later than
r>ecemlier .'U. 1951, relaxes a number of limitations
hitherto imposed on industry in the Federal territory and
will facilitate production in Germany of items and ma-
terials for common defense by the West.

3. By the terms of the Agreement, limitations and
restrictions hitherto in force upon the size and speed or
tonnage of merchant ships built or otherwise acquired
by Germany, primary aluminum, syntlietic ammonia,
chlorine, styrene, and upon machine tools of types listed
in annex "B" to the former Agreement are removed. In
addition, the High Commission will be willing to author-
ize the production of crude steel outside the limit of 11.1
million tons per annum where such production will facili-
tate steel being provided for the conunon defense effort.
The prohibition on the production of synthetic oil and
rubber is removed, and restrictions upon the capacity of
the.se and of the ball and roller bearing industries are
now modified. Control is retained, but in modified form,
over the production of electronic valves.

4. The three Governments do not desire to hamper
technological progress or to prevent the modernization
of production leading to the reduction of costs and econo-
mies in raw materials, power and fuel. Consequently, in
those few industries where tlie limitation of capacity is
maintained the High Commission will be prepared to au-
thorize the substitution of more efficient equipment, the
rearrangement of machinery and the introduction of new
processes or other technical changes even though this
may involve a minor increase in the capacity of the fac-
tory or the equipment in question.

5. In authorizing the rehabilitation of plants (includ-
ing the installation of new equipment) and the utiliza-
tion of new processes for the production of synthetic
rubber and synthetic oil the High Commission will, as
long as solid fuels are in short supply, grant licenses only
to the extent that additional consumption of coal and
coke necessary for the production contemplated does not
affect the satisfaction of the needs of solid fuel import-
ing countries. Nevertheless, applications outstanding for
use of the plants at Bergkamen, Viktor, Scholven and
Ruhroel will be granted forthwith.

(j. Whilst the necessity for obtaining license to manu-
facture machine tools listed in schedule "B" of the old
Prohibited and Limited Industries Agreement is not main-
tained, my colleagues and I require that a sy.stem of
declaration of manufacture by the producer (indicating
the intended destination of each machine) and of report-
ing on the quantities of such machines in Germany shall
be put into operation.

7. The coming into force of the Agreement on Industrial
Controls will entail certain amendments to High Commis-
sion Law 24 and to ordinances which your Government
has issued in respect of the various items concerned. It
is not intended that the coming into effect of the new
Agreement shall await completion of all administrative
proee-s-tes involved in these amendments, and instructions
have been issued to the Military Security Board to treat
applications from industry in the spirit of the new Agree-
ment pending the issue of the necessary amendments.

April 76, 1951

623

U.S.-Sweden Discuss Financial
Policies on Transfer of Dollars

[Released to the press April 5]

During the years 1947, 1948, and 1949 the
United States Government and the Government
of Sweden concluded a series of understandings
■nhicli temporarily modified the quantitative and
nondiscriminatory commitments of the trade
agreement of 1935 between the two countries.
These modifications were necessitated by the
drain on Sweden's gold and foreign-exchange
holdings which became apparent in 1946 and
threatened to reduce these holdings below the
minimum levels required to carry on international
trade. Because of this situation, and on the basis
of the relevant understandings, the Swedish Gov-
ernment instituted temporary controls over trade
and payments with a view particularly to limit-
ing uses of Swedish-held dollar exchange to pur-
poses considered essential to that nation's
economy.

The understandings modifying the 1935 trade
agreement were last renewed on June 27, 1949,
for a period ending June 30, 1950, or on the date
Sweden became a contracting party of the Gen-
eral Agreement on Tariffs and Trade, whichever
was earlier. As a result of Sweden's accession
to the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade,
an agreement was signed May 25, 1950, by which
the 1935 trade agreement was terminated effec-
tive June 30, 1950. Therefore, from that date,
commodity trade between Sweden and the United
States has been subject only to the provisions of
the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade,
although Sweden actually became a contracting
party to the General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade on April 30, 1950.

The modifications contained in the 1949 under-
standing expired on April 30, 1950, and with
respect to payments ("invisible" transactions),
there existed after June 30, 1950, no general
financial arrangements comparable to those in the
1935 trade agreement. This situation will con-
tinue presumably until Sweden becomes a mem-
ber of the International Monetary Fund or enters
into an alternative financial agi'eement as pro-
vided in the General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade for contracting parties not members of the
International Monetary Fund. At the same time,
there remain certain funds whose transfer into
dollars was deferred by the Swedish Government
on the basis of the luiderstandings which have
expired.

The United States Government has discussed
these circumstances with the Swedish Govern-
ment in the light of the improvement which has
been noted in the Swedish balance of payments
and the Swedish gold and foreigu-cxchange hold-
ings during the past IS months. As a result of
these discussions, it has been learned that the

Swedish Government is prepared to liberalize re-
strictions on the transfer of current dollar pay-
ments accruing in the future and to undertake
the early reduction of blocked funds which have
accumulated as a result of the deferral of dollar
payments by Sweden following the 1948 and 1949
understanding mentioned above. The United
States Government will continue to discuss with
the Swedish Government, on the basis of equity
or the anticipated membership of Sweden in the
International Monetary Fund, the policies govern-
ing the transfer of payments between the two
countries.

Current U.N. Documents:
A Selected Bibliography'

General Assembly

Palestine : Question of an International Regime for the
Jerusalem Area and Protection of the Holy Places :
Special Report of the Trusteeship Council. Report
of the Ad Boo Political Committee. A/1724, Decem-
ber 14, 1950. 5 pp. mimeo.

Budget Estimates for the Financial Tear 1951: Salary,
Allowance and Leave System of the United Nations.
Report of the Fifth Committee. A/1732, December
14, 1950. 14 pp. mimeo.

Budget Estimates for the Financial Year 1951 : Report
of the Fifth Committee. A/1734, December 14, 1950.
70 pp. mimeo.

Department of Public Information : Research Section :
The General Assembly, Fourth Regular Session.
Background paper no. 46, supplement no. 2, April 15,
1950. 2S pp. mimeo.

Economic and Social Council

Relations With and Co-Ordination of Specialized Agencies.
Eighth Report of the Administrative Committee on
Co-Ordination to the Economic and Social Council.
E/1865, November 7, 1950. 11 pp. mimeo.

United Nations International Children's Emergency Fund.
General Progress Report of Executive Director.
E/ICEF/163, January 27, 1951. 22 pp. mimeo.

Report of the Commission on Narcotic Drugs (Fifth Ses-
sion). E/1SS9, December 29, 1950. 84 pp. mimeo.

United Nations Programme of Technical Assistance.
Under General Assembly Resolutions 58 (1), 200
(111) and 246 (111). E/1893, January 0, 19."il.
99 pp. mimeo.

' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27, N.Y. Other
materials (mimeographetl or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libi'aries in the United
States.

The United Nations Secretariat has established an 0/P-
cial Rrrords .series for the General Assembly, the Security
Council, the Economic and Social Council, the Trusteeship
Council, and the Atomic Energy Commission: which in-
cludes summaries of proceedings, resolutions, and rejwrts
of the various commissions and committees. Publications
in the Official Records series will not be listed in this
department as heretofore, but information on securing
sul)scriptions to the series may be obtained from the
International Documents Service.

624

Department of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Reports of U.N. Command Operations in Korea

FIFTEENTH REPORT:

FOR THE PERIOD FEBRUARY 1-15, 1951 >

U.N. doc. S/2053
Dated M.ir. 26, 1951

I herewith submit report number 15 of the
United Nations Command Operations in Korea for
the period 1-15 February, inclusive.

General. — During this period our strategic plans
to cope with the new situation created by Com-
munist China's entry into the war have continued
to produce the desired resuks. By breaking con-
tact with the enemy and rapidly withdrawing to
the south when our advance of 24 November ex-
posed the secret build up of Communist Chinese
forces in the forward battle area south of the Yahi
River, the enemy, following in pursuit, was forced
to extend his lines of supply over 300 miles. Each
mile of this forward extension rendered him in-
creasingly vulnerable to air attack, expanded cor-
respondingly our power by maneuver to overcome
the handicap of numerically superior ground
forces and terrain favorable to the enemy tactic of
infiltration, and reduced proportionately our own
logistical difficulties. Resulting from this more
favorable balance, our air and ground forces have
inflicted losses upon the enemy reaching major pro-
portions, kept him off balance and denied him any
extended enjoyment of the tactical initiative. Of
possibly greater significance during this period has
been the exploding of the myth, built up by enemy

' Transmitted to the Security Council by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin, U.S. representative in the Security
Council, on March 23. For texts of the first, second, third,
fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, and
eleventh reports to the Security Council on U.N. command
operations in Korea, see Bulletin, of Aug. 7, 19.50, p. 20.3 ;
Aug. 28, 1950, p. 32.3 ; and Sept. 11, 1950, p. 403 ; Oct. 2,
1950, p. 534 ; Oct. 16, 1950, p. 603 ; Nov. 6, 1950, p. 729 ;
Nov. 13, 1950, p. 759 ; Jan. 8, 1951, p. 43, and Feb. 19, 11)51,
p. 304, respectively. The reports vrhich have been pub-
lished separately as Department of State publications 3935,
3955, 3962, 3978, 3986, 4006, 4015, and 4108 respectively will
appear hereafter only in the Bulletin. The twelfth, thir-
teenth, and fourteenth reports appear in the Bulletin of
Mar. 19, 1951, p. 470.

propaganda, of the invincibility of Communist
military power and the clear demonstration that
the allied soldier crusading for freedom is more
than a match for the Communist soldier fighting
to serve neither ideal nor spiritual purpose.

Our operations have been characterized by a
most complete and effective co-ordination of the
combined arm.s — land, sea and air — and an inte-
gration of the units of the several nationalities
involved, spiritually and physically, with few par-
allels in military history. It is in every respect a
unified command of high morale and marked bat-
tle efficiency, with every unit and individual in-
vincibly bound together by a singleness of high
purpose.

On 13 February after visiting the western sector
of the Korean battle front, I issued the following
public statement on the military situation : "AVhat
the future has in store in Korea continues to be
largely dependent upon international considera-
tions and decisions not yet known here. Mean-
while, the command is doing everything that could
reasonably be expected of it. Our field strategy,
initiated upon Communist China's entry into the
war, involving a rapid withdrawal to weaken the
enemy's supply lines with resultant pyramiding of
his logistical difficulties and an almost astronomi-
cal increase in the destructiveness of our air power,
has worked well. In the development of this
strategy the Eighth Army has achieved local tacti-
cal successes through maximum exploitation of the
air's massive blows on extended enemy concentra-
tions and supplies, but in the evaluation of these
successes sight must not be lost of the enemy's re-
maining potential for reinforcement and resupply.
We must not fall into the error of evaluating such
tactical successes as decisively leading to the
enemy's defeat just as many erred in assessing our
strategic withdrawals in the face of Communist
China's commitment to war as a decisive defeat
inflicted upon us.

"We are still engaged in a war of maneuver
with the object of inflicting as heavy a punish-

ApW; 76, 195?

625

ment upon the enemy as possible, striving con-
stiintly to keep him off bahmce to prevent his ob-
tainin<^ and hohlinji the tactical initiative while at
the same time avoiding the hazards inherent in his
numerical superiority. The concept advanced by
some that we should establish a line across Korea
and enter into positional warfare is wholly un-
realistic and illusory. It fails completely to take
into account the length of such a line at the nar-
rowest lateral, the rugged terrain which is in-
volved, and the relatively small force which could
be committed to the purpose. The attempt to en-
gage in such strategy would insure destruction of
our forces piecemeal. Talk of crossing 3Sth Par-
allel at the present stage of the campaign except
by scattered patrol action incidental to the tactical
situation is purely academic. From a military
standpoint we must materially reduce the existing
superiority of our Chinese Communist enemy en-
gaging with impunity in undeclared war against
us, with the unprecedented military advantage of
sanctuary protection upon Chinese soil for his
military potential against our counter attack be-
fore we can seriously consider condiicting major
operations north of that geographic line.

"Meanwhile, however, the complete coordination
of our land, sea and air forces and the consequent
smooth synchi-onization of their combined opera-
tions, with each arm contributing its full part,
continues to inflict terrific losses upon the enemy.
General Ridgway is proving himself a brilliant
and worthy successor to General Walker in com-
mand of the Eighth Army, and with Admiral
Strulile in command of the Fleet, and General
Partridge in command of the Air comprise an
ideal trio of field commanders."

Summary of Operations — Hard-driving United
Nations forces scored advances of twelve to twenty-
five miles along the entire front against stubbornly
i-esisting enemy forces. Some of the most inten-
sive fighting of the war took place in the Anyang
and Yangpyong areas south and east of Seoul. Chi-
nese Conmumist and north Korean forces, com-
prising the North Korean I Corps and the Chinese
Communist 50th and 38th Armies, in an aggregate
of eight divisions, fought tenaciously in the An-
yang, Kyongan, Yangpyong areas to protect the
main route of approach to Seoul, but United Na-
tions forces took Anyang on 7 February and ad-
vanced thi-ee miles north of the town on the
following day. By 10 February the battered en-
emy in this area had been driven north across the
Han River, and United Nations forces had taken
possession of the Port of Inchon, Kimpo Airfield,
and the south bank of the Han, to the south and
west of Seoul. Enemy attempts to recross the
river were repelled on 12 February.

Heavy fighting continued throughout the period
in the area south of Yangpyong. The Chinese
Communist foi'ccs of the .'iSth Army were forced
back five to six miles on both sides of the Yoju-
Yangi)yong axis, and sustained heavy casualties.

However, enemy resistance remains firm to the
south and east of Yangpyong, and intensive action
continues. Meanwhile, the enemy is maintaining
his Han River bridgehead between Seoul and
Yangpyong.

In the central portion of the front against light
to moderate resistance United Nations forces took
Hoengsong on 2 February and advanced nine miles
to the north by 11 February. On the night of
11-12 February the enemy launched a heavy
counter-offensive north of Hoengsong with two
Chinese Communist armies on a ten mile front,
the 40th and Gfith Armies in conjunction with the
north Korean V Corps in an aggregate of five to
eight divisions. In this effort, the enemy pene-
trated our positions in several places, principally
against the Republic of Korea 3d and 8th Divi-
sions, achieved extensive infiltrations, and forced
United Nations units to withdraw several thousand
yards to a new defensive line south of the town.
Our forces evacuated Hoengsong on 13 February
and withdrew to the vicinity of Wonju for further
operations.

In eastern Korea, enemy resistance was spotty
as United Nations forces advanced up to twenty-
five miles. By 7 February Kangnung on the east
coast was taken, and Chumunjin fell on the follow-
ing day. By 10 February, United Nations forces
had advanced several miles northward toward the
38th parallel.

In the Uihung area, almost 100 miles south of
the main front. United Nations forces continued
vigorous action to suppress relatively strong north
Korean remnants and guerrilla forces. In re-
peated engagements of battalion and regimental
size, the enemy forces invariably withdrew after a
few hours of fighting. Guerrilla forces in this area
are now almost constantly on the defensive and
have lost the initiative.

Front lines at the end of the period ran generally
from Inchon on the west coast to Seoul, southeast
to Kwanju, east to the Han River below Yang-
pyong, east to Wonju or north thereof, northeast
to Kanpyong, and thence to Chumunjin on the
east coast.

United Nations Naval Forces conducted patrol
and reconnaissance operations which continue to
deny to the enemy the waters surrountling Korea.
Air and gunfire support were furnished by naval
units which maintained station in extremely se-
vere winter weather condit ions. Heavy naval gun-
fire support missions along both coasts blasted the
enemy ahead of the United Nations ground forces
as they advanced while United Nations Naval and
Marine air units contributed to the close air sup-
port effort and to strike against the enemy in the
rear areas. The bombardment of the Kangnung
area on the east coast and of the Inchon area on
the west coast were particularly effective.

Check minesweeping operations ;ind destruction
of mines were continued aU)ng the coasts of Korea
to clear the waters used by gunfire support ships

626

Department of Stale Bulletin

and transport. Drifting mines constitute a con-
stant menace to shipping in Korean waters and
in the Japan Sea. This mine menace was high-
lighted by the sinking of a sweeper engaged in
check sweeping operations.

x\.ir operations have followed the pattern of
previous periods with the close integration of the
air and ground efforts enjoying marked tactical
success. Both on the main battle position and in
United Xations rear areas where guerrilla activi-
ties have been a source of annoyance, the offensive
ground action has served to increase the number
of suitable air targets by forcing the enemy to
concentrate and to reveal his location as he is
driven from one area to another. Air drops of
hundred of tons of ammunition and other combat
equipment, by removing the requirement for sur-
face resupjily, have granted to many army units
a flexibility contributing materiallj' to tactical
successes.

Armed reconnaissance aircraft continue sweep-
ing the North Korean roads and railroads of ve-
hicles and rolling stock while destruction of
bridges, marshalling yards and tunnels render the
enemy resujiply problem a gigantic one. Rela-
tively heavy southbound traffic through Hamhung
in the northeastern sector received the brunt of
attacks during several days early in February and
later the traffic in the western areas received the
heavier effort.

Improved equipment and procedures have in-
creased substantially the effectiveness of not only
the night sweeps along lines of communications,
hut also the close support effort where the battle
area can be brilliantly lighted by high candle
power flares.

Air engagements have been few, the enemy re-
fusing to operate except by sneak attack in areas
otlier than those immediately adjacent to his
Manchurian Sanctuary.

In addition to the prisoner of war enclosures in
the vicinity of Pusan, an additional enclosure of
Camp No. 1 has been opened on nearby Koje-Do
Island at a site selected with due regard to the
health and welfare of the prisoners. In accord-
ance with Article 23 of the 1949 Geneva Prisoner
of War Convention, the coordinates of the new
enclosure have been transmitted to the enemy
through the international committee of the Red
Cross, Geneva, Switzerland.

During this period, the United Nations Com-
mand has made still further improvements at all
enclosures of Camp No. 1 furnishing United States
Army immersion type heaters for sterilizing mess
gear, installing new oil-fed ranges and continuing
the issuance of large additional quantities of warm
clothing, bedding, and mess gear.

Since the submission of my last report the flow
of refugees in the forward areas has been negli-
gible. Controlled movement of refugees has been
negligible. Controlled movement of refugees has
been permitted but in general regulations issued

by (he United Nations Command have held the
local ])opulation in their home conununities. The
redistribution of refugees away from Key Korean
conununication centers such as Pusan continues
for humanitarian reasons and of military neces-
sity. Every effort is being made by the United
Nations Command to provide food, clothing,
shelter, and medical assistance for these unfortu-
nate people.

Although some cases of sickness have been re-
ported, it is noteworthy that there has been no
general outbreak of disease of e])idemic propor-
tion in the areas under control of the United
Nations forces. Active measures are being taken
to prevent such an occurrence, including continua-
tion of the DDT dusting program, expansion of
the inununization program to include typhus,
sinallpox, and typhoid immimizations for the en-
tire South Korean population estimated at 20 mil-
lion persons and improvement and reestablishment
of medical facilities. For example, since my last
report four hospitals have been placed in opera-
tion on Cheju-Do.

To date, I have knowledge of sixteen United
Nations member nations whose generous contribu-
tions with those of United Nations organizations
and voluntary relief agencies total over $14,.500,-
000. Of this total, approximately $8,500,000 has
lieen delivered in Korea. These contributions are
of immeasurable assistance in alleviating the suf-
fering of the war-ridden Korean civilian popula-
tion and in the attainment of the United Nations
objectives in Korea.

Through combined use of the media of radio
broadcast, loudspeaker transmissions and air
dropped leaflets, United Nations forces are en-
deavoring to control the movement of civilian
refugees in Korea in order to prevent needless loss
of life. Broadcasts from airborne loudspeakers,
accompanied by air drop of special leaflets, have
been used to channel refugee groups along roads
that will take them out of the immediate combat
zone. Radio broadcasts have instructed civilians
to stay out of the city of Seoul during the current
operations in that area. Simultaneously, intensive
dissemination of leaflets to enemy soldiers con-
tinues at a high level, with primary emphasis on
instructions concerning methods of surrender, and
on reassurance of their good treatment as prison-
ers of war in United Nations camps. More than
230 million United Nations leaflets have been dis-
seminated. Daily United Nations radio broad-
casts are now reaching a larger audience through
the installation of mobile and stationary loud-
speaker relay systems in several Korean cities.

SIXTEENTH REPORT:

FOR THE PERIOD FEBRUARY 16-28, 1951

U.N. doc. S/2053
Dated Mar. 26, 1951

I herewith submit report number 16 of the
United Nations Command Operations in Korea for

April 16, 1957

627

the period 16 to 28 February, inclusive. United
Nations Command communiqufe, nnmbers 802
through 808, provide detailed accounts of these
operations.

Stubbornly resisting a vigorous United Nations
offensive, enemy forces during this period were
pushed northward seven to sixteen miles on a
ninety-mile front extending from Seoul to Chong-
son. The enemy employed large numbers of his
tactical reserves, particularly in the Seoul-Hoeng-
song area. However, this move was not only un-
successful but resulted in tremendous losses both
in men and materiel. In this action the enemy's
Han Kiver bridgehead between Seoul and Yang-
pyong was elmininated. and he had been forced to
relinquish his deep salient between Wonju and
Chongson by 25 February._ As a result, United
Nations lines are now relatively straight and un-
broken over the entire front.

United Nations forces had driven the enemy
north of the Han River at Yangpyong by 19 Feb-
ruary, but met heavy resistance immediately north
of this town. Heavy fighting continued in the
Chipyong area to the end of the period, as United
Nations forces advanced about ten miles and drove
a shallow salient into enemy lines four to six miles
north and northeast'of Chipyong. Strong enemy
forces were driven out of Hoengsong by 24 Febru-
ary, but continued stubborn resistance to the north
and west of the town.

In the Pyongchang area, enemy forces held the
initiative until 20 February, and forced United
Nations imits to make limited withdrawals from
16 to 19 February. During this period heavy fight-
ing took place seven to ten miles north of Chechon,
twelve miles east of Wonju, and in the area south
of Chongson. Having overcome these strong local
attacks. United Nations units began vigorous of-
fensive action, and by February 24 the enemy had
been forced to retreat ten to seventeen miles.
Minor clashes took j^lace in the Kangnung area,
near the east coast.

Front lines at the end of the period ran north-
east from Inchon to the Han River, along the Han
to Yangpyong, east to Hoengsong and Chongson,
and thence northeast to Kangnung.

Guerrilla forces in the Andong-Uihung area
have been considerably less active during the pe-
riod 16-28 February and have dispersed after short
skirmishes with United Nations policing forces.
It is estimated that United Nations action has now
reduced the over-all strength of guerrilla forces in
South Korea to about 30,000, representing a decline
of about 15 percent during the past two months.

Constant patrol and daily reconnaissance oper-
ations by United Nations Naval Forces continued
to deny to the enemy tlie use of Korean waters.
Surface units provided effective gunfire support to
United Nations ground units on both coasts of
Korea, particularly in tlie Inclion-Seoul area.
Other surface units carried out a devastating pro-
gram of interdiction by naval gunfire of the east

coast railroads and highways, concentrating the
main efforts on bridges and tunnels near Wonsan,
Tachon and Sono^jin. Republic of Korea Marines,
supported by United Nations surface forces, occu-
pied the islands of Ung-Do, Yo-Do and Sin-Do in
the approaches to Wonsan to facilitate naval bom-
bardment operations in the vicinity of that port.
Amphibious elements of United Nations Naval
Forces assisted in the reopening of the port of
Inchon.

Drifting mines continued to menace shipping in
Korean waters. Check minesweeping operations
were continued along the east coast of Korea in
waters used by the gunfire support ships.

Intermittently poor weather with low clouds,
rain, sleet and snow hindered air operations, but
good days saw the United Nations Air Forces
mounting their gi-eatest efforts of the Korean con-
flict. Generally rising temperatures and rain over
South Korea have made the thawing ground a
quagmire severely restricting normal resupply to
front line units. Under this condition the capa-
bilities of United Nations cargo aircraft on air
landing and air-di-opping supplies have been fully
realized, contributing greatly to the success of cur-
rent operations.

Enemy lines of supply were repeatedly attacked
between the Manchurian border and the front lines.
The numerical advantage of the enemy has been ^

considei-ably offset by the constant choking of his i

lengthy supply channels. Bridges and marehall-
ing yards continue to be the focal points of the
strangulation attacks though dumps, tunnels,
warehouses, and barracks are attacked whenever
a degree of importance to the enemy is indicated.
An increased niunber of vehicles and trains have
provided remunerative targets.

Several multi-plane attacks by MIG-15s upon
small formation of bombers and upon single planes
have resulted in negligible damage.

The close support rendered to ground forces by
all elements of United Nations tactic aircraft
continues to be a decisive factor in each day's
operations.

Since the submission of my last report, the lib-
eration of additional areas of South Korea has
necessitated an increase in the number of civil
assistance teams and the availability of local gov-
ernmental ofKcials to reinstitute civil government
in these liberated areas. Action currently is being ■
taken to dispatch a newly formed civil assistance |J
team to the province of Cholla Namdo and to aug- i
ment teams whose area of responsibility has in-
creased. Government officials and police of
northern areas of South Korea have been alerted
for re-entry into their respective areas when the
military situation will ])ermit. i

It has been necessary to continue the control of
movement of refugees, and to hold the local ]iopu-
lation in home comnuinities. Return of refugees
to their home conunnnities is permitted whenever
practicable, however, military operations and con-
{Continucd on page 63S)

628

Department of State Bulletin

Further Efforts To Solve the India-Pakistan Dispute

Statement iy Ernest A. Gross

Deputy V. S. Representative to the United Nations ^

When I last spoke in the Security Council con-
cerning tlie India-Pakistan question, on February
21, 1 said that the United States believes the Coun-
cil should exercise its responsibility to narrow
further the area of disagreement between the
parties.^ We think this responsibility can best be

J)erformed by eifecting the demilitarization of
vaslimir in order that a plebiscite can be held
under United Nations auspices. The draft resolu-
tion, introduced by the United Kingdom and the
United States, proposed to deal with the principal
issues arising in this area of disagi'eement by estab-
lishing machinery which we believed would capi-
talize on the experience of the past 2 years of
repeated attempts to implement the August 13,
1948 and January 5, 1949 resolutions of the United
Nations Commission for India and Pakistan.
The United States, in acting with the Grovernment
of the United Kingdom to offer this draft resolu-
tion last month, did not believe that the machinery
provided by the resolution was the only means of
helping the parties advance toward settlement of
this dispute. However, we thought it was a rea-
sonable proposal, and, like any suggested device
for helping solve a complex issue, it was always
open to amendment designed to improve the sug-
gestion M'hile retaining the essential minimum
necessary, in our belief, to help advance the dispute
toward a reasonable solution acceptable to both
parties.

The Governments of both Pakistan and India
have voiced objections to the resolution as sub-
mitted. The Government of Pakistan would pre-
fer a resolution by which the Security Council
would order the United Nations representative to
implement the provisions of the United Nations
Conmiission for India and Pakistan resolutions of
August 1948 and January 1949 and would give the
Council's representative the power to remove or

' Made before the Security Council on Mar. 21 and re-
leased to the press by the U.S. Mission to the United
Nations on the same date.

' Bulletin of Mar. 5, 1951, p. 394.

disband all military forces, to exercise effective
supervision over the state authorities in assuring
a fair and free plebiscite, and to arbitrate all points
of difference between the parties arising from im-
plementation of these two resolutions.

The Government of India declared they were
wholly unable to accept the draft resolution be-
cause they conceived the resolution, in many re-
spects, went beyond the terms of the August 13,
1948, and January 5, 1949 United Nations Com-
mission resolutions. The representative of India
mentioned particularly the reference to Sir Owen
Dixon's demilitarization proposals and the possi-
bility that United Nations troops might be used to
facilitate demilitarization and the holding of a
plebiscite.

Amendments to the Resolution

In accordance with our concept that the draft
resolution submitted last February 21, might be
improved by revision — as long as the objective re-
mained of providing machinery to help the par-
ties advance toward a reasonable and mutually
acceptable solution of the dispute — the United
States has joined with the United Kingdom in
sponsoring amendments to the February 21 draft
resolution. These amendments take into account
objections made by both parties, the most impor-
tant of these being the insistence by the Govern-
ments of both India and Pakistan on holding firm
to the August 1948 and January 1949 resolutions
of the United Nations Commission for India and
Pakistan. The amended text is, in my opinion,
the irreducible minimum in this case, if the Coun-
cil is to provide machinery which will aid the
parties to carry out their connuitments as mem-
bers of the United Nations to settle their disputes
by peaceful means.

These amendments have four principal effects :
First, the United Nations representative would
now be charged with the duty of effecting demili-
tarization of the state of Jammu and Kashmir on

April 16, 1951

629

the basis of the two United Nations Commission
resolutions of August 13, 1948 and January 5,
11)49. This does not mean that we believe the
United Nations representative should disregard
the efforts of more than 2 years in attempting to
implement these two resolutions, as experienced
liy General McNaughton and Sir Owen Dixon.
This experience forms a part of the Security Coun-
cil record, and neither can nor should be ignored.

In this connection, we believe that both parties
should be led, by virtue of their attitude toward
the two resolutions of the United Nations Com-
mission, to give the United Nations representative
their detailed plans for implementing these reso-
lutions. We are most pleased to note the reaffir-
mation by the representative of India of his Gov-
ernment's firm adherence to these two resolutions
iind his statement that they contain adequate pro-
visions for a free and impartial plebiscite
under United Nations auspices. We cannot, how-
ever, agree with Sir Benegal Rau's emphasis that
the Government of India cannot make any further
"concessions." This is not a matter of making
concessions but of giving effect to a commitment.
The responsibility of the Government of India
and of the Government of Pakistan, under their
international commitment in accepting these two
resolutions, is to cooperate in settling the ques-
tion of accession to India or Pakistan by a free
and impartial plebiscite under United Nations
auspices. The United Nations Commission's reso-
lutions provide merely a framework which must
be filled in; these resolutions do not set forth a
complete plan for accomplishing demilitarization
and a plebiscite. The parties will have to develop
and consider with the United Nations representa-
tive the details which fill out the framework in im-
plementing their commitment — details over which
the Governments of India and Pakistan have dis-
agreed for more than 2 years. Neither party can
stop short, merely reaffirm the two resolutions of
August 1948 anci January 1949, and say that it
cannot make further "concessions," therelDy block-
ing further progress.

The parties, moreover, are committed to permit
the people of Kashmir to decide the question of
accession of the state of Jannnu and Kashmir to
India or Pakistan. That commitment is not, as
the distinguished representative of India has said,
"To give the people the right to decide whether
they would remain in India or not." To phrase
the plebiscite question in this latter formulation
would be to disregard the binding agreement ac-
cepted by both parties. The Security Council has,
from the beginning, held that the issue of accession
is one which is to be settled by a fair and impartial
plebiscite under United Nations auspices, and both
parties, in tlio language of (heir connnitments, have
accepted this view. I am confident that Sir
Benegal Eau did not inteiul to suggest a contrary
interpretation.

I emphasize this now to make clear the position

630

of the United States Government in this vital
matter. It is a position which rests upon the belief
that the most fruitful approach, which the Secu-
rity Council can take at this stage in this dispute,
is to provide the parties with machinery for its
.solution.

The second of the four principal effects of the
amendments is the complete elimination of para-
graph 4 of the February 21, 1951 draft resolution.
This change results from the thesis that the Au-
gust 1948 and January 1949 resolutions should be
set forth clearly as the basis upon which the United
Nations representative is to effect demilitarization.
The suggestions offered in paragraph 4 of the
original draft were intended only to provide help-
ful guideposts to the United Nations representa-
tive in his efforts to work out a reasonable and
mutually satisfactory solution of the Kashmir
dispute. However, in view of the objections of
both parties, they have been excised from the text.

Thirdly, if he has not effected demilitarization
or, at least obtained agreement to a demilitariza-
tion plan, the United Nations representative is to
report to the Council, within 3 months from the
date of his arrival on the subcontinent, those points
of difference between the parties, in regard to both
interpretation and execution of the agreed August
1948 and January 1949 resolutions, which he con-
siders must be resolved in order to enable demili-
tarization to be carried out. This formulation by
the Council's representative of these essential
points of difference is important not only in focus-
ing the attention of the Security Council on the
principal issues between the parties but also be-
cause of the revised paragraph 6 and its arbitra-
tion proposal.

Paragraph 6 contains the fourth principal
change proposed by these amendments. While,
as previously, it calls upon both parties to accept
arbitration upon such outstanding points of dif-
ference as may remain after concluding discus-
sions with the' United Nations representative, it
is now changed to declare that arbitration should
be accejited upon those points as they are reported
to the Council by the United Nations repi'esenta-
tive. Furthermore, the arbitration projiosal now
provides that the arbitrator, or panel of arbitra-
tors, is to be appointed by the President of the
International Court of Justice after consultation
witli the ])art ies, instead of by the Court as a whole.
This latter change, which is more in accordance
with the international practice, will serve to expe-
dite the arbitration process if resort to it should
become necessary.

The Government of the United States regards
this arbitration proposal as one of the key elements
of this resolution. The representative of India
has not rejected the concept of arbitration but has
said that under the guise of arbitration issues can-
not be reopened which have already been closed by
the resolutions of August 1948 and .lanuary 1949
and by the assurances given to India by the United

Departmenf of Sfofe Bulletin

Nations Commission. I trust that, if it becomes
necessary to give effect to tliis arbitration provi-
sion, the Government of India will find itself able
to accept the arbitration jirovisions of this resolu-
tion. Tlie commitment of botli parties in this dis-
])ute is to settle the (piestion of accession by a fair
and impartial jjlebiscite under United Nations su-
])ervisioii. It is the parties commitment, under
the Charter of the United Nations, to seek a solu-
tion by all manner of peaceful means of their own
choice. AVhen other jjeaceful means have been ex-
hausied and interpretation must be made of the
commitments entered into by both ]>arties under
the two resolutions of August 1948 and January
194!), then arbitration is logical in order to settle
the issues preliminary to actually holding the
plebiscite.

Legal Jurisdiction of Indian Government

The members of the Security Council will note
that the February 21 resolution submitted by the
ITnited Kingdom and the United States remains
the same in an important respect: the language in
tlie preamble concerning the Kashmir National
Conference has not been changed. In my speech
on February 21 in support of the draft resolution,
I expressed my Government's concern about the
action which the authorities in the Indian-con-
trolled area of Kashmir are undertaking to deter-
mine the future shape and affiliation of the state.
I wondered whether it might interfere with a fair
and impartial plebiscite under United Nations
auspices in the entire state. I associated myself
with the anxiety expressed by Sir Gladwyn Jebb
in this regard and hoped that, if the Security
Council received an explanation, we would find
ourselves reassured that the action of the Kashmir
National Conference would not prejudice the jirior
commitments of the parties.

The representative of India, in adverting to this
problem, declared that, so far as the Government
of India is concerned, the Constituent Assembly
is not intended to prejudice the issues before the
Security Council or to come in the Council's way.
He subsequently stated that, while the Constituent
Assembly may if it so desires express an opinion
on the question of accession, it can make no deci-
sion on the question. However, the representative
of India also said that the Kashmir State Gov-
ernment is a unit of the Indian Federation, sub-
ject to federal jurisdiction in regard to defense,
external affairs, and communications, but com-
pletely autonomous in almost all other matters.
Sir Benegal Rau emphasized the autonomous na-
ture of the Kashmir State Government, affirming
that the state is entitled to frame its own constitu-
tion and to convene a Constituent Assembly for
this purpose. In discussing the question of su-
pervising the activities of the Kashmir State Gov-
ernment for purposes of a plebiscite, the repre-
sentative of India emphasized that the authority

of the Government of India over the Government
of Kashmir is limited to certain subjects; outside
that sj^here it can only advise and cannot impose
any decision.

In addition to this careful statement of the Gov-
ernment of India's limited control over the Gov-
ernment of the state of Kaslmiir, tliei'e have been
a mnnber of statements recently wjiich bear di-
rectly on the problem before the Security Council
made by ranking leaders of the Governments of
India and Kashmir concerning the Constituent
Assembly and its purpose. One of such statements
was niatle by Sheikh Abdullah, as recently as
February 25, when he said that the Constituent
Assembly would decide tlie question of accession
of the state as well as its form of government.
The Government of the United States, therefore,
believes the situation requires that the Security
Council place on the record its attitude toward
the Constituent Assembly and toward any at-
tempts that the Constituent Assembly might make
to cletermine the future shape and affiliation of
Kashmir.

Settlement Necessary to Peace in South Asia

The United States believes that the Security
Council can and should affirm what the parties
have agreed upon — that final disposition of the
state of Jammu and Kashmir will be made by the
will of the people as expressed through a fair and
impartial plebiscite conducted under United Na-
tions auspices. We believe that it is important
that the Security Council hold firm to this lan-
guage as a minimum statement of its attitude to-
ward the proposed Constituent Assembly and
toward the obligations of the Government of India
in respect to this Constituent Assembly. The
nuitter of the final disposition of the state of Jam-
mu and Kashmir is an international question, a
matter which this Council has had within its pur-
view for over 3 years. It clearly falls within the
field of external affairs, and Sir Benegal Eau has
told the Council that the external affairs of the
Government of Kashmir are within the contiol of
the Indian Government. The Security Council,
therefore, should be entitled to assume that the
Government of India will prevent the Government
of Kashmir from taking action which would inter-
fere with the responsibility of this Council.

Members of the Council will note that para-
graph 8 of the amended draft resolution calls upon
the parties to take all possible measures to insure
the creation and maintenance of an atmosphere
favorable to the promotion of further negotiations
and to refrain from any action likely to prejudice
a just and peaceful settlement. This language is
similar to that used in previous Security Council
resolutions in the course of this dispute. The
Government of Pakistan and the Government of
India have both condemned appeals to force to
settle the Kaslmiir dispute which have been made

April 16, J 95 J

631

by irresponsible and intemperate elements. Con-
tinued efforts by the parties to discourage such
appeals to force will help insure and maintain an
atmosphere which is favorable to pi-omoting fur-
ther negotiations and to refrain from action likely
to prejudice a peaceful settlement.

Let me close my remarks by repeating the deep
concern of my Government that the Security
Council should give serious and prompt considera-
tion to the amended draft resolution. The pro-
ceedings before the Security Council since Feb-
ruary 21, 1951, have indicated clearly the degree
to which the Kashmir dispute continues to be an
irritant prejudicing friendly relations between the
Governments of these two great powers, India and
Pakistan, and the extent to which this dispute
blocks the restoration of the friendship and
mutual esteem which is necessary for the peace
and security of South Asia. I believe that the
Security Council must assist the parties to reach
a peaceful and mutually acceptable solution of
this long-lasting dispute. The resolution, as it
is proposed to be amended, offers a reasonable de-
vice to help the parties solve a complex issue. It
is offered in the sincere belief that the present
frame of mind of both parties requires that the
Security Council aid them in attempting to ad-
vance toward a solution, rather than leave them
to their own devices. As I said last February, the
time and the situation demand that the Council
give the parties practical aid and give this aid with
the earnest hope that it may, in those old and
meaningful words, "speak to their condition."

Paris Selected as Site for Sixtii Session
of General Assembly

Statement hy Ernest A. Gross

Deputy U.S. Representative to United Nations''-

Wlien the question came up in December of the
selection of a site for the sixth session of the
General Assembly, my Government abstained in
the vote. We dicl so because we felt that as host
government and as the country having the honor
of furnishing the site for the United Nations
headquarters an abstention on our part seemed to
be the proper course to take.

We did not wish to appear to avoid the respon-
sibilities resting upon the liost government nor
to take advantage of the obvious economies, effi-
ciency and general convenience which would flow
to us as well as a number of other countries, by
reason of having the sixth session take place in
New York. 1 stress those three factors of con-
siderations of economy, etliciency, and conven-
ience. It seems to us wholly appropriate to

' Mailo Ix'fore pliMiary session of the General Assembly
on Miir. 120 aiul releused to tlie press by the U.S. Mission
to the United Nations on the same date.

632

consider the question of economies, not merely as
loyal members of the organization, but as one of
the large contributors to its budget.

We agree with the comments that have been
made by some of the preceding speakers that, in
a sense, tlie general policy question was put at
rest by the decision which was taken by the Gen-
eral Assembly on December 14. And it is not my
purpose now to reopen that decision nor to ques-
tion the policies which underlay it, particularly,
because of the factors which lead us to abstain
and which I have just outlined.

The matter of financial implications of the pro-
posal embodied in the resolution before us is one
which I am sure will cause concern to all of us
and which for a variety of reasons causes partic-
ular concern to my Government as well as to some
of the others around this table.

We also are very much concerned, as I imagine
all members are, with the administrative problems
which have been mentioned in very clear terms
by some of the preceding speakers.

Wliat in fact would be the effect upon the work
of the United Nations organs and specialized
agencies by reason of this new element which has
come into the situation, which is the element of
the rather late date which the Government of
France suggests or advises us is the earliest date
upon which it can conveniently make the neces-
sary arrangements ?

"\Aniile I am sure that this is not the time or
place to engage in general political ijolemics. it
does seem to me that there may be varying inter-
ests in the work of these specialized agencies.
Some of us participate in the work of those agen-
cies wholeheartedly. Others, at this table, see fit
not to participate in that work and, therefore,
perhaps they might be excused if they do not take
into account the necessity for efHciency and orderly
operations which those very constructive agencies
perform.

Therefore, I think it is relevant and indeed
rather important for the Assemblj' to be advised
by the Secretary-General, if he would be gracious
enough to do so, what in his opinion the effect
upon the work of the other agencies and other
organs of the United Nations would be, by reason
of the date problem presented to us by the note,
which we have received from the Government of
France.

Finally, I think there also arises the question
of general convenience, efficiency of operations as
to which the viewpoint of the Secretary-General,
as the responsible executive of the organization,
would also be most welcome to my Government,
and I imagine to other Goverinnonts around the
table as well. Therefore, before my delegation
would feel in a position to act upon (his matter,
wo would be most obliged if the distiitguished
representative of France would find it possible to
indicate to the Assembly whether it is within the

Deparfment of State Bulletin

Text of Resolution

U.N. doc. A/1792
Adopted Mar. 21, 1951

Tlie General AssetnWy,

Havino dken informed that the French Govern-
ment, desirous of respondin;; to the wish that has
been expressed to it on several occasions, has de-
cided to welcome the General Assembly to Paris for
the duration of its sixth session.

1. Drcitlcs, in pursuance of its resolution 497 (V)
of 14 December 1950, to hold its sixth regular session
in Paris ;

2. Decides that, notwithstanding the provisions of
rule 1 of its rules of procedure, the sixth session
shall commence not later than 6 November 1951 ;

3. Authnrizcs the Secretary-General to conclude
with the French Government the necessary agi-ee-
ments for holding the sixth session of the General
Assembly in Paris, provided that the total estimated
cost of holding the sixth session in I'aris (including
such meetings as may be arranged after 1 .January
1952) shall not exceed the amount of $2,350,400 pro-
vided in the 1951 budget, plus such additional
amounts as may be authorized by transfer from
other sections of the 1951 budget by the Secretary-
General with the prior concurrence of the Advisory
Committee on Administrative and Budgetary Ques-
tions.

concept or plan of the Government oi France to
provide tlie necessary facilities in siicL form and
in such manner as would leave the United Nations
■without the necessity for incurring any expense
additional to that amount which appears in the
approved budget for 19.51, perhaps with some
small addition that might be decided upon by
the Secretary-General in consultation with the
Budget Advisory Committee — by that I would
assume a small amount on fact upon which we
would all agree would be a small amount—
whether that would fit within the general ap-
pi'oach of the Government of France as it has
surveyed the problem. Then, also, as I have said
before, if the Secretary-General would be kind
enough to give us an appraisal of the administra-
tive implications both with i-egard to the efficiency
of operations and the impact upon the work of the
other organs of the United Nations and of the
specialized agencies.

U.N. Command Operations — Continued from ipage 628

ditions of liberated areas have precluded mass
movement of i-efugees to the north.

The program of extensive DDT dusting and im-
munization referred to in my last report is being
prosecuted vigorously in order to prevent an out-
break or spread of communicable diseases. Al-
though scattered cases of smallpox and typhus
continue to be reported, there has been no general
outbreak of diseases of epidemic proportions in
the areas under control of United Nations forces.
With continued military progress, it is anticipated
that there will be an increasing demand for medi-
cal supplies in the war-damaged areas to care for

tlie wounded and to prevent the spread of disease.

Contributions to date by United Nations mem-
ber nations are valued at approximately 1.5 million
dollars. Since it is of vital impoilance that relief
supplies continue to flow into Korea in order to
prevent disease, starvation and unrest, member
nations are urged to continue their contributions
in order that the humanitarian responsibilities
imposed upon the United Nations may be accom-
plished.

In the dissemination of United Nations leaflets
to enemy troops in Korea, increased emphasis is
being placed on safe conduct passes, which explain
to the soldier the humane treatment guaranteed
him by the United Nations in accordance with the
Geneva Convention, and urge him to cease resist-
ance. In addition to a message to the enemy
soldier in either Chinese or Korean, these leaflets
contain English and Korean instructions to
United Nations soldiers, directing them to treat
the bearer as an honorable Prisoner of War, and
take him to the nearest officer. Prisoner interroga-
tion reports show that such leaflets are influencing
many enemy soldiers despite Communist efforts
to intimidate them with false allegations concern-
ing United Nations treatment of prisoners. Ap-
proximately 250 million copies of some 1.3.3 dif-
ferent leaflets have now been used in Korea.
The schedule of United Nations radio broadcasts
to Korea has been augmented M'ith the addition of
three new informational programs designed to
stimulate li.stener interest and bolster Korean
morale.

Conclusion. As I pointed out on my last inspec-
tion of the Korean battle front, I am entirely
satisfied with the situation at the front where the
enemy has suffered a tactical reverse of measurable
proportion. His losses have been among the
bloodiest of modern times. As these are from
Communist China's finest troops, it will be dif-
ficult to adequately replace them. The enemy is
finding it an entirely different problem fighting
350 miles from his base than when he had this
"sanctuary" in his immediate rear, with our air
and naval forces practically zeroed out. He is
paying now for the illusion, so falsely but effec-
tively propagandized when Communist China
initiated undeclared war that he had decisively de-
feated these same forces. Our strategic plan, not-
withstanding the enemy's great numerical superi-
ority, is indeed working well and I have just
directed a resumption of the initiative by our
forces. All ranks of this international force are
covering themselves with distinction and I again
wish to especially commend the outstanding team-
work of the three Services under the skillful direc-
tion of their able field commanders, General Eidg-
way. Admiral Struble and General Partridge.
Our successes are in great part due to the smooth
synchronization of the power of the three arms.
This, indeed, is the most vital factor in modern
war.

kptW 16, 1951

633

International Materials Conference

RULES OF PROCEDURE ADOPTED

[Released to the press by Imo April 2]

At the second meeting on March 30, the perma-
nent Central Group of the International Materials
Conference (Imc) decided upon its rules of
procedure.

This enlarged, permanent Group is composed
of the Governments of the three originating cotin-
tries — France, the United Kingdom, and the
United States — plus those of Australia, Brazil,
Canada, India, and Italy and the Organization of
American States and the Organization for Euro-
pean Economic Cooperation. Six earlier meet-
ings liave been held by the temporary Group,
making tliis the eighth meeting of the Group since
its formation.

The chief function of this new international
body, tlie International Materials Conference,
will be to formulate and coordinate international
policy relating to the production, allocation, con-
servation, distribution, and utilization of certain
strategic raw materials. The solution of com-
modity shortages, whicli will be world-wide in
scope and effect, is one of the most important and
critical problems facing the free world today.

The Centra] Group in its rules, adopted on
March 30, allowed for the establishment of addi-
tional commodity committees as situation and
circumstances warrant. Meetings of the Central
Group will be held at regular intervals as is de-
cided by the Central Group or at the call of the
chairman or at the request of any two members to
the secretary.

Although the seven commodity conmiittees thus
far established by the Central Group have com-
plete autonomy in conducting their work, the Cen-
tral Group will work out with the chairman of
individual committees any procedures which will
facilitate the coordination of those committees in
their approach toward common problems.

The Group elected for its permanent chairman,
Edwin T. Gibson of the United States. Two vice
chairmen also have been provided for, but they
have not yet been selected. The chairman and
vice chairmen will be allowed when in the chair
to continue to represent their respective Govern-
ments. Their terms of office will be for a period
of G months. The executive secretary of the Imc,
Charles W. Jeffers, will be the secretary of the
Central Group.

COMPOSITION OF THE WOOL COMMITTEE

Tlie Inlernalional Materials Conference (Imo)
announced on April 2 that the Wool Committee
met for the first time on that date. Ten nations
were represented. Of the seven commodity com-

634

mittees which have thus far been established, six
are now holding sessions. Yet to convene is the
Pulp and Paper Committee. The date of its con-
vening will be announced later. Composition of
the Wool Committee is as follows:

AUSTRALIA

Representative:

J.

Alternates:

R.

V. Jloroney, Assistant Secretary,
Department of Agriculture and
Commerce

E. Campbell, Assistant Secretary,
Australian Wool Realization Com-
mission ; Eric P. McCIintoek, Assist-
ant Government Trade Commis-
sioner, Australian Trade Commis-
sion, New York City; R. B.
McMillan, Wool Economist, Depart-
ment of Commerce and Agriculture
BELGIUM (Representing Benelux: Belgium, Netherlands,
Luxembourg)

Pierre Jaspar, Economic Counselor,
Belgian Embassy

L^andre Mari^chal, Commercial Attach^,
Belgian Embassy ; J. Teppema,
Commercial Secretary, Netherlands
Embassy

Representative
Alternates:

FRANCE

Representative:
Alternates:

GERMANY

Representative:

Alternate:

IT ALT

Representative :

Alternate:

NEW ZHULAND

Representatire

Robert Kalm-Scriber, Managing Di-
rector, Mooch and Odelin, Paris

Eugene Dyant, Vice-Chairman of the
French Central Wool Committee;
Raymond Forestier, French Supply
Office, Embassy of French Republic ;
L6on Laroy, Manager, French
Groupement of Wool Importation

Nickolaus H. Schilling, Managing Di-
rector, Bremer WoUkaemmerei,
Bremen

Alexander von ImhofE, Corporation
Lawyer, Verein Deutcher Kamm-
garnopinner, Frankfort

Renato Lombardi, President, Associa-

zione dell 'Industria Laniera Itali-

ana, Milan
Dr. Roberto Dodi, Consultant, Associa-

zione dell 'Industria Laniera Itali-

ana, Rome

E.

J. Fawcett, Director-General of Agri-
culture, Department of Agriculture
Alternate: Not yet designated

UNION OP SOUTH AFRICA

Rcpresciitalive: W. A. Horrocks, Commercial Secretary,
South African Emba.ssy

AUerTMte: Rees Davies, Agricultural Attach^,

South African Embassy

UNITED KINGDOM

Representative: J. L. May, -Assistant Secretary, Board

of Trade
Alternates: E. Atherton, Assistant Economic

Attach^, British Embassy
H. O. Hooper

G. E. M. McDougall, Counselor, British
Emba.ssy

Richard H. Roberts, Deputy Director,
Office of Ki'QUirenieiits and Alloca-
tions, I'roduction and Marketing
Administration, Department of
Agriculture

Washington P. Bermudez, Commercial

Attache, Embassy of Uruginiy
Not yet designated

Department of Stale Bulletin

UNITED STATES

Rciircscntative:

URUGUAY

Representative:

Alternate:

The United States in the United Nations

[April G-12, 1951]

General Assembly

Collective Measures Committee. — At the Com-
mittee's fourth meeting, on April 12, the Chair-
man, Joa Carlos Muniz (Brazil), presented the
subcommittee's suggested program of work, and
a (haft communication to be sent to all United
Nations members requesting information on ac-
tion taken, or contemplated, by them under sec-
tion C. of the uniting-for-peace resolution.

The program of work was approved and the
Chairman appointed, without objection, the fol-
lowing three study groups: Military Experts
Panel — Canada. France, and Turkey; Economic
and Financial Measures — Australia, Egypt, Phil-
ippines, United States, and Venezuela; Political
Measures — Belgium, Burma, Mexico, United
Kingdom, and Yugoslavia.

The draft letter was approved with the revision
stressing the urgency of receiving the data re-
quested, even if on a preliminary and tentative
basis, in view of the need for the Committee to
report to the General Assembly by September 1,
1951.

The Chairman, Mr. Muniz (Brazil), in answer
to points raised by Ambassador Mahmoud Fawzi
Bey (Egypt) with regard to the economic aspects,
stated that while he agreed on the need for eco-
nomic and financial security, he thought the cre-
ation of such strength was the work of other
United Nations organs. The Collective Measures
Committee was charged with the responsibility
for organizing collective security. The United
States deputy representative, Howard F. Ban-
croft, stressed that time was short and that the
momentum generated by the adoption of the
uniting-for-peace resolution should be main-
tained.

ECOSOC

World riealth Organization (Who) . — The Spe-
cial Committee on International Sanitary Regu-
lations began a 4-week Conference at Geneva on
April 9. All Who member states, as well as ob-
servers from nonmember states such as Germany
and Spain and observers from international or-
ganizations including maritime and aircraft
groups, have been invited to attend the Con-
ference. The purpose of the Conference is to
revise and consolidate several international sani-
tai-y conventions now in force and to prepare for
their replacement by a single code of procedure
applicable on a world-wide basis to all means of
international transport.

The Committee will make a detailed technical

and legal analysis of the proposed international
sanitary regulations prepared by the Wiio Expert
Committee on international epidemiology and
quarantine and will revise them, giving full con-
sideration to the recommendations submitted by
meuiber governments. The final draft will be
submitted for adoption by the Fourth World
Health Assembly (legislative body) which will
convene in Geneva on May 7. The new regula-
tions will come into force 15 months after their
acceptance by the Assembly.

The United States delegation comprises: Chair-
man, Dr. Joseph A. Bell, Chief, Section of Epi-
demiology, National Institutes of Health, Public
Health Service; Charles I. Bevans, Assistant for
Treaty Aifairs, Department of State; Howard B.
Calderwood, Office of United Nations Economic
and Social Affairs, Department of State ; Lt. Col.
Louis G. Kossuth, USAF, Chief, Preventive Med-
icine Division, Office of the Air Force, Europe;
Paid Reiber, Assistant General Counsel, Air
Transport Association; Knud Stowman, Ph.D.,
Division of International Health, Public Health
Service, and Mrs. Jeanne Ende, Technical Assist-
ant, Office of United Nations Economic and Social
Affairs, Department of State.

Dr. Pierre Dorolle, Who Deputy Director-
General, who addressed the opening session, said
he hoped that "without aiming at unattainable
perfection the delegates would be able to achieve
a just and reasonable balance between the teclini-
cal minimum necessary to avoid the spread of
disease and the administrative maximum which it
is possible to impose without unnecessary hamper-
ing of international traffic, an essential element in
the economic and social life of the world today."

In the general debate on April 10, Dr. J. A.
Bell (U.S.) stated that the draft Who regula-
tions should take more fully into account the
present world situation and be more flexible to
meet changing conditions. In view of the re-
duction of the number and size of centers of epi-
demic diseases as well as new discoveries against
such diseases, he advocated limitations and con-
trol measures primarily in ports which were
sources of world infection. He thought that sim-
ple precautionary measures, if effectively applied,
should enormously reduce the need for quaran-
tine procedures in the rest of the world.

United Natioihs Commission on Narcotic
Drugs. — The 15-mcmber Commission opened its
sixth session which is expected to last about 2
months at United Nations Headquarters on April
10. The following officers were unanimously re-
elected: A. N. Sattanathan (India), Chairman;
Oscar Rabasa (Mexico), Vice Chairman; and
Samuel Hoare (U.K.), Rapporteur. The Com-

AprW 16, ?95?

635

mission adopted (10-3 (U.S.S.R., Poland, Yugo-
slavia)-! (India)) the proposal made by the
United States representative, James N. Hyde,
to postpone debate on the U.S.S.R. draft reso-
lution to invite a representative of the People's
Republic of China to be seated as the Chinese
member until the next regular session of the Com-
mission. In this connection, he drew attention to
the General Assembly resolution of December 14.
1950, and stated that it would be "unwise and
unsound" to attempt to decide the issue inde-
pendently of the Assembly and the Economic and
Social Council (Ecosoc).

The two major questions that will be given con-
sideration are (1) steps for bringing into force
an interim agreement to limit the pi'oduction
of opium to medical and scientific needs, and (2)
a single convention to replace existing interna-
tional instruments for the control of narcotics.
The proposal for an interim agreement aims at
limiting the production of opium to the amount
required to meet the world's medical and scien-
tific needs. For this purpose, there would be
established an international monopoly through
which the trade in opium would be conducted.
The draft convention on international narcotics
regulations is designed to incorporate the pro-
visions of several older conventions, agreements,
and protocols, as well as existing practices, into
one legal instrument in order to simplify and
strengthen international control of narcotics.

The Council, at its recent twelfth session at San-
tiago, adopted two resolutions which "approved
the plans prepared by the Commission on Nar-
cotic Drugs for the further elaboration during
1951 and the early part of 1952 of the Single Con-
vention on Narcotic Drugs," and "urged the Com-
mission to make every possible effort during its
sixth session to find a basis acceptable to the gov-
ernments principally concerned on which an in-
ternational agreement to limit the production of
opivun to medical and scientific needs could be
formulated."

Ad Hoc Comrrdttee on Reorganization of the
Council and ita Fimcfional Comm/issions. — This
Committee, which was authorized under the reso-
lution adopted August 16, 1950, at the eleventh
session of the Economic and Social Council, be-
gan its second meeting on April 10 at Lake Suc-
cess. It will review the organization and opera-
tion of the Council and its Commissions and sub-
mit a report and recommendations thereon to the
thirteenth session of the Council. The Commit-
tee will consider the replies received to the inquiry
jireyiously sent out to all member governments
asking for their observations on the functioning
of the Council.

The Committee membership consists of Aus-
tralia, Brazil, Cliina. France, India, U.S.S.R.,
United Kingdom, and the United States. Hernan
Santa Cruz (Chile) was elected Chairman.

Security Council

United Nations Commission for Indonesia. —
The Commission, on April 6, submitted its report
to the Security Council covering its activities from
the date of the transfer of sovereignty, December
27, 1949, from the Netherlands to the Republic of
the United States of Indonesia, to the present.
In the conclusion of its report, the Commission in-
formed the Coiuicil that since the problems aris-
ing from the military agi'eements reached at the
Round Table Conference held at The Hague,
August 23, 1949 to November 2, 1949, are now vir-
tually solved, the Commission has decided that,
while continuing to hold itself at the disposal of
the parties, it will adjourn sine die.

United Nations Cemetery
Dedicated at Pusan

The first permanent United Nations cemetery,
where soldiers killed in United Nations action
against aggression in Korea lie buried, was for-
mally dedicated in a ceremony held on April 6 at
Pusan. Lt. Gen. Matthew Ridgway, Commander
in Chief of the United Nations Command, un-
furled a large United Nations banner at the mast
in front of poles bearing flags of all the IG coun-
tries which have military units in action in Korea
— Australia, Belgium, Canada, France, Greece,
India, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, New Zea-
land, Philippines, Thailand, Turkey, the Union of
South Africa, United Kingdom, United States,
and the Republic of Korea.

General Ridgway paid tribute to the heroic
dead who gave their lives in freedom's fight. He
said, "Fearlessly they died, defending to the last
the dignity of the individual, the rock on which
our fight for freedom rests. We seek today to
express the honor in which they are held. We
shall seek through all the future to keep the state
they so fully kept, and having kept passed on to
us in trust."

Correction

Tlie February 26, 1951, issuo of the F.n,i.ETiN con-
tained a statement that Aniliassador Franci.s B.
Sa.vre, United States representative in the Trustee-
ship Council, advised the Trusteeship Ctunicil that
respousiliility for tlie civilian administration of the
trust territory of the Pacific Islands had been trans-
ferred as of .January 8, 1951, from the Navy De-
partment to tlie Department of the Interior. This
account of Ambassador Sayre's statement was incor-
rect. Ambassador Sayre informed the Trusteosliip
Council that Elbert 1 >. Thomas assumed tlu' office
of Hijih Commissioner of the trust territory of the
Pacific Islands on .lanuary S of this year. Itespon-
sibility for the administration of the trust territory
remains with the Department of the Navy, but plans
are l>eimr made for the transfer of this responsi-
bility to the Department of the Interior on .Inly
1, 1951.

636

Department of State Bulletin

THE CONGRESS

Senate Passes Resolution
Authorizing U.S. Troops in Europe

STATEMENT BY THE PRESIDENT

[Released to the itrcss by the White House April 5]

The adoption by the Senate of Senate Resolu-
tion 99 is further evidence that the country stands
tirm in its support of the North Athmtic Treaty.
It reaffirms the basic principle of our foreign
policy — that the security of the United States is
lutiniately bound up with the security of other
free nations.

The clear endorsement of the appointment of
General Eisenhower and the plans to assign troops
to liis command shows that there has never been
any real question but that this country would do
its part in helping to create an integi'ated Euro-
pean defense force.

Our main task now is to get on with the job
of building our own strength and help to build
the strength of the free world — a job which we all
agree should continue to be carried out through
collaboration by the executive and the legislative
branches of the Government.

TEXT OF SENATE RESOLUTION 99 i

Resolved, That —

1. the Senate approved the action of the President of
the United States in cooperating in the common defensive
effort of the North Atlantic Treaty nations by designating,
at their unanimous request, General of the Army Dwight
D. Eisenhower as Supreme Allied Commander, Europe,
and in placing Armed Forces of the United States in
Europe under his command ;

2. it is the belief of the Senate that the threat to the
security of the United States and our North Atlantic
Treaty partners makes it necessary for the United States
to station abroad such units of our Armed Forces as may
be necessary and appropriate to contribute our fair share
of the forces needed for the joint defense of the North
Atlantic area ;

3. it is the sense of the Senate that the President of the
United States as Commander in Chief of the Armed
Forces, before taking action to send units of ground troops
to Euroije under article 3 of the North Atlantic Treaty,
should consult the Secretary of Defense and the Joint
Chiefs of Staff, the Committee on Foreign Relations of
the Senate, the Committee on Foreign Affairs of the House
of Representatives, and the Armed Services Committees
of the Senate and the House of Representatives, and that
he should likewise consult the Supreme Allied Commander,
Europe;

4. it is the sense of the Senate that before sending units
of ground trooi)S to Europe under article 3 of the North
Atlantic Treaty, the Joint CJhiefs of Staff shall certify
to the Secretary of Defense that in their opinion the
jiarties to the North Atlantic Treaty are giving, and have
agreed to give full, realistic force and elTeit to the require-
Mieiit of article 3 of said tre;ity that "by means of con-
tinuous and effective self-help and mutual aid" they will
"maintain and develoj) their individual and collective
capM<-ity to resist armed attack," specifically insofar as
the creation of combat imits is concerned;

5. the Senate herewith apiiroves the understanding that
the major contribution to the ground forces under General
Eisenhower's command should be made by the European
members of the North Atlantic Treaty, and that such units
of United States ground forces as may be assigned to the
above command shall be so assigned only after the Joint
Chiefs of Staff certify to the Secretary of Defense that in
their opinion such assignment is a necessary step in
strengthening the security of the United States; and the
certified opinions referred to in paragraph 4 and 5 shall
be transmitted by the Secretary of Defense to the Presi-
dent of the United States, and to the Senate Committees
on Foreign Relations and Armed Services, and to the
House Committees on Foreign Affairs and Armed Services
as soon as they are received ;

6. it is the sense of the Senate that, in the interests of
sound constitutional processes, and of national unity and
understanding, congressional approval should be obtained
of any policy requiring the assignment of American troops
abroad when such assignment is in implementation of
article 3 of the North Atlantic Treaty ; and the Senate
hereby approves the present plans of the President and
the Joint Chiefs of Staff to send four additional divisions
of ground forces to Western Europe, but it is the sense of
the Senate that no ground troops in addition to such four
divisions should be sent to Western Europe in implementa-
tion of article 3 of the North Atlantic Treaty without
fui'ther congressional approval ;

7. it is the sense of the Senate that the President should
submit to the Congress at intervals of not more than 6
months reports on the implementation of the North
Atlantic Treaty, including such information as may be
made available for this purpose by the Supreme Allied
Commander, Europe ;

8. it is the sense of the Senate that the United States
should seek to eliminate all provisions of the existing
treaty with Italy which impose limitations upon the
military strength of Italy and prevent the performance by
Italy of her obligations under the North Atlantic Treaty
to contribute to the full extent of her capacity to the
defense of Western Europe;

!). it is the sense of the Senate that consideration should
be given to the I'evision of plans for the defense of Europe
as soon as possible so as to provide for utilization on a
voluntary basis of the military and other resources of
Western Germany and Spain, but not exclusive of the
military and other resources of other nations.

Legislation

' Adopted by a vote of 69 yeas, 21 nays, and 6 not voting.
The Senate also adopted S. Con. Res. 18 which Is similar
to S. Res. 99, except for last part of par. 9 which reads :
". . . and other resources of Western Germany, Spain,
Turkey, and Greece, . . ."

Cultural Convention With Brazil. S. Doc, Executive X,
81st Cong, 2d sess. Message from The President of
tbe United States transmitting the Cultural Conven-
tion between the United States of America and the
United States of Brazil, signed at Washington on
October 17, 1950, 6 pp.

Emergency Relief Assistance to Yugoslavia. H. Bept.
3204, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. 4234]
5 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Kept.
3224, 81st Cong., 2d sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res.
108] 2 pp

Extension of the Reciprocal Trade Agreements Act. H.
Rept. 14, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R.
1612] 30 pp.

April 16, 1951

637

America's Campaign of Truth Goes Forward

INFORMATION ADVISORY COMMISSION
SUBMITS REPORT

[Released to the press April 7]

The United States Advisory Commission on In-
formation today praised the effectiveness of a
world-wide Campaign of Trutli being waged by
tlie Department of State.

In its fourth semiannual report^ to Congress,
the Commission stated that the international infor-
mation program is being efficiently and skillfully
guided by Assistant Secretary Edward W. Barrett
and his staff.

Agreeing with Secretary of Defense George
]\Iarshall that the present world situation is more
dangerous than it was 6 months ago, the Commis-
sion urged Congress —

to keep right on pioviding enough ammunition and
manpower with which to wage the war of ideas.

The Commission, which is headed by Erwin D.
Canham, editor of the Christian Science Monitor,
expressed satisfaction that its major recommenda-
tions to the State Department and Congress have
been largely carried out.

The Commission gave these as its basic con-
clusions :

That the program is being efficiently administered.

That its personnel has been greatly improved, and is
being steadily enriched by specialists of larger experience
and talent.

That the expansion authorized by the 81st Congress as
the Campaign of Truth is being effectively carried forward.

That most of the recommendations made by this Com-
mission have been put into effect.

That a great deal more can be done, and must be done,
before the United States will be adequately waging the
war of ideas.

Thai the evaluation techniques through which the De-
partment tests its programs need further strengthening,
as mucli as possilile through iiuii'iiendont sources.

That grave doubts exist whether major structural
changes, such as taking the program outside the State
Department, will be an improvement. We are aware of
the advantages of a separate agency, but we are more
impressed by the disadvantages of divorcing policy-making
from operation, and of setting up almost inevitably con-
flicting representation in foreign coiuUries.

That channels wliicli jiave been ojiencd up to
bring Ainericiin ))riva(e expertiiess into the pro-

' Publications Division, Department of Slate.

gi'am in advisory and consultative capacities
show great promise of effective results.

In expressing doubt as to the removal of the
information program from the Department of
State, the Commission pointed out that the mem-
bers felt that it was important that the "United
States should speak with a single voice"' abroad.
If the program were divorced from the State De-
partment, the report said,

there would seem to be two policies, the official State
Department one and the one promulgated by the informa-
tion people.

However, the Commission recommended that
the subject be investigated.

In addition to Mr. Canham, the report was
signed by Philip D. Reed, chairman of the Board
of the General Electric Company ; Mark A. May,
director of the Institute of Human Relations at
Yale University ; and Justin Miller, president of
the National Association of Broadcasters. The
newest member of the Commission, Ben Hibbs,
editor of the Saturday Evening Post, did not sign
the report since he was not officially' confirmed by
the Senate as a member of the Commission at the
time the report was issued.

PRESIDENT TRUMAN URGES RADIO FUNDS

Statement hy the President

[Released to the press hij the White House April 5]

Tliere is now pending before the Congress a
request for fluids to build a world-wide network
of radio broadcasting facilities. These facilities
are needed to help us win the battle for the minds
and hearts of men. They would help us holil our
own in the vital coniiiuniications field in the event
of war. I understand tlnit some Menibei"s of Con-
gress advocate sharply reducing funds needed for
these facilities. I find it hard to believe that this
report could be true since it would constitute a
complete reverstil of the House Aiii)roi-)riation
subcommittee's action last summer when (he en-
tire broadcasting-facilities plan was put before the
Committee. In approving the first segment of

638

Department of Sfofe Bulletin

the total plan at that time, the Committee stated
that :

The Committee is firmly convinced of the absolute anil
immediate necessity of these appropriations which are so
closely connected with our national defense and security.

These facilities would help us hold our own in
the vital communications field in the event of war.

AVliile it had been expected to request funds for
the world-wide network of radio facilities over a
period of three fiscal years, I directed the State
Department that it should request funds for the
entire project immediately in order that it might
be completed as soon as possible in the interest of
national security. The completion of this radio-
facilities expansion program is necessary to in-
sure the delivery by radio of our campaign of
truth to the people behind the iron curtain. The
facilities program has been developed since the
initiation of Soviet radio jamming which seriously
interfered with American and other free-world
broadcasts; the program was worked out with
leading electronics scientists in Universities and
private industries as well as in Government.

THE FOREIGN SERVICE

Merwin L. Bohan Named

to Inter- American Economic Council

aierwiu L. Bohan took the oath as United States repre-
sentative to the lA-Ecosoc on aiarch 20, 1951, and was
Kiven the personal rank of Ambassador by the President.

Consular Offices

The American consulate at Geneva, Switzerland, has
been designated a consulate general, effective April 2, 1951.

THE DEPARTMENT

Charles A. Coolidge as Deputy Director of International
Security Affairs, effective March 22, 1951.

John H. Ferguson as Deputy Director of the Policy
Planning Staff, effective April 2, 1951.

PUBLICATIONS

SOVIET BIG LIE vs THE CAMPAIGN OF TRUTH Appointment of Officers

[Released to tlie press April 3]

Moscow propaganda long has applied the big-
lie technique, developed by Adolf Hitler, in its
attacks upon the free nations of the world. The
United States Government, in its information
output, has sought to counter the big lie by stick-
ing to factual reporting. This policy is based on
the conviction that, in the long run, the truth will
prevail.

A recent telegram from the United States Em-
bassy in Ankara, Turkey, is indicative of the
success of this policy. The telegram reported
that the cultural attache of the Embassy, in a
recent visit to the town of Bolu, in northwest
Turkey, asked Presat Aker, former mayor and a
respected elder of the community, whether the
villagers listened to the Voice of America.

He replied :

Yes, indeed. We advise those among us who have
radios to listen to the Voice of America if they would
hear the truth. Some of us listen to Moscow radio too,
so we can tell our people how the Russians are lying.
The people have been aware of Radio Moscow's tactics
ever since it reported the entire Turkish brigade in Korea
had been wiped out, including General Yazici. When
letters kept coming from friends in Korea, our people
knew the Russians were lying. We tell them the Voice
of America tells the truth about the Korean war, in-
cluding accurate casualty figures, and that they can
believe it.

Recent Releases

For sale 16;/ the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C. Address requests
direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except in the
case of free publications, ichich may be obtained from the
Department of State.

Diplomatic List, March 195L Pub. 4145. 1C6 pp. 30?f.
a copy. Subscription price, $3.25 a year domestic; $4.50
foreign.

Monthly list of foreign diplomatic representatives in
Wa.shington, with their addresses.

The Washington Meeting of Foreign Ministers of the
American Republics. International Organization and
Conference Series II, American Republics 7. Pub. 4149.
8 pp., map. Free.

A background summary.

April ?6, 195?

639

April 16, 1951

Ind

American Republics

Inter-American Ecosoc, Appointment (Bohan) . 639
4th Meeting ol Consultation of Ministers of
Foreign Affairs of American States:
Economic Cooperation (U.S. Draft Res.) . . bl*
Final Act (Signed, Washington) ..... 60b
Outstanding Achievements (Acheson) . .
VS Solicits Opinions on Japan Treaty (Dulles)

616
617

Arms and Armed Forces

AMERICAN REPUBLICS :

Ministers

Foreign
Meet. See American Republics.

VS. Troops in Europe: Statement (Truman);
S. Res. 99 ,■ ; ■ '

U S -U K_France : Industrial Controls Agree-
ment In Allied Zones of Germany . . .

637
621

New World War

Asia

FAR EAST: Preventing a

(Truman)

INDIA-PAKISTAN: Solution Sought (Gross) .
KOREA: U.N. Command Operations:

Fifteenth Report (Feb. 1-15, 1951) ....
Sixteenth Report (Feb. 16-28, 1951) ....
JAPAN: Peace Treaty:

Erroneous Versions In Foreign Press ....
U.S. Solicits Latin American Opinion

(Dulles)

PHILIPPINES: War Damage Commission Com-
pletes Task on Claims 618

Claims

Philippine War Damage Commission Completes
Task

603
629

625
627

618

617

618

Communism

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers
Meet. See American Republics.

Campaign of Truth Goes Forward:

Radio Funds Urged (Truman) ....
Information Advisory Commission Report
Soviet Big Lie vs. Campaign of Truth . .

KOREA: U.N. Command Operations .... 625,

Preventing a New World War (Truman) .

Congress

Campaign of Truth Goes Forward:

Radio Funds Urged (Truman) ....

Information Advisory Commission Report

Legislation Listed

Senate Authorizes Troops In Europe:

S. Res. 99, Text

Statement (Truman)

638

638
639
627
603

638
638
637

637
637

Europe

FRANCE:

Industrial Controls Agreement In Germany .

Site for 6th General Assembly

GERMANY: Industrial Controls in Allied Zones:

Agreement, Text

Letter (Allied High Commission to Ade-
nauer)

Preventing a New World War (Truman) . . .
NAT: 2d Anniversary Marks Progress ....
SWEDEN : Financial Policies Discussed ....
SWITZERLAND: Consulate (Geneva), Status

Changed

U.K.: Industrial Controls Agreement In Ger-
many

U.S. Troops:

S. Res. 99, Text

Statement (Truman)

Finance

Appropriations for VOA Urged (Truman) . . .
Financial Policies, U.S.-Sweden, Discussed . .

Foreign Service

Consulate (Geneva), Status Changed ....
Inter-American Council, Appointment (Bohan) .

Industry

AMERICAN REPiraLICS: Foreign Ministers

Meet. See American Republics.
Industrial Controls In Allied Zones of Germany:

Agreement (U.S.-U.K.-France) , Text . . .

Letter (Allied High Commission to Adenauer) .

621
632

621

623
603
620
624

639

621

637
637

638
624

639
639

621
623

g X Vol. XXIV, No. 615

Information and Educational Exchange Program

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers

Meet. See American Republics.
Campaign of Truth Goes Forward 638

International Meetings

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers

Meet. See American Republics.
International Materials Conference (livic) Rules

of Procedure; Wool Committee 634

Labor

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers
Meet. See American Republics.

Mutual Aid and Defense

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers

Meet. See American Republics.
Preventing a New World War (Truman) . . . 603

North Atlantic Treaty Organization

NAT: 2d Anniversary: Message (Acheson to van

Zeeland); Statement (Trtmian) .... 620

Publications

Recent Releases 639

State, Department of

Appointment of OfiScers 639

Strategic Materials

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers

Meet. See American Republics.
Industrial Controls Agreement in Germany:

Agreement (U.S.-U.K.-France), Text .... 621
Letter (Allied High Commission to Adenauer) . 623
International Materials Conference (IMC) : Wool

Committee; Rules of Procedure 634

Technical Cooperation and Development

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers
Meet. See American Republics.

Telecommunications

VOA: Radio-Facilities Expansion Urged (Tru-
man) 638

Treaties and Other International Agreements

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers
Meet. See American Republics.

GERMANY: Industrial Controls Agreement:

Agreement (U.S.-U.K.-France), Text .... 621
Letter (Allied High Commission to Adenauer) . 623

JAPAN: Peace Treaty:

Erroneous Versions in Foreign Press . . . 618
U.S. Solicits Latin American Opinion (Dulles) . 617

NORTH ATLANTIC TREATY: 2d Anniversary . 620

SWEDEN: Financial Policies Discussed .... 624

United Nations

AMERICAN REPUBLICS: Foreign Ministers
Meet. See American Republics.

INDIA-PAKISTAN: Solution Sought (Gross) . . 629

General Assembly: Site of 6th Session:

Resolution, Text 633

Statement (Gross) 632

Preventing a New World War (Truman radio

address) 603

U.N. Command Operations In Korea:

Fifteenth Report (Feb. 1-15, 1951) .... 625
Sixteenth Report (Feb. 16-28, 1951) .... 627

U.N. Documents: A Selected Bibliography . . . 624

U.S. in U.N. (Weekly Summary) 635

U.S. Solicits Latin American Opinions on Jap-
anese Treaty (Dulles) 617

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 606, 616. 620

Adenauer, Chancellor 621,623

Austin, Warren R 625

Bohan, Merwln L 639

Coolldge, Charles A 639

Dulles, John F 617

Ferguson, John H 639

Gibson. Edwin T 634

Gross, Ernest A 629, 632

Roberts, Richard H 634

Truman, President Harry S. . . 603. 618. 620, 637. 638

van Zeehmd, Paul G 620

Waring, Frank A 619

U. S. GOVERNHEKT PR1NTIN6 orriCli Ifil

J/ve/ ^ehw)(tmeni/ ^ t/taie^

^.iXuJr

LffiYA— SYMBOL OF HOPE FOR A NEW ERA IN

NORTH AFRICA • Exchange of Remarks Between
Ambassador Clark and Prime Minister Shaqishli .... 643

THE CHOICES CONFRONTING US IN KOREA •

Remarks by Assistant Secretary Rusk 655

COMPULSORY JURISDICTION OF THE INTERNA-
TIONAL COURT OF JUSTICE • ^otes by Denys P.
Myers 664

For index see back cover

Vol. XXIV, No. 616
April 23, 1951

3le Qle/ia^^e^ ^/ y^ate DUllGlin

Vol. XXIV, No. 616 • Publication 4193

April 23, 1951

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 26, D.O.

Price:

B2 issues, domestic $7.60, foreign $10.25

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
ov Stats BtrtLETiN as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides tlie
public and interested agencies of
the Government utith information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the icork of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as urell as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
wellas legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

o.s.suPERlNT£^u-^7c.-Docua:^,■^Ts
MAY i- 195]

Libya — Symbol of Hope for a New Era in North Africa

EXCHANGE OF REMARKS BETWEEN AMBASSADOR CLARK
AND PRIME MINISTER SHAQISHLI

[i?ctea«ed to the press April i2]

Follovying is the exchwnge of remarks betireen Am-
bassador Leicis Clark, United States representative on
the United Nations Coxincil for Libya, and Muhammad
Bhaqixhti, the Prime Minister of Cyrenaica, on the oc-
casion of Ambassador Clark's presentation to the King
Designate of Libya, Amir aUSayyid Idris al Sanusi, on
April 10 at ISenghazi, Cyrenaica.

TEXT OF AMBASSADOR CLARK'S REMARKS

Mr. Prime Minister, Gentlemen : First I should
like to express my appreciation of the kind re-
marks that have just been made by His Excellency
the Prime Minister. The words of friendship
and of welcome he has voiced I take to be a token
of the sentiments of the Cyrenaican Government
and people for the Government and people of my
country.' I should like to reciprocate, if I may,
and express at the outset to you and through you
to the Libyan people the strong sentiments of
friendship and affection which I and my Govern-
ment feel toward the Libyan people. It has been
a real privilege to work in Tripoli with such
outstanding Cyrenaicans as Ali Bey Jerbi, my col-
league on the United Nations Council, Omar Bey
Shanib, Vice President of the National Assembly
and Minister of Defense of the Libyan Govern-
ment and Khalil Bey Galal, and others, to name
only a few. I am glad, therefore, of the oppor-
tunity once again to have the privilege of visiting
Cyrenaica itself and of seeing for myself that you
have many more sons of capabilities and chann
equal to those you have sent to Tripoli.

I have looked forward to this visit because I
know from experience that the traditional hos-
pitality of the East has never been more clearly
exemplified than here in Cyrenaica. Wlien I was
here before I felt that I was one of you. I sin-

' Cyrenaica is one of the parts of the proposed Liljyan
federation. Under United Nations aegis, a provisional
Government of Libya has been established in anticipation
of Libya's independence by January 1, 1952.

April 23, 7 95 J

cerely hope that my assumption is justified. I
find your people sympathetic. You laugh at the
same things at which I laugh and weep on similar
occasions. I have looked forward also to this
opportunity to tell Your Excellency and the peo-
ple of Cyrenaica that the Government and the
people of the United States are deeply interested
in the future of the Libyan state.

We are all keenly aware that in Libya today
we are participating in developments of supreme
significance not only to Libya but to the world at
large. A gi-eat experiment is being conducted
here. You gentlemen are more fully aware than
most that the LTnited Nations was founded only
5 yeai-s ago. That historic organization was ded-
icated, among other things, to an abiding prin-
ciple— respect for the dignity of the human being.
In that principle lies the fundamental difference
between Soviet communism and civilization as we
know it in my country and, for that matter, in
all countries outside the Soviet Union and its
satellites. It is the principle on which both Chris-
tianity and Islam are founded. All of us are
privileged to share the conviction — ingrained in
our minds through centuries of religious develop-
ment— that the individual is not destined to serve
the state but that the state is created to serve the
individuals. It is respect for the dignity of the
individual that distinguishes us from those who
have come under Soviet dominance. It was that
community of conviction which found us fighting
together in the recent war against the similarly
alien Fascist and Nazi philosophies and now that
our convictions with the help of God have tri-
umphed, it is only fitting that the United Nations
should in every way possible help the people of
Libya to establish a sovereign and democratic
nation.

It is also fitting that my country, the United
States of America, should play a leading part in
assisting the Libyan people to achieve a stable and
lasting independence. I should like to repeat that

643

the founding of a Libyan state is a liistoric experi-
ment. Already in tlie five short years since the
United Nations Organization was founded, at least
nine new independent states have come into being.
We all hope and we believe that Libya will very
soon take her rightful place in their midst. Libya
is unique, however, in that it is the first country for
which the United Nations has declared itself speci-
fically responsible. Libyan independence has been
earned by the efforts of Libyan patriots, but in the
preservation of that independence and in the
steady elevation of Libya's standard of life the
United Nations has assumed special responsibili-
ties and has sent, and will continue to send, men
highly qualified in all fields to carry out those
responsibilities.

No one can fail to recognize that Libya will be
faced with more problems than most countries.
There are few known natural resources and dis-
tances between its centers of population are great —
great even as they were in my country in its early
days of independence. I should like to digress
here for a moment, if I may, to say that in the
early days of my country the framers of our Con-
stitution found it necessary to require a lapse of
4 months' time between the election of our
President and his assumption of office solely to
permit him to travel from his home to the seat of
government.

There are many other similarities between the
problems which confront the framers of your con-
stitution today and those which confronted the
fathers of my country. But I shall not go into
those today. Our task and your task will not be
easy. Nevertheless, the goal of my country, and
I am sure the goal of the United Nations is the
same, is to see growing up in Libya a stable and
peace-loving nation where there will be steadily
increasing economic well-being and where every
citizen can be sure that his hopes and his holy
prerogatives are recognized.

Since I last came to Cyrenaica, much has hap-
pened. The National Assembly has met and made
great progress with its tasks. His Highness the
Amir has been acclaimed King of the future state.
A provisional federal government has been named,
and, already, the powers of state are being trans-
ferred to the Libyans themselves in accordance
with the resolutions of the United Nations Gen-
eral Assembly. Much credit in this, it seems to
me, is due to the spirit of friendly cooperation
that has so happily been demonstrated by our
mutual friends in the United Kingdom, in France,
and in Italy. The readiness of the administering
powers, both the United Kingdom and France,
to facilitate in every appropriate way the transfer
of powers to the provisional government that has
been established and the visits here to Benghazi
of the representatives on our council of France and
of Italy have given, it seems to me, evidence on
the part of those jiowers not only of good Mill
■^a. toward the Libyan state but also of friendship for

His Highness the Amir and of confidence in the
ability of His Highness to conduct the affairs of
an independent Libya wisely, efficiently and in a
manner best serving the interests of all of the
people of Libya. I

I shall look forward, therefore, to the final steps
in the constitutional development program, to the
drawing up of the constitution, the declaration of
independence, and the assumption of the throne
by His Higlmess the Amir as King of the Libyan
nation.

For its part, the United States is eager to wit-
ness that great event and to welcome a new friend
into the family of nations. Libya was 2,000 years '
ago the site of a great culture and 1,200 years the
site of another. Let us hope that we are on the
threshold of a new era in North Africa. It is
fitting at this time to pay tribute to the Libyan
patriots who did not live to see their country take
its place as an independent nation. Were they
alive today, I am sure they would be proud of the
nation which is being born and of the man who
has been selected by the Libyans to be their rulei".
I should like once again, therefore, to express to
you and through you to His Highness the Amir
the sincere friendship of the Government and
people of the United States for the Government
and people of Libya and our most sincere hope
and anticipation that the future will, mider the
wise guidance of His Highness, witness a steady
improvement in the well-being and happiness of
the Libyan people.

TEXT OF PRIME MINISTER SHAQISHLI'S
REMARKS

Your Excellency and Gentlemen : It is a great
honour and pleasure to have Mr. Clark, ^Vmbas-
sador of the United States of America, amongst us ||
as guest of His Majesty the King in the capital of
Cyrenaica.

The people of Cj'renaica have been eagerly
awaiting this auspicious visit in order to welcome
one who is liked and admired all over Libya, one
of our closest friends and one wlio has devoted
his energies honestly and sincerely in serving the
cause of our country and in helping oiu- peojile to
move forward toward constitutional reform, a
matter the people themselves chose and planned
of their own free will according to the decision of
the United Nations Organization.

The time spent by you in Libya, during which
you were the interjireter of friendly feelings of
the American ])eople, a fact proved on many an
occasion by different asjiects of kindness and
friendliness toward the Libyan people, must have
given you a true impression of feelings of our
])eople to your own people and of our people's
aspirations toward a free, democratic and in-
dependent life, a life of dignity and self-respect,
a life in which a nation I'an plan its own futin-e

644

Department of State Bulletin

for itself under tlie aegis of our beloved King, the
symbol of our aspirations and protector of our
Fatlierland.

Your Excellency will no doubt have noticed how
a young Libyan peoj^le is slri\ing to awake from
its slumber and is shaking off tiie dust of a hated
past. Your Kxccllency will also have admired this
people's longing to achieve their objective and
their devotion to their King, and their sacrilices
to achieve their national aims, with a view to en-
joyment of freedom and independence, and in
order to play their part with free nations in the
establishment of world peace.

Your Excellency, the Libyan people, being
guardians of a great legacy of extreme spiritual
value, believe it to be a heresy to deny the truth
of such a spiritual legacy, a heresy which must
be fought. Witli such a belief it finds itself near-
est to the free democratic nations and is proud
of their close friendship, first among which is
its friendship with the generous American nation.
This friendship has emerged as a result of hon-
ourably defending a sacred cause, a responsibility
which the gallant American nation has now as-
sumed witli all their tremendous potentialities in
the vanguard of all free nations in the defence of
the free world and of the true democratic prin-
ciples which are now endangered by the greatest
menace history ever knew.

Your Excellency, we appreciate the noble feel-
ings of the American people and admire their de-
votion to their humanitarian duty. Despite their
safety at home and the fact that they need not
fear others, since of their own ample strength they
can defend themselves against any attack, this
noble and humanitarian feeling caused them to
adopt an active role in combatting this danger
which is threatening world peace, and induced
them to leave their homeland and their security,
so as to take the responsibility of fulfilling a sub-
lime historical mission. A mission, the banner of
which is being carried by most of the free nations,
including especially the people of the United
Kingdom, wlio are also defending this sublime
principle.

What causes rejoicing, however, is that the
world is witnessing today signs of joint coopera-
tion between the American nation and the rest of
the free nations of the world to cope with the
present critical situation which requires an im-
mense effort on the part of the big democratic
powers so as to prevent a third world war which
may shake the foundations of our present civiliza-
tion. And what brings confidence is the prevail-
ing belief that the establishment of a spirit of
cooperation and the strenghtening of such a spirit
between the great democratic powers and the rest
of the free nations is the best guarantee for the
safety of the free world and the preservation of
the principles for which they stand from the
threat of any danger, especially at this critical
period, in which the forces of the free nations come
under the banner of the United Nations organiza-

tion, are waging a fierce struggle in support of a
free life: Free from fear, and free from humilia-
tion for the coming generations. We also firmly
believe that as long as the free nations entertain
such a belief, and are confident of the energies
and potentialities of the big democratic powers,
then no danger whatsoever can thi'eaten inde-
pendence and freedom and the ways of life and
thinking of the free world. We are full of hope
that the sun of that day, in which the United Na-
tions forces will be able to restore peace, will shine
in the very near future.

Your Excellency, may I, in my capacity as Prime
Minister of the Cyrenaican Government, and with
this true faith and this shining hope, welcome you
heartily as a guest of our King, and extend to
you on behalf of the Cyrenaican people, a sincere
and friendly greeting, trusting that Your Ex-
cellency may have a happy sojourn amongst us.
For my part, I extend to the generous American
people my best wishes and regards.

And lastly, may I conclude this speech by wish-
ing a long life to our King Idris the Great and to
President Truman, the honourable President of
a friendly state, and may long friendship reign
between our two peoples.

May peace and mercy of God be upon you.

THE CONGRESS

Legislation

Amending the Tariff Act of 1930 so as To Extend to Flax-
seed and Linseed and Flaxseed and Linseed Oil the
Privilege of Substitution for Drawbacli of Duties. H.
Rept. 27, S2d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. K.
2192] 2 pp.

Granting of Permanent Residence to Certain Aliens. H.
Rept. 91, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. Con.
Kes. 49] 57 pp.

Providing for the Expeditious Naturalization of Former
Citizens <if the United States Who Have Lost United
States Citizenship Through Voting in a Political Elec-
tion or in a Plebiscite Held in Italy. H. Rept. 92, 82d
Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R. 400] 8 pp.

Providing the Privilege of Becoming a Naturalized Citizen
of the United States to All Aliens Having a Legal
Riglit to Permanent Residence. H. Rept. 93, 82d Cong.
1st sess. [To accompany H. R. 403] 4 pp.

Clarifying the Immigration Status of Certain Aliens. H.
Rept. 118, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R.
2.339] 6 pp.

BacIiKround Information on the Use of United States
Armed Forces in Foreign Countries. Report of the
Committee on Foreign Affairs pursuant to H. Res. 28,
a resolution authorizing the Committee on Foreign
Affairs to conduct thorough studies and investigations
of all matters coming within the jurisdiction of such
committee. H. Rept. 127, 82d Cong. 1st sess. vii,
77 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept. 158,
82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res. 6]
2 pp. Also, H. Rept. 159, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To
accompany S. Con. Res. 7] 2 pp.

{Continued on page 663)

April 23, J 95 7

645

U.S. Reiterates Demand to U.S.S.R. on Lend-Lease Settlement

Folloiniit/ is an exchange of notes bctirem the Sec-
retary of State and the Soviet Ambassador to Washing-
ton concerning the request of the United States Ooveriv-
ment of Fet)ruarii 7, 1951, that the Gmyernment of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics promptly return to
the United States all vessels loaned to the Union of
Soviet Socialist Republics under the terms of the master
lend-lease agreement of June 11, 19^2.

UNITED STATES NOTE OF APRIL 6

ExcELLENCT : I liave the honor to refer to your
note No. 22 of March 21, 1951 concerning this
Government's request of February 7, 1951 that
the Government of the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics promptly return to the United States
all vessels loaned to the Soviet Union under the
terms of the Master Lend-Lease Agreement of
June 11, 1942.

In your note you declare that agreement had
already been reached between our two Govern-
ments for the sale to the Soviet Union of all the
merchant sliips and part of the naval ships re-
ceived under Lend-Lease and that this Govern-
ment's note of February 7, 1951 "violates" this
agreement.

By "agi'eement" it is presumed that you have
reference to this Government's notes of February
27, 1948, September 3, 1948 and August 8, 1949
which dealt with the disposition of lend-lease
vessels.^

With respect to the thirty-six war-built mer-
chant vessels this Government's note of February
27, 1948 stated :

The agreement of your Government concerning these
vessels resolves tentatively one of the several points
necessary to a satisfactory comprehensive settlement of
the oliligations under the agreement between our two
Governments of .Tune 11, 1942.

. . . Your attention is invited to the fact that at the
first meeting of the Working (iroups on May 3, 1!U7,
United States Kepreseiitatives stated that since the object
of tlie negotiations was to acliicve a satisfactory com-
prehensive settlement, agreement reached on any par-
ticular subject was tentative and subject to agreement
on all issues necessary (o a general settlement. The
Soviet representatives indicated their concurrence. Ac-
cordingly, the first paragraph of the Outline of Main

' Not printed.
646

Points of Settlement Proposed by the United States Bide
in keeping with the above-mentioned understandings
reached by the representatives of our two Governments on
May 3, 1947 reads in part as follows : "As both sides have
understood from the outset, the reaching of agreement
upon any one issue is tentative and subject to the con-
clusion of a satisfactory comprehensive settlement."

With respect to pre-war-built merchant vessels
and tugs, this Government's note of August 8, 1949
stated in part :

The Government of the United States considers this
amount (.$13,000,000) satisfactory as the cash price for
the sale of the vessels, effective as of September 2, 1945,
it being understood that the sale will be consummated
only upon conclusion of the over-all Lend-Lease settle-
ment. Agreement on this point resolves satisfactorily
another of the several points of a comprehensive settle-
ment, but the Government of the United States will con-
tinue to reserve its rights imder Article V of the agreement
of June 11, 1942, to require the return to the United States
of the pre-war-built merchant vessels and the tugs as
well as other Lend-Lease articles until such time as a
mutually satisfactory over-all settlement agreement is
reached.

With respect to naval vessels, this Government's
note of September 3, 1948 stated in part :

Provided a mutually satisfactory Lend-Lease settle-
ment is promptly agreed upon by our two Governments,
the Government of the United States is willing, at agreed
prices, to sell to the Soviet Government as a part of such
settlement and in accordance with the surplus property
procedures outlined to representatives of your Govern-
ment on June 2.5, 1947, the following naval craft . . .

Moreover, on other occasions this Government
has made perfectly clear to the Soviet Govern-
ment its position concerning the disposition of
lend-lease vessels. In this Government's note of
May 7. 1948 which referred to the conditional na-
ture of the agreement concerning war-built mer-
chant ships as set forth in this Government's note
of February 27, 1948, it was stated :

. . . the position of the Government of the United
States is that, if a comprehensive lend-lease settlement
is not concluded promptly, the Government of the TInited
St.'ites under .\rticle V of the Agreement of .lune 11, 1942,
will reijuire tlu' return to the United States of the lend-
lease iiiercliaiit vessels now remaining in tlie possession
of your government.

In this Government's note of September 3, 1948
in connection with the need for a prompt and sat-
isfactory settlement, it was stated:

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

Therefore, notwithstanding certain offers which this
Government lias made in connection with its settlement
proposals, unless a mutually satisfactory settlement is
promptly agreed upon by our two Governments, this Gov-
ernment will have no alternative but to withdraw its
offers to transfer full title to certain lend-lease articles
to the Government of the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics and will be obliged to exercise its rights under
Article V of the Agreement of June 11, 1942 by requiring
the return of such articles to the United States. This is
particularly applicable to all merchant and naval vessels.
It applies also to military vessels and to certain other
lend-lease articles which would be of use to the United
States.

From the above it is clear that the agreement
referred to in your note of March 21, 1951 consists
of a series of tentative offers by the Government
of tlie United States which have been explicitly
conditioned upon the conclusion of a prompt and
satisfactory lend-lease settlement. In the current
conversations on the subject of a lend-lease settle-
ment, Ambassador John C. Wiley has repeatedly
I called to your attention the fact that the Soviet
Government by avoiding the reaching of a prompt
and satisfactory over-all settlement clearly has
failed to meet the conditions for the sale of any
of these vessels. Therefore, this Government is
free to withdraw its conditional offer to sell such
vessels and this was done in this Government's
note of February 7, 1951.

Your note of March 21, 1951 advances as a sec-
ond reason for not returning lend-lease vessels the
argimient that the vessels are not needed by the
United States. Article V of the Master Lend-
Lease Agreement of June 11, 1942 is clear and
specific on this point, reading as follows :

The Government of the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics will return to the United States of America at
the end of the present emergency, as determined by the
President of the United States of America, such defense
articles transferred under this agreement as shall not
have been destroyed, lost or consumed and as shall be
determined by the President to be useful in the defense
of the United States of America or of the Western Hemi-
sphere or to be otherwise of use to the United States of
America.

This article places upon the President of the
United States alone the responsibility for the
determination of tlie usefulness of lend-lease
articles to the United States. The point raised in
your note of March 21, 1951 that certain vessels of
the United States may have been disposed of to
third countries bears no relationship to the obliga-
tions of your Government under Article V and is
not subject to discussion between our two Govern-
ments.

On July 7, 1948 the President of the United
States of America determined that the emergency
relative to the lend-lease program had been termi-
nated and the Goverimaent of the Union of Soviet
Socialist Republics was so notified on October 7,
1948. On this date the Soviet Government was
also notified of the determination by the President
of the United States that 3 icebreakers, 28 frigates
and 186 other naval craft were of use to the United

States and their return was demanded. The Soviet
Government has returned only the frigates and one
icebreaker. On February 7, 1951 the Government
of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics was
informed that the President of the United States
of America had determined that all merchant,
military and naval lend-lease vessels remaining in
Soviet custody are of use to the United States and
the prompt return of these vessels was duly de-
manded. Therefore, the obligation of the Soviet
Government to return the vessels listed in this
Government's note of February 7, 1951 is clear
and unequivocal.

With reference to the statement in your note of
March 21, 1951 that United States naval vessels
in Soviet custody are "badly worn out and for the
most part unfit for navigation in the open sea,"
I wish to emphasize that title to these vessels re-
mains in the Government of the United States
regardless of their condition. I therefore repeat
the request made in this Government's note of Feb-
ruary 7, 1951 that representatives of the Govern-
ment of the United States be permitted to examine
all unserviceable vessels in order to determine their
ultimate disposition.

The demand presented in this Government's
note of February 7, 1951, that the Government of
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics immedi-
ately return to the Government of the United
States all the naval and merchant vessels as well
as military watercraft which were transferred to
it under the Master Lend-Lease Agreement of
June 11, 1942 is hereby reiterated.

A prompt reply is requested in order that the
necessary arrangements for return may be
promptly agreed upon with the Soviet naval ex-
pert now in Washington.

Accept [etc.]

Dean Acheson

SOVIET NOTE OF MARCH 21

Washington, March 21, 1951

Sir : In connection with your note delivered to
me on February 7, 1951 by Mr. Wiley during the
negotiations on the question of a Lend-Lease set-
tlement, I have the honor to state the following:

As you know, by agreement between the Govern-
ments of the IJ.S.S.R. and the U.S.A. negotia-
tions were renewed in Washington on January 15
this year between representatives of both Govern-
ments for settling all Lend-Lease accounts. Prior
to that time agreement had already been reached
between the Governments of the U.S.S.R. and the
U.S.A. on several specific questions of the Lend-
Lease settlement, and several other specific ques-
tions remained to be agreed upon in order to
complete the negotiations and to conclude an
agreement for a final and total settlement. In
particular, an agreement was reached concerning

April 23, 7 95 J

647

the sale to the Soviet Union of all the merchant
ships and part of the naval ships received nnder
Lend-Lease. With regard to merchant ships, an
agreement was also reached about sale prices and
tliat the value of all merchant ships of pre-war
construction would be paid for in cash. It is
important to note that the agreement concerning
the sale of merchant ships to the Soviet Union was
reached long before the expiration of the Act of
1946 concerning the sale of merchant ships. As
concerns the naval vessels, it is well known that
the Government of the U.S.S.R., in view of the
agreement which had been reached earlier, sent a
naval expert to Washington at the suggestion of
the Government of the U.S.A., proceeding on the
basis that the American and Soviet experts would
discuss the conditions of the sale of naval vessels
to the Soviet Union.

The proposal for the immediate return of all
merchant and naval vessels, made by the Govern-
ment of the U.S.A. in your note of February 7 of
this year, violates the agreement ali'eady reached
between the Governments of the U.S.S.R. and the
U.S.A. during the negotiations on Lend-Lease.

The United States Government attempts to jus-
tify its violation of the agreement concerning the
sale to the Soviet Union of all merchant vessels and
part of the naval vessels by referring to Article 5
of the Lend-Lease Agreement of June 11, 1942,
which stipulates the possibility of the return of
Lend-Lease residue at the determination of the
President of the United States. However, in this
case the question concerns solely the fulfillment by
the Government of the LT.S.A. of an agreement
which had been reached after the conclusion of
the Agreement of June 11, 1942 and which fully
corresponds to the principles and tasks of this
agreement, which pi-ovides for the necessity of
guaranteeing the interests of both sides in the final
Lend-Lease settlement.

It is necessary to note that the Government of
the U.S.A. motivates its proposal, concerning the
return of the merchant and naval vessels received
by the Soviet Union under Lend-Lease, by the fact
that the United States has need of these vessels at
the present time. This motivation cannot but
cause surprise.

The United States demands the return by the
Soviet Union of an insignificant number of mer-
chant vessels while according to the report of the
Senate Commission of August 30, 1950, No. 2494,
three-fifths of all tonnage or more than 1.5 million
gross tons of the United States merchant fleet are
not Ix'ing used and are moored inactive at piers.

The United States also demands the return by
the Soviet Union of an insignificant number of
small naval vessels badly worn out and for the most
part unlit for navigation in the open sea. Mean-
while it is well known that the United States has
sold and transferred several naval vessels to other
countries. Thus, according to data of the U.S.

Department of Defense published in a press re-
lease of January 9, 1951, two light cruisers were
sold to Brazil and Chile; according to reports in
the American press, destroyer escorts, submarines
and other naval vessels were sold to Turkey,
Greece, France and other countries. Altogether
according to data published in the United States
twenty-six large naval vessels were sold to other
countries in 1950 and 1951, not to mention a con-
siderable number of small naval vessels. With re-
gard to the sale of merchant vessels, as can be seen
from data published on January IS of this year
in the American press the United States has sold
1,113 American vessels of war-time construction
to foreign purchasers.

It is also known that during the Lend-Lease set-
tlement with Great Britain, the Government of the
U.S.A. sold vessels, along with other Lend-Lease
residual items, to the Government of Great Britain,
as is witnessed by the report of the Senate Com-
mission of March 22, 194G, No. 110, section V.

Thus the reference in your note to the fact that
the United States needs merchant and naval vessels
appears to have an artificial character and there-
fore cannot serve as a basis for presenting the So-
viet Union with a demand to return all Lend-Lease
vessels. Such a demand does not conform to the
principles of the Lend-Lease Agreement, which
pi'ovides, as is well known, an obligation to con-
sider the interests of both sides and not to act uni-
laterally and to the harm of these interests.

The Soviet Government also considers it neces-
sary to draw the attention of the Government of
the U.S.A. to the fact that the number of Lend-
Lease naval vessels indicated in the supplement to
your note of February 7 does not correspond to (
the actual number of such vessels in the possession I
of the Soviet Union. The total number of avail-
able Lend-Lease naval vessels in the U.S.S.R. is
498, not counting two icebreakers. The remaining
56 vessels were lost during military operations and
for other reasons. On June 25, 1948 the Soviet
Government, as is known, reported the existence
in the U.S.S.R. of 518 naval vessels, consisting
mainly of cutters, minesweepers and other small
vessels, without mentioning the remaining vessels
which were lost during the war.

In its note of reply of Sejitember 3, 1948, the
Government of the U.S.A. correctly listed 36 vcs-
.sels as lost or destroyed. As concerns 20 vessels,
I reported their loss to Mr. Wiley during the nego-
tiations on January 27 of this year. During the
negotiations on February 7, additional informa-
tion concerning Lend-Lease naval vessels now in
the U.S.S.R. was given to Mr. Wiley.

The Soviet Government expresses confidence
that the Government of the U.S.A. will adhere to
the agreement previously reached concerning mer-
chant autl naval vessels, which is an important
condition in reaching a Lend-Lease settlement.

Accejit fi'tc]

A. Panyusiikin

648

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

Analysis of Official Personnel Stationed in the U.S. and the U.S.S.R.

Text of Letter from Assistant Secretary McFall
to Representative Thomas J. Lane

March 20, 1951

My Dear Mr. Lane : Reference is made to your
letter of March 1, 1951, acknowledged by tele-
phone on March 9, 1951, forwarding lor the De-
partment's comment a copy of the remarks which
you made in the House of Representatives on
March 1. In these remarks you recommend that
the official personnel which the Soviet Government
sends to the United States and the travel of this
personnel in the United States be placed on a
reciprocal basis with regard to the number of
official personnel of the United States in the Soviet
Union and the travel privileges of American offi-
cial personnel in that country.

Your remarks refer to two important questions
concerning United States-Soviet relations which
are under continual consideration in the Depart-
ment. The comments of the Department with
regard to tliese matters are presented in the fol-
lowing paragraphs.

The exchange of official representatives between
two governments is rarely susceptible to treatment
on a numerical parity basis. In almost every in-
stance one country or the other will require a
larger official establishment. Actually the va-
riety of functions which the American Foreign
Service is expected to perform, including complex
visa and passport services and a wide range of
reporting on political and economic subjects, is so
great that the diijlomatic and consular offices of
the United States in any foreign country tend to
be larger than that country's official representa-
tion in the United States.

An analysis of the number of Soviet officials in
the United States reported to the Department of
State by the Soviet Embassy up to March 5, 1951,
and comparable American personnel in the Soviet
Union as of the same date indicates that Soviet
and United States official representation is prac-
tically on a parity basis. This analysis includes
Embassy officials, correspondents, and commeixial
representatives of the two countries. It excludes
Soviet representation to international organiza-
tions in the United States which have no counter-
part in the Soviet Union.

There are enclosed two sheets which present
United States official personnel in the Soviet
Union and Soviet personnel in the United States
as of March 5, 1951. You will note that the Soviet
list carries a comparative list of Soviet personnel
in the United States as of July 1, 1950. While
on the face of these lists there appears to be a
numerical disparity in representation in favor of
the Soviet Union, an analysis of the figures gives
a different picture. On March 5 the United States
Government had official personnel numbering 101
with 16 dependents assigned to the American Em-
bassy in Moscow. The Soviet counterpart of this
figure is official Soviet personnel numbering 88,
with 125 dependents (70 wives and 55 children)
assigned to the Soviet Embassy in Washington.
Thus, the United States has 115 more official em-
ployees in the American Embassy in Moscow than
the Soviet Government has in the Soviet Embassy
in Washington. Since no international organiza-
tion of which the United States is a member has
its headquarters in the Soviet Union, there can be
no United States personnel in the Soviet Union
comparable to the Soviet personnel assigned to the
United Nations; namely, 121 (52 official employ-
ees, 38 wives, 31 children). If from the 381 total
Soviet official personnel in the United States, there
is subtracted 121, which is the Soviet representa-
tion, including dependents, to the United Nations,
and 153 which represents Soviet dependents in the
United States other than dependents of Soviet
United Nations employees, the total Soviet official
employees in the United States would amount to
107, 6 more than the 101 United States official
employees in the Soviet Union, minus dependents.

With regard to Soviet restrictions on the travel
of foreigners, the Union of Soviet Socialist Re-
publics is divided into "free" and prohibited areas
for diplomatic and consular personnel of foreign
nations in the Soviet Union. Foreign officials on
duty in Moscow may not travel more than 50
kilometers from the city limits with the exception
of three points of historic interest to which for-
eigners may travel after appropriate notification
to the foreign office. In general, all border areas
and all of the central Asian republics, the Cau-
casus with the exception of Tbilisi, the Baltic
States, and the western areas of the Ukraine and

April 23, J 95 1

649

Belorussia includino; the capital cities of Kiev and
Minsi< are within the zones proliibited to foreign
officials. Although most of the Siberian areas is
technically "free," in practice it is greatly re-
stricted owing to the fact that the important cities
are forbidden areas. In order to travel to "free"
areas foreign missions must notify the foreign
office in advance of the name and the itinerary
of the traveler. Under this procedure, members
of the Embassy's staff in Moscow have been able
to make frequent trij^s to "free" areas during the
past 2 years.

The question of applying travel control meas-
ures to Soviet official personnel in the United
States is under constant review by the United
States Government agencies concerned. Restric-
tions upon the travel of Soviet officials will be
imposed whenever it is evident that such action
is in the over-all interest of the United States.

Sincerely yours,

Jack K. McFall,
Assistant Secretary.

Enclosures: (1) Total UnitPd StatPS oflJrial pprsonnel in the
Soviet Union as of March 5, 1951 : (2) total Soviet officials in
the United States as of March 5, 1951.

Total United States Official Personnel
in the Soviet Union, March 5, 1951

Embassy :

State Department ftt

Navy attach^ staff IH

Army attach^ staff 18

Air Force attach^ staff 6

Dependents 16

Total 117

UNITED STATES NONOFFICIAL PERSONNEL IN THE
SOVIET UNION

Clerfjymen 1

Newspaper correspondents 6

Businessmen (composed at present of fur buyers —

an approximation) 2

Total 9

Grand total 126

Hreakdown of figures used in tlie compilation "Total
TTnitod States official personnel in the Soviet Union
March 5, 19.^)1," attached hereto :
State Department :

Male employees including; Ambassador:

Foreign Service officer 15

Foreign Service Reserve officer 1

Foreign service staff perscmnel 25

Female employees, unmarried (Foreign Serv-
ice staff) 8

Working wives (Foreign Service staff) 15

Total working personnel 64

Dependents (nonworking — includes 2 wives and
9 children) 11

Total State Department 75

Navy Department:

Naval officers 5

Enlisted men 8

Total 13

Dependents (2 wives Included in "working wives"
above and 1 daughter included in "female em-
ployees, unmarried" above — 1 dependent

child) 4

Total Navy Department 14

Department of the Army:

Officers .">

Warrant officers 1

Enlisted men 12

Total 1«

Dependents (2 wives included in "working wives"

above; 2 dependent wives) 4

Total Army 20

Air Force:

Officers 3

Enlisted men 3

Total 6

Dependents (1 wife included in "working wives"

above; 1 wife and 1 dependent child) 3

Total for Air Force 8

Grand total 117

Soviet Officials in United States '

I

Comparativ
figures

•e

Mar. 5,
1951"

Julv 1,
1950

SUMMARY

Embassy personnel

International organizations

Purchasing Commission

88
52
2
7
2
7

1

124

98

0

»86
59

7.

Tass

7

Pravda correspondents

?

17

Correspondents of AU-Union
Committee of U.S.S.R. . .

Radio

1

Wives

1371

Children

103

Dependent relative -

1

Grand total ^ . . . .

381

410

assy. .

ees . .

BREAKDOWN

Embassy of the U.S.S.R.:

Accredited officers of Emb
Employees of Embassy .

40

48

39
47

Subtotal

88

86

Wives of Embassy officers
Wives of Embassy employ

32

38

31
38

Subtotal

70

69

650

Department of State Bulletin

Comparative
figures

Mar. 5,
19511

Jiilv 1,
1950

Embassy of the U. S. S. R.— Con.

Children of Krnbassy officers . .
Children of Embassy employees .

23
32

24

28

Subtotal

55

52

Dependent relative of Embassy
personnel

0

1

Total Embassy

213

208

United Nations:

U.S.S.R. representation to U.N. .
Wives of U.S.S.R. representa-
tives

49

35
30

55
39

Children

37

Subtotal

114

131

U.S.S.R. members Military Staff
Committee

3

3

1

4

Wives of members of Military

Staff Committee

Children

4
2

Subtotal

7

10

Total United Nations

121

141

Government organizations:

Purchasing Commission ....

Wives of members

Children

2
2
2

2
2
2

Subtotal

6

6

Tass employees

Wives

7
6
5

7
6

Children

3

Subtotal

18

16

Pravda correspondents

Wives

2
2

1

2
1

Children

0

Subtotal

5

3

All-Union Radio Committee Cor-
respondents

Wives

1
1
2

1
1

Children

1

Subtotal

4

3

Amtorg employees

Wives

7
5
2

17
10

Children

6

Subtotal

14

33

Total governmental organiza-
tions

47

61

Grand total

3 381

410

1

' Figures based on note 8 of Jan. 27, 1951, from Soviet
Embassy reporting Soviet citizens, employees of Soviet
State institutions, Soviet mi.ssions, and other organiza-
tions to be found in the United States as of Jan. 1, 1951,
and note 7 of Jan. 24, 1951, and note 11 of Feb. 7, 1951,
which showed further personnel changes.

2 Soviet officials in United States as of Julv 1, 1950.
Figures based on note 113 of July 13, 1950. Soviet Em-
bassy reporting Soviet citizens, employees, and other
organizations in the United States as of July 1, 1950.

' In addition to this total, there are 12 Soviet citizens
employed by the Secretariat of the United Nations who
are accompanied by 12 wives and 6 chidren (total 30).

Deadline for Filing War Claims
With Italy

[Released to the press April 12}

The importance of completino; the consideration
and adjndication of claims on behalf of American
nationals nnder provisions of the peace treaty with
Italy with the least possible delay makes it im-
perative that a time limit be fixed for the filing?
of such claims.

Considering^ that a period of more than 3 years
has already elapsed within which such claims
could be filed, it has been determined that the date
of September 15, 1951, be fixed as the final date for
the filing of claims either directly with the Ameri-
can Embassy at Rome or with the Department of
State, Legal Adviser's Office, Washington, D.C.,
for presentation to the Government of the Eepub-
lic of Italy.

The claims involved are those based upon loss
or damage, as a result of the war, to property in
Italy which was owned by American nationals.

Since no assurance can be given that it will be
possible for claims not filed on or before Septem-
ber 15, 1951, to receive proper consideration,
claimants desiring to file claims of the character
referred to, but who have not yet done so, are
urged to present them as far in advance of the
above-mentioned date as possible.

Effect of Revised German Monetary
Reform Law on U.N. Nationals

[Released to the press April 12]

The Department of State wishes to direct the
attention of United States citizens to an amend-
ment of the monetary reform legislation enacted
in Western Germany in June 1948. This amend-
ment is Allied High Connnission Law No. 46 and
enables United Nations nationals to accept, at the
rate of 1 deutschemark for every 10 reichsmarks
previously due, payments in deutschemarks of
reichsmarks debts owed them by German nationals
without waiving their rights to secure whatever
future payments there may be to United Nations
nationals in the final settlement of such debts.
Under the provisions of this law, a United Na-
tions creditor, if he has objected against con-
version at the rate stipulated in the currency
reform law or has refused a previous tender of
deutschemarks, must notify his debtor on or before
December 31, 1951, that his refusal of payment
is withdrawn.

Under the terms of the 1948 monetary reform
legi-slation in Germany, in general all debts and
claims expressed in former reichsmarks were con-
verted into new deutschemark obligations at the
rate of 1 deutschemark for every 10 reichsmarks

April 23, 1951

651

previously due. Article XV of United States-
United Kingdom Military Government Laws Nos.
63 and section XV of French Military Govern-
ment Ordinance No. 100 provided, however, that
United Nations nationals owinfj claims for the
payment of a sum of money arising out of debts
expressed in reichsmarks, other than credit bal-
ances in financial institutions, could make to their
debtors before October 20, 1948, a declaration
against conversion of the debt into deutschemarks
at the above-mentioned rate of exchange.

Apart from this option of making immediate
declaration to their debtors, article XV and sec-
tion XV also permitted United Nations nationals
to refuse a tender of deutschemarks at any time
prior to a peace treaty or other agreed settlement
of this problem. If a United Nations creditor
either objected to the conversion by notification
to his debtor or refused to accept a payment when
tendered, his rights remain unaffected by the laws
and ordinance.

As stated above, the revision of article XV and
section XV now permits a United Nations creditor
to accept payment of the debt in deutschemarks at
the 10 to 1 rate without waiving his right to se-
cure whatever future payments there may be to
United Nations nationals under a final settlement
of the problem. Such revision further provides
that a United Nations creditor, who has objected
against conversion at the stipulated rate by a
declaration to his debtor or refused a tender of
deutschemarks, must notify his debtor on or before
December 31, 1951, that his refusal of payment
is withdrawn.

Panel of U.S. Women Visit Germany

On April 10, the Department of State and the
Office of the United States High Commissioner
for Germany announced that a panel of 11 women
delegates from national nongovernmental organ-
izations will leave the United States for Germany
on April 19 for 6 weeks' work and consultation
with German women's organizations. Their
travel to and from Germany is being financed by
their respective organizations, representing ap-
proximately 15,000,000 American women. The
Women's Bureau of the Department of Labor has
acted as liaison between the Department of State
and the various national organizations in plan-
ning this joint panel, the first of its kind to repi-e-
sent the United States in Germany. The names
of the or<ranizations and their representatives
follow :

Organization

Name

Iveagaie of Women Voters Mrs. TI. R. Dyke

Congre.ss of Industrial Organi- Mrs. Marie Mengerseu

zations
Associated Country Women of Mrs. Philip Jones

tiie World
Young Women's Christian Asso- Mrs. Arthur Anderson

elation

Organization

United Council

Women
National Council

Women

American Federation of Labor
National Federation of Business

and Professional Women's

Clubs, Inc.
American Association of Uni-
versity Women
National Council of

Women
National Council of Catholic

Women

Name
of Church Miss Luella Reckmeyer
of Negro Dr. Dorothy Ferebee

Mrs. Edna Rose
Dr. Minnie MafEett

Mrs. Frederick Gilstrap
Jewish Jlrs. Joseph WlUen

Mrs. Anthony J. Seholter

The delegates will spend from 5 to 7 days re-
spectively in the vicinity of Frankfort, Stuttgart,
Munich, Berlin, Hamburjr, Bonn, and in rural
areas of the Federal Kepublic. At each stopover,
the jjanel will meet with German women's groups
and then divide to pursue special interests, such
as labor affairs, religious activities, and civic af-
fairs, by working individuallj' with women's or-
ganizations and leaders in smaller towns.

The American and German women will ex-
change ideas concerning mutual problems, the par-
ticipation of women in civic affairs, and the
objectives and functions of national and interna-
tional women's organizations. The American
women will be especially concerned with investi-
gating methods of aiding German-affiliated or-
ganizations and other women's groups. They
will also visit many of the educational, welfare,
and civic projects sponsored by German women's
organizations.

The 6-week program is being arranged jointly
by the Women's Affairs representatives of the
Allied High Commissioners and a committee
of representatives of major German women's,
organizations.

U.S.-Germany Discuss Agreement
for VOA German Language Programs

[Relciiscd to the press April 12]

The Department of State in a statement re-
leased simultaneously today in Washington and
Frankfort announced the openin<i of negotiations
in Germany between the (general managers of four
German radio stations and the Voice of America
for an agreement on the relaj' of Voice of America
German-language programs.

The negotiations are the culmination of requests
made several months ago by the German broad-
casters for discussions with representatives of the
Voice of America on tlie present Voice German-
lane;uap:e programs relayed by the stations in the
Amei'ican zone of Germany. 'I'hese ])rograms have
been rebroadcast as an occupation requirement by
the stations Radio Bremen in Bremen. Hessian
radios in Frankfort, South German Radio in
Stuttgart, and tiie Bavarian Radio in Munich.

652

Department of Sfofe Bulletin

The Depaitment of Stale lias received, and is
considering, proposals made by Eberhard Beek-
mann, general niansiger of the Hessian Eadio;
Fritz Eberhardt, general manager of the South
German Radio; Rudoli)h von Scholz, general man-
ager of tlie Bavarian Radio; and Walter Geerdes,
general manager of Radio Bremen.

Statement hy HowJand II. Sargeant

Deputy Assistant Secretary for Public Affairs

The negotiations now going on between the
German stations and the Voice of America are an
eloquent example of free people cooperating
wholeheartedly in the international struggle for
truthful infonnation. We are happy that through
the cooperation of the German broadcasters con-
tinued relays of the Voice of America will be pos-
sible in a mutually acceptable and beneficial
manner. We are particularly happy that through
the medium of the Voice of America the German
people will continue to receive a complete picture
of American thought, action, and culture. The
amazing and rapid development of German radio
during the occupation into a vital instrument of
free expression and thouglit for all the jjeople of
Germany has indeed been gratifying. This latest
step in cooperation marks an important milestone
in the wholesome relationships between the Ger-
man and American people. It is a high sign of
good will and mutual cooperation in these difficult
times. We welcome it as the expression of a free
people banded together with us in the Campaign
of Truth so necessary in the world today.

VOA To Broadcast in Hebrew

[Released to the press April 10]

The Voice of America will begin a daily 30-
minnte broadcast in HebreM' on Sunday, April 15,
the Department of State announced today.

The initial program will include messages from
President Truman; George C. McGhee, Assistant
Secretary for Near Eastern, South Asian, and
African Affairs; Senator Herbert Lehman; and
Abba Eban, Israeli Ambassador to the United
States. Subsequent broadcasts will contain news,
analysis, features, and music. The features will
consist of interviews with Israelis in America,
Americana, talks by well-known Israelis and eco-
nomic, agricidtural, labor, scientific, cultui'al, and
dramatic programs.

The new Voice of America program will be
broadcast short wave from the United States on
four frequencies from 1 : 00 to 1 : 30 p.m. e.s.t.
(8 : 00-8 : 30 p.m. in Israel) and will be relayed by
the Voice of America i-elay base at Tangier.

Sidney Glazer, who has been with the Near East
section of the Voice of America and was formerly
with the Library of Congress, has been designated
chief of the Hebrew unit.

The addition of Hebrew will increase to 30 the
number of languages and dialects utilized by the
Voice of America in its world-wide broadcasting
service.

Al.so, on April 15, the Voice of America will
increase its transmissions in Persian, Spanish to
Spain, German to Germany and Portuguese to
Brazil, which will increase the total Voice of
America service to more than 42 program hours
daily.

Point 4 Agreement Signed With Iraq

[Released to the press April 10]

The United States and Iraq today signed a Point
4 general agreement in Baghdad. Acting Minister
of Foreign Affairs, Tewfiq Suweidi, signed for
Iraq and American Ambassador Edward S.
Crocker, for the United States. With the addi-
tion of Iraq today, there are now 22 countries
which have signed technical cooperation agree-
ments with the United States under the Act for
International Development, which authorized
President Truman's Point 4 Program.

A request has been approved for the services of
an American engineer on the Iraq Development
Boaid, which will study the country's most im-
mediate economic problems and make recom-
mendations for a development program. Requests
also have been I'eceived for technical assistance in
the fields of agricultural education, vocational
education, and home economics.

The legendary site of the Garden of Eden, Iraq,
is taking action to control the flood waters of the
Euphrates and Tigris Rivers to bring the country
back to its historic productivity. Irrigation and
proper control of these two great rivers can double
the area of about 12,500 square miles now under
cultivation and make the land now in use more
productive.

A 12.8 million dollar loan was negotiated in June
1950 by Iraq from the International Bank for
Reconstruction and Development for a flood con-
trol project on the Tigris River, and bids have been
asked for the work. A project already is under
way in the valley of the Euphrates. It is called
the Habbaniyah water storage scheme. Each of
these projects, when completed, should provide
water to irrigate up to a million acres.

About 80 percent of Iraq's 4,800,000 people are
farmeis. Two crops, barley and dates, contribute
78.4 percent of Iraq's exports, exclusive of oil, and
other agricultural products contribute another 16
percent. The principal food imports are tea,
coffee, and sugar, none of which can be grown
locally in quantity. Aside from these and other
minor items, Iraq's people can produce enough to
feed themselves. Industrial and agricultural ma-
chinery are important items of importation.

April 23, 7957

653

Secretary-General Lie Advised
off Change in U. N. Command

Letter From Ambassador Austin
to Secretary-General Lie

U.N. doc. S/2082
Dated Apr. 11, I'.tSl

11 April 1951

Excellency: Acting under instructions from
my Government, I have the honor to inform the
Security Council that the President of the United
States has today relieved General Douglas Mac-
Arthur as the Commanding General of the mili-
tary forces which the members of the United Na-
tions have made available to the Unitied Com-
mand under the United States, pursuant to the
Security Council resolution of July 7, 1950, and
has designated Lieutenant General Matthew B.
Ridgway as his successor.

Request is made that this report be provided to
the Security Council.

Accept, Excellency, the renewed assurances of
my highest consideration.

Warren R. Austin

ship to strengthen peace and the defense of free-
dom in the Pacific. That is a result which the
American people ai'e unitedly determined to
achieve, and I shall contribute to it to the best of
my ability.

I am glad to be accompanied by the Assistant
Secretary of the Army, Earl D. Johnson and Col.
C. Stanton Babcock and Robert A. Fearey, who
were part of the earlier mission to Jai)an. My
deputy, John M. Allison, is remaining in Wash-
ington to carry on the current discussions with
I'epresentatives of Allied Powers.

We expect to return from our present mission to
Tokyo in about 10 days.

Statement hy Under Secretary Wehh
[Released to the press April 13]

The President has asked me to wish Mr. Dulles
a safe and successful trip and to reaffirm the deter-
mination of the United States to work earnestly
for a prompt conclusion of a Japanese peace set-
tlement. This policy is strongly supported on a
bipartisan basis — a fact which Mr. Dulles is emi-
nently qualified to take to tiie Japanese people.

Ambassador Dulles Returns to Japan
for Peace Treaty Consultation

Statement by the Ambassador
[Released to the press April 13]

I am flying to Japan to discuss with General
Ridgway and Japanese leaders the present state
of the Japanese peace treaty. Since our mission
left Japan on February 11, good progress has been
made, and the President has made abundantly
clear his determination that this work shall move
forward steadily. That makes it important at
this juncture to acquaint General Ridgway with
all phases of the matter so that, as Supreme Com-
mander for the Allied Powers in Japan, he can
assist in conqjleting the peace which was contem-
plated by the surrender terms and which is now
due. It will also be useful, at this juncture, to
advise the Japanese leaders as to the pending state
of the negotiations with other Allied Powers.
There will be some differences to be ironed out, but
nothing that has transpired leads us to doubt the
practicability of an early agreement by most of
the Allied Powers upon a peace treaty which will,
in general, follow the lines indicated in my Los
Angeles address of March 31.

Wliatever may be (he differences of opinion here
at home as to other matters, I have found agree-
ment by the leaders of both our political parties
that we must proceed without regard to partisan-

• Bulletin of Apr. 9, 1051, p. 576.
654

Purpose of the Ambassador''s Trip

[Released to the press hy the White House April 11]

In view of the importance of concluding a Japa-
nese peace settlement, as recognized by the leaders
of both political parties, at the request of the Presi-
dent, Jolm Foster Dulles, who is acting as the
special representative of the President in this mat-
ter, will return to Tokyo over the coming week end
for the dual purpose of consulting with General
Ridgway and Japanese leaders.

The President has made clear that it is the firm
policy of tlie United States Government to press
forward to conclude a peace settlement with Japan
as soon as possible. The principles underlying the
treaty were set out by Mr. Dulles in liis Los Angeles
address of March 31, 1951.^ They have been de-
veloped with the closest consultation with leaders
of both parties in both houses of Congress and with
General MacArthur and have the full approval of
the President.

Ambassador Dulles'' Departure

Ambassador John Foster Dulles, sjiecial repre-
sentative of the President, left at 4 : 00 p.m. April
13 by special plane for Tokyo. As announced
by the White House on April 11, the ])urpose of
Mr. Dulles" trip is to confer with General Ridgway
and Jajianese leaders regarding nuitters connected
witli bringing about the early conclusion of a peace
settlement with ,lapan.

Mrs. Dulles will also accompany him as will
Mrs. Burnita O'Day, his private secretary.

Department of State Bulletin

The Choices Confronting Us in Korea

Remarks by Demi Rusk

Assistant Secretary for Far Eastern Affairs ^

Today I should like to talk for a few minutes
about where we come out in Korea. How does the
fighting end?

Let's look first at the choices which are easy to
think about. We could turn the fighting into a
much bigger war by attacking those who are di-
rectly involved in the aggression in Korea. The
action of Red China and tlie Soviet Union in
Korea has been criminal and unconscionable. But
we would not solve the Korean problem that way.
We miglit be able to forget it, but only because
we would have far more serious things to worry
about. Our jjurpose must be to defend our secu-
rity and liberties without a world war if we can ;
but defend them we must.

Perhaps you are one of those who say, "We don't
want a general war ; we only want to bomb Man-
churia and attack China." But there are others in
this struggle, who have great power available to
them not yet committed to the aggression in Korea.
They, too, can make decisions. It may be that
your guess is that the Communists won't wage a
general war at this time. Your guess might be
right. But it might be wrong. Those who make
the decision to extend hostilities beyond Korea
would be completely irresponsible if they did not
take into full account the element of general war,
with all the destruction and loss of life which
would be involved.

A second easy thing to think about is an imme-
diate withdrawal from Korea. That, too, would
lead to disaster. Korea is not the only object of
the appetites and ambitions of Communist con-
spiracy. We could not solve anything by abandon-
ing Korea. Wlio would be the next victim ? And
the next? And the next? Have we so soon for-
gotten Adolph Hitler? Each bite was to be t\\Q
last. Do you remember the trail which led from
Manchuria and Ethiopia to Pearl Harbor? To

' Made over NBC television on Apr. \'> and released to
the press on the same date.

abandon Korea would be to abandon the United
States.

Some are now saying, "Either extend the war
or get out of Korea." They are asking us to choose
which of two roads to disaster we should take.
Our choice must be to take neither, if we can avoid
it. At this point, the job gets tough and compli-
cated.

Wliat we are trying to do is to maintain peace
and security without a general war. We are say-
ing to the aggressors, "You will not be allowed to
get away with your crime ; you must stop it." At
the same time, we are trying to prevent a general
conflagration which would consume the very things
we are now trying to defend.

Let's admit that this effort is extremely difficult.
There is no more complicated problem than to
bring an end to fighting which involves the world's
great powers witliout unconditional surrender of
one side or the other — an unconditional surrender
which will not come except in general war. It is
hard to understand and hard to explain. It means
a condition of half-war, half-peace.

Peace will come in Korea when the aggressors
decide to give up their purpose. There is no pres-
ent sign that they intend to do so. But if we count
their casualties and the forces they now have in
Korea, the aggi'essors have committed at least
1,250,000 troops to their criminal effort and are
riglit where they were when the first attack was
launched. In Red China itself, people are in-
creasingly worried about sending waves of Chinese
manpower into the fiery furnace of modern fire
power in a foreign land, in a war hatched up by
someone else.

The President reminded us last Wednesday
evening that Communist aggression was repelled
in Greece and in Berlin without a general war.
Tliis came about because situations were created
by vigorous action on the part of the free world
which made it necessary for the aggressors, for

April 23, T95J

655

reasons fully known only to them, to clmng-e their
course of action. Both in Greece and in Bei'lin,
the result fully protected the essential interests of
the free world and the failure of purpose and loss
of prestige went to those who had flagrantly chal-
lenged the peace of the world.

Apart from Korea itself, the free peoples of the
world are increasing their strength rapidly; their
armed forces and their industrial production are
being readied to defend themselves against the
threat which has been raised against them. This
very fact produces peril. For a course of events
has been set in motion by the free world which
will shortly place us in position to be secure and
to get on with the great peaceful purposes which
are our true aims. This prospect may be intolera-
ble to the Kremlin — hence, the danger. But, we
must pass through this valley of danger if we are
to maintain our liberties.

No one can surely promise that we can avoid
general war, because conspirators elsewhere can
jiroduce one. But, if one should come, it is im-
portant that we be in the strongest possible posi-
tion to meet it. At the moment of greatest danger,
strength will come from clear conscience — from
the knowledge that we have done everything
humanly possible to prevent it. Strength will

come from the solid alliance of all free men;
welded together by their common understanding
of the stakes and of the nature of the attack.
Strength will come from our industrial strength
as it is geared to support our armed power.
Strength will come from within the iron curtain
itself as men revolt against the tyranny and the
aggression. All these we must not confuse by ill-
considered action on our own part now.

In closing, I should like to add a word about
the quality of our world leadership in the period
ahead. We Americans know that our politics
get boisterous at times. It is noi-mal to our tra-
ditions and our history. But, we have vital re-
sponsibilities of woi-ld leadership; we live in a
great goldfish bowl where all the world may
see us. What we do here at home has endless
eifects abroad. It may well be that the most im-
portant single fact of the twentieth century is
that the energy, wealth, power, and imagiin^tion
of the American people are devoted to the peace,
liberty, and economic well-being of ourselves and
others. We do not serve our cause if, in this
great democracy, we destroy our unity and under-
mine our strength, or if we lack the patience and
the maturity we shall need, as we move to meet
the tests ahead.

I

Casualties of U.N. Forces in Korea

[Released to the press by the U.N. Department of Public Informatimi March SI]

The following are the most recent figures show- senting Governments which have contributed
ing casualties suffered by the forces operating forces to sujaport the United Nations action in
under the United Nations Command in Korea. Korea.

These figures are based on an informal survey Except where otherwise indicated the figures
conducted by the United Nations Secretariat given below are as of March 9.
among delegations to the United Nations repre-

Killed in Wounded in Missing in

Country Action Action Action Total

Republic of Korea 16,182 88,511 63,959 168,652

United States as of 23 March 8,511 37,918 10,691 57,120

Turkey as of 1 March 298 672 199 1,169

United Kingdom as of 21 February 145 442 i 305 892

Franco 84 309 3 396

Australia 62 196 7 265

Philipi)ines as of 2 March 6 49 None 55

Netherlands 28 82 2 112

Greece as of 15 March 28 60 1 89

Canada as of 12 March 17 51 None 68

New Zealand 4 ^5 None 9

South Africa 0 0 '6 6

Belgium and l/uxembourg (These troops were not in action before 9 March)

Thailand as of 7 February 9 "99 None 108

Total 25,374 128,394 75,173 228,941

' Inclufiing 61 prisoners.

2 Iiichidiiig sick and injured.

' Presumed dead.

656

Department of State Bulletin

Assisting Iran To Unite With the Free World'

Remarks hy George C. McGJiee
Assistant Secretary for Near Eastern,
South Asian and African Affairs

MR. MC GHEE : Mr. Cronkite, I am not going to
try to minimize the dangers inherent in such a
strategically located and oil-rich country as Iran.
Martial law, which at tirst was enforced only in
Tehran, is now in effect in the oil fields in the
southwestern part of the country. The Iranian
legislature has voted for nationalization of the
country's great oil industry. About 12,000 work-
ers in the oil fields are on strike. The local Com-
munist Party is fanning the flames of dissension.

Yet, if we take a balanced, long-range look at
the situation, there is no reason to be pessimistic.
To date, there is no indication that the Kremlin
engineered the present crisis in Iran, much as they
are delighted with it. The Shah and Prime Min-
ister Hussein Ala, both of whom I saw during my
recent visit in Iran, have shown cool judgment
' in meeting emergency situations. The Iranian
army is behind them. This army is capable of
maintaining order. There has been almost no vio-
lence in the area of the strike.

I had the opportunity for a long discussion with
the Shah in Tehran on the day of the second tragic
assassination, that of the Minister of Education.
I was tremendously impressed with his coolness
and courage, his determination to take whatever
steps are required to maintain Iran's integrity.
He has a keen interest in the welfare of his people
and his deep desire to continue the distribution of
his land and to get on with the 7-year develop-
ment program in which he has played such an im-
portant role. I conveyed to him the confidence
which our Government has in him, and the fact
that we are fully behind Iran and want to do what
we can to assist Iran.

The point I want to make is that you do not
succeed in any endeavor by exaggerating the dif-
ficulties that lie ahead. You capitalize on what
you have and drive ahead with a will to win. If
we had concentrated on dangers of past crises in-
stead of exploiting the strong points, Greece might
have fallen to the Communists. There would have

' A CBS television program broadcast on Apr. 8 and
released to the press on the same date.

AptW 23, 1 95 1

941240—51 3

been no Berlin airlift, no intervention by the
United Nations in Korea, no North Atlantic
Treaty Organization, and General Eisenhower
would never have undertaken his difficult assign-
ment in Europe.

commentator: Well, Mr. McGhee, just what is
our goal in Iran? Wliat is it that we're trying
to do in that country, some 7,000 miles from our
firesides here in the United States?

mcgiiee: Wliat we are trying to do, Mr. Cron-
kite, as a friend of Iran and without in any way
interfering in Iranian internal affairs, is to help
Iran solve its problems and strengthen its economy
and its military forces. The first Point 4 Program
in the world was established in Iran. We hope this
program can be continued next year and increased.
In 1948, we extended a 26 million dollar loan to
Iran to buy military equipment. Substantial
quantities of military supplies are now being
shipped to Iran on a grant basis under the ISIutual
Defense Assistance Program. Next year, we ex-
pect this assistance to be increased. Iran has been
offered a 25 million dollar Export-Import Bank
Loan which will take effect as soon as the Iranian
Govei'nment concludes the agreement. We are pre-
pared to consider other needs as they arise.

commentator: Have we done enough, Mr.
McGhee?

mcghee: We are doing what we can. In the
present world crisis with such great demands being
made on us all over the world, we must distribute
our aid as the needs arise and on the basis of the
urgency of each situation involved. We must seek
to provide what the Secretary recently called the
"missing component" where other components al-
ready exist. Some people have asked why has the
United States given Iran no more dollar assist-
ance. The answer is that, until recently, Iran's
problem did not appear to be a deficiency of
dollars.

commentator : I can see that we have to ration
our help, Mr. McGhee. But when an economic sit-
uation does develop which justifies our help, can
we move fast enough to meet it effectively?

mcghee: We certainly can. We did this in
Greece. We did it in Turkey. We are very hope-
ful that Congress will give us the support to meet
the famine situation in India. Here is an example

657

of how we can help the Iranians with our techni-
cal assistance if we move quickly. Almost the en-
tire area of Iran, south of the 30th parallel, is in
danger of being ravaged by one of the great
plagues of locusts which have periodically infested
these ancient lands since Biblical times. Accord-
ing to the latest reports, the egg fields of these
locusts already cover an area of 2,000 square miles.
Unless the locusts are killed off now they will
destroy the crops in southern Iran. Even more
serious, the locusts will sweep northward over the
entire country, eventually ravaging the northern
provinces, which are the real breadbaskets of
Iran. The Premier of Iran has appealed to the
United States, Great Britain, and the United Na-
tions for help. To be effective, spraying of the
infested area must begin in the next 3 weeks.
Within a matter of days, we have formulated an
effective program for American assistance in the
problem, and, by the end of this week, technicians,
material, and equipment will be flown to Iran and
put in operation.

commentator: Wliat do you think the future
holds for Iran ?

MC GHEE : I am optimistic for the reasons that I
have mentioned, and, especially, because of the
Iranian people themselves. Iran, as you know, is
the modern name for Persia. The Persians built
up one of the greatest empires the world has ever
known centuries before the new world was discov-
ered. Only about three million of the IGi/o mil-
lion people of Iran live in cities. The rest are
hardy farmers or migratory tribesmen of great
physical strength and intelligence. They have
been fighting the Russians off and on for several
hundred years. They have been conquered, but
they have never been subjugated. They under-
stand the Russians better than we do. United
under their Shah, they are determined to preserve
their independence. I feel confident that they
will do so.

Remarks by Elbert G. Mathews

COMMENTATOR : Thank you, Mr. McGhee. And
now to tell us about some of the political facts
we face in the area south of the Communist em-
pire, here is Bert Mathews, Director of the State
Department's Office of South Asian Affairs.

MATHEWS : Let's amend that "some" to "a very
few" of the political facts we face in the vast
area from Greece to India. The countries of this
area are separated by important differences of
language, religion, cultui'e, and living standards.
Most of them do, however, have two things in
common. First, having achieved independence,
after many years as colonies under one foreign
empire or another, they are determined to preserve
their new sovereignty and freedom at all costs.
Second, they are determined to speed the develop-
ment of their natural resources and the inijirove-
ment of the living stnndards of their people.

Both of these characteristics are present in a

very high degree in India, the largest and most
heavily populated country in this area. They
underlie India's political outlook, which has
puzzled many Americans in recent months. Yet
Americans, more than any other people, should
be able to understand the problems and hopes of
new countries.

We should, for example, understand that India
will seize every opportunity to demonstrate and
defend its newly won independence of judgment
and action. The Indian people will be quick to
resent any evidence of an attitude of superiority
or casualness on the part of other nations.

When George Washington was President, he
expressed the sentiments of the new United States
in advising against becoming embroiled in the
world's troubles outside our own borders. Today,
Prime Minister Nehru voices the hopes of his
people when he says that India does not wish to
become involved in the strains and tensions of the
present world. The difference between India's
position today and ours at the end of the
eighteenth century is that the airplane, fast ships,
and quick communications have left the globn
much smaller, and no nation, however much it
may wish to do so, can now divorce itself from
the world's troubles.

We were fortunate when we proclaimed our in-
dependence in that we inherited a land rich in
untapped natural resources. But the Indians are!
crowded into an old country which is striving
to produce enough food for more than 350,000,000
people. Last year, natural disasters— droughts,
floods, earthquakes, and plagues of locust — fell on
the people and the land with unusual severity.
Famine is imminent in the provinces of Madras,
Bihar, and Assam. To avert starvation, India
must import 6 million tons of grain. India is
paying for 4 million tons. It is asking the United
States to assist by providing the remaining 2 mil-
lion tons. India" could pay for this 2 million tons
only by harmfully delaying the economic develop-
ment programs which are essential for the coun-
try's security. If we do not give the grain, or if
we sencl it with strings attached, we will strike a
serious blow at a new growth of democracy which
is taking root in Asia.

commentator: Thank you, Mr. Mathews. It
seems to me that the American people would be
more willing to send grain to India if India, in
return, would smiport our stand in the Ignited Na-
tions against Communist aggi-ession in Korea.
Would you care to comment on this ?

MATHEWS : Yes, Mr. Cronkite. I have lived
closely with this problem. It is part of niv job
to try to understand why India takes a different
position on the Far Eastern problem than we do.
The basic reason is our different estimates of
the two strong forces in Asia today. Prime forces
are nationalism and communism. Prime Minister
Nehru of India and his Government believe that
nationalism — the drive of the Asian people for

658

Department of State Bulletin

complete independence — is so strong that it can
and will defeat coniniunisni. We agree that na-
tionalism is a tremendous force. We doubt that
nationalism can -withstand aggressive interna-
tional communism, aided and directed by power
grasping regimes in Moscow and Peiping, unless
all free nations, including the newly independent
nations of Asia, stand together against the threat.
Let me make one last thing clear. The Indian
Government has taken severe and effective meas-
ures against Communists within its borders. And
India will fight if invaded. You can be sure of
that.

Remarks hy John Loftus

coMBrENTATou : Of all the economic problems of
the Middle East and South Asian area, none is
more important than oil. To answer our ques-
tions about the vital oil fields of the Middle East,
here is John Loftus, economic adviser to Mr.
McGhee.

Mr. Loftus, most Americans think we have all
the oil we need. Is this true?

LOFTUS : In normal times we can almost make
out with what we have. But, the last war was a
drain on our oil resources. We have changed
from a large exporter of oil to an even larger
importer of oil. Western Europe, for all practi-
cal purposes, has no oil supply of its own. I3efore
the war, Europe imported oil, mostly from the
United States and Venezuela. Now, Western
Europe depends on the oil fields of the Middle
East for three-fourths of its needs.

Production-wise, Middle East oil did not count
for much until after the last w\ar. In 1939, the
oil fields of the Middle East were producing only
one-tenth of the volume which was then being
produced in the United States. However, in
about 10 years, production in the Middle East
has risen from about 300,000 to nearly 2,000,000
ban-els per day. Nearly 80 percent of the oil
needed to turn the wheels of Europe's industries
come from the Middle East.

The most important oil fields are in Saudi
Arabia, Southern Iran, the Sheikdom of Kuwait,
Bahrein Island, and the Kirkuk area in Iraq.
None of the oil goes to Eussia. Russia and her
satellites produce only about one-half as much
oil as is produced in the Middle East. All of the
concessions in these Middle Eastern fields are
controlled by the free nations of the world.

COMMENTATOR : I think this problem of conces-
sions confuses some of us, Mr. Loftus. We read
about the activities of American oil companies in
Saudi Arabia, and British oil companies in Iran,
and French oil companies in Iraq. Wliy can't
these countries develop their own oil fields?

LOFTUS : Well, it's like this. On the one hand, a
large part of the oil resources of the world is
located in areas where there has not been much
economic and technical progress. On the other

hand, finding, producing, transporting, and refin-
ing oil is a verj' complicated technical business.
It requires a great deal of know-how and ca]iital.
Generally speaking, the Middle liastern countries
do not have that know-how and capital. So, in
effect, they sign contracts with outside companies
to do the job for them. The Government of the
country which has the oil and the oil company
which has the know-how and equipment to develop
it sign a concession contract. The company agrees
to pay the Government so nmch royalty on every
barrel of oil produced. The Government agrees
that the company shall have the right to sell the
oil in world markets. The Government, in return,
receives a large annual payment as its share of the
proceeds. Of course, the contracts cover many
other points in great detail, such as taxes, dead
I'ents, and so on.

COMMENTATOR : But, if all details are covered in
the concession contracts, why does so much tension
develop between the Governments and the oil
companies ?

i,orTus : Tension does not always develop, Mr.
Cronkite. For example, relations between the
Arabian American Oil Company and the Govern-
ment of Arabia have been quite satisfactory. In
Iran, obviously, the tension is very great right
now.

There are many reasons for the tensions which
do develop. First, the concession contracts are
drawn up at a time when no one knows for sure
that there is oil in the country. Almost any con-
tract looks good to the Government at the start.
But, if the fields turn out to be productive, the
picture changes. The company begins to produce
and sell great quantities of oil and apparently is
making a lot of money. On the other hand, the
oil company assumed heavy risks and invested a
great deal of money. But the Governments start
asking themselves why they shouldn't get a larger
share of the benefits.

Second, the Government may feel that the com-
pany is not producing as much oil as it could pro-
duce. And each country would like to have its
own refinery, like the one in Abadan, in Iran,
larf^cst in the world.

And so oil, which is initially an economic prob-
lem, becomes involved in the great surge of na-
tionalism which is sweeping through the Middle
East. There is no easy solution to this problem.
We need the oil. These countries need the reve-
nues from oil to finance their economic develop-
ment programs and they need the companies if
they are to realize these revenues. To achieve an
equitable solution. Governments and oil companies
alike must display statesmanship of the highest
order.

Remarks hy Norman Burns

commentator: Thankyou, Mr. Loftus. Oil lies
under only a small fraction of the great area of
the Middle East and South Asia. And now to tell

April 23, J 95 1

659

us something more about the land of this vast area,
here is Norman Burns, agricultural and economic
specialist on Mr. McGhee's staff.

BURNS : As Mr. Loftus pointed out, many of the
world's richest oil fields have been found in the
so-called underdeveloped areas where, today,
there is great poverty and privation. These areas
were not always underdeveloped. Several months
ago, I visited the cradle of our Western civiliza-
tion— the ancient valley of the Tigris and
Euphrates rivers in Iraq, formerly Mesopotamia.
Today, much of this valley is a desert — flat, sandy,
parched by relentless sun. Yet, in the days of
Nebuchadnezzar almost 3 thousand years ago, this
same area, known as the Garden of Eden, sup-
ported millions of people.

With patience, hard work, and modern scientific
methods, this land can again support a prosperous
and progressive civilization.

Under the present system in the Middle East,
most of the land is owned by a small minority and
the mass of people are tenant serfs. They have no
interest in improving land which is not their own.
In Lebanon, two-tenths of 1 percent of the land-
owners own half of the cultivable land. In Egypt,
3 million of the 4 million families living on the
land own less than 1 acre, or else do not own
any land at all.

Eecently, the Shah of Iran made the farsighted
decision to divide part of his immense land hold-
ings among his people.

And now, let's see what the Government of Iraq
did with 163,000 acres of state-owned land which
the Iraq Government irrigated with a 30-mile canal
between the Tigris and Euphrates. It divided the
land, known as the Dujeila project, into tracts of
621/2 acres each. It chose 1200 peasant families
from the estates of neighboring sheikhs and leased
a tract to each family. The head of the family
signed a contract with the Government (putting
his fingerprint on the paper, since he could neither
read nor write) . The tenant agreed to cultivate the
land for 10 years. He agreed to build a home, a
stable for his animals, and storage bins for his
crops. Schools, clinics, agricultural machine
shops, experimental gardens, and a nursery are
within walking distance of his home. After 10
years, if he has tilled the land successfully, the
tenant is given title to his tract. His future is then
in his own hands. Communism holds little or no
appeal for him.

Revitalizing these lands of the Middle East and
South Asia is a challenge to fire the imagination
of American scientists and the people of the coun-
tries themselves. On a recent trip to the Near
East, I saw efforts being made to graft an olive
tree to an ash tree, so that it could ";row in marshy
lands. In Lebanon, I saw fields of elephant grass
imported from Brazil to provide cheap forage for

cattle. I saw a new variety of grass, known as
kudzu, which stores nitrogen in the soil. In Syria,
I saw evergreen trees being tested for reforestation.
I saw irrigation projects, macadamized roads, ex-
perimental farms, a new port at Latakia. In
Transjordan, I saw sheep drinking from an an-
cient Roman cistern which engineers plan to clean
out and rebuild as part of a modern water supply.

Americans are eager to offer their technical as-
sistance for these development projects. How-
ever, the initiative and the elbow grease to get
these projects started must come from the people
who will use and benefit from them. The initia-
tive is there. But, in many countries, it is held
back by suspicions of our motives, by local red tape
and by inertia. The lowest classes of people live
in such poverty that, for them, almost any change
would be an improvement of their present situa-
tion.

Above all, there is the element of time. We must
speed up the process of helping these people to im-
prove their lot. If we fail in this efl'ort, many of
them will turn in despair to communism.

Summary iy Assistant Secretary McGhee

commentator: Thank you, Mr. Burns. And
now to summarize the facts we face in this vital
area south of the Communist empire, here, again,
is Assistant Secretary of State McGhee.

mcghee: There is not the least doubt in my
mind that the strategists in the Kremlin are seeking
to gain control of this area as quickly as they can.
In their hands, these lands would provide them
with great manpower resources, with the oil, man-
ganese, and the many other strategic materials
which they need to fight a global war. •■

In my judgment, they cannot succeed for the fol- il
lowing reasons. Without exception, the vast ma-
jority of the people in the Near East and South
Asia abhor the Communist doctrine. They are re-
ligious, they are individualistic, they have old and
honored cultures which they are determined to pre-
serve. Most of them are new nations. They have
won their independence after centuries of struggle
under colonial yoke.

They will not surrender it easily now. They
are suspicious of influences from the West, but they
are more suspicious of the new Communist imperi-
alism. They are determined to succeed in the hard
task of raising their standards of living so that
they may share the advantages of free government.

Many of these nations have shown their deter-
mination to resist Communist aggression by their
stand in the United Nations with respect to Korea.
Some have sent troops to fight for the cause of
the United Nations in Korea. We, in turn, nuist
continue to take all practical steps to hel]i thoni
realize their asjnrations so that they can unite with
the rest of the free world for nuitual security.

660

DeparlmenI of Slate Bulletin

U.S. Aid to Iran

in Fight Against Locust Plague

[Released to the press April 10]

Two DC-4 Skyinaster planes, carrying six dis-
assembled single-engine planes and over six tons
of insecticide to fight the locust plague in Iran,
are sciieduled to leave Idlewild International Air-
port, New York, within the next 24 hours. A
third plane, carrying two nioi-e small planes and
additional supplies, is scheduled to take oil for
Tehran, April 13.

This emergency action, taken at the request of
the Iranian Government, is being carried out as
part of the Point 4 Program of technical coopera-
tion, administered by the Department of State.
A Point 4 project is already in operation in Iran
for the purpose of increasing food production and
improving living conditions in rural areas.

The flights and spraying operations are being
carried out under contract by the United States
Overseas Airlines, a private charter service. The
Iranian Government will provide fuel for the
spraying planes and will house and feed the pilots
and mechanics who are making the trip. About
20 of the group will remain in Iran to spray the
fields.

A Department of Agriculture entomologist,
"William K. Mabee, will fly to Iran to direct the
technical phases of the project and will remain in
Iran as one of the group of American technicians
engaged in the long-range technical cooperation
project. Mr. Mabee has been stationed at Elko,
Nevada, as a supervisor of grasshopper control in
the Western States. He is one of the pioneers in
the use of airplanes for applying insecticides to
field crops to control insects. Another Depart-
ment of Agriculture entomologist, Edson J. Ham-
bleton, also will make the trip to Iran, but he will
stay there only a short time.

Reports from Iran indicate that over 130,000
square miles of cultivated land are threatened by
the plague of locusts. At present, the egg fields
of the insects actually cover about 2,000 square
miles in southern Iran below the 30th parallel, an
area where wheat, barley, pistachio nuts, almonds,
and other foods are grown. However, Iranian
authorities advise that unless the insects are killed
off within the next 3 weeks, the locusts will swarm
northward, eventually reaching the northern prov-
inces of Iran which are the real breadbaskets
of the country.

. After the transport planes arrive in Iran, only
6 hours will be needed to assemble the spraying
planes. They will carry a new insecticide — al-
drin, 2 ounces of which, mixed in solvent, are
enough to kill locusts covering an acre of ground.
The material to be used in Iran was flown from
Denver to Idlewild yesterday.

Preparations for the emergency action have been
completed in record time by State Department and

aviation officials. Passports, visas, and inocula-
tions for personnel making the trip have been ob-
tained on 24-hour notice.

The small planes will be ready to begin spray-
ing operations within 10 days after the Iranian
officials made their appeal to the United States
Government.

Joint Communique on U.S.-U.K.
Iranian Talks

[Released to the press April 9]

The opening exchange of views between the Brit-
ish Ambassador and the State Department has
taken place in a cordial atmosphere. These talks
were informal and exploratory and dealt in a posi-
tive and constructive way with matters of mutual
interest between the British and United States
Governments relating to Iran.

The British and United States Governments
have many times demonstrated their concern with
the stability of Iran and the well-being of the
Iranian people. Both Governments, for instance,
in May 1950, declared their interest in the con-
tinued political independence and territorial in-
tegrity of Iran, and they have both given proof
of their willingness to provide Iran with technical
and material assistance. It is the earnest hope of
the British and United States Governments that
this mutual cooperation will be maintained and
developed with advantage to the peoples of all
three countries.

Iranian oil has played a vital part in world trade
and in meeting the requirements of many coun-
tries of the free world. Its importance to Iran,
to the United Kingdom, and to the economy of the
free world generally is, of course, great. Hence,
the two Governments, while recognizing that ques-
tions relating to Iranian oil must be settled else-
where, have deemed it advisable to exchange views
informally.

Further exchanges of views will take place.

Admiral Robert B. Carney
To Visit Jordan

[Released to the press April 10]

On the invitation of the Government of the
Hashemite Kingdom of the Jordan, Admiral
Robert B. Carney, USN, Commander in Chief,
United States Naval Forces in the Eastern Atlan-
tic and Mediterranean, is scheduled to arrive today
at Amman, the capital of Jordan. Admiral Car-
ney's visit is in connection with the celebration on
April 11 of Arab Legion Day.

April 23, 1 95 1

661

Trade Agreement With Costa Rica Terminated

[Released! to the press April 4]

Representatives of the Oovernment of the United States
and the Oovernment of Costa Rica exchanged notes on
April 3 providing for termination of the trade agreement
between the two Governments signed November 28, 1936.
The trade agreement will cease to be in force on and after
June 1, 1951.

In the trade agreement, Costa Rica in 1937
gi-anted reductions and bindings on a wide range
of agricultural and industrial products. The
Costa Rican customs duties, which will be applied
to these items after termination of the trade agree-
ment, have not been announced. The United
States bound or reduced its duties on four tropical
fruit products (dried bananas, pineapples, pre-
served guavas, mango and guava pastes) and
bound on the free list bananas and plantains,
coffee, cocoa beans, deer and reptile skins, turtles,
balsa, and cabinet woods. The tjnited States tariff
status of these items will be unchanged since the
dutiable items are included at the same or lower
levels in other trade agi-eements, and the free list
articles are also bound free in other agreements.

In 1948, the Costa Rican Government, impelled
by a large imbalance in its trade with the United
States and in order to increase its revenues, took
steps to restrict imports of nonessential goods and
applied exchange surcharges to certain categories
of imports, including some items covered by the
trade agreement. New legislation in Costa Rica,
effective April 1, 1950, provided for increased ex-
change surcharges. In order to permit Costa Rica
to seek a solution of its emergency financial diffi-
culties which would not be in conflict with the
trade agreement, the United States agreed to a
waiver of article I of the agreement for a year
ending March 31, 1951.'

In the meantime, during the course of conversa-
tions between representatives of the two Govern-
ments, it became evident that because of special
conditions Costa Rica would be unable to apply
the terms of the trade agreement in the foreseeaole
future. After a full exploration of various alter-
natives, the two Governments therefore agreed to
joint termination of the trade agreement effective
June 1, 1951. The waiver of article I of the agree-
ment has been extended to that termination date.

' Bulletin of May 1, 1950, p. 694.

TEXT OF COSTA RICAN NOTE

April 3, 1951

Excellency: I have the honor to refer to your Excel-
lency's note dated April 3, 1951, relating to the termina-
tion by mutual consent of the trade agreement signed
November 28, 1936, and relating to the extension of the
agreement effected by exchange of notes on April 4, 1950.

I have the honor to confirm the agreement arrived at in
the course of conversations between representatives of
our two Governments, which agreement is set forth in
your note of April 3, 1951, atjove mentioned.

As proposed in that note, it is agreed that your note
and this reply shall constitute an agreement between our
two Governments which shall enter into force today.

Accept [etc.]

J. Rafael Oeeamuno

TEXT OF UNITED STATES NOTE

April 3, 1951

ExcEiXENCY : I have the honor to refer to conversa-
tions between representatives of the Government of the
United States of America and the Government of the
Republic of Costa Rica regarding the termination by
mutual consent of the trade agreement signed November
28, 1936. I also have the honor to refer to the agreement
effected by an excliange of notes on April 4, 1950 whereby
the Government of the United States, at the request of
the Government of Costa Rica, agreed to waive, for a
period of one year, beginning April 1, 1950, the provisions
of Article I of the above-mentioned trade agreement to
permit the application of multiple excliange surcliarges
to impcn-ts from the United States of America of articles
listed in Schedule I of the trade agreement.

The Government of Costa Kica has made it dear that
special conditions exist, and will continue to exist for
the foreseeable future, which will nial<e it impossible for
Costa Rica to apply tlie terms of the trade agreement.
tn view of these conditions, and in accordance witli the
conversations to which I have referred. 1 have the honor
to coutirm the agreement reached tculay in a friendly
and understanding spirit that the Trade Agreement be-
tween tlie United States of America and the Republic of
Costa Rica, signed at San Jos6 on November 28, 1936,
shall cease to be in force on and after June 1, 1951.

Pursuant to the request of the Government of Costa
Rica during the cour.se of the above-mentioned conver-
sations and recognizing the prolilems confronting the
Government of Costa Rica, I further contlrni tliat tlie
Government of tlie United States of America agriH.'s to
extend from April 1, 1951 through May 31, 1951 the
waiver of Article I of the trade agreement as granted

662

Department of State Bulletin

In the agreement efiected by the exchange of notes
dated April 4, 1950.

If the Government of Costa Rica concurs in the fore-
going, this note and Your Excellency's reply thereto
will constitute an a;;reement between our two Govern-
ments, which shall enter into force on the date of Your
Excellency's note.

It is understood that the Government of Costa Rica
Is desirous of exploring the possibility of negotiating a
comprehensive treaty of friendship, conunene and navi-
gation between our two countries. My Government is
equally desirous of undertaliing diseus.sions concerning
such a treaty and is prepared to begin them at an early
date.

Accept [etc.].

For the Secretary of State:
Thomas C. Mann

Death of Ernest Bevin, Former
British Foreign Minister

Statement by Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press April 14]

Ernest Bevin's death brings to me deep sorrow
from the loss of a friend and trusted colleague.
We have worked together for two and one half
years in a critical and troubled time, sharing com-
mon problems and determined in the interests of
our countries to find solutions in common. To
work with him inevitably evoked deep affection,
respect, and trust. It could not be otherwise, be-
cause his indomitable courage, his simplicity and
directness, his love of his country and his under-
standing of the grandeur of its contribution to the
cause of human liberty, his humanity and knowl-
edge of the struggles and aspirations of his fellow-
men, his own warm affectionate good humor made
him both loved and trusted.

We have sat together in many international
conferences and personal meetings. We have ex-
changed innumerable messages on the problems
confronting us. He fought hard for views which
were always founded on a remarkable knowledge
of history, an apprehension — deeper than knowl-
edge— that he was acting in the moving stream of
history, and an understanding of present facts.
But his mind was not closed. It was tough, and
often stubborn, but always open to arguments
strongly and honestly pushed.

Not only his own coimtrymen but all of us to
whom freedom and liberty are the foundation of
our lives will stand in spirit beside his grave in
sorrow and gratitude and joy that in these times
such a man has lived.

Ernest Bevin was a gallant gentleman, a great
Englishman, a fighter for the freedom of all men.

'-s^

Legislation Continued from page 645

Clarifying the Immigration Status of Certain Aliens. S.
Kept. Ill, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany S.
728] 4 pp.

Authorizing Vessels of Canadian Registry To Transport
Iron Ore Between United States Ports on the Great
Lakes During 1951. S. Kept. 119, 82d Cong. 1st sess.
[To accompany S. 683] 4 pp.

Assignment of Ground Forces of the United States to Duty
in the European Area. Report of the Committee on
Foreign Relations and the Committee on Armed Serv-
ices on S. Res. 99 and S. Con. Res. 18. S. Bept. 175,
82d Cong. 1st sess. lil, Rlap, 23 pp.

Ninth Semiannual Report of the Atomic Energy Commis-
sion. S. Doc. 6, 82d Cong. 1st sess. vii, 158 pp.

Basic Data Relating to Energy Resources. Study Made by
the Committee on Interior and Insular Affairs, pursu-
ant to S. Res. 239 (81st Cong.) to investigate available
fuel reserves and formulate a national fuel policy of
the United States. S. Doc. 8, 82d Cong. 1st sess. xxi,
226 pp.

Investigation of the Preparedness Program. Fifth Report
of the preparedness subcommittee of the Committee
on Armed Services, United States Senate, under the
authority of S. Res. 18 (82d Cong.). Interim Report
on Lackland Air Force Base. S. Doc. 9, S2d Cong. 1st
sess. v, 22 pp. Also, Sixth Report . . . Tin, 1951. S.
Doc. 13, 82d Cong. 1st sess. vil, 56 pp.

North American Regional Broadcasting Agreement and
Final Protocol Thereto. Message from the President
of the United States transmitting the North American
Regional Broadcasting Agreement and the final proto-
col thereto, which were signed in the English, Spani.sh,
and French languages at Washington on November 15,
1950, by the respective plenijwtentiaries of the United
States of America, the United Kingdom of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland for the territories in the
North American Region (Baliamas and Jamaica),
Canada, Cuba, and the Dominican Kepublle. Senate
Ex. A, 82d Cong. 1st sess. 100 pp.

1951 Extension of the Reciprocal Trade Agreements Act.
Hearing before the Committee on Ways and Means,
House of Representatives, Eighty-second Congress,
first session, on H. R. 1612, a bill to extend the au-
thority of the President to enter into trade agree-
ments under section 3.50 of the Tariff Act of 1930, as
amended, and for other purposes. January 22, 24,
25, and 26, 1951. [Department of State, pp. 1-104.]
vi, 625 pp.

India Emergency Assistance Act of 1951. Hearings before
the Committee on Foreign Affairs, House of Repre-
sentatives, Eighty-second Congress, first session, on
H. R. 2692, H. R. 2693, H. R. 2694, H. R. 2695, H. R.
2696, H. R. 2698, H. R. 2699, H. R. 2700, H. R. 2702,
H. R. 2705, H. R. 2706, and H. R. 3017, bills to furnish
emergency food relief A.ssistance to India. February
20, 21, 22, 23, 1951. [Department of State, pp. 5-38,
45-103, 204-206, 217-225.] iv, 233 pp.

Imports Controls on Fats, Oils, Rice, and Rice Products.
Hearings before the Committee on Banking and Cur-
rency, House of Representatives, Eighty-first Con-
gress, first session, on H. R. 5240, a bill to continue
for a temporary period certain powers, authority,
and discretion for the purpose of exercising, admin-
istering, and enforcing import controls with respect
to fats and oils, and rice and rice products. June 21,
1949. iii, 5 pp.

The Effect of Imports on Employment. Hearings before
a special subcommittee of the Committee on Education
and Labor, House of Representatives, Eighty-first
Congress, second session, pursuant to H. Res. 75, a
resolution authorizing the committee on education
and labor to conduct studies and investigations re-
lating to matters within its jurisdiction. Hearings
held at Washington, D. C, May 2, 6, 15, 16, June 1,
2, 12, 26, and 27, 1950. vil, 430 pp.

Aprii 23, 1 95 1

663

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Compulsory Jurisdiction of the International Court of Justice

ADDITIONS UP THROUGH MARCH 31, 1951

Notes hy Denys P. Myers

Compulsory jurisdiction of the International
Court of Justice is a continuation of the compul-
sory jurisdiction established by article 36 of the
Statute of the Permanent Court of International
Justice. Article 36 of the Statute of the Interna-
tional Court of Justice, therefore, provides for dec-
larations of states parties to the Statute to be ef-
fective either —

{a) under the present Statute in virtue of ar-
ticle 36, paragraph 2 ; or

{h) under the terms of declarations made with
respect to the Permanent Court of International
Justice and carried over by application of article
36, paragraph 5, of the present Statute.

Compulsory jurisdiction of the Permanent
Court of International Justice was effected by
signing a declaration setting forth the terms and
conditions reciprocally accepted by the respective
party to the Statute. That Statute was brought
into force by ratification of a covering protocol of
signature dated December 16, 1920, to which was
annexed an optional clause providing a medium by
which parties to the Statute accepted the compul-
sory jurisdiction of article 36 in affixing to it the
declaration above-mentioned. Ratification of dec-
larations was not expressly required, but ratifica-
tion was frequently a condition of a declaration.

Compulsory jurisdiction of the International
Court of Justice is effected by depositing with the
Secretary-General of the United Nations a dec-
laration stating the terms and conditions of
acceptance. Since the Statute of the Interna-
tional Court of Justice is an annex and an integral
part of the Charter of the United Nations, no
special protocol of the type of the former optional

664

clause was set up. Declarations of acceptance
may be made subject to ratification. Declarations
made under the Statute of the International Court
of Justice are separately registered in accordance
with article 102 of the Charter of the United Na-
tions and published in the United Nations Treaty
Series. They are communicated to the registrar
of the International Court of Justice and pub-
lished in chapter X of the Yearbook issued by him
for successive years beginning July 15, 19i6.

The pertinent provisions of the Statute of the
International Court of Justice, in force since Octo-
ber 24, 1945, are :

Article S6

1. The jurisdiction of the Court comprises all cases
which tlie parties refer to it and all matters specially
provided for in the Charter of the United Nations or in
treaties and conventions in force.

2. The states parties to the present Statute may at any
time declare that they recognize as compulsory ii>so facto
and without special agreement, in relation to any other
state accepting the same obligation, the jurisdiction of
the Court in all legal disputes concerning:

(a) the interpretation of a treaty;

(b) any question of international law;

(c) the existence of any fact which, if established,
would constitute a breach of an international obligation ;

(d) the nature or extent of the reparation to be made
for the breach of an international obligation.

3. The declarations referred to above may be made
unconditionally or on condition of reciprocity on the
part of several or certain states, or for a certain time.

4. Such declarations shall be deposited with the .'^ecre-
tary-Oeneral of the United Nations, who shall transmit
<'()pies thereof to the parties to the Statute and to the
Registrar of tlie Court.

■'). Declarations made under Article :W of the Statute of
the Permanent Court of International Justice and wliich

Department of Slate Bulletin

are still in force shall be deemed, as between tbe parties
to the present Statute, to be acceptances of the compul-
sory jurisdiction of the International Court of Justice
for the period which they still have to run and in accord-
ance with their terms.

(>. In the event of a dispute as to whetlier the Court
has jurisdiction, tlie matter shall he settled by the deci-
sion of the Court.

Declarations were first compiled and published
in the June 1948 issue of Docimients and State
Papers and reprinted with revisions as Depart-
ment of State publication 3540, International Or-
ganization and Conference Series, III, 31, under
the title of Comfulsory Jurisdiction of the Inter-

Status of Declarations Accepting Compulsory Jurisdiction

(Asterisks (*) indicate declarations made before October 24, 1945, which continue in force.)

State

♦Australia

Belgium

Bolivia

Brazil

♦Canada

China

♦Colombia

Denniarlv

♦Dominican Republic
♦El Salvador . . . .

France

Guatemala . . . .
♦Haiti

Honduras

♦India

♦Iran

Israel

Liechtenstein. . . .

♦Luxembourg . . . .

Mexico

Netherlands . . . .

♦New Zealand . . .

♦Nicaragua

Norway

Pakistan

♦Panama

♦Paraguay

Philippines

Sweden

Switzerland . . . .
♦Thailand

Turkey

♦Union of South Afri-
ca.
♦United Kingdom . .

British Honduras .

United States . . .
♦Uruguay

Date of signature

Aug. 21, 1940

June 10, 1948.
July 5, 1948 .
Feb. 12, 1948.
Sept. 20, 1929.

Oct. 26, 1946.

Oct. 30, 1937.
Dec. 10, 1946.
Sept. 30, 1924.
Before Jan. 28,

1921.
Feb. 18, 1947.

Jan. 27, 1947 .
[1921] ....
Feb. 2, 1948 .
Feb. 28, 1940 .

Oct. 2, 1930 .

Sept. 4, 1950 .
Mar. 10, 1950.

Sept. 15, 1930.

Oct. 23, 1947.

Aug. 5, 1946 .

Apr. 1, 1940 .

Sept. 24, 1929.
Nov. 16, 1946.
June 22, 1948.

Oct. 25, 1921 .
May 11, 1933.
July 12, 1947 .

Apr. 5, 1947 .
Julv 6, 1948 .
Sept. 20, 1929.
May 3, 1940 .
Mav 20, 1950.
May 22, 1947.
Apr. 7, 1940 .

Feb. 28, 1940.

Feb. 13, 1946.
Feb. 12, 1951 .
Aug. 14, 1946.

Before Jan.
1921.

28,

Currently
effective from

Sept. 2, 1940 .

Julv 13, 1948.
July 5, 1948 .
Mar. 12, 1948.
July 28, 1930 .

Oct. 26, 1946 .

Oct. 30, 1937 .
Dec. 11, 1946.
Fob. 4, 1933 .
Aug. 19, 1930.

Mar. 1, 1949 .

Jan. 27, 1947 .
Sept. 7, 1921 .
Feb. 10, 1948.
Mar. 7, 1940 .

Sept. 19, 1932.

Mar. 29, 1950.

Sept. 15, 1930.

Mar. 1, 1947 .

Aug. 6, 1946 .

Apr. 8, 1940 .

Nov. 29, 1939.
Oct. 3, 1946 .
July 9, 1948 .

June 14, 1929.
May 11, 1933.
July 4, 1946 .

Apr. 6, 1947 .
Julv 28, 1948.
May 7, 1930 .
May 7, 1940 .
Mav 3, 1950 .
June 6, 1947 .
Apr. 20, 1940 .

Mar. 7, 1940 .

Feb. 13, 1946.
Feb. 12, 1951 .
Aug. 14, 1946.

Sept. 27, 1921.

Duration

5 years, and until notice

to terminate.

5 years

5 years

5 years

10 years, and until notice

to terminate.
5 years, tlien 6 months'

notice.

Indefinite

10 years

Indefinite

Indefinite

5 years, and until notice
to terminate.

5 years

Indefinite

6 years

5 years, and until notice
"to terminate.

6 years, and until notice
of abrogation.

5 years, from ratification

Until revocation on 1
year's notice.

Renewable for 5-year
periods.

5 years, then 6 months'
notice.

10 years, and until notice
of abrogation.

5 years, and until notice
to terminate.

Indefinite

10 years

5 years, and until notice
to terminate.

Indefinite

Indefinite

For 10 years, from July
4, 1946, and until no-
tice of abrogation.

10 years

Indefinite

10-year period

10-year period

lO-.vear period

5 years

Indefinite

5 years, and until notice

to terminate.

5 years

5 years

5 years, then 6 months'

notice.
Indefinite

References
UN Treaty Series Yearbook

16:203; no. 260
16:207; no. 261
15:221; no. 237

1:35; no. 5

1:45; no. 10

26:91; no. 378
1:49; no. 12 . .
15: 21 7; no." 236'

no. 759

9:97; no. 127
1:7; no. 2 . .

1:37; no. 6 . .
16:197; no. 259

7:229; no. 101

2:3; no. 16 . .
17:115; no. 272

no. 844 .. .
4:265; no. 50

1:3; no. 1 . .
annex no. 1
1:9; no. 3 . .

'46:216

'47:130
'47:131
'47:130
'46:208

'46:218

'46:212
'46:219
'46:208
'46:210

'46:220

'46:219
'46:207
'47:129
'46:213

'46:211

'49:165
'46:210
'47:129
'46:217
'46:214

'46:210

'46:219
'47:131

'46:207
'46:211

'47:128

'46:220
'47:132
'46:208
'46:208

'47:127
'46:215

'46:212

'46:217

'46:217

'46:207

April 23, ?95I

665

national Court of Justice. The table here pre-
sented shows the status of declarations currently
in force or made.

All declarations are by the Statute reciprocal
"in relation to any other state accepting the same
obligation" and are also made "on condition of
reciprocity" with regard to terms expressed in
them.

Declarations made or renewed since June 1949,
when publication 3540 was issued, follow :

Israel

[Translated from French by the Government of Irsael]

On behalf of the Government of Israel, and subject to
ratification, I declare that Israel recognizes as compulsory
irpso facto and without special agreement, in relation to
all other Members of the United Nations and to any non-
member State which becomes a party to the Statute of
the International Court of Justice pursuant to Article 93,
paragraph 2 of the Charter and which accepts the same
obligation (that is, subject to reciprocity) the jurisdiction
of the International Court of Justice in conformity witli
Article 3G, paragraph 2 of the Statute of the said Court
in all legal disputes concerning situations or facts which
may arise after the date of deiwsit of the instrument of
ratification of this declaration ' and, in particular, which
do not involve a legal title created or conferred by a Gov-
ernment or authority other than the Government of the
State of Israel or an authority under the jurisdiction of
that Government.

This declaration does not apply :

(a) to any dispute in respect of which the parties have
agreed or shall agree to have recourse to another means
of peaceful settlement;

(b) to any dispute relating to matters which are es-
sentially within the domestic jurisdiction of the State of
Israel ; ^

(e) to any dispute between the State of Israel and
another State which refuses to establish or maintain nor-
mal relations with it.

The present declaration has been made for five years
as from the date of deposit of the instrument of ratifi-
cation.'

Hakirya, the twenty-second of Elul five thousand seven
hundred and ten.

(the fourth of September 1950)"

M. Sharett
Minister of Foreign Affairs

CEETIFIED TRUE COPT

Assistant Secretary-Oeneral
Legal Department

I'rince Frangois Joseph II, in accordance with the Order
of the Diet of the Principality of Liechtenstein dated 9
March 1950, which came into force on 10 March 1950,

declares by these presents that the Principality of
Liechtenstein recognizes as compulsory ipso facto and
witliout special agreement, in relation to any other State
accepting the same obligation, the jurisdiction of the In-
ternational Court of Justice in all legal disputes con-
cerning :

(a) the interpretation of a treaty;

(b) any question of international law ;

(c) the existence of any fact which, if established,
would constitute a breach of an international obligation;

(d) the nature or extent of the reparation to be made
for the breach of an international obligation.

The present Declaration, which is made under Article
3(5 of the .Statute of the International Court of Justice,
shall take effect from the date ° on which the Principality
becomes a party to the Statute and shall have effect as
long as the Declaration has not been revoked subject to
one year's notice.

Done at Vaduz, 10 March 1950

On behalf of the Government of the Principality of
Liechtenstein

Head of Government

[se.\l] a. Fmck

Thailand (Siam)°

On behalf of the Siamese Government, I recognize, sub-
ject to ratification, in relation to any other Member or
State which accepts the same obligation, that is to say, on
the condition of reciprocity, the jurisdiction of the Court
as compulsory ipso facto and without any special conven-
tion, in conformity with Article 36, paragraph 2, of the
Statute of the Court for a period of ten years in all dis-
putes, as to which no other means of pacific settlement is
agreed upon between the parties.

Geneva, September 20, 1929:

Vabnvaidta

RENEWAL

On behalf of the Thai Government, I hereby renew for
a period of 10 years, from May 7th, 1940, the declaration
of September 20th, 1929, accepting the compulsory juris-
diction of the Permanent Court of International Justice
in conformity with Article 3ii, paragraph 2, of the Statute
of the Court witliin the limits of and subject to the c-ondi-
tions and reservations set forth in the said declaration.

Banokok, May Srd, 191,0.

PiBULASONGOBAN.

MiNiSTBY OP Foreign Affaius.

Bangkok, [May 20, 1950].'

Liechtenstein^

The Government of the Principality of Liechtenstein,
duly .luthorized by His Serene Highness, the Reigning

' Uatification by the Cabinet under Israeli law had not
been given by Mar. 31, 1051.

"An oflicial press release of Nov. 29, 1950 pointed out
that this condition would apply specifically to all matters
arising out of the Mandate for Palestine of July 24, 1922,
or which took place during the time the mandate was in
force, i.e., until Aug. 1, 1948 (stipulated by the Plan of
Partition with Economic Union approved by res. 181 (HI)
of the General Assembly of the United Nations, Nov. 29,
1947).

'Deposited with the Secretary-General of the United
Nations Oct. 11, 1950.

* Translated from the French ; registration no. 759.

666

RENEWAL

No. 9083/2493

Sir, I have the lionour to inform you that by a declara-
tion dated September 20, 1920 [i. e., 1929] His Majesty's

''The declaration in virtue of which Liechtenstein be-
came a partv to Statute was deposited witli the Secre-
tariat and effective on Mar. 29, 19.50: registration no. 758.

" The name of Kingdom of Siam was dianged to Thailand
on June •24. 1939; back to Siani on Sept. 7, 1945; and to
'I'liailand again on May 11, 1949 (BtTLLETiN of June 12,
1949. p. 705).

'Ralilication deposited with the Secretariat of the
League of Nations, May 7, 19;?0.

'ivepositod and registered in tlie Secretariat, June 13,
19.50 ; registration no. 844.

Department of State Bulletin

Govt'i-nment liad accepted the coinimlsory jurisiliction of
the Feriiianent Court of Iiiterii:iti<inal Justice iu con-
formity witli Article 3(5, para^raidi 2 of the Statute for
a period of ten years aud on condition of reciprocity.
That declaration has been renewed on May 3, 1040 for
another i)eriod of ten years.

In accordance with the provisions of Article 30, para-
graph 4 of the Statute of the International Court of Jus-
tice, I have now the lionour to inform you that His
Majesty's Government hereby renew the declaration above
mentioned for a furtlier period of ten years as from May
3, 1950 with the limits and subject to the same conditions
and reservations as set forth iu the first declaration of
September 20, 1020 (i. e., 1020],

I have the honour to he. Sir, your obedient servant,

(signed) Illegible
[WoKAKAN Ranch A]
MiniHtrr of Foreiyn Affairs of Thailand
The Secretary-General of the United Nations,
Lake Success, New York.

DECLARATION WITH RESPECT TO ALL (LEGAL DISPUTES
CONCERNING THE INTERPRETATION, APPLICATION OR VA-
LIDITY OF ANY TREATY RELATING TO THE BOUNDARIES
OF BRITISH HONDURAS '»

I, Ernest Bevin, His Majesty's Principal Secretary of
State for Foreign Affairs, declare ou behalf of His Ma-
jesty's Government in the United Kingdom in accordance
with paragraph 2 of Article 36 of the Statute of the
International Court of Justice that for a period of five
years from the date of this declaration they accept as
compulsory i/j.so facto and without special agreement, in
relation to any other State accepting the same obligation,
the jurisdiction of the Court in all legal disputes con-
cerning the interpretation, application or validity of any
treaty relating to the boundaries of British Honduras,
and over any questions arising out of any conclusion
which the Court may reach with regard to such treaty.

Given under my hand and seal, at the Foreign Ollice,
London, this Thirteentli day of February, One Thousand
Nine Hundred and Forty-six.

Ernest Bevin.

United Kingdom of Great Britain
and Northern Ireland

On l)eluUf of His Majesty's Government in the United
Kingdom, I now declare that they accept as compulsory
iliHo facto and without special convention, on condition
of reciprocity, the jiu'isdiction of the Court, in conform-
ity with paragraph 2 of Article 36 of the Statute of the
Court, for a period of five years from today's date and
thereafter until such time as notice may be given to
terminate the acceptance, over all disputes arising after
February 5th, 1930, with regard to situations or facts sub-
sequent to the same date, other than :

disputes in regard to which the Parties to the dispute
have agreed or shall agree to have recourse to some other
method of peaceful settlement ;

disputes with the government of any other Member of
the League which is a Member of the British Common-
wealth of Nations, all of which disputes shall be settled
in such manner as the Parties have agreed or shall agree ;

disputes with regard to questions which by interna-
tional law fall exclusively within the jurisdiction of the
United Kingdom ; and

disputes arising out of events occurring at a time when
His Majesty's Government in the United Kingdom were
involved in hostilities ;

and subject to the condition that His Majesty's Gov-
ernment reserve the right to require that proceedings in
the Court shall be suspended in respect of any dispute
which has been submitted to and is under consideration
by the Council of the League of Nations, ijrovided that
notice to suspend is given after the dispute has been sub-
mitted to the Council and is given within ten days of the
notification of the initiation of the proceedings in the
Court, and provided also that .such suspension shall be
limited to a period of twelve mouths or such longer
l)eriod as may be agreed by the Parties to the dispute or
determined by a decision of all the Members of the Coun-
cil other than the Parties to the dispute.

London, February 2S, 19!,0.'

Halifax.

DECLARATION "

I, Kenneth Gilmour Younger, Minister of State, on be-
half of His Majesty's Principal Secretary of State for
Foreign Affairs, declare on behalf of His Majesty's Gov-
ernment in the United Kingdom and in accordance with
paragraph 2 of Article 36 of the Statute of the Inter-
national Court of Justice that the Declaration of the 13th
February 1916, concerning any treaty relating to the
boundaries of British Honduras, is renewed for a further
lieriod of five years beginning on the 12th February 1951,
the date of the expiry of the Declaration of 1946.

Given under my hand aud seal at the Foreign Office,
London, this twelfth day of February, One thousand, nine
hundred aud fifty-one.

K. G. YOUNGEB

APPENDIX 1— REVISED GENERAL ACT

FOR THE PACIFIC SETTLEMENT

OF INTERNATIONAL DISPUTES

Adopted by General Assembly of United Nations, Apr. 28, 1949 "

In force for 5-year periods from Sept. 20, 1950 ^

[Excerpts]

' Received in the Secretariat of the League of Nations
Mar. 7, 1940. For the circumstances under which this
declaration was substituted for the previous declaration
of Sept. 19, 1929, in force on Feb. 5, 1930 (as stated in
this declaration), see Department of State publication
3540, p. 16.

"1 United Nations Treaty Series, p. 3; registration
no. 1.

" Circular note of the Assistant Secretary-General,
Legal Department, Mar. 2, 1951.

"Res. 268 (III) of the General Assembly, 3d sess., 2d
part. The Revised General Act was registered ex oflBcio
Sept. 20, 1950 ; registration no. 912.

" The instrument entered into force 90 days after de-
posit of the second accession. Belgium's accession, Dec.
23, 1949, extended to all provisions. Sweden's accession,
June 22, 19.50, extends to chaps. I (conciliation), II (judi-
cial settlement), and IV (procedure) ; its accession to
the General Act of Sept. 26, 1928, extended to chaps. I
and IV.

The revised text of article 43 provides :

"1. The present General Act shall be open to accession
by the Members of the United Nations, by the non-member
States which shall have become parties to the Statute of
the International Court of Justice or to which the Gen-
eral Assembly of the United Nations shall have communi-
cated a copy for this purpose."

The General Assembly by resolutions 372 (IV), Decem-
ber 3, 1949, and 480 (V), December 12, 19.50, deferred until
the sixth session the designation of nonmember states to
which certified copies should be communicated for the
purpose of accession.

Apu] 23, 1957

667

\

Chapter II: Judicial Settlement

Article 17

All disputes with regard to which the parties
are in conflict as to their respective rights shall,
subject to any reservations which may be made
under Article 39, be submitted for decision to the
International Court of Justice, unless the parties
agree, in the manner hereinafter provided, to have
resort to an arbitral tribunal.

It is understood that the disputes referred to
above include in particular those mentioned in
Article 36 of the Statute of the International
Court of Justice.

Chapter IV: General Provisions

Article 39

1. In addition to the power given in the preced-
ing article," a Party, in acceding to the present
General Act, may make his acceptance conditional
upon the reservations exhaustively enumerated in
the following paragraph. These reservations
must be indicated at the time of accession.

2. These reservations m.ay be such as to exclude
from the procedure described in the present Act :

(a) Disputes arising out of facts prior to the
accession either of the Party making the reserva-
tion or of any other Party v>-ith whom the said
Party may have a dispute;

(b) Disputes concerning questions which by
international law are solely within the domestic
jurisdiction of States;

(c) Disputes concerning particular cases or
clearly specified subject-matters, such as terri-
torial status, or disputes falling within clearly
defined categories.

3. If one of the parties to a dispute has made a
reservation, the other parties may enforce the
same reservation in regard to that party.

4. In the case of Parties, who have acceded to
the provisions of the present General Act relating
to judicial settlement or to arbitration, such resei'-
vations as they may have made shall, unless other-
wise expressly stated, be deemed not to apply to
the procedure of conciliation.

NOTE

The General Act for the Pacific Settlement of
International Disputes was opened for accession
by the Assembly of the League of Nations Septem-
ber 26, 1928 " and entered into force for successive
5-year periods from August 16, 1929. The Ke-
vised General Act adopted by the General Assem-
bly of the United Nations on April 28, 1949 pro-

" Art. 38 permits accession to all or only certain chap-
ters of thp Gcnoral Act, which are: I, (conciliation) ; II,
(judicial settlement); III, (arl)itration) ; IV, (general
provisions).

"!):{ League of Nations Treaty Series, p. 343; registra-
tion no. 2123.

vides for the "restoration to the General Act of
26 September 1928 of its original efiicacy" by
amending the text so that assignments to the
League of Nations and the Permanent Court of
International Justice ai'e replaced by references
to the United Nations and the International Court
of Justice. The resolution of the General As-
sembly of the United Nations was a specific appli-
cation of the principles established by resolution
24 (I) of February 12, 1946 relating to the trans-
fer of functions and powers belonging to the
League of Nations under international agreements.
The General Act of September 26, 1928 remains
in force, the current 5-year period beginning
August 16, 1949. An acce.ssion is subject to de-
nunciation for the period beginning August 16,
1954 on 6-months' notice befoi'e that date. Acces-
sions in force are as follows :

State

Australia

Belgium

Canada

Denmark*

Estonia

Ethiopia*

Finland*

France

Greece

India

Ireland*

Italy

Latvia*

Lnxembovirg*

Netherlands (including Netherlands In-
dies, Surinam, and Curagao) ....

New Zealand

Norway*

Peru

Sweden

Switzerland*

Turkey

United Kingdom of
Northern Ireland .

Great Britain and

Date

Mav
Mav
July

Apr.
Sept.
Mar.

Sept.
Mav
Sept.
Mav

Sept.
Sept.
Sept.
Sept.

21, 1931

18, 1929

1, 1931

14, 1930
3, 1931

15, 1935

6, 1930
21, 1931

14, 1931
21, 1931
26, 1931

7, 1931
17, 1935

15, 1930

Aug. 8, 1930
Mav 21, 1931
June 11, 1930
Nov. 21, 1931
Mav 13, 1929
Dec. 7, 1934
June 26, 1934

May 21, 1931

♦Acceded without reservations. For the text of the
reservations made by other states see United Nations,
Signatures, Ratifications, Acceptances, Accessions, etc., con-
cerning the MidtHateral Conventions and Agreements in
respect of ichich the Secretary-General acts as Depository,
p. 25-30 (1949, V. 9).

The Netherlands and Sweden acceded only to chaps. I
(conciliation), II (judicial settlement), and IV (general
provisions).

APPENDIX 2— BELGIUM, FRANCE,
LUXEMBOURG, NETHERLANDS,
UNITED KINGDOM

The treaty of collaboration and collective self-
defense signed by plenipotentiaries of Belgium,
France, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, and the
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern

668

Department of State Bulletin

Ireland at Brussels on March 17, 1948, and in
force for 50 years from August 25, 1948,^^ contains
the following provisions:

Article VIIl

In pursuance of their determination to settle
disputes only by peaceful means, the High Con-
tracting Parties will apply to disputes between
themselves the following provisions:

The High Contracting Parties will, while tlio
present Treaty remains in force, settle all disjjutes
falling within the scope of Article 36, paragraph
2, of the Statute of the International Court of
Justice by referring them to the Court, subject
only, in the case of each of them, to any reserva-
tion already made by that Party when accepting
this clause for compulsory jurisdiction to the ex-
tent that that Party may maintain the reservation.

In addition, the High Contracting Parties will
submit to conciliation all disputes outside the
scope of Article 36, paragraph 2, of the Statute
of the International Court of Justice. In the case
of a mixed dispute involving both questions for
which conciliation is appropriate and other ques-
tions for which judicial settlement is appropriate,
any Party to the dispute shall have the right to
insist that the judicial settlement of the legal
questions shall precede conciliation.

The preceding provisions of this Article in no
way affect the application of relevant provisions
of agreements prescribing some other method of
pacific settlement.

the juiisdiction of the Court as compulsory ipso
farto, without the necessity of any special agree-
ment so long as the present Treaty is in force, in
all disputes of a juridical nature that arise among
them concerning :

a) The interpretation of a treaty ;

b) Any question of international law;

c) The existence of any fact which, if estab-
lished, would constitute the breach of an inter-
national obligation;

d) The nature or extent of the reparation to be
made for (he breach of an international obligation.

Article 32

When the conciliation procedure previously es-
tablished in tlie present Treaty or by agreement of
the parties does not lead to a solution, and the said
parties have not agreed ujjon an arbitral proce-
dure, either of them shall be entitled to have re-
course to the International Court of Justice in the
manner prescribed in Article 40 of the Statute
thereof. The Court shall have compulsory juris-
diction in accordance with Article 36, paragraph
1, of the said Statute.

Article 34

If the Court, for the reasons set forth in Articles
5, 6 and 7 of this Treaty [domestic jurisdic-
tion, matters settled or governed by instruments in
force April 30, 1948, exhaustion of local remedies],
declares itself to be without jurisdiction to hear
the controversy, such controversy shall be de-
clared ended.

APPENDIX 3— AMERICAN TREATY
ON PACIFIC SETTLEMENT:
"PACT OF BOGOTA"

Signed at Bogota, April 30, 1948 ; in force May 6, 1949 "

Chapter IV: Judicial Procedure

Article 31

In conformity with Article 36, paragraph 2, of
the Statute of the International Court of Justice,
the High Contracting Parties declare that they
recognize, in relation to any other American State,

"Kegistered with the Secretariat Nov. 2, 1948; 19
United Nations Treat.v Series, p. !il : registration no. 304.

•\rt. IX of the treaty provides that the parties "may,
by agreement, invite any other state to accede to the
present treaty on conditions to be agreed to between them
and the state so invited."

"30 United Nations Treaty Series, p. 55; registration
no. 440.

Itatifications have been deposited witli the Pan Ameri-
can Union as follows : Costa Rica, May 6, 1949 ; Dominican
Republic, Sept. 12, 19.")0; El Salvador, Sept. 11, 1950; Haiti,
Mar. 28. 1951 : Honduras, Feb. 7, 1950 ; Mexico, Nov. 23,
1948; Nicaragua, Julv 26, 1950.

NOTE

This treaty, which comes into force for the
parties "in the order in which they deposit their
respective ratifications" with the Pan American
Union, would make article 31 applicable between
Chile, Costa Rica, Cuba, Ecuador, Peru and Vene-
zuela, which have not separately accepted the
compulsory jurisdiction of the International Court
of Justice." xirgentina by an express reservation
did not adhere to chapter IV.

The United States at signing made certain res-
ervations. It did not "undertake as the complain-
ant State to submit to the International Court of
Justice any controversy which is not considered to
be properly within the jurisdiction of the Court."
It noted that its acceptance of compulsory
jurisdiction under the treaty "is limited by any
jurisdictional or other limitations contained in any
Declaration deposited by the United States under
Article 36, paragraph 4, of the Statute of the
Court, and in force at the time of the submission of
any case."

• This compilation was assembled by Denys P.
Myers, specialist in international organization,
Oifice of the Legal Adviser, Department of State.

April 23, 795T

669

U.S. Delegation

to International Meetings

Seventh Session Human Rights

On April 5, the Department of State announced
that Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt, the United
States representative on the United Nations Com-
mission on Human Rights, will attend the sev-
enth session of the Commission, wliich is sched-
uled to convene at Geneva, on April 16, 1951. The
other members of the United States delegation to
the seventh session of the Commission are as
follo\TS :

Advisers

Herbert Eeaser, Office of the General Counsel Federal
Security Agency

John M. Gates, .Jr., Office of United Nations Economic
and Social Affairs, Department of State

Frieda S. Miller, Director, Women's Bureau, Depart-
ment of Labor

Herzel Plaine, Special Assistant to the Attorney General,
Department of Justice

James Simsariau, Office of United Nations Economic and
Social Affairs, Department of State

Marjorie Whiteman, Office of the Legal Adviser, Depart-
ment of State

Special Assistant to United States Representative

Malvina Thompson, Assistant to Mrs. Boosevelt

The Commission on Human Rights will give
priority at its sesventh session to tlie revision of
the draft International Covenant on Human
Rights. In resolutions on the subject adopted at
its 1950 session, the General Assembly of the
United Nations requested, among other things,
that: the list of rights in the first 18 articles of
the Covenant be reexamined in order to insure the
adequacy of that list and to define the rights and
limitations with the greatest possible precision;
the desirability be studied of including a special
article on the application of the Covenant to fed-
eral states; provision be made for the inclusion in
the Covenant of economic, social, and cultural
rights, and an explicit recognition of the equality
of men and women ; consideration be given to
provisions, to be inserted in the Covenant or in
separate protocols, for the receipt and examina-
tion of petitions from individuals and organiza-
tions on alleged Covenant violations; and an
article be included in the Covenant to make its
terms applicable equally to a signatory metropoli-
tan state and to all territories, be they non-self-
governing, trust, or colonial, which are being ad-
ministered or governed by such a state. The Com-
mission was also asked in a General Assembly
resolution to study and i)repai'e recommendation's
on ways and means of insuring the right of
peoples and nations to self-determination.
• Other subjects on the provisional agenda of the
next session of the Commission "include (1) the
development of (he woi'k of (he United Nations
for wider observance and respect for human rights

and fundamental freedoms throughout the world,
(2) annual reports on human rights, (3) the Draft
Declaration on the Rights of the Child, (4) an
International Court of Human Rights, (5) the
continuing validity of minorities treaties and
declarations, and (6) the Yearbook on Human
Rights.

The Commission on Human Rights, which is one
of the nine permanent functional commissions of
the United Nations Economic and Social Council,
advises and assists the Council on all matters re-
lating to the obligation assumed by the members
of the United Nations to promote universal respect
for, and observance of, human i-ights and funda-
mental freedoms for all, without distinction as to
race, sex, language, or religion. Eighteen Gov-
ernments, elected by the Council, comprise the
membersliii) of the Commission. Its sixth session
was held at Lake Success from March 27-Mav 19
1950.

Plight of Survivors of
Concentration Camps

U.N. doc. E/1974
Adopted Mar. 19, 1951

The Economic and Social Council,

Taking note of the report received from the Secretary-
General in pursuance of Council resolution 305 (XI)
adopted on 14 July 1950, on the subject of survivors of
concentration camps who, under the Nazi regime, were
the victims of so-called scientific experiments,

1. Appeals to the competent German autliorities to con-
sider making the fullest possible reparation for the in-
juries suffered, under the Nazi regime, by jiersons sub-
jected to so-called scientitic experiments in concentration
camps ;

2. Ini-ites the International Refugee Organization and
any authority which may succeed it in the administra-
tion of the Reparations Funds, and voluntary agencies
distributing these funds, to alleviate the plight of these
victims as far as possible;

3. Invites the World Health Organization to assist in the
health aspects of the problem ;

4. Requests the Secretary-General to study tlie possibility
of securing such voluntary sujjport and coiitribuiinns
as may appear necessary to supplement the reparation
measures proposed above, if the latter prove inadequate;
and

5. Further requests the Secretary-General to keep in-
formed of all the measures whicli may lie taken, to seek
to ensure that they provide full reparalioii. and to report
to the thirteenth .session of the C'ouiuil on the results
of the present resolution.

Forced Labor and
for Its Abolition

U.N. doc. E/19fiO
Adopted Mar. 10, 1951

Measures

The Economic and Social Council,
Rkc.vi.i.ino its previous resolutions on tlie subject of
forced labour and measures for its abolition.

CONSiUEiUNo the reiilies furnished by Member States to

670

Department of State Bulletin

the communications adilressed to tliem liy the Secretary-
General in accordance with resolutions lt».j (VIII) ami
237 (IX),

Taking note of the communications from the Interna-
tional Labour Organization setting; forth the discus-
sions on I he (luestiou of forced labour at the 111th and
I 113th sessions of the Governinf; Body,

Considering the rules and principles laid down in In-
ternationa) Labour Convention No. 29,

ItECALLiNo the principles of the Cliarter relating to
respect for huniau rights and fundamental freedoms,
and the principles of the Universal Declaration of Hu-
man Rights,

Dekpi.y moved liy the documents and evidence brouffht
to its knowle<lKe and revealing in law and in fact the
existence in the world of systems of forced labour under
which a large proportion of the populations of certain
States are subjected to a penitentiary regime,

1. Decides to invite the International Labour Organi-
zation to co-operate with the Council in the earliest
possible establishment of an ad Itoc committee on forced
labour of not more than five independent members, quali-
fied by their competence and impartiality, to be appointed
jointly by the Secretary-General of the United Nations
and the Director-General of the International Labour
Office with the following terms of reference :

(a) To study the nature and extent of the problem
raised by the existence in the world of systems of forced
or ■■corrective" labour, which are employed as a means
of political coercion or punishment for holding or ex-
pressing political views, and which are on such a scale
as to constitute an important element in the economy
of a given country, by examining the texts of laws and
regulations and their application in the light of the prin-
ciples referred to above, and, if the Committee thinks
fit, by taking additional evidence into consideration;

(b) To report the results of its studies and progress
thereon to the Council and to the Governing Body of
the International Labour Office; and

2. Requests the Secretary-General and the Director-
General to supply the professional and clerical assistance
necessary to ensure the earliest initiation and effective
discharge of the ad hoc committee's work.

Water Control and Utilization
for Arid Areas

tJ.N. doc E/1945
Adopted Mar. 9, 1951

The Economio and Social Council,

Considering the desirability that measures being taken
internationally in the general field of water control and
utilization should be co-ordinated, and that such co-
ordination should be undertaken within the United
Nations system, and

Considering that the General Assembly, in resolution
402 (V), has recommended that the Secretary-General
prepare for the examination of the Council at its four-
teenth session a report on the practical measures adopted
for the study of the problems of arid zones and on the
technical and financial means employed by the specialized
agencies for this purpose,

1. Requests the Secretary-General to take into con-
sideration, in preparing this report, the entire field of
water control and utilization as it is related to the prob-
lems of arid zones ; and

2. Further requests the Secretary-General, in consulta-
tion with the specialized agencies, to submit a rei>ort to
the Council on the work being done by the specialized
agencies and other international organizations, whether
governmental, semi-governmental or non-governmental,
engaged in the broad field of water control and utilization.

United Nations Documents:
A Selected Bibliography >

Security Council

Letter dated 12 March 1951 from the Chief of Staff of
the Truce Supervision Organization to the Secretary-
General transmitting a report on the activities of the
Special Committee provided for in the Egyptian-
Israeli General Armistice Agreement. S/2047, March
21, 1951. 4 pp. mimeo.

Letter dated 12 March 1951 from the Chief of Staff of
the Truce Supervision Organization to the Secretary-
General transmitting a report on decisions taken by
the Hashemite Jordan Kingdom-Israel Mixed Armis-
tice Commission. S/2048, March 21, 1951. 15 pp.
mimeo.

Letter dated 12 March 1051 from the Chief of Staff of
the Truce Supervision Organization to the Secretary-
General transmitting a report on the status of the
operations of the Mixed Armistice Commissions.
S/2049, March 21, 1951. i;{ pp. mimeo.

Economic and Social Council

Plight of Survivors of Concentration Camps. Progress Re-
port by the Secretary-General. E/1915, February 6,
1951. 50 pp. mimeo.

Recommendations Regarding the Agenda of the Twelfth
Session of the Council. E/1919, February 17, 1951.
9 pp. mimeo.

Expanded Programme of Technical Assistance; Second Re-
port of the Technical Assistance Committee (First
Part). E/1920, February 17, 1951. 7 pp. mimeo.

Letter dated 27 March 1951 from the Secretary-General
to the President of the Security Council transmitting
the Ninth Progress Report of the United Conciliation
Commission for Palestine [ A1793] . S/2057, March 27,
1951. 1 p. mimeo.

Methods of Social Welfare Administration. E/ON.5/224,
October 25, 1950. 299 pp. printed, $2.50.

Economic and Social Council ; Eleventh Session, 3 July to
16 August 1950 (Geneva) and 12 October to 13 Decem-
ber 1950 (Lake Success). Disposition of Agenda
Items. E/INF/40, January 2, 1951. 236 pp. mimeo.

Trusteeship Council

Report [The Ewe Problem] by Mr. Paulin Baptiste, Pro-
curator-General. T/846, February 26, 1951. 28 pp.
mimeo.

Department of Public Information
Research Section

United Nations Headquarters. Background Paper No. 63.
44 pp. mimeo.

April 23, 1951

' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27, N. Y. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.

The United Nations Secretariat has established an Otfir
rial Records series for the General Assembly, the Securit.v
Council, the Economic and Social Council, the Trusteeship
Council, and the Atomic Energy Commission which in-
cludes summaries of proceedings, resolutions, and reports
of the various commissions and committees. Publications
in the Official Records series will not be listed in this
department as heretofore, but information on securing
subscriptions to the series may be obtained from the In-
ternational Documents Service.

671

The United States in the United Nations

[April 13-19, 1951]

General Assembly

Additional Mea-nires Committee. — At a meet-
ing on April 18, the subcommittee approved for-
wardin<? the following report to the Additional
Measures Committee (Amc) :

The Additional Measures Committee, at Its second
meeting of March 8, appointed this sub-committee to con-
sider practical measures and to study priorities. The
sub-committee has carefully considered these subjects.
Tiiere have been numerous consultations and exchanijes
of views on the general approach which the Auc might
use in Its studies.

The sub-committee unanimously recommends that, when
the Additional Measures Committee pursues the exami-
nation of additional measures against the Central Peo-
ple's Government of the People's Republic of China, it
should give priority to the study of economic measures.

Economic and Social Council

C ommission on Human Riahts. — The IS-mem-
ber Commission began its seventh session at
Geneva on April 16, which will last approximately
6 weeks. The countries represented on the Com-
mission are: Australia, Chile, China, Denmark,
Egypt, France, Greece, Guatemala, India, Leb-
anon, Pakistan, Sweden, Ukrainian, S.S.K.,
U.S.S.R., United Kingdom, United States, Uru-
guay, and Yugoslavia.

At the first meeting, Mrs. Franklin D. Roose-
velt, the United States representative, who has
been chairman since the inception of the Commis-
sion in 1946, announced that she would not seek
reelection as she considered it desirable that no
one person and no representative of one state —
particularly one of the larger states — should con-
tinue too long to preside over international work
of the type done by the Commission. She stated
she would continue her deep interest in the Com-
mission's work and would continue as the United
States member of it. Several members praised
Mrs. Roosevelt's work and her contribution to the
cause of human rights both within the United
Nations and in private life.

Dr. Charles ^lalik (Lebanon) was nominated
by Mrs. Roosevelt to succeed her as chairman.
This motion was seconded and he was unanimously
elected. The other officers elected were : Prof.
Rene Cassin (France), first vice chairman; Mrs.
Hansa Mehta (India) second vice chairman; and
H. F. W. Wliitlam (Australia) rapporteur.

As early as 1!)1(>, the Commission considered as
its main task the formulation of an International
Bill of Human Kights to be composed of three
parts. The first of these is the Universal Declara-

tion of Human Rights, which was adopted by the
General Assembly in Paris on December 10, 1948.
The second part will be a covenant on such specific
rights as lend themselves to bindint^ legal obliga-
tions. The third, which will set forth measures
of implementation, will relate to machinerj- that
might be set up by the United Nations to enforce
the provisions of the covenant.

At this session, the Commission will give pri-
ority to the completion of the draft International
Covenant on Human Rights and Measures of Im-
plementation. In this connection, it will give at-
tention to the resolutions adopted by the fifth
session of the General Assembly on December 4,
1950, and, at the twelfth session of the Economic
and Social Council on February 23, 1951, which
request: (1) that the list of rights in the first 18
articles of the covenant be reexamined to insure
the adequacy of that list and to define the rights
and limitations; (2) that study be given to the
inclusion of a special article to apply the Covenant
to federal states; (3) that provision be made to
include in the covenant economic, social, and cul-
tural rights and an explicit recognition of the
equality of men and women; (4) that separate
protocols or covenant provisions be considered for
the receipt and study of petitions from individuals
and organizations on alleged covenant violations;
(5) that an article be included to make the terms
of the covenant applicable to all signatory states
and their territories, colonies, or dependencies.
The Commission was also asked in a General As-
sembly resolution to study and recommend ways
and means of insuring the rights of peoples and
nations to self-determination.

Among the other subjects on the agenda are
(1) the development of the work of the United
Nations for wider observance and respect for hu-
man rights and fundamental freedoms throughout
the world; (2) annual reports on human rights;

(3) draft, declaration on the rights of the cliild;

(4) old-age rights; (5) an international court of
human rights; (6) the continuing validity of
minorities treaties and declarations; and (7) the
Yearbook on Human Rights.

At the end of its session, the Conunission will
adopt a report on its work to be submitted to the
next session of the Economic and Social Council.

Security Council

The Council met on April IT to consider again
the I'alestine question since the adoi)tion of the
resolution on November 17, 19,')(1, wjiich "expressed
the hoi)e that the governments and autiioritiescon-

672

Department of State Bulletin

ceriiod would at an early date achieve acreeiiiont
on linal settlement of all questions outstanding
between them."

In aceordance with several communications re-
ceived by the President of the Security Council
from Faris El-Khouri Bey, chairman of the Syr-
ian delegation to the United Nations and Ambas-
sador Abba Eban, permanent delegate of Israel to
the United Nations, regarding complaints of vio-
lations of the general armistice agreement the
following items had been placed on the provisional
agenda :

1. Violations of the armistice agreement.
(Starting and continuing operations for drain-
ing the Huleh swamps witlain the demilitarized
zone against the wishes of Syria, Arab landowners,
and United Nations supervisors, thus violating,
repeatedly the terms of the armistice agreement
and defying the recommendation and advice of the
United Nations supervisors.)

2. Military Occupation by Israel of demilitar-
ized zones.

3. Firing on Syrian posts. (Firing of auto-
matic weapons and mortars on Syrian military
posts.)

4. Evacuation of Arab inhabitants. (Evacua-
tion of the Arab inhabitants by force within the
demilitarized zones.)

5. B o m b i n g and demolishing incidents.
(Bombing of Syrian military posts and demolish-
ing of Arab villages on Syrian territory on April
5, 1961.)

6. Complaint of Syrian violation of general
armistice agreement between Israel and Syria by
persistent firing on civilian workers in the demili-
tarized zone in Israel territory near Banat Yakub
on March 15, 1951, and between March 25 and 28,
1951.

7. Complaints of Syrian violation of general
armistice agreement between Israel and Syria by
the entry of Sj'rian armed forces into the demili-
tarized zone in Israel territory between El Hamma
and Khirbeth Tewfig on April 3, 1951.

8. Complaint of Syrian violation of general
armistice agreement between Israel and Syria by
the action of Syrian armed forces in opening fire on
Israel civilian policemen near El Hamma in Israel
territory on April 4, 1951, killing seven Israel
civilian policemen and wounding tliree.

Prior to adoption of the agenda, the President
stated "there is no prima facie value in any item
appearing on the provisional agenda. The items
are intended only to identify the subject matter."
He also called attention to press reports received
from the United Nations public information officer
with the Palestine Conciliation Commission,
Jerusalem, that both Syria and Israel had agreed,
April 16 and 12. respectively, on the following
four points as a basis for resumption of normal
meetings of the Mixed Armistice Commission :
"(1) All military and para-military forces of both
sides to be withdrawn from the demilitarized zone.

(2) No further fighting within the zone or across
demarcation lines. (3) United Nations observere
to be afforded every facility for carrying out their
duties. (4) The responsibility of the Mixed
Armistice Commission Chairman to implement
Article 5 of the Armistice Agreement, on the re-
sumption of normal life in the zone, to be reaf-
firmed."

Mr. El-Khouri stated that Israel had ignored
Syria's protests and the warnings of the Mixed
Armistice Commission and had entered the mili-
tarized zone to begin large-scale drainage works.
He cited a series of requests from the Mixed
Armistice Commission Chairman to the Israelis
to suspend the drainage work, pending an inquiry.
Such requests were ignored while Israel moved in
armed forces and began mass deportations of Arab
inhabitants in the demilitarized zone. As for the
legal issues, he declared there was no law of ex-
propriation for the demilitarized zone. Further-
more, the mass deportations of the Arab inhabit-
ants was in open contravention of international
law and justice.

The zone was not Israeli territory, nor did either
party have sovereignty there. The draining of the
Huleh swamp, in itself, was a useful project, Mr.
El-Khouri admitted, but his Government opposed
the drainage for a variety of reasons, as explained.
He stated further that Syrian forces had never
fired on United Nations observers as Israel al-
leged, and the observers themselves had never
made such a complaint. In conclusion, he said, it
was obvious that the Syrian Government could not
remain unconcerned regarding the Huleh drain-
age project. In addition, the bombing of Syria
by the Israeli Government had to be considered
ail international crime condemned by the Charter
and international law.

In a brief reply, Mr. Eban stated that the Israeli
complaints had been submitted for two reasons:
the circumstances showed a clear breach of the
peace by Syrian armed violence; also, the Mixed
Armistice Commission (Mac) had been in a state
of paralysis and inertia at the time the complaints
were filed because of the relationship among its
members. He referred to the agreement i-eached
on April 12 between Col. Bennett L. de Bidder,
Acting Chief of Staff of the United Nations Truce
Supervision Organization, and Israel, and stated,
now that the Mac had been reconstituted, it was
the proper place for discussion. There could be
recourse to the Council from the Mixed Armistice
Commission, if needed.

Ambassador Sir Gladwyn Jebb (U.K.), the
only other member to speak at this meeting, be-
lieved the Council should do its best to establish
the facts. For that purpose, it would be advisable
to hear evidence from Maj. Gen. AV. Riley, Chief
of Staff of the Truce Supervision Organization.

The President agreed with this suggestion and
stated he would invite General Riley to attend the
next meeting of the Council.

April 23, 1957

673

CONGRESS

THE DEPARTMENT

Threat of Famine in India Immediate

Statement by Secretary Acheson ^

I shall not impose on the patience of this Com-
mittee by repeating the statement in support of
food assistance to India which I made before the
House Foreign Affairs Committee on February
20.^ I should like, however, to make one or two
comments to bring tliat statement up to date.

I discussed with the House Committee the ques-
tion of the acquisition by India of food gi'ains
which might be available in Pakistan. I was hope-
ful at the time that India and Pakistan would
answer this question themselves. They have done
so. On February 25, the two countries signed a
trade agreement which provides, among other
things, for the delivery to India in 1951 of 300,000
tons of Pakistan rice and 25,000 tons of wheat and
flour. This acquisition will be included in India's
1951 purchase program of some 4 million tons of
food grains and does not affect the need for the
additional 2 million tons specially requested from
the United States.

I urged before the Foreign Affairs Committee
that the grain specially requested from this coun-
try should begin to move no later than April 1.
The studies of the executive branch of the Govern-
ment had led us to believe that the Indian food
situation would become dangerously critical by
midsummer. Events since January 20 have shown
that our estimate was overly optimistic. The In-
dian Government is already finding it exceedingly
difficult to maintain the flow of gi'ain to its ration
outlets in such disaster-stricken areas as Bihar.
The Indian people are becoming increasingly fear-
ful of the threat of famine. The threat is immedi-
ate. The first million tons of gi-ain specially re-
quested from us, if it is to arrive in time, should
be loaded on ships for India as soon as is humanly
possible, and I strongly urge that the Congress
enact the necessary legislation.

As the President said on March 29,

. . . we should provide the first million tons promptly
as a grant. We can then explore in greater detail the
situation with respect to the remaining million tons.

I am heartened by the fact that the bill before
tliis Committee, S. 872, is sponsored by a bipartisan
group of ;50 Senators. I am sure that this Com-
mittee and the Senate as a whole are aware of the
urgency of the Indian need and will act as quickly
as possible.

'Made before the Senate Foreign Kelalions Committee
on Apr. IG, and released to the press on the same date.
' Bulletin of Mar. 12, VXA, p. 424.

Reorganization in Bureau
of Economic Affairs

[Released to the press April 10}

To meet the new requirements in the field of
international economic policy raised by this
country's large-scale defense program, the De-
partment of State today announced a reorganiza-
tion in the Bureau of Economic Affairs.

Effective immediately, the Office of Inter-
national Trade Policy is abolished.

There is established an Office of International
Materials Policy and an Office of Economic De-
fense and Trade Policy.

The Office of International Materials Policy
will take over the functions, personnel, and equip-
ment of the Petroleum Policy Staff, the Food and
Agriculture Branch, and the Industrial Materials
Branch of the Economic Resources and Security
Staff.

It will be the purpose of the Office of Inter- j
national Materials Policy, in cooperation with \\
other agencies of the Government; (1) to develop
programs and policies which will insure the har-
monization of domestic and foreign emergency
economic controls designed to stimulate the pro-
duction of basic materials in short supply; (2)
to assure the widest degree of parallel action in
the adoption of conservation measures; (3) to
provide for the contiiiued export of goods essen-
tial to meet the minimum civilian requirements
of other parts of the free world ; (4) to assure the
availability to the United States adequate sup-
plies of basic materials, and (5) to promote the
allocation where necessary of materials in short
supply.

The Office of Economic Defense and Trade
Policy will take over the functions, personnel, and
equipment of the Commercial Policy Staff, the
International Business Practices Policy Staff, and
the Economic Security Branch of the Economic
Resources and Security Staff.

It will be the purpose of the Office of Economic
Defense and Trade Policy to promote the strength
of the free world through economic ties to jiievcnt
inflation and to increase the flow of essential trade.
The Office will cooperate with other Government
agencies to consolidate and strengthen the frame-
work of international cooperation in the field of
trade policy and economic treaty relationships to
develop greater political unity and to assure long-
run economic stability on whicli a sustained de-
fense program must rest. The Office also will have
authority in the Department's jurisdiction over
controls of exports to the Soviet bloc.

674

Deparlmeni of State Bulletin

Principal Officers

The principal officers in the new units are as
follows :

a. Office of International Materials (OMP)

Winthi'iip G. Brown, actint? director
John W. Evans, acting deptity director
Willis C. Armstrong, acting special assistant
Clarence W. Nichols, acting special assistant

(1) Petroleum Policy Staff (PED)
Edwin G. Moline, acting chief

(2) Manufactured Products Staff (MPS)

(3) Agricultural Products Staff (APS)
Francis A. Linville. acting chief

(-1) Industrial Raw Materials Staff (lUM)
(5) Metals and Minerals Staff (MMS)
Harlan 1'. Bramble, acting chief

b. Office of Economic Defense and Trade Policy (E3DT)

John M. Leddy, acting director
Joseph D. Coppock, acting adviser

(1) Economic Defense Staff (EDS)

(2) Commercial Policy Staff (CP)
Carl D. Corse, acting chief

(3) Business Practices and Technology Staff (BPT)
Roger 0. Dixon, acting chief

Mrs. Esther Caukin Brunauer Suspended

[Released to the press April 10]

Deputy Under Secretary Carlisle H. Humelsine
armounced today that he has ordered the suspen-
sion of Mrs. Esther Caukin Brunauer because of
information received that the Department of the
Navy had suspended her husband, Stephen Bru-
nauer, under Navy Department loyalty and secur-
ity procedures. Mrs. Brunauer's suspension was
taken automatically pending the outcome of the
Department of the Navy action concerning Mr.
Brunauer. Mrs. Brunauer has been employed by
the Unesco relations staff of the Department of
State as a liaison officer.

In announcing this action, Mr. Humelsine made
it clear that Mrs. Brunauer's suspension results
from action taken by the Navy in regard to her
husband and not from any information which
has been received concerning her.

Fifth Semiannual Report

of Educational Exchange issue

[Released to the press April 12]

A sharpening of the Department of State's Ed-
ucational Exchange Program to fulfill the objec-
tives of the Campaign of Truth is reported in the
fifth semianiuuxl report of the United States Ad-
visory Commission on Educational Exchange.^

The report, made public today following its sub-
mission to Congress, was presented by the Com-
mission Chairman Harvie Branscomb, chancellor
of Vaiulerbilt University. It contains an attach-

• H. Doe. 108, 82d Cong. 1st sess.

ment on the cultural penetration of northern Ko-
rea by Soviet Kussia as an example of the need
for sliifting the emphasis in the operation of the
exchange program in many paits of the world.
The report comments,

This provides a vivid illustration of a S<iviet program
to nnsguide and seduce a wliole population for violent
ends.

The Commission recommends increased activi-
ties in the international exchange of labor lead-
ers— more scholarships at workers' education
centers, more study tours of trade unionists, and
special summer classes to study social problems
in various countries.

The report further comments,

Communist propaganda is aimed at workers who con-
stitute a large and important part of the world's popula-
tion. Tlie United States must combat this intluence to
win the workers' support.

Our task must be to depict the true status of workers
in the U.S.S.R. and in Soviet satellite ccnmtries in con-
trast to the position of labor in the United States where
workers have economic security, dignity, self-respect, and
recognition without recourse to class warfare and dicta-
torship which the Communist doctrine holds to be neces-
sary before workers can attain their rights.

The report notes that organized American labor
has developed a technical assistance program
through the International Confederation of Free
Trade Unions [Icftu]. Among the many proj-
ects initiated by the Icfttj, the report notes, is
the establishment of training schools in Asia to
develop leaders for free trade unions.

Reviewing Soviet activities in North Korea, the
report detailed widespread cultural penetration
during the 5 years preceding the outbreak of hos-
tilities. This included the enrollment of over
1,300,000 North Koreans in Soviet-oriented cul-
tural societies, the translation and publication of
over 500 Russian books, the organization of Rus-
sian-language courses, and thousands of lectures
and concerts. Hundreds of intellectual, indus-
trial, and political leaders were taken to Moscow
for indoctrination.

The report said, in commenting on the ex-
pansion of the program :

While the Communist educational and cultural pro-
gram in north Korea was exceptional in its intensity,
similar efforts in other countries called for a re-thinking
and re-direction of United States educational exchange
objectives during the last year.

Major steps considered by the Commission were
listed as (1) shaping the program to fit each coun-
try, and (2) sharpening the objectives of the pro-
gram. Under tlie second point, the Commission
cited the following three specific objectives to be
carried out in collaboration with the international
information program :

a. To keep alive the spirit of cooperation among the
free nations of the world for the purpose of self-protec-
tion and progress for all.

b. To strengthen resistance to Communism in countries
immediately threatened with infiltration or aggression.

April 23, 1951

675

c. To weaken the forces of Communism and diminish
its power in areas now under tlie domination of the
U.S.S.R.

Tlie Commission noted a growth in the number
of exchange grants from 450 in 1948 to an esti-
mated 6,500 for 1951. With 30,000 foreign stu-
dents now studying at a thousand American
campuses, it was pointed out that the Government
program is relatively small compared to the ex-
change activities carried out under private
auspices.

In a summary appraisal, the Commission
stated :

The expansion of the educational exchange program
to many new countries, its rapid increase in volume, and
its redirection to meet the challenge of Communist propa-
ganda and subversion have placed heavy burdens upon
the administrators of the program throughout this three-
year period. The responsil)ilities have been particularly
great this past year when, with the initiation of the
President's Campaign of Truth, most of the expansion
and change has taken place. It is the opinion of this
Commission that, on the whole, the job has been well done.

The Assistant Secretary of State for Public Affairs,
Edward W. Barrett, has given the program vigorous and
forward-looliing leadership. Obviously, we cannot pass
judgment on the capabilities of all the officers he has
selected to carry on the work of the program liere and
overseas. The progress of the program, however, con-
vinces us that he has brought together an excellent staff
and, in our various contacts with the program officers
here and overseas, we have noted their devotion and
enthusiasm for their jobs.

Noting recent proposals to remove the informa-
tion and educational exchange program from the
Department of State, the majority of the Com-
mission expressed its belief that the educational
exchange program should remain in the Depart-
ment of State.

The membership of the Commission, in addi-
tion to Dr. Branscomb, includes :

Vice Chairman — Mark Starr, educational director of the

International Ladies Garment Workers Union
Harold Willis Dodds, president, Princeton University
Edwin B. Fred, president. University of Wisconsin
Martin R. P. McGuire, professor, Catholic University

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

For sale ly the Superintendent of Documents, Govern-
ment Printinfi Office, Washington 25, D. C. Address
requests direct to the Superintendent of Documents, ex-
cept in the ease of free inibtieatioiis, tvhieh may he ob-
tained from the Department of State.

Passport Visa Fees. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 1990. I'ub. 3709. 2 pp. 5<t.

Agreement between the United States and Greece —
Effected t)y exchange of notes dated at Athens March
4 and .July 22, 1949; entered into force July 22, 1949.

Some Facts About the Foreign Service, April 1, 1950. De-
partment and Foreign Service Series, Ifj. Pub. 3789.
70 pp. 20^.

A short account of its organization and duties to-
gether with pertinent laws and regulations.

Termination of Reciprocal Trade Agreement of May 18,

1936. Treaties and Other International Acts Series 2'»83.
Pub. 3916. 2 pp. 5«(.

Agreement between the United States and Finland —
Signed at Helsinki .January 18, 1950; entered into m
force January 18, 19.50. 1 1

Vocational Industrial Education. Treaties and Other In-
ternational Acts Series 2115. Pub. 4018. 25 pp. lOf*.

Agreements between the United States and Brazil
extending and amending agreement of January 3,
1946 — Effected by exchange of notes signed at Rio
de Janeiro August 23 and September 29, 1949 ; entered
into force October 4, 1949, oi)erative retroactively
from June 30, 1948 and Exchange of notes signed
at Rio de Janeiro July 23 and October 21 and 27,
1048; entered into force October 30, 1948, operative
retroactively from June 30, 1948.

Economic Cooperation With Burma. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 2128. Pub. 4022. 17 pp. 10#.

Agreement between the United States and Burma —
Signed at Rangoon September 13, 1950; entered into
force October 10, 1950, and Exchange of notes —
Signed at Rangoon September 13, 1950.

Claims. Treaties and Other International Acts Series
2129. Pub. 4027. 10 pp. 5«(.

Convention between the United States and Panama —
Signed at Panama .January 26, 1950; entered into
force October 11, 1950.

Finance: Expenditures by Forces Under Command of the
Commanding General Armed Forces of the Member

States of the United Nations. Treaties and Other Inter-
national Acts Series 2135. Pub. 4038. 12 pp. 5«!

Agreement between the United States and ICorea
superseding agreement of July 6, 19.50 — Signed at
Taegu July 28, 1950; entered into force July 28,
1950 and Exchange of notes — Signed September 3
and 5, 1950.

The "Point Four" Program. Economic Cooperation Se-
ries 25. Pub. 4042. 10 pp. Free.

Progress report No. 5. The fifth in a series of prog-
ress reports on the Point I'\)ur Program designed
to provide background information in summary form
on developments in tlie President's program for
world economic progress through cooperative tech-
nical assistance.

Passport Visas. Treaties and Other International Acts
Series 2137. Pub. 4043. 4 pp. 5{(

Agreement between the United States and Chile — •
Effected by exch;inge of notes signed at Santiago
August 29, 1950; entereil into force September 1, 1950.

Technical Cooperation. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 2138. Pub. 4044. 5 pp. Vi(f

Agreement between tlie United States and Oylon —
Signed at Colombo November 7, 1950 ; entered into
force November 7, 1950.

Air Transport Services. Treaties and Other Interna-
tional Acts Scries 21;'.!. Pub. 4047. 4 pp. 5('.

.\greenient between the United States and Spain
amending agreement of Deiemlier 2, 1944.

676

Deparfmeni of State Bulletin

Air Transport Services. Trpaties and Other Tnterna-
tional Acts Series lil32. Pub. 4048. 3 pp. 5(f

Agreement between the United States and Spain
amending agreement of December 2, 1944 as
amended — EfTected by exchange of nolcs verbales
dated at Madrid Februar.v 21, and March 12, 194G;
entered into force March 12, 1946.

Passport Visas: United States Citizens Visiting South-
ern Rhodesia; Briti.sh Subjects Residents of Southern
Rhodesia Visiting the United States. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 2141. Pub. 40.55. 2 pp. 5#.

Arrangement between the United States and the
TInited Kingdom — Effected by excliange of notes
dated at Washington August 20 and September 13,
1950; entered into force September 13, 1950.

Germany: Retention in Germany or Removal as Repara-
tions of German Industrial Plants. Treaties and OtJier
International Acts Series 2142. Pub. 4056. 6 pp. 5^.

Agreement between the United States and United
Kinudcim anil Fiance — Signed at London March 31,
1049 ; entered into force April 8, 1949.

Aviation: Flights of Military Aircraft. Treaties and
Other International Acts Series 2143. Pub. 4057. 6 pp.
5<t.

Agreement between the United States and the Domin-
ican Republic — Effected by exchange of notes signed
at ("iudad Trujillo August 11, 1950; entered into
force August 11, 1950.

Mutual Defense Assistance. Treaties and Other Interna-
tional Acts Series 2145. Pub. 4059. 4 pp. 5^.

Agreement between the United States and Yugo-
slavia— Effected by exchange of notes signed at Bel-
gi-ade November 20 and 21, 1950 ; entered into force
November 21, 1950.

Emergency Food Assistance: Publicity for Distribution
Program. Treaties and Other International Acts Series
2146. Pub. 4060. 3 pp. 5^.

Agreement between the United States and Yugo-
slavia— Effected by exchange of notes signed at Bel-
grade November 17 and 21, 1950; entered into force
November 21, 1950.

Passport Visa Fees. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 2144. Pub. 4061. 3 pp. 5^.

Agreement between the United States and Greece —
Effected by exchange of notes dated at Athens Janu-
ary 7 and 29, 1949; entered into force January 29,
1949.

Foreign Service List, January 1, 1951. Pub. 4069. 209 pp.
40^ a copy. Subscription price, $1.50 a year ; $2 foreign.

Includes the posts of assignment, consular districts,
tariff of Foreign Service fees, index of persons, and
geographic index.

Finance: Repayment of Funds Advanced to the National
Defense Forces, Republic of the Philippines, by the
United States Philippines-Ryukyus Command. Treaties
and Other International Acts Series 2151. Pub. 4070. 7
pp. 50.

Agreement between the United States and the Re-
public of the Philippines— Signed at Washington
November 6, 1950; entered into force November 6,
1950.
Telling America's Story Abroad. International Infor-
mation and Cultural Series 14. Pub. 4075. 28 pp. 15<f.

The State Department's Information and Educational
Exchange Program.

April 23, 1951

Reorganization on the Department of State Implement-
ing the Recommendations of the Hoover Commission.

Department and Foreign Service Series 22. Pub. 4106.
6 pp. Free.

Reprint from Bulletin of January 1, 1951.

Recent Soviet Pressures on Germany. European and
British Commonwealth Series 18. Revised. Pub. 4123.
4 pp. Free.

A background summary.

Unity of Purpose Urged for Security of North Atlantic
Area. General Foreign Policy Series 42. Pub. 4129.
18 pp. Free.

Report of Gen. Dwight D. Eisenhower, Supreme Allied
Commander, Europe, to Members of Congress, Feb-
ruary 1, 1951.

The Road Ahead in Collective Defense of Free Nations.

General Foreign Policy Series 44. Pub. 4134. 5 pp.
Free.

Excerpts from an address by Ambassador Warren R.
Austin before the Association of American Colleges
at Atlantic City, N.J., on January 9, 1951. Reprint
from BurxBriN of January 29, 1951.

It Has Fallen to Us. General Foreign Policy Series 45.
Pub. 4144. 8 pp. Free.

A letter from the Secretary of State on the meaning
of Korea.

Laying Foundations for Peace in the Pacific. Far East-
ern Series 39. Pub. 4148. 12 pp. Free.

Address by John Foster Dulles over the Columbia
Broadcasting System network on March 1, 1951.

Instructions Issued to Foreign Service
Posts on the Internal Security Act

[Released to the press April J.'i]

FoUoiring are the operating instructions sent to all
American diplomatic and consular officers re the act of
October 16, 1918, as amended by the Internal Seciiriti/ Act
of 11)50 and the Clarification Act of March 28, 1951, pend-
ing the issuance of formal regulations.

1. The President approved on March 28, 1951
an Act of Congress (Piiblic Law 14, 82d Congress)
which requires a change in the interpretation of
the provisions of the Act of October IG, 1918, as
amended by the Internal Security Act of 1950.

2. Section 1 of the Act of March 28, 1951 reads :

That the Attorney General is hereby authorized and
directed to provide by regulations that the terms "mem-
bers of" and "affiliated with" where used in the Act of
October 16, 191S, as amended, shall include only member-
ship or affiliation which is or was voluntary, and shall not
include membership or affiliation which is or was solely
(a) when under sixteen years of age, (b) by operation of
law, or (c) for purposes of obtaining employment, food
rations, or other essentials of living, and where necessary
for such purposes.

677

3. The committee report in connection with the
legislation contains the following statements :

The reason most frequently given for the denial of visas
or the denial of admission appears to be the applicants
past membership of, or affiliation with, certain totalitarian
youth, national labor, or professional, student, or similar
organizations, or the alien's service in the German or
Italian Armies, or his involuntary membership in totali-
tarian parties or their affiliates and auxiliaries. Including
those cases where it was shown that such membership or
affiliation occurred by operation of law or edict, or for
purposes of obtaining or preserving employment, food
rations, or other essentials of living.

The bill makes clear the intent of Congress that aliens
who are, or were, voluntary members of the Nazi, Fascist,
or other totalitarian parties or organizations are to be
excluded, but aliens who were involuntary members of
Nazi, Fascist, or other totalitarian youth, national labor,
student, or similar organizations, are not to be considered
ipso facto as members of, or affiliated with, the Nazi,
Fascist, or other totalitarian parties or organizations
within 'the meaning of the act of October 16, 191S, as
amended. Furthermore, aliens who served in the German,
Italian or other armed forces are not to be considered
Ipso facto as members of, or affiliated with, the Nazi,
Fascist, or other totalitarian parties or subsidiary organi-
zations.

4. All cases of visa applicants in which ad-
verse action was taken nnder the Act of October
16, 1918, as amended by the Internal Security Act
of 1950, shoidd be reviewed in the light of the Act
of March 28, 1951. Visas may now be issued :n
such cases if they were previously withheld solely
on one or more of the grounds which no longer
exist, as provided in the Act of March 28, 1951.

5. Visas may now be granted in all bona fide
nonimmigrant cases now pending before the De-
partment, or the Department of Justice, for ninth
proviso action which was deemed to be necessary
under the Attorney General's construction of the
law, but which now clearly do not fall within the
intent of Congress as stated in the Act of March
28, 1951, and in all such cases arising henceforth.
The Department should be promptly informed of
any pending cases which are still considered to re-
quire ninth proviso action.

6. Immigration visas may be issued to aliens
whose cases had been suspended solely upon the
basis of former involuntary membership in the
Nazi, Fascist, Falangist or Communist party or
an affiliate, subsidiary, section, branch, or subdi-
vision of those parties, and in all such cases aris-
ing henceforth.

7. The admission of aliens who are, or were,
Nazis or Fascists at heart, or who advocate the
Falangist system for the United States, is to be
considered prejudicial to the interests of the
United States within the meaning of the war-time
visa regidations contained in Supjilement D to the
Foreign Service Regulations (22 CFR 53.1-53.41) .

8. Aliens who are, or were, voluntary members
of, or voluntarily affiliated with, the parties or or-
ganizations proscribed by the Act of October 16,
1918, as amended, are still excludable.

9. The princii)al parties proscribed by the Act
of October 16, 1918, as amended by the Internal
Security Act of 1950, are:

678

(a) Every Communist party in the world, which in-
cludes every party that has ever been a part of the world
Communist movement directed from the U. S. S. R., re-
gardless of the name by which it may be, or have been,
known ; the Nazi Party (N. S. D. A. I'.) of Germany; the
Fascist Party (P. N. F.) of Italy; and the Falange
(F. E. T.) of Spain. The proscription of the statute
also applies to any other party which is or was a "totali-
tarian dictatorship" as defined in Section 3 (15) of the
Internal Security Act of 1950. No party other than those
specifically designated has been so designated up to the
present time.

(b) Every section, subsidiary, branch, or sub-division
(which are to be regarded as synonymous terms) of such a
parties is also within the statutory pro.scription. Every I
direct predecessor or successor party or organization, hav- *
ing the same general ideological objectives or purposes,

of such parties is also within the statutory proscription.

(c) Every "affiliate" (affiliated organization) of such
parties is also within the statutory proscription. The
term "affiliate" as here used means an organization sub-
stantially directed, dominated, or controlled by one of the
parties within the statutory proscription, which is or was
used or operated by such party primarily to help maintain
its totalitarian control over the country, or to help dis-
seminate its totalitarian economic and governmental doc-
trines or ideology.

(d) Considering the Nazi Party of Germany as an ex-
ample, the (SS) SchutzstafCeln (Protective Squad — Elite
Guard), the (SA) Sturniabteilung (Storm Detachment),
the (NSKK) NS Kraftfahrerkorps (Motor Corps), the
(NSFK) NS Fliegerkorps (Flying Corps), the (HJ) Hit-
ler Jugend (Hitler Youth), and the (BDM) Bund
Deutscher (League of German Girls) may be regarded as
sections, subsidiaries, branches, or subdivisions of the
Party. The (DAF) Deutsche Arbeitsfront (German La-
bor Front), the (NSV) NS Volkswohlfahrt (Peoples Wel-
fare Service), and the (RAD) Reichsarbeitsdienst
(Compulsory National Labor Service) were "affiliates" of
the Party.

(e) Where used in this circular airgram, the term
"proscribed party or organization" means all of the afore-
mentioned Communist and other totalitarian parties, their
sections, subsidiaries, branches and subdivisions, their
direct predecessor and successor parties or organizations,
and their "affiliates". Where "affiliates" are separately
treated it is intended to cover only affiliated organizations
which are or were not .sections, subsidiaries, branches, or
subdivisions of such proscribed parties.

10. (a) Service, whether voluntary or not, in
the armed forces of any country shall not be re-
garded, of itself, as membership in, or affiliation
with, any proscribed party or organization, and
shall not, of itself, constitute a ground for exclu-
sion. This, however, in no way affects the pro-
hibition contained in Section 13 of the Displaced
Persons Act of 1948, as amended, against the issu-
ance of a visa under that Act to any person who has
voluntarily borne arms against the United States
on the western front during World War II except
that the construction of the word ''voluntary" as
used in this circular airgram shall be applied to
the construction of the word "voluntarily " ajipear-
ing in Section 13 of the Displaced Persons Act of
1948, as amended, in relation to bearing arms, but
only by other than German nationals.

(b) Voluntary service in a political capac-
ity (such as a political commissar) with the armed
forces of any country shall constitute affiliation
with a proscribed party or organization.

11. Membership or affiliation, whether voluntary
or not, which ended before an alien readied liis ,

Department of State Bulletin '

sixteenth birthday shall not constitute a ground
for exclusion. If an alien continues or continued
his membership or affiliation beyond his sixteenth
birthday, the question whether his membership or

I affiliation after his sixteenth birthday is or was
voluntary shall be determined as in the case of any
other alien. In that connection, the facts relating
to his activities only after his sixteenth birthday
may be considered in determining whetlier the con-
tinual ion of his membei'ship or affiliation is or was

, voluntary.

12. Membership or affiliation solely by operation
of law shall not constitute a ground for exclusion.
This "operation of law" exception includes any
case wherein the alien automatically becomes or
became a member or affiliate of a proscribed party
or organization by official act, proclamation, order
or decree.

13. The term "voluntary" when used in relation
to membership in, or affiliation with, a proscribed
party or organization shall be construed to mean
membership or affiliation which is or was know-
ingly created by the alien's act of joining or affiliat-
ing, upon his own volition, with such proscribed
party or organization. It does not include :

(a) Alembership or affiliation which is or was
solely the result of duress or coercion ;

(b) Membership or affiliation which is or was
solely, and necessary, for the purpose of obtaining
or keeping employment, food rations, housing, or
other essentials of living, such as general educa-
tion;

(c) Membership or affiliation in a non-pro-
scribed party or organization, which membership
or affiliation continues or continued after such
party or organization becomes or became pro-
scribed, or comes or came under the domination
or control of a proscribed party or organization,
provided that the alien estaolishes that he cannot
or could not have terminated his membership or
affiliation without suffering loss of employment,
housing, food rations, or other essentials of living,
such as general education. However, a person
who terminates or terminated his membership or
affiliation in a party or organization prior to the
date it becomes or became proscribed, or comes or
came under the domination or control of a pro-
scribed party or organization, shall not be con-
sidered to be or to have been a member or affidiate
of a proscribed party or organization ;

(d) Membership in or affiliation with an "af-
filiate", where the alien establishes that at the time
he voluntarily joined the "affiliate", it professed a
purpose neither Communist nor totalitarian in
character, provided the alien establishes that at the
time of joining he did not know, and did not have
reasonable means of ascertaining, that the "affili-
ate" had any purpose Communist or totalitarian
in character, and that he continues or continued
to have no knowledge of. and no reasonable means
of ascertaining, the proscribed purpose of the "af-
filiate", up until the time his membership or affilia-

tion ceases or ceased, or that after he ascertains
or ascertained the proscribed purpose of the
"affiliate", he is or was not able to terminate his
membership or affiliation without suffering loss of
employment, housing, food rations, or other essen-
tials of living, such as general education.

14. In all cases under paragraphs 12 and 13
above, the responsible consular officer must be sat-
isfied that the alien did not, in whole or in part,
join or remain a member or affiliate because of ide-
ological conviction or belief in the doctrines of
Communism or other form of totalitarianism, and
that he has never intentionally been active in the
promotion of such doctrines.

15. (a) Membership in, or direct (i. e., not
through any intermediary "affiliate") affiliation
with, any Communist Party, the Nazi Party, the
Fascist Party, the Spanish Falange, or other total-
itarian party, or any section, subsidiary, branch,
or subdivision thereof, including the youth groups
under any Communist Party (where the member-
ship or affiliation is or was after the alien's six-
teenth birthday) — as distinguished from an "af-
filiate" or youth group comprehended within (b),
below — shall be considered prima facie to be or
to have been voluntary, and the burden shall be on
the alien to prove by clear and convincing evi-
dence, which shall be made a matter of record in
the case, that such membership or direct affiliation
is or was involuntary.

(b) Membership in, or affiliation with, an "af-
filiate" of any Communist Party, the Nazi Party,
the Fascist Party, the Spanish Falange, or other
totalitarian party, or membership in, or affiliation
with, the youth sections of the Nazi Party, the
Fascist Party, the Spanish Falange, or other total-
itarian party (where the membership or affiliation
is or was after the alien's sixteenth birthday),
except youth groups under any Communist party,
shall be regarded as raising an inference that such
membership or affiliation is or was voluntary, but
this inference may be overcome by the alien's sworn
statement that his membership or affiliation is or
was involuntary, provided that, after appropriate
security clearances, there is no evidence or reliable
information to the contrary. If any such evidence
or information to the contrary is obtained, the
burden shall continue to be on such alien to estab-
lish by clear and convincing evidence, which shall
be made a matter of record in the case, that his
membership or affiliation is or was involuntary.
Officers of the "affiliates" and youth sections re-
ferred to in this subsection shall be considered
under (a) above.

16. Doubtful cases of immigrants and nonim-
migrants should be submitted to the Department
for advisory opinions. All cases of members or
former members of the Communist Party or any
of its sections, branches, subdivisions or sub-
sidiaries as distinguished from nonofficer mem-
bers of an affiliate thereof, shall be considered to
be doubtful for this purpose.

April 23, 1 951

679

April 23, 1951 Index

Africa ^"^'

Libya — Symbol of Hope for a New Era (Clark,

Sbaqishli) 643

Agriculture

U.S. Aid to Iran In Fight Against Locusts . . 661

Aid to Foreign Countries

U.S.S.R. : U.S. Reiterates Demand on I,end-Lease

Settlement 646

Asia

INDIA: Threat of Famine Immediate (Acheson,

Cong, testimony) 674

IRAN:

Assisting Iran To Unite With the Free World

McGhee, Mathews, Loftus, Burns) . . 657

Joint Communique on U.S.-U.K. Talks ... 661

U.S. Aid to Iran in Fight Against Locusts . . 661

IRAQ: Point 4 Agreement Signed 653

ISRAEL: VOA Programs Inaugurated .... 653
JAPAN: Ambassador Dulles Returns for Peace

Treaty Consultation 654

JORDAN: Admiral Robert B. Carney Visits . . 661

KOREA:

Croices Confronting Us In Korea (Rusk over

NBC) 655

U.N. Casualties 656

American Republics

COSTA RICA: Trade Agreement Terminated . 662

Arms and Armed Forces

U.N. Casualties in Korea 656

Claims

Deadline for Filing War Claims With Italy . . 651

Communism

Choices Confronting Us in Korea (Rusk over

NBC) 655

Educational Exchange Program, 5th Semiannual

Report Issued 675

Congress

Analysis of Official Personnel Stationed in the
U.S. and U.S.S.R.: Text of Letter (McFall
to Lane) 649

INDIA: Threat of Famine Immediate (Acheson,

Cong, testimony) 674

Instructions Issued to Foreign Service on In-

teri^al Security Act 677

Legislation Listed 645

Europe

Instructions Issued to Foreign Service on In-
ternal Security Act 677

GERMANY:

Discussion of Agreement for VOA Language

Programs (Sargeant) 652

Effect of Revised Monetary Reform Law on

U.N. Nationals 651

U.S. Women To Visit 652

ITALY: Deadline for Filing War Claims ... 651
U.K.:

Death of Ernest Bevin (Acheson) 663

Joint Communique on U.S.-U.K. Iranian

Talks 661

U.S.S.R.:

Analysis of Official Personnel: Text of Letter

(McFall to Lane) 649

U.S. Reiterates Demand on Lend-Lease Settle-
ment: Exchange of Notes, Texts . . . 646

Finance

Effect of Revised German Monetary Reform Law

on U.N. Nationals 651

Vol. XXIV No. 616

649
677

670

Foreign Service

Analysis of Official Personnel Stationed in the
U.S. and the U.S.S.R

Instructions Issued on Internal Security Act . .

Libya — Symbol of Hope for a New Era in North

Africa. Exchange of Remarks 643

Human Rights

Seventh Session, U.S. Delegation

Forced Labor and Measure for Abolition, Text

of Resolution 670

Information and Educational Exchange Program

Educational Exchange Program, 5th Semian-
nual Report Issued 676

VOA:

German Language Programs (Sargeant) . . 662
Israeli Programs Inaugurated 653

International Meetings

U.S. Delegation: 7th Session Hirnian Rights . . 670
U.S. Women To Visit Germany 652

Mutual Aid and Defense

Assisting Iran To Unite With the Free World . .

Publications

5th Semiannual Report of U.S. Advisory Com-
mission on Educational Exchange Issued .
Recent Releases

Page
657

675
676

Refugees and Displaced Persons

Instructions to Foreign Service on the Internal

Security Act 677

Plight of Survivors of Concentration Camps,

Text of Resolution 670

State, Department of

Reorganization: Bureau of Economic Affairs .
Suspension: Mrs. Esther Caukin Brunauer .

Technical Cooperation and Development

Assisting Iran To Unite With the Free World .

Agreement With Iraq 653

U.S. Aid to Iran in Fight Against Locxists . . 661

Water Control and Utilization of Arid Areas,
Text of Resolution

674
675

657

671

Telecommunications

U.S.-Germany Discuss Agreement for VOA Ger-
man Language Programs (Sargeant) . . . 652

Trade

Costa Rica-U.S. Agreement Terminated . . . 662

Treaties and Other International Agreements

Compulsory Jurisdiction of the International

Court of Justice (Myers) 664

COSTA RICA: Trade Agreement (1936) Termi-
nated. Exchange of Notes, Texts .... 662

IRAQ: Point 4 Agreement Signed 653

JAPAN: Ambassador Dulles Returns for Peace

Treaty Consultation 654

LEND-LEASE (1942): U.S. Reiterates Demand

to U.S.S.R. Exchange of Notes, Texts . . 646

VOA: U.S.-Germany Discuss Programs (Sar-
geant) 652

United Nations

Casualties of U.N. Forces in Korea 656

Compulsory Jurisdiction of the International
Court of Justice — Additions Through March

31 (Myers) 664

Effect of Revised Monetary Law on U.N. Na-
tionals 651

Libya — Symbol of Hope for a New Era. (Clark,

Shaqishli) 643

Resolutions :

Forced Labor and Measures for Abolition

(Mar. 19), Text 670

Plight of Survivors of Concentration Camps

(Mar. 19), Text 670

Water Control and Utilization for Arid Areas

(Mar. 9), Text 671

Secretary-General Advised of Change in U.N.

Command 654

U.N. Bibliography: Selected Documents . . . 671

U.S. in U.N. (Weekly Summary) 672

A'a»ie Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 647,663,674

Austin, Warren R 654

Bevin, Etnest 663

Branscomb, Harvie 675

Brown, Winthrop G 675

Brunauer, Esther C 675

Burns, Norman 659

Carney, Robert B 661

Clark, Lewis 643

Crocker, Edward S 653

Dulles, John F 664

Lane, Thomas J 649

Leddy, John M 675

Lie, Trygvie 664

Loftus, John 659

Maiui, Thomas C 663

Mathews, Elbert G 658

McFall, Jack K 649

McGhee, George C 657, 660

Myers, Denys P 664

Oreamuno, J. Rafael 662

Panyushkin, A 648

Roosevelt, Mrs. Franklin D 670

Rusk, Dean 655

Sargeant, Howland H 653

Shaqishli, Muhammad 643

Suwcldl, Tewflq 663

Webb, James E 664

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTINQ OFFICII l>ll

tJrie/ ^eha/^tTitent/ aw t/tafe^

OUR FAR EASTERN POLICY: DEBATE, DECISION,

AND ACTION • by Secretary Acheson 683

TAKING STOCK OF INTER-AMERICAN RELA-
TIONS • fry Ambassador John C. Dreier 688

HOW SHOULD THE AMERICAN REPUBLICS FACE
THE ECONOMIC PROBLEINIS IN THE PRESENT

DANGER! 9 by Assistant Secretary Thorp 693

THE UNESCO CONFERENCE ON THE IMPROVE-
MENT OF BIBLIOGRAPHIC SERVICES • by Jesse
H. Shera 707

For index see back cover

Vol. XXIV, No. 61't
April 30, 1951

%yAe zi^e/ia/r^menC 4)^ C/ldle yj W 1 1 \j L 1 1 1

Vol. XXIV, No. 617 • Publication 4200
April 30, 1951

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U. B. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D. C.

Prick:

62 issues, domestic $7.60 foreign $10.25

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
b« reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a tceekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government xcilh information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which tlie
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listetl
currently.

U. S. SUPERINTEMDFNT OF DOCUMENTS

MAY 14 laol

Our Far Eastern Policy

DEBATE, DECISION, AND ACTION

Address hy Secretary Achcson^

1*#E HAVE just emerged from a great de-
■■ bate upon one aspect of our foreign policy.
I think it is a safe prediction to say that we are
about to start upon another. The one just con-
ckided dealt with the defense of the North At-
lantic area, the part that we and our European
allies would play in it, the need for mutual help
and individual effort, the need for unity of com-
mand and for direction of effort. The debate
brought out our primary purpose and object of
maintaining peace and preventing war. It made

Slain that if peace were broken by aggression, the
orth Atlantic nations must be able to meet the
attack successfully and without sacrificing the
freedom of one of them in the initial shock.

The forthcoming debate will deal with the se-
curity of the Far East ; with the interest that our
country has and the part that it should play in
maintaining that security; with the part that
others can and should play ; with the nature of the
dangers to be faced and with the steps which are
being taken and which should be taken to achieve
the same two purposes — the prevention of war
and the successful meeting of war should it be
forced upon us.

Now the fact that our Far Eastern policy and
our European policy have been separately de-
bated should not lead us to make the fatal error
of regarding these policies as being divorced
from one another.

We are dealing with a global problem which
does not correspond to the artificiiil divisions
which sometimes claim our attention.

The present dramatic realities of the Korean
conflict may blind us to the less obvious but no
less critical realities of the Near Eastern and the
Western portions of our global problems.

' Made before the Women's National Press Club at Wash-
ington on Apr. 18 and released to the press on the same
date. Also printed as Department of State publication
4201.

But if we do not allow this to happen, and if we
discuss the problems of each area in the context of
the whole, the debate can clarify issues and can
help us get ahead.

It is not my purpose tonight to attempt a dis-
course on all Far Eastern problems in one speech.
But it may be useful to make some observations
which will indicate lines along which debate can
be constructive and perhaps narrow the issues.

At the outset, we should remind ourselves and
we should remind our friends abroad of the in-
valuable part which public debate of public is-
sues has played in the life of our country since
its earliest days. In our debates everyone is en-
titled to his say, and I may add that almost every-
one avails himself of this right. It is good that
this is so, because with us these periods of national
discussion perform many useful purposes. They
provide an opportunity for letting off steam, and
the importance of letting off steam was known to
the framers of our Constitution. They perform
the function of public analysis of issues and argu-
ments and public evaluation of the issues and argu-
ments. They are a national "thinking aloud."
They make up the national mind and they focus
the national will.

Sometimes our friends abroad look with dismay
on the divergence of views which are expressed.
They fail to remember that out of this divergence,
out of hard-fought discussions there comes a na-
tional agreement upon conclusions, conclusions
produced by the innate common sense of the
American people when they have heard all sides
and come to the point of decision.

No one expects in these debates that all the state-
ments made are going to be logical or that they
are going to be based on proved facts or that they
are going to be good tempered. In the heat of
debate many things are said which would have
been better left unsaid. But we expect this. We
understand this. Wliat is essential, if the debate
is going to accomplish its important purpose, is

AprW 30, 7951

683

that we all try to make our contributions construc-
tive and to keep them directed toward the issues
as we see tliose issues. The greatest disservice that
can be done to this institution of the national de-
bate is consciously to confuse it, to obscure it, to
frustrate it.

It is well to remember also that this debate will
be conducted in the full hearing of that propa-
ganda organization, the Cominform, which is
making a ceaseless effort to confuse, to divide^ to
weaken people in our own and other countries;
to divide us from our allies; and to weaken our
collective strength.

Points of View on Foreign Policy

Now in the debate which is about to open, it is
safe to say that three fairly distinguishable points
of view will emerge. These all came out in the
prior debate. Two are extreme points of view
which are held by small numbers but are vocifer-
ously expressed, and sometimes they affect the
thinking of the great majority.

One extreme point of view is held by impatient
or discouraged people who believe that war is in-
evitable, that it is futile to attempt to prevent it,
and that all our effort should be directed toward
fighting it.

Tlie other extreme view is also held by discour-
aged people who believe that there is no real
strength in the non-Communist world except our
own, and that we should limit our main effort to
holding a defensive circle, and that the help we
give to others should be limited to what will sup-
port our thrusts by sea and air against the enemy
in the event of war.

Sometimes advocates of these respective points
of view join forces, and then they recommend
withdrawal from one area and involvement in an-
other. But in the main these views are distinct
and recognizable.

But the great body of opinion does not hold
either of these views. It believes that war is not
inevitable, that the great object of policy should
be to prevent war, that to do this it is essential to
build, as quickly as possible and as effectively as
possible, the collective strength of ourselves and
our allies. It believes that aggression is an evil
which has to be met; that surrender to the threat
of force is appeasement; that negotiation and
peaceful settlement is not appeasement. Those
who hold this point of view do not expect that
difficult questions are susceptible of easy and pain-
less answers. They want to be sure that the course
chosen is sensible and is the best course among
those open to us.

The real debate will occur within this section of
American opinion. It will concern itself with
knowing the facts, with appraising results, with
evaluating, the advantages and the risks of various
courses and settling upon those courses wliich are
best calculated to preserve peace, to prevent war,

684

to limit and to end the conflict in which we are now
engaged. Above all, it will concern itself with
those courses which will best protect the security
of our country.

Now with these preliminary observations, we
come to what in my judgment are the main ques-
tions on Far Eastern policy which will be affected
by the coming debate.

Far Eastern Policy For Peace

Let us start with the great constructive tasks on
which we have been engaged, the steps that we
have been taking to move out of the period of
war and to establish a new basis for a stable and
constructive structure of peace in the Pacific.

These steps, essential to our security, are not
within what seems to be that area of bitter dis-
agreement which may be expected among us.

We are moving rapidly ahead to make a prompt
and enduring peace with the Japanese and to join
with them as well as with other nations in the
Pacific in creating the essentials of security in
that area.

We believe that, on these matters, we shall find a
large, if not a complete, range of agreement and
a minimum of divergence on basic points of view.

The outlines of a treaty of peace with Japan
have already been discussed with their own leaders
and with other governments concerned and have
been made public. Ambassador John Foster
Dulles reviewed these in some detail in his Los
Angeles speech of March 31. May I put them as
concisely as possible. The Japanese peace settle-
ment which we have in mind has these basic
elements :

The peace should be, as Mr. Dulles said, "a peace
of reconciliation."

The peace should restore Japan as an equal in
the world community.

The peace should afford Japan a chance to earn
her own way in the world and to become self-
sustaining.

The peace should encourage close cultural rela-
tions between Japan and the West.

The peace should enable Japan to obtain a rea-
sonable degree of security.

We want tliis kind of peace because the great
energy and abilities of the Japanese people can
make a major contribution to the peace and well-
being not only of the Pacific but of the entire
world. We know that Japan can make this con-
tribution only as a full and free member of the
family of nations. We know that the Japanese
themselves are anxious to assume their proper in-
ternational role; that they are in a mood to reject
militarism in all its aspects and to seek fellowship
with peace-loving nations through collective se-
curity and the cooperative activity of the United
Nations.

So far as our own country is concerned, these
principles of policy have been worked out under

Department of State Bulletin

the direction and with the approval of the Presi-
dent. They have been fully discussed by Mr.
Dulles with the Japanese and with other govern-
ments who are as ready as we to make an early
peace. They reflect the views of General Mac-
Arthur and have had his full support. They have
had detailed consideration in both Senate and
House Committees and with the leadership of both
of our political parties. I believe that our citizens
at home and our friends abroad are entitled to
reassurance from the fact that Mr. Dulles, with the
strong support of the leaders of both political
parties, left for Japan last week for the purpose
of going ahead with our plans for a Japanese
treaty as a determined national policy.

Tliis afternoon the President announced an-
other important forward step in the great con-
structive task of building security in the Pacific.
This has to do with security arrangements which
we already have or which we expect to have with
Japan, the Philippines, Australia, and with New
Zealand.

The United States has been chiefly responsible
for the security of Japan since the autumn of
1945, by reason of our role as the principal oc-
cupying power. Neither we nor the Japanese de-
sire that a vacuum of power should suddenly be
created by a peace settlement with an exposed and
unarmed Japan, which would tempt the appetites
and ambitions of any with aggressive designs. So
it is anticipated that the United States and Japan
will by mutual agreement arrange for the contin-
ued security of that country, whose safety is vital
to both of us.

As for the Philippines, no one can be under the
slightest misapprehension about our concern for
the security of that nation. Existing agreements
register our partnership and the practical means
for giving effect to it. But apart from formal re-
lations and formal agreements, the United States
would not tolerate any aggi'ession against the
Philippines from any quarter. Our history, our
mutual esteem, and our practical interests pow-
erfully reinforce our agreements.

In the case of Australia and New Zealand, we
recall with regard and affection our association in
World War II. Without formal agreements, it
has been clear that our fates have been joined.
Discussion of a Japanese peace settlement has
raised the desirability of saying more formally
what had become an underlying fact. Hence our
desire to proceed with more specific plans of this
sort mentioned by the President.

These plans constitute a threat to no one. They
are an expression of our desire to build another
portion of the edifice of peace and will enlist the
practical principles of self-help and mutual aid
which were set forth in the Vandenberg Resolu-
tion. They will operate fully within the spirit
and principles of the Charter of the United
Nations.

I call your attention to the President's use of
the words "initial steps" in describing these plans.
They are not a final answer to the organization of
security in the Pacific. They will not interfere
in any way with such broader agreements as the
nations in that area may wish to develop — agree-
ments which we have said would receive the sym-
pathetic interest of the United States.

These prospective plans announced by the Pres-
ident today have had the fullest consideration and
approval by the military and civilian departments
of government and have had full discussion by ap-
propriate committees of the Congress and by re-
sponsible leaders of both political parties. The
President has announced our determination to
push ahead with bringing these agreements, as
well as a Japanese peace settlement, into effect as
early as possible. And so nothing done or said
in the great Far Eastern debate should hinder
this effort, because it is central to the security of
the Pacific and to the maintenance of peace in that
part of the world.

Far Eastern Policy for Relief

There is a second great constructive effort of
immense long-range practical importance which
we have been making in the Pacific — again di-
rected toward the purposes of security and peace.
This is the work which we have been doing jointly
with the nations of Asia to strengthen their newly
found freedom and to achieve a measure of relief
from the poverty and misery which have been
their lot.

Here again there may be a little difference of
opinion, but we hope not much. Some may wish
to do more, some less — some may wish to do it
differently. But these are minor questions. The
important point is the basic policy — the unmis-
takable evidence of the friendship of the United
States for these people of Asia, its unquestioned
determination to help them in achieving their own
purposes in their own way.

In some cases, our assistance takes the form of
technical help. In others, we have added direct
help with consumers' goods and capital plant. In
others we have tried to meet a need for military
assistance. Today we have Eca missions in the
Philippines, Indochina, Thailand, Burma, Indo-
nesia, and Formosa; we have military-assistance
programs in the Philippines, Indochina, Thailand,
and Formosa. At this particular moment we are
also much preoccupied with our effort to provide
a substantial quantity of wheat for India as soon
as possible to help that great nation get over the
desperate food situation which now confronts it.

Time does not permit me to go on to discuss
these programs which will shortly be laid before
the Congress. They are a part of the battle for
peace. They are building strength to maintain
peace. They are an essential counterpart to our
policy of stopping aggression.

April 30, 1 95 J

685

Action Against Aggression in Korea

We now come to the third area in this field of
debate. This will revolve around the action which
we and other members of the United Nations have
taken and are now taking to oppose the aggression
in Korea and around what should be done in the
future.

Now here again, I believe that the divergence
of views will not be as great as might appear at
first glance.

So far as what has been done is concerned, I
believe that the great body of opinion in this
country stands solidly behind the prompt and
courageous action which was taken last June. I
believe that our countrymen recognized then, and
have increasingly come to understand, the aggres-
sion in Korea for what it truly was — war by satel-
lite— the first step in a larger plan which, if not
checked, would have engulfed all of Asia.

I do not think that there is likely to be much
disagreement about the OTeat accomplishments
which that action has achieved in the months
which followed. The aggressors have thrown
into the battle a million and a quarter troops and
a vast amount of resources. But they are no
nearer to achieving their goal than they were when
they started. That goal was a quick and easy con-
quest in their program of aggression.

The plan of aggression has been thrown badly
out of gear. The immediate purposes of the ag-
gression have been thwarted. Our country and
the nations associated with it, which have the
great preponderance of potential power in the
world, have been awakened and stimulated to
transform that potential power into power in be-
ing— and to do this on a scale never before under-
taken in peacetime. This in itself will have a
profound effect upon redressing the inequality of
power which had arisen and which gravely
threatened the peace of the world.

Furthermore, what we call collective security,
which is the willingness of nations to fight side by
side, if necessary, for the safety of any of them be-
cause their common safety is involved, has re-
ceived a new vitality from this action in Korea
which reaches far beyond the immediate problems
of Korea.

And tliis isn't all. Not only the physical strug-
gle in Korea, with the obvious evidence of the
sources of its support and direction, but the expo-
sures at Lake Success have torn the veil from the
shabby pretense of aggression by satellite. If this
device has not already run its course and lost its
usefulness, it has become a most dangerous
metliod for those who use it.

No, I do not believe that there will be much
difTereiK'c of opinion that wliat has been done was
wel 1 and rightly done. The debate is likely to turn
upon wliat is being done and upon what should
be done to end the aggression.

Earlier in these remarks I suggested that the
debate was likely to bring out three general points

of view. I think it is here that we shall see these
emerge. Again it seems likely to me that the two
extreme views will be held by small but articulate
groups. The main discussion will center in the
larger group.

One extreme view will be the impatient one, that
the struggle in Korea can be ended only by widen-
ing the hostilities, with the attendant risks, and
that any willingness to settle the problems of
Korea by peaceful means is tantamount to
ajipeasement.

Another extreme view is likely to be that the
best thing to do is to pull out of Korea and aban-
don the effort. These views run counter to two
purposes deeply held by the American people —
to prevent the outbreak of world war and to pre-
vent aggression which may lead to world war.
They are not likely to hold the center of the dis-
cussion. That discussion, I believe, will seek what
our people seek, and that is, the best course open to
us among difficult courses — the best course which
will end the aggression, which will prevent its
extension into a world war, and which will best
protect the security of our country. Every bit of
light and help which the discussion can give to-
ward reaching agreement on this course is good
and necessary.

Propositions for Consideration

I shan't attempt to anticipate the discussion,
but I offer some propositions in an effort to ana-
lyze the problem and forward the discussion of
it. These propositions, I believe, stand out :

First: Peace can come to Korea if the aggres-
sors cease their aggression. It is they who pro-
long the fighting. To end the fighting by giving
the aggressor what he seeks would be appease-
ment in the true sense of that word.

Second : All the nations who are supporting the
United Nations military action in Korea are and
always have been desirous of solving the problems
of Korea by peaceful means. They are not and
never have been attempting to solve political
problems by force. Their military object is to
end the aggression and restore peace. Force was
resorted to by the Communist aggi-essors.

Third: The aggressors continue to suffer heavy
losses in the field. The Chinese people ai-e being
made to pay an additional price in hardships at
home. Those responsible are their own rulers.
This cannot be concealed, especially in (liina.

Fourth: The effective fight in Korea and the
growing strength of the countries who are op-
posed to aggression are upsetting the calculations
upon which the attack against Korea was based
anil upon which, no douht, other reckless adven-
tures had been ])lunnetl.

P''ifth: Under present circumstances, an exten-
sion of hostilities would not aid the T'nited Na-
tions troops in their mission. It would gravely
imperil world peace. General Bradley discussed

686

Department of Stafe Bulletin

the military aspects of this fight in his speech yes-
terday. His conchision was, and I quote his
words: "If at all possible, Korea should be set-
tled on the present battlefrround."

Sixth : The responsibility for action which
would result in extending hostilities and imperil-
ing world peace rests squarely on the aggressors.

Seventh : The aggression in Korea can end by
the aggressors' determining from bitter experience
in the field and by the growing strength of the
nations opposing them that the attempt has failed
and is too dangerous to continue ; or those respon-
sible for it can deliberately choose to widen hos-
tilities and risk a world war.

It will be clear to the world that if there is an
extension of the conflict in Korea, or if a world
conflict should result from it, the responsibility
will rest squarely on the Kremlin and its agents
in Peiping.

The American people will never choose this
course. They will not fall into the trap of seeming
to choose it.

It is plain that our common safety and our com-
mon hopes for the future depend on steadiness and
cool heads and unflinching determination to hold
a steadfast course in Korea.

Aggi-ession cannot be allowed to succeed ; it can-
not be appeased, rewarded, or ignored. To meet
it squarely is the price of peace.

Now, earlier I suggested that it is well for us
to remember that our debates are not conducted
in private but are followed in the greatest detail
by people all over the world. In one way, this is
a good thing. The fact that the process by which
our foreign policy is made is open to observation
for all the world should make it evident that we
conceal no secret purposes and that our real inten-
tions are better known and understood.

But it is well for us all to bear in mind that the
vast Soviet propaganda machine is also listening
in, ready to make use of what we say here to
advance its own purposes.

It is useful, I think, to remind ourselves that
the major purpose of Soviet strategy in regard to
the United States appears to be to isolate us, to
■weaken the moral strength of our position, to
break apart our ties with our allies, and to prevent
us from moving together to build the strength
upon which our safety depends.

A fundamental part of the Cominform strategy
is to contrive, through political maneuver, to iso-
late the opponent and make it appear that he is
the one who is committing the aggression.

Now this involves the use of a lot of upside-
down language: they wage war, for instance, in
the name of peace, and they acquire an empire in
the name of anti-imperialism.

They hide their intentions in deceptive talk
and when the nations ask, like Little Red Riding
Hood, "What big armies you have !", they reply :
"All the better to protect you with, from those
aggressive capitalists."

Now, as preposterous as these deceptions ap-
pear to us, we cannot let ourselves lose sight of
this constant effort on the part of the whole Soviet
apparatus to tear down our moral position in the
world, to create misunderstandings as to our mo-
tives and to magnify differences between ourselves
and our allies, and to put us in the position of
seeming to be against peace.

To frustrate this strategy is not only a matter
for our Government, but is a matter for all of us.
Our Government seeks to make our position clear
before the world and to maintain with our allies
the closest association which grows out of our com-
mon interests in peace and progress. But it is also
the obligation of all of us who participate in these
public discussions to speak responsibly and soberly
in order that we may not unwittingly further the
Soviet purpose of isolating us.

And there is another point which we need to take
into account in thinking about the Soviet rulers.

We usually talk about the rulers of the Soviet
Union as though they were always well infonned,
always cool-headed, always calculating.

But this may not always be the case. Soviet
agents may report back what thej^ think their su-
periors would like to hear. Soviet leaders may
deceive not only their people but themselves by
the very intensity of their propaganda. They
may be blinded to actual conditions in the outside
world by the rigidity of their theory.

And, what is even more dangerous, as men who
are playing a desperate game of power and of fear,
they are subject to being rattled.

This injects an element which we must also have
in mind. It requires us to make our meaning and
our peaceful purposes plain and to talk, to act
seriously and deliberately.

I firmly believe that the program of action in
the Far East which I have discussed with you to-
night, together with the tremendous effort which
is being made to build up strength in Europe and
in other parts of the world, will overcome the ob-
stacles created by Soviet policy and will carry us
forward toward the kind of world in which we can
live in peace.

But to steer a course through these tense and
dangerous times requires, more than any other
kind of strength, the strength of character of the
American people.

New and heavy responsibilities have fallen to
our nation in this century. We are a young coun-
try, but the responsibilities that go with tremen-
dous power now rest in our hands. The people
of the world look to us for cooperative leadership.

The act of leadership is shared by every citizen
of this nation. To perform it in a way which will
lift from our shoulders the threat of war and
establish the conditions of peace will require the
support of a steadfast, of a mature, and of a
responsible public opinion.

This is the task before us in the days ahead.

April 30, 1957

687

Taking Stock of Inter-American Relations

hy Ambassador John C. Dreier

U.S. Representative on the Council

of the Organization of American States ^

There is a distinct value to the custom of desig-
nating a special day and week of the year for
the holding of Pan American celebrations. I do
not have in mind merely the opportunity which
this occasion affords to engage in a little well-
intentioned propaganda to increase the interest
in and knowledge of inter- American affairs.
This is indeed of real importance. However, I
have in mind also the value on the occasion, which
is afforded, to pause and take stock of inter- Amer-
ican relations at least once each year.

Like many other things that are an essential
part of our life but that do not happen to occupy
the center of the stage during this particular
scene in the drama of history, it is easy to take
inter-American relations for granted. This an-
nual holding of Pan American celebrations gives
us an ojiportunity to take stock of the facts of
the case.

Due in large measure to the fact that inter-
American relations are established on a pretty
sound basis as the result of decades of experience,
they do not basically change from year to year.
Startling innovations or world-shaking crises, to
which our jaded appetites have become accus-
tomed in the world-wide scene, are not apt to
originate in Latin America. Inter-American re-
lations are, however, vitally affected by the con-
stantly changing context of world affairs.
Although I^atin America is geographically some-
what remote from the main theatere of activity in
world events today, it would be a mistake to as-
sume that that area is effectively isolated. Re-
gional isolation is no more possible for Latin
America than it is for the United States. Inter-
Americanism nmst, therefore, at any given time,
be understood in the light of the world situation
of which it is a part-
Conditions in other areas of the world have a
powerful effect upon Latin America. Trade be-
tween Latin America and other areas, particu-

'An address made before tlie Pan American ScK'ioty of
Mass. and N. New England at Boston, Mass., on Apr. 18.

larly Europe, is of vital importance to both par-
ties. Ideas, too, overcome the barriers of geogra-
I)hy with sometimes alarming effectiveness.
Latin America, therefore, can never be considered
as effectively isolated against the spread of either
good or bad ideas.

World Events and U.S.-Latin American Relations

However, the world situation also exerts a strong
impact on Latin America through the influence
which it has upon the policy of the United States.
A brief look at histoi-y will indicate, for example,
the powerful influence of world events on United
States relations with Latin America.

AVlien, in the early days of the nineteenth cen-
tury, the young Republic of the United States of
America felt itself vulnerable to aggressive Euro-
pean designs, we paid especial attention to the
possibility of encouraging partners in independ-
ence among the Latin American colonies. When
tliose colonies threw off the bonds of Spanish im-
perialism, the United States was quick to recog-
nize their independence. Support of the political
independence of the new world states found its
culmination in the Monroe Doctrine in 1823. This
doctrine — in the formulation of which a great New
Englander, John Quincy Adams, played so im-
portant a role — constitutes a foundation stone
upon which much of our foreign policy has been
developed.

Again, in the 1930's, when the independence of
the new world was threatened by the expansion
of Nazi imperialism, a new era in inter- American
relations develoyied. The good-neighbor policy,
which was adopted by all the American Republics,
reaped its harvest in the cooperation of these
countries in World War II. One outstanding re-
sult of this cooperation was the development of
two great inter-American treaties which now form
the cornerstone of our Organization of American
States. I refer to the Inter-American Treaty of

688

Department of State Bulletin

Reciprocal Assistance, which was signed at Rio de
Janeiro in 1947 and the Charter of the Organiza-
tion of American States, signed at Bogota, Colom-
bia, in 1948.

Because tlie intensity of interest on the part of
the United States in Latin America has varied in
the light of the world situation and its demands
ujjon us, Latin Americans have sometimes criti-
cized the United States. It has been said that we
forget our friends when we no longer need them.
I would sa}', however, that by and large the re-
ports of this dearth of affection have been greatly
exaggerated. If M'e take an historical perspec-
tive, it will be clear, I believe, that the net gain
in the positive interest of the Government of the
United States in Latin America has been great,
particularly over the past two decades.

The change in the nature of United States in-
terest in Latin America, moreover, has been un-
questionably for the better. This, in turn, has
been in some measure due to the changing role of
the United States in the world at large.

At the end of the nineteenth century, the United
States emerged from the Spanish-American War
as a world power. There followed an era in
which the United States at times assumed the role
of a policeman in the Western Hemisphere.

Principles for Uniting Western Hemisphere

Today, as a result of experiences in the Western
Hemisphere and during two world wars, our ap-
proach to international relations presents a great
contrast. The United States now finds itself a
leader in a system of collective security in which
all states share the responsibility for the establish-
ment and maintenance of law among nations.
Committed to a policy of international coopera-
tion under the United Nations, the United States
has confirmed, in its world policy, principles
which were first developed with the other Ameri-
can Republics for the Western Hemisphere.

It is worthwhile to pause for a moment and
review some of these principles. They constitute
the very essence of inter- Americanism.

First is the recognition of the sovereign equality
of nations regardless of size and strength. All
nations in our inter-American system are equal
before the law.

Accordingly, we believe in the principle of non-
intervention which means that the strong have no
right to inflict their will upon the weak. The doc-
trine of nonintervention can be, and sometimes ap-
parently is, pushed to an unrealistic extreme in
inter-American debates. The validity of its fun-
damental thesis, however, cannot be questioned:
the supremacy of law over the unsanctioned use
of force.

Nonintervention requires for its effectiveness the
establishment of an adequate system of law to
which all nations can resort. Wlien the United
States felt impelled to appoint itself policeman

of the Caribbean 50 years ago, there appeared to
be no effective alternative. Today, there is in the
treaty of Rio de Janeiro and in the Charter of
the Organization of American States an effective
regional alternative whereby the community of
American states assumes, within the framework
of the United Nations, joint and common respon-
sibility for the maintenance of peace and security.
A fundamental principle of our inter-American
relations today is, therefore, the sharing of re-
sponsibility for the enforcement of law m order
that peace and justice may be maintained.

Finally, we have in inter-American relations
recognized the basic importance of cooperation in
the constructive phase of our common interests.
Mechanisms for the enforcement of peace and se-
curity among the American Republics are impor-
tant. Also of great significance, however, has been
the development of mechanisms of cooperation
whereby our American nations can help each other
tackle basic problems such as ignorance, disease,
and economic backwardness. In this area, too,
the sharing of responsibility is essential.

Although these ideas are not new, they are vital
and creative ideas. They are deeply imbedded in
our inter- American relations. They require con-
tinual reapplication in the light of the changing
world picture.

Let us stop a moment to take a brief look at the
situation in which we and our Latin American
neighbors find ourselves today. Certainly, the
dominating feature of the position of the United
States in the world today is our struggle with
Soviet communism. The issue is whether our in-
dependence and our way of life can be defended.
The Soviet machine has demonstrated its readiness
to use force to gain its will whenever that is deemed
necessary. So we, in turn, have had to marshal
resources of men and of things, both at home and
abroad, in a gigantic defense effort.

Wliat is the role and position of Latin America
in this situation? On the one hand, does Latin
America constitute an increased problem with re-
spect to Soviet imperialism ? On the other hand,
what does Latin America represent in the way of
a source of strength to the rest of the free world
in this critical hour?

First, from the military or strategic viewpoint :
In World War II, it was feared that an actual
invasion of South America by Nazi forces might
take place if the German and Italian armies were
able to occupy the western coast of Africa. Today
the danger of a large-scale military invasij^i of
South America by any potential foe seems rela-
tively small. In this one sense the geographical
remoteness of Latin America is a real advantage.

However, our foe in the present world struggle
does not rely upon the movement of military forces
alone. The ground is first made ready by ideologi-
cal penetration. To what extent, therefore, does
Latm America offer a fertile field for that type
of enemy invasion?

April 30, J 95 1

689

It would be impossible to give a categorical
answer. It is possible, however, to point out cer-
tain factors which weigh on each side of this
question.

On the one hand, the large majority of Latin
American Governments have taken a firm stand
against communism. By and large, the people of
Latin America went through much the same
process as people elsewhere during the postwar
period. Communist movements grew immediately
after the war. When, however, it became apparent
that Communist Parties were actually serving as
the weapons of a foreign power, opposing the
national interests of independent countries, popu-
lar support of communism declined markedly.
All but six countries have outlawed Communist
Parties, and those six, like the United States, have
chosen other means of combating the danger of
subversion. Established institutions in Latin
America are as a whole firmly opposed to Com-
munist influence.

On the other hand, one must not overlook the
fact that in many countries there are determined
groups of Communist followers, some of whom
have managed to work their way into positions of
influence on public affairs all out of proportion
to their numbers. Moreover, there exist in Latin
America conditions which require correction in
order to prevent the growth of communism. I
refer to the poverty among the working people ; to
the problems of poor housing, ill health, under-
nourishment, and ignorance with which progi-es-
sive forces in Latin America are wrestling. Unless
democracy as we understand it can demonstrate its
capacity to improve the lot of these millions, we
cannot rest assured that an alien philosophy, how-
ever false may be its promises, will not spread.
The translation of democratic principles into bet-
ter conditions of life in Latin America remains
a tremendous task of which those Governments
are acutely conscious. We may well bear this fact
in mind as we appraise inter- Americanism today.

There is, however, little doubt that Latin
America constitutes a great reservoir of support
for the rest of Western civilization. As our de-
fense program gets under way, in order to develop
both here and in other friendly countries a power
capable of resisting further aggression, we become
acutely aware of Latin America as an important
source of raw materials. Copper, tin, petroleum,
wool, hides, foodstuffs, and a host of other prod-
ucts are supplied in important measure by our
good neighbors to the south. A few weeks ago,
there arrived at Sparrow Point, near Baltimore,
Maryland, the first shipment of iron ore from
Venezuela, marking the beginning of what
promises to be a significant new import trade for
American industry.

Latin America therefore again looms as a major
source of strategic materials needed in increasing
amounts during the present world crisis by the
United States and otiier friendly countries.

Political cooperation among the American Re-
publics is also of great significance at this time.
In the United Nations the 20 votes of Latin
American countries have frequently exercised an
important influence on the decisions of the Gen-
eral Assembly. The interests of these 20 countries
in regard to economic and social affairs in the
United Nations often differ from those of the
United States. However, in the main political
and security issues involving resistance to Soviet-
inspired aggression, an identity of interest with
the United States is apparent.

Thirdly, we come to the question of manpower
and possible military assistance from Latin
America. The other day, announcement was made
of the fact that, for the first time in history, the
25opulation of Latin America appears to have ex-
ceeded that of the United States. Population ex-
peits tell us that this numerical superiority will
grow. The manpower in Latin America, there-
fore, can have an increasingly important bearing
on both economic and military affairs.

Although the financial burden of maintaining
large armies has been beyond the capacity of most
of the Latin American countries, the possibility
of working out arrangements wliei'eby the more
than 150 million people of Latin America can
assume a share of the military burden of defend-
ing the free world should be possible. The mili-
tary responsibilities which Latin America might
assume are particularly important with reference
to the defense of the continent, its productive en-
terprises, and transportation routes in case of an
attack on America. During World War II, ap-
l)roximately 75,000 United States troops were
required for those purposes in the Latin American
area.

The job of inter-American relations today is to
make effective arrangements whereby the human
and economic resources of all 21 Republics can
be utilized better for two specific ends : Fii"st,
to i-ealize the potential strength of the American
nations in the common effort to protect their peace
and security; and, second, to overcome the weak-
nesses and deficiencies which the American Re-
publics present today.

Collective Efforts Through the OAS

Fortunately, in the Organization of American
States, we have the machinery tlirough which we
can formulate common policies and e.xecute those
measures whicl\ require a collective effort.

The Organization of American States recently
look a major step in facing the world situation.
At the request ot the (iovernment of the I'nited
States there was convened at Washington on
Marcli 26 a meeting of Consultation of Ministers
of Foreign Affairs of the 21 American Republics.
Tlie statement issued by Secretary Acheson in re-
questing tliis meeting indicated its purpose. Scc-
retai'V Acheson said.

690

Department of State BuHet'in

The aggressive policy of international communism,
carried out tiirough its satellites, lias brought about a
situation in which the entire free world is threatened
. . . The United States, having embarked on urgent
mobilization for the common defense, wishes to consult
Its fellow members in the inter-Auierican community with
respect to the situation which we all face and on the
coordination of the common effort required to meet it.

Tlie Government of the United States, in ac-
cordance witli established procedure, also proposed
subjects for discussion at the meeting of consulta-
tion. The proposals of the United States were
reviewed by the Council of the Organization of
American States meeting in Washington, and all
of the member governments had an opportunity
to make suggestions regarding the agenda. The
program which emerged from this procedure cov-
ered three main topics: Political and military
cooperation; the problem of internal security of
the American states against subversive activities ;
and third, emergency economic cooperation. The
results of the meeting of Foreign Ministers, which
came to a close on April 7, indicate the answer
of inter-Americanism to the present world
situation.

The interest in the meeting of Foreign Min-
isters throughout Latin America was intense.
Twenty of the Foreign Ministers, including Sec-
retary Acheson, attended in person, the otheiHaeing
represented by his Ambassador in Washington.
Judging from news articles and editorials appear-
ing in newspapers of Latin America, public opin-
ion followed the discussion in Washington witli
constant interest.

Although differences in some areas of discus-
sions appeared at first to be large, as the meeting
got under way, the Foreign Ministers rapidly
found a common ground in all subjects. In the
final count, the 31 resolutions were approved with
no contrary votes, only a few abstentions being
recorded on relatively unimportant matters. The
meeting ended with a very genuine feeling of
satisfaction on all sides that the principles of
cooperation and of inter-American solidarity had
again demonstrated their ability to cope success-
fully with differences of national interest.

In the political and military field, the meeting
of Foreign Ministers first made clear its general
approach to the problems with which it dealt.
Resolution No. I, called the Declaration of Wash-
ington, declared the firm determination of the
American Republics to remain steadfastly united,
both spiritually and materially, in the present
emergency or in the face of any aggression or
threat against any one of them. The Foreign
Ministers reaffirmed the faith of their countries
in the principles set forth in the Charter of the
Organization of American States and expressed
their conviction of the necessity for strong support
of the action of the United Nations as the most
effective means of maintaining the peace, security
and well-being of the peoples of the world.

The Foreign Ministers gave specific endorse-
ment to the resolution adopted by the General

Assembly of the United Nations last fall called
Uniting for Peace and recommended that each
American Republic should review its resources and
give particular attention to the development of
necessary armed forces which could promptly be
made available for the defense of the hemisphere
and for service as United Nations units.

On the question of continental defense with
which it was more directly concerned, the meeting
built upon the treaty of Rio de Janeiro. The For-
eign Ministers recommended that the American
Republics orient their military preparation in such
a way as to give increased emphasis to the prin-
ciple of collective defense. They instructed the
Inter-American Defense Board to prepare, on this
basis, the necessary military defense plans for re-
view by the Governments.

In order to emphasize the peaceful purposes of
their cooperation, the Foreign Ministers reaffirmed
the obligations of their respective countries to set-
tle disputes by peaceful means. They pointed out
that the faithful observance by their countries of
these commitments would make it possible for each
of them to concentrate its defensive preparations
upon tasks required for a collective system of com-
mon defense.

The subject of internal security against sub-
versive activities posed a dual problem for the
American Foreign Ministers. On the one hand,
it was recognized that measures of control must
be studied and prepared in order to prevent the
abuse of freedom by individuals and groups work-
ing on behalf of the Soviet-controlled Communist
movement. On the other hand, it must be made
clear that democracy could not be made effective
by police measures alone but that it required a
revitalization of the faith of the American peoples
in democracy and an assurance that controls were
not directed against any political minorities other
than those working in the service of an external
power threatening the security of the Americas.

Under this item of the agenda, therefore, the
Foreign, Ministers adopted resolutions calling for
a more effective exercise of representative democ-
racy, social justice, and observance of the rights
of men. They called for renewed efforts nation-
ally and internationally not only to realize more
effectively the political rights which we hold im-
portant but also to improve the social and eco-
nomic conditions of life throughout the Americas.

In the sphere of controlling subversive activi-
ties themselves, the Foreign Ministers gave special
attention to the need for each country to review
its laws and regulations, with particular reference
to the agents of international communism and their
travel and communication across national bound-
aries. They also directed that a careful study be
made by technical experts of possible means for
more effective prevention of sabotage and other
subversive acts. These studies will be made availa-
ble to the individual Governments for their assist-
ance in developing their respective systems of
control.

April 30, 1 95 1

691

The largest number of resolutions were sub-
mitted under the economic topics on the agenda.
It was indicative of the spirit of cooperation and
constructire effort displayed by the members of
the meeting that the economic group worked until
3 o'clock one morning and until 6 o'clock another
morning in order to complete its task by the sched-
uled date of adjournment.

Many of the issues discussed in the economic
field arose from fears on the part of some of the
other countries that their requirements and inter-
ests would be overlooked in the large-scale de-
fense program which the United States and its
other allies were undertaking. Some were con-
cerned lest their efforts at economic development
and the improvement of living standards be
stranded for lack of materials from our defense
economy. They sought some guaranty against
unilateral action by the United States in matters
which were of vital import to their economic wel-
fare and even to their political stability. United
States representatives, of course, urged that top
priority be accorded to the requirements of the
defense program and that production of strategic
materials be expanded. By the constant exercise
of good will, fairness, and mutual understanding,
these problems were dealt with to the satisfaction
of all parties.

The Foreign Ministers recommended that the
American Republics should adopt measures for
increasing the production and processing of basic
and strategic materials required for the defense
emergency and for the essential civilian needs and
public services. They suggested certain arrange-
ments to be agreed upon as needed by the various
Governments to facilitate the achievement of this
objective.

The Foreign Ministers resolved that the essen-
tial needs for the operation of civilian economic
activities should be met and that, when shortages
of goods required the adoption of a system of
allocation, the principle of relative equality of
sacrifice should apply. The imposition of con-
trols should be coupled with an ample opportunity
for consultative arrangements among interested
Governments concerning the effect of allocations,
priorities, and price controls on international
trade.

In the area of price controls, the Foreign Min-
isters emphasized the necessity for controlling
inflation and advocated an opportunity for
intergovernmental discussion of price-control
measures. They urged that price-control systems
should apply equally to imports and exports, to
the prices of raw materials as well as to those of
manufactured products. With respect to policies
governing price controls during tlie emergency
period, they agreed that there should be taken into
account the desirability of establishing in inter-
national commerce an equitable relationship be-
tween the price of raw materials and manufac-
tured goods.

692

. Considerable attention was given to the eco-
nomic development of underdeveloped countries j
which the Ministers declared to be an essential fac-
tor in the total concept of hemisphere defense.
They resolved that programs for economic develop-
ment should be pursued with even greater vigor,
giving special priority to projects which would
contribute to defense purposes, or satisfy basic
civilian requirements.

In summary, I would be inclined to point to the
following main factors :

First, the meeting set forth basic policies in all
of the most important areas of the problem which
the present world situation poses for the inter-
American system. These main policias are em-
bodied in the final act containing more than 30
resolutions.^

Second, the meetmg proved the value of the ±
procedure of consultation. So long as people in ^
responsible positions of different Governments
can deal only separately and at long distance with
each other, they can gain only a limited under-
standing of the over-all problem in which each
one plays but a single part. Questions are bound
to be clarified when representatives of all Gov-
ernments meet together for a frank discussion.
The Foreign Ministers of the Americas may now
feel that they have had a far greater opportunity
to understand the situation facing their countries.
This increasing measure of certainty is in itself
an advantage.

Third, the meeting of consultation gave renewed
faith in the principles of the inter- American sys-
tem. At various times during the discussions, it
was obvious that a force greater than the purely
national interest of each country was at work.
That force was the tradition of inter-American
cooperation which led individual Governments to
subordinate their national interests to the achieve-
ment of a common goal.

At the same time, it was clearly understood by
all those attending the meeting that the adoption
of resolutions was, as Secretary Acheson said in
his closing remarks, not the end of the task but
the beginning. The test of the meeting of For-
eign Ministers and the system of inter-American
cooperation wliich it typifies will be in the effec-
tiveness with which the recommendations of the
Foreign Ministers are carried out. This will re-
quire, of course, an even greater degi'ee of good
will, of determination, and of a sense of common
purpose.

Aluch will depend also upon the degree to which,
as time go on, the peoples of the Americas increase
their understanding of the world situation with
which they are faced. On the part of the people
of the United States, there is need for a greater
comprehension of the problems and of the aspira-
tions of the Latin American people. Living under
a different set of circumstances, far less favored

' For text, see Bulletin of Apr. IG, 1951, p. 606.

Department of State Bulletin

with the material benefits which we enjoy, the
people of Latin America naturally view the future
in somewhat different terms. They see as an over-
whelming need the improvement of living condi-
tions for their people. They aspire to a greater
economic independence in the woi'ld, and, to this
end, they seek greater industrialization.

In the face of their own pressing tasks, prob-
lems of Asia and Europe seem remote indeed to
many Latin Americans. Yet, in order to fulfill
their share in the cooperative enterprise on which
they and we have embarked in the Organization
of American States and tlie United Nations, Latin
Americans must also gain a greater understanding
of tlie problems which we in tlie United States face.
They must appreciate the significance of American
lives being sacrificed in foreign lands to keep the

Americas free. As their minds bridge the geo-
graphical distance between their shores and the
areas where aggression is taking place against the
free world, tliey will realize more clearly that
no part of America — North, Central, or South —
can live in cloistered separation from world events.
Progress toward this greater understanding was
certainly made on both sides at the meeting of
Foreign Ministers. It is now up to those who have
the interests of inter-American cooperation at
heart to see that this understanding grows among
the peoples of all the American Republ ics. Inter-
American cooperation requires at all times a gen-
uine identity of interest among the peoples of our
21 Republics. And for inter- Americanism to live,
it must continue to bear a living and conscious
relationship to the world to which it is a part.

How Should the American Republics Face the Economic Problems of Today?

Statement hy WiUard L. Thorp, Assistant Secretary for lEconomdc A fairs ^

We are faced with a clear and present danger,
and we have no choice except to build our defenses.
This means simply that we must devote whatever
energy and resources are required to the task of
rearmament. Unhappily, once again we in the
free world must look to our military strength to
insure the preservation of our fundamental
institutions.

But, building military sti'ength is not our only
goal. Even more basic is the objective that the
civilization which we seek to preserve should be-
come more and more responsive to the needs and
aspirations of mankind. We must make ever more
worthy that which we undertake to defend.

These are great and difficult tasks. No one of
our countries alone can protect itself nor can it
build its future by itself. We must put our ener-
gies, our abilities, and our economic resources into
the common effort in order that each of us may
continue to develop and grow in ways of life con-
forming to our ideals. Tlie strength of the whole
is much greater than the strength of its parts.
We can meet the challenge if we meet it together.

In no area does the emergency raise as many
difficult questions as in the economic field. The
vast new military production effort necessitates
many readjustments, and perhaps the most diffi-

' Made on Mar. 27 in Committee III of the Fourth Meet-
ing of Consultation of Ministers of Foreigu Affairs of
American States. The U.S. draft resolutions were printed
in the Buixetin of Apr. 16, 1951, p. 614 ; however, space did
not permit including Mr. Thorp's statement in that issue.

cult part of our task lies in the working out of
appropriate economic arrangements and policies
both within and among our countries, and also
with other countries of the free world.

The Questions Before Us

The specific questions we are called upon to deal
with in this Committee can, I think, be summed
up about as follows: What common steps are re-
quired for us to build up most rapidly and effec-
tively our defensive military strength? How,
while doing so, can we best meet the requirements
of our civilian populations for goods and services?
How can we maintain our economies on an even
keel ? How can we reconcile the requirements of
the defense program with the aspirations of all
our countries for improved standards of living and
for further economic development?

These are the questions to which we must find
the answers. They are more than questions. They
are challenges. By accepting them as such, we
will go a long way toward meeting them.

In thinking about these problems, I am sure
that many of us are tempted to recall the ex-
periences we all went through during World War
II and to seek solutions from the history of the
war years. The lessons of wartime can certainly
be of use to us, but I am sure that we will be mak-
ing a serious mistake if we try to apply them too
closely to our present situation. For there is an
important difference between the objectives we

April 30, 1 95 1

693

now seek ami the objectives we saii^rht then, and
there are marked clianges between tne world eco-
nomic situation as it was then and the economio
conditions which exist today.

I should like to discuss these points a bit further.

Our Objective

First, it is clearly not the objective of the free
world to enter upon that full-scale economic mo-
bilization which is necessary for the actual carry-
ing on of war. It is true that this may be foi'ced
upon us if the Kremlin persists in a course of ag-
gression. But our purpose now is to discourage
the aggressor. Our purpose is to prevent war. We
in the free world hope to do this by building
around oui-selves a military shield of sufficient
toughness to deter aggression and to create behind
that shield an expanding and dynamic economy
which can serve both the purposes of peace and
the purposes of war if war should be forced
upon us.

This is a goal that is both easier and more diffi-
cult than we faced before. It is easier because it
will not require that we devote as much of our
total energies to military production as we did in
wartime. It is more difficult because it depends
upon maintaining in peacetime a resolute and un-
wavering determination that the defensive shield
be forged quickly and that, once it is forged, it
be kept strong over as many years as may be neces-
sary, perhaps for an indefinite period.

Our Capacity

If the task be less today because it is not the
task of full war mobilization, it is also easier be-
cause of our present economic potential. We in
the free world have much greater economic ca-
pacity today than we had before the last war.

In the United States, the total output of the
economy — that is, the gross national product — for
the last quarter of 1950 ran at the rate of 300 bil-
lion dollars per year. We are achieving this out-
put on the basis of an average work week of less
than 42 hours. If we adjust this figure for
changes in the price level, such an annual rate of
the gross national product of the United States
is about 60 percent greater than in 1940. The in-
dex of our industrial production is more than 70
percent above the 1940 average. Our civilian la-
bor force has grown by more than 7,000,000
workers in the last 10 years, from 55,000,000 in
1940 to r).'5,000,000 in 1950. We are today produc-
ing, without substantial strain, somewhat more
than we were producing, under the greatest strain,
during tlie wartime years of peak production.

In the other American Republics, we also see
great economic advances. In the last 10 years, it
is estimated that the national income in various
Latin American countries has increased by per-
centages rangii\g fi'oni 'JH percent to more than

60 percent. Industrial output for the region as
a whole has doubled in this period.

In Canada, our neighbor to the north, output
has grown by almost one-third during the last
decade, from 13.6 billion to 17.7 billion dollars,
Canadian dollars, in current prices.

In Western Europe, economic recovery from the
devastation of war is all but complete. Real
output, even on a per capita basis, is substantially
higher than it was at the beginning of World War
II. By the end of 1950, the countries of Western
Europe had increased the physical volume of their
industrial production by 42 percent above the
level achieved in 1938.

So that today, we in the free world can begin
the hard and disagreeable, but necessary, task of
rebuilding our military defenses with the knowl-
edge that we start from a stronger economic base,
with greater productive capacity, greater man-
power, and enhanced skills to carry us forward.

In part, because we have a greater capacity to
produce, we will need to devote less of it to build
our defensive military shield than we spent for
military purposes during World AVar II. Again
turning to statistics for the United States, during
the wartime years of peak production, 45 percent
of our gross national product went for military
purposes, whereas by the end of 1951 we expect ,■
that about 18 percent of our gross national prod- 11
net will go for the purpose of security. Assum-
ing that we are successful in our objective of
preventing war and barring a further serious de-
terioration in the international situation, the per-
centage of output going into military production
is not likely to become greatly higher than this
figure. In spite of the burden of armament pro-
duction, the production for civilian consumption
at home and abroad should, therefore, be at a sub-
stantially higher level than that of the wartime
years. It must be recognized, however, that un-
less and >uitil new capacity becomes available,
certain segments of industry, where the impact of
military production is felt most directly, will of
necessity have to curtail their output for civilian
consumption.

There are other differences between today's eco-
nomic situation and that prevailing during the
war period, which will necessarily affect our in-
ternational economic relationships.

During the war, the countries of Latin America
were almost whollj' cut off from sources of supply
in Western P^urope. The continent of Europe
after 1940 was in enemy hands. The export trade
of the United Kingdom was drastically curtailed.
The United States, which had supplied about one-
third of Latin America's im])orts before the war,
and Canada, became virtually the sole suppliers
of the goods required to maintain the economies
of the other American Republics.

Today, Western Europe has again become an
important source for the industrial and other
commodities nuiking up the im[)ort trade of the

694

Department of State Bulletin

Latin American countries. In 1947, the export
trade of the countries participating in the Organi-
zation for European Economic Cooperation, ex-
chiding intra-European trade, amounted to only
75 percent of their exports during the prewar year
1938. During 1948, trie prewar level was reached
and, in 1949, was slightly exceeded. By the end
of 1950, Western European exports had increased
to 60 percent above the 1938 level.

Again, there is more shipping available today
to carry the connnerce of the free world and the
trade routes are free of the submarine menace.
During World War II, shipping space was the
scarcest commodity on the market and, even when
goods were available, they could not always be
moved.

All of these are comforting comparisons to
make. They are mainly useful because they help
us to set our sights and steer our course with
confidence.

The Task Ahead

The facts about our increased capacity do not
mean that we can preserve our liberties without
economic sacrifice. Our levels of consumption
have greatly increased since the end of the war.
Our civilian populations cannot continue to con-
sume all they produce and still build tanks, planes,
and guns. There is no way in which we in the free
world can build our military defenses without
economic pain. We must bear the costs as tax-
payers and as consumers. All of us will have to
do with less than we would like. But, if we are
successful in deterring aggression and avoiding
war, we will be substantially better off, even with
these cuts, than we were during World War II.
Many of our luxuries and some of our comforts
and conveniences may have to go, but we should
have more of the essentials which we need than
we had before.

This, then, is not the mobilization for war of
1943-44. But neither is it "business as usual." It
is a time for soberness and sacrifice, as well as a
time for keeping our progressive goals steadily
before us and alive in our minds. It is a time for
sharpening our ^words to defend our homes as we
go about the task of making those homes better
places to live in.

We can view the period ahead of us with con-
fidence, if we also approach it with determination.
We have the productive powers, the skills, and
the economic resources. We must develop the
economic programs and policies which are neces-
sary to deploy our total resources so as to build
our military defenses, sustain our essential civilian
economic activities, and move forward as circum-
stances permit toward further economic growth
and social progress. These policies and programs
should be designed to encourage a greater output
of basic materials and foods ; provide for the effec-
tive and equitable international distribution of
scarce goods in support of the defense effort and

April 30, 1 95 1

of civilian economies; hold in check the inflation-
ary pressures which threaten our economic sta-
bility ; and press forward with programs of tech-
nical cooperation and economic development
within the limitations imposed by the emergency.

Again, these are common tasks, to which all of
us must make our full contribution, each according
to his abilities and circumstances. A major pur-
pose of this meeting of our Foreign Ministers
nuist be to forge our wills to these ends and make
known to the world our joint purpose and
determination.

I should like to turn now to a number of specific
economic problems which we face. These are all
problems which have been in the minds of many
of us for a long time. They have been discussed
in international meetings and in single speeches.
They have been discussed in aide-memoires and in
the communications of diplomats. Many of the
things which I shall say have been said before by
many of you or by your representatives. I have
tried to approach these problems not from the
point of view of a single country but as a consensus
of the thinking, so far as I know it, of all the coun-
tries here represented.

Requirements and Supplies

First, I must speak about the problem of phys-
ical commodities— copper and cotton, coffee and
automobiles, manganese and machine tools — the
raw materials and the manufactured goods which
are the lifeblood of any economy.

One of the most serious limiting factors affect-
ing the ability of the free world to build its de-
fenses and supply its civilian populations is the
shortage of basic materials. The availability of
materials, more than any other single thing, will
determine how quickly we can strengthen our mili-
tary defense and how well we can supply the man-
ufactured goods, both durable and nondurable,
upon which our civilian populations depend. All
of us, I am sure, are aware of the recent spectacular
increases in the prices of many of these materials
which are so vitally important to the economies
of all of us. No one is to blame for these price
increases. They are simply the result which one
gets when demand outruns supply. They are a
measure of the fact of shortage. We, the Govern-
ments of the American Republics, and the Govern-
ments of other free world countries, will be at fault
if we do not cooperate to bring this situation under
control.

It is essential that we do our utmost to increase
production. The American Republics are among
the world's most important producers of the basic
materials which supply the factories of the free
world. It is appropriate, therefore, that they
should take the lead in this effort. We are aware
that the stimulation of production of basic mate-
rials for emergency purposes may encounter dif-
ficulties unless the producei-s of these materials
can look forward to adequate and fair compensa-

695

tion for their efforts and can be assured of a mar-
ket for their increased output over a reasonable
period in the future. One approach which the
Government of the United States is prepared to
follow is to cooperate with the other American
Eepublics in providing financial assistance, on
reasonable terms, where such assistance is neces-
sary to increase output needed in the common
defense. It is also prepared, where necessary, to
cooperate in the conclusion of medium or long-
term undertakings for the purchase of basic ma-
terials at reasonable prices.

Unfortunatey, it is clear that, despite efforts to
increase production, there will still be shortages.
At the manufacturing level, the immediate require-
ments of military production will necessitate the
curtailment of civilian production. The curtail-
ment may be severe in some particular items. None
of us, during this period of building up our com-
mon defenses, will be able to have everything we
want to satisfy the needs and desires of our civilian
populations. It will often be necessary for our
Governments to place limits on various forms of
civilian production and consumption and, to a
substantial degree, to direct and channel the flow
of goods in international trade.

How, then, shall we go about determining the
best way in which to share the limited supply of
goods that is available ?

Two points, I think, are clear. First, we must
give highest priority to the requirements for mili-
tary production in our common defense. Second,
we must stand ready to meet the minimum require-
ments for the maintenance of essential civilian
supply in our respective countries and in the free
world. Military strength can be effective only if
it is firmly and squarely based on strong and
healthy economies.

Military production and essential civilian
needs — these are the twin urgencies which must
have a prior claim on our economic resources.
With respect to less essential civilian requirements,
each country should make its full contribution in
reducing consumption, and the principle of rela-
tive equality of sacrifice among countries should
prevail.

We must also take steps to see that we do not
strengthen the hand of aggressors or potential ag-
gressors by making available to them goods of
strategic significance or by depriving the coun-
tries of the free world of the goods which they
need.

Many of these matters, which I have been dis-
cussing, will appear in the form of individual
actions by one country or another. But that is not
enough. In the case of key commodities, we have
already begun the development of international
machinery througli the establishment in Washing-
ton of the Interiuitional Materials Conference.
'Jlie International Materials Conference, consist-
ing of a series of International Materials Commit-
tees and a Central Group, is designed to provide
an organization through which all of the coun-

696

tries of the free world having an interest in certain
commodities, whether as producer or consumer,
can cooperate in bringing about a sensible dis-
tribution of materials in short supply, in stimulat-
ing their production, and in agreeing to reduce
their consumption for nonessential or less essen-
tial purposes. The Organization of American
States is a member of the permanent Central
Group and, as such, plays an important role in its
deliberations. The Governments of Brazil and of
the United States are also members of the Central |i
Group. Other Governments of the American Ee- "
publics are represented on the several committees
relating to specific commodities. Countries which
are not members of particular committees will be
afforded a full opportunity to present their views
to the committees and will be kept informed as
to the work of the committees as it proceeds.

The commodity problems of which I have been
speaking are interrelated. Obviously, there will
be situations in which some one country will be
tempted to seek its own advantage at the expense
of the common effort. However, cooperation can-
not be turned on and off in accordance with short-
run gain or loss. Our cooperation should be built
solidly upon a continuing spirit of common pur-
pose, common need, and common sacrifice. Our
aim should be to conserve and develop the economic
strength of all of us.

Control of Inflation

One of the greatest economic dangers we face is
the threat of inflation. If we place unlimited and
uncontrolled demands upon our economic re-
sources, we shall multiply manifold the costs of
our defense program and imdermine our basic
economic stability.

Here again cooperation and concerted action
among the American Eepublics is called for.
Each of us must be willing to adopt and enforce,
both within our own countries and internationally,
the stern measures which may be necessary if run-
away inflationary tendencies are to be kept under _
control. For all of our countries, this will mean ||
appropriate internal fiscal, credit and tax policies
to recluce excessive requirements for goods of
which there is no longer an abundance. For others
of us, it will also mean some form of direct control
over the prices of goods.

As you know, the United States has already
adopted controls over prices, both for goods en-
tering into international trade and for goods con-
sumed domestically. Our price controls have been
introduced at a time which, when comparetl with
])ast periods, is highly favorable to countries which
trade with the United States. In other words, the
base period selected for the price control is one in
which the prices of goods which the United States
imports are high in relation to the prices of goods
which the United States sells abroad. The index
of unit values in the foreign trade of the United
States (1936-38 equals 100) shows that, during

Department of State Bvlletin

December 1950, the unit value of our imports stood
at 276, whereas the unit vahie of our exports was
195. This is certainly a wide price diti'erential.

The price controls which now exist over exports
fi-om the United States can be of substantial bene-
fit to the other American Republics in the fight
against inflation. But this benefit can easily be
wasted and dissipated if parallel measures are not
taken in tiie importing countries to prevent specu-
lative price rises for tliese same conunodities after
they liave left our shores. We sec in this one il-
lustration, therefore, an important opportunity for
the American Republics to concert their eftorts
against inflation, so that the actions of each of
them will supplement and reenforce the actions
of the others.

Price controls necessarily have an impact on in-
ternational trade flows, on income from goods pro-
duced and sold, and on competitive relationships.
Certain basic principles seem to be the subject of
general agreement. It should be tlie aim to man-
age such price controls as are adopted so as to
achieve their central purpose of stabilization while
stimulating the production and flow of goods into
desirable channels. Price control systems should
apply equally to raw materials and manufactui-ed
goods. If imposed on imports, they should also
be extended to exports. They should not be de-
signed to favor domestic producers or to discrimi-
nate against producers in other countries. These
are principles by which we can be sure that price
controls will be just and equitable in our inter-
national dealings with each other.

international Consultation

The emergency economic controls which we
must adopt in defense of our liberties will, of
course, give rise to many knotty problems and diffi-
culties among our countries on which there will
frequently be differences of view. The only true
solvent for these problems is full and frank con-
sultation among us. I am sure that the Govern-
ment of the United States is no different from the
other countries represented here when I say that
we are prepared at all times to consult fully with
each and all of the other American Republics in
seeking the right answers to tliese problems in the
light of our common purposes and our historical
relationship of mutual friendship. The urgen-
cies of the defense program and the large num-
ber of countries involved will not always permit
international consultation to go forward before it
becomes necessary for a particular government to
impose emergency controls. Even in such cases,
however, consultation can often lead to appropri-
ate adjustments so that hardships can be lightened
and inequities removed.

Economic Development and Technical Cooperation

These, then, are the emergency problems we
face — how to increase the production of basic

April 30, 195?

942358 — 51 3

materials and use them best in the common de-
fense ; how to go about the allocation of goods in
short supply ; how to avoid giving strengtlr to ag-
gressors and potential aggressors; how to keep
down inflation and maintain our economic sta-
bility; and how to resolve the differences which
may arise among us.

But what about the role of economic develop-
ment during this emergency period? Do the
urgencies of defense mean that we must forego
all progress toward a better life — that we must
shelve for the time being all our plans for im-
proving our health, our education, our industrial
and agricultural organizations, our working con-
ditions, our standards of living?

The answer, I think, is clearly, "No." Eco-
nomic development of the underdeveloped regions
of the free world is not a luxury. It cannot be
made a casualty of the defense program. Like
our other free institutions, it is part and parcel of
the way of life in the free worm which we are de-
termined to defend.

But neither can we, in this critical time, have
all of the economic development that we would
wish to have. Like the other aspects of our eco-
nomic life, it too must be made subject to neces-
sary limitations and priorities.

Let us, then, press forward with our programs
of economic development and technical coopera-
tion, advancing them as best we can, subject only
to the higher priorities which we must give to the
needs of military production and the essential re-
quirements of our civilian economies. In this
effort, we should give emphasis to those programs
which will stimulate the production of food and
of basic materials, raise nutritional standards, re-
duce the incidence of disease, and improve labor
standards and working conditions.

There is, I think, one thing that all of us can
do immediately which would stand both as a
symbol and as a concrete demonstration of our
intention to move forward in the field of economic
development. I refer to the need for supporting
the Technical Cooperation Program for 1951,
which has already been approved by the Council
of the Oi'ganization of American States. This
program, even though of moderate proportions,
is being held up for lack of national contributions
from the various American Republics. I hope
that all our Governments will find it possible to
contribute their funds promptly so that this
worthwhile program will not be delayed.

Draft Resolutions

In my remarks today, I have, I believe, touched
on each of the main economic problems with which
we have been called upon to deal. The United
States delegation has prepared and distributed to
the Conference a series of draft resolutions on
these various points. These resolutions are the
product of many consultations between my Gov-
ernment and other Governments here represented.

697

They also reflect much of the work and discussion
which have gone into the excellent technical report
prepared for us by the Inter-American Economic
and Social Council. In drawing up these resolu-
tions, the United States delegation has sought to
put forward a set of principles and policies which
would reflect our common aspirations and meet
our common problems. It is our hope, therefore,
that they will facilitate the work of the Conference
in expressing the agreement of all of us as to the
economic policies which should guide us in the
difficult, yet hopeful, years ahead.

not specifically authorized by him to go or to remain
thereon.

§ 19.13 Possession and control of vessels. The Gov-
ernor may supervise and control the movement of any
vessel and shall lake full or partial possession or control
of any vessel or any part thereof, within the Canal Z<me
whenever it apears to him that such action is necessary
in order to secure such vessel from damage or injury, or
to prevent damage or injui'y to any vessel or waterfront
facility or waters of the Canal Zone, or to secure the
observance of rights and obligations of the United ,1
States. II

§ 19.16 Assistance of other agencies. The Governor
may enlist the aid and cooperation of Federal and private
agencies to assist In the enforcement of regulations issued
pursuant to this part.

Regulations Relating to the
Safeguarding of Vessels, Harbors,
Ports, and Waterfront Facilities in
the Canal Zone^

By virtue of the authority vested in me by Public Law
679, 81st Congress, 2d Session, approved August 9, 1950,
which amended section 1, Title II of the act of June 15,
1917, 40 Stat. 220 (50 U.S.C. 191), and as President of
tlie United States, I hereby find that the security of the
United States is endangered by reason of subversive ac-
tivity, and I hereby prescribe the following regulations
relating to the safeguarding against destruction, loss, or
Injury from sabotage or other subversive acts, accidents,
or other causes of similar nature, of vessels, harbors,
ports, and waterfront facilities in the Canal Zone, and
all territory and water in the Canal Zone, and the said
regulations shall constitute Part 19, Title 35 of the Code
of Federal Regulations ; and all agencies and authorities
of the Government of the United States shall, and all
persons are urged to, support, conform to, and assist in
the enforcement of these regulations and all supplemental
regulations issued pursuant thereto :

DEFINITIONS

§ 19.1 Governor. "Governor" as used in this part,
means the Governor of The Panama Canal.

§ 19.2 Wateriront facility. "Waterfront facility" as
used in this part, means all piers, wharves, docks. Canal
locks, and similar structures to which vessels may be
secured, buildings on such structures or contiguous to
them, and equipment and materials on such structures or
in such buildings.

GENERAI, PE0VISI0N8

§ 19.5 Enforcement. The rules and regulations in this
part shall be enforced by the Governor through such
officers, employees, or agencies as he may designate.

§ 19.10 Preventing access of persons, articles or things
to vessels or waterfront facilities. The Governor may
prevent any person, article or thing from boarding or
being taken on board any vessel or entering or being taken
into any waterfront facility when he deems that the
presence of such person, article or thing would be inimi-
cal to the purposes set forth in § 19.13.

§ 19.12 Visitation and search. The Governor may
cause to be inspected and searched at any time any
vessel or waterfront facility or any person, article or
thing thereon, within the Canal Zone, may place guards
upon any such vessel and waterfront facility and may
remove therefrom any or all persons, articles or things

' Ex. Or. 10226, Fed. Reg. 2683.

IDENTIFICATION AND EXCLUSION OF PERSONS FEOM VESSELS
AND WATERFRONT FACILITIES

§ 19.20 Access to vessels and waterfront facilities.
Any person on board any vessel or any person seeking
access to any vessel or any waterfront facility within the
Canal Zone may be required to carry identification cre-
dentials issued by or otherwise satisfactory to the Gov-
ernor. The Governor may define and designate those
categories of vessels and areas of the waterfront wherein
such credentials are required.

§19.22 Identification credentials. The identification
credential to be used by the Governor shall be known as
the Canal Zone Port Security Card, and the form of such
credential, and the conditions and the manner of its
issuance shall be as prescribed by the Governor. The
Governor shall not issue a Canal Zone Port Security Card
if he is satisfied that the character and habits of life of
the applicant therefor are such as to authorize the belief
that the presence of such individual on board a vessel or
within a waterfront facility would be inimical to the
security of the United States. The Governor shall revoke
and require the surrender of a Canal Zone Port Security
Card when he is no longer satisfied that tlie holder is
entitled thereto. The Governor may recognize for the
same purpose such other credentials as he may desig-
nate in lieu of the Canal Zone Port Security Card.

§ 19.24 Appeals. Persons who are refused employment
or who are refused the issuance of documents or who are
required to surrender such documents, under this part,
shall have the right of appeal, and the Governor shall
appoint a Board for acting on such appeals. Such Board
sliall, so far as practicable, include one member drawn
from management, and one member drawn from labor.
The Board shall consider each appeal brought before It
and, in recommending final action to the Governor, shall
insure the appellant all fairness consistent with the
safeguarding of the national security.

SUPEEVISION AND CONTROL OF EXPLOSIVES
OB OTHER DANGEROUS CARGO

§ 19.26 General supervision and control. The Gov-
ernor may supervise and control the transportation,
handling, loading, discharging, stowage, or storage of
explosives, inflammable or combustible liquids in bulk,
or other dangerous articles or cargo covered by the regu-
lations entitled "Regulations for the Transportation of
Hazardous Cargoes in Canal Zone Waters" (35 CFR
sections 4.106-4.127).

§ 19.28 Approval of facility for dangerous cargo. The
Governor may designate waterfront facilities for the han-
dling and storage of, and for vessel loading and discharg-
ing, explosives, inflammable or combustible li(iuids in
bulk, or other dangerous articles or cargo covered by
the regulations referred to in § 19.26, and may require
the owners, operators, masters, and others concerned to
secure permits for handling, storage, loading, and unload-
ing from the Governor, conditioned upon the fulfillment
of such requirements for the safeguarding of such water-
front facilities and vessels as the Governor may prescribe.

698

Department of Stale Bulletin

SABOTAGE AND SUBVERSIVE ACTIVITY

§ 19.32 Reporting of sabotage and suhversive activity.
Evidence of sabotage or subversive activity involvinf? or
endangering any vessel, harbor, port, or waterfront facility
shall be reported immediately to the Governor or his
representatives.

§ 10.34 Precautions against sahotagc. The master,
owner, agent, or operator of a vessel or waterfront fncilily
shall take all necessary precautious to protect the vessel,
waterfront facility, and cargo from sabotage.

PENALTIES

§ 19.36 Violations. Section 2, Title II of the act of
June 15, 1917, as amended, 50 U. S. C. 192, provides as
follows :

If any owner, agent, master, officer, or person in
charge, or any member of the crew of any such vessel
falls to comply with any regulation or rule issued or order
given under the provisions of this title, or obstructs or
Interferes with the exercise of any power conferred by
this title, the vessel, together with her tackle, apparel,
furniture, and equipment, shall be subject to seizure and
forfeiture to the United States in the same manner as
merchandise is forfeited for violation of the customs reve-
nue laws ; and the person guilty of such failure, obstruc-
tion, or interference shall be punished by imprisonment for
not more than ten years and may, in the discretion of the
court, be fined not more than $10,000.

(a) If any other person knowingly fails to comply
with any regulation of rule issued or order given under the
provisions of this title, or knowingly obstructs or inter-
feres with the exercise of any power conferred by this
title, he shall be punished by imprisonment for not more
than ten years and may, at the discretion of the court, be
fined not more than $10,000.

The White House,
March 2S, 1951.

Strengthening Position of Free World
in Pacific Ocean Area

of the Philippines, and the whole world knows
(hat the United States recognizes that an armed
attack on the Philippines would be looked upon
by the United States as dangerous to its own
peace and safety and that it would act accordingly.

The Governments of Australia and New Zea-
land, in connection with the reestablishment of
peace with Japan, have suggested an arrange-
ment between them and the United States, pur-
suant to articles 51 and 52 of the United Nations
Charter which would make clear that in the event
of an armed attack upon any one of them in the
Pacific, each of the three would act to meet the
common danger in accordance with its constitu-
tional processes; and which would establish con-
sultation to strengthen security on the basis of
continuous and effective self-help and mutual aid.

The possibilities of such an arrangement were
fully explored by Mr. Dulles at Canberra, Aus-
tralia, and Wellington, New Zealand, and have
since been informally discussed with the appro-
priate subcommittee of the Senate Foreign Rela-
tions Committee and the Foreign Affairs Com-
mittee of the House.

I have now asked the Secretary of State, the
Secretary of Defense, and Mr. Dulles, as my
special representative in relation to the Japanese
peace settlement and related matters, to pursue
this matter further concurrently with the prose-
cution of the other negotiations necessary to bring
the Japanese peace settlement to an early and
satisfactory conclusion.

The series of arrangements and dispositions out-
lined above will strengthen the fabric of peace in
the whole Pacific Ocean area, where security is
strongly influenced by sea and air power. They
constitute natural initial steps in the consolida-
tion of peace in that area and also will contribute
to the building of universal peace as sought by
the United Nations and under which great goal
the efforts of our nation are now being largely
dedicated.

Statement hy the President

[Released to the press ty the White House April 181

The United States is moving steadily forward
in concert with other countries of the Pacific in
its determination to make ever stronger the posi-
tion of the free world in the Pacific Ocean area.

In connection with the reestablishment of peace
with Japan, we are discussing with the Japanese
Government the implementation of its expressed
desire for a posttreaty security arrangement pur-
suant to which United States Armed Forces might
on a provisional basis remain in and about Japan.

The United States maintains and expects to con-
tinue to maintain its Armed Forces in tlie
Ryukjois, particularly at Okinawa.

In the Philippines, the United States is accorded
certain military operating rights and facilities
pursuant to an agreement with the Government

Progress on the Point 4 Program

Statement by the President

[Released to the press hy the White House April 18]

Dr. Henry G. Bennett, Administrator of the
Point 4 Program, has given me an informal report
on the progress of the program to date. I am
pleased with what he has told me.

The Point 4 Progi-ara is more necessary today
than ever. The threat of Communist aggression
compels the free world to build strong military de-
fenses. But communism cannot be stopped by
arms alone. One of its most dangerous weapons
is its false appeal to people who are burdened
with hunger, disease, poverty, and ignorance.

April 30, 1 95 J

699

The Point 4 Program is part of the defense of
the free world. It is the best answer to the false
promises of communism. It offers the plain people
of the world a way to do what they want most to
do — improve their conditions of life by their own
efforts.

The Point 4 Program is being welcomed in that
spirit by the free countries of Asia, Africa, the
Middle East, and Latin America. Point 4 general
agreements have been signed with 22 Governments.
About 360 American technicians are at work on
Point 4 projects in 28 countries. More than 240
technicians from 34 countries are being trained
in the United States.

But this is only the beginning. Dr. Bennett
tells me that, with relatively small appropriations,
Point 4 can help some 50 countries with a popula-
tion of almost a billion people double their food
production in 5 to 10 years. Comparable advances
can be made by these countries m public health
and education, as well as in other aspects of eco-
nomic development.

Mass Transmission of Drama
"Darkness at Noon" Over VOA

[Released to the press April 17]

The Voice of America cleared its broadcast
decks on April 14 for a mass transmission of an
original 1-hour radio version of the prize-winning
Broadway play, Darknesi^ at Noon., the Depart-
ment of State announced today.

The program was beamed to Europe and the
Near East from 2 to 3 p.m., e. s. t., on 14 fre-
quencies from the United States and relayed on
five short-wave and one medium-wave frequencies
from Munich, six short-wave frequencies from
Tangier, five short-wave frequencies from Eng-
land and one medium-wave frequency from
Greece. Broadcasts ordinarily scheduled during
that period in Serbo-Croat, Hungarian, Arabic,
Bulgarian and Rumanian were canceled in order
to utilize all available transmitting facilities for
the antitotalitarian play.

The program was beamed to Latin America
from 8 to 9 p.m., e.s.t., on 16 frequencies and
to the Far East from 8 to 9 a.m., e.s.t., Sunday
on six frequencies with relays on two frequencies
frona Honolulu and three short-wave and one
medium-wave frequency from Manila. The pro-
gram was also repeated twice Sunday from relay
bases at Tangier, Munich, and Salonika.

The English radio version was adapted from
the Sidney Kingsley play which recently won
the New York Drama Critics Award. Claude
Rains, star of the Broadway cast and other mem-
bers of the cast, played their original roles in the
Voice of America production.

The play was based on Arthur Koestler's novel
on the 1937 Moscow purge trials and the radio
condensation of the play was written by Gladys
Conry of the Voice of America staff. Frank
Papp directed the radio version and Vladimir
Selinsky composed the original musical score.

Later the Voice of America plans to broadcast
a score of foreign-language transmissions of
Darkness at Noon, either in 1-hour or in a series
of shorter versions.

U.S. and U.K. Discuss Mutual
Interests in Iran

[Releaied to the press April i9]

The series of talks between the British Ambas-
sador and the Department of State on mutual
interests in Iran in the light of recent develop-
ments have been concluded, and the British offi-
cials who came to assist the Ambassador have re-
turned to London.

The conversations were satisfactory to both
Governments and comprised an informal ex-
change of views on matters pertaining to their
broad policies in the area whose general objectives
are similar. Among other matters, the Iranian
oil question was discussed in general terms only
since it was fully recognized that the problem
must be worked out elsewhere by the parties di-
rectly concerned.

American National Ballet Theatre
To Tour South America

The Department of State received word on
April 20 that contracts have been signed at Paris
for a 3-month tour of South America by the
American National Ballet Theatre. Lucia Chase,
founder and director of the Ballet Theatre, and
Blevins Davis, president of the Ballet Theatre
Foundation, have announced that negotiations for
the tour were completed by Dante \ ittani, noted
South American impresario, and Anatole Heller,
European manager of Ballet Theatre.

The company of 60 or more dancers and tech-
nicians will begin their tour on May 21 at Rio
de Janeiro, officially opening the season at the
Teatro Municipal Opera. After playing at Rio
for 3 weeks, the Ballet Theatre will appear at
Sao Paulo for another week. The option also
calls for a 4-weck stay at Montevideo and Buenos
Aires. The Department of State is cooperating
with Ballet Theatre in arrangements for its tour
as a means of demonstrating American cultural
achievements to other countries.

700

Department of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

I Conclusion of Torquay Tariff Conference

STATEMENT ISSUED BY PARTICIPATING GOVERNMENTS

[Released to the press April 21}

The signing of the final act at Torquay on April
21, 1951, marks the conclusion of the tariff nego-
tiations which began on September 28, 1950.

The purpose of this release is to provide gen-
eral guidance on the concluding stages of the
Conference and the arrangements for giving effect
to its results.

General Review of the Conference

The Torquay Conference has been the third of
a series of international tariff conferences which
have been held since the end of the Second World
"War. The first was held in Geneva in 1947, when
23 countries entered into tariff negotiations among
themselves and drew up the General Agreement
on Tariffs and Trade to put into effect the results
of these negotiations and provide rules governing
other aspects of their trade relations. The Gen-
eral Agreement — a multilateral trade agreement
which comprises the schedules of tariff concessions
and, inter alia, various provisions designed to
protect the concessions against nullification or im-
pairment— became operative in 1948. It was
always intended that further countries which
were prepared to enter into negotiations should
be enabled to join the Agreement and so enjoy
its benefits and should have the opportunity of
acceding to it throuo;h negotiating concessions in
their own tariffs. Thus, a second tariff conference
on a smaller scale was held at Annecy, France, in

1949, which resulted in the accession of a further
group of countries to the Agreement. The pro-
posal to hold a third tariff conference was made
in the summer of 1949 ; invitations to attend were
extended in November 1949, and the offer by His
Majesty's Government in the United Kingdom
of Torquay as the site was accepted in March

1950. The Torquay negotiations followed the
same pattern as these held at Geneva and Annecy,

except that, in addition to negotiations between
contracting parties and the acceding Govern-
ments; there were also further negotiations be-
tween contracting parties themselves for
additional concessions.

The tecluiique of multilateral tariff bargaining
through the holding of simultaneous bilateral ne-
gotiations between paire of countries followed by
the generalization of the resulting concessions
which was put into practice at Geneva and An-
necy was continued at Torquay. It has again
been demonstrated that despite some growing
difticulties, which are I'eferred to below, this tech-
nique offers marked advantages over older methods
of negotiating tariff reductions. A large number
of negotiations has been completed, and a sub-
stantial list of concessions has been achieved
which will be applied over a very extensive area
of world trade before the end of 1951.

The scope and complexity of the Torquay Con-
ference were enhanced by the fact that the nego-
tiations were also related to the renewal of the
firm validity of the concessions exchanged at
Geneva and Annecy. The reductions and bind-
ings in the rates of tariff duties which were nego-
tiated in 1947 and 1949 had an assured life only
to January 1, 1951. Thereafter, it was open to
any contracting party to give notice, under article
XXVIII of the General Agreement, of its inten-
tion to withdraw or modify any of the conces-
sions which it had made in its tariff. If the Geneva
and Annecy concessions had remained liable to
widespread modification or withdrawal, the sta-
bility of world tariff levels — one of the main bene-
fits afforded by the Agreement — would have been
imperiled. To avoid this danger, it was decided
that any renegotiation of the 1947 and 1949 con-
cessions which countries felt obliged to undertake
should be carried out at Torquay and that the
assured life of the resulting schedules should be

Aprii 30, J 95?

701

extended for another 3 years. The life of the
Geneva and Annecy concessions will be prolonged
by an amendment included in the Torquay proto-
col and by the declaration on the continued appli-
cation of the present schedules, which is described
later in this release. This rebinding of the Geneva
and Annecy concessions, added to the new con-
cessions negotiated at Torquay, will give stability
to tariff rates covering a very large part of world
trade, until 1954. This element of stability in-
sures a set of tariff schedules for some 38 countries
all of which will be bound against increase for
3 years and is in effect a new factor in the picture
of world commerce which has been introduced
through the operation of the Gatt.

The Torquay Conference has also provided for
the accession of new Governments to the General
Agreement. Through the signing of appropriate
legal in.struments — the decisions on the accession
of the acceding Governments are described later
in this release — a further group of countries will
be enabled to adhere to the Agreement. Each of
these countries will have agreed to reduce its
tariffs through negotiations with the contracting
parties and with each other, when a basis for such
negotiations existed. To a large extent, their
tariffs will be stabilized. When they have acceded,
the countries adhering to the General Agreement
will comprise a group whose trade accounts for
over 80 percent of world imports and over 85
percent of world exports.
_ Against the background of achievement — the
significant reductions and bindings of tariff duties
resulting from the Torquay negotiations, the pro-
longing of the assured life of the whole body of
tariff concessions for a further 3 years, and the
expected accession of a group of important coun-
tries— some reference to the clifficulties which have
been encountered may be permitted. In the first
place, many of the countries had to a large extent
used up their bargaining power in 1947 and 1949
and were not in a position at Torquay to reduce
their tariffs much further.

In the second place, with the steady increase in
the volume of trade which has been liberalized
from quotas during 1950 — particularly in
Europe — tariffs are reverting to their traditional
role as instruments for protection for domestic
industries and agriculture. Generally speaking,
the significance of tariffs as instruments of na-
tional economic policy is increasing, and the diffi-
culties encountered in lowering rates of duty are
probably greater today than at any time since
the end of the war.

Organization of the Negotiations

A Tariff Negotiations Committee (Chairman,
L. D. Wilgress, Canada), representing all the
participating Governments, was appointed as the
managing body of the Conference. Day-to-day
administrative coordination was undertaken by
a smaller group, the Tariff Negotiations Working

Party (Chairman, H. van Blankenstein, Nether-
lands).

Governments Participating in
Tariff Negotiations

The countries and territories which took part
in the Torquay Tariff Conference as contracting
parties ^ to the General Agreement were :

Au.stralin

Haiti

Benelux Union

India

Brazil

Indonesia

Canada

Italy

Ceylon

New Zealand

Chile

Norway

Cuba

Pakistan

Czechoslovakia

South Africa

Denmark

Southern Rhodesia

Dominican Republic

Sweden

Finland'

United Kingdom

France

United States

Greece

The countries

which

negotiated at Torquay

with a view to acceding ^

to the Agreement were :

Austria

Peru

Federal Republic of Ger-

Republic of the PhUipplnes

many

Turkey

Korea

Uruguay

At the opening of the tariff negotiations, the
delegation of Czechoslovakia stated that the par-
ticipation of Western Germany was not in accord-
ance with the terms of the Potsdam Agreement
under which Germany was to be treated as a
single economic unit. They also denied that
Western Germany had any legal capacity to be-
come a contracting party.

The delegation of Czechoslovakia also stated
that they did not recognize the Government of
South Korea.

Legal Instruments Open for Signature

Today, the closing date of the Conference, four
legal instruments were opened for signature at
Torquay :

1. The final act, which authenticates the texts of
the instruments described below.

2. Decisions on the accession of the acceding Gov-
ernments.

There is a separate decision for each of the six
acceding Governments. Under the terms of the
Gatt, a majority of two-thirds of the contracting
parties is needed to take a decision to admit each
acceding country. The six decisions will be
opened for signature at Torquay and will later be
deposited at the headquarters of the United Na-

' Four contracting parties did not xmdertake tariff nego-
tiations at Torquay : Burma, Liberia, Nicaragua, and
Syria. The Nationalist Government of the Republic of
China notified its withdrawal from the General Agree-
ment with effect from May 5, 1950; the Central Peoples
Government of China has not yet defined its position in
regard to the General Agreement.

" Uruguay also took part in the Annecy Conference but
did not subsequently become a contracting party.

702

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

tions and will be open there for further signa-
tures. (The seventh of the accedinfj Govern-
ments, namely Uruguay, negotiated initially at
Annecy in 19-19 and is expected to accede under
the terms of the Annecy protocol.) The last day
for signature of the decisions will be June 20,
1951.

3. The Torquay protocol to the General Agree-
ment on Tariffs and Trade embodies the results
of the tariff negotiations undertaken at Torquay
and the terms on which the new Governments
will be able to accede. This will be open for
signature by the participating Governments and
will later be deposited at the headquarters of the
United Nations and will be open there for further
signatures. The results of the negotiations may
be brought into force by the contracting parties
and the acceding Governments (as and when they
become contracting parties) at various dates be-
tween May and November 1951, depending on the
dates of their signatures or notifications regai'd-
ing article XXVIII negotiations. October 20
will be the last day for signature of the Torquay
protocol.

4. The declaration on the continued application of
the present schedules, taken in conjunction with
the relevant provisons of the Torquay protocol,
is the instrument through which the contracting
parties will prolong the assured life of the Geneva
and Annecy schedules, as modified in accordance
with such renegotiations as were undertaken at
Torquay, until January 1, 1954.

It is expected that, at Torquay, all delegations
will sign the final act and most will also sign the
declaration.

Announcement of Results; Publication of the
Schedules

On May 9, 1951, the Governments which took
part in the Torquay negotiations will be at lib-
erty to announce the results of their negotiations."

On May 12, the schedules of tariff concessions
as a whole and the text of the Torquay protocol
will be published by the Secretariat at Geneva
and will be placed on sale through United Na-
tions sales agents.

Negotiations Completed

A. Countries participating in the negotiations and
the number of bilateral negotiations completed
hy each :

Australia 6

Austria 23

Benelux Union 9

(Belgium, the Netherlands and Luxemburg)

Brazil 2

Canada 16

Ceylon 2

' An analysis, in detail, of the results of the nego-
tiations on the part of the United States will be made
public by the Department of State on May 9, 1951.

Apr/; 30, ?95I

Chile 4

Czechoslovakia 7

Denmark 18

Dominican Republic 3

Finland 5

France 17

Germany 23

Greece 4

Haiti 2

India 8

Indonesia 8

Italy 16

Korea 5

New Zealand 3

Norway 16

Pakistan 5

Peru 15

Philippines 16

Southern Rhodesia 4

Sweden 16

Turkey 20

Union of South Africa 10

United Kingdom 9

United States 17

Uruguay 4

B. Bilateral negotiations which each participating
contracting party completed with other contract-
ing parties:

Australia Denmark, Sweden

Benelux Union .... Denmark, Italy, South Africa,
United States

Brazil United States

Canada Denmark, Dominican Republic,

France, Haiti, India, Indonesia,
Italy, Norway, Sweden, United
States

Ceylon South Africa

Czechoslovakia .... Denmark, France, Indonesia

Denmark Australia, Benelux Union,

Canada, Czechoslovakia,
Greece, India, Italy, Norway,
United Kingdom, United States

Dominican Republic . Canada, France, United States

Finland France, Norway, South Africa

France Canada, Czechoslovakia, Domin-
ican Republic, Finland, Indo-
nesia, Pakistan, Southern Rho-
desia, Sweden, South Africa,
United Kingdom, United States

Greece Denmark

Haiti Canada, Norway

India Canada, Denmark, Indonesia

Indonesia Canada, Czechoslovakia, France,

India, Sweden, United States

Italy Benelux Union, Canada, Den-
mark, Norway, Pakistan,
Southern Rhodesia, Sweden,
United States, Uruguay

Norway Canada, Denmark, Finland,

Haiti, Italy, Southern Rhodesia,
Sweden, South Africa, United
Kingdom, United States

Pakistan France, Italy

South Africa Benelux Union, Ceylon, Finland,

France, Norway, Sweden

Southern Rhodesia . . France, Italy, Norway, Sweden

Sweden Australia, Canada, France, Indo-
nesia, Italy, Norway, Southern
Rhodesia, South Africa, United
Kingdom, United States

United Kingdom . . . Denmark, France, Norway, Swe-
den

United States Benelux Union, Brazil, Canada,

Denmark, Dominican Repub-
lic, France, Indonesia, Italy,
Norway, Sweden

703

C. Bilateral negotiations ivhich contracting
parties completed with acceding Governments:

Australia. Austria, Germany, Philippines,

Turkey

Benelux Union .... Austria, Germany, Peru, Philip-
pines, Turkey

Brazil Austria

Canada Austria, Germany, Korea, Peru,

Philippines, Turkey

Ceylon Germany

Chile Austria, Germany, Peru, Philip-
pines

Czechoslovakia .... Austria, Peru, Philippines, Turkey

Denmark Austria, Germany, Korea, Peru,

Philippines, Turkey

Finland Austria, Germany

France Austria, Germany, Korea, Peru,

Philippines, Turkey

Greece Austria, Germany, Turkey

India Austria, Germany, Peru, Philip-
pines, Turkey

Indonesia Austria, Germany

Italy Austria, Germany, Peru, Philip-
pines, Turkey

New Zealand .... Germany, Philippines^ Turkey

Norway Austria, Germany, Korea, Peru,

Philippines, Turkey

Pakistan Austria, Germany, Turkey

South Africa Austria, Turkey

Sweden Austria, Germany, Korea, Peru,

Philippines, Turkey

United Kingdom . . . Austria, Germany, Peru, Philip-
pines, Turkey

United States .... Austria, Germany, Korea, Peru,
Turkey

D. Bilateral negotiations completed among the
acceding Governments :

Austria Germany, Turkey

Germany Austria, Philippines

Philippines Germany

Turkey Austria

Note: Bilateral negotiations completed by
Uruguay with certain contracting parties and
acceding Governments :

Uruguay Italy, Germany, Peru, Turkey

International Materials Conference

PROGRESS REPORT

[Released to the press by IMC April S]

Supplemental to the announcements previously
made by the International Materials Conference
concerning the preliminary, organizational work
done by its commodity committees, is the follow-
ing report on the progress of the committees.

Questionnaires to be filled out by member and
nonmember interested countries have been pre-
pared and issued. Some of the committees have
examined the available statistics in oixler to ob-
tain a first estimate of the size of the anticipated
deficit, and, at least for certain materials, pre-
liminary discussions have been initiated on
measures to be taken to meet the present situation.

Copper, Zinc and Lead Committee

The Copper, Zinc and Lead Committee has
agreed upon the questionnaire to be used to secure
requirements and production estimates for 1951
and 1952. Copies nave been furnished to all mem-
bers of the Committee for transmittal to their
Governments, and letters to all nonmember (lOV-
ernments which have a significant interest either
as producei*s or consumers were dispatched on
March 28, requesting that they supply the data
covered by the questionnaire. The questionnaire
asks for import and export figures, as well as
statements of restrictive controls in effect or con-
templated and statements of the possibilities and

requirements for increasing production. Replies
to the questionnaire are being requested by not
later than April 23. The Committee hopes to
have them assembled, tabulated and reviewed by
early May.

The Committee met April 16 to complete a pre-
liminary review of the 1951 estimate of require-
ments based upon information furnished by its
members during the week of April 2. Such a
preliminary review will indicate the probable size
and nature of the anticipated deficit in supplies.
However, no formal recommendation will be de-
veloped by the Committee until it has examined
the replies to the questionnaire. The Conmiittee
is limiting its current analysis to primary metals
but has agreed to examine requirements for
semifabricated products later. It recognizes the
importance of this aspect of the problem to the
countries that import such products and the need
to develop such methods for insuring equitable
treatment to consuming countries as well as
producing countries in the event of a deficit in
supplies.

Sulphur Committee

The Sulphur t'ommittee has discussed state-
ments submitted by representatives regarding re-
quirements and the steps taken or contemplated
to expand production, conserve sulphur, and sub-
stitute other materials. A subconunittee is now
in the process of preparing a first report to ac-
company preliminary tables of statistics. This

704

Department of State Bulletin

report will cover methods of expanding produc-
tion of sulphur and sulpluir-bearino; materials,
conservation of sulphur and substitution of sul-
phur, and controls regarding the utilization of sul-
phur. Also, the Committee is studying drafts of
letters and questionnaires prepared by the sub-
coiiiHiittei' on statistii-s whicli call for statistical
data and information relating to sulphur and sul-
phur-bearing materials from member and non-
member countries.

Cotton and Cotton Linters Committee

This Committee recessed on March 15, pending
the preparation of certain statistical tables re-
quired to assess the world situation and to permit
the formulation of recommendations. Drafting
of a cotton questionnaire designed to develop the
information requested by the Committee was com-
pleted during the week of March 18. In the past
week, forms have been processed for distribution
to Governments. Preparation of forms for a
linters questionnaire will follow promptly. The
Committee has tentatively set June 11 as the date
for reconvening.

Tungsten and Molybdenum Committee

The Tungsten and Molybdenum Committee has
been occupied with the gathering of statistics of
production and consumption. Questionnaires
have been issued to member governments and cer-
tain nonmember governments, requesting them to
furnish particulars both on production and con-
sumption in past years and on the estimates for
1951 and 1952. \Vhen the full committee again
meets, it will give consideration to information
assembled by its subcommittee on statistics. It
will consider the problem as a whole with special
reference to the supply position of 1951.

Manganese, Nicl«el and Cobalt Committee

Subcommittees on statistics have compiled avail-
able data on production, movements, and consump-
tion of manganese, nickel, and cobalt in the calen-
dar years 1948, 1949. and 1950, also in 1938 for the
first material, and 1943 for the latter ones. The
subcommittees have drafted a letter to be sent to
Governments indicating what additional informa-
tion is desired from them concerning estimates for
1951 and 1952, and the measures taken or con-
templated to increase production, restrict con-
sumption and economize in the use of the ma-
terials. The full Committee met last Friday to
adopt its permanent rules of procedure and
examine the reports of the statistical subcom-
mittees.

Wool Committee

The Wool Committee convened for the first
time on April 2. The heads of the delegation have

met several times since to set up their order of
business. A subcommittee on statistics is also
meeting. This Committee has developed its work
rapidly, largely due to the work which has already
been done by other international conferences
covering this field.

Pulp and Paper Committee

All replies to invitations sent out have not yet
been received. Announcement as to the composi-
tion and date of initial meeting of this Committee
will be announced in the very near future.

COMPOSITION OF MANGANESE,
NICKEL AND COBALT COMMITTEE

BELGIUM ( Representing Benelux : Belgium, Netherlands,
Luxembourg)

Representative: Pierre Jaspar, Economic Counselor, Bel-
gium Embassy

Alternates: Henri Wenniaekers, Attach^, Belgium

Embassy
M. H. Moerel, Adviser, Netherlands Em-
bassy

BEAZIL

Representative: Joao Baptista Pinheiro, Second Secre-
tary, Brazilian Embassy

Alternate: Armindo Branco Mendes Cadaxa, Second

Secretary, Brazilian Embassy

CANADA

Representative: S. V. Allen, Special Assistant to Deputy
Minister, Department of Trade and
Commerce, Ottawa

Alternate: M. P. Carson, Assistant Commercial Sec-

retary, Canadian Embassy

CUBA

Representative:
Alternate:

Enrique Perez-Cisneros
Kamoii G. Osuna, Attach^, Cuban Em-
bassy

Rent? Samuel Lajeunesse, Mining Engi-
neer, Paris

Pierre Braye, Importation and Allocation
Group for Tungsten, Molybdenum
and Chrome, Corporation of Minerals
and Metals, Paris

Jean- Yves Gautier, Electro-Chemical and
Electro-Metallurgical Engineer, Paris

Rudolf Afflerbach, Representative, Minis-
try of Economics, Bonn

Clemens Schueller, Representative, Min-
istry of Economics, Bonn

H. A. Sujon, Director, Indian Supply Mis-
sion, Washington, D. C.

M. B. Shankar, Deputy Director, Indian
Supply Mission, Washington, D. C.

Thoralf Svendsen, Commercial Counselor,

Norwegian Embassy
Gunnar Kjolstad, Economic Counselor,

Norwegian Embassy

TTNION OF SOUTH AFRICA

Representative: W. A. Horrocks, Commercial Secretary,
South African Embassy

Alternate: J. H. Schutte, Assistant Commercial Sec-

retary, South African Embassy

FRANCE

Representative:
Alternates:

GERMANY

Representative:
Alternate:

INDIA

Representative:
Alternate:

NOEWAT

Representative:
Alternate:

April 30, 1 95 J

705

UNITED KINGDOM

Representative: V. P. Harries, Under Secretary, Ministry

of Supply, London
Alternate: Dr. W. E. Berry, Principal, Ministry of

Supply, London

UNITED STATES

Representative: John W. Evans, Chief, Economic and Re-
sources Staff, Department of State

Alternate: Edwin J. Lintner, Chief, Additive-Alloys

Branch, Munitions Board

COMPOSITION OF TUNGSTEN AND
MOLYBDENUM COMMITTEE

AUSTRALIA

Representative:
Alternate:

F. A. Meere, First Assistant Comptroller
General, Department of Trade and
Customs, Canberra

Dr. H. G. Raggatt, Director, Bureau of
Mineral Resources, Ministry of Na-
tional Development, Melbourne

Representative:
Alternate:

BRAZIL

Representative:

Alternate:

CHILE

Repiesentative:
Alternate:

FRANCE

Repi'esentative :
Alternates:

Juan Poiiaranda

Germfin Rovira, Commercial Counselor,
Bolivian Embassy

Col. Jos6 Filho Kahl, Chief of Brazilian
Aeronautical Commission, Washing-
ton, D. C.

Lt. Col. Paulo E. da Camara Ortegal,
Assistant Air Attach^, Brazilian
Embassy

Roberto Vergara, General Manager,

Pacific Steel Company, Santiago
Not yet designated.

Ren6 Samuel Lajeunesse, Mining Engi-
neer, Paris

Pierre Braye, Director, Importation and
Allocation Group for Tungsten,
Molybdenum and Chrome, Corpora-
tion of Minerals and Metals, Paris

Jean-Yves Gautier, Electro-Chemical and
Electro-Metallurgical Engineer,
Paris

Representative: Dr. Arno Ristow, Chief, Department for
Ferro-AUoys, Ministry of Economies,

Alternate: Joachim Hoppe, Official, Ministry of B]co-

nomics, Bonn

POETUGAL

Representative: Antonio de Lncena, Second Secretary,
Portuguese Embassy

Alternate: Joao Guimaraes dos Santos, Mining En-

gineer, Government of Portugal,

SPAIN

Representative: Juan Lizaur, Mining Engineer, Govern-
ment of Spain, Madrid

Alternate: Jos^ Aragones, Commercial Attach^, Gov-

ernment of Spain, Madrid

SWEDEN

Representative: Olaf Drakenberg, Managing Director,
Swedish Ferro-AUoys, Inc., Stock-
holm
Alternates: Hubert de Besche, Economic Counselor,

Swedish Embassy
Torsten Hylander
Stig Nyblad
C. H. von Platen

UNITED) KINGDOM

Representative.

Alternates:

UNITED STATES

V. P. Harries, Under Secretary, Ministry

of Supply, London
Dr. W. E. Berry, Principal, Ministry of

Supply, London
H. O. Hooper
G. E. M. McDougall, Counselor, British

Embassy

Representative: J. H. Critchett, Chief, Ferro-Alloys and
Metals Section, Iron and Steel Di-
vision, Department of Commerce

Alternate: Robert Bridgman

U.S. Delegations to International Conferences

Population Commission (ECOSOC)

The Department of State announced on April 20
tliat I'hilip M. Hauser, Unit«d States representa-
tive on the Population Commission of the United
Nations Economic and Social Council (Ecosoc)
will attend the sixth session of the Commission,
which will convene at Lake Success on April 23,
19,51. Dr. Hauser is professor of sociology at the
University of Chicago and was formerly deputy
director and acting director of the Bureau of the
Census. He will be assisted by the following
advisers :

Dudley Kirk, Division of International and Functional
Intelligence, Department of State

Conrad Taeuber, consultant, Bureau of the Census, Depart-
ment of Commerce

Established in 1946, the Population Commis-
sion, which is one of the nine permanent func-
tional commissions of the United Nations Eco-
nomic and Social Coimcil, advises the Council on
all demographic matters falling within the pur-
view of the United Nations. Twelve Govern-
ments, elected by the Council, comprise the mem-
bership of this Commission. The last session of
the Population Commission was held at Lake Suc-
cess from May 22 to June 2, 1950.

706

Oeparfmenf of Stafe Bulletin

Among the agenda items to be considered by the
sixth session are studies of interrelationships of
demographic, economic, and social factors in par-
ticular areas, demographic aspects of migration,
and mortality and mortality rates; a revision of
"Findings of studies on the interrelationships be-
tween population trends and economic and social
factors , problems related to the 1950 and 1951
censuses of population; demographic aspects of
the problem of retired persons and the aged ; re-
gional seminars on population problems; analysis
of vital, demographic, and migi'ation statistics;
and future work and priorities of the Commission.

South Pacific Commission, Seventh Session

On April 16, the Department of State an-
nounced that the seventh session of the South
Pacific Commission will convene at Noumea, New
Caledonia, on April 28, 1951. The United States
Government will be represented at the session by
the following delegation :

Senior I'nitcd States Coniiitissioner

Dr. Felix M. Keesing, professor of anthropology, Stanford
University, Calif.

United States Commissioner

Milton Shalleck, attorney. New York

Advisers

Robert R. Robbins, Office of Dependent Area Affairs, De-
partment of State.
Claude U. Ross, American Consul, Noumea

The major items on the provisional agenda for
this session include implementation of the recom-
mendations of the first South Pacific Conference
held at Suva, Fiji Islands, from April 25 to May
5, 1950; review of projects undertaken in the 1949-
1950 work program; appointments of secretary
general and deputy secretary of the Commission
and deputy chairman of the research council; in-
formation program and jjublications; and various
other administrative and financial matters.

The South Pacific Commission is a considtative
and advisory body to the member governments
(Australia, France, the Netherlands, New Zea-
land, United Kingdom, and United States) in
matters affecting the economic and social develop-
ment of the 15 non-self-governing territories in
the South Pacific under the scope of the Commis-
sion. American Samoa is the one United States
Pacific territory within the purview of the Com-
mission. The biannual meetings of the Commis-
sion are provided for in the agreement establishing
the Commission. The last session of the South
Pacific Commission was held at Noumea, New
Caledonia, in October 1950.

The UNESCO Conference on the Improvement of Bibliographic Services

hy Jesse H. Shera, U.S. Delegate

The Unesco Conference on the Improvement of
Bibliographic Services, held at Paris from No-
vember 7-10, 1950, represents the culmination
of efforts begun as early as 1946 to develop coordi-
nation of international interest in the improve-
ment of national and international bibliographical
services. The problems of bibliographic organiza-
tion have loomed importantly in Unesco's pro-
gram from its inception, and, even before the es-
tablishment of Unesco, the views of those who
were consulted regarding its activities insisted
upon its responsibilities in this field. Beginning
with the second session, in 1947, and annually since
that time, the General Conference of Unesco has
instructed the Director General to conduct the nec-
essary surveys and make other preliminary prepa-
rations for a conference such as this.

In fulfillment of these instructions, Unesco en-
tered into a 2-year contract with the Library of
Congress for the preparation of a report on the
present state of bibliographic services and the pos-
sibilities for their improvement. The results of

this study appeared in published form as the now
well-known Unesco and Library of Congress
Bibliographical Survey, of which the first part,
the general report, was prepared by Verner W.
Clapp, Chief Assistant Librarian of Congress, and
the second part, an historical appendix, was the
work of Mrs. Katherine O. Murra, General Kef-
erence and Bibliography, Library of Congress.

This survey, which was designed to be the basis
of the work of the present Conference, became
available early in 1950 and was given careful study
by working groups in some 40 countries. National
reports, stimulated by the general survey, were
prepared by these working groups and were sub-
mitted to Unesco by the summer of 1950. Most
of these reports were abstracted by the Secretariat
and are now available as vohune II of the Unesco
and Library of Congress Bibliographical Survey
under the title National Development and Inter-
national Planning of Bihliogra'phical Services.
In general, each of the national reports divides
into three major sections: a more or less detailed

April 30, 1 95 1

707

survey of existing bibliographic services; recom-
mendations for the improvement of bibliographic
services within the country for which the report is
submitted ; and proposals for the improvement of
international bibliographic coordination.

The national report for the United States was
prepared for the Committee on Bibliography of
the American Library Association by Miss Mar-
garet E. Egan, assistant professor of the graduate
library school of the University of Chicago and
the author. The report could not be prepared in
time for inclusion in the second volume of the
Bibliographical Survey but was presented to the
Conference, and its full text will appear in the
pages of American Documentation.

Thus, the Conference had, as a basis for its dis-
cussions, three important documents: (1) the basic
survey prepared by Mr. Clapp and Mrs. Murra,
(2) the series of national reports, and (3) a syn-
thesis of the reports prepared as a working paper
for the Conference by Mme. Denise Ravage of the
staff of the Unesco Secretariat. With this docu-
mentation before it, the Conference convened on
November 7. Here were assembled 81 persons
representing 31 countries, 16 international organi-
zations concerned with bibliography, and 4 who
were invited by Unesco as independent experts.
As chairman of the Committee on Bibliography of
the American Library Association and as joint
author of the United States National Report, the
author was chosen as the United States delegate
to this Conference. Mr. Clapp was also present
as one of the four experts invited by the Unesco
Secretariat.

The proceedings began with an opening address
by Jaime Torres Bodet, the Director General of
Unesco, who displayed a remarkable grasp of the
relation of bibliographic organization to interna-
tional intellectual cooperation and of the problems
implicit in any effective program of action. Dr.
L. Brummel, Director of the Royal Library at The
Hague, was unanimously elected President of the
Conference, and the group consumed the re-
mainder of the first day in considering certain
necessary problems of organization and other es-
sential preliminary matters, including a working
definition of bibliography (a term which, inci-
dentally, it ultimately refused to define).

On the second and third days, the Conference
divided into two more or less equal working
groups, or committees: the one, under the chair-
manship of Lionel McColvin, Librarian of the
Westminster Public Library, to consider biblio-
graphic organization at the national level, and
the other, under Emile Vauthier of the Royal Li-
brary of Bruxolles, to deal with problems of inter-
national bibliographic organization. From the
first group came recommendations for the creation
of permanent national bodies designed to repre-
sent the several bibliograi)hic interests of tlicir
respective countries charged with the task of pro-
moting and coordinating a rational pattern of
national bibliographic services and empowered to

708

deal with such international bibliographic bodies
as might be created. Other recommendations had
to do with encouraging the preparation and pub-
lication of national bibliographies, the establish-
ment of national bibliographic information
centers, and bureaus of specialized information.
Other recommendations had to do with encourag-
ing the publication of :

a. A general national bibliography of all books
published and on sale within the country

b. A similar bibliography of all books and pam-
phlets published but not on sale

c. An index to periodical literature

d. A bibliography of maps and atlases

e. A bibliography of musical works

f. A bibliography of unpublished theses and '
other academic publications

g. A bibliography of local government publi-
cations

h. A directory of periodicals and newspapers
currently published

i. A clirectory of publishers and booksellers
j. An indexed directory of learned societies, in-
stitutes, libraries, and other related organizations.

Mr. Vauthier's committee concerned itself with
the general problem of international coordination
of bibliographic activity, particularly as related
to the objectives of Unesco, and the role that
Unesco might play in the promotion of such co-
ordination. The program recommended by this
group was divided into three parts: (1) a list of
long-range tasks which eventually must be under-
taken to coordinate bibliographic activity at the
international level ; (2) specific recommendations
to the Director General of Unesco for the estab-
lishment of a permanent Advisory Committee on
Bibliography to assist in the formulation and exe-
cution of UNESCO's bibliographic program, espe-
cially with reference to certain immediate opera-
tions such as a pilot bibliogra]ihic center, the prep-
aration of a series of handbooks or manuals on the
creation and operation of national bibliographic
services, and the publication of other bibliographic
information of international importance; and (3)
recommendations to the constituent countries con-
cerning the improvement of bibliographic services
at the national level.

On the fourth and final day, the Conference
again convened in plenary session and with rela-
tively little debate, disagreement, or alteration of
the text approved the work of the committees, and
the whole was authorized as approved to appear
as the final act of the Conference. This final act
contains a preamble, 14 resolutions, one annex of j
long-term tasks in international bibliograpliic co- j
ordination (prepared by Mr. Clapp), and four
sui)])lementary resolutions. In general, the major
provisions and recommendations of the final act
coincide in principle, and even to a large extent in
detail, with those contained in the United States
National Report.

Department of State Bulletin

The real success of the Conference can be ]'iul<i:ed
only in terms of the future achievement of the
machinery which has been set in motion. At the
national level, there is already ample evidence that
the special conunittees, created in response to the
initiative of Unesco, are beginning to assume per-
manent status and to exercise important leader-
ship in the development of bibliogi-aphic services
within their own jurisdictions. In Canada, for
example, work on the initiation of a much-needed
national bibliography, both current and retrospec-
tive, is going forward in a manner that follows
closely tlie i)lans proposed in the Canadian na-
tional report. Other countries are displaying an
equally intensive interest.

In the United States, the preliminary work of
UNESCO has been brought to a focus by the Paris
Conference. Librarians and others concerned
with the development and coordination of our
bibliographic resources have been made increas-
ingly aware of the need for a central bibliographic
agency that will serve as a planning group, a clear-
inghouse of information, and eventually, a produc-
tion center for bibliographic services. The initial
enthusiasm with which the United States National
Report was received encourages one to believe that
the creation of such an agency is a very real and
immediate possibility. The most pressing de-
mand is for the establishment of such an agency,
either through the reconstitution of an existing
organization, such as the American Documentation
Institute, or by the creation of a new corporate
body designed especially to meet these needs. It
is not within the province of the present report to
set forth the merits and defects of the alternatives,
but it can be reported that preliminary discussions
of this problem are already well under way among
interested groups.

On the plane of international activity, the re-
sults of the Paris Conference are already becom-
ing immediately apparent. Shortly after the Con-
ference adjourned, the Secretariat of Unesco an-
nounced the intentiton to proceed with the crea-
tion of the Permanent Advisory Committee on
International Bibliographic Organization as rec-
ommended by the assembled Paris delegates. To
this end, the Unesco Secretariat is calling a meet-
ing in London on April 2-!r-27, 1951, of a Commit-
tee of Experts to decide how the Permanent
Committee can best be provided with a constitu-
tion, a program of work, and personnel consonant
with the responsibilities of such an important
body. One may, therefore, view with considerable
optimism the prospects for future success in this
imjiortant field.

The accomplishments of the Conference may be :

1. A foundation has been laid for international
understanding and cooperation in promoting
bibliographic organization among some 40 coun-
tries of the world.

2. The administrative framework for an agency

April 30, 1957

to continue such intellectual cooperation in the
future has been designed.

3. An opportunity has been given for the free
exchange of ideas, opinions, and problems of
bibliographic organization on the part of repre-
sentative national leaders in bibliography.

4. The cooperation and assistance of certain
international organizations dependent upon or
concerned in bibliography has been solicited and
achieved.

5. Policies and procedures have been established
for the much-needed improvement of biblio-
graphic services within the jurisdiction of the par-
ticipating countries.

6. Within the United States, great impetus has
been given to a coordinated and systematic ap-
proach to the problems of etfective bibliographic
coverage at the national level.

The significance of these achievements is not to
be minimized. The writer is convinced that, in
bringing together a group of international special-
ists who are deeply concerned about the present
state of bibliography and the improvement of
bibliogi-aphical organization, Unesco has taken an
important forward step toward the solution of the
numy complex problems by which librarians and
documentalists are confronted. In these 4 days,
a real international understanding of the ob-
jectives of bibliographic organization was at-
tained, and a practical groundwork was laid for
effective and permanent action. Throughout the
meetings, it was constantly evident that the other
countries expected the United States to exert a
certain amount of leadership, or at least to carry
its full share of the responsibility for implement-
ing the program. This responsibility the United
States must prepare itself to meet.

Ethiopia Sends Troops to Korea

[Released to the press by the U.N. Department of Public
Information April 12]

The Secretary-General has been advised by the
unified command that an Ethiopian expeditionary
force will leave Djibouti for Korea on April 15.

In November 1950, the Ethiopian Government,
in response to the appeal for offers of assistance
which the Secretary-General sent to all member
states supporting the Security Council decisions
on Korea, replied that —

. . . The Imperial Ethiopian Government are prepared
specifically to olTer a contingent of 1,069 officers and
men. . . .

Countries which already have combat forces
serving in Korea under the United Nations Com-
mand are: Australia, Belgium, Canada, France,
Greece, Luxembourg, Netherlands, New Zealand,
Philippines, Eepublic of Korea, Thailand, Tur-
key, Union of South Africa, United Kingdom,
and United States.

709

Seventeenth Report of U.N. Command Operations in Korea

FOR THE PERIOD MARCH 1-15, 1951 >

I lierewith submit report mimber 17 of the
United Nations Command operations in Korea for
the period 1-15 March inclusive. United Nations
Command communiques numbers 809-823 provide
detailed accounts of these operations.

Progress of the campaign continues to be satis-
factory, with all three Services — Army, Navy and
Air — performing well their completely coordi-
nated tactical missions. Designed to meet abnor-
mal military inhibitions, our sti-ategic plan,
involving constant movement to keep the enemy
off balance with a corresponding limitation upon
his initiative, remains unaltered. Our selection of
the battle area furthermore has forced him into
the military disadvantage of fighting far from his
base and jaermitted greater employment of our
air and sea arms against which he has little de-
fense. There has been a resultant continuing and
exhausting attrition ui)on both his manpower and
supplies. There should be no illusions in this
matter, however. In such a campaign of maneu-
ver, as our battle lines shift north the supply
position of the enemy will progressively improve,
just as inversely the effectiveness of our air po-
tential will progressively diminish, thus in turn
causing his numerical ground superiority to be-
come of increasing battle field significance. As-
suming no diminution of the enemy's flow of
gi'ound forces and material to the Korean battle
area, a continuation of the existing limitation upon
our freedom of counter offensive action, and no
major additions to our organizational strength,

' Transmitted to the Security Council l)y Amli.issador
Warren K. Austin, U.S. representative in tlie Security
Council, on April 19. For texts of the first, second, third,
fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eiglith, ninth, tenth, and
eleventh reports to the Security Council on U.N. command
oixrations in Korea, see P.tti.i.eti.v, of Aug. 7, 19.50, p. 203 ;
Aug. 28, IftoO, p. 32;!; and Sept. 11, 1050, p. 403; Oct. 2,
10,JO, p. .534; Oct. IG, I'.I.-.O, p. 003; Nov. 6, 10.50, p. 720;
Nov. 13, 19.50, p. 7.50; .Tan. S, 10.51, p. 43, and Fell. 10, 1051,
p. .304, rcsi)ectively. The reports which have liccn pub-
lished separately as I>eparlmeut of State publications
393.5, 30.5.5, .39(i2, ;!07S, :!0,S(!, 400(i, 4015, and 41(),S respec-
tively will appear hereafter only in the Buli.ktin. The
twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth rejxirts appear in the
Buli.ktin of Mar. 19, 1051, p. 470; and the lifteentli and
Sixteenth reports in the Biii.i.ktin of Apr. l(i, 1051, p.
625.

the battle lines cannot fail in time to reach a point
of theoretical military stalemate. Thereafter our
further advance would militarily benefit the enemy
more than it would ourselves. The exact place of
stabilization is of necessity a fluctuating variable
dependent upon the shifting relative strengths of
the forces committed and will constantly move up
or down. Even now there are indications that the
enemy is attempting to build up from China a new
and massive offensive for the spring. These are
the salient factors which must continue to delimit
strategical thinking and planning as the campaign
proceeds.

Suffering heavy casualties the enemy conducted
vigorous delaying actions as steady United Na-
tions pressure forced him northward six to eight
miles on the central front extending about seventy
miles from the Pukhan River area east of Seoul to
Hajinbu, near the East Coast. Concomitantly
United Nations have observed extensive troop and
vehicular movement to the hostile rear, disclosing
the enemy's efforts to augment and redeploy his
reserve forces in the vicinity of the Hongchon
River, and in the areas north of Hongchon and
Seoul. Additional Chinese Communist and north
Korean imits are steadily displacing southward,
principally along the eastern axis into the Kuin-
hwa-Hwachon-Chunchon-Cliorwon area, and de-
pleted front-line units are receiving large num-
bers of badly needed replacements. Enemy re-
serve forces available for immediate employment
on the front include at least four Cliinese Commu-
nist Armies and at least one north Korean Corps.

Enemy forces offered strong resistance through
10 March. Fighting was particularly heavy on
both sides of the Pukhan River, near its conflu-
ence with the Han. After three days of heavy
fighting, hostile elements we.st of the Pukhan re-
tired in disorder on D March, abandoning much
of their equipment. Heavy fighting also raged in
the vicinity of Yongdu, Hoengsong, Sanrgo
[Samgo-ri]' and Changdong, but by 1'2 March
resistance liad diminislied and became generally
light over the entire front.

Vigorous United Nations operations have sub-
stantially reduced the strength of organized Com-

710

Departmenf of Sfofe Bulletin

munist guerrilla elements operating in United
Nations rear areas in the past four weeks. In par-
ticular, the large guerrilla force built around the
10th north Korean Division suffered severe losses
between 4 and 7 March, in the area fifteen miles
west of Ulchin, near tlie East Coast. Remnants
of this force have moved northward toward Sam-
chok, their offensive capacity, for the present,
drastically reduced. Guerrilla forces elsewhere
have been relatively inactive and are believed to
be breaking up into smaller bands in order to elude
United Nations forces. However, in the event of
a renewed enemy offensive, guerrilla forces will
undoubtedly regroup and renew their attacks on
United Nations rear-area installations.

Front lines at the close of the period ran along
the Han River from the West Coast to point twelve
miles east of Seoul, thence generally eastward to
Yangdogwon, east-southeast to Maam-Ni, east-
northeast to Hajinbu, and thence northeast to
Chumunjin.

United Nations Naval Forces continued to deny
to the enemy the use of Korean coastal waters
while assuring the unrestricted movement of
United Nations shipping to and from Korea. As
part of coordinated interdiction operations di-
rected against enemy lines of communication in
northeastern Korea, United Nations carrier-based
aircraft, in daylight and nigJit attacks, destroyed
scores of bridges, attacked tunnels and constantly
harassed moving transport. At the same time,
United Nations surface units conducted around-
the-clock Naval gunfire operations against key
highway and railroad junction points, confining
their efforts mainly to the Wonsan, Songjin and
Cliongjin areas. Similar coordinated operations
were conducted in the Chinnampo-Chungsan Got
area on the West Coast.

Check-minesweeping operations were continued
along the Korean East Coast, particularly in those
areas used by United Nations gunfire-support
ships. Substantial numbers of drifting mines con-
tinue to menace shipping in Korean waters.

The hospital ship Jutlandia, contributed by
Denmark, reported for operations during the
period of this report and constitutes a most valua-
ble and welcome addition to the United Nations
Naval forces combatting aggression in Korea.

Enemy jet fightei's in flights of 15 to 25 in-
effectively challenged United Nations air suprem-
acy several times over north Korea during this
period. United Nations medium bombers sus-
tained slight damage but the bombers and fighters
maintained the score of downed and damaged air-
craft well in the favor of United Nations forces.
The enemy jets restrict their operations to the
northern part of Korea within easy access to the
Manchurian border and to their Antung base visi-
ble to United Nations aircraft flying interdiction
and counterair operations south of the Yalu River.

Indicative of the relentless pressure being ap-
plied by the air echelon is the new high total of

about 1,250 sorties flown on one day of this period.
The B-29's have again joined the fighters and
light bombers in attacks immediately in rear of
the Communist lines. The close integration of
the air and ground efforts is most connuendable.

Night operations supplementing the daylight
attacks continue the destruction and harassment
of enemy resupply activities. Considerable in-
creased motor traffic has been subjected to twenty-
four hour attack complementing the repeated
attacks on supply dumps, bridges and tunnels in
the interdiction program.

Transport aircraft repeated their major contri-
bution to the United Nations effort, their efforts
being marked by the lift of nearly 5,000 passengers
on one day and the airdrop of" 1,000 five-gallon
drums of motor gas to front line units on another.

There has been no significant change in civil
assistance activities during the period. Displaced
persons, particularly farmers, are being encour-
aged to return to tlieir homes and farms in non-
combat zones and resume as far as possible their
contributions to the normal economy of Korea.

Miniature weekly newspapers in Chinese and
Korean are now being disseminated regularly to
Communist soldiers in the front lines in Korea.
These newspapers are part of a steadily expand-
ing program to provide enemy troops with accu-
rate information concerning the Korean conflict
and their position in it. and to expose the false
indoctrination of their Communist political offi-
cei-s. This program is being prosecuted vigorously
both by United Nations Command Headquarters
and by the Eighth Army. More than 280 million
copies of some 154 different leaflets have now been
disseminated in Korea. These are complemented
by front line broadcasts from ground and air-
borne loudspeakers. Special radio broadcasts on
1 March commemorated the 32nd anniversary of
the Korean Declaration of Independence, and
regular daily Unit«d Nations broadcasts continue
to provide reliable news reports to Korean
civilians.

The void of reliable information concerning
United Nations soldiere who have fallen into the
hands of the enemy is another manifestation of
the contempt in which the Communists apparently
hold the international laws of war. In spite of
their statements to the United Nations, we have
no information indicating any compliance with
tlie provisions of the Geneva Convention which
require that a civilized nation render certain mini-
mum reports on prisoners of war. The enemy
have consistently pursued a viciously misleading
pr-ogram wherein lughly colored propaganda has
been substituted for the official, confirmed data
required by the Geneva Convention. The Interna-
tional Red Cross has not yet been permitted to
establish liaison with United Nations prisoners
held by the Communists nor to carry out other
services usually provided by the Red Cross
organization.

April 30, 1957

711

Communiques Regarding Korea
to tlie Security Council

General Douglas MacArthur, Commander in
Chief of United Nations Command, has transmit-
ted communiques regarding Korea to the Secre-
tary-General of the United Nations under the
following United Nations document numbers:
8/2039, March 14; S/2040, March 15; S/2042,
March 16; S/2043, March 16; S/2045, March 20;
S/2046, March 20; S/2051, March 21; S/2052,
March 23; S/2054, March 26; S/2055, March 27;
S/2066, April 3 ; S/2068, April 4 ; S/2073, April 6 ;
S/2080, April 11 ; S/2081, April 11 ; S/2083, April
11; S/2086, April 16.

«

ECOSOC Resolution on World
Economic Situation

U.N. doc. E/1977
Adoptea Mar. 20, 1951

The Economic and Social Council,

Noting with interest the World Economic Report, 191i9-
1950, prepared by the Secretariat,

Taking into account General Assembly resolution 406
(V) and

Considering that:

(a) The maintenance of international peace and
security, the creation of conditions of economic stability,
and the improvement of the standards of living of the
world's population are permanent objectives of interna-
tional economic and social co-operation among the United
Nations ;

(b) Continued progress in creating conditions of
economic stability and in improving standards of living
requires Increases in the production of food, raw mate-
rials and manufactured goods ;

(e) In the under-developed countries, progress to-
ward the objectives enumerated in paragraph (b) is lim-
ited by the characteristics of their pre.spnt economic
structures, which are reflected in the nature of their for-
eign trade, in the vulnerability of their terms of foreign
trade, in their dependence on foreign countries for capital
goods, in low levels of investment and in other factors
both external and internal which contribute to their low
living standards ;

(d) Some of the adverse factors enumerated in para-
graph (c) are being aggravated by new inflationary pres-
sures, shortages of goods, regulation of prices at different
relative levels for different products, and re-allocation of
prodnctive factors, which are likely to affect unfavourably
the rate or pattern of economic development of some
countries ;

(e) In the industrialized countries, particularly tho.se
which are faced with the task of reconstruction and re-
equipment as the result of war damage, the additional
tasks assumed as a result of the international sitiintion
are likely to cause inflationary pressures;

(f ) Instability of jirices in international markets also
affects indnsti'ialized countries ;inil. in many of them, ag-
gravates internal disequilibrium and makes more difficult
the necessary increase of tlieir production;

(g) If appropriate measures are not taken, difficul-
ties may arise in trade between the industrialized countries

and the under-developed countries when present inflation-
ary pressures subside and when reconversion of defence
industries occurs ; and some of these difficulties would tend
to increase the difference between the levels of their re-
spective productive capacities and also to increase the
vulnerability of their economies to a decline in the demand li
for their products and to a fall in the prices of these prod- I ■
ucts in world markets, with consequent unfavourable eco-
nomic and social effects ;

1. RecommeniJs that all Members of the United Nations,
during the period of general shortage of goods, take spe-
cial measures to bring about adequate production and
equitable international distribution of capital goods, es-
sential consumers' goods and raw materials especially
needed for the maintenance of the international peace
and security, the preservation of standards of living and
the furthering of economic development ;

2. Recommends that all Members of the United Nations,
during the period of general inflationary pressure, take
measures, direct or indirect, to regulate at equitable levels
and relationships, the prices of essential goods moving in
international trade, including capital goods, essential con-
sumers' goods and raw materials ;

3. Recommends that the equitable regulation of distri-
bution and prices referred to in recommendations 1 and
2 above be maintained as long as strong inflationary
pressures persist, in order to minimize changes in the
purchasing power, in terms of imports, of current earn-
ings from exports as well as of monetary assets ;

4. Recommends further that all Members of the
United Nations take all steps in their power to prevent
the development of inflationary pressures, thereby pre-
venting speculative profits and maintaining the purchas-
ing power of the poorer sections of the population ;

5. Amends paragraph 19 of resolution 290 (XI) to
request that tlie group of experts to be appointed under
that paragraph include in its report recommendations
concerning the appropriate national and international
measures required to mitigate the vulnerability of the
economies of underdeveloped countries to fluctuations in
international markets, including measures to adjust,
establish and maintain appropriate relations between
prices of raw materials, on the one hand, and essential
manufactured goods on the other, and thus to insure
greater economic stability ; and

0. Rcqnrxts all Memliers of the United Nations to re-
port to the thirteenth session of the Council on such
action as they have taken under the present resolution;
and

B

Having regard to the fact that various Governments
have not bad sufficient time to study the ^Vorld Economic
Report, 19'i9-lS50, particularly the sections on the eco-
nomic conditions in the Middle East and in Africa ;

Having keqard further to the radically changed eco-
nomic conditions in the world since the ixTind covered
by the Report, and liearing in mind that Members of
the United Nations have not had sufficient time to re-
spond to tlie invitation contained in General Assembly
resolution 4(Xi (V) to submit tlieir views concerning the
way in which the world situation lias affected their
economic i)rogress and the prospects of continuing world
economic expansion.

Having regard finally to the request contained in
the above resolution of the General Assenihly that the
Council recommend to governments and to the General
Assembly measures designed to make possible tlie un-
interrupted progress of programmes of economic sta-
bility and development,

Dccidrn to consider further at its thirteentli session,
tlie wiu'id economic situation in 1949-19ri0, and jMir-
tieularly tlie sections of the report relating to the eco-
nomic conditions in the Middle lOast and Africa, and the
views submitted liy Members of the Unititl Nations in
response to General Asseiiilily resolution 4(H) (V), with
a view to making appropriate reconinicndations.

712

DepartmeM of State Bulletin

U.S. Answers U.N. Questionnaire on Slavery and Servitude

IT.N. doc. E/Ar.SS/Add.sn
Transmitted Mar. 13. I'JDl

8 U.S.C. 56, abolishing and proliibiting the
holding of any person to service of labor under
the system known as peonage ;

18 U.S.C. 1581, providing criminal penalties for
holding or returning any person to a condition of
peonage or arresting him with the intent of plac-
mghim in peonage; and

18 U.S.C. 1582-1588, inclusive, prescribing
criminal punishments for providing vessels for
slave trade, kidnaping or enticing anyone into
slavery or involuntary servitude, holding another
in or selling him into involuntary servitude, en-
gaging in the transportation or sale of slaves,
serving on board a vessel engaged in the slave
itrade, keeping slaves on board ship for the pur-
pose of sale, or transporting anyone from any
place in the United States to any other place to
be held or sold as a slave.

There are also related statutes which may have
a bearing on enforcing the general prohibition
against slavery and involuntary servitude, such
as 18 U.S.C. 241 punishing conspiracy to injure
any citizen in the free exercise or enjoyment of any
right or privilege secured to him by the Constitu-
tion or laws of the United States;

18 U.S.C. 242, providing punishment of anyone

who under color of law wilfully subjects any in-

.; habitant of the United States to the deprivation of

,'any rights, privileges or immunities secured or

protected by the Constitution or laws of the

United States ;

Answer of United States to United Nations
Questionnaire on Slavery and Servitude

Question 1. Does slavery as deflned in Article 1 of the
International Slavery (Convention of 1926 exist in any
territory subject to the control of your Government?

Ansive)'. No. The Thirteenth Amendment to
the United States Constitution, adopted in 1865,
abolished slavery and involuntary servitude. The
first section of that amendment provides :

I Neither slavery nor involuntary servitude, except as a
punishment for crime whereof the party shall have been
duly convicted, shall exist within the United States, or
any place subject to their jurisdiction.

Under the second section of the amendment,
which confers upon the Congress of the United
States power to enforce the amendment by appro-
priate legislation, the Congress has enacted
statutes, such as

8 U.S.C. 56, abolishing and prohibiting the
holding of any person to sei-vice of labor under
the system known as peonage;

18 U.S.C. 1581, providing criminal penalties
for holding or retui-ning any person to a condition
of peonage or arresting him with the intent of
placing him in peonage ; and

18 U.S.C. 1582-1588, inclusive, prescribing
criminal punishments for providing vessels for
slave trade, kidnaping or enticing anyone into
slavery or involuntary servitude, holding another
in or selling him into involuntary servitude, en-
gaging in the transportation or sale of slaves,
serving on board a vessel engaged in the slave
trade, keeping slaves on board ship for the pur-
pose of sale, or transporting anyone from any
place in the United States to any other place to
be held or sold as a slave.

There are also related statutes which may have
a bearing on enforcing the general prohibition
against slavery and involuntary servitude, such
as 18 U.S.C. 241 punishing conspiracy to injure
any citizen in the free exercise or enjoyment of
any right or privilege secured to him by the Con-
stitution or laws of the United States;

18 U.S.C. 242, providing punishment of any-
one who under color of law wilfully subjects any
inhabitant of the United States to the deprivation
of any rights, privileges or immunities secured
or protected by the Constitution or laws of the
United States;

8 U.S.C. 43 and 47, providing civil remedies for
persons injured by violations more or less co-ex-
tensive with the violations of 18 U.S.C. 241 and
242;

18 U.S.C. 1201, providing punishment for trans-
portation in interstate or foreign commerce of
kidnaped persons; and

18 U.S.C. 2421-2424, dealing with white-slave
traffic, and making punishable the transportation,
coercion or enticement of any woman or girl in
interstate or foreign commerce for the purpose of
prostitution.

April 30, 7957

713

ff

Question 2. Does the slave trade, as defined in Article I
of the International Slavery Convention of 1926, exist in
any of the territories subject to the control of your
Government?

Answer. No. The slave trade has been particu-
larly singled out for prohibition and punishment
in the sections of law, 18 U.S.C. 1582-1588, sum-
marized in the answer to Question 1 above.

Question 3. Do any practices exist in any territory sub-
ject to the control of your Government which are restric-
tive of the liberty of the person and which tend to subject
that person to a state of servitude, as for instance:

(a) Serfdom (compulsory and hereditary attach-
ment to land accompanied by obligations to render serv-
ice to the landlord) ;

(b) Traditional forms of involuntary unpaid service
exacted by land owners and other employers of labour
[Such as concertaje, servicio personal, pongaje or pon-
gueajo, yanaconazgo, and others] ;

(c) Debt bondage [Such as siringalcs or cauchales'] ;

(d) Pledging and pawning of third persons as security
for debt [Such as ixvofa\ ;

(e) Exploitation of children under the form of
adoption ;

(f ) Purchase of wives and inheritance of widows by
the heir of the deceased husband involving involuntary
subjection of a woman to a man not of her choice ;

(g) Forms of prostitution of women and children in-
volving exercise of ownership over them?

Please describe in detail such institutions or practices
which may exist.

Answer. No. However, while slavery has dis-
appeared in the United States, federal authori-
ties do receive complaints concerninp; possible
violations by individuals of the laws forbiddino;
involuntary servitude. Upon investigation, some
of the complaints have resulted in the bringing
of indictments, and in convictions, e.g.. United
States V. Bumette (U.S.D.C, S.D. Miss., 1945),
plea of guilty on a charge of holding a Negro
woman and her son in involuntary servitude;
Pierce v. United States, 146 F. (2d) 84 (CCA.
5, 1944), affinning a peonage conviction based
u]wn forced prostitution; United States v. I?i-
ffalls, 73 F. Supp. 76 (U.S.D.C, S.D. Cal., 1947),
conviction for inducing a personal servant to be
held as a slave.

Question J/. What legislation has been passed, and what
adniiiiLstrative methods have been applied, since 1926, to
checli slavery, the slave trade, or any practices which are
restrictive of tlie liberty of the person and which tend
to subject that person to a state of servitude?

Answer. All of the significant legislation, cited
in the answer to Question 1 above was enacted
prior to 1926 with tlie following two exceptions.
The revision of Title IS, U.S.C, effective Sep-
tember 1, 1948, made clear by a technical altera-
tion effected in 18 U.S.C. 1584 that the holding to
or selling into any kind of involuntary servitude
M-as a punisiiable offense. The i<i(lnapuig statute,
18 U.S.C. 1201, wliich is sometimes referred to
as the Lindbergh kidnaping law, became law on
Juno 22, 1932.

Regarding administrative metliods to check
practices wliich tend to subject any person to a

state of servitude, the investigations and prosecu-
cutions upon individual complaints have been re-
ferred to in the answer to Question 3 above. In
this connection, in 1939, there was established in
the federal Department of Justice a Civil Rights
Section to give special attention to the enforce-
ment of federal civil rights statutes. Moreover,
the executive branch of the Government has re-
quested from the legislative branch a general over-
hauling of the federal civil rights statutes in
order to improve the means of investigating and
prosecuting alleged offenses.

Question 5. What have been the results of the applica-
tion of these measures and activities?

A^hswer. Slavery, the slave trade and practices
which are restrictions of liberty of person and
which tend to subject a person to a state of servi-
tude have disappeared. However, as pointed out
in answer to Question 3 above, complaints are re-
ceived from time to time concerning possible vio-
lations by individuals of laws forbidding
involuntary servitude, and upon investigation
some of these complaints have resulted in the
bringing of indictments and in convictions.

THE DEPARTMENT

Religious Advisory Panel Named

[Released to the press April 2i]

Representatives of the Catholic, Jewish, and
Protestant faiths have been invited to become the
members of a religious advisory panel to meet
regularly with Edward W. Barrett, Assistant
Secretary for Public Affairs to consider the pres-
ent religious content of Voice of America pro-
grams and other output of the United States
International Information and Educational
Exchange Program.

The panel, which held its first meeting with
Mr. Barrett at th&^Department of State today,
consists of Monsig. Thomas J. McCarthy of the '
National Catholic Welfare Conference, Isaac
Franck, of the Jewish Community Council of
Greater Washington, and Rev. Edward Hughes
Prudcn, President of the American Baptist Con-
vention, all residing in Waslungton.

"We are convinced that our Campaign of Truth
can be matlo tremendously more effective through
increasing tlie projiortion of religious materials
in the radio programs, pamphlets, and motion
pictures that we are sending to people of all
religious faiths the world over," Mr. Barrett said.
"We will of course continue to adhere strictly to
the princi]ile of absolute impartiality in dealing
with tlie various religious sects."

714

Department of State Bulletin

Personnel Improvement Plans Announced

The Secretary of State made public on April 16
a report prepared by a special Advisory Commit-
tee on Personnel outlining an improved personnel
system for the conduct of foreign affairs. At the
same time, the Secretary disclosed that a number
of the Advisory Committee's recommendations
have been included in a State Department direc-
tive to improve the personnel program of the De-
partment and the unified Foreign Service.

Purpose of Advisory Committee

Members of the Advisory Committee included
James H. Rowe, Jr., attorney engaged in private
practice in Washington; Robert Ramspeck, for-
mer Congi-essman and more recently Executive
Vice President of the Air Transport Association
of America prior to his appointment as Chairman
of the United States Civil Service Commission;
and William E. DeCourcy, Foreign Service officer
and Ambassador to Haiti.

The Rowe-Ramspeck-DeCourcy Committee had
been set up to advise the Secretary whether any
fundamental changes were required in the person-
nel systems and relationships of the Department
of State and the Foreign Service of the United
States, including steps that would bring about a
closer integration of the two services. At present,
pei-sonnel of the Department of State proper are
administered under the general Civil Service per-
sonnel system, whereas employees of the Foreign
Service are administered under a separate statute
not under the Civil Service. Proposals have been
made, from time to time, to place these two groups
of employees under a single personnel system.
This course of action was recommended by the
Commission on Organization of the Executive
Branch of the Government (The Hoover Com-
mission).

Recommendations

Basically, the Rowe-Ramspeck-DeCourcy Com-
mittee, after careful study and inquiry including
an intensive appraisal of employee attitudes, made
the following recommendations:

A. ESTABLISHMENT OF FOREIGN AFFAIRS SERVICE

1. The personnel of the Department and of
the Foreign Service should be placed in one serv-
ice under a single, but flexible, personnel system.

2. This system should be established initially
outside the Civil Sei'vice.

3. It should adequately meet the needs of
other agencies of Government concerned with
foreign affairs.

B. CHARACTERISTICS OF IMPROVED PERSONNEL SYSTEM

1. The framework of the new service should
provide for a single Foreign Affairs Officer cate-

gory to include general and specialized officers
concerned with the substantive aspects of foreign
affairs.

2. The i^ersonnel system for the new service
should be based on maintaining the career prin-
ciple with entry governed by a strict qualifying
process ; advancement on the basis of merit ; care-
fully controlled use of lateral appointments at
higher grades ; and separation of those whose per-
formance unduly inhibits the advancement of
more able employees.

3. At the same time, the personnel system
should be sufficiently flexible to permit rapid ex-
pansion and contraction j to assure a proper blend-
ing of generalists, specialists, and career execu-
tives; to enable those with specialized training
and interests to enter the service and advance in
their respective fields; to make lateral appoint-
ments from the outside whenever the service can-
not itself supply enough qualified staff; and to
enable outstanding officers to receive adequate
recognition in promotion.

4. The personnel system should eliminate
certain inequities which now exist with respect to
pay, retirement, and leave benefits.

5. Personnel should be administered under a
common set of policies which adequately recog-
nize the conditions of overseas service, and they
should serve at home or abroad as the needs of
the service might require.

C. TRANSITION TO NEW SERVICE

1. Studies should be started without delay
to prepare the statutory basis for the integrated
personnel system.

2. Pending the enactment of legislation, all
possible steps should be taken administratively
to work toward an integrated service.

Objectives

Tlie principal objectives as outlined in the di-
rective issued by Mr. Humelsine are as follows :

1. To obtain, develop, and maintain an expe-
rienced and versatile career service capable of
meeting present and future needs of the Depart-
ment and Foreign Service in the conduct of foreign
affairs and to provide means for quickly supple-
menting this staff whenever conditions require
temporary or permanent expansion of personnel.

2. To make maximum use of skills and abilities
of Departmental and Foreign Service personnel
and broaden the range of their usefulness through
training and other developmental programs.

3. To eliminate inequities in the treatment of
certain categories of Foreign Service personnel.

4. To increase through voluntary means the
flexible use of Departmental and Foreign Service
personnel interchangeably between overseas and
domestic assignments.

These objectives, the Secretary stated, are in
line with the Committee's recommendations and

April 30, 1 95 J

715

will lay the groundwork for undertaking possible
further integration of the two services at some
time in the future.

Text of Secretary AchesorCs Letter to Members of
the Advisory Committee,

I wish to express my appreciation for your ex-
cellent report on "An Improved Personnel System
for the Conduct of Foreign Affairs." I have read
it with interest and you may be sure that the De-
partment will put as many of your recommenda-
tions into effect as practicable under present day
conditions.

In essence you have recommended that the per-
sonnel of the Department and of the Foreign Serv-
ice be placed under a single personnel system
initially outside the Civil Service. You have pro-
posed that this system be based on the career prin-
ciple and made sufficiently flexible to meet the
needs of the Government for the conduct of for-
eign affairs.

I have accepted your basic recommendations
regarding the characteristics of an improved per-
sonnel system and program. The Department will
therefore endeavor to adjust the present Foreign
Service personnel system through administrative
and legislative means to closely parallel in char-
acter the system which you have recommended.
Concurrently, we will make corollary administra-
tive improvements within the framework of the
Departmental Civil Service system.

However, I believe the emphasis on integration
of the two Services should be placed on the Foreign
Service and those positions in the Department for
which continuing overseas experience is essential
or desirable. Common conditions of employment
can reasonably be applied to the personnel used to
staff these positions, whereas this is not practicable
for a large segment of the Departmental Service.

Secondly, I feel it is essential that Departmental
employees not be penalized for failure to accept the
conditions of employment implicit in an inte-
gi-ated Service. Eather, their availability for con-
tinuing service at home and abroad should be
accomplished on a voluntary basis. Accordingly,
the Department favors and will promote the en-
trance into an improved Foreign Service personnel
system of Departmental employees who are quali-
fied and willing to accept dual service at home and
abroad. Above and beyond this, the Department
will endeavor to increase substantially the number
of Departmental employees possessing overseas ex-
perience but who are unable to assume the obliga-
tion of dual service for a protracted period.

This approach is consistent with the ultimate
objective of a fully integrated Service. Once we
have attained the more immediate goal of an im-
])roved personnel system coupled with partial steps
toward integration, the Department will liave a
more informed basis for deciding whether to un-
dertake additional steps toward further integra-
tion.

716

Mr. Humelsine, Deputy Under Secretary for
Administration, has been directed and authorized
to carry out this program without delay. I have
asked him to bear constantly in mind your wise
caution, concerning a gradual and considered ap-
plication of basic changes in the present personnel
systems of the Department and the Foreign
Service.

I inclose a copy of the Directive which Mr.
Humelsine has been authorized to issue. You will
note that it embodies a considerable number of
your basic recommendations. The Board of For-
eign Service, which includes advisers from other iJ
Federal agencies with an interest in foreign affairs, '■
has concurred in this Directive. In this connection
we propose to extend the scope of the home assign-
ment program considerably to permit Foreign
Service personnel to be assigned to other Federal
agencies in the United States on a reimbursable
exchange basis.

Mr. Humelsine is also planning to circulate your
report within the Department of State and the
Foreign Service, as well as making it available to
the press and to interested outside groups. We
want everyone concerned to have an opportunity
to read your recommendations directly at the same
time that we annoimce the Department's proposed
course of action.

Mr. Humelsine and I will be glad to meet with
you and with the Committee's Staff Director, Mr.
William Howell, to elaborate on tlie Department's
intended course of action. I am inclosing a copy
of a letter to Mr. Howell.

Ben Hibbs Confirmed as Member
of Information Advisory Commission

On April 18, the Senate confirmed the nomination of
Ben Hibbs as a member of the United States Advisory
Commission on Information, term expiring January
27, 1954.

FOREIGN SERVICE

Confirmations

On April 17, tlie Sen.nte conflrmod the nomination of
Philip H. Floming as American Amliassador Extrsiordl-
nary and Plenipotentiary to Costa Rica.

On April IS, the Senate confirmed the following
nominations :

Georgo K. Morrell as American .\mbassador Extraordi-
nary and Plenipotentiary to .\fj;hanistan ;

Paul C. Daniels as American Ambas.sador Extraordi-
nary and Plenipotentiary to Kcuador :

J. Ri\es t'liilds lis American Ambassador Extraordi-
nary and Plenipotentiary to Ethiopia.

Department of Sfofe Bulletin

Proposals Set Forth for Emergency Assistance to Yugoslavia

TEXT OF U. S. NOTE TO YUGOSLAVIA

[Released to the press April 18]

The State Department today made puilio the text of
a note to the Yugoslav Oovernment dated April 17, 1951,
in connection with the President's announcement of April
16 that Military Defense Assistance funds not to exceed
29 million dollars will be made arailahle to Yugoslavia.
The note, signed hy United States Ambassador to
Yugoslavia Oeorge V. Allen, is as follows.

I have the honor to refer to the request sub-
mitted to the Secretary of State of the United
States of America, by the Ambassador of the
Federal People's Republic of Yugoslavia for
further assistance to meet the emergency in
Yugoslavia resulting from the recent drought.

Particular reference is made to that part of
your country's shortage of raw materifjs and
other supplies which affects the continued ability
of the Government of the Federal People's Repub-
lic of Yugoslavia to support the materiel require-
ments of its military forces. It is understood
that the shortage of such raw materials and sup-
plies results from the recent drought that depleted
Yugoslavia of those agricultural commodities by
export of which Yugoslavia normally acquires
these raw materials and supplies, and that such
shortage is now, in consequence, so drastic as
seriously to impair the ability of the Government
of the Federal People's Republic of Yugoslavia
to defend itself against aggi'ession.

Our two Governments are both desirous of fos-
tering international peace and security within the
framework of the Charter of the United Nations
through measures which will further the ability
of nations dedicated to the purposes and principles
of the Charter to participate effectively in arrange-
ments for individual and collective self-defense
in support of these purposes and principles.

Accordingly, I am pleased to inform you that
the Government of the United States of America
is prepared, pursuant to the provisions of Public
Law 329, 81st Congress, as amended, to extend
immediate assistance in the form of raw materials
and other supplies in amounts and kinds equiva-
lent to certain consumption needs for supporting
the armed forces of the Federal People's Republic

of Yugoslavia on the following mutually agreed
basis :

1. The Government of the Federal People's
Republic of Yugoslavia will use the assistance ex-
clusively for the purpose for which it is fur-
nished, namely in furtherance of the purposes of
the Charter of the United Nations and to
strengthen the defense of the Federal People's
Republic of Yugoslavia against aggression;

2. The Government of the Federal People's
Republic of Yugoslavia agi-ees not to transfer to
any other Nation the assistance furnished pursu-
ant to this agreement without the prior consent of
the Government of the United States of America ;

3. The Government of the Federal People's
Republic of Yugoslavia will provide the United
States of America with reciprocal assistance by
continuing to facilitate the production and trans-
fer to the United States of America in such quan-
tities and upon such terms and conditions as may
be agi'eed on, of raw and semiprocessed materials
required by the United States of America as a
result of deficiencies or potential deficiencies in its
own resources, and which may be available in
Yugoslavia. Arrangements for such transfers
shall give due regard to requirements of Yugo-
slavia for domestic use and commercial export;

4. The Government of the Federal People's
Republic of Yugoslavia will permit and facilitate
in every way the freedom of the Representatives of
the Government of the United States of America,
duly designated for this purpose by the United
States Ambassador to Yugoslavia, without restric-
tion, to observe, supervise and report on the receipt
and distribution in Yugoslavia of commodities and
other assistance made available pursuant to this
agreement, and to cooperate fully with them by
permitting them to have full access to communi-
cation and information facilities. The Govern-
ment of the Federal People's Republic of Yugo-
slavia will afford to such representatives of the
Government of the United States of America op-
portunity to make their observations known to,
and to discuss the necessary supply and transpor-
tation arrangements with, the appropriate officials
of the Federal People's Republic of Yugoslavia.
The Government of the Federal People's Republic
of Yugoslavia is prepared to provide periodical

April 30, J 95 J

717

reports concerning the use made of this assistance:

5. The Government of the United States of
America and the Government of the Federal Peo-
ple's Republic of Yugoslavia recognize that it is
in their mutual interest that consistent with the
requirements of security, full publicity be given
to the objectives and progress of the assistance
being rendered pursuant to this agreement and
that all pertinent information be made available
to the people of Yugoslavia ;

6. The Government of the Federal People's
Republic of Yugoslavia will take appropriate
measures to enable it to become independent of
extraordinary outside assistance ;

7. The Government of the Federal People's
Republic of Yugoslavia will establish a special
account in the Central Bank of Yugoslavia in the
name of the Government of the Federal People's
Republic of Yugoslavia (hereinafter called the
Special Account) and will make deposits in dinars
to this account in amounts commensurate with
the indicated dollar cost to the Government of the
United States of America of commodities and
services (including any cost of processing, storing,
transporting, repairing, or other services incident
thereto) made available to the Federal People's
Republic of Yugoslavia pursuant to this agree-
ment. The Government of the United States shall
from time to time notify the Government of the
Federal People's Republic of Yugoslavia of the
indicated dollar cost of any such commodities and
services, and the Government of the Federal
People's Republic of Yugoslavia will thereupon
deposit in the Special Account a commensurate
amount of dinars computed at a rate of exchange
which shall be the par value agreed at such time
with the International Monetary Fund. The Gov-
ernment of the Federal People's Republic of Yugo-
slavia may at any time make advance deposits in
the Special Account which shall be credited
against subsequent notifications pursuant to this
paragraph ;

b. The Government of the United States
will from time to time notify the Government of
the Federal People's Republic of Yugoslavia of
its requirements for administrative and operating
expenditures in dinars within Yugoslavia incident
to the assistance herein, and the Government of
the Federal People's Republic will thereupon
make such sums available out of any balances in
the Special Account in the manner requested by
the Government of the United States in the noti-
fication ;

c. Five per cent of each deposit made pur-
suant to this paragraph in respect of the assist-
ance herein shall be allocated to the use of the
Government of the United States for its expendi-
tures in Yugoslavia and sums made available pur-
suant to part b. of this paragraph shall first be
charged to the amounts allocated under this 5
per cent ;

d. The Government of the Federal People's

718

Republic may draw upon any remaining balance
in the Special Account for such purposes as may
be agreed from time to time with the Government
of the United States of America consistent with
tlie objectives of this agreement ;

8. The Government of the United States of
America reserves the right at any time to termi-
nate its assistance to Yugoslavia made available
pursuant to this agreement, including termination
of deliveries of all supplies scheduled but not yet
delivered.

Your Excellency will note that with the excep-
tion of paragraph 7 above the foregoing consti-
tutes a reiteration, appropriate changes having
been made, of the assurances contained in the ex-
changes of notes on November 17, 20 and 21, 1950,
regarding supplies furnished to Yugoslavia under
the MDAA and of the agreement signed on Janu-
ary 6, 1951, regarding the provision of foodstuflFs
by the United States Government in accordance
witli the provisions of the Yugoslav Emergency
Relief Assistance Act of 1950.

If the Yugoslav Government after considering
the foregoing proposals is in accord with them, I
have the honor to propose that this note, together
with the reply of the Government of the Federal
People's Republic of Yugoslavia so indicating,
constitute an agreement, effective on the date of
your reply.^

LETTER FROM PRESIDENT

TO SENATE AND HOUSE COMMITTEES

[Released to the press hy the White House April 16]

The President today sent the follomng identical letters
to the Chairmen of the Senate and House AmKd SenHces
and Foreign Affairs Committees.

My dear Mr. Chairman: As you know, the
United States has provided emergency food assis-
tance to Yugoslavia during the past months to
meet the threat to the security of that country
caused by the recent drought : initially, under the
provisions of the Mutual Defense Assistance Act,
the Economic Cooperation Act, and through loans
made by the Export-Import Bank ; and then under
tile provisions of the Yugoslav Emergency Relief
Assistance Act. The drought which gave rise to
the need for assistance, however, not only caused
a shortage in the availability of food for consump-
tion in Yugoslavia, but also has made it impossible
for Yugoslavia to export the agricultural products
with which Yugoslavia normally obtains the re-
sources to pay for imports of critically needed
raw materials. The consequent shortage of raw
materials, which includes those basic to tlie needs

' The YuKoslav note, signed by the Deputy Minister of
Foreign Affairs of the Yugoslav Governmont, states that
the Yugoslav Government is In accoril with the U.S.
note.

Department of State Bulletin

Df the Yugoslav armed forces, is so acute as to
jeopardize the combat effectiveness of the Yugo-
■ilav armed forces and to weaken the ability of
Jugoslavia to defend itself against aggression.
This development seriousl}' affects the security of
:he North Atlantic area.

As I explained to you in my letter of November
24, 1950, and for the reasons stated therein, I have
found that Yugoslavia is a nation whose strategic
location makes it of direct importance to the de-
fense of the North Atlantic area, and that an
immediate increase in its ability to defend itself
)ver that which exists if no assistance is supplied
(vill contribute to the preservation of the peace
ind security of the North Atlantic area.

I have determined, therefore, after consultation

with the Governments of the other nations which
are parties to the North Atlantic Treaty, that in
order effectively to carry out the purposes of
the Mutual Defense Assistance Act of 1949, as
amended, it is essential as an immediate measure
to use not to exceed $29 million of the funds
appropriated for the purposes of Title I of that
Act to provide raw materials and similar supplies
for Yugoslavia in amounts and kinds equivalent
to certain consumption needs for supporting its
armed forces. I am, under the authority of that
Act, approving the procurement and shipment
of such materials and supplies.

This letter constitutes the notification required
by Section 408 (c) of the Mutual Defense Assist-
ance Act, as amended.

.egislation

Jnivpisal Military Training and Service Act of 1951.
Hearings before the prepare<lness subcommittee of the
Committee on Armed Services, United States Senate,
Eighty-second Congress, first session, on S. 1, a bill
to provide for the common defense and security of the
United States and to permit the more effective utiliza-
tion of manpower resources of the United States by
authorizing universal military service and training,
and for other purposes. January 10, 11, 12, 15, 16,
17, 18, 19, 22, 24, 25, 26, 29, 30, and February 2, 1951.
[Contents lists statements, dates, and charts.] six,
1243 pp.

Emergency Powers of the President. Hearings before the
Committee on Expenditures in the Executive Depart-
ments, United States Senate, Eighty-first Congress,
second session, on S. 4264, to amend and extend cer-
tain provisions of the First War Powers Act, 1941, S.
4266, to amend and extend title II of the First War
Powers Act, 1941, December 20, 1950, and S. 101 (82d
Cong., 1st sess. ) to amend the Reorganization Act
of 1949, January 23, 1951. iii, 79 pp.

\^ssignment of Ground Forces of the United States to Duty
in the European Area. Hearings before the Commit-
tee on Foreign Relations and the Committee on Armed
Services, United States Senate, Eighty-second Con-
gress, first session, on S. Con. Res. 8, a concurrent
resolution relative to the assignment of ground forces
of the United States to duty In the European area.
February 1, 15. 16, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, and 28,
1951. iv, 819 pp. [Department of State, pp. 77-125.]

' iv, 819 pp.

nvestigation of Shipments to Communist China. Hear-
ings before a subcommittee of the Committee on
Interstate and Foreign Commerce, . . . October 17,
19, 30, November 21 and 22, 1950. [Department of
State, pp. 88-96.] iii, 199 pp.

development of a Twenty-Year Programme for Achieving
i'eace Tlirough the United Nations. E/1900, February
12, 1951. 18 pp. mimeo.

Vorld Economic Report 1949-50, Preliminary edition.
E/1910, January 29, 1951. 392 pp. mimeo.

lelief and Rehabilitation of Korea. E/1913, February 12,
1951. 35 pp. mimeo.

Jranting of Permanent Residence to Certain Aliens. H.
Kept. 181, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H.
Con. Res. 62] 2 pp.

Uien Property Claims. S. Rept. 59, 82d Cong. 1st sess.
(To accomi)any S. 28] 6 pp.

^pril 30, 1951

India Emergency Assistance Act of 1951. Report of the
Committee on Foreign Affairs on H. R. 3017, a bill
to furnish emergency food relief assistance to India.
H. Rept. 185, 82d Cong. 1st sess. iii, 37 pp.

Extending the Time for the Filing of Certain Claims Un-
der the War Claims Act of 1948. H. Rept. 217, 82d
Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany S. J. Res. 40] 4 pp.

Study of the Health of World War II Prisoners of War.
H. Rept. 228, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany
H. R. 304] 8 pp.

Ninth Report to Congress of the B3conomic Cooperation
Administration. Supplement. EJoonomic Coopera-
tion Agreements and Other Documents, July 1, 1950-
December 31, 1050. H. Doc. 713, Part 2, 81st Cong.
2d sess. V. 100 pp.

Reports To Be Made To Congress. Letter From the Clerk
of the House of Representatives transmitting a list
of reports which it is the duty of any officer of de-
partment to make to Congress. H. Doc. 27, 82d
Cong. 1st sess. 39 pp.

Tenth Report to Congress of the Economic Cooperation
Administration. For the Quarter Ended September
30, 1950. H. Doc. 52, 82d Cong. 1st sess. xi, 147 pp.

Assistance to the Republic of India. Message from the
President of the United States transmitting a recom-
mendation . . . H. Doc. 56, 82d Cong. 1st sess. 4 pp.

Proposed Supplemental Appropriations, Involving an In-
crease, for Various Agencies in the Executive Branch.
Communication from the President of the United
States ... an Increase of $36,694,250 . . . H. Doc. 66,
S2d Cong. 1st sess. 10 pp.

Proposed Supplemental Appropriations Together with
Proposed Provisions and Increases in Limitations
Pertaining to Existing Appropriations. Communica-
tion from the President of the United States . . .
In the amount of $242,165,024 . . . . H. Doc. 67, 82d
Cong. 1st sess. 18 pp.

Proposed Supplemental Appropriation for the Department
of State. Communication from the President of the
United States ... in the amount of $97,.500,00. . . .
H. Doc. 74, 82d Cong. 1st sess. 2 pp.

Amending the Reorganization Act of 1949. S. Rept. 45,
82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany S. 101] 12 pp.

Certain Cases in Which the Attorney General Had Sus-
pended Deportation. S. Rept. 69, 82d Cong. 1st sess.
[To accompany S. Con. Res. 9] 2 pp. Also, S. Rept.
70, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res.
10] 2 pp. Also, S. Rept. 137, 82d Cong. 1st sess.
[To accompany S. Con. Res. 15] 2 pp.

719

II

April 30, 1951

Ind

e X

Vol. XXIV, No. 617

Africa ^"^^

ETHIOPIA: Troops Join U.N. Forces In Korea . 709

Aid to Foreign Countries

Par East: Policy and Action (Acheson before

Women's Natl. Press Club) 685

YUGOSLAVIA: Emergency Aid:

Letter, Text (Truman to Cong. Cttees.) . . 718
VB. Note, Text (Allen) 717

American Republics

American National Ballet Theatre on Tour . . 700
CANAL ZONE: Regulations re Safeguarding of

Vessels Ports, and Waterfront Facilities In

Canal Zone (Ex. Or. 10226) 698

Economic Problems in the Present Danger

(Thorp in OAS Cttee.) 693

Inter-American Relations Reviewed (Dreler

before Pan Am. Soc. of New Eng.) .... 688

Arms and Armed Forces

Economic Problems Facing American Republics

(Thorp In OAS Cttee.) 693

Inter-American Relations Reviewed (Dreler

before Pan Am. Soc. of New Etog.) . . . 688

Par Eastern Policy: Debate, Decision, and
Action (Acheson before Women's Natl. Press

Club) 683

IRAN: U.S.-U.K. Discuss Mutual Interests . . 700
JAPAN: Peace Treaty:

Far Eastern Policy and Action VK-Cheson be-
fore Women's Natl. Press Club) 684

Negotiations With Pacific Ocean Countries

(Truman) 699

KOREA:

Communiques to Security Council .... 712
Ethiopian Troops Join U.N. Forces .... 709
Far Eastern Policy and Action (Acheson

before Women's Natl. Press Club) .... 686
TT.N. Command Operations, 17th Report

(Mar. 1-15. 1951) 710

South Pacific Commission, 7th Session . . . 707

Communism

Inter-American Relations Reviewed (Dreler

before Pan Am. Soc. of New Eng.) . . . 688

Our Far Eastern Policy: Debate, Decision, and
Action (Acheson before Women's Natl. Press
Club) 683

Progress on Point 4 Program (Truman) . . . 699

VOA Transmission of Darkness at Noon . . . 700

Congress

Confirmations 716

Legislation Listed 719

YUGOSLAVIA: Emergency Aid:

Letter, Text (Truman to Cong. Cttees.) . . 718

U.S. Note, Text (Allen) 717

Europe

U.K.: U.S.-U.K. Discuss Mutual Interests In

Iran 700

YUGOSLAVIA: Emergency Aid:

Letter, Text (Truman to Cong. Cttees.) . . 718
U.S. Note, Text (Allen) 717

Foreign Service

Confirmations 716

Personel Improvement Plans Announced . . . 715

Human Rights

UjS. Answers U.N. Slavery-Servitude Question-
naire 713

Informational and Educational Exchange Program

American Ballet Theatre on South American

Tour 700

Ben Hibbs Confirmed to Information Advisory

Commission 716

Religious Advisory Panel Named 714

VOA : Transmission of Darkness at Noon . . . 700

International Meetings

GAIT: Torquay Conference Ended 701

International Materials Conference (IMC) :

Progress Report of Committees 704

Composition of Committees:

Manganese, Nickel, and Cobalt 705

Tungsten and Molybdenum 706

UNESCO: Conference on Improvement of Biblio-
graphic Services (Shera) 707

U.S. Delegations: Page

Population Commission (ECOSOC) .... 706
South Pacific Commission, 7th Session . . . 707

Mutual Aid and Defense

Economic Problems Facing American Republics

(Thorp in OAS Cttee.) 693

Emergency Aid to Yugoslavia:

Letter, Text (Truman to Cong. Cttees.) . . 718

U.S. Note, Text (Allen) 717

Inter-American Relations Reviewed (Dreler

before Pan Am. Soc. of New Eng.) . . . 688
Strengthening Position of Free World In Pacific

Ocean Area (Truman) 699

Presidential Documents

CORRESPONDENCE: Congressional Committees

on Emergency Aid to Yugoslavia .... 718

EX. OR. 10226: Regulations re Safeguarding of
Vessels, Ports, and Waterfront Facilities In
Canal Zone 698

State, Department of

Personnel Improvement Plans Announced . . 715
Religious Advisory Panel Named 714

Strategic Materials

Economic Problems Facing American Republics

(Thorp In OAS Cttee.) 693

Inter-American Relations Reviewed (Dreler

before Pan Am. Soc. of New Eng.) . . . 688
International Materials Conference (IMC):

Progress Report of Committees 704

Composition of Committees:

Manganese, Nickel, and Cobalt 705

Tungsten and Molybdenum 706

Technical Cooperation and Development

Economic Problems Facing American Republics

(Thorp In OAS Cttee.) 693

POINT 4: Progress (Truman) 699

Trade

Economic Problems Facing American Republics

(Thorp in OAS Cttee.) 693

GATT: Torquay Conference. Statement by

Participating Governments 701

Transportation

Regulations re Safeguarding of Vessels, Ports,
and Waterfront Facilities In Canal Zone
(Ex. Or. 10226) 698

Treaties and Other International Agreements
GATT: Torquay Conference. Statement by

Participating Governments 701

JAPAN: Peace Treaty:

Far East Policy and Action (Acheson before

Women's Natl. Press Club) 684

Negotiations With Pacific Ocean Coxintrles

(Truman) 699

United Nations

Communiques Regarding Korea 712

ECOSOC Resolution on World Economic Situ-
ation 712

Ethiopian Troops Join U.N. Forces In Korea . . 709
UNESCO: Conference on Improvement of Biblio-
graphic Services (Shera) 707

U.N. Command Operations in Korea, 17th Report

(Mar. 1-15. 1951) 710

U.S. Answers Slavery-Servitude Questionnaire . 713

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 683, 716

Allen, George V 717

Austin, Warren R 710

Childs, J. Rives 716

Critchett, J. H 706

Daniels, Paul C 716

Dreler. John C 688

Evans, John W 706

Fleming, Philip B 716

Hauser, Dr. Philip M 706

Hibbs, Ben 716

Keesing. Dr. Felix M 707

MacArthur, Gen. Douglas 712

Merrell, George R 716

Shera, Jesse H 707

Thorp, Willard L 693

Truman, President Harry S 698, 699, 718

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICEi 1911

tJ/ie/ u)eha/)(£7nenl/ xw trtaCe/

RELEASE OF ROBERT A. VOGELER BY THE

HUNGARIAN GOVERNMENT 723

PEACE WITHOUT FEAR • hy Ambassador John Foster

Dulles 726

OUTLOOK AND TASKS AHEAD FOR GERMANY:
OUTLINE OF UNITED STATES POLICIES • by

John J. McCloy, U.S. High Commissioner ...... 736

THE PHONY "PEACE" OFFENSIVE • by Assistant

Secretary Hickerson 731

For index see back cover

Vol. XXI F, No. 618
May 7, 1951

U. S. SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS

%//ie

MAY 18 1951

bulletin

Vol. XXrV, No. 618 • Publication 4211
May 7, 1951

For tale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D.O.

Price:

62 issues, domestic $7.50, foreign $10.25

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has

been approved by the Director of the

Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government tvith information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the urork of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department, Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to ichich the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

Release of Robert A. Vogeler by the Hungarian Government

ASSURANCES GIVEN HUNGARY BY U.S.

[Released to the press April ^S]

Robert A. Vogeler, an American citizen who
has been held in Hungary for over 17 months, was
today released by the Hungarian authorities and
has arrived at the American Legation in Vienna.
Mr. Vogeler was delivered by Hungarian offi-
cials into the custody of a representative of the
American Legation in Vienna at Nickelsdorf on
the Austrian frontier at 11 a.m. today (5 a.m.
e.s.t.) and was escorted directly to Vienna.

The Department is gratified that this American
citizen has regained the freedom of which he was
unjustly deprived and that he is now safely re-
united with his family. The release of Mr. Voge-
ler follows upon continuous efforts by the United
States Government in his behalf since the begin-
ning of his detention and brings to a successful
close negotiations which the American Minister
in Budapest, Nathaniel P. Davis, has carried on
personally with the Hungarian Government over
a long period of time, with skill and determina-
tion, under most trying conditions.

In connection with the understanding reached
with the Hungarian Government for freeing Mr.
Vogeler, assurances on the following points have
been communicated by Mr. Davis to the Hun-
garian Government, and, in consequence of the
latter's action in releasing Mr. Vogeler and of his
safe arrival at the American Legation in Vienna,
these assurances now enter into effect :

(1) The United States Government will ap-
prove the reopening of Hungarian consular
establishments in New York City and Cleveland,
Oliio.

(2) It will also, through its appropriate agen-
cies, again validate the passports of private Amer-
ican citizens who may wish to travel to Hungary.

(3) Finally, the United States Government will
facilitate the delivery of all Hungarian goods in
the Ignited States zone of Germany which, in the
light of the provisions of article 30 of the treaty
of peace witli Hungary, liave been found avail-
able for restitution, including Hungarian cul-
tural property, and will permit two Hungarian
representatives to enter the United States zone
of Germany for the purpose of receiving such
property and arranging for its transportation.
United States civil and military officials in Ger-

many will facilitate the entry of the Hungarian
representatives for the purpose stated, render
them all proper assistance as regards the collec-
tion and shipment of the property in question, and
regard them as official representatives of the Hun-
garian Government.

With regard to the matters dealt with under
points (1) and (2) above, it is, of course, the
expectation of this Government that the Hun-
garian Government's observance of consular
rights and the rights of American citizens will
be in accord with international law and practice
and with the provisions of existing treaties be-
tween the United States and Hungary. More-
over, private American citizens who may wish to
travel to Hungary will undoubtedly wish to
inform themselves through the Department or
American missions abroad concerning conditions
in that country.

BACKGROUND OF NEGOTIATIONS
IN VOGELER CASE

[Released to the pi'ess April 28]

Mr. Vogeler was arrested on November 18,
1949, by the Hungarian security police and was
not permitted to communicate with his family or
to have access to American consular officials at
any time or in any manner. As may be recalled
from documents released by the Department at
the time, the conduct of the Hungarian Govern-
ment was such that the United States Government
was impelled to close the Hungarian consulates in
New York City and in Cleveland, Ohio, and to
prohibit further travel by private American citi-
zens to Hungary. Mr. Vogeler was brought to
trial before the Criminal Court in Budapest on
February 17, 1950, on an indictment charging
espionage and sabotage, and was sentenced by that
Court on February 21, to 15 years in prison. The
decision of the Hungarian Supreme Court up-
holding this sentence was announced in the Hun-
garian press on May 11.

The United States Government, deeply con-
cerned at the arbitrary arrest of Mr. Vogeler, his
prolonged detention without access at any time to
American consular representatives, and the ex

May 7, 1 95 1

723

•parte nature of the entire trial proceedings, made
repeated jjrotests and representations through its
diplomatic representative, Mr. Davis, against the
conduct of the Hungarian Government, which was
in flagrant violation of elemental human rights
and all accepted standards of justice.^ It also af-
firmed in the clearest terms that it regarded the al-
legations made by the Hungarian authorities
against Mr. Vogeler as pali^ably false and politi-
cally motivated. This conclusion has been con-
firmed in every detail by the Department's study
of the Hungarian Government's published ac-
count of the proceedings against Mr. Vogeler.

On March 25, 1950, Mr. Davis called in person
on Deputy Prime Minister Matyas Rakosi in order
to press representations in behalf of Mr. Vogeler
before the highest Hungarian authority. On this
occasion, for the first time, it was indicated that
the Hungarian Government might be disposed to
give serious consideration to the request of this
Government that Mr. Vogeler be released and per-
mitted to depart from Hungary. The essential
position of the United States Government on
which Mr. Davis was instructed to base his ap-
proach was then, as throughout subsequent nego-
tiations, that this Government stood ready, upon
the release of Mr. Vogeler by the Hungarian Gov-
ernment, to rescind those measures which it had
put into effect because of the Hungarian Govern-
ment's unwarranted proceedings against Mr.
Vogeler. Mr. Davis was also authorized to in-
form the Hungarian Government tliat a satis-
factory solution of the Vogeler case would make
it possible for the United States Government,
pursuant to the provisions of article 30 of the
treaty of jDeace with Hungary, to facilitate the
delivery of Hungarian goods in the United States
zone of Germany which had been found available
for restitution to Hungary. The delivery of such
goods to Hungary had been suspended since 1948
because of various differences between the United
States and Hungarian Governments.

The conversations thus begun were patiently
pursued by Mr. Davis with the Hungarian For-
eign Office and were brought to an apparently sat-
isfactory conclusion on June 16, 1950, when the
Hungarian authorities agreed to proceed promptly
with arrangements for Mr. Vogeler's deportation.
According to this understanding, it was agreed
that this Government, upon the release of Mr.
Vogeler and his safe arrival at the American Lega-
tion in Vienna, would (1) permit the reopening
of Hungarian consular establishments in New
York City and in Cleveland, Ohio, (2) again vali-
date the passports of private United States citi-
zens who might wish to travel to Hungary, and
(3) facilitate the delivery of all Hungarian goods
in the United States zone of Germany which had

'For in;ileri;ils proviously rpleasod, see But.letin of
Jan. 2, 1950, p. 21 ; .Tan. K!, 1!).-|0, p. 9,5; Feb. 27 19.^)0 p
32.'?; Mar. (i, 19.")0, pp. 377 and 37S; Mar. 13, 1950, pp
308 and 399.

been found available for restitution to that coun-
try. The Minister was informed by the Hungar-
ian Foreign Office that he would be notified on
June 19 of the exact time and arrangements for
Mr. Vogeler's release. Unfortunately, the atti-
tude of the Hungarian Government in this matter
underwent a sudden and complete change between
June 16 and June 20, and, by the latter date, the
Hungarian authorities were no longer prepared
to carry out the "full agreement" of June 16 for
Mr. Vogeler's release.

On June 17 and 18, the terms agreed upon for
Mr. Vogeler's release received premature pub-
licity, and this occasioned wide speculation in the
press. Subsequently, moreover, in the latter part
of June, a rumor of unknown origin was given
wide circulation by the press to the effect that
the principal condition for Mr. Vogeler's release
was the return of the historic Crown of St. Stephen
of Hungary. This report was entirely untrue,
as the subject of the Crown up to that time had
never arisen in comiection with the Vogeler nego-
tiations. Mr. Davis and the Department, being
concerned to forestall a complete breakdown of
diijlomatic negotiations which it was imperative
to carry out on a confidential basis and being
desirous of preserving the framework of agree-
ment laboriously established after many months,
concluded in this situation that tlie interests of
Mr. Vogeler would be seriously prejudiced by any
public discussion or comment on their part re-
garding the details of the case. They, therefore,
remained largely silent, although the Department
felt it necessary to affirm in response to public in-
quiries that this Government was continuing its
efforts to effect Mr. Vogeler's release and to cau-
tion that the speculative reports then current with
regard to the subject should be treated with the
greatest reserve.

When Mr. Davis called at the Hungarian Foi'-
eign Office on June 20, 1950, the Under Secretary
for Foreign Affairs, Dr. Andor Berei, made it
clear that the Hungarian authorities regarded
the premature publicity on the terms of the agree-
ment as particularly aggravating. Dr. Berei then
insisted that the question of interference with the
broadcasts of Radio Petofi in Budapest, allegedly
resulting from Voice of America Hungarian-lan-
guage broadcasts transmitted from Munich, had
not been properly clarified by previous discussion
and that, accordingly, a solution of this problem
was an essential condition for Mr. Vogeler's re-
lease. This was an entirely new condition for,
although the matter had previously been discussed
by Mr. Davis with the Hungarian Foreign Office
in connection with the Vogeler negotiations, it had
originally been treated as a technical matter re-
(]uiring clarification rather than as a condition
which the United States Government would be
required to meet before Mr. Vogeler's release.
Mr. Davis had presented and the Hungarian For-
eign Office had accepted such a clarification,

724

Department of State Bulletin

wherein it was pointed out that the alleged inter-
ference could be eliminated or alleviated if the
Hunjrarian radio held exactly to its prescribed
wave len<jth and avoided spreading its signal.

Desjiite the Hungarian refusal on June 20 to
implement the agi'eement reached on June 16, Mr.
Davis remained in touch with the Hungarian
Foreign Office in the hope of resolving the new
differences which had arisen. However, the situ-
ation did not improve, for on September 11, 1950,
Minister Davis was informed by the Hungarian
Foreign Office that it would require as a further
condition for Mr. Vogeler's release the return to
Hungary of St. Stephen's Crown. Thus, this
matter, which had become the subject of unfounded
reports and speculation after mid-June, now en-
tered into and complicated the subsequent nego-
tiations for Mr. Vogeler's release.

The Hungarian demands with respect to St.
Stephen's Crown and the elimination of radio
interference proved to be serious obstacles to the
early conclusion of a new agreement for Mr.
Vogeler's release and, as new factors, necessitated
a review of the entire situation.

Mr. Davis, with the approval of the Depart-
ment, continued his conversations with the Hun-
garian Foreign Office with a view to exploring all
possibilities for bringing about Mr. Vogeler's re-
lease. In addition to his constant efforts looking
toward the accomplishment of this fundamental
objective, the Minister also approached the For-
eign Office on December 12, 1950, in a renewed
attempt to secure permission on humanitarian as
well as legal grounds for an American consular
representative to visit and talk with Mr. Vogeler
at regular intervals at his place of detention or
elsewhere for the purpose of ascertaining his wel-
fare, needs, and treatment. However, this request
was rejected by the Hungarian Foreign Office on
December 16, 1950, on the grounds that it lacked
all legal foundation and that "under present cir-
cumstances the Hungarian authorities are unable
to meet such requests."

Meanwliile, it had become increasingly evident
that because of the proximity of the frequency
used by Radio Petofi in Budapest and the failure
of that station to stabilize its transmitter precisely
on that frequency, the VOA Hungarian-language
broadcasts transmitted from Munich were fre-
quently rendered unintelligible to listeners in
Hungary, particularly in the Budapest area.
Wlien further investigation confirmed this fact,
the Department concluded that it would be in the
interest of effective VOA broadcasting to utilize
another frequency which would assure a clear
channel. Accordingly, this Government on its
own initiative decided to terminate the relay of
the VOA Hungarian program through Munich
and to utilize another channel which would enable
clear broadcasting. This change was announced
by the VOA to Hungarian listeners on April 1
and was effected on April 7.

On April 9, 1951, following his return to Buda-
pest from Washington on consultation, Mr. Davis
called at the Hungarian Foreign Office to renew
official discussions with Dr. Berei and to pi-esent
the position of the United States Government
once more in concrete terms. The Minister re-
ferred to the action which the United States Gov-
ernment, being concerned no less than the
Hungarian Government with the problem of radio
interference, had already taken on its own initia-
tive and in its own interest to terminate the relay
of the VOA Hungarian-language program
through Munich and to transmit through another
channel clear of such interference. The Minister
added that he assumed this action effectively dis-
posed of the question of i-adio interference raised
by the Hungarian Government. With regard to
the question of St. Stephen's Crown, Mr. Davis
informed Dr. Berei as follows:

The Government of the United States i.s not prepared to
discuss the return of St. Stephen's Crown as a condition
to the release of Mr. Robert A. Voseler. This property
was not removed by force from Hungary but was sur-
rendered to United States authorities for safe-keeping
and is being held in trust by them. It is therefore outside
the scope of restitution and continues to be treated as
property of a special status. The Government of the
United States does not regard the present juncture as
opportune or otherwise appropriate for taking any action
regarding its disposition.

In conclusion, Mr. Davis stated to Dr. Berei,
with reference to the part of the agreement of
June 16, 1950, dealing with restitution, that the
United States Government would perforce have
to proceed with the liquidation by public sale of
Hungarian property in the United States zone
of Germany found available for restitution, other
than Hungarian cultural property, if full agree-
ment were not reached by April 30 for
Mr. Vogeler's release and the way thus cleared
for the return of such property to Hungary.

Dr. Berei received the Minister's presentation
of the United States position on these matters
without substantive comment and stated that he
would report to his Government at once and com-
municate its reply to the Minister as soon as pos-
sible. On April 20, Dr. Berei made known to
Mr. Davis, orally and in writmg, that the Hun-
garian Government did not accept the United
States viewpoint concerning the status of St.
Stephen's Crown. He added, however, that in-
dependently of this question his Government
perceived no obstacle to the release of Mr. Voge-
ler at an early date, in view of the disposal of the
question of radio interference, provided that the
points of the agreement of June 16, 1950, regard-
ing the Hungarian consulates, travel of United
States citizens to Himgary, and restitution were
confirmed by the Minister in writing. A press
release issued by the Hungarian Foreign Office on
April 21 officially confirmed that the negotiations
for Mr. Vogeler's release had been concluded
successfully.

May 7, J 95 J

725

Peace Without Fear

hy Ambassador Jolvii Foster Dulles
Consultant to the Secretary ^

The United States, in association with its allies
and in consultation with Japan, is seeking a
proin23t peace, a just peace, a peace insured by
collective power.

These three principles have solid bipartisan
support in the United States. If that were not
so, our mission would not be here today. The
change in the Supreme Command has left United
States policies untouched insofar as relates to
Japan. That is good news, for policies which
depend upon the vicissitudes of individual for-
tunes are always fragile. Policies which sur-
mount personalities are the policies which are
dependable. All the world can now know that our
Japanese policies have that quality of depend-
ability and of survival.

Prompt Peace

The fact that the United States is seeking a
prompt peace is shown by the energy with which
our Government has been moving forward. Our
mission was established by the President on Janu-
ary 10, 1951. We left for Japan on January 22,
19.51. After nearly 2 weeks of intensive activity
here, we went on to the Philippines, Australia,
and New Zealand. We laid the foundation for
an Australian-New Zealand-United States secu-
rity arrangement related to the Japanese peace.
My deputy, Mr. Allison, went to England. We
completed the task of drafting, as a working paper,
the complete text of a suggested Japanese peace
treaty. We circulated that text to the 15 other
Governments princi])ally concerned, and we have
given personal explanations to 14 of them.

In ail of these matters, wo have maintained
close worlcing relations with our Congress.

We availed of the presence in Washington of
the Foreign Ministers of the 20 other American

' Aildri'ss made before a meeting of the United Nations
Association of .)ai)an, at the Industrial Club, Tokyo, on
Apr. 23 and released to the press on the same date.

726

states, all belligerents, to explain to them the
principles of the Japanese peace we sought.

Within a few hours following the retirement
of General MacArthur as Supreme Commander
and after confirming that there was continuing
bipartisan support of established policies, we re-
turned to Japan so that the new Supreme Com-
mander, General Ridgway, might be fully in-
formed. He has been informed, and, ali-eady his
great ability, tested not only in war but also in the
counsels of the United Nations, is being dedicated
to the attainment of peace.

We have taken advantage of our presence here
to inform your Prime Minister and other Japa-
nese political leaders of the progress made, of the
obstacles surmounted, and the problems that
remain.

The records of the past 3 months admit of no
doubt as to our intention to seek an early peace.
It is not necessary, in this respect, to relj' upon
what we say. You can see what we do.

Just Peace

The peace we seek is a just peace which will pro-
mote reconciliation between those who have been
enemies. When I spoke in Tokyo last February,
we talked of a peace of trust and of opportunity.^
The treaty terms, which we have now tentatively
formulated, were described in an address made in
Los Angeles on March 31.^ I shall not describe
them here again because they are familiar to you.
I am confident you have found that our detailed
proposals fully conform to what wo forecast here.
The peace treaty we envisage would, in fact, re-
store Japan as a free and equal member of the
society of nations.

There is always the temptation to take advan-
tage of a defeated nation's helplessness to impose
restrictions of a kind which are not applicable to

' Rui.LETiN of Feb. 12, 1051, p. 252.
' Bulletin of Apr. 9, 1951, p. 576.

A

Department of State Bulletin

other sovereign nations. The United States is
opposed to that. We are convinced that the wel-
fare of all concerned, tlie victors as well as the
vanquished, will best be served by a peace wliich
will erase the wounds of war, not keep tliem
festering.

General MacArthur, who largely inspired our
concept of peace, said that it "brings a new spirit-
ual idea to mankind and evokes a new standard of
morality in international relations." That is
j worth doing. Though the value of that is in-
j tangible, it is not, on that account, less real.

Secure Peace

We seek a peace that will be insured by the de-
terrent of collective power. Wlien I last spoke
there on February 2, 1 referred to the United Na-
tions concept that there should be "effective col-
lective measures for the prevention of threats to
tlie peace.'' Veto power in the Security Council
has prevented the United Nations itself from set-
ting up an effective security force. But the United
Nations principle is, nevertheless, being applied
througli regional collective security arrangements,
which are contemplated by the Charter. In that
way, there is being built up collective power to
deter aggression.
I Today, the material might to deter aggression
resides largely in the United States. But, as we
said here before, the United States is prepared to
combine its {)ower with that of others in nuitual
committals so that the deterrent power that pro-
tects us will also protect others. Japan can, if it
wishes, share in that protection.

The Obstacle of Fear

Since we have been here, many have asked us
about the obstacles that lie in the way of the
prompt, just, and secure peace we seek. Of course,
there are obstacles. That is a normal incident of
every great achievement. There are, however, no
obstacles that seem to be insurmountable except
perhaps the obstacle of fear. Fear is a para-
1 lyzing, a corroding emotion. It destroys men's
I capacity to think clearly, and it makes them irreso-
lute in action. Fear is a negative rather than a
, positive force. The most important task, to clear
[l the way for the peace we seek, is to dispel the fears
that harass us.

United States Stands Firm in the Pacific

Some seem to fear that the offer of the United
States to establish collective security for Japan
and for other Pacific areas means little because,
they suggest, the power we possess will only be
used to protect the members of the North Atlantic
pact, leaving Asia in a position of neglect. That
suggestion is wholly without foundation. I do not
ask you to believe that merely because I say it. I

ask you to consider such indisputable facts as the
following :

1. Of the Armed Forces of the United States
which are outside of our homeland, a large part
are in Asia.

2. The Far Eastern Air Force has been ex-
panded in numbers and facilities, a fresh United
States Army division has, in tiie last few days, ar-
rived in Japan to strengthen the position here,
while still another is en route.

3. The United States stands ready, by bilateral
arrangement with Japan, to continue after the
peace a screen of protection which could not be
breached without placing upon the United States
grave responsibilities, which we publicly accept.

4. The United States has, and expects to main-
tain, ai-med force at Okinawa, and new construc-
tion there is steadily going forward.

5. The United States has in the Philippines
military-operating rights and facilities pursuant
to agreement with that Government, and Presi-
dent Truman, only last week, has affirmed that
an armed attack on the Philippines would be
looked upon by the United States as dangerous to
its own peace and safety and that it would act
accordingly.

6. The United States, as the President further
announced last week, is prepared, in connection
with reestablishment of peace with Jajian, to make
an arrangement with Australia and New Zealand
providing for common action to meet the common
danger inherent in an armed attack upon any of
them in the Pacific.

7. The bulk of United States power, and no-
tably its strategic air power, remains, of course,
within the United States itself. But, there, it also
serves others. An armed attack upon any of
the areas, East or West, where there are such pre-
arrangements as I have described, could bring into
play this immense retaliatory striking power.
That is known, and that knowledge exerts a power-
ful influence for peace. The Japanese nation can
share the security which the United States itself
and others derive from the fact that potential ag-
gressors know that they cannot attack without sub-
jecting themselves to the risk of gi-eat disaster.

8. Secretary Acheson, speaking in Washington
on April 18, in discussing the contemplated ar-
rangements between the United States and Japan
for the continued security of Japan said tliat
Japan's safety is of vital concern to us both.*

In the light of all these facts, it is ridiculous to
pretend that the collective security which is offered
to Japan is illusory.

Fear of Indirect Aggression

Let us turn now to a second cause of fear, the
fear that the Soviet Union and the Soviet Com-

' Btjlletin of Apr. 30, 1951, p. 683.

May 7, J 95 1

727

munist Party (Bolshevik) may not leave Japan
alone.

As I pointed out in speaking here last February,
international clanger has two aspects. There is
the danger of direct aggression and also of in-
direct aggression.

I cannot in honesty say to you that the menace of
indirect aggression is illusory. That is a danger
that is ever present and all pervading. In every
free country of the world, there exists, partly in
the open but also invariably underground, a IBol-
shevik organization working to gain political con-
trol so as to add that country to the list of those
which are subject to the will of international com-
munism. Their avowed goal is to achieve a uni-
versal state under the domination of the Soviet
Communist Party as the leader of the world pro-
letariat. In their efforts, they accept the direction
of the Moscow Politburo as being what they call
the General Staff of the world proletariat. This
is a danger which, as I say, exists everywhere. It
is, however, a danger which, when it is recog-
nized, can be met. That has been proved time
after time.

Communism wins its internal victories by using
fraud and terrorism to win converts and by then
using these converts first to break down orderly
government and then to seize power through rev-
olutionary effort. Those methods fail utterly
when falsehood is met with truth; when secrecy
is confronted with exposure ; and, above all, when
the society is so sound and healthy that there are
not mass discontents which furnish communism
with recruits. Confronted by these conditions, the
tactics of Bolslievik communism cannot prevail.

The consequences of Communist conquest are
now so demonstrably evil that to abet the conquest
is a supi'eme crime. We see these consequences
in China and North Korea. There the Commu-
nist rulers, like all true Communists of the Bol-
shevist school, proclaim and protest loyalty to the
Politburo at Moscow, and now the destitute and
war- weary peoples of North Korea and China are
being fed into the fiery furnace of a war of ag-
gression to gain control of all Korea, an area
which has been a strategic objective of Russia
since the days of the czars. The total casualties
of North Korean and Communist Chinese forces
in Korea between June 25, 1950 and April 17,
1951, are officially estimated by the United Na-
tions Command as being 827,186. This awful
sacrifice is so sickening that all peoples in their
senses will take the necessary measures so that
they will not, in turn, become victims of Commu-
nist despotism and be made to pour out the lives
of their youth to promote the fanatical Bolshevik
dream of world domination.

The danger is real. It is a danger that con-
fronts every nation in the world, but it is a danger
that can bo dealt with and which will be dealt
with by all who see the danger, for the conse-
quences of neglect are disastrous.

The Danger of Direct Aggression

There is, of course, some risk of general war,
but I personally doubt that the rulers of Russia
now want it. I may be wrong. No one can be
certain of what goes on within the dark recesses
of the Kremlin. But experience to date indicates
that the rulers of Soviet Russia spread fear of
general war primarily because that helps the Com-
munist Parties in non-Communist countries to
strengthen their position so that they can take
over from within.

I recall that in 1948, the Prime Minister of
France told me that the Communist Party within
France had been greatly strengthened numerically
by rumors that France would be invaded by the
Red armies of Russia. The Communists deliber-
ately spread those rumors and sought to capitalize
on the resultant fear by urging membership in
the Party as a means of getting safety as against
liquidation when the Red armies moved in.

That is standard technique, and I should be sur-
prised if it is not practiced in all other countries
within reach of the military power of Russia.

Also, I recall the furor that Soviet Russia raised "
when the North Atlantic security pact was made
2 years ago. The Russian leaders cried to high
heaven that this security arrangement constituted
in fact an offensive threat and that it involved
the United Kingdom and France in violation of
their treaties of alliance with Russia. Commu-
nists indicated that this might be a cause for war.

Some timid souls were paralyzed with fright
and saw, in nightmares, the Red army marching
into Western Europe. Those who were calmer
and more experienced saw that the Red annies
would not march on the basis of some legalistic
pretext. They saw that it was better to gain
strength than to succumb to blackmail which would
mean permanent weakness and the living in per-
petual fear. So the Atlantic countries went
ahead. They made their security pact, they be-
gan to implement it, and the Red armies did not
march.

There is always danger of war when there are
ambitious despots who control a great military
establishment. That has been so since the begin-
ning of time. However, the evidence to date sug-
gests that the present progi-am for world conquest
IS primarily the program of the Communist Party,
that it is being pm-sued primarily by methods of
indirect aggression, and that the fear of direct
aggression and armed attack is being spread to
frighten the free peoples into a condition which li
will make them vulnerable to conquest from =■
within.

Over-All Peace

Those who seek alternatives to collective secur-
ity are the victims of a great illusion.

Some seek safety in what they call an over-
all peace. That means, I take it, that they do not

728

Department of State Bulletin

want peace befoi'e it is offered jointly by the free
nations and also by Soviet Russia.

It is, of course, highly desirable that the Soviet
Union should become a party to the kind of peace
we seek for Japan. The United States has sought
earnestly to brincr that about, and we shall con-
tinue to do so. We have been scrupulous to seek
to keep in touch with the representatives of the
Soviet Union precisely as with the other Allies
principally concerned.

For some montlis, the Soviet Government,
through Jacob Malik, carried on discussions with
us. Before coming to Japan last January, I
explained to Mr. Malik the exjiloratory nature of
our mission ; that no final decisions would be taken
and that we would discuss the situation with him
when we returned. In accordance with that
promise, immediately upon our return, we sought
to see him to report the good prospects ahead, and
to exchange views about future procedure. There-
upon, Mr. Malik, presumably under instructions,
announced to the press that he would not "resume
negotiation on a Japanese peace ti'eaty."

We were not willing to reply on a press an-
nouncement on so important a matter. There-
fore, we pei'sonally approached Mr. ISIalik to find
out whether the press statement must be accepted
at its face value. He confirmed that his Govern-
ment was unwilling to resume our Japanese peace
treaty discussions.

Even so, however, we do not accept the rebuff
as final. We have submitted our suggested text
of treaty to the Soviet Embassy in Washington
and, in this way, informed the Soviet Govern-
ment that the United States would appreciate its
consideration of the draft and an early expression
of its views. We have further informed the
Soviet Government that thereafter the Govern-
ment of the United States would expect again to
get in touch with the Soviet Government with a
view to concerting future procedures.

Our approach has so far elicited no response,
and it may be that the Soviet Union intends to
disassociate itself from the Japanese peace. If so,
the reasons will not be hard to find. The Soviet
Government talks much of peace but in fact, when
peace comes near, they avoid it like the plague.
They do so because they desire to deny the reas-
surance which peace would bring and to keep alive
the fear upon which the Bolshevik Communist
Party capitalizes in its efforts at indirect aggres-
sion.

If that attitude persists, then those who advo-
cate a so-called over-all peace are, in effect, advo-
cating no peace at all.

Neutrality and Friendship

There are some who feel that neutrality is safer
than collective security. Neutrality would, of
couse, be normal if we were living in a world where
aggression was permanently banished. But in a
world where there are still aggressors, neutrality

is no protection, rather it encourages aggression.

No one has spoken more clearly or eloquently on
this point than Stalin himself. Speaking on
March 10, 1939, Stalin bitterly reproached what
he called "the non-aggressive states, primarily
England, France, and the United States because,
he said they —

. . . have rejected the policy of collective security, the
policy of collective resistance to the aggressors, and have
taken up a jiosition of nonintervention, a position of "nou-
trality." That policy might be defined as foUovi's: "Let
each country defend itself from the aggressors as it likes
and as hest it can" . . . but, actually speaking the policy
of nonintervention means conniving at aggression.

We should all be advised to remember these
words. History is full of examples of how il-
lusory it is to seek security through neutrality and
pacts of nonaggression and of friendship.

Let us recall the experience of the National Gov-
ernment of China.

As part of the Yalta arrangement of February,
1945, Stalin agreed to conclude with the National
Government of China a pact of friendship and
alliance. Six months later, the Soviet Union did
in fact make such a pact. The National Govern-
ment of China, in accordance with the Yalta pro-
posal, agreed to surrender to Russia effective con-
trol of Manchurian railroads. Port Arthur, and
Dairen. But in return, as was stipulated by the
Yalta proposal, the Soviet Union made with the
National Government of China a treaty of friend-
ship and alliance and solemnly promised that, for
20 years, it would —

. . . render to China moral support and aid in military
supplies and other material resources, such support and
aid to be entirely given to the National Government as the
central government of China.

A few days later, the Japanese surrender having
been concluded, the Russians moved into Man-
churia, Port Arthur, Dairen, North Korea, South
Saklialin, and the Kuril and Habomai Islands,
thus cashing in on a formal belligerency that had
lasted 6 days. In Manchuria, they acquired not
only Japanese industrial investments but also vast
amounts of Japanese armament and ammunition
dumps. These latter they turned over to the
Chinese Red armies, despite the explicit agreement
they had just made, to give military supplies only
to the National Government.

In October 1949, in another direct violation of
its 20-year treaty of 1945, the Soviet Government
withdrew its recognition of the National Govern-
ment and recognized the Red regime of Mao Tse-
tinig as the government of all China.

Tlie lessons are clear. As Stalin said, the only
reliable security policy is the policy of collective
resistance to aggressors and a policy of neutrality
means in fact "conniving at aggression."

The Road to Peace

I have spoken of fears in the hope of allaying
fear. Fear itself is usually far more dangerous

tAay 7, 7951

729

than wliiit is feared, for it destroys the capacity to
surmount danger.

As we have seen, the actual danger that con-
fronts us, the danger of indirect aggression, can
be dealt with. The danger of direct aggi-ession is
a kind of danger that has been constant in the
world as it has existed for thousands of years.
There is today much more chance to overcome that
type of danger than ever before in the history of
mankind. Now, for the first time, there is a pos-
sibility of collective measures adequate to assure
that victims will not be plucked one by one.
Therefore, we can face the future with courage
and confidence and act to seek the kind of peace
that the nations envisaged when they met at San
Francisco and drafted the United Nations Charter
which should always be our guide.

Collective Security

That Charter, you will recall, rejects the thesis
of pacifism that there should be no armament and
no resistance to aggi-ession. On the contrary, the
Charter imposes upon every member the obliga-
tion to stand ready to provide armed forces for the
maintenance of international peace and security.
The Charter recognizes that there is a right of in-
dividual and collective self-defense and that this
is what it calls an inherent right. It recognizes
the need for "effective collective measures for the
prevention and removal of threats to the peace."
It contemplates regional arrangments as an agency
for peace.

It is in pursuance of those principles that the
President of the United States last week outlined
his plans for sti-engthening the fabric of peace in
the Pacific Ocean area by a series of steps which
initially would include (a) a posttreaty security
arrangement between the United States and
Japan ; (b) the maintenance of armed forces at
Okinawa; (c) recognition that an armed attack
on the Philippines would be looked upon by the
United States as dangerous to its own peace and
safety; and (d) the conclusion with the Govern-
ments of Australia and New Zealand of an ar-
rangement whereby, in the event of an armed
attack upon any of them in the Pacific, each of the
three would act to meet the common danger.
These measures, he pointed out, were "initial
steps," and, as Secretary Acheson pointed out the
following day, they will not interfere in any way
with such broader arrangements as nations in the
Pacific area may wish to develop — arrangements
which he said would receive the sympathetic inter-
est of the United States.

The series of measures thus outlined, taken in
the aggregate, i-epresent major steps in the exer-
cise of regional and collective security rights
which are authorized by the United Nations Char-
ter, and which all of the members of the United
Nations have by the Charter recognized to be in
the interest of peace, security, and justice. Let us

also recall that the United Nations Charter, while
it recognizes the necessity of there being armed
force to resist armed attack, lays down another
principle; namely, the principle that "force shall
not be used, save in the common interest." This
great principle, if given practical expression in
arrangements for collective security, automat-
ically gives hope that armed force created for se-
curity will not serve to create insecurity. Since
this principle is embodied in practice, it will mean
that individual nations will be less inclined and
less able to use national force to promote purely
national ambitions. It is a principle which oper-
ates against the militarism which neither Japan
nor its neighbors want.

Economic Weil-Being

Let us also recall article 55 of the Charter of
the United Nations, which recognizes that stability
and well-being are necessary for peaceful and
friendly relations among nations and which calls
upon the nations to promote higher standards of
living, full employment, and conditions of eco-
nomic and social progress and development.

The leaders and people of Japan are, I know,
concerned with their economic problems, and that
is a natural concern. It is because of the difficulty
of the Japanese economic position that the United
States stands against imposing such economic bur-
dens and disabilities as would make it improbable
that Japan would realize the conditions which the
Charter of the TTnited Nations recognizes to be
necessary for lasting peace. cj

If the Japanese conform in public and private ■' '
trade and commerce to internationally accepted
fair practices and if the industry, the aptitude,
and the ingenuity of the Japanese people are de-
voted to developing mutually desirable trade and
commerce with the rest of the world, that should
assure the possibility of a rising economic
standard.

In this connection, it is useful to recall that trade
and commerce are apt to flourish where they have
the protection of a common security system. If
there is concluded between Japan and the L^nited
States such a post-treaty security arrangement as
the President of the United States has suggested,
that in itself will promote the confidence which
will encourage business and finance within our two
nations to work together in cooperation for mutual
advantage.

Human Rights

Let us also recall that the United Nations Cliar-
ter calls for universal respect for and oliservance
of human rights and fundamental freedoms and
for cultural and educational cooperation.

In Japan, human freedom and opportunity have
already been vastly enlarged dui-ing the occupa-
tion through such measures as women's suffrage,

730

Department of State Bulletin

land reform, the organization of labor, the liquida-
tion of militarism and police terrorism, freedom
of the press, and, broadly, the <fivin<; of sov-
ereignty to the people through a truly representa-
tive government. Japan is today one of the
nations wliich are in the forefront of those seeking
to conform their conduct to the high ideals enun-
ciated in the United Nations Universal Declaration
of Human Riglits.

You are eager for cultural and educational co-
operation and, in this respect, you have mucli to
give, for your people have demonstrated over the
centuries the capacity to appreciate and create
beauty and culture.

The free world, in turn, welcomes cooperation

with Japan in the field of education and culture,
and our mission is perhaps unique in the history
of i)eace missions in that one of its membere was
specifically charged with finding ways to promote
cultural and educational cooperation.

Conclusion

Wo stand at a threshold beyond which lies a
\ista of opportunities that are immense and glor-
ious. The door is not yet open, but we hold in
our hands the key. Let not our hand be paralyzed
by fears and doubts. Let us dare to use that key
to open that door and go forward on the road to
peace.

The Phony "Peace" Offensive

hy John D. Hickerson

Assistant Secretary for United Nations Affairs ^

How well do we in the United States under-
stand Soviet techniques designed to undermine the
free world ?

In the great debates taking place in this country
about how we can best defend ourselves from the
threat of Soviet imperialism, we should not lose
sight of the aims and methods utilized by those
who would destroy us.

Some Soviet techniques we now understand
fairly well — such as subvei-sion througli coups,
espionage, overt aggression through satellites,
and tlie constant i-epetition of blatantly false
propaganda. But are we sufficiently alert to
some of the more subtle maneuverings of the
Kremlin which are designed to advance Soviet
imperialism by exploiting the free world's
sincere desire for peace? I doubt it.

I would like, therefore, to talk to you today
about one of the most insidious weapons of the
Cominform — the phony "peace" offensive.

We are in a period of history which is unique
in many ways. Man's aspiration to live in har-
mony with his fellow man has existed since the
beginning of time. But, there has probably never
been a time when more people, from all walks of
bfe, in all parts of the world, were so anxious for
peace. The last two world wars reached into
the homes of millions of people, took away dear
ones and wrecked the products of their life's work.
At no time have the ravages of war been felt by
so many. A new war would affect more rather

' Address made before the 2d Annual Institute on
U.S. Foreign Policy at Milwaukee, Wis. on Apr. 27 and
released to the press on the same date.

than fewer men, and its potential havoc is terri-
fying to contemplate. Paradoxically, however,
there have been few times in histoi-y when a just
peace has been so hard to attain.

Tlie universal desire for peace is not lost on the
men in the Kremlin. Although they alone are
sabotaging peace, they see in this universal de-
sire for peace an opportunity to exploit for their
own ends.

Exploiting the Desire for Peace

Why has the Kremlin found it desirable to ex-
ploit this yearning for peace?

The Soviet's ability to extend their power
through the medium of communism, as an eco-
nomic and political belief, has been steadily los-
ing ground in most parts of the world. The Com-
inform brand of "domestic" communism has be-
come known for what it is — an arm of Soviet ex-
pansionism, entirely subservient to the aims of the
Kremlin.

Communism thrives on empty stomachs, on
chaos, and on fear. As the free nations of the
world increase their security, the appeal of com-
munism declines.

The democratic nations of tlie world have made
tremendous strides in the reconstruction of their
countries and in their ability to defend themselves.
The material betterment we have achieved far
outstrips the progress made by the Soviets and
their satellites. The free countries are proving
that they can give to the world an ever-expanding
economic and social program.

May 7, 1957

731

The Marshall Plan, Point 4, the North Atlantic
Treaty, and the Eio Pact have given evidence of
the ability of the democracies to provide bread
and security.

The Communists nnist realize that no informed
person believes them when they claim to be the
champions of social justice. Thus, the area, in
which the Soviet Union can persuade people with-
out the use of force, has been steadily decreasing.
Theirs is a bankrupt philosophy, and, more and
more, people have come to realize this. As politi-
cal dogma, it is as dated as the slang of another
decade.

The decline in the Soviet Union's ability to sell
its wares and the increasing strength of tlie demo-
cratic nations are matters of grave concern to
Soviet leaders. To rally support, they have,
therefore, seized on one central theme with which
no one can quarrel. That theme is peace. Of
course, we all want peace. As long as the Com-
munists don't define it — for a Communist defini-
tion is invariably a contradiction of the term
itself — the people of the world will naturally
tend to support a campaign for peace.

Let us see, now, how the Kremlin has tried to
exploit the peace theme. In Paris, back in 1949,
the Communists set up the partisans-of -peace or-
ganization. Together with the word "peace" they
utilized the world "partisan," which had strong
associations among democratic peoples with the
united effort during World War II to overthrow
the tyranny of totalitarianism. They sought to
gather strength for their campaign of deceit
through use of these universally appealing words.
These so-called partisans of peace later met at
Stockholm where they initiated the notorious
Stockholm Appeal. Later, they met in Warsaw
where they established an executive body known as
the World Peace Council. The first meeting of
this World Peace Council was in East Berlin last
February.

What is this World Peace Council ?

The Council asserts gi"andiloquently that it has
262 members from 60 countries and represents
500 million people. It claims to be a more repre-
sentative international organization than the
United Nations itself. Let's investigate it more
carefully. The total population of the U.S.S.R.
and Communist China exceeds 500 million, and no
one can tell how many of these are included among
the 500 million people supposedly represented by
the World Peace Council. Representatives are se-
lected to the World Peace Council by the usual
Communist methods of "self-election" or appoint-
ment.

We can well imagine how the U.S.S.R., Chinese
Communists, and satellite ones are chosen. Wlio
are some of these representatives who purport to
represent other countries? Joliet-Curie, who is
the chairman, is an avowed Communist who was
removed last year from his position as High Com-
missioner of the French Atomic Energy Board,

732

because of doubt about his primary loyalty to
France. Does he purport to speak for France?
Paul Robeson is a member of the Executive Coun-
cil. Does he purport to speak for 153 million
Americans ?

These are two representative examples of who
it is that speaks for countries in this World Peace
Council. The others are largely persons noto-
rious in their own country ; thoroughly discredited
in the eyes of their own countrymen; and hand-
picked for their naivete or primary loyalty to the
Soviet Union. The net result is that at least 85
percent of the members of the World Peace Coun-
cil are Communists or fellow travelers. To make
insurance doubly sure, control of the Council is in
the hands of its executive bureau. All but two of
the 27 members of this bureau are either Com-
munists or fellow travelers. The very structure
of this organization is indicative of its origin.
This is typical Communist-front organizational
procedure.

In the United States, the mission of the World
Peace Council is carried on by something that calls
itself the American Peace Crusade. This group
was publicly exposed by Secretary Acheson last
February as merely a continuation of the spurious
partisans-of -peace movement. The entire pro-
gram of this shadowy group coincides with the
foreign policy objectives of the U.S.S.R.

How does this World Peace Council operate?

The object of this organization is to obtain wide-
spread support from groups which would not
ordinarily respond to Communist doctrines. It is
its aim, through playing the role of champion of
"peace," to win these people away from the sup-
port of democratic ideas and policies to a concept
of false neutrality. They will play upon the imi-
versal desire for peace; upon abhorrence of war-
fare; upon the purposes of the United Nations.
They try to garner support under these general
rubrics.

Let us look at the fine print, however. You will
note how this support for peace is cleverly coupled
with support of specific Communist objectives, and
how it is hypocritically designed to exploit incon-
sistent local prejudices.

Here is how this specious device works. A
world-wide drive for peace is started. Peace has
a universal appeal. The man in the factory in
Detroit wants peace ; the farmer in Brittany wants
peace; the man in the rice jiaddy of South Asia
wants peace. When beamed at South Asia, the
propaganda organ of the partisans is for peace
and against colonialism. In exploiting Asian na-
tionalism, they fail to say that they want to impose
a totalitarian government subservient to Soviet
imjierialism. They want to create a power
vacuum into which they can inject their fifth
column and secure control over these peoples in a
way which makes old time colonial rule look en-
lightened. No colonial domination of the old
order was ever felt so heavily by the people as is
the tyranny of Soviet imperialism.

Department of State Bulletin

Wlien talking to the Frenchman, they are for
peace and ac:ainst German rearmament. By ex-
ploiting the historic fear of a militant Germany,
they seek to bi-ing about a weak Europe — a Europe
they can dominate with fear and overrun when it
suits their purposes. When talking to Germany,
they are for peace and a strong, unilied Germany.
When talking to certain parts of the Far East, they
want peace and are against Japanese rearmament.
Playing on the fears of a resurgent Japan, they
seek again a power vacuum in which the Japanese
people will not be able to defend themselves. In
this way, the organization couples a universal idea
with a local issue with which to serve their own
interests.

Soviet Agitation by "Peace" Meetings

In addition to a skillful, constant use of mass
media for such purjjoses, they have scheduled —
to use the parlance of bureaucracy — regional and
functional meetings. There is, for example, a
meeting sponsored by the World Peace Council
in the American hemisphere scheduled for this
summer. The issue of peace will doubtless be
coupled with local prejudice in such a way as to
be useful to the local Communist parties. Per-
haps it will be peace and Yankee imperialism.
Perhaps, it will be peace and the alleged exploita-
tion of Latin America in some other form by the
United States. At all these meetings, the unwary
will soon find that peace means Soviet peace ; that
the meeting is being run by experienced Soviet-
trained agitators and Communist organizers.

I mentioned earlier that the World Peace Coun-
cil claims to have the support of millions for peace.
But the organization will also claim that these
millions support its specific policies. This is but
one of the insidious methods by which they are
attempting to obtain wide support for their own
ends from innocent, well-meaning peoples. A
well-meaning person may sign a petition saying
simply: "I am for a peace pact." Whether he
knows it or not, his name is misused as a sup-
porter of Soviet imperialism. Like the not yet
forgotten American practice of offering free
lunch with a nickle glass of beer, the World Peace
Council is trying to sell its product — Soviet im-
perialism— by promising world i^eace.

The obvious attempt is to create a propaganda
basis which could be used to divide the free world.
Their aim is to drive a wedge between the people
and their governments, and between free govern-
ments themselves. To this end, they utilize in-
nocent non-Communist persons who are sincerely
interested in peace.

Now let us look more closely at some of the poli-
cies advocated in this phony Communist peace
offensive. What are the planks in the platform?

First, the subject of atomic weapons is a popu-
lar one. At their Stockholm meeting, the parti-
sans of peace appealed for a banning of atomic

May 7, 1951

weapons. This has been a standard theme since
then. Well, who is really against banning atomic
weapons? Just examine the history of efforts in
the United Nations to assure the control of atomic
energy and make possible a real abolition of
atomic weapons. The statement of the pai-tici-
pating powers on their attempts at negotiation
with the Soviet Union on atomic energy control
is eloquent on this subject.
It states :

It is apparent that there is a fundamental difference
not only on methods but also on aims. All of the Spon-
soring Towers, other than the U.S.S.R., put world security
first and are prepared to accept innovations in traditional
concepts of international cooperation, national sover-
eignty, and economic organization where these are neces-
sary for security. The Government of the U.S.S.R. puts its
sovereignty first and is unwilling to accept measures
which may impinge upon or interfere with its rigid exer-
cise of unimpeded state sovereignty. If this fundamental
difference could be overcome, other differences which have
hitherto appeared unsurmountable could be seen in true
perspective, and reasonable ground might be found for
their adjustment.

Yet the partisans of peace sought to delude the
peoples of the world into thinking that a Commu-
nist paper pledge would insure against atomic
attack. Wliat is needed, of course, is not a decla-
ration against the use of the atom bomb but an
effective system of control and inspection. Yet
all efforts in the United Nations to secure agree-
ment on such a system have been frustrated by
the Soviet Union, and the Soviet Union alone.

The United Nations Atomic Energy Commis-
sion drafted a plan for the control of atomic
energy which was approved in 1948 by an over-
whelming majority of the General Assembly.
Since then, it has twice been reaffirmed by even
larger majorities.

If these partisans of peace were actually con-
cerned about the use of atomic weapons, why did
they not address themselves to this plan? Is it
because the Soviet Union is not really interested
in effective control? Is it because, while calling
for the outlawing of the bomb, they have main-
tained a standing army far outnumbering that
of any of the world powers today? One could
speculate that they exploited the universal ab-
horrence of the atomic bomb to try to weaken us
in the one field — technical proficiency — that could
be matched against their larger land armies.

Second, the World Peace Council, now brazenly
says it is against aggression. The earlier version
of the Stockholm Appeal failed to condemn ag-
gression. Now, they say they are against aggres-
sion, but they condemn the United Nations for
having declared the Chinese Communists to be
aggressors in Korea. The Cominform asks for
"peace" at meetings of the partisans of peace in
Stockholm, Paris, Warsaw, or in Berlin. At the
same time, they attempt to intimidate Yugoslavia
and they actually succeed in instigating armed
aggression against the Republic of Korea.

It is revealing to note that just before the North
Koreans launched their unprovoked attack against

733

the Republic of Korea, more than half the popu-
lation of North Korea was reported to have signed
the Stockholm petition. This illustrates the basic
hypocrisy of tlie ('ommunist "peace appeal." The
Soviet concept of world peace means the absence
of any opposition to the ever-expanding Soviet
drive for power.

Third, the organization is now campaigning for
a five-power peace pact, a favorite Soviet propo-
sition. The Five Powers would be the United
States, the United Kingdom, Fi-ance, the Soviet
Union, and Eed China. They state that failure
to meet for the purpose of signing a peace pact
between the Big Five would be evidence of ag-
gressive intentions. A campaign is under way
to secure signatures which will, in their oavii.
words, "create" a movement of public opinion
powerful enough to force discussion and final
conclusion of a "peace pact."

These techniques are so important to Moscow
that the Cominform journal, the organ of inter-
national communism, stated that the collection of
these signatures is "the main paramount task" of
intei'national communism. It is interesting to
note that a campaign to collect these signatures
in North Korea was announced just a few days
before the latest Communist offensive against
United Nations forces in Korea.

It is nonsensical to say that complex problems
can be worked out if only Five Powers would sit
down at a conference table and talk them out.
Ever since the end of World War II, we have
been and are still attempting to do this. We have
held six meetings of the Council of Foreign Min-
isters in an attempt to settle our differences. But
Soviet intransigeance was just as marked at the
last as it was at the first.

In Paris, the Deputy Foreign Ministers are
meeting in an attempt to secure agreement on an
objective agenda on limited issues. After 8
weeks — 8 weeks — the Soviet representatives have
not yet agreed to a simple agenda which would
serve as a basis of discussion between the Big Four.

We sit at the council tables at Lake Success, day
in and day out, in an effort to collaborate on the
peaceful settlement of disputes. There is some-
thing more fundamental involved than simply try-
ing to talk things out. We have witnessed Soviet
tactics of subversion and obstruction, in and out
of the United Nations. If the Soviet Union will
not carry out its existing obligations, what reason
is there to assume that they would honor a new
I)eace pact. The Charter itself is the most solemn
peace pact in history. Why do we need a new one ?

Fourth, they ask that the United Nations re-
turn "to the role assigned it by the Charter,"
namely, that it serve as an area of agreement be-
tween governments. They assert that it now acts
as an instrument of a "dominant group."

The Soviet UnioTi's activities in the United Na-
tions have been 100 ])ercent negative in the politi-
cal field, in tlie economic and social fields, in the

fields of disarmament and atomic energy. Not
only have they offered no constructive program
in the United Nations ; they have consistently at-
tempted to subvert the organization to their own
propaganda purposes. When they talk about the
United Nations, check what they say against the
telltale record of their performance. There is
no doubt about who is out of step.

Nevertheless, in spite of Soviet obstruction, the
United Nations has important achievements to
its cretlit. Among these are the withdrawal of
Soviet troops from Iranian territory in 1946; the
successfuf conclusion of the Netherlands-Indo-
nesian dispute, resulting in the establishment of
an independent Indonesia ; the cease-fires in Pales-
tine and in Kashmir, the contribution tiuough
its close surveillance and active concern to the
independence of Greece; and, more dramatically,
the defense of the Republic of Korea.

Fourteen members of the United Nations now
have fighting forces in Korea alongside the gal-
lant Koreans. Reinforcements from these and
other countries are on the way or will soon be on
the way. Three other countries have medical units
in Korea. Forty-one countries have furnished
or pledged nonmilitary assistance to the Koreans.
As a result of this collective effort, the Commu-
nist aggressors have twice been rolled back to
behind the point where the original aggression
started. I am confident that we will give a good
account of ourselves in the current fighting.

No, the United Nations has not, as Marshal
Stalin said he feared, gone the inglorious way of
the League of Nations and failed to meet aggres-
sion. But the aggression, which it met and is in
the process of repelling, is a Communist aggres-
sion. Is this, pei-haps, why the Soviets have
stepped up the tempo of their campaign against
the United Nations, particularly, after the United
Nations branded the Chinese Communist aggres-
sors in Februaiy ?

Answering Soviet Charges Against U.N.

The Soviet charge that the United Nations has
disappointed the peoples of the world comes from
the nation which lias caused such disappointment
as exists by its threats and use of force; its sub-
versive and conspiratorial methods; its refusal to
cooperate; its propaganda of hatred; and its
misuse of a great idea for its own purposes.

The Soviets charge that the United Nations
has failed because it has turned into a docile in-
st rumont of United States policy. This is nothing
but an absurd way of saying that the majority
of free nations of the world have been alert to
Soviet subvereion. The voting i-ecord in the
United Nations reflects the unity of the democ-
racies against the vociferous minority of the
Soviets and their satellites.

The Ignited States cannot lionestly be blamed
because other nations lind their intei-ests at odds

734

Department of State Bulletin

with those of the Soviet Union. The Soviets are
themselves responsible. Their unreasonable and
uncompromising positions have engendered a real
fear among the majority of the members of the
United Nations. An eloquent statement of this
was made by Paul Henri Spaak, former
Belgian Foreign Minister, when, in reply to
Mr. Vyshinsk}', he saiil :

I must answer you. I think 1 am the one to do it, be-
cause no one could consider that Belpum is tryinj; to
be provocative aj;ainst the Soviet Union. We are iifraid
l)ecause by your conduct you have rendered this organi-
zation (the United Nations) ineffective. We are afraid
lieiiuise the problems before this Assembly have remained
unsolved: because, even when a solution is proposed by
a majority of the United Nations, you have refused to
adhere to this solution. We are afraid because we have
placed all our hopes and confidence in the defensive or-
ganization of the United Nations ; and through the policy
you ha\e pursued, you are forbidding us to seek our
security and our salvation within the framework of this
organization, but making us seek it within the frame-
work of a regional arrangement. We are afraid of you
Iiecause, in every country represented here, you are main-
taining a fifth column, beside which the Hitlerite fifth
colunm is nothing but a boy scout organization, if I
might say so. There is not a single spot in the world
whether in Asia, whether in Europe, or whether in Africa,
where a government represented here fails to find ditii-
culties, and these difficulties are being made still further
aggravated by you . . .

Fundamental political and security decisions
of the United Nations have been supported by the
vast majority of members including countries
with such diverse interests as the American Re-
publics, the Asian states, and the Arab states.
Their decisions are arrived at through democratic
means in the give and take of free discussion.
Differences of opinion, in degree, do, of course,
exist. I believe that this is proof, however, of
the democratic nature of the organization.

In organizing its phoney "peace" campaign,
what has the Kremlin in mind concerning the fu-
ture of the United Nations? That is anybody's
guess on this side of the iron curtain. This "peace"
campaign professes a wish to bring the United
Nations back to its original purposes. In this
manner the World Peace Council seeks to dis-
credit the United Nations and thus lessen the
stigma of the United Nations' denunciation of the
North Korean and Chinese Communist aggression.

By building up their World Peace Council, the
Soviets seek to exert propaganchi pressure against
the United Nations — a sort of blackmail. It is
perhaps significant that the last North Korean
message to the United Nations, contained in a
length}' document in the Russian language, care-
fully followed the line being voiced by the World
Peace Council.

However, in sjjite of the Soviet record, we are
not willing to give up hope for peace. We are
willing to continue to try to settle differences with
them by negotiation. We believe this should be
done largely through the United Nations. We are
not, however, blind to Soviet aims and tactics, and
we must not allow them to subvert the United Na-

tions to their ends. We have fought their at-
tempts to do this since 1945 and will continue our
efforts to strengthen the United Nations as an ef-
fective organization on world peace.

We of the free world have worked consistently
to further man's desire for jieace, freedom, eco-
nomic betterment, and security. We will not be
deceived by broad statements of the Soviet-domi-
nated Peace Council.

Let's be sure they are made to explain what they
mean by peace. Let's be sure it isn't acquiescence
in Soviet imperialism. Let's be sure we are not
1 idled into a false sense of security by a declara-
tion outlawing the atomic bomb without an ef-
fective system of inspection and control. Let's
be sure they do not succeed in sowing dissatisfac-
tion within the United Nations.

If they insist on slandering the United Nations,
we must lay the blame for the inadequacies of that
organization squarely where it belongs — on the
Soviet Union and its policies of obstruction and
subversion. We must block the Kremlin's efforts
to deceive and divide.

What do the Soviets mean by ]ieace? Look at
the record of the past 6 years. The kind of peace
the Soviets have in mind is clear. Soviet peace
means the fall of democratic Czechoslovakia, the
blockade of Berlin, aggression by satellites, the
extinction of human rights and fundamental free-
doms in all areas which they control, and brazen
defiance of the LTnited Nations Charter.

Let no one be deceived by the World Peace
Council. It is an organ of Soviet foreign policy.
It is a tool of the phony "peace" offensive.

The real peace offensive is being waged by those
who honestly support the United Nations. This
was well put by the Secretary-General. Trygve
Lie, in the course of replying to Joliet-Curie :

The United Nations is working for collective security
against armed aggression. The United Nations is work-
ing for the peaceful settlement of international differ-
ences by negotiation, mediation, and conciliation. The
United Nations is working for the control and reduction
of armaments and the elimination of weapons of mass
destruction under an international control system that
will protect all nations against violations and evasions.
'llie United Nations is working to give freedom, bread,
security, and opportunity for improvement of their lot
to all tiie hungry, the poor, the oppressed, and the fright-
ened people of the world. Finally, the United Nations
stands for the principle of universality and seeks to aiiply
the doctrine of the peaceful coexistence of all kinds of
systems and cultures which is talked about so much
and — outside the United Nations — practiced so little in the
world today.

It is the first duty, therefore, of every peace-loving
man and woman in the world to give their support to
the United Nations, to seek to persuade all governments
to give respect and compliance to all its decisions and
recommendations, and to use every opjiortunity to spread
and to strengthen its influence for peace. Conversely,
tho.se whose actions tend to weaken the United Nations,
to undermine its authority, to sharpen the discords that
are inevitably present in a world organization — they are
no true friends of peace no matter what they profess to be.

. . . Support the United Nations with under-
standing and loyalty, and you shall have peace.

May 7, ?95I

735

Outlook and Tasks Ahead for Germany

OUTLINE OF UNITED STATES POLICIES

hy John J. McCloy

United States High Commissioner for Germany ^

Six years ago, the obstacles of the rebuilding of
Germany seemed to be staggering. The tasks of
restoring order from chaos, of preventing the
starvation and death of millions of people, of
cleaning up the physical and moral debris of war
looked almost hopeless.

Progress Since 1945

Look at your country today. It is easy to criti-
cize, but you must see the situation in perspective.
The progress since 1945 is astounding. More peo-
ple are now gainfully employed than ever before
in Western Germany. Hundreds of thousands of
new dwellings are going up everywhere in the Fed-
eral Kepublic. Restrictions on almost all kinds of
Sroduction, including shipbuilding, have fallen.
Inch, to be sure, remains to be done to reduce un-
employment, to I'each a better equilibrium in the
price-wage scale, to provide more housing. But
the simple fact is that your economy provides you
with unrationed food, clothing, and other con-
sumer goods on a scale at least equal to that of
other AVestern European countries and far greater
than that achieved anywhere behind the iron cur-
tain. Politically, you have created a free demo-
cratic community in the Federal Republic. The
individual is safe from the arbitrary will of one
man or of one party. Men and women are free to
speak and to take active part in the affairs of their
country.

The Bundes Republic is gaining increasing re-
spect abroad. Your position as a full member of
the European Council now seems assured. Two
weeks ago, your Chancellor was I'eceived in Paris
as an honored guest to negotiate on a basis of equal-
ity with the ministers of five other European
countries. The rebirth of Germany in the past

' Address made over the Bavarian Radio on Apr. 25
and released to the press on the same date.

6 years has been a great constructive accomplish-
ment. It has been the result of hard work by the
German people and their representatives, aided by
the great economic and moral contribution from
the free world. It has been achieved without slave
labor, without fear of a secret police, without false
promises of 5-year plans. If there were a way to
do so, a vast majority of the millions of Germans
in the East zone would try to share in the eco-
nomic and political progress made by the Bundes
Republic.

The outside world has noted these achievements
of postwar Germany. The German people should
take pride in them. The fact that Germany is
obliged to pay a portion of the costs involved in
the occupation or that a peace treaty is not in the
immediate offing does not lessen these gains. The
tlireat posed by the Communists by their control
of the East zone makes the situation here much
more complicated, for example, take the case of
Japan.

The Task Ahead for Germany and U.S. Policies

In the next period, the task of Germany will
be twofold; first, to maintain and extend at home
the gains already achieved, especially in strength-
ening and modernizing economic and political in-
stitutions. The second main task is to forge
strong and enduring links witli the free world.
In this connection, I want to outline to you briefly
how the policies of the United States in (Germany
are designed to help carry out these tasks :

INTEGRATION WITH FREE EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

1. It is the policy of tlie United States to sup-
port the integration of Germany witli tlu> other
free countries of Europe. Tiu> European coun-
tries themselves must join together to solve their
joint problems. Here, the Schuman Plan rep-

736

Deparfmenf of Sfafe Bu//ef/n

resents a striking example of the possibilities of
such cooperation. In American eyes, the Schu-
man Plan is a test of the sincerity and ability of
European countries to act as one community.

In a basic sector of the European economy, the
Schuman Plan will consolidate the economic
strength of Western Europe, free markets, and
develop new economic opportunities. It will cre-
ate employment, not unemployment. It is fan-
tastic to assert, as some have, that the United
States, which has poured billions into Germany
to help revive production, would favor a plan to
put people out of work or hamper German indus-
trial development. Politically, it marks Ger-
many's emergence as an equal partner in a
great European project. If this bold, imagina-
tive concept were rejected, it would be a serious
and perhaps fatal blow to the hopes built up
slowly during the past few years. It would create
the danger of a disunited, weak Europe and an
isolated Germany.

Farsighted leadership on both sides of the
Rhine has carried the Schuman Plan concept thus
far. It is now a matter for debate by the various
parliaments. I hope that, through this process,
all of you will become fully aware of the char-
acter of the plan and its high objectives.

RESISTANCE OF ARMED ATTACK

2. It is the policy of the United States to assure
men peace and to deter aggression by supporting
and participating in the effort to create a strong
Western European security system. It is our
policy to resist any armed attack on West Ger-
many or West Berlin.

The necessity for defense preparations is an un-
pleasant fact we must all face. Korea has
shown — and the new Comnumist offensive shown
again — that aggression in any part of the world
affects European and German security.

The Xai-o [North Atlantic Treaty Organiza-
tion] forces are being built up in Europe to deter
aggression not to institute it. The power of the
Western World will come into action only in the
event of aggression against any member. But, if
attacked, the power of each country will become
the strength of all.

PARTICIPATION IN EUROPEAN DEFENSE SYSTEM

3. The United States recognized the right of
Germany to participate in her own and in the com-
mon defense within an integrated European de-
fense system under conditions of equality.

We are firmly opposed to any revival of Ger-
man militarism or of any German Army which
would be independent of an international security
system and we, together with the German people,
will guard carefully against any such develop-
ment.

We believe that German participation in an
integrated European force is a decision which

May 7, 7957

943383—51 3

the German Government and people must make
for themselves. We are not attempting to buy or
force and do not intend to buy or force such
participation.

We believe it must be obvious to the German
people that the nature and the efficacy and extent
to which Germany can be protected depends in a
large measure on German participation in its own
defense. Neutrality has never been an effective
bar to aggression against an unprotected country.

SUPPORT FOR DEMOCRATIC ELEMENTS

4. It is the policy of the United States to sup-
port the development of a democratic Germany
and to aid all democratic elements in Germany
to safeguard against the revival of nazism or the
imposition of communism. The German people
have shown their rejection of communism in every
free election which has taken place in Germany.
Once identified, the Communist approach is al-
ways repudiated. This is now so clear that the
Communists have resorted to their familiar tactic
of using false fronts, such as neutrality, pacifism,
and peace plebiscites to cover up their own im-
perialistic designs. These attempts are cynical
frauds, just as the Communist cry for German
unity is a fraud when, at the same time, free elec-
tions are outlawed.

Equally sinister is the threat from other totali-
tarian groups composed in large part of former
Nazi activitists. In certain areas of Germany,
small groups are again trying to spread the evil
doctrines, the old slogans and tactics, which
brought Germany to ruin and will do so again if
they should ever prevail. The German people,
through their democratic governments, must be
aware of these developments and be prepared to
deal effectively with them. The German people
cannot ever again permit such forces to gain con-
trol in their country, nor will the democratic
world permit it.

ASSISTANCE TO GERMAN YOUTH

5. It is the policy of the United States to help
German youth to recognize that its future op-
portunities can be found only in a democratic
Germany within a great European community
in a united, free world.

We recognize that a majority of German youth
is eager to attach its loyalties to affirmative ob-
jectives; that it will not be deceived again by
glittering promises that only a decade ago caused
the destruction of its hopes and ideals. For that
reason, the United States has made large contri-
butions, including financial support, to German
organizations which assist youth. We do not seek
to control, to propagandize, or to regiment youth.
We seek only to give German youth a chance for
a better life.

For their part, the German people and their
governments — city, kreis, land, and bund — should,

737

in my judgment, take greater interest in the prob-
lems of youth, spend more money on projects to
help youth, and give youth greater opportunity
for self-development. Young men and women
should not be barred by their elders from office
simply because of tlieir youth, restricted in their
participation in public allairs, or have their free-
dom to engage in a trade or profession arbitrar-
ily circumscribed.

AID AND STRENGTH FOR CITY OF BERLIN

6. It is the policy of the United States to help
the city of Berlin. The free world has been pro-
foundly impressed by the fortitude of the people
of Berlin and in their determination to stand up

for and defend their freedom. I hope and I am
confident that the Bundes Republic will do every-
thing possible to aid the city and strengthen ties
with it.

These aims of the United States are not com-
plex, and in no one of them is there the slightest
suggestion of aggrandizement or extension of
American power.

The condition of our aid, the condition of the
maintenance of our policy is likewise simple. It
demands only that the German people and their
Government put their great energies and capac-
ities into the making of a liberal, tolerant com-
munity, in which all men can walk with dignity
and freedom.

German Federal Republic's Monthly Economic Review

In February, a substantial decline in unemploy-
ment and an increase in the daily rate of coal pro-
duction indicated that the economy of Western
Germany was beginning to revive from its mid-
winter slump. Economic policy also reached a
turning point with the Federal Government's de-
cision to suspend trade liberalization in order to
curb the mounting deficit with the European Pay-
ments Union. The issuance of licenses for quota
imports was also suspended and the Bank
Deutscher Laender initiated a stringent program
for the reduction of (short-term) deot.

Industrial production in January registered
another decline (2.4 percent), largely as a result
of seasonal factors, coal and power shortages, and
the beginning of certain raw material shortages.
Employment during February rose mainly because
of revived building activity. Labor continued to
push its claims for wage increases comparable to
the rise in the cost of living, and to press for co-
determination, extending its demand to the chemi-
cal industry and railways, as well as iron, steel
and coal.

Foreign Trade

West German exports and imports decreased
in January. Exports of $217,500,000 represented
a decline of $23,700,000 from December to reach
the lowest level since last October. The export de-
cline carried added significance as the first monthly
decline since April 1950. Imports of $295,400,000

' Reprinted from the April issue of the Information
Bulletin; prepared by the Analytical Reports Branch of
the Trogram Review Division of the Office of Economic
Affairs, Hicoq.

738

in January were $19,400,000 less than in Decem-
ber. The most important developments by area
were:

fZ/SA.— Exports of $14,400,000 and imports of
$39,200,000 were both slightly below December
figures.

Other Western Hemisphere. — Trade was main-
tained at a high level as exports ($23,200,000)
were only $500,000 less, while imports ($25,500,-
000) were $500,000 higher than in the previous
month.

Marshall Plan Countries. — Most of the decline
in both exports and imports in January was in
trade with the Marshall Plan countries. Although
January exports to sterling participants ($15,-
900,000) were greater than in December, those to
non-sterling participants declined to $126,100,000,
the lowest amount since September 1950. Imports
from both sterling ($31,700,000) and non-sterling
($142,600,000) participants declined, and tlie total
for imports from Marshall Plan countries ($174,-
300,000) was also the lowest since September.

Sterling Countries outside Marshall Plan. — Ex-
ports ($10,900,000) declined $2,400,000, but im-
ports (mostly raw materials) continued to rise,
reaching $23,800,000 in January.

Eastern Europe.— EnT^ovis ($7,600,000) to and
imports ($10,300,000) from the Soviet Bloc coun-
tries fell off, while exports to Yu<j;oslavia ($7,-
800,000) were almost triple the figure for De-
cember.

Commodity wise, food and agriculture exports
($14,300,000) were almost double the December
total, but the finished goods component, the key
item in West German exports, declined by $24,-
300,000 to $145,800,000. On the import side, all

Department of State Bulletin

major commodity groups shared equally in the
decline.

Reasons for the adverse foreign trade develop-
ments in January were seasonal — there were less
working days, for workers took long vacations at
New Year; there were the normal post-Christmas
slump, and the usual cold weather impediments to
trade. Although the January decline in exports
followed the December drop in German produc-
tion, it is too early to assess the degree to which
raw material shortages, international and domes-
tic, were responsible for this development.

Dollar export figures to the United States and
Canada in December disclose that of the total of
$15,700,000 exported to the United States, five
commodity groups (pig iron, $1,600,000; steel
pipes and tubes, $1,500,000; sheet iron, $1,000,000;
ferrous scrap, $1,000,000 and fine mechanics and
optical goods, $800,000) accounted for $5,900,000
or almost 40 percent of the total.

Of the December exports to Canada, three com-
modity groups (ironware, $323,000; fine mechan-
ics and optical goods, $103,000; and cutlery and
hardware. $50,000) made up $470,000 or one-half
of the $872,000 total.

Comparison with a year ago reveals that, for the
major items, as the level of West German produc-
tion and trade has risen, emphasis in exports to
the United States has shifted away from scarce
non-ferrous metals and semi-manufactured goods
toward iron and steel mill products. Exceptions
to this development are ferrous scrap, the export
of which is a postwar phenomenon and of which
about 30 percent of the total export to all coun-
tries went to the United States in December, and
fine mechanics and optical goods, a traditional
German export to the United States and Canada.

WEST GERMAN FOREIGN COMMODITY TRADE
January 1951

(Thousand Dollars)

CATEGORIES ImpoTts Exports

Food and Agriculture 112, 363 14. 263

Industry 183,048 203,275

Raw Materials 104, 437 22. 965

Semiflnishod Goods 41,110 34,494

Finished Ooods 37,601 145,816

Total 295, 411 217. 533

ABEA

Total Non-Participating Countries 121. 146 75. 150

USA 39.189 14.378

Canada 1,197 1.010

Latin America 24. 309 22, 204

Non-participating Sterling Countries 23. 830 10, 910

Soviet Bloc (incl. China) 10,340 7,619

Yugoslavia and Finland 4. 203 9. 417

Other Countries 18,078 9.612

Participating Countries 174.264 141,941

Non-Sterling 142,590 126.059

Sterling 31,674 15,882

Unspecified 1 447

Total 295,411 217,538

IMPORT SURPLUS: January $77,873,000.

Foreign Payments Position

On Feb. 22, the German government an-
nounced temporary suspension of trade liberaliza-
tion in an attempt to stem the mounting deficit

with the European Payments Union (EPU).
During the month the deficit swelled by approxi-
mately $58,000,000 as against $42,000,000 in Jan-
uary. This peak deficit occurred in a month when
it was expected that Western Germany's payments
would begin to break even. The total cumulative
deficit has now reached $457,000,000. The rate of
licensing for liberalized imports continued at the
high level reached during the second half of Jan-
uary and the value of tenders issued in February
by the German Import Advisory Committee for
non-liberalized imports were almost double the
January figure. Although the rate of licensing
increased with the dropping of the deposit re-
quirement from 50 percent to 25 percent, the main
impetus was the continuation of excessive demand
for imported goods, due to the lack of stringent
credit restrictions and a virtual discontinuance of
savings. As a result of these developments, the
German government decided on Feb. 22 to sus-
pend temporarily issuance of liberalized licenses.
At a special meeting on Feb. 23, the EPU Man-
aging Board accepted Germany's suspension
of liberalization and requested the Federal Gov-
ernment to submit its program of measures to
counteract the developments which led to the sus-
pension. On Feb. 27, the suspension of licensing
was extended to the quota items imported from
EPU countries, and the issuance of foreign ex-
change allocation certificates was suspended.

Industrial Production

In January, industrial activity slackened fur-
ther, still beset by persisting coal and power short-
ages and seasonal factors. Shortage of raw
materials, an additional handicap, is beginning
to make itself felt. Bottlenecks in the supply of
power and raw materials are not only restricting
output, but also preventing expansion of employ-
ment in many manufacturing establishments. On
the other hand, however, orders received remained
well above the value of current sales, although a
three percent drop was recorded for December.

The federal index of industrial production (ex-
cluding building, stimulants and food processing)
declined three points (2.4 percent) from the De-
cember figure to 126 of the 1936 level. The de-
creasing trend in production during the last two
months has followed generally that of a year ago
when industrial activity fell abruptly in Decem-
ber, slightly less in January and began increasing
in February. This year, however, the rate of
change is sharper. The usual holiday and seasonal
factors affecting this decline were augmented dur-
ing 1950 by coal, power and raw material short-
ages, the last of which is now beginning to restrict
output by industrial users of non-ferrous metals,
rubber, rayon, wool and sulphate.

As the winter passes, indications are that the
trend of production should level off in February
and improve in the coming months. Of the 30
industry groups for which data are available, 21

May 7, I95I

739

showed decreases in production during January,
while nine showed increases.

INDEX OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION

1936=100

mo 1951

TOTAL ALL nronsTRiES Noi- Dee. Jan.

(incl. electricity and gas //) 135 rl29 126

(excl. electricity and pas If) 132 125 122

Investment goods (total) 136 rI29 123

Raw materials 106 r 94 91

Finished products 155 rl50 143

General production goods

(incl. electricity and gas) 142 rl40 139

(excl. electricity and gas) 131 127 126

Consumer goods 125 rll7 116

//= Eicluding food processing, stimulants and building,
r = Revised.

PRODUCTION OF MAJOR COMMODITIES

Unit of 1960 1951

COMMODITT Measure II Nov. rl Dec. rl Jan. pi

Hard coal (gross mined) thous. t 10, 022 9, 585 10, 138

Crude petroleum t 97, 793 103, 060 102. 176

Cement thous. t 1, 010 735 599

Bricks (total) 1,000 411.691 319.109 247,790

Pig iron t 864, 296 766, 149 801, 003

Steel ingots t 1,080,868 929,952 1,011,968

Rolled steel finished products . , . t 792, 755 675, 795 745. 097

Farm tractors (total ID pieces 5, 221 6, 197 5, 670

Office machines t 622 652 613

Passenger cars (incl. chassis) .... pieces 22. 916 20. 613 23. 028

Cameras (total) pieces 202, 838 139, 918 178, 055

Sulphuric acid (incl. oleum) .... t-SOi 108.313114.078 110,779

Calcium carbide t 40. 024 44, 724 37, 737

Soap (total) t 8, 618 6, 784 11, 779

Newsprint t 14. 564 13. 173 13, 641

Auto and truck tires pieces 331, 743 289, 033 283, .591

Shoes (total) 1,000 pairs 9, 409 7, 431 7, 209

//= All tons are metric tons.

f/= Excluding accessories, parts and spare parts.

r = Revised,

p = Preliminary.

Coal

The fuel shortage is still a serious handicap to
the expansion of output and has been reported as
cause for cutting production and employment in
some industries. (See Industrial Production
above.) During February, however, a favorable
upward trend began in hard coal output. With
24 working days in February, daily average pro-
duction reached a record level of 384,164 tons.
This brought production for the month to 9,445,-
803 tons, with only 258,032 tons reported as extra
shift production. Factors believed contributing
to the increase in the rate of production are: ap-
proximately 1,000 additional miners, a decrease
in the number of shifts lost and a decline in the
absenteeism rate.

Germany's coal export quota for the second
quarter of 1951 was fixed at 6,200,000 tons by the
Council of the International Authority for the
Ruhr at its Feb. 16 meeting. Two assumptions
underlying this quota were that 900,000 tons would
be exported to the Saar in exchange for equivalent
imports from that area, and that 200,000 tons of
coal would be imported from the United States
during the quarter.

Despite the short month, aluminum production
in February remained at 3,500 tons, and was ex-
pected to reach 4,000 tons in March. With suffi-
cient water supply, aluminum smelters increased
production. The zinc, lead and copper smelters,

with sufficient supplies of raw materials and coal,
have been able to maintain production. A serious
contraction was expected in April, however, when
present difficulties in obtaining raw materials and
shipping space were expected to come to a climax.

The Federal Republic law for the control of
raw materials is not yet in force, and until a
tighter control on the end-use of scarce materials is
introduced, increasing difficulties in obtaining
United States export licenses must be expected.

Production in the chemical industry continues
to drop, restricted by the shortage of coal and raw
materials. Manufacturers' stocks of coal are
down by one to four days' supply, with some
firms operating intermittently, depending upon
coal deliveries. Some coal has been purchased
from the United States with free dollars, urea
traded for French coal, and soda traded for Bel-
gian coal. The production index for the chemical
industry has been dropping steadily from the high
of 138 in November to an_ expected 110 or lower
in February. As a result, the chemical industry
is cutting employment and producing less for
export.

Other than coal, the main shortages are sulphur
and chlorine. The allocation of only 36.8 percent
of the German requirements of United States sul-
phur will seriously affect the production of car-
bondisulphide for textiles and sulphur available as
insecticide for the vineyards. An Allied working
party is investigating Germany's need for addi-
tional chlorine capacity.

Mild weather with heavy rains increased hydro-
electric power available during February, so that
the shortage of power was not as acute as in Jan-
uary. Coal allocations continued to be insufficient,
and coal stocks remained at only 13 days' supply —
below a safe point for this season of the year. As
a consequence, power restrictions imposed in Jan-
uary were continued through February, but were
reduced to a certain extent in some Laender
(states) where the supply of hydroelectricity in-
creased. Despite these restrictions, power con-
sumption in February was 19 percent higher than
in February of last year. Fifty MW new capacity,
financed by ECA counterpart funds, was placed
in service during the month.

Cold weather in February reduced crude oil
production below the January level. Refinery out-
put also showed a reduction during the month,
resulting from fuel shortage and refinery repairs.
Stocks of gasoline showed no essential change.
P'ebruary consumption, increasing 10,000 tons
over January, was estimated at 105,000 tons, and
receipts from domestic and foreign sources were
estimated at 174.000 tons. Stocks were expected
to increase considerably by March 1. Diesel oil
stocks, however, do not indicate this favorable de-
velopment. By Feb. 1, stocks decreased by 31,000
tons, and decreased further during the month.
February consumption, 7,000 tons less than in Jan-
uary, was estimated at 115,000 tons, and receipts
were estimated at only 75,000 tons.

740

Department of State Bulletin

Transportation and Communication

Traflic demands on the Bundesbahn remained at
a comparatively high level in February, averag-
ing 59,000 cars per workday. At the same time,
the number of serviceable cars dropped to 251,000
cars (253,000 in January; 262,300 in December;
and November high 264,500). Workshops can-
not keep abreast of the increasing number of un-
serviceable cars. This development was fully
foreseen in the fall of 1950 when the Bundesbalin,
to meet heavy harvest traffic demands, deferred all
repairs on running equipment. By so doing, it
kept more than 260,000 cars in traffic. As a con-
sequence, the Bundesbahn could not meet Feb-
ruary demands in full — a fact causing particular
concern, since traffic demands for any European
railway are usually lighter for February than for
any other month of the year.

The Bundesbahn and the Federal Government
are aware that both new cars and a stepped-up
freight car repair program are requisites. The
major difficulty still facing the Bundesbahn is the
immediate need for new capital to finance a freight
car consti'uction program and the continued re-
habilitation of war damages, since such programs
cannot be financed out of j^rofits from current Bun-
desbahn operations.

The month of February saw a combined effort of
the three Allied Powers, in conjunction with the
Federal Ministry for Posts and Telecommunica-
tions, to standardize and make uniform all pro-
cedures for the procurement and payment of com-
munications facilities and services rendered the
Allied Forces by the Deutsche Post. This in-
volves major changes in the procedures currently
being followed by each of the three authorities
with relation to the ordering of long distance cir-
cuits, local service and equipment, and modi-
fication of accounting and billing procedures.

The primary objective of this entire program is
to bring current procedures in line with the over-
all policy surrounding the inauguration of the
national budget principle. Wlien completed it
will permit each of the three Allied authorities
to procure its own services directly from the
Deutsche Post, regardless of location and to re-
imburse the Deutsche Post from its own budget.

During January the Bundespost continued to
make progress on its telecommunications plant
construction program. Six new manual and two
automatic central office exchanges were brought
into operation, and work was completed on ex-
tensions to five manual and 20 automatic exchanges
plus extensions to seven long distance trunk ex-
changes. These new facilities will relieve, to some
extent, the present shortage of telecommunica-
tion facilities in the Federal Republic.

Labor

The labor market situation as of mid-February
1951 was exceptionally good. Employment was

higher than ever before at this time of year. This
also applied to the building trades, which had
slumped badly in December and early January.

Employment statistics reflect fundamentally
favorable business conditions. With substantial
orders on hand, employers are not discharging
workers when temporary shortages of coal and
raw materials retard production. Public employ-
ment exchange officials believe that if the Federal
Government allows the speculative maldistribu-
tion of raw materials and half-fabricates to grow
more serious, employment will soar to new heights
before June.

Registered unemployment declined in February
by almost 160,000, thus bringing the total decrease
since the turning point in mid-January to approxi-
mately 250,000. At the end of February, unem-
ployment stood at 1,663,000, or about 27,000 less
than at the close of 1950. Comparisons with the
early part of 1950 reveal the recent unemployment
development has actually been a very favorable
one. At the end of February 1950, unemployment
was still hovering around the 2,000,000 mark, and
was 425,000 higher than in December 1949. It was
not until the end of May 1950 that unemployment
was reduced to 1,668,300 — the end of February
1951 is already 5,000 below this figure.

Furthermore, the unemployment rate is now sig-
nificantly lower than in February 1950, when de-
pendent employment was approximately 1,000,000
less than the present level. In February 1951, the
rate of unemployment in terms of the wage and
salary-earning labor force was 10.5 percent as
against 13.1 percent last year.

Seasonal factors, which were primarily respon-
sible for rising unemployment between the end
of October 1950 and mid-January 1951, also ac-
count largely for the recent reversal in trend. The
major part of the decline in unemployment has
come in outdoor occupations such as building and
construction, including public works projects, and
in agriculture.

Significantly, however, there has also been
a drop in unemployment in manufacturing, also
due mainly to seasonal factors, and in commerce
and transportation. Among the manufacturing
industries which would probably show higher em-
ployment for February are stones and earths,
metal working industries, including those related
to the building trade, woodworking, clothing, food
processing and leather. Employment in other
branches of manufacturing is undergoing little
change.

With much less fanfare than in the latter half
of 1950, a new wage drive of considerable propor-
tions is underway. Pay boosts were obtained in
February by approximately 775,000 industrial
workers, and negotiations are proceeding for em-
ployees in public administration and services.
Notification of termination of collective agree-
ments, effective in March or April, has been given
in the building, textile and clothing, and the shoe

May 7, 1951

741

industries in the federal area. The Woodworking
Union is reportedly considering similar action.

The unions present the rise in consumer prices
during recent months as their reason for demand-
ing wage increases. The official consumer price
index rose by 2.G percent between October and Jan-
uary, and consumer prices continued to increase
in February.

Commodity Price Indexes

In January, the three major price indexes all
rose sharply. The basic materials price index
showed the sharpest rise since September — an in-
crease of 11 points (4.8 percent) to a new high
of 240 percent of the 1938 level. The industrial
component of the basic materials price index (up
14 points — 5.3 percent — to 279) is now 30 percent
above the level of a year ago, with practically
all of that rise occurring since the beginning of
the Korean War. The agricultural component
(up only six points — 5.4 percent — to 182) is eight
percent above the index of a year ago, with the
entire rise occurring in the last seven months.

The index of industrial producers prices (up 11
points — 5.6 percent — to 206 in January) has risen
by 13 percent during the past year; the largest
gains noted were in textiles and clothing (up 30
percent), and iron, steel and non-ferrous metals
(up 27 percent).

The index of consumer prices for January 1951
(up three points to 154 percent of 1938) stands at
almost the same level as a year ago, having de-
clined almost continuously during the first nine
months of the year before beginning a steady rise
in September 1950.

CONSUMER PRICE INDEX (BIZONAL AREAI/)

1938=100
(Wage/salary earner's family of four, with one child under 14)

1950 mi

Dec. Jan.

TOTAL 151 154

Food 155 167

stimulants 275 275

Clothing 192 197

Rent 103 103

Heat and liRht 119 121

Cloaning and hypiene 149 151

Education and entertainment 142 143

Household goods 165 171

Traveling 133 148

//=The Consumer Price Index is not yet available on a Trizonal basis.

Feb.
156
159
275
203
103
122
154
145
177
161

INDEX OF INDUSTRIAL PRODUCERS PRICES

Bizonal Area

1938 = 100

19B0 1951

Nov. Die. Jan.
189 196 206

BASIC MATERIALS PRICE INDEX

1938-100

1950
Nov. Dec.

Food 177 176

Industry 256 265

TOTAL 224 229

p/= Preliminary.

742

1951

Jan. pi

182

279

240

Finance

The DM 186,000,000 increase in short term bank
credit outstanding in Januarj', was considerably
less than the prior month's expansion of DM 250,-
000,000. Direct Central Bank credits outstand-
ing totaled DM 1,311,000,000 in January, a signifi-
cant drop below the December total of DM
1,580,000,000. _

The following restrictive measures were intro-
duced by the Bank Deutscher Laender on Jan.
31, 1951, in an attempt to improve the foreign pay-
ments situation and to redress the position of cer-
tain banks which had over-extended their credit
operations. The immediate aim of these measures
is to curtail the volume of bank credit out-
standing :

(1) Short term business credits not to exceed
capital and reserves more than 30 times;

(2) Current account and acceptance credits not
to exceed 70 percent of deposits, capital and
reserves ;

(3) Acceptance credits not to exceed capital
and reserves by more than seven times (in certain
instances, three times) ; and

(4) Liquid assets (cash on hand and on deposit
with the Central Bank and Post, checks, bills of
exchange and treasury bills) not to fall below 20
percent of deposits and acceptances.

It is too early to ascertain how these restrictions
will affect the development of commercial bank
credit and the money supply.

A decrease in January of DM 410,000,000 (esti-
mated) in the volume of money was noted over
December's revised totals. This compares with a
DM 68,000,000 revised monthly increase in No-
vember and a DM 524,000,000 revised monthly in-
crease in December. The January level of excess
reserves expressed as a percentage of legal reserves
amounts to three percent as compared with De-
cember's revised level of 4.8 percent.

Food and Agriculture

A greater than usual amount of snowfall and
rain during the winter months has resulted in an
increasing amount of soil moisture, which insures
the starting of early spring crops. Precipitation
and temperatures during February were about
normal. No particular damage to fall-sown crops,
or to root crops remaining in storage, was
reported.

Indications at present point toward a satis-
factory crop year in 1951. Some field work was
underway during February and full spring opera-
tions were expected to start earlj' in March.

During February, the number of cases of foot
and mouth disease increased. The disease has not
reached critical proportions, however, and vaccine
supplies are suflicient to keep it under control.

All sliipments from the Federal Republic, under
the United States program for expedited aid to
Yugoslavia by shipping German-milled flour and

Department of State Bulletin

replacing this with equivalent quantities of wheat,
were completed early in February.

The two principal items of federal legislation
concerned seeds and butter. The Ministry for
Food, Agriculture and Forestry issued an ordi-
nance prohibiting the sale, in conmiercial quan-
tities, of other than certified agricultural and vege-
table seeds. The certifying agencies are the state
authorities; basic conditions for certification are
fixed by the federal minister. Under an ordinance
of the minister of economics, maximum butter
prices per 100 kg for the different grades, in lots
of 25 kg or over, are fixed as follows : if delivered
by dairies and wholesalers, DM 498-550; if de-
livered by retailers, DM 512-564. Allied High
Commission decision on both ordinances is
pending.

Berlin

Seasonal declines in industry normally recur-
ring in January remained very mild this year and
in the latter half of the month were more than
compensated by impressive upward trends in iron,
steel and malleable castings, in the output of non-
ferrous metal foundries, as well as in clothing.
Employment, following a decline of more than
8,300 in the first half of January, increased by
3,300 in the second half of the month, and by al-
most 1,900 in the first half of February. This fa-
vorable reversal of the usual seasonal employment
trend occurred one month earlier this year than
in 1950.

Reports of the Berlin Central Bank indicate
that the city's balance of payments position con-
tinued to weaken in February. In the past,
counterpart funds releases and Federal Republic
assistance were usually sufficient to cover this
deficit. From time to time, however, small deficits
in the city's balance of payments exceeded the ex-
ternal aid to Berlin and were financed by borrow-
ings of the Berlin Central Bank from the Bank
Deutscher Laender. About eight percent of the
1950 gap in the payments balance was covered by
these credits.

In February, however, it became necessary to
borrow substantial additional funds from the
Bank Deutscher Laender, although actual trans-
fers to Berlin under the various headings of ex-
ternal assistance were somewhat higher during
February than in the previous month (DM 65,-
000,000 against DM 02,000,000 in January). The
Bei-lin Central Bank's indebtedness to the Bank
Deutscher Laender on Feb. 28 amounted to DM
126,700,000 and was Dil 29,500,000 higher than
on the last day of January.

It was found that a number of firms whose busi-
ness activities were concentrated in Western Ger-
many, obtained an unduly large portion of their
credit requirements from Berlin banks through
their Berlin branches or head offices. As a conse-

quence, on Feb. 9, 1951, the rediscount rate was
raised from four to six percent, thereby adjusting
the Berlin rate to the West German level. It is
expected that this will be an important factor in
improving Berlin's balance of payments situation.

Procedure for Filing Claims]
Under Berlin General Claims Law

[Released to the press April 23]

The Department of State wishes to direct the
attention of United States residents to the recent
promulgation by the Berlin City Assembly of leg-
islation known as the Berlin General Claims Law.
The coming into force of this legislation provides
a means \\-hereby certain classes of persons, who
suffered monetary and other losses in Berlin dur-
ing the Nazi regime, may receive indemnification
for losses falling outside the scope of restitution
legislation previously enacted in Berlin. The
registry agency is Entschadigungsamt, Fehr-
belliner Platz 1, Berlin-Wilmersdorf, Germany.
Claims based on this legislation must be filed with
that registry agency by January 10, 1952.

The Berlin General Claims Law pi'ovides that
persons who during the period from January 30,
1933, to May 8, 1915, were jDersecuted because of
political conviction or for racial, religious, or
ideological grounds and thereby suffered damage
to life and limb, health, liberty, possessions, prop-
erty, or economic advancement shall be entitled to
restitution according to the provisions thereof.

For the city of Berlin to be liable as restitutor,
claimants must have had their legitimate domicile
or usual residence in Berlin on January 1, 1947, or
have been assigned to Berlin as a refugee, or, hav-
ing had such domicile or residence, have died, emi-
grated, have been deported, or have been expelled
prior to that date.

Persons desiring further information concern-
ing the Berlin General Claims Law should address
their inquiries, including requests for copies of the
law, to the Entschadigungsamt in Berlin.

Raw Cotton for West Germany

Approximately 109,000 bales of raw cotton are
going to German mills under a Marshall Plan
purchase approved recently. Reporting procure-
ment figures for the final month of 1950, the ECA
said the cotton authorization for Germany repre-
sented about 23 percent of the December total.
The figure for the month was $190,300,000, includ-
ing $44,100,000 for the German cotton purchase.
Deliveries were to have been completed last month.

May 7, 1957

743

U.S. Proposes To Submit Disagreement Over Soviet
Lend-Lease Settlement to Arbitral Panel

[Released to the press April 27]

The United States today proposed to the Soviet
Government that the outstanding disagreement
over a lend-lease settlement be submitted to an in-
ternational arbitration board.

The board would be asked to decide the amount
and terms of a financial settlement which the two
governments, in 4 years of direct negotiations,
have been unable to reach.

The decision of the board, the United States
said in a note delivered to the Soviet Ambassador
at Washington, Alexander S. Panyushkin, should
be final and binding on both parties.

The lengthy negotiations with the Soviet dele-
gation "have yielded little progress," the Ameri-
can note, signed by Secretary of State Dean Ache-
son, said.

"In order to achieve a solution satisfactory to
both sides," the United States proposed that the
question of what woidd be "fair and reasonable
terms of financial settlement" be submitted to an
arbitral panel of three members. One member of
the panel would be appointed by the United States
and one member by the U.S.S.R. The third mem-
ber would be appointed by the President of the
International Court of Justice.

The United States note said that the question of
lend-lease ships, the return of which was again
demanded in the United States note of April 6,
1950, is not included in the arbitration proposal.'

During the war, the United States furnished
lend-lease supplies and services to Russia valued at
10.8 billion dollars. The United States has re-
quested payment only for civilian-type articles
which remained in Soviet custody at the end of the
war. No request for payment was made for
civilian-type articles lost, destroyed, or consumed
during the war.

Value of the civilian-type articles in Russian
hands at the end of the war has been estimated
by the United States, after liberal allowances for
losses and depreciation, at 2.6 billion dollars. In
an effort to speed the settlement, however, the
United States offered to settle for 1 billion dollai-s
and later for 800 million dollars. The final
amount offered by Russia was 240 million dollars.

• Bttixetin of Apr. 23, 1951. p. 646.

Text of U.S. Note of April 27, 1951

Excellency: I have the honor to refer to the
negotiations between our two Governments for
a settlement of the obligations of the Government
of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics under
the Master Lend-Lease Agreement of June 11,
1942, and specifically to the questions of compen-
sation for lend-lease articles not lost, destroyed or
consumed during the war and the terms and con-
ditions under which such articles may be retained
by the Soviet Government. The Government of
the United States has upon several occasions al-
ready demanded the return under Article V of
the Master Lend-Lease Agi'eement of all lend-
lease ships and watercraft, particularly in its notes
of February 7 and April (3, 1951. The question
of ships therefore is not considered herein.

The Government of the United States has re-
quested no payment for "military-type" articles
(arms, ammunition and implements of war, ex-
clusive of ships) which may have remained in So-
viet custody at the war's end. The position of
the Government of the United States, however,
has been that the terms of any settlement would
reserve the right of the Government of the United
States, as set forth in Article V of the Master
Lend-Lease Agreement, to the return to the United
States by the Soviet Government of such "mili-
tary-type" articles and would maintain the obli-
gation of the Soviet Government as stipulated in
Article III of the Master Lend-Lease Agreement,
to obtain the prior consent of the Government of
the United States before retransfer of such arti-
cles to third parties. The position of the Gov-
ernnient of the United States in this matter is in
keeping with the settlements already concluded
with other Lend-Lease countries having Master
Lend-Lease agreements similar to that with the
the Soviet Government.

The Government of the United States also has
requested no payment for "civilian-type" articles
lost, destroyed, or consumed during the war.
The Government of the United States has re-
quested payment only for those "civilian-type"
articles which remained in Soviet custody at the
war's end and has offered to transfer title to such

744

Department of State Bulletin

articles in consideration of payment of a mu-
tually satisfactory sum on terms agreed by our
two Governments. These "civilian-type" articles
consist of lend-lease supplies having a peacetime
value to the Soviet economy and remaining under
the control of the Soviet Government on Septem-
ber 2, 1945, or subsequently received by it with
the exception of ships, "military-type" articles
as stated above, and certain lend-lease articles
title to which had been transferred to the Soviet
Government under the Agreements of May 30,
1945 and October 15, 1945.

In order to provide a basis for determination of
the fair value of "civilian-type" articles remain-
ing in Soviet custody at the war's end, the Gov-
ernment of the United States carefully compiled
from its own records a detailed estimated inven-
tory of such articles. In preparing this inventory
most liberal allowances were made for wartime
losses. The value of this inventory at landed
cost less most liberal allowances for depreciation
amounted to a total of $2.6 billion. The Gov-
ernment of the United States, in an effort to ar-
rive at a mutually satisfactory sum representing
the fair value of these articles to the Soviet peace-
time economy, initially proj^osed the sum of $1.3
billion i-epayable in thirty annual installments
beginning five years after July 1, 1946, with in-
terest at 2 percent per annum accruing from July
1, 1946 and payable annually thereafter. Subse-
quently, in a further eifort to speed the negotia-
tions to a mutually satisfactory conclusion, the
Government of the United States expressed its
willingness to accept still lesser sums, first by
proposing the amount of $1 billion and later the
amount of $800 million. Furthermore, in the in-
terest of a prompt settlement, the Government of
the United States has repeatedly indicated its
readiness to reduce further this sum provided that
the Soviet Government on its part would increase
its present offer to a sum more nearly reflecting
the value of the articles to the Soviet peacetime
economy.

The Soviet Government has taken the position
that a lend-lease settlement, in the first place, must
take into account the Soviet contribution to the
victory against the common enemy, and secondly,
must conform with other existing lend-lease
settlements. The Soviet Government, however,
has cited only the settlement with the British
Government.

With regard to the first principle put forward
by the Soviet Government, the Government of
the United States believes that it has given full
I'ecognition to the Soviet contribution to the de-
feat of the common enemy by writing off com-
pletely the entire lend-lease contribution of the
United States to the Soviet war effort and asking
payment only for those "civilian-type" articles
remaining in the Soviet Union at the war's end.
It is to be noted that total lend-lease assistance
provided by the United States to the Soviet Union

during the war amounted to approximately $10.8
billion and represented a. vast contribution of the
skills, labor and resources of the United States
to assist the peoples of the Soviet Union in the
defeat of the aggressor nations. It is also to be
noted that the amount of compensation now pro-
posed by the Government of the United States is
$800 million. From these facts it may be clearly
seen that the Government of the United States
has asked no payment for w-ar-time lend-lease aid
totaling approximately $10 billion. This repre-
sents, on the part of the Government of the
United States, great recognition of the community
of interest of our two Governments in the achieve-
ment of the common victory and takes full
cognizance of the part played by the Soviet
(lovernment in this effort.

AVith regard to the Soviet contention that a
lend-lease settlement must conform to "prece-
dents", specifically the settlement with the British
Government, the Goveinment of the United
States has invited the attention of the Soviet
Government to the fact that the Government of
the United States has never agreed to give most-
favored-nation treatment in connection with any
lend-lease settlement. Nevertheless, the Govern-
ment of the United States has in fact sought to
reach a lend-lease settlement with the Soviet
Government on the basis of the same principles
which were observed in the settlement with the
British Government. In accordance with these
principles the British Government was not asked
to pay for lend-lease articles lost, destroyed or
consumed in the war ; nor was payment asked for
"military-type" articles remaining in the United
Kingdom at the end of the war. Payment was
requested only for the fair value of "civilian-
tyjie" articles remaining in the United Kingdom
at the war's end. The Soviet Government, how-
ever, has repeatedly and categorically refused to
I'each a settlement on the basis of these principles.

It will be recalled in this connection that, unlike
the British Government, the Soviet Government
while refusing to furnish an inventory of lend-
lease articles remaining in existence at the end
of the war, has declined also to consider the esti-
mated inventory provided by the Government of
the United States as a basis for settlement. The
Soviet Government has instead sought to make
settlement on the basis of the total lend-lease fur-
nished and has had recourse to extraneous analo-
gies not germane to the British settlement.

The Soviet Government has thus refused to ac-
cept the very principles on which it insists and
upon which the settlement with the British Gov-
ernment was based. The Government of the
United States must, therefore, reject the conten-
tion of the Soviet Government that its offer fully
conforms to the British settlement.

The Soviet Government, on the basis of its own
principles, has offered to pay to the Government
of the United States a "global" sum first in the

May 7, 1951

745

amount of $170 million, later increased to $200
million and more recently has made an offer of
$240 million stated by Soviet representatives to be
"final". The Soviet Government proposes that
payment of this sum should be made over a period
of 50 years with interest at 2 percent per annum,
but with payment of interest and principal be-
ginning five years after the conclusion of the agree-
ment. The Government of the United States
considers the amount and terms of the offer of
the Soviet Government to be inadequate and
unreasonable.

In these circumstances the Government of the
United States must point out that four years of
direct negotiations between our two Governments
have yielded little progress toward a settlement
of this issue. Therefore, in order to achieve a
solution satisfactory to both sides, the Govei'n-
ment of the United States proposes that there be
submitted to an arbitral panel consisting of three
members, one each to be appointed by the Govern-
ment of the United States and of "the Union of
Soviet Socialist Republics and a third member to
be appointed by the President of the International
Court of Justice, the question of what would be
fair and reasonable terms of financial settlement
by the Soviet Government for the lend-lease
articles having civilian utility, except ships, which
were not lost, destroyed or consumed during the
war and which are not returned to the United
States.

The Government of the United States expresses
its hope that the Government of the Union of
Soviet Socialist Republics will agree to treat the
decision of such an arbitral panel on this ques-
tion as binding upon both Governments and will
accept this proposal as a practical means of reach-
ing final agreement on this issue.

Accept [etc.].

Dean Acheson

Treaty of Friendship, Commerce,
and Navigation With Colombia Signed

[Released to the press April 26]

A treaty of friendship, commerce, and naviga-
tion between the United States and Colombia was
signed today in Washington. The Secretary of
State signed for this Government and Ambassa-
dor Eduardo Zuleta-Angel, for Colombia.

The treaty establishes a set of advanced jirin-
ciples as a basis for economic and cultural rela-
tions between the two countries. It replaces, in
the greater i)art, a 104-year old treaty with New
Granada, tlie name by which Colombia was known
until 18()1. Tlie conclusion of this treaty marks
the increasingly close neighborly relations be-
tween Colombia and the United States. Other

746

recent evidences of close cooperation are the dis-
patch by Colombia of a war vessel to the Korean
war zone and the assignment of a substantial con-
tingent of troops to serve with the United Nations
forces there.

The new treaty contains 26 articles and a pro-
tocol and deals in considerable detail with a wide
range of subject matter. In brief, however, each
of the two Governments: (1) agrees to accord
within its territories to citizens and corporations
of the other, treatment no less favorable than it
accords to its own citizens and corporations with
respect to the general run of industrial, commer-
cial, and cultural pursuits (2) formally endorses
standards regarding the protection of persons,
their property and interests that reflect the most
enlightened legal and constitutional principles
(3) recognizes the need for special attention to
requirements for stimulating investment for eco-
nomic development and (4) reasserts its adherence
to the principles of nondiscriminatory treatment
of trade and shipping.

From the standpoint of aiding the economic
interests of Colombia, the treaty represents an
additional step in the development of that coun-
try's forward-looking plans for promoting its in-
dustrial development and for improving the
welfare of its people by various means, including
the encouragement of foreign private investment
and the utilization of foreign technical assistance.
Other related steps in implementing this policy
have been the arrangement for an economic sur-
vey of the country, carried out in 1949 by a
mission from the International Bank for Recon-
struction and Development; the subsequent em-
ployment of an economic and financial advisory
mission; the conclusion on March 9 of a general
technical cooperation (Point 4) agreement with
the United States preparatory to the negotiation
of specific technical aid arrangements; and the
recent extensive liberalization of the system of
controls over foreign exchange designed to expand
the country's trade and national income. In ad-
dition, a project for an agreement for the avoid- i
ance of double taxation is under consideration by '
the two Governments.

The United States program for the negotiation .
of treaties of this type is an integral part of this I
country's policy for the furtherance of liberal
])rinciples of trade and economic relations in gen-
eral, and particularly for creating throughout the
world conditions favorable to ect)nomic develop-
ment. Domestically, these treaties reinforce in
terms of international obligation the position of
the Federal Government as guardian of the rights
of foreigners and foreign enterprises in this coun-
try, a policy that has developed in conformity
with the Const it ution and Federal law. They safe-
guard aliens, on a basis of reciprocity, against
certain statutory disabilities, particularly with
respect to engaging in certain types of occupa-
tions, inheritance mattei-s, and othei-s.

Department of Slate Bulletin

U.S. To Send Military Supplies
to China for Defense of Taiwan

I Released to the press April 25]

Exchange of Notes Between the U.S. and Chirm

American Embassy, Taipei,

January 30, 1951.
Excelxjinct: Pursuant to instructions from my
Government, I liave the lionor to deliver the
following statement :

"The Government of the United States is pre-
pared to make available to the Republic of China
under the temis of P. L. 329, 81st Congi-ess, as
amended, certain military material for the defense
of Taiwan against possible attack.

"This material, and any other furnished under
the authority of the law referred to, is transferred
on the undei'standing that it will be used and dis-
posed of pursuant to the following undertakings
and that failure to do so by the Chinese Govern-
ment will be contrary to the understanding of
the United States Government, and may be con-
sidered by the United States to be cause for the
cessation of further deliveries (it being imder-
stood that the undertakings contained in the first
three paragraphs below apply as well to the
material transferred to the Chinese Government
under that law since June 27, 1950) ;

"1. The Chinese Government will use the ma-
terial to maintain its internal security or its
legitimate self-defense.

"2. The Chinese Government will take such
security measures as may be agreed in each case
between the United States Government and the
Chinese Government in order to prevent the dis-
closure and compromise of classified military
articles, services or information furnished by the
United States Government.

"3. Tlie Chinese Government agrees to receive
personnel of the United States Government who
will discharge in the territory under the control
of the Chinese Government the i-esponsibilities of
the United States Government under this agree-
ment and who will be accorded adequate facilities
to observe the progress of the assistance furnished,
to confirm that the material furnished is being
used for the purposes for which it is provided,
and to carry out such other operations or arrange-
ments as shall be mutually agreed pursuant to this
agreement. Such pereonnel, including personnel
temporarily assigned, will, in their relations with
the Chinese Government, operate as a part of the
United States Embassy, under the direction and
control of the Chief of the United States
Diplomatic Mission.

"4. The Chinese Government will not transfer,
sell, or otherwise dispose of the material provided
pursuant to the above undertakings, or any other

equipment susceptible of military use, without re-
gard to its source, or the time or manner of its
acquisition, without first obtaining the assurance
of the United States Government that such equip-
ment or material is not I'cquired by the United
States for its own use or required to support pro-
grams of military assistance undertaken by the
United States.

"The United States Government would appre-
ciate a written assurance from the Chinese Gov-
ernment of its acceptance of the undertakings in
tliis note."

Accept [etc.]

K. L. Rankin
[Charge d^Affaires, a. i.]

Taipeh, Tafwan
Fehimary 9, 1951

Monsieur le Charge d'affaires: I have the
honor to acknowledge receipt of your note No. 13,
dated January 30, 1951, which reads as follows:

[Here follows the text of the United States note, quoted
above.]

Ill reply, I have the honor to signify on behalf
of the Chinese Government the acceptance of the
undertakings set forth in your note under
reference.

Please accept [etc.]

[seal] George K. C. Yeh

\_Minister of Foreign Affairs]

Treaty Discussed With New Supreme
Commander and Japanese Officials

Statement by Ambassador John Foster Dulles^
{Released to the press April 24]

Our mission returns from a week in Japan.^
One of our tasks was to inform the new
SuiM-eme Commander, General Ridgway, regard-
ing United States policies and program for a
Japanese peace settlement. This has been done.
General Ridgway is quickly mastering the sub-
ject, and there can be complete confidence that he
will deal effectively with the Jaj^anese phase of

' The returning members of the mission in addition to
Mr. Dulles are Assistant Secretary of the Army, Earl D.
Johnson and Col. C. Stanton Babcoek, of the Department
of Defense, Robert A. Fearey, of the Department of
State, secretary of the Mission, and Burnita L. O'Day,
Mr. Dulles' personal secretary.

May 7, 195?

747

his new responsibilities. The Japanese them-
selves are already beginning to appreciate that,
and they will soon appreciate it fully.

Another task was to reassure the Japanese na-
tion that the change in Supreme Command did
not involve change in the basic policies with which
General MacArthur had been particularly identi-
fied in Japan. These policies were : an early and
just Japanese peace settlement; an unwavering
will to resist Communist aggression in the west-
ern Pacific, and the implementing of that will by
deeds to save Japan from being left defenseless
upon consummation of the treaty. We met with
many Japanese political and civic leaders, and I
made a public address which was widely reported
to the Japanese people. In such ways, we were
able to provide a large measure of reassurance;
and, as our nation continues to translate these basic
policies into effective action, we are confident that
the Japanese nation for its part will continue to
place confidence in the United States and desire
close association with us.

A third task was to discuss with the Japanese
Government the present status of our negotiations
for a Japanese peace treaty. We had full ex-
changes of views with the Prime Minister and
his associates. We reported the substantial prog-
ress made, the obstacles encountered, and our
program for bringing the peace settlement to an
early successful conclusion. In this connection, we
also had useful talks with some of the diplomatic
representatives in Tokyo of the Allied Powers.

There is unmistakable evidence that the Com-
munist Parties of Russia, China, and Japan are
working intensely and with renewed vigor to
spread distrust and fear in Japan and to block
the peace settlement on which the hopes of the
Japanese people center. We return confident
that their design can be frustrated if the free
world acts promptly, unitedly, and with an en-
lightened recognition of its community of interest
with the peace and freedom-seeking people of
Japan.

U.S.-Bolivia Study Strategic
Materials and Development Problems

[Released to the press April 23]

Following consultation between the Foreign
Minister of Bolivia, Pedro Zilveti Arce, and the
Department of State, representatives of the de-
partments and agencies of the United States Gov-
ernment concerned are studying the problems in-
volved in the subscription of long-term and mu-
tually advantageous contracts for the purchase of
strategic minerals, especially tin and tungsten,

748

from Bolivian private producers and the Bolivian
Mining Bank. In the meantime, in order that
normal shipments of Bolivian tin ores for the
RFC smelter at Texas City may not be inter-
rupted, an interim contract, covering deliveries
between IMarch 1 and May 31, 1951, has been
signed, while negotiations for a long-term con-
tract are continuing with the aim of concluding it
before May 31.

At the request of the Bolivian Foreign Minister,
a committee of United States officials has been
formed to study, with a committee of Bolivian
officials, basic Bolivian economic problems which
are of mutual interest to the two Governments and
which are related to the common defense effort.
This committee will study the needs and possibili-
ties of providing additional United States tech-
nical and financial assistance, public and private,
in order to contribute to an increase in Bolivian
production of strategic minerals and to the de-
velopment of increased agricultural and industrial
production.

U.S.-Bolivian Officials Named
on Joint Economic Committee

{Released to the press April 27]

On April 23, the Department of State an-
nounced the formation of a committee of United
States officials to study, with a connnittee of
Bolivian officials, basic Bolivian economic prob-
lems which are of mutual interest to the two Gov-
ernments and which are related to the common
defense effort. The United States committee is
composed of Fletcher Warren, Director of the
Office of South American Affairs of the Depart-
ment of State, as Chairman ; Winthrop G. Brown,
Acting Director of the Office of International Ma- |
terials Policy of the Department of State; Mer- |
win Bohan, who was chief of a United States i
economic mission which was sent to Bolivia in .j
1941 ; and Rollin S. Atwood, Deputy Director of
the Office of South American Affairs.

The Bolivian committee is composed of Ricardo
Martinez Vargas, Bolivian Ambassador to the
United States, as Chairman; Jose Romero Loza,
formerly Minister of Finance and National Econ-
omy in Bolivia; Juan Penaranda jMinchin, Min-
ister-Counselor of the Bolivian Embassy in Wash-
ington; and Guillermo Mariaca, General Man-
ager of Yacimientos Petroliferos Fiscales
Bolivianos, the Bolivian Government's petroleum
agency.

The work of the two connnittees was formally
initiated in a brief joint meeting at the Depart-
ment of State on April 26.

Department of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Calendar of Meetings '

Torquay Sept. 28- Apr. 21

Torquay Mar. 29-Apr. 3

Santiago Mar. 1-Apr. 7

Geneva Mar. 19-Apr. M

New York Apr. 2-17

Paris Mar. 19-Apr. 30

Montreal Mar. 20-Apr. 21

Montreal Mar. 27-Apr. 27

Washington Mar. 26-Apr. 7

Lyon. . . .
Washington .

Mar. 31-Apr.
Apr. 2-10

Adjourned During April 1951

Gatt (General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade) :

Third Set of Tariff Negotiations of Contracting Parties

Special Session of Contracting Parties

International Exposition of Railroads, Industry and Economy ....
United Nations:

Economic and Social Council:

Social Commission

Ad Hoc Committee on Slavery: 2d Session

Wmo (World Meteorological Organization): First Congress

IcAO (International Civil Aviation Organization):

Airworthiness Division: 4th Session

Operations Division: 4th Session

Fourth Meeting of Consultation of Ministers of Foreign Affairs of
American States.

Lyon International Trade Fair: 33d

First Meeting of the International Commission for the Northwest
Atlantic Fisheries.

South Pacific Quarantine Conference

Cannes Film Festival

Iro (International Refugee Organization):

Executive Committee, 9th Session

General Council, 7th Session

Fad (Food and Agriculture Organization) :

Rice Breeders' Working Party: 2d Meeting

Working Party on Fertilizers: 1st Meeting

Fag/Who Joint Expert Committee on Nutrition: 2d Session. . . .

XXIX International Milan Fair

♦Health Congress of the Royal Sanitary Institute: 55th Meeting. .
Nato (North Atlantic Treaty Organization) : Planning Board for
Ocean Shipping: 3d Meeting.

♦Second Inter- .American Indigenist Exposition

Rubber Study Group: 8th Session

In Session as of April 30, 1951

United Nations:

General Assembly: 5th Session

Economic and Social Council:

Commission on Narcotic Drugs: 6th Session Lake Success Apr. 10-

Human Rights Commission: 7th Session Geneva Apr. 16-

Population Commission: 6th Session Lake Success Apr. 23-

Commission on the Status of Women: 5th Session Lake Success Apr. 30-

International Materials Conference Washington Feb. 26-

Four Power Conference on Swiss- Allied Accord Bern Mar. 5-

Council of Foreign Ministers, Meeting of Deputies Paris Mar. 5- Apr.

Intergovernmental Study Group on Germany (continuation of Fourth London Apr. 3-

Phase).

' Prepared in the Division of International Conferences, Department of State.
* Tentative.

9

Suva, Fiji Islands Apr. 2-11

Cannes Apr. 3-20

Geneva Apr. 4-19

Geneva Apr. 9-20

Bogor, Indonesia Apr. 9-13

Bogor, Indonesia Apr. 14-19

Rome Apr. 10-17

Milan Apr. 12-29

Southport, England .... Apr. 23-27

London Apr. 23- 26

Rio de Janeiro Apr. 13-30

Rome Apr. 16-20

Lake Success Sept. 19-

May 7, 1 95 J

749

Calendar of Meetings — Continued

In Session as of April 30, 1951 — Continued

Fourth International Poplar Congress United Kingdom ....

Itu (International Telecommunication Union): Administrative Geneva

Council: 6th Session.
Pan American Sanitary Organization: 13th Meeting of Executive Washington

Committee.
IcAO Air Navigation Commission Communications Division: Montreal

4th Session.

Paris International Trade Fair Paris

South Pacific Commission: 7th Session Noumea, New Caledonia.

International Textile Exposition Lille, France

Scheduled May 1-July 31, 1951

International Exposition of Textile Art and Fashion Turin, Italy

Festival of Britain, 1951 Ens^land

Ninth International Exhibition of Decorative and Industrial Arts Milan

and Modern Architecture.
Who (World Health Organization) :

Fourth World Health Assembly Geneva

Executive Board: 8th Session Geneva

Ilo (International Labor Organization) :

Coal Mines: 4th Session Geneva

Joint Maritime Commission Geneva

Governing Body: 115th Session Geneva

34th International Labor Conference Geneva

Meeting of Experts on the Status and Conditions of Employment Geneva

of Domestic Workers.
United Nations:

Economic and Social Council:

Fiscal Commission: 3d Session Lake Success

Statistical Commission: 6th Session Lake Success

Economic, Employment and Development Commission .... Lake Success

Draft Convention Relating to the Status of Refugees, Con- Geneva

ference of Plenipotentiaries.

Economic Commission for Latin America: 4th Session .... Mexico City

Economic Commission for Europe: 6th Session Geneva

Subcommission on Prevention of Discrimination and Protection Geneva

of Minorities: 4th Session.

Council Committee on Non-Governmental Organizations . . . Lake Success

Agenda Committee Geneva

Council, 13th Session Geneva

International Law Commission : 3d Session Geneva

Permanent Central Opium Board and Narcotic Drugs Super- Geneva

visory Body: 5th Joint Session.

Trusteeship Council: 9th Session Lake Success

Caribbean Commission: 12th Meeting Barbados, British West Indies .

First Pan American Congress on Medical Education Lima

Third Regional Seminar on Social Affairs P6rto Alegre, Brazil . . . .

Inter-American Commission of Women Santiago

First Pan American Congress on Veterinary Medicine Lima

Universal Postal Union:

Executive and Liaison Committee St. Gallen, Switzerland . . .

Technical Transit Committee Pontresina, Switzerland . . .

Canadian International Trade Fair Toronto

IcAo: 5th Assembly Montreal

Diplomatic Conference on Maritime Law Brussels

Itu (International Telecommunication Union): International Radio Geneva

Consultative Committee: 6th Plenary Meeting.

Fao Council: 12th Session Rome ,

19th International Aeronautical Exposition Paris

UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Or-
ganization) :

General Conference: 6th Session Paris

Seminar on Teaching of History Sfcvres, France

Seminar on Teaching of Visual Arts in General Education .... Bristol

International Wheat Council, 5th Session London

Building Exhibition, "Constructa": the 25th Hannover, Germany . . .

Conference of British Commonwealth Survey Officers London

14th International Congress on Public Education Geneva

International Commission for the Regulation of Whaling, 3d Meeting . Capetown

Wool Study Group: 5th Meeting London

♦Tentative

750 Deporfmenf of Sfofe Bulletin

Apr.

25-

Apr.

Ifr-

Apr.

23-

Apr.

24-

Apr.

28-

Apr.

28-

Apr.

28-

Mav 2-

Mav 3-

Maj

5-

Mav 7-

June 4-

May 7-

Ma\

21-

Mav

■ 28-

June

6-

July 2-

May

7-

May

7-

Mav

14-

May

28*-

Mav

2S-

Mav

29-

June

18*-

June

19-

June

26-

Julv

3-

Mav

15-

June

5*-

June

11-

Mav

7-

Mav

14-

Mav

14-

Mav

14*-

May

20-

Mav 21-

June

6-

Mav 28-

June

5-

June

5-

June 5-

June

11-

June 16-

June 18-

Julv U-

July

7-

June

13-

Julv

3-

Julv

9-

Julv

12-

July 23-

July

U.S. Delegations to International Conferences

Fourth Session of Communications Division (ICAO)

The Department of State announced on April

25 that tlie fourth session of the Connnunications
(Com) Division of the International Civil Avia-
tion Organization (Icao) convened at Montreal,
Canada, on April 24, 1951. The United States
delegation is as follows :

Delegate and Chairman

George L. Rami, Chief, Communications Division, Civil
Aeronautics Administration, Department of Com-
merce.

Alternate Delegate and Vice Chairman

Arthur L. Lebel, Assistant Chief, Telecommuuications
Policy StafC, Department of State

Advisers

John M. Beardslee, Deput.v Director, Office of Federal Air-
ways, Civil Aeronautics Administration, Department
of Commerce

John Durkdvic, Corporation Secretary, Aeronautical
Hadii), Inc., Washington, D. C.

Benjamin F. Engel, Commander, United States Coast
Guard, Department of tlie Treasury

Thomas A. Kouchnerkavieh, Electronics Engineer, Inter-
national, Office of Federal Airways, Civil Aero-
nautics Administration, Department of Commerce

Donald Mitchell, Cliief, International Affairs Branch,
Aviation Division, Federal Communications Commis-
sion

Gordon C. Pearson, Aeronautical Communications Special-
ist, Office of Federal Airways, Civil Aeronautics Ad-
ministration, Department of Commerce

Clinton A. Petry, Director, Frequency Department, Aero-
nautical Radio, Inc., Washington, D. C.

Edmund V. Shores, Aeronautical Communications Special-
ist, Office of Federal Airways, Civil Aeronautics Ad-
ministration, Department of Commerce

Vernon I. Weihe, Radio Engineer, Air Transiwrt Associa-
tion of America

The Communications Division is one of ten tech-
nical Divisions of the Air Navigation Commission,
as established by the Icao Council. These Divi-
sions are responsible for formulating for the Com-
mission and for eventual Council action recom-
mendations on standards, procedures, and facilities
which appear to be necessary or desirable for the
safety, regularity or efficiency of international air
navigation. In practice, the Divisions function as
technical or specialized conferences open to dele-
gations from all Icao contracting states. The

third session of the Conuiumications Division was
held at Montreal from Janiiary 11 to February
26, 1949.

The fourth session will examine problems of air
communications relating, in particular, to pro-
cedures, codes, and abbreviations; frequency utili-
zation: equipment; and connnunication systems.
In addition, the Com Division will review its exist-
ing work program and recommendations thereon.

Fifth Session of Commission on
Status of Women (ECOSOC)

The Department of State announced on April
27 that Olive Remington Goldman, United States
representative on the Conunission on the Status
of Women of the United Nations Economic and
Social Council (Ecosoc), will attend the fifth
session of the Commission which will convene at
Lake Success on April 30, 1951. She will be
assisted by the following advisers:

Sara Buchanan, labor economist. Women's Bureau, De-
partment of Labor

Katherine B. File, assistant to the legal adviser, Depart-
ment of State

James N. Hyde, United States Mission to the United
Nations, New York

Rachel Nason, Office of United Nations Economic and
Social Affairs, Department of State

Carolyn A. Recht, Division of Research for U.S.S.R.
and Eastern Europe, Department of State

Among the items on the provisional agenda for
this session are political rights of women, the
status of women in both public and private law,
educational opportunities for women, equal pay
for equal work for men and women workers, par-
ticipation of women in the work of the United
Nations, and the report of the Inter- American
Commission of Women.

The Commission on the Status of Women, which
is one of the nine permanent functional commis-
sions of the Ecosoc, is responsible for the prepar-
ation of recommendations and reports to the
Council on the promotion of women's rights in
political, economic, social, educational, and civil
fields. Fifteen Governments, elected by the Coun-
cil, comprise the membership of this Commission.
The last session of the Commission was held at
Lake Success, May 8-19, 1950.

May 7, 7957

751

Health Congress of Royal Sanitary Inutstite

The Department of State announced on April
23 that the Health Congress of the Royal Sanitary
Institute will convene at Soutliport, England, on
that date. The United States delegation is as
follows :

Chairman

Col. Jay F. Gamel, AIC, USAF, Headquarters, Third Air
Division, Middlesex, Eugland

Delegates

Robert P. Burden, ScD., Paris OflSee, Rockefeller Founda-
tion, Paris

Lt. Col. Raymond J. Karpen, MC, USA, Preventive Medi-
cine Division, Office of the Surgeon General, Depart-
ment of the Army

Lt. Col. Louis C. Kossuth, MC, USAF, chief. Preventive
Medicine Division, Oflice of the Air Surgeon, Head-
quarters, United States Air Forces in Europe

Dr. Arthur S. Osborne, senior science attach^, American
Embassy, London

Capt. J. P. Wood, MC, USN, Office of Naval Research.
Branch Office, London

The Royal Sanitary Institute, which is the lead-
ing public health society of Great Britain, was
founded in 1876 to promote the application of the
English Public Health Act of 1875. The object
of the Institute is to furtlier the advancement of
sanitary science in all its branches and the diffu-
sion of knowledge relating thereto. It is the be-
lief of the Institute that one of the best means
of disseminating such knowledge is through hold-
ing annual meetings of representatives from all
over the world to discuss subjects of public health
and sanitation.

This meeting will afford the delegates an oppor-
tunity to exchange scientific information and to
discuss, in particular, such matters as preventive
medicine, maternal and child health, food and
nutrition, tropical hygiene, and hygiene in
industry.

The last Health Congress of the Royal Sanitary
Institute was held at Eastbourne, England,
April 24-28, 1950.

Pan American Sanitary Organization

Tlie Department of State announced on April
23 that the thirteenth meeting of the executive
committee of the Pan American Sanitary Organi-
zation (Paso) will convene at Washington from
April 23 to May 1, 1951. The United States dele-
gation is as follows :

Alternate United States Representative

Dr. Frederick ,T. Brady, Assistant Chief, International
Organization Lranch, Division of International
Healtli, i'ublic Health Service, Federal Security
Agency

Admsers

James F. Anderson, Division of International Adminis-
tration, Department of State

Marcia M. Fleming, Oflice of Assistant Legal Adviser for
United Nations Affairs, Department of State

Simon N. Wilson, Oflice of Regional-American Affairs,
Department of State

The Executive Committee was set up by a direc-
tive of the Twelfth Pan American Sanitary
Conference (Caracas, January 1947), which au-
tliorized tlie reorganization of tlie Pan American
Sanitary Bureau, a body established in 1902 as
the central coordinating agency for public health
activities in the American Republics. The Com-
mittee, elected by the Directing Council, performs
interim executive and advisory functions between
meetings of the Council and prepares agenda for
Council meetings.

The thirteenth meeting will consider such mat-
ters as the program and budget for both the Pan
American Sanitary Bureau and the reaional office
of the World Health Organization (Who).

The last meeting of the Executive Committee
was held at Ciudad Trujillo, Dominican Republic,
October 11-13, 1950.

International Arrangements Reviewed
for Equitable Use of Raw Materials

Remarks hy Secretary Acheson

[Released to the press April 25]

In response to a question whether, as allcrjcd iy Aneiirin
Bevan, the United States teas gobbling up most of the
raw materials Britain also needs with resultant jeopardy
to Britain's economy. Secretary Acheson today made the
following remarks at his press conference, which he
autkorixed for direct quotation.

We all know that rapid implementation of an
effective defense program to meet the present sit-
uation will necessitate very real sacrifices on the
part of the peoples of all 12 nations participating
in the North Atlantic Treaty Organization; sac-
rifices in which the United States, as a member,
expects to share; and of which all 12 participants
are aware.

In the International Materials Conference, and
in many other ways, the United States is contin-
uing to press for increased production of essential
raw nniterials and for international arrangements
to insure an equitable and efficient utilization of
existing stocks. Some of these essential materials
we produce in the United States. For others, we
are dependent upon foreign sources. Consump-
tion for less essential purposes has already been re-
stricted in this country.

Tlie export and import ]iolioies of the United
States are designed to take f idl account of the es-
sential needs in other friendly countries for mate-
rials to supply their basic economy and defense
programs.

Obviously, a full scale defense {)rogram sud-
denly imi)Osed on the economy of any nation must
liave some inflationary effect; a tendency whicli we
in tlie United States are equally anxious to curb.

752

Department of State Bulletin

The United States in tlie United Nations

[Apr. 20-May 3, 1951]
Security Council

Kasliinir. — The Council met on April 30 to ap-
point a United Nations representative as mediator
for India and Pakistan on Kashmir in accordance
with the resolution adopted on March 30. His
task is to effect the demilitarization of the state
of Jammu and Kashmir on the basis of the two
United Nations Commission for India and Paki-
stan (Uncip) resolutions of August 13, 1948, and
January 5, 1949, or at least to obtain the parties'
agreement to a demilitarization plan.

The President, D. von Balluseck (Netherlands) ,
stated that the delegates of the United Kingdom
and the United States had presented for consid-
eration the name of Dr. Frank P. Graham, De-
fense Manpower Administrator in the Depart-
ment of Labor, former United States Senator,
and former President of the University of North
Carolina. After receiving a negative response to
his incpiiry wliether there were any other nomi-
nees, the President asked the members to vote on
the appointment of Dr. Graham as United Na-
tions representative. The vote of approval was
7-0-4 (India, Netherlands, U.S.S.R., Yugoslavia) .
Dr. Graham is to report back to the Council within
3 months from the date of his arrival at the
subcontinent.

Ambassador "Warren E. Austin, in presenting
the name of Dr. Graham, stated that he was
"among the five distinguished United States citi-
zens designated by my Government for inclusion
in the United Nations Panel for Inquiry and Con-
ciliation. His fine qualities are well appreciated
in the United States where he is known as a dis-
tinguished educator, statesman, government ofli-
cial, and negotiator of great ability. I know that
he will bring to this new task in full measure the
qualities needed for his part to accomplish his
mission. ... It is our earnest hope that both
parties will work with Dr. Graham and will im-
plement the details of demilitarization prepara-
tory to the plebiscite, which will permit the people
of Kashmir freely to express their will regarding
the question of accession."

Palestine. — Two meetings were held, April 25
and May 2, on the Palestine question. On April
25 statements were made by Ambassador Abba S.
Eban (Israel) and by Maj. Gen. William E. Riley,
USMC, Chief of Staff of the United Nations Truce
Supervision Organization in Palestine.

Mr. Eban stated that: (1) The original center
of tension in the demilitarized zone between Syria
and Israel had been the Huleh area, where Syria
had "fomented" incidents in February and March

in order to "impede" the drainage of the swamps.
(2) During negotiations for an armistice, Dr.
Bundle had proposed the creation of a demilitar-
ized zone, including the two areas, Huleh and Ain
Gev, and some others. Israel had been assured that
only its military forces would be denied access to
the zone, that it could continue to pursue all non-
military activities. The text of the armistice
agreement contained no such restrictions as were
now being claimed, and he could state "from inti-
mate personal knowledge" that Israel would never
have signed an agreement containing any such
restrictions. The view of Israel was that the
Chief of Staff of the United Nations Truce Super-
vision Organization and the Chairman of the
Israeli-Syrian Mixed Armistice Commission had
no capacity to make rulings on sovereignty, on
the annulment or extension of concessions, on laws
of expropriation, or other legal and political mat-
ters. (3) The areas in question had been part of
Israel since its establishment. Work on the Huleh
concession had extended to the demilitarized zone
in January with the full Imowledge of the Syrian
Government and the representatives of the United
Nations — and "without objection." (4) Syria
had proclaimed its intention to annex the Huleh
and the Ain Gev areas. "We I'eject Syria's claim
and will sign no peace involving cession of these
areas." (5) Israel considered that the retalia-
tory bombing of El Hamnia and nearby Syrian
positions on April 4 had been taken in self-defense
following the Syrian wanton murder of seven
Israeli policemen. He admitted that the action
"may not be in conformity with the armistice
agreement" and wanted to voice Israel's regret.
It had been due "only to extreme provocation."

General Riley commenced his discussion of this
dispute by expressing regret that the complaints
had come before the Council since he believed that
tliey could and should be handled by the Syrian-
Israeli Mixed Armistice Commission. He set
forth Dr. Bundle's interpretation of Syria's and
Israel's rights in the demilitarized zone between
them. He pointed out that this interpretation
had been accepted by both countries and accord-
ingly had governed him. General Riley, in his en-
forcement of the armistice agreement's provisions
relating to the zone. Neither party could validly
claim to have a free hand in the demilitarized zone
over civilian activity, while military activity was
totally excluded. Dr. Bunche had stressecl that
the armistice agreement did not prejudge the ques-
tion of territorial sovereignty. General Riley
stated that the "troublesome question" of admin-
istrative authority in the zone was one which, if

May 7, 7957

753

considered and clarified by the Security Council,
could be very useful to the Mixed Armistice Com-
mission. The Commission could then take deci-
sions on all the subsidiary questions involved.

In answer to a series of questions put to him
at the May 2 meeting by the delegates of Ecuador,
Israel, Syria, United Kingdom, and the United
States, he replied: (1) The removal of armed
forces veas basic to the security of the demilitar-
ized zone and entry of forces from either side
would be a flagrant violation of the annistice
agreement; (2) The Huleh project itself should
not be discussed by the Mixed Armistice Com-
mission. However, it could be considered if Syria
complained regarding the expropriation of land
as this would be a dispute over the interpretation
of the agreement. He was not aware that any
of the actual tlrainage work had been under-
taken as the result of approval by the Mac Chair-
man. The Arabs had been dispossessed of 7 acres
in the area and thus the project was interfering
with the restoration of normal activities; (3)
Each village was responsible only to itself for
its administration and policing, and, in the event
of disputes, the Mac Chairman would work
through the heads of the Arab and Israeli vil-
lages. (4) The issue was whether Syria could
dictate to Israel as to what the latter could do
in Israeli-controlled territory, including Huleh.
If the Israelis could proceed with the project
without violating the armistice or interfering
with the restoration of normal life, then Syria
could not say that Israel could not carry it out.

Economic and Social Council

Commission on the Status of Women. — The
15-member Commission opened its fifth session at
Lake Success on April 30. Mrs. Marie-Helen
Lefaucheux (France) was reelected chairman.
Mrs. Olive K. Goldman, chief, Public Education
Division of Vocational Rehabilitation, Illinois
State Board of Vocational Education, is the
United States delegate.

The Commission's task is to make recommenda-
tions and reports to the Economic and Social
Council on the promotion of women's rights in the
political, civil, economic, social, and educational
helds, which would implement the principle of
equality of rights for men and women.

The adopted agenda includes: report of the
Secretary-General relating to the political rights
of women ; consideration of a draft convention on
the political rights of women; political education
for women in countries where women have only
recently acquired the right to vote; status of
women in public law; rei)ort of the Inter-Amer-
ican Commission of Women; equal i)ay for equal
work for men and women ; and i)articipation of
women in the work of (lie United Nations.

The Commission decided that it was not compe-
tent to consider the U.S.S.K. motion to unseat the
representative of the Chinese Nationalist Govern-

ment. It also voted not to include in the agenda
a new item sponsored by the U.S.S.K. and Poland
in behalf of the Women's International Demo-
cratic Federation (Widf) resolution similar to
the Communist Stockholm "Partisans of Peace"
petition. The chairman stated that the Commis-
sion should stay strictly within the terms of its
reference, and in this way it could best serve not
only the cause of women but also of peace.

Population Commission. — The 12-member Com-
mission began its sixth session at Lake Success
on April 23. Alfred Sauvy (France) was re-
elected chairman, Germano Jardim (Brazil) vice
chairman, and Philip M. Hauser (U. S.)
rapporteur.

Among the agenda items are: studies of inter-
relationships of demographic, economic, and social
factors in particular areas; demographic aspects
of migration; mortality and mortality rates; a
revision of the report on "Findings of studies on
the inter-relationships between population trends
and economic and social factors" ; jiroblems con-
nected with the 1950 and 1951 censuses of popula-
tion; demographic aspects of the problem of re-
tired persons and the aged; regional seminars on
population problems; and convening of a World
Population Conference under United Nations
auspices.

The U.S.S.E.'s customary proposal, that the
representative of the People's Republic of China
should be invited to attend in place of the repre-
sentative of the Chinese Nationalist Government,
was ruled out of order by the Chairman. Tliis
decision was upheld 7-2 (U.S.S.R., Ukraine )-l
(Yugoslavia). The Commission will submit a
report to the Economic and Social Council at the
close of the session.

Specialized Agencies

World Meteorological Organization. (WMO). —
The First Congress of the Wjio concluded a 6-
week session in Paris on April 28, after approv-
ing an agreement which provides for its affilia-
tion with the United Nations as a specialized
agency. The agi-eement will be submitted to the
Economic and Social Council (Ecosoc) and the
General Assembly for final approval.

As of February 15, 1951, 44 states, including
the United States, had deposited instruments of
ratification or accession to the Convention estab-
lishing the Organization.

Dr. F. W. Reichelderfer, Chief of the United
States Weather Bureau, was elected President.
An Executive Committee was established, which
will meet at least once a year, and will guide the
activities of Wmo between sessions of the Con-
gress, whose headquarters will be at Geneva.

The basic objective of the Organization is to
coordinate, standardize, and improve world
meteorological activities, and to encourage an effi-
cient exchange of meteorological information be-
tween countries.

754

Departmenl of Sfate Bulletin

I Eighteenth Report of U.N. Command Operations in Korea

FOR THE PERIOD MARCH 16-31, 1951 >

U.N. dop. S/2107
Dated Apr. 26, 1931

I herewith submit report number 18 of the
United Nations Command Operations in Korea
for the period 16-31 INIarcli, inclusive. United
Nations Command communiques number 824-839
provide detailed accounts of these operations.

During this period the enemy has been driven
northward about fifteen miles over the entire
front, except in the Seoul area, where United Na-
tions forces advanced 25 miles. The heaviest fight-
ing occurred from 23 to 25 March near Uijongbu,
Naegang, and Hyon, on the western front, and at
Chaun-Ni on the central front. Enemy resistance
appeared to be stiffening toward the end of the
period, especially along the central front in the
Kapyong and Chunchon area. In his withdrawal
the enemy has made increasing use of mortars and
landmines.

Front lines at the close of the period ran gen-
erally from Munsan east through Chunchon to
the vicinity of Hyon-Ni, and thence northeast to
Yangyang, which fell to United Nations forces
on 27 March.

During the past two weeks the battered Chinese
units on the central front were relieved and re-
placed by at least three, and probably four, re-
habilitated Chinese Communist armies. Concur-
rently, the enemy has built a powerful reserve
force, generally within supporting distance of the
front. This force, includes four fresh north

' Transmitted to the Security Council by Ambassador
Wiirren R. Austin, U.S. representative in the Security
Council, on April 26. For texts of the first, second, third,
fourth, tifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, and
eleventh reports to the Security Council on U.N. command
operation in Korea, see Bitlletin, of Aug. 7, 1950, p. 203 ;
Aug. 28, 1950, p. 323; and Sept. 11, 1950, p. 403; Oct. 2,

1950, p. .5.34; Oct. 16, 1950, p. 603; Nov. 6, 1950, p. 729;
Nov. 13, 1950, p. 7.59; .Jan. 8, 1951, p. 43, and Feb. 19, 1951,
p. 304, respectively. The reports which have been pub-
lished separately as Department of State pul)lications
3935, 3955, 3962, 3978, 3986, 4006, 4015, and 4108 respec-
tively will appear hereafter only in the Buf-letin. The
twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth reports appear in the
Bulletin of Mar. 19, 1951, p. 470 ; the fifteenth and six-
teenth reports in the Bulletin of Apr. 16, 1951, p. 625;
and the seventeenth report in the Bulletin of Apr. 30,

1951, p. 710.

Korean corps, totaling twelve divisions, the equiv-
alent of five fresh Chinese Communist force
armies, totaling approximately fifteen divisions,
and the four Chinese Communist force armies,
totaling twelve divisions, which were recently
withdrawn from combat. Enemy forces currently
deployed on the front, plus the reserve forces, total
about sixty divisions. Southbound transport
movements in the enemy rear indicate a strong
effort to provide adequate logistical support for
future combat operations. Enemy traffic is
heaviest on north-south supply routes terminating
in Central Korea near the 38th parallel.

Enemy guerrilla forces in United Nations rear
areas have been steadily reduced by vigorous
United Nations action. Most contacts occurred
in the east coastal area, as United Nations forces
sought out and attacked scattered guerrilla bands.
Guerrilla strength has been somewhat reduced in
southwestern Korea by the surrender of numerous
guerrillas to civil authorities.

Constant jjatrol and daily reconnaissance oper-
ations by United Nations Naval forces continued
to deny movement of enemy shipping in Korean
waters. Naval gunfire support continued along
the east coast near the 38th parallel. Coordinated
interdiction operations by United Nations carrier-
based aircraft and surface forces, conducted on
a round-the-clock basis, continued to restrict
severely the movement of enemy supplies on the
northeast Korean lines of communication. One
specially planned bombardment operation in the
Wonsan area inflicted very severe personnel casu-
alties on a large concentration of enemy troops.

More than the usual numbers of drifting mines
were sighted in Korean waters during the period
of this report. Check minesweeping operations
continued, mainly for the protection of ships en-
gaged in shore bombardment.

United Nations air power continued the relent-
less pounding of enemy troops, supplies and trans-
portation facilities. The Far East Air Forces
with attached South African, Australian and
shore-based United States Marine units consist-
ently averaged more than 1,000 sorties a day. On
23 March the Fifth Air P'orce mounted its one

May 7, J95T

755

hundred thousandth sortie of the air war in
Korea.

As battle lines continued to move northward,
rail and highway bridges, tunnels, trackage, loco-
motives and boxcars were destroyed in a massive
air effort which has substantially reduced the en-
emy's ability to furnish the regrouping forces
with ammunition and reinforcements. Virtually
all enemy supply movement during daylight hours
has been brought to a standstill, while improved
methods of air operations at night have facili-
tated the destruction of a large portion of his rail
and vehicular traffic attempting to move under
cover of darkness.

Several enemy MIG-type planes were destroyed
and others damaged; however, most of the flights
which have been observed south of the Yalu River
have fled to their Manchurian sanctuary when ap-
proached by United Nations aircraft.

The second and largest airborne operation of
the Korean war was launched on 23 March. After
days of careful preparation, thousands of para-
troopers were successfully dropped behind enemy
lines about fifteen miles northwest of Seoul. In
addition to noi-mal unit equipment and supplies,
the drop included heavy equipment, jeeps, wea-
pon carriers, howitzers, and many other bulky
items. Earlier in the daj^ all possible enemy troop
positions were blasted with napalm, rockets and
bombs by fighters and bombers of the Far East
Air Forces.

Enemy prisoners report continuing strenuous
efforts by Communist officers to isolate their men
from the truth and to deceive them with calcu-
lated falsifications. These tactics are being com-
bated with increasing effectiveness by United Na-
tions leaflets and loudspeaker and radio broad-
casts. Through these media, many Chinese and
North Korean soldiers are, even now, learning for
the first time that their armies are opposing the
United Nations as well as the Republic of Korea.
They are also being shown, by actual photographs
as well as by descriptions, how the United Nations
forces accord to every enemy prisoner the priv-
ileges guaranteed him by the Geneva Convention.
Prisoners report, almost without exception, that
Communist officers have attempted to convince
them that they will be executed or tortured if cap-
tured. Approximately 300 million United Na-
tions leaflets have now been disseminated in Ko-
rea, in conjunction with regular broadcasts from
ground and airborne loudspeakers and from fixed
radio stations.

Violations of the laws of war by the enemy con-
tinue to be reported by United Nations forces in
Korea. The following incidents in which the
armed forces of North Korea have violated, and
are continuing to violate, accepted standards for
the humanitarian conduct of war have been re-

Sorted: On or about 22 September 1950 the 27
iegimental Commander (NKPA) ordered the
execution of six United Nations prisoners of war.
Their hands were bound, eyes covered and they

756

were shot to death near Kachon-Myon. One mile
southwest of Inchon the bodies of twenty-seven
civilians were found who had been bound and shot
on or about 15 January 1951. On 8 February
1951, in the village of Fabalmak, the bodies of
nine civilians were uncovered. Available infor-
mation indicated the victims had been bound and
shot on or about 5 February 1951. These reports
are being collated and investigated to verify the
facts and to establish the units and persons
responsible.

THE CONGRESS

Legislation

Authorizing Vessels of Canadian Resistry To Transport
Iron Ore Between United States Ports on tlie Great
Lalces During 1951. H. Rept. 283, 82d Cong. 1st
sess. [To accompany H. R. 2338] 4 pp.

Copper Import-Tax Suspension. H. Rept. 285, S2d Cong.
1st sess. [To accompany H. R. 3336] 3 pp.

Granting of Permanent Residence to Certain Aliens. H.
Rept. 303, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H.
Con. Res. 90] 2 pp.

Amending the Displaced Persons Act of 1948, as Amended.
H. Rept. 325, S2d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany
H. R. 3576] 6 pp.

Importation of Foreign Agricultural Workers. H. Rept.
326, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R. 3283]
13 pp.

Report of Activities of the National Advisory Coimeil on
International Monetary and Financial Problems.
Message from the President of the United States
transmitting a report . . . H. Doc. 70, 82d Cong. 1st
sess. 69 pp.

Granting of Permanent Residence to Certain Aliens. S.
Rept. 188, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H.
Con. Res. 49] 2 pp.

Amending Section 6 of the Central Intelligence Agency
Act of 1949. S. Rept. 195, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To
accompany S. 927] 2 pp.

Importation of Foreign Agricultural Workers. S. Rept.
214, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany S. 984] 11
pp.

Giving the Department of Commerce the Authority To Ex-
tend Certain Charters of Vessels to Citizens of the
Republic of the Philippines. S. Rept. 218, 82d Cong.
1st sess. [To accompany S. J. Res. 57] 5 pp.

Joint Economic Report. A Report of tlie .Joint Committee
on the Economic Report on the January ISK^l Eco-
nomic Report of the President. S. Rept. 210, 82d
Cong. 1st sess. 121 pp.

Convention With Canada Relating to Operation of Cer-
tain Radio Equipment or Stations. Message from the
President of the United States transmitting a Con-
vention . . . signed at Ottawa on Fel)ruary 8, 1951.
Senate Ex. C. 82d Cong. 1st sess. 5 pp.

January 1951 Economic Report of the President. Hear-
ings before the Joint Committee of the United States,
Eighty-second Congress, first session, on Sec. 5 (A)
of Public Law 304 (79th Congress) January 22, 24, 25,
26, 29, 31, February 2, 1951. 530 pp.

Proposed Supplemental .Appropriation To Pay Claims for
Damages, Audited Claims, and Judgments Rendered
Against the United States. Communication from
the President of the United States ... in the amount
of $1,999,044.26 . . . H. Doc. 85, 82d Cong. 1st sess.
20 pp.

Department of State Bulletin

Summary of Report on Mutual Defense Assistance Program

SEMIANNUAL REPORT SUBMITTED
TO CONGRESS

[Released to the press April 26]

President Truman, on April 25, transmitted to
the Congress the second semiannual report on
the Mutual Defense Assistance Program (Mdap),
covering the period from April 6 to October 6,
1950.

(This completes the first full year of operation
under Public Law 329, 81st Cong., 1st sess., cited
as the "Mutual Defense Assistance Act of 1949,"
approved October 6, 1949. The act was amended
to increase its scope at the 2d sess. [Public Law
621, 81st Cong.] approved July 26, 1950.)

Summary of Report

The report details the joint activities of the
Department of State, the Department of Defense,
and the Economic Cooperation Administration in
providing military assistance to "certain friendly
nations whose security must be maintained in the
intei'ests of preserving world peace" — including
North Atlantic Treaty nations.

While most of the details of the program — the
world's greatest peacetime cooperative defense
effort — have already been made public, the report
shows them in relation to their bearing on Amer-
ican foreign policy today and makes clear that the
program of economic-military aid being followed
is aimed at preserving world peace.

As the report states :

Because communism probed for weak links resardless
of their character and then skillfully selected and shaped
its tactics to exploit them, the task of building strength
in the free world was that of building strength in all of
its principal elements — economic, political, spiritual, and
military. It was futile to revive the economy and spirit
of a people in order to provide a shield against internal
Communist aggression while leaving them an easy, un-
defended target for Soviet military or paramilitary forces.

Moreover, the attainment of internal stability depended
in part uiwn the development of a feeling of security
from external aggression — a conviction that the fruits of
the self-discipline and hard labor required for economic
recovery could not be harvested by a conqueror. Con-
versely, however, no nation could create and maintain an
effective military establishment without a healthy econ-
omy. Similarly, the cost of such an establishment would
be unjustified if it protected a nation which was too weak

internally to survive Comnninist subversion or was lacking
in the will to resist external force in crisis. The devel-
opment of economic, military, political, and spiritual
strength must go hand-in-hand, and for this reason the
principal elements of the American program to achieve
peace and security were specifically designed to provide
these several components of total strength both abroad
and at home.

The principal elements of this program were:

(1) The European Recovery Program and other
economic programs designed to assist the free nations
to repair the ravages of war and to attain a standard of
existence that gave them the strength and the desire to
resist Communist subversion and propaganda ;

(2) the creation and maintenance of an American
defensive military establishment capable, alone in the
first instance, and later as part of a collective force, of
discouraging any immediate challenge of military
aggression ;

(3) participation in collective security arrangements
with other friendly Governments in the Western Heroi-
sphere and North Atlantic area in those cases where, in
the light of our available resources, the character of our
strategic interests, and the practicability of effectlye
associations, such arrangements were likely to provide
increased military strength against aggression ; and

(4) the Mutual Defense Assistance Program, and
several smaller and more specific earlier programs, in-
tended to provide cooperating free nations, to the extent
that they could not help themselves, with the physic^
means of achieving military strength.

Along with strong and continuous support for the
United Nations in both word and action, the United
States has vigorously and with increasing success pursued
these four courses.

"Wliereas, the first G months of operation of the
Mutual Defense Assistance Program had repre-
sented a period of planning and i^reparation, the
second 6 months — to October 6, 1950 — was a
period of active operations. By the end of the
period, approximately 330,000 measurement tons
of military materiel and commodities had been
shipped, including nearly 500 tanks and combat
vehicles.

A sharp upswing in the obligation of Mdap
funds also is noted in the report. From March 31,
1950, when total obligations were just under 42
million dollars (less than 3 percent of total funds
appropriated for fiscal year 1950), obliga-
tions jumped to about 1.9 billion dollars by
October first.

The extent to which cooperating nations are
making efforts of their own to build their defenses
is discussed at length in the report.

May 7, 1951

757

In summinp; up, the conclusion of the report
states :

The story of the Mutual Defense Assistance Program
which has been recorded in these pages bespeaks its own
lessons. The world as we find it is a world in which
the ability of free men to preserve their freedom depends
upon the ability and will of free men to defend them-
selves against the sinister, virulent, and powerful forces
which seek to enslave them. Everywhere, Soviet com-
munism, evil and strong, is assaulting the ramparts of
libert.v — probing for weakness and endeavoring by tlie
exploitation of weakness to spread the hopeless dark-
ness which covers its present, already vast empire to
the farthest reaches of the earth. The events which
have been chronicled in this report have demonstrated
the nature and ever-present character of this danger.
They have also proved that this danger can only be
removed by building comparable strength throughout the
free world — spiritual strength, political strength, eco-
nomic strength, and military strength. Force mu.st be
confronted with force — force defensively so great that
Soviet communism will never dare to test it. Toward
this end the Mutual Defense Assistance Program clearly
has an indispensable role. It must therefore be con-
tinued in the future for so long and in such size and
form as may be required to build the kind of military
strength among free nations that will preserve the
secvirity of these nations, including tlie United States,
against Soviet aggi-ession.

The ta.sk of meeting Soviet communism on its own terms
in every sphere is a manageable task, but it requires more
than plans, promises, and hopes. It will demand the best
and most that every free nation can contribute. The
price will be high, but it is a price which the free nations
can pay, and it is a price that they must pay if they wish
to preserve their freedom.

The Mutual Defense Assistance Program and other
programs directed toward strengthening the non-Soviet
world are a necessary part of that price. There is no
other choice, no easy middle road of concession or neu-
trality, because Soviet communism brooks no compromise
except where compromise will serve its own imperialistic
ends. So long as this condition persists, free man will
either meet the challenge and pay the price or cease to be
free. Whether they will have the foresight and wisdom
to look beyond the shadows of their own hamlets and
perceive and understand this fact, and whether they will
have the courage and be prepared to make the heavy
sacrifices required to deal therewith, are the great issues
of our time. American foreign policy proceeds on the
assumption that the quality of free men and nations is
such that these issues can and must be resolved on the
side of freedom and liberty.

PRESIDENT'S MESSAGE TO CONGRESS

[Released to the press by the White House April 26]

To the CongresH of the United States :

Pursuant to the provisions of Public Law 329
(81st Cong., 1st sess., G3 Stat. 714), I submit the
Second Semiannual Report on the Mutual Defense
Assistance Program, covering the period from
April 6, 1950 to October 6, 19.^0.

In making this submission I can do no better
than to reiterate the following words which were
contained in my letter submitting the First Semi-
annual Report on June 1, 19.50:

By its enactment of the Mutual Defense Assistance
Act of 1940, and by its earlier provision of aid for Greece
and Turkey, the Congress of the United States recognized

that the security of the United States required a strength-
ening of the will and ability of certain free nations to
resist the aggression with which they were threatened.
The preservation of world peace in a form which free
peoples could accept depended then, as it depends now,
upon the physical capacity and moral determination of
the free world to stem those forces which seek to cloak
the whole earth with the mantle of totalitarianism. The
Mutual Defense Assistance Program represents one part
of our effort to assist in the development of this essential
capacity and determination and, as the attached report
clearly demonstrates, is, and must continue to be, an
integral part of the total policy of the United States.

Events since that time have proved beyond a
reasonable doubt the truth of these principles.

Harrt S. Truman

The WnrrE House
April 25, 1951.

THE DEPARTMENT

Mrs. Bertha S. Rodrick Retires
With Fifty- Year Employment Record

Mrs. Bertha S. Rodrick retired from the De-
partment of State on April 30, 1951 after 50 years
of service.^ She is the first woman employee to
achieve this record of service in the history of the
Department.

Mrs. Rodrick was first appointed to the Depart-
ment on March 28, 1900. At this time, she was
employed for 1 month to do special work on the
Foreign Relations volumes. On May 16, 1901, she
was appointed to the Department as a stenographer
in the Bureau of Indexes and Archives, and her
service has been consecutive since that time.

In 1906, she was transferred to the Passport
Division, which at that time consisted of 7 employ-
ees. At present, there are over 200 employees in
this Division, headed by Ruth B. Shipley, more
than the total employment of the Department in
1906. Since that time, the Passport Division has
issued 514 million passports.

Mrs. Rodrick's knowledge of passport require-
ments and procedures and long experience with
all phases of this critical facet of the Department's
responsibilities has made her services effective in
dealing with the wide range of requests and in-
([uiries relative to passports and complicated citi-
zenship matters.

Secretary of State Acheson presented a letter of
commendation for her noteworthy service to Mrs.
Rodrick on April 30, 1951.

' For interview with Mrs. Rodrick, Viewing 1,S Years in
the Department of State, see Bulletin of Nov. 14, 1J)49,
p. 741.

758

Department of State Bulletin

PUBLICATIONS

Pamphlets on Germany
and German Youth Released

[Released to the press April 29]

The Department of State released today two
pamphlets relating to Germany and German
youth. They are Confuse and Control: Soviet
Techniques in Gennany^ and Preparation for To-
morrow: A German Boy's Year in America.

The pamphlet Confuse and Control, describes
Soviet efforts to reduce the German people to a
helpless confusion of distrust and divided purpose.
Through example and detailed analysis, presented
against the background of United States policies
and programs in Germany, these hundred-odd
pages give the story of Soviet subversion tactics,
their successes, and their failures in a crucial year
of the occupation. The account opens with an
estimate of Soviet intentions and of the impor-
tance of Germany to the U.S.S.K. and to the free
world. It proceeds with a discussion of the two
Germanys of today, an estimate of the influence of
communism in Western Germany, and an exam-
ination of the current Party line, including the
Kremlin version of the Korean issue as siiread by
the Connnunist "free" pi-ess in Eastern Germany.
Communist literature. Communist-inspired riots,
and the remarkable election of October 1950 are
brought into the record.

Also brought into the record are the attempts
of the Soviets to entice the young people of East-
ern Germany into the Communist Party by the
methods Hitler used more than a decade ago to con-
vert the youth of his day to nazism. The
pamphlet describes the Communist spring festival
in Berlin a year ago when half a million young
Germans were brought to the capital for a jam-
boree that was to rise to a climax in a riotous march
through Western Berlin. Through the good sense
and the precautions taken by the citizens and of-
ficials of Western Berlin, the Soviet plans for a
bloody riot — and the world headlines that would
have arniounced it — were blocked. Instead, some
thousands of the young visitors who wandered into
Western Berlin were welcomed by the people of
that sector who took them into their homes and
offset some of their Communist teachings with
considerable success.

Confuse and Control pays tribute to the citizens
of both Eastern and Western Berlin for the cou-
rageous way in which they are resisting Soviet
pressures. With a spirit characteristic of most of
the peoples who stand closely under the guns of

the Kremlin, Berliners are showing a fortitude
and toughness of mind that are defeating the
Soviet confusion tactics. As this account indicates,
Germans who are not in daily contact with Soviet
rule are likely to be more susceptible to these con-
fusion tactics, but the strenuous efforts of the Al-
lied occupation authorities in Western Germany
have had a nuirked success in defeating Soviet
plans and in building up the democratic patterns
that are establishing confidence and a clear goal
for the German people.

Confuse and Control gives a full pictorial cover-
age of its topics with maps, cartoons, and photo-
graphs. Included are reproductions of Commu-
nist posters extolling the "joys" of living under
communism and deploring, with pointed reference
to Germany's problems, the horrors of American
"brutality" and "dollar imperialism."

The second pamphlet, Preparation for Tomor-
row, the Department of State has told the story of
a 17-year-old German boy's year in America under
the Department's exchange program for German
boys and girls of secondary school age. This il-
lustrated pamphlet describes Ernst Taucher's
family background, how the opportunity to go
to the United States came to him, his journey, his
introduction to American life in an Indiana farm-
ing community, his experiences as a member of
a hospitable midwestern family, as a student in
the high school, and as a sharer in the everyday
life of a small town. Finally, it describes the
conflicting emotions with which Ernst uproots
himself from his new life and returns to Germany.

Ernst's experiences, special and extraordinary
as they seemed to him, are common to the 576
German youngsters who have had or are now hav-
ing a chance to learn what democracy is by living
with it for a year under American conditions.

The exchange program for Germany's teen-age
boys and girls, as conducted by the State Depart-
ment's Office of Educational Exchange with the
cooperation of various religious and civic organi-
zations, is designed to give some of Germany's
most ]jromising young people practical training
in democratic procedures and living. Ernst
speaks of his American experience as "the most
wonderful year of my life." The Department
and the increasing number of Americans who have
come to know the young visitors from Germany
take the position that the teen-ager exchange pro-
gi'am is a sensible and typically American way
of helping Germany to develop sound leadership.

Both of these publications are on sale by the
Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government
Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C. The price
of Confuse and Control: Soviet Techniques in
Germany is 30^. The pamphlet. Preparation for
Tomorrou): A German Boy's Year in America,
sells for 25«*.

May 7, 1957

759

May 7, 1951

Index

Vol. XXIV, No. 618

American Republics Page
BOLIVIA:

Joint Economic Committee Officials Named . . 748

Joint Study of Materials and Development . . 748

COLOMBIA: Treaty of Friendship, Commerce,

and Navigation Signed With U.S 746

Pan American Sanitary Organization Meeting . . 752

Asia

CHINA: U.S. To Send Military Supplies for Tai-
wan. Exchange of Notes (Rankin, Teh) . . 747

JAPAN: Peace Treaty:

Discussion With New Supreme Commander

and Japanese Officials (Dulles) 747

Peace Without Fear. (Dulles before U.N. Assn.

of Japan) 726

KOREA: U.N. Command Operations, 18th Re-
port. (Mar. 16-31, 1951) 755

Aviation

ICAO Communications Division, 4th session . . 751

Claims and Property

Claims-Filing Procedure Under Berlin Law . . . 743

Communism

Confuse and Control: Soviet Techniques in Ger-
many (Pamphlet) Released 759

Japan Treaty Discussions With Supreme Com-
mander and Japanese Officials (Dulles) . . . 747

MDAP Semiannual Report: Message to Congress,

Text (Truman); Summary 757

Outlook and Tasks Aliead for Germany: U.S.

Policies. (McCIoy over Bavarian Radio) . . 736

Peace Without Fear (Dulles before U.N. Assn.

of Japan) 726

Soviet Techniques for "Peace" (Hlckerson before

Foreign Policy Institute, Milwaukee) .... 731

Congress

MDAP Semiannual Report: Message of Trans-
mission, Text (Truman); Summary 757

Legislation Listed 756

Europe

GERMANY:

Claims-Filing Procedure Under Berlin Law . . 743

EGA Purchase of Raw Cotton 743

Monthly Economic Review (Feb. 1951) 738

Outlook and Tasks Ahead-U.S. Policies (Mc-
CIoy over Bavarian Radio) 736

Pamphlets on Germany and Youth Released . 759
HUNGARY: Robert A. Vogeler Release: Back-
ground of Negotiations; U.S. Assurances . . 723

U.K.:

Health Congress Meeting, Royal Sanitary In-
stitute 752

International Arrangements for Raw Materials

Reviewed (Acheson) 752

U.S.S.R.:

Japan Peace Treaty, Soviet Action (Dulles

before U.N. Assn. of Japan) 726

U.S. Proposes To Submit Lend-Lease Settle-
ment to Arbitral Panel 744

Finance

German Monthly Economic Review (Feb. 1951) . 738

Foreign Service

Robert A. Vogeler Released by Hungary Govt.:

Negotiations; U.S. Assurances 723

Health

Health Congress Meets, Royal Sanitary Institute . 752
Pan American Sanitary Organization Meeting . 752

Human Rights

Commission on Status of Women (ECOSOC) . . 751

Industry

ECA Purchase of Raw Cotton for West Germany . 743
German Monthly Economic Review (Feb. 1951) . 738

Information and Educational Exchange Program

Pamphlets on Germany and Youth Released . . 759

Page

VGA: Radio Interference Problenx Settled .... 724
International Meetings

Calendar of Meetings 749

U.S. Delegations:

Commission on Status of Women (ECOSOC) . 751

Health Congress, Royal Sanitary Institute . . . 752

ICAO Communications Division 751

Pan American Sanitary Organization 752

Labor

German Monthly Economic Review (Feb. 1951) . 738

Mutual Aid and Defense

MDAP: Semiannual Report: Message to Con-
gress, Text (Truman); Summary 757

Outlook and Tasks Ahead tor Germany: U.S.

Policies (McCloy over Bavarian Radio) . . . 738

Pacific Ocean Area, U.S. Negotiations (Dulles

before U.N. Assn. of Japan) 726

U.S. -Bolivian Officials Named on Joint Economic

Committee 748

U.S.-Bollvia Study Materials and Development . 748

U.S. To Send Military Supplies for Taiwan De-
fense Exchange of Notes. (Rankin, Yeh) . . 747

North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)

International Agreements for Raw Materials Re-
viewed (Acheson) 752

Presidential Documents

MESSAGES TO CONGRESS: MDAP Report . . 757

Protection of U.S. Nationals and Property

Robert A. Vogeler Released by Hungary Govt.:

Negotiations; U.S. Assiu-ances 723

Publications

Pamphlets on Germany and Youth Released . . 759

State, Department of

Retirement: Bertha S. Rodrlck 758

Strategic Materials

International Arrangements Reviewed (Acheson) 752
U.S.-Bolivla Study Joint Problems 748

Trade

German Monthly Economic Review (Feb. 1951) . 738

Transportation

German Monthly Economic Review (Feb. 1951) . 738
Treaties and Other International Agreements
COLOMBIA: Treaty of Friendship, Commerce,

and Navigation, Signature 746

HUNGARY: Peace Treaty (1947) U.S. Assurances

(Art. 30) in Release of Vogeler 723

JAPAN Peace Treaty: U.S. Action Summarized

(Dulles before U.N. Assn. of Japan) 726

LEND-LEASE (1942) ; Proposal To Submit Settle-
ment With U.S.S.R. to Arbitral Panel .... 744

United Nations

Soviet Techniques for "Peace" (Hlckerson before

Foreign Policy Institute, Milwaukee) .... 731
U.N. Command Operations in Korea, 18th Report

(Mar. 16-31, 1951) 755

U.S. in U.N. (Weekly Summary) 753

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 746, 752

Austin, Warren R 755

Brady, Dr. Frederick J 752

Dulles, John Foster 726, 747

Gamel, Col. Jay F 752

Goldman, Olive Remington 751

Hlckerson, John D 731

McCloy, John J , 736

Rand, George L 751

Ranklln, K. L 747

Rodrlck, Bertha S 758

Truman, Harry S 757, 758

Vargas, Ricardo Martinez 748

Vogeler, Robert A 723

Warren, Fletcher 748

Yeh, George K. C 747

Zllvetl, Pedro Arce 748

Zuleta, Eduardo Angel 746

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTINQ OFFICCi lift

tJne/ ^e/ia^tT^teni/ x)^ tnate/

WHY WE NEED ALLIES • Address hy the President . . 763

DEFENDING THE PEACE FROM SOVIET

THRUSTS • Address by Secretary Acheson « . • . 766

U.N. ACTION ON COLLECTIVE SECURITY: WHAT

IT MEANS TO AMERICANS • by Assistant Secretary
Hickerson •...•• 775

CAN THE U.N. BECOME A COLLECTIVE SECURITY

ORGANIZATION • by Harding F. Bancroft .... 771

For index see back cover

Vol. XXIV, No. 619
May 14, 1951

.SINTENDENT OF DOCJIMO- ;

Me

Vol. XXIV, No. 619 • Publication 4215
May 14, 1951

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U. S. Government Printing Office

Washington 26, D. C.

Price:

62 issues, domestic $7.60 foreign $10.26

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29. 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
Of State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternatioruil agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

WHY WE NEED ALLIES

by President Truman^

THIS conference is being held to consider one of
the most important tasks facing our country. The
lives of many millions of our fellow citizens may
depend on the development of a strong civil de-
fense. The threat of atomic warfare is one which
we must face, no matter how much we dislike it
We can never aiford to forget that the terrible
destruction of cities, and of civilization as we know
it, is a real possibility.

There are two things our country must do in the
face of this awesome and terrible possibility. One
of them is to look to our civil defense. So long
as there is any chance at all that atomic bombs may
fall on our cities, we cannot gamble on being
caught unprepared. And let's not fool ourselves —
there is such a chance. "We must prepare for it.

The other thing we must do is to try to prevent
atomic war from coming. That is what I have
been working for ever since I became President.
That is what our foreign policy is all about. The
foreign policy of the United States is based on an
effort to attain world peace. Every action we have
taken has had this aim.

We are right in the midst of a bi^ debate on
foreign policy. A lot of people are lookin^at this
debate as if it were just a political fight. But the
stakes are a lot more important than the outcome
of an election. The thing that is at stake in this
debate may be atomic war. Our foreign policy is
not a political issue. It is a matter of life and
death. It is a matter of the future of mankind.

These two things — civil defense and foreign
policy — are what I will talk about tonight. As you
see. they are closely tied together. And they are
both concerned with a form of warfare which is
more destructive than anything the world has ever
known before.

Civil Defense Against Atomic Bombs

Our civil-defense problem starts with a few basic
facts. Because there was an atomic explosion
in the Soviet Union in 1949, we must act on the
assumption that they do have atomic bombs. They
have planes that could drop atomic bombs upon

'Made before the Civil Defense Conference at Wash-
ington on May 7 and released to the press by the White
House on the same date. Also printed as Department of
State publication 4218.

May 14, 1951

our cities. No matter how good our air defense
may be, or how big an air force we build, a deter-
mined air attack by the Soviet Union could drop
bombs upon this country. Our air force experts
say planes would get through, however good our
defenses may be.

The purpose of atomic attacks would be to strike
a death blow at our cities; to burn out our centers
of production; and to create panic among our
people. There is no complete protection against
an atomic-bomb attack. But there is a lot we can
do to reduce the number of deaths and injuries
and to check panic.

We must organize ourselves — in every city, fac-
tory, office, and home. Civil defense is a respon-
sibility which begins with the individual, and is
shared with the city, the State, and the Nation.

We have two immediate jobs. One is to teach all
our people how to protect themselves in the event
of enemy attack. The other is to organize and
train millions of volunteers as active members of
the United States Civil Defense Corps.

The question we are putting up to you men and
women at this conference is : how can we do these
jobs as quickly and as efficiently as possible ? We
neecl your help in getting our fellow citizens to
realize that this is a very serious business. So long
as we face the threat of an atomic attack on the
United States, we have got to build a strong civil
defense organization. But even with such an or-
ganization, our losses in an atomic war, if we
should have one, would be terrible. Whole cities
would be casualties. Cleveland or Chicago,
Seattle or New York, or any of our other great
cities might be destroyed. Even with such losses,
frightful as they would be, I think this country
would survive and would win an atomic war. But
even if we win, an atomic war would be a disaster.

Collective Security Through the United Nations

The best defense against atomic bombing is to
prevent the outbreak of another world war and
achieves real peace. We must bend all our energy
to the job of keeping our free way of life, and
to doing it without another war. We can have
peace only if we have justice and fair dealing
among nations. The United Nations is the best
means we have for deciding what is right and
what is wrong between nations. It is a great

763

attempt to make the moral judgment of mankind
effective in international affairs. Nothing is more
important if mankind is to overcome the bar-
barian doctrine that might makes right.

Our best chance of keeping the peace and stay-
ing free is for nations that believe in freedom to
stick together and to build their strength together.
This is what we call collective security. We have
been trying since the last war was over and even
before to build a system of collective security
among all those countries that really believe in the
principles of the United Nations. I think we have
made a lot of progress. I know that some people
have become impatient with our efforts to estab-
lish collective security, because we have not yet
succeeded in attaining world peace. But we are
on the right road.

There are cynics who scorn the United Nations,
who are indifferent to the need for cooperation
among the free peoples. They do not understand
that our best hope for peace is to bind together
the nations that are striving for peace and to in-
crease their strength to stop aggression. The
United Nations is being severely tested today be-
cause of the Korean conflict. The fighting there
is requiring great sacrifices. In a time of crisis,
there is a tendency to look for some easy way out
regardless of the consequences. But we must not
be misled. We must not lose sight of the world
picture and the critical importance of the United
Nations if we are to reach a permanent solution.

Communist Aggression in the Far East

Communist aggression in Korea is part of the
world-wide strategy of the Kremlin to destroy
freedom. It has shown men all over the world
that Communist imperialism may strike anywhere,
anytime. The defense of Korea is part of the
world-wide effort of all the free nations to main-
tain freedom. It has shown free men that if they
stand together, and pool their strength. Commu-
nist aggression cannot succeed. The firm stand
of the United Nations in Korea has checked the
advance of Communist imperialism throughout
Asia. It is using up the military resources of
the Chinese Communists to such an extent that
they are not able to carry out the designs of Com-
munist imperialism against the independence of
other Asian countries. And the people of those
countries who have been resisting Communist
aggression have now been given new hope and
new courage.

The Communist assault in Indochina has been
checked by the free people of Indochina with the
he]]) of the French. In Malaya, the British are
holding firm against Communist guerrilla attacks.
In the Philippines, in Burma, and in other places
in Asia, Communist-led guerrillas are being
blocked.

The fight against aggression in Korea has also
dealt a heavy blow to the Kremlin conspiracy out-
side of Asia. It has brought new hope and cour-

age to free men in Europe, and in the Middle East,
who face the Soviet menace across their frontiers.
The fight against Communist aggression in the
Far East is the fight against Communist aggres-
sion in the West as well.

The struggle in Korea is a long and hard one.
But it can be won — and our policy is designed to
win it.

The Chinese rulers are losing large numbers of
their soldiers. As these losses increase it will be-
come clearer and clearer to them that aggression
does not pay. They can have peace when they
give up their aggression and stop the fighting.

Meanwhile, the strength of all the free nations
is gi'owing. The Soviet plan of world conquest is
becoming more and more impossible to achieve.
If we stick to our guns, and continue to punish the
aggressors, we can end the aggression in Korea
and restore peace.

Foreign Policy and World Peace

We have been urged to take measures which
would spread the fighting in the Far East. We
have been told that this would bring the Korean
conflict to a speedy conclusion ; that it would save
the lives of our troops. In my judgment, this is
not true. I believe we have a better chance of
stopping the aggression in Korea, at a smaller cost
in the lives of our troops and those of our allies,
by following our present course Let me tell you
that I have studied this question for a long time.
It is not a question that can be decided in the light
of Korea alone. It does not affect the Far East
alone. It is not a local question. It affects Korea
and Japan, and the security of our troops in those
places. But it also reaches Europe, and the future
of the North Atlantic Treaty, and the security of
free people there and everywhere else in the world.
It is a decision that affects the future of the United
Nations and the future of the whole world.

I have refused to extend the area of the conflict
in the Far East, under the circumstances which
now prevail, and I am going to tell you exactly
why. I have refused first on military grounds.
The best military advice I have been able to ob-
tain— the best collective military advice in this
country — is that this course of action would not
lead to a quick and easy solution of the Korean
conflict.

On the contrary, it could very well lead to a
much bigger and much longer war. Such a war
would not reduce our casualties in the Far East.
It would increase them enormously. Such a war
would expose our troops to devastating air and
submarine attacks. It would seriously eudMuger
Japan and the Philij^pines. It would unite the
Chinese people behind their Communist rulers.

Furthermore, a deep involvement on our part
in a war in China, whatever the outcome there,
would have critical military consequences in Eu-
rojie. There is nothing that would give the Krem-
lin greater satisfaction tluui to see our resources

764

Department of State Bulletin

committed to an all-out struggle in Asia, leaving
Europe exposed to the Soviet armies.

These are some of the military dangers.

Moreover, there are other dangers. The Krem-
lin is trying, and has been trying for a long time,
to drive a wedge between us and the other free
nations. It wants to see us isolated. It wants to
see us distrusted. It wants to see us feared and
hated by our allies. Our allies agi-ee with us in
the course we are following. They do not believe
that we should take the initiative to widen the
conflict in the Far East. If the United States
were to widen the conflict, we might well have to
go it alone.

If we go it alone in Asia, we may destroy the
unity of the free nations against aggression. Our
European allies are nearer to Russia than we are.
They are in far greater danger. If we act without
regard to the danger that faces them, they may
act witliout regard to the dangers that we face.
Going it alone brought the world to the disaster
of World AVar II. We cannot go it alone in Asia
and go it in company in Europe. The whole idea
of going it alone is the opposite of everything we
have stood for and worked for since World War II.
In this way, <roing it alone in Asia might wreck
the United Nations, The North Atlantic Treaty,
and the whole system of collective security we are
helping to set up.

That would be a tremendous Soviet victory. We
do not intend to fall into that trap. I do not pro-
pose to strip this country of its allies in the face of
the Soviet danger. The path of collective security
is our only sure defense against the dangers that
threaten us. Moreover, it is the path to jieace in
Korea, to peace in the world.

We are determined to do our utmost to limit the
war in Korea. We will not take any action which
might place upon us the responsibility for initiat-
ing a general war. But if the aggressor takes
further action which threatens the security of the
United Nations forces in Korea, we will counter
that action.

I repeat : I am convinced that the course we are
now following in Korea is achieving the most for
peace — and at the least cost in Amei'ican lives. All
of us wish that no Americans had to fight and die.
But by fighting on a limited scale now, we may
be able to prevent a third world war later on.

Eemember this. If we do have another world
war, it will be an atomic war. We could expect
many atomic bombs to be dropped on American
cities. And a single one of them could cause many
times more casualties than we have suffered in all
the fighting in Korea. I do not want to be respon-
sible for bringing that about.

Tension Behind the Iron Curtain

Some people do not understand how the free
world can ever win this long struggle, without
fighting a third world war. These people overlook
the inner weaknesses of the Soviet dictatorship.

They forget that the free world is stronger —
stronger in its determination, stronger in its stay-
ing power, stronger in its human resources — than
any system of slavery.

The Kremlin's system of terror, which appears
to be its main strength, is one of its gi'eatest weak-
nesses. Dictatorships are based on fear. They
cannot give their people happiness and peace.
They have nothing to oflPer except aggression and
slavery.

As the aggressive tactics of the Kremlin are
checked by the collective defenses of the free
world, the futility of the whole Communist pro-
gram is becoming more and more apparent to the
people under Soviet control. We can already see
this pi'ocess at work. In China, the failure of
the Korean adventure is weakening the hold of
the Communist government. Wholesale arrests
and executions are taking place. In the same
way, the pressure of the police state is increasing
in the other satellite countries. Yugoslavia has
thrown off the Kremlin yoke. Every day refugees
flee across the border from the Iron Curtain coun-
tries into the free countries of Europe.

There are growing signs of internal tension and
unrest behind the Iron Curtain.

Our Goal of Peace

We must remember that the peoples under the
Soviet rule of terror are not only our friends, but
our silent allies. They are the victims of a ter-
rible tyranny. We do not hate them. We have
had friendly relations with them in the past; we
can have such friendship again.

As the free nations build their strength and
unity, this fact will compel a change in the Soviet
drive for power and conquest. The Soviet rulers
are faced with the growing strength of the free
world, the increasing cost of aggression, and the
increasing difficulty of driving their people to
greater and greater hardships. They will be
forced by these pressures from within and without
to give up aggression. It will then be possible
to make progress with a program for international
control and reduction of armaments and for the
peaceful settlement of disputes.

Our programs of economic aid and technical
assistance, and our campaign of truth, not only
strengthen the free peoples; they weaken the dic-
tatorships. They remind the victims of tyranny
that a better world lies outside their prison. They
build up the hope of freedom everywhere.

Everything we do to strengthen the free world;
every dollar we spend for assistance to other free
nations ; every effort we make to resist aggression
in Korea, and around the world, brings closer the
day of genuine peace.

We are not engaged in a struggle without end.
We are engaged in a struggle which has the
definite goal of peace. Peace under law is the
victory we seek. To achieve this goal we must

(Continued on page 779)

May 14, J95I

765

Defending the Peace From Soviet Thrusts

Address hy Secretary Acheson^

The common interest around which your organ-
ization is built is one wliich goes right to the heart
of what we are trying to achieve in the world
through our foreign policy.

Your organization is one of the major expres-
sions of America's great productive power, and,
though there may be differences of opinion about
many things, I think all of us will agree that this
great productive power of ours is one of the key
factors, and perhaps the most important single
factor, on which the peace of the world today
depends.

Although we are blessed with the greatest pro-
ductive capacity in all the world, we dare not
forget that there are other important concentra-
tions of industrial production in the world. For-
tunately, most of the other important concentra-
tions are in the hands of those who share our
basic purposes. This means that a preponderance
of industrial power is in the hands of nations who
are trying to build, rather than destroy, interna-
tional relationships based on the principles of the
United Nations.

Now, your Government is asking you to devote
a substantial share, and an increasing share, of
this great productive capacity to turning out items
that contribute to the defensive strength of this
and other free nations.

All of us wish that it were not necessary to do
this. We would all much rather be turning out
things that are creative and constructive, things
that make life better for people, rather than
weapons of war.

And, we all wish that we could devote a larger
portion of our energies to our great constructive
programs to assist other free peoples to move
toward better standards of living. This is the
kind of thing we Americans traditionally prefer
to do.

But instead, we are called upon to devote some

' Made before U. S. Chnmbcr of Commerce at Wash-
ington on Apr. 30 and released to the press on the same
date.

15 to 20 percent of our national output to the
urgent necessities of military defense.

What I would like to discuss with you today
is why this has become necessary and what it is
this nation is seeking to do with this strength you
are helping to build.

Menace of Soviet Thrusts

In the 61/2 years that have passed since the end
of the war, the men who control the destinies of
the Soviet Union have continued to pi'ess forward
not only with the traditional territorial aspira-
tions of Old Russia but also with the revolution-
ary aims for world rule of the Bolshevik con-
spiracy.

This is the threat which i-equires the rest of
the world to build defensive strength.

By a combination of a ruthless control system
over their own people and false promises to the
discontented in many other lands, the men who
run this vast conspiracy have been reaching out
for more power. And, what is most important
for us to understand is that they are reaching
out for those critical centers of power which will
give them leverage over all the rest.

The object of the Soviet reach for power in this
period is to bring within the Soviet sphere of
control two critical areas. One of these contains
the great industrial capacity of Europe. The
other is Asia with its resources, including the
present and, more important, the potential in-
dustrial capacity of Japan.

With these areas under their control, the Soviet
rulers believe that they could dominate the world.
They would not only be in a strong position in
the event of war but what also is just as impor-
tant, they would be in a strong po.sition to im-
pose their will on the other parts of the world
without having to fire a shot.

It is immediately clear tliat this would be a
very dangerous condition for us and for all free
people.

Now, even if we were to leave aside all the con-

766

Department of Stale BuUetin

siderations of our friendship and concern for the
people who would be enslaved in this expansion
of Soviet power and were to take the narrowest
view of our own national security, we would still
be faced with that fact that these two thrusts by
the Soviet power system would not be compatible
with our national security. It is, therefore, the
essential task of our defense program in the
present period to prevent the Soviet system from
adding the resources and the productive concen-
trations in Western Europe and in Asia to its
own war-making machine. This is not all that
our defense program has to do, but it is, in broad
strategic terms, the major task now required of it.
Let us now take a closer look at wnat we are
doing, with the strength which you are helping
to build, to meet these two major Soviet thrusts in
Europe and in Asia.

Meeting the Thrust in Europe

One arm of our security effort is seeking to meet
the Soviet thrust against Europe.

I am not going to review with you here all the
details of the progress we are making under the
North Atlantic Treaty Organization, and the set-
ting up of General Eisenhower's headquarters and
staff, and the operation of our military and eco-
nomic aid program, and the steps which show the
growing cohesion and strength of the European
nations. I know that these are familiar to you
and that your organization has been following
these pi'ograms closely.

Wliat I do want to do is to step back and look
at these efforts in the large, to see this European
effort in great block poster colors, so that we can
come away with a feeling for the whole pattern
of what it is we are trying to do there.

In the large, the people of Europe, with our
help, are trying to harness their growing economic
strength to the urgent need for an effective de-
fense system, so that they and their resources and
their skills and their industrial plants will not,
either through attack or through subversion, fall
into the hands of the Soviet rulers.

Germany, as I indicated a moment ago, occu-
pies a place of particular significance in this effort,
because Soviet control over the Ruhr would put
the Soviet rulers in a strong position to reach out
for the rest of Europe.

The Soviet rulers have long understood this
simple strategic fact.

The whole point of the Soviet tactics in the
talks among the deputy Foreign Ministers at
Paris has been to retard, and if possible to pre-
vent, the strengthening of the Western European
defense system. To do this, they have been trying
to drive a wedge between the Allies by portraying
themselves as the put-upon lovers of peace and by
characterizing our defense measures as aggressive.
In particular, they have been seeking to prevent
the participation of Western Germany in the
Western European defense system.

The increased shrillness of the Soviet represen-
tative in the Paris talks, Mr. Gromyko, is in a
sense the measure of the progress of our defensive
effort.

If we weren't getting anywhere with the Euro-
pean defense program, the Soviet representatives
wouldn't be making a great noise about it. But
as we make progress, as we eliminate the possi-
bilities for easy conquest, we must be prepared
for these propaganda blasts, for a war of nerves,
for fake peace offensives.

It is one of the inescapable features of this sit-
uation that, as we eliminate the weaknesses which
invite aggression, the tensions and the dangers
of the immediate period may increase.

Since the only alternative to this course would
be to remain at a disadvantage and ultimately lose
all, we have no choice but to plug ahead, build-
ing our combined strength as steadily and as
rapidly as we can. That is the only way to work
our way through this period of danger.

We have repeatedly said — and our record in
these Paris discussions and on many previous
occasions makes it clear that we mean what we
say — that we are ready to negotiate in good faith
now or at any time. But until we are met with
equal good faith, and so long as this threat hangs
over us, we cannot relax our efforts to build our
common strength.

One advantage that the people of Europe start
with in building this defensive strength is the
remarkable rate of economic recovery they have
achieved from the destruction of the war. Great
credit is due the people of Europe for this achieve-
ment. It does not in any way diminish from the
luster of their accomplishment for us to ac-
knowledge the part our aid program has played
in that recovery.

Our economic aid program, which was carried
forward, appropriately under the name of the
Marshall Plan, has been a tremendous success.
Make no mistake about that. The evidence of
Europe's mounting productive output is not only
a testimony to our enlightened and unprecedented
effort to assist the people of Europe in rebuilding
their war-shattered economy but it is also, even
from a narrow interpretation of our own self-
interest, a good return on our investment in bol-
stering our national security.

The urgent problem that remains is to translate
an adequate part of this economic potential into
the tanks and the planes and the guns needed for
defense.

A good start has been made in this direction.
But the Soviet military preparations have been
going on steadily since the war, and Soviet sat-
ellite forces are being built up rapidly, to add to
the Soviet capability for intimidation and attack.

The best military minds of this country and of
our European allies have been working to devise
defense plans and create a defense program which
will be adequate to the threat.

May 14, J95I

767

It is our goal to build a defense system which
will inspire confidence among the people of Europe
that they can prevent their homelands from being
overrun. It is also our goal to attain a level of
defense which will, together with our power, be
sufficient to discourage the appetite for aggression
altogether.

It will take time and great effort on the part
of all of us to bring this European defense system
to a level which approaches these necessary goals.

I would like to say a word here on the cost of
our assistance to our allies in the North Atlantic
Treaty Organization, in answer to suggestions I
have heard that this aid is an extravagance which
should be discontinued.

Purely in terms of the hard-headed question:
How much security will a dollar buy? It is
evident that the aid we are furnishing our allies
so multiplies our common security that it is in
fact an economical use of resources.

Our aid is not only an addition to the billions
of dollars now in the military budgets of the
European countries — but it is often a multiplying
factor. To take one example, 55 thousand dollars
worth of copper and zinc supplied by us made
possible the manufacture of 3.6 million dollar's
worth of antitank mines in Britain.

Or, in another case, 300 thousand dollars worth
of machine tools made it possible for France to
produce almost 14 million dollars worth of air
frames.

Reduced to its simplest terms, our aid to West-
ern Europe produces more security per dollar,
faster, than we could possibly achieve ourselves.
And, it is security which is vital both to us and
to our European allies.

We are well aware that the rapid fulfillment
of our common defense program is cei'tain to af-
fect the civilian life, not only of our own people
but of all the people with whom we are allied.

Wherever careful planning and cooperation can
moderate or equalize these burdens, we are en-
deavoring to bring this about.

This is all part of the complex but essential
process by wliich the combined defense system is
now taking shape.

Our progress up to this point has been sufficient,
I believe, to justify our confidence that, with time
and with effort, we can build the strength of this
European defense system sufficiently to prevent
the Soviet thrust in this direction from achieving
its aim. To do so is necessary to peace and to
our security.

The Pattern in Asia

Now, let us look at the other major Soviet thrust
and at what we are doing about it.

The puri)osc of (his thrust is to put the Soviet
empire in a position to dominate all Asia, includ-
ing control over Jai)an, with its iilready large
production and its larger potentialities, with its
skilled population and its strategic position. By

768

linking the production of Japan to the manpower
of China and the resources of Asia, the Soviet
rulers would be in a strong position to redouble
their pressure on the rest of the world.

To undei'stand this purpose helps to make clear
the meaning of the attack on Korea.

This attack, carried forward by satellite troops,
was designed in the first instance to extend Com-
munist control over the entire Koi'ean peninsula.

To achieve this, they were willing to fiout the
authority of the United Nations, and they sought,
in so doing, to weaken the political and moral po-
sition of the United Nations and of all the nations
that are standing in the way of the Soviet
ambitions.

Another purpose of this attack, which has made
itself apparent, is to divert our attention from
Europe by occupying us as fully as possible in
Asia before our strength-in-being has been fur-
ther built up.

How are we dealing with this Soviet strategy
for Asia? Again here, as in our discussion of
the thrust against Europe, I will not go into great
detail about the steps we are taking. These de-
tails are familiar to you, and what I want to try
to bring out is the pattern of our efforts.

Tlie objective of these efforts is to thwart the
Soviet attempt to dominate Asia. It is our pur-
pose to help the people of Asia protect their free-
dom and independence.

One of the major lines of effort in this program
is the writing of a peace treaty for Japan. The
careful and able work of Ambassador John Foster
Dulles has laid the basis for a Japanese peace
treaty which will enable Japan to become an equal,
peaceful, and self-sustaining member of the world
community. It will also put the people of Japan
in the best position to contribute to the inde-
pence of their country, which, as we have seen,
is important to our security as well as to theirs.

The people of Japan have earned our confidence
by tlieir steady and responsible course during
these difficult months since the attack was launched
against Korea, and we look forward to the estab-
lishment of permanent bonds of friendship be-
tween Japan and all other free nations.

In order that a power vacuum will not be
created by a peace settlement with Japan, we are
making cooperative arrangements, on the basis
of mutual agreement, to insure the independence
and the continued security of Japan.

This agreement is to be one of a series recently
announced by the President,- which are intended
as initial steps toward building the basis for secu-
rity in the Pacific.

Conditions in the Pacific area are substantially
different from those which prevail in Europe, and
the establishment of security arrangements sim-
ilar to those in the North Atlantic area are not
now feasible. We wish to help the peoples of the
Pacific area in their efforts in any way we can,

= Bulletin of Apr. 30, 1951, p. 099.

Department of State Bulletin

and the present and proposed security arrange-
ments between ourselves and Japan and with the
Phihppines, Australia and New Zealand, to which
the President referred, will, we hope, further
strengthen the structure of peace in the Pacific.

Our economic and military aid programs are
another essential part of this total effort to main-
tain peace in the Far East.

By demonstrating our friendship for the peoples
of Asia and by helping them to achieve and pro-
tect their freedom and to make progress against
the poverty and misery which oppi'esses them, we
are, at the same time, helping to throw up a bul-
wark against the Soviet imperialist design, and
we thereby strengthen our own security.

Our friendship for the people of China, who
are now suffering the tragedy of life behind the
iron curtain, has not diminished. The structure
of peace which we and our allies are building will
never be complete until all the peoples who are
now under the domination of the Kremlin are
able to participate freely and independently.

The Soviets are constantly probing for points
throughout Asia at which penetration may be
possible. Efforts to penetrate by economic and
political means of subvei-sion have now been sup-
plemented by the use of armed invasion and war.

Our military and economic aid programs have
been adapted to meet the further threat posed by
this Communist use of force.

Supplementing the important aid programs
which we had been developing in the Far East,
additional military aid has been directed to those
areas especially threatened by this military
development.

This includes additional aid to Formosa, the
Philippines, and Indochina. As the President de-
clared following the Communist attack on Korea,
the occupation of Formosa by Communist forces
in these circumstances would be a direct threat
to the security of the Pacific area and to United
States forces in that area. The Seventh Fleet
was ordered then to prevent any attack on For-
mosa. To supplement the defense of Formosa
and insure that Formosa will not fall into hostile
hands, we are providing increased military aid.^

The aid programs in the Far East meet not only
such immediate security requirements as these but
also give powerful support to our national security
interest by helping the people of Asia lay the
basis for stable and developing societies. It is
; important for us to appreciate that our humani-
/ tarian instincts and our own national security
interests are both served by these programs.

The Test of Strength in Korea

Now, we come to the most direct military aspect
of our efforts to deal with the Soviet thrust in
Asia. This relates to what we and the other mem-
bers of the United Nations are doing to stop the
aggression in Korea.

' Bulletin of May 7, 1951, p. 747.
May 14, 1951

"VVliat I have already said should make it clear
why it is important to our security that this attack
in Korea be stopped in its tracks. We have seen
that this attack is part of a design to gain control
over all Asia. This attack is also intended to
weaken the position of the United Nations, the
United States, and others who stand in the way of
Soviet ambitions.

There are several other points which have
emerged from our survey, and which bear on this
conflict in Korea. One is that this is not the only
Soviet thrust we must bear in mind. The Soviets
are using satellite troops for this aggression, keep-
ing their own forces in reserve. It would further
their strategy if we were to expend our major
strength against the forces and the territory of
their satellites or if we were to neglect other vital
interests in meeting this thrust.

We have also seen that we need time to push
ahead with our program of building strength, and
we need to build that strength together with our
allies.

These are factors which cannot be ignored in
thinking about what it is we are doing in Korea.

Our objectives in Korea are very clear, and
there should be no misunderstanding about them.

In the simplest terms, we are trying to accom-
plish three things in Korea :

1. We are trying to stop this act of aggression.

2. We are trying to keep this conflict from
spreading, to the extent that it is in our power to
do so.

3. We are trying to restore peace and security to
the area.

These have been our purposes from the begin-
ning, and these have been the agi-eed purposes of
the United Nations. The United Nations has
never contemplated the use of force to accomplish
its political objective in Korea, which is the estab-
lishment of a unified, independent, and democratic
country.

A great deal has already been accomplished by
the steadiness with which we have held to these
purposes, and above all by the heroic devotion of
our men in Korea and their fellow soldiers from
other countries. We should not, in the course of
the present debate, lose sight of these accomplish-
ments :

First, this act of aggression has not succeeded
according to the Soviet plan, and whatever other
actions were planned have been interfered with;

Second, the defense against this aggression has
served to arouse free men all over the world and
has stimulated them to speed up their efforts to
build a strong defense system;

Third, new vitality has pulsed through the
whole idea of collective security against aggres-
sion;

And fourth, this device of satellite aggression
has been thoroughly exposed, and its usefulness
in other situations has been reduced.

We knew last June, and we know today, that it

769

■was right and necessary to stand firm against
this attack. If we had not, the whole spirit of
resistance against the Soviet grab for power would
have been weakened, perhaps fatally.

Now, people are saying : this may be true, but
how can the conflict in Korea be brought to an
end ?

There are two ways in which this situation in
Korea may develop.

One is that the fighting may spread despite our
efforts to limit it. Further acts of the aggressors
could touch off world war. If this happens, the
responsibility for it will rest squarely on the Krem-
lin and its agents in Peiping.

The other is that the fighting may be brought
to an end in Korea. The best way to do this is
for us to continue firm in our determination to
meet and repel the enemy until it becomes clear to
him that his aggression cannot pay. There must
be an end to the fighting, there must be concrete
measures against the renewal of the attack, and
there must be an abandonment by the enemy of
his attempt to conquer the Republic of Korea.

If we remain firm and steady on the course we
are following in Korea, if we don't flinch or get
rattled, we shall have the best chance of bringing
this action to a successful conclusion.

The other day at Paris, Mr. Gromyko was play-
ing back to us some of the arguments he has
been overhearing from this side of the Atlantic
about Korea. He raised the question whether or
not we are going to hold to our course in Korea
with firm determination.

Well, we are. But his intervention serves to
remind us that, in thinking about this action in
Korea, we have to keep always in mind the total
world picture, and the whole threat we face.

The ingredients of peace in the world must in-
clude: the resoluteness with which we hold to
our course in Korea; the speed with which we
build up our strength elsewhere in the world; the
closeness of our common defense arrangements
with our allies.

As I said at the outset, the strength and the
power you are helping to build are essential to
our security and to world peace. But equally im-
portant is the strength of character and the steadi-
ness of the American people.

To win through to a period of peace in the world
will require wisdom and courage and common
sense from all of us.

Removing Prohibition Against
Travel in Hungary

[Released to the press on May 1 ]

The Department of State has instructed all
American diplomatic and consular officers abroad
and the passport agents in the United States that

passports may now be issued, renewed, extended,
and amended without invalidation for travel to
Hungary. The American diplomatic and consu-
lar officers and the passport agents are also being
instructed that passports which come into their
hands for any purpose and which bear the restric-
tion against travel in Hungai-y should be amended
by deleting the restriction. This new procedure
does away with the instructions of December 20,
1949, of the Department of State, under which
all passports other than those issued on official
business or to bona fide American correspondents
were required to bear an endorsement invalidating
them against use in Hungary.

Passports will be issued, renewed, extended, and
amended for travel to Hungary, but the Passport
Division, when granting such services, will furnish
the applicants with a statement that, private
American citizens desiring to travel in Hungary
will, no doubt, desire to inform themselves con-
cerning conditions in that country by consulting
the Department of State or American missions
abroad.

Robert Vogeier Expresses Gratitude |
to the President and the Secretary

[Released to the press May J]
Message to President Trmnan

I was not aware until reaching Vienna of the
great crisis which was forced upon the United
States and which occurred during my imprison-
ment. It is amazing to me that with all your
difficulties and troubles time was found to com-
plete so successfully negotiations for my libera-
tion. This is an example of the great solicitude
our country has for every one of its humblest
citizens. Pending my return to the United States,
I should appreciate your thanking the American
people in my name for their confidence and con-
tinuing interest in my welfare.

Message to Secretary AcTieson

I have just learned of the personal interest you
took in my release and the wonderful considera-
tion you have shown to my wife and champion,
and I thank you for all the happiness you have
brouglit to me and my family in making this re-
union possible. From all of the information I
have received since my liberation, I cannot but ad-
mire the constant intense effort made by the State
Department throughout this long period of my
imprisonment. Please convey this expression of
my gratitude to all of the personnel concerned for
their untiring interest.

770

Deparfmenf of Slate Bullelin

CAN THE U.N. BECOME A COLLECTIVE SECURITY ORGANIZATION?

by Harding F. Bancroft

Deputy V. S. Representative on Collective Measures Committee *

The adoption by the General Assembly last fall
of the resolution, Uniting for Peace, represents a
further effort by the world community to organize
itself for collective action to deter or suppress
aggression.^ This paper will analyze how the
process of the United Nations under the uniting-
for-peace resolution carries out the purposes of
the Charter and will consider the political and
legal implications of that program.

The pragmatic adaption of the Charter in the
security field was started sooner than could be
anticipated because of the aggression in Korea on
June 25, 1950. The action of the Security Coun-
cil in this first instance of United Nations collec-
tive measures and its first use of military force to
meet an act of aggression was done by recommen-
dation rather than by order. To this extent, the
United Nations action in Korea broke the ground
for an alternate route around the impasse which
had been created by the failure to reach agree-
ment on the forces to be available to the United
Nations under article 43. In Korea, therefore,
improvising was necessary. No forward plan-
ning— no methods, no procedures, no apparatus —
had been established for the creation of a United
Nations command and for the integration of forces
and other contributions from member states into
that command.

The method used in the Korean action is, never-
theless, clearly directed toward the same destina-
tion as the exact scheme of the Charter — namely,
a United Nations organized and equipped to deter

' Based on a paper read before the American Society of
International Law on Apr. 27, at Washington.
" Btjlletin of Nov. 20, 1950, p. 823.

or to repel the attack of an aggressor state. In
Korea, there is now in being a United Nations
force acting in common cause in furtherance of
paragraph 1, article 1 of chapter I of the Charter
and actually taking "effective collective meas-
ures . . . for the suppression of acts of aggres-
sion".

The problem, therefore, that stood out in the
summer of 1950 was how to ready the United Na-
tions for similar action in the future, within the
framework of the Charter and within the limita-
tions of political realities. The miiting-for-peace
resolution, that the Assembly adopted by 52
affirmative votes, sought to pave the way for the
answer to that problem.

The principal features of the uniting- for-peace
resolution are:

1. The provision that the General Assembly
can meet on 24 hours' notice if the Security Coun-
cil is prevented by the veto from exercising its
primary responsibility for international peace and
security.

2. The provision that in such case the General
Assembly may make recommendations to mem-
ber states for collective measures including, in the
case of a breach of the peace or act of aggression,
the use of armed force.

3. The provision recommending that each mem-
ber state maintain within its national armed forces
elements so trained, organized, and equipped that
they could promptly be made available for service
as United Nations units on the recommendation of
the Security Council or the General Assembly.

4. The establisliment of the Peace Observation
Commission to observe and report in any area
where international tension exists.

May 14, 1957

771

5. The creations of the Collective Measures
Committee to study and report on methods to
strengthen peace and security in accordance with
the Claarter.

In these provisions are the essential elements of
a collective security system: — the means of de-
termining aggression, an organism to put collective
measures into operations, military force in read-
iness to carry out those measures, and some ap-
paratus to perfect the methods for coordinating
collective action.

Indeed, these elements are the same as those in
the Charter. Only in terms of process is there a
permissive rerouting of its precise scheme in re-
spect to the forum available for initiating the
action, the differing procedures if the alternative
forum is used, and the nature of the commitment
undertaken by member states.

The pattern of the uniting- for-peace resolution
is not a deviation from the intent of the Charter.
The Security Council can and normally would be
used to initiate enforcement or preventive action.
Furthermore, contributions from member states
to the collective effort, whether of armed force or
otherwise, would presiunably be the same whether
called into service by the Security Council or by
the General Assembly.

Nothing in the uniting-for-peace program,
therefore, distorts the original concepts or pur-
poses of the Charter, but, on the contrary, the de-
sign is to carry forward those concepts and
purposes. That, after all, is the best test of
constitutionality. Any progress that the Collec-
tive Measures Committee may make, any proced-
ures that it formulates, any machinery that it
creates, or the planning that it does is in further-
ance of the Charter's design and can, at a moment's

In the Charter of the United Nations, we have
one of the greatest i)eace pacts in history. AH of
the large powers including the Soviet Union have
subscribed to that pact. It applies In Us peace-
protecting clauses to all nations whether they are
members or not. If the people of the world are
sufficiently informed and clear about the essentials
of the Charter, no nation can escape its responsibili-
ties or slip out from under its obligations even by
withdrawing from the organization. Not even a
veto in the Security Council excuses any member
from joining in carrying out collective measures.
It all depends upon the will of the peoples and gov-
ernments to support a real system of collective
security, as 53 of them did on June 25, 1950.

Ambassador Warren R. Austin

April 1, 1951

772

notice, be utilized imder the exact scheme of the
Charter with the role of the Security Council
maintained.

Politically, it cannot be validly argued that the
establishment of a system of collective security in
furtherance of the uniting-for-peace resolution is
an anti-U.S.S.R. alliance. It is an attempt to
make the United Nations work in the collective
security field. If the U.S.S.R. wishes to "rejoin"
the United Nations and to cooperate in these ef-
forts, then, the reason or occasion for using the
General Assembly for collective action vanishes.

Use of the General Assembly

The first constitutional question that is raised
in analyzing the uniting-for-peace resolution is
the use of the General Assembly in place of the
Security Council.

This question has been frequently debated in
detail. Under article 24 of the Charter, the Se-
cui'ity Council was given primary responsibility
for the maintenance of international peace and
security. But it was not given complete and ex-
clusive responsibility.

The General Assembly's authority to recom-
mend collective measures has its source in article
10 of the Charter which authorizes the Assembly
to discuss any question within the scope of the
Charter and to make recommendations to member
states. The legislative history of this provision
makes it unquestionably clear that this language
meant exactly what is said. The big powers who
held the veto made this concession to the other 45
nations at San Francisco who insisted that the
Assembly have this latent power. The only limi-
tation lies in article 12, namely, that the General
Assembly may not make recommendations in re-
spect to a dispute or situation when the Security
Council is dealing with that dispute or situation.
- The argument has been advanced, however, that
paragraph 2 of article 11 of the Charter deprives
the General Assembly of the authority to make
recommendations for collective measures. That
paragraph provides that any question on which
the Assembly may wish to make recommendations
on which action is necessary shall be referred to
the Security Council by the General Assembly
either before or after discussion. Although the
meaning of the word "action" may be subject to
some doubt, it would appear from tlie context that
it refei-s to orders or binding enforcement deci-
sions of the Security Council under chapter VII

DeparlmenI of State Bulletin

of the Charter rather than to recommendations.
Whatever its meaning, under tlie uniting-for-
peace resolution, the Assembly would not be en-
croaching upon the autliority of tlie Security
Council, only filling a vacuum left by the Council's
nonaction. Since the only reason for the As-
sembly to act would be in cases where the Security
Council had had the opportunity to take action
and had failed to do so. In these circumstances,
therefore, to construe article 11, paragraph 2, in
such a way as to i-estrict the General Assembly's
right to act would be to come out with a completely
circular and nonsensical result.

Voting

If the forum of the General Assembly, rather
than the Security Council, is used to put in train
collective measures to maintain the peace, the proc-
ess of decision is naturally different. In the Se-
curity Council, there is the veto. In the Assembly,
there is none. All that is required in the Genei'al
Assembly in order to make a recommendation to
member states, with the moral force and authority
of the United Nations behind it, is a two-thii"ds
Assembly vote. The right of veto was more than
a protection to the permanent members of the Se-
curity Council. It was also regarded as a safe-

In emphasizing the idea of collective measures, I
do not want to neglect what I have always regarded
as the most important function of the United Na-
tions— namely, the peaceful settlement of disputes.
We are going to continue to have disputes long
after the last imperialist power gives up ambition
to rule the world by force. We have dealt with
quite a few disputes between nations since 1945 and
have a good record of preventing or stopping armed
clashes. In each case our success was based upon
the willingness of the parties to bring their dispute
to the United Nations.

The provisions for peaceful settlement to be found
in Chapter VI of the Charter will be used with
greater certainty if aggression is made hopeless by
a collective security system. As in the case of
individuals, the police tend to drive the disputants
to the court to settle their differences rather than
to a dueling field.

We have learned a great deal In Korea about
what we require to make a really broad United
Nations defense possible. In the Collective Meas-
ures Committee, established by the last General
Assembly, the plans are being drawn up to produce
peace forces of many parts which can form a
united front. This concerns problems such as ad-
vance training, equipping of special units, over-
coming language barriers, providing in advance for
transport, arranging for professional military direc-
tion, and others.

Ambassador Warren R, Austin

April 1, 1951

guard by the smaller states who knew that, because
the veto existed, they would never have to comply
with Security Council decisions unless all five
permanent members agreed to the course of action.

It may be asked whether the use of the vetoless
General Assembly in this field is of real signifi-
cance in terms of political and practical realities?

If the veto was in the nature of an escape hatch
to the majority of the United Nations members in
the event of a falling-out between the gi-eat powers,
as no doubt many members thought of it, the hatch
has not been battened down by the use of the
General Assembly. In the first place, an As-
sembly resolution is not a binding decision but
merely a recommendation to be complied with or
not in accordance with each members' honest
judgment of his obligations as a signatory of the
Charter. Moreover, because a two-thirds vote
would be necessary in the General Assembly to
institute collective measures, they could be blocked
by one-third plus one of the total membership.
Both these factors constitute practical and realis-
tic protection to a member state from becoming
involved itself in United Nations action which it
believes to be undesirable, ineffective, or unwise.
They afford no protection, however, to an aggres-
sor who cannot stop the collective action of an
angry and determined two-thirds majority.

Nor is the distinction between the decisions of
the Security Council and the recommendations of
the General Assembly a fundamental one in prac-
tical application. Even Security Council de-
cisions have no process for judicial execution
which in the present state of organized inter-
national society can compel compliance. The
commitment under the Charter to carry out de-
cisions of the Security Council is not the source
of collective strength. Rather, it lies in the in-
dividual and collective determination to maintain
freedom and to preserve a way of life — a willing-
ness to act together in a common cause.

Undertakings To Provide Armed Forces

Under article 43 of the Charter, all members
of the United Nations undertook to make avail-
able to the Security Council on its call the armed
forces necessary for the purpose of maintaining
international peace and security. Special agree-
ments governing the number and types of forces,
their degree of readiness and general location, as
well as other types of assistance and facilities,
including rights of passage, were to be negotiated

fAoY 14, 1951

773

and concluded between the Security Council and
individual members. Plans for the application
of armed force were to be made by the Security
Council with the assistance of the Military Staff
Committee.

What are the basic differences between the unit-
ing-for-peace proposals and the unfulfilled Char-
ter provisions for the use of armed force ?

In the first place, the uniting-for-peace resolu-
tion makes no provision for special agreements but
places reliance on a recommendation that the mem-
bers maintain elements within their national forces
available for prompt United Nations service.
Both under article 43 and the uniting-for-peace
resolution, members' contingents are to be drawn
from the national armed forces of member states.

The basic difference, therefore, lies in the fact
that the article 43 forces were to be deposited, as
it were, in a bank to be drawn out by appropriate
decisions from the Security Council. But, again,
it must be questioned exactly how negotiable such
a Security Comicil decision would be if a member
state for reasons of its own did not wish to employ
its own force. A General Assembly recommenda-
tion has no mandatory effect on a member state
reluctant to use its forces. It must be remembered,
however, that a General Assembly reconunenda-
tion has behind it two-thirds of the membership
of the United Nations, and we may assume some
relation exists between the voting position of a
member state and its action position when collec-
tive measures are called for.

The third basic distinction lies in the United
Nations' capabilities for planning under the two
schemes. If, under the scheme of the Charter, all
the special agreements were to be negotiated, con-
cluded, and ratified, the United Nations would
know with certainty the total over-all strength of
the forces, assistance, and facilities that could be
called into use from every member state.

Under the uniting-for-peace resolution, it will
not be possible to know with similar exactitude the
total available strength. The resolution attempts
to make some headway in this direction by re-
questing member states to inform the Collective
Measures Committee promptly of the steps taken
in complying with the recommendation that ele-
ments within its armed forces for United Na-
tions use be maintained. Thus, the Collective
Measures Committee can, by collating the re-
sponses of member states, make rough estimates of
the force at hand. The possibility of real prog-

In the United Nations, we are laying the founda-
tions for a security system, which will put an end
to the war method in international relations. Those
wlio may be called upon to make sacrifices of life
and limb in support of this system are not fighting
for the victory of a side in a conflict but for the
victory of mankind in its struggle against war
itself.

The principles of the collective security system
are easy to state and to comprehend. But the task
of constructing it through voluntary cooperation of
independent countries takes infinite patience and
goodwill. Many complex problems are involved.

A collective security system is a shield of peace,
for it confronts an aggressor with the combined
forces and resources of the entire world. Ac-
cordingly, the victim of an aggressor Is not just
a particular nation over whose borders troops may
march. It is all the independent nations prepared
in advance to defend themselves by defending the
immediate victim. Mutual aid and self-help goes
into action regardless who the initiator of the as-
sault may be or what his politics or mission. By
the principles of collective security, we must be
prepared to put down the act of aggression. This
act shall not prevail. The peace-loving majority
have it within their spiritual strength and their
economic and military power to enforce that doc-
trine.

Ambassador Warren R. Austin

April 1, 1951

ress, however, lies not in computations of prospec-
tive contributions but in the ability to devise
methods and procedures and techniques of
coordination, so that the national action taken by
the member states in response to an Assembly rec-
ommendation will have maximiun operative
effectiveness.

The process of girding the loins of the United
Nations is not a short or easy one. It is, however,
susceptible of progressive development. The
United Nations may never be perfected to meet an
idealist's goal, but, if sufficient progress is made,
it may determine whether a potential aggressor
will be willing to face the consequences of his act.

From the point of view of our own American
policy, in the most selfish sense, the creation and
development of a universal security system in the
United Nations is to be our best interests. It is
not merely an idealistic concept conceived and
promoted by those who maintain no relations with
reality. On the contrary, recognition is given to
the fact that, in collective action, we multiply our
defensive capability.

In short, the building up of our own strength
and the building up of the strength of the United
Nations is one and the same thing pointing in the
same direction : to prevent a war, or, if it cannot
be prevented, to win it.

774

Deparfmenf of Stafe Bulletin

U.N. Action on Collective Security: What It Means to Americans

hy John D. Hickerson

Assistant Secretary for United Nations Affairs ^

Amidst the debate and tumult these days, as
this great country works out in its own way the
guidelines which will mark its path of leadership
in the civilized world, one fact remains crystal
clear. Our leadership, in strengthening the free
world, will not falter. We are committed to the
job, and it is going on every minute and every day.

The debates may go on since people here are
free to voice their differences and to bring their
ideas to the market place of a democratic society.
But, the debates are over the how and when and
where of our defenses. We may now debate ways
and means, but we are united as a people in the
conviction that what we have is wortn preserving.
We know that we are menaced by enemies of the
Republic from without, that we must assume a
posture of defensive strength, and that, with the
collaboration of other free peoples, we must take
the lead in working for peace through strength.
This is America's foreign policy. And one of the
foundation stones of the edifice is the United
Nations.

Through the United Nations, we are working for
peace. To the United Nations, we are giving
strength, to reinforce this international instru-
ment of community law, morality, and action.
And, from the United Nations, we are gaining
strength — the strength of collective action — and
the best hope for the future peace of the world.

U.N. Actions on Collective Security

It is this facet of our policy which I shall speak
on : strengthening the free world through the
United Nations.

Despite many handicaps, the United Nations is
doing a good job in the world today on many
fronts. But the one which is of most immediate
importance is the front of collective security. This
means the effective action of the world commu-

\

' Address made before the Virginia Federation of
Women's Clubs at Washington on Apr. 25 and released
to the press on the same date.

May 74, J95?

nity to preserve peace and, indeed, community
existence against the outlaw.

The problem is as old as society itself. Count-
less ages ago, man first learned that, alone, he was
the prey of marauders, thieves, and bandits. Dur-
ing the intervening ages, he learned that survival
lay in joining with his fellow creatures for mu-
tual protection. Our advanced community life, in
towns and cities and within nations, pays tribute
to the lesson learned over the centuries.

Somehow, this lesson never was well learned
when it came to nations. The law of the jungle,
long since outlawed through collective action
wherever men had become civilized, still ruled
men's affairs in the international setting.

The slow tortuous process of learning how to
live together, how to pool individual strength for
mutual protection, and how to live peaceably but
equipped to deal with the lawless — this process
has finally brought us to a point, where, for the
first time in history, free men, organized as nations,
are rallying under a common banner to protect
their national freeholds by enforcing the judg-
ment of the community against the lawbreaker
the first time he tries to jump on an individual
member.

This, then, is the backdrop for collective secu-
rity. Korea is the setting. The free men of the
world, led by this nation, are the protagonists in
the fateful drama. With the history of man's
slow progress in learning his lessons of interna-
tional life, it becomes clear that this is a beginning,
not an end. It becomes clear that the United Na-
tions action in Korea is the action of all peaceful
men, whether in the fight or not. The United
Nations moves as we, the member nations, will it
to move. As we are resolute and courageous, it
acts with those qualities. If we are divided and
indecisive, it seems to be weak and without
strength. And, above all, its effectiveness as a
center for genuine collective action to preserve the
peace is only as great as the will and strength of
this nation and of other free nations to make it

775

so. Only after the efforts are made and the process
becomes habitual and accepted is there a chance
for the sum to become greater than the parts.

Today, with collective international action in
its first stages, we cannot, of course, rely on the
United Nations as our only means of protection
against aggression. It is one of the means. The
United Nations is buttressed by our own increas-
ing strength, combined with that of the other free
nations ; this strength is now the principal deter-
rent to the would-be conqueror.

But I am firmly convinced that the United Na-
tions can steadily be developed into a strong col-
lective security system if we keep in mind what
it is, what it can do, and what we can do to support
it most effectively.

Analyzing the Charter

It would be well to correct a common misunder-
standing. It is often said that the United Nations
system was founded on the assumption that the
Big Five would cooperate for world peace. This
is looking at the picture through the wrong end
of the lens. We did not just "assume" that the
Big Five would cooperate — the Big Five, in sign-
ing the Charter, specifically pledged that they
would cooperate for world peace. The Charter
is one of the most solemn international obliga-
tions in history. No one was compelled to sign
it. But those who did sign it solemnly undertook
to carry out in good faith its provisions.

This difference is important in understanding
the facts. If the United Nations Charter is viewed
solely in terms of an assumption that the Big Five
would cooperate — which, of course, the Soviet
Union has not done — you may feel that the United
Nations cannot achieve its original purposes.
But, if you look at the Charter as we do — as a
solemn commitment to abide by its contents —
then, when one of the important parties violates
its commitments, it is a challenge to the ingenuity
and strength of those members of the United Na-
tions who take the Charter seriously. The job
becomes one of devising other ways within the
framework of the Charter to accomplish its pur-
poses and principles. That is what we are doing
in the United Nations.

The basic element of an ideal collective security
system would be an armed force which could be
called promptly into action and which would be
stronger than the armed forces committing aggres-
sion. The founders of the United Nations plan-
ned for military forces to be at the call of the
Security Council. Two things have prevented
this. First, the Soviet Union refused to cooperate
with the Military Staff Committee which was sup-

§osed to work out the plan for these forces,
econdly, the Soviet representatives constantly
abused the veto. In an age when the aggressors
are the Soviet imperialists or their satellites, this
made it clear that, even if such forces were at the
disposal of the Security Council, the Soviet veto

would obviously frustrate any effort to use them
against an aggressor. It is fair to assume that the
Soviets thought they had effectively sabotaged the
efforts of the United Nations to develop a collec-
tive security system.

Frustrating A Well-Planned Aggression

That was the situation on June 25, 1950 — when
the Soviets gave the signal to their North Korean
puppets to invade the Kepublic of Korea. In fact,
the Soviets were apparently so convinced that they
could write off any effective collective counter-
action by free nations that they did not even think
it necessary to be present at the meetings of the
Security Council in June and July to cast their
vetoes.

But they seriously underestimated the free
world.

The Soviet puppets did not get away with their
aggression. They ran smack into the firm deter-
mination of the vast majority of the United Na-
tions members to repel the aggression — to repel it
even though there was no United Nations army
ready to be rushed to the scene. We know now
what we guessed then — that the Soviets expected
the North Koreans to overrun all of Korea within
a few days if no outside assistance was given and
within a few weeks if the United States tried to
assist the Republic of Korea. Our answer to their
confidence is that we are still in Korea with the
other fighting forces of the United Nations. We
have not been driven out of Korea — not by the
North Koreans and not by the Chinese Commu-
nists. The United Nations is ready, as it has al-
ways been, to arrange for the phased withdrawal
of United Nations troops after a satisfactory
agreement to stop the fighting and end the
aggression.

JBut we do not intend to be driven out.

And we will not slink out behind a smokescreen
of appeasement.

How did it come about that the United Nations
was able to frustrate this well-planned aggressi'.n?

It came about because the free world, at last, had
learned the bitter lesson of history that aggression
must be met by fii'm collective action. The Secu-
rity Council could not call upon its own forces
because the Soviet Union had prevented their
organization. But it could, and did, urge the
member nations to come to the rescue of the Re-
public of Korea. Free men everywhere took
heart at this decision. Fifty-three of the 59 mem-
bers of the United Nations endorsed the action
taken by the Security Council. The will to repel
the aggression was unmistakable. But the means
had to be improvised. For some time, we were
practically the onlj' ones fighting alongside the
gallant forces of the Republic of Korea. We are
still bearing the major burden along with the
Republic of Korea forces, but the situation is dif-
ferent now. Thirteen other United Nation mem-
bers actually have fighting forces in Korea, and

776

Department of State Bulletin

tliey are all — I repeat, all — actually fighting and
giving a splendid account of themselves. I am
sure you have heard of the gallantry of our
brothers-in-arms from the British Common-
wealth : United Kingdom, Australia, New Zea-
land, Canada, and South Africa ; the magnificent
fighting qualities of the Turks; the stirring per-
formance of the French; and the battlefront ex-
ploits of forces from Belgium, the Netherlands,
the Philippines, Thailand, Greece, and Luxem-
bourg.

Counteraction by Member Countries

Their contributions are not numerically large
but, considering the problems each country is fac-
ing against the threat of Soviet attack or subver-
sion, I do not call them small.

I am glad to be able to report that some of
these countries have alreadj' sent or are planning
to send reinforcements. A number of countries
which do not yet have troops in Korea are now
preparing to send forces; for example, Colombia
will soon have an infanti'y battalion en route to
Korea.

How shall we measure our own contribution?
We have paid a very heavy price in American
dead, wounded, and missing; in disi'upted homes;
and in our national treasury. But we know that
those who have made these sacrifices have done
so for the security of our own country and for
free men everywhere. They have done it for a
principle which all of us know is right. And
what has been the result?

The United Nation forces have twice rolled the
aggressors back in Korea- — back to behind the
point where the original aggi-ession started.
Now, the aggressors have launched a new offen-
sive. I am confident we will give a good ac-
count of ourselves in the current fighting. We
have seriously set back the Communist timetable
for expansion and aggression. We have limited
the war to Korea and have avoided precipitating a
world conflict. AVe have gained precious time
for the free world to develop its own strength.
We have learned the imperative necessity of doing
this as rapidly as possible. Perhaps we couldn't
have learned any other way. Perhaps it required
the shock of Korea to make us and our friends in
the free world understand the dangers confront-
ing us. And the measure of the effectiveness of
our efforts there will be in how resolutely we build
on the lessons this experience has taught us.

Building on Lessons Learned in Korea

How is the free world building on the lessons
we have learned in Korea ? First, we are increas-
ing our own strength, and we are helping our
friends in the free world increase their strength
at a rate unprecedented in peacetime. Secondly,
and this I would like to discuss in some detail, I
believe that the greatest single step forward to-

May 14, 1951

944309—51 3

ward the goal of collective security was the adop-
tion by the United Nations General Assembly last
fall of the uniting-for-peace resolution proposed
by Secretary Acheson.

This was a carefully thought-out plan to
strengthen the United Nations. Let me review
some of the important features of this plan and
tell you of some of the progress that is being
made under it.

First, the uniting-for-peace plan went a long
way toward stripping the veto of its significance
as far as collective security is concerned. You
will recall that the Soviets had been boycotting
the United Nations during the months of Juno
and July when the Security Council took such
important action on Korea. Malik's return to the
Security Council on August 1 is proof that this
was a miscalculation on their part which they
sought to rectify. Well aware of this, the free
nations in the United Nations were determined
not to be frustrated in the future in their desire
for peace by Soviet abuse of the veto. So, the
uniting-for-peace resolution provided that the
veto-free General Assembly could be called into
emergency session on 24 hours notice — previously
2 weeks were needed — if the Security Council
proved itself unable to handle a threat to the peace
or breach of the peace. In effect, the General
Assembly was saying simply this to the Security
Council : If there is a threat to the peace or a
breach of the peace, you do your best to restore
peace. But if you can't, or if you don't, we are
prepared to consider the situation and take action
if it is wise to do so.

The next important thing the uniting-for-peace
resolution did was to establish a 14-member Peace
Observation Commission. The purpose of this is
clear. It was fortunate that, when the Com-
munist aggression occurred in Korea, there was on
hand a United Nations body which had previously
been sent there by the General Assembly. This
body, known as the United Nations Commission
on Korea, consisted of representatives of seven
United Nations members whose objectivity can-
not seriously be questioned. The Commission
reported promptly to the Security Council that
the Republic of Korea had been the victim of an
unprovoked attack by the North Korean Com-
munists. Without this impartial report, some
members of the United Nations might have been
reluctant to act so promptly and firmly. Largely
on the basis of this experience, the General As-
sembly set up the li-member Peace Observation
Commission. It will be the duty of the Com-
mission to send observers to troubled areas when
requested to do so and with the consent of the
country involved. We feel that the presence of
such a group might in itself act as a deterrent to
aggression. If it does not, at least the United
Nations will get a quick and impartial report
on which to base further action.

The uniting-for-peace resolution also took into

777

account that armed forces to be placed at the call
of the Security Council have not been developed
and probably will not be in the forseeable future.
But, from Korea, we learn that the free nations
are willing to respond to a recommendation that
they come to the rescue of the victim of aggres-
sion. We learned too — and it was a hard lesson to
learn — that most of the members who were willing
to do this were not militarily prepared to do so.
We learned also that many countries would go
to unusual lengths to prepare armed forces for
use against aggression but that they were handi-
capped in doing so by uncertainties of the Korean
situation— how long "the fighting would last, what
types of troops were needed, what kind of
equipment, and who would pay for it.

Ethiopian^Contribution

Let me

The international Communist movement has re-
cently launched a World Peace Council with dele-
gates from 80 countries deluded by the Stockholm
Peace Appeal to assist in the campaign of divide
and conquer. This Council seeks to attract support
from many peace-minded people who would be
horrified by the thought that they were helping to
extend the reach and control of the Soviet dictator-
ship. Whether this new Council succeeds in catch-
ing many people on their blind side in terms of their
desire for peace depends very much on how clear
citizens of the free world are about this matter of
collective security.

The best defense of peace is the strength of in-
dependent nations and their determination unitedly
to resist aggression. The great deterrent to regimes
out to increa.se their territory is strength, unity, and
cooperation of the free. That perhaps explains
why so much pressure is directed against the stub-
born unity we maintain.

Among the "peace proposals" of the Communist-
sponsored World Peace Council you find such items
as : withdrawing United Nations forces from Korea.
Another is a pact for peace among the five powers —
that is, between the Soviet Union and the four other
large powers, including the United States. The
Council declares that any country which is not
willing to join such a pact is to be regarded as an
aggressor. There are, of course, other demands on
such subjects as atomic energy and the peace
settlements.

They all add up to a weakening of the efforts to
build a system of collective security. That is the
target. The bleating for peace in Korea, essentially
on the terms advocated by the Soviets from the be-
ginning, attempts to turn the first successful col-
lective action against aggression into a failure.
This would result in new aggressions rather than
peace. Surrender would lead to surrender. Re-
warding aggression in Korea would invite aggres-
sion in Hong Kong, Formosa, Malaya, Indo-China,
Iran, Turkey, Yugoslavia, and Western Euroiie.
More than anything else, it would deliver an
almost fatal lihiw to the l)riglit prospects for build-
ing up tlie system of collective security. After
reneging on the Charter in that manner, what mem-
bers of the United Nations could be expected to
take, in tlu' future, effective collective measures for
the prevention and removal of threats to the peace
and fur tlie snpiiressioti of acts of aggression and
other breaches of tlie peace.

Amhassador Warren R. Austin

April 1. 1051

77Q

- give just one specific example — one
among many. Not long after the fighting broke
out in Korea, we were advised that Ethiopia J
wanted to contribute an expeditioiuiry force. |
This was a significant development, coming as it
did from a country which had itself been a victun
of aggression in 193,5 and which had felt let down
by the international community in the Leagiie of
Nations days in resisting that aggression. But it
was impractical to take immediate advantage of
this offer because of the lack of organized military
training, the inadequacies of equipment, and other
logistical difficulties. But Ethopia went ahead.
She organized and trained an expeditionary force
of over 1,000 men. Last week, that force sailed
for Korea. Their morale was high. It was en-
tirely a voluntary force, and, for every man in the
force, 10 other volunteers had been rejected.
The embarkation took place with remarkable ef-
ficiency, with just one amusing and rather signifi-
cant exception: Just before the expeditionary
force sailed from Djibouti, the Commander noticed
an Ethiopian First Lieutenant who had not been
assigned to the unit. When asked to explain his
presence, the Lieutenant admitted that he had
stowed himself away on one of the troop trains
which had brought the force 48G miles from Ad-
dis Ababa to Djibouti. He said that, above all,
he wanted to join the force bound for Korea. The
Commander was regretfully obliged to put this
man ashore.

I have no doubt that this Ethiopian contingent
will perform in the field as heroically as the fight-
ing forces from other countries. I have no doubt,
too, that other contingents will be trained from
Ethiopia — and from many other free countries.
Whether all these forces can arrive in time to take
part in the fighting in Korea cannot be predicted
at this time. But, under the uniting-for-peace
plan, the momentum generated by the Korean sit-
uation will be continued. All the members of the
United Nations are asked to maintain within their
armed forces contingents which could be made
available to the United Nations for the purpose
of repelling aggression. We believe that every
free nation must share proportionatelv in the ef-
fort. This is not something that can be achieved
overnight. It is a slow and difficult process.
But I am glad to say that it is proceeding. We
hope, for example, that it will thus be possible for
the United Nations to use the services of that
stowaway Ethiopian Lieutenant and of the thou-
saiuls of other volunteers who did not sail for
Korea in the first contingent.

Another important feature of tlie uniting-for-
jieace jilan is the establishment of a 14-meiiilicr
Collective Measures Committee. The purixise of
this Committee is to devise ways and means of
strengthening the United Nations' ability to sup-
press aggression. The scope of this Committee's

Department of State Bulletin

st)idy is limitless — it can examine and report to
the General Assembly on all jjhases of military,
political, economic, social, and psychological
measures available to the United Nations. It is
not in itself empowered to take any action. But
what it is doing is to try to develop a blueprint for
using the available resources of those members
of the United Nations who are sincerely desirous
of preserving the peace. . . .

The blunt question may be asked: "Will the
uniting-for-peace plan alone guarantee the
peace?" The answer is, "No." We regard this
whole plan as but a step in the right direction. In
the interests of the United Nations, the United
States must remain strong until the dangers now
confronting the world have passed. But a peace-
ful, orderly world society can, we think, only be
developed by such steps as this plan. The world
has within its grasp today the makings of a real
system of collective security if it wants it and if
the free world is willing to pay the price for it.
We have made a start but, I repeat, only a start
in the right direction. I am convinced that the
people of this world who still have any freedom
of choice want such a system of collective secui-ity
and are willing to pay the price for it. I pro-
foundly believe that it can be made to work. . . .

I have tried to sketch out some of the things
which the United Nations means to us as Ameri-
cans in terms of collective security. The problems
are big problems. But can we not detect, in the
great events which are unfolding, the forward
steps of free men determined to keep the peace
they have fought for three times in our own life
span? Peace is a fragile organism. We have
finally learned that it needs strength to live — that
indifference, pious hopes, and noble words alone
will not suffice. But I think the more realistic we
are, and the more practical, the greater chance we
have to achieve our ideals.

I would like to close with the words of one who
understands man's quest for collective securit_y per-
haps better than most other men alive today. He
saw it fail once, and he saw his country overrun
by an aggressor. On April 12 of this year, the
Emperor of Ethiopia, Haile Selassie, spoke these
moving words to his men about to sail for distant
Korea to join the battle of free men for their se-
curity and their way of life :

It is in a large sense, soldier, that you are today leav-
ing the homeland to fight on distant shores. You are
fighting not only for freedom as we know it in Ethiopia
and the right of each people to its freedom, you are also
representing and defending in far corners of the earth
the most sacred principles of modern international policy
— that principles of collective security with which the
name of Ethiopia is imperishably associated.

Thus It is that you are now departing to take your hon-
ored place beside the valiant soldiers of other united na-
tions, those of the United States, Britain, France, the
Netherlands, Belgium, Greece, Turkey and others.

Remember that you are about to pay a debt of honor
for your homeland which was liberated thanks not only
to the blood of her patriots, but also to that of faithful

allies, likewise members of the United Nations. Remem-
ber also that in paying this debt you are laying the basis
for a universal system of collective security in behalf of
your own homeland as well as of all nations of the world,
be they great or small, iwwerful or weak.

May God protect you, give you courage to acquit your-
selves as heroes and bring you back safely to your be-
loved homeland.

Progress on Japanese Peace Settlement
Reported to President

[Released to the press ty the White House May 3]

John Foster Dulles reported to the President on
the second trip which he had made to Japan as the
President's representative in relation to a Japa-
nese peace settlement, and from which Mr. Dvilles
had returned last week. Mr. Dulles told the
President that in his opinion the Japanese Gov-
ernment and people were now aware that the
change in the Supreme Commander involved no
change in basic United States policies toward
Japan and communism in Asia ancf that the United
States would continue vigorously to work for an
early and just Japanese peace settlement. Mr.
Dulles also told the President of the satisfactory
talks he had had with General Ridgway, the new
Supreme Commander, and of the General's prompt
grasp of the situation in Japan.

The President, the Secretary of State, and Mr.
Dulles considered the program for concluding, in
connection with the reastablishment of peace with
Japan, a security aiTangement between the
Unitecl States and Australia and New Zealand, in
accordance with the President's statement of
April 18, which also outlined the contemplated
security arrangements between the United States
and the Philippines and between the United
States and Japan.

Mr. Dulles reported that the President's state-
ment of April 18 had a very salutory influence in
the Western Pacific and was accepted as clear evn-
dence of the determination of the United States
to stand firm in this area.^

Why We Need MUes^Continued from page 765

work together, steadfastly and patiently. We
must not be led astray. The real issue is whether
we stand alone, or whether we stand and work
with the other free peoples of the world.

I am confident that the American people will
not yield either to impatience or defeatism. I am
sure that our courage and wisdom are equal to
the great test we are now undergoing. And I
believe that with all of our resources, our human
energies, and our common sense, we shall be suc-
cessful in the great objective of defending freedom
and bringing peace to the world.

' Bulletin of Apr. 30, 1951, p. 699.

May 14, 195?

779

Effectiveness of the Voice of America

iy Foy D. Kohler

Chief, International Broadcasting Division^

It is a little hard to reduce to a short talk the topic
of my assignment, mainly because of the scale and
scope of the Voice of America operation. We are
presently broadcasting over a world-wide network
of transmitter bases in 33 languages. We operate
around the clock, sending out in these languages
more than 80 separate programs a day, each
tailored specifically for the time of day and the
attitudes of the target audiences. We process over
two million M'ords daily and put more than 350,000
out over the air waves. We are expanding even
from tliese staggering figures. Witliin a few
months, we expect to be using 50 languages and
broadcasting over a liundred programs daily, about
60 hours of "live" programs, containing over a
half a million words. The United States taxpayer
has an investment in facilities already operating
or under construction of about 125 million dollars.
If Congress approves, this will be increased by an
additional 100 million within the next couple of
years. Tlie cost of programing and operating i^
presently running at the rate of approximate!}'
25 million dollars per annum and, if the new fa-
cilities are granted, will gradually work up to a
high level of about 45 million dollars per year.

Is the taxpayer getting his money's worth?

Is the Voice of America effective?

I think the Voice of America radio operation is
certainly one of the best investments ever made
with the taxpayer's money. I think it is effective,
and I shall try to suggest to you why I am con-
vinced there is ample support for my conclusion.

Answers to Questions of Effectiveness

The question of effectiveness of the Voice of
America, as I see it, involves really three questions.

1. Are we delivering a clear, strong signal ?

2. Are we getting an audience? Indeed, do the
possibilities of getting an audience exist?

' Remarks made before the Institute for Education over
radio-television at Columbus, Ohio, on May 4 and released
to the press on the -same date.

780

3. Are we affecting the minds and influencing
the actions of our audience in a sense favorable to
the interests and aspirations of the American
Government and the American people ?

I can deal with the first two questions only in
passing.

With respect to the first: Are we delivering a
clear, strong signal?

The United States is severely handicapped in
international broadcasting by its geographic lo-
cation. Short-wave radio is, in any event, a
medium with severe limitations both in terms of
the quality of the signal and of access to the signal
by prospective listeners. To overcome these hand-
icaps, we have started to ring the world with relay
bases which boost the signal to the listeners via
both short and medium wave. We are developing
overseas program operations. We are doing our
best to obtain local relays wherever there is such a
possibility. We are pioneering in advanced tech-
niques and superpower with the collaboration of
the best electronic engineering groups in the
country. If Congress gives us the necessary finan-
cial support, we can deliver an effective radio
signal, even through the Soviet jamming.

With respect to the second element: Are we
getting an audience?

We are extremely fortunate in that radio, even
in relatively backward areas of the world, is an
established and fairly highly developed medium
of communication. We have available either firm
figures or solid estimates on the number of radio
receivers which we can reach throughout the
world. We know there are about 80 million re-
ceiving sets outside of North America, giving in-
ternational broadcasters a direct potential audi-
ence of over 300 million people, not to mention
secondary distribution. xVnd we are able, at com-
paratively low cost, to promote ever-wider dis-
tribution of receivers. Within the free world, we
can apply with some adaption the techniques of
quantitative audience surveys so highly developed

Department of State Bulletin

in the United States. Through these, we are able
to get an accurate measure of the size, composition,
and other characteristics of our audience and of
clianges in tliese elements. To do this, we use
mainly private contractors, notably such oi'ganiza-
tions as tlie American Institute of Public Opinion
(Gallup Polls) and its overseas affiliates; and the
Bureau of Applied Social Research of Columbia
University (Kingsley Davis-Paul Lazarsfeld).

I can give you only a few examples of our find-
ings.

We thus laiow that in France, where our pro-
gram is rebroadcast over the French domestic net-
work, our audience has increased constantly and
greatly in size during the past few years. We
know that over 24 percent of the adult population
of France of 7 million people are at least occasional
listeners to the Voice programs, that on any given
weekday we can count on an audience of at least
a million people, and that we have nearly 3
million on Sundays. We know that over half the
adult population of that country has heard the
Voice of America at some time and that our prob-
lem is to get more and more of them tuning in
regularly. We know that this audience includes
tlie better educated and urban residents in greater
proportion than their ratio to the total population.

In Germany, we know that we have likewise
been able to bring more and moi'e Gennans to
their receivers when we are on the air; that we
now have a regular audience numbering over 6
million in the United States zone alone. Here,
the audience is characterized by its proportionate
accent on youth — a very good thing, I would say.

In Sweden, surveys indicate an occasional audi-
ence for our English-language broadcast of 1.5
percent of the total Swedish population, or over
700 thousand people, and a regidar audience of
nearly 100 thousand, heavily weighted on the side
of so-called opinion leaders and of youth. The
same studies, based on direct sampling and on
analj^sis of BBC's Swedish audience, made it clear
that we could multiply our audience manifold
and get their more consistent attention to our
story if we broadcast in the Swedish language.
AVe are, accordingly, preparing to do so during
tlie coming fiscal year.

You will recognize that I have been talking
about relatively advanced and accessible areas.
Unfortunately, the job is a lot harder outside
Western Europe. In the free areas of Asia and
Latin America, we find that our contractors are
engaged in an unprecedented pioneering eifort.
But, I am glad to say that they are getting a good
reception and cooperation from local authorities
and local educational institutions. Consequently,
we are gradually acquiring a first collection of
firm information about the holdings and distribu-
tion of radio receivei's and the attitudes, listening
habits, and characteristics of the audiences in these
parts of the world.

Behind the curtain, in the satellite states of

May 14, 1951

Eastern Europe we have, of course, been unable
to make direct surveys. However, we are not
without our resources here either. We have firm
figures from preshivcry days on the distribution
of radio sets and sufficient current intelligence to
keep these up to date. Research agencies, letters
from displaced persons, interrogation of defectors.
United States missions — all these sources are sur-
prisingly unanimous in agreeing that we I'each
about 80 percent of the radio owneis every day
and that the Voice of America, with the assistance
of the well-developed grapevine, can deliver an
important message to practically the entire popu-
lation of the satellite states within a matter of
hours. Similar sources indicate that there has
been a comparably sharpened interest in China
since the Communists took over. The frantic ef-
forts of local stooge governments to combat our
efforts confirm these estimates.

In the Soviet Union, in the early days of our
Russian language program, which was inaugu-
rated in February 1947, all the evidence we could
amass at the Embassy in Moscow indicated that
the Voice of America must have a regular listen-
ing audience of at least 10 million people. Wliat
the figure is since the Kremlin indicated its dis-
approval of listening, by undertaking a colossal
jamming campaign in April 1949, nobody really
could know. However, our monitoring indicates
that we have greatly improved the delivery of our
signal since that date ; that the Voice can be heard
25 percent of the time even in Moscow, where the
jamming is concentrated, and 60 to 80 percent of
the time outside the capitol. Moreover, defectors
continue to give us a pattern of widespread listen-
ing, and the Soviet press and radio contribute ad-
ditional evidence. Last year, an important Soviet
journal started its review of the current Soviet
stage success by saying:

The Voice of America : To millions of Soviet people
these words have become synonymous with lying and
provocational fictions.

So much for audience measurement.

Impact on Audiences

Now, what is the Voice's impact on the audiences
We reach ?

This question involves even more intangibles in
the international field than in the field of domes-
tic radio — and, as all of you know, there are plenty
of intangibles even here at home. It involves
questions of the analysis of the content of our pro-
grams and their measurement against our com-
munications intentions. It involves ascertaining
sample audiences' reaction to specific programs
through the panel technique and the use of such
devices as the Stanton-Lazarfeld reaction ana-
lyzer. It involves the testing of the level and
quality of the language we use in our 30-odd lan-
guage programs and audience reaction to specific
announcers voices and method of delivery. For
all these purposes, we can also use established

781

American methods and techniques and the serv-
ices of objective and experienced American re-
search agencies like International Public Opinion
Research, Inc. (Elmo Wilson, Elmo Roper,
Joshua Powers), McCann Erickson, The Commit-
tee on Communications of the University of Chi-
cago, and the Research Study for Human Rela-
tions of New York University. Within the free
world, tests can be made on the spot in the target
countries. For testing programs delivered behind
the iron curtain, panels of recent defectors are
assembled both along the immediate periphery of
the Soviet orbit and here in the United States.

I want to say at this point that, in a democracy —
and in the long run in any regime anywhere — the
word and the deed must go together. Pure prop-
aganda at variance with acts may serve to con-
fuse for a while or even to attain immediate tac-
tical objectives. But, in the long run, false
pretentions will out. In fact, it is one of our
constant jiurposes to expose the false pretentions
of our opponents. By the same token, it is our
basic rule to maintain credibility and confidence in
the Voice of America, even at the expense of occa-
sional tactical reverses.

In a general way, then, I think it is clear that
the Voice of America can take a considerable share
of the credit for fostering the growing strength
and determination of the free world; for the suc-
cession of 50-odd to 5 votes in the United Nations
condemning Communist aggression in Korea ; for
the declining strength of communism throughout
the free world, and, particularly, in such vital
countries as France and Italy.

This is attested by the constantly increasing
size and interest of our free world audience, of
which I have spoken. It is reflected in ever grow-
ing demands for our program-schedule booklet.
This schedule is sent to listeners on written re-
quest only, and circulation figures have mounted
in the past year from 500,000 to nearly 900,000
copies an issue. General effectiveness is also
shown by the steady upward trend of our audience
mail. In 1949, we received 126,000 letters from
our listeners ; in 1950, 230,000. In March of this
year, we reached an all-time high of nearly
40,000 letters for 1 month alone.

Now, I realize that these booklets and letters are
not scientifically established methods of measure-
ment comparable to our siirveys and panel tests,
but they are very heart-warming and encouraging.
And they do give us valid and sometimes striking
examples of audience attitudes and changes
therein. I should like to read you a few very
random excerpts :

Frotn France. — I was climbing the steps to my sixth
floor apartment (slowly as I am 74 years old and suffer
from a heart condition) ; I could hear the Voice of
America from every door, even at the sixth floor. I was
both proud and happy.

From Indonesia. — The more I know about your country
and people, the more I get to appreciate America. I am
very glad knowing that the Voice of America is able to

gratify the desire of all democratic nations, namely, the
disclosure of the Soviets behind the Iron Curtain. I
exult that you have done many things in order to make
clear the meaning of democracy.

From Germany. — At the beginning of your broadcasts,
I used to be rather skeptical and must took them for a
mere propaganda trick. ... I have changed my mind
fundamentally about everything concerning your oper-
ation.

From Turkey. — Since our brigade went to Korea the
interest in and love for the Voice of America have greatly
increased. You made us very proud. . . .

From Austria. — I followed your deliberation in radio
with increasing interest until I finally discovered that
formerly I was politically on the wrong road. By means
of your broadcast, I came to despise the (Communist)
path which I had unwittingly begun to travel.

Programs Endeavor To Boost Morale

In our programs to the peoples of the captive
states, our job is a little different. Here, the
stooge regimes are our enemies and have a ten-
dency to be "more royal than the king." But the
people are our long-established friends. We try
to give them the assurance that we have not for-
gotten and will not forget. We try to sustain
their hope for eventual freedom and encourage
their continued hostility toward and their resist-
ance to their oppressors. At the same time, we
must avoid arousing their hopes unduly and, thus,
disillusion them. We must also avoid inviting
them to commit suicide by premature rebellion.
It is a fine line to draw. We are constantly at-
tacked by extremist emigi-e groups for being either
too soft or too hard. Maybe this in itself is a
good indication that we are continuing to main-
tain the right line, but a lot of other more valid
evidence indicates this too. Of course, our own
people still in those countries are able to give us
good advice. Moderate emigre groups abroad do
likewise. Mail from and interviews with the de-
fectors constantly streaming out into Germany
and Austria on the Continent and into Korea and
Hong Kong in the Far East also support our con-
clusion that we are hitting the target with satis-
factory accuracy. Here, too, I can perhaps best
illustrate my point by quoting a couple of samples
of the obviously deeply felt words of these inter-
viewees and letter writers.

A Woman in Czechoslorakia. — In this atmosphere of
oppression, the only moment of hope occiu's when we hear
the Voice of America. Tour voice comes to this fiery hell
like greetings from a civilized world. . . . We can live
our terrible life behind the Iron Curtain and keep on
living only if you, on the other side of the ocean, continue
to feed us with the strength of everlasting hope.

In LiVernted Seoul, after months of Communist ocot/-
pation, a Korean Listener. — During those weary and dis-
tressing days of my dug-out life, the only hope and com-
fort have been my listening to your broadcast over the
Voice of America. ... I knew then we would win.
I'lease keep on sending us your messages of hope,
strength, encouragement, and inspiration. We need
them. . . .

In our programs to the Soviet Union, we draw

782

Department of Slate Bulletin

a clear distinction and do our best to drive a wedge
between tlie despotic regime and its enslaved sub-
jects. We appeal to their memories of better days
and remind tiiem of tlieir own suppressed historic
traditions and political and literary classics. We
stimulate their skepticism about tlie story being
told them by tlieir own rulers, by telling them the
other half. We ti-y to clarify the curiosity we
know they have about the outer world, and correct
the warped and distorted image of that world
given them by their Kremlin masters. I think
there is strong, perhaps almost conclusive, evi-
dences that we are succeeding. Defectors do con-
tinue to come out, despite the great dangers they
run. We liave questioned scores of them, and
practically all refer to the influence of the Voice's
programs on their decisions. Occasionally, we
iiave striking demonstrations of our direct influ-
ence, such as that of the two Soviet aviators who
flew their jilane straight out of the Soviet Union
a couple of years ago. The unabated efforts of
the Kremlin to keep our message out of the Soviet
Union by the use of their colossal jamming network
is anotlier measure of the Kremlin's own estimate
of our effectiveness with the Soviet citizenry.
Even better is the constant stream of attacks made
on us over the Soviet radio and in the Soviet press.
These have gone from a quai-terly level of 30-odd
full-dress attacks in 1949 to over 100 during the
last quarter of 1950. They are so voluminous and
so revealing that we have them under constant
analysis by the Russian Research Center at Har-
vard University. Not only do they give us a con-
cept of the extent and composition of our audience,
as I have already suggested, but they indicate the
themes to which the Kremlin is particularly sen-
sitive and with which it feels compelled to try to
rebut to its own people. I might mention that
they have reacted with special violence to our com-
parisons of living standards in the Soviet orbit and
the outside world; to our campaigns on the ques-
tion of slave labor; to our demonstration that even
minor improvement in living conditions in the
Soviet Union proper is matched by a worsening
of conditions in the satellites, and to our exposure
of the frauds and fallacies of the Stalinist con-
cept of Marxism.

A Russian Defector rcccntlif icrotc us after his arrival
in German!/. — Your Russian liroadcasts undermine the
Soviet regime and completely nullify the Commimist propa-
ganda behind the Iron Curtain. Tour broadcasts are a
weapon more powerful than the atom bomb.

Now our friend's language is perhaps a bit exag-
gerated— this would be understandable in the cir-
cumstances. But its obvious conviction and es-
sential message seem to me to confirm Arthur
Schlesinger's recent statement that:

. . . only the potential disaffection of the Russian peo-
ple prevents the Kremlin from throwing the world into
another global conflict.

We propose to keep that potential of disaffection
alive and growing.

VOA Honors 160th Anniversary
of Polish Constitution

Statement hy the President
[Released to the press May 4]

I take pleasure in honoring the one hundred and
sixtieth anniversary of Poland's Constitution of
May 3, 1791. For more than a century and a
half, in bondage and in freedom, Poles have com-
memorated May 3 as the symbol of their unflag-
ging devotion to human rights and of their
indomitable resistance to foreign oppression.
The Constitution of May 3 has an additional
meaning for Americans because it was brilliantly
defended against the foreign invader by Tadeusz
Kosciuszko, a hero of our own war for independ-
ence. I think it is appropriate on this traditional
Polish holiday to recall the opening words of the
Polish national anthem:

Poland is not yet lost while we are living.

A spirit like that can never die.

Relay of VOA Programs

Over German Stations Negotiated

[Released to the press Hay 2]

On April 12, 1951, the Department announced
the inauguration of negotiations in Germany be-
tween the general managers of four German radio
stations and the Voice of America for an agree-
ment on the relay of Voice of America German-
language programs.

These negotiations grew out of requests by the
German broadcasters for discussions with repre-
sentatives of the Voice of America on the present
Voice German-language programs relayed by the
stations in the American zone of Germany. These
programs have been rebroadcast as an occupation
requirement by the stations Radio Bremen, Hes-
sian Radio in Frankfort, South German Radio at
Stuttgart, and the Bavarian Radio at Munich.

The negotiations were designed to place the re-
lays on a voluntary basis and to integrate them
with the general schedule of the stations. The
preliminary agreement reached provides for a 15-
minute relay at 6: 1:5 p. m., German time, consist-
ing of political commentary, news analysis, and
press roundups. Feature type broadcasts will be
relayed at other times convenient to the stations.

German station managers have emphasized the
value of the political broadcasts, originating with
the Voice of America, and have asked that they
be continued. American and German surveys
have shown that tlie programs enjoy constantly
increasing popularity.

May 14, 1951

783

statement by Secretary Acheson
on Wedemeyer's Korean Report

[Releifiged to the press on May 2]

The record of our action in Korea is plain.
Certainly, our coui-se in Koi-ea has paralleled the
recommendations of General Wedemeyer.

The United States endeavored, between 1945
and 1947, to reach an agreement with the
U.S.S.R. concerning the broad problem of Ko-
rean freedom and independence, including the
question of the withdrawal of American and So-
viet occupation forces from Korea. When this
proved fruitless, the United States went to the
United Nations and in October 1947, introduced
a resolution calling for elections under United
Nations supervision and the establishment of a
free and independent nation. On November 14,
1947, the United Nations passed such a resolution,
and a United Nations Commission was sent to
Korea to supervise the elections and formation
of a government.

The Soviets refused to recognize the United
Nations action and never permitted the free elec-
tions in North Korea. Free elections were held
in South Korea, and the Republic of Korea was
established on August 15, 1948.

American occupation forces were not withdrawn
from Korea mitil June 29, 1949, 6 months after
the announced withdrawal of Soviet forces. An
American military advisory group of some 500
officers and men was established in Korea, upon
the withdrawal of the occupation forces, to con-
tinue the training of the Republic's army, coast
guard, and police. This mission was still there
when the Communist sneak attack was launched.
It has played a very important part in advising
and assisting the Korean army throughout the
fighting.

At the time of tlie withdrawal of our occupation
troops, the Republic of Korea had security forces
totaling about 114,000. The army of 65,000 was
fully equipped with United States infantry-type
materiel. About one-half of the police and coast
guard had United States side arms and carbines
and the remainder had Japanese equipment of
similar type. By the time of the attack, these
security forces had been increased to 150,000 with
our assistance.

Prior to the North Korean attack, the United
States had delivered to Korea military equipment
with an original value of over 57 million dollars.
That equipment, at the time of its delivery, would
have cost almost 110 million dollars to replace.
Included in the equipment were over 105,000 rifles
and carbines; over 2,000 machine guns and sub-
machine guns ; over 50,000,000 rounds of ammuni-
tion for these guns; also mortai-s, howitzers,
bazookas, and other artillery with necessary am-
munition; 5,000 trucks; 50,000 mines and demo-

lition blocks; 79 vessels, many of them armed for
coast guard use; and 20 liaison aircraft.

Further military assistance was provided for
in the Mutual Defense Assistance Act of 1949.

Advice and training of technical specialists and
tactical units had been and was being provided
by the military advisory mission.

In addition, the United States gave Korea sub-
stantial economic assistance to correct the disloca-
tions in Korea's economy which had resulted from
the war and the division of Korea at the 38th
parallel. During the occupation, 1945^8, a total
of 356 million dollars was provided for Govern-
ment and relief. With the establishment of the
Republic, EGA launched a large-scale program
of economic assistance designed to fill the economic
\'acuum which had been created and to promote
economic stability which would contribute to the
maintenance of the political stability of the new
Republic as a basis for eventual unification of the
entii'e country. EGA plans called for a 3-year
program totaling 285 million dollars.

The only recommendation not carried out in
actual fact was that calling for the creation of an
American-officered Korean scout force. Instead,
we provided a military mission to advise and train
a Korean-officered army. In actual operations,
our officers have served with the Korean forces in
the field.

Norway Contributes Mobile Surgical
Hospital Unit for Korea

On April 30, the United Nations Department of Public
Information announced that the iollowing information
had heen received from the United Nations Information
Center at Copenhai/en.

The last preparations are now in hand for Nor-
way's humanitarian contribution to Korea.
Early in June, a Norwegian mobile surgical hos-
pital is expected to be in full operation in Korea.

The hospital, toward which the Norwegian Gov-
ernment has contributed an initial 5 million
kroner ($750,000), will be organized by the Nor-
wegian Red Cross. It will have a total personnel
of approximately 80 people : 12 doctors, 20 lun-ses,
porters, drivers, etc., and will be divided into three
main sections, each devoted to special branches of
surgery. The equi]iment, including the large
army tents in which the hospital will be installed,
will be purchased in Tokyo. It is sciiedulod to
hold 60 beds, and it is expected that about 100
beds will be added gradually.

Two planes have been cliartered for the trans-
jiort of the doctors and stall' direct from Oslo to
Tokyo. Tlie planes are expected to leave Oslo on
May 16 and 23. After arrival in Tokyo, the staff
will undergo training for about a fortnight and
will then be flown to the base selected by Unified
Command.

784

Department of State Bulletin

U.S., France, and U.K. Submit Claims
Regarding German-Looted Gold to Arbitrator

[Released to the press May 2]

Representatives of the Governments of France, Great
Britdin, and the United States met in Washington in
March to seek a solution of the problem with regard to
the distribution of certain looted gold, claim to which has
been made by both Albania and Italy. The Gold Com-
mission, established by ilie tripartite Governments to
distribute from the pool recovered gold previously looted
by Gcrninny, had been unable to reach a conclusion in this
particular complicated case.

At the Washington discussions, the three Governments
signed the attached agreement tvhich is thought to set
forth a just and appropriate procedure for the solution
of the case. The attached statement explains the circum-
stances surrounding the tico competitive claims and also
a connected British claim to the same gold. The latter
claim goes back to the Corfu Channel incident.

The State Department is requesting the President of
the International Court at The Hague to designate an
arbitrator as provided by the agreement.

STATEMENT CONCERNING AGREEMENT

The Governments of the French Republic, the
United Kingdom, and the United States, who
have under part III of the final act of the Paris
conference on reparation the duty of distributing
monetary gold from the pool formed by the gold
found in Germany by the allied forces and re-
covered from third countries, have found them-
selves unable at the present time to reach a con-
clusion with regard to a certain quantity of gold
to which claims have been made, both by Albania
and by Italy, under paragraph C of part III of
the Paris act. The three Governments have, there-
fore, decided to submit this question to an arbitra-
tor to be selected by the President of the Inter-
national Court of Justice and to obtain from the
arbitrator an opinion whether Albania or Italy,
or neither of them, has established a claim to this
amount of gold under part III of this act. The
three Governments have signed an agreement, pro-
viding for this reference to an arbitrator, the
agreement providing that the arbitrator, before he
considers his opinion, shall afford a full oppor-
tunity to Albania, to Italy, and to each of the three
Governments to submit to him such evidence and
legal arguments as they may desire to do. The
three Governments will accept the opinion of the

arbitrator as decisive on the question of the claims
made under part III of the Paris act.

If the opinion of the arbitrator should state that
Albania has established a claim under part III
of tlie act, the Three Powers are confronted by
another question because both the United King-
dom on the one hand and Italy on the other hand
maintain for different reasons that the gold which
on this hypothesis falls to Albania under part III
of the Paris act should be delivered to them.

The United Kingdom maintains that the gold
should be delivered to it because it has obtained in
the International Court of Justice a judgment
against Albania for £843,947 in respect of the
deaths of and injuries to members of the British
Navy and the loss of and damage to British war-
ships in the Corfu Channel, as a result of an un-
disclosed mine field, for which the Court held that
Albania had a responsibility. This judgment has
remained completely unsatisfied, and although dis-
cussions have taken place between the British and
Albanian agents in the case, Albania has not of-
fered anything more than a token sum in satis-
faction of this judgment, and accordingly the
discussions between the two agents have been
broken off. The United Kingdom contends that
in the circumstances, if Albania establishes a
claim to the gold under part III of the Paris act,
it should be delivered to the United Kingdom in
partial satisfaction of the judgment of the Inter-
national Court of Justice against Albania.

Italy also has asserted a claim to the gold in-
volved here, which arises from a matter not cov-
ered by part III, namely, the Albanian Law of
January 13, 1945, whereby Albania confiscated
without any compensation the assets of the Na-
tional Bank of Albania, the shares in which were
for the most part held by the Italian Government.
The gold in question constituted an important as-
set of the said Bank outside of Albania, and Italy
contends that under international law no extra-
territorial effect should be given the Albanian Gov-
ernment's confiscation and the gold should be de-
livered to Italy. In addition Italy asserts a
claim to this specific gold based on the provisions

May 14, 1957

785

of the Italian peace treaty. Finally, the effect of
the Italian peace treaty as regards the respective
rights of the interested parties would have to be
considered.

The three Governments have agreed that, if the
opiiiion of the arbitrator is that Albania has es-
tablished a claim under part III of the Paris act
to 2338.7565 kilograms of monetary gold looted
by Germany, they will deliver the gold to the
United Kingdom in partial satisfaction of the
judgment in the Corfu Channel case unless within
90 days from the date of the communication of the
arbitrator's opinion to Italy and Albania either
(a) Albania makes an application to the Inter-
national Court of Justice for the determination of
the question whether it is proper that the gold, to
which Albania has established a claim under part
III, should be delivered to the United Kingdom in
partial satisfaction of the Corfu Channel judg-
ment; or (b) Italy makes an application to the
International Court of Justice for the determina-
tion of the question, whether by reason of any
right which she claims to possess as a result of the
Albanian Law of January 13, 1945, or under the
provisions of the Italian peace treaty, the gold
should be delivered to Italy rather than to Al-
bania and agrees to accept the jurisdiction of the
Court to determine the question whether the claim
of the United Kingdom or of Italy to receive the
gold should have priority, if this issue should
arise.

The Governments of the French Republic, the
United Kingdom, and the United States declare
that they will accept as defendants the jurisdiction
of the Court for the purpose of the determination
of such applications by Italy or by Albania or by
both.

The three Governments agi"ee to conform in the
matter of the delivery of gold with any decisions
of the International Court of Justice given as the
result of such applications by Italy or by Albania.

TEXT OF AGREEMENT

The Governments of the French Republic, the
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland, and the United States of America (here-
inafter referred to as the three Governments),

Whereas Part III of the Final Act of the Paris
Conference on Reparation provides:

A. All the monetary gold found in Germany by the
Allied Forces and that referred to in paragraph G below
(irifludin;,' gold coins, except those of numismatic or
historical value, which shall be restored directly if identi-
fiable) shall be pooled for distribution as restitution
among the countries participating in the pool in propor-
tion to their respective losses of gold through looting or
by wrongful removal to Germany.

B. Without prejudice to claims by way of reparation
for unrestored gold, the portion of monetary gold thus
accruing to each country participating in the pool shall
be accepted by that country in full satisfaction of all
claims against Germany for restitution of monetary gold.

C. A proportional share of the gold shall be allocated to

each country concerned which adheres to this arrangement
for the restitution of monetary gold ami which can es-
tablish that a definite amount of monetary gold belonging
to it was looted by Germany or, at any time after March
12th, 1938, was wrongfully removed into German territory.

D. The question of the eventual participation of coun-
tries not represented at the Conference (other than Ger-
many but including Austria and Italy) in the above-
mentioned distribution shall be reserved, and the equiva-
lent of the total shares which these countries would re-
ceive, if they were eventually admitted to participate,
shall be set aside to be disposed of at a later date in such
manner as may be decided by the Allied Governments
concerned.

E. The various countries participating in the pool shall
supply to the Governments of the United States of
America, France, and the United Kingdom, as the oc-
cupying Powers concerned, detailed and verifiable data
regarding the gold losses suffered through looting by, or
removal to, Germany.

F. The Governments of the United States of America,
France, and the United Kingdom shall take appropriate
steps within the Zones of Germany occupied by them
respectively to implement distribution in accordance
with the foregoing provisions.

G. Any monetary gold which may be recovered from a
third country to which it was transferred from Germany
shall be distributed in accordance with this arrangement
for the restitution of monetary gold.

Whereas, for the purpose of fulfilling their
duties under the aforesaid Part III, the three Gov-
ernments established a Commission designated as
the Tripartite Commission for the Restitution of
Monetary Gold and invited all Governments
which desired to make claims under Part III of
the Final Act of the Paris Conference on Repara-
tion for a proportionate share of the gold pool to
submit their claims to the said Commission ;

Whereas, in 1943 Germany looted, or wrong-
fuUv removed from Rome to German territory,
2338.7565 kilograms of gold;

Whereas, Albania claims that the said amount
of gold was monetary gold belonging to Albania
within the meaning of the aforementioned para-
graph C and that in consequence, under the afore-
said paragraph A, Albania should receive a pro-
portionate part of the gold pool referred to in that
paragraph ;

Wliereas, Italy claims that the aforesaid amoimt
of gold was monetary gold belonging to Italy
within the meaning of the aforesaid paragraph
C and that in consequence, under paragraph A,
Italy should receive a proportionate amount of
the gold pool referred to in that paragraph;

Wliereas, the Governments of Italy and Albania
submitted claims to the Commission as above
recited ;

Whereas, the said Commission considered that
the competitive claims of Albania and of Italy
involved disputed questions which the Commis-
sion felt itself incompetent to determine and ac-
cordingly revoked its previous provisional decision
on the matter (which previous decision shall now
be regarded as a nullity) and referred the said
claims to the three Govermnents for decision; and

Wliereas, the three (Jovernments consider that
the aforesaid claims of Albania and Italy involve
disputed questions of law and fact and, in order

786

Department of State Bulletin

that they may, in the exercise of their duty under
Part III of the Paris Act, carry out the distribu-
tion provided for in that Part correctly, they
should be assisted by the opinion of an impartial
and highly qualified jurist;
Have agreed as follows:

(1) The three Governments request the Presi-
dent of the International Court of Justice to desig-
nate as an arbitrator an eminent and impartial
jurist, to advise them as to the decision which they
should adopt with regard to the aforementioned
claims of Albania and of Italy. The emoluments
and expenses of the arbitrator shall be defrayed
by the Tripartite Gold Commission as a proper
charge against the gold pool.

(2) The arbitrator, after taking into account
all the facts and all the legal considerations which
it is proper for the three Governments to take
into account under Part III and bearing in mind
that his advice should be consistent with decisions
already made in other cases by the Tripartite Gold
Commission, is requested to advise the three Gov-
ernments whether:

(i) Albania has established that 2338.7565
kilogi'ams of monetary gold, which were looted by
Germany from Rome in 1943, belonged to Al-
bania, or

(ii) Italy has established that 2338.7565 kilo-
gi'ams of monetary gold, which were looted by
Germany from Rome in 1943, belonged to Italy, or

(iii) neither Albania nor Italy has es-
tablished that 2338.7565 kilograms of monetary
gold, which were looted by Germany from Rome
in 1943, belonged to either of them.

The arbitrator is requested to furnish his advice
in the form of a fully reasoned opinion.

(3) Before submitting his opinion, the arbitra-
tor shall afford to the Governments of Albania,
and of Italy, and to each of the three Governments
an opportunity of submitting to him any material,
evidence and arguments relating to the questions
submitted to the arbitrator which they may re-
spectively desire to submit.

(4) Save as provided in the two preceding Ar-
ticles, the arbitrator shall determine all questions
of procedure, including the manner and the time
limits within which evidence and observations may
be submitted to him by any Govermnent entitled
to do so. Before determining any questions of
procedure, he shall convoke a meeting at Brussels
of the Agents of all the Governments entitled to
submit evidence and arguments to him, and shall
hear their views with regard to all questions of
procedure. If any Government entitled to do so
does not, within thirty days of being invited to
do so by the arbitrator, inform the arbitrator of
its intention to appoint an Agent and to submit
evidence or observations, that Government shall
be deemed to have renounced its right to do so.

(5) The three Governments, in exercising their
duty under Part III of the Final Act of the Paris
Conference on Reparation, will accept the advice

given by the arbitrator on the question whether
Albania, or Italy, or neither has established a
claim to the aforesaid amount of gold.

In witness whereof, tlie undersigned represent-
atives of the three Governments, being duly
authorized thereto, have signed the present Agree-
ment.

Done this 25th day of April 1951, at Washing-
ton in English and French, both texts being
equally authentic, in a single copy, which will
remain deposited in the archives of the Govern-
ment of the United States, of which certified copies
shall be transmitted by the Government of the
United States to the Governments of the French
Republic, the United Kingdom, Albania, and
Italy.

For the Government of the French Republic :

Henri Bonnet
For the Government of the United Kingdom of
Great Britain and Northern Ireland :

OLrvER S. Franks
For the Government of the United States of
America :

Dean Acheson

Killing of American Soldier
at Vienna Being Investigated

The Department of State was informed on May
4 by its Legation at Vienna of the killing of an
American soldier by Soviet soldiers in that city's
international sector.

The United States element is responsible for
the preservation of law and order in the interna-
tional sector of Viemia during the month of May,
in accordance with quadripartite agreement which
assigns this responsibility in rotation to the four
occupying powers.

According to the dispatch, the soldier, experi-
enced in the Vienna international patrol, was ac-
companied by another American soldier. The
soldiers were on foot patrol at approximately
12 : 30 a. m., Vienna time, when two armed Soviet
soldiers who were asked to halt for the usual iden-
tification, without warning fired two bursts of a
"tommygun" at less than 10 yards range. The
American soldier fell immediately and died en
route to the hospital. His companion returned
the fire, and it is believed that one of the Soviet
soldiers, who fled into the Soviet sector, was
wounded.

Troops of all occupying powers are authorized
by protocol to carry weapons in the international
sector.

A thorough investigation is under way. The
United States High Commissioner is making the
strongest ofEcial protests to the Soviet authorities.
The Department will issue a further statement as
soon as detailed information is available.

May 14, 7951

787

Educational Exchange Among Free Nations

FIFTH SEMIANNUAL REPORT TO CONGRESS
JULY TO DECEMBER, 1950 >

I. APPRAISAL OF THE DEVELOPMENT

OF THE EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGE PROGRAM

This appraisal of the development of the edu-
cational exchange program is submitted by the
United States Advisory Commission on Educa-
tional Exchange in fulfillment of its statutory re-
porting responsibilities under Public Law 402,
Eightieth Congress.

The educational exchange program of Public
Law 402 was formally authorized on a world-wide
scale in 1948, at which time this Commission was
appointed. The progi-am has faced not only the
initial problems encountered in any new under-
taking, but also special ones due to the worsening
of world conditions from 1948 to the present time.

At its outset the progi-am was the heir of ideas
which had been developed during the Second
World War as well as more specific Government
programs which had been carried out in the Latin-
American countries in order to cement hemispheric
friendship and cooperation. Its basic concept
was to interpret the United States to other coun-
tries. It was to make known the strength of the
United States, the character and purpose of our
people, and our national policies and objectives.
At first restricted in the main to the Latin-Ameri-
can countries as a continuation of what remained
of the wartime program,^ the educational exchange
service was expanded in 1950 to Europe and other
areas of the Eastern Hemisphere.

The program was established with certain ma-
jor instruments, including the exchange of per-
sons, both at the student and mature leadership
level, the maintenance of overseas libraries and
cultural centers, the translation of representative
American books and documents into foreign lan-

' Tmnsniitted by the chairman of the U.S. Advisory
Commission on Educational Exchange. Harvie Brans-
comb, on Apr. (), 19.')1. Printed from H. doc. 108, 82d
Cong., 1st sess. ; for material on the fourth report see
BULI.KTIN of Sept. 11, 10.10, p. 417.

° The oversoa.s library prof;rani has been world-wide ever
since its beginning in World War IT and it was a part
of OWI as well as the Latin-American program.

guages, assistance to American-sponsored schools
in the other American Republics, the support of
various official projects in connection with uni-
versities, industrial exhibits, and fairs, and cer-
tain cooperative technological services in the
Latin-American area.

The concept of interpreting the United States
appealed strongly to the American people, and
the program has received wide public support and
steadily increasing appropriations from the Con-
gress. In 1948, a total of around $20,000,000 was
appropriated to the United States information and
educational exchange programs, including the pro-
gram of scientific ancl technical cooperation with
the other American Republics. Of this total of
$20,000,000, approximately $3,000,000 was avail-
able for educational exchange activities.

In succeeding years the appropriations were
made steadily larger. Funds available for 1951
exceed $111,000,000 ^ for the information and edu-
cational exchange programs of Public Law 402.
Of this total around $10,000,000 has been allocated
to educational exchange. In addition, for fiscal
year 1951, approximately $20,000,000 in dollars
and the dollar equivalent in foreign currencies is
available for special educational exchange pro-
grams under other authorities, such as the Ful-
bright educational program and other special
programs in Finland and Germany, and the China
area aid program.

Thus, two developments have been under way
during this brief period : the expansion of the
program to new countries and an increase in its
volume. Simultaneously has come the necessity
for another development. As world conditions
worsened, it became evident that althougli the ob-
jectives as originally conceived were still valid,
they were inadequate and needed sup]ileinentation
and sharjaening. The Communist attack on the

'The contrast between this figure and the $20,000,000
for 194S is even greater when certain facts are pointed
out. The 10,11 amount of over $111,000,000 does not in-
clude funds for the scientific and technical projects of
Point 4, for which around $;!.''i,000.000 was appro]u-iatcd.
The 1948 amount did include funds for this purpose.

788

Department of State Bulletin

United States was not new, but the program as it
was first conceived did not take into consideration
intensive campaigns for the conversion of whole
peoples to the Communist point of view. The
events in North Korea before the Communist mili-
tary invasion of South Korea illustrate this chal-
lenge.

The facts in this instance are so significant that
they should be cited specifically. In 1945 some
3,700 North Koreans were enrolled in one or
another of the Soviet-oriented cultural societies
in that area. By 1949 this number had been in-
creased to over 1,300,000. During the 3-year
period prior to 1948, some 770,000 copies of 72
Russian books were published in North Korea.
In 1949 some 500 books were translated and large
numbers of copies distributed. For example, of
2 books alone 537,000 copies were distributed.
Numerous classes in the Russian language were
organized. Almost 70,000 lectures and concerts
were given in North Korea by Soviet artists, writ-
ers, and other cultural representatives in 1948,
and an even greater number were given in 1949.
In the course of the 5-year period preceding hos-
tilities, hundreds of intellectual, industrial, and
political leaders from North Korea were taken to
Moscow for indoctrination. This provides a vivid
illustration of Soviet program to misguide and
seduce a whole population for violent ends. (De-
tails of the Soviet cultural penetration of North
Korea are given in the attaclmient on p. 795.)

While the Communist educational and cultural
program in North Korea was exceptional in its
intensity, similar efforts in other countries called
for a rethinking and redirection of United States
educational exchange objectives during the last
year.

The Commission on Educational Exchange has
discussed with departmental officers the formula-
tion of basic principles and policies underlying
the new approach. Certain major steps in this
reshaping of the program may be cited as follows :

1. Shaping the program to fit each country
National attitudes and conditions in each coun-
try and area of the world have been analyzed
from the standpoint of the objectives of the pro-
gram to be conducted in each. This has directed
attention to special needs in various areas and
ended the concejit of a single program directed
from Washington. For example, 31 countries are
now considered by the Department of State to be
areas of critical concern. They are the countries
under Communist domination, those in danger of
beuig so dominated, or those whose loss to the
Communist forces would constitute a serious blow
to us. The purpose of the analysis is to tailor the
educational exchange program to fit the local
situation.

2. Sharpening the ohjectives of the program
The aims of the educational exchange program

have been examined and restated. Three specific

objectives have been set up, the relative emphasis
upon each being determined by conditions in the
respective countries. In collaboration with the
information program, the educational exchange
service is now striving —

(a) To keep alive the spirit of cooperation
among the free nations of the world for the
purpose of self-protection and progi'ess for all.

(S) To strengthen resistance to communism in
countries immediately thi-eatened with infiltration
or aggression.

(c) To weaken the forces of communism and
diminish its power in areas now under the
domination of the U.S.S.R.

These aims obviously are not in contradiction
to the earlier, general aim of interpreting the
United States to other countries. They do repre-
sent, however, a great gain in flexibility and in
definiteness.

3. Review and redirection of speciftc program
activities

In order to achieve the goals set forth above,
the program operations have been reviewed and
redirected. A number of specific projects or
activities have been revised.

United States information centers. — An excel-
lent illustration of this is the broadening of
function as well as the increase in the number of
overseas libraries, now called United States in-
formation centers. In 1948 there were 67 over-
seas libraries and 22 reading rooms. By contrast,
it is expected that the information centers will
number 170 by June 30, 1951. Their change of
name from libraries to information centers cor-
responds to the more positive role which has
recently been assigned to them. In addition to
providing books and other reference and extension
services, they now arrange for lectures, discussion
groups, and "workshops" for specialized gi'oups
such as teachers; show documentary films; and
hold exliibits, as local conditions make these acti-
vities practicable and desirable. These informa-
tion centers actively assist local institutions and
groups along many lines, including the lending
of materials to national libraries and educational
institutions and providing English teaching ma-
terials and textbooks to local schools and groups.

Exchange of persons. — The greatly expanded
exchange-of-persons program is also being
adapted to serve immediate needs more effectively.
Grants formerly were limited chiefly to the
academic and scientific fields. Exchange activi-
ties now include individuals in other representa-
tive categories: Government officials, labor
groups, youth leaders, and professional leaders
in all fields. There is an increased emphasis on
bringing mature leaders and specialists to the
United States on short-term visits. Even in
student exchanges, one of the main criteria in the
selection of grantees is an individual's prospect
of a position of influence in the near future.

May 14, 1951

789

A few statistics illustrate these new trends in
the exchange of persons program, and also its
expansion. In 1948 around 450 grants were
awarded to students and adult professional lead-
ers. In 1951, the plans provide for 1,555 grants
from Smith-Mundt funds. With the addition of
special educational exchange activities under the
German program, the Fulbright Act, the Finnish
program, and some others the total figure for 1951
is expected to exceed 6,500 grants. Roughly half
of the 6,500 grants will be made to mature leaders
selected from a number of representative fields for
the purpose of lecturing, inspecting new tech-
niques, pursuing research projects, teaching, and
other activities.

The Department of State's program, however, is
only a small part of the total United States ex-
change-of-persons activities, the great bulk of
which are carried out under private auspices in the
United States and other countries. Over 30,000
foreign students are now studying in over a thou-
sand American campuses. Not more than 9 or 10
percent* of these foreign students are supported
by Government grants. The great importance of
this student migration and the teaching contribu-
tion of American educational institutions to an
intellectually unified and cooperating world is im-
possible to calculate.

In some instances, the sharpening of the pro-
gram to meet Communist attacks has been accom-
plished indirectly. For example, a number of
appointments to qualified Negroes for study or
other work abroad has done more to oflFset the
charges of racial conflict in the United States than
many articles on the subject could have done.

Other activities. — In a number of countries
progress has been made to secure local support
for the program. For example, binational Ameri-
can centers are being opened during the current
fiscal year in Turkey, Iran, and Burma. These
centers offer regular English classes, provide in-
tensive English training for special groups such as
educators, and offer courses and seminars on
American civilization and other services.

Difference of language is always a barrier. The
previously mentioned Russian program in North
Korea placed emphasis on overcoming this prob-
lem. The Department of State is carrying out
activities designed to increase the number of
English-speaking peoples in various countries, as
well as to reach other nationals through their own
language by translating representative American
publications.

English-teaching materials are being distributed
to foreign schools and individuals engaged in the
teaching of English. In addition, special Eng-
lish-teaching materials are being developed.
These include textbooks and recordings in Korean,
Viet-Namese, Indonesian, Burmese, Turkish, and
Persian. Experimentation is now under way to

* Exelu.sive of Chinose students assisted under the spe-
cial China area aid program.

make effective use of motion pictures and radio
as media for English teaching. Activities in the
field of translation include financial and other as-
sistance to foreign publishers for the translation
and publication of American books, and Govern-
ment-financed translations of certain United
States Government publications for distribution
abroad. By the close of fiscal year 1951, nearly
2,000,000 copies of translated American publica-
tions will have been distributed in 23 different 1
languages. '

Summary Appraisal

The expansion of the educational exchange pro-
gram to many new countries, its rapid increase in
volume, and its redirection to meet the challenge
of Communist propaganda and subversion, have
placed heavy burdens upon the administrators of
the program throughout this 3-year period. The
responsibilities have been particularly great this
past year when, with the initiation of the Presi-
dent's Campaign of Truth, most of the expansion
and change has taken place. It is the opinion of
this Commission that on the whole the job has been
well done.

The Assistant Secretary of State for Public Af-
fairs has given the program vigorous and forward-
looking leadership. Obviously we cannot pass
judgment on the capabilities of all the officers he
has selected to carry on the work of the program
here and overseas. The progress of the program,
however, convinces us that he has brought together
an excellent staff and in our various contacts with
the program officers here and overseas we have
noted their devotion and enthusiasm for their jobs.

We feel that special comment is called for in
connection with the administration of this pro-
gram since we understand that this topic has been
under consideration in congressional cii"cles. This
Commission is a policy and program appraising
body and does not deal with administrative or op-
erating problems. However, a number of admin-
istrative studies, surveys, and changes designed
to improve the program as it expands have been
brought to our attention and should be cited.

About a year ago the Department of State was
reorganized along lines recommended by the
Hoover Commission. This reorganization laid
the groundwork for administering the information
and educational exchange programs along more
effective, better coordinated lines. Soon after this
reorganization, the Department employed a pri-
vate firm of well-known management engineoi-s
to make a survey of the operations and the ad-
ministrative aspects of the total educational ex-
change program. Many of the reconunendations
which came out of this survey have already been
put into effect and others are in process. This firm
reports to us that in general the operations of the
educational exchange jn-ogram compare favorably
with those of any private firm or institution doing
similar or related work.

790

Departmenf of Slate Bulletin

In order to obtain objective counsel on the pro-
fessional aspects of the publishing program, the
Department has employed three private experts
as consultants for the "program of the Division
of Libraries and Institutes. Two of these con-
sultants are in the publishing field and were se-
lected after obtaining the advice of the American
Book Publishers Council. These individuals have
spent on an average of 2 days a week for a period
of 2 months reviewing the program in detail.
They are now surveying operations at 17 overseas
missions in Europe and the Near East. The ap-
pointment of consultants on other phases of the
educational exchange program is in process.

The Commission wishes to make it clear that
we do not believe the program has attained its
maturity either in scope or definition. The process
of adjusting it to the tasks imposed by the Com-
munist challenge will be a continuous one. To
illustrate, we feel that the reexamination of the
content of the presentation made to other peoples,
as contrasted with the objectives sought, has only
just begun. Part of the approach used at one
time — the emphasis upon the strength and in-
dustrial wealth of the United States for ex-
ample— ran grave risks of creating envy and
resentment, rather than attitudes of cooperation
and friendship. We believe that more attention
should be given to the development of basic
themes for program guidance. Yet it would be
very unrealistic to insist that everything must
be accomplished at once, and we are unanimous
in reporting to the Congress that steady progress
has been made over this 3-year period in this in-
dispensable but relatively new undertaking. We
urge for it increased attention and constructive
criticism by the Congress and the public, and
further financial support.

The preceding statement is not intended as a
full and detailed report on the Department of
State's educational exchange program. It is not
the duty of this Commission to provide such in-
formation. Rather, it is a statement of the situ-
ation as the members of the Commission see it —
a i-esume of considerations which have led us to
believe that the educational exchange program is
sound in character and is making an indispensable
contribution to United States foreign policy.

The Commission has also studied certain specific
problems during the period covered by this report.
These problems and the Commission's recommen-
dations are set forth in the following section.

II. OTHER RECOMMENDATIONS AND
ACTIVITIES OF THE COMMISSION
ON EDUCATIONAL EXCHANGE

{July 1 -December 31, 1950)

A. Department of State Versus
Independent Agency Control

During the period covered by this report, there
have been various proposals to remove the inf orma-

May M, J95?

tion and educational exchange program from the
Department of State. This Commission's review
of the proposals has been made solely from the
standpoint of whether or not such action would
make for more effective operation of the educa-
tional exchange program.

This Commission believes, one member dissent-
ing, that the educational exchange program should
remain in the Department of State and we are so
advising the Secretary of State.

Our position is based on three major considera-
tions :

First, we believe that if the program is to be re-
sponsive to the needs of United States foreign pol-
icy, it must be closely integrated with the Depart-
ment of State offices which formulate such policy.

In the second place, the Department of State's
over-all educational exchange program is a com-
posite of many programs whose procedures and
policies have been closely integrated so as to give
the total effort common objectives. The Smith-
Mundt educational exchange program under Pub-
lic Law 402 is but one part of this over-all educa-
tional exchange program. Others are —

The Fulbright exchange program (Public Law 584, 79th
Con?.). ^. ,

The program for educational exchanges with Finland
(Public Law 265, 81st Cong.).

China area aid (Public Laws 327 and 535, 81st Cong.).

Iranian-American trust fund (Public Law 861, 81st

The German educational exchange program (Public
Law 535, 81st Cong.).

Thirdly, we feel that independent status for the
program would make it more difficult for the pro-
gram to operate effectively at the overseas missions.
Under the present set-up, the Foreign Service of-
ficers assigned to this program are a part of the
regular Foreign Service establishments. Then-
work is integrated with the official diplomatic
work. It is our opinion that if our educational
exchange officers operated in establishments sep-
arate from the embassies, their work could not be
as closely and effectively tied in with other em-
bassy activities.

We feel, however, that some improvements can
be made in the organization of the program by
making adjustments within the framework of the
Department of State itself. By the close of 1951
the two programs of Public Law 402 will account
for around one-half of the employees and half of
the total of the appropriations of the Department
of State. Also, the operations of the information
and educational exchange programs differ from
other activities of the Department of State which
historically have given primary emphasis to the
diplomatic and political side of international re-
lations. It is logical and desirable for special pro-
visions to be made for the two programs so as to
insure increased flexibility and increased speed of
operations. With these considerations in mind
we feel that the over-all status of the program in
the Department should be studied. We have been

791

informed that the Department is doing this and
"we look forward to reviewing the results of any
surveys conducted.

(This recommendation is being submitted to the
Department of State simultaneously with this re-
port to the Congress. Therefore, no depart-
mental reply can be reported at this time.)

B. Relationship of Information and Educational
Exchange Programs and Commissions

This Commission discussed with the Commis-
sion on Information the question as to whether
the information and educational exchange pro-
grams, and the two Advisory Commissions, could
more profitably be combined into a single under-
taking. Both Commissions agreed that the direc-
tion of both by one assistant secretary and a single
general manager, as well as the direction of both
in the field by a single public affairs officer, pro-
vided adequate coordination.

(No departmental action required.)

C. Coordination With Advisory Board
on International Development

The Commission on Educational Exchange and
the Advisory Board on International Develop-
ment have taken steps to insure the coordination
of their respective activities. This has been con-
sidered necessary because of the interrelation of
the progi'ams upon which both bodies advise.

A member of each body has been appointed to
specialize on the policies and operations of the
other board. If either specialist finds that prob-
lems of mutual interest are developing, either
body may request the advice and assistance of the
other through joint meetings of the two Boards
or conferences of individual members. Members
appointed to carry out these responsibilities are
as follows :

Advisory Board on International Development ; President
John A. Hannah, University of Michigan, member of
the Board

Advisory Commission on Educational Exchange: Chan-
celor Harvie Branscomb, Vanderbilt University,
Chairman of the Commission on Educational
Exchange

(No departmental action necessary.)

D. Evaluation of International Exchange
of Persons Activities

The Commission on Educational Exchange has
taken steps to develop specifications and secure
private sponsorship for an evaluation project deal-
ing with exchange of persons in order to ascertain
what elements have contributed to the success or
failure of programs of international exchange.
The Commission hopes to interest one of the larger
foundations in financing the project and arrang-
ing for its conduct, without any participation by

the Department of State or the Commission on
Educational Exchange.

(No departmental action necessary.)

E. The Department of State's Conduct
of the Finnish Program

The legislative history of Public Law 265,
Eighty-first Congress, clearly indicates that the
Congress intended for the Commission on Educa-
tional Exchange to assume advisory responsibil-
ities for the i^rogram of educational exchange
with Finland conducted under that law. Accord-
ingly, the Commission has reviewed the progress
made by the Department of State in the adminis-
tration of the program during fiscal year 1950,
the first year of the program's operation. For
this period, $264,422 was available for the Finnish
program, with two-thirds allotted to exchange of
persons activities.

Funds for exchange of persons activities ($176,-
281) provided for 50 grants to Finnish nationals —
10 grants to specialists and 40 to graduate students.
Fields covered included agriculture, education,
engineering, industrial relations, journalism, med-
icine, meteorology, natural sciences, woodworking,
and the humanities. These funds also provided
for one lecturer in American history to go to
Finland.

The selection procedures appear entirely satis-
factory. For specialist grants, the candidates
were nominated initially by the American Lega-
tion in Helsinki upon the recommendation of
Finnish professional organizations in their re-
spective fields, and final selections were made by
the Department of State. In connection with stu-
dent candidates, preliminary selections were made
in Finland by the Committee on Study and Train-
ing in the United States and reviewed by the
Legation, as well as the various professional com-
mittees of the Institute of International Edu-
cation in New York. Final selection was made
by the Department of State.

Over $88,000 was available under this program
for the purchase of special educational equipment
for use by institutions in Finland. This equip-
ment included scientific and technical books, jour-
nals, and periodicals as well as specialized
laboratory and visual aids equipment.

Since funds available for the Finnish program
under Public Law 265 may not bo used for ad-
ministrative purposes, the Department of State
has administered and serviced the program with-
out hiring additional personnel for this purpose.
Despite this, the Dejiartment has, in the opinion
of the Commission, established the program on a
sound footing and administered it well.

(No departmental action necessary as a result
of this statement.)

F. Labor in International Exchange

Communist propaganda is aimed at workers
wlio constitute a large and important part of the

792

Department of State Bulletin

world's population. The United States must
combat this influence to win the workers' support.
Our task must be to depict the true status of
workers in the U.S.S.K. and in Soviet satellite
countries in contrast to the position of labor in
the United States where workers have economic
security, dignity, self-respect, and recognition
without recourse to class warfare and dictator-
ship which the Communist doctrine holds to be
necessary before workers can attain their rights.

Both Government and labor have recognized
the importance of labor in international relations.
The Department of State has labor advisers and
consultants, and, at ovei-seas posts, labor attaches
and labor reporting officers form a part of the
United States diplomatic missions. Under the
EGA program and the Department of State's ex-
change-of-persons program numerous labor rep-
resentatives have visited the United States.
Organized American labor has developed its own
technical assistance program which was organized
in December 1949 under the sponsorship of the
International Confederation of Free Trade
Unions (Icftu), in protest against the Soviet
domination of the World Federation of Trade
Unions. The Iciro's progi'am is similar in con-
cept to point 4 activities. Among the many
projects initiated by the Icftu is that of establish-
ing training schools in Asia to prepare promising
leaders from countries in the region to function
more effectively in the development of free trade
unions.

The Commission on Educational Exchange en-
dorses heartily the emphasis being placed on labor
by the Department of State. However, we feel
that certain additional steps would increase the
effectiveness of the Department's activities.
Among these are the following which the Com-
mission recommends for consideration by the
Dejjartment of State :

(a) More scholarships at workers' education
centers and labor colleges.

(h) More planned short-term study tours of
trade-unionists on a functional basis.

(c) Special summer schools and institutes for
labor activists to study social problems and
solutions proposed in various countries.

(This recommendation was submitted to the
Department of State simultaneously with its sub-
mission to the Congress. Therefore no reply can
now be recorded.)

G. Orientation of Chinese Students

The Commission on Educational Exchange has
recommended that the Department of State take
the following steps in connection with the orienta-
tion of Chinese grantees in order to carry out the
terms of the legislation authorizing the China
area aid program (Public Law 535, 81st Cong.) :

(1) Urge foreign student advisers throughout
the United States to see that the Chinese student

grantees participate in American campus and
community life. This would include insuring
that the Chinese share appropriate housing facili-
ties with American students and other steps which
would be conducive to closer associations between
American and Chinese students, thereby avoiding
the formation of national cliques which tend to
isolate the Chinese from the American democratic
influences.

(2) Recommend that college or university rep-
resentatives, professors, advisers, and deans be en-
couraged, whenever possible without imposing
requirements concerning specific courses, to advise
and counsel Chinese students to take courses which
in the judgment of the advisers would enable them
to interpret American democracy more effectively
to their countrymen upon their return to China.

(3) Take such steps as are possible to insure
the widest practicable distribution throughout
American colleges and universities of Chinese stu-
dents who are entering the United States under
this progi-am.

(4) Proceed with the plans to hold a confer-
ence with representatives of colleges, educational
institutions, and universities with a sizable Chi-
nese enrollment in order that the Department and
the advisers may exchange experiences and de-
velop plans for the pi-ogram which will carry out
further the objectives of its authorizing legisla-
tion.

The Department of State has informed the Com-
mission that it will take action concerning the
above recommendations in accordance with the
following (excerpts from the Department's official
reply) :

The Commission set forth for the Department's con-
sideration one formal recommendation concerning the
China area aid program which is administered by tlie
Department under the authority of Public Law .535,
Eighty-first Congress. Your recommendation consisted of
four major proposals, each designed to insure more ef-
fective orientation of Chinese grantees in the American
way of life. Although each of these proposals bears on
problems wliich have been under consideration by the
Department we have benefited from the fresh approach
of the Commission.

Before commenting on the specific points recommended
by the Commission, I should like to mention the points
raised by the Department's Advisory Committee on Emer-
gency Aid to Chinese Students and Scholars, which de-
voted a major portion of its last meeting, in December
1950, to a discussion of the problems. The committee
agreed (1) that the orientation of Chinese students is
part of the larger question of foreign students generally ;
(2) that in dealing with this problem the most effective
work is done at the local level, and should not be under
direction from Washington; (.3) that the Department can
properly inquire of local institutions as to programs whicu
have been developed and their success to date and that fu-
ture progress in this direction sliould be reported to the
Department; (4) that over-all coordination can well be
achieved by regional or national conferences in which
experiences in this activity might be shared.

The Commission's first proposal was that the Depart-
ment of State urge foreign student advisers throughout
the United States to see that the Chinese student grantees
participate in American campus and community life.
Efforts have been made in this direction. Members of

May 14, 1951

793

the Department's staff have made extensive field trips to
discuss with university authorities and foreign student
advisers ways and means of stimulating participation of
('hinese students in extracurricular affairs. Since the
Department considers that signitieant progress is de-
IDeudent primarily upon efforts of the American commu-
nity, special attempts are constantly being made to enlist
the services of private agencies and local groups to do
their utmost to relate the community experiences of the
student to their educational goals. The work of the Na-
tional Association of Foreign Student Advisers has been
particularly fruitful in coordinating individual efforts and
in furthering participation by American groups in this
important phase of educational exchange. In line with
the Commission's proposal, the Department has taken addi-
tional steps. Arrangements have been made with the
National Association of Foreign Student Advisers to have
a full discussion of the problem at its conference to be held
in Denver next April. At this meeting the Department
will present the Commission's views on the subject.

The Commission's second proposal was that university
representatives and faculty advisers be encouraged to
counsel Chinese students to take courses which would en-
able them to interpret American democracy more effec-
tively upon their return to China. The Department feels
that implementation of this proposal might affect the suc-
cessful operation of the program in the individual colleges
and universities since the Federal Government has no
jurisdiction over the selection of courses in this or any
other program of educational exchange. We should like
to point out, however, that we have been informed of
action taken locally in line with the Commission's rec-
ommendation.

The Commission's next proposal was that the Depart-
ment insure the widest practical distribution of Chinese
students throughout American colleges. Full execution of
this proposal is limited due to the fact that the program
is based on the principle of providing assistance to Chinese
students already enrolled in accredited colleges and uni-
versities in the United States. However, there are now
some 530 institutions which have been approved for par-
ticipation in this program. The Department has indi-
rectly taken steps to prevent high concentrations of
Chinese nationals in a few schools by following, since
the inception of the program, a policy of discouraging the
transfer of Chinese students from one university to
another.

In connection with the Commission's fourth point en-
dorsing the Department's plan for meeting with repre-
sentatives of colleges and universities who are responsible
for various aspects of the Chinese aid program, I should
like to point out that the Department now considers it
preferable to approach the problem in a somewhat modi-
fied manner. For example, the Department has been
holding a series of small meetings on many campuses, at
which representatives of the Department discuss with
university officials problems related to the Chinese pro-
gram. The Advisory Committee on Emergency Aid to
Chinese Students and Scholars has been another effective
medium for exchanging views, and, in general, coordinat-
ing the ofjerations of this program. Also, at various
meetings of private groups, such as the National Asso-
ciation of Foreign Student Advisers, and various educa-
tional associations, there have been frequent and detailed
discussions of this program, in which representatives of
the Department have particiijated. From time to time
the Department has considered the possibility of conven-
ing a national conference of representatives of educa-
tional institutions to discuss problems arising from the
Chinese student program, but the Department believes it
is preferable to approach the problem through the de-
vices previousl,\- mentioned, rather than through such a
national conference.

The Department will continue to develop other means,
consistent with the substance of the Commission's recom-
mendations, whereby participants in tliis program may
obtain a better understanding of democratic principles
and processes as exemplified on the American scene.

III. RECOMMENDATIONS, FISCAL YEAR 1950,
FOR WHICH DEPARTMENTAL ACTION HAS NOT
BEEN PREVIOUSLY REPORTED TO CONGRESS

Destitute Chinese Students

Recommendation

The Commission considers that its general pro-
posals for United States financial aid to destitute
foreign students remain sound but that subsequent
changes in the Far East necessitate a revision of its
recommendations with respect to destitute Chinese
students. (The text of these proposals may be
found on pp. 9-11, H. Doc. No. 431, 81st Cong.,
Dec. 29, 1949.) The following statement is a re-
vision of these recommendations :

The Commission approves efforts of the United
States Government to strengthen democratic ele-
ments in China by providing educational oppor-
tunities in this country for future Chinese leaders.
Further, insofar as the Commission's previous rec-
ommendations are concerned, we wish to leave to
the discretion of the Department of State the ques-
tion of requiring the return to China of Chinese
students in the United States. However, even
though this question must be decided in the light
of changing conditions in China and the avail-
ability of funds, the program should be based on
the general guiding principle that foreign stu-
dents should return to their own countries upon
completion of their educational program and make
their training and experience available to their
people.

Action {departmental reply)

The Department is in agreement with the Com-
mission's recommendations on aid to destitute
Chinese students. Regulations governing the ad-
ministration of the $6,000,000 now available for
such aid are being drafted by the Department.
Provision for payment of return travel of needy
Chinese will continue to be made. This, in itself,
indicates the Department's intent that recipients
of such aid shall, like all other United States Gov-
ernment grantees, be expected to return to their
own countries to make their training and experi-
ence available to their own people as soon as prac-
ticable. The matter of requiring the return to
China of Chinese students in the United States is,
however, within the province of the Immigration
and Naturalization Service of the Department of
Justice.

Report From United States Grantees

Recommendation

The Commission on Educational Exchange rec-
onunends that the Department of State, in order
to insure the proper supervision, control, and eval-
uation of the exchange-of-persons programs, re-
quire all persons receiving United States (Jovern-
mcnt grants to submit adeqiutte reports covering
their activities during the period of the grant.

794

Department of State Bulletin

Action (departmental reply)

The Department agrees with the Commission's
recommendation regarding reports from persons
receiving United States Government grants, lie-
ports are required from all United States Govern-
ment grantees. At present there is great variation
in the form of these reports. An effort is being
made, however, to utilize these reports more fully.
The Department will develop, with the assistance
of its missions abroad and the cooperating agen-
cies in the United States, a common format and
content pattern for these reports which will pro-
duce the information necessary to insure that
proper supervision, control, and evaluation of the
exchange of persons program is maintained.

Two projects now in progress will contribute
to our study of this problem. Results of the
management survey of the Office of Educational
Exchange will include suggestions for improve-
ment of the reporting functions in terms of more
efficient organization of personnel assigned to
analyze and exploit this material. The results
of this survey will be available November 1, 1950.
Likewise, one of the objectives of the current plan-
ning study for the application of evaluation
techniques to the educational exchange program is
to review and make a qualitative assessment of
existing government reporting and analysis pro-
cedures, and recommend practical revisions which
will increase their value.

Stabilization of Latin-American Program

RecorriTnendation

The Commission on Educational Exchange
makes the recommendation to the Department of
State that it investigate the possibility of utilizing
foreign currency credits resulting from the sale
of United States surplus property to stabilize the
educational exchange program in the other
American Republics.

Action {departmental reply)

With regard to the Commission's recommenda-
tion for stabilization of the Latin-American pro-
S-am, the Department desires to inform the
ommission that it has been investigating the
possibility of utilizing foreign currency credits
resulting from the sale of United States surplus
property for exchange-of-persons programs with
the other American Republics. A recent reexam-
ination of the situation, however, reveals that
under the surplus-property agreements negotiated
with the other American Republics there are no
foreign currencies available for educational ex-
change purposes. Wliile some foreign currencies
have been made available to the United States
Government as a result of lend-lease settlements,
these moneys may not be used for educational ex-
changes under the Fulbright Act, which is limited
to the use of credits resulting from surplus-
property agreements.

However, the Department will continue to take
every opportunity to seek foreign currency credits
in this area which may be used for educational
exchange purposes. The Department is also ex-
ploring new ways of stimulating greater use of
funds from private organizations and private
enterprise.

ATTACHMENT

Soviet Cultural Influence in North Korea

The predominant role of the Soviet Union in
North Korea is reflected in North Korean educa-
tion and culture. During the period of Japanese
rule, mass education of the Koreans was neglected,
artistic creativity was repressed, and literature,
drama, and art were limited to a select few, mainly
Koreans educated in Japan. The educational and
cultural void enabled first the Soviet occupation
forces and then the North Korean regime to foster
Soviet culture among the mass Korean people
through the educational system and through the
encouragement of mass appreciation of Soviet
literature, drama, and art. Until the past year,
however, lack of facilities limited the scope of the
educational and cultural program. Since then,
there has been increased activity in both programs.

Most aspects of Soviet cultural imperialism are
carried out through official channels. The pro-
grams are facilitated by the Economic and Cul-
tural Agreement of March 17, 1949, which states :

The contracting parties shall In every way develop and
consolidate the relations which have been established
between them in the spheres of culture, science, and art.

The objectives of the Soviet educational and
cultural programs are publicly supported by the
North Korean Government leaders, who have
avowed the superiority of Soviet culture and have
encouraged the spread of training in the Russian
language, the influx of Soviet educators into the
schools, the translation, publication, and reading
of Soviet literature ancl the cultivation of Soviet
artistic works.^

° Typical statements propounding Soviet cultural su-
periority are :

"In order to develop the important educational culture,
it is the most pressing popular aspiration to study and
absorb broadly the advanced Soviet educational science,
and to consolidate more than ever the everlasting im-
perishable good will between Korea and the Soviet Union.
. . . Soviet educational science occupies the highest place
in the world as the means to develop culture and the
weapon for the realization of a Communist society."
(Pyongyang radio broadcast on October 26, 1949, of a
speech by I'aik Nam Un, Minister of Education.)

"Only by absorbing the advanced Soviet culture will we
be able to develop our national culture further. There-
fore we must intensify our efforts to absorb more vigor-
ously the advanced Soviet culture so that we may develop
our national culture to a higher level and make ours a
rich, powerful country." (Pyongyang radio broadcast on
October 19, 1949, of a speech by V&<^ Chong Son, Vice
Minister of Culture and Propaganda, on the necessity for
the absorption of Soviet culture.)

Moy J4, ?95?

795

The educational and cultural programs pro-
jected to encourage assimilation of Soviet culture
are implemented mainly by the Ministries of Edu-
cation and Pi'opaganda. In addition, there are
special organizations cliarged with tlie responsi-
bility for the propagation of Soviet culture. The
Korean-Soviet Culture Society is the indigenous
agency primarily responsible for the Soviet cul-
tural program. In the fall of 1945 the society had
a membership of about 3,700, -with only 20
branches. By May 1949, the membership of the
society was over 1,300,000, with 105 branches and
20,000 units. Among the activities of the society
are the translation and publication of books, the
publication of a newspaper and a magazine, and
the making of arrangements for lecture tours,
concerts, theatrical performances, etc.

There are, moreover, certain Soviet organiza-
tions that direct the flow of materials and Soviet
representatives to the Korean-Soviet Culture So-
ciety and to other indigenous organizations.
Among these are the Soviet culture houses and
several propaganda outlets under the Soviet Em-
bassy ; the Soviet Information Bureau and Soviet
libraries; the Soviet Motion Picture Export and
Import Society (a branch of the Soviet Ministry
of Cinema Industry) ; and the Tass News Agency.

SOVIET INFLUENCE ON THE EDUCATIONAL SYSTEM

A primary objective of Soviet educational
policy is the teaching of Russian as the second
language in North Korean schools. The Ministry
of Education has reportedly decreed that Russian
will be the only required foi'eign language in Ko-
rean schools. In order to train middle school
teachers and Government employees, 109 special
Russian-language schools have been established.
There are reported to be 1,580 graduates of these
special schools already. A Russian Language Col-
lege has been established in Pyongyang. Reliable
reports indicate that the Russian language has
been added to the curriculum of other colleges and
universities. In addition to Russian training,
courses on Marxism, Soviet history, literature, art,
and other aspects of the Soviet civilization are
offered in North Korean schools.

Soviet influence over the educational system is
further manifested through the assignment of
Soviet scholars and professors to teach in North
Korean colleges and universities, short visits of
other Soviet academic personnel, and the provi-
sion of Soviet textbooks, teaching and training
manuals, experimental apparatus, and literary
works on both an advanced and an elementary
level. It is reported that 13 of the original mem-
bers of the teacliing staff of Kim II Sung Univer-

sity were Russians. Since July 1948, more than
30 well-known Soviet scholars have visited the
various Korean institutions of higher learning to
assist in their educational programs. Soviet en-
gineers also visited Korea to provide similar assist-
ance in industrial and agricultural fields.

The Soviet Union has also brought Korean
students to the U.S.S.R. for educational training
in the natural sciences, humanities, public admin-
istration, and engineering and other technical
fields. More than 600 such students, both men
and women, are currently in the Soviet Union, and
recent reports indicate that many more students
are expected to go to the U.S.S.R. These stu-
dents, upon their return, are expected to assume
positions of responsibility in the Government and
political organizations and to form a nucleus for
the Communist intelligentsia in North Korea.

CULTURAL ASSIMILATION

Assimilation of Soviet culture is sought not
only through Soviet influence over the educational
system but also through dissemination to the gen-
eral public of a wide variety of translated Soviet
publications; the performance of Soviet motion
pictures, plays, music, ballet, and the like ; the ex-
hibition of Soviet creative woi'ks; and the visits
and lectures of Soviet writers, artists, and other
cultural representatives. In the field of publica-
tions, from the time of the Soviet "liberation" up
to 1948, 72 books (with a total of 770,000 copies)
were published in North Korea, most of them
translations of Soviet literature and technical
books. In 1949, some 500 books were translated;
copies of the History of the Communist Party
(Bolshevik) of the U.S.S.R. and Stalin's Col-
lected Works alone totaled 537,000. In addition,
two daily newspapers are devoted primarily to
Soviet writings; one published by the Korean-
Soviet Culture Society and the other by the Soviet
Foreign Culture Association. Finally, there is
also a weekly publication of the Soviet Foreign
Culture Association and a magazine published by
the Korean-Soviet Culture Society.

In the nonpublication fields, there are numerous
examples of Soviet cultural penetration. During
1949 more than 209 Soviet films were imported
into North Korea and shown in both urban and
rural areas. The State Theater at Pyongyang,
established on January 9, 1947, is reserved for the
performance of Soviet plays and for concerts by
Soviet musicians and dancers. Its limited facili-
ties, however, permitted the production of only
eight plays in 1950. Finally, almost 70,000 lec-
tures and concerts were given by Soviet artists,
writers, and other cultural representatives in 1948,
and an even greater number were given in 1949.

796

Department of State Bulletin

The United States in the United Nations

[May 4-10, 1951]

Security Council

As a result of the increased tempo of the fight-
ing, which broke out the latter part of last week
in and around the demilitarized zone between
Israel and Syria, tlie Council met on May 8 to con-
sider the immediate issuance of a cease-fire order.

United States Ambassador Warren R. Austin
introduced the following draft resolution
(S/2130), cosponsored by France, Turkey, United
Kingdom, and the United States :

The Security Council

1. Recalling Its resolutions of 15 July 1948, 11 August
1949, 17 November 1950,

2. Noting with concern that fighting has broken out in
and around the demilitarized zone established by the
Syrian-Israeli General Armistice Agreement of 20 July
1949 and that fighting is continuing despite the cease-fire
order of the Acting Chief of Staff of the United Nations
Truce Supervision Organization issued on 4 May 1951,

3. Calls upon the parties or persons in the areas con-
cerned to cease fighting and brings to the attention of the
parties their obligations under article 2, paragraph 4 of
the Charter of the United Nations and the Security-Coun-
cil's resolution of 15 July 1948 and their commitments
under the General Armistice Agreement and accordingly
calls upon them to comply with these obligations and
commitments.

Mr. Austin stated that it was important that the
fighting stop; otherwise the peace of the entire
area would be jeopardized. The action of the
Security Council would be directed to the parties
and persons in the area without prejudice to fur-
ther deliberation by the Council. Later, in assess-
ing responsibility for the outbreak, the Council
might want to take into account the readiness of
the parties to comply with the Council directives.
Neither Israel nor Syria should lay down any con-
ditions for carrying out the cease-fire order.
Adoption of the resolution, he added, would in
no way mean that the Council was dropping dis-
cussion of the Palestine question. This was
merely an emergency step, required by the circum-
stances, and debate on the main question should
continue afterward.

Sir Gladwyn Jebb (U.K.) stated that his Gov-
ernment had been gravely disturbed by the recent
deterioration of relations between Israel and Syria
and by the outbreak of fighting in the demili-

tarized zone. It was his Government's view that
redress for the fighting should be sought through
the machinery provided in the general armistice
agreement and not through resort to armed force.
There could be no justification on the part of either
party not to attend the Mixed Armistice Commis-
sion's (Mac) meetings, nor generally to cooperate
in its work.

The French representative, Francis Lacoste, ex-
pressed the deep concern of his Government over
the dispute and stated that the need for a return
to a de facto peace was very urgent.

Ambassador Selim Sarper (Turkey), in ex-
plaining his Government's cosponsorship of the
resolution, pointed out there was nothing in its
terms which would prejudice the claims of either
party.

Ambassador Abba S. Eban (Israel) said the
Syrian aggression had increased in scope and mo-
mentum and had now led to Israel's formal pro-
test and complaint. The Syrian army had estab-
lished itself at the southern triangle of the
demilitarized zone. In addition, it had canceled
and violated a cease-fire arrangement, had inflicted
and suffered considerable casualties, and had left
behind unmistakable evidences of Syrian military
occupation. His Government could not give the
slightest credence to suggestions that the forces
attacking the Israeli territory were "civilians."
Furthermore, Israel held the Syrian Government
wholly responsible for the activities of these
attacking forces. The intensive Syrian aggres-
sion had been accompanied with a virtual break-
down of United Nations machinery in the area.
He criticized the reports sent to the Security
Council as disjointed recitals which consisted
mainly of reports submitted by both parties. The
Israeli complaints had not been accurately or fully
transmitted, and the main military engagements
had been entirely ignored. In referring to the
resolution, he stated he was in full accord with its
central theme. At the same time, he noted the
armistice agreement provided for the absence of
military and paramilitary units from the demili-
tarized zone. Therefore, he suggested an amend-
ment to the resolution which would require with-
drawal of all military and paramilitary units that

May 14, 1951

797

had penetrated the zone. He concluded by re-
serving the right to seek condemnation of Syrian
aggression.

Faris El-Khoury Bey, chairman of the Syrian
delegation to the United Nations, stressed that the
several reports from the Truce Supervision Or-
ganization substantiated his denial that Syrian
units had been guilty of aggression. In particu-
lar, he referred to a cable of May 4 which dis-
counted an Israeli claim regarding an alleged
attack on Tel El Mutilla by Syrian forces. While
denying that Syria was attempting to occupy the
zone, Mv. El-Khoury stated that Syria considered
all claims to the zone were in abeyance during the
armistice. He charged that Israel had planned
and perpetrated iniquitous methods of ridding the
Huleh drainage area of Arab landowners. The
Council should provide for the immediate suspen-
sion of the Huleh project, pending further discus-
sions in the Mac and pending the acquisition of
needed land by the free consent of the owners.
Also, there should be the immediate return of all
inhabitants of the zone. Further, there should be
payment by Israel to the Arabs for destroyed
property. All militai'y and paramilitary forces
should be withdrawn from the zone, including
police units not locally recruited. The Council
and the two parties should confirm the powers of
the Chief of Staff of the Truce Supervision Organ-
ization and the Mixed Armistice Commission. He
read a declaration from his Government which
stated that the United Nations observers were no
longer able to perform their duties because of
flagrant disregard of their authority. The state-
ment also said Israel was trying to utilize tlie
delay in the Council on the dispute in an effort
to present a fait accompli. He also offered an
amendment to the resolution, which would pro-
vide for the withdrawal of military and paramili-
tary units, as well as the safe return of all civilian
inhabitants to the demilitarized zone. He stated
that Syria agreed to the cease-fire.

The Council decided not to consider the amend-
ments offered and adopted the four-state resolu-
tion by a vote of 10-0-1 (U.S.S.R.).

Under questioning, Maj. Gen. William E. Riley,
USMC, who planned to return to the Middle East
on May 13, gave data to the Council concerning
the predominance of Arab population in the de-

militarized zone, together with the information
that two Arab villages in the zone had been de-
stroyed. He also stated that at the present time
there were 30 United Nations observers, and that
five additional observers had been requested.
However, if the Mixed Armistice Commission
were used, he thought he could get along with the
present number.

Specialized Agencies

World Health Organization {'WHO).—H\\&
Fourth World Health Assembly, legislative body
of Who, opened May 7 at Geneva. The member-
ship comprises 76 nations; three other countries —
Japan, Spain, and the German Federal Republic —
have sent representatives and have requested full
membership in the Organization.

Dr. Leonard A. Scheele, Surgeon General of the
United States Public Health Service, was desig-
nated by President Truman to head the 19-mem-
ber United States delegation to the Assembly.
Dr. Scheele was elected president, and Dr. D. A.
Dowling (Australia), Dr. A. H. Taba (Iran), and
Dr. K. Evang (Norway) were elected vice
presidents.

One of the important events that will take place
at this conference is the adoption of a single code
of International Sanitary Regulations to replace
the many existing sanitary conventions.

Other agenda items include: (1) Completion
of work on a 4-j'ear plan for world health designed
to strengthen national public health services and
develop Who's permanent world-wide technical
services; (2) Plans to expand AVho services
through funds provided by the United Nations
program of technical assistance for economic de-
velopment; (3) The Director-General's annual
report for 1950; and (4) Various financial mat-
ters, including fixing a scale of assessment for
1952.

Dr. Scheele, in accepting the presidency, said:

The United States firmly desires to continue its support
to the World Health Organization to the end that the
world may be a better and more healthful place for all.
. . . We believe that health improvement in all parts
of the world is one of the main roads to peace. The world
cannot remain half healthy and half sick and still main-
tain economic, moral, and spiritual equilibrium.

798

Department of Slate Bulletin

THE FOREIGN SERVICE

Career Foreign Service Officer
Category Expanded

[Released to the press May 2]

On April 16, the Department of State an-
nounced a program designed to improve the per-
sonnel program of the Department and the unilied
Foreign Service of the United States.^ In the
furtherance of that program, the Department an-
nounced today a program for substantial expan-
sion of the career Foreign Service officer category
to meet the increased needs for such officers in the
conduct of foreign affairs.

To achieve this objective, lateral entry to the
intermediate and upper grades of the career serv-
ice will be thrown open for a period of 3 years
to qualified noncareer officers of the Department
of State, the Foreign Service Staff Corps, and the
Foreign Service Reserve without restriction as to
number. (The term "lateral entry" is applied
to the entry into the career Foreign Service of
noncareer officers of the Department, the Foreign
Service Staff Corps, and the Foreign Service Re-
serve at approximately the same salary or grade
level as that currently held by such noncareer per-
sonnel.) All qualified officers in the noncareer
service are being urged to make application for
entry into the career service under this program.

At the same time, a systematic and intensive
campaign is being inaugurated in colleges and uni-
vei-sities throughout the country to increase the
immber and quality of young men and women
seeking appointment at the entrance level as For-
eign Service officer, Class 6. This drive is being
inaugurated in order that the base of the service
may be expanded to keep pace with increases in
the middle and upper grades.

Selection, in all cases, will be on the basis of
examinations conducted by the Board of Exam-
iners for the Foreign Service.

Those eligible for consideration for the career
Foreign Service officer category under the expan-
sion program are:

1. All personnel of the Department of State, the Staff
Corps, and the Foreign Service Reserve, including per-
sonnel of the Economic Cooperation Administration ap-
pointed under the provisions of the Economic Coopera-
tion Act of 1948.

2. Applicants must be American citizens of at least 10
years.

3. Married applicants must be married to American
citizens.

4. Applicants must have rendered at least 3 years of
continuous service in positions of responsibility in the
Department of State or Foreign Service or have been em-
ployed by the Economic Cooperation Administration fol-
lowinfr appointment under the provisions of the Economic

' BUI.LETIN of Apr. 30, 1951, p. 715.

Cooperation Act of 1948 and have achieved an efficiency
rating of Very Good or ExceUent (or their equivalent)
for each of those years.

5. Applicants under the age of 31 must have rendered
4 years continuous service and have achieved Very Good
or ISxcellent efficiency ratings for those years.

6. All applicants must be under age 52 as of July 1, 1951.

Any employee of the Department, the Staff or
the Reserve who does not meet these qualifications
on July 1, 1951, but who expects to meet them on
or before January 1, 1954, will be permitted to
submit an application for designation for exami-
nation. A deadline of November 1, 1951, has
been established for the receipt of applications.
Applicants wishing to be examined during the
present calendar year, however, must submit ap-
plications no later than June 29, 1951.

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

For sale ly the Superintendent of Documents, Oovern-
ment Printing Offlce, Washington 25, D. C. Address re-
guests direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except
in the case of free publications, which may be obtained
from the Department of State.

Overseas Information Progrrams of the United States
Government. Bibliography No. 58. February 28, 1951.
Division of Library and Reference Services. 34 pp. 250.

A selection of writings appearing in books, periodicals,
documentary materials and oflJcial publications on the
organization and administration of the overseas in-
formation programs and in particular those concerned
with the various media used in the dissemination of
information abroad. References to the activities of
nongovernmental and international agencies have also
been included.

Massachusetts and Foreign Trade. 23 pp. Free. Limited
distribution.

One of the reports prepared by the Department of
State in response to a large number of requests from
Individuals and organized groups. Statistical data
were prepared by the International Economic Analy-
sis Division, Department of Commerce.

Education: Cooperative Program in Panama. Treaties
and Other International Acts Series 2148. Pub. 4065.
22 pp. 10^.

Agreement between the United States and Panama
Extending Program provided by agreement of No-
vember 13 and 14, 1944 — Effected by exchange of notes
signed at PanamS. September 23 and 24, 1948 ; en-
tered into force September 24, 1948 ; operative retro-
actively from June 30, 1948.

Confuse and Control: Soviet Techniques in Germany.

European and British Commonwealth Series 17. Puli.
4107. 108 pp. 30«*.

Description of Soviet efforts to reduce the German
people to a helpless confusion of distrust and di-
vided purpose. Full pictorial coverage of topics with
maps, cartoons, and photographs; reproductions of
Communist posters.

May 14, 1951

799

May 14, 1951

Ind

ex

Vol. XXIV, No. 619

Africa Page

ETHIOPIA: Contribution to Korean Conflict
(Hickerson before Va. Federation of
Woraens's Clubs. Washington) 778

Aid to Foreign Countries

KOREA: Wedemeyer's Report (Acheson) . . . 784

American Republics

Educational Exchange Program: Recommenda-
tion by Advisory Commission and Depart-
mental Reply 795

Arms and Armed Forces

American Soldier's Death in Vieima Investi-
gated 787

U.N. as Collective Security Organ (Bancroft) . 771
Wedemeyer's Korean Report (Acheson) . . . 784

Asia

CHINA: Educational Exchange Program (Public
Law 535), Recommendations and Depart-
mental Reply 793

Defending Peace From Soviet Thrusts (Acheson

before U.S. Chamber of Commerce) . . . 766

Effectiveness of VOA 780

JAPAN : Peace Treaty, Progress Report .... 779
KOREA:

Norway Contributes Mobile Hospital Unit . . 784

Soviet Cultural Influence 795

U.N. Action (Hickerson before Va. Federation

of Women's Clubs, Washington) .... 775
Wedemeyer's Report (Acheson) 784

Claims and Property

German-Looted Gold Claims Submitted to Arbi-
trator by U.S., Prance, and U.K 785

Communism

Defending Peace From Soviet Thrusts (Acheson

before U.S. Chamber of Commerce) . . . 766

Educational Exchange Program: Appraisal and
Recommendations. 5th Report of Advisory
Commission 788

Effectiveness of VOA (Kohler before Institute for
Education by Radio-Television, Columbus,
Ohio) 780

U.N. Action on Collective Security (Hickerson
before Va. Federation of Women's Clubs,
Washington) 775

Why We Need Allies (Truman before Civil De-
fense Conference, Washington, D.C.) . . 763

Congress

U.S. Advisory Commission on Educational Ex-
change, 5th Report Submitted (Public Law
402) 788

Europe

ALBANIA: German-Looted Gold Claims Sub-
mitted to Arbitrator by U.S., France, and
U.K 785

AUSTRIA: American Soldier's Death Investi-
gated 787

Effectiveness of VOA 780

FINLAND : Educational Exchange Program

(Public Law 265) Appraised 792

GERMANY: Relay of VOA Programs, Negotia-
tions for Agreement 783

HUNGARY: American Passports Now Issued for

Travel in Hungary 770

ITALY: German-Looted Gold Claims Submitted

to Arbitrator by U.S., France, and U.K. . . 785

NORWAY: Mobile Hospital Contributed for

Korea 784

POLAND: VOA Honors Anniversary of Constitu-
tion (Truman) 783

U.S.S.R.:

American Soldier's Death In Vienna Investi-
gated 787

Defending Peace From Soviet Thrusts (Ache-
son before U.S. Chamber of Commerce) . . 766
Wedemeyer's Korean Report (Acheson) . . 784

Foreign Service

American Soldier's Death Ui Vienna Investi-
gated 787

Foreign Service — Continued Page

Career Officer Category Expanded 799

Passports to Hungary Now Issued 770

Industry

Defending Peace From Soviet Thrusts (Acheson

before U.S. Chamber of Commerce) . . . 766

Information and Educational Exchange Pro-
gram

Educational Exchange Program (Public Law
402), 5th Report of Advisory Commission:
Appraisal and Recommendations .... 788
VOA:
Agreement on Relay of German-Language Pro-
grams. Negotiations 783

Effectiveness (Kohler before Institute for
Education by Radio-Television, Columbus,

Ohio) 780

Polish Constitution Anniversary Honored

(Truman) 783

Labor

Role of Educational Exchange Program . . . 792

Mutual Aid and Defense

Defending Peace From Soviet Thrusts (Acheson

before U.S. Chamber of Commerce) . . . 766

Why We Need Allies (Truman before Civil De-
fense Conference, Washington, D.C. . . . 763

U.N. Action on Collective Security (Hickerson
before Va. Federation of Women's Clubs,
Washington) 775

U.N. Collective Security (Bancroft before Am.

Soc. of Internat. Law, Washington) ... 771

North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)

Defending Peace Prom Soviet Thrusts (Acheson

before U.S. Chamber of Commerce) . . . 766

Protection of U.S. Nationals and Property

Robert Vogeler Expresses Gratitude to President

and Secretary 770

Publications

Recent Releases 799

Telecommunications

Effectiveness of VOA (Kohler before Institute for
Education by Radio-Television, Columbus,
Ohio) 780

Treaties and Other International Ag^reements

German-Looted Gold Claims: Submission to
Arbitrator by U.S., France, and U.K.:

Agreement, Text 786

Statement 785

GERMANY: Relay of VOA Programs, Negotia-
tions for Agreement 783

JAPAN: Peace Treaty, Progress Report . . . 779

United Nations

As a Collective Security Organization (Bancroft
before Am. Soc. of Internat. Law, Wash-
ington) 771

Action on Collective Security (Hickerson before
Va. Federation of Women's Clubs, Wash-
ington) 775

Norway Contributes Mobile Hospital for Korea . 784

U.S. in U.N. (Weekly Summary) 797

Wedemeyer's Korean Report (Acheson) . . . 784
Why We Need Allies (Truman before Civil De-
fense Conference, Washington, D.C.) . . . 763

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 766. 770. 784, 787

Austin, Warren R 772, 773, 774, 778

Bancroft, Harding F 771

Branscomb, Harvie 788

Bonnet. Henri 787

Dulles, John F 779

Franks, Oliver S 787

Hickerson, John D 775

Kohler, Foy D 780

Truman, President Harry S. . . . 763,770,779,783

Vogeler, Robert 770

Wedemeyer, General 784

^Ae/ u/eha^tmeni/ ^ t/taie^

1

THE GREAT ALLIANCE OF FREE MEN • hyW.

Avcrell Harriman 806

U.S., U.K., AND FRENCH DEPUTIES PRESENT
ALTERNATIVE PROPOSALS FOR MEETING OF
FOREIGN MINISTERS 803

NORTH ATLANTIC COUNCIL, FINANCIAL AND
ECONOMIC BOARD ADOPT TERMS OF REFER-

ENCE # Communique .......... 810

For index see back cover

Vol. XXIV, No. 620
May 21, 1951

^Ae

U. S. SUPERINTENDENT 9F DOCUMENTS

MAY 31 ^951

bulletin

Vol. XXIV, No. 620 • Publication 4220
May 21, 1951

Tor sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 25, D.C.

Prick:

(2 iuuei, domestic $7.60, foreign $10.25

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1049).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
coiiyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the tcork of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as u-ell as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of interruitional relations, are listed
currently.

U.S., U.K., and French Deputies Present Alternative Proposals
for Meeting of Foreign Ministers

STATEMENT BY AMBASSADOR JESSUP >

In i)rvscnting the three altintativcs in hchalf of the
United titatcs. United Kingdom, und France, Ambassador
Philip C. Jessup of the United Slates made the following
explanation.

Our discussions here have reached an impasse.
For 8 weeks the representatives of the United
States, tlie United Kingdom, and France have
continued to explore every avenue which might
lead to agreement on an agenda for a meeting of
the four Ministers.

I believe it is unnecessary to review the argu-
ments or to restate the present situation. I only
wish to point out again that while the three dele-
gations submitted new proposals for a complete
agenda on April 2, 17, and 27, the Soviet delegate
has submitted no new proposal for a complete
agenda since March 5.

Since it is the desire of the Governments of
tlie United States, United Kingdom, and France
that the Foreign Ministers should meet, we have
explored every possible way to end the impasse.
In a further effort to reach agreement on an
agenda which will permit the Foreign Ministers
to meet, the three delegations now make three
alternative proposals. The four Foreign Minis-
ters could meet on the basis of any one of these
proposals.

Alternative A

Since I shall confine my statement to an ex-
planation of the three alternative proposals they
will be distributed now. The first alternative
proposal, which is marked "Alternative A," rep-
resents a maximum effort by the three delegations
to secure agreement upon an agenda along the
lines of the discussion in the last 8 weeks. Three
changes have been made in the text of the draft
M-liich was proposed by the tliree delegations on
April 27.

In the first place, the text of the new proposal
changes the order of the point on the demilitariza-
tion of Germany so as to place it first among the

'Made on May 2 at Paris and roleascd to the press in
Washington on May 9.

May 2J, T95I

Alternative A

[Released to the press at Paris May S and at Wash-
ingtMi May 9]

I. Examination of the causes and effects of
Iiresent international tensions in Enrope and of the
means to secure a real and lastin;; improvement in
the relations between the Soviet Union, the United
States, United Kingdom and Prance, including the
following questions relating to : the demilitarization
of Germany ; the existing level of armaments and
armed forces and measures to be proposed jointly
by the U.S.S.R., United States, United Kingdom
and France for the international control and reduc-
tion of armaments and armed forces; fulfillment of
present treaty obligations and agreements; the
elimination of the threat of war and fear of
aggression.

II. Completion of the treaty for the reestablish-
ment of an independent and democratic Austria.

III. Problems relating to the reestablishment of
German unity and the preparation of a treaty of
peace.

IV. Fulfillment of the treaties of peace with
Italy, Rumania, Bulgaria, and Hungary : agree-
ments of the Four Powers concerning Germany and
Austria.

V. Fulfillment of the treaty of peace with Italy
in the part concerning Trieste.

several points included by way of example in
item I.

We still see no logic in the Soviet arguments in
favor of having the Miiusters discuss the ques-
tion of German demilitarization before they
discuss the general problem of armaments. How-
ever, contrary to Mr. Gromyko's statement on
Monday, the three delegations have had no
ulterior purpose in trying to persuade the Soviet
representative of the soundness of their point of
view on this question of order.

We liave been guided wholly by considerations
of logic and common sense and by a desire to
facilitate the work of the Ministers by listing
items in an orderly way. The several points
listed in item I are all parts of a single item.

This item calls for an "examination of the causes
and effects of present international tensions in
Europe and a means to secure a real and lasting

803

improvement in the relations" between the Four
Powers. The proposed agenda specifies certain
questions which are to be included in that exami-
nation. We think that the Soviet argument that
any one of these points would be "buried" if it
were listed second or even third is silly. It obvi-
ously has no relation to the realities of a discus-
sion by the four Ministers under a single heading.

However, since the change of the order of this
point in item I involves no commitment of funda-
mental principles, the three delegations propose
to meet the Soviet view in this respect in
"Alternative A."

This proposal by the three delegations may well
be regarded as a test of the general Soviet posi-
tion and of its delegations' willingness to cooperate
with the other three delegations in arranging for
a meeting of the four Ministers. The proposal on
this point is advanced for the purpose of reaching
full agreement and for no other reason.

No change has been made in the wording of the
point dealing with armaments because the Soviet
proposal prejudges the issues which the four
Ministers are to consider. The effect of the Soviet
proposal, as explained by Mr. Gromyko, would be
to commit the four Governments in advance to
take as their aim the reduction of the armaments
and armed forces of the Four Powers without re-
gard to the armaments and armed forces of other
countries and without sufficient regard to the
necessary examination of the existing level of
armaments and armed forces and of the estab-
lishment of international controls.

It is unnecessary to restate at length the reasons
why the three Governments reject the Soviet
wording on this matter of armaments. I merely
state the fact again that the Soviet proposal is not
acceptable.

The new proposal marked "Alternative A" con-
tains a change in items IV and V. This change
is the insertion of the word "fulfillment" in both
items. The Soviet representative has insisted on
the exact wording of the item on Trieste which
the Soviet delegation proposed. The other three
representatives have pointed out to Mr. Gromyko
the possibility of misvuiderstanding if the word
"fulfillment" was used in this item.

In response to the arguments of the three rep-
resentatives, Mr. Gromyko has insisted that the
Soviet Government has no intention of overlook-
ing the role of the Security Council of the United
Nations under the Italian peace treaty in the part
concerning Trieste.

The three delegations have taken this into ac-
count. They recall also that one of the agreed
points under item I reads "fidfillnient of present
treaty obligations and agreements." The three
Goverimients, of course, liave no objection to the
Ministers examining the question of the fullill-
ment of any outstanding treaty or agrcenu'nt.

Clearly, if it is aijpropriate that the word "ful-
fillment" should be included in tlie item on Trieste,

it should also be included in item IV which refers
to "treaties of peace with Italy, Rumania, Bul-
garia and Hungary : agi'eements of the Four
Powers concerning Germany and Austria." This
word accordingly has been inserted in both these
paragraphs.

The Soviet proposal of an item on the North
Atlantic Ti-eaty and bases has not been included
because it is completely unacceptable to the
three Governments for reasons with which
Mr. Gromyko is entirely familiar.

The three delegations would be entitled to ex-
pect the Soviet delegation's acceptance of this
new proposal listed as "Alternative A" if it were
convinced that the Soviet delegation shares in
equal measure the desire of the three delegations
to reach agreement upon the full text of an
agenda. The three delegations hope that this
will prove to be the fact and that the work of
these meetings can now be concluded by
Soviet agreement to the proposal contained in
"Alternative A."

The various detailed proposals contained in
this complete draft agenda are interdependent
and readvanced in the hope of securing full agi'ee-
ment. If that agreement is forthcoming, we can
proceed at once to consider any incidental matters
and to set a date for the meeting of the four
Ministers.

Alternative B

In case, however, the Soviet delegation is un-
willing to accept the wording of the draft agenda
proposed as "Alternative A" the three delegations
propose as a second alternative the revised draft
agenda marked "Alternative B."

The essential nature of this proposal is an offer
of the three Governments to proceed with a meet-
ing of the four Ministers, even though agreement
is not reached on all points of the agenda. Ex-
cept for the listing of two texts on the question of
armaments the wording of all of the items in
"Alternative B" is identical with the wording of
the items in "Alternative A." However, in
"Alternative B" the order of the point on German
demilitarization would remain reserved for the
decision of the Ministers along with the two texts
dealing with the question of armaments.

For the reasons already stated, the three delega-
tions are willing under "Alternative A" to accept
the Soviet view in regard to the order of listing
the point of German demilitarization.

This proposal, however, is contingent ujion
reaching full agreement on the agenda. If tiiat
agreement cannot be reached, this question nuist
be reserved for decision by the Ministers. They
themselves will be able to determine whether it is
more ndvantageous to discuss German demilita-
rization before or after the question of armaments.

In regard to the question of armaments, there
is no disagi'cement that this topic should be dis-

804

Departmenf of State Bulletin

Alternative B

[Released to flic press at Paris May 2 and at Wash-
iniiton Mail 9]

Examination of the causes and effects of tlie
present international tensions in Europe and of
tlie means necessary to secure a real and lasting
improvement in the relations between the Soviet
Union, the United States, the United Kingdom and
France, including the following questions relating
to:

U.S., U.K., and France U.S.S.R.

The existing level of The demilitarization

armaments and armed of Germany ; measures

forces and measures to for the reduction of

be proposed jointlv by armaments and armed

the U.S.S.R., U.S., U.K., forces of the U.S.S.R.,

and France for the in- the U.K., the U.S. and

ternational control and France, the existing

reduction of armaments level of armaments an<l

and armed forces ; the armed forces and the

demilitarization of Ger- establishment of an ap-

many : fulfillment of propriate internatiimal

present treaty obliga- control. Fulfillment of

tions and agreements; present treaty obliga-

the elimination of the tions and agreements ;

threat of war and fear the elimination of the

of aggression. threat of war and fear
of aggression.

Completion of the treaty for the reestablishment
of an independent and democratic Austria.

Problems relating to the reestablishment of Ger-
man unity and the preparation of a treaty of peace.

Fulfillment of the treaties of peace with Italy,
Rumania, Bulgaria and Hungary ; agreements of
the Four Powers concerning Germany and Austria.

Fulfillment of the treaty of peace with Italy in
the part concerning Trieste.

cussed by the Ministers. The disagreement re-
lates to the way in which this topic is to be
described on the agenda. If no agreement is
reached on "Ahernative A," the two texts can be
referred to the Ministers.

In regard to the other items inchided in "Alter-
native B," the three delegations have assumed that
no difficulty will arise since the word "fulfillment"
is included in the item on Trieste in accordance
with the desire of the Soviet delegation. If the
Soviet delegation agrees to the proposal in "Alter-
native B," the Ministers can meet on that basis
and we can proceed at once to dispose of any
incidental matters, including the date of the
meeting.

Alternative C

To the three delegations it seems clear that only
an unwillingness to have the four Ministers meet
could prevent agreement here on either "Alter-
native A" or "Alternative B." Nevertheless, since
the three delegations wish to explore every possi-
ble basis for a meeting they propose also the draft
agenda marked "Alternative C."

This draft embodies a simplified, strictly factual
listing of the topics which the Ministers would
discuss.

For 8 weeks the three delegations have pointed
out to the Soviet delegation that they were quite
willing to agree upon such a simple listing of
topics. Moreover, such a simple listing would be
entirely in conformity with the agenda of pre-
vious meetings of the four Ministers. The 8 weeks
of discussion which have taken place here have
served to bring out in great detail the views of
the four Governments on all of these topics.

The four Ministers, when they meet, would be
fully familiar with the views which have been
expressed here. They would, accordingly, be
aware of the various detailed aspects of these
topics which one or another Minister will desire
to raise. It is jierfectly clear that if the Ministers
meet on the basis of such a simplified agenda, as
is proposed, "Alternative C," they will be able to
give full consideration to all of the matters which
have been discussed here during the last 8 weeks.
Certainly, there is nothing contained in "Alter-
native A" or for that matter in any of the pro-
posals of the Soviet delegation which could not
be considered by the Ministers under "Alterna-
tive C." Accordingly, the three delegations pro-
pose this third alternative which would have the
advantage of eliminating disagreements over the
formulation of particular points.

These then are the three alternative proposals
which are presented by the delegations of France,
the United Kingdom, and the United States. I
repeat that their three Governments wish to have
a meeting of the four Foreign Ministers and are
prepared to have such a meeting on the basis of
any one of these three alternative proposals.

I hope that the significance and importance of
these three alternative proposals will be fully
understood by the Soviet delegation. We recog-
nize that they will require thorough study. I
have tried to make my explanation of the three
alternative proposals as brief as possible, but we
will, of course, be glad to answer any questions
which Mr. Gromyko may desire to ask for the
purpose of further clarification.

Alternative C

[Released to the press at Paris May 2 and at Wash-
inpton May 9]

I. Examination of measures for the elimination
of the present international tensions in Europe, of
tlie threat of war, and of the fear of aggression.

II. Questions concerning armaments and armed

forces.

III. Questions concerning Austria.

IV. Questions concerning Germany.

V. Fulfillment of treaties and agreements.

May 27, J95J

805

The Great Alliance of Free Men

by W. Averell Harrivian

Special Assistant to the President '■

During the past months, our country has been
engaged in a series of debates. All kinds of things
have been said on all sides of every question. Some
would even have us believe that we are all in a state
of confusion. Some contend that we have no poli-
cies, that we are drifting aimlessly. Some are at-
tempting to distort the true purpose of our poli-
cies. Much of what is said is irrelevant ; much is
even irresponsible.

Of course, in our democratic way we should de-
bate all issues, but, at a time when our country is in
grave danger, we should conduct these debates for
the sole purpose of gaining a clearer understand-
ing of the issues.

Tonight, I want to try to cut through the fog of
unreality. I want to talk about the things we face,
and how we are dealing with them.

Policies of Foresight

I spent a good deal of time in Kussia during the
war, and I had an unusual chance to learn some-
thing about the Kussian people and their rulers in
the Kremlin.

When I came home 5 years ago, I was gravely
concerned over the dangers that were developing
from the Kremlin, and I was afraid that we would
not face up to them before it was too late.

Well, we have faced up to them. I think the
American peoi:)le have been magnificent during the
past 5 years. They have supported unprecedented
measures. Never in the history of our country, or
in the history of any country, has a nation in peace-
time taken such wise and eifective steps in dealing
with so many varied and complex problems.

In 1945 I had come back for a brief visit just
after the deatli of President Roosevelt, and I
vividly remember tlie first encouragement I got.
It came from President Truman. It was the first

' Address iniido befoi'o the AniciMcan Associatuin for the
United Nations, Inc., at Lo.s Angeles on Ai)r. .'50 and re-
leased to the press by the Wliite House on the same date.

806

time I had met him. I found that he was already
alive to the indication of the trouble ahead with
the Soviet Union. He had carefully studied the
records of President Roosevelt and his last mes-
sages to Stalin. He was already much concerned
by the duplicity of the Kremlin and was deter-
mined to stand firm against the Kremlin schemes.
As a result, he has been prepared to take prompt
and vigorous steps in dealing with the Kremlin
threat. No president has in peacetime initiated so
many unprecedented and far-sighted measures and
actions for our national security as has President
Truman.

Wartime Reiations With U.S.S.R.

In our wartime relations with the Soviet Union,
we had two fundamental objectives. Of first im-
portance was to keep Russia as an effective fighting
ally. We also wanted to use this new relationship
to find a way of working together for peace on a
live-and-let-live basis. People in this country, and
all over the world, had hopes that this could be
accomplished. The British and American Gov-
ernments were well aware of the difficulties in
attaining this objective.

During the war, Roosevelt and Churchill made
every effort to talk things out with Stalin in order
to arrive at some workable understanding on the
basis of the principles of the Atlantic Cliarter.

When I was in Moscow, there were indications
that the Kremlin had two ajiproaches to their
])ostwar i)olicies. In the many talks that 1 had
with Stalin, I felt tliat he himself was of two
minds; one etnphasized internal reconstruction
and the other e.xternal expansion.

On the one hand, they were discussing possible
understandings with us whicli might result in in-
creased trade with and loans from llie West for
the reconstruction of the tei-rible devastation left
in the wake of the war. Tliis would mean soft-
pedaling, for a time at least, the Conununist de-
signs for world domination — much along the lines

Department of State Bulletin

of the policies they had pursued between the two
world wars.

On tlie other hand, they were treating us in
many ways as potential enemies. There were indi-
cations that they would take advantage of the Red
army occupation of neighboring countries to main-
tain control, and they were supporting Communist
parties in otlier countries to be in a position to
seize control in the postwar turmoil.

The Kremlin Choice — Aggressive Imperialism

The men of the Kremlin chose the second course.

In October of 194.5, I went to see Stalin at his
country jjlace in Sochi in the Caucasus. After two
long niglits of arguments over the disagreements
we were then having, he as much as told me in a
moment of anger that he had decided to go his
own way. As time went on, the imperialist plans
of the men of the Kremlin became increasingly
aggressive.

I'hey broke the a,greements they had entered
into. If they had carried out those agreements,
the world would be a dilferent place today. They
used the occupation of the Red army to set up
puppet governments. They established a Hetwoi'k
of subvei-sion all over the world, inciting disorders
and insurrections and exploiting weakness where-
ever it exists.

The one great thing, however, accomplished by
our constant efforts during and since the war to
reach an understanding with the Soviet Union
was that they establish our moral position before
the people of the world. Had these efforts not
been made, many people would still be wondering
whether we and not the Kremlin were to blame for
the tensions that have developed.

Alliance for Meeting Aggression

The United Nations has provided the forum
through which the designs and the duplicity of
the Kremlin have been made crystal clear. The
United Nations has been the medium through
which the free nations have been drawn together.
It is the medium through which the United States
has been able to give leadership. And when it
came to shameless aggression against the Republic
of Korea, it was the medium through which we
rallied 5.3 nations, all of the free nations, to face
together this attempt to use force for conquest.
We had built better than we knew. Never before
in history has there been such unanimity of world
undei-standing and world oj^inion.

This was no accident. Step by step our policies
had built strength and confidence among tlie free
nations. As the Kremlin plan of action unfolded,
we had helped other countries to resist and turn
back aggression. We helped Greece put down
Kremlin-inspired civil war. We have helped
Westei-n Europe to rebuild its economic life and
suppress Communist subversion.

We took leadei-ship in the organization of the
North Atlantic Treaty. In a maimer unprece-
dented, we have gone out to deal with the threat
to our security at its source; we have not waited
until it came to us. And let no man think that it
would not have come to us. Western Europe
would not have survived Kremlin domination if it
had not been for our prompt and imaginative ac-
tion. With control of Europe, the industrial ca-
pacity available to the Kremlin would have pi-ac-
tically equaled ours. We might have faced an
unmanageable situation. Instead today we are
combining the potential of the North Atlantic
conununity in the development of collective de-
fense forces under our great General Dwight
Eisenhower.

In Korea we have faced foi'ce with force. We
have learned from the bitter experience of the
events which led to World War II that aggression
must be dealt with at the very beginning, or it will
encourage further aggression. We are showing
the Kremlin that the free world will not tolerate
the use of force for conquest, that free men have
the will and ability to resist. Our action in Korea
is giving confidence to other peoples who are under
pressure that they can maintain their independ-
ence. We are destroying the myth that the Chinese
Red armies are invincible. We are upsetting their
timetable of attack in other areas of Asia.

But it is not our aim to bring on another world
war. Our aim is to limit the conflict if we possibly
can and deal with it successfully within Korea. In
the meantime, we are converting our tremendous
economic resources into military strength and are
helping our friends and allies do the same. Before
long, the free world will have the military strength
to meet any threat with confidence. Wlien we are
strong enough, the Kremlin will not dare imder-
take further aggression.

As I say, we are using every means at our com-
mand to prevent another world war. No man with
any understanding of history can say that there
can be victory in a general war. There can be
nothing but chaos and disaster. But there can be
victory — and glorious victory — in preventing an-
other world conflict. And that is the clear aim of
American policy. Evei-y step we have taken has
this objective. Let no man take us off this course.

Korea — A Case Study

I want to discuss some of the alternatives that
are being put forward with respect to Korea.

Some would have us abandon Korea. This
would be an invitation to further aggression, and
we would soon find ourselves fighting elsewhere.
Or, any idea that we can obtain a solution by buy-
ing off the Chinese Communists through appease-
ment and giving any reward whatsoever for ag-
gression is unthinkable. In view of the misrepre-
sentations and false statements that are being made
about the policies of our Government, I want to

Aioy 27, 795J

807

state in the most emphatic terms that President
Truman will not engage in appeasement or reward
aggression. He rejects any such idea and so do all
his advisers. This has been said time and time
again. Thirdly, there are those who would involve
us in a wider war in order to end the present con-
flict in Korea. Yet they have not explained how,
when, and at what cost this wider conflict could be
brought to a successful conclusion. They are ready
to have us lose our allies with all of the world-wide
consequences that would result. And they are
ready to risk a total war. They say this is the
necessary way to solve the Korean situation.

GREECE

You remember the talk during the Greek civil
war. People said that we were bogged down in
Greece — there could be nothing but a stalemate.
"How could the fighting be brought to a successful
conclusion within Greece?" "We should either
abandon Greece or carry the fight across the bor-
ders and attack the Communist bases in Yugo-
slavia." And yet the struggle was won on Greek
soil. And don't let us overlook the fact that now
Yugoslavia is joining the ranks of those who are
resisting the Kremlin.

BERLIN

We heard the same sort of thing during the
Berlin airlift. There were those who could see no
end to it. We were told either to get out or have
a showdown. In these cases, we pursued the same
kind of determined and yet restrained policies that
we are now pursuing. We must always remember
that, although the menace of war comes from the
Kremlin, hasty and ill-conceived action on our part
can lead to grave consequences. I would like to
recall to you the words of Winston Churchill from
his recent war memoirs :

. . . Those who are prone by temperament and character
to seek sharp and clearcut solutions of difficult and obscure
problems, who are ready to fight whenever some challenge
comes from a foreign power, have not always been right.
On the other hand, those whose inclination is ... to seek
patiently and faithfully for peaceful compromise, are not
always wrong. On the contrary, in the majority of in-
stances they may be right, not only morally but from a
practical standpoint. How many wars have been averted
by patience and persisting good will ! . . . How many
wars have been precipitated by firebrands ! '

No one can foresee the future. Our men are
joined in desperate battle in Korea. They are
inflicting frightful casualties, estimated at the
equivalent of the better part of a Chinese division
a day. They are fighting to force the Chinese
Reds to abandon the aggression. They are fight-
ing to prevent the vintold horrors to us and all
mankind of another world war. Let all Ameri-
cans give them their support. Let us pray for
their success. It is shockmg that some question

^ The Gathering Storm, Houghton-Mifflin Co., p. 320.

the good faith of our allies who are fighting
with us.

Let us think back a few years.

UNITY OF PURPOSE

In 1940, the Greeks refused to appease and faced
alone invasion against overwhelming odds. The
British came to their assistance with the small
forces they had available in the Middle East. _ I
was in Cairo in the spring of 1941 when the Brit-
ish troops returned from this honorable but unsuc-
cessful expedition. I know the risks they took and
the sacrifice they made to support their ally.
Threatened as the Greek people still are, they have
sent a token force to Korea. It is a token of their
determination to stand with the free nations
against aggression. It is a token of honor.

The Turks, under a similar threat of aggression
at home, have sent a brigade which has won the
respect of all.

The French have been fighting Comnuinist ag-
gression in Indochina for 4 years and have now
150,000 troops engaged in that conflict. Yet they
have sent a small force to join us.

The British were quick to send their Pacific
Fleet and then troops, although they too are en-
gaged against the Communists in Malaya.

A total of 13 nations have sent forces according
to their situation and others are preparing to join.
Although the preponderance of the forces is ours,
we are not fi,ghting alone in Korea. Thei'e have
been times when other nations have fought alone.
I was in England during the year when the British
stood alone against the full force of Nazi power.
The men and women of Britain stood firm with
courage and determination. They took pride in
the feeling that they were fighting not only for
themselves but for the freedom of other nations
as well. Korea is a vital part, but only a part, of
the world-wide struggle in which all free nations
are engaged.

The Meaning of Interdependence

Let no man try to tell us that there are any safe
or easy shortcuts. The years ahead will be difii-
cult. To achieve our objectives we must do many
things that will mean many sacrifices. Military
strength alone is not enough. Neither military
strength nor political stability can be attained
without an expanding economy in the free world.
We are all interdependent. The industrial coun-
tries need adequate food and increasing quantities
of raw materials. The new nations of the East
M'ill need the know-how and economic assistance
to expand production and to give promise for a
decent life for their people. It is only on this basis
that there can be political stability.

The resources of the free world are today vastly
greater than those of the Soviet Union and its
satellites. The Atlantic community alone has
about three-quarters of the heavy industry of the

808

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

world, and over 400 million of the most inventive,
skillful, and productive people. But the life of
the free world cannot sui-vive if it is dismembered
limb by limb. We Americans understand this.
Strong as we are, we can not survive alone. But
we must use our strength to cement the unity and
strength of the free nations.

We are engaged in a great enteriirise — the build-
ing of a great alliance of free men for human
welfare and mutual security. With the success
already achieved, we can have faith that the free
nations working together can build the necessary
strength and stability to withstand external ag-
gression and internal subversion alike.

Weighing the Issues

Don't let us either underrate or overrate the
Soviet capabilities. Don't let us underrate their
ruthlessness and determination ; their skill in the
techniques of subversion and in creating and ex-
ploiting weakness ; their conviction that they are
destined to dominate the world. They believe that
free men can not stand together; that free men can
not rule themselves; that free nations can not be
united, but will fight among themselves.

But we should not overrate the strength of
Kussia on which their operations are based. They
are maintaining vast military forces by imposing a
terrific burden on their economy and their people.
You really have to go to Russia to understand how
backward it is. The people have never known
what we would consider a decent life. Men and
women have to work hard and long hours for very
little. But their equipment and organization are
so poor that the productivity of industry and agi'i-
culture is far behind that of the West. After 35
years of rule, the Kremlin has not been able to gain
the loyalty of the people. Stalin himself once ad-
mitted this when he told me during the war that
the people were "fighting for their motherland, not
for us." By "us" he meant, of course, the Kremlin.
Russia is ruled by fear. The Kremlin fears the
people, and the people fear the Kremlin. When-
ever we hear of purges, it is an indication of inter-
nal tension. The unhappy people of the satellites
crave only to be freed from the iron hand.

As the free world grows stronger, pressures will
increase behind the iron curtain. The deflection of
Yugoslavia was primarily caused by the success of
the Marshall Plan. Tito saw that there was noth-
ing to hope for but exploitation from the Kremlin
in his alliance with Russia. With the improve-
ment of conditions in Western Europe, he wanted
economic association with the West. As the free
countries become stronger and stronger, their very
strength will act as a magnet on the enslaved peo-

ples. There is a brittleness in any dictatorship, but
one can never know when it will be strained to the
breaking point.

American Faith in the Future

The policies which we must follow have been
laid out. We must pursue them unflinchingly.

Our men are fighting in Korea tonight to do
their part in preventing another world war and to
preserve our freedom. We must face the future,
and the long future, with the same courage, deter-
mination, and perseverance. I am convinced that
we can succeed, and I believe we will succeed.

As I have said, the American people have been
magnificent during the past 5 years. It is incon-
ceivable to me that anyone can deflect us from our
course. The job ahead is even more difficult. But
the success we have already achieved in our en-
deavors gives promise for the future.

But peace in Korea will not put an end to the global
danger of Soviet aggression. We must build up enough
military strength — enough military strength actually in
existence — to convince the Kremlin that it ought not start
a ivorld war.

— ^President Truman
May 9, 1951

Let us not be confused by men of little faith in
America's capabilities who say that we can't afford
to do the things we must to safeguard our security.
Let us not be confused by those who are impatient
and would lead us to take reckless steps. Let us
not be confused by those who have no understand-
ing of the strength of the great association of free
nations that we are building. Let us closely ex-
amine what is being said so that we will not be
misled by those who are distorting and falsifying
the facts.

The wise statesmen of both our political parties
have laid out the road to follow: support the
United Nations and its actions in Korea ; support
the North Atlantic Treaty; vigorous and rapid
action to rearm; aid to our friends and allies to
equip adequately their military forces ; work with
other nations for an expanding world economy;
help the new nations of the East to attain political
and economic stability; and strive with all our
strength to prevent another world war.

Of first importance is to attain unity of purpose
at home for the world-wide struggle. We can then
give effective inspiration and leadership for unity
m the free world. In the great alliance of free men
we are building, we can have faith that we will rid
the world of tyranny, that we can maintain peace,
and that freedom will prevail.

May 21, J95J

809

North Atlantic Council, Financial and^Economic Board
Adopt Terms of Reference

Text of Communique, Issued at London, May 5, 1951

by Charles M. Spofford, Deputy U.S. Representative for NATO

[Released to the press May 8]

I.

The North Atlantic Council Deputies announce
today the adoption by their Governments of new
terms of reference for the North Atlantic Council,
which will hereafter incorporate the Defense
Committee and Defense Finance and Economic
Committee and thus become sole ministerial body
in organization.

The Council Deputies announce at the same
time the creation of a Financial and Economic
Board [Feb], located in Paris.

The North Atlantic Council, as originally estab-
lished, was composed of the Foreign Ministers of
the nations party to the North Atlantic Treaty.
Two other ministerial committees were organized,
a Defense Committee composed of Defense Min-
isters and a Defense Finance and Economic Com-
mittee composed of Finance Ministers. The only
full-time agencies functioning during the early
months of Nato (North Atlantic Treaty Organiza-
tion) were the standing group (made up of rep-
resentatives of the Chiefs of Staff of France, the
United Kingdom and the United States) and the
permanent working staffs of the Defense Finance
and Economic Committee and of the Military Pro-
duction and Supply Board, a subordinate organ-
ization of Defense Committee.

Experience soon demonstrated the need for a
central, continuously functioning body to insure
coordination between the work of the various
treaty agencies and to facilitate the implementa-
tion of agreed plans. The Council in May 1950
therefore established the Council Deputies, who
first met in July of that year.

II. The Canadian Proposal

Ex|)erienc'e also demonstrated the need, par-
ticularly as emphasis shifted from planning to

the implementation of plans, for a simpler organ-
ization with clear lines of authority, for fewer
committees and more full-time operating agen-
cies. In the autumn of 1950 the Canadian Gov-
ernment proposed reorganization of Nato to meet
this need, and in December the Council authorized
the deputies to study and recommend the neces-
sary changes. The result is the structure an-
nounced today.

III. The Reorganized Council

As before, the Council is the principal body in
the North Atlantic Treaty Organization and is
"charged with the responsibility of considering
all matters concerning the implementation of the
provisions of the treaty." The reorganized Coun-
cil, however, incorporates not only the Council
envisaged by article 9 of the treaty but also the
Defense Committee referred to in the same article
and the Defense Finance and Economic Com-
mittee. Both latter cease to exist as separate
entities. The Council will continue to be composed
of persons of ministerial rank, although in excep-
tional circumstances member governments may
be represented by other persons duly designated
for the purpose. Jleads of Governments may
attend meetings of the Council in pei'son. Other-
wise, Governments will be represented by their
Minister for Foreign Affairs and/or the Minister
of Defense, or by other competent ministers,
especially by those responsible for financial and
economic afl'aii's, according to the nature of the
agenda.

As hitherto, the Council will meet annually in
ordinary session and such other times as may be
deemed desirable by the majority of the parties.

810

Department of State Bulletin

IV. Location of Sessions

Location of each session will be determined by
tlie chairman after consultation with the other
parties. For jjeneral convenience, the ordinary
annual session will normally be held at about the
same time and in the same geographic area as the
annual session of the (ieneral Assembly of the
United Nations. Other ordinary sessions will
normally be held at some convenient location in
Europe.

V. Chairmanship

The chairmanship of the Council will continue
to rotate in alphabetical order. Paul van Zeeland,
Foreign Minister of Belgium, is the present chair-
man. In order that the Council may effectively
carry out its responsibilities and exercise them
continuously, each Government is represented by
a council deputy. Each deputy represents all
ministers concerned with N.vto matters in his Gov-
ernment and is responsible to such minister or
ministers as his Government may determine. The
Council Deputies, located in London, constitute
the permanent working organization of the Noi'th
Atlantic Council.

VI. The Council Deputies

When the Council is not in session, tlie Deputies
carry out its policies, recommend to Governments
the measures necessary to this end, formulate
issues requiring decisions by the Council or by
member governments and otherwise constitute a
body which may register the approval of their
Governments on matters before them for consid-
eration.

The deputies will also be responsible for coordi-
nating the activities of and giving guidance to
all other permanent organs of the North Atlantic
Treaty Organization, exchange views on political
matters of common interest within the scope of
the treaty, promote and coordinate ]iublic infor-
mation activities in furtherance of its objectives.

The chairman of the Council Deputies in addi-
tion to presiding at their meetings, is responsible
for directing the permanent working staff of the
organization.

VII. Military Structure

With the exception of the incorporation of the
former defense committee into the Council, the
military structure remains unchanged. The Coun-
cil Deputies will deal directly with the military
committee, and, when that body is not in session,
with the standing group on political matters
having military implications. It will provide
those bodies with political guidance upon which
strategic decisions should be based. The standing
group will maintain close liaison with the Coun-

cil Deputies and provide that body with advice on
military matters.

VIII. Defense Production Board

The Defense Production Board, which was
established last December and has its head-
quarters in London, replaced the military Produc-
tion and Supply Board and the subsidiary agen-
cies of that committee. It has as its general
objectives the achievement of the maximum pro-
duction of military equipment in the most efficient
manner, at the least cost, and in the shortest time
to meet the military material requirements of
Nato. These objectives will be sought by co-
ordinating national production programmes so
that they will together fulfill NAio-wide produc-
tion objectives. The Board is directed to concen-
trate its activities on those aspects of military
production and procurement which involve major
problems of international cooperation among the
Nat members. A unified international staff has
been organized to serve the Board under a coordi-
nator of North Atlantic Defense Production, who
is ex officio a member of the Dpd.

IX. Creation of the FEB

The creation of tlie Financial and Economic
Board (Feb) is another step toward simplifying
and making more effective the executive organiza-
tion of Nato. In this respect it follows the pre-
cedent established in the setting up of the Defense
Production Board.

According to its terms of reference, the new
Feb:

shall be responsible for considering and making recom-
mendation upon financial and economic problems arising
in connection with Nato defense profjrams and upon the
best use of financial and economic resources in member
countries in support of the common defense effort. It
shall advise the other Nato bodies under the Council
Deputies on all relevant economic and financial questions
arising out of their work.

The Feb will ordinarily address its recom-
mendations to the Council Deputies, but in speci-
fied cases these may be sent direct to member
governments.

The Feb will succeed to the functions and re-
sponsibilities previously belonging to the perma-
nent working staff of the Defense Financial and
Economic Committee, the advisory group on raw
material problems, and the economic and financial
working group, which was set up some months ago
in Paris. Among its other tasks, it has been
assigned the duty of reporting to the Council
Deputies on the financial and economic aspects of
progress of defense programs in member countries.
It will also:

maintain close contact with the work of other interna-
tional organizations dealing with financial and economic
]irol)U'ms and in particular with the Organization for
liluropean Economic Cooperation (Oeec), having In view
tlie need to avoid duplication of effort.

May 2J, 7957

811

The Feb will be based in Paris so that it will be
able to draw on the experience and skills of the
Oeec. It is expected that governments will be
represented on Feb by senior members of their
delegations to Oeec so that close coordination of
activities of these two bodies will be assured.

U.S.- Iceland Sign Defense Agreement

IReleased to the press May 7]

An agreement concerning the defense of Iceland
was made public today. The agi-eement was
signed by Bjarni Benediktsson, Foreign Minister
of Iceland, and by Edward B. Lawson, United
States Minister to Iceland, on May 5, 1951.

The agreement concerns the use of facilities in
Iceland in the collective efforts of the parties to
the North Atlantic Treaty to preserve peace and
security in the North Atlantic Treaty area. Ice-
land agrees to provide such facilities as are
mutually found necessary, and the United States
will make defense arrangements under conditions
set forth.

The United States-Iceland agreement grew out
of a request of the North Atlantic Treaty Organi-
zation that the United States and Iceland make
arrangements under which armed forces of the
North Atlantic Treaty countries may make use
of facilities in Iceland in the common defense of
the Treaty area, and an agi'eement has now
been concluded in Reykjavik between the two
Governments.

At the request of the Icelandic Government
and in accordance with agi'eed defense plans of
the North Atlantic Treaty Oi'ganization, a con-
tingent of United States security forces is in Ice-
land. This contingent is stationed there in
accordance with the terms of the agreement.
This defense step is being carried out under the
direction of the North Atlantic Ocean Regional
Planning Group.

TEXT OF AGREEMENT

[Released to the press hlay 7]

Defense Agreement Pursuant to North Atlantic
Treaty Between United States and Republic of
Iceland

Preamble

Havinir regard to the fact that the people of Iceland
caiinor themselves adequately secure their own defenses
and whereas experience has shown that a country's lack
of defenses greatly endangers its security and that of
its peaceful neighbors, the North Atlantic Treaty Organi-
zation has recpiested, hecause of the unsettled state of
world affairs, that the United States and Iceland in view
of the collective efforts of the parties to the North At-
lantic Treaty to preserve peace and security in the North

Atlantic Treaty area, make arrangements for the use of
facilities in Iceland in defense of Iceland and thus also
the North Atlantic Treaty area. In conformity with this
proposal the following agreement has been entered into :

Article I

The United States on behalf of the North Atlantic
Treaty Organization and in accordance with its re-
sponsibilities under the North Atlantic Treaty will make
arrangements regarding the defense of Iceland subject
to the conditions set forth in this Agreement. For this
purpose and in view of the defense of the North Atlantic
Treaty area Iceland will provide such facilities in
Iceland as are mutually agreed to be necessary.

Article II

Iceland will make all acquisitions of land and other
arrangements required to permit entry upon and use of
facilities in accordance with this Agreement, and the
Cnited States shall not be obliged to compensate Iceland
or any national of Iceland or other person for such entry
or use.

Article III

The national composition of forces, and the conditions
imder which they may enter upon and make u.se of facil-
ities in Iceland pursuant to this Agreement, shall be deter-
mined in agreement with Iceland.

Article IV

The number of personnel to be stationed in Iceland
pursuant to this Agreement shall be subject to the approval
of the Icelandic Government.

Article V

The United States in carrying out its responsibilities
under this Agreement shall do so in a manner that con-
tributes to the maximum safety of the Icelandic people,
keeping always in mind that Iceland has a sparse popula-
tion and has been unarmed for centuries. Nothing in
this Agreement shall be so construed as to impair the
ultimate authority of Iceland with regard to Icelandic
affairs.

Article YI

The Agreement of October 7, 1946, between the United
States and Iceland for interim use of Keflavik Airport
shall terminate upon the coming into force of this Agree-
ment whereupon Iceland will assume direction of and
responsibility for civil aviation operations at Keflavik
Airport. The United States and Iceland will negotiate
appropriate arrangements concerning the organization
of the Airport to coordinate the operation thereof with
the defense of Iceland.

Article VII

Either Government may at any time, on notification to
the other Government, request the Council of the North
Atlantic Treaty Organization to review the continued
necessity for the facilities and their utilization, and to
make recommendations to the two Governments concern-
ing the continuation of this Agreement. If no under-
standing between the two Governments is reached as a
result of such request for review within a period of six
months from the date of the original request, either
Government may at any time thereafter give notice of
its intention to terminate the .\greenient, and the Agree-
ment shall then cease to be in force twelve months from
the date of such notice. Whenever the contingency pro-
vided for in Articles .5 and (i of the North Atlantic Treaty
shall occur, the facilities which will be afforded in accord-
ance with this .Vgreement shall be available for the same
use. While such facilities are not being used for military
purposes, necessary maintenance work will be performed
l)y Iceland or Iceland will authorize its performance by
the United States.

812

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

Article VIII

After signatun; by the appropriate authorities of the
United States and Iceland, tliis Agreement, of which
the English and Icelandic texts are equally authentic,
shall come into force on the date of receipt l)y the Gov-
ernment of the United States of America of a notifica-
tion from the Government of Iceland of its ratification
of the Agreement.

Done at Reykjavik, the 5th day of May 1951

Edward B. Lawson
Bjarni Benediktsson

BACKGROUND INFORMATION

[Released to the press May 7]

The outbreak of war in 1939 made Iceland's
geographical position on the North Atlantic sea
and air routes between Europe and North
America one of prime strategic importance.
United States recognition of this importance was
manifested by the signing of a defense agreement
by Iceland and the United States on July 1, 1941,
which provided that American troops would be
stationed in and take over the defense of Iceland
from the British who had undertaken the pro-
tection of the country after the Nazi invasion of
Norway.

The period during which American forces were
in Iceland — from July 1941 to April 1947 — was
one marked by most friendly relations between
the two countries.^ The American forces departed
from Iceland in accordance with an agreement
dated October 7, 1946, which also set forth the
conditions under which the United States-built
Keflavik Airport, the leading military aii'field in
Iceland, would be turned over to Iceland. How-
ever, the United States received the right to oper-
ate the airport for use in connection with the sup-
port of its control agencies in Germany. The
United States Government designated an Ameri-
can civil aviation company to administer the oper-
ations of the airport, and this company, utilizing
both American and Icelandic personnel, operated
Keflavik as an international civil airport. It had
been used extensively by United States and foreign
commercial carriers since 1947.

The agreement of 194G was to remain in effect
for the period of United States maintenance of
control agencies in Germany subject to review at
the request of either Government at any time after
5 years; if no agreement was reached within 6
months after such a review, the Keflavik agree-
ment could be denounced to terminate 1 year
later. Under this provision it would have been
possible for either party to terminate the agree-
ment by April 195.3. The agreement of May 5,
1951, terminates the Keflavik agreement, and
places the responsibility for the civil aspects of
operations at Keflavik under Iceland.

The agreement of May 5 is an outgrowth of
Iceland's becoming a member of the North Atlan-

' For text, see Btjlletin of July 12, 1941, p. 15.
May 27, 1951

tic pact, and the agreement falls within the frame-
work of the North Atlantic Treaty. The Ice-
landers, in signing the North Atlantic Treaty in
April 19-19, expressed their confidence that mem-
bership in the North Atlantic Treaty Organiza-
tion offered them the best available assurance of
security. Recently, the Icelandic Government de-
cided to request that troops be stationed in their
country, which would increase the security of Ice-
land and the North Atlantic Treaty area. (The
Icelanders themselves have no armed forces and
never liave had since the establishment of their
nation over a thousand years ago.) Consequently,
the United States and Iceland, acting in accord-
ance with Nato recommendations, concluded the
agreement of May 5 in which Iceland makes avail-
able certain facilities for the use of United States
troops for defense purposes.

U.S.-Canada Agree on

U.S. Leased Bases in Newfoundland

[Released to the press on May 1]

It was announced today at Washington and
Ottawa that the United States and Canada had
reached agreement in principle on certain changes
in the agreement of March 1941, regarding the
United States leased naval and air bases in New-
foundland. Discussions were carried on in the
Permanent Joint Board on Defense. Canada-
United States, and the joint recommendations of
the Board have now been approved by the two
Governments.

The United States, in the agreement of March
1941, leased from the United Kingdom for 99
years naval and air bases located in Newfound-
land and in the Caribbean area. The United
States has been operating four bases in New-
foundland: Pepperrell Air Force Base near St.
John's, Harmon Air Force Base near Stephen-
ville, McAndrew Air Force Base at Argentia, and
the Naval Operating Base at Argentia.

Newfoundland was incorporated into Canada
and became its tenth province on April 1, 1949, at
which time the Canadian Government became a
party to the 1941 agreement. Shortly before this
time, the Canadian Government requested the
United States to negotiate changes in those parts
of the agreement regarding customs and excise
taxes, income tax arrangements, military postal
facilities, and jurisdiction of courts in criminal
cases.

The Prime Minister of Canada announced today
that it would be necessary to make certain changes
in Canadian domestic legislation to implement the
recommendations of the Board. It is anticipated
that after Canada has made the necessary legal
changes, there will be an exchange of notes be-

813

tween the two Governments constituting a formal
agreement.

The proposed arrangements are satisfactory to
both Governments and provide an equitable and
practicable solution to the points at issue. The
settlement of this problem provides a further indi-
cation of tlie ability of the two countries to arrive
at mutually satisfactory arrangements for their
common benefit.

It is expected that the text of the recommenda-
tions of the Permanent Joint Board on Defense
will be made public in the Canadian Prime Min-
ister's statement to Parliament.

U.S. and Denmark Sign Agreement
for Defense of Greenland

[Released to the press April 27]

An agreement concerning the defense of Green-
land was signed today at Copenhagen by the
United States and Denmark. The agreement was
signed on behalf of the United States by Ambassa-
dor Eugenie Anderson. The agreement providing
for the use of facilities in Greenland in the com-
mon defense comes into force upon notification
to the United States that the Danish Parliament
has given approval to its terms.

The United States-Danish agreement grew out
of a request by the North Atlantic Treaty Organ-
ization tliat arrangements be negotiated under
which facilities in Greenland might be made use
of by the armed forces of the parties to the North
Atlantic Treaty Organization in the common de-
fense of Greenland and the rest of the North
Atlantic Treaty area.

It is expected that the full text of the agree-
ment will be made public when presented to the
Danish Parliament,

Francis Adams Truslow Appointed
to U.S.-Brazil Joint Commission
for Economic Development

[Released to the press May 2]

The President announced today the appoint-
ment of Francis Adams Truslow to be United
States Commissioner on the United States-Brazil
Joint Commission for Economic Development
with the personal rank of Minister.

The Joint Commission was established by a
formal exchange of notes between the Govern-
ments of Brazil and the United States and was an-
nounced at the same time, December 21, 1950, that
the conclusion of a general agreement for technical

cooperation under the Point 4 Program was made
public.

Mr. Truslow recently resigned as president of
the New York Curb Exchange to accept a position
with the Department as consultant on Brazilian ■
Economic Relations to tlie Assistant Secretary for I
Inter- American Affairs.

The Joint Commission, to be located in Rio de
Janeiro, will be directed by two commissioners, J
one American and the other Brazilian. 1

The Joint Commission will study the develop-
ment needs of Brazil and will make recommenda-
tions for development and improvement in specific
fields. The Commission will recommend what
technical assistance is needed on specific projects
and will advise on opportunities for utilizing for-
eign and domestic technical knowledge and skills.
It will also seek ways of encouraging private
investments in furthering Brazil's economic de-
velopment.

During World War II, Mr. Truslow, a member
of the New York Bar, was president of the Rubber
Development Corporation and spent considerable
time in Brazil and the Amazon region.

U.S. Delegation to Nicaraguan
Inaugural Ceremonies

On April 25, the Department of State announced
that the President has approved the following
delegation to represent the United States at cere-
monies marking the inauguration of Gen. Anas-
tasio Somoza as President of the Republic of
Nicaragua on May 1 :

Capus M. Waynick, Personal Representative of the Presi-
dent and Special Ambassador, Hrad of Delegation;
U.S. Ambassador to Nicaragua

Fletcher Warren, Special Ambassador ; Director of the
Office of South American Affairs, Bureau of Inter-
American Affairs, Department of State

Other ilemhers of the Delegation

Carl Hinshaw, U.S. Representative, California
Tliurinan Cliathraan, U.S. Representative, Xortli Carolina
Lt. Gen. William H. H. Jlorris, Jr., USA, Commander in

Chief, Caribliean Command
Rev. .Jo.seph Francis Thorninc;, Washington, D.C., Asso-
ciate Editor of World Affairs
Philip I'. Williams, First Secretary, U.S. Embassy in

Nicaragua
Col. Sanmcl P. Walker, Jr., aiilitary Attach^, U.S. Em-

ba.ssy in Nicaragua
Capt. Alvord John Greenacre, Naval Attach^ and Naval

Attache for Air, U.S. Emliassy in Nicaragua
Lt. Col. Wendell L. Bevan, Jr., Assistant Air Attache,

U.S. Embassy in Nicaragua
Overton G. Ellis, Jr., Second Secretary, U.S. Embassy In

Nicaragua
John Ij. Topping, Second Secretary, U. S. Embassy in

Nicaragua

814

Department of State Bulletin

Soviet Obstruction

to Western German Government

Statement hy Henry A. Byroade
Director^ Bureau of Germun Affairs '

I wiuit to talk to you about one of the major
problems our Government faces today.

After continuous effort over a period of years
to reach agreement with the U.S.S.R. on Ger-
many, our Government — in conjunction with the
French and British — concluded reluctantly in
1949 that progress could no longer be delayed
because of Soviet obstruction. We, therefore,
gave authority to the Western Germans to estab-
lish a democratic form of government in Western
Germany.

Attempts at obstruction by the Soviet Union
followed, including the blockade on the City of
Berlin. You all know the gallant story of the
airlift to Berlin. Thwarted in this, the Soviets
requested a meeting of the four Foreign Ministers
in a final effort to block the formation of the
West German Government. We met with them
in good faith, but Molotov soon made it very
clear that there could be no agreement on Ger-
many except one which would place all Germany
at the mercy of the Soviet Union.

I give you this history because of its similarity
to what is happening today.

The tactics, military preparations, and hostile
propaganda of the Soviet Union — resulting in
open aggression by forces in their orbit last
June — have reluctantly caused free nations to
look to their own defense. In the Atlantic area,
the 12 nations of the North Atlantic Treaty Or-
ganization made a far-reaching decision to estab-
lish a common force and further agreed that
Western Germany, should she so elect, would have
the right and opportunity to join and so partic-
ipate in her own defense. This was many, many
months after Soviet representatives had estab-
lished military forces — so-called police forces — in
East Germany.

The Soviet Union has attacked this defensive
plan, now with veiled threats, now with mocking
"peace offensives.'' They also asked for a Big
Four meeting to discuss German demilitarization.

We have no desire to avoid such a meeting, since
one must always cling to the hope that a basic
agreement can be possible. But this time we
wanted the assurance of an agenda, not simply
weeks of futile discussions by the Foreign Min-
isters on procedures and on what to talk about.

For this purpose, the deputies of the Foreign
Ministers have now been in session in Paris more
than 8 weeks.

I want to cut through confused interplay of
agenda wording and tell you why what is going

' Mode over the NBC television on Apr. 29 and released
to tlie press on the same date.

on at Paris is much more important to us than
a play on words.

Gromyko, the Soviet representative, has main-
tained that the question of Western (Jerman par-
ticii)ation in her own defense is the principal cause
of tension in Europe. This is clearly nonsense
since the question of German participation in de-
fense would not arise except for the aggressive
Soviet behavior, coupled with their large military
forces, in Eastern Germany and the satellites. To
accept their contention would lead to the conclu-
sion that the acts and policies of the West were the
jn-iinary cause of tensions in Europe.

The Western deputies have also indicated that
existing level of armaments and armed forces and
means for international control of armaments
should be a subject for Four Power consideration.
When we and our Western Allies disarmed upon
the end of the last war, Russia maintained — in
some instances even increased — her military
strength. It is the threat of these Red armies — •
partly outside Russian borders and far in excess
of the needs of any state for its own self-protec-
tion-— that is the real cause of tension in Europe
today. In the face of this situation, the Soviet
representative desires agenda wording which
would commit us to a policy of reduction in armed
strength of the Four Powers — and this prior to
any consideration of the present unbalance and
prior to any agreement on a form of international
inspection and control. This is an old and fa-
miliar Soviet proposition. It, too, forms no basis
for honest discussions.

These are some of the differences at Paris. So-
viet propaganda, Soviet double talk, Soviet in-
sistence that white is black and black is white,
denies what you and I know to be true. It would
seem that the original goal of the Soviet repre-
sentatives— that is to prevent Western Germany
from accepting a defense role with the West —
has now been broadened into an attack upon the
whole defensive effort of the West. It is impor-
tant that we all understand what is behind their
efforts to confuse and control.

For sale by the Superintendent of Doeuments, Govern-
ment Printing Office, Wnshinoton 25, D.C. Address re-
quests direct to the Superintendent of Documents.

Confuse and Control: Soviet Techniques in Germany.

European and I'.ritish Commonwealth Series 17. PuIj.
4107. 108 pp. 30^.

Description of Soviet efforts to reduce the German
people to a helpless confusion of distrust and di-
vided purpose. Full pictorial coverage of topics with
maiDs, cartoons, and photographs ; reproductions of
Communist posters.

Preparation for Tomorrow: A German Boy's Year in
America. European and British Commonwealth Series
20. Pub. 4138. 54 pp. 25{J.

The story of a 17-year-old German boy's year in
America under the Department's exchange program
for German boys and girls of secondary school age.
Illustrated.

May 21, 1951

815

Results of Torquay Tariff Conference Under GATT

I

The results of the recent 34-country Tariff Con-
ference at Torquay, England, which ended on
April 21 after sessions lasting almost 7 months,
constitute a very substantial advance in the field
of international trade relations and the relaxation
of unnecessary restrictions on world commerce.^

At Torquay the United States exchanged sig-
nificant and mutually advantageous tariff con-
cessions with 17 countries, five of which were new
countries negotiating for the purpose of becoming
contracting parties to the General Agreement on
Tariffs and Trade, and 12 of which were already
contracting parties. Moreover, the Conference
agreed to the extension, until January 1, 1954, of
the validity of the concessions which had been
exchanged at the two previous conferences at
Geneva in 1947, and at Annecy, France, in 1949.
This extension gives stability to the pattern of
trade-barrier relaxation which is the basis of the
General Agreement and which is fundamental to
the economic foreign policy of the United States.

In addition to advantages gained through di-
rect negotiation with other countries, the United
States will benefit in a great many cases from
concessions which other countries negotiated with
each other and which will apply, under the pro-
visions of the General Agreement, to the trade
of the United States.

Participation of the Federal Kepublic of
Germany was an important aspect of the Con-
ference. A wide range of concessions was nego-
tiated between the United States and the Federal
Kepublic. Substantial concessions were agi'eed
to in the negotiations between the United States
and Canada, France, Peru, and other countries,
including both contracting parties and countries
negotiating for accession.

The United States was not able to find a basis
for expanding the existing range of concessions in
the General Agreement with regard to Australia,
Cuba, New Zealand, the Union of South Africa,
and the United Kingdom. This situation does
not affect the contimied participation of these
countries as i:)arties to the General Agreement
nor the maintenance of the concessions which they
negotiated at Geneva and Annecy. Neither does
it prcchide further negotiations with them at some
future time when conditions are more favorable.

' BuiXETiN of Apr. 30, 1951, p. 701.

816

Legal Instruments Make Results Effective

On April 21, all but four of the participating
Governments signed, at Torquay, the final act
whicli authenticates the texts of other legal docu-
ments embodying the results of the Conference.
These documents include :

1. The Torquay Protocol to the General Agreement on
Tariffs and Trade which, with the schedules of con-
cessions annexed to it, sets forth the results of the nego-
tiations and the terms on which new contracting parties
may accede to the agreement. The United States signed
the Protocol at Torquay on April 21, and the document
will be open for signature by other countries until
October 20, 1951.

2. A separate Decision with regard to each new country
applying for accession to the agreement. Such a Deci-
sion is, in effect, a vote in favor of admitting the country
concerned. June 20 is the last date for signing the De-
cisions. The United States signed Decisions with respect
to each country negotiating to accede, at Torquay on April
21. Under the provisions of the General Agreement a
majority of two-thirds of the present contracting parties
is required for admission of a new contracting party.

3. The Declaration which, together with the relevant
provisions of the Protocol, provides for extension, until
January 1, 1954, of the concessions exchanged at Geneva
and Annecy. A provision in the Protocol itself so amends
the text of article XXVIII of the General Agreement as
to effect the extension of the life of the Geneva and
Annecy concessions. The amendment will go into effect
when two-thirds of the contracting parties have signed
the Protocol.

Concessions negotiated at Torquay will be put
into effect by the Governments negotiating them,
at various dates in 1951, depending upon the dates
on which the participating Governments sign the
Torquay Protocol and other necessary legal
instruments. Tlie Provisions of the Protocol
govern these effective dates. The United States
Government signed the Protocol and all other
Torquay documents on April 21. The earliest
date at which any United States concessions can
be put into effect is June <5, 1951. The United
States and all other contracting parties are free
to withhold concessions initially negotiated at
Torquay with a given country, until 30 days after
that country has signed the Torquay Protocol.

U.S. Receives Concessions

At Torquay, the United States received new
foreign concessions in the form of tariff reduc-
tions or the binding of existing customs treatment,
on a very wide range of American agricultruul and

Department of Slate Bulletin

industrial export products. In 1949, the coun-
tries which granted concessions to the United
States at Torquay, imported from this country
more tlian a bilhon dollars' worth of the products
to which the concessions apply.

U.S. Grants Concessions

In exchange, the United States granted tariff
reductions or bindings of existing customs treat-
ment on several hundreds of items imported into
this country, principally from the countries par-
ticipating in the General Agreement. United
States imports in 1949 of products on which the
United States ";ranted concessions at Torquay
were valued at ai)out 500 million dollars.

The apparent wide disparity between the 1949
value of trade on which the United States ob-
tained concessions and the 1949 value of trade on
which the United States granted concessions, is
due in lai'ge part to the highly almormal pattern
of trade in that year. In 1949 United States ex-
ports were much greater than could be expected
under ordinary conditions, especially exports of
such commodities as foodstuffs, materials, and
equipment urgently needed by other countries in
their postwar efforts toward economic recovery.
European countries, moreover, had not, in 1949,
reached their present capacity to produce goods for
export to tlie United States. It is not likely that
the striking imbalance of trade covei'age between
concessions obtained and granted will continue to
be so large as is indicated by the 1949 figures.

Many Commodities Covered

The list of products on which the United States
obtained foreign concessions includes most of the
important American products which seek markets
abroad. The list includes wheat and wheat flour;
corn ; cotton ; lard and other meat products ; dried,
canned, and fresh fruit ; many chemical and re-
lated products; machinery of practically all
kinds; textile specialties; all types of electrical
equipment and apparatus; agricultural imple-
ments ; and office machinery and equipment.

Among the products on which the United States
granted concessions are lead and zinc, Canadian-
type whiskey, cigarette leaf tobacco, aluminum,
long-staple cotton, precious and semiprecious
stones, certain laces and embroideries, flour bulbs,
sugar (except from Cuba and the Philippine Is-
lands), cheese, and bonito and certain other fish,
not including frozen fish fillets. In over-all
figures, duty reductions made by the United States
at Torquay apply to I.t.5 percent, by value, of all
dutiable imports into this country in 1949 ; duties
were bound on an additional 1 percent of dutiable
imports; and duty-free status was bound on about
1 percent of duty-free imports. In all cases, con-
cessions were granted on products which can be
imported into this country to the advantage of the
national economy.

May 27, 7951

945520—51 3

It is not possible, at this stage, to make an esti-
mate of the amount of United States trade which
will benefit, indirectly, from the concessions nego-
tiated by other countries among themselves, which
will apply to United States products, but the ad-
vantages will undoubtedly be very great.

The list of commodities on which the United
States would consider granting concessions in the
negotiations, as published before the public hear-
ings preceding the Torquay negotiations, con-
tained approximately 2,800 items. Concessions
actually made at Torquay apply to about 1,325
items.

In order to provide for the public the maximum
of information with regard to the Torquay Con-
ference, there has been prepared a comprehensive
analysis of the results, containing full details of
all concessions obtained and granted by the United
States. For convenience, a summary of that anal-
ysis is attached to this release.- The analysis itself
is available by purchase from the Superintendent
of Documents, Government Printing Office, Wash-
ington 25, D. C, at the price of $1.00.

World Trade Week, 1951 '

A PROCLAMATION

Whereas trade among tbe free nations of the world
raises tlie .standards of livins of the peoples of such na-
tions and fosters friendly relations among them ; and

Whereas international trade makes it possible for us
and our allies to obtain supplies and materials necessary
for the mobilization of a common defense against aggres-
sion ; and

Whereas it is particularly fitting in this time of inter-
national ten.sion that the ideals and effectiveness of free
enterprise should be reasserted:

Now, Therefore, I Harry S. Truman, President of the
United States of America, do hereby proclaim the week
beginning May 20, 1!>51, as World Trade Week ; and I
request the appropriate officials of the Federal Govern-
ment and of the several States, Territories, possessions,
and municipalities of the United States to cooperate in the
observance of that week.

I also urge business, labor, agricultural, educational,
and civic groups, as well as the people of the United
States generally, to observe World Trade Week with
gatherings, discus.sions, exhibits, ceremonies, and other
appropriate activities.

In witness whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and
caused the Seal of the United States of America to be
affixed.

Done at the City of Washington this eighth day of May
in the year of our Lord nineteen hundred and
[seal] fifty-one, and of the Independence of the United
States of America the one hundred and seventy-
fifth.

By the President :
Dean Acheson,
Secretary of State.

' Not here printed. For text of summary, see Depart-
ment of State press release 36.5 of May 7, 19151.
' Proc. 2927, 16 Fed. Beg. 4367.

817

Problem of Fair Distribution of Commodities

hy WtJIard L. Thorp

Assistant Secretary for Economic Affairs '

Tliere are a number of things that have brought
about the present situation, and, by the jjresent
situation, I am thinking about shortages of raw
materials and tlie tremendous rise in prices of raw
materials. The first thing has been just the be-
havior of the economies themselves, quite apart
from any new programs of any kind.

For the last quarter of 1950 in the United States,
our industrial production was 22 percent above
the level of the previous year, 1949. It had gone
up quarter by quarter through 1950, and that is
a tremendous increase. The total industrial pro-
duction of the United States was running at the
end of 1950, the last quarter, 22 percent above the
level of the year 1949. In Western Europe, it was
23 percent above the level in 1949.

This step-up in industrial production not only
has required much moi'e raw materials but there
is a thing called the pipeline, a series of various
steps from raw material to consumer, and what
happens is that you not only have to bring a given
increased amount out at the end but there is a
tendency for inventories, at each point along the
pipeline, to have to be increased so that the total
impact is an exaggerated one.

It has always been true, as those who have
studied business cj'cles can tell you, that the
swings in an economy are less at the consumer's
point and most at the raw materials point, both
pricewise and productionwise. This is a normal
phenomenon. Swings become exaggei'ated as you
get away from the consumer.

Now, on top of this increased demand was the
fact that a good many people began to anticipate
that there might be shortages and, of course, there
is nothing that creates a shortage as definitely as
the expectancy that there will be a shortage. You
remember we had a run on sugar,* here in the
United States, when there was no shortage, but

' Excerpts from nn informal speech made before a Na-
tional Conference held at the Department of State on
May 2 and relea.sed to the press on May 3.

only rumors of one. In the department stores a
little while ago, there was a period in which in
some items the sales were just tremendous, ob-
viously a kind of stockpiling, if you will, on the
part of consumers. This is a natural phenomenon,
it is not against the law, and everybody proceeds
to do it. Individuals, businessmen, and specula-
tors— I mean by that, people who just buy because
they think the price is going up — and finally gov-
ernments, all have moved in in anticipation of
shortages, to purchase these raw materials.

I must say that the Government purchases for
stockpiling are something on which information
is not given out, but I can say that they usually
are greatly exaggerated in the various markets as
against what actually has happened.

Well, all this together, plus the fact that clearly
there will be added demands for particular ma-
terials when the production of military items gets
rolling, all this means that in some items there
are and will be shortages. Iron, steel, copper, and
zinc and a whole series of things will be needed in
military production. To the extent to which we
meet the future as we hope to do by gi-eater total
production, both military and civilian, the pres-
sure on raw materials will be that much gi-eater.

Now, a lot of things have been done to ease this
situation and mostly done by the United States.

In the first place, in a great many items, we have
issued orders which forbid production or the use
of materials for certain types of products. We
just have wiped them out because they were lux-
urious uses of particular products.

In the second place, many industries have been
told on what reduced basis they can have these
raw materials, looking ahead quarter by quarter.
Tlie automobile people can only have so much
steel, less by a considerable percentage than they
had last year. This is typical of a whole series
of steps that have been taken, because you have a
situation in which the demand seems to outrun
the supply. There are only two things you can
do. You can either cut back on the demand or

818

Departmenf of State Bulletin

you can increase the supply. We have been cut-
ting back on tlie demand on a selective basis, and
will continue to do so as may be necessary, because
if we don't, then we will have obviously a waste-
ful situation in which a precious material is being
used in far less important uses.

We have also done a good deal with respect to
increasing supply. That, of course, is a matter in
which it is easy to act in some cases and difficult
to do in others. In the case of rubber, we have
taken all the synthetic rubber plants out of moth-
balls, and they are getting under operation, so
that that will greatly ease that particular
situation.

This Government is financing the opening of
new sulphur deposits in other countries, man-
ganese deposits in otlier countries, tungsten depos-
its in otlier countries, in fact, very actively look-
ing toward the expansion of the supply. But,
even after you have done what you can on cutting
back the demand and what you can on increasing
the supply, there still is a problem of fair distri-
bution among countries, because, after all, the
United States can outbid anybody else in most
markets. Therefore, we have a basic problem of
fair distribution where there are shortages.

In the case of the two commodities, which are
particularly important at the present time, in
which the United States has very substantial con-
trol, sulphur and cotton, we have set up export
controls for allocation as among countries so that
as far as the American supply going abroad is
concerned, it will be fairly distributed and each
foreign country will get its share, based upon what
it has customarily taken, with consideration of any
special circumstances. But even beyond that,
starting last fall, we organized, here in Washing-
ton, a new organization which has had very little
publicity, and doesn't need it particularly, known
as the International Materials Conference.

It has a central conunittee in which there are 8
countries plus the Organization of American
States and the Organization for European Eco-
nomic Cooperation, 10 members as a central com-
mittee which sets up international committees on
particular commodities. To do this, it gets out
the statistics, and it invites the half dozen coun-
tries that are the chief producers and the half
dozen countries that are the chief consumers. It
calls them together and says, "Now, you are the
most important countries producing and con-
suming this commodity. We would like to put
on you as a group the responsibility for consider-
ing what can be done to increase production and
to make more effective and fairer distribution of
this particular commodity."

Those committees are meeting busily here in
Washington, and I expect that some of them very
shortly will begin to make recommendations to
their Governments as to steps that can be taken.
So here is an organized international approach to
the problem of sharing goods with other comitries.

One can argue purely selfishly that we have to
get things from other countries like copper and
lead and zinc and petroleum, and, to the extent
to which we want to get them from other countries,
we obviously have to be prepared to export to
them. But beyond that, there is the point that
these various friendly countries must maintain
their civilian economies, and much of that de-
pends upon exports which they get from the
United States.

Interestingly enough, I anticipate that our
problems in the next year, as far as the State De-
partment and its work in the field of economic
relations is concerned, will be more important in
terms of whether or not foreign countries get from
the United States commodities which tliey are
perfectly prepared to pay for, but which are diffi-
cult to get, rather than the problem of the dollar
shortages which they may face, although both of
them will be problems that will be active and diffi-
cult.

U.S.-Chile Discuss Copper Situation

[Released to the pre^s May 7]

The United States and Chilean Governments
have concluded a series of talks, held at the re-
quest of the President of Chile, on outstanding
problems with respect to copper. Agreement was
reached which should result in a substantial in-
crease in Chilean copper production, greater sup-
plies of copper from Chile for the United States,
denial of Chilean copper to unfriendly countries,
and a higher price to Chile for her copper. No
purchase commitments are, however, involved.

It was agreed that production of copper in
Chile should be expanded. In the case of the
American companies, this is to be done without
United States financial assistance but with
priority assistance for equipment to the fullest
extent that the emergency permits. The com-
panies concerned are negotiating with the Chilean
Government concerning the actual means of ex-
pansion and with respect to a satisfactory pro-
posal for a new tax and exchange law. These
meetings between the companies and the Chilean
officials are being carried out in a cooperative
atmosphere and are calculated to bring out a
substantial increase in the production of copper,
the bulk of which will be available for United
States defense needs. The United States also
agreed to consider an aid program for expansion
of production at small mines if such expansion
proves feasible.

The Chileans agreed to cease abnormal trade in
semiprocessed copper and taking cognizance of
the need of maximum shipments of copper to the
United States agi-eed that no more than 20 per-
cent of the production of the American companies
will be reserved for Chile's own use and for export

May 21, I95I

819

to other countries. Cliile will take steps to limit
such exports to essential requirements of friendly
countries and will take the necessary measures to
insure that such copper will not be reexported,
and she will make no sales to countries of the
Soviet bloc.

In recognition of the fact that the price of
Chile's copper has not kept pace with the rise in
most of the commodities Chile imports, to induce
increased production of copper, ancl in further
recognition of Chile's needs for additional dollars
in order to maintain its economic stability and
support its own eil'ort for participation in hemi-
spheric defense, the United States Government
has stated that it considered reasonable an in-
crease of 3^ per pound in the price of Chilean
copper sold in the United States. It is under-
stood that prices to third countries will not be
lower than the price to the United States.

Eepresentatives of the Chilean Government in-
cluded the Foreign Minister and the Ambassador
to the United States and the officials of the
Anaconda Copper Mining Company and Ken-
necott Copper Corporation, which control the
largest copi^er mines in Chile, were given an op-
portunity to present their views. The United
States Government was represented by officials of
the Department of State, Defense Production
Administration, and the Economic Stabilization
Agency.

VOA Adds New Programs

to World-Wide Broadcasting Service

[Released to the press May 7]

The Voice of America will step up its world-
wide broadcasting service next Sunday (May 13)
with the inauguration of daily programs in Hindi,
Urdu, Thai, and Alabanian, and with increases
in present Finnish and English transmissions.

The new programs will increase the Voice of
America broadcast output to approximately 45
program hours daily in 37 languages and dialects.

The 30-minute Hindi program to India (6 : 30
p.m., Indian time) and the 30-minute Urdu pi'o-
gram to Pakistan (6 p.m., Pakis-tan time) will
be relayed by Tangier and Radio Colombo, in
Ceylon. The 30-minute Thai broadcast to Thai-
land (7 p.m., Thai tiiTie) will be relayed by Manila
and Honolulu. The 15-minute Albanian program
(6:15 p.m., Albanian time) will be relayed by
Tangier, Munich, Salonika, and BBC.

The new Finnish jtrogram (6:30 p.m., Finnish
time) will be relayed by Tangier and BBC and
will increase the daily Finnish language output
to 30 minutes.

The additions to the Voice of America English
service will consist of two 30-minute programs.

one to the Far East (8 : 30 p.m., China Coast time)
with relays by Manila and Honolulu, and the other
to South Asia (9 p.m., Indian time) with relays ,
by Tangier and Radio Colombo. I

Opportunities for Graduate Study
Researcli and Teacliing Abroad

[Released to the press May 5]

Opportunities for more than 1,200 Americans
to undertake graduate study, teaching, or research
abroad during the 1952-53 academic year under
the terms of the Fulbright Act were announced
today by the Department of State. A comparable
number of opportunities will be available for for-
eign nationals to come to the United States for
similar purposes.

The countries in which these opportunities 'will
be available are Austria, Australia, Belgium,
Burma, Egypt. France, Greece, India, Iran, Italy,
Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Pakistan,
Philippines, Thailand, Turkey, and the United
Kingdom.

All applications must be submitted by October
15, 1951. Persons wishing to apply should send
their inquiries to the following agencies for :

Oraduate study

Students now enrolled in American colleges and univer-
sities should apply to the Fulbright Program advisers
on their campuses.

Others should apply directly to : Institute of International
Education, 2 West 45th Street, New York 19, N.Y.

University teaching, or advanced research

Conference Board of Associated Research Councils, 2101
Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington 25, D.C.

Teaching in American secondary schools abroad

American Schools Service, American Council on Educa-
tion, 1785 Massachusetts Avenue, XW., Washington
6, D.C.

Teaching in national secondary schools abroad

OfBce of Education, Federal Security Agency, Washing-
ton 25, D.C.

These awards are made under Public Law 584,
79th Congress, the Fulbright Act, which author-
izes the Department of State to use certain for-
eign currencies and credits acquired through the
sale of surplus property abroad for programs of
educational exchange with other nations.

Grants are normally made for one academic year
and are renewable only in exceptional cases.
Grants to Americans usually include round-trip
transportation, tuition or a stipend, a living allow-
ance and a small amount for necessary books and
equipment. Grants to foreign nationals include
round-trip transportation only, and their expenses
in the United States must be met from other
sources.

820

Department of State Bulletin

Polish Charges of Discriminatory Inspections of Her Vessels
Entering Port of New York Called Unfounded

[Released to the press May 11]

The American Embassy at Warsaiv today delivered the
follouinff note to the Polish Foreign Office in reply to
the Polish (rovcruniciit's note of April 18, 1951, eoncern-
ing the withdrawal of the Polish Motor Ship Batory from,
the New York service.

The Embassy of the United States of America
presents its compliments to the Ministry of For-
eign Affairs and with reference to the Ministry's
note of April IS, 1951,^ concerning discontinuance
of service to New York by the Motor Ship Batory
has the honor, pureuant to instructions of the
United States Government, to make the following
reply :

The United States Government notes this
formal communication of the Polish Government
on a maritime problem contains many passages
that can only have the purpose of propaganda.
The United States Government, therefoi'e, refuses
to take seriously, or address itself to, various prop-
aganda assertions and insinuations about the
alleged "anti-peace policy of the United States"
or its actions ''hostile to peaceful international
cooperation." The specious character of such
charges is generally apparent as is also the im-
plication that Poland belongs to a block of coun-
tries which alone are striving for peace.

It is essential, however, to deal with certain
statements in the Polish note involving points of
international law. In both its notes of March 19
and April 18, li)51,^ the Polish Government has
intermingled and confused measures of the Fed-
eral Government of the United States and a local
action in which the Federal Government played
no part. The Polish Government has taken the
position that the decision of the municipality of
New York as announced on March 9 by Edward
F. Cavanaugh, Jr., Commissioner of Marine and
Aviation, denying further use of municipally
owned piei-s to the Motor Ship Batory belongs to
the same group of measures as inspections of that
ship which Immigration, Customs, and Coast
Guard officers of the Federal Government have
been accustomed to make.

' Not printed.
May 27, 1951

The Polish note further confuses the issue by
referring to these measui-es of inspection con-
ducted by the Federal Government as actions by
the Port Authorities in New York. The Em-
bassy's note of April 2, 1951,^ clearly distinguished
between such steps of the Federal Government
and the recent decision of the New York munici-
pality concerning leasing its piers and insists that
this distinction must be kept in mind as a basis
for any factual consideration of the problem.

In the treatment of these two separate matters
it is desired to deal first with the charge that the
inspections of the Federal Government constitute
discrimination against the Polish flag and are in
violation of the principles of international law.

These precautionary measures do not violate the
Treaty of Friendship, Commerce, and Consular
Rights between the United States of America and
Poland signed at Washington on June 15, 1931,
since there are no provisions in the Treaty that
prohibit such inspections. In the absence of a
governing treaty provision, there is no known
principle in international law to prevent a govern-
ment from taking necessai-y and reasonable pre-
cautions (such as inspections complained about)
in its own territory for the protection of its citi-
zens and its security.

This is especially true during times of national
emergency. Long-term treaties governing peace-
time intercourse between nations have been con-
sidered as being implicitly subject to security
reservations. More recent treaties, out of an abun-
dance of precaution, do contain security reserva-
tions. As an indication of the views of nations
concerning precautionary safety measures for the
preservation of human life, at the time of the
1948 Conference on the subject of Safety of Life
at Sea, it was decided that inspection officers of
any Government had the right to verify that the
vessel carried a valid certificate and, if necessary,
that conditions of tlie shiji's seaworthiness cor-
responded substantially with detailed pi'ovisions
of the Convention governing tlie building and
equipment of seagoing vessels and their lifeboats.

Since inspections are not prohibited by treaties

821

and are not at variance with International law,
officers of the Federal Government will inspect any
ship, foreign or domestic, when similar circum-
stances exist to make desirable such inspections.
The charge that inspections are discriminatory
are, therefore, without foundation and cannot be
accepted by the United States Government.

As to the other matter, involving the entry of
the M. S. Batory into New York harbor after the
decision of the New York municipality affecting
the use of municipal-owned piers, the U. S. Gov-
ernment wishes to stress again it had no connec-
tion with this local action of a local pier owner,
or statements made by the pier owner, and, in
fact, was not even consulted by the New York
municipality. The issue of whether the action of
the municipal authorities constitutes a flagant vio-
lation of the principle of freedom of navigation
and principles of International law must be con-
sidered in relation to the actual facts of the situa-
tion.

The local municipality does not own or control
all berths in the New York Port area. Ships of
the Gdynia- American Line, Inc., the operators of
the M. S. Batory, have not been outlawed or barred
from calling at tlie Port of New York or any other
American port open to commerce and the Line
has not been excluded from leasing privately
owned berthing facilities, the equal in every re-
spect to those being used by certain other well-
kiiown steamship companies, including the Ameri-
can Export Lines, the American President Lines
and tlie Holland-America Line, operating luxury
passenger liners to and from New Yort.

If privately owned berthing facilities are avail-
able for lease, the statement in the Polish note that
"the Steamship Line has no possibility to con-
clude an agreement for another pier in the Port
of New York" is in error. The Polish Govern-
ment has made no showing that such facilities are
not available; in fact the United States Govern-
ment understands that the Gdynia-America Line,
Inc. was, in fact, offered space for docking at
Jersey City across the Hudson River within the
Port of New York.

In the absence of such a showing the conclusion
is inescapable that on this point there has been
no violation by the United States Government of
the freedom of commerce and navigation pro-
visions as set forth in article VI of the Treaty.
The Gdynia-America Line, Inc. has been operating
ships to the United States for a long time and
although permitted to do so has never shown any
interest in acquiring its own pier facilities. In-
asmuch as there has been no violation of the free-
dom of navigation and commerce provisions of
the Treaty, there can be no violation of a similar
principle in inteiiiational law even if such a prin-
ciple could be proven to exist in the absence of
appropriate treaty provision.

The United States Government does not dispute
the assertion that local or nmnicipal authorities

are bound as much as federal authorities by treaty
provisions. The United States Government, how-
ever, finds no particular treaty provisions as
having been violated either by the local author-
ities or by the Federal Government, and, indeed,
the Polish Government cites no such violation.
If all berths available in the Port of New York
had been under control of the local authorities,
or if Polish vessels had been prevented from call-
ing at the Port of New York, the situation com-
plained about would have been viewed more seri-
ously. But as the Polish Government must real-
ize, the actual circumstances are quite different.
In view of these considerations the only con-
clusion to be drawn is that the Polish Govern-
ment did not wish, for other reasons, to con-
tinue the services of the M. S. Batory to New
York. It is thus apparent that the Polish Gov-
ernment was seeking a pretext in the action of the
New York municipality for withdrawing the
M. S. Batory from navigation to New York
whereby it could seek to place responsibility for
this decision on the United States itself.

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Oovem-
ment Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C. Address re-
guests direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except
in the case of free publications, which may be obtained
from the Department of State.

Essentials of a Peace With Japan. Far Eastern Series 40.
Pub. 4171. 11 pp. Free.

Address by John Foster Dulles delivered at Whittier
College, Los Angeles, California, on March 31, 1951.

The Schuman Plan Constituting a European Coal and
Steel Community: Draft Treaty Constituting the Euro-
pean Coal and Steel Community and Draft Convention
Containing the Transitional Provisions. European and
British Commonwealth Series 22. Pub. 4173. 126 pp.
55(J.

Proof texts of basic documents initialed at Paris on
March 19, 1951, by the representatives of France, Italy,
the German Federal Republic, and the Benelux coun-
tries (Belgium, the Netherlands, Luxembourg).

An Analysis of the Schuman Plan. European and British
Commonwealth Series 23. Pub. 4176. 8 pp. Free.

Reprinted from the Bitlletin of April 2, 1951.

The Department of State. Department and Foreign Serv-
ice Series 23. Pub. 4177. 14 pp. Free.

Description of functions of the Department and list-
ing of heads of principal activities of the Depart-
ment. Illu.strated.

Preventing a New World War. General Foreign Policy

Series 48. Pub. 4195. 8 pp. Free.

Address by Harry S. Truman, President of United
States, on April 11, 1951.

822

Departmenf of Stafe Bulletin

Point 4 Agreements Signed

POINT 4 AGREEMENT WITH ECUADOR SIGNED

[Released to the press May 4]

The United States and Ecuador signed a Point
4 general agreement at Quito yesterday. Foreign
Minister Neftali Ponce signed for Ecuador and
Charge d'Affaires John N. Hamlin signed for the
United States. Twenty-three Governments have
now signed pacts for technical cooperation with
tlie United States under the Act for International
Development which authorized the President's
Point 4 Program. With the signing of this agree-
ment, the technical assistance activities of other
United States Government agencies in Ecuador
will be included under the Point 4 Program.

Dr. Henry G. Bennett, Technical Cooperation
Administrator, who recently visited Ecuador, pre-
dicted good results from cooperation between
American and Ecuadoran experts :

What I saw convinced me that Ecuador has a future
of great promise, if her economic development plans are
carried out.

Her citizens have shown remarkable stamina under
adversity. When the terrible earthqualje of Ambato
struck in 1949 the whole country rallied to the task of
relief and recovery. The Ecuadoran people have a re-
markable spirit and a determination to let nothing stand
In the way of reconstruction and progress. They have
earned our respect and cooperation.

The Ambato earthquake caused more than 6,000
killed and a property loss estimated at more than
20 million dollars; one of the very first to offer
assistance was the United States Health and Sani-
tation field party of the Institute of Inter- Ameri-
can Affairs, a Point 4 agency.

A health and sanitation servicio has been in
operation in Ecuador since 1942. The United
States field party cooperating with the Ecuadoran
Government in the joint servicio is headed by
Charles Preston Blanks, Jr., of Meridian, Missis-
sippi. In the combined staff of the servicio, there
are at present six American technicians and 495
Ecuadorans. Its activities have included the
building, staffing and equipping of 29 hospitals,
training professional and technical personnel, and
a program of malaria control.

An education servicio was started in 1945 by the
Institute of Inter-American Affairs in coopera-

tion with the Ecuadoran Government. George
Greco, of Nesquehoning, Pennsylvania, is chief of
the United States field party. He has five other
Americans on his staff.

There has been a United States agricultural
mission in Ecuador since 1941. At present, it
consists of eight technicians and is headed by
Lee Hines of Ripley, Tippah County, Mississippi.
He is director of the cooperative experiment sta-
tion of Ecuador. Its work now includes improve-
ment of cacao through plant selection for yield
and resistance to disease. This work is carried
out in cooperation with commercial cocoa pro-
ducers.

Some United States technicians are working on
cereals and the improvement of food crops in
general. Others devote their attention to fibrous
and oil-producing plants and still others to live-
stock, which includes insect and pest study and
control and the improvement of the dairying
industry.

A United States civil aviation expert is now in
Ecuador studying the coimtry's transportation
problems, advising on the construction of airfields,
and the setting up of air traffic controls and navi-
gation facilities.

Requests have been approved for technical as-
sistance on census and industrial training. Spe-
cialists will be sent out by the Department of
Labor under the new Point 4 agreement.

Today, there are 22 Ecuadoran trainees in the
United States studying American methods in civil
aviation, census, vital statistics, child welfare,
public health and sanitation, water resources,
aqueducts and sewers, education and labor
statistics.

POINT 4 AGREEMENT WITH EGYPT SIGNED

[Released to the press on May 5]

The Governments of the United States and
Egypt today concluded a Point 4 general agree-
ment. The signing of the agreement took place in
Cairo, with Minister of Foreign Affairs Dr. Mo-
hamed Salaheddin Bey representing Egypt and
Ambassador Jefferson Caffery representing the
United States.

May 21, I95I

823

Dr. Henry G. Bennett, Technical Cooperation
Administrator, announced simultaneously that
two projects in the fields of agricultural develop-
ment and rural improvement, which the Egyptian
Government had requested, will go into action
immediately.

In one of these projects, American technicians
will cooperate with the Egyptian Ministry of
Social Affairs on its comprehensive program of
social security and rural improvement. They will
help to train staffs for the 131 rural training cen-
ters already in operation and advise on adminis-
tration of the social security program.

In the other project, American specialists will
work with the Ministry of National Economy on a
national agricultural program including problems
of the milling and storage of grain, extension serv-
ices, dry farming, and control of citrus diseases.
In all, seven ministries and agencies of the Egyp-
tian Government will participate in the work
under the Point 4 Program.

Trainees will be brought to the United States
for advanced study in rural and agricultural im-
provement. Wlien they finish their training and
return to Egypt, they will act as instructors in the
131 rural training centers the Government now
operates. They will organize cooperatives, de-
velop handicrafts, and establish basic education,
agricultural, and health programs.

The Point 4 mission will consist of six techni-
cians under a technical cooperation officer ; two of
them will work with the Ministry of Social Affairs,
and four will cooperate on the agricultural devel-
opment program with the Ministry of National
Economy.

POINT 4 AGREEMENT WITH HAITI SIGNED

[Released to the press May 9]

A Point 4 general agreement has been con-
cluded with Haiti by a formal exchange of notes
between the Haitian Ministry of Foreign Affairs
and the United States Embassy at Port-au-Prince.

Technical Cooperation Administrator, Henry
G. Bennett, said that the exchange of notes paves
the way for an expanded program of technical
cooperation with Haiti under the Point 4
Program.

Dr. Bennett called Haiti's food problem the
number one priority, because of her rising popu-
lation. He pointed out that a scant 35 percent
of the country's area can produce food. Much
of this land has become unproductive through
years of unscientific farming. He said that Haiti,
with an area only slightly larger than Vermont,
has to support 3,500,000 people compared to Ver-
mont's 374,000 people. Each square mile of
Haiti's tillable land must feed 1,050 mouths.
This, said Dr. Bennett, is possible only through
modern methods and careful planning.

The Institute of Inter-American Affairs has
cooperated with the Government of Haiti on a
food supply program through a joint servicio,
since 1944. The Institute's field party is now
under the direction of Vance Kogers, of Albu-
querque, New Mexico.

The food supply servicio staff consists of 8
Americans and 239 Haitians. The program has
helped farmers to restore lands to food growing
which were diverted to production of other crops
during the war. It has been concerned also with
the construction of gi'ain seed storage facilities.
It has operated demonstration farms for food
crops and livestock. It has reclaimed small dis-
tricts in the Artibonite River Valley through
drainage, irrigation, and soil leaching. These
pilot projects have set a pattern for large-scale
rehabditation of the Valley for which a credit of
14 million dollars was recently approved by the
Export-Import Bank.

The United States has been extending tech-
nical and financial assistance to Haiti for the past
35 years. This service has been especially im-
portant during the past 15 yeai-s. Since 1947 the
United Nations and its related agencies such as
UNESCO, to which the United States contributes,
have also been active in Haiti.

Technicians of the United States Government
have served as advisers in the fields of agriculture,
finance, health and sanitation, education, census
statistics, irrigation, and reclamation. At the
same time, Haitian students have come to the
United States for advanced study along similar
lines. During the 1944-49 period, 212 specialists
arrived in this country from Haiti for training.

The Institute of Inter-American Affairs has
been cooperating with Haiti on a health and sani-
tation servicio since 1942. It has a staff of 7
Americans and 323 Haitians. Edwin L. Dudley,
a sanitary engineer of Biloxi, Mississippi, is chief
of the IiAA field party.

The principal work of the health and sanita-
tion servicio has been to control yaws and malaria,
to train public health nurses, to improve hospital
facilities, and to train Haitians progressively to
take over their own health activities.

POINT 4 SIGNED WITH ATHENS COLLEGE

[Released to the press May 10]

The United States Government today signed a
grant-in-aid agreement for $297.r)25 with the
Athens College, Greece, to be administered under
the Technical Cooperation Program.

Dr. Henry G. Bennett, Technical Cooperation
Administrator, signed for the Uniteil States Gov-
ernment, and President Homer W. Davis signed
for the Athens College. The college, a 25-year-
old joint Greek-American institution, will expand
its departments of chemistry, physics, biology,

824

Department of State Bulletin

manual arts, and commercial training, erect sev-
eral buildings to permit an increase in enrollment,
and provide scholarships for 200 Greek students
in the next 2 years.

The grant will enable the college to add 14
professors and assistants, both Gi'eek and Ameri-
can, to its staff and to provide them with
necessary laboratory equipment.

Point 4 scholars will be drawn from the rural
areas where educational opportunities are scarce.
Thej' will be selected on the basis of competitive
examinations, and preference will be given to
those who are willing to go back to the rural
areas as technicians and teachers.

Dr. Bennett said that since the liberation of
Greece, more than $200,000 has been donated to
the college by the Greek people for new buildings
and scholarships. The fact that this gift repx'e-
sented tlie sacrifices of hundreds of people who
have suifered great hardships speaks well for the
reputation of the college.

Greeks and Americans have contributed about
equally to the support of Athens College, which
is administered by two governing bodies, a Greek
Board of Directors in Greece and an American
Board of Trustees in the United States. An
American president and a Greek co-director share
responsibility for the operation of the college.

There are about 900 students enrolled in Athens
College studying courses on the Junior College
and secondary school level.

Former Prime Minister Themistocles Sophou-
lis recently said.

Institutions such as Athens College complete and
strengthen the worli of American aid to the Greelj people.
The cooperation of Greeks and Americans in defending
our country, in rebuilding its ruins would be incomplete
without cooperation in the task of creating a new genera-
tion capable of shouldering the responsibility for the
future of Greece.

AMERICAN UNIVERSITY OF BEIRUT
UNDERTAKES POINT 4 PROJECT

[Released to the press April 26]

The American University of Beirut today en-
tered into a Point 4 agreement under which the
university will train Near Eastern technicians in
agriculture and engineering, preventive medicine,
economics and finance, and public administration.

Dr. Henry G. Bennett, Technical Cooperation
Administrator in the Department of State, and
Dr. Stephen B. L. Penrose, President of the Uni-
versity, today signed the agreement, setting forth
the terms of cooperation between the university
and the Point 4 administration. The agreement
provides a unique opportunity in the Near East
for nationals of that region to gain technical com-
petence in these four fields considered essential to
the economic development of the region.

As a regional training center, the university will
prepare selected students for public service in their

own countries. These students, Point-4 fellows,
will be nominated by their respective governments,
approved jointly by the university and the Point 4
mission at Beirut, and given a year's intensive
training.

Each student must agree to spend at least a year
in the public service of his country working in his
special field after completing his course at the uni-
versity. The program will' graduate 118 of these
special students each year.

The four new schools will be jointly staffed by
the university and the Technical Cooperation Ad-
ministration, drawing on other agencies of the
Government, such as the United States Public
Health Service, and the Department of Agricul-
ture for technical personnel. Equipment which
cannot be locally obtained will be financed by Point
4 funds, as well as the tuition of the special stu-
dents. Their Governments are expected to pay
their transportation expenses. An initial sum of
$624,000 has been allocated to the project by the
Technical Cooperation Administration on the
basis of a 2-year program.

In signing the agreement, Dr. Bennett pointed
out that the new project follows a pattern of Point
4 cooperation with private organizations of distin-
guished reputation and proven experience. This
pattern, he noted, was first set by a Point 4 agree-
ment with the Near East Foundation on January
30, and it will be increasingly used and expanded,
in line with established Point 4 policy.

The American University of Beirut was chosen
as the Point 4 agency for this training project
because of the reputation it has earned as an out-
standing institution of learning during its 85 years
of life. The majority of the physicians practicing
today in the Arab states received their medical
education at the University, and its fame is so well-
founded that the selection of trainees should be a
relatively easy task.

The university was started at Beirut in 1866.
It began with 10 students. It was known as the
Syrian Protestant College until 1920 when its
name was changed to the American University.
It has a charter from the regents of the University
of the State of New York, Its medical school
was started in 1867 and today is on the approved
list of foreign medical schools of the American
Medical Association. Under the agreement just
signed with the Technical Cooperation Admin-
istration, a school of preventive medicine and pub-
lic health will be added.

Today, the university has 40 buildings located
on a campus of 70 acres. The International Col-
lege, which has been established at Izmir, became
affiliated with the university in 1936 to take over
the preparatory schools and the first 2 years of
college teaching. The university and the college
conduct the following schools; elementary, pre-
paratory, secondary, school for nursing, school of
arts and sciences, school of pharmacy, and school
of medicine.

May 21, 7957

825

UNITARIAN COMMITTEE TO SEND POINT 4
MEDICAL MISSION TO ISRAEL

[Released to the prens May 10]

The Department of State and the Unitarian
Service Committee today signed a Point 4 agree-
ment, under which the Committee will send a 14-
man medical mission to Israel for a 6-week period.

The agreement was signed by Dr. Henry G.
Bennett, Technical Cooperation Administrator
and Howard Brooks, Associate Director of the
Unitarian Service Committee. The project, which
grew out of a request by the Government of Israel,
is jointly financed by the World Health Organiza-
tion and by a Point 4 gi-ant.

The Unitarian Service Committee is organizing
a mission consisting of outstanding American and
Eurojjean physicians who will contribute their
services in order to share modern medical techni-
ques with the doctors of Israel. The Committee
has recently sponsored similar projects in Ger-
many at the request of the United States Govern-
ment.

The mission will hold seminars and short re-
fresher courses in various branches of the medical
sciences. It will give demonstrations and organize
informal discussions for the double purpose of
sharing recent advances in medicine and stimu-
lating cooperation among specialists in different
fields.

Howard Brooks, Associate Director of the Uni-
tarian Service Committee, will go to Israel as ad-
ministrative officer of the mission. The other
members so far appointed are :

Dr. Edward Grzegorzewski, Director, Division of Educa-
tion and Training Services, Who, Geneva, Advisor on
Medical Education, who will represent the Director
General of Who on the mission

Dr. liucien E. Morris, Assistant Professor of Anesthesi-
ology, University Hospital, State University of Iowa,
Iowa City, la.

Dr. Erik Warburg, Professor of Medicine, University of
Copenhagen, Denmark, specialist in Internal Medi-
cine

Dr. Samuel Z. Levine, Professor of Pediatries, Cornell
University Medical College, New York

Dr. Carl Semb, Surgeon-in-Chief, Ulleval Hospital, Oslo,
Norway, specialist in General and Thoracic Surgery

Dr. Leo G. Rigler, Professor of Itadiology and Head of
Department, University of Minnesota School of
Medicine, Minneapolis

Dr. Hugo Theorell. Professor of Biochemistry, Nobel
Institute, Stockholm

Dr. Paul Klemperer, Clinical Professor of Pathology,
Columbia University, (College of Physicians and
Surgeons. New York

Dr. Gordon Kenneth Moe, Professor of Physiology, Slate
University of New York, Medical Center, Syracuse
University, Syracuse, New York, specialist in
Physiology and Pharnuicology

Dr. .lohti E. flordon, Professor of Preventive Medicine and
Epiileiiii<ilo%'y, Harvard University Scliool of Public
Health, Poslon

Professor Ki<'hard Tyler, Professor of Sanitary Engineer-
ing, University of Washington, Seattle, specialist in
environmental sanitation

The problem which the mission will help to
solve is not a shortage of doctors, with which
Israel is relatively well supplied, but a lack of
up-to-date information concerning the latest de-
velopments in medicine, public health, and medi-
cal education. Many of Israel's dcjctors have
recently come there as members of refugee groups.
Their period of medical training coincided, in
general, with the years of war and intensive
persecution in Europe, during which time they
were largely cut off from world-wide progress in
medicine.

This is the sixth of a series of cooperative ar-
rangements, under the Point 4 Program, which
has been signed with private organizations tliat
have had long experience in technical and educa-
tional work abroad. Similar agreements have
been concluded with the Near East Foundation
for village improvement projects in Iran and
Syria, with the Booker Washington Institute in
Liberia, and with the American University of
Beirut, Lebanon.

POINT 4 AGREEMENT WITH NEAR EAST
FOUNDATION SIGNED

[Released to the press May 2]

Two Point 4 agreements were signed today with
the Near East Foundation for the expansion of
rural improvement programs in Iran and Syria.

Dr. Henry G. Bennett, Technical Cooperation
Administrator, represented the United States
Government and Edward C. Miller, Secretary of
the Near East Foundation, signed for that
organization.

At the signing of the agreements, Dr. Bennett
said,

The Near East Foundation has show that remarkable
results can be obtained through the rural aijproacli in
countries like Iran and Syria, where most of the people
live and work in small villages. The I'\)undation works
directly with the p«'ople, showing them better methods of
farming, better health i>ractices and basic, practical
methods of education, and training them to demonstrate
these improvements, in turn, to their own people.

In Syria, the agreement makes possible the employment
of 12 additional specialists in the tields of agriculture
extension, honiemaking, medicine, nurse-midwifery, sani-
tation, and rural education. In Iran, it will mean increas-
ing the number of village demonstration centers from 35
to 75. It will add 10 American technicians to the staff
and a large innnber of Iranians trained under United
States supervision.

The training methods have been found satisfactory.
Each American specialist will have from five to ten local
trainees assigned to him for a year of training. Thi'y will
be nominated by the Foundation and ajiproved liy their
Goveiiinients. They will enter jinlilic service when their
training ends. The doctors will conduct clini<'s at isolated
centers with the help of local trainees. They will train
nur.se-midw ives who, in turn, will teach as well as practice
their skills.

826

Department of State Bulletin

The Near East Foiindntioii will work closely
with roint 4 missions in Iran and Syria.

In Iran, the Foundation's program will supple-
ment and strengthen tlie existing Point 4 village
improvement project which is under the direction
of Dr. Franklin Harris, and which is supervised
by an Iranian-United States Joint Commission for
Kural Improvement, under an agreement signed
in October 1950.

The ])urpose of the Foundation's work is the
same as that of the Point 4 mission : to raise stand-
ards of living at the village level by a concerted
effort to im^Drove agriculture, health, and educa-
tion, and to train a body of Iranian experts to
carry this work to other parts of the country.

The Near East Fomulation was incorporated
in New York on February 18, 1930. It succeeded
the Near East Relief and selected the Near East
as its field of activity because of the needs of the
area and the inheritance of knowledge and good
will it received from the Near East Relief.

At present, it is working in Syria, Iran, and
Greece. In Greece, its program emphasizes live-
stock improvement, vocational training for the
physically unfit, youth welfare, and rural im-
provement.

The Near East Foundation is supported entirely
by voluntary contributions. It represents an or-
ganized American effort to assist people through
fully recognizing the values in national genius
and cultures; understanding changing conditions
in social and economic life; undertaking demon-
strations only upon local request and where local
cooperation is assured; adapting proved Ameri-
can welfare methods to existing needs; selecting
technically trained American personnel of proved
ability to direct each project ; expecting each proj-
ect to be continued by local agencies and specifi-
cally trained local personnel ; and maintaining
broad international ideals with a staff pledged to
respect native customs and work in accord with
local religious opinion.

CARIBBEAN AREA GRANTED VOCATIONAL
TRAINING UNDER POINT 4

[Released to the press on May 7]

Technical Cooperation Administrator Heniy G.
Bennett today announced a grant of $38,250 of
Point 4 funds to the Metropolitan Vocational
School of San Juan, Puerto Rico, for vocational
training of citizens of the British, French, and
Dutch territories in the Caribbean area. The
project grew out of the interest of the Caribbean
Commission in creating a nucleus of trained arti-
sans needed for the development of the Islands.

In a letter to Ward M. Canaday, chairman of
the United States sector of the Caribbean Com-
mission announcing the approval of the grant, Dr.
Bennett said :

This project has been developed, largely as a result of
the interest shown by the Caribbean Commission and its

nicnilicrs. In order to insure that the training is given to
tliosc individuals wlio will bo able to nialie the greatest
contriliution to the economic development of the Islands,
il is our hope that the Commission will sponsor this pro-
grani ;ind assist in carrying it out.

Specifically, we should like to liave the Secretary Gen-
eral of the Commission, \vorl;ing with tli<> school in Puerto
Rico, lake stei»s to see that the availal)ility of this train-
ing is made known lo the otlicials and peoi)les of the terri-
tories. We sliould like to have the Secretary General
receive the applications, determine which ones should be
included within the number autliorized in this project and
certify Ihem to the school. We sliduld Iil;e very much
to have reports from the Secretary General from time to
time iiulicating the progress which is uuide by the stu-
dents upon the completion of their training.

The fields of training at the Metropolitan Voca-
tional School, in which the students from the
Caribbean area may enroll, include cabinet mak-
ing, electricity, radio, auto mechanics, macliine
shoj), printing, air-conditioning, refrigeration,
liaking, and drafting. The grant approved today
will permit 30 students to take a 1-year training
course. The fact that last fall 47 applications had
been received by the Secretary General of the
Caribbean Commission was cited as evidence of
interest among the islanders.

POINT 4 TECHNICIANS TRAIN FOR
FIELD ASSIGNMENTS

The Department of State announced on April
25 that 15 Point 4 technicians, ijreparing to take
up field assignments in Latin America and India,
were told today that the President's Point 4 Pro-
gram is "good business" for Americans as well as
for the people of less developed regions.

Dr. Henry G. Bennett, Administrator of the
Point 4 Program in the Department of State, told
the technicians :

We borrowed from ever.vbody in building up this great
nation. Now, in the Point 4 Program, we are just paying
back a little — and benefiting ourselves while we help
others.

It is tecnnologieally possible for every human being
to be well-fed, decently clothed, and liou.sed and to have
proper medical care. The peoples of other lands have
learned of this progress. They want to share in the
knowledge that makes it possible to produce and enjoy
the good things of life.

If we are to have stable peace in the world, we must
attack the sources of war, the Four Horsemen : hunger,
poverty, disease and ignorance.

Dr. Bennett spoke at the Foreign Service In-
stitute where the fifteen technicians are complet-
ing a 3-weeks orientation course which empha-
sizes the understanding of foreign peoples, their
customs, cultures, and languages. The wives of
several of the technicians are also attending the
orientation course.

Twelve of the experts will proceed to Latin
America to take part in Point 4 projects concerned
with food supply, education, public health, and
census mapping. One is going to India to co-
operate in agricultural development. Two will
be roving consultants in the administration of
social security programs.

May 2J, 7951

827

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Special Report of U.N. Commanding General ^

CAPTURED DOCUMENTS REVEAL DETAILS FOR ATTACK ON KOREA

U.N. doc. S/2112
Dated May 2, 1951

I herewith submit a Special Report of the
United Nations Command Operations in Korea
consisting of two documents captured from the
North Korean forces. The first of these docu-
ments is Reconnaissance Order No. 1, General
Staff of the North Korean Army, dated June 18,
1950. The second of these documents is Opera-
tion Order No. 1, issued by Lee Kwon Mu, Com-
mander, 4th Infantry Division, dated June 22,
1950. The originals of these documents, which
are in the Korean language, are in the possession
of the United States Government.

These two orders issued to North Korean forces
on June 18 and June 22, 1950, provide clear and
documented confirmation that the attack against
the Republic of Korea, launched on the 25th of
June 1950, was carefully prepared and carried
out in acordance with a deliberate and precon-
ceived plan for the conquest of the Republic of
Korea.

Reconnaissance Order No. 1 of June 18. 1950,
instructs the Chief of Staff of the North Korean
4th Division to carry out reconnaissance prior to
the attack in order to determine the location of
the main body of the forces of the Republic of
Korea and to work out an accurate target map
of the installations of such forces. The Order
further directs the Chief of Staff of the North
Korean 4th Division "as the attack begins" to
carry out continuous observation of the centers
of resistance on the routes of defensive lines ap-
proaching Seoul.

Operation Order No. 1, dated June 22, 1950,
issued by Lee Kwon Mu, Commander, North
Korean 4th Infantry Division, states the objec-

' Transmitted to the Security Council by Ambassador
Wnrron U. Austin, U.S. representative in the Security
Conncil, on May 2. The official Command reports are
publislied regularly in the nDu.ETiN.

tive of the 4th Division "in the frontal attack"
is to advance to the Uijongbu-Seoul area for which
preparations are to be completed by June 23, 1950.
The first report to the Security Council of the
United Nations Command Operations in Korea,
dated July 25, 1950, discloses that the attack on
the central front was carried out in accordance
with the plan set forth in this document.^

The remaining portions of Operation Order
No. 1 contain specific and detailed military direc-
tives for carrying out the attack against the Re-
public of Korea.

Full translation of a group of documents representing
orders from G-2, General Staff, North Korean Army to
the Chiefs of Staff of various military units. Dated
18 Juno 50.

(TN: indicates exact tranUteration from the original
Russian.)

To: The Chief of Staff of the 4th Division

Reconnaissance Order No. 1

General StafC of the North Korean Army

IS June 1950 Map 50,000 — 1949 Issue

1. The enemy, 1st Regiment, 7th Division, with an
attached artillery, is defending the sector from IMJIN-
GANG up to hill 538.5 (0634). The frontal edge of the
defense of the 3Sth parallel is along the northern slope
of the heights at the parallel. The frontal edge of the
enemy main line of resistance is along the northern slopes
of the heights 217.0 (0622), SEKKYO-RI* (SOKKYO-
RI (0622)) northern slopes of the heights 411.3 (002S)
the northwestern and northern slopes of the heights (0630-
0632). Tlie defiles along the roads from the parallel to
KAJSISANRI* (9824) and TONGJIN are protected with a
well-developed system of defense installations. The posi-
tions of tlie regimental reserves are supposedly in the
region of hill 240.7 ((X)26). To the left, the defenses
are held by the 13th Infantry Regiment of the 1st In-
fantry Division, to the left is the 9th Regiment of the
7th Division.

2. Wlien the division is set up in an attack position,
and prior to the beginning of the attack, tlirough obser-

■ Bulletin of Aug. 7, 1950, p. 203.

*Indicates exact transliteration from the original
Russian.

828

Department of Stale Bulletin

\ation and reconnaissance the niglit before the attack, it
is necessary to :

Guarantee the final defining of the true frontal edge
of the main line of enemy resistance, the presence and
arrangement of mine fields, wire entanglements and other
barricades, the presence and location of unbarricaded
sectors and passes in barricades.

Determine accurately the arrangement of the trenches,
connecting trenches, DOT (TN Reinforced concrete pill-
box) DZOT (TN Earth-and-Timber pillbox), NP (TN Ob-
servation point), the defense firearms supply and the
system of firing.

Determine the location of the main body of the enemy
personnel and the plan of the day.

Determine accurately the firing positions of the artil-
lery, the number and caliber of the guns on hand. Deter-
mine the arrangement of the antitank guns, especially
along the approaches to the defile.

Toward the end of the second day, after assuming an
attack position, work out a very accurate target map
and a map of the engineering installations of the enemy.

As the attack begins:

Carry on a continuous, intensified observation for the
appearance of new firing ix)ints covering tlie defile; to
uncover, in time, new strong points and centers of re-
sistance of the enemy ; watch where the dislodged enemy
elements retreat.

When the front units reach the SEKIJO* (TN Pre-
sumably CHOKSONG) (0416)-TONGJIN line, organize
additional reconnaissance in the directions of SEKIJO*-
SINZAIRI*-KANAYRI*; along the railroad to GI-
SEIFU*, with the objective of a timely stand along this
line of the enemy defense .sectors and along the line
of the arrival of reinforcements from the rear.

After reaching HIGAIRI* (8614) YOSHU (YANGJU)
(8426) line organize the reconnaissance of routes:
HIGAIRI*-KAYO (HAYANG), RIOFUKUIN* (7414);
KANAIRI* PUKOKU-RI, KYOKHATSURI* (7416) ;
lOSU, TISEIFU* SODORI (7226) with the objective of
determining possible resistance points on these routes
of defensive lines approaching SEOUL.

With the advance toward the approaches to SEOUL
by all means secure the collection of information about
enemy forces concentrated in the city and the steps
intended for the city defense.

3. The 24-hour intelligence summaries must be sub-
mitted to the Intelligence Section by 1900 hours daily
by telegraph, radio and telephone. Written reports,
captured documents and interrogation reports must be
submitted to the Intelligence Section daily by 0800 hours
and 2000 hours.

4. Not more than a third of the personnel of the
reconnaissance subdivisions are to be placed along the
attack line at observation points, and two-thirds must be
readied to accomplish the reconnaissance in the heart of
the enemy defenses.

Each regiment must have one group of three to five
men who would collect captured documents on the
battlefield.

Chief of Stuff
Chief of Army Intelligence Section

FuU trannlation of a mimeographed copii of Operation
Order No. 1, dated 22 June 50, issued liy LEE Kwon Mu.
Co. 4tl' Infiintry Division, Noi'th Korean Army

TOP SECRET

Reed 0512 hours. 24 June.

TN : Inscritjcd in pencil.

OPERATION ORDER NO. 1

Issued hy Operations Section, .',th Inf Div OKKE-Ri, 11,00

hours, 22 June, 1950

(Map 1 : 50,000, issued 1949)

1. The 1st Infantry Regiment of the enemy's 7th In-
fantry Division is standing on the defensive against our
attack.

2. The most important objective of our Division in the
frontal attack is to penetrate the enemy's defensive line
on tlie KWAN-Dong (0.-).18)-A.JANG-Dong (Oa.:53) line,
and alter taking MA.II-Ri (O.'J.IO), hill .'■)3.j.O (03.33),
P'Yongniaul (95.13), and NAEHOEAM (91.32), advance
to UIJONGBU-SEOUL Area. The plan calls for com-
pletion of preparations by 23 June 10.50.

3. On our right wing the 1st Infantry Division will
stand to the attack. The boundary between the right
wing and other area is the line along MAKTAEDONG
(23.18), NOGONG-Ni (18.18), BANG.! UNG-Ni (88.11) and
PIBONG (67.18). The 4th Infantry Division is not re-
sponsible for any of these positions apart from M.\KTAE-
DONG. On the left wing, the 3rd Infantry Division will
attack. The boundary between the left wing and our
area is the line along PUIIUNGDONG (20.3.5), hill 583.5
(06.34), hill 535.6 (03.33), bill 519 (93.32) and hill 337.1
(82.29), for all of which the 4tb Infantry Division is
not responsible.

4. The main attack will be directed toward the wide
road on the left flank. Battle (TN Two words illegible.)
Will be in two echelons.

5. The 18th Infantry Regiment, together with one bat-
talion of artillery, one .45mm gun company, one self-
propelled artillery battalion, one engineer company, one
tank company, and two antitank sections will break
through the enemy's defensive line on the KWAN-Dong
(05.18) and SAHANG-Ni (09.30) line, and as the present
objective, take the KUUM-Ni (14.18) and TONGMYONG-
CHON (06.27) line, and lastly, the line on MA.7I-Ri
(03.16) and hill 262 (24.27). Subsequently, an attack
will be directed against the enemy in the HYANGDONG
(31.24) Area.

The foregoing action will be carried out with the aid
of one antitank company from the Antitank Battalion,
13th Artillery Regiment, 13th Infantry Division, one
76mm gun company, one 45mm gun company, one 45mm
gun company from the 2nd Battalion of the 5th Infantry
Regiment, and one 82mm gun company from the same
battalion. The left wing boundary of the 16th Infantry
Regiment will be the line along UMNAE-Ri (19.30),
SAECHIP (12.27), SARANG-Ni (19.30), hill 289 (06.27),
TANGNAE (00.27), CHUNGP'AE (97.26) and SONGAM'
Ni (94.27) all of which, with the exception of UMNAE-
Ri, will be included in the 18th Infantry Regiment. The
security of the area adjacent to the left wing will be en-
trusted to the commander of the ISth Infantry Regiment.

6. The 16th Infantry Regiment, the 2d and 3d Battalion,
along with one 45mm gun company of the Division Artil-
lery Regiment, two companies from the self-propelled
artillery battalion, two sections from the antitank rifle
company, 45mm gun battalion, and one company from
the engineer battalion, will break through the enemy's
defensive line on the SARANG-Ni ( 09..''.0 ) -PAEGI-Ri
(10.34) Area, and will take, as the primary objective,
YANGWONG-Ni (05.27) and PAEHA-Ri (05.33). As
the second objective, they will take the line on hill 362
(04.27) and hill 535.6 (03..33), and subsequently attack
the UIJONGBU Area. The regimental action will be
carried out with the aid of the 2d Battalion of the Artil-
lery Regiment, 13th Infantry Division, two companies
from the antitank artillery battalion, two 76mm gun
companies, two 45mm gun companies, and 76mm gun com-
pany, 120mm gun company, and two 82mm gun companies
from the 5th Regiment.

The left wing boundary line will be the Division bound-
ary line, and responsibility for the adjacent area lies
with the Commander of the 16th Regiment.

7. The 5th Regiment (less one battalion), as the Divi-
sion's second echelon, will follow the rear of the 16th
Infantry Regiment and will prepare to penetrate the line
on hill 362 (4.27) and hill 535.6 (03.33). The Commander
of the 1st Battalion of the 5th Regiment will form an
assault group with one antitank gun section, two anti-
tank rifle squads, two heavy machine gun squads, and
one engineer platoon, in addition to one infantry platoon.
The infantry platoon leader will take command of the
assault group.

May 21, 1951

829

8. The 2d Infantry Battnlion of the 5th Regiment, to-
gether with the antitank gun company, will be engaged
in attack on the heels of the ISth Infantry Regiment and
will prepare for tank attack along the MAJI-Ri (03.16)
and TONGP'YONGCH'ON (06.27) line.

9. The corps artillery battalion will be placed under my
command. Artillery preparation fire will be laid down
for 30 minutes : 15 minutes bombardment and 15 minutes
rapid fire.

The general function of artillerymen is:

Firing minutes

At the time of preparation for charge —

(a) To cripple and destroy the enemy's fighting
power on its defen.se line.

(b) To break down the enemy's artillery positions,
engineer fire positions as well as permanent fire
positions.

(c) To construct a road through obstacles on the
enemy's defense line.

(d) To hold off the enemy from the line on
CHOMKANG (06.20), PUJOPTONG (06.25) and
CH'OCH'ON-Ni (06.30).

(e) To prevent the enemy's observation from posts
on the defense line.

When supporting the charge —

(a) The charge by infantry, tanks and self-pro-
IwUed artillery will be carried as far as MAJI-Pi
(03.16), MACH'ABAN (02.20) and hill 535.6
(03.32).

(b) Stamp out the enemy's staying power as well
as engineer positions and permanent positions on
the right and left sides of the main road leading
to SEOUL.

(e) Carry out counterfire upon the enemy's
artillery positions.

(d) Prevent the enemy from carrying out a pos-
sible counter-charge in the area along the roads
leading to KOSAYONG (02.14), HOSA-Ri (?)
(97.25) and UIJONGBU.

(e) Prevent the enemy from assembling on the
TONGDUCH'ON-Ni and HANSAN-Ni (97.'24) Area.

(f) Destroy the enemy's command system.
During the last phase of action —

(a) Cut off the enemy's retreat.

(b) Continue bombardment by artillery.

(c) Cut off the roads and waterways on the
enemy's line of retreat and destroy the flank of
TONGTUCH'ON.

(d) As soon as the present mission of the Divi-
sion is carried out, it will keep the enemy from
assembling at the road junction (97.20) of
TAECH'ON (98.15) YOGONG-Ni (97.20) and
HANSAX-Ni (97.25) as well as the KIOHON
(97.32) Area.

(e) Prevent the enemy's concentration for counter-
attack from the I'l.TONGBU direction.

The preparation for bombardment calls for completion
by 2400 hours 23 .Tune 1950.

10. IXity of the air corris —

(a) Cover our movements and protect our troops
from possible enemy charges.

(b) Destroy the enemy's military facilities and
railway stations.

(c) Keep the enemy from concentrating and prevent
the approach of their reserves.

(d) Destroy the enemy's roads in order to prevent
them from concentrating.

11. To meet the enemy's air raids, each regiment will
take counter measures separately, using equipment at
hand, and in case of enemy air attack, mobili/.e 30 percent
of the arms of the infantry force. The division air ob-
servation liaison station is No (TN HlanU.), and those
of each regiment are as follows :

18th Inf Regt No (TN Blank.)
16th Inf Regt No (TN P.lank.)
5th Inf Regt No. (TN Blank.)

The anti-aircraft machine gun company will protect
artillery jiositions as well as the command post area of
the Division.

12. The antitank reserve unit, composed of one com-
pan.v from the 45mm artillery battalion and one engineer
com[iany, will follow the second echelon, attacking, and
at the end of the attack, will prevent the enemy's
mechanized luiit from penetrating. Each unit will take
its own antitank measures by utilizing its own antitank
weapons.

13. The division Medical Section and transfer point
will be situated, respectively, at 23.30 L on the map,
from 20 Jun 50, and 23.31 L, after 21 Jun 50.

14. The Division Command Post (presently at
HYOPKOK 13.28) and the Observation Post (presently
at 03.31) will be removed to a point along the road
leading to UMOXGIiU.

15. Reports will be made:

(a) When attack preparations are completed.

(b) When attack is begun.

(c) By messenger, radio, and written report when
the present, the next, or a day's duty had been
completed.

(d) Once every two hours on matters other than the
above.

(e) Written reports will be sent twice a day to be
received exactly at 0700 and 1900 hours.

16. Standard signals —

TELE-
PHONE

NO. SIGNAL FLARE

1. Begin attack Storm

2. Begin charge . . . Green . . . Fine

3. Begin bombardment. Red . . . Storm

RADIO

. 244
. 224
333

Snowstorm. Ill

Stop firing . 222
Thunder 444

4. Begin supporting Green . .

charge.

5. Cease firing .... White . .

6. Call for fire power . Red and

Green
mixed,
fired to-
ward
object.

17. First deputy : The Chief of Staff.

Second Deputy : The Commander of 16th Infantry
Regiment.

Lee Kwon Mu, Commander

4th Infantry Division
Ho Bong Hak

Chief of Staff

OFFICIAL ; 3 copies made

No. 1 cop.v
Other copies will be sent as

specified in the Secret

Documents recording form.
(TN One word illegible.) HWANG Myon Chone
(TN Illegible.)

22 June 1950

Communiques Regarding Korea
to the Security Council

Tlie lieatkiuiirtofs of the United Nations Com-
niaiid has transmitted coniinuniqnes rejrarding
Korea (o the Secretary-General of the United
Nations under the followiiiir United Nations docu-
ineiil nuiiiber.s: S/'2()!)0, April 17; S '2091, April
17; S/2()!);5, April 17; S/20f).5, April ID; S/'20!)7,
April 120; S/L'imS, April 20; S/2100, April 24;
S/210G, April 26; S/210S, April 27; S, 2101), April
27; S/2110, April 30; S/2115, May 3.

830

Department of State Bulletin

Implementing Details of
Demilitarization in State of
Jammu and Kashmir

statement by Ambassador Warren R. Austin
V. S. Representative in Secimty Council '

When my Government inidertook to explore the
possibility of presenting the name of someone to
this Council for the post of United Nations repre-
sentative for Kashmir, it turned to the Panel for
Enquiry and Conciliation operated by General
Assembly resolution of April 28, 1949. Dr.
[Frank P.] Graham, as you know, is among the
five distinguished United States citizens desig-
nated by my Govcnnnent for inclusion in the
Panel. His tine qualities are well appreciated in
the United States, where he is known as a distin-
guished educator, statesman, government oiHcial,
and negotiator of gi-eat ability. I know that he
will bring to this new task, in full measure, the
qualities needed for his part to accomplish his
mi.ssion.

In expressing the good wishes of the United
States for the success of the mission of the new
United Nations representative, I should like to add
a word or two regarding the character of his mis-
sion. This is or may be, as the Council knows,
twofold. His first effort will be to effect de-
militarization in the state of Jammu and Kashmir
on the basis of the international agreement em-
bodied in the Uncip [United Nations Commission
for India and Pakistan] resolutions of August 13,
1948, and January 5, 1949." While previous ef-
forts to bring about agreement between the parties
on the demilitarization provisions of these resolu-
tions by the India-Pakistan Commission, General
McNaughton, and Sir Owen Dixon have not been
successful, they have undeniably made ])rogress
toward tlie desired end. The area of disagree-
ment has been narrowed and we have, thanks to
them, a fairly clear picture of what these disagree-
ments are. I am sure that the debate on the Kash-
mir case recently concluded in the Council, in
which the distinguished representatives of Pakis-
tan and India have presented their Government's
views, has been most helpful to the members of
this Council. Council members in their interven-
tions exhibited a large measure of agreement in
their understanding of the issues and their ideas
of what should be done to resolve them.

The disagreements on the demilitarization proc-
ess still existing are, basically, differences of in-
terpretation of how the framework provided by
the two resolutions of the United Nations Com-
mission should be filled in. These resolutions, in

attempting to devise procedures which would fur-
nish adequate security and equitable treatment for
all, went as far as was possible at the stage tiien
reached. The procedural details necessarily liad
to be left to be worked out by tlie parties. This
they have not yet succeeded in fully doing. It is
our earnest hope that both parties will work out
witli Dr. Graham and will imjjlement the details
of demilitarization preparatory to the plebiscite
which will permit the people of Kaslnnir freely to
express their will i-egarding the question of
accession.

If, however, these efforts should fail of their
jjurpose, tlie United Nations representative woidd
embark on the second phase of his mission : He
would return to the Council and report to it those
jjoints of differences between the parties in regard
to the interpretation and execution of the agreed
resolutions of August 13, 1948, and January 5,
1949, wliich he considers must be resolved to enable
demilitarization to be effected. The arbitration
clause of the present resolution would then become
operative, and the United States most earnestly
urges that the parties accept the arbitration pro-
cedure as a final step to conclude a peaceful settle-
ment of this problem which holds so much danger
for the peace, pi-osperity, and stability of the great
subcontinent. I fully concur with our distin-
guished President, who said at the 538th meeting
of this Council,

In a case like the one with which we are dealing, this
would seem to be the logical procedure, since it concerns
questions which, as the representative of Brazil has so
ably explained, might well be considered as coming within
the widely acljnowledged justiciable sphere where ar-
bitrage would be fully justified.

United Nations Documents:
A Selected Bibliography '

Economic and Social Council

Expanded Programme of Technical Assistance. Second
Report of the Technical Assistance Board to the
Technical Assistance Committee. E/1911, January
24, 1951. 82 pp. mimeo.

Proceedings of the Conference on Building Research.
General, E/ECE/122, E/ECE/IM/HOU/BR/2. De-
cemlier 1950. 285 pp. mimeo.

' Made before the Security Council on Apr. 30 and
released to the press by the U. S. Mission to the U. N. on
the same date.

' For a review of the Kashmir dispute, see Bttlletin of
Mar. 5, 1951, p. 394.

' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27, N. Y. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.

Tlie United Nations Secretariat has established an 0/?l-
cial Kccnrrls series for the General Assembly, the Security
Council, the Economic and .Social Council, the Trusteeship
Council, and the Atomic Energy Commission which in-
cludes summaries of proceedings, resolutions, and reports
of the various commissions and committees. Publications
in tlie Offlrinl Rccordx series will not be listed in this
department as heretofore, but information on securing
subscriptions to the series may be obtained from the In-
ternational Documents Service.

Aloy 27, J95J

831

International Materials Conference: Progress Report

[liW Information Bulletin of May ^]

Copper-Zinc-Lead Committee

This Committee has received replies from a
majority of tlie countries to which it sent ques-
tionnaires for production and consumption esti-
mates. The replies were due on April 23. A
sufficient number have been received to enable the
Committee to revise its previous preliminary esti-
mates of the supply situation. It is currently
analyzing the data and considering methods of
dealing with the shortages of supplies.

It is expected that the Committee will be able
to submit to its members for their consideration
later this month reasonably firm estimates of the
1951-52 production and consumption, and recom-
mendations as to methods for distributing avail-
able supplies. When the member governments
have acted upon the Committee recommendations,
provision will be made for further consultation
with nonmember governments regarding their
special problems as may be necessary.

Sulpiiur Committee

The Committee has completed its first report
and has sent it to member and nonmember govern-
ments together with a questionnaire which calls
for statistical data and estimates of requirements.

In addition to the statistical data and estimates,
the questionnaire requests as much information as
possible under the following headings:

1. Explanation of requirements of sulphur for
1951-52.

2. Steps taken and projected to initiate and/or
increase production of sulphur and pyrites.

3. Steps taken and projected to initiate and/or
increase production of other sulphur-bearing raw
materials and to use them in substitution for
native sulphur; e.g., anhydrite, gypsum and
gases from smelting of zinc, copper, lead, and
other ores and concentrates.

4. Steps taken and projected to recover and
use sulphur available from industrial processes;
e.g., tlie manufacture of coal gas and coke, oil
refining and cracking.

5. Steps taken and projected to conserve sul-
phur, including: a. substitution, in whole or in

part, of other material for sulphur in agriculture
or industry; and b. recovery or recujjenition of
sulpluiric acid in industrial processes.

6. Eti'ect of steps taken in 2, 3, 4, and 5 on future
requirements of sulphur.

7. Any factors, such as the need for machinery,
equipment and transport facilities, which limit
the adoption of the measures referred to above.

At a later date, an opportunity will be provided
to nonmember govei'nments for stating their case
orally to the Sulphur Committee. Meanwhile, to
permit early consideration of requirements of
native sulphur, the Committee has requested that
replies to the questionnaii'e be made by May 20,
1951. The question of equitable distribution is
being considered.

Cotton-Cotton Linters Committee

This Connnittee has been in recess since March
15 pending the preparation of certain statistical
tables required to assess the world situation and to
permit the formulation of recommendations. The
Committee has set May 9 for its next meeting.

Tungsten-Molybdenum Committee

For the past 3 weeks the Committee has been
engaged with work on the principles of distribu-
tion. Hitherto, the Committee has mainly worked
on the distribution of molybdenum, but alternative
plans in the case of tungsten also have been laid
before members of the Committee. The consump-
tion of these two materials in the form of ores and
concentrates by nonmember countries is not lar^e
and it is believed that the Committee is already
in touch, directly or indirectly, with all nonmem-
ber consumers.

The consiunption of tungsten and molybdenum
in the form of primary products is somewhat more
general, but the Committee has not yet considered
this part of the subject. It is possible that if a
satisfactory plan to deal with the urgent problem
of distribution of ores and concentrates of these
two metals can be agreed upon, it will not be nec-
essary to proceed further and consider primary
products. This is a point, however, on which con-
clusions have not yet been reached.

832

Department of State Bulletin

Manganese-Nickel-Cobalt Committee

This Comniittee has received a few answers to
the questionnaires sent out on April 16, 1951.
Members are expected to furnish their replies
within a few days and nonmember governments
at the latest on May 16, 1951.

In the meantime, the Committee has appointed
a special Subcommittee on Distribution to outline
various principles and possible methods of inter-
national distribution or the materials concerned.
Any scliemes developed will be made available
for discussion by the Committee and eventual im-
plementation in case the supply position of any
of the materials appeared to be so critical as to
render such action necessary.

Wool Committee

Durino- tlie past 2 weeks, the Wool Committee
has continued its study of the wool situation and
has received preliminary reports from its subcom-
mittees. The Subcommittee on Production has
submitted a draft of a report suggesting means of
increasing production of wool. Tlie proposals
are concerned particulai'ly with the years follow-
ing 1952 since it is recognized that it is not practi-
cable to influence the production for the next clip.
The Subcommittee on Conservation is completing
a draft of a report which will be considered by the
full Committee next week. The Committee is still
engaged in the examination of all factors affecting
the supply and demand situation.

Pulp-Paper Committee

This Committee held its first meeting on April
30. Twehe nations were represented : Australia,
Belgium. Brazil, Canada, France, Federal Repub-
lic of Germany, Italy, Netherlands, Norway,
Sweden, United Kingdom and the United States.

"Willard L. Thorp, United States Assistant Sec-
retary of State for Economic Affairs, welcomed
the delegates on behalf of the host government.
The United States delegate, G. J. Ticoulat, was
elected as chairman pro tempore.

Pending adoption of the rules of procedure,
temporary rules concerning representation and
voting were adopted. The Committee also con-
sidered its future order of business. Four sub-
committees were established : Program Subcom-
mittee; Subcommittee on Rules of Procedure;
Subcommittee on Statistics and Subcommittee on
Emergency Supplies of Newsprint. These sub-
conunittees will report to the full Committee
witliin a few days.

Composition of Pulp-Paper Committee

[Released to the press ly IMC April 30\

The Pulp-Paper Committee met today for the
first time. Twelve nations were represented.
This is the last of the seven commodity committees
tlius far established by the Imc to meet.

May 21, J95?

Composition of the Pulp-Paper Committee is
as follows:

AUSTBALIA

Representative:
Alternate:

BELGIUM

Representative:

Alternate:

BRAZIL

Representative:
Alternate:

CANADA

Representative:
Alternate:

FB.\NCE

Representative:
Alternate:

F. A. Meere, First Assist.ant Comptroller
General, Department of Trade and
Customs, Canberra

Not yet designated

Pierre E. Jaspar, Economic Counselor,
Belgian Embassy, or in bis absence :
Maurice Heyne, Minister Plenipoten-
tiary, Commercial Counselor, Bel-
gian Embassy

A. D. Jacxsens, Charge, Economic Mis-
sion, Belgian Embassy

Raul de Vincenzi, Second Secretary, Bra-
zilian Embassy

Helio Bittencourt, Third Secretary, Min-
istry of Foreign Affairs, Rio de Ja-
neiro

S. V. Allen, Special Assistant to the Co-
ordinator of Materials, Department
of Defense Production, Ottawa

M. P. Carson, Assistant Commercial Sec-
retary, Embassy of Canada

Marc BCyafil, Secretary of State of Eco-
nomic Affairs, Director of Foreign
Economic Relations, Paris

Not yet designated

FEDERAL REPUBLIC OP GERMANY

Representative: Max H. Schmid, President, Zellstoff-

fabrik Waldhof, Wiesbaden
Alternate: Not yet designated

ITALY

Representative: Dr. Lulgi Cibrario

Alternate: Dr. Vincenzo Amici, Director, Technical

Service, Italian Institution, Pulp and

Paper, Rome

NETHERLANDS

Representative: J. Grooters, Assistant Financial Attach*,

Embassy of the Netherlands
Alternate: J. Teppema, Second Commercial Secre-

tary, Embassy of the Netherlands

NORWAY

Thoralf Svendsen, Commercial Coun-
selor, Embassy of Norway

Gunder Kvaerne, First Secretary, Em-
bassy of Norway

Eigil Nygaard, Counselor of Embassy,
Embassy of Norway

Representative.
Alternates:

Representative.
Alternate:

Hubert de Besche, Economic Counselor,

Embassy of Sweden
Baron C. H. von Platen, First Secretary,

Embassy of Sweden

UNITED KINGDOM

Representative: A. S. Gilbert, Assistant Secretary, Board

of Trade, London
Alternate: E. Atherton, Assistant Economic At-

tach6, British Embassy

UNITED STATES

Representative: G. J. Ticoulat, Director, Pulp and Pai)er
Division, National Production Au-
thority, Washington, D. C.

833

U.S. Delegations to International Conferences

Directing Council (American International
Institute for Protection of Childhood)

The Department of State announced on May 9
that Elisabeth S. Enochs, Chief, International
Teclmical Missions, Office of the Commissioner for
Social Security, Federal Security Agency, has
been designated as alternate United States tech-
nical delegate to a meeting of the Directing Coun-
cil of the American International Institute for
the Protection of Childhood to be held at Monte-
video, Uruguay, beginning on May 11. Katherine
F. Lenroot, Chief, Children's Bureau, Social Se-
curity Administration, Federal Security Agency,
and United States technical delegate to the Direct-
ing Council, is unable to attend.

The Directing Council will be concerned at its
forthcoming meeting with the making of plans
for the Tenth Pan American Child Congress,
which is scheduled to be held in Colombia in 1952,
and with such business matters as (1) review of
the report of the Director General on the activities
of the Institute during the past year (2) adoption
of regulations to define the functions and respon-
sibilities of delegates to the Directing Council and
(3) election of a president, vice president, and
secretary for the period 1951-53.

The American International Institute for the
Protection of Childhood, of which the Directing
Couucil is the governing body, is the center of
international activities connected with child life
and child welfare in the Americas. The last meet-
ing of the Directing Council was held at Monte-
video, October 6, 1950.

Twelfth Meeting of the Caribbean Commission

On May 4, the Department of State announced
that tlie United States (Jovernment be represented
at tlie twelfth meeting of tlie Caribbean Commis-
sion, at Barbados, British West Indies, May 7-12,
1951, by the following delegation :

Commissioners

Ward M. Canaday, United States Co-Chairman ; Cbair-
iiian of tlie Board of Directors, Will.vs-Overland
Motors, Inc., Toledo, Ohio

Jesus T. I'ifiero, former Governor of Puerto Rico.

Advisers I

Sol Lui.s Descartes, Director, Economic Research of Puerto |
Rioan Economic Development Administration

J. Jefferson Jones, III, Deputy Director, Office of De-
pendent Area Affairs, Department of State

A. B. Nvren, Vice Consul, American Consulate, Barbados,
B. W. I.

Frances McReynolds Smith, Office of Dependent Area
Affairs, Department of State

The Caribbean Commission was established in
1948 as an advisory and consultative body on eco-
nomic and social matters to the Governments of
France, the Netherlands, the United Kingdom, and
the United States, and the 15 territories under
their administration in the Caribbean area. Lilce
its predecessor, the Anglo-American Caribbean
Commission, it has made a real contribution to the
economic and social well-being of the inhabitants
of the Caribbean area.

The 22-item provisional agenda for the twelfth
meeting provides, among other things, for action
on the recommendations of the West Indian Con-
ference (4th sess.), consideration of technical as-
sistance projects in the area, action on the reports
and recommendations of conferences on statistical
and technical matters, and action on the lease of
a Commission headquarters building at Trinidad.

Fourth Session of the Coal Mines Committee C'l-O)

The Department of State announced on May 4
that the fourth session of the Coal Mines Com-
mittee of the International Labor Organization
(Ilo) will convene at Geneva, on May 7, 1951.
The United States will be represented by the fol-
lowing tripartite delegation :

GOVKUNMENT KEPBESENTATIVES

Dclcffates

William R. McConib, Cliairmoit, Administrator, Wage and
Hour and Public Contracts Division, Department of
Labor

Louis C. McOabe, Chief of the Fuels and Explosives Di-
vision, Bureau of Mines, Department of the Interior

Advisers

Robert M. Barnett, Economic Officer (labor), American

Legation, Bern, Switzerland, Resident at Geneva
Witt Bowden, SiKH'ial Consultant, Department of Labor

834

Department of State Bulletin

EMPLOYEES Ma'KESENTATIVliS

Delegates

H. .1. Connolly, President, Penns.vhani.i Coal Company,
Scran ton. Pa.

Huston St. Clair, President, Jewell Ridge Coal Corpora-
tion, Tazewell, Va.

Alternate Delegate

Jame.s W. Haley, Vice President, .lewell Ridge Coal Cor-
poration, Washington, D.C.

WOBKEES KEPKESENTATU'ES

Delegates

Samuel Caddy, President, District No. :?(), United Mine

Woikers of America, Lexington, Ky.
Thomas Kennedy, Vice President, United Mine Workers of

America, Washington, D.C.

The agenda for this session incUides an exam-
ination of a general report, prepared by the In-
ternational Labor Oflice, in wliich particular ref-
erence is made to action taken by the various conn-
tries to implement conclusions of previous Com-
mittee sessions, steps tal^en by the International
Labor Office to follow np tlie studies and inquiries
proposed by the Committee, and recent events and
developments in the coal industry.

The Connnittee will also consider possible meth-
ods of dealing with resolutions of the Miners' In-
ternational Federation requesting that the United
Nations and the Ilo jointly call a tripartite meet-
ing of all coal-producing coinitries to regulate the
problems of production, trade, prices, and work-
ing conditions. In addition, the Committee will
review hours of work and productivity in coal
mines with a view to submitting recommendations
to tlie Ilo for amelioration therein.

The Coal Mines Committee was the first of eight
industrial committees established by the Ilo to
meet the need for dealing with problems peculiar
to important industries. The United States is one
of tlie 12 member states of this Committee, which
seeks the general improvement of working condi-
tions and safety factors in coal mines. The last
session of the Committee was held at Pittsburgh,
April 20-30, 1949.

Third Session of Fiscal Commission (ECOSOC>

On ]\Iay 7, the Department of State announced
that Edward F. Bartelt, Fiscal Assistant Secre-
tary, Depai'tment of the Treasury, and United
States Representative on the Fiscal Commission
of the United Nations Economic and Social Coun-
cil (Ecosoc), will attend the third session of that
Commission, which is to be held at Lake Success,
May 7-lC. 1951. Mr. Bartelt will be assisted by
the following four advisers:

Roy P.lough, Member, Council of Economic Advisers,
Executive Office of the President

Natlian N. Gordon, Economist, Tax Advisory Staff Secre-
tai-y. Department of the Treasury

Eldon P. King. Special Deputy Commissioner, Bureau of
Internal Revenue, Department of the Treasury

Frederick Livesey, Adviser, Office of Financial and De-
velopment Policy, Department of State

The major question at tlie forthcoming session
of the Fiscal Commission will be how it can best
use the forces at its disposal to contribute to inter-
national economic development and stability. In-
ternational activities for economic development
are handicapped by the fact that (1), at the
national level, the establislunent of comprehensive
fiscal policies is virtually impossible in some coun-
tries and (2), at the international level, synchroni-
zation of ojovernment financial action is extremely
difficult. Priority consideration will undoubtedly
be given by the Commission to the fiscal aspects
of tlie i)roblems of financing economic develop-
ment and stability and to the formulation of
recommendations on tliose international aspects
of public finance relating specifically to policies
which contribute most to economic development
and .stability.

Specific items on the agenda for the session
relate to international tax problems, government
financial reporting, public finance information
services, government finance and economic devel-
opment, and profits taxes and devaluation of
money. One of the questions which will probably
be discussed in connection with tlie Commission's
review of international tax problems is: ''What
are the proper methods of solving the problem of
international multiple taxation, especially from
the point of view of the different interests and
financial resources of capital exporting and im-
porting countries, and the availability of uni-
lateral legislation and bilateral agreements?"

The Fiscal Commission, which is one of the 9
permanent functional commissions of the Ecosoc,
advises tlie Council on matters in the field of pub-
lic finance. Fifteen Governments, elected by the
Council, comprise the membership of the Com-
mission. Its second session was held at Lake
Success, January 10-25, 1949.

Fourth World Health Assembly

On May 2, the Department of State announced
that Leonard A. Scheele, M.D., Surgeon General,
Public Health Service, Federal Security Agency,
has been designated by President Truman to serve
as chairman of the United States delegation to the
Fourth World Health Assembly, scheduled to
convene at Geneva, Switzerland, on May 7.

Other members of the delegation are, as follows :

Dclei/ates

Roy Cleere, M.D., Executive Director, Colorado State

Department of Health, Denver, Colo.
India Edwards (Mrs. Herbert T. Edwards), Executive

Director, Women's Division, Democratic National

Committee

Alternates

Frederick J. Brady, M.D., Assistant Chief, International
Organizations, Division of International Health,
Pulilic Health Service, Federal Security Agency

Howard B. Calderwood, Office of United Nations Economic
and Social Affairs, Department of State

May 21, 1951

835

H. van Zile Hyde, M.D., United States Representative,
Executive Board, World Health Organization

George Mason Ingram, Chief, Division of International
Administration, Department of State

Congressional Advisers

Herbert H. Lelaman, United States Senate
Richard M. Nixon, United States Senate

Advisers

Gaylord Anderson, RI.D., Dean, School of Public Health,
University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, Minn.

Wesley E. Gilbertson, Sanitary Engineering Director,
Communicable Disease Center, Atlanta, Ga.

Malcolm T. MacEachern, M.D., Director Emeritus, Ameri-
can College of Surgeons, Chicago, 111.

Richard S. Meiling, M.D., Chairman, Armed Forces Medi-
cal Policy Council, Office of the Secretary of Defense,
Department of Defense

Henry B. Mulholland, M.D., Assistant Dean and Professor
of the Practice of Medicine, University of Virginia,
Charlottesville, Va.

Anne Steffen, Assistant Dean, School of Nursing, Univer-
sity of Calif.

Knud Stowman, Ph.D.. Foreign Affairs Health Adviser,
Division of International Health, Public Health Serv-
ice, Federal Security Agency

Secretary of the Delegation

Millard L. Kenestrick, Conference Attach^, Office of Resi-
dent United States Delegations to International Or-
ganizations, Geneva

Technical Assistant

Jeanne Ende, Office of United Nations Economic and
Social Affairs, Department of State

Documents Officer

Florence S. Thomason, Administrative Assistant to the
United State.s Representative, Executive Board, World
Health Organization

The Health Assembly is the policy-determining
body of the World Health Organization (Who),
■which was formally established on April 7, 1948,
after the deposit of ratifications of the Organiza-
tion's Constitution by 26 member states of the
United Nations. At the present time, 75 states are
members of the Wuo.

One of the most important items on the agenda
for the Fourth World Health Assembly is con-
sideration of a draft sanitary code, to be known
as International Sanitary Regulations or Who
Regulations No. 2. This code is designed to pro-
vide a maximum of security against the inter-
national transmission of such dangerous epidemic
diseases as cholera, relapsing fever, smallpox,
typhus, and yellow fever.

Since April 9, a special committee on interna-
tional sanitary regulations, on which the United
States Government is represented, has been meet-
ing at Geneva and has been revising and consoli-
dating several existing, yet outmoded, interna-
tional sanitary conventions in order to prepare for
their replacement by a single code of procedure
which will be ajiplicablc on a woi'ld-widc basis to
all means of international transport and which
will be sufficiently flexible to permit the making of

such periodic, partial revisions as may be neces-
sary to keep pace with the progress of scientific
kiiowledge. The new regulations will come into
force 15 months after their acceptance by the
Assembly.

A second important topic on the agenda is "the
education and training of medical and public
health personnel." At past sessions of the As-
sembly, in particular at the Third World Health
Assembly held at Geneva May 8-27, 1950, the need
for developing a sound and comprehensive pro-
gram on professional and technical training was
emphasized. Among the factors which made the
need strikingly apparent were the problem of ge-
ographical di.stribution of doctors, the need for
establishing international standards of medical
education, and the lack of facilities in underde-
veloped countries for training health personnel.

Consideration of the annual report of the
Director-General for 1950, and of the reports of
the various Who expert committees, will provide a
basis for considering new program proposals and
for adopting the programs and budgets necessary
to enable the Who to achieve its objective of rais-
ing the health level of all peoples.

It is expected that the program adopted for
1952, as well as a new longer-term program which
is to be adopted in order to give greater continuity
to the work of Who, will deal with a wide variety
of activities :

The provision of advisory services to govern-
ments in the form of expert consultants and health '
demonstration teams ;

The granting of fellowships for medical and
health studies and training purposes;

The exchange of professional i)ersonnel be-
tween countries;

The promotion of medical research and dissem-
ination of scientific knowledge;

The provision of daily information, for use by
national health authorities and seaport and air-
port officials all over the world, regarding the
prevalence of communicable diseases to assist gov-
ernments in protecting their countries against the
introduction of such diseases ;

The prohibition of the distribution and use of
habit-forming drugs; the safety, purity, potency,
and uniformity of biological, pharmaceutical, and
similar products ; and the advertising and labeling
of such products moving in international
commerce ;

The provision of assistance to governments in
dealing with epidemics and other emergencies;

The World Health Assembly will also consider
and adojit a jn'ogram to guide the activities of the
Who during 1952 in providing technical assistance
for the economic development of underdeveloped
coiuitries.

Like past sessions of the Assembly, the Fourth ;
World Health Assembly will also consider nu-
merous administrative, financial, and legal mat- \
ters. Included on the agenda are items relating

836

Department of State Bulletin

to the internal administration of the Who; co-
ordination with the United Nations and its spe-
cialized agencies on administrative and financial
questions; applications by Germany, Japan, and
Spain for membership in the Who; the transfer
to tlie Who of the assets of the International Office
of Public Health; the status of contributions;
and the scale of assessments for member nations
in 1952.

Sixth Session of Statistical Commission (ECOSOC)

On May 4, the Department of State announced
that Stuart A. Rice, Assistant Director in charge
of statistical standards, Bureau of the Budget,
and tlie United States Repi'esentative on the Sta-
tistical Commission of the United Nations Eco-
nomic and Social Council (Ecosoc), will attend
the sixth session of that Commission, which is to
convene at Lake Success on May 7, 1951. Mr.
Rice will be assisted by the following advisers :

Harry Venneman, Bureau of the Budget, Principal

Adviser
Maxwell R. Conklin, Bureau of the Census, Department

of Commerce
J. Edward Ely, Bureau of the Census, Department of

Commerce
Vladimir Kolesnikoff, Bureau of the Budget

At its forthcoming session, the Statistical Com-
mission will review a report on the standard inter-
national trade classification which was developed
by the Commission at its third, fourth, and fifth
sessions in order to provide a single classification
of commodities for use in compiling international
trade statistics. The need for such a classifica-
tion stemmed from the desire of a number of
countries to obtain guidance from the United Na-
tions in devising new systems for classifying their
own external trade statistics, the need for obtain-
ing trade statistics which would be comparable
either for a group of countries regionally or the
world as a whole, and the need for reducing the
variety of classifications used by international
agencies in asking individual countries for statis-
tical trade reports. It is expected that the report
will deal, in particular, with the extent to which
countries and international agencies have used the
classification and the progress of work that has
been undertaken to prepare comprehensive man-
uals or guides to the application of the classi-
fication.

The Commission will review and discuss reports
on the classification of occupations; the interna-
tional standard industrial classification of all eco-
nomic activities; the application of transport defi-
nitions; censuses of distribution; the status of
technical assistance in statistics; and the interna-
tional convention relating to economic statistics.
Proposals for international standards with respect
to vital records and statistics, basic industrial sta-

tistics, price index numbers, and international
trade statistics will also be discussed.

The Statistical Commission, which is one of the
nine permanent functional commissions of the
Ecosoc, was established in 1946 to assist in the de-
velopment of the statistical services of the United
Nations Secretariat and to recommend those im-
provements of statistics and statistical methods
necessary to make the statistics of one state com-
parable with the statistics of other states. Fifteen
Governments, elected by the Council, comprise the
membership of the Commission. Its fifth session
was held at Lake Success, May 8-17, 1950.

THE DEPARTMENT

Noel Hemmendinger Named Economic
Affairs Officer for Korea and Japan

The Department of State announced on April 15, 1951,
that Noel Hemmendinger was appointed officer in charge
of economic aftairs in the Otflce of Northeast Asian
Affairs. In his new post, Mr. Hemmendinger will be re-
sponsible for economic policy with respect to Japan and
Korea.

Assignments for Japanese Peace Settlement '

1. The purpose of this announcement is to explain the
assignments and responsil)ilities of the personnel working
with Ambassador John Foster Dulles on problems re-
lating to the proposed Japanese peace settlement.

2. In addition to his position as Consultant to the
Secretary of State, Ambassador Dulles continues as the
President's Special Representative, with the personal rank
of Ambassador, in conducting on behalf of the United
States such further discussions and negotiations as may
be necessary to bring a Japanese peace settlement to a
successful conclusion.

3. Ambassador Dulles is assisted by the following staff :

a. John M. Allison is serving as Ambassador Dulles'
Deputy, with the personal rank of Minister.

b. Robert A. Fearey is serving on detail from the OtBce
of Northeast Asian Affairs.

c. Col. C. Stanton Babcock of the Otflce of Occupied
Areas in the Office of the Assistant Secretary of the
Army, acts as General Liaison Officer between Ambas-
sador Dulles' oflice and the Department of Defense.

4. Ambassador Dulles, in coordination with the Bureau
of Far Eastern Affairs, has action responsibility within
the Department of State on all matters directly related
to the conclusion of a peace treaty with Japan and the
Japanese security and mutual assistance arrangements
among the Pacific island nations connected therewith,
within the definition of action responsibility found in
Volume II, d-ganizatiou, Manual of Regulations and Pro-
cedures.

'Departmental Announcement 103 of May 8, 1951.

May 27, I95I

837

The United States in tlie United Nations

[May 11-18, 1051]

General Assembly

Additional Meamres Committee. — At its fifth
meeting, May 14, the Committee, established by
the General Assembly resolution of February 1,
1951, to consider additional measures to be em-
ployed to meet aggression in Korea, adopted
(11-0-1) an amended United States draft resolu-
tion which ^'■Recommends that every State apply
an embargo on the shipment to areas under the
control of the Central I'eople's Government of
the People's Republic of China and of the North
Korean authorities of arms, ammunition and im-
plements of war, atomic energy materials, petro-
leum, and items useful in the production of arms,
ammunition and implements of war."

United States Ambassador Ernest A. Gross, in
introducing the resolution, called attention to the
fact that it was addressed to all states, and not
merely to United Nations members. He explained
that the primary purpose was to proclaim as the
United Nations policy the economic measures
which were already being applied by a large num-
ber of countries. This embargo would have a very
strong moral value in itself by demonstrating the
unity of the United Nations and the intention of
persevering in the efforts to repel the Communist
aggression in Korea. He emphasized that this was
a collective enterprise, just as the United Nations
military action had been collective. He also
stressed the importance of the references in the
resolution to tlie Good Offices Committee and
stated that the United States action in proposing
the embargo in no way signalized a failure of the
Good Offices Committee to find an avenue to peace
in Korea. The resolution reaffirms that the United
Nations policy continues to be that of bringing
about a cease-fire and achievement of United Na-
tions olmctives in Korea and requests the Good
Offices Committee to continue its efforts toward
this end.

Sir (xladwyn Jebb (U.K.) advised that Great
Britain had been ap]>lying, almost from the be-
ginning of the Korean conflict, a "selective em-
bargo" against the Chinese Communist regime.
The continued unwillingness of Peiping to make
any move in the direction of stopping the war had

removed any doubts his Government may have had
about imposition of the embargo.

Francis Lacoste (France) said his Government
approved the resolution because it had been ap-
plying very important restrictive measures to pre-
vent such materials from reaching the People's
Republic of China.

The Chairman, Selim Sarper (Turkey) em-
phasized that the proposed measures were "the
least that could be done" and "a modest begin-
ning." The resolution did little more than ap-
prove policy already being followed, he thought,
and expressed the hope that additional measures
would be considered.

Joseph Nisot (Belgium) stated that his coun-
try, as well as the Netherlands and Luxembourg,
was already aj^plying the embargo measures.

All the other members of the Committee, with
the exception of Egypt, which abstained from
voting, spoke in favor of the resolution.

Committee I {Political and Security). — The
Chairman, Dr. Roberto Urdaneta Arbelaez (Co-
lombia), called a meeting of Committee I on May
17 to give immediate attention to the Additional
Measures Committee report, which included the
embargo resolution it had adopted. This report
was to be considered under the agenda item of
"Intervention of the Central People's Government
of the People's Republic of China in Korea."

Keith C. O. Shann (Australia), rapporteur of
the Additional Measures Committee (AMC),
stated tliat "quite a large number" of the members
of tliat (^ommittoe were already carrying out the
measui'es reconuuended in the draft resolution. It
was, however, the opinion of the Asio that the
recommendation of these measures to all United
Nations members and other nations "may have an
appreciable effect on the Chinese by filling loop-
holes in the present restrictions on the importation
of materials useful in the waging of war."

The next delegates to speak, the U.S.S.R. and
her satellites, refused to particijiate in the discus-
sion, and argued that the General Assembly was
not autliorized to consider such questions as tlie
imjiosition of an embargo, which was exclusively
within the competence of the Security Council.
However, as no formal proposal was presented

838

Department of State Bulletin

along these lines, the Chairman stated that the
Committee would proceed with the debate.

Ambassador Gross (U.S.), the next speaker, an-
nounced that the United States, jointly with Aus-
tralia, France, United Kingdom, and Venezuela,
was offering an amendment to the embargo reso-
lution by adding "transportation materials of
strategic value" to the general list of items to be
subjected to the embargo. The resolution, he
stated, would mean that tlie United Nations would
express "its determination that United Nations
soldiers — soldiers on a mission unprecedented in
history — must not be opposed by materials of war
produced by member nations, or indeed, by any
other state." He gave a detailed review of the
various provisions of the embargo resolution,
stressing those which are designed to prevent any
circumvention of the embargo. "No state should
go into the market place of the aggressors and
enlarge its trade in commodities which other states
have embargoed. The forces of aggression are not
entitled to buy war materials in a black market."

Mr. Gross stressed also that provision of the
resolution wliich would enable the Additional
Measures Committee to recommend that the em-
bargo be lifted if the aggression against the United
Nations is ended. It was the opinion of the United
States Government, he declared, that the embargo
resolution would strengthen the hand of the Good
Offices Committee, and that the resolution would
be a further step in the United Nations eiforts for
peace. "The aggressors," he said, "will be brought
closer to the realization that in their own self-
interest, they must end their aggression. It is
only in this way that a peaceful settlement in
Korea can be achieved."

Statements in explanation and in support of the
resolution were made by the majority of the mem-
bers who voted for its adoption. They argued, in
substance, that the proposed embargo was the
logical step in the United Nations efforts to meet
the aggression in Korea, and they all maintained
that its effect would be to speed up the attainment
of peace in Korea.

Also, several of the members that abstained from
voting — Syria, Sweden, Egj-pt, India, Burma —
advised as follows: (1) Syria — ". . . is al-
ways ready to comply with United Nations reso-
lutions, irrespective of the way we vote"; (2)
Sweden — ". . . no export of war material had
taken place from Sweden to China and no such
export was envisaged under the circumstances";
(3) Egypt — ". . . did not export any of the
articles envisaged in this resolution"; (4) India —
". . . would remain unaffected by the resolu-
tion since its present trade with China Mas limited
to barter for rice and other food grains and did
not involve war materials," and (6) Burma —
". . . its trade with China was not appreciable
and none of the materials listed was exported by
Burma."

The joint amendment, adding "transportation
materials of strategic value" to the categories of
items to be embargoed was approved by a vote of
45-0-9. The amended resolution was adojited by
a roll call vote of 4.5-0-9 (Afghanistan, Burma,
Ecuador, Egypt, India, Indonesia, Pakistan,
Sweden, Syria.) Ecuador abstained due to lack
of instructions from its Government; Luxembourg
was absent ; and the Soviet bloc did not participate
in the voting.

In a postvote explanation. Ambassador Gross
(U.S.) declared that "the Soviet delegation mis-
interprets the Charter" in its claim that the Gen-
eral Assembly was not competent to deal with this
issue. It was true that the Charter gave the Se-
curity Council the primary responsibility for the
maintenance of peace and security, but it was also
true that when the Council was not discharging
this responsibility, the General Assembly was em-
powered to do so. In this veiy case, the Security
Council was prevented, "by Soviet veto," from
carrying out its responsibility with regard to the
aggression in Korea. Furthermore, he said, the
Security Council had removed this question from
its agenda.

General Assembly. — The Assembly met in ple-
nary session on May 18, and, after limited general
discussion, voted on the above embargo resolution
in three parts: (1) the preamble was approved
44-0-10; (-2) the operative section was adopted
46-0-8; and (3) the i-esolution as a whole was ap-
proved by a roll call vote of 47-0-8 (Afghanistan,
Burma, Egypt, India, Indonesia, Pakistan, Swe-
den, Syria). The Soviet bloc did not participate
in the voting.

Security Council

Palestine. — Ambassador Warren R. Austin
(U.S.) presented to the Council, May IG, a French-
Turkish-United Kingdom-United States draft
resolution designed to put an end to the current
Syrian-Israeli dispute.

Ambassador Austin stated that it was the con-
viction of the United States that "if peace is to
come in the Palestine area the major responsibility
for such peace rests upon the parties in the area.
They have the means for maintaining the Arm-
istice that now exists, if they will use it in good
faith. This means full cooperation with the
Chairman of the Mixed Armistice Commission, the
rendering of all necessary facilities to the United
Nations Observers in the performance of their
duties, and a will to abide by decisions reached by
the Commission or by its Chairman, whichever has
jurisdiction in the case."

Statements in support of the draft resolution
were made by representatives of the other sponsor-
ing nations, and by Ecuador, the Netherlands^
Brazil, and India.

On May 18 the Council members completed de-
bate on the resolution, and it was adopted, with
minor revisions, by a vote of 10-0-1 (U.S.S.R.).

May 2J, J95I

839

May 21, 1951

Index

Vol. XXIV, No. 620

Africa Pae«

EGYPT: Point 4 Agreement Signed 828

American Republics

BRAZIL: Joint Commission for Economic De-
velopment. Appointment (Truslow) . . .
CARIBBEAN AREA: Point 4 Vocational Train-

ing

CHILE: Copper Situation Discussed With U.S.
ECUADOR: Point 4 Agreement Signed . . .
HAITI: Point 4 Agreement Signed ....
NICARAGUA: U.S. Delegation to Inauguration

814

827
819
823

824
814

Arms and Armed Forces

Soviet Obstruction to West German Defense . 815

U.S.-Denmark Defense Agreement 814

U.S.-Iceiand Sign Defense Agreement .... 812

Asia

INDIA: Implementing Details of Demilitariza-
tion in State of Jammu and Kashmir . . 831
ISRAEL: Unitarian Service Committee To Send

Medical Mission Under Point 4 826

KOREA:

Case Study in Aggression (Harriman) . . . 806
Communiques to Security Cotincil .... 830
U.N. Command Special Report: Captured

Documents Covering First Attack .... 828
LEBANON: American University of Beirut

Undertakes Point 4 Project 825

Near East Foundation Signs Point 4 . . . . 826
VOA Programs to South Asia Inaugurated . . . 820

813

Canada

Agreement With U.S. on Newfoundland Bases. .

Communism

Great Alliance of Free Men (Harriman before
Amer. Assn. for U.N., Los Angeles) ....

Europe

ALBANIA: VOA Program Inaugurated ....
DENMARK: Defense Agreement tor Greenland .
GERMANY : Soviet Obstruction to West German

Defense (Bryoade over NBC)

GREECE: Athens College Signs Point 4 . . .
POLAND: Charges of Discriminatory Vessel

Inspections Called Unfounded

U.S.S.R.:

Postwar Policies (Harriman)

Obstruction to German Defense (Bryoade) .

Health

Fourth World Health Assembly

Unitarian Service Committee To Send Medical
Mission to Isreal Under Point 4 . . . .

Iceland

Defense Agreement With U.S. Signed ....

806

820
814

815
824

821

806
815

835
826

812

Information and Educational Exchange Program

Pulbrlght Act: Opportunities for Graduate

Study, Research, and Teaching Announced . 820
VOA: New Programs to Albania and South Asia . 820

International Meetings

Council of Foreign Ministers: U.S.-U.K.-France

Present Alternate Agenda Proposals .
GATT: Torquay Conference Results . . .
U.S. Delegations to:

Caribbean Commission, 12th Meeting . .
Coal Mines Committee (ILO) , 4th Session
Directing Council, (Amer. Intern. Inst.

Protection of Childhood)

Fourth World Health Assembly ....
Fiscal Commission (ECOSOC) , 3d Session
Statistical Commission (ECOSOC), 6th Ses-
sion

for

803
816

834
834

834
835
836

837

Mutual Aid and Defense

Great Alliance of Free Men (Harriman before

Amer. Assn. for U.N., Los Angeles) . . . 806

North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)

NAC Reorganized; Financial and Economic

Board Created. Communiqufc (Spoflord). . 810
U.S. -Danish Defense Agreement for Greenland . 814
U.S.-Iceland Sign Defense Agreement .... 812

Presidential Documents P^Se

PROCLAMATIONS: World Trade Week (2927) . 817

Publications

Recent Releases 815,822

State, Department of

Departmental Announcement 103: Assignments

for Japanese Peace Settlement 837

Economic Affairs Officer Named for Japan,

Korea 837

Strategic Materials

Fair Distribution of Commodities (Thorp) . . 818
Internation Materials Conference (IMC) :

Progress Report on Committees 832

Sulphur Committee, Composition 833

U.S.-Chile Discuss Copper Situation 819

Technical Cooperation and Development

POINT 4 Agreements Signed 823

POINT 4 Technicians Train for Field .... 827
U.S. -Brazil Joint Commission for Economic De-
velopment, Appointment (Truslow) . . . 814

Trade

Fair Distribution of Commodities (Thorp) . . 818

GATT: Torquay Conference Results .... 816

U.S.-Chlle Discuss Copper Situation .... 819

World Trade Week Proclamation (Truman) . . 817

Transportation

Polish Charges of Discriminatory Vessel Inspec-
tions Called Unfounded 821

Treaties and Other International Agreements

DENMARK: Defense of Greenland, Signature . . 814

ECUADOR: Point 4 Agreement Signed .... 823

EGYPT: Point 4 Agreement Signed 823

GREECE: Athens College Signs Point 4 . . . 824

HAITI: Point 4 Agreement Signed 824

ICELAND: Defense Agreement, Background;

Text 812

ISRAEL : Unitarian Committee Signs Point 4 . . 826
LEBANON: American University (Beirut) Signs

Point 4 825

NEAR EAST FOUNDATION: Point 4 Signed . . 826
NEWFOUNDLAND: U.S.-Canada Defense Agree-
ment 813

United Nations

Communiques on Korea to Security Council . . 830

Documents: Selected Bibliography 831

Great Alliance of Fi-ee Men (Harriman) . . . 806
INDIA-PAKISTAN: Demilitarization In Jammu-

Kashmir (Austin) 831

U.N. Command Special Report on Korea . . . 828

U.S. In U.N. (Weekly Summary) 838

Name Index

Anderson, Eugenie 814

Austin, Warren R 828,831

Bartelt, Edward F 835

Benedlktsson, BJarni 812

Bennett, Henry G 823,824,825,826.827

Bey, Dr. Mohamed S 823

Byroade, Henry A 815

Caffery. Jefferson 823

Davis, Homer W 824

Dulles, John Foster 837

Hamlin, John N 823

Harriman, W. Averell 806

Hemmendinger, Noel 837

Jessup, Philip C 803

Lawson. Edward B 812

McComb, William R 834

Miller, Edward C 826

Penrose, Dr. Stephen B. L 825

Ponce, Neftall 823

Rice, Stuart A 837

Scheele, Dr. Leonard A 835

Spofford. Charles M 810

Thorp, Wlllard L 818

Ticoulat, G. J 833

Truman. President Harry S 809, 817

Truslow, Fiancls Adams 814

Waynlck, Capus M 814

Sustaining Friendship With China

hy Ambassador John Foster Dulles
Consultant to the Secretary ^

/f. ^~/

One of my most prized possessions is a letter
I received when 8 years old from Li Hung Chang,
then the great Chinese elder statesman. The open-
ing sentence of the letter reads: "To the little
gi'andchild of General Foster, my friend and
counsellor in my hours of perplexity and trouble."

That letter is to me symbolic of what has been,
and always should be, the relations between our
peoples.

It breathes the spirit of fraternal friendship be-
tween their old and our young society. It re-
flects the kindly good humor and respect for home
and family ties which make it easy for Americans
to understand and to love the Chinese character.
It confesses the troubles and perplexities which
inevitably confront an ancient civilization when
it is pressed upon by the thrusts of a restless new
outer world. It testifies to the value to be found
in counsel which is understanding and loyal.

That, you may say, is sentiment. So it is. Sen-
timent, rather than materialism, is, indeed, the
essence of the relationship of the American people
with the Chinese people. First, as colonists we
came to know and admire Chinese art in terms of
chinaware, wall paper, silks, and lacquer. Later,
our clipper ships began directly to touch at China
ports. But trade with China never grew to large
proportions nor did Americans ever invest heav-
ily in China. Always the contacts have been
primarily cultural and spiritual, notably through
missionaries.

Historic Relations With China

The Tientsin treaty of 1858 freely gave Chris-
tianity a special invitation. During the nine-
teenth century, scarcely a community in the United
States was without at least a share in a missionary
to China. Our churcli people regularly gathered
together to fill missionary boxes for China and
to hear read aloud the story of their China mis-

' Address made before the China Institute at New York
City, N.Y. on May 18 and released to the press on the
same date.

sionary and his Chinese friends and of the grow-
ing spiritual kinship between them. Later, Amer-
icans founded in China many Christian colleges,
medical schools, and hospitals, and many Chinese
students came to this country.

Only when the Spanish war made us a western
Pacific power did our relations with China become
a matter of major govei'nmental concern. We
saw that the people of China should be allowed
to develop in their own way which, we were con-
fident, would be a peaceful way. We were fearful
of the consequences if the Chinese became the tools
of alien despots. So, Secretary Hay called for
the "open door," Secretary Hughes made the
Washington treaty to maintain China's integrity,
Secretary Stimson proclaimed "nonrecognition of
the fruits of aggression." Finally, we accepted
the probability of war with Japan rather than
accept Japanese domination of China througjh
the puppet regimes which Japan had set up in
Manchukuo and Nanking.

During the long, hard Pacific war, the United
States helped China, both morally and materially,
and we looked forward to victory as opening a
new era of closer friendship between us.

Insidious Influence of Communism

It comes as a brutal shock that today much of
China is under the control of a regime which
fanatically hates the United States and which has
sent Chinese armies to Korea to kill Americans
who are there at the behest of the United Nations.

The Chinese Communist attitude is exemplified
by a widely publicized pamphlet written last Oc-
tober. The first section is entitled We Must Hate
America, Because She is the Chinese Peopled Im^
placable Enemy. There follows a recital of al-
leged historic incidents which blames the United
States for almost all of China's troubles, beginning
with the opium war which was allegedly sup-
ported by the American Navy.

The second section is entitled IFe Must Desvise
A77ierica, Because if is a Corrupt Imperialistic
Nation.) the World Center of Reaction and Deca-

May 28, 7957

843

denny. There follows a picture of the United
States which is indeed startling: 18 million un-
employed; 10 million with no housing whatso-
ever; 40 million who barely exist in slums; 14
thousand agents of the F.B.I, engaged in "the
exclusive mission of persecuting the people"; 99
percent of the newspapers and magazines con-
trolled by the National Association of Manufac-
turers and used for making the younger genera-
tion "spiritually decadent and halting their intel-
lectual development, so that they may be driven
to serve aggression and war."

The third section is entitled We Must Look
Down Upon America Becau-ie She is a Paper
Tiger and Entirely Vulnerable to Defeat. There
follows a picture of America without friends or
allies, internally divided and confronted by the
closely knit 830 million peoples of China, Russia,
and the Russian satellite states. Our great in-
dustrial capacity is admitted but, it is said, this
will be offset when Western Europe is liberated
and, further, our concentrated industry is said to
be particularly vulnerable to the Soviet Union's
atom bombs. It concludes America faces "defeat
which will be more disastrous than that which be-
fell Hitler and Japan."

That is the regular Party line. By print, by
radio, by drama, by pictures, with all of the skills
which communism has developed, "Hate America,
Despise America" is the sentiment being pounded
into the Chinese people.

How has this come to pass ? In part, no doubt,
because of some errors on our part. But, in a
larger sense, the present situation is the Soviet's
reward for 30 years of hard work.

In 1924, Stalin revealed it as basic strategy that
"the road to victory over the West" would be
sought in Asia, and particularly, China. The 450
million people of China must be made to serve the
Soviet Communist program of world conquest.
To this end, a Chinese Communist Party was
formed under the guiding direction of the Rus-
sian, Borodin. That Party, Soviet Russia has
nurtured until it has matured into today's regime
of Mao Tse-tung which serves as the instrument
of Soviet communism.

If any doubt that relationship, I remind them
of these facts :

1. The Chinese Communist Party has consist-
ently and publicly proclaimed its disciple-master
relationship with Stalin and Soviet Russia. The
following oft-repeated statement of Mao Tse-tung,
first made in 1939, is typical :

The fact that Stalin has come into the world is indeed
fortunate. 'Poday, when we have the Soviet Union, the
Communist l'art.v, and Stalin — all's riglit with the world.

2. The Soviet Government paid a great price to
bring the Chinese Commimist regime into power
and would only have done so to serve itself.
Among other things, it openly dishonored its 1945
Treaty of Alliance and I'riendshi]) with National
China whereby it undertook that for 20 years its

"moral support and aid in military supplies and
other material resources," would "be entirely

given to tlie National Government as the Central
rovernment of China."

3. Mao Tse-tung, after winning mainland vic-
tories with the Soviet help we have referred to,
went to Moscow at the end of 1949 where he spent
nearly 3 months in consultation with the Soviet
leaders. On his return, he broadcast to the
peoples of Southeast Asia, calling upon them to
seek liberation through "armed struggle" as part
of the "forces headed by the Soviet Union." There
followed Communist-armed interventions in Ko-
rea, Indochina, Tibet, and the Philippines. These
interventions conformed exactly with known So-
viet wishes and, indeed, were forecast in advance
by the Soviet official press.

4. These foreign policies of Mao Tse-tung are
utterly irreconcilable with the interests of the
Chinese people. After 14 years of exhausting
war, they desperately need internal recuperation.
No one in his senses could assert that it is in
China's interest to shovel its youth and material
resources into the fiery furnace of Korean war to
gain South Korea, an area which means little to
China, but which, since the czars, has been coveted
by Russia because of its strategic value as against
Japan.

By the test of conception, birth, nurture, and
obedience, the Mao Tse-tung regime is a creature
of the Moscow Politburo, and it is on behalf of
Moscow, not of China, that it is destroying the
friendship of the Chinese people toward the
United States.

What has happened is precisely what Stalin
planned. In his 1924 lectures on Leninism, Stalin
discusses what he calls "The National Problem,"
that is, the problem of how aspirations for na-
tional independence can be fitted into the Soviet
program of world conquest. Communist leaders
in Asia must, he says, recognize that national in-
dependence is but a slogan wherewith to ride into
power on anticolonial sentiment. But, once in
power, the Communist leaders must fight against
the tendency of the masses toward "national in-
sularity" and must seek "the amalgamation of
these masses into a single state union" which is
the goal of "Soviet power."

That is what is going on in China now. Anti-
American sentiment is being whipped up to eradi-
cate the influence of the West, ostensibly in the
interest of national independence. But this pop-
ular hysteria is sought as a front behind wnich
the Chinese laeople are being deprived of their in-
dependence ancl being betrayed into amalgama-
tion with the mass which serves Moscow.

It is inevitable that many Chinese should be
fooled by what is going on. But the AnuM-ican
people and their Government should not be fooled.
We should treat the Mao Tse-tung regime for
what it is — a puppet regime. The relationship
to Moscow is camouflaged more craftily than was

844

Department of State Bulletin

the relationship between the Japanese and the Nan-
king regime of Wang Ching-wei. Eeoent de-
velopments in the technique of propaganda enable
it to win greater popular support and to depend
less openly upon foreign military power. But
the doctrine and the iron discipline of the Commu-
nist Party, Bolshevik, bind Mao Tse-tung to the
service of Moscow more completely than was Wang
Ching-wei ever bound to the service of Japan.

That could change. The Chinese people are
today being abused to a degree that is causing
many Chinese Communist leaders to feel rebellious
against the subserviency to Moscow. But, unless
and until actual conduct gives clear proof of
change, our national self-interest, our friendship
for China, and the historic dedication of our
Nation to the cause of human freedom combine
to require that no act of ours shall contribute
to a ]\Iao Tse-tung success which could fasten the
yoke of Moscow on the Chinese people.

My own official concern today is the Japanese
peace treaty. I can assure you that, in negotia-
ing that treaty, we shall not consider that the
voice of Mao Tse-tung is the voice of China.

^^Hiile we thus adopt a negative attitude toward
Mao Tse-tung and all his ilk, we should adopt a
positive attitude toward the many Chinese who
remain loyal to the welfare of China and to the
friendship between China and the United States
which has in the past served China so well. Our
own loyalty to those ideals should be demonstrated
by deeds, public and private. It will not always
be easy to find the way. But whatever the ob-
stacles, however long and troubled be the way,
we must be loyal to past and present friendships.
We must work to preserve these friendships with
persistence and resourcefulness at least equal to
that which for 30 years Soviet communism has
devoted to undermining Chinese-American friend-
ship.

A great weakness is that we are not enough
interested in long-range programs. Because elec-
tions come so frequently, there is a tendency on
the jiart of government to seek short cuts which
can bear quick political fruit. There is a tend-
ency to evade long, hard tasks.

That gives the Soviet Union a great advantage,
for its planning is often in terms of what Stalin
has referred to as "an entire historic era."

I am not advocating slow motion in the case
of China. On the contrary, it is imperative that
we move quickly, while we still have many friends
not only on Formosa, but also on the mainland,
and j)ossibilities of access to them. But we must
not only start fast, we must start with long vision
and endurance because we cannot overnight undo
what has been accomplished by the best brains
and skills of the Soviet Communist Party working
with substantial resources over a span of 30 years.

Generally, and particularly in the Orient, great
results are not achieved quickly, and those who

would succeed must dedicate themselves to sus-
tained effort.

That is where our people come in. In the past,
our churches, colleges, private organizations, and
individuals have decisively molded and sustained
our China policy. That nnist continue to be the
case. Despite provocation and discouragements
in China, the American people must persist in
their faith in the Chinese people and the determi-
nation to find works which will express that faith.
Thus hatred will succumb to friendship, servitude
will give way to liberation, and warfare will sub-
side into peace.

We have entered upon a period of long trial.
But true friendship has the capacity to survive the
strain of misunderstanding, provocation, and dis-
appointment. It "beareth all things, hopeth all
things, endureth all things."

Those who have been friends of China, who in-
herit and would preserve that great tradition,
have often been mocked because their plans have
gone awry, and their hopes have seemed vain. All
of that is unimportant, so long as faith and deter-
mination persist. The friends of China may have
been daily wrong — but they have been eternally
right.

Italian Senate Approves Funds
for Defense Budget

Statement hy Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press May IS]

The Italian Ambassador [Alberto Tarchiani]
called upon me to discuss the Italian defense effort
and to inform me of the passage by the Italian
Senate of the bill appropriating 250 billion lire,
the equivalent of 400 million dollars, for rearma-
ment as Italy's immediate additional contribution
to the defense of the North Atlantic community.

I welcomed this expression of Italy's coopera-
tion with the other nations of the North Atlantic
community in their common progi'am for deter-
ring aggression. I pointed out that free demo-
cratic Italy has made a notable recovery since the
war and today occupies a place of distinction and
full equality among the free nations working to
establish an enduring peace. Although denied
admission into the United Nations by repeated
Soviet vetoes, Italy as a member of the North
Atlantic Treaty Organization is making a major
contribution to the common defense of liberty and
the preservation of democratic traditions in a free
world.

The bonds of friendship existing between the
American and Italian people are being constantly
strengthened by daily association and cooperation
in the effort to maintain peace and guard against
aggression.

May 28, 7951

845

Chinese-American FriendsFiip

6y Bean Rusk

Assistant Secretary for Far Eastern Affairs ^

I should like, first of all, to congratulate the
China Institute on its quarter century of splendid
public service and to compliment you who are
responsible for this timely chance to recall the
warm friendship which has marked the relations
between the Chinese and American people
throughout the last two centuries.

Something of what we have in mind this evening
is contained in a concurrent resolution which
passed the Senate on May 4 and which is now be-
fore the House of Kepresentatives, which reads
in part :

Resolved by the Senate (the House of Representatives
concurring). That the Congress of the United States re-
affirm the historic and abiding friendship of the American
people for all other peoples, including the peoples of the
Soviet Union, and declares —

That the American people deeply regret the artificial
barriers which separate them from the peoples of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, and which keep the
Soviet peoples from learning of the desire of the American
people to live in friendship with all other peoples and to
work with them in advancing the ideal of human brother-
hood; and

That the American people and their Government desire
neither war with the Soviet Union nor the terrible con-
sequences of such a war;

Traditional Bonds

Despite the artificial barriers which now sepa-
rate us from most of the peoples of China, we
meet to reaffirm the historic and abiding friend-
ship of the American people for the people of
China.

Most of you here this evening are better quali-
fied than I to explore the origins and elements of
Chinese-American friendship. Over the cen-
turies, this friendship lias come to be taken for
granted; cordial sentiments between a free China
and a free America became strong and durable

' Address made liefore the China Institute at New York
on May 18 and released to the press on the same date.

because they were constantly nourished by com-
mon purposes and common practical interests.

We and the Chinese, for example, have had a
vital interest in the peace of the Pacific. Each of
us wants security on our Pacific flank and wants
to be able to look across those vast waters to find
strength, independence, and good will in its great
neighbor on the other side. It was inevitable that
the driving force of Japanese militarism would
sooner or later bring China and America together
to oppose it, just as we had moved 40 years earlier
to support China's independence and integrity
against threats from Europe. The same issues
are now posed again — and are made more difficult
to deal with because foreign encroachment is now
being arranged by Chinese who seem to love China
less than they do their foreign masters.

We meet here this evening to reaffirm our friend-
ship with the Chinese people — but not merely as
a routine and elegant expression of good will.
For the friendship we have taken for granted for
so long is now being attacked with every available
weapon by those who have come to power on the
mainland of China. Their sustained and violent
effort to ei'ase all evidence of this friendship bears
powerful witness to the validity and strength of
the bonds between our two peoples. American in-
fluence among the Chinese people is intolerable to
those in power in Peiping and Moscow because
they know, and quite rightly, that the idea of
national and individual freedom which is at the
heart of American political thouglit is the great-
est threat to their own evil purposes.

Is the message of this meeting this evening to
our friends in China prompted solely by narrowly
conceived American interests? That important
American interests are involved, there can bo no
doubt. But our historical relations witli China
have always reflected a high regard on our part
for Chinese interests, and it is these we ask our
friends in China now to consider.

846

Department of State Bullelin

Threats to China's Independence

The independence of China is gravely threat-
ened. In the Communist world, there is room for
only one mastei- — a jealous and implacable master,
■whose price of friendship is complete submission.
How many Chinese, in one connnunity after
another, are now being destroyed because they love
China more than the Soviet Union? How many
Chinese will remember in time the fates of Rajk,
Kostov, Petkov, dementis, and all those in other
satellites who discovered that being Communist is
not enough for the conspirators of the Kremlin ?

The freedoms of the Chinese people are disap-
pearing. Trial by mob, mass slaughter, banish-
ment as forced labor to Manchuria, Siberia or
Sinkiang, the arbitrary seizure of property, the
destruction of loyalties within the family, the sup-
pression of free speech — these are the facts behind
the parades and celebrations and the empty prom-
ises.

The territorial integrity of China is now an
ironic phrase. The movement of Soviet forces
into Sinkiang, the realities of "joint exploitation"
of that great province by Moscow and Peiping,
the separation of Inner Mongolia from the body
politic of China, and the continued inroads of
Soviet power into Manchuria under the cloak of
the Korean aggression mean in fact that China
is losing its great northern areas to the European
empire which has stretched out its greedy hands
for them for at least a century.

Are our Chinese friends reflecting upon the
maps of Cliina now being published on the main-
land which show Sinkiang, Inner Mongolia, Man-
churia, and areas in the west and southwest as
something distinct from China? Are our friends
in China impressed by trade union buttons appear-
ing on the streets of Peiping which no longer show
Sinkiang and Inner Mongolia on the map of
China? Have the authorities in Peiping them-
selves fully considered what it means for them
to have Soviet troops on Chinese soil, in the light
of the experience of the miserable satellites of
Eastern Europe?

The peace and security of China are being sac-
rificed to the ambitions of the Communist con-
spiracy. China has been driven by foreign mas-
ters into an adventure of foreign aggression which
cuts across the most fundamental national inter-
ests of the Chinese people. This action stands
condemned by the great world community in
which the Chinese people have always aspired to
play a worthy role.

Hundreds of thousands of Chinese youths are
being sacrificed in a fiery furnace, pitting their
waves of human flesh against the fire power of
modern weapons and without heavy equipment,
adequate supply, or the most elementary medical
attention. Apart from Korea, the Chinese are
being pressed to aggressive action in other areas —
all calculated to divert the attention and energies

of China away from the encroachments of Soviet
imperialism upon China itself.

Support From the Free World

I find it hard to believe that the Chinese people
will acquiesce in the kind of future which their
masters are now preparing for them. I find it
impossible to believe that our friends in China
have given up their desire to live at peace with
their neighbors, to play a major role as a peaceful
member of the international community of na-
tions, to trade freely with all the world, to improve
their own conditions in accordance with their own
needs, aspirations and traditions, to maintain
their independence as a nation, to preserve their
territorial integrity, and to live out their lives in
dignity and with the respect of their fellow men.

Events in China must surely challenge the con-
cern of Chinese everywhere — in Formosa, on the
mainland, and in overseas communities. There is
a job to be done for China which only the Chinese
can do— a job which will require sustained energy,
continued sacrifice, and an abundance of the high
courage with which so many Chinese have fought
for so long during the struggles of the past
decades. The rest of us cannot tell them exactly
what is to be done or how. We cannot provide a
formula to engage the unity of effort among all
Chinese who love their country. But one thing
we can say — as the Chinese people move to assert
their freedom and to work out their destiny in
accordance with their own historical purposes —
they can count upon tremendous support from
free peoples in other parts of the world.

It is not my purpose, in these few moments this
evening, to go into specific elements of our own
national policy in the present situation. But we
can tell our friends in China that the United
States will not acquiesce in the degradation which
is being forced upon them. We clo not recognize
the authorities in Peiping for what they pretend
to be. The Peiping regime may be a colonial Rus-
sian government — a Slavic Manchukuo on a larger
scale. It is not the Government of China. It does
not pass the first test. It is not Chinese.

It is not entitled to speak for China in the com-
munity of nations. It is entitled only to the fruits
of its own conduct — the fruits of aggression upon
which it is now willfully, openly, and senselessly
embarked.

We recognize the National Government of the
Republic of China, even though the territory
under its control is severely restricted. We believe
it more authentically represents the views of the
great body of the people of China, particularly
their historic demand for independence from for-
eign control. That Government will continue to
receive important aid and assistance from the
United States. Under the circumstances, however,
such aid in itself cannot be decisive to the future
of China. The decision and the eilort are for the

May 28, 1951

847

Chinese people, pooling their efforts, wherever
they are, in behalf of China.

If the Chinese people decide for freedom, they
shall find friends among all the peoples of the
earth who have known and love freedom. They
shall find added strength from those who refuse to
believe that China is fated to become a land of
tyranny and aggression and who expect China to
fulfill the promise of its great past.

Statement hy Micha-el J. McDermott
Chief Press Officer ^

Attempts to read into the speech of Assistant
Secretary Dean Rusk on Friday night implications
which are said to amount to a change in policy
are not justified by what was said. The speech
was intended to be and was a restatement of the
deep and long friendship between the Chinese
and American people, the concern of the Ameri-
can people for preserving the independence and
integrity of China and our concern that the Chi-
nese people have been sacrificed by Communist
leaders in the fighting in Korea. It reaffirms our
hope and belief that the Chinese people will not
give up their national characteristic of wishing

to live at peace with and engage in peaceful trade
with the nations of the world. It states what has
often been said before, that the United States will
not acquiesce or aid in fastening upon them a re-
gime which subordinates their interests to the
interests of a foreign state. It states that this
regime is not entitled to speak for China in the
community of nations. There is certainly nothing
new here.

It states the fact that we continue to recognize
the National Government of the Republic of China
and we believe that its demand for independence
from foreign control represents an historic Chi-
nese attitude. It states that we are giving aid
to the National Government, as we are obviously
and publicly doing.

It concludes that if the Chinese people decide
for freedom they will find friends among all people
who love freedom. Such a decision on the part
of the Chinese people obviously would restore close
I'elations between the Chinese and other peoples
of the world.

To strive to build these statements into far-
reaching conclusions of involvement in the Chinese
civil war is absolutely not justified.

Embargo on Shipments to People's Republic of China Urged

Statements hy Ambassador Ernest A. Gross
Deputy U.S. Representative to the U.N?

The aggression against the United Nations in
Korea continues.

Chinese Communist and North Korean authori-
ties, reckless of casualties, press their attack
against the Republic of Korea. The aggressors
ignore the efforts of the President of the General
Assembly and of the Good Offices Committee to
bring about a cessation of hostilities and the
achievement of United Nations objectives in Korea
by peaceful means.

Forces of the United Nations stand shoulder to
shoulder with forces of the Republic of Korea in
resisting the wanton assaults of the aggressors.
We meet today to consider how best to support
United Nations forces fighting in the field, how
best to lielp end the aggression, and how best to
help bring about that peaceful settlement which it
is oui' declared purpose to achieve.

Tlie draft resolution of the Additional Measures

^M;i(l<. on May 21.

'Made before Committee I (Political and Seourity) on
May 17 and released to the press by the U.S. Mission to
the U.N. on the same dale.

Committee proposes one immediate and practical
step leading toward the attainment of these three
great objectives. The members of the Additional
Measures Committee have worked long and care-
fully to make sure that their first recommendation
would be responsive to the actual situation in
Korea, as well as to the objectives laid down in the
General Assembly's resolution of February 1.
The Committee has labored constantly to preserve
the fundamental unity of the United Nations in
its determination to resist aggression.

The Committee's task was to devise measures
which would supplement the military action of
the United Nations forces in the field. Numerous
consultations and exchanges of views among mem-
bers of the Committee led to agreement that pri-
ority should be given to the consideration of eco-
nomic measures. The result of tliat agreement is
the resolution set forth in (he Committee's iii-st
report.

The resolution reconnnends a full strategic em-
bargo against Connnunist China and the North
Koreans. What does that mean? It means that

848

Department of State Bulletin

the General Assembly will reconiniend not simply
to all members of the United Nations, but to all
states everywhere, that they deny these two ag-
gressors strategic materials necessary to maintain
the armies they are hurlino; against United Na-
tions units in Korea. It means that the United
Nations is expressing its determination that
United Nations soldiers — soldiers on a mission
unprecedented in history — must not be opposed by
materials of war produced by member nations or
indeed by any other state.

My (Tovernment already has banned all trade
with North Korea and Communist China. We
prohibit United States ships and planes from
calling at Communist Chinese ports or carrying
goods destined for that area. We have frozen
Communist Chinese assets within the United
States.

Many other members of the United Nations
have already prohibited the shipment of strategic
materials to Communist China.

The resolution now before us takes account of
these facts and recommends a full United Nations
strategic embargo- — a program which can be im-
mediately and effectively applied on the widest
possible scale.

I turn now to a more detailed comment on the
draft resolution.

Paragrajih B of the preamble records the im-
portant fact that a number of states have already
embargoed the shipment of strategic items to Com-
munist China. The draft resolution proclaims
the policy of the United Nations to make these
actions more effective by widening the area of
international cooperation.

Paragraph C of the preamble states the two
purposes of the proposed embargo. First, these
measures would support and supplement the mili-
tary action of the United Nations in Korea. Sec-
oncl, they would assist in putting an end to the
aggression. To restate United Nations objectives
in this resolution is a good thing. It is right to say
that the United Nations is determined to do what
is needful in order to attain those objectives.

In the operative part of the resolution, para-
graph A contains a broad formula for deciding
what strategic items are recommended for em-
bargo. My delegation has joined with four other
delegations in sponsoring an amendment which
would help clarify the formula and thereby
strengthen the resolution. As revised, paragi'aph
A would recommend that every state:

(A) Apply an embargo on the shipment to areas under
the control of the Central People's Government of the
People's Republic of China and of the North Korean
authorities of arms, ammunition and implements of war,
atomic energy materials, petroleum, transportation ma-
terials of strategic value, and items useful in the pro-
duction of arms, ammunition and implements of war.

Under paragraph B of the operative section
each state would have the responsibility of de-
ciding which items are covered by the broad
formulation of the embargo, and what specific

May 28, 1 95 1

Text of Embargo Resolution

U.N. doc. A/1805
Adopted May 18, 1951

The General Assembly.

Noting the Report of the Additional Measures
Committee dated 14 May 1951,

Recaujno its resolution 498 (V) of 1 February
1951,

Noting That

(a) The Additional Measures Committee es-
tablished by that resolution has considered ad-
ditional measures to be employed to meet the ag-
gression in Korea,

(b) The Additional Measures Committee has
reported that a number of States have already
taken measures designed to deny contributions
to the military strength of the forces opposing
the United Nations in Korea,

(c) The Additional Measures Committee has
also reported that certain economic measures
designed further to deny such contributions
would support and supplement the military action
of the United Nations in Korea and would assist
in putting an end to the aggression,

1. Recommends that every State :

(a) Apply an embargo on the .shipment to
areas under the control of the Central People's
Government of the People's Republic of China
and of the North Korean authorities of arms,
ammunition and implements of war, atomic
energy materials, petroleum, transportation ma-
terials of strategic value, and items useful in the
production of arms, ammunition, and inplements
of war ;

(b) Determine which commodities exported
from its territory fall within the embargo, and
apply controls to give effect to the embargo;

(c) Prevent by all means within its juris-
diction the circumvention of controls on ship-
ments applied by other States pursuant to the
present resolution ;

(d) Co-operate with other States in carry-
ing out the purposes of this embargo ;

(e) Report to the Additional Measures Com-
mittee, within 30 days and thereafter at the
request of the Committee, on the measures taken
in accordance with the present resolution ;

2. Requests the Additional Measures Committee:

(a) To report to the General Assembly, with
recommendations as appropriate, on the general
effectiveness of the embargo and the desirability
of continuing, extending or relaxing it ;

(b) To continue its consideration of addi-
tional measures to be employed to meet the ag-
gression in Korea, and to report thereon fur-
ther to the General Assembly, it being under-
stood that the Committee is authorized to defer
its report if the Good Offices Committee reports
satisfactory progress in its efforts;

.3. Reaffirms that it continues to be the policy
of the United Nations to bring about a cessation
of hostilities in Korea, and the achievement of
United Nations ob.iectives in Korea by peaceful
means, and requests the Good Offices Committee
to continue its good offices.

controls it should apply to prevent their con-
tinued export.

Paragi-aph C recommends that each state sup-
port the actions taken by others so that a com-

849

modity embargoed by one state shall not be trans-
shipped or reexported or in some other way as-
sisted on its way to the aggressors.

Paragraph D asserts the basic nature of tliis
plan by recommending cooperation among states.
It is broad ; but it is meaningful. No state should
go into the market place of the aggressors and
enlarge its trade in commodities which other states
have embargoed. The forces of aggression are
not entitled to buy war materials in a black
market.

The draft resolution provides that each state
will detennine what particular articles fall within
the strategic embargo. Hence, tlie review ma-
chinery which this resolution would establish is an
essential part of the program. Like all effective
United Nations operations, this is a cooperative
undertaking for collective security. It tests the
determination of members of the United Nations
to support by economic measures United Nations
forces fighting in Korea to protect the system of
collective security upon which the survival of the
free world depends.

The resolution further makes two requests of
the Additional Measures Committee. First, it is
asked to establish a procedure for reviewing re-
ports made by states on the measures they have
already taken or will take in accordance with the
resolution. This provision will allow the Addi-
tional Measures Committee to determine how well
the embargo is being applied and whether new
measures are needed to apply it more effectively.
The Additional Measures Committee will also be
in a position to recommend changes in the em-
bargo in the light of changing circumstances. If
the aggi-ession continues, the Additional Meas-
ures Committee may recommend broader economic
measures. The experience gained through tlie
strategic embargo would show how to apply such
measures most effectively and thus help solve those
complex economic and administrative problems
which such broader measures may entail. If the
aggression ends, the Committee may recommend
that the United Nations end its embargo.

The Additional Measures Committee would also
be requested to continue its consideration of other
different measures which might usefully be em-
ployed to meet the aggression. The decision of
the Committee to give priority to economic meas-
ures does not, of course, alter the responsibility
of the Conunittee, under its original terms of ref-
erence, which this resolution would reaffirm.

The final paragraph of the resolution requests
the Good Offices Committee to continue its efforts.
My Govermnent attaches great importance to the
work of the Good Offices Committee. We believe
that the peace-making functions of the United
Nations must never be lost sight of, even in the
midst of our efforts to strengthen collective action
against aggression. In our view, the measures con-
temi)latcd by the draft resolution will strengthen
the hand of the Good Offices Conunittee, by demon-

strating to the aggressors our unity of purpose and
firmness of action against aggression and for peace.
The i:iassage of this resolution will be a further
step in the United Nations effoit for peace. The
aggressors will be brought closer to the realization
that in their own self-interest they must end their
aggression. It is only in this way tliat a peace- I
f ul settlement in Korea can be achieved.

In my statement earlier today, I set forth the
attitude of my Govermuent concerning the reso-
lution just adopted by this Committee and the
reasons why we support it. My explanation of
vote at this time is designed to deal with the ques-
tion raised by the Soviet delegate concerning the
power of the General Assembly to recommend col-
lective measures against the aggressor.

The Soviet delegate, as I understood his argu-
ment, maintains that under the United Nations
Charter the Security Council is the only United
Nations body authorized to deal with the ques-
tion of collective measures.

The Soviet delegate misinterprets the Charter.
It is true, as he said, that article 24 confers on the
Security Council primary responsibility for the
maintenance of international peace and security
but it is also true, as he did not say, that the Char-
ter confers upon the General Assembly the author-
ity to discuss and make recommendations on any
question or any matter within the scope of the
Charter, unless the Security Council is exercising
in respect of any dispute or situation the functions
assigned to it in the Charter. If the Security
Council fails to exercise its functions, or ceases to
deal with matters arising under the Charter, the
General Assembly has the power to make recom- j
mendations appropriate to deal with them.

Tlie General Assembly itself has declared this
to be true. In its resolution entitled Uniting for
Peace, adopted on November 4, 1950, the Assembly
formally resolved that "if the Security Council,
because of lack of unanimity of the permanent
members fails to exercise its primary responsi-
bility for the maintenance of international peace
and security in any case where there appears to
be a threat to the peace, breach of the peace, or act
of aggression, the General Assembly shall consider
the matter immediately with a view to making ap-
propriate recommendations to members for col-
lective measures, including in the case of a breach
of the peace or act of aggression the use of armed
force when necessary, to maintain or restore inter-
national peace and security."

In this very case. Mi-. Chairman, the General
Assembly dealt squarely with the question which
has arisen because in this very case the Security
Council has been prevented by Soviet veto from
carrying out its responsibility to deal with tlie
aggression in Korea. The very first paragraph of
the resolution of February 1, 1951, which sets up
the Additional Measures Conunittee and under

850

Department of State Bulletin

which resohition the Additional Measures Com-
mittee has reported to the Assembly, stated :

Noting that the Security Council because of lack of
unanimity of the permanent members has failed to exer-
cise its primary responsibility for the maintenance of in-
ternational peace and security in regard to the Chinese
Communist intervention in Korea.

Then the resolution proceeds to take the action
with which we are familiar. In addition, Mr.
Chairman, the Security Council itself by formal
action on January 31, at its 531st meeting, had
taken this question off the agenda of the Security
Council.

There can be no question in the view of my
delegation, therefore, that the General Assembly is
, fully authorized by the Charter to recommend the
action which this Committee has just approved.

U.S. Position on Iranian Oil Situation

[Released to the press May 18]

The United States is deeply concerned by the
dispute between the Iranian and British Govern-
ments over Iranian oil. We are firm friends of
both Iran and Great Britain and are sincerely in-
terested in the welfare of each country. The
United States wants an amicable settlement to
this dispute, which is serious not only to the parties
directly concerned but also to the whole free world.
We have followed the matter closely and have
told both countries where we stand. The views
which we have expressed have related to the broad
aspects of the problem, as it has not been appro-
priate for us to advise with respect to specific
terms of arrangements which might be worked out.

Since the United States attitude has been the
subject of some speculation, it is deemed advisable
to describe the position which we have taken in our
talks with representatives of Iran and Great
Britain.

We have stressed to the Govenmaents of both
countries the need to solve the dispute in a friendly
way through negotiation and have urged them to
avoid intimidation and threats of unilateral action.

In our talks with the British Government, we
have expressed the opinion that arrangements
should be worked out with the Iranians which give
recognition to Iran's expressed desire for greater
control over and benefits from the development of
its petroleum resources. While the United States
has not approved or disapproved the terms of any
particular British proposal, it is pleased to note a
sincere desire on the part of the British to nego-
tiate with the Iranians on all outstanding issues.

We fully recognize the sovereign rights of Iran
and sympathize with Iran's desire that increased
benefits accrue to that country from the develop-
ment of its petroleum. In talks with the Iranian
Government, we have pointed out the serious ef-
fects of any unilateral cancellation of clear con-
tractual relationshij)s which the United States

strongly opposes. Wo have stressed the impor-
tance of the Iranians achieving their legitimate
objectives through friendly negotiation witli the
other party, consistent with their international
responsibilities. This would have the advantage
of maintaining confidence in future commercial
investments in Iran and, indeed, in the validity
of contractual arrangements all over the world.

Iran has been urged, before it takes final action,
to analyze carefully the practical aspects of this
problem. In this connection, we have raised the
question of whether or not the elimination of the
established British oil company from Iran would
in fact secure for Iran the greatest possible bene-
fits. We have pointed out that the efficient pro-
duction and renning of Iranian oil requires not
only technical knowledge and capital but trans-
port and marketing facilities such as those pro-
vided by the company. We have also pointed out
that any uncertainty as to future availability of
Iranian supplies would cause concern on the part
of customers which might lead to shifts in their
source of supply with a consequent decreased reve-
nue to Iran.

Those United States oil companies which would
be best able to conduct operations such as the
large-scale and complex industry in Iran have in-
dicated to this Government that they would not
in the face of unilateral action by Iran against
the British company be willing to undertake opera-
tions in that country. Moreover, petroleum tech-
nicians of the number and competence required to
replace those presently in Iran are not, due to ex-
treme shortages of manpower in this specialized
field, available in this country or in other countries.

The United States believes that Iran and Great
Britain have such a strong mutuality of interests
that they must and will find some way, through
friendly negotiation, of reestablishing a relation-
ship which will permit each party to play its full
role in the achievement of their common objec-
tives. Through such negotiation it is felt that
Iran's basic desires and interests can best be real-
ized, the legitimate British interests preserved, and
the essential flow of Iranian oil into the markets
of the free world maintained.

The United States has repeatedly expressed its
great interest in the continued independence and
territorial integrity of Iran and has given and
will continue to give concrete evidence of this
interest.

Consular Offices

The consular agency at Quepos, Costa Rica, was closed
both to the public and oflBcially on April 30, 1951.

The American Legation at Vientiane, Laos, was ofiB-
cially opened on August 22, 1950. The oflBce is a special
purpose post administered by a Charge d'Affaires ad
interim in the absence of the American Minister who is
accredited to the three associated states of Vietnam, Cam-
bodia, and Laos. The Minister maintains his permanent
residence at Saigon, Vietnam, and makes periodic visits
to other associated states.

fAay 28, ?95J

851

U. S. Analyzes Comments by U. S. S. R. for
Effecting Japanese Peace Treaty

U. S. MEMORANDUM TO U. S. S. R.

[Released to the press May 20]

The following United States reply to the remarks of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics dated May 7, 1951, on
the draft Japanese peace treaty was handed to the Soviet
Ambassador in Washington on May 19, 1951.

The Government of the United States has care-
fully considered the remarks of the Government
of the Soviet Union of May 7, 1951, relative to the
draft of a Japanese peace treaty which the Gov-
ernment of the United States submitted on March
29, 1951. These remarks show the persistence of
a major difference of opinion as regards procedure.
However, as regards substance, the Government
of Soviet Union raises objection only to the pro-
posed treatment of (a) Formosa and the Pesca-
dores; (b) the Ryukyu and Bonin Islands; (c)
Japan's future security ; and even here the differ-
ences are only partial, not total. The Soviet Gov-
ernment's analysis would seem to constitute a
fenuine, if unintended, tribute to the regard for
alanced justice with which the draft treaty was
prepared.

I

The paragraphs of the Soviet Government's Re-
marks numbered I, deal with procedure.

The Soviet Government asserts that under the
Potsdam Agreement of August 2, 1945, "the draw-
ing up of a peace treaty with Japan has been laid
upon the United States, the Soviet Union, China
and Great Britain," constituting for this purpose
the Council of Foreign Ministers.

This view of the Soviet Government has been
put forward on several occasions and has as often
been rejected by the Government of the United
States.

The Potsdam Agreement of August 2, 1945, con-
templates that the Council of Foreign Ministers
thereby established would, "as its immediate im-
portant task," draw up "treaties of peace with
Italy, Rumania, Bulgaria, Hungary and Finland"
and propose "settlements of territoi'ial questions
outstanding on the termination of the war in
Europe." It is then provided that the Council
"shall be utilized for the preparation of a peace
settlement for (lermany." It is finally provided
that "Other matters may from time to time be re-

ferred to the Council by agreement between the
Member Governments."

Thus, the Potsdam Agreement between the Gov-
ernment of the Soviet Union, the United Kingdom
and the United States did not mention the Japa-
nese Peace Treaty. This was natural, for the war
with Japan was then in full vigor and the Soviet
Union was then neutral in that war.

The Council of Foreign Ministers can, of course,
deal with "other matters" than the European
matters specified, but only "by agreement between
the Member Governments."

The United States has not agreed and does not
agree to the reference to the Council of Foreign
Ministers of the matter of making a Japanese
peace treaty. The reason, among othere, is that
the systematic misuse in the Council of veto power
militates against the speedy achievement, tlirough
the Council, of an early peace treaty. Further-
more, the procedures of the Council would give a
secondary role to Allied Powers which bore a
greater bui'den of the Pacific war than did the
Soviet Union.

The Government of the Soviet ITnion urges that
the peace-making procedure should fully take ac-
count of the interests of China in a Japanese peace
treaty. The procedure being presently followed
does that. It is true that the United States does
not seek guidance from a convicted aggi-essor, but
the real interests of China are fully reflected in
the present draft treaty. For example, by Arti-
cle 11, "Japan renounces all special rights and
interests in China" and Article 19 makes this re-
nunciation automatically effective. It is note-
worthy that the Soviet Government, which in
Parts II and III of its remarks, deals fully with
substantive issues, suggests no modification or ad-
dition in favor of China except in relation to
Formosa and the Pescadores, as to which it is sug-
gested that Japan should do more than liquidate
its own title. This large measure of acceptance
by the Government of the Soviet Union of the
substantive ])rovisions dealing with China testi-
fies to the strupulous regard for China's interests
with which the draft treaty was prepared.

II

The paragraphs of the Soviet Government's re-
marks numbered II deal with tlie substance of the
draft treaty.

852

Department of Stale Bulletin

(a) As to territorial matters, the Government of
the Soviet Union suggests that the draft treaty
does not faithfully reflect the Surrender Terms
because it does not provide that "the Island of
Taiwan and the Pescadores Islands should be re-
turned to China."

The territorial clause of the Surrender Terms
stipulated "The terms of the Cairo Declaration
shall be carried out and Japanese sovereignty shall
be limited to the islands of Honshu, Hokkaido,
Kyushu, Shikoku and such minor islands as we
determine." The draft treaty would, in fact,
limit Japanese sovereignty accordingly.

The Cairo Declaration provided that "Man-
churia, Formosa, and the Pescadores, shall be re-
stored to the Republic of China."

The Government of the United States notes that
the remarks of the Soviet Government fail to
quote accurately the Cairo Declaration. The
word "Manchuria" is deleted and "China" is sub-
stituted for "the Republic of China."

In view of the known acquisition by the
U. S. S. R. of zones of interest in Manchuria, the
United States Government is prompted to inquire
as to the significance of the present avoidance by
the Soviet Government of reference to the restora-
tion of Manchuria.

Furthermore, in view of the fact that the Gov-
ernment of the Soviet Union has itself pointed
out on numerous occasions that the "Republic of
China" is not identical with what the Soviet Gov-
ernment now refers to as the "Chinese People's
Republic," the Government of the ITnited States
inquires of the Government of the Soviet Union
whether it in fact now desires that Manchuria,
Formosa and the Pescadores should be restored
to "the Republic of China."

The draft treaty proceeds on the assumption
that Japanese sovereignty "shall be limited" to
exclude sovereignty over Formosa and the Pes-
cadores, according to the Surrender Terms and
that if this is done by Japan, Japan will have
done all that can be required of her and the
Japanese people ought not to be denied a state of
peace because of a difference of opinion among
the Allied Powers as to the subsequent disposi-
tion of Formosa and the Pescadores.

The Government of the Soviet Union criticizes
the provision that the Ryukyu, Bonin, and cer-
tain other islands may be placed under United
Nations trusteeship with the United States as
administering authority.

It is true that the Surrender Terms, neither by
themselves, nor by the incorporated reference to
the Cairo Declaration, mention by name South
Sakhalin or the Kurile Islands, now occupied by
the Soviet Union, or the Ryukyu, Bonin Islands
or other islands mentioned in the Remarks of
the Soviet Government. Since, however, the
Surrender Terms provided, as indicated, that
Japanese sovereignty should be limited to the four
main islands and such minor islands as may be

determined, it is consonant with the Sui-iender
Terms for the Allied Powers by treaty of peace
with Japan to deal with Japanese islands other
than the four main islands mentioned.

(b) As to demilitarization, the Soviet Govern-
ment complains that the present draft does not
guarantee against the restoration of Japanese
militarism and does not limit the size of armed
forces in Japan. It is said that this cannot be
reconciled with "known agreements of the powers
concerning demilitarization of Japan."

The Soviet Government does not attempt to
identify the so-called "known agreements". In
fact there are none, outside of understandings
dealing with the occupation period.

Of the agreements mentioned by the Soviet
Government s remarks, neither Cairo nor Yalta
touch on the subject. The Potsdam Surrender
Terms provide that "until there is convincing
proof that Japan's war-making power is de-
stroyed, points in Japanese territory to be desig-
nated by the Allies shall be occupied," and that
"the Japanese military forces, after being com-
j)letely disarmed, shall be permitted to return to
their homes with the opportunity to lead peace-
ful and productive lives."

The United States Govei-nment is satisfied that
"Japan's war-making power is destroyed." Ap-
parently the Soviet Government shares that con-
viction, since it says that the occupation of Japan
has "impermissibly dragged on". Furthermore,
the United States, so far as it is concerned, has
in fact completely disarmed the Japanese military
forces under its control and has assured that they
now lead peaceful and productive lives. Of the
belligerents, only the Soviet Government has
failed to comply with this provision and, in viola-
tion of the Surrender Terms, withholds from re-
turn to their homes and peaceful lives approxi-
mately 200 thousand Japanese soldiers. The peo-
ple of Japan, eagerly await the return to peaceful
pursuits of these thousands of Japanese soldiers,
as promised by the Surrender Terms.

With respect to the avoidance of any future of-
fensive military threat from Japan, this is a
matter of profound concern to the United States,
which bore the burden of Japan's war of aggres-
sion for nearly 4 years, as against 6 days of Soviet
Union belligerency. It is the belief of the United
States Government that the most effective means to
the desired end is to make the future security of
the Japanese area a matter of collective inter-
national concern, which would as a practical
matter assure that the measures which the Japa-
nese might take for their own security, would de-
velop as a cooperative rather than as a purely
national project.

The President of the United States indicated
in his statement of April 18, 1951, that the United
States Government is prepared now to take what
the President referred to as "natural initial steps
in the consolidation of peace" in the Pacific Ocean

May 28, J957

853

area and, as one of such steps, to enter into a post-
treaty security arrangement witli Japan. The
United States Government contempLates that this
arrangement would accept the principle that
Japan should not possess military forces which
could become an onensive threat.

The United States Government is not disposed
to rely upon the dependability of treaty limita-
tions on armament such as were imposed upon
Rumania, Bulgaria, and Hungary by the Treaties
of Peace and which limitations already are being
grossly exceeded.

(c) As to ending the Occupation, the Soviet
Government alleges that the present draft does
not establish any period for the withdrawal of
occupation troops from Japan. On the contrary,
under the draft treaty, the occupation would
cease upon the coming into force of the treaty.
If, after the treaty comes into force, any allied
troops are in Japan they will not be there as oc-
cupation troops but pursuant to such collective
security arrangement as Japan may make volun-
tarily. Such arrangement would carry no
offensive threat.

The Government of the Soviet Union refers to
the fact that the territory of Japan and its natural
and human resources are even now being utilized
in connection with what is referred to as "armed
intervention in Korea" by which is presumably
meant the efforts of the United Nations to repel
armed aggression in Korea.

The assistance which the Japanese in fact are
rendering to the United Nations action in Korea
is within the demilitarization limits established
by Far Eastern Commission decisions, is nonbel-
ligerent in character, and is in accord with the
Charter and recommendation of the United
Nations.

According to Article 2, Paragraphs 5 and 6,
of the Charter even "states which are not mem-
bers of the United Nations" are required to "give
the United Nations every assistance" so far as
may be necessary for the maintenance of inter-
national peace and security, and General Assembly
Resolution No. A/1771 adopted February 1, 1951,
calls upon "all states and authorities to continue
to lend every assistance to United Nations action
in Korea."

(d) As to Japan's peacetime economy, the
Soviet Government alleges that the draft treaty
"ignores the necessity of removing limitations
with respect to the free development of the peace-
ful economy of Japan." In reality, the draft
treaty, by restoring to Japan complete sover-
eignty without any limitation upon the develop-
ment of its peaceful economy and without impos-
ing burdensome current reparation liabilities,
would accomplish completely the result which the
Government of the Soviet Union professes to
desire.

Ill

The Paragraphs of the Soviet Government's Re-
marks numbered III contain certain proposals
designed, in the words of the Soviet Government,
to bring about the "speedy conclusion of a peace
treaty with Japan."

(1) The Government of the Soviet Union sug-
gests, as to procedure, the calling of a session of
the Council of Foreign Ministers in June or July
of 1951 to be composed of representatives of the
United States, China, Great Britain and the Soviet
Union to embark upon the preparation of a peace
treaty with Japan. For the reasons earlier stated,
and because all experience shows that this proce-
dure would not in fact achieve a "speedy conclu-
sion of a peace treaty with Japan," the United
States Government cannot agree to this j)roce-
dural proposal.

(2) The Soviet Government proposes that in
drawing up a Japanese peace treaty the powers
concerned should be governed by certain basic
aims. With one qualification, these basic aims
are, in fact, reflected in the present draft treaty,
namely :

a. Japan should become a peace-loving, dem-
ocratic, independent state.

Japan already is a peace-loving and demo-
cratic state and the Treaty would give it inde-
pendence.

b. Democratic rights should be guaranteed
and organizations to deprive people of their demo-
cratic rights . . . should not be allowed.

These matters are taken care of by the Japanese
Constitution and by the Declaration, contemplated
by the present draft treaty, that Japan will strive
to realize the objectives of the United Nations
Universal Declaration of Human Rights and to
create internally conditions of stability and well-
being as envisioned by Articles 55 and 56 of the
Charter of the United Nations and already initi-
ated by postwar Japanese legislation.

c. As guarantee against a revival of Japanese
militarism, limitation should be established in the
treaty on the size of Japanese armed forces in
order that they may not exceed the requirement
of self-defense.

The proposal of the Soviet Government seems
to assume that Japan will have to depend, for
defense, solely on its own armed forces ; and that
its requirement, in this respect, can now be meas-
ured definitely, for all time. But the Charter of
the United Nations recognizes the inherent right
of collective, as well as individual, self-defense.
Generalissimo Stalin, in his memorable address
of March 10, 1939, pointed out that "adequate de-
fense against aggression requires collective secu-
rity, the policy of collective resistance to the ag-
gressors" and, he says, the policy of "let each
country defend itself from aggressors" means
"conniving at aggression."

854

Department of State Bulletin

The present suggestions of the Soviet Govern-
ment that Japan shall have armed forces as re-
quired for its self-defense, coupled with the fur-
ther Soviet projjosal (4) that there can be no
other troops in Japan, seems a reversion to the
principle of "let Japan defend itself" and conse-
quently, as Generalissimo Stalin said, a "conniv-

ms at aggression

Furthermore, to define "the size of Japanese
armed forces" needed for "requirements of self-
defense" as the Government of the Soviet Union
now proposes, would not only be difficult, but
might be dangerous. Japanese land, sea, and air
forces adequate for self-defense under present
troubled circumstances might also, under other
circumstances, be adequate for offense.

It is the hope and expectation of the United
States Government that application of the policy
of collective security envisaged by Article 7 of the
draft treaty will provide Japan with effective se-
curity with much less Japanese armament than
would be required if the Ti-eaty reflected the policy
of "let each country defend itself."

d. No limitation in the matter of development
of a peaceful economy should be laid on Japan.

The present draft contains no such limitation.

e. All limitations with respect to trade of
Japan with other states be removed.

The present draft imi)oses no limitations on the
right of Japan to trade with others.

(3) The Government of the Soviet Union sug-
gests providing in the treaty that "Japan will not
enter any coalition directed against any of the
states taking part with its armed forces in war
against militaristic Japan."

It is the view of the Government of the United
States that Japan should not enter into any coali-
tion directed against any state, whether or not
it was a belligei'ent in the war against Japan.
This is provided for by Article 6 of the draft
Treaty whereby Japan would agree, in accordance
with Article 2 of the Charter of the United Na-
tions, to refrain from the threat or use of force
against the territorial integrity or political inde-
pendence of any state.

(4) The Government of the Soviet Union sug-
gests that the peace treaty should provide that
"all occupation forces will be withdrawn from
Japanese territory in the course of not more than
1 year and no foreign state will have troops or
military bases in Japan."

It is contemplated by the draft treaty that the
occupation will end immediately upon the coming
into force of the treaty of peace. It will not be
prolonged even for 1 year thereafter.

With respect to the presence in Japan of the
troops of any other state the United States Gov-
ernment would not be willing to deny to Japan
what the Charter of the United Nations refers to
as the "inlierent right of . . . collective self-
defense."

(5) The Government of the Soviet Union sug-
gests that "the states signing the Peace Treaty
with Japan will support the entry of Japan into
the United Nations."

The present draft contemplates that Japan will
promptly apply for admission to the United Na-
tions and the Government of the United States
welcomes the recognition by the Government of
the Soviet Union that Japan is qualified for
membership.

IV

The Government of the United States earnestly
urges that the Government of the Soviet Union
should continue to cooperate in the Japanese
peace-making already in process and now far ad-
vanced. The United States Government does not
seek, as is alleged, to make a "separate" peace
treaty with Japan. On the contrary, it seeks the
participation of all concerned.

The Soviet Government complains because the
United States Government has taken the lead in
the initial stages of formulating peace treaty
terms. That complaint seems not well taken by
a state which, in the hour of victory, joined in
recognizing the unique position of the United
States in relation to Japan and in placing upon
the United States the sole responsibility for nam-
ing and issuing directives to the Supreme Com-
mander for the Allied Powers in an occupation
which was designed to prepare Japan for a "new
order of peace, security and justice." The United
States Government accepted that responsibility
and has invested in the occupation not only large
resources and much effort, but hopes and aspira-
tions for a Japan which would henceforth live
with others as a good neighbor. The United
States Government would fail utterly in the dis-
charge of the occupation responsibility which
the Government of the Soviet Union, among
others, placed upon it if it did not take a timely
initiative in transforming that occupation into
a peace which will be just and durable.

Already the views of the governments princi-
pally concerned have been thoroughly canvassed
through discussions initiated last September and
continuously pursued ever since. The draft sub-
mitted on March 29th to the Government of the
Soviet Union, as pointed out in the covering mem-
orandum, to a considerable extent reflects views
which the Government of the United States had
obtained as a result of cooperation manifested by
other governments. Among the views taken into
account were the views of the Soviet Government.

The Soviet Government now states that it "is
not true" that there have been "an exchange of
opinions between representatives of the Govern-
ment of the United States of America and repre-
sentatives of the Government of the Soviet
Union."

The undeniable facts are that on October 6,
1950, November 20, 1950, and on January 13, 1951,
there were personal discussions of the proposed

May 28, I95J

855

Japanese peace treaty between the Soviet Dep-
uty Minister of Foreign Affairs, J. Malik, and
John Foster Dulles, furthermore, on Novem-
ber 20, 1950, Malik submitted to Dulles on behalf
of the Soviet Government an aide memoire deal-
ing with the principles underlying the proposed
treaty and on November 26, 1950, Dulles trans-
mitted to Malik a reply memorandum.

The Government of the United States is thus
at a loss to understand what the Soviet Govei-n-
ment now means when it says that it is "untrue"
that there has been "an exchange of opinions"
between representatives of the Governments of
the United States and of the Soviet Union.

The present remarks on behalf of the Govern-
ment of the Soviet Union in I'esponse to the
United States Government's memorandum of
March 29, 1951, and in further development of
its views heretofore submitted, orally and in writ-
ing, shows that the differences which stand be-
tween the Government of the Soviet Union and
the peace terms embodied in the March draft are
not enough to prevent an agreed peace, assuming
that there is genuine desire on the part of the So-
viet Union promptly to give peace to Japan.
Therefore, the Government of the United States
trusts that the Government of the Soviet Union
will continue to pursue to a favorable conclusion
the procedures now under way, rather than to seek
now to shift to procedures which, in all candor,
it must recognize would not in fact be productive
of the "speedy conclusion" which the Soviet Gov-
ernment states that it seeks.

The United States stands ready to resume
prompt and intensive diplomatic discussions with
the Government of the Soviet Union under cir-
cumstances that will be calculated to advance a
just treaty to a speedy conclusion.

REMARKS BY THE U.S.S.R. >

The Government of the U.S.S.R. received on
March 29, 1951, from the Goveriiment of the
United States of America a draft of a peace treaty
with Japan. In connection with this, the Soviet
Govei'nment considers it necessary to make the
following remarks.

In spite of the fact that more than 5 years have
already passed since the time of the termination
of war with Japan, the question of a peaceful set-
tlement for Japan remains unresolved. Such a
situation has been created, first of all, as a result
of the position taken by the Government of the
U.S.A., wliich under various pretexts has post-
poned not only the conclusion but the very prepa-
ration of a peace treaty. In this connection, the
Government of the U.S.A. has repeatedly rejected

' Handed to Ambassador Kirk by Acting Foreifin Min-
ister Bogomolov on May 7, 1951.

the proposals of the Soviet Government for the
preparation of a peace treaty with Japan jointly
with other Governments, as envisaged by the ap-
propriate international agreements. As a result
of this, the occupation of Japan by foreign troops
has impermissibly dragged on.

1. The remarks of the Soviet Government, con-
cern, first of all, the incorrect preparation of a
peace treaty with Japan.

In the memorandum accompanying the Ameri-
can draft of a peace treaty with Japan, the Gov-
ernment of the U.S.A. declares that the draft
referred to was drawn up after an exchange of
opinions between representatives of the Govern-
ment of the U.S.A. and representatives of the
Governments of several other states, including
the Soviet Union. It should be noted that this
last is not true, since the Soviet Government as
early as the beginning of March of this year pub-
lished a statement concerning its refusal to carry
on separate negotiations with representatives of
the U.S.A. with regard to the preparation of a
peace treaty with Japan. In this connection, the
Soviet Government proceeded from the position
that the preparation of a peace treaty with Japan
cannot be the affair of any one Government or of
a query conducted by it of the opinions of other
interested Governments, but should be a joint af-
fair of all these Governments, as is provided for
by the appropriate international agreements.
Nevertheless, the Government of the U.S.A. did
did not refrain from the separate preparation of
a peace treaty with Japan, aiming at arrogating
this right exclusively to itself, which is a viola-
tion of the obligations undertaken by it concern-
ing the preparation of a peace treaty with Japan
jointly with the U.S.S.R., China, and Great Brit-
ain, with the participation of other interested
states.

In accordance with the Potsdam Agreement of
August 2, 1945, a Council of Foreign Ministers of
the five powers — U.S.A., U.S.S.R., China, Great
Britain, and France — was established, in which
connection it was directly stated in the Potsdam
Agreement that the Council of Foreign Ministers
was being created, in the first instance, for "pre-
paratory work on peaceful settlement," and that
in drawing up the corresjDonding peace treaties
"the Council would consist of members represent-
ing those states which have signed the terms of
capitulation dictated to that enemy state which the
given task concerns." Tlie peace treaties with
Ital}', Rumania, Hungary, Bulgaria and Finland
were prepared and concluded in conformity with
this. Thuf the drafting of a peace treaty witli
Japan has been laid upon the U.S.A., the U.S.S.R.,
China and Great Britain, who, as is known, signed
the Japanese surrender document, also flows from
the Potsdam Agreement referred to. As early as
1947 the Soviet (lovei'nment jiroposed calling a
special session of the Council of Foi-eign Ministers
composed of the representatives of China, U.S.A.,

856

Department of State Bulletin

U.S.S.R. and Great Britain in order to embark
upon the preparation of a peace treaty with Japan.
Ill tliis connection, it was envisaged that all states
who jjarticipated with their armed forces in the
war with Japan wonld be drawn into the prepara-
tory work for drawing up a peace treaty with
-Tapan. But this proposal as well as other repeat-
edly renewed efforts of the Soviet Government
directed toward hastening the conclusion of a peace
treaty with Japan liave furnished no positive
residts, since the Government of the U.S.A. ignores
tlie necessity of calling a Council of Foreign Min-
isters for the preparation of a peace treaty with
Japan as well as calling a peace conference for the
consideration of this treaty.

Tlie Soviet Government considers it necessary
to mention particularly the impermissibility of
excluding China from the preparation of a peace
treaty with Japan. It is known that China was
subjected during the course of many years to cruel
aggression on the part of militaristic Japan, waged
a protracted hard war against Japanese imperial-
ism and bore the greatest sacrifices from the ag-
gression of Japan. It is natural, therefore, that
the Government of the Chinese People's Republic,
being the only legal representative of the Chinese
people, has a special interest in the preparation
of a peace treaty with Japan and in the establish-
ment of lasting peace in the Far East. It is pev-
fectly obvious that without the participation of
the Chinese People's Republic in the work of pre-
paring a peace treaty with Japan a real peace-
ful settlement in the Far East is not possible.

From this it is seen that the Government of
the United States is endeavoring to exclude the
U.S.S.R., the Chinese People's Republic and other
coimtries from the preparation of a peace treaty
with Japan and to take this matter exclusively
into its own hands in order unilaterally to im-
pose upon Japan through the procedure of a dictate
conditions of this treaty satisfactory to the Gov-
ernment of the U.S.A., utilizing for this purpose
the dependence of the present Government of
Japan upon the American occupation authorities.

2. The remarks of the Soviet Government con-
cern, secondly, the fact that the American draft of
a peace treaty with Japan contains, from the point
of view of the substance of the matter, several
incorrect contentions incompatible with existing
agreements between the powers.

In such known international documents as the
Cairo Declaration of 1943, the Potsdam Declara-
tion of 1945, and the Yalta Agreement of 1945
the Governments of the United States of America,
Great Britain, China, and the U.S.S.R. took upon
themselves definite obligations with relation to a
future peace treaty with Japan.

In these documents the territorial borders of
Japan were defined and it was pointed out that
there should exist in Japan "a peacefully disposed
and responsible government in conformity with
the freely expressed will of the Japanese people,"

May 28, 1951

946745 — 51 3

after which the occupation troops should be with-
drawn from Japan.

In these documents, as well as in subsequent
agreements between tlie powers, it is stated that
there should in Japan "be eliminated all obstacles
to the revival and straightening of democratic ten-
dencies among the Japanese people" and that
broad possibilities for the development of the
peaceful economy of the country should be opened
up. Along with this it is stated there that it is
necessary to finish with the authority and influence
of the militarists and to accomplish the demili-
tarization of Japan.

The American draft of a peace treaty with
Japan ignores in one degree or another these
obligations of the powers which flow from the
documents referred to above.

First of all, this must be said of territorial
questions.

For example, in the Cairo Declaration of 1943
it is directly stated that the Island of Taiwan and
the Pescadores Islands should be returned to
China. In this American draft it is stated only
that Japan renounces all rights to Taiwan and
Pescadores Islands, but nothing is said regarding
the transfer of Taiwan and Pescadores Islands to
China. From this the conclusion can be drawn
that the draft leaves the present situation with
Taiwan and the Pescadores Islands, wliich have
actually been torn away from China, without
change, in violation of the Cairo Agreement con-
cerning the return of these islands to China.

The American draft provides, further, for tak-
ing the Ryukyu, Bonin, Rosario, Volcano, Parece
Vela, and Marcus Islands out from under the
sovereignty of Japan and transferring them under
the administration of the U.S.A. under the pre-
text of establishing a trusteeship over them, al-
legedly on the part of the United Nations Organ-
ization. Inasmuch, however, as the wresting of
the islands named away from Japan is envisaged
neither by agreement between the powers nor by
decision of United Nations in the person of the
Security Council, such wresting away does not
have any justification.

Those deviations on military matters from the
international agreements mentioned above which
are contained in the American draft of a peace
treaty with Japan possess even greater signifi-
cance. It suiBces to say that the American draft
not onlj^ does not contain a guarantee against the
restoration of Japanese militarism but in general
does not set forth any limitations with relation
to the size of the armed forces in Japan.

It is known that in the peace treaty with Italy,
which together with Japan was one of the primary
aggressors in the Second World War, precise limi-
tations on the proportions of the Italian army,
the number of naval fleet personnel and also the
size of the air forces are contained. Meanwhile,
no limitations on the armed forces of Japan are
contained in the American draft. Thus, Japan

857

is placed in a privilefjed position in comparison
with Italy, although tliere is no basis for this.
From this it is seen tliat Japan itself will decide
the matter of the size of its armed forces for so-
called "self-defense." The Soviet Government
considers that this is tantamount to allowing
Japan to restore militarism. It is quite clear that
such a position can in no way be reconciled with
certain iigi'cenients of the powers concerning de-
militarization of JajJan.

Likewise the fact cannot be passed ovei' that the
American draft does not establish any jieriod for
the withdrawal of occupation troops from Japan
and is directly designed to leave American occu-
pation troops and military bases in Japan even
after the conclusion of a peace treaty. Conse-
quently, even after that "peaceful settlement'"
which the United States is preparing for .Japan,
the military occupation of Japan will not be dis-
continued and the United States of America will
remain the real master in Japan.

As is known, in the peace treaty with Italy the
withdrawal of occupation troops from Italy within
a 3-months period after the conclusion of peace
was provided for. Thus, Japan falls into a worse
position in comparison with Italy, and the U.S.A.
receives unlimited right to continue the occupa-
tion of Japan after the signing of peace with J;i]ian
for an unlimited period. It is quite clear that ail
this can in no way be reconciled with the Potsdam
Declaration of 1945.

It is necessary to add to this that already at
the present time the Government of the U.S.A. is
utilizing tlie occupation of Japan by Amei'ican
troops for other pur]>oses tlian were agreed among
the states signing the Japanese surrender docu-
ment. American occupation troops located on
Japanese territory are utilizing the territory of
Japan, its material and human resources for armed
intervention in Korea, which is incompatible with
international agreements according American
troops the right of occupation in Ja])an only for
the purposes of carrying out measures for the
demilitarization and democratization of -lajjan.

Finally, tlie American draft ignores the neces-
sity of removing limitations with respect to the
free development of the peaceful economy of
Japan. It is quite clear that without the develop-
ment of the peaceful economy of the country and
without the existence of noi'uial trade with other
countries it is not possible to create a I'eliable liasis
for the economic upsurge of Japan and growth in
the welfare of tlie Japanese ])eople.

The Soviet Govermnent also has other remarks
on the draft of the treaty which it intends to set
forth at a meeting of the interested powers.

3. The Soviet Government, constantly insisting
on a speedy conclusion of a peace treaty with
Japan, considers that a peace treaty should be

drawn up on the basis of international agreements
which were concluded between the powers during
the period of the Second World War, and the prep-
aration of a draft treaty should be cairied on
jointly by representatives of the U.S.A., the Chi-
nese People's Republic, U.S.S.R. and Great Britain
with all the member states of the Far Eastern
Commission being drawn into the matter.

In conformity with this, the Soviet Government
proposes :

Fir»t. — To call in June or July of 1951 a session
of the Council of Ministers of Foreign Affairs
composed of representatives of U.S.A., Cliina,
(ireat Britain and U.S.S.R. in order to embark
upon the preparation of a peace treaty with Japan
having in view bringing into the preparatory work
for drawing up a peace treaty with Jai)an repre-
sentatives of all states partici]>ating with their
armed forces in the war with Japan, in order that
a draft of a peace treaty may be submitted for the
consideration of a peace conference.

Seco'ivd. — To conduct the drafting of a peace
treaty with Japan on the basis of the Cairo Dec-
laration, the Potsdam Declaration, and the Yalta
Agreement, governed by the following jiasic aims :

A. Japan should become a peace-loving, demo-
cratic, indejH'udent state.

B. Democratic rights should be guaranteed to
the population of Japan and the existence of such
organizations be they political, military, or of mili-
tary character whose purpose is to deprive the
people of their democratic rights, as was provided
in the peace treaty with Italy, should not be
allowed.

C. As a guarantee against tlie revival of Jap-
anese militarism limitations should be established
in the treaty on the size of Jajjanese armed forces
in order that they may not exceed the require-
ments of self-defense, as was established in the
peace treaty with Italy.

D. No limitations be put upon Japan in the
matter of the development of her peaceful
ct'onomy.

E. All limitations with respect to the trade of
Japan with otiier states be removed.

Third. — To provide in the treaty that Japan
will not enter any coalition directed against any
of the states jjarticipating with their armed forces
in the war against militaristic Japan.

Fourth. — To specify precisely in the treaty that
after the conclusion of a peace treaty with Japan
all occupation troops will be withdrawn from
Japanese territory in the course of not moi'e tiian
1 year and no foreign state will have troops or
military bases in Japan.

Fifth. — To agree that the states signing the
l)eace treaty with Japan will support the entry of
Japan into the Ignited Nations Organization.

Moscow, May 7, 1951.

858

Department of State Bulletin

Actual Participation by Soviet Union
in Foreign Ministers Meeting Questioned

Statement hy Ambassador Philip C. Jessup ^

Mr. Cliairman, I should like to make a few com-
ments on the present state of our work and the
prospects for it.

The first point I should like to touch on is this.
Mr. Groniyko keejis talkinji about ajireement on
the agenda us if the agenda were a final binding
agreement of governments for the solution of all
the major existing international problems.

Now we all know actually that an agenda is
not that kind of international agreement, inter-
governmental agreement. The agenda actually is
preparatory work for a meeting of the Ministers
in order to make the task of the Ministers easier
when they do meet. Now if we could reach full
agreement on the agenda it would be a distinct
help to the Ministers. We want such an agi-ee-
ment.

However, in spite of the large amount of evi-
dence that the Soviet Government is unwilling to
make a real effort for the strengthening of peace,
the three Governments — France, the United King-
dom, and tlie United States — are ready to take the
step of having the Ministers meet even without a
full agreement on the agenda.

We presented on May 2 tliree alternative pro-
posals for a meeting of the four Foreign Minis-
ters." Mr. Gromyko told us yesterday that the
Soviet delegation could not say that it had agreed
to any one of them. We have now spent 2 days
in a discussion principally of one of the alterna-
tives which was marked Alternative A. That dis-
cussion has served to underline one fact : that fact
is that the Soviet delegation insists that we make
here an agreement on the substance. Mr.
Gromyko demands that we agree here that the best
way to secure a reduction of armaments is for the
three Governments to bind themselves here and
now to accej^t the Soviet substantive proposal for
confining reduction to the Four Powers.

' Made at the forty-sixth deputies meeting at Paris on
May 8.
= BtTLLETiN of May 14, 1951, p. 803.

This proposal for confining the reduction of
armaments and armed foices to the Four Powers
is an illusory and deceitful projiosal. We will
not be a ])arty to any sucli deception. No honest
look at the realities of the world situation would
lead anyone to think that the three Governments
could consider reducing their forces while the So-
viet Government remained free to maintain and
to increase the other armies supporting the Soviet
Union in Europe and in Asia.

No honest look at the realities of the world sit-
uation would lead anyone to think that the three
Governments could make a binding decision here
and now on reduction of armaments and armed
forces before knowing wliether tlie Soviet Govern-
ment is prepared to lift the iron curtain and agree
to an effective international control.

Everything that Mr. Gromyko says on the So-
viet proposal on the I'eduction of armaments and
armed forces supports the conclusion that he is
asking for a binding decision here. If this were
not true, all of his talk aliout "burying'' and
"drowning" (the question of reduction of arma-
ments) would be merely childisli nonsense.

All of Mr. Gromyko's talk about the continu-
ance of our defense effort while these meetings are
going on supports the conclusion that he is trying
to get us to make a binding decision now. It all
goes to show that what he is trying to do is to tie
the hands of the three Govermnents through a
substantive decision reached here which will pre-
judge the decisions which ought to be reached by
the four Ministers themselves.

Our defense measures will go on just as long as
our security is threatened. That security is
threatened by the huge armed forces which are
maintained by the Soviet Union and by the other
ai'Uiies which are supporting the Soviet Union in
Eui'ope and Asia. No agenda by itself can re-
move that threat to our security. No mere words
spoken by Mr. Gromyko hei'e can remove that
threat. It can be removed if the Soviet Union

May 28, 1951

859

will participate in a meeting of the four Foreign
Ministers and join in an honest effort to take real
steps which will promote peace.

Under any one of the proposals submitted by
the three delegations for the agenda, the Soviet
Minister could raise, and the four Ministers can
consider, Soviet proposals for the reduction and
control of armaments and armed forces. The
Ministers will then have before them the details
of the Soviet plan, whatever it may be. They will
also have before them proposals of the three Min-
isters, and they can examine at that time the ex-
isting level of armaments.

We hope that the attitude of the Soviet Govern-
ment at the meeting of the four Foreign Ministers
will then permit agreement on the reduction of
armaments and armed forces, but these are con-
siderations to be taken up at the meeting of the
four Foreign Ministers.

As the Soviet Government said in its note of
December 30, 1950, referring to this present
meeting :

It goes without saying that in tasl^s of such a prelimi-
nary discussion, consideration of questions which should
be considered at the meeting itself of the four Foreign
Ministers will not lie included.'

We still hope that the Soviet delegation will
be able to agree on a complete agenda. But if the
Soviet delegation refuses to agree to any complete
agenda which fills the normal role of an agenda by
indicating the subjects which the Ministers are to
discuss instead of binding them in advance to some
particular solution of any one of the problems in-
volved, the three Governments are willing to have
the four Ministers meet on the basis of the results
of our work up to now. This means listing the
items and points on which there is no disagreement
and also two parallel texts where agreement has
not been reached. That is what we, in effect, pro-
pose in Alternative B.

The legitimate question which is raised by Mr.
Gromyko's brief references to this Alternative B
is the following : Does the Soviet Government re-
fuse to participate in a meeting of the four For-
eign Ministers? Although we have been making
and are making and will make every possible ef-
fort to secure an agreed agenda, we are basically
interested in the reality of the meeting of tlie four
Foreign Ministers because we hope that such a
meeting would be a stejD toward promoting peace.

In the notes of the three Governments under
date of February 19, we expressed to the Soviet
Government the hope that this preliminary con-
ference would find a "mutually acceptable basis
for a meeting" of the four Foreign Ministers.*

Our proposal. Alternative B, is in effect a state-
ment by tlie three delegations to the Soviet dele-
gation as follows: under the existing circum-

' HuLi.ETiN of .Ian. 1.5, 19,51, p. 91.
* Bui,LETiN of Mar. .5, 1951, p. 3C6.

stances the extent of agreement already reached
here on the agenda with two parallel texts in-
cluded on the unagreed points is an "acceptable
basis for a meeting." Our Alternative A is an
acceptable basis for a meeting. Our Alternative
C is an acceptable basis for a meeting.

With particular reference to Alternative Pro-
posal B, I make the statement, Mr. Gromyko, that
the three Governments wish to have a meeting of
the four Foreign Ministers. I, therefore, put the
question squarely to Mr. Gromyko. Is the Soviet
Government willing to participate in a meeting of
the four Foreign Ministers, or is it not?

I hope, Mr. Chairman, that Mr. Gromyko will
answer my questions.

Cordell Hull Foundation Furthers
Good Neighbor Policy

Statement hy Secretary Ackeson

[Released to the press May 9]

I have just been informed of the announcement
to establish the Cordell Hull Foundation for In-
ternational Education.

The creation of this Foundation is a fitting
tribute to one of our great Secretaries of State.
It is especially appropriate that a foundation
bearing the name of Cordell Hull should be estab-
lished to promote better relations between the
United States and Latin America. Tins country
owes Mr. Hull a special debt of gratitude for his
untiring efforts in strengthening the bonds be-
tween the northern and southern hemispheres.
In establishing such a foundation, this gi-atitude
is translated into action, the effects of which will
continue through the years.

Legislation

Commonwealth Parliamentary Association Meeting. A
Report to the United States Senate by Senators Theo-
dore Francis Green and Homer Ferguson appointed
to attend the Commnnwealth Parliamentary Associa-
tion Meeting In Canberra, Australia, December 10-13,
19.50. S. Doc. 16, S2d Cong. 1st sess. 52 pp.

Universal Military Training. Hearings before the Com-
mittee on Armed Services, House of Representatives,
Eighty-second Congress, first session, on H. R. 1752, a
bill to provide for the common defense and security
of the United States and to permit the more effective
utilization of manpower resources of the United
States by authorizing universal military service and
training, and for other purposes. Januarv 23, 24, 25,
26, 29, 30, .SI, February 5, C, 26, 28, March 1, 2. 5, 6. 7,
and 8, 1951. 969 pp.

Bills Pending Before the Committee. Preliminary Hear-
ings before the Committee on Foreign Affairs, House
of Ucpresentatives, Eighty-tirst Congress, first ses-
sion. February 6, 7, and S, 1951. 88 pp.

Trade Agreements Extension Act of 19.51. Hearings be-
fore the Committee on Finance, United States Sen-
ate, Eighty-second Congress, first session, on H. R.
1612. 981 pp. Part 1, Februarv 22, 26, 27, 28, March
1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 12, 13, 1951 ; also Part 11, March 16, 19,
20, 21, 22, April 3, 4, 5, and 6, 1951. 4.52 pp.

860

Department of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Status of Offers of Military Assistance to the U. N. for Korea

Country

Status

1. AUSTRALIA Naval vessels (S/1524, S/1646) In action.

1 RAAF squadron (S/1530) Do.

Ground forces (S/1637, S/1664) Do.

2. BELGIUM Air Transport (S/1620) Do.

Infantry battalion (S/1787) Do.

3. BOLIVIA 30 officers (S/1618) Acceptance deferred.

4. CANADA 3 naval vessels (S/1602) In action.

1 RCAF Squadron (S/1617) Do.

Ground forces (S/1700) Do.

Canadian-Pacific Airlines (Commercial Facilities (S/1685) ) Do.

10,000 ton dry-cargo vessels Do.

5. CHINA 3 infantry divisions and 20 C-47's (S/1562) Acceptance deferred.

6. COLOMBIA 1 frigate En route.

1,080 ground forces Accepted.

7. COSTA RICA Sea and air bases Do.

Volunteers (S/1645) Acceptance deferred.

8. CUBA 1 infantry company Accepted.

9. DENMARK Hospital ship Jutlandia (S/1699) In Korea.

Motor ship Bella Dan Withdrawn.

10. EL SALVADOR Volunteers if U.S. will train and equip (S/1692) .... Acceptance deferred.

11. ETHioPA 1,069 ground forces In Korea.

12. FRANCE 1 patrol gun boat (S/1611) Withdrawn.

Infantry battalion (S/1611) Inaction.

13. GREECE 7 RHAF Dakota transport aircraft (S/1612) Do.

Ground forces (S/1755) Do.

14. INDIA . Field ambulance unit (S/1647) Do.

15. LUXEMBOURG Infantry company (44 men) Do.

16. NETHERLANDS 1 Destroyer (S/1670) Do.

1 Infantry battalion (S/1775) Do.

17. NEW ZEALAND 2 frigates (S/1563) Do.

Combat unit (S/1636) Do.

18. NORWAY Merchant ship tonnage (S/1576) Do.

19. PANAMA Contingent volunteers; bases for training Acceptance deferred.

Use of merchant marine Accepted.

Free use of highways (S/1673) Do.

Farm hands to supply troops Pending.

20. PHILIPPINES 17 Sherman tanks In Korea.

1 tank destroyer (S/1561) Do.

Regimental combat team (S/1681) In action.

21. SWEDEN Field hospital unit (S/1615) Do.

22. THAILAND 1 infantry combat team (S/1622) Do.

2 corvettes and navy transport In action (1 corvette

destroyed after
grounding.)

23. TURKEY 1 infantry combat force (S/1630) In action.

24. UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA . . 1 fighter squadron (S/1669) Do.

25. UNITED KINGDOM Naval forces (S/1515) Do.

Ground forces (S/1638, S/1702) Do.

Air unit Do.

1 As of Apr. 23, 1951. Prepared by the Office of United Nations Political and Security Affairs, Department of State.
May 28, 7951 861

Canadian Infantry Troops
Arrive in Korea

On Miiy 5, the United Nntions Department of PuhUc
Information announced that tlte ftilJnicinii information
has been recciced from the United NationJi Commission
for the Unification and Rehabilitation of Korea at Tokyo.

Soldiers of the 25th Canadian Infantry Brigade
streamed off a United States navy transport at a
Soutli Korean port on Friday to join the United
Nations Forces in action in Korea.

Welcomed on the docks by bands and Korean
flower girls, the troops immediately moved to a
camp from which tliey liope shortly to go into the
line alongside the Canadian '2d Battalion of the
Princess Patricia's Light Infantry which has been
in Koi-ea since December.

The new troojis of Princess Pat's are part of a
Canadian Army Si)ecial Force recruited for serv-
ice anywhere in tlie world under the United Na-
tions flag.

Brig. John M. Rockingham, Commanding Of-
ficer, said,

The 2.5th Brigade will hi' part of the newly formed
First ("ommonwealth Division.

The Brigade is in very good .shape, and we have some
wonderful troops. In all my experience I have never seen
troops as willing to work as these.

sentative on the Economic, Employment and De-
velopment Commission of the United Nations
Economic and Social Council (Ecosoc), will at-
tend the sixth session of that Commission, which
will be held at Lake Success May 14— June 1, 1951.
Mr. Stinebower will be assisted by the following
advisers :

George A. Eddy, Chief of Stabilization Fund, Gold and

Silver Division, Office of International Finance
William .1. Stibravy, Office of Financial and Development

Policy

The Economic, Employment and Development
Commission will, as requested in a resolution
adopted at the twelfth session of the Ecosoc (San-
tiago, Chile, February 20-March 21, 1951), give
priority consideration at its sixth session to the
problem of financing the economic development of
underdeveloped countries.

The Economic, Employment and Development
Commission, one of the nine permanent functional
commissions of the Eco-soc, advises the Council
on economic matters in general and those economic
questions in particular which must be solved to
jiromote higher standards of living in all parts of
the world. Eighteen Governments, elected by the
Council, conii)rise the membership of the Com-
mission. The fifth session was held at Lake Su''-
cess, January 18-30, 1950.

Belgium Sends More Forces to Korea

[Released to the press hij the V.N. Department of Public
Information Man 'i I

Secretary-Oeneral Trygve Lie has received the follow-
ing letter dated Mail 3 from Ambassador Fernand van
Langenhove, permanent representative of Belgium to the
United Nations.

With reference to the resolutions of the Security
Council of 25 and 27 June 1950, 1 have the honor
to inform you that the Belgian Government has
decided to increase the effective strength of the
Belgian expeditionary corps at present in action
in Korea and to insure the maintenance of these
forces through the creation of a reserve. To this
effect a first contingent of reinforcements consist-
ing of about 225 volunteers will embark for the
Far East early in May. The departure of the
next contingent will take place during the month
of June.

U.S. Delegation to Sixth Session of
Employment and Development
Commission (ECOSOC)

Oil May 14, the Department ol' State announced
that Leroy D. Stinebower, Ollice of Financial
and Development Policy and United States repre-

Concessions Under Torquay
Protocol Effective June 6, 1951

[Released to the press May 16]

United States tariff concessions initially nego-
tiated at Torquay, England, with the Benelux
Customs Union (Belgium, the Netherlands, and
Luxembourg), Canada, France, and the Domini-
can Republic will, under the provisions of the
Torquay Protocol to the General Agreement on
Tariffs and Trade, be put into effect on June 6.
1951. All these countries except Canada joined
the United States in signing the protocol on April
21, the opening date for signature of the docu-
ment. Canada signed at New York on May 7.

Conce.ssions granted by the United States to the
11 other countries with which we negotiated
at Torquay will, in practically all cases, be with-
held until the thirtieth day after each of these
countries signs the protocol. A few LTnited
States concessions negotiated initially witji those
11 countries will, however, be put into effect on
June 6, for technical and other reasons.

As soon as ]iossible, and before the effective date,
the President is expected to issue a jiroclamation
for the puri)ose of making effective the new United
States tariff' rates which will go into effect on
June 6.

862

Department of State Bulletin

On June 6, also, the countries other tlian thb
United States wliicli have aheady sip:ned the Tor-
quay Protocol \yill be required by that document
to i)ut into effect any concessions they made to the
United States, as well as those which they made
to each other. They may also put into effect con-
cessions which they had fj;ranted to other countries.

The countries with which the United States ini-
tially negotiated concessions at Torquay are indi-
cated in the AnaJyuis of Tovipunj Protocol Sched-
v/('&\ and Related Domnients (Department of
State ])ub. 4ii01)), in the sixth column of the tabu-
lation beginning on page 361 of that document.
The concessions shown there as having been
granted to Benelux, Canada, France, and the
Dominican Republic are those which the protocol
provides will be put into effect on June 6, as stated
above.

Copies of the AnaJi/sis may be inspected at the
field offices of the ITnited States Department of
Commerce and at the offices of the United States
Tariff Commission in New York. They are avail-
able by purchase from the Suj^erintendent of Doc-
uments, Government Printinix Office, Washington
'25. D. C. at the price of $1.0().

Information regarding s])ecific concessions may
be obtained from the United States Tariff Com-
mission. Washington 25, D. C.

Brief Report on U.N. International Children's
Emergency Fund Activities

Based on U.N. doc. E/ICEF/174
Dated Apr. 19, 1951

Between 1948 and the end of 10.">0 approxiniiitely 4 mil-
lidii dollars has been delivered hy the United Nations
International Children's Emergency Fund [Unicef] in
medical supplies assistance to operating projects devel-
oped by European governments. During 19.")0 additional
projects to the extent of 1.^ million dollars were devel-
oped and are now in operation, for which the major por-
tions of supplies have ijeen shipped in 1951.

Unicef assistance to medical projects began only after
the emergency feeding operations were well established.
Plans of operation In the medical tield were not developed
with Governments before early in 1049. Under the
impact of war and immediate postwar conditions. Gov-
ernments had felt it essential to use all available re-
sources to feed their children and, therefore, postponed
their requests for assistance in the medical field. During
194S and 1949 the Governments began to give emphasis
to large-scale attacks upon tuberculosis, malaria, and
venereal disease. Since that time there has been a gradual
development of long-term {jrojeets for child health, and
greater emphasis shifted to projects in the field of mater-
nal and child health approved by the joint Unicef/Who
Committee on Health Policy and assistance in this field
alone has reached approximately 1.2.5 million dollars.

Working in clo.se cooperation with Who's special office
for Euroiie, which maintains a liaison medical olBcer with
Unicf.f, Unicef supply assistance has been given to those
projects which would, with minimum allocations of funds,
give greatest impetus to government initiative. Programs
have not been considered unless they could lie fitted into
the social, economic, and administrative organizations of
the countries requesting aid, and only where it would
be possible to continue such projects under governmental

resources after the termination of Unicef aid. Great
care was given to the development of projects by existing
nalidiial health organizations, in order to take advantage
of the existence of organized technical iier.-^onnel, estab-
lished governmental budgets for implcmenling such
proj(>cts, and the possibilit.v of project c<inlinuatioM under
the government's own resources. Each project was con-
sidered also with the aini of reaching the largest possible
■section of the child population. While there is a varied
availability in Europe;in countries of technical me(li<-al
pers<innel, such jjersonnel does exist to a much greater
extent than in other Unicef assisted areas. Thus, over
95 percent of all Unicef countr.v allocations has gone into
the direct provision of medical supplies.

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

P'or sale bii the Siipci-iittciiflriit of Documents, Gorrni-
incHt Prill ti)U) Offlrc, Wasliiiif/toii 25, D. C. Addrrxs
rcfiucsts direct to the Siiperiiitciidvnt of Docuiiirntu ,e.r-
ec/tt in tite ease of free piililieiilifjii.i, irhich iiiiiij lie ob-
tiiiiicd front tlie D< iiiirtiiiciit of Slate.

Education: Cooperative Program in Panama. Treaties
and Other International Acts Series 2149. Pub. 4066. 3
pp. 50.

Agreement between the United States and Panama ex-
tending program proviiled for by agreement of No-
vember 13 and 14, 1044, as extended by agreement of
September 23 and 24, 1948 — Effected by exchange of
notes signed at Panamfi July 23 and September 2,
1949 ; entered into force September 2, 1949.

Technical Cooperation. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 2168. Pub. 4000. 6 pp. 50.

Agreement between the United States and Nicara-
gua— Signed at Managua December 23, 1950 ; entered
into force December 23, 19.")0.

Technical Cooperation. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 2167. Pub. 4091. 8 pp. 5(i.

Agreement between the United States and Panama —
Signed at Panama December .30, lO.'iO; entered into
force December 30, 1950.

Education: Cooperative Program in Bolivia. Treaties
and Other International Acts Series 2182. Pub. 4116.
3 pp. 5(f.

Agreement between the United States and Bolivia
modifying and extending agi-eement of September
7. 1944, as modified and extended — Effected by ex-
change of notes signed at Ua Paz .July 6 and August 9,
1948; entered into force September 8, 1948.

The Fallacy of a "Preventive" War. General Foreign
Policy Series 43. Pub. 4130 (! pp. Free.

Address hy Ambassador Philip C. Jessup delivered at
Union College, Schenectady, N. Y.. February 23, 1951.

Our Far Eastern Policy: Debate, Decision, and Action.

Far Eastern Series 41. Pub. 4201. 11 pp. Free.

Address by Secretary of State Dean Acheson de-
livered before the Women's National Press Club,
Washington, D.C., April 18, 1951.

May 28, J95J

863

The United States in the United Nations

[May 19-24, 1951]

General Assembly

The International Law Commission. — The
Commission opened its third session at Geneva on
May 16 and elected James L. Brierly (U.K.),
chairman. Manley O. Hudson is the United
States representative. Among the items the Com-
mission will consider are (1) review of its statute
with the object of recommending revisions thereof
to the Sixth General Assembly; (2) reservations
to multilateral conventions, with specific reference
to the Convention on the Prevention and Punish-
ment of the Crime of Genocide; (3) General As-
sembly resolution (Nov. 17, 1950), "Duties of
States in the Event of Outbreak of Hostilities,"
and in connection therewith the issue raised by the
U.S.S.R. on a definition of aggression; and (4)
preparation of a draft code of offenses against the
peace and security of mankind.

Economic and Social Council

International Chihlreii''s Emergency Fund. —
The Executive Board of Unicef convened its sec-
ond session. May 22, at United Nations headquar-
ters. The chairman, Mrs. Adelaide Sinclair
(Canada), was elected for the current year at the
February session.

In answer to the usual Soviet proposal concern-
ing Chinese representation, Katherine F. Lenroot,
United States representative, moved for adjourn-
ment of debate on this question for the present
session stating that the Board was not the appro-
priate place to make this decision and expressing
the United States view that representatives of the
People's Republic of China should not be seated in
the United Nations or specialized agencies while
that regime was engaged in hostilities in Korea
against the United Nations. This motion was car-
ried by a vote of 16-5-4.

Among the items on the agenda are ( 1 ) general
progress report of the Executive Director; (2)
approved plans of operations in Latin America as
of April 1, 1951; (3) approved plans of operations
in Asia as of April 1, 1951 ; (4) plans and progi-ess
of operations in UNiCEF-Assisted Child-Feeding
Programmes in Europe; (5) report of the Execu-
tive Director on estimated requirements July 1,
1951--June 30, 1952; and (6) apportionments, al-
locations, and other questions.

Economic, Emfloxjment and Development Com,-

mission. — The sixth session of the 18-meraber
Commission convened May 14 at United Nations
Headquarters and will extend over a 3- week pe-
riod. Jose Nunez Guimaraes (Brazil) was elected
chairman. Leroy D. Stinebower, OiEcer of
Financial and Development Policy, is the United
States representative.

At the first meeting, the chaimian ruled out of
order (12-5 (Soviet bloc, India, Yugoslavia) -0)
the U.S.S.R. motion to unseat the representative
of the Chinese Nationalist Govermnent and invite
a representative from the People's Republic of
China to attend.

The Commission has before it the following
three agenda items (1) financing economic devel-
opment of underdeveloped countries; (2) I'eport
of the group of experts appointed by the Secre-
tary-General upon recommendation of the Council
on measures to reduce unemployment and under-
employment in underdeveloped countries in light
of the current world economic situation and of the
requirements of economic development; (3) re-
plies of Governments to the full employment ques-
tionaire covering the period 1950-51, which was
circulated by the Secretary-General on instruc-
tions from the Council.

The Commission will submit a report to the
Council at the close of the session.

Commission on Human Rights. — The 18-niem-
ber Commission, which ended its seventh session
on May 19, completed the draft International
Covenant on Human Rights and Measures of Im-
plementation. By a vote of 15-0-2 (U.S.S.R.,
Ukraine), the Commission decided to forward the
draft covenant immediately to United Nations
members and specialized agencies to obtain their
observations prior to the next session of Ecosoc
beginning July 30, 1951.

The draft covenant includes provisions for eco-
nomic, social, and cultural rights, and following is
the adopted (10 (U.S.)-S-O) text of the general
clause concerning these rights:

The States parties to the present Covenant,

1. Bearing in mind the link between the rights ami
liberties recosnized and defined above, and the economic
social and culturnl risjhts prochiinied in the Universal
Declaration of Human Rights ;

2. Resolved to combat the scourges, such as famine,
disease, poverty, the feeling of insecurity and ignorance,
which take toll or degrade men and prevent the free de-
velopment of their personality ;

3. Resolved to strive to ensure that every human being
shall obtain the food, clothing, and shelter essential for

864

Department of State Bulletin

his livelihood and well-beinf; and shall achieve an ade-
quate standard of livius and a continuous improvement of
his material and spiritual livin.i? coiulilious;

4. UiidcitiiK-cs to take steps, individually and through
International cooperation, to the maxiniuni of their avail-
able resources with a view to a( liievinf; proKressively the
full realization of the rights recognized in this part of
the Covenant.

The Coniinission rejected (7-10 (U.S.)-l) the
proposal to include provisions in the Covenant
authorizin<2; receipt and examination of petitions
from individuals and nongovernmental organiza-
tions on alleged covenant violations.

The report to tlie Council was adopted by vote
of 15 (U. S.)-0-3 (U.S.S.R., Ukraine, India).

Commission on Narcotic Drugs. — The 15-mem-
ber Commission completed its sixtli session on May
24, and adopted 10-2 (U.S.S.R., Poland)-0 its re-
port to Ecosoc, which includes the following :

1. Resolution adopted 8 (U.S.) -2 (Poland,
U.S.S.R.)-2 (China, U.K.), covering a draft pro-
tocol of principles, based on a French proposal,
designed to limit the production of opium to med-
ical and scientific needs.

2. Resolution, cosponsored by Canada, United
States, and Yugoslavia, which (1) recommends
adoption by the Council of the principles of the
opium protocol, and (2) requests the Council (a)
to instruct the Secretary-General to submit these
principles to the members of the United Nations
and to nonmember states parties to the interna-
tional treaties on narcotics for their observations
and (b) , in the light of these observations, to study
the possibility of convening an international con-
ference for the purpose of preparing and adopting
a protocol relating to the limitation of the produc-
tion of opium. The Commission adopted this res-
olution by a vote of 8 (U.S.)-2 (Poland,
U.S.S.R.)-2 (China, Iran).

3. With regard to the adoption of a single con-
vention for the control of narcotics, it was decided
to defer consideration of this until the seventh
session of the Commission. In the meantime, the
Permanent Central Opium Board and the Drug
Supervisory Body, established by the 1931 conven-
tion, have been requested to submit their comments
and views on the single convention by September
1, 1951. In addition, all Govermnents will be re-
quested to submit, if they have not already done
so, their observations on the single convention by
December 1, 1951. The Secretariat will then pre-
pare an annotated, consolidated draft of the con-
vention for further consideration by the Commis-
sion at its next session and by the Economic and
Social Council during its fifteenth session in July
1952. It is expected that the Council will decide
whether to call an international conference to com-
plete the convention.

4. Tlie Commission, under authority granted to
it under article 2 of the Synthetic Drugs Protocol
of 1948, decided to place two new synthetic drugs,
known as NU-1932 and NU-220G, under the 1931
convention pending action by the World Health
Organization.

Ad Hoc Committee on the Organization and
Operation of ECOSOC and its Commissions. —
The Committee, May 22, adopted (7-1 (U. S. S.-
R.) ) its first report to the Council, and included
therein are, briefly, the following recommenda-
tions :

1. ECOSOC— {1) The Council should hold
three regular sessions each year: the first should
be devoted to social and human rights matters;
the second to economic issues; and the pre- As-
sembly session to problems of coordination, pri-
orities, reports of specialized agencies and sub-
ordinate organs of the Council, and the report of
the Council to the General Assembly; (2) the
Council should prepare an annual basic agenda
and so arrange its work that subjects are dealt
with in related groups; (3) the Council should, as
far as practicable, discuss matters in plenary
session.

2. Functional Com/missions and subcom/mis-
aion-s. — (1) All the subcommissions, Statistical
Sampling, Prevention of Discrimination and Pro-
tection of Minorities, and Freedom of Information
and of the Press, should be abolished. However,
the Freedom of Information Subcommission
should be continued for one more session. Tlie
work of the subcommissions should be taken over
by the United Nations Secretariat, ad hoc groups,
as appropriate, and the Commissions. (2) the
Economic, Employment and Development Com-
mission, and the Transport and Communications
Commission should be discontinued. The work
should be taken over by the Council itself, the
regional economic commissions or ad hoc bodies
as appropriate. (3) the Fiscal, Statistical, Popu-
lation, and Social Commissions and the Commis-
sion on the Status of Women should be continued
until December 31, 1953. (4) the Commission on
Human Rights should be continued until it has
completed its work on the Covenant. Thereafter,
the Council should review the question of its con-
tinuation. (5) the Commission on Narcotic Drugs
should also be continued until it has completed
its work on the single convention on narcotic
drugs.

Specialized Agencies

Universal Postal Union. — The 19-member Upu
Executive and Liaison committee opened its an-
nual meeting. May 21, at St. Gallen, Switzerland.
Representatives of the United Nations, the Inter-
national Civil Aviation Organization, and the In-
ternational Air Transport Association are also
attending the meeting. Joseph Lemouel, Di-
rector-General of the French Postal Services, is
chairman. The United States delegation is headed
by A. C. Halm, Executive Director, Bureau of
Transportation, United States Post Office Depart-
ment.

On the matter of Chinese representation, the
Committee decided (10-6-3) that the Chinese
Nationalist delegate should be seated.

May 28, 1951

865

Geneva Conventions for the Protection of War Victims'

PRESIDENT'S MESSAGE TO SENATE

REPORT OF SECRETARY OF STATE

The White House, April 26, 1951.

To the Senate of the United States :

With a view to receiving the advice and consent
of the Senate to ratification, I transmit herewith
a certified copy of each of the following
conventions :

(1) Geneva convention for the amelioration of
the condition of the wounded and sick in Armed
Forces in the field ;

(2) Geneva convention for the amelioration of
the condition of wounded, sick, and shipwrecked
members of Armed Forces at sea ;

(3) Geneva convention relative to the treatment
of prisoners of war;

(4) Geneva convention relative to the protec-
tion of civilian persons in time of war;

which were open for signature from August 12,
1949, until February 12, 1950, and during that
period were signed on behalf of the United States
of America and a number of other States.

I also transmit, for the information of the
Senate, the report made to me by the Secretai-y of
State with respect to this inatter.

In the event that the Senate advises and con-
sents to the ratification of the Geneva convention
relative to the protection of civilian persons in
time of war, it is requested that the Senate do so
subject to the reservation made by the plenipo-
tentiary of the United States in signing the con-
vention, namely:

The United States reserves the right to impose the
death penalty in accordance with the provisions of Article
68, paragraph 2, without regard to whether the offences
referred to therein are punishable by death under the
law of the occupied territory at the time the occupation
begins.

H.\RRY S. TeUMAN.

(EnclosureB : (1) Report of the Secretary of State, with accom-
panying commentaries ; (2) certifled copies of Geneva conventions
of August 12, 1949, for the protection of war victims.^)

' S. Ex. D, E, F, and G, 82d Cong., 1st sess.
' Not here printed.

Department of State,
Washington, April 25, 1951,
The PREsroENT,

The White House.
The undersigned, the Secretary of State, has the
honor to submit to the President, with a view to
their transmission to the Senate to receive the
advice and consent of that body to ratification,
if liis judgment approve thereof, a certified copy
of eacli of the following conventions:

(1) Geneva convention for the amelioration of
the condition of wounded and sick in Armed
Forces in the field;

(2) Geneva convention for the amelioration of
the condition of wounded, sick, and shipwrecked
members of Armed Forces at sea ;

(3) Geneva convention relative to the treat-
ment of prisonei-s of war;

(4) Geneva convention relative to the protec-
tion of civilian persons in time of war :

which were open for signature from August 12,
1949, until February 12, 1950, and during that
period were signed on behalf of the United States
of America and a number of other States.

At the time of signature, a reservation with re-
spect to the convention relative to the protection
of civilian persons in time of war was made on
behalf of the United States reading:

The United States reserves the right to impose the
death penalty in accordance witli the provisions of Article
68, paragraph 2, without rejrard to whetlier the offences
referreil to tlierein are punishable by death under the law
of the occupied territory at tlie time the occupation begins.

The same reservation was also made by Canada,
New Zealand, the Netherlands, and the United
Kingdom. Tlie conventions were signed subject
to other reservations by certain of the signatory
states, the texts of which reservations are set forth
in a separate section immediately following the
texts of the conventions annexed to this report.

The conventions were formulated and ado])ted
at the Diplomatic Conference for the Establish-
ment of International Conventions for the Pro-
tection of War Victims, held in Geneva, Switzer-
land, from April 21 to August 12, 1949. Fifty-

866

Department of State Bulletin

nine governments, including; the Big Four (France,
the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, the United
Kingdom, and the United States), sent delega-
tions to Geneva to participate. Five other coun-
tries had observers present, as did 23 international
organizations. Also, representatives of the In-
ternational Committee of the Red Cross and the
League of Red Cross Societies participated as
technical experts and played an active and prom-
inent part in the meetings of the conference.

Specifically, the task of the Conference was to
revise existing treaties relating to the protection of
war victims, namely, the Geneva convention of
July 27, 1929, for "the amelioration of the con-
dition of the wounded and sick of armies in the
field (47 Stat. 2074) ; the Geneva convention of
July 27, 1929, relating to the treatment of prison-
ers of war (47 Stat. 2021) ; and the Hague con-
vention of October 18. 1907, for the adaptation to
maritime warfare of the principles of the Geneva
convention of July 6, 1906 (36 Stat. 2371), and to
write a new convention applicable to civilians in
wartime.

In the light of experiences of World War II,
there was recognized by all governments the ur-
gent necessity for rather extensive revisions of the
above-mentioned earlier conventions for the pur-
pose of bringing them up to date, making them
easier to apply uniformly and less susceptible to
diflFerent interpretations, and providing more ef-
fective protection of the categories of persons
covered. It was considered equally important to
secure by treaty international legal protection for
civilians in belligerent and occupied territories.
The generally unsatisfactory stop-gap measure of
attempting to apply the prisoners-of-war conven-
tion to certain categories of civilians during World
War II had pointed up the need for a separate
treaty establishing humane standards of treat-
ment for civilians in time of war.

The United States had from the beginning ac-
tively supported the initiative taken in the fall of
1945 by the International Committee of the Red
Cross to revise the existing conventions and to
formulate a new civilian convention before the
experiences of World War II had been forgotten.
This Government participated in preliminary in-
formal discussions of the subject at a meeting of
government experts convened at Geneva under the
auspices of the International Committee of the
Red Cross, April 14-26, 1947. At that meeting
14 Allied Governments were represented, and
considerable progress was made in the formula-
tion of revised and new draft conventions. The
Seventeenth International Red Cross Conference,
which took place at Stockholm August 20-30, 1948,
and in which 49 governments, including the United
States, and 51 national Red Cross societies partic-
ipated, offered an opportunity for a continuance
of these discussions on a broader scale. These
preparatory meetings resulted in the formulation
of drafts for each of the four conventions which

served as the working documents for the Diplo-
matic Conference at (jreneva in 1949.

The preparation of the United States position
on these new conventions began early in 1946 with
the establishment, on invitation of the Secretary
of State, of an Interdepartmental Prisoners of
War Committee. Interested agencies which have
participated in and contributed to the formula-
tion of the United States position include the De-
partments of State, Army, Navy, Air Force, Jus-
tice, Treasury (including Coast Guard), Post Of-
fice, and Labor, the Federal Security Agency, and
the American Red Cross. The United States was
represented at the Geneva Conference by a dele-
gation which was composed of representatives of
the Department of State, the three military serv-
ices, the Department of Justice, and the American
Red Cross.

Substantial portions of the United States po-
sition on all four of the conventions were accepted
by the Conference as presented. Foremost among
the revisions supported by the United States which
were concurred in were the following : ( 1) A com-
plete rewording of the article concerning food
which, in essence, provides that the food ration
of prisoners of war shall be sufficient in quantity,
quality, and variety to keep prisoners in good
health, and prevent loss of weight or the develop-
ment of nutritional deficiencies; (2) a new and
simplified formula regarding the employment of
prisoners of war which among other things pro-
hibits their use for mine clearance and disposal
work; (3) prompt repatriation of prisoners of
war after the cessation of hostilities; (4) a pro-
vision permitting transfers of prisoners of war
among cobelligerents provided the receiving gov-
ernment is a party to the convention, and placing
on both governments involved in the transfer equal
responsibility in seeing that the treatment received
by prisoners of war following their transfer is in
accordance with the terms of the convention; (5)
the extension of the application of the prisoners
of war and civilian conventions to civil wars pro-
vided the dissident party agrees for its part re-
ciprocally to apply the terms of those conventions ;
(6) definition of tlae conditions which must be met
by partisan forces if they are to be accorded treat-
ment as prisoners of war and entitled to protection
of that convention; and (7) improved identifica-
tion markings for hospital ships.

There are transmitted herewith commentaries,
dealing with each of the conventions, which do
not purport to discuss and analyze the texts in
detail, but in which an attempt is made with re-
spect to the wounded and sick, maritime, and
prisoners of war conventions to indicate and iden-
tify the significant revisions introduced in relation
to the earlier conventions and, in the case of the
civilian convention, to present a summary of the
subjects dealt with therein.

It is provided in each convention that it will
come into force 6 months after not less than two

May 28, J95I

867

instruments of ratification have been deposited.
Thereafter, it sliall come into force for eacli state
6 months after the deposit of its instiniment of rati-
fication. Since the closing date for signature of
the conventions, Chile, Czechoslovakia, the Holy
See, India, Liechtenstein, Monaco, Switzerland,
and Yugoslavia have deposited their respective
instruments of ratification of all four conventions.

The four conventions represent the culmination
of nearly 4 years of preparatory work. It is be-
lieved the three revised conventions are a consider-
able improvement over those which they are
intended to replace, and that the new civilian
convention marks a step forward in the effort to
mitigate, through international agreement, the
suffering occasioned by war. They are based on
realistic considerations and reflect the experiences
of those who were charged with the administrative
responsibility of the earlier conventions during
the last war. Since the United States played an
active and prominent role in furthering the efforts
to revise and extend these humanitarian conven-
tions, it is hoped they will be given early and favor-
able consideration by the Senate.

Kespectfully submitted.

Dean Acheson.

(Enclosures: (1) CommentariPS ; (2) certified copies of Geneva
conventions of August 12, 1949, for the protection of war victims.)

COMMENTARIES

I. Provisions Common to the Four Conventions

FoRMtTLATED AT GeNEVA AuGUST 12, 1949
GENERAL PROVISIONS

There have been assembled at the head of each
of the four conventions formulated at Geneva the
provisions of a general nature dealing with the ap-
plication of the convention, and the procedure and
organizations by which its enforcement is to be
facilitated. Most of these provisions are new, and
certain of them, namely those embodied in Articles
1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 of the wounded and
sick, the maritime, and the prisoners of war con-
ventions and in Articles 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and
12 of the civilian convention, are common to each
of the conventions and, with slight adaptation for
the particular convention concerned, have been ex-
pressed in identical wording.

Article 2 is concerned with the application of
the convention and is entirely new with the ex-
ception of the provision stating that although one
of the powers in conflict may not be a party to the
convention the powers which are parties shall re-
main bound by it in their mutual relations. Tliis
article provides that, in addition to the provisions
which shall be implemented in peacetime, the con-
vention shall apply to all cases of declared war or
of any other arnied conflict whicli may arise be-
tween two or more of the contracting parties, even

if the state of war is not recognized by one of them.
Also, the convention is to apply to all cases oi
partial or total occupation of the territory of a
contracting party, even if that occupation meets
with no armed resistance. Further, it is provided
that in case of conflict in which one of the powers
is not a party to the convention, the provisions
nevertheless shall prevail if the nonparty accepts
and applies its provisions.

The application of the convention to ai-med con-
flicts not of an international character is provided
for in Article 3 wherein there are established mini-
mum humanitarian principles which each party to
the conflict is bound to apply. Persons taking no
active part in the hostilities are to be treated hu-
manely without any adverse distinction based on
race, color, religion or faith, sex or birth, or
wealth. Acts of violence to life and person, the
taking of hostages, outrages upon personal dig-
nity, and the passing of sentences and the carry-
ing out of executions without previous judgment
of a regidarly constituted court are prohibited.

Article 6 provides that contracting parties may,
in addition to the agreements expressly provided
for in various articles of the convention, conclude
other special agreements for all matters concern-
ing which the parties may deem it suitable to make
special provision. These agreements, however,
are not to affect adversely the situation of the per-
sons protected by the convention or to restrict the
rights which the convention confers upon them.

In Article 7 there is stated that very important
principle that persons protected by the convention
may under no circumstances renounce in part or in
entirety the rights secured them by the convention
or by the special agreements referred to above.

It is set forth in Article 8 that the convention
sliall be applied with the cooperation and under
the scrutiny of the Protecting Powers whose duty
it is to safeguard the interests of the parties to the
conflict. Delegates apart from the diplomatic or
consular staff may be appointed by the Protecting
Powers to help carry out these duties. Repre-
sentatives of the Protecting Powers are not to ex-
ceed their mission under the convention and, in
particular, are to take account of the imperative
necessities of security of the State in which they
are carrying out their duties.

Article 9 states that the provisions of the con-
vention shall constitute no obstacle to the humani-
tarian activities which the International Commit-
tee of the Red Cross or any other impai-tial hu-
manitarian organization may undertake to help
the persons protected by the convention.

Substitutes for Protecting Powers are provided
for in Article 10. Contracting Parties may at any
time agree to entrust to an international organiza-
tion which offers all guarantees of imjiartiality
and efficacy the duties incumbent on t lie Protect ing
Power. AVhen the protected persons cease to ben-
efit by the activities of a Protecting Power or of
such organization, the Detaining Power is re-
quired to request a neutral state or such an organi-

868

Department of State Bulletin

zation to undertake tlie functions performed by a
Protectin<i; Power. If such protection cannot be
arranged, the Detaining Power shall rc(iuest or
accept the oti'er of the services of a luunanitarian
organization, such as the International Commit-
tee of the Ked Cross, to assume the humanitarian
functions performed by Protecting Powers under
the convention.

In the event of a disagreement between Parties
to tiie conflict as to the application or interpreta-
tion of the provisions of the convention, it is pro-
vided in Article 11 that the Protecting Powers
shall lend their good ofdces with a view to settling
the disagreement. For this purpose the Protect-
ing Powers may arrange for a meeting of the vc\)-
resentatives of the two parties and may, if
necessary, propose for approval by the parties to
the conflict a person belonging to a neutral power
or delegated by the International Committee of
the Eed Cross who shall be invited to take part in
such a meeting.

EXECUTION OF CONVENTION AND REPRESSION OF
ABUSES AND INFRACTIONS

In addition to the general provisions outlined
above, each of the four conventions has sections
containing provisions relating to the execution of
the convention and the repression of abuses and
infractions. In accordance with these provisions,
the contracting parties undertake in time of peace
as in time of war to disseminate the text of the
convention as widely as possible and to include the
study thereof in their programs of military and,
if possible, civil instruction. The contracting
parties also undertake to enact any legislation
necessary to provide effective penal sanctions for
persons committing or ordering to be committed
grave breaches of the convention such as wilful
killing, torture or inhuman treatment, including
biological experiments, or wilfully causing great
suffering or serious injuiy to body or health.
Each contracting party is under an obligation to
search for persons alleged to have committed such
grave breaches and to bring such persons, regai'd-
less of their nationality, before its own courts, or,
if it prefers, hand such persons over to another
Contracting Party for trial.

II. Geneva Convention for the Amelioration
OF THE Condition of the Wounded and Sick in
Armed Forces in the Field of August 12, 1949

WOUNDED and SICK (CHAPTER H)

This is the most important chapter in the con-
vention and the foundation on which the whole
convention rests.

Article 12 corresponds to Article 1 of the 1929
convention. It has been expanded considerably,
however, and an attempt has been made to define
in its provisions more accurately the manner in
■which the wounded and sick are to be treated and
cared for by the parties to the conflict in order
to avoid some of the unfortunate experiences of

May 28, I95I

tlie last war. The article explicitly prohibits any
diil'erential treatment on the basis of sex, race, na-
tionality, religion, political opinions, or any other
similar criteria. Only urgent medical reasons au-
thorizes priority in the order of treatment to be
administered. It is intended thereby to insure
that all wounded and sick, whether friend or foe,
shall be treated on a footing of perfect equality as
regards the protection, respect, and care to which
they are entitled. The new provisions also enu-
merate and expressly prohibit some of the most
serious offenses which a belligerent might be guilty
of toward the wounded and sick in its power.
Prohibited acts include attempts upon their lives
or violence to their persons, murder or extermina-
tion, subjection to torture or to biological experi-
ments deliberate abandonment without medical
care, or exposure to risk of contagion or infection
created for that purpose.

Article 13 is new. It defines the different cate-
gories of persons who, if sick or w'ounded, shall
be entitlecl to the benefit of the convention. The
1929 convention applied only to members of the
Armed Forces and to other persons officially at-
tached to them. The new convention extends the
field of application to other categories of persons.
Members of militias and corps of volunteers, in-
cluding those of organized resistance movements
not forming part of the armed forces of a party
to the conflict are one of the new groups protected,
provided certain conditions are fulfilled. It is de-
fined that these corps and militias may legally
operate in or outside their own territory even if it
is occupied. This is an important innovation
which has become necessary as a result of the ex-
perience of World War II.

Other categories covered and not before in-
cluded in conventional international law are (1)
members of regular forces who profess allegiance
to a government not recognized by the Detaining
Powers, and (2) members of crews of merchant
marine and civil aircraft who do not benefit by
more favorable treatment under any other provi-
sions of international law.

In Article 15 the scope of Article 3 of the 1929
convention has been extended. The 1929 conven-
tion made it possible for local military com-
manders to conclude an armistice or arrange for
a temporary cessation of hostilities for the pur-
pose of collecting and removing the wounded from
the battlefield. This provision has been broadened
so as to include the exchange of wounded from
besieged or encircled areas, and to permit the
passage of medical and religious personnel and
equipment on their way to such an area.

The provisions relative to the identification of
wounded, sick, and dead have been made clearer
and more specific in Article 16 of the new conven-
tion than in Article 4 of the 1929 convention. In
order to insure more effective coordination, it has
been provided that the information the bellig-
erents are required to furnish each other shall be
forwarded through the official National Bureau of

869

each of the parties, and thence through the chan-
nel of the Protecting Powers and the Central
Prisoners of War Agency established in a neutral
country.

In connection with the handling of the dead,
new provisions have been included in Article 17.
Burial or cremation shall, as far as is possible, be
carried out individually and not collectively.
Bodies shall not be cremated, except for impera-
tive reasons of hygiene or for motives based on
the religion of the deceased.

There is retained in Article 18 tlie provision of
Article 5 of the 1929 convention stating that the
military authorities could appeal to the charitable
aid of the inliabitants in collecting and caring for
wounded persons under the supervision of such
authorities, and that, in such cases, the inhabi-
tants in question would be entitled to assistance
and protection. Added to this provision are new
provisions which formally authorize the inhabi-
tants spontaneously to collect and care for
wounded of all nationalities and expressly stipu-
late that the mere fact of having rendered aid to
wounded or sick persons shall never constitute
a ground for prosecution or punishment. These
are provisions of exceptional importance since
they are intended particularly to apply to wounded
parachutists or resistants. Assisting or caring for
such persons in the last war was frequently pro-
hibited, subject to extremely severe penalties.

MEDICAL UNITS AND ESTABLISHMENTS ( CHAPTER HI )

Apart from Article 20 providing that hospital
ships shall not be attacked from the land, the new
provision in Article 22 authorizing protected
establishments to care for civilian wounded or
sick, and Article 23 relating to the establishment
of hospital zones, the provisions of this Chapter
are substantially the same as the provisions in-
cluded in Chapter II of the 1929 convention. The
provisions of Article 23 with regard to hospital
zones are considered important, for it is the first
time that the concept of hospital zones and locali-
ties has been provided for in a convention. In
accordance with these provisions, any country may
set up hospital zones or localities i-eserved for the
wounded and sick and the personnel necessai-y to
give them medical attention. Upon the outbreak
and during the course of hostilities, the parties
concerned may conclude agreements on mutual
recognition of the hospital zones and localities
they have created. A model draft agreement
which the parties may implement for this purpose
and revise if desired is annexed to the convention.

Eegtilar personnel of the medical and chaplain
services, and members of tlie armed forces who are
not actually or exclusively members of the medi-
cal services but who have received special training
to enable them to carry out medical duties, con-
tinue to enjoy in Articles 24 and 2,5 of the new
convention the same protection provided for them
hitherto in Article 9 of the 1929 convention. Like-

wise, in Article 26 of the new convention, personnel
of national red cross and voluntary aid societies
of belligerents are again placed on an equal foot-
ing witli medical personnel as they were in Article
10 of the 1929 convention.

The status of regular medical and chaplain per-
sonnel and of personnel of voluntary aid societies
after capture by the enemy has, however, been
changed in the new convention. The convention
of 1929 explicitly prohibited the detention of such
personnel, although it did provide in Article 12
that an agreement could be concluded by the bellig-
erents for retaining such personnel temporarily.
But this procedure was regarded as being excep-
tional. Under Article 28 of the new convention,
such personnel may be automatically retained
without the previous agreement provided for by
the 1929 convention in so far as the medical and
spiritual needs of the prisoners of war themselves
require. Personnel thus retained are not to be
deemed prisoners of war, but they are to be ac-
corded the benefits of all the provisions of the
prisoners of war convention and in addition special
facilities in regard to correspondence and travel
essential for the proper performance of tlieir
duties.

The status after capture of the members of the
armed forces who are only temporarily attached to
the medical service has also been changed in the
new convention. Whereas the convention of 1929
provided for their return on the same conditions
as those applicable to permanent personnel, Ar-
ticle 29 of the 1949 convention provides that they
should be treated as prisoners of war, but shall be
employed in caring for the wounded and sick.

BUILDINGS AND MATERIAL (CHAPTER V)

The provisions of Article 33 relating to the
material of mobile medical units have been radi-
cally altered. According to the 1929 convention,
if such a unit fell into the hands of the enemy its
material would be returned as far as possible at
the same time as the medical personnel were re-
turned. The new provisions, on the contrary,
stipulate that this material is to remain in the
hands of the capturing party but is to be reserved
for the care of the wounded and sick. No changes
have been made with respect to the disposal of
fixed medical establishments which remain sub-
ject to the laws of war. It is provided that the
material and stores of botli mobile units and of
fixed establishments shall not be intentionally
destroyed.

MEDICAL TRANSPORTS (CHAPTER VI)

As in the case of the material of mobile medical
units, the transports of wounded and sick or of
medical equipment which fall into tlie liands of
the adverse party are not restored as hitherto pro-
vided for in tlie 1929 convention. Instead, such
transports or vehicles are, in accordance with the
provisions of Article 35, subject to the laws of war

870

Deparfment of Sfa/e Bulletin

on condition that the party to the conflict who cap-
tures them sliall in all cases insure the care of the
wounded and sick they contain.

An attempt has been made in Article 36 to take
care of the inadequacy of distinctive markings for
the protection of medical aircraft under the pres-
ent conditions of aerial warfare by requiring that
such planes fly at heights, times, and on routes
specifically agreed upon between the belligerents
concerned. Another new provision included in
this article stipulates that in the event the air-
craft is required by the enemy to land, the medi-
cal aircraft with its occupants shall be allowed
to resume its flight after inspection.

The 1929 convention did not cover the case of
medical aircraft flying over a neutral country.
Under Article 37 of the present convention, flying
over neutral countries is permitted, subject, how-
ever, to previous agi-eement between the belliger-
ents and neutral country concerned.

THE DISTINCTTVE EMBLEM (CHAPTER VII)

This Chapter corresponds to Chapter VI of the
1929 convention and the changes and innovations
of substance are few. The provisions relating to
the identification of medical and religious per-
sonnel have been clarified in Article 40. In addi-
tion to the armlet bearing a red cross, provision
has been made for a special pocket-size, water-
resistant identity card for all personnel exclu-
sively engaged in protected activities. The iden-
tity card is to state in what capacity the bearer
is entitled to protection under the convention and
is to be uniform throughout the same armed forces.
As far as possible, it is to be of a similar type in
the armed forces of all the contracting parties,
and a model card is annexed to the convention to
serve as a guide.

Article 41 dealing with the identification of tem-
porary medical personnel is new. In order to pro-
vide some permanent sign to make it possible to
recognize and protect them, such personnel are to
wear a white armlet with a red cross emblem which
is smaller in size than the emblem on armlets worn
by permanent personnel. As personnel of this
kind will be treated as prisoners of war if they
fall into the hands of the enemy, a special identi<:y
card is not provided for them. However, their
military identification documents are to specify
what special medical training they have received,
the temporary character of their duties, and their
authority to wear an armlet.

In Article 44 there are set forth the conditions
under which the red cross emblem may be used.
Wliile the essential provisions of Article 24 of the
1929 convention have been incorporated, an at-
tempt has been made to establish a clearer distinc-
tion between the use of the distinctive emblem
which has a protective value during military op-
erations and the popular emblem used by national
red cross societies for purposes of identification.
In order that the protective emblem shall retain
its full value, it is provided that it can only be used

in time of peace by national red cross societies for
their other activities which are in conformity with
the principles laid down by the International Red
Cross Conferences. Wlien those activities are car-
ried out in time of war, the conditions for the use
of the emblem shall be such that it cannot be con-
sidered as conferring the protection of the con-
vention, and the emblem must be small in size and
may not be placed on armlets or on the roofs of
buildings.

In view of the fact that international red cross
organizations are required to perform their duties
everywhere and in all circumstances, a new pro-
vision has been inserted in the present convention
permitting such organizations to make use of the
red cross emblem at all times.

III. Geneva Convention for the Amelioration
OF the Condition of Wounded, Sick, and Ship-
wrecked Members of Armed Forces at Sea of
August 12, 1949

In view of the subject matter with which this
convention is concerned, many of its provisions are
identical or almost identical to corresponding pro-
visions embodied in the 1949 Geneva convention
relative to the wounded and sick. This is partic-
ularly true in respect of the articles relating to
the treatment of the wounded and sick, the cate-
gories of persons entitled to protection under the
convention, identification of the wounded and
dead and the handling of the dead, the status of
medical and religious personnel, the medical trans-
ports, and the use of the distinctive emblem. As
a consequence of that similarity, discussion in this
commentary is restricted to those provisions which
are peculiar to the convention relative to the
wounded, sick, and shipwrecked of armed forces
at sea.

wounded, sick, and shipwrecked (CHAPTER II)

In Article 12 there is included a definition of the
term "shipwreck" which is new. As defined, it
means shipwrecked from any cause and includes
forced landings at sea by or from aircraft.

A new provision has been inserted in Article 18
which imposes on belligerents not only the former
obligation embodied in Article IG of the 1907
Hague convention to search after each engagement
for the shipwrecked, wounded, aTid sick, but also
includes the duty of collecting and taking them on
board and providing them with all necessary care.
Another new provision also included in this ar-
ticle stipulates that whenever circumstances per-
mit, parties to the conflict shall conclude local
arrangements for the removal of the wounded and
sick by sea from a besieged or encircled area and
for the passage of medical and religious personnel
and equipment on their way to that area.

HOSPITAL SHIPS ( CHAPTER III )

In order to be eligible for protection, certain
conditions which were not present in the corre-

May 28, 7957

871

spending article (Article 1) of the 1907 conven-
tion have been added in Article 22 in connection
with the notification of hospital ships to the bellig-
erents concerned. The notification has to be made
ten days before a hospital ship is employed and
must have in addition to tlie ship's name the char-
acteristics of the ship, including registered gross
tonnage, the length from stem to stem and the
number of masts and funnels.

Article 23 provides that establishments ashore
entitled to the protection of the 1949 Geneva con-
vention for the wounded and sick in armed forces
in the field shall be protected from bombardment
or attack from the sea. This is a new provision
which has never appeared before in any interna-
tional convention.

While a minimum tonnage for hospital ships
is not specified, a new provision in Article 26
stipulates that belligerents shall, in order to in-
sure maximum comfort and security, endeavor to
utilize for the transport of wounded, sick, and
shipwrecked over long distances and on the high
seas only hospital ships of over 2,000 tons gross.

Under Article 27, which is also new, small craft
employed by the state or by the officially recog-
nized lifeboat institutions for coastal rescue
operations are to receive the same protection as
hospital ships so far as operational requirements
permit. Fixed coastal installations exclusively
used by these craft are also to receive as far as
possible similar protection.

Since hospital ships cannot be captured, an-
other new article (Article 29) provides that if such
a ship is in a port which has fallen into the hands
of the enemy it shall be authorized to leave that
port.

Article 31 sets forth certain rights which parties
to the conflict may exercise with respect to the
control of hospital ships. In addition to the
measures set forth in Article 4 of the 1907 Hague
convention, it is further provided in this article
that a belligerent may control the use of the wire-
less installations on such vessels as well as other
means of communication. It is also stipulated that
neutral observers may be put on board whose duty
it would be to verify the strict observance of the
present convention.

Article 33 j)rovides that a merchant vessel once
transformed into a hospital ship cannot be put to
any other use for the duration of hostilities. The
intention of this new provision is to prevent a
government from refitting a large merchant vessel
as a hospital ship, sending it overseas through the
danger zones, and then reconverting it into a mer-
chant vessel.

Article 34 provides that the protection to which
hospital ships and sick-bays are entitled shall not
cease unless they are used to commit, outside their
humanitarian duties, acts harmful to the enemy.
In particular, hospital .shi])s may not possess or
use a secret code for their wireless or other means
of communication. Protection may, however, not

I

cease until after due warning has been given and
such warning has remained unheeded.

Article 35 lists the conditions which shall not be
considered as depriving hospital ships or sick-bays
of vessels of the protection due them. The article
is similar to Article 22 of the wounded and sick
convention. One additional provision stipulates
that protection may not be withdrawn because of
the presence on board of medical personnel or
equipment over and above the normal require-
ments for the operation of the ship.

PERSONNEL (CHAPTER IV)

Article 36 which deals with the protection to be
given to personnel of hospital ships is entirely new.
The religious, medical, and hospital personnel of
hospital ships and their crews may not be cap-
tured during the time they are in the service of the
hospital ship, whether or not there are wounded
and sick on board. Membei-s of the crew have
been included, for without them a hospital ship
would be useless and the entire pi'otection granted
to its medical personnel would become inoperative
if the crew could be captured. Furtlier, since the
present convention stipulates that a hospital ship
may not be captured under any circumstances, it
is obvious that such a pi'ovision would be void
if the adverse belligerent were allowed to take the
crew prisoner.

Article 37 relates to personnel of vessels other
than hospital ships and while it includes the essen-
tial provisions of Article 10 of the 1907 convention
new provisions have been added permitting the
retention for a time of medical and religious per-
sonnel to care for the wounded and sick. More-
over, it differs from the 1907 convention in another
important respect. The Hague convention re-
ferred to religious and medical personnel of any
captured vessel, thus putting on the same footing
warships, merchant ships, and other vessels. The
present article restricts protection exclusively to
personnel engaged in the medical or spiritual care
of persons protected by the convention under
Articles 12 and 13. Members of the crew of these
vessels are not protected since the grounds for such
I^rotection no longer exist. Religious, medical,
and hospital personnel are entitled to the same
protection as that of hospital ships, but, contrary
to the provisions for personnel of hospital ships,
some may be retained if necessaiy for the care of
the wounded and sick who are taken prisoners of
war. This retained personnel must be put ashore
as soon as possible by the belligerent which cap-
tures them and once landed are subject to the pro-
visions of the 1949 Geneva convention concerning
the M'ounded and sick of armed forces in the field.

MEDICAL TRANSPORTS (CHAPTER V)

Article 38 introduces a new provision peruiit-
ting ships chartered for that i)ur]Kise to transport
equipment exclusively intended for the treatment
of wounded and sick members of armed forces or

872

Department of State Bulletin

for tlic prevention of disease, provided that the
particulars regarding their voyage liave been noti-
fied to tlie adveree party and approved by the
latter. The carrier ships may be boarded by the
adverse power, but may not be captured or have
their equipment seized.

THE DISTINCTrVE EMBLEM (CHAPTER VI)

The marking of hospital ships and other craft
covered by the same system of protection was very
inadequately defined by Article 5 of the lOQT
Hague convention. The experience of the last
■war showed that most of the attacks on hospital
ships were attributable to insufficient marking.
Therefore, in order to try to make possible identi-
fication of hospital ships at long range, far-reacli-
ing changes have been made in Article 43 of the
new convention.

White has been retained as the color for all ex-
terior surfaces, but the horizontal band of green
or red has been abandoned. One or more red
crosses, according to the tonnage of the ship, are
to be painted and displayed on both sides of the
hull and on the horizontal surfaces. The color of
the crosses is to be dark red which will provide
the most striking contrast to the white of the ship.
A white flag with the red cross is to be hoisted as
high as possible on the mainmast which is the first
part of a ship to appear on the horizon and will
thei'efore help make identification possible from
that moment. At night and at times of reduced
visibility, hospital craft mnst, subject to the assent
of the power to the conflict under whose control
they are, take the necessary measures to render
their painting and distinctive emblems sufficiently
apparent. Lifeboats and small craft employed
by the medical service are to be painted white with
dark red crosses and shall bear, as far as possible,
the same marks of identification as the hospital
ships.

IV. Geneva Convention Kelati\'e to the Treat-
ment OF Prisoners of War of August 12, 1949

general provisions (PART I)

There are enumerated in Article 4 the categories
of persons who would qualify to receive the pro-
tection of the convention. These categories in-
clude the same ones as set forth in Article 12 of
the Geneva convention of 1949 for the wounded
and sick in armed forces in the field. In addition,
Article 4 stipulates that persons who are arrested
by the Occupying Power because of their member-
ship in the armed forces of the occupied country
are to receive the protection of the convention.
Article 4 also gives military pereonnel interned
in neutral countries the protection of the conven-
tion and sets forth the points on which the treat-
ment of such persons may not be similar to that of
prisoners of war.

Article 5 in its first paragraph states the very
important principle that the application of the

convention to the persons covered in the preceding
article shall continue from the moment they have
fallen into enemy hands until their liberation.
The second paragraph provides that in the future
no person whose right to be treated as belonging
to one of the categories of Article 4 is in doubt
shall be deprived of the protection of the conven-
tion until his status has been determined by a com-
petent tribunal.

general protection of prisoners of war (part II)

Part II corresponds to Title I of the 1929 con-
vention, all of whose provisions it restates with the
exception of Article 1.

The last two paragraphs of Article 12 are com-
l^letely new and regulate responsibility in the case
of transfer of prisoners from one power to an-
other ; transfer to a power which is not a party to
the convention is ruled out completely. It is also
Ijrovided that the transferring power shall bear a
contingent responsibility.

Article 13 is a more complete version of Article
3 of the 1929 convention. It states that prisoners
of war must at all times be humanely treated and
provides in particular that no prisoner of war may
be subjected to physical mutilation or to medical
or scientific experiments not justified by the medi-
cal treatment of the prisonere concerned.

CAPTIVITY (PART III)

Beginning of Captivity {Section I)

Section I incorporates the essential provisions
of Title II and Section I of Title III of the 1929
convention.

Article 17 contains a new provision which
obliges each party to the conflict to issue an iden-
tity card to every person under its jurisdiction who
may become a prisoner of war. Moreover, under
the 1929 convention, a prisoner of war may con-
fine himself to giving, if questioned, only his regi-
mental or personal number. The new convention
obliges him to give his surname, first names and
rank, date of birth, and army, regimental, per-
sonal, or serial number.

Internment of Prisoners of War {Section II)

Chapters I and II of Section II correspond
roughly to Chapters 1 and 2 of Section II, Title
III of the 1929 convention.

Tlie second and third paragraphs of Article 21
are new and relate to the release on parole of pris-
oners of war.

In the third paragi-aph of Article 22, relating
to places and methods of internment, there has
been inserted a provision stating that the Detain-
ing Power shall assemble prisoners of war in
camps or camp compounds according to their na-
tionality, language, and customs, provided that
such persons shall not be sejDarated from prison-
ers of war belonging to the armed foi-ces with
wdiich they were serving at the time of their cap-
ture except with their consent.

May 28, I95I

873

Guarantees for the safety of prisoners have been
given considerably greater force in Article 23,
particularly in regard to the shelters which must
be supplied for them, notification of the location
of the camps, and their marking.

Article 24 vras introduced in order that prison-
ers of war in permanent transit camps might not
be deprived of the guarantees accorded by the con-
Tentions to prisoners in other camps.

Article 26 of the new convention abandons the
standards of the 1929 convention wherein food
rations were put on the same basis as for troops of
the Detaining Power's own forces. The new pro-
vision is that the basic daily food ration shall be
sufficient in quantity, quality, and variety to keep
prisoners of war in good health and to prevent
loss of weight or the development of nutritional
deficiencies. Account must also be taken of the
habitual diet of the prisoners.

The provisions of Articles 29, 30, and 31 of
Chapter III of Section II dealing with hygiene
and medical care and inspections are similar to
the Articles in Chapter 3 of Section II, Title II
of the 1929 convention ; they merely amplify and
clarify the provisions of the earlier convention
Article 32, however, is new. It provides that
prisoners of war who, though not members of the
military medical services of their own forces, are
doctors, dentists, nurses, or hospital orderlies may
be required to carry out medical duties and shall
in that case receive the same treatment as corre-
sponding members of retained medical personnel.

Chapter IV is also new. It defines the position
of medical personnel and chaplains who have
fallen into the hands of the enemy and are re-
tained with a view to assisting prisoners of war.
Each person in this category shall enjoy all the
necessary facilities for the carrying out of his
duties and have at the same time the protection of
the convention without being considered a pris-
oner of war.

Chapter VI concerning discipline and Chapter
VII relating to the rank of prisoners of war in-
corporate the essential provisions of Chapters 5
and 6 of Section II, Title III of the 1929 conven-
tion. Chapter 7 of the 1929 convention, how-
ever, has been deleted and its provisions are now
contained in the section relating to financial re-
sources of prisoners of war. Accordingly, Chap-
ter VIII in the new convention dealing with the
transfer of prisoners of war after their arrival in
camp corresponds roughly to Chapter 8, Section
II, Title III of the 1929 convention.

In Article 43 a new principle has been intro-
duced, namely, the recognition of promotions in
rank accorded to prisoners of war. Article 44
differs from Article 22 of the 1929 convention in
tliat it abandons the rule according to which offi-
cer prisoners of war had to provide their food and
clotliing from what was paid to them by the De-
taining Power. They are now put on the same
basis in this respect as other prisoners of war.

The conditions of, and procedure for, transfer
(Articles 46, 47, and 48) have been provided for in
more detail in view of the experiences in World
War II. Particular emphasis has been placed on
the additional precautions which should be taken
in the case of transport by sea or by air. More-
over, prisoners are to be allowed to take with
them their personal effects, and the correspond-
ence and parcels which have arrived for them.
The weight of such baggage may be limited if
the conditions of transfer so require, to what each
prisoner can reasonably carry, but in no case to
more than twenty-five kilograms per head.

Labor of Prisoners of 'War (Section III)

This section governing the labor of prisoners of
war corresponds with Section III, Title III of
the 1929 convention.

The general provisions of Article 49 add to the
rules set forth in the 1929 convention by requir-
ing also that account shall be taken of the age
and sex of prisoners of war, and that they should
be maintained in a good state of physical and
mental health.

The 1929 convention stipulated that the work
of prisoners of war should have no direct relation
to operations of war. In Article 50 of the new
convention this principle has been maintained
and is clarified by a limitative enumeration of the
categories of work which prisoners may be
required to do.

Article 52 confirms the principle already laid
down in the 1929 convention whereby prisoners of
war may not be detailed for unhealthy or danger-
ous labor. A new provision has been included,
however, stating that the removal of mines or
similar devices shall be considered as dangerous
labor.

Articles 53, 54, 55, 56, and 57 which deal with
duration of labor, working pay and working acci-
dents, medical supervision, labor detachments,
and prisoners of war detailed to private employ-
ers, reproduce in greater detail the 1929 stipula-
tions with the exception of the article dealing with
the compensation of prisoners who are victims of
working accidents. In the new convention, the
Detaining Power must provide these prisoners
with all necessary care, but, as opposed to the 1929
provision, the power on which the prisoner de-
pends is now solely responsibile for paying such
compensation. It is worthy of note also that the
Detaining Power is obliged to give a daily rest of
one hour in the middle of the day, and, as far
as the weekly rest of prisoners is concerned, to
take into account the day of rest observed in the
prisoner's home country.

Financial Resources of PHsoners of War
[Section /F)

This section is completely new. The articles
dealing with financial questions have been
grouped togeUier, whereas, in the 1929 conven-

874

Department of Sfofe Bulletin

tion they are scattered. It is also new in the sense
that it profoundly changes the 1929 rules which
were based for the most part on the liberal mone-
tary system which operated before World War I.
It has been necessary to take into accoiuit the more
rigid financial and monetary controls without,
however, excluding the possibility of applying
the liberal concept when this could be to the ad-
vantage of the prisoner.

The basic principle of the system of financial
resources is set forth in Article 58 which provides
that the Detaining Power may, especially with a
view to preventing escapes, fix a limit pending an
arrangement with the Protecting Power to the
sums which a prisoner may have in his possession.
Any sum in excess of the limit is placed to the
prisoner's account.

Articles 60, 61, 62, and 63 are concerned with
the various sources from which prisoners may
acquire funds. Under the 1929 convention pay
was given only to officers; it has now been ex-
tended to all prisoners in order to cover those who,
not being able to work, do not earn anything. The
amount of pay has been fixed for the various ranks
which have for this purpose been divided into
five categories. The pay has been called an "ad-
vance of pay" to show that the amount is a part
only of the amount paid to them in their army.
In order to decide in advance the pay due to pris-
oners of different categories, the complicated sys-
tem provided for in the 1929 convention has been
supplanted by a fixed basis, the gold Swiss Franc.

There have also been departures from the 1929
convention as regards ordinary pay. Since it is
not a question of wage or a salary on which a
prisoner has to live, the terra "working pay" has
been introduced. The rather impractical stand-
ards in the old convention for fixing pay have been
dropped ; the Detaining Power itself shall fix the
amounts of working pay, but may not go below a
minimum which has been likewise fixed in terms
of the gold Swiss Franc. Finally, no matter
whether prisoners work for private or public em-
ployers, the Detaining Power is itself responsible
for paying them, and, contrary to the rule adopted
in 1929, is responsible also for the working pay
of prisoners assigned permanently in the capacity
of artisans or clerks to the administration or
management of camps.

In Articles 6-1 and 65 there has been established
a system of close control over prisoners' accounts
which gives both prisoners and the Protecting
Power the possibility of checking the accounts
regularly. The winding up of accounts in every
case where captivity comes to an end has been
carefully provided for in Article 66. The 1929
rule which obliged the Detaining Power to pay
the prisoners the ci'edit balance of their account
in cash has been dropped. In the new convention,
it is provided that a certificate showing the
amount of a prisoner's credit balance shall be
given to him and a duplicate sent to the power

of origin which shall be responsible for payment
to the re])atriated prisoners of the credit balance
shown on the certificate.

Relations of PHsoriers of War with the Exterior
{Section V)

In addition to the provision of the 1929 conven-
tion which stipulated that the prisoner of war
should be enabled to send to his next-of-kin, at the
latest one week after his arrival in camp, a post
card informing them of his capture. Article 69
provides for a second message on a second card
called "capture card" addressed directly to the
Central Prisoners of War Agency. This "capture
card" is intended to enable the Central Prisoners
of War Agency to establish its card index even
before having received from the Detaining Power
the official lists of the prisoners of war which they
have captured.

Article 71 deals with correspondence and at-
tempts to remedy the difficulties experienced in
World War II in connection with the slowness
in forwarding prisoners of war correspondence due
to the congestion of the censorship service. Limi-
tations may be imposed on the number of letters
and cards which prisoners may write each month,
but cannot normally be restricted to less than two
letters and four cards. In order to expedite cen-
sorship, correspondence which is addressed to
prisoners may also imder certain conditions be
limited. Further, a new provision extends the
number of cases in which prisoners of war may
send telegrams.

In view of the importance of collective relief
shipments, a new article (Article 73) has been
included which makes the practical details of re-
ceiving and allocating relief shipments the sub-
ject of special agreements between the parties to
the conflict. If there is no agi-eement between
the parties concerned, the model agreement an-
nexed to the convention then applies.

Article 74 contains a new provision wliich has
no counterpart in the 1929 convention, namely,
that relief shipments for prisoners of war shall
enjoy free transport in all territory under the con-
trol of the Detaining Power, and in the territory
of every other power which is a party to the
convention.

Article 75 is entirely new and is concerned with
special transport. The object of the article is to
enable either the International Committee of the
Eed Cross or any other organization acceptable to
the parties to the conflict, whenever military opera-
tions make it impossible for the latter to fulfil the
obligation of providing transport for relief sup-
plies, to undertake on its own initiative to make
arrangements in whatever way may prove neces-
sary to insure such transport.

Relations between Prisoners of War
and the Authorities {Section VI)

Article 78 restates in gi-eater detail the provi-
sions of Article 42 of the 1929 convention relating

May 28, J95J

875

to complaints and requests of prisoners of war.
It provides in particular an innovation in that
prisoners are given the right of unlimited recourse
to the representatives of the Protecting Power
in order to make known their grievances.

Article 80 contains an important new provision
with respect to prisoners' representatives by stipu-
lating that they shall not be held responsible sim-
ply by reason of their functions for any offenses
committed by prisoners of war.

With i-espect to penal and disciplinary sanc-
tions, several new principles have been introduced.
In Article 83 an appeal is made to the indulgence
of the authorities of the Detaining Power when
deciding the question of whether an offense should
be the subject of judicial or disciplinary action.
In the 1929 text this principle referred only to
offenses connected with escape. Article 84 pi-o-
vides that in general prisoners should be judged
by military courts and in all cases by courts of-
fering essential guarantees of independence and
impartiality. In Article 85 it is provided that
prisoners of war prosecuted under the laws of
the Detaining Power for acts committed prior to
capture shall retain, even if convicted, the benefits
of the convention. Article 87 provides that the
courts and authorities of the Detaining Power
shall take into consideration when fixing the pen-
alty the fact that the accused prisoner is not a
national of the Detaining Power and is not bound
to it by any tie of allegiance, and pennits the
courts or authorities to lighten the sentence of the
accused prisoner.

In Article 89 there has been introduced a limita-
tive enumeration of the various forms of discipli-
nary punishments applicable to prisoners. In
this connection, there has been omitted the 1929
provision for punishment by disciplinary meas-
ures affecting rations. A basic safeguard has been
included to the effect that the punishments shall
never be inhuman, brutal, or dangerous to the
health of prisonere of war.

Article 91 is new; it defines the conditions to be
fulfilled in order that escapees may be regarded
as successful.

In Article 9C it should be noted that camp com-
mandants are now prohibited from delegating
their disciplinary powers to prisoners of war and
are also required to keep a register of any dis-
ciplinary punishment inflicted, which register
shall be accessible to representatives of the Pro-
tecting Power. The importance of these provi-
sions has been demonstrated by experience.

With respect to the articles relative to judicial
proceedings, there has been introduced in Article
99 the principle that no prisoner of war may be
tried or sentenced for an act which is not for-
bidden by the law of the Detaining Power or by
international law in force at (he time the said act
was connnitted. It has also been set forth that no
prisoner of war may be tried without having the
assistance of qualified counsel. Article 102 guar-

antees to prisoners of war the same trial procedure
as provided for members of the armed forces of the
Detaining Power. The provisions of the conven-
tion relating to such matters must also be ob-
served. Article 105 provides that the Detaining
Power shall find the accused a lawyer if he or the
Protecting Power have not selected one and that
the counsel shall be given the facilities necessary
to prepare the defense. Also, it is provided that
the particulars of the charge or charges on which
the prisoner of war is to be arraigned and other
court documents involved shall be communicated
to the accused.

The system of notification of judgments to the
Protecting Power has been improved. In the fu- .
ture, in accordance with Article 107, the detailed
notification which in the 1929 convention was re-
quired for the death penalty only is now to be made
for all sentences.

Article 108 is new and defines the mininnnn con-
ditions for the treatment of prisoners after sen-
tence has been passed, particularly with regard to
hygiene, correspondence, medical or spiritual aid,
the application of penalties, and the provision of
separate accommodations for women.

Termination of Captivity (Part III)

With respect to direct repatriation and accom-
modation in a neutral country. Article 109 ampli-
fies the provisions of Articles 68 and 72 of the 1929
convention. This article includes a new provision
stipulating that no wounded or sick prisoner of
war who is eligible for repatriation may be repatri-
ated against his will during hostilities. Article 110
enumerates the categories of persons to be repatri-
ated direct or who may be accommodated in a
neutral country. Article 112 covers Mixed Medical
Commissions, and prescribes that their appoint-
ment, duties, and functioning shall be in accord-
ance with the regidations set forth in Annex II of
the convention. Annex II is completely new and
the necessity for it was demonstrated by experi-
ences in Woi'ld War II.

With respect to the release and repatriation of
prisoners of war at the close of hostilities, Article

118 sets forth the principle that prisoners of war
shall be released and repatriated without delay at
the end of active hostilities. There is also outlined
in Article 118 certain principles dealing with the
apportionment of costs of repatriation. Article

119 includes new provisions concerning the condi-
tions governing the repatriation of prisoners. It
contains in particular provisions for the restitu-
tion and trans])ort of prisoners' property.

In connection with the death of prisoners of war,
Article 121 has been inserted because of incid^'uts
which took place during World War II. It is
clearly stated therein tiiat whenever there is doubt
about the cause of death or serious injury tliere
shall be an inquiry, and, if necessary, punishment
by the Detaining Power of any persons found
guilty.

876

Department of State Bulletin

V. Geneva Convention Relati\t: to the Protec-
tion OF Civilian Persons in Time of War of
August 12, 1949

General PRO^^SIONS (Part I)

The provisions in this part whicli are not com-
mon to t lie other conventions formulated at Geneva
are embodied in Articles 4, 5, and 6. Article 4
defines tlie persons who are entitled to claim pro-
1 tection under the convention. In general, the per-
sons protected are tliose who, in the case oi conflict
or of occupation, finds themselves in the hands of
a power of which they are not nationals. Article 5
deals with restrictions which may be placed on the
protection afforded by the convention in connection
with persons suspected of or engaged in activities
hostile to the security of the state or the occupying
power. Article 6 establishes the beginning and
end of the application of the convention. Appli-
cation begins at the outset of a conflict or as soon
as there is occupation. In the territory of parties
to the conflict it shall cease on the general close of
military operations. In case of occupied territory,
the application shall cease one year after the gen-
eral close of military operations. Should occupa-
tion continue after that time, the occupying power
will be bound for the duration of the occupation,
to the extent that such power exercises the func-
tions of government in that territory, by the pro-
visions of certain enumerated articles. These ar-
ticles contain provisions which should continue to
protect the inhabitants of occupied territory for
the duration of the occupation.

GENERt\L PROTECTION OF POPULuVTIONS AGAINST CER-
TAIN CONSEQUENCES OF WAR (PART U)

The articles in Part II are applicable to the
whole of the populations of countries in conflict;
they concern not only the relations between a
given state and aliens but also the relations be-
tween a given state and its own nationals. Article
14 envisages the establishment of hospital and
safety zones and localities so organized as to pro-
tect from the effects of war the wounded, sick and
; aged persons, children under fifteen, expectant
■ mothers, and mothers of children under seven.
' Article 15 permits the setting up of neutralized
zones in regions where fighting is taking place to
shelter wounded and sick combatants or noncom-
batants and civilian persons who take no part in
hostilities and perform no work of a military char-
acter. Articles 16 through 23 deal with the pro-
tection and treatment to be afforded the civilian
wounded and sick. They relate to the evacuation
of besieged or encircled areas, the protection to
which civilian hospitals are entitled, the status of
the hospital staff, the protection to be accorded the
land, sea, and air transport employed for the re-
moval of wounded and sick civilians, and the free
passage under certain conditions of consigiiments
of medical supplies, food, and clothing. Articles
24, 25, and 26 are concerned with special measures

relating to child welfare, family news and corre-
spondence, and dispersed families.

STATUS AND TREATMENT OF PROTECTED PERSONS
(PART III)

Part III constitutes the main portion of the
convention. It deals with two situations present-
ing fundamental differences, namely, that of aliens
in the territory of a belligerent state and that of
the population, whether national or alien, resident
in a country occupied by the enemy. It is divided
into five sections: (I) common provisions govern-
ing both of the above situations, (II) provisions
relative to aliens in the territory of a party to the
conflict, (III) provisions concerning occupied
territories, (IV) provisions relating to the status
of internees, and (V) provisions concerning infor-
mation bureaus and a central information agency.

Section I (Articles 27-84) provides that pro-
tected persons are entitled in all circumstances to
respect for their persons, honor, family rights,
religious convictions and practices, and manners
and customs. They shall at all times be humanely
treated. Women are to be especially protected.
The party to the conflict in whose hands protected
persons may be is responsible for the treatment
accorded to them by its agents, irrespective of any
individual responsibility whicli may be incurred.
Protected persons are to have every facility for
making application to Protecting Powers and re-
lief organizations. The use of physical or moral
coercion to obtain information is forbidden, and
the use of any measure of such a character as to
cause physical suffering or extermination is pro-
hibited. Collective penalties, reprisals, and tak-
ing of hostages are likewise prohibited.

Section II (Articles 35-46) provides that all
protected persons who may desire to leave the ter-
ritory at the outset of, or during a conflict, shall
be entitled to do so unless their departure is con-
trary to national interests of the state. If a pro-
tected person is refused permission to leave he
shall be entitled to have such refusal reconsidered
by an appropriate court or administrative board
designated for that purpose. Persons permitted
to leave may provide themselves with the neces-
sary funds for their journey and take with them a
reasonable amount of their effects, and departures
permitted shall be carried out under satisfactory
conditions as regards safety, hygiene, sanitation,
and food. Protected persons who are not repatri-
ated are to be treated in principle in the same way
as in time of peace. In any case, certain specific
rights are to be granted to them. They are to be
enabled to receive the individual or collective re-
lief that may be sent to them, to receive medical
attention and hospital treatment to the same ex-
tent as the nationals of the state concerned, to be
allowed to practice their religion, and to be au-
thorized to move from an area particularly ex-
posed to the dangers of war to the same extent as
the nationals of the state concerned. Protected
persons who, as a result of the war, have lost their

May 28, J95J

877

gainful employment shall be granted the oppor-
tunity to find paid employment and that oppor-
tunity shall, subject to security considerations,
be equal to that enjoyed by the nationals of the
power in whose territory they are. Protected per-
sons may be compelled to work only to the same
extent as nationals of the party to the conflict in
whose territory they are. The internment or
placing in assigned residence of protected persons
may be ordered only if the security of the Detain-
ing Power makes it absolutely necessary, and any
persons interned or placed in an assigned residence
are entitled to have such action reconsidered by
an appropriate court or administrative board of
the Detaining Power. Finally, protected persons
cannot be transferred to a power which is not a
party to the convention. Article 44 establishes
the principle that the Detaining Power shall not
automatically and in all respects treat as enemy
aliens solely on the basis of enemy nationality per-
sons who are bona fide refugees from an enemy
sttitc

Section III (Articles 47-78) sets forth rules
which are to govern the Occupying Power in its
treatment of protected persons in the territory
which is occupied by that Power. Protected per-
sons in occupied territory are not to be deprived
of any benefits of the convention by virtue of any
change introduced into the institutions or govern-
ment of the territory or by an annexation of the
whole or part of the occupied territory. An ap-
propriate procedure is to be established in order
to give persons who are not nationals of the power
whose territory is occupied an opportunity to leave
the territory. Individual or mass forcible trans-
fers and deportations are prohibited, except that
the Occupying Power may undertake total or par-
tial evacuation of a given area if the security of
the population or imperative military reasons so
demand. The Occupying Power shall facilitate
the proper working of all institutions devoted to
the care and education of children, take steps to
facilitate their identification, and make arrange-
ments, if local institutions are inadequate, to main-
tain and educate orphaned children. Protected
persons may not be compelled to serve in the
armed forces of the Occupying Power and com-
pulsory work is forbidden except when necessary
for needs of the army of occupation, for public
utility services, or for the feeding, sheltering,
transportation, or health of the population of the
occupied country. Destruction of personnel or
real property not made absolutely necessary by
military operations is prohibited. The Occupy-
ing Power has the duty to insure, so far as it is
reasonably able to do so, the food and medical sup-
plies of the population and may requisition by
payment of fair value such supplies only for the
occupation forces and then only if the require-
ments of the civilian jiopulation are taken into
account. The Occupying Power is also obligated
to maintain, to the extent of its ability reasonably
to do so, and in cooperation with the local author-

878

itieSj the medical and hospital establishments and
services, public health and hygiene in the occupied
territory. Relief schemes and consignments for
the population must be accepted by the Occupying
Power and by other parties to the conflict where
certain conditions are satisfied. Distribution of
relief consignments shall be carried out with the
cooperation and under the supervision of the Pro-
tecting Power. Relief societies sliall be permitted
to pursue their humanitarian activities.

With respect to penal legislation, it is provided
that penal laws of the occupied territory shall re-
main in force with the exception that they may be
repealed or suspended by the Occupying Power
in cases where they constitute a threat to its se-
curity or an obstacle to the application of the con-
vention. Local courts are to continue to function
in respect of all ofi'enses covered by these laws.
The Occupying Power may enact penal laws
which are essential to insure its security, to enable
it to fulfill its obligations under the convention,
and to maintain orderly government, but these
laws cannot come into force until published. In
case of offenses against these laws, the Occupying
Power may hand over the accused to its properly
constituted, nonpolitical military courts which
must sit in the occupied country. The courts
shall apply only those laws which were applicable
prior to the offense and which are in accordance
with general principles of law, in particular the
principle that the penalty shall be proportionate
to the offense. Persons who commit an offense in-
tended solely to harm the Occupying Power but
which does not constitute an attempt on life or
limb of members of the occupying forces, a grave
collective danger, or seriously damage property of
the occupying forces shall be liable only to intern-
ment or simple imprisonment. The Occupying
Power may impose the death penalty upon pro-
tected persons only in cases of espionage, sabotage,
or intentional offenses which have caused the
death of one or more persons, and then only if
such offenses were punishable by death under the
law of the occupied territory. Accused persons
shall have the right of a regular trial, the right to
present evidence necessary to their defense, the
right of counsel, and the right of appeal provided
for by the laws applied by the court. In no case
shall persons condemned to death be deprived of
the right of petition for pardon or reprieve, and
execution of the death sentence shall not take place
before the expiration of at least six months from
the date of receipt by the Protecting Power of the
notification of the final judgment. Protected per-
sons accused of offenses shall be detained in the
occupied country and if convicted shall serve their
sentences therein. At the close of occupation, pro-
tected persons who have been accused of offenses
or convicted by the courts in occupied territory
shall be handed over with the relevant records to
the authorities of the liheratod territory.

Section IV (Articles 79-i;?r)) contains the regu-
lations for the treatment of internees. In mnny

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

respects these are similar and related to the pro-
visions governing the treatment of prisoners con-
tained in the convention on prisoners of war. The
regulations deal with the places of internment;
food and clothing; hygiene and medical attention ;
religious, intellectual, and physical activities; per-
sonal property and financial resources; adminis-
tration and discipline; relations with the exterior;
penal and disciplinary sanctions; transfers of in-
ternees; deatlis; and release, repatriation, and
accommodation in neutral countries.

Section V (Articles 136-141) relating to infor-
mation bureaux and a Central Information
Agency contains provisions similar to the provi-
sions on the same subject embodied in the pris-
oners of war convention.

U.S. Reports Return of
World War 1 1 Prisoners of War

Communication From, Ambassador Austin
to Secretary-General Lie, dated May i, 1951

The Representative of the United States to the
United Nations pi'esents his compliments to the
i Secretary-General of the United Nations and has
j the honor to refer to the Secretary-General's note
! SOA 417/5/02, dated February 23, 1951, regard-
ing the resolution adopted by the General As-
; sembly on December 14, 1950, concerning measures
i for the peaceful solution of the problem of prison-
I ers of war (Doc. A/1749).^ The Secretary-Gen-
\ eral states that he would appreciate receiving any
information which this Government might be in
a position to furnish with respect to (a) names of
World War II prisoners of war still in custody,
reasons for which they are still detained and
places in which they are detained, and (b) names
of prisoners of war who died while in custody,
as well as date and cause of death and manner
and place of burial in each case.

The Representative of the United States is
pleased to inform the Secretary-General that the
United States does not have any World War II
prisoners of war in its custody. Tlie United
States progi-am of repatriation of prisoners of
war was completed by June 30, 1947. A list is
enclosed giving names and other information re-
garding the nineteen individual prisoners of war
who had been under sentence tor post-capture
crimes and were repatriated after that date.^

With respect to section (b) relating to deaths
of prisoner of war while in United States custody,
the Secretary-General is informed that full details
concerning serious illnesses, deaths and burials of
World War II prisoners of war were promptly
furnished the home countries of the prisoners of
war at the time through the protecting powers and
the International Committee of the Red Cross.
However, since receipt of the Secretary-General's

' Bulletin of Jan. 8, 1951, p. 73.

note under reference a list has been compiled,
copies of which are enclosed, giving names of and
infoi-mation regarding prisoners of war who died
while in custody in the United States.- Owing to
the pressure of work on the enemy Prisoner-of-
War Information Bureau resulting from United
Nations operations in Korea, it has not thus far
been possible to compile from the several million
individual prisoner-of-war files a similar list of
prisoners of war who died in various theaters of
operation and were buried overseas. These files
will be made available at any time to the United
Nations Commission on Prisoners of War.

In connection with both of the above points, it
should be noted that the provisions of the Geneva
Prisoner-of-War Convention of July 27, 1929 were,
from the beginning of United States participation
in the war, continuously given effect in respect of
the United States. Pursuant to this Convention,
during the war period and afterward, while the
United States had prisoners of war in its custody,
representatives of the International Committee of
the Red Cross had access to prisoner-of-war camps
and to prisoners of war in United States custody.
Representatives of protecting powers chosen by
the home comitries of prisoners of war also had
access to the camps and the prisoners of war. Thus
these representatives were enabled to verify the
information furnished concerning their identity
and the camps in which they were held and to
observe the treatment which the prisoners of war
received.

All German, Japanese and Italian nationals
who were convicted of war crimes by any United
States tribunals remained in, or were promptly
returned to their home countries for incarceration,
where they are allowed communication facilities
and may be visited by their families. The names
of and other pertinent information concerning
these war criminals have been published, and will
be made available on request to the United Na-
tions Commission on Prisoners of War.

In the event that the United Nations Commis-
sion on Prisoners of War, provided for in the Gen-
eral Assembly Resolution under reference, should
wish to obtain information concerning the United
States program of repatriation of World War II
prisoners of war, or any other information con-
cerning such prisoners of war while they were in
United States custody, the United States Govern-
ment will be happy to make available to it all
pertinent records.

The Representative of the United States further
assures the Secretary-General that in addition to
supplying all necessary information, the Govern-
ment of the United States will grant to the United
Nations Commission on Prisoners of War right of
access to the United States and to areas under its
jurisdiction and will cooperate fully with the
Commission in all aspects of its work in accord-
ance with the resolution under reference.

" Not printed.

May 28, 1951

879

May 28, 1951

Index

Vol. XXIV, No. 621

American Republics

Cordell Hull Foundation Furthers Good

Neighbor Policy 860

COSTA RICA: U.S. Consular Agency at Quepos

Closed 851

DOMINICAN REPUBLIC: Torquay Protocol Con-
cessions Effective. June 6, 1951 862

Arms and Armed Forces

Belgium Sends More Forces to Korea .... 862
Canadian Infantry Troops Arrive in Korea . . 862
Geneva Conventions Transmitted to Senate . . 866
Italian Senate Approves Contribution to NAT

Defense (Acheson) 845

Shipments Embargo to People's Republic of
China:
General Assembly Resolution, Text .... 849

Statements (Gross) 848

Status of Offers of Military Aid for Korea . . 861

Asia

CHINA:

Shipments Embargo to People's Republic:

General Assembly Resolution. Text . . . 849

Statements (Gross) 848

U.S. Policy (Dulles, Rusk before China In-
stitute, N.Y.) 843,846

INDOCHINA: U.S. Legation at Vientiane, Laos,

Opened 851

IRAN: U.S. Position on Oil Situation .... 851
JAPAN: Peace Treaty, U.S. Analyzes U.S.S.R.
Comments:

Remarks by U.S.S.R 856

U.S. Memorandum to U.S.S.R 852

KOREA:

Belgium Sends Additional Forces 862

Canadian Infantry Troops Arrive 862

Military Aid to U.N., Status of Offers ... 861
Shipments Embargo to People's Republic of
China:
General Assembly Resolution, Text . . . 849
Statements (Gross) 848

Canada

GATT: Torquay Protocol Concessions Effective,

June 6, 1951 862

25th Infantry Troops Arrive in Korea .... 862

Communism

Soviet Action in China (Dulles, Rusk before

China Institute. N.Y.) 843,846

Congress

Geneva Conventions for Protection of War Vic-
tims: Message of Transmission (Truman):
Secretary's Report (Acheson); Commen-
taries 866. 868

Legislation Listed 860

Europe

BELGIUM: Additional Forces to Korea . . . 862
BENELUX: Torquay Protocol Concessions

(GATT) Effective, June 6, 1951 862

FRANCE: Torquay Protocol Concessions (GATT)

Effective 862

ITALY: Italian Senate Approves Contribution

to NAT Defense (Acheson) 845

U.K.: U.S. Position on Iranian Oil Situation . . 851
U.S.S.R.:

Participation In CFM Meeting Questioned

(Jessup) 859

U.S. Analyzes Comments on Japan Peace
Treaty :

Remarks by U.S.S.R 856

U.S. Memorandum 852

Foreign Service

Consular Offices: Quepos, Costa Rica, Consular

Agency Closed 851

Missions: Vientiane, Laos, Legation Opened . . 861

Health

International Children's Emergency Fund Activ-
ities: Brief Report 863

International Meetings

Council of Foreign Ministers (CFM) : U.S.S.R.

Participation Questioned (Jessup) . . . 859

U.S. Delegation to Employment and Develop-
ment Commission (ECOSOC), 6th session . 862

Labor

Employment-Development Commlssson

(ECOSOC), 6th session 862

North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)

Italian Senate Approves Contribution to Defense

Budget (Acheson) 845

Presidential Documents

MESSAGE TO SENATE: Geneva Conventions . 866

Prisoners of War

Geneva Conventions Transmitted to Senate . . 866
U.S. Reports Return of World War II Prisoners

of War (Austin Letter to Lie) 879

Protection of U.S. Nationals and Property

Geneva Conventions Transmitted to Senate . . 866

Publications

Recent Releases 863

Strategic Materials

Shipments Embargo to People's Republic of
China:
General Assembly Resolution, Text .... 849
Statements (Gross) 848

U.S. Position on Iranian Oil Situation . . . 851

Trade

GATT: Protocol Concessions (Torquay) Effec-
tive, June 6, 1951 862

Treaties and Other International Agreements

GATT: Torquay Protocol Concessions Effective,

June 6, 1951 862

Geneva Conventions for Protection of War Vic-
tims: Message of Transmission (Truman);
Secretary's Report (Acheson); Commen-
taries 866. 868

JAPAN: Peace Treaty, U.S. Analysis of Soviet
Comments :

U.S. Memorandum 852

U.S.S.R. Remarks 856

United Nations

Belgium Sends More Forces to Korea .... 862
Canadian Infantry Troops Arrive In Korea . . 862
International Children's Emergency Fund Activ-
ities: Brief Report 863

Military Aid to U.N. for Korea, Status of Offers . 861
Shipments Embargo to People's Republic of
China:

General Assembly Resolution, Text .... 849

Statements (Gross) 848

U.S. Reports Return of World War II Prisoners

of War (Austin Letter to Lie) 879

U.S. in U.N. (Weekly summary) 864

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 845,860,866

Austin, Warren R 879

Dulles, John Foster 843

Gross, Ernest A 848

Jessup, Philip C 859

Lie, Trygvie 862,879

McDermott, Michael 848

Rockingham. Brig. John M 862

Rusk, Dean 846

Stineblower, Leroy D 862

Truman, President Harry S 866

van Langenhove, Fernand 882

U, S. GOVCRHMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 19BI

tjAe/ u)eha7^fmeni/ .<w c/taie/

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR A MUTUAL SECURITY

PROGRAM • Message of the President to the Congress . 883

TASKS CONFRONTING THE INDIAN GOVERNMENT •

by Assistant Secretary McGhee 892

A GLOBAL FOREIGN POLICY • by Francis H. Russell . 895

COMMUNIQUE ON SETTLEMENT OF GERMAN

EXTERNAL DEBTS 901

For index see back cover

Vol. XXIV, No. 622
June 4, 1951

^^BNT o«.

Q. S. SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMEffTF

s. ^«w^y.. bulletin

Vol. XXIV, No. 622 . Publication 4233
June 4, 1951

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Washington 26, D.O.

pbicb;

e2 luues, domestic $7.60, foreign $10.26
Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has

been approved by the Director of the

Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and Items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
oy State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government tcith information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

lecommendations for a Mutual Security Program

^lessage of the President to the Congress ^

Released to the press by the White House May 24]

Three weeks ago I transmitted to the Congress
, request for 60 billion dollars for the United
States defense establishment during the fiscal year
nding June 30, 1952.

1 am now recommending for the fiscal year end-
tig June 30, 1952, a Mutual Security Program as
ollows :

(1) Military assistance to other free nations
11 the amount of 6.25 billion dollars.

(2) Economic assistance to other free nations
11 the amount of 2.25 billion dollars, primarily to
ujjport expanded defense efforts abroad.

These amounts compare with 5.3 billion dollars
ppropriated for military assistance, and 3 billion
ollars for economic assistance, in the current
iscal year.

xtent and Design of the Program

The program for our own Armed Forces and
lis Mutual Security Program interlock. The one
uilds upon the other. The purpose of each is the
ecurity of the United States — the security of
Linerican lives and homes against attack and the
ecurity of our rights and liberties as law-abiding
lembers of the world community.

Our country ha? greater economic strength and
irger potential military power than any other
ation on earth. But we do not and we should
,ot stand alone. We cannot maintain our civiliza-
on, if the rest of the world is split up, subjugated,
nd organized against us by the Kremlin.

This is a very real and terrible danger. But it
an be overcome. To do so, we must work with
le rest of the free world : we must join other
ree nations in common defense plans; we must
oncert our economic strength with theirs for the
ommon good ; and we must help other free coun-

H. doc. 147, 82(1 Cong.. 1st sess.
artnient of State publication 4236.

line 4, 1951

Also printed as De-

tries to build the military and economic power
needed to make impossible the Communist dreams
of world conquest.

This is hard common sense and sound economy.
The dollars spent under the Mutual Security Pro-
gram will build more strength in support of our
security than we could build at home with the
same expenditure of funds.

This Mutual Security Program brings together
our various foreign-aid programs, including the
arms aid of the Mutual Defense Assistance Pro-
gram, economic assistance for Europe^ — now being
directed primarily to support of rearmament — and
our economic aid to underdeveloped areas under
the Point 4 concept. Every one of these programs
has proved its worth.

In jDreparing the present recommendations, each
of these separate programs has been revised in
the light of the emergency situation that exists in
the world and the extraordinary demands that are
being placed on our Nation. The amounts, the
geographical areas, and the purposes of the aid
have all been chosen in order to bring about the
greatest possible increase in the security of the
United States and the whole free world.

Under this program, the United States will send
tanks, guns, and planes to a number of free coun-
tries, in Europe and other parts of the world,
which are building up armed forces against the
threat of Communist attack. We will also send
economic help to a number of countries — economic
help ranging from machinery and materials with
which to make weapons, to seeds, medicine, and
technical assistance with which to conquer com-
munism's allies of starvation and sickness.

This program was designed with three major
characteristics of the Soviet threat in mind:

First, the Soviet threat is world-wide. In Eu-
rope, in Asia, in our own hemisphere, the strategy
of the Kremlin concentrates on trying to pick off
the free countries one by one, so that their resources
and people can be organized against the rest of the

883

free world. That is why the Mutual Security Pro-
gram includes essential help to free countries all
around the world which are exposed to the danger
of internal or external Communist pressures.

Second, the Soviet threat is total, it affects every
form of human endeavor. Communist attack may
come in the form of armies marching across fron-
tiers; or it may come in the form of internal sub-
version. Economic warfare, psychological war-
fare, political infiltration, sabotage, the marching
of armies — tliese are interchangeable aggressive
weapons wliich the Soviet rulers use singly or to-
gether according to shifting calculations of great-
est advantage. That is why the free world must
concentrate upon building not only military
strength, but also economic, political, and moral
strength. That is why the Mutual Security Pro-
gram includes economic as well as military assist-

ance.

Third, the Soviet threat is of indefinite duration.
The free world must take into account both the
possibility that the Soviet rulers may soon start
all-out armed aggression, and the possibility that
they may carry on their aggressive tactics for many
years by measures short of all-out war.

That is why the task of the free world now is
not only to build defenses urgently in the immedi-
ate future, but also to prepare for the long pull.
We of the free countries must make preparations
now so that when our armed forces have been
built up we will be able to maintain them for years,
if necessary, and at the same time grow in under-
lying economic strength more soundly and more
rapidly than the Soviet dictatorship.

Resources Provided by the Program

The free nations have the resources and the will
to overcome all these aspects of the Soviet threat.
Together, our potential strength is enormous. The
free nations have 75 percent of the world's indus-
trial capacity and most of the world's raw mate-
rials.

Most important of all, free men, all around the
world, have the determination to stop Communist
aggression and to achieve peace. The Communist
aggression in Korea dispelled any lingering doubts
that the Kremlin is willing to threaten the peace
of the world.

The job before the free nations is to organize
their potential resources and together to convert
them into actual military and economic strength.
Our associates in the free world are now making
vigorous efforts to this end. The Mutual Security
Program will provide them with resources re-
quired to supplement and make effective their ef-
forts. It is not a xerogram under which we will
carry the rest of the free world on our backs. It
could not succeed if that were the case. The pro-
gram is founded on the principle of mutual effort
and the knowledge that we can help effectively
only those who help themselves.

884

The proposed aid is related to the resources
available to each recipient country, its economic
stability, and the burdens it has assumed. Our aid
will be provided only for essential needs that the
country cannot meet by its own efforts. The need
for aid will be continuously reviewed in the light
of each country's performance and of economic and
political changes.

The bulk of the assistance under the Mutual
Security Program will be military equipment
Most of this will go to our partners in the North
Atlantic Treaty, but, in addition, substantial quan
titles will be supplied to nations in Asia and the
Middle East. Military equipment to supplement
their own will be provided to countries when thej
have organized forces which require this equip-
ment in order to become effective fighting units
With our assistance, the free world as a whole wil
be able to strengthen its military defenses rapidly
Without such aid, the necessary build-up would b«
dangerously delayed if not impossible.

In addition to supplying military equipment
this program will provide economic aid for a num-i I
ber of countries. In most countries in Europe
and in some countries in other parts of the world
this economic aid will enable the recipients U
carry on larger defense programs than wouk
otherwise be possible. In a few cases, some fur
ther economic help is necessary to continue prog
ress toward recovery. In Asia and other under
developed areas, this program will enable th
people to make headway against conditions o
poverty and stagnation which are principal asset
of Soviet infiltration.

The condition of the people in the underdevel
oped areas would be a matter of humanitaria)
concern even if our national security were no
involved. Major improvement in tliese condition
is necessarily a long-term process, in which th
countries' own efforts, private investment, am
public developmental loans should play the larges
part. Carefully selected projects of technical as
sistance and initial development on a grant basis
however, can speed up this process and pi'ovid
tangible benefits even in the short run.

The underdeveloped countries in Asia, Soutl
America, and Africa produce strategic material
which are essential to the defense and economi
health of the free world. Production of these mai
terials must be increased. Loans and develop!
mental help are needed. The development of thm
resources of those countries helps them by raisinjilfi
their standard of living and increasing their re
sistance to Connnunist subversion, and helps thi
whole free world by increasing the supply of raw fe
materials essential to defense and to an expandin|
world economy.

To enable the underdeveloped areas to expam
their production of strategic materials, they mus k
be assured of being able to obtain the essentia
supplies and equipment they need from our couni
try. Indeed, our entire security program will b»

Department of State Bulleth

^

^1

successful only if the materials available to the free
world are distributed in the way that will best
contribute to the build-up of total free world
pt length. The Mutual Security Program, like the
]>rogram for our own Ai-med Forces, has been ex-
amined from the standpoint of the availability of
supplies, materials, and equipment tliat are re-
(|uired to carry it out. We believe these resources
cm and must be made available out of the expand-
u\'^ production of the free world.

In each area, tlie United States aid which I
propose will be a small part of the total resources
:nailable for military and economic purposes —
lint that small proportion is crucial. In all these
areas of the world, larger amounts of United
Slates assistance could be put to good use and
would pay real dividends. But I have limited
the assistance I am recommending to what is abso-
lutely necessary, under the emergency conditions
we are in today, to help those countries build es-
■ sential military and economic strength.

Division of Funds

I propose that the total funds required under the
Mutual Security Program be divided as follows:

Mutual Security Program, 1952

[In millions]

Economic Military

ETROPE 1,650 5,240

MIDDLE EAST AND NORTHERN AFRICA 125 415

ASIA 375 555

LATIN AMERICA 22 40

Administrative Expenses 78

I 2, 250 6, 250

I The military aid for Greece and Turkey is in-
cluded in the amount for the Middle East. The
amount of the economic aid for Europe includes
the economic aid for Greece and Turkey. For con-
venience, the estimated requiremont for adminis-
trative expenses for the entire program — approxi-
mately 78 million dollars is shown as a single figure
under economic aid.

The amounts requested for economic aid include
13 million dollars to be furnished the United Na-
tions and the Organization of American States for
their technical assistance programs.

The economic, as well as the military aid recom-
mended, is grant assistance to be provided through
appropriated funds. Loans by the Export-Import
Bank will also continue to play an important role
in our eiforts to assist the economic progress of
friendly countries. In order that full use may be
made of the opportunities for loans, especially to
develop strategic materials, I recommend that the
lending authority of the Export-Import Bank be
I increased bv 1 billion dollars. Not all of the in-
creased lending authority, of course, will be used in
the coming year.

With this program of assistance to the total free

world effort, we will move forward rapidly toward
a situation giving reasonable assurance against
aggression.

Moreover, the Mutual Security Program is de-
signed to taper off as soon as our safety will permit.
The creation of effective military forces in being,
coupled with increased productivity, will make
it possible, within a few years, for most areas of the
free world to maintain their defenses and sustain
their economies without further grant assistance
from this country.

The creation of this strength will provide a de-
fensive shield against aggression for all the free
world. Ever since the war, the free nations have
been going forward to develop their resources and
improve the lot of their people. Ever since the
war, the free nations have been working together
to create a world community in which each nation,
respecting world law, can play its distinctive and
honorable role.

The only kind of war we seek is the good old fight
against man's ancient enemies — poverty, disease,
hunger, and illiteracy. This is an effort which
makes use of the great elements of our strength —
our economic power, our science, our organizing
ability, our political principles, our enthusiasm as
free men with faith in the future. This is an
effort to build, not to destroy ; to grow in freedom
and justice and mutual respect; to replace the force
of arms with the force of peaceful change.

We have no doubt about the outcome of this
free world effort. But we must be strong and we
must have strong partners if we are to discourage
new acts of violence by the power-hungry, and to
win the opportunity to carry on our work of peace-
ful progress.

For the time being, therefore, the emphasis in
our cooperation with the other free nations must
be on building our defensive shield against ag-
gression. This shield threatens no one. It will
never be used for aggression. But it will be used
instantly for defense.

The strengthening of the free world along these
lines is the best hope of producing changes in the
policies of the Soviet Union without a world war.
Military defense forces will put a stop to the
Kremlin's hope of easy conquest. Growing pros-
perity in the free countries will fiiistrate Soviet
]3olitical warfare. In these circumstances, the
Soviet rulers will face growing internal pressures.
The peoples under Soviet control will grow more
and more restive under the burden of an aggres-
sive and futile policy of hostility toward the whole
world. The rulers of the Soviet Union will be
forced by these pressures to abandon their policy
of aggi'ession.

It is too early to predict how or when this policy
will change. But this program of mutual security
will help to bring about such a change. It is cer-
tain that the united vigor and cooperative action
of the free world can produce such results if we
act in time. No system based on slavery and terror

June 4, 1951

885

can long withstand the tremendous human ener-
gies that are released by the advance of freedom.

Critical Areas To Be Defended

EUROPE

For the security of the United States, for the
survival of freedom in the world, free Europe is
a critical area that must be defended.

The people of Europe free from Soviet control
number 300 million. They operate a great indus-
trial plant, second only to our own. They occupy
a uniquely strategic location. They are at once
the most tempting prize for Soviet ambitions and
our strongest allies in the world struggle for
freedom.

The loss of Europe to the Soviet Union would
not only be tragic in itself; it would also result
in a tremendous shift of world power. It would
compel us to convert the United States into an
isolated garrison state.

That is why, 3 years ago, when the countries
of Europe were trembling on the brink of economic
collapse, the United States launched its progi-am
of aid for European recovery.

That is why, 2 years ago, the United States and
Canada joined 10 Western European countries —
Iceland. Great Britain, Norway, Denmark, the
Netherlands, Belgium, Luxembourg, France. Por-
tugal, and Italy — in the North Atlantic Treaty,
declaring that an attack on one would be consid-
ered an attack on all.

The North Atlantic Treaty reflects the basic
fact of international life that the freedom of West-
ern Europe and the freedom of North America are
inseparable.

Under that Treaty, defense plans have been de-
veloped by the military leaders of the North At-
lantic Treaty countries. Under General Eisen-
hower's central command, a unified army, navy,
and air force is being organized for the defense
of Western Europe, composed of national forces
assigned by individual nations.

The key element in the defense of free Europe
is the ability to hold on the ground. Western Eu-
rope lacks the insulation of wide oceans. Major
preparations must therefore be made to hold its
lands — ^by well-armed manpower on the ground,
by the great striking force of airpower, and by a
seapower which commands its surrounding watei-s
and important lines of communication.

The European countries themselves are provid-
ing the great majority of the forces needed. The
United States also has Army, Navy, and Air Force
units in Europe, which add to the power of the
combined defense forces, and more units will move
there, both from this country and from Canada.

Our Euro]iean partnei-s in the North Atlantic
Treaty now have over 2 million men under arms,
plus large numbers of trained reserves. The bulk
of Western Europe's armed forces are pledged

886

to General Eisenhower's command. Moreover,
some of these countries — notably France and Brit-
ain— have sizable forces fighting in Malaya, Indo-
china, and Korea, and have other important
overseas defense commitments. The combat power
of Western European forces is rising steadily as
equipment becomes available and periods of mili-
tary service are lengthened.

Rearmament will cause a severe drain on the
Western European countries. Through their own
eiforts, national and collective, and with the vital
assistance of the Marshall Plan, Western Europe
has made a remarkable record of economic re-
covery since 1947. Production and trade have been
restored and financial conditions have been greatly
improved. In the free countries of Europe, com-
munism has been checked and thrown back. The
original goals of the Marshall Plan have been
largely achieved.

But the Western European countries are by no
means yet free from the after effects of the most
destructive war in history.

They are living on a very narrow economic mar-
gin. Whereas our standard of living is nearly
50 percent higher than it was before World War
II, theirs has only recently reached their prewar
levels, which were much lower than ours.

The Eui-opean countries cannot move rapidly
into siifficient lai-ge-scale military production to
provide all the equipment required for the essen-
tial expansion of their forces. Over the next
few years, they do expect to increase their pro-
duction of military equipment. In the coming
fiscal year, it will be more than double the pre-
Korean rate. But the most they can do will not
be enough to equip their armed forces on the time
schedule necessary for the common defense.

The United States, with its huge and flexible
industrial capacity and greater margin for divert-
ing resources to military production, can and
should continue to supply military equipment to
our allies in Western Europe. In this way, many
divisions, air squadrons, and naval vessels can be
brought to active duty in the next year or two
which otherwise can not be.

In the immediately coming years, the crucial
need is to jiroduce the initial equipment for a
very rapid build-up of forces. The expanding!
European productive capacity will contribute in-
ci'easingly to this build-up. With this capacity,
Euro]ic should be able to meet the smaller con-
tinuing maintenance and replacement require-
ments without substantial outside aid.

The militarj' aid for Europe I am recommending
amounts to 5.3 billion dollars. I also recommendi
economic assistance for this area for the coming
year in the amount of 1.05 billion dollars.

Because of the degree of economic recovery
which has been attained, the total economic as-
sistance I am requesting for Eurojiean countries
next year — despite the large new burdens of Eu-
I'opean rearmament — is substantially reduced from

Department of State Bulletin

r

t III' amount we have provided in the current fiscal
year.

However, in the free countries of Europe which
are rearniinj;, the proposed increases in military
production and the building of armed forces will
require large diversions of manpower and other
economic resources away from production of goods
for consumption, for investment, and for export.
To carrying these greatly enlarged military bur-
dens, our partners in Europe will be taking meas-
ures to increase taxes and mobilize their resources
through economic controls. Despite determined
efforts in this direction they will need some con-
tinuing economic assistance.

Some aid is also proposed for Western Germany,
which by its support of occupation forces is assist-
ing the defense effort and which may later make
more direct contributions to the common defense.
In Austria and Trieste, which cannot directly con-
tribute to the rearmament effort, but whose econ-
omies are handicapped by special difficulties,
economic aid must also be continued to maintain
political stability. Certain economic assistance
for Yugoslavia is proposed to help meet its mini-
mum requirements in maintaining strength against
the threat of Soviet imperialism.

This economic aid is critical — that is, it is the
essential condition of an increase in European
military effort. It should make possible European
production many times larger than the amount of
the support given.

MIDDLE EAST

The countries of the Middle East are, for the
most part, less developed industrially than those
of Europe. They are, nevei-theless, of great im-
portance to the security of the entire free world.
This region is a vital link of land, sea, and air com-
munications between Europe, Asia, and Africa.
In the free nations of the Middle East, lie half of
the oil reserves of the world.

No part of the world is more directly exposed to
Soviet pressure. The Kremlin has lost no oppor-
tunity to stir these troubled waters, as the postwar
record amply demonstrates. Civil war in Greece ;
pressure for Turkish concessions on the Darda-
nelles; sponsorship of the rebellious Tudeh party
in Iran ; furthering of factional strife in the Arab
States and Israel — all reflect a concerted design
for the extension of Soviet domination to this vital
area.

There is no simple formula for increasing sta-
bility and security in the Middle East. With the
help of American military and economic assist-
ance, Soviet pressure has already been firmly
resisted in Turkey and the Soviet-inspired guer-
rilla war has been decisively defeated in Greece.
But the pressure against the Middle East is unre-
mitting. It can be overcome only by a continued
build-up of armed defenses and the fostering of
economic development. Only through such meas-
ures can these peoples advance toward stability

and improved living conditions, and be assured
that their aims can best be achieved through
strengthening their associations in the free world.

To these ends, I am recommending 415 million
dollars in military aid, for Greece, Turkey, and
Iran; a portion of this aid will be available for
other Middle Eastern nations if necessary. I am
also recommending 125 million dollars in economic
aid for Middle Eastern countries, exclusive of
Greece and Turkey for whom economic aid is
provided as part of the pi'ogram for Europe. This
amount also includes programs of technical assist-
ance to Libya, Liberia, and Ethiopia, three inde-
pendent states of Africa whose economic j^rob-
lems are similar to those of the Middle Eastern
countries.

Continuing military aid for Greece and Turkey
will make possible the further strengthening of
these countries' large and well-trained armed
forces, which have already displayed their valiant
resolution in the fight for freedom in Korea. In
Iran, continuing military aid is required to help
build internal security and defense, together with
economic aid to help sustain the Iranian economy
and give impetus to the much needed longer-term
process of economic development for the benefit
of the Iranian people.

In the Arab States and Israel, the fundamental
requirement is a regional approach to the basic
problems of economic development. This is ur-
gently needed to reduce existing tensions, espe-
cially through the orderly settlement of homeless
refugees. The program ifor the Arab States will
expand needed food production through the de-
velopment of land and water resources. The pro-
gram for Israel will help that country to maintain
her economy during an especially trying period of
her national development. At the same time, the
program of assistance to the Arab refugees from
Palestine, which will necessarily extend beyond
the coming fiscal year, has the threefold purpose of
assisting the settlement of refugees, of strengthen-
ing those states wherein they settle, and assisting
both Israel and the Arab States by removing this
threat to the peace of the area.

The program I am now proposing is a balanced
program for strengthening the security of the Mid-
dle East. It will make a solid contribution to our
hopes for peace.

ASIA AND THE PACIFIC

In Asia, in a vast arc stretching from Afghan-
istan to Korea, free countries are struggling to
meet Communist aggression in all its many forms.
Some of these countries are battling the Commu-
nist armies of Soviet satellites; some are engaged
in bitter civil strife against Communist-led guer-
rillas; all of them face the immediate danger of
Communist subversion.

Soviet intentions with regard to these countries
are unmistakably clear. Using the weapons of

June 4, 1951

887

subversion, false propaganda and civil war, the
Kremlin has already reduced China to the status
of a satellite. The Soviet rulers have turned their
satellite armies loose on the Republic of Korea.
Communist rebellion is raging in Indochina. In
Burma, the Philippines, and other places, Commu-
nist-inspired groups are stirring up internal dis-
order. In all countries, they are trying to exploit
deep-seated economic difficulties — poverty, illiter-
acy, and disease.

This campaign threatens to absorb the man-
power and the vital resources of the East into the
Soviet design of world conquest. It threatens to
deprive the free nations of some of their most
vitally needed raw materials. It threatens to turn
more of the peaceful millions of the East into
armies to be used as pawns at the disposal of the
Kremlin.

Aside from immediate consideration of secu-
rity, the continued independence of these nations
is vital to the future of the free world. Many of
these nations are new to self-government. They
have dedicated themselves to the ideals of na-
tional independence, of human liberty, and social
progress. Their hundreds of millions of citizens
are eager for justice and liberty and a stake in the
future.

These countries demonstrate the power and
vitality of the ideals of our own American Revolu-
tion; they mark the sweeping advance across the
world of the concepts of freedom and brotherhood.
To lose these countries to the rulers of the Kremlin
would be more than a blow to our military security
and our economic life. It would be a terrible de-
feat for the ideals of freedom — with grave spirit-
ual consequences for men everywhere who share
our faith in freedom.

All these considerations make it essential for the
United States to help the free countries of Asia in
their struggle to make good their independence
and bring economic and social progress to their
people. Where the Governments of tnese countries
are striving to establish free and stable political
institutions, to build up their military defenses,
and to raise the standard of living above the level
of bare subsistence, we can and should give them
assistance. We cannot replace their own strong
efforts, but we can supplement them.

This Mutual Security Program is intended to
do that. On the military side, it will supply cer-
tain of the Asian countries with items of military
equipment and the training they need for their
defense forces. On the economic side, it will pro-
vide a number of the Asian countries with the most
urgently needed commodities, machinery, and
tools, and with technical advice in such fields as
agriculture, industry, health, and governnieiUal
administration.

The assistance I am recommending for Asian
countries, t>r>f> million dollai-s in military aid and
375 million dollars in economic aid, is so planned
as to meet the most pressing needs in the various

countries, and is intended to provide the crucial
margin of resources which will enable them to
move forward.

Military assistance under this program will go
to the Chinese armies on Formosa, to help keep
that island out of the hands of Communist China.
It will go to Indochina, where over 100,000 French
troops are fighting side-by-side with the forces of
Viet Nam, Laos, and Cambodia against Commu-
nist-led forces. It will go to the Philippines and
to Thailand, to help build forces strong enough
to insure internal security and discourage outside
attack. Some of these military assistance funds
will also be available for allocation to other coun-
tries in the area if a critical need arises.

The military aid under this program will sup-
plement other military efforts against commu-
nism in Asia. The countries we will be aiding,
and a number of others, are supporting military
forces with their own funds. France is supplying
the largest part of the military supplies needed
in Indochina, and Britain is supplying her forces
which are fighting guerrillas in the Malay States.
The substantial military aid we are giving to the
forces of the Republic of Korea is included in
the budget for our military services.

The struggle for security and peace in Asia is
far more than a military matter. In many of the
Asian countries, including all the countries which
need military aid, economic assistance is also
required.

These countries urgently need help in their ef-
forts to overcome the desperate conditions of pov-
erty, illiteracy, and disease which are the heart
of the Asian problem. It is a terrible fact that
poverty is increasing rather than diminishing in
much of Asia. Millions of people exist at bare
subsistence levels.

The Asian countries are doing what they can on
their own to meet this problem. An encouraging
proposal affecting a number of these countries is
the Colombo Plan for technical assistance and
economic development worked out under the aus-
pices of the British Commonwealth. In addition,
some aid to Asian countries will be furnished
through the programs of the United Nations.

These sources of aid alone will not, however,
suffice to reverse the downward trend in living
standards. Aid from the United States is also
necessary.

Sizable programs of technical assistance and
capital development are now being carried on by
the Economic Cooperation Administration in some
of these countries under the Point 4 concept. A
portion of the funds I am now recommending will
provide for continuing these programs and ex-
tending them to other countries. These funils will
be used to send out technical experts and equip-
ment needed to improve health, agriculture, truus-
portution, and comnuuiications services and assist
in the development of natural resources.

In addition, the funds I am now recommending

888

Department of State Bulletin

will provide necessary economic support for de-
fense programs in Indochina, Formosa, and the
Pliilippines.

Finally, the economic aid funds I am requesting
fur Asia include 112.5 million dollars for the
United Nations Korean Reconstruction A<iency.
Together witli 50 million dollars which are likely
(o remain unexpended from funds available for
Korean aid for the present fiscal year, these funds
will be made available to the Agency at such time
as conditions in Korea permit the reconstruction
program to be undertaken.

In preparing these recommendations for eco-
nomic aid, projects which should be financed by
loans have been excluded. The investment of
private capital and public loans from the Inter-
national Bank for Reconstruction and Develop-
ment and the Export-Import Bank will play an
important part in the economic progress of Asia,
as in otlier parts of the world.

In the administration of this progi-am, loans,
grants, and technical assistance will be meshed
together with the plans and efforts of each of the
recipient countries for the development of its own
resources. Only in this manner can the various
kinds of outside aid available to an Asian country
be used most effectively and without duplication or
overlapping.

These economic programs will have as their goal
the creation of conditions eliminating the need for
further grant aid for economic development.
Such programs look toward the creation of sound
government finances and public services, and to-
ward more stable economic and political founda-
tions for raising living standards and creating
broader opportunities. It will take time to reach
these goals but they nuist be steadily pursued.
Our aid will provide a dynamic force in that direc-
tion and will thus contribute strongly to freedom
and peace in Asia.

LATIN AMERICA

The United States and the other American Re-
publics agreed in 1947, in the treaty of Rio de
Janeiro, that an armed attack upon one of them is
to be regarded as an armed attack on all, and to act
together for the common defense.

Our good neighbors to the south are more than
willing to share in defending the hemisphere.
But there are real limits on their ability to do so
without some aid from us. They produce little
modern military equipment.

During World War II, defense tasks in Latin
America required the use of over 75,000 United
States troops as well as considerable United States
naval forces. The armed forces of the Latin
American states did not at that time have the
equipment or training to carry out those defense
tasks by themselves.

It makes good sense that, in planning the defense
of this heniisphere, the United States should aid
the Latin American countries to prejaare for and

take over certain hemisphere defense tasks that are
of interest to us all ; tasks they are willing to do and
well able to handle, with a little help in equipping
and training their forces. Consequently, 1 am
recommending 40 million dollars in military assist-
ance to these countries.

In addition, I recommend 22 million dollars in
economic aid to cari-y forward the excellent techni-
cal assistance work that is now underway in the
other American states in developing agriculture,
natural resources, and health, education and other
types of basic services. This type of assistance
has already proved its worth in the Latin American
area. It is helping to raise living standards,
hasten economic development, and strengthen both
jieoples and Governments in warding off the
danger of Communist subversion.

This grant assistance is helping to lay the foun-
dation for an expanding volume of capital de-
velopment, through public and private loans and
investments, in the other American Republics.
The United States is already providing major eco-
nomic help to Latin American countries through
loans by the Export-Import Bank. Fortunately,
the relative geographic security and the economic
position of the American Republics make possible
large amounts of private loans and investments —
the normal and desirable means of fostering eco-
nomic development.

Administration of the Program

The proposed organization for administering
the Mutual Security Program is based on the ex-
perience we have had so far, under the arrange-
ments established by the Congress in legislation
authorizing previous military and economic aid
programs.

The administration of military aid will be han-
dled, as at present, by the Department of Defense,
which will be able to insure full coordination be-
tween United States production of equipment for
our own forces and equipment for our allies. The
Department of Defense is responsible for evaluat-
ing the equipment deficiencies of the forces of our
allies, under mutually agreed strategic concepts,
and is charged with procurement, inspection and
transportation of military equipment provided by
this country.

Administration of economic assistance for West-
ern Europe and most of the countries in the Middle
East, Africa, and South and Southeast Asia will
be carried on by the Economic Cooperation Ad-
ministration. This agency has already proved its
effectiveness in aiding countries to achieve eco-
nomic recovery and is now administering economic
assistance in support of our mutual defense and
security objectives in Europe and Southeast Asia.
The economic aid programs for Latin America and
certain other countries in which the econoniic aid
is limited almost wholly to technical assistance
are now administered by the Technical Coopera-

Jone 4, 7 95 J

889

tion Administration of the State Department.
Consideration is now being given to the question
of whetlicr or not it woidd be desirable to transfer
the administration of these programs to the Eco-
nomic Cooperation Administration dnring the pe-
riod that that agency is administering other for-
eign economic aid programs.

These agencies will work very closely with the
Export-Import Bank and the International Bank
for Reconstruction and Development in achieving
a proper integration between loan and grant pro-
grams.

In order to insure coordinated policy guidance
in administering military and economic aid pro-
grams, a key coordinating committee has been es-
tablished composed of senior representatives of
the exe<^utive agencies concerned. This Interna-
tional Security Affairs Committee has developed
out of the experience of an executive committee
that had previously been coordinating operations
under the Mutual Defense Assistance Act. The
chairman of the new committee, the Director of
International Security Affairs, is a senior official
of the Department of State confirmed by the Sen-
ate, and occupies a position authorized by the
Congress under the Mutual Defense Assistance
Act.

Conclusion

I recommend this Mutual Security Program to
the Congress as another vital step along the road
to real security and lasting peace. Peace through
collective strength is a difficult course. It is not
without danger. There can be no absolute as-
surance of success. But there are far greater
dangers in any other course.

We cannot win peace through appeasement.
We cannot gain security in isolation. We will not
surrender.

Let it never be "forgotten, however, that we are
ready as we have always been, to follow the road
of peaceful settlement of disputes, of control and
reduction of armaments, of cooperation in apply-
ing man's talents to the building of a just and
prosperous world society.

If the rulers of the Soviet Union did not drown
their words of peace with the drums of war, if
their professions of peaceful intent were matched
by deeds, the century in which we live could be-
come the brightest man has known upon this earth.
For our part, if peace could be made sure, the
American people would be glad to invest a part of
the resources we must now allocate to defense to a
large-scale program of world-wide economic
development.

The benefits of such a program would be im-
mense ; the cost a small part of what we must now
)iay to build our defenses at home and abroad.
Witli such a program, we could, in cooperation
with other peoples, inaugiu-ato the most hopeful
and fruitful period of peaceful development the
world has ever seen.

890

This was our vision 6 years ago, when the war
came to a close. Let us never forget it. And let
us never give up our hopes and our efforts to
make it a reality.

Habry S. Truman

The White House,
May U, 1951

Settlement of Intercustodial
Conflicts Relating to Enemy Property ^

By virtue of the authority vested in me by the Con-
stitution and laws of the United States, including the
Trading With the Enemy Act of October G, 1917 (50 U. S. C.
1 et seq. ), as amended, and the act of September 28,
1950 (Public Lavp 857, 81st Congress), and as President
of the United States, it Is hereby ordered as follows:

1. The Secretary of State and the Attorney General
are liereby jointly designated as the officers authorized to
conclude and give effect to agreements relating to th©i
settlement of intercustodial conflicts involving enemy*
property made pursuant to the said act of September 28/
1950, and to exercise all powers Incident thereto whichi P
are conferred by such act, including, without limitation,!
the powers to receive, transfer, release, or return prop-
erty, interests therein, or proceeds thereof.

2. It is the policy of this order that the Secretary ol
State, with the concurrence of the Attorney General, shall
perform all functions necessary or appropriate to give
effect to any agreement made pursuant to tlie said act oj
September 28, 1950, witli relation to the protection ol
American interests in property outside the United States
and that the Attorney General, with the concurrence ol
the Secretary of State, shall perform all functions nee
essary or appropriate to give effect to any such agreement
with relation to property subject to the jurisdiction ol
the United States, and that all other functions relating
to the effectuation of any such agreement shall be per-
formed as may be agreed by the Secretary of State and
the Attorney General. However, no action taken here-
under by either the Secretary of State or the Attorney
General shall l)e considered to lie invalid on the grounc
that under the provisions of this order such action was
within the jurisdiction of the Secretary of State rathei
than the Attorney General, or vice versa, or that concur-
rence was not obtained, or that such action was not joint.

3. The Secretary of State and tlie Attorney General
may each delegate to the other or to any other officer,
person, or agency within his respective department such
of his functions under this order as he may deem neces-
sary.

4. Any money, property, or interest received as reim-
bursement by the United States lay virtue of any agree-
ment made pursuant to the said act of September 28,
1950, shall be administered and disposed of by the At-
torney General as vested property pursuant to the said
Trading Witli the Enemy Act. as amended. Any other
money, property, or interest received by tlie Secretary
of State or the Attorney General pursuant to any such
agreement sliall be administered and disposed of pur-
suant to the provisions of such agreement.

ILVBBT S. Tbuman
The White House,
Man a. 19ot.

' Ex. Or. 1024-i, 10 Fctl. Kvp. 4639.

Department of State Bulletin

U.S. Position on British-Iranian Oil Controversy

-REMARKS BY SECRETARY ACHESON

[h'ricascd to the press on May 23]

III rcsimiisc to questions regnrdinfi the United States
liiixitioii irith respect to the Iranian oil controversy, Sec-
n liiry of Slate Dean Acheson made the following extern-
imnineous remarks at his neivs conference today.

As we pointed out in our statement of May 18,
we believe very earnestly that the controversy be-
tween the British Government and the Iranian
(TDvernment is a controversy which can be and
should be settled by negotiation between those
piirties, and we indicated some of the principles
which we thought wei'e important in controlling
the general conduct of those negotiations. I don't
need to go over them again with you.

Tliere has been comment in Iran, ]irotest in Iran
that the United States was intervening, or that we
were hostile in some way to them. That is a very
surprising reaction as far as I am concerned. I
tliought there was nothing having to do with inter-
vention about it. There was nothing having to do
with liostility or opi^osition to the stated desires of
the Iranians in regard to the control of their
resources.

We pointed out to them in the statement that we
liave consistently urged moderation on both the
British and the Iranian Governments. We
pointed out that we have taken a firm stand against
unilateral action of a confiscatory nature. We
pointed out the technical obstacles which the Iran-
ian Government would face if it tried to remove
the present comjiany.

I hope that the Iranians will realize that the
United States is their sincere friend, that it has
helped them in the past and will in the future, and
that the gi-eat and continuing interest of the United
States in the independence, the territorial integ-
rity, and the well-being of Iran remains a cardinal
principle of American policy.

There is no intention by the United States of
challenging Iran's sovereignty. A serious con-
troversy exists, whatever the rights or wrongs of
the matter may be. Such controversies cannot be
settled unilaterally. The British Government has
stated its willingness to negotiate and to make
bnjad concessions to the Iranian point of view.
The United States, therefore, publicly recorded its

belief that the two parties to the controversy
should sit down at a conference table and work the
matter out.^

As the statement pointed out, the United States
is the friend of, and is deeply concerned in the
welfare and strength of both parties to the con-
troversy. The solution of the controversy is of
great importance, both to the welfare and strength
of these parties and of the entire free world, toward
which the United States has made such great
contribution. The statement voiced our deep and
proper interest in such a solution.

Now, that is a reaffirmation of the reason for the
statement, the propriety of the statement, and our
interest in the peaceful settlement.

TEXT or AIDE-MEMOIRE TO IRAN

The follovring is the text of an aide-memoire that the
American Ambassador at Tehrati handed to the Iranian
Minister for Foreign Affairs on May 26.

The aide-memoire of His Excellency, the Minis-
ter for Foreign Affairs of Iran, which was handed
to the American Ambassador in Tehran on May
21, has been carefully considered by the Govern-
ment of the United States.

It is unfortunate that the public statement made
by this Government on May 18 has been miscon-
strued by the Iranian Government as intervention
in the internal affairs of Iran.^ The United States
wishes to make it clear that it did not- then intend,
nor does it now intend, to interfere in the internal
affairs of Iran, not to oppose Iran's sovereign
rights or the expressed desires of the Iranian Gov-
ernment in regard to control of Iranian resources.

There is, however, legitimate basis for deep and
proper interest on the part of this Government in
a solution of the oil problem in Iran. A serious
controversy exists between Iran and Great Britain,
a controversy which could undermine the unity
of the free world and seriously weaken it. The
United States is bound to both countries by strong
ties of friendship and has attested its sincere con-
cern for the well-being of both. It has, therefore,

' BuiXETiN of May 28, 1951, p. 851.

June 4, 1 95 1

891

in view of the importance of the matter, discussed
the issues with both parties and has stated pub-
licly the principles it considers important in reach-
ing a solution of this controversy.

The United States continues in its firm belief
that an issue of this kind can be settled satisfac-
torily only by negotiation by the parties con-
cerned. While the United States has urged upon
both parties the need for moderation, it has taken
no position on details of any arrangement which
might be worked out. It has, however, reaffirmed
its stand against unilateral cancellation of con-
tractural relationships and actions of a confisca-
tory nature. The United States is convinced that

through negotiation a settlement can be found
which will satisfy the desires of the Iranian people
to control their own resources, which will protect
legitimate British interests and which will assure
uninterrupted flow of Iranian oil to its world mar-
kets. Such a settlement is, in the opinion of this
Government, of the utmost importance not only
to the welfare of tlie two powers concerned but
to that of the entire free world. The United States
wishes to state again its deep interest in the welfare
of the Iranian people and in the maintenance of
the independence and territorial integrity of Iran,
which is a cardinal principal of United States
policy.

Tasks Confronting the Indian Government

by George O. McGhee

Assistant Secretary for Near Eastern, South Asian and African Affairs '

India, Pakistan, and Ceylon, have existed as
independent nations for less than 4 years. In-
dependence came to India in consequence of a
long and determined campaign against foreign
domination. Indian leaders, accordingly, are
wary of any form of external power — military,
economic, political, or cultural — which might in
any way threaten their independence. As a corol-
lary, they are wary of too close an association with
states which possess such power. The Indian
Government adheres to the view that it may be able
to steer a middle course and, by avoiding involve-
ment in a global war, gain an opportunity to build
up its economy and strengthen its political
structure.

There is no question, however, as to what the
Indian Government's reaction would be in the
event that India were attacked. Indian spokes-
men have stated that an invasion of Indian terri-
tory would be resisted with all the force at the
country's disposal. Moreover, India's vigilance
against invasion is not confined to its own borders.
The Prime Minister has also made it clear that
India will not tolerate an invasion of Nepal which,
as you know, lies between India and Tibet. But
India has also expressed its clear determination to
avoid association with either of the so-called
"blocs" in the cold war. The Indian Government
favors the pursuit of peace not through alinement
with any major power, but tlirough an independent
approach to each controversial issue.

' Kxccrpts from an address made liefore the Council on
World Affairs at Cincitinati, Ohio, on May \Vi and released
to the press on the same date.

892

Principal Problems

Let us now consider the principal problems
which confront the Indian Government. India's
leaders are committed to the task of strengthening
the Governmental structure and improving the liv-
ing conditions of its 350 million people. The In-
dian Government has had very little time to apply
to this challenging task. It is disturbed hy any
development which threatens to interfere with itsi
accomplishment. No threat causes the Indian
leaders more concern than the threat of a global
war. They are, therefore, doing everything within
their power, according to their judgment and pat-
terns of thought, to localize the present conflicti
and to prevent global war.

As leaders responsible for the destiny of a very
young nation, their attitude might be expressed in
the words of another prominent statesman, who
said —

With me, a predominant motive has been to endeavor
to sain time for our country to settle and mature its yet
recent institutions, and to progress without interruptloni
to that degree of strength and consistency which is neces-i
sary to give it, humanly speaking, the command of itSi
own fortunes.

That statement by George Washington is even;
more cogetit when we appl}' it to the masses of In-
dia's population, the great dislocations which In-
dia is undergoing as a result of the precipitate
withdrawal of British atithority and the pressure
of the jiresent times. With tliis background in
mind — the strong desire of Indian leaders to let
nothing interfere with the strengthening of their
comitry — it is apparent why India is nutlcing every

Deparimeni of State Bu//ef/ni;

(tl'ort to stay out of the so-called cold war and to
avoid possible involvement in a shooting war
should it come.

Greater Voice in World Affairs

Another major motivation of Indian foreign
policy lies in its desire for a greater voice for itself
and the other Asian nations in world affairs, par-
ticularly in regard to those issues which directly
relate to developments in Asia. Eesponsible In-
dian leaders tell us that their interest in establish-
ing- a greater voice in world affairs does not con-
stitute an attempt to establish Indian leadership
in Asia. Rather, they say, it represents an effort
to impress the rest of the world with the fact that
the awakening of Asia is a powerful factor m
world affairs, that the decisive forces of history
are no longer centered exclusively in the West.

In the words of the Indian Secretary General
of External Affairs, India's advocacy of a greater
voice for Asians in world affairs is —

A legitimate and timely reminder . . . that if new con-
flicts are not to arise under the impulse of political and
economic discontent in the world's largest continent, the
peoples of that continent must not be treated as dormant,
dispirited, and helpless.

India's advocacy of greater Asian participation
in international affairs is being realized not only
at the United Nations but also within the Com-
monwealth and in India's direct relations with
other members of the international community.
Along with its South Asian neighbors, Pakistan
and Afghanistan, India has played an increasingly
important part in the councils of the United Na-
tions. While more often than not India and the
United States have voted on the same side in ques-
tions before the United Nations, we hold differing
views on certain important issues, particularly the
questions of Chinese Communist aggression in
Korea, admission of Communist China to the
United Nations, and the problem of Formosa.

Our differences with India appear, however, to
be much more a matter of tactics than of basic
goals. In the achievement of these goals, India is
relying chiefly on moral suasion, we on collective
security. As you are aware, the Indian Govern-
ment has played a prominent part in efforts to find
a basis for a peaceful settlement in Korea. Here,
India and the United States have frankly differed
on the best methods of achieving this end. We
should not forget, however, that the ultimate goals
of India and the United States are the same. Both
Governments are working to limit hostilities in the
Far East. Both are endeavoring to find a basis
for lasting peace in the Far East and throughout
the world. Our problem is to agree on the best
means of attaining these ends.

Further, we are in full agreement with India
concerning the desirability of giving the Asian
peoples a greater voice in world affairs. We have
a strong realization of the great forces at work in
Asia today. No intelligent American will ques-

June 4, 1957

tion the desirability of closer consultation with the
free Asian governments and of giving full con-
sideration to their views in reaching our own de-
cisions on important international questions. Sup-
port of the right of free Asian nations to
participate in world councils is an effective means
of achieving this end, and we have given that sup-
port, vigorously and without reservation. But we
are not going to let any country — Asian or non-
Asian — shoot its way into international councils,
nor are we willing to extend membership therein
as a reward for aggression.

Thus the differences which exist between the
United States and the countries of South Asia are,
I believe, more superficial than they appear to be.
I should like, moreover, to describe some of the
means through which we are endeavoring to re-
solve these differences and to broaden the signifi-
cant areas of agreement which do in fact exist.
In so doing, we must define the rock-bottom ob-
jectives on which our global foreign policy is
based.

The basic principles of our foreign policy are
to restore and maintain peace through collective
action ; to assist other peoples to establish the basis
for stability and self-development, provided they
desire our assistance and are themselves prepared
to make the primary effort; and to work toward
the development of better mutual understanding
and cooperative effort between the free nations of
the world.

U.S. Objectives in This Area

Now, how are these principles being applied
with respect to our relations with the South Asian
countries, and with India in particular? As I
have said, both the United States and India are
dedicated to the objective of limiting aggression.
The United States is attempting to do so through
support of the United Nations military efforts to
put down the aggression which is ravaging an-
other Asian country. We know that we can make
no compromise with the aggressive aims of inter-
national communism which serve as a cloak for
Soviet imperialism.

We are, therefore, making every effort to con-
vince the Indian Government of the rightness and
logic of that course not only in the interests of
collective defense by the international community
but also in India's own self-interest. We are mak-
ing every effort to demonstrate to the Indian peo-
ple the relationship between the tactics of domes-
tic Communist elements in India and the aggres-
sive strategy of Soviet imperialism. At the same
time, we are endeavoring to make clear to the
South Asian people that we desire them to keep
the significant gains which they have made in the
direction of political independence and economic
progress and to further consolidate those gains.

In our efforts to assist these Governments — all
of which are non-Communist — to maintain their
independence, we are faced with the problem of

893

letting the people of that area know that, how-
ever trying present conditions may be, Communist
domination would create far greater misery. We
are confronted with the task of demonstrating to
the people of South Asia the need for resisting
the false promises of the Communists if they
would maintain their independence.

While we are, of course, careful to avoid inter-
fering in any way in the internal affairs of these
countries, we lose no opportunity to stress the vital
importance of working toward the strengthening
of their democratic processes and resisting any
tendencies toward authoritarian rule. We try to
make it abundantly clear to tlie peoples of South
Asia that we respect their national independence
and have no desire to engage in any sort of ac-
tivity— political, military, or economic — which
would interfere in their internal affairs.

Everyone recognizes that there are limits to the
support we can give to the economies of other
countries whose needs are so great. There are,
however, steps which we can take to help improve
living standards in free Asia which cost relatively
little in terms of dollars — amounts which will be a
good investment for us if they will help to build
the economic, social, and political components of
national strength. I have in mind, for example,
technical assistance projects in which a single
expert can teach thousands of farmers to improve
crops and increase yields through simple demon-
stration of efficient methods of plowing, seed selec-
tion, and irrigation — jirocesses which will help
South Asians to move in the direction of self-
sufficiency in food grains.

We supported India's request for loans from the
International Bank for Eeconstruction and Devel-
opment, designed, in large part, to assist in the
improvement of agi'icultural development. More
recently, we have had an opportunity to demon-
strate our interest in the economic development of
this area by our participation on the Consultative
Committee for Economic Development in South
and Southeast Asia, which met in Ceylon in Feb-
ruary. And we hope to accelerate and expand our
technical assistance programs, to support proj-
ects worked out jointly with the Governments con-
cerned. In the meantime, action is expected any
day on the request by the President that Congress
provide authority for furnishing 2 million tons of
grain to India to avert tlie widespread famine
that would result from the shortage of food pro-
duction due to natural disasters.

As Gordon Gray emphasized, in his report to
the President on foreign economic policies.

In a real sense, tlie newly estiibllsheil non-Comraunist
governments of this region are on trial before their own
people, with their status largely dependent nijon their
success in findins solntions to their economic problems,
and in some areas to the agrarian problem in particular.

We are anxious to assist these free Governments
in maintaining and improving their status and to
demonstrate to their peoples that they are receiv-
ing constructive help in resolving their major
problems.

Effort To Maintain Friendly Relations

In addition, we wish to make every effort to
encourage the development of mutual understand-
ing and to accommodate our thinking to that oi
our allies and friends, where we can do so without
sacrificing our principles. In this task we can
all plan an active role, as indeed the existence of
your Council demonstrates.

I hardly need tell you that the day-to-day rela-
tions between American and South Asian officials
are frank and friendly. They constitute a sound
basis for continuing efforts to narrow down our
differences in approach. Moreover, the increas-
ing interchange of persons between the United
States and South Asia — exchanges of students and
teachers, of professional and technical people — is
steadily demonstrating and consolidating the mu-
tuality of our interests. This is a process which
has an important cumulative effect.

But it is also of vital importance that we dem-
onstrate, both as a nation and as private citizens,
that we are deeply interested in the welfare of
the South Asian people, tliat we understand their
aspirations, and that we are making sacrifices to
preserve the independence of the world's free na-
tions, including the independence of South Asia.

In conclusion, we must not forget that all the
Governments of South Asia have thus far success-
fully resisted the efforts of Communist agents and
parties to challenge their authority. In the light
of reports of neutral attitudes in these countries
toward the Far Eastern crisis, we must not forget
that they are fiercely proud of their independence,
that they are ready to defend it to the very limit
of their ability. We must not lose sight of the
fact that there is no single government in South
Asia which would willingly accept any arrange-
ment or compromise with any foreign power if it
were apparent that this would endanger its hard-
won independence.

Let us, then, take hope from the all-important
fact that South Asia and its lialf billion people
remain an integral part of the free world. We
hope, ultimately, to see the voluntary and forth-
right association of South Asia in collective action
for freedom. On this hope, we can build for the
future of Asia.

Appointment of Officers

Kobert G. Barnes as Deputy Director of the Executive
Secretariat, effective May 21, 1951.

894

Department of Sfafe BuUetin

A Global Foreign Policy

hy Francis H. Russell

Director, Office of Public Affairs '

It lias been natural, in fact inevitable, that the
■working people of this country should be among
the first to discern the real nature of the primary
problem of our time, world communism. They
were among the very first to be the object of at-
tack in the peculiar ways in which communism
tries to achieve its objectives, by propaganda and
confusion. The way in which labor in this coun-
try has met that attack and then taken the leader-
ship in helping to resist it around the world stands
in the forefront of the successes of democracy.
Most dramatic are the successes achieved in
Korea, in Italy, Greece, Turkey, in Berlin, and
on other fronts.

It is of great importance for this country not
only to have strong diplomatic and political ties
with other countries but also to have increasingly
close relationships between our working people
and workers in other countries. In today's strug-
gle, there is no substitute for the good that can
be done by a close bond between American labor
unions and people elsewhere who are attempting
to move forward to greater freedoms and higher
standards of living.

Debate on our Foreign Policy

Our foreign policies are today the subject of a
great national debate.

It is becoming clear that this gi'eat debate in-
volves three basic issues. First is an issue of facts.
What is the nature of the crisis we face? What
kind of an enemy confronts us? What are his
methods, his intentions, his potential i What are
our sources of strength? How strong and how
reliable are our allies?

The second issue is an issue of principles and
objectives. Wliat kind of a woi'ld do we hope to
see established? Is it a world dominated by the

' Excerpts from an address made before the Brother-
hood of Railway Clerks Couvention at San Francisco,
Calif., on May 19 and released to the press on the same
date.

United States? Or is it a world based upon co-
operative arrangements among free peoples? Do
we want a world of exi^ancling trade with in-
creased opportunity for all people? Or do we
want a world with each country for itself, a world
that would be without hope for the submerged
two-thirds of the world's population?

The third issue is an issue of methods for
achieving our objectives. Can we achieve these
objectives by pulling back behind a "gibraltar of
the Western Hemisphere ?" Can we achieve them
by "going it alone ?" Or should we work through
the various instruments of international coopera-
tion ? Should we take any chance of bringing on
World War III that could possibly be avoided?
Or should we direct all our efforts to achieving
freedom with peace.

If we can thwart the efforts to confuse us, if we
strip off the irrelevant, we will find that these are
the problems that we must tackle.

The Issues To Be Considered

Let us consider each of these issues briefly.

First, what is the nature of the enemy we face?
We cannot know how to deal with him until we
know who and what he is. There are those who
insist on waging today's struggle in terms of the
wars of the past. But this is not just a power
struggle between two nations. If this were merely
a conflict between the United States and China,
there might be every reason why we should use
all of our resources to push forward to a speedy
victory over the Peiping regime. But China is
not our principal enemy. We could pay the
enormous price of victory in a war against China,
and find ourselves, weakened and our resources de-
pleted, still faced with the real enemy.

Nor is our enemy just a political or economic
system. We believe profoundly in the right of all
men to political freedom and economic well-being.
We are not engaged in trying either to resist, or to
establish over other peoples, a particular political
or economic system. On the contrary, we believe

June 4, 1951

895

that every country, every people, has the right to
its own political and economic institutions, even
though we may not like some of them.

Today's crisis has arisen because a number of
long term, world-wide developments, each of
which presents problems of vast proportions, have
fused at this particular point in history to produce
one of the greatest crises in the history of civil-
ization.

Wliat are these developments? Let me men-
tion some of them.

The first is an international conspiracy directed
by one imperialist power. Communism as a world
movement is almost exactly a century old but only
within the last few years as a result of its having
been forged into a principal instrument of Soviet
Russia has it constituted the threat to the progress
of civilization which it is today.

It has been with difficulty that some Americans
have come to a realization of the nature and extent
of this threat. There has been nothing in our life
to prepare most Americans to understand the de-
signs and the amoral workings of the minds of the
men in the Kremlin. But we have come to know
that basically they take their departure from most
of the rest of mankind at the point where they
adopt and build upon the concept that the ulti-
mate value, the final objective in life is the exalting
of an entity, the "party." The interests of the
party, the Communists say, transcend all rights
and interests of individual human beings. Human
beings are only pawns to be sacrificed to this end.

From this basic pliilosophy, the Communists
are led inexorably to a controlled press and radio,
to purges in place of elections, to a police state
where every person is required to be a spy on friend
and family, to slave camps, police cards which con-
trol movement from one place to another, state
monopolies controlling all aspects of economic life,
dictated employment, and the banning of freedoms
of the mind, of speech, and of religion. All of
these are the inevitable attributes of a political
system that glorifies the state.

Add to this their fanatical belief that all ad-
herents to the movement must do everything pos-
sible to impose this pattern of human existence
upon the two and a half billion people in the world.
In achieving this there are no moral curbs. They
play upon the fears and hopes, the resentments
and the ambitions of different groups of people.
They say one thing to one person, another thing
to other people. They strike terror in the hearts
of people wherever they can. They attempt to
frustrate all kinds of organizations, from labor
unions to the United Nations itself. They create
planned chaos and exploit want so people will
give up in despair and follow anyone who prom-
ises them anything at all. They use aggression
where they believe that it will accomplish their
purpose. The Imndful of men in the Kremlin
are, in simple fact, engaged in a conspiracy, and
they operate through a tight party mechanism

that has its representatives in every part of the
world.

It is their ambition to eliminate all other kinds
of human existence. They are not interested in
compromise. They are not interested in negotia-
tion except as it may give them some kind of tacti-
cal or propaganda advantage. That has been
demonstrated time and time again. There is only
one thing that will give them any halt, even for
a moment, and that is the prospect that they may
wind up worse off, possibly even with a complete
loss of power. That they are not prepared to risk.

That is the nature of the men we face.

Reasons for the Korean Attack

Now, there are a number of conclusions that fol-
low from such an understanding of our enemy.
First, it makes clear what the situation is that
confronts us in Korea.

The Soviet Union is continuously and relent-
lessly engaged in searching out weak spots every-
where in the world and then bringing its resources
to bear to exploit them to their own ends. Last
June, there were numerous buttons that the Krem-
lin could have pushed. They could have pushed
a button that would have started trouble in Ger-
many, or another against Yugoslavia, or in Iran,
or they could have stepped up the pressure against
Indochina.

The place they chose for their greatest effort
was Korea. They chose Korea for several rea-
sons. Intrinsically, from the point of view of raw
materials and industrial output, Korea was per-
haps the least important. Perhaps the Kremlin
felt that the free world might be less inclined to
rally to its support. Korea was divided and this
gave the Kremlin a chance to claim that it was
merely a civil war. But if the aggi'ession suc-
ceeded, the Kremlin would be in a position to
threaten Japan, one of its major objectives in the
Far East.

The obstructions which have been put in the way
of a Japanese peace treaty by the Soviet Union
are significant. Moreover, the Republic of Korea
constitutes a special commitment of the United
Nations and the wiping out of the Republic of
Korea would have been a serious blow, perhaps a
mortal blow, to the prestige and integrity of
the United Nations.

But the important thing about Korea is that it
was only one of many points at which the aggres-
sor could have directed his blow. It was a test
that was being watched by all of the other coun-
tries on the perimeter of the Soviet orbit. If
Korea were allowed to fall, other friends of free-
dom would have felt their case was hopeless. We
would have faced the {xissibility of free govern-
ments starting to fall like dominoes. All of these
things are at stake today in Korea.

It also follows from this analysis of the nature
of communism that we shall get nowhere with

896

Deparfment of State Bulletin

proposals for buying off the Kremlin. They will
be unimpressed by suggestions that this country,
for example, devote to world-wide constructive
purposes 10, 20 or 50 billion dollars during the
next 5 years provided the Kremlin calls off its
aggi-essive designs. They will be unmoved by
projiosals for world government as a means for
dealing with present tensions and conflicts. The
world, to be sure, must strengthen its institutions
for security and well-being. But the men in the
Kremlin have no interest in promoting that. They
have their own very precise pattern of world gov-
ernment and are impressed not by argument, but
by power.

An understanding of the basic nature of Soviet
communism also makes it possible for us to deal
with their efforts to confuse and divide by all-out
propaganda. Last year, the Cominform set out to
get 400 million signatures to its Stockholm appeal.
It was apparent that this was merely an attempt
by the Kremlin to exploit the universal desire for
peace and to place the onus for the international
tensions, M'hich the Kremlin itself has created on
the free world.

The "Peace Crusade" Objective

This year, the Cominform is engaged in another
effort to confuse and divide the people of the non-
Communist world, through a "peace crusade."
The objectives of this "crusade" turn out to be the
political and military objectives of the Kremlin,
namely: (1) to get the United Nations out of
Korea so that the Commvinists can succeed in their
aggression there, (2) to bring about the recogni-
tion of the Chinese Communist regime under con-
ditions that would solidify the dominance of the
Kremlin over China, (3) to bring about a cessation
or weakening of the effort to build the defenses
of Western Europe under General Eisenhower,
(4) to prevent the creation of a free and inde-
pendent Western Germany, so that this greatest
concentration of industrial power outside the
United States can be taken over by the Soviet
Union, and (5) once more to attempt to sidetrack
efforts at genuine disarmament in all types of
weapons and to marshal public opinion for a
scheme which would deny defensive strength to
the free world while leaving untouched the mas-
sive military machine of the Soviets.

Purpose of Soviet Propaganda

Now, all of these are points on which intelligent,
sincere, and patriotic people of the free world hold
different views. A few months ago, according to
Mr. Gallup, considerably more than half of the
American people felt that we should pull our boys
out of Korea. That did not mean that half of the
American people were Communists. (Today, the
great majority of Americans are in favor of see-
ing it through in Korea.)

June 4, 7951

947976 — 51 3

Many of our strongest allies hold views that dif-
fer from ours with respect to the way of dealing
with Communist China. Tliat does not mean that
they are Communists. A number of prominent
Americans are opposed to American participation
in the defense of Western Europe. They are not
Communists.

But the purpose of Soviet propaganda is to
accentuate these differences of opinion, to use them
to create doubt, confusion, and suspicion, to drive
a wedge between free peoples, to prevent the soli-
darity upon which the strength of the free nations
must bo built. And so it is that when we go be-
yond honest discussion and debate and wander in
what may, at times, aj^pear to be the attractive
fields of nan-ow partisanship, character assassina-
tion, and public confusion we are opening up the
only way oy which the Communists can hope to
make any real headway against us. The leaders
in the Kremlin are bending every effort to make
the free world as disunited as possible. Their
spirits rise according to the intensity with which
we feud among ourselves and attack our own.
When we do that we are doing their work for them.

So the first factor in the present world crisis is
the threat of Soviet Communist imperialism. The
second is the revolutionary mood and ferment, en-
tirely unrelated to the Soviet will to world domi-
nation, that characterizes the minds of two-thirds
of the world's people, the people whose annual in-
come averages around a hundred dollars a year,
whose average life span is 30 years, less than one
half that of our own, for example. They are the
billion and a half people who, only within recent
years, have learned through moving pictures,
radio, newspapers, and personal contact with the
peoples of the economically more fortunate coun-
tries that the application of modern science and
technology to the resources of their areas of the
world can produce a vastly increased standard of
living for them and their families. They feel they
have hold of the short end of the stick, and they
are determined by one means or another to redress
that situation. It is this widespread discontent
that has been exploited by the Chinese Com-
munists.

China, a Lesson to the Free World

A revolution has been going on in Asia over a
long time. It is an economic revolution and a
political and ideological revolution, revulsion
against misery and poverty and revulsion against
foreign domination. It is an insistent drive to
individual betterment and national independence.
We must base our policies upon a recognition of
the power of those dynamic forces.

China is a lesson, a most bitter lesson, to the
depressed peoples of the world of what happens
when the Communist sword conquers a country
and the bright promises all turn out to be false.
The families of China are suffering today in

897

frightful numbers the losses that come when Com-
munist leaders take over and use the subjected
peoples as pawns in their further quest for power.
The people of China and other satellites are in
the process of absorbing this lesson.

But the free world, too, must learn the lesson
of our time. We must understand the mood of
change and revolution among the hundreds of
millions of the world's depressed peoples. We
must meet the Communist challenge not only
when it takes the form of overt aggression but in
the struggle for the minds of men. We must do
this through the Campaign of Truth with the
instruments at our disposal such as the Voice of
America, libraries, exchange of persons programs,
and the other ways that are available to us. We
must do it also by demonstrating in fact that we
can deal with such problems as land reform, racial
differences, conditions of labor, standards of liv-
ing, more effectively under free institutions than
can ever be accomplished under totalitarian re-
gimes.

Answers to Communist Aggression

Your Union can be proud of the role taken by
the president of your organization in the found-
ing conference of the International Confederation
of Free Trade Unions (Icrru). Free national
trade unions such as yours, as well as the Icfttj and
other international groups, like the International
Transport Workers' Federation, are among the
most effective answers to Communist attempts to
confuse and control the minds of men.

In another area, take the question of land, or
agrarian reform, as it is sometimes called. De-
spite loose assertions to the contrary, no responsi-
ble American official has asserted that the Chinese
Communists were "mere agrarian reformers." It
has been clear from the beginning that they were
Stalinist Communists in thought and in fact. But
we shall seriously miscalculate, as others have
miscalculated in the past, if we fail to understand
the importance of the Chinese Communist propa-
ganda promising agrarian reform to the peasants
of China. The average Asian farmer, like the
average American farmer, looks forward to land
of his own.

One of the most important measures that has
been carried out in Japan since the occupation
is that of land reform. Today, in Japan, only 10
percent of the farmers are tenants. Before the
war, half of them were. By contrast in North
Korea, there is a virtually universal resentment
against the trickery that has taken place in the
guise of "land reform" under the Communists.

In contrast to the fate of the North Korean and
the Chinese people, many of the submerged peo-
ples of the world have recently acliieved the free-
dom and national independence for which they
have striven for generations. As recently as
within the last 5 or 10 years India, Pakistan,

Ceylon, Burma, the associated states of Indochina,
Indonesia, the Philippines, and Korea have
emerged as full-fledged members of the community
of nations. It would be a supreme irony, a fright-
ful tragedy if, as a result of a time lag in thiioking,
a carry-over of old resentments, those hundreds of
millions of people were to throw themselves into
a slavery that would be infinitely harsher than
they have known in the past, that is, into the
slavery of the Kremlin.

We must make sure that we do not put our-
selves in a position of successfully keeping
communism from entering the front door through
resisting its aggression, while it comes through the
back door — in the minds of hundreds of millions
of the world's people who are trying to improve
their lot. Fortunately, there is no country in
the world that can help these people achieve what
they are striving for as we can, and have, through
the Marshall Plan, Export-Import Bank loans,
and Point 4. We must continue to use our great
economic strength to build more strength in the
free world.

Closely akin to this revolutionary ferment is the
third major element, the accumulation of years
of racial bitternesses and hatreds. The representa-
tive of the Chinese Communists, in his 2-hour out-
burst before the Security Council of the United
Nations last January, gave evidence of the vol-
canic fury that is smoldering among many of the
colored races of the world. The demands of "Asia
for the Asiatics," the morbid preoccupation of
the press of India with racial problems here in
the United States, the relations between the races
in various parts of Africa, are all instances of
the intensity of this problem.

Anyone who asserts that he has the answers
to this problem is only displaying the extent of
his own ignorance. It is infinitely difficult and
infinitely complex. But anyone who, because of
its complexit}', turns his back on the problem is
taking the path to disaster. It will remain with
us long after the Communist threat has disap-
jieared.

As a foui'th major element in our current world
crisis, I would mention the moral and material
disintegration that is still our heritage from
World AVar II. Many, but by no means all, of
the homes and factories that were bombed in the
last war have been rebuilt, but the people of Eu-
rope are still suffering from the effects of the war,
of occupation, of malnutrition, and want. The
fears, the apprehensions, the absence of willing-
ness to face facts are just as real, and frequently
more difficult to deal with than was the concrete
devastation of the war. We caimot deal with
tliem by mere gestures of impatience.

Finally, in spite of the progress that we have
made in building the fabric of international co-
operation through tlie United Nations, the North
Atlantic Council, the Organization of American
States, and other international instruments, we

898

Deparfment of Stale Bulletin

s( ill have national fears, national prides, national
ambitions, national hatreds, that make it difficult

, to construct a firm and lasting peace, as we have

ll found in our efforts to further the integration of

I AVestern Europe.

j These are the main elements of the present

) crisis of freedom and democracy.

Now, if this is the real nature of our problem,

i' it follows that there has been, there is, and there
will be no magic wand that someone could wave,
no magic ])hrase that someone could utter to make
the problem disappear. The ingredients of our
crisis go far back into the past. They will extend
into the future for years to come. And it will re-
iiuire the utmost in human understanding, pa-
tience, determination, and sacrifice if we are to
overcome them.

These are the facts of woi-ld life, and unless
we always bear them in mind, we shall risk the
danger of making false moves and dissipating our
resources.

Our Long-Range Objective

Now, faced with this kind of situation, what
should be the objectives to guide us in our day-to-
day operations?

Our major, overriding objective is to make it
possible for the world to move forward, gradually
if necessary but steadily, with the task of creating
greater freedoms, better living conditions, a pro-
gressively happier existence for the people of the
world. This is our long-range objective, because
only in such a world can the people of the United
States hope to maintain their way of life.

"We know that this country cannot "go it alone"
because, if we go it alone and all other countries
go it alone, we shall be turning the world over to
aggressors, and the rest of the world will be very
quickly arrayed against us.

We want a world in which neither the Soviet
Union nor we nor ai\y other power is going to
dictate how things shall be.

We want a world at j^eace.

How do we hope to accomplish these broad
objectives ?

First, we must deal with the outright aggression
that has been launched in Korea against the free
world, the first aggression by mass armies across
a national line since the United Nations was set up.

We are fighting in Korea to demonstrate the
integrity and efficacy of the United Nations in
resisting aggression so that it will not follow the
dismal path that was taken by the countries of
the world under the League of Nations.

We are fighting to give courage and confidence
to other nations that are on the periphery of the
Soviet orbit, to show them they are not standing
alone and that they may safely take measures to
resist Soviet threats.

We are fighting to give time for the free world
to build up its vast potential strength.

It has been said that the object of war is vic-
tory— no more and no less — and in the present
world context that means victory over China. But
we must keep our eyes on the main objective,
and real victory may require much less than com-
jjlete subjugation of another country.

At least three times in our history, we have
fought major wars in which we achieved our ob-
jectives without conquering the nations with
which we fought.

In 1798, we fought a naval war with France to
protect our commerce and shipping. We won
that struggle but we did not carry the war to
France. Secretary of State Timothy Pickering,
who had insisted on an all-out war against France,
was dismissed by President Adams.

In the War of 1812, a satisfactory settlement
was achieved with the British by negotiation.

In the Spanish-American War, our purpose was
limited. We did not carry the war against Spain
itself but we did achieve our limited political ob-
jective, to free the Cuban people from the oppres-
sion of Spanish rule.

In each case, we achieved a limited objective
without extending the warfare.

Always, in times of national crisis, the Ameri-
can people have had to contend with defeatists,
with those who said that victory was impossible.
Washington had them on his hands at Valley
Forge. Lincoln had to contend with them all
during the Civil War right up to the moment of
victory. More recently, there were those who said
that the airlift to Berlin could not win out, and
others who contended that aid to Greece and Tur-
key was fruitless and without hope of any suc-
cessful end.

The Danger of Defeatism

Today, the greatest danger that we face is the
danger of defeatism. Defeatism may show itself
in two ways. There is the defeatism of despair
and the defeatism of desperation.

We must guard against those who say that our
situation is hopeless and that there is no good
in making the effort.

We must guard equally against those who say
that, because we are faced with difficulties, we
should resort to desperate measures.

There is no cause for either despair or despera-
tion. We have every reason for confidence.

We are in the process of building military power
capable of meeting with overpowering strength
any further Communist aggression. We have the
ingredients of this power.

Today, the Soviet rulers and their puppets
dominate the destiny of 800 million people. This
is their greatest potential strength. But two-
thirds of the world's population live in countries
still masters of their own destiny and not subject
to domination from the Kremlin.

June 4, 1 95 1

899

Moreover, the 150 million of the United States
and the 275 millioi of free Europe are the highest
skilled, the most productive in the world. The
trained minds and trained hands of free men ■work-
ing through free institutions give the free world
a productive capacity that far overtops anything
the police state and slave labor can produce both
in peace and in war.

Steel production is on the side of the free world.
Last year, American labor and business manage-
ment produced 96 million short tons of crude steel.
Free Europe i^roduced 55 million tons, Eussia and
its European satellites produced only 34 million
tons.

In 1950. the United States and free Europe pro-
duced over a billion tons of coal. Russia and its
satellites produced 290 million.

The United States and Western Europe pro-
duced 625 billion kilowatt hours of electric
energy. Russia and its satellites only 125 billion.

Over the last 10 years, the average standard
of living in this country has increased by 30 per-
cent. This increase is equal to the total national
production of the Soviet Union — just our advance
during the past 10 years.

During the last war, we reached the point where
45 percent of all of our production went into war
materials. It is estimated that the percentage
of our production during the next 2 years may
reach as high as 20 percent. Some of that, of
course, will come out of continued increases in
production ; some of it will have to come out of our
standard of living, but probably not by more than
5 percent.

In the last quarter of 1950 in the United States,
our industrial production was 22 percent above
the level of the previous year. In Western Eu-
rope, the industrial production was 23 percent
above the level in 1949. This step-up in industrial
production, of course, requires many more raw
materials and that is what has given rise to some
of the shortages that we face, some of the sacri-
fices that consumers are called upon to make.

In other less developed parts of the free world,
there is tremendous additional economic strength,
much of it still only a potential. Yet last year,
it contributed a large part of the 9 million barrels
of crude oil produced daily by the free world.
The Soviet Union and its satellites produced less
than 1 million.

The free world and largely the underdeveloped
nations produced 90 percent of the world's total
output of natural rubber, two-thirds of its tin
and by far its greatest quantities of uranium, cop-
per, and other essential raw materials.

To mobilize fully the vast actual and potential
IH'oductive capacity of the free world, the Presi-
dent in his budget message revealed that the

United States proposes to spend over the next year
more than 9 billion dollare. We are proposing to
use that money to provide arms and other military
equipment to areas in the free world where it is
most needed. We are proposing to spend part of
it in helping other industrial countries in getting
their own military production rolling full blast.
We propose to spend part of it in supplying essen-
tial goods of a nonmilitary kind to countries whose
economies are likely to fall without our help.
And we propose to spend part of it in technical
cooperation programs with other nations to help
them help themselves.

The sum total of this program is the building
of mutual strength to the point where the Kremlin
either will not dare to attack or will be defeated
decisively if it does.

Now, no one can give any guarantee that we
can avoid a general war because the leaders of the
Communist conspiracy can launch a war if they
decide to. But. if one should come, we must be
in the strongest possible position to meet it, both
in our military strength and in our moral position
throughout the world.

Summarizing Our Foreign Policy

What, then, is our foreign policy?

It is to advance the welfare and preserve the
safety of the United States by putting the weight
of the United States behind the steady advance
of mankind toward freedom and a better life.

It is to resist the neatest threat to this advance,
the aggression of Soviet communism and to co-
operate with other free peoples in meeting this
threat.

It is to demonstrate in Korea, where Communist
aggression has shown itself in its barest and most
threatening form, that aggression will not and
cannot succeed and that free people everywhere
will be supported in their efforts to resist it.

It is to build up the strength of the free world
as rapidly as possible to a point where it cannot
be challenged and to do it in such a way as to
avoid the fright fulness of world war.

It is to demonstrate that the real revolution is
the revolution of freedom; that the ultimate value
is not a party or a regime, but human life, human
beings; that society must be concerned with pro-
viding the environment of freedom in which the
individual's "happiness," as we put it in our Decla-
ration of Independence, can best take place : free-
dom to believe, to \Yorship, to speak, to read, to
move from one comnuinity to another, to create,
to freely choose political and economic institutions.

These are the things that mark the real world
revolution.

This is the cause we serve, with the steady con-
fidence of people who serve the right.

900

Department of State Bulletin

Communique on Settlement of German External Debts

[Released to the press May 2-}]

The following announcement was made today:

The Governments of France, the United King-
dom and the United States have been considering
the problem of bringing about a settlement of
German debts as envisaged by the agreement of
(ith March with the German Federal Government.
They have now transmitted to the Government of
the German Federal Kepublic and to the Govern-
ments of a number of interested countries a com-
munication which desci'ibes a proposed procedure
for arriving at a settlement of Germany's prewar
debts and which outlines their present views on
the points of principle relating to it. A copy of
this communication, together with its several en-
closures, is being released simultaneously, and is
attached herewith.

It is proposed that a meeting of interested par-
ties, both governmental and private, should be
held in London in the autumn of this year. To
prepare for this meeting and to represent their
interests in the discussions of the German debt
problem, the three Governments have established
a Tripartite Commission on German Debts. The
Commission will also repi-esent their interests in
regard to the question of Germany's debts arising
from the postwar economic assistance which the
three Governments have extended to Germany.

The Tripartite Commission on German Debts
will carry on the work on German debts hitherto
jjerformed by the Intergovernmental Study Group
on Germany, which has now completed the various
other tasks assigned to it by the three Govern-
ments.

Attachments are as follows :

COMMUNICATION CONCERNING THE
SETTLEMENT OF GERMAN EXTERNAL DEBTS

1. The Governments of France, the United
Kingdom and the United States have reached the
conclusion in agreement with the German Federal
Government that the settlement of German ex-
ternal debts is in the interests of the restoration
of normal economic and financial relations between

Germany and other countries. They have also
agreed with the German Federal Government that
interested Governments, including the Federal Ee-
public, creditors and debtors, shall participate in
working out a subsequent plan in accordance with
certain principles.

2. The exchange of letters which placed this
agreement on recoi'd, and the letter from the Al-
lied High Commission to the German Federal
Chancellor which preceded it and which set out
the views of the three Governments in regard to
the settlement of claims against Germany, were
published on 6th March. Copies of these letters
are attached as Enclosure 1.

3. As recorded in this exchange of letters of
6th March, the three Governments have been en-
gaged in preparing proposals for the working out
of arrangements for an orderly overall settlement
which would be fair and equitable to all the in-
terests affected. They have now completed a ten-
tative procedure for arriving at acceptable
settlement arrangements, a statement outlining
their present views on points of principle relating
to the settlement, and a list of certain technical
questions requiring consideration. The relevant
documents, of which copies are attached as En-
closures 2, 3, and 4, are intended to serve as a
preliminary basis for consultations later in the
.year. In order to prepare for these consultations
the three Governments intend to hold informal
preliminary meetings in order to obtain views of
some of the interested j^arties. Thereafter further
communications will be sent on the subjects of
the enclosures listed above and arrangements made
for the participation in these consultations of rep-
resentatives of creditors and debtors, of the Ger-
man Federal Government and of the Governments
of countries having a significant creditor interest.

4. The three Governments, in order to make
an overall settlement of German debts possible,
are prepared to modify the priority of their claims
in respect of the postwar economic assistance
which they furnished to Germany, on condition
that the settlement plan is acceptable to them.

5. The arrangements contemplated relate to

iune 4, 1 95 1

901

Germany's prewar public and private indebted-
ness and to the German debt arising out of postwar
economic assistance; they do not rehite to claims
arising out of the war which can only be dealt
with in connection with a peace treaty.

6. The three Governments have set up a Tri-
partite Commission on German Debts to act on
their behalf in the necessary consultations and ne-
gotiations. A copy of its terms of reference is
attached as Enclosure 5.

Enclosure 1

A. LETTER TO FEDERAL CHANCELLOR
OF OCTOBER 23, 1950

TO : His Excellency, The Chancellor of the Federal Republic
of Germany.

Mr. Chancellob, I have the honour to refer to the com-
munique issued by the Foreign Ministers in New York
in which they indicated that the Federal Government
would be expected to undertake certain commitments con-
sonant with the new responsibilities which the Govern-
ments of the three Occupying Powers contemplated would
be conferred upon the Federal Republic. The three Gov-
ernments bold that, at the moment when the Federal Gov-
ernment assumes responsibility for the conduct of its
foreign relations, the status of the obligations resting
upon it in its relations with foreign countries should be
clarified. The three Governments regard the Federal
Government as the only German Government which can
speak for Germany and represent the German people in
international affairs pending the reunification of Germany.
They consider, therefore, that pending a final peace settle-
ment, and without prejudice to its terms, the Federal Gov-
ernment is the only Government entitled to assume the
rights and fulfil the obligations of the former German
Reich.

The High Commission has communicated to the Federal
Government separately the decisions which have been
taken by the Foreign Ministers concerning the clarifica-
tion of the status of treaties to which the German Reich
was a party. The question of the obligations of the Reich
also involves the external debt of the Reich. The three
Governments consider that the Federal Government should
in consonance with what has been said above, assume
responsibility for the prewar external debt of the Reich.
They recognize that, in the determination of the manner
In which and the extent to which the Federal Govern-
ment is to fulfil the obligations arising from this assump-
tion, account must be taken of the general situation of the
Federal Republic, including, in particular, the effect of
the limitations on its territorial jurisdiction.

The determination of the financial responsibilities of the
Federal Government necessarily also involves the obliga-
tions resulting from the economic assistance which lias
been furnished by the occupying powers to Germany. As
the Federal Government is aware, the occupying powers
have, at considerable cost to the peoples of their own
countries, extended substantial economic assistance to
Germany since the termination of hostilities, with a view
to ensuring the well-being of the German people and assist-
ing them in the rehabilitation of their economic life. In
due course the occupying powers will call for a settlement
of the obligations arising from this assistance. They will
consider in the settlement of these obligations the ability
of the Federal Government to pay and other relevant
factors. Meanwhile, they consider that the Federal Gov-
ernment should acknowledge its debt in respect of the
expenditures which they have incurred and that it should
recognize the prior status of th(>se obligations over other
claims.

It is the intention of the three Governments to proceed
as promptly as possible with the development of a settle-
ment plan which will assure fair and equitable treatment

John W. Gunter Named to Tripartite
Commission on German Debts

The Department of State today announced on
May 25 the appointment of John W. Gunter as the
United States alternate representative on the Tri-
partite Commission on Gennan Debts.

Mr. Gunter, who has been the United States mem-
ber of the Greek Currency Committee in Athens since
1949, will have the personal rank of Minister. He
already has arrived in London to assume his new
duties on the debt-commission.

of the interests affected and remove as far as practicable
obstacles to normal economic relations between the Fed-
eral Republic and other countries. These arrangements
would necessarily be provisional and subject to revision
when Germany is reunited and a final peace settlement
becomes possible. The three Governments are agreed
that the plan should provide for the orderly settlement of
the claims against Germany, the total effect of which
should not dislocate the German economy through un-
desirable effects on the internal financial situation, nor
unduly drain existing or potential German foreign ex-
change resources. It should also avoid adding appreciably
to the financial burden of any Occupying Power.

The three Governments have instructed the Intergov-
ernmental Study Group on Germany in London to prepare
a plan for handling claims in accordance with the above
principles and to recommend arrangements for the ap-
propriate participation of other interested Governments
and the debtors and creditors, including the Federal Gov-
ernment. The Federal Government will in due course be
informed of the results of these studies.

Although there are numerous problems to which it has
not yet been possible to give consideration, the three Gov-
ernments are in agreement that the settlement plan should
include, in particular, those categories of claims whose
settlement would best achieve the objective of normalising
the economic and financial relations of the Federal Repub-
lic with other coimtries. In their view the plan must
therefore necessarily deal with the prewar external debt
as well as with the claims in respect of postwar economic
assistance which enjoy a priority status over all other
claims. The plan should also provide for the settlement
of certain claims in connection with social insurance op-
erations and with the conversion into deutschemark of
reichsmark brought back from Germany by repatriated
prisoners of war and deportees, if these claims have not
been disposed of before the establishment of the plan.

In addition to the foregoing matters, other questions
may arise in the detailed working out of the settlement
arrangements. For example, it may be necessary to give
consideration to certain prewar debts owed to the resi-
dents of foreign countries which may not be strictly
classifiable as external in character.

The three Governments reco.gnize that a settlement plan
of the scope envisaged can be put into effect only through
some modification of the priority of their claims in respect
of postwar economic assistance. Accordingly, the three
Governments have agreed that, provided a settlement plan
is worked out in accordance with the principles outlined in
the preceding paragraphs and provided further that agreed
procedures and controls are established that will govern
this settlement plan and all payments made under it, they
will modify the priority of their claims in respect of post-
war economic assistance to the extent necessary to permit
the fulfillment of such an agreed plan. This qualified
modification of the priority of claims in respect of postwar
economic assistance will not preclude the continued fulfill-
ment of the obligations which the Federal Government has
already incurred under existing agreements concerning
such claims.

The three Governments feel certain that the Federal
Government shares their views as to the desirability of

902

Department of State Bulletin

restoririR Germany's credit and of providing for an orderly
settlement of German detits which will ensure fair treat-
ment to all concerueil, taking full account of Germany's
economic problems. Tliey feel equally certain that the
Federal Government will share their belief that such a
settlement will contribute to the restoration of normal
relations between Germany and other countries.

The three Governments would appreciate receiving a
formal assurance from the Federal Government that it
regards itself as responsible for the prewar external debt
of the German Reich and that it recognizes its debt
with respect to the expenditures incurred by the occupying
powers for economic assistance to the Federal Heimblic and
affirms the priority of the claims arising from such assist-
.ince over other claims against Germany. They would also
.ippreciate receiving assurances of the cooperation of the
Federal Government in working out and implementing a
settlement plan.

In order to give formal effect to these undertakings and
assurances and to the undertakings and assurances offered
b.v the Governments of the three occupying powers, I
have to propose that an agreement should be concluded by
an exchange of notes between the Allied High Commission
and the Federal Government. It is the intention of the
High Commission to proceed with the modification of the
controls in the Occupation Statute on the lines agreed by
the three Foreign Ministers as soon as this exchange of
notes is completed and the assurance in respect of cooper-
ation in an equitable apportionment of materials and prod-
ucts in short supply required for common defense, on which
a separate letter is today being sent to you, has been
received. However, it is the understanding of the three
( ;<ivernments that the exchange of notes on debt obligations
will be submitted to the Federal legislature for approval
and I have to request you to confirm that this will be done
at the appropriate time.

I beg your Excellency to accept the assurance of my high
esteem.

IVONE KiRKPATRICK

Chairman

Octohcr 23, 1950

B. LETTER OF FEDERAL CHANCELLOR
OF MARCH 6, 1951

TO : His Excellency, The Chairman of the Allied High
Commission

In reply to your letter of 23 October 1950, I have the
honor to inform you as follows :

I. The Federal Republic hereby confirms that it is liable
f<jr the prewar external debt of the German Reich, in-
cluding those debts of other corporate bodies subsequently
to be declared liabilities of the Reich, as well as for In-
terest and other charges on securities of the Government
of Austria, to the extent that such interest and charges
become due after 12 March 1938 and before 8 May 1945.

The Federal Government understands that in the de-
termination of the manner in which and the extent to
which the Federal Republic will fulfill this liability, ac-
count will be taken of the general situation of the Federal
Republic including, in particular, the effects of the limita-
tions on its territorial jurisdiction and its capacity to pay.

II. The Federal Government acknowledges hereby in
principle the debt arising from the economic assistance
furnished to Germany since 8 May 1945, to the extent to
which liability for such debt has not previously been
acknowledged in the agreement of economic cooperation
concluded on 15 December 1949 between the Federal Re-
public and the United States of America, or for which
the Federal Republic has not already taken over resjion-
sibility under article 133 of the basic law. The Federal
Government is ready to accord the obligations arising from
the economic assistance priority over all other foreign
claims against Germany or German nationals.

The Federal Government regards it as appropriate to
regulate any questions connected with the recognition and
settlement of these debts by bilateral agreements with

the Governments of the countries which have rendered
economic assistance, patterned on the agreement con-
cluded with the United States of America on 15 December
1949. The Federal Government takes for granted that
these agreements will contain an arbitration clause for
cases of dispute. The Federal Government is prepared
at once to enter into negotiations for the conclusion of
such agreements with the Goverinnents concerned.

The Federal Government hereby expresses its desire
to resume payments on the German external debt. It un-
derstands that there is agreement between it and the
Governments of France, the United Kingdom of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland and of the United States
of America on the following :

It is in the interest of the re-establishment of normal
economic relations between the Federal Republic and
other Countries to work out as soon as possible a settle-
ment plan w bich will govern the .settlement of public and
private claims against Germany and German nationals.

Interested Governments including the Federal Republic,
creditors and debtors shall participate in working out
this plan.

The settlement plan shall in particular deal with those
claims, the settlement of which would achieve the objec-
tive of normalizing the economic and financial relations
of the Federal Republic with other countries. It will take
into account the general economic position of the Federal
Republic, notably the increase of its burdens and the
reduction in its economic wealth. The general effect of
this plan shall neither dislocate the German economy
through undesirable effects on the internal financial situ-
ation nor unduly drain existing or potential German for-
eign-exchange resources. It shall also not add appreciably
to the financial burden of any occupation power.

The Governments concerned may obtain expert opinions
on all questions (arising out of the negotiations of the
settlement plan and on the capacity to pay).

The result of the negotiations shall be set forth in agree-
ments. It is agreed that the plan will be provisional in
nature and subject to revision as soon as Germany is re-
united and a final peace settlement becomes possible.

I beg Your Excellency to accept the assurance of my
high esteem.

Adenauer

c. letter to federal chancellor

OF MARCH 6, 1951

TO : His Excellency, The Chancellor of the Federal Repub-
lic of Germany

In reply to your letter of 6 March 1951, on the subject
of German indebtedness we have the honor, on behalf of
the Governments of France, the United Kingdom of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland, and the United States of
America, to acknowledge the undertakings of the Federal
Government in regard to the responsibility of the Federal
Republic for the prewar external debts of the German
Reich and for the debt arising out of the economic assist-
ance furnished to Germany by the three Governments
since 8 May 1945.

With regard to the priority accorded to the obligations
arising from the postwar economic assistance we are
authorized to state that the three Governments would
not propose to exercise this priority in such a way as to
restrict settlement of foreign held claims arising out of
trade subsequent to 8 May 1945, essential to the economic
recovery of the Federal Republic.

With regard to the question of an arbitration clause in
agreements covering the debts for postwar economic as-
sistance, the three Governments will be prepared, when
negotiating such agreements, to consider whether it would
be useful to Include an arbitration clause to deal with
any matters which might be appropriately settled by such
a procedure.

We further have the honor on behalf of the three Gov-
ernments to confirm the understandings of the Federal
Government as set forth in the second paragraph of

June 4, 7957

903

article 1 and in artiolc 3 of Your Excellency's letter. They
are now engaged in preparing proposals for the working
out of settlement arrangements; these will provide for
the participation of foreign creditors, German debtors,
and interested governments including the Federal Gov-
ernment.

The proposals will be designed to arrive at an orderly
overall settlement of prewar claims against Germany and
German debtors and of the debt arising out of the postwar
economic assistance, which would be fair and equitable to
all the interests affected, including those of the Federal
Government. It is the intention that the resulting settle-
ment should be embodied in a multilateral agreement ; any
bilateral agreements that may be considered to be neces-
sary would be concluded within the framework of the
settlement plan. As soon as their proposals are ready the
three Governments will communicate them to the Federal
Government and to other interested Governments and will
discuss with them these proposals and the procedure to be
adopted for dealing with the subject.

We have the honor to state that our three Governments
regard Your Excellency's letter under reference and this
letter as placing on record an agreement between the
Governments of France, the United Kingdom of Great Brit-
ain and Northern Ireland, and the United States of Amer-
ica, on the one hand and the Government of the Federal
Republic on the other, concerning the questions of German
indebtedess covered in these letters. These letters are
prepared in English, French and German, each text being
equally authentic.

The Chairman
AUied High Commission
(Andre Fkanqois-Poncet)

Enclosure 2

PROPOSED PROCEDURE

1. In order to arrive at a settlement of German prewar
and postwar external debts in cooperation with the inter-
ested parties, the three Governments have worked out a
tentative procedure for organising consultations and nego-
tiations, in which interested Governments, including the
German Federal Government, and with representatives of
debtors and creditors, would take part. In the meetings
envisaged in this procedure the three Governments would
be represented through the Tripartite Commission on
German Debts.

2. The procedure is designed to lead to the conclusion of
an intergovernmental agreement which would establish
the general conditions under which outstanding debts
would be settled between individual debtors and creditors.

3. In the view of the three Governments the agreement
should be arrived at In such a way that its terms would be
acceptable both to the Governments and to the various
interests affected. This means that representatives not
only of Governments but also of private creditor and debtor
interests should have the opportunity to participate fully
in working out the general settlement arrangements which
would form the basis of the agreement. Their participa-
tion is in fact an essential step towards and constitutes in
itself an element in the normalisation of Germany's inter-
national relations. On the other hand in view of their
interest in the subject, the three Governments intend to
participate fully in each stage of the procedure.

4. The following procedure is proposed:

(a) Consultations between the three Governments
and the German Federal (iovernment, the Governments of
other countries with a significant creditor interest, and
repre.sentative of creditors and debtors, on the implica-
tions of the statement on points of principle in Enclosure
3, on certain technical issues listed in Enclosure 4, and
on the procedure itself. The purpose of the consulta-
tions is to explain these matters to the participants and
to obtain their views on them and upon the practical
methods of implementation. As a result of these consul-

904

tations, the three Governments would revise and elaborate
the documents as necessary.

( b) Preparation of proposed settlement arrangements
by the interested parties. Tlie detailed organisation of
meetings for this purpose and the procedure to be followed
will be discussed in the consultations referred to above.
It is however agreed that the procedure should allow for
direct negotiations between representatives of debtors and
creditors and for full participation by the Tripartite Com-
mission acting on behalf of the three Governments.

(c) Conclusion of an intergovernmental agreement
which would enter into force when signed and approved
by the three Governments and the Government of the Fed-
eral Republic and to which other Governments would be
able to accede.

5. The three Governments have considered the best way
of organising the consultations referred to in paragraph
4(a) and believe that it is desirable that a meeting should
be held at which the interested parties, both governmental
and private, should have an opportunity of expressing their
views. It is proposed that such a meeting should be called
in London In the autumn of this year.

6. In order to ensure that this meeting is productive
and leads without undue delay to the negotiations en-
visaged in paragraph 4 (b), adequate preparation must
be made. The three Governments intend that this prep-
aration should include informal meetings with German
representatives and with representatives of the principal
creditor groups in the three countries, to which the Gov-
ernments of four other countries which have a major
creditor Interest, namely Belgium, the Netherlands,
Sweden and Switzerland are being invited to app<iint ob-
servers. Such meetings will be purely preliminary and
designed to explore the issue and prepare the ground for
the autumn meeting. Governments of creditor countries
not represented will receive further documents drawn
up after these informal meetings. It is hoped that
through the circulation of the present and later documents
all interested Governments will be able to consult the pri-
vate creditor interests in their own countries and make
adequate preparation for their participation at the autumn
meeting.

7. Following a short visit to Bonn early in June to
explain tlie procedure to the German Federal Government,
the Tripartite Commission will hold the preliminary in-
formal meetings referred to in paragraph 6 in London at
the end of June. Thereafter it will complete its own
preparatory work, and during August invitations will be
issued to the full consultations which it is hoped will be
held at the end of September. The negotiation of the
general settlement arrangements and the preparation of
the intergovernmental agreement would follow as soon as
possible.

Enclosure 3

POINTS OF PRINCIPLE

1. The three Governments acting in conformity with
their responsibilities and by reason of their position as
the principal and priority creditors of Germany, have
agreed with the Federal Government, In an exchange of
letters of 6th March. 1951, between the Federal Chan-
cellor and the Allied High Commission that a debt set-
tlement plan should be worked out in the interest of the
reestablishment of normal economic relations between the
Federal Rei)ublic and other countries. The general pur-
pose of this plan would be to provide for the settlement
of the prewar external debts of Germany and of German
debtors and of the debts for economic assistance extended
to Germany since 8th May, 1945, by the three occupying
l)owers.

2. It is the view of the three Governments that, in
order to further the reestablishment of normal economic
relations between the Federal Republic and other coun-
tries, the settlement should : —

Deparfmenf of Sfo/e Bulletin

(a) eliminate the state of default of Germany to
tlie utmost extent possible by suitable treatment of ma-
tured and maturing debts and of arrears of interest ;

(b) lead to a situation whieb would permit a return
to normal debtor-creditor relationships by providing
methods for settling these debts by agreement between
the parties;

(c) be of such a character as to contribute to the
recovery of Germany's international credit by the restora-
tion of confidence in her financial standing and reliability
as a borrower, while giving a reasonable assurance that
Germany will not again default on her undertakings ;

(d) be compatible with and as far as possible facili-
tate Germany's eventual compliance with obligations
which members of the International Monetary Fund and
the Organization for European Economic Cooperation
have assumed with regard to the transfer of payments
on current account, including interest and earnings on
investments.

II

3. The three Governments, which are also occupying
powers, have a special and continuing interest both in the
attainment of the above mentioned objectives and in the
settlement arrangements adopted to promote them. They
have indicated to the Federal Govei'nment in their letter
of 23rd October, 1950, which continued to represent their
views, that provided a settlement plan is worked out
which is acceptable to them, they will modify the priority
of their claims in respect to postwar economic assistance
to the extent necessary to permit the fulfilment of such an
agreed plan. To be acceptable the plan must conform to
the following principles :

(a) It should take into account the general economic
position of the Federal Republic ; it should not dislocate
the German economy through undesirable effects on the
internal financial situation, nor unduly drain existing
or potential German foreign exchange resources, and it
should not add appreciably to the financial burden of
any Occupying Power.

(b) It should provide for an orderly overall settle-
ment of the debts to be included in the plan and assure
fair and equitable treatment of all the interests affected,
including those of the Federal Government.

(c) It should be subject to revision as soon as Ger-
many is reunited and a final peace settlement becomes
possible, and should be capable of adjustment in the
light of changed circumstances.

In the view of the three Governments agreed procedures
and controls must also be established to govern this
settlement and all payments made under it.

4. The settlement of debts can only be put into effect
by agreements between particular German debtors and
their foreign creditors, but the three Governments have
agreed that such individual settlements should conform
to general settlement arrangements which would reflect
the foregoing principles. These arrangements would be
arrived at in negotiations between representatives of
creditors and debtors, the Federal Government, the three
Governments, and other interested Governments, and
would be incorporated in an intergovernmental agreement.
This agreement would provide patterns for the later
agreements between the individual debtors and creditors.
If a creditor does not wish to accept settlement in accord-
ance with one or other of these patterns, then under the
intergovernmental agreement there would be no present
possibility of the debt being discharged.

5. It is clear that a settlement plan of the nature out-
lined above requires that all parties be prepared to make
sacrifices in the interest of common agreement. It can-
not be expected that creditors will make sacrifices unless
the Germans make real efforts to meet their obligations
and unless the German Federal Government on their side
pursues such foreign exchange and internal fiscal policies
as will enable German obligations to be met under the
settlement agreement. The Germans must also bear in
mind the heavy burden borne by many other countries.

On the other hand, other creditors, like the three Govern-
ments, will have to give due regard to Germany's present
and future economic position, the other economic burdens
which she has to bear, and the fact that she is still receiv-
ing governmental economic assistance from abroad.

6. The three Governments will give due consideration
to the internal financial position of Germany and the
budgetary position of the Federal Government, both of
which will be affected by certain problems such as the
impact of Western defence requirements.

Ill

7. The settlement plan should provide that as a rule
holders of existing debts denominated in foreign curren-
cies should continue to hold obligations so denominated
which would be serviced in foreign exchange. It is, there-
fore, the amount which Germany can afford to pay in
foreign exchange that is likely to be the most Important
factor. At present Germany has small foreign exchange
reserves and is continuing to receive foreign aid or credit.
Although it is desirable that service on the debts should
be resumed at an early date, it is evident that in the short
run, while Germany continues to receive foreign aid, debt
service on more than a limited scale would add appreciably
to the financial burden of the three Governments. It
seems reasonable to assume, however, that in the long run
Germany's external payments can be balanced without
the need for exceptional assistance. It is necessary,
therefore, to make a distinction between what Germany-
can pay in the immediate future and what she can be
expected to pay in the long run.

8. It seems clear the Germany will have sufficient
resources to resume service payments on her external
debts under a reasonable settlement arrangement provided
that she is determined to do so and to accept the sacrifices
which may be necessary for the sake of removing a serious
obstacle to good relationships with others, improving her
credit standing and opening the way to normal sources of
credit. On the other hand, the volume of German prewar
and postwar foreign indebtedness will be disproportion-
ately large in relation to Germany's prospective ability to
make payments thereon. Moreover, a large part of the
prewar debts has matured and considerable amounts of
interest are in arrears. In view of these factors a realis-
tic approach by the creditors to the problem will be neces-
sary, and this will probably involve adjustments of the
terms of the debts. The methods and extent of such ad-
justments are matters which must be determined in the
negotiation of the settlement plan.

IV

9. Other questions for consideration arise from the
prospect that some creditors will seek settlement of their
debts in deutschemark (DM). Consideration must be
given to what extent and under what conditions it would
be possible to permit settlement in DM of foreign currency
debts. It will be necessary to assure that the plan pro-
vides equitable treatment between creditors who receive
payment in foreign currency and those who desire to re-
ceive payment in DM, and among creditors holding differ-
ent categories of German debts. To the extent that any
DM settlements may be permitted, it is considered that the
use of the DM received will have to be controlled in order
to reduce the potential loss of foreign exchange to the
German economy and in order to channel these DM into
long-term investment in Germany.

10. The most practicable method of arriving at an equi-
table treatment of the various creditor groups would
seem to be a process of negotiation among them with a
view to reaching agreement respecting the treatment to
be provided for the various tyi)es of claims in the settle-
ment plan. Whatever method is adopted, however, the
three Governments will wish to ensure that the settle-
ment arrangements do not lead to inequity or preferential
treatment as between some groups of creditors and others.

June 4, 1951

905

It will lie tlie aim of the three Governments to see that
all groups are properly represented, have a full oppor-
tunity to participate in working out the arrangements,
and agree to the treatment of each type of claim in the
settlement arrangements as a whole. They are agreed
that the terms of the debt settlement should not vary
according to the currencies in which oljligations are de-
nominated.

VI

11. Altliough the settlement arrangements must be suf-
ficiently flexible to permit of revision when Germany is
reunited and to allow the creditors to receive higher
annual payments as Germany's ability to make payments
improves, they should, nevertheless, provide a stable basis
for future financial relations by giving both creditor and
debtor a clear picture of their expectations in the future.
This aim would not be achieved if there had to be fre-
quent renegotiation of the terms of the settlement. There-
fore, the .settlement plan should go as far as possible in
including provisions designed to obviate the need of any
early renegotiation. For this purpose it will be necessary
to provide in the plan for adjustment in the light of
changes in the German economic situation and the manner
in which this can be achieved is a subject which will
require careful consideration during the course of the
negotiations. The plan must in any ease clearly con-
template the possibility of renegotiation at such time as
Germany becomes reunited.

Enclosure 4

TECHNICAL QUESTIONS

In connection with the establishment of a plan for the
.settlement of German external debts a number of ques-
tions are expected to arise for consideration.

Among these are :

(1) Whether German debts owed to foreign creditors
which may not be strictly classifiable as external in char-
acter should be included in the plan ;

(2) questions connected with the operations of the
Konversionskasse and Verrechnungskasse ;

(3) what debts of corporate bodies which functioned
as Reich agencies constitute liabilities of the Reich ;

(4) the extent of the liability of the Federal Repuuiie
with regard to interest and other charges which became
due after 12th March, 1938, and before 8th May, 1945, on
securities of the Government of Austria ;

(5) specific problems relating to the debts of Prussui ;

(6) effect of the gold clause provisions in specific
German obligations.

TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR TRIPARTITE
COMIVIISSiON ON GERMAN DEBTS

[Enclosure 5]

The Governments of France, United Kingdom
and United States have decided to establish a
commission to be known as the Tripartite Com-
mission on German Debts for the purpose of car-
rying forwai'd tlie work of the three Governments
ill pre])ai'ing for tlie orderly overall settlement of
German jjrewar debts and of the German debt
arising out of postwar economic assistance, as
envisaged in the agreement of 6th March, 1951,
between the three Governments and the German
Federal Govei'nment.

1. Tiio Conunission will have its headquarters
in London.

2. The functions of the Commission will be :

(a) To serve as a means of coordinating the
policies of the three Governments regarding for-
eign-held German debts.

(b) To take the necessary steps so that a
plan for general settlement arrangements for these
debts is worked out in consiUtation with the Ger-
man Federal Government and other interested
Governments and with representatives of credi-
tors and debtors and so that the settlement ar-
rangements are embodied in an intergovernmental
agreement.

(c) To represent the three Governments:
(i) in the negotiations relative to these set-
tlement arrangements and the intergovernmental
agreement; and

(ii) in dealing with problems in connec-
tion with the settlement of postwar debts for eco-
nomic assistance.

(d) To deal with such other matters relative
to German debts as are referred to it by the three
Governments.

3. In carrying out these functions the Com-
mission will be guided by the agreed policies of
the three Governments including the principles
relating to German debts which were communi-
cated to the Chancellor of the German Federal
Kepublic in the letter of 23rd October, 1950, from
the Allied Hi^h Commission and by the agree-
ment of 6th March, 1951, between the three Gov-
ernments and the German Federal Government.

Ban on Critical Materials Exports
to East-West Trade Violators Urged

^Released to the jjrcss at Frankfort, Bonn, and Washing-
ton May 22]

United States High Commissioner John J.
McCloy today announced that he is recommending
that the United States Government prohibit the
shipment of critical export goods from the United
States to any companies or persons in West Ger-
many engaging in illegal trade with the Soviet
orbit. This recommendation, the result of a long-
term study, has been the subject of discussions
between several United States departments at
Washington and Hicoo.

HicoG economics officials stressed the signifi-
cance of this step in view of the large volume of
much needed exports from the United States to
West Germany.

The recommended ban on shipments will not
affect United States food shipments to Germany
but could all'ect many other kinds of United States
exports to Germany.

Tliis action follows the recent announcement of
tlie Federal Chancellor tliat effective steps would
be taken to combat illeo:al trade and denv scarce

906

Department of State Bulletin

raw materials to violators. It was pointed out
that the ECA mission has repeatedly warned that
East-West trade violators will get no ECA aid
and that there is a constant check on end-use of
ECA-financed ^oods to insure against misuse of
these goods. One of the first conditions of the
investment of ECA counterpart funds is that the
firm concerned is not an East -West trade violator.
In the following letter to Chancellor Adenauer,
Mr. McCloy informed the Federal Chancellor of
his latest reconunendation to Washington :

I was gratified to learn of your statement, dated April
28, 1951, in which you referred to the objectionable situ-
ation prevailing within the Federal Republic in the matter
of illegal exports of strategic commodities to the East. I
noted particularly, the expression of your firm intent to
take effective steps in combating such illegal trade and
denying scarce raw materials to violators, as one of the
steps to be employed.

As you know the Government of the United States is
profoundly concerned with this problem and is endeavor-
ing to tind an adequate solution to it in Germany, as well
as in other parts of the Western world. Sir. Cattier,
Chief of tlie ECA sjiecial missi(m to Western Germany,
has informed your Government that no ECA counterpart
funds will lie approved for investment in any company
which engages in illegal trade with the East. Recently,
General Handy and I agreed to extend operations of the
United States customs unit to the interzonal border of the
United States zone, as well as the international border,
where it had previously been stationed. Further, as you
know, members of my staff in recent weeks have had
numerous discussions with representatives of your Gov-
ernment, in reference to various aspects of illegal East-
West trade. Information received by my staff confirms
the serious state of affairs in this field.

In order to supplement measures which have recently
been taken or announced, I would now like to ask you to
institute all measures necessary to prevent any allocation
of ECA dollars, or commodity imports for ECA dollars,
to any person or company which engages in illegal trade
with the Soviet orbit.

I would further like to advise you that I am recom-
mending to my Government to prohibit certain exports
from the United States to any companies or persons in
Western Germany who, according to information coming
to our attention, may be engaged in transactions of this
nature.

Your offer of cooperation in this matter reflects your
appreciation of the scope and significance of this prob-
lem and a determination to find an appropriate solution
to it. This attitude is indeed gratifying, and I would
like to ask you to instruct competent members of your
government to meet with appropriate members of my staff,
in order to arrive at mutually satisfactory arrangements
on procedures and administration in this field in accord-
ance with the objectives outlined in the foregoing para-
graphs.

Stay of Executions of German
War Criminals Lifted

[Released to the press May 21}

The Department of State announced today that
it has lifted the stay of executions of five German
■war criminals and has notified John J. McCloy,
United States High Commissioner for Germany,

of its action. Final disposition of the cases is now
in the hands of Mr. McCloy. Any additional in-
formation will be issued by the Office of the United
States High Commissioner for Germany.

The sentences were stayed when counsel for the
condemned men began appeal proceedings in the
United States courts on February 14, 1951. Fol-
lowing the refusal of the United States Supreme
Court to consider the cases, the United States
Court of Appeals issued its mandate to the District
Court, aflirming the action of that Court. Today
the District Court terminated the court proceed-
ings by entering a final order affirming its dis-
missal of the petitions.

The five criminals involved are: Paul Blobel,
Werner Braune, Erich Xaumann, Otto Ohlendorf ,
and Oswald Polil.

Two other death sentences of German war crim-
inals are under the jurisdiction of the Department
of Defense.

[Released to the press Map 2Jf]

The Department has been informed by the
United States District Court that the Court has
issued an order I'estraining the execution of the
seven Landsberg war criminals until 10 : 00 a.m.,
Tuesday, May 29. The Department immediately
notified United States High Commissioner McCloy
of the stay of execution.

The Court has set 10 : 00 a.m., Monday for full
argument.

Income-Tax Convention
With Switzerland Signed

[Released to the press May 3.'/]

On May 24, 1951, Dean Acheson, Secretary of
State, and Charles Bruggmann, Swiss Minister in
Washington, signed a convention between the
United States and Switzerland for the avoidance
of double taxation with respect to taxes on income.

The provisions of the convention are similar in
general to those contained in income-tax conven-
tions now in force between the United States and
Canada, Denmark, France, the Netherlands, Swe-
den, and the United Kingdom.

The convention will be submitted to the Senate
for its advice and consent to ratification. The
convention provides that instruments of ratifica-
tion shall be exchanged and that the convention
shall become effective for taxable years beginning
on or after January 1 of the year in which the
exchange takes place, except that, if the exchange
takes place on or after October 1, certain provisions
shall have effect only for taxable years beginning
on or after January 1 of the year next following
the year in which the exchange takes place.

June 4, 1951

907

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Calendar of Meetings ^

Adjourned During May 1951

International Industries Fair Bombay Apr. 1-May 15

United Nations:

Economic and Social Council:

Human Rights Commission: 7th Session Geneva Apr. 16-May 19

Population Commission: 6th Session Lake Success Apr. 23-May 4

Commission on Status of Women: 5th Session Lake Success Apr. 30- May 14

Fiscal Commission: 3d Session Lake Success May 7-16

Statistical Commission: 6th Session Lake Success May 7-18

Technical Assistance Board Paris May 8-15

Economic Commission for Europe: Coal Committee Geneva May 22*-25*

Who (World Health Organization):

Special Committee on International Sanitary Regulations .... Geneva Apr. 9- May 5

Fourth Assembly Geneva May 7-26

Pan American Sanitary Organization: 13th Meeting of Executive Washington Apr. 23-May 1

Committee.
United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization:

Middle East Conference To Explain U. N. to Teachers Beirut Apr. 24^May 6

Fag (Food and Agriculture Organization) :

International Poplar Commission: 5th Session United Kingdom Apr. 25-May 2

Paris International Trade Fair Paris Apr. 28-May 14

International Textile Exposition Lille Apr. 28-May 20

Wmo (World Meteorological Organization): Executive Committee . . Paris Apr. 30-May 1

Council of Europe, Consultative Assembly Strasbourg May 6-19

Caribbean Commission: 12th Meeting Barbados May 7-12

Ii.o (International Labor Organization) : 4th Session Geneva May 7-19

Joint Maritime Commission Geneva May 21-26

South Pacific Commission: 7th Session Noumea Apr. 28-May 7

American International Institute for the Protection of Cliildhood, Montevideo May 11-12

Annual Meeting of the Directing Council.

In Session as of May 31, 1951

United Nations:

General As.sembly, 5th Regular Session Lake Success Sept. 19-

Economic and Social Council:

Commission on Narcotic Drugs: 6th Session Lake Success Apr. 10-

FJconomic, F^mployment and Development Commission .... Lake Success May 14-

Economic Commission for Latin America: 4th Se.ssion Mexico City May 28-

Intcrnational Law Commission: 3d Session Geneva May 15-

Intergovernmental Study Group on Germany London Jan. 30-

International Materials Conference Washington Feb. 26-

Council of Foreign Ministers, Meeting of Deputies Paris Mar. 5-

Four Power Conference on Swiss Allied Accord Bern Mar. 5-

International Exhibition of Textile Arts and Fashion; Art Exhibit. . Turin Apr. 1-

Itu (International Telecommunication Union):

Sixth Session of the .Administrative Council Geneva. Apr. 16-

Nato (North Atlantic Treaty Organization): Working Group on London Apr. 16-

Draft International Convention Regarding Status of Nato
Representatives and International Staff.
Icao (International Civil Aviation Organization):

Comnuinications Division: 4th Session Montreal Apr. 24-

Festival of Britain England Rlay 3-

' Prepared in the Division of International Conferences, Department of State.
♦Tentative

908 Department of State Bulletin

Calendar oj Meetings— Conimned.

In Session as of May 31, 19S1— Continued

9th International Exhibition of Decorative and Industrial Arts and Milan May 5

Modern Architecture.

Upu (Universal Postal Union) : . , ,^, „ . a^ nqllpn . . May 21-

Executive and Liaison Commission: 14th Session p;i,p May 22-

FAo/WHoP:xpert Committee on Nutrition: 2d Session T.Znto ' Mav 28-

Fourth Canadian International Trade Fair p"„," Mav 28-

Fao Working Partv on Lons;- Term Program n^oiiiu Mav 28-

Who Consultative Committee for Europe: 1st Session nlV.^„ MaV 31-

Who-Unicef Joint Committee on Health Policy fv"pv^ May 28-

I,.o Governing Body: 115th Session Santiago ''.'.'.'.'.'■ May 30-

Inter-Anierican Commission of Women »anuat,o j

Scheduled June 1-August 31, 1951

Statistical Institute, Inter-American: 1st Session of the Committee Washington June 2-

for the Improvement of National Statistics. j^^^^ ^

Who Executive Board: 8th Session Montreal '■ '■ June 5-

ICAO 5th Assembly •••■•.■••, Brussels ■■■:::... June 5-

Diplomatic Conference on Maritime Law rsrusseis

Itu (International Telecommunication Union): aj i- n „o„<. June 5-

International Radio Consultative Committee :6th Plenary Meetmg. Geneva Augu^lS-

Extraordinary Administrative Radio Conference Geneva 6

^ PermMenrCentral Opium Board and Narcotic Drugs Supervisory Geneva June 5-

Body: 5th Joint Session. t oV= «.,oo<.=o June 11-

Trusteeship Council: 9th Session Lake Success June ii

Economic and Social Council: . ^ . i. at „„ Tune 9-

Regional Conference of Non-Governmental Organizations on Managua June y

U. N. Information. . „ Tune 11-

Economic Commission for Europe: Timber Committee .... VT^e^.^n'o^; lune 11-

Council Committee on Non-Governmental Organizations . . . Lake Success 1X2-

Conference of Plenipotentiaries on the Status of Refugees and Geneva Juiy -^

Stateless Persons. . , j„„„o!o Julv 10-

Regional Conference of Non-Governmental Organizations on Indonesia Juiy i"-

United Nations Information. t 1 03-

Economic and Social Council— Economic Committee Geneva " y

Economic and Social] Council— Agenda Committee Geneva y

Economic and Social Council: 13th Session . ...... . .... Geneva Aue 1-

Intergovernmental Committee on International Criminal Juris- Geneva ^"B-

diction.

Ilo (International Labor Organization) : p„„o„a June 6-

34th International Labor Conference ueneva. 2_

116th Session of Governing Body . •••;.• • • • •, • • • 1 > pf°!3« July 2-

Meeting of Experts on the Status and Conditions of Employment of Geneva ""'J'

Domestic Workers.

Upu (Universal Postal Union) : . Tune 6-

Technical Transit Committee: 2d Meetmg ?he Hague •'■::::: June ?=

13th International Congress of Actuaries ine nague ....

Fad (Food and Agriculture Organization) : p^mp June 11-

Council: 12th Session 51 rf>i A„=tri<i Aug 12*

Meeting of Mechanical Wood Technology . . ... .... . . • ^■^°'?l' A"^^"* June U

Statisticallnstitute, Inter-American, 4th Session of Committee on the Washmgton June 11

1950 Census of the Americas. . j^^g i5_

International Aeronautical Exposition, Nineteenth . • • • {;a"s

13th International Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy . . Pans

United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization: . j^^^ jg_

General Conference: 6th Se,ssion ••.••••■••• T^tL'f^ Julv 7-

Seminar on Teaching of Visual Arts in General Education . . . . Bristol July 11-
Seminar on Teaching of History P„r[r® July 11-

Executive Board: 26th Session fnnHon June 25-

International Sugar Council . ■•„•■•■ ■ • Tnndon '. '■ June 13-

Fifth Session of the International Wheat Council London 2_

International Penal and Penitentiary Commission St'T^l.^p. Julv 3-

Building Exhibition, Constructa: 25th ■ ■ ■ tiannover lulv 9-

Conference of British Commonwealth Survey Officers l^ondon ^y ^^_

Public Education, 14th International Congress .. . . ■■■■ ■ ■ X'^°®yf„,„ Tulv 23-

International Commission for the Regulation of Whalmg: 3d Meeting Capetown Juiy/d

Wool Studv Group: 5th Meeting -xl^iioI^Ho,; Aug 17-

International Congress of Entomology, 9th • • ■ • • ^?iw''^^°' Aug 8-

International Exhibition of Cinematographic Art, 12th Venice ^^&. ^^

Izmir International Trade Fair ;;>//,••,■»■■' b "''^ 1= Aue 21-

Geodesy and Geophysics, International Union of: 9th General Assem- Brussels Aug. ^1

Na^'o": 7th Session Europe* August*

*Tentative

June 4, J 95 1

909

Nineteenth Report of U.N. Command Operations in Korea

FOR THE PERIOD APRIL 1-15, 19511

/

U.N. doc. S/2156
Dated May 18, 1951

I herewith sul3mit report number 19 of the
United Nations Command Opei'ations in Korea
for the period 1-15 April, inclusive. United Na-
tions Command comnumiques provide detailed ac-
counts of these operations.

Enemy forces offered only sporadic resistance
until 8 April when all regular Chinese Communist
and north Korean forces to the east of the Imjin
Eiver had been driven out of the Republic of
Korea. Thereafter, enemy forces on their main
line of resistance bitterly contested United Na-
tions advances. The most intense fighting of the
period took place on the central front along the
Hantanchon River east of its confluence with the
Imjin, along the southern approaches to the
Hwachon reservoir and dam, and along the Soyang
River a few miles to the east. Fighting was also
intense in the Changam area. In his defensive
efforts, the enemy has demonstrated increased
strength in artillery and mortars. During the
period. United Nations forces advanced eight to
fifteen miles over the front west of Chongong.

Although the enemy has remained on the de-
fensive since mid February, only partially ex-
ploiting his enormous potential of more than sixty
divisions, he retains the capability of assuming the
offensive at any time. Marked increase in ac-

' Transmitted to the Security Council by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin, U.S. representative in tbe Security
Council, on May IS. For texts of the first, second, third,
fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, and
eleventh report.s to the Security Council on U.N. command
operation in Korea, see Bulletin, of Aug. 7, 1950, p. 203;
Aug. 28, 1!)50, p. 32:5; and Sept. 11, li^'M, p. 403; Oct. 2,
19.j0, p. ,534 ; Oct. 10, 1950, p. 003 ; Nov. 0, 1950, p. 729 ;
Nov. 13, 1950, p. 759 ; JaiL 8, 1951, p. 43, and Fell. 19, 1951,
p. 304, resjiectively. The rejjorts whicli have licen pub-
lished separately as Department of State publications
3935, 3955, 3902, 397cS, 39,S0, 4000, 4015, aiul 4108 respec-
tively will appear hereafter only in the Bulletin. The
twelfth, thirteenth, fourteenth reports appear in the
Bulletin of Mar. 19, 1951, p. 470; the fifteenth and six-
teenth rep<irts in the I'.ullktin of .\pr. 10, 1951, p. 025;
(he seventeenth report in the Bin.i.ivriN of Apr. 30, 1951,
p. 710; the eighteenth in Bulletin of May 7, 1951, p. 755;
and for text of a special report by the U.N. Commanding
Ceneral, so!c Bulletin of May 21, 1951, p. 828.

tivity in the hostile rear has been accompanied by
a continued deployment of combat forces into for-
ward areas. Daily vehicle sightings in late March
and early April repeatedly pass the 2,000 mark,
and the traffic pattern indicates that the enemy
has expanded his central front buildup westward
into the Kumchon area, opposite the west flank of
the United Nations Eighth Army. Three or more
Chinese Communist Forces Armies have recently
displaced into this area.

Front lines at the close of the period ran gen-
erally northeast along the Imjin River to Chon-
gong, east to Hwachon and Inje, and thence to
Hupchiri on the east coast.

Guerrilla activity in United Nations rear areas
has declined to the lowest point since the outbreak
of the Korean conflict, as the dissident bands seek
to avoid contact with United Nations forces.
United Nations security forces have continued to
ferret out and destroy guerrilla units at every op-
portunity, and have greatly reduced their effective
strength in the past three months. As the main
enemy forces resume the offensive, the guerrillas
may be expected to again become aggressive, but
their potential threat to United Nations logistical
facilities is much less than before.

United Nations naval forces continued effective
denial to the enemy of the use of Korean coastal
waters wliile assuring the unrestricted movement
of United Nations shipping to and from Korea.
Gunfire sujiport of ground forces was limited to
occasional missions on the east coast of Korea.
Surface units continued the mu'cmitting program
of interdiction by naval gunfire of enemy lines of
communications in the Wonsar, Songjin and
Chongjin areas. Naval carrier based aircraft, in-
cluding the Marine Air Wing ashore. Hew missions
on a daily basis in close support of United Nations
ground forces concentrating on the front lines in
the western and central sectors. Successful
harassment on enemy transportation routes, on
east coastal railways and highways and armed
reconnaissance in central area was carried out by
these Naval aircraft, as well as methodical checks
on enemy airfields, small boat and troop move-
ments. A raiding force of British Royal Marine

910

Deparfment of State Bulletin

commandos, supported by United Nations surface
units and carrier based aircraft, landed in the
Songjin area, demolished a section of the coastal
railroad and withdrew without suffering losses.

Check minesweeping operations were continued
along the Korean east coast for the protection of
gunfire support ships. Drifting mines continued
to menace shipping in the Sea of Japan.

United Nations dominance of the skies over
Korea continued despite repeated challenges by an
increasing number of enemy Russian-built MIG
jet planes. The air battles have taken place prac-
tically every day in the general Sinuiju-Sinaju
area to whicli the enemy has restricted his opera-
tions by basing his short-range jets in Manchuria.
Despite the advantages of the haven north of the
Yalu, the Communists losses have been extremely
heavy compared to those of the United Nations
forces. The greatest air battle of the war took
place on 12 April when about 22,5 United Nations
and hostile planes clashed near Sinuiju.

Mediimi bombers, while continuing their inter-
diction efforts over all north Korea, have several
times attacked the Korean ends of the bridges over
the Yalu River. The enemy's concern aSout the
damage to his attempted build-up is indicated by
his continued attempted interceptions despite
significant daily losses.

Close support of ground forces and disruption
of transportation nearer the battle area were con-
tinued by the tactical elements of United Nations
air forces. Night operations against the increas-
ing vehicular traffic are being expanded with
considerable success.

Enemy efforts to maintain north Korean air-
fields in operable condition are being countered by
attacks utilizing bombs, napalm, rockets and ma-
chine guns. His continued efforts in this regard
give indication of his intent, or at least desire, to
renew his air efforts against United Nations forces
in areas other than northwest Korea. Intelligence
reports indicate there is much air-training activity
in various areas of China and Manchuria.

High praise must be paid to the elements en-
gaged in evacuation by air of wounded persomiel
and of individuals from behind enemy lines.
Countless numbers of wounded who would surely
have died and of men who would have become
prisoners have been saved by prompt and efficient
action of the air rescue and evacuation units. The
wounded United Nations soldier in Korea has a
better chance of recovery than had the soldier of
any i^revious war, not only by virtue of improved
medical treatments available at all echelons, but
also in large measure because of his ready accessi-
bility to major medical installations provided by
rapid air evacuation.

The enemy continues to violate the laws of war
in Korea. Since the last report, three new cases
of atrocities have been substantiated. These inci-
dents in which the Armed Forces of north Korea

and Communist China have violated accepted
standards for the conduct of war have been re-
ported : On or about 29 January 1951, a patrol
from the .5th Marine Regiment was dispatched on
a mission north of Yongchon. The patrol, con-
sisting of ten Marines and one south Koi'ean, never
returned. On or about 7 March 1951, the bodies
of ten Americans, reported by local inhabitants to
have been captured on or about 30 January 1951 by
guerrillas, were found with fifteen bodies of Re-
public of Korea personnel in a mass grave at
Nakchon-Dong. The victims were found with
their hands tied, the condition of the bodies indi-
cating they had been beaten, knifed, mutilated
and shot at close range.

A soldier of the 2d Infantry Division was cap-
tured by Cliinese troops on or about 12 February
1951 near Hoengsong. The Chinese poured gaso-
line over him and set him afire. The victim was
recovered by United Nations troops on or about
21 February 1951 and died on 24 February of
second degree burns and emaciation.

On or about 26 September 1950 a captured
United States soldier was being held at the Peoples
Hospital, Kunsang-Ni, Chinan, Korea. He was
marched a short distance from the hospital and
executed by two members of the north Korean
Security Forces. The body was buried by villagers
in a Korean Cemetery.

Unconfirmed atrocities, recently reported, are
under active investigation. The reports include a
massacre of 228 political prisoners at the Holdong
Gold ISIine, cluboing to death of twenty civilians
at Hongnong Myon and the execution of thirteen
l^olitical prisoners at Gooncha Myon.

In leaflets, loudspeaker broadcasts, and radio
broadcasts to enemy soldiers and to Korean ci-
vilians, particular emphasis is being placed on reg-
ularly restating the United Nations Korean
objectives of peace, unification, and rehabilitation.
The desire of the United Nations to prevent expan-
sion of the conflict and to arrange a peaceful set-
tlement is kept constantly before soldier and
civilian alike. The importance of wide transmis-
sion of this information is manifested by recurring
reports that Communist political officers are reg-
ularly falsifying the facts to deceive their own
forces and compel them to continue to sujjport the
cause of aggression. A new series of radio pro-
grams entitled "Spirit of Freedom" dramatizes
for the Korean people the story of the United
Nations Forces fighting in their support. More
than 326 million leaflets have now been dissemi-
nated in Korea.

On 11 April 1951, eight months and eighteen
days after the activation of the United Nations
Command for the prosecution of the Korean ef-
fort. General of the Army Douglas MacArthur
relinquished command to the undersigned.

RiDGWAT

June 4, 7957

911

The United States in the United Nations

[May 25-31, 1951]

General Assembly

The Committee of Twelve {AEC-CCA).—K.t
a meeting on May 25, the United States represent-
ative, Frank C. Nash, presented the United States
proposal for the establishment of a single com-
mission to coordinate the work of the Atomic En-
ergy Commission and the Commission for Conven-
tional Armaments. This plan proposes that the
new commission should be established under and
report to the Council, which in turn should submit
periodic progress reports to the General Assem-
bly. The functions include:

The primary task of the new commission should be to
prepare comprehensive and coordinated plans for the in-
ternational control of all armaments and armed forces,
and accordinftly, would provide for the regulation, limita-
tion, and balanced reduction of all armaments and armed
forces, including internal security and poUce forces.

The new commission should build upon the work already
develoi)ed by the AEC and the CCA. The United Nations
plan for the international control of atomic energy and
the prohibition of atomic weapons should continue to
serve as the basis for any plan for the control of atomic
energy unless and until a better and no less effective
system can be devised.

Mr. Nash stated that in the view of the United
States, the work of the Aec and the Cca —

. . . has now reached a point where it is appropriate
to consider ways and means of initiating the requisite
coordination and expansion in a comprehensive system
of control. ... In proposing the establishment of a
new and consolidated commission to take over the work
of the two present commissions, the United States dele-
gation has in view the further important objective of
possibly relieving the atmosphere of stalemate which has
prevailed in the two commissions for some time past.
. . . It is our hope that the demonstration by the
peace-loving nations of the world of their determination
to stand together, strensthened and united in effective
opposition against any further aggression, may lead to
a change in some of these fundamental disagreements.
Then . . . we may have a chance of getting ahead
with our work toward disarmament.

Only two other delegates, Dr. H. R. Wei
(China), and S. K. Tsarapkin (U.S.S.R.), com-
mented on the proposal at this meeting. Dr. Wei
stated that the plan was a valuable contribution
and had the correct approach to the problem. The
U.S.S.R. delegate voiced objections to the "so-
called new United States proposal," which he
stated stipulated that the new commission was to
base its work on "the same old, obsolete, and un-
acceptable" United States plan for atomic energy
control. In reply, Mr. Nash (U. S.) commented

that the United States had no intention of offering
a "new" proposal, and that the Soviet Union had
urged a merger of the two commissions some years
back. "I am frankly disappointed," he said, "that
this new step now lacks U.S.S.R. support."

The Committee, established under the General
Assembly resolution of December 13, 1950, is re-
quired to submit a report of its work to the next
session of the Assembly.

The Committee adopted a United States formal
motion (11-1 (U.S.S.R.)-O) authorizing the Sec-
retariat to prepare a study of the activities of
the League of Nations in the disarmament field.

Economic and Social Council

Economic CoTnmission for Latin America
(ECLA). — The fourth session of Ecl.\ opened
at Mexico City on May 28. Tlie Commission is
composed of 20 Latin American countries, and
France, Netherlands, United Kingdom, and the
United States. Ambassador Merwin L. Bohan
heads the United States delegation.

The items on the agenda include: (1) Economic
survey of Latin America for 1950; (2) foreign-
trade problems; (3) joint work program of Ecla
and Fag; and (4) coordination between Ecla and
the Inter- American Economic and Social Council.

Economic Commission for Europe {ECE). —
The sixth session of the Commission convened at
Geneva on May 29. Representatives of 17 Eu-
ropean member countries of the United Nations,
and the United States, are attending the session.
Milton Katz is the United States representative.

The items on the agenda include: (1) Reports
of the activities over the past year of the principal
EcE Committees; (2) a statement by the Execu-
tive secretary, Gunnar Myrdal (Sweden), on the
past and future work of the Commission ; and (3)
Secretariat's annual survey of the European eco-
nomic situation and problems.

Specialized Agencies

World Health Organization {WnO).—T\\Q
Fourth World Health Assembly, legislative body
of Who, at its final plenary meeting, May 25,
adopted a single code of International Sanitary
Regulations to replace all the existing sanitary
conventions for health protection in international
trade and travel. The new regulations do not
require ratification by member states and will au-
tomatically come into force on October 1, 1952.

As a result of the Assembly's decisions on pro-

912

Department of Stale Bulletin

gram questions, it is expected that for the first
time, 1952, tliere will be a world-wide coordinated
pattern of international health work financed by
Who, Unicef, and the United Nations technical
assistance program.

The Assembly adopted a 1952 budget for Who
of almost 7.7 million dollars, a 25 percent in-
crease over this year's figure.

Three countries — Japan, Spain, and Germany —
were admitted to the Who.

Security Council

The Council met on M;iy 29. After expressions
of sympathy on the death of Dr. Jose Philadelpho
de Barros e Azevedo on May 7, the members
unanimously adopted the proposal of President
Selim Sarper (Turkey) to hold a separate election
to fill the vacancy in the International Court of
Justice during the next session of the General
Assembly prior to the regular election, during that
session, of successors to five other judges whose
terms of ofSce expire in February 1952.

The President then took up the matter contained
in the following two letters received from the
Pakistan Government: (a) Letter to the Presi-
dent of the Council, dated May 4, from Sir
Mohammad Zafrulla Khan, Pakistan Minister of
Foreign Affairs, calling attention to ''a report
which has appeared in the press in India and Pak-
istan that the Yuvaraja of Jammu and Kashmir
issued a proclamation on April 30, 1951, for con-
voking a constituent assembly in the State," (b)
letter to the President of the Council, dated May
8, from Ahmed S. Bokhari, Pakistan permanent
representative to the United Nations, calling atten-
tion to an "extract from Sheikh Abdulla's (Prime
Minister of the Indian-occupied Kashmir) speech
delivered by him at Srinager on the 4th of May
1951 . . . 'We have decided after long de-
liberations to convene Constituent Assembly to de-
cide future shape and affiliation of Kashmir and no
power can veto its decision.' "

Ahmed S. Bokhari (Pakistan) discussed the two
conmiunications received by the Council and re-
viewed previous statements made by the delegates
expressing concern over the Constituent Assembly
and its possible implications. He stated that the
responsibility for the convoking of the Assembly
rested with the Indian Government and held that
the question of the constitution should be taken
up only after the question of accession had been
settled. He felt that the device of the so-called
Assembly would be a most unhappy augury for
the future.

Rajeshwar Dayal (India) declared that the
Indian attitude had already been clearly stated
previously by Sir Benegal N. Rau (India), who
had pointed out that Kashmir as a unit of the
Indian federation had to follow the usual consti-
tutional processes and that the proposed Constit-
uent Assembly was not intended to prejudice the
question of accession. Sir Benegal had said, and

this continued to be the position of the Indian
Government, that the Assembly could not physi-
cally be prevented from expressing its opinion on
the question of accession if it so chose, but this
opinion would not bind the Indian Government
nor prejudice the position of the Security Council.

Sir Gladwyn Jebb (U. K.) stated that his Gov-
ernment "greatly regrets" that the Security Coun-
cil had to resume the discussion of this matter so
soon and believed that the statement of Sheikh
Abdulla, rejecting the Council resolutions, would
inevitably create a "painful impression." How-
ever, in view of the reassuring remarks of the rep-
resentatives of India, he proposed that the
President of the Council communicate with both
parties in order to draw their attention to the
apprehensions expressed in the Council and ex-
press the hope that the two Governments would do
everything possible to prevent the Kashmir au-
thorities from acting in a manner prejudicial to
the Security Council.

Ambassador Ernest A. Gross (U. S.) supported
Sir Jebb's remarks and proposal. He cited the
provision of the Security Council resolution of
March 30 with regard to the Constituent Assembly,
and also called attention to paragraph 8 of that
resolution. He noted it was true that Sir Bene-
gal N. Rau's (India) assurances stated that
no prejudicial action was intended and it was
"gratifying" to hear a reaffirmation of these assur-
ances. However, Sheikh Abdulla did not seem to
agree with these statements of the Indian repre-
sentatives. He added that the United Nations
representative. Dr. Frank P. Graham, would leave
for the subcontinent within the next few weeks
and it was not only right but necessary that he
should arrive there in an atmosphere clear of the
doubts raised at this meeting. The United States
hoped that both parties and the Security Council
would concentrate on the primary objective of
aiding the United Nations representative to ac-
complish his mission. He reemphasized that the
United States favored a settlement acceptable to
both parties.

After the other members, with the exception of
the U.S.S.R., had commented along the same lines
as the United Kingdom and United States, the
President read the text of the letter he proposed
to send to both Governments. It noted with satis-
faction the assurances of the representatives of
India that the Assembly was not intended to
prejudice the issues before the Security Council.
It pointed out, on the other hand, that the com-
munications from Pakistan on the convening and
purpose of the Assembly would, if true, involve
procedures in conflict with the commitments of
the parties involved. The letter recalled the opera-
tive pai-agraph 8 of the March 30 resolution and
said a full record of the May 29 meeting would be
forwarded to both parties.

The letter was approved 9-0-2 (U.S.S.R.,
India).

June 4, 7 95 J

913

Negotiating a Peace in Palestine

I

STATEMENT BY AMBASSADOR AUSTIN

U.S. REPRESENTATIVE IN SECURITY COUNCIL'

Last week, in participating in sponsoring this
Council's resolution calling for a cease-fire in the
present unfortunate dispute between Israel and
Syria, I urged the necessity of prompt considera-
tion of the complaints which we have now had on
our agenda for the last few weeks under "The
Palestine Question."

Fortunately, with the passage of the interven-
ing days between our last meeting and this one,
we have received reassuring indications that the
fighting in and around the demilitarized zone has
ceased as ordered. Today, therefore, I believe we
may consider these complaints more dispassion-
ately and with a clearer understanding of the facts
and of the necessity for prompt Council action.

I think that the urgency of Council action can
be readily appreciated by all of us, for delay in
acting here, delays the realization of peace in
Palestine. Furthermore, the Chief of Staff of the
Truce Supervision Organization, General Riley,
should have had a much longer period of con-
valescence; he has returned to his post in Pales-
tine, and we should see to it that he and the parties
in the dispute have material evidence of our deter-
mination that this present dispute shall be resolved
promptly and that future disputes shall be pre-
vented.

Strengthening the Negotiating Machinery

As a result of what has been heard here before
the Council, the impression may have been cre-
ated in the minds of some of us that the negotiat-
ing nuichinery provided for in the general armis-
tice agi-eement is incapable of handling this pres-
ent dispute. This is clearly not so. I believe we
may with confidence note the assurances given us
by General Riley at the Council's meeting on April
25, when he stated that he was confident that the
armistice agreement could be made to work; that
it had worked well for almost 2 years and that

' Made in the Security Council on May 16 and released
to the press by tlio U.S. Mission to the U.N. on the same
ilate.

it certainly was in the interest of the parties that
they should make it work.

The United States strongly supports General
Riley's position, but, in view of the critical nature
of the present situation in Palestine, it deems it
desirable for the Council to consider with care
the complaints before us in order to see what may
be done to strengthen the existing negotiating
machinery.

Examining the Armistice Agreements

In supporting General Riley's view that the
Mixed Armistice Commission can and should
handle nearly all of the complaints before us, the
United States believes that a number of these com-
plaints should be returned to the Mixed Armistice
Commission for prompt decisions and equally
prompt implementation of the decisions.

In returning these complaints to the Mixed
Armistice Commission, the Council would do well,
in my Government's view, to avoid passing judg-
ment on such of those complaints as the Commis-
sion is capable of handling. Not only would such
action Ijy the Council duplicate and possibly pre-
judge decisions of the Connnission but it would
also lessen the inclination of the parties to exhaust
the remedies to which they have agreed before
coming to this Council. A new problem might
follow a possible conflict of judgment. It should
be obvious, I believe, that lasting peace in Pales-
tine will more readily come from decisive negotia-
tion between the ])arties — particularly where ave-
nues of negotiation already exists — than from
decisions demanded of this Council by parties un-
willing to negotiate.

The United States believes the Mixed Armistice
Commission should act upon the complaints re-
ferred to it. In taking this position, it also
believes that the Council can render assistance to
the parties and to the negotiating machinery by
enunciating general considerations which it be-
lieves sliould guide tlie settlement of tlie present
difficulties.

The Council sluiuUl be j)repared to pass judg-
ment on those matters which, in its opinion, have
implications beyond the Commission's jurisdic-
tion. It would appear essential that the parties

914

Department of State Bulletin

he instructed to settle their dispute through the
Commission and that the Council should consider
ways and means for facilitating the negotiations.

The Council now has before it a number of com-
plaints from the Governments of Syria and Israel.
It is regrettably apparent from the statements of
Israel and Syria that there are wide divergencies
between the views of the two countries, both in the
statements of their representatives before the
Council and in the claims and counterclaims of
the two Governments reported to this Council by
the United Nations Truce Supervision Organiza-
tion. At the same time, we have the opinions and
views of the Truce Supervision Organization it-
self, and tlie statements, and answers to questions,
by Maj. Gen. William E. Riley.

In signing the various armistice agreements,
Israel, on the one hand, and Lebanon, Syria, Jor-
dan, and Egypt, on the other, agi'eed that the
United Nations would assist the parties in the
supervision of the application and observance of
the terms of those agreements. The Truce Super-
vision Organization has played an important role
in connection with carrying out the provisions of
the armistice agreements. The United States be-
lieves that the Council should give great weight
to the account of the recent events given by this
United Nations body of impartial observers chosen
from the armed forces of Belgium, France, and
the United States.

Situation in tlie Demilitarized Zone

In the view of the United States, the basic cause
for the present situation in the demilitarized zone
has been the conflict of views over the rights and
responsibilities of the United Nations Chairman
of the Mixed Armistice Commission in the demili-
tarized zone. In examining what these respon-
sibilities are. we must look, therefore, at the record
of the negotiations which preceded the armistice
as well as at the agreement itself.

On June 25, 1949, Dr. Ralph Bunche, the acting
mediator for Palestine, expressed himself in a let-
ter to the Syrian and Israeli Governments on the
manner in which the demilitarized zone would
operate. Dr. Bunche stated in this letter, in part,
as follows :

The provision for the demilitarized zone in the light
of all circumstances is the most that can be reasonably
expected in an armistice agreement by either party.
Questions of permanent boundaries, territorial sov-
ereisnty, customs, trade relations and the like must be
dealt with in the ultimate peace settlement and not in the
armistice agreement.

I would point out again that previous arrangements for
demilitarized zones involving United Nations responsibil-
ity as at El-Auma, Government House, and Jlount Scopus
have worked satisfactorily and have served to protect
fully the interests and claims of rival parties pending
final settlement. The proposed demilitarized zone in the
agreement now under negotiation will work equally well.
The United Nations will insure this since its honor and
effectiveness will be involved.

I may also assure botli parties that the United Nations,
through the Chairman of the proposed Israeli-Syrian
Mixed Armistice Commission will also insure that the
demilitarized zone will not be a vacuum or wasteland
and that normal civilian life under normal local civilian
administration and policing will be operative in the zone.

In this regard I would point out that in view of the
relatively small area involved and the limited number of
settlements or villages in it the administration and polic-
ing problem is not at all a severe or greatly complicated
one and can be readily solved. I would also point out
that in the projected Mixed Armistice Commission both
parties will have an opportunity to discuss and agree upon
details affecting this or any other aspect of the armistice
agreement, and that the United Nations will find fully
satisfactory any subsequent arrangements based on mu-
tual agreement of the two parties. The sole function of
the United Nations is to assist the parties in reaching
a mutually satisfactory agreement and in giving them
such help as they may mutually request in implementing
and supervising the terms of the agreement.

Of even greater significance in considering this
dispute is the definitive comments which were in-
serted into the records of the armistice conference
between Israel and Syria on July 3, 194:9, which
both parties agreed constituted an authoritative
statement of the armistice agreement. This state-
ment, in our view, sets forth a definitive interpre-
tation of the rights of the chairman of the Mixed
Armistice Commission in the demilitarized zone.
These comments were quoted by General Riley in
his statement before the Council on April 2.5 and,
as I stated above, are included in the four-power
draft resolution.

With regard to the actual supervision of the
demilitarized zone itself, I should like to refer to
article 5 of the Israeli-Syrian armistice agreement
which provides for its establishment. This zone
may be seen on the map attached to the armistice
agreement and is divided in a northern, southern,
and a central sector.

Article 5 of paragi-aph 2 of the armistice agree-
ment states :

In pursuance of the spirit of the Security Council reso-
lution of 16 November 1948 the armistice demarcation
line and the demilitarized zone have been detined with
a view toward separating the armed forces of the two
parties in such manner to minimize the possibility of
friction and Incidence while providing for the gradual
restoration of normal civilian life and without prejudice
to the ultimate settlement.

Paragraph 5c of the same article states :

The Chairman of the Mixed Armistice Commission es-
tablished in article 7 of this agreement and United
Nations observers attached to the Commission shall be
responsible for insuring the full implementation of this
article.

Paragraph 5e states :

The Chairman of the Mixed Armistice Commission
shall be empowered to authorize the return of civilians
to villages and settlements in the demilitarized zone and
the employment of limited numbers of locally recruited
civilian police in the zone for internal security purposes
and shall be guided in this regard by the schedule of
withdrawal referred to in subparagraph d of this article.

June 4, )95J

915

Discussion of the Resolution

From the foregoing, it seems clear that the
armistice agreement provides for the gi-adual
restoration of normal civilian life in the zone and
that this gradual restoration is without prejudice
to the ultimate settlement. The agreement also
provides that the Chairman of the Mixed Armis-
tice Commission, who may be the Chief of Staff
of the United Nations Truce Supervision Organi-
zation or an officer designated by him, is responsi-
ble for insuring the full implementation of article
5 and is also empowered to authorize the return
of civilians to villages and settlements in the zone
and the employment of limited numbers of locally
recruited civilian police for internal security pur-
poses.

It is my Government's view that article 5 of the
armistice agreement formally establishes that the
United Nations chairman of the Mixed Armistice
Commission, and not Israel or Syria, is the i-e-
sponsible party for general supervision of the ad-
ministration of the demilitarized zone which will
take place on a local basis and that this authority
has been acquiesced in by both of the parties. It
is believed that this situation obtains until Israel
and Syria reach an agreement to the contrary or
a modification of the armistice agreement is made.
In the individual villages and settlements in the
demilitarized zone, it seems clear that the local
authority lies with the local officials, either Arab
or Israeli, but outside of their immediate jurisdic-
tion it would not appear from the agreement that
they could undertake activities in the demilitarized
zone contrary to the requests or recommendations
of the Chairman of the Mixed Armistice Commis-
sion. In the present instance, we have an example
of one of the parties claiming to interpret cor-
rectly article 5 of the armistice agreement in de-
ciding what constitutes normal civilian life in the
zone. I should like to call attention to the fact
that the armistice agreement provides appropriate
means whereby an interpretation of article 5 may
be made. In this connection, I should like to draw
attention to article 7, paragraph 8, which states:

Where interpretation of the meaning of particular pro-
visions of thi.s iisreement other than the preamble and
articles 1 and 2 is at issue, the Commission's interpreta-
tion shall prevail.

The Council, now, has before it a resoliition
which has been introduced by the United King-
dom, France, Turkey, and the United States. It is
the view of my Government that the passage of
this resolution by the Council will clarify and
strengthen the responsibilities and duties of the
Chairman of the Israel-Syrian Mixed Armistice
Commission. My Government is glad to note
that fighting in the area in question has ceased.
It is the ho])e of my Govei'nment that the adoption
of the resolution whicli you now have before you
will further contribute to the maintenance of
peaceful conditions in the area.

In conclusion, I would like to reiterate my Gov-

916

ernment's conviction that, if peace is to come in the
Palestine area, the major responsibility for such ,
peace rests upon the parties in the area. They ,
have the means for maintaining the armistice that
now exists, if they will use it in good faith. This
means full cooperation with the Chairman of the
Mixed Armistice Commission, the rendering of all
necessary facilities to the United Nations observers
in the performance of their duties, and a will to
abide by decisions reached by the Commission or
by its chairman, whichever has jurisdiction in the
case. The role of this Council should remain that
of strengthening the existing armistice machinery
wlien it is necessary, of considering complaints of
the parties only when all their other remedies have
been exhausted, and of constantly remindino; the
parties of their overriding obligations to estaolish
a lasting peace among themselves.

TEXT OF RESOLUTION

U. N. doc. S/2152/ReT. 1
Adopted May 18, 1951
Vote: 10-0-1

The Security Council,

Recallino its past resolutions of 15 July 1948, 11 Aug-
ust 1949, 17 November 1950 and 8 May 1951 relating to
the armistice agreements between Israel and the neigh-
bouring Arab States and to the provisions contained
therein concerning methods for maintaining the armis-
tice and resolving disputes through the Mixed Armistice
Commissions participated in by the parties to the Armis-
tice Agreement;

Noting the complaints of Syria and Israel to the Secur-
ity Council, statements in the Council of the representa-
tives of Syria and Israel, the reports to the Secretary-
General of the United Nations by tlie Chief of Staff and
the Acting Chief of Staff of the United Nations Truce
Supervision Organization for Palestine, and statements
before the Council by the Chief of Staft of the United
Nations Truce Supervision Organization for Palestine;

Noting that the Chief of Staff of the Truce Supervision
Organization in a memorandum of 7 March 1951, and the
Chairman of the Syrian-Israel Mixed Armistice Commis-
sion on a number of occasions have requested the Israel
Delegation to the Mixed Armistice Commission to insure
that the Palestine Land Development Company, Limited,
is instructed to cease all operations in the demilitarized
zone until such time as an agreement is arranged tlirough
the Chairmiin of the Mixed Armistice Commission for
continuing tliis project, and,

Noting further that Article V of the General Armistice
Agreement gives to the Chairman tlie responsibility for
the general supervision of the demilitarized zone.

Endorses the requests of the Chief of Staff and the
Chairman of the Mixed Armistice Commission on this
matter and calls upon the Government of Israel to comply
with them.

Declares that in order to promote the return of per-
manent peace in Palestine, it is essential that the Govern-
ments of Israel and Syria observe faithfully the General
Armistice Agreement of 20 July 1949,

Notes that under Article 7, paragraph 8, of the Armis-
tice Agreement, where interpretation of the meaning of a
particular provision of the agreement, other than the pre-
amble and -Articles I and II. is at issue, the Mixed Armis-
tice Coumiission's interpretation shall prevail.

('tilts upon the Oovernnieiits of Israel an<i Syria to
bring before the Mixed Armistice Commission or its
Chairman, whichever has the pertinent responsibility
under the Armistice Agreement, their complaints and to
abide liy the decisions resulting therefrom.

Considers that it is inconsistent witli the objectives

Deparfmenf of Stafe Bullef'm

and intent of the Armistice Agreement to refuse to par-
ticipate in meetings of the Mixed Armistice Commission
or to fail to respect requests of the Chairman of tlie Mixed
Armistice Commission as they relate to his obligations
under Article V and calls upon the parties to be repre-
sented at all meetings called by the Chairman of the
('onmiission and to respect such requests,

Co//*' upon the parties to give effect to the following
excerpt cited by the Chief of Staff of the Truce Supervi-
sion Organization at the 542nd meeting of the Security
Council on 25 April 1951, as being from the summary rec-
ord of the Syria-Israel Armistice Conference of 3 July
1940, which was agreed to by the parties as an authorita-
tive comment on Article V of the Syria-Israel Armistice
Agreement :

'The question of civil administration in villages and
settlements in the demilitarized zone is provided for, with-
in the framework of an Armistice Agreement, in sub-
paragraphs 5(B) and 5(F) of the draft article. Such civil
administration, including policing, will be on a local basis,
without raising general questions of administration, juris-
diction, citizenship, and sovereignty.

'Where Israeli civilians return to or remain In an
Israeli village or settlement, the civil administration and
policing of the village or settlement will be by Israelis.
Similarly, where Arab civilians return to or remain in an
Arab village, a local Arab administration and police unit
will be authorized.

'As civilian life is gradually restored, administration
will take shape on a local basis under the general super-
vision of the Chairman of the Mixed Armistice
Commission.

'Tlie Chairman of the Mixed Armistice Commission,
in consultation and co-operation with the local communi-
ties, will be in a position to authorize all necessary ar-
rangements for the restoration and protection of civilian
life. He will not assume responsibility for direct admin-
istration of the zone.'

Rrcalls to tlie Governments of Syria and Israel their
obligations under Article II, paragraph 4 of the Charter
of the United Nations and their commitments under the
Armistice Agreement not to resort to military force and
finds that: (A) Aerial action taken by the forces of the
Government of Israel on 5 April 1951 and (B) any ag-
gressive militai-y action by either of the parties in or
around the demilitarized zone, which further investiga-
tion by the Chief of Staff of the Truce Supervision Or-
ganization into the reports and complaints recently sub-
mitted to the Council may establish, constitute a viola-
tion of the cease-fire provision provided in the Security
Council resolution of 15 July 1948 and are inconsistent
with the terms of the Armistice Agreement and the obli-
gations assumed under the Charter.

Noting the complaint with regard to the evacuation of
Arab residents from the demilitarized zone: (A) decides
that Arab civilians who have been removed from the de-
militarized zone by the Government of Israel should be
permitted to return forthwith to their homes and that
the Mixed Armistice Commission should supervise their
return and rehabilitation in a manner to be determined
by the Commission; and (B) holds that no action involv-
ing the transfer of persons across international frontiers,
armistice lines or within the demilitarized zone should be
undertaken without prior decision of the Chairman of
the Jlixed Armistice Commission.

Noting with concern the refusal on a number of oc-
casions to permit observers and officials of the Truce
Supervision Organization to enter localities and areas
which were subjects of complaints in order to perform
their legitimate functions, considers that the parties
should permit such entry at all times whenever this is
required, to enable the Truce Supervision Organization to
fulfil its functions, and should render every facility
which may be requested by the Chairman of the Mixed
Armistice Commission for this purpose.

Reminds the parties of their obligations under the Char-
ter of the United Nations to settle their international

disputes by peaceful means in such manner that interna-
tional peace and security are not endangered and ex-
presses its concern at the failure of the Governments of
Israel and Syria to achieve progress pursuant to their
commitments under the Armistice Agreement to promote
the return to permanent peace in Palestine.

Directs the Chief of Staff of the Truce Supervision
Organization to take the necessary steps to give effect
to this resolution for the purpose of restoring peace in
the area and authorizes him to take such measures to
restore peace in the area and to make such representations
to the Governments of Israel and Syria as he may deem
necessary.

Calls upon the Chief of Staff of the Truce Supervision
Organization to report to the Security Council on compli-
ance given to this resolution.

Requests the Secretary-General to furnish such addi-
tional personnel and assistance as the Chief of Staff of
the Truce Supervision Organization may request in carry-
ing out tl)is re.soluti<m and the Council's resolution of
8 May 1951 and 17 November 1950.

North Atlantic Planning Board
Establishes Defense Shipping Authority

[Released to the press May 25]

In accordance with its directive from the North
Atlantic Council, the North Atlantic Planning
Board for Ocean Shipping has agreed on an out-
line plan for the mobilization of ocean-going ship-
23ing in a single pool and its allocation on a world-
wide basis in time of war or wartime emergency
and for the establishment in such circumstances
of any international organization of a civilian
character to be named the Defense Shipping Au-
thority.

The objective of the Defense Shipping Author-
ity would be to insure that shipping is so organ-
ized as to achieve the greatest possible economy
in its employment and to render it effectively and
readily available to meet the needs, both military
and civil, of the cooperating nations according to
approved priorities.

The main principles which would govern the
operation of the Defense Shipping Authority are
that each participating government should in war
or wartime emergency take all the ocean-going
merchant ships of its own flag under its own con-
trol and place them in a central pool for allocation
to eroployment by the Defense Shipping Author-
ity. Each government would insure that the ships
under its control carry out the tasks allotted to
them by the Defense Shipping Authority. The
arrangements between each government and its
shipowners would be the domestic concern of that
government but would be of such a nature that
individual owners would have no direct interest
in the financial results of the employment to which
their ships were allocated.

For the purposes of day-to-day operation, two
branches would be established, one at Washington
and one at London, with all participating govern-
ments having the right to be represented in both

June 4, 1 95 J

917

branches. While the pool of shippiiio; would be
operated as a single unit, the branch at Washington
would deal primarily with shipping and the de-
mands for shipping services of the Western Hemi-
sphere, and the London Branch would deal pri-
marily with shipping and the demands for
shipping services of the Eastern Hemisphere.

It is intended that, should the Defense Shipping
Authority be brought into being, uou-Nato coun-
tries which participate in the conunon effort should
be invited to place their ocean-going merchant
ships in the pool and become members of the
Authority.

THE CONGRESS

Effectiveness of Fulbright
Exchange of Persons Program

[Released to the press t)y the White House May 11]

Letter from President Truman
to Walter Johnson

Dear Dr. Johnson : I have read with interest
the resolution adopted by the Boaixl of Foreign
Scholarships on April 7, 1951, and I would like to
take this opportunity to thank the members of the
Board for their outstanding public service.

The program on which they have been working
(created by Public Law 584, 79th Congress, and
commonly "known as the Fulbright Act) provides
for the international exchange of students, profes-
sors, research scholars and teachers.

This program is vitally important in widening
the knowleclge and technical ability of the peoples
of the twelve participating countries. Even more
important, it is helping us all to understand each
other better than ever before. And it is proving
effective in combating Communist lies and distor-
tions about social, economic and political condi-
tions and objectives in our respective countries.

The Board of Foreign Scholarships, as well as
the Department of State and the binational edu-
cational foundations and commissions overseas, is
to be commended for the significant success al-
ready achieved and for the considerable prestige
which is accruing to this program abroad.

I am pleased to accept the resolution of the
Boiird of Foreign Scholarships, to approve the
piinciples it embodies and to reaffirm my unquali-
fied sui>port for the purpose whicli this program
represents.

Very sincerely youis,

Harrt S. Trtjman

Text of Board of Foreign
Scholarships^ Resolution

Whereas : The Board of Foreign Scholarships,
authorized by Public Law 581, 79th Congress (The
P'ulbright Act), has been appointed by tlie Presi-
dent of the United States to supervise the educa-
tional exchange program authorized by such Act;
and

Whereas : The Board of Foreign Scholarships
has carefully supervised the administration of the
FuU^right Act since it went into operation ; and

Whereas : On the recent visit of the Cliairman
of the Board to twelve countries in whicli tlie Ful-
bright program is operating, it was clearly evi-
dent that the program had acliieved high prestige
and had won tlie commendation of leaders in these
countries as an effective exchange of persons pro-
gram; and

Whereas: The Fulbright program has demon-
strated that persons speaking to persons are an
effective means of explaining the ideas and aspira-
tions of America to other nations and of these
nations to America ; and

Whereas: The Board feels that the program
is making a decided impact in building under-
standing toward a better and a more peaceful
world ; therefore, be it

Resolved: That the Board of Foreign Scholar-
ships express (1) its commendation for tlie excel-
lent administration of the Fulbright Act by the
Department of State, (2) its deep thanks for the
thorough and highly valuable staff work per-
formed by the Department for the Board of For-
eign Scholarships, and (3) its confidence that in
the continued administration of this program by
the Department of State the exchange of persons
under the Fulbright Act will make a lasting and
significant contribution to the aims and objectives
of American foreign policy.

Passed by the Board of Foreign Scholarshijis
at its formal meeting on April 7, 1951, at Wash-
ington, D.C., and ordered to bo transmitted to the
President.

Walit.r Johnson
Chairman, Board of Foreign Scholarships

Resvme of Program,

Since Public Law 584 was enacted on August 1.
194C, the United States Government has signed
executive agreements witli 20 countries to provide
for the international excliange of students, pro-
fessors, research scholars, and teachers. As a re-
sult, 1,907 Americans from the 48 States, the terri-
tories, and the District of Columbia liave received
awards to study, teach, lecture, or conduct research
abroad and 1.7:51 uiitionals of otlier countries have
received awards for siinilar piojects in I lie United
States. In addition, (VIG foreign students liave re-
ceived scholarships for study in American schools

918

Department of Slate Bulletin

Ill their home country. It is expected that 3,310
persons will be beneficiaries under this year's
profijram.

The selection of persons and institutions quali-
fied to participate in this program is under the
general supervision of the Board of Foreign
Scholarships. Members of the Board are ap-
pointed by the President and serve without com-
pensation. The Board has met regularly since its
first meeting in October 1947, and its present mem-
bership is as follows : Walter Johnson, Chairman
of the Department of History, University of Chi-
cago, chairman; Lewis Webster Jones, President,
University of Arkansas, vice chairman; Col. Jolin
N. Andrews, Personal Representative of the Ad-
ministrator, Veterans Administration; Sarah Gib-
son Blanding, President, Vassar College; Mar-
garet Clapp, President, Wellesley College;
Charles S. Johnson, President, Fisk University;
Earl J. McGrath, United States Commissioner of
Education ; ]\Iartin R. P. McGuire, Professor of
Greek and Latin, Catholic Univei-sity of America ;
and Helen C. White, Professor of English, Uni-
vei-sity of Wisconsin.

Legislation

Importation of Foreign Agricultural Workers. H. Rept.
,■520, Part 2, 82(1 Coug. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R.
3283] 6 pp.

Giving the Department of Commerce the Authority to
E.xteml Certain Charters of Vessels to Citizens of
the Republic of the Philippines, and for Other Pur-
poses. H. Rept. 343, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accom-
pany H. ,T. Res. 223] 4 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens. H. Rept.
870, S2d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany S. Con. Res.
9] 2 pp. Also, H. Rept. 371, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To
accompany S. Con. Res. 10] 2 pp.

India Emergency Assistance Act of 1951. Report of the
Committee on Foreign Affairs on H. K. 3791, a bill
to furnish emergency food relief assistance to India.
H. Rept. 373. 82d Cong. 1st sess. 9 pp.

Report on the Communist "Peace" Offensive. A Cam-
paign to Disarm and Defeat the United States. H.
Rept. 378, 82d Cong. 1st sess. 166 pp.

Permitting Free Entry of Articles Imported from Foreign
Countries for the Purpose of Exhibition at the Japa-
nese Trade Fair, Seattle, Wash. H. Rept. 427, 82d
Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. J. Res. 253] 2 pp.

Suspending Certain Import Taxes on Copper. Conference
Report. H. Rept. 428, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To
accompany H. R. 3336] 2 pp.

Conveying Hospital Equipment and Making Grants-in-Aid
to the Repul)lic of Philippines for Philippine Scouts.
H. Rept. 4.j6, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany
H. R. 1216] 5 pp.

Opposing the Admission of Communist China to Member-
ship In the United Nations. H. Kept. 463, 82d Cong.
1st sess. [To accompany H. Res. 96] 1 p.

Arms Embargo on Communist China. H. Rept. 464, 82d
Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. Con. Res. 101]
1 p.

Reaffirming the Friendship of the American People for all
the Peoples of the World, Including the Peoples of
the Soviet Union. H. Rept. 466, S2d Cong. 1st sess.
[To accompany H. Con. Res. 57] 8 pp.

Eleventh Report to Congress of the Economic Cooperation
Administration. For the Quarter Ended December
31, 1950. H. Doc. 115, S2d Cong. 1st sess.

FOREIGN SERVICE

June 4, I95I

Foreign Buildings Operations Exhibit

Statement hy Secretary Acheson
[Released to the press May iC]

I should like to call your attention to the For-
eign Buildings Operations E.xhibit in the lobby.
This e.xhibit illustrates by model or photograph
some 48 projects out of a total of more than 500
projects accomplished under the Foreign Sei'vice
Buildings Program since the end of the war. This
program has been geared to meet the greatly in-
creased responsibilities of the United States in
foreign affairs in recent years. Primary accent
has been placed on the providing of efficient,
secure, and i-epresentative housing and office space
for American personnel abroad.

Of special interest is the method of financing the
acquisition or construction and furnishing of these
projects. From 1947 througli 1950 some 540
projects were completed in 72 countries at a cost
of approximately 93 million dollars. Of this total
amount, approximately 97 percent was obtained
from foreign currency credits arising from the
disposal of war surplus, lend-lease settlements,
utilization of EGA counterpart funds, and other
overseas assets.

The total cost to the taxpayer in new dollar
expenditures has been only about 2.3 million dol-
lars, the balance of 90.7 million dollars represent-
ing the recovery of foreign-currency credits in the
form of these valuable and much needed building
assets. In addition, the resulting savings to the
taxpayer in annual dollar appropriations, for
rental of privately owned quarters, exceeds 5 mil-
lion dollars annually.

This exhibit is one example of many programs
and opei-ations which receives little publicity but
which is an integral part of the Department's
operations.

Correction On Slavery Questionnaire

In the BrrLLETiN of April 30, 1951, page 713,
left-hand column, the first five paragraphs shoulcl
not have appeared. The following introductory
paragi'aphs were omitted :

The .\cting Representative of the United States to the
United Nations presents his compliments to the Secretary-
General of the United Nations and has the honor to refer
to the Secretary-General's notes S0.\ 317/10/02 (2) /EL,
dated April 14, 19.50, and SOA 317/10/02(2), dated Decem-
ber 14, 1950, regarding the Questionnaire on Slavery and
Servitude.

The Acting Representative of the United States has the
honor to transmit herewith one copy of the Answer of
the United States to the United Nations Questionnaire on
Slavery and Servitude.

919

June 4, 1951

Ind

ex

Vol. XXIV, No. 622

Aid to Foreign Countries

Mutual Security Program, Recommendations

to Congress (Truman) 883

Tasks Confronting the Indian Government
(McGhee before Cincinnati Council on
World Affairs) 892

Arms and Armed Forces

Mutual Security Program, Recommendations to

Congress (Truman) 883

U N Command Operations In Korea: 19th Re-
port (Apr. 1-15, 1951) 910

Asia

Global Foreign Policy (Russell before Brother-
hood of Railway Clerks Convention, San

Francisco) 895

KOREA: U. N. Command Operations, 19th Report

(Apr. 1-15, 1951) 910

IRAN: U. S. Position on U. K.-Iran Oil Contro-
versy:

Aide-memoire, Text 891

Remarks (Acheson) 891

PALESTINE: Peace Negotiations:

Security Council Resolution, Text 916

Statement (Austin) 914

Tasks Confronting the Indian Government
(McGhee before Cincinnati Council on
World Affairs) 892

Claims and Property

Enemy Property, Settlement of Intercustodlal
Conflict Involving Enemy Property (Ex. Or.

10244) 890

German Debts, Tripartite Commission on:

Tripartite Communique on Procedures . . . 901
U.S. Appointment (Gunter) 902

Congress

Legislation, Listed 919

MESSAGES FROM PRESIDENT: Mutual Secur-
ity Program, Recommendations 883

Communism

Global Foreign Policy (Russell before Brother-
hood of Railway Clerks Convention, San
Francisco) 895

Mutual Security Program, Recommendations to

Congress (Truman) 883

Tasks Confronting the Indian Government
(McGhee before Cincinnati Council on
World Affairs) 892

Europe

GERMANY:

Critical Materials Export Ban Urged (McCloy

Letter to Adenauer) 906

War Criminals Stay of Execution Lifted . . 907
Tripartite Commission on German Debts:

Tripartite Communique on Procedures . . 901

U.S. Appointment (Gunter) 902

SWITZERLAND: Double Taxation Convention

Signed 907

U.K.:

U.S. Position on Iranian OH Controversy:

Aide-Memoire to Iran, Text 891

Remarks (Acheson) 891

Foreign Service

Foreign Buildings Operations Exhibit (Ache-
son) 919

GERMANY: Tripartite Commission on Debts,

U.S. Appointment (Gunter) 902

Information and Educational Exchange
Program

Pulbrlght Act: Effectiveness of Program:
Letter (Truman to Johnson); Resolution of
Foreign Scholarships, Text; R*sum6 of
Program 918

International Meetings

Calendar of Meetings 908

Mutual Aid and Defense

Global Foreign Policy (Russell before Brother-
hood of Railway Clerks Convention, San
Francisco) 895

Mutual Security Program, Recommendations to

Congress (Truman) 883

North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)

Planning Board for Ocean Fishing: Defense

Plan 917

Presidential Documents

CORRESPONDENCE: Board of Foreign Schol-
arships (Johnson) on Success of Fulbrlght
Program 918

EXECUTIVE ORDERS: Settlement of Inter-
custodial Conflicts Involving Enemy Prop-
erty (Ex. Or. 10244) 890

MESSAGES TO CONGRESS: Mutual Security
Program, Recommendations.

Prisoners of War

German War Criminals' Stay of Execution

Lifted 907

Protection of U.S. Citizens and Property

Enemy Property, Settlement of Intercustodlal

Conflicts Involving (Ex. Or. 10244) ... 890

Strategic Materials

Export Ban to German Trade Violators Urged

(McCloy Letter to Adenauer) 906

U.S. Position on U.K.-Iran Oil Controversy:

Aid-M6moire to Iran, Text 891

Remarks (Acheson) 891

Taxation

Double Taxation Convention Signed With

Switzerland 907

Trade

Critical Materials Export Ban to German Trade
Violators Urged (McCloy Letter to Ade-
nauer) 906

Transportation

NATO Defense Plan for Ocean Shipping . . . 917

Treaties and Other International Agreements

PALESTINE: Peace Negotiations 914

SWITZERLAND: Double Taxation Convention

Signed 907

United Nations

Calendar of Meetings 908

Correction on Slavery Questionnaire .... 919

Palestine Peace Negotiations:

Security Council Resolution, Text .... 916

Statement (Austin) 914

U.N. Command Operations In Korea, 19th

Report (Apr. 1-15. 1951) 910

U.S. in U.N. (Weekly Summary) 912

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 891,907.919

Adenauer, Chancellor 902, 907

Austin, Warren R 910, 914

Barnes, Robert G 894

Bruggmann, Charles 907

Fran?ols-Poncet, Andre 904

Gunter, John W 902

Johnson, Walter 918

Klrkpatrlck, Ivone 903

McCloy, John J 906,907

McGhee, George C 892

Ridgway, General 911

Russell, Francis H 895

Truman, President Harry S 883, 890, 918

^Ae/ ^eha^tment^ ^ triai&

PEACE OR WAR AND THE SURVIVAL OF HUMAN

FREEDOM • Statement by Secretary Acheson . . . 923

THE CHALLENGE OF TODAY • By Ambassador John

Foster Dulles 935

THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA: A PARTNER-
SHIP FOR PEACE • By Under Secretary Webb . . 927

For index see back cover

Vol. XXIV, No. 623
June 11, 1951

U. S. SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS

JUN 22 1361

,JAg zl)efi€t/y&yi€^t xil ^ate V^ W JL 1 \IJ L JL 11

Vol. XXIV, No. 623 • Publication 4240
June 11, 1951

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Oovernment Printing Office

Washington 25, D.O.

Price:

62 issues, domestic $7.50, foreign $10.25

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and Items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
0» State Bulletin as the source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department, Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of interruitional relations, are listed
currently.

Peace or War and the Survival of Human Freedom

Statement hy Secretary Acheson ^

Mr. Chairman, Gentlejien : The real issues in
lithe discussion before us are peace or war, and the
survival of human freedom.

It is not just a difference as to method which
is now under examination. What is challenged
is the bedrock purpose of our foreign policy, and
of what we have been trying to do. That is the
place I would like to start, in this brief statement.

The foreign policy of the United States has a
central and dominant objective — to protect the
nation and to safeguard the future of its people.
We stand ready to defend our future by force of
arms if that necessity is forced upon us. But we
seek to deter war if we can.

•■ Another world war would be destructive beyond
experience ; it would not solve problems, but mul-
tiply them. Therefore, it is part of our funda-
mental purpose to prevent, by all honorable means,
the outbreak of another general war. "

Even before the last world war was over, while
our young men were storming the beaches at Nor-
mandy and Saipan and dozens of other places
now engraved in our memories, the resolution was
forming among our peojile that future wars must
be prevented.

Their conviction grew that the best way to pro-
tect the security of our nation and of our people
was to prevent war, and that the way to go about
it was through an international system of col-
lective security.

The Four Freedoms, the Atlantic Charter, the
United Nations — these were not cynical slogans.
They represented the idea which our people felt
in their hearts was worth fighting for.

It has been the purpose of our foreign policy to
keep faith with that idea.

The attempt to build a collective security system
on the basis of the cooperation of all the gi'eat
powers broke down because of the policies of the

' Made on June 1 before the Senate Armed Services and
the Foreign Relations Committees on the MacArthur
Hearings.

Soviet Union. But Soviet ambitions have not
been able to obstruct our determined efforts.

Within the framework of the Charter of the
United Nations, we have been building a collective
security system based on the cooperation of those
nations who are dedicated to peace.

The united and determined effort of our people
to build effective instruments for keeping the peace
is recorded in a series of vigorous and far-sighted
actions : the United Nations Charter itself, the Eio
Treaty, the Greek-Turkish Aid Program, the Mar-
shall Plan, the North Atlantic Treaty, and the
Mutual Defense Assistance Program.

We have been building our strength, together
with our allies. We must be strong enough to
keep the peace.

Side by side with these programs there is an-
other basic element in our foreign policy : to assist
the hundreds of millions of people who were ac-
quiring their independence after the war, so that
they might be free to develo^D in their own way,
and to join in an international system for preserv-
ing the peace.

Our hopes for peace required us to understand
the changes which were in motion among vast
populations of the Middle East and Asia, and to
help peoples who had just gained their independ-
ence from losing it again to the new imperialism
of the Soviet Union.

Those are the big, central ideas that express
what we have been trying to do in the world.

The Challenge of Korea

The attack on Korea was a blow at the founda-
tion of this whole program. It was a challenge
to the whole system of collective security, not only
in the Far East, but everywhere in the world. It
was a threat to all nations newly arrived at inde-
pendence. This dagger thrust pinned a warning
notice to the wall which said: "Give up or be
conquered."

This was a test which would decide whether our

June 17, J95I

923

collective secui'ity system would survive or would
crumble. It would determine whether other na-
tions would be intimidated by this show of force.

The decision to meet force with force in Korea
was essential. It was the unanimous view of the
political and military advisers of the President
that this was the right thing to do. This decision
had the full support of the American people be-
cause it accorded with the principles by which
Americans live.

As a people we condemn aggression of any kind.
We reject appeasement of any kind. If we stood
with our arms folded while Korea was swallowed
up, it would have meant abandoning our prin-
ciples, and it would have meant the defeat of the
collective security system on which our own
safety ultimately depends.

What I want to stress here is that it was not
only a crucial decision whether or not to meet this
aggression; it was no less important how this
aggression was to be dealt with.

In the first place, the attack on Korea has been
met by collective action. The United States
brought the aggi-ession in Korea before the United
Nations, not only because the Charter requires it,
but also because the authority and even the sur-
vival of that organization was directly involved.

The response of some members of the United
Nations, in terms of their capacities and their
other security responsibilities, has been generous
and wholehearted.

The total action is admittedly an imperfect one,
as might be expected of beginning steps in a col-
lective security system. But the development of
this system requires us to take into consideration
the dangers and interests of those associated with
us, just as we want them to take into consideration
our dangers and interests.

In the second place, our response to the aggi'es-
sion against Korea required a careful estimate of
the risks involved in the light of the total world
situation.

There was the risk that the conflict might
spread into a general war in Asia, a risk that the
Chinese Communists might intervene, a risk that
the Soviet Union might declare itself in.

We take it for granted that risk of some sort is
implicit in any positive policy, and that there is
also a risk in doing nothing.

The elements of risk and the means of reducing
that risk to us and to the rest of the free world
quite properly influenced our policy in Korea.

It has been our purpose to turn back this Com-
munist thrust, and to do it in such a way as to
prevent a third World War if we can. This is
in accord with one of the most fundamental tenets
of our policy — to prevent, in so far as we can do

so, another world war.

It is against this basic purpose that the opera-
tion in Korea, and (he plans for carrying it to a
conclusion, need to be considered.

What the Defense of Korea Has Accomplished

The operation in Korea has been a success.
Both the North Koreans and the Chinese Com-
munists declared it to be their purpose to drive
the United Nations forces out of Korea and im-
pose Communist rule throughout the entire
peninsula. They have been prevented from
accomplishing their objective.

It has been charged that the American and allied
forces fighting in Korea are engaged in a pointless
and inconclusive struggle.

Nothing could be farther from the fact. They
have been magnificent. Their gallant, determined
and successful fight has checked the Communist
advance and turned it into a retreat. They have
administered terrible defeats to the Communist
forces. In so doing, they have scored a powerful
victory.

Their victory has dealt Communist imperialist
aims in Asia a severe setback.

The alluring prospect for the Communist con-
spiracy in June, 1950 — the prospect of a quick and
easy success which would not only win Korea for
the Kremlin but shake the free nations of Asia and
paralyze the defense of Europe — all this has
evaporated.

Instead of weakening the rest of the world, they
have solidified it. They have given a powerful
impetus to the military preparations of this coun-
try and its associates in and out of the North
Atlantic Treaty Organization.

We have doubled the number of our men under
arms, and the production of materiel has been
boosted to a point where it can begin to have a
profound effect on the maintenance of the peace.

The idea of collective security has been put to
the test, and has been sustained. The nations who
believe in collective security have shown that they
can stick together and fight together.

New urgency has been given to the negotiation
of a peace treaty with Japan, and of initial se-
curity arrangements to build strength in the Pa-
cific area.

These are some of the results of the attack on
Korea, unexpected by — and I am sure most un-
welcome to — the Kremlin.

How the Fighting Can Be Brought to an End

The objective of our military operation in
Korea is to end the aggi-ession, to safeguard
against its renewal, and to restore peace. There is
wide agreement on this objective in the domestic
discussions of this issue.

Both the Administration and its critics have
said that the object of the courses thoj' propose is
to end the aggression and restore ])eaco. Both are
willing — indeed desire — to end the figliting by an
honorable settlement which will end the aggi'es-
siou. jn-ovidc against its renewal and restore peace.

Neither will purchase a sotlloment by allowing
the aggressors to profit by (heir wrong. Neither

924

Departmenf of State Bulletin

believes tliat the destruction or uncoiulitional sur-
render of the aggressor is necessary to attain the
goal.

General Marshall, General Bradley and the
Joint Chiefs of Staff have given you, in detail, the
reasons why they believe that the Chinese Com-
munists will be defeated in Korea and must aban-
don their purpose.

They report that our forces are in excellent
shape, that their morale is high and that they
are in a good supply position.

They report not only that the mass attacks
launched by the enemy have failed to break
through the firepower of United Nations forces,
but that the offensives of the enemy have been
broken and thrown back with enormous enemy
casualties.

These defeats in Korea, together with other con-
sequences of this campaign, present grave problems
for the Comnuinist authorities in China.

Wliile the manpower resources of China are vast,
its supply of trained men is limited. They cannot
cover up their casualties. They cannot gloss over
the draft of more and more men for military
service.

The Chinese Red leaders have betrayed their
long-standing pledge of demobilization and the
military demand for manpower has, instead, been
increased.

Peiping has also broken its promises of social
and economic improvement. In the great cities,
dependent on imported materials, unemployment
increases. The regime has not lightened the bur-
dens of the people. It has made them heavier.

All of this is reflected in a sharp increase in
repressive measures, and in propaganda to wliip
up the flagging zeal of their own people.

In the light of all these factors, I believe that
the aggi'ession can best be brought to an end with
a minimum risk and a minimum loss, by continu-
ing the punishing defeat of the Chinese in Korea.
This is being done.

No one can predict when the fighting will stop
and when the aggression will end. It is also true
that no one could have foretold exactly what would
happen when we undertook action to end the Ber-
lin blockade, but we did what we thought was
right and the blockade was ended.

No one could have foretold how the aggi'ession
in Greece would be terminated, but again we took
those measures which our best judgment and sense
indicated were the right ones and the aggression
ceased.

Wliile the outcome of every course of action in
the foreign policy field cannot be predicted with
certainty in advance, it is our responsibility in
taking action to apply our best judgment on the
basis of the best information at hand.

I think it is fair to say that all of the President's
advisers believe the course we are now following
gives us the best chance of stopping hostilities and
ending the aggi-ession in Korea.

The Proposal To Enlarge the War

I should like briefly to address myself to the
alternative course which was placed before this
Committee. This course would seek to bring the
conflict in Korea to an end by enlarging the sphere
of hostilities.

I will not try to review the military considera-
tions involved in this proposed course, since these
have been thoroughly discussed by the previous
witnesses before your Committees.

It is enough to say that it is the judgment of
the President's military advisers that the pro-
posed enlargement of our militai'y action would
not exercise a prompt and decisive effect in bring-
ing the hostilities to an end. To this judgment
there must be added a recognition of the gi'ave
risks and other disadvantages of this alternative
course.

Against the dubious advantages of spreading
the war in an initially limited manner to the main-
land of China, there must be measured the risk
of a general war with China, the risk of Soviet
intervention, and of World War III, as well as
the probable effects upon the solidarity of the free
world coalition.

Tlie advocates of this program make two as-
sumptions which require careful examination.
They assume that the Soviet Union will not neces-
sarily respond to any action on our part. Tliey
also assume that in the build-up of strength rela-
tive to the Soviet Union and the Commimist
sphere, time is not necessarily on our side.

As to Soviet reactions, no one can be sure he
is forecasting accurately what they would be, but
there are certain facts at hand that bear on this
question.

We know of Soviet influence in North Korea,
of Soviet assistance to the North Koreans and to
Communist China, and we know that under-
standings must have accompanied this assistance.
We also know that there is a treaty between the
Soviets and the Chinese Communists.

But, even if the treaty did not exist, China is
the Soviet Union's largest and most important
satellite. Russian self-interest in the Far East
and the necessity of maintaining prestige in the
Communist sphere make it difficult to see how the
Soviet Union could ignore a direct attack upon
the Chinese mainland.

I cannot accept the assumption that the Soviet
Union will go its way regardless of what we do.
I do not think that Russian policy is formed that
way any more than our own policy is formed that
way. This view is certainly not well enough
grounded to justify a gamble with the essential
security of our nation.

In response to the proposed course of action,
there are a number of courses of counteraction
open to the Soviets.

They could turn over to the Chinese large num-
bers of planes with "volunteer" crews for retalia-
tory action in Korea and outside. They might

June 7 7, 7957

925

participate with the Soviet air force and the sub-
marine fleet.

The Kremlin could elect to parallel the action
taken by Peiping and intervene with a half million
or more ground force "volunteers" ; or it could go
the whole way and launch an all-out war.

Singly, or in combination, these reactions con-
tain explosive possibilities, not only for the Far
East, but for the rest of the world as well.

We should also analyze the effect on our allies
of our taking steps to initiate the spread of war
beyond Korea. It would severely weaken their
ties with us and in some instances it might sever
them.

They are understandably reluctant to be drawn
into a general war in the Far East — one which
holds the possibilities of becoming a world war —
particularly if it developed out of an American
impatience with the progress of the effort to repel
aggression, an effort which in their belief offers
an honorable and far less catastrophic solution.

If we followed the course proposed, we would
be increasing our risks and commitments at the
same time that we diminished our strength by
reducing the strength and determination of our
coalition.

We cannot expect that our collective security
system will long survive if we take steps which
unnecessarily and dangerously expose the people
who are in the system with us. They would un-
standably hesitate to be tied to a partner who leads
them to a highly dangerous short cut across a diffi-
cult crevasse.

In relation to the total world threat, our safety
requires that we strengthen, not weaken, the bonds
of our collective security system.

The power of our coalition to deter an attack
depends in part upon the will and the mutual
confidence of our partners. If we, by the measures
proposed, were to weaken that effect, particularly
in the North Atlantic area, we would be jeopardiz-
ing the security of an area which is vital to our
own national security.

Wliat this adds up to, it seems to me, is that
we are being asked to undertake a large risk of
general war with China, risk of war with the
Soviet Union, and a demonstrable weakening of
our collective security system — all this in return
for what ?

In return for measures whose effectiveness in
bringing the conflict to an early conclusion are
judged doubtful by our responsible military
authorities.

Before concluding, I should like to deal briefly
with the related proposition that we may need to
take extreme risks now because time may not be on
our side. I believe this is wrong.

The basic premise of our foreign policy is that
time is on our side if we make good use of it. This
does not necessarily mean that time must bring us
to a point where we can match the Soviet Union
man-for-man and tank-for-tank.

Wliat it does mean is that we need to use the time
we have to build an effective deterrent force. This
requires us to create sufficient force-in-being, both
in the United States and among our allies, to shield
our great potential against the possibility of a
quick and easy onslaught, and to ensure that our
allies will not suffer occupation and destruction.
And back of this shield we need to have the poten-
tial that would enable us to win a war.

This is the measure of the force we need ; as we
approach it, we appi'oach our objective of prevent-
ing war.

Can we do this ? I believe we can. We and our
allies have the capacity to out-produce the Soviet
bloc by a staggering margin. There is no doubt
about that. Our capacity to produce has been set
in motion and is rapidly getting to the point where
its output will be vast and its effect significant.

There is also the critical factor of our will. The
future belongs to freedom if free men have the
will to make time work on their side. I believe the
American people and their allies do have the will,
the will to work together when their freedom is
threatened.

This is the ultimate source of our faith and our
confidence. A free society can call upon profound
resources among its people in behalf of a righteous
cause.

Legislation

Extending and Strengthening the Defense Production Act
of 1950. Message from the President of the United
States transmitting a recommendation. . . . H. Doc.
118, 82d Cong. 1st sess. 11 pp.

Importation of Foreign Agricultural Workers. S. Kept.
214, Part 2, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany S.
984] 14 pp.

Providing for Continuation of Authority for Regulation
of Exports. S. Kept. 253, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To
accompany S. J. Res. 50] 4 pp.

Emergency Food Aid to India. S. Rept. 297, 82d Cong.
1st sess. [To accompany S. 872] 14 pp.

Reaffirming the Friendship of the American People for
all the Peoples of the World, Including the Peoples
of the Soviet Union. S. Rept. 298, 82d Cong. 1st sess.
[To accompany S. Con. Res. 11] 5 pp.

Trade Agreements Extension Act of 1951. S. Rept. 299,
82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R. 1612] 8 pp.

Third Supplemental Appropriation Bill, 19,")1. S. Rept.
.S02, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R. 3587]
[Department of State, pp. 6, 17] OS pp.

Fixing the Personnel Strength of the United States Ma-
rine Corps, and Establishing the Relationship of the
Commandant of the Marine Corps to the Joint Chiefs
of Staff. S. Rept. 308, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To ac-
company S. 677] 6 pp.

Address of General of tlie .\rmy Douglas MacArthur at
a .Joint Meeting of the Two Houses in the Hall of the
House of Representatives, April 19, 1951. S. Doc.
36, 82d Cong. 1st .sess. 6 pp.

Convention (No. 88) Concerning the Organization of the
Employment Service, Adopted at the Tliirty First
Session of the International Labor Conference.
Message from the President of the United States
transmitting a recommendation. . . . Senate Ex. B.
82d Cong, let sess. 21 pp.

926

Deparlment of S/afe Bulletin

The United States and Canada: A Partnership for Peace

hy James E. 'WeUb
Under Secretai'y of State '■

It lias been a long time since we met here
together 8 years ago, and I appreciate more than
I can say, your invitation to come back again.
Eight years is a long time, and none of us, when
we met here in 1943, could look ahead to the events
which have piled one on top of another as we came
out of one war and moved on in so short a time to
face the possibility of another.

Eight years ago I said to you that you citizens
of Canada had never wavered in your opposition
to tyranny and that you had seen that your own
destiny and that of all freedom-loving peoples lay
in turning back the swarming hordes of Nazis.
I said then that "The heroic deeds of Canada's
sons on eveiy fighting front will never die." And
today I know I speak the sentiment of millions
of your neighboring Americans when I say that,
in the following years of war, 1944 and 1945, we
were proud to fight by your side. And I can say
also that following the war there has hardly been
an important endeavor to strengthen peace, to
build international cooperation, or to resist aggres-
sion, on which we have not stood together.

Identity of Interests

Now, of course, it would be entirely wrong to
say that any two great nations living in close
proximity, imder conditions of modern civiliza-
tion, with many f rictional areas arising out of even
the normal activities of trade and commerce,
would always take the same view on every subject.
Diversity of thought and approach is the very germ
of democracy, and I know we both cherish it.
But the important thing, the thing that stands
out in both the years of war and the years since
the war, is that on the matters that really coimt
we have both seen an identity of interests. We
have found a commonly acceptable course of
action.

' Excerpt of an address made before the Kiwanls Club
at Montreal, Canada, on May 31 and released to the press
on the same date.

Wliat are the things that really count in these
times ?

I suggest that for Canada and the United
States, one of them is that we live close together
as neighbors on a continent where geography links
us in a common destiny. We trade together, and
we both profit by that trade. In fact, the volume
of trade between the people of Canada and the
people of the United States last year amounted
to more than 4 billion dollars, which is the largest
volume of commercial interchange that has ever
occurred at any time in the past between two
nations. Through the years, the long boundary
between Canada and the United States has pro-
vided many opportunities for working together
in the development of common resources, and the
results have been good for both of us. In times
of international crisis, we have learned to rely
heavily on each other and to depend on each
other's aid. We, in the United States, have
watched with admiration Canada's tremendous
increase in wealth and industrial strength and the
large stature which Canada has gained and
merited in the United Nations, in the North At-
lantic Treaty Organization, and, in fact, in every
international forum. We look to Candida not
only as a powerful friend and ally but we recog-
nize her also as a force to be respected, a nation
of independent ideas and international interests
which are constantly expanding. We see that
your external relations have assumed such gi-eat
importance that you have increased your foreign
posts since the war until you now have almost
half a hundred in 37 different countries.

For both of our countries, with our common
destiny, one of the most important questions —
the question which perhaps counts most — is how
we shall fare as free nations in a world in which
all freedom is under a serious threat. The hard
facts of international life which we both must
face together are that within this century, within
the lifetime of most of you here, two great and
destructive world wars have unleashed vast forces
of violence. Two revolutions — the Russian and

June J J, 1951

927

the Chinese — have run a course of extreme scope
and intensity. Five empires — the Ottoman, the
Austro-Hungarian, the German, the Italian, and
the Japanese — have collapsed. Two major im-
perial systems — the British and French — have had
to readjust to meet the new conditions. Many
new independent nations have come into being
and are finding their way with great difficulty in
the hazardous tlioroughfare of international
intercourse.

Wlien we look out to the far international hori-
zon, we face a world situation characterized by
two clashing concepts of political and social or-
ganization. One is based on freedom ; the other
on totalitarianism. We face the inescapable con-
clusion that the fanatic doctrine of Soviet Com-
munist imperialism is relentlessly driving to
impose its absolute authority over all the peoples
of the world. The history of the past 6 years
has demonstrated this intention on the part of the
Soviet rulers.

We must remember that, when the war ended
in Europe, 6 years ago, the Soviet forces already
occupiecl a w"hole series of European countries.
Also, in those countries which had not been over-
run by the Red Army circumstances were highly
favorable to the Communist purpose of seizing
power. In most of them, the German occupation
had disrupted the prewar pattern of political life
and had damaged the confidence which people had
in their former political institutions. Experi-
ence taught that there would normally be a wave
of iDitterness and restlessness in the immediate post-
war period. Suspicion and hostility toward the
exile governments had been assiduously sown and
cultivated by Communist agitators. Their pur-
pose was to make conditions as chaotic as possible.
By penetrating into the underground resistance
movements, the Communists had placed themselves
in an excellent position to act with telling effect.
The large popular followings, which they had
amassed, enabled them to participate in parlia-
mentary governments when established. They
could make favorable deals with non-Communist
parties, use these connections to damage their
non-Communist associates, invoke the influence of
government, and distort its purposes to their own
ends.

In these circumstances, it is a remarkable tribute
to the brave people of these nations and their
staunch leaders that Western Europe is today a
citadel of freedom.

Concept of Collective Security

For a period after the war, it seemed that none
could withstand the ruthless Soviet pressure —
certainly none who were close enough to feel the
weight of its military power. Then came the turn-
ing point. First Iran, then Turkey, then Greece,
felt (lie pressure and decided to resist. You Cana-
dians aud we Americans were able to help, and in
the process, we took the measure of the Soviet

928

purpose and method. Others did likewise. To
both of us and to other peoples desperately seeking
to establish a firm and lasting peace. Soviet actions
were a rude shock, but one that cleared the air.
The Marshall Plan has been a successful joint ef-
fort. The Western Union Treaty, the Council of
Europe, the North Atlantic Treaty, the European
Payments Union, the Schuman Plan, all these
are important organized cooperative efforts. All
of them have contributed to the laying of a foun-
dation for the most important single concept af-
fecting international life. That concept is the
concept of collective security.

I should like to consider with you the implica-
tions of this concept as I see them, but first, I think
it is important to ask the question : "Wliy at the
end of the war, in its weakened condition did Eu-
rope resist and why did we help?" Following
1945 as the pattern of Soviet intentions and actions
took shape, it became clearer that in the Soviet
system everj' satellite is subservient to Moscow
and becomes an inferior state; that every individ-
ual is a pawn of the all-powerful Communist
Party masters. It also became clear that among
these masters there was no respect for human
dignity, no milk of human kindness, no restraint
of law. Wherever this system spread its power,
people who were not completely subservient were
coerced, enslaved, imprisoned, or murdered. It
was clear to the peoples of Europe and to us that
aggressive imperialism had captured communism
and had embarked on a campaign to impose on
free peoples, wherever it could, the deadly ap-
paratus of the police state.

Restrictions in Soviet Living

Wliat is that police state? In the U.S.S.R.,
every worker is required to have an internal pass-
port, a labor book, and a pay book. The Govern-
ment exercises absolute control over his job and
movements. He cannot change his job without
permission. If he quits his job or is absent from
work, he pays a stiff fine or serves months in a
labor camp. Even to change his residence, a So-
viet worker must get permission from the police
and must register with the police within 2-f hours
after the move. The same iron rule applies when
he wishes to visit another city — he checks in and
out with the police at both points. He has prac-
tically no choice of where or at what he will woi-k
and almost no freedom of movement.

The Soviet worker is rigidly controlled by a
government in whose actions and decisions he has
no voice at all. He is told what to think in a
continuous stream of skillfully planned i)r()pa-
ganda. He reads only censored oflicial ]iapers,
listens to a censored radio, and casts a meaningless
vote. Candidates for office are designated by the
Party and are unopposed. Except for Canadian
broaclcasts, the Voice of America, and other trans-
missions from the free nations, he lives in a dark-
ness of ignorance about the outside world.

Department of State Bulletin

These are the facts of life in the Soviet "worker's
paradise." These are the conditions of sei-vitude
imposed on a vast population to build up the Soviet
armed forces and the international Communist
apparatus.

Does anyone here believe that this Communist
apparatus was not at the center of the conspiracy
to launch aggi-ession against the Republic of Korea
last June? Does anyone here believe that this
same international Communist apparatus will
shrink from any action which will add to its power
except as it counts the risk too great?

Has anyone found a practical, hard-headed way
to meet this threat of aggression except through
the development of the institutions of collective
security ?

Cooperative^! nstitutions To Meet Aggression

Among the things that really count in these
times is, I think, that we in the Unit«d States and,
I believe, you in Canada are committed to co-
operative institutions for collective security be-
cause we know of no better way to meet the threat
of aggression and to win the peace. We believe
that, if the free nations of tlie world work together,
we can face the future with confidence. In the
United States, we believe we and you and our
friends and allies have the capacity to erect a mili-
tary shield which can protect us from the aggres-
sive power of the Communist nations, and we are
certain that when we have overcome this threat of
armed aggression the strength of our religious, po-
litical, economic, and social institutions can make
secure "the blessings of liberty to ourselves and
our posterity." We believe that the first job is to
rebuild our military power. Through the United
Nations, the North Atlantic Treaty, the Eio pact,
and perhaps at some time a Pacific pact, we believe
we can attain a collective security that will ade-
quately serve our common defense.

Wlien the ruthless drive of Communist power
and conspiracy became more threatening in 1948,
you in Canada and we in the United States recog-
nized tlie danger and began to build with our
friends and allies in Western Europe the structure
of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization. We
both intended this to be a major instrument for
collective security. We both hoped, I am sure,
that if each nation signing the treaty carried out
its solemn obligations and built up its own in-
dividual military forces even on a limited scale
and drew the nec&ssary plans for using these forces
in partnership. Communist aggression would heed
this warning of our determination. We thought
our partnership in the North Atlantic Treaty
would make it clear that we were not an easy prey
to be picked off one by one.

But Communist aggression ignored the warn-
ing. It struck in Korea and was met there by
your own heroic sons, and those we and other na-
tions have sent. The first aggi-essive step that
otherwise might have started the fires of a major

war has been stopped in its tracks. It has been
stopped, not by one nation, but by The United
Nations. It has been stopped by collective action
for collective security.

Now, we have both had our losses in Korea, we
have mourned our dead, and we have felt the
bitterness engendered by a cruel enemy. But, we
have also stopped the first step designed to dis-
integrate our emerging system of collective
security, and we in the United States feel that we
may have gained the time and wisdom to avoid
the catastrophe and the infinitely more teri-ible
losses that would come from another world
conflagration.

How shall we utilize our time, how shall we use
our wisdom? The stopping of aggression in
Korea, important as it is, is only part of the bur-
den we must carry in these times. We, and you,
and other freedom-loving nations must bind our-
selves together in a system of collective security
that will be our strength and our common de-
fense. The most important single fact about the
way you and we and other United Nations fight
in Korea is that we fight in partnership. This is
the real heart of the matter. To take steps to
build that partnership stronger and on a broader
basis is the challenge to our wisdom and to our
ability to best use the time we have so dearly
purchased.

Meeting Our Common Problems

From a historic point of view, the mere signing
and ratification of the North Atlantic Treaty were
for our two countries steps unprecedented in time
of peace. By these acts, we joined 10 other count-
tries in agreeing that "an armed attack against
one or more of tliem in Europe or North America
shall be considered an attack against them all."
Further, we agreed to join our resources with
those of our 10 other allies to build our common
defensive strength so as to prevent an attack or,
if one should come, be prepared to meet it success-
fully. But, we did not limit our agreements to
the building of a military shield to protect us from
attack. We, also, agreed to work together on a
positive progi-am for improving the social and
economic well-being of our peoples and to spread
an understanding of the purposes for which we
were joined together. Under this treaty, we have
embarked on a broad program of common action
to carry out its provisions. The main purpose
now is to build collective security, but for the
future and based on the experience of working
together for defense, we will have an excellent
foundation upon which to build common action
for the well-being of our peoples when military
matters no longer occupy the front of the stage.
Now if, as I stated earlier, it is wrong to assume
that any two great nations like Canada and the
United States even though linked by a common
destiny would always see eye to eye on every sub-
ject, think how much more difficult it is to find

June 71, 7951

929

a common basis of action for 12 nations, each
sovereign and each dependent upon the processes
of democracy to enforce decisions and think also
that these nations are separated by vast oceans
and distances. Think of the infinite patience
wliicli your distinguished and able Minister of
External Relations and our Secretary of Stat«
must have to work out these problems.

But it is important to know that they and the
leaders of the other members of the North At-
lantic Treaty Organization are working them out.
Our 12-nation organization for collective security
is moving from a planning stage to an operating
stage. Executive direction of the North Atlantic
Treaty Organization on a day-to-day basis is
being achieved through a Council of Deputies
which meets on a permanent, full-time basis in
London. Military planning for the Treaty Or-
ganization is conducted under the general guid-
ance of a military committee composed of the
Chiefs of Staff of the 12 nations. Agreement has
been reached on a general strategic plan for the
defense of the North Atlantic area and the forces
required to carry out that plan are beginning to
assemble under the Supreme Commander, General
Dwight D. Eisenhower.

Agreement has been reached that each nation
will be called upon to contribute that which it is
best qualified to send and that the high overhead
and inefficiency of balanced national forces will
give way to the new collective security concept of
balancecl collective forces. This is a momentous
decision because it means that what each nation
takes from its citizens to build the common de-
fense will have the maximum impact to preserve
the peace.

When you in Canada and we in the United
States thinlc of the burdens of raising military
forces and of the proper sharing of those burdens,
I think it is important for us to remember that
every European country in the North Atlantic
Treaty has already established universal military
training. Every one of them has acted since the
aggression in Korea last June to increase the
length of initial service, and most of them have
increased the periods for refresher training. For
the training of some of these European officers and
men, you in Canada and we in the United States
have opened up our schools and are conducting
specialized courses. Through the Military As-
sistance Program of the United States, extensive
training is going forward abroad in the use of
modern weapons.

Collective Defense Measures

When I spoke to you years ago in the midst of
World War II, I used these words :

Your .sons and oiu-s on st'a, on land, niul in the air are
fif-iiting (his war with the best weapons which modorn
scicn.o has yet produced . . . they are hitting the enemy
liefore the enemy can hit them in most instances and their
losses are {.'oiiiLC to lie very considerably less than would
be the case if \\v had to send them out to fight without
this equipment.

930

These words illustrate another of the great prob-
lems which our plan of collective security must
solve. Science has made war more and more costly
in terms of equipment, and our biggest task is to
develop large-scale production of modern weapons
to equip our forces. In Europe, practically every
country has doubled its expenditures for military
production during the past year.

Help is being given from Canada and the United
States in terms of patents and know-how for mod-
ern types of equipment and specialized machinery
for munitions production. The abandonment of
the concept of balanced national forces for the
newer partnership arrangements called for by bal-
anced collective forces makes it easier to agree
upon standard types of weapons and to get pro-
duction going. To cite one example, already a
British model fighter aircraft is being produced
under joint arrangements by whiclt Britain fur-
nishes the specifications, Belgium produces the en-
gines, and Holland the airframe.

Another example is the project for the manu-
facture in Canada of 50,000 walkie-talkie sets for
use by our collective security forces in Europe.
In the United States, we are preparing to build
military equipment on a scale approaching the
highest rate reached in World War II. We are
proposing to supply to our partners in collective
security vast quantities of tanks, guns, planes, and
other modern military equipment. We are pro-
posing to help pay for military production in
countries like France and England which have
the capacity to increase their own military pro-
duction but do not have the funds to pay the total
cost. We are preparing to do our part and we
know that you in Canada are engaged in a similar
great effort. In furnishing equipment for three
infantry divisions and other vitally needed sup-
plies, your government is making a notable con-
tribution to collective security. Through meas-
ures such as these and through standardizing the
equipment of our own two military services,
Canada and the United States are proving their
common determination that communism shall not
be the master and we the slave.

In conclusion, I should like to say that as we
share our common destiny, as we move forward in
partnership to build collective security, we in the
United States will not minimize the difficulties,
but we will strive for mutual understanding and
the firmest possible basis of cooperation. We have
a deep feeling that democracy can outstrip despo-
tism and that the peoples of the free luitions can
develo]) the attitudes toward each other which
support collective action. We are convinced that
the free nations joined in arrangemenls for collec-
tive security have the skill and the leadership and
the broad public support which is bound to win
(his struggle.

If we really build this security the Communist
world is bound to learn that aggression doesn't
jiay, and we will be moving forward toward a just
and lasting peace.

Department of State Bulletin

Decisions for American Citizens

ty President Truman '

The job of being an American citizen keeps

trowing more difficult and more important every
ay. In some countries, the important decisions
are made by the rulers, and the citizens do what
they are told. In our country, the citizens make the
basic decisions, and the officials of the Government
have to do what the people tell them — sometimes.

We must make the right decisions. You, as
citizens, must make the right decisions. Never
was there a time when the right decisions are so
necessary as they are at this time.

As the problems before our country become more
complicated and more dangerous, our citizens must
give greater attention to their job of making the
basic decisions. It is your country, as well as
mine. It is your responsibility, as well as mine.
If you do not assume that responsibility — and you
are part of that responsibility — there is nobody
to blame but yourselves when things go entirely
■wrong. There is less margin for error than there
used to be making these decisions. Wrong deci-
sions in this day and age may wreck the country —
wreck it for all time.

There is a great deal of serious business before
the Government of this country now. This busi-
ness concerns our national defense and our na-
tional survival. The important decisions have to
be made by the Congress, by the President, and the
country, and they must be made soon. These deci-
sions ought to be above petty politics, because the
welfare of the country depends upon them.

Citizens should understand the facts. You
know, the hardest thing in the world to find is a
real fact. And the easiest thing to do is to garble
and confuse the facts. I repeat, that the easiest
thing to do in the world today is to garble and
confuse the facts. We have a great deal of that
going on right now.

' Excerpts from an address made before the National
Conference on Citizenship at Washington on May 17 and
released to the press by the White House on the same
date.

I hope, when you leave this conference, you will
take home with you an understanding of the major
problems we face, and a sense of urgency about
the decisions your Government has to make. If
this understanding can be spread among all the
citizens groups you represent, I believe these deci-
sions will be made promptly, and I believe they
will be made right.

If citizens know the facts, and let their elected
representatives know that they want the national
interest put above every political interest and
every special interest, then there won't be any
question about keeping our Nation strong and se-
cure. This is one of the most important things
that this conference can do.

We must face up to the major problems, face up
to them and solve them — solve them in the interest
of all the people and not in the interest of just a
favored few.

I would like to outline for j'ou a few of the major
problems we have to face.

There is a lot of discussion nowadays about mili-
tary strategy. That's all right. Military strat-
egy is important, and everybody ought to be con-
cerned about it. And I want to say to you that
our Defense Department is headed by the ablest
group of men that this or any other country ever
had for planning and carrying out its defense
policy.

But, there are a lot of other problems that are
equally important. We have the hard problems
of defense production, the problem of taxes, the
problem of stabilization — these are just examples
of a few of the problems that we have. Unless we
face these problems, we won't be able to have any
military strategy at all. No matter how able our
Defense Department men may be, there won't be
anything to plan for.

The dangers we face are very serious, the most
dangerous we have ever faced in all our time.
Our country faces the danger of war from an ag-
gressive and imperialist foreign power. Meeting

June 7T, 1957

931

this danger is all-important. And to meet that
danger, we should all stand together.

There is a free world, and there is a slave world.
We belong to the free world, and we are the head
of the free world. We have got to accept that
responsibility and carry out that responsibility.

Our defense program has two parts. One part
is building up our own armed forces and our na-
tional strength. The other is helping our allies
build up their strength so they can do their share
in preventing war and stopping aggi'ession. Both
these parts of our defense program are essential
to our security.

Unless we help our allies, we might have to face
the real danger alone. Unless our allies are
strong, the Kremlin might take them over, and
the danger of war would increase. Without allies,
our defense would be more difficult, and more
costly — more costly in dollars, and what is much
more important, most costly in lives. There is no
economy in slashing our foreign-aid program.
Penny-pinching now may mean throwing away
the lives of our soldiers later on.

One of the reasons we are in this condition is
because we did not accept our responsibility im-
mediately after the war was over. In 1945, a uni-
versal service law was asked for by the President
of the United States. That universal service law
passed in 1945 or early in 1946 would have saved
billions of dollars now. The people who pre-
vented the enactment of a universal service law in
1945 are trying by every means at their command
to prevent it now. We must not let them prevent
it, because it is essential to the safety of the
world — to our own safety.

We must build our economy for defense. We
have the most amazingly prosperous economy in
the liistory of the world, and we have got to keep
it that way.

Now, I don't think people ought to have any
trouble agreeing on the national interest. I think
everybody — every citizen — is a patriot and that he
believes that the national interest comes first and
that at a time like this, when some of our young
men are fighting and dying to stop Communist
aggression, and when so many of our boys face a
period of military service to prepare for whatever
may lie ahead, it ought to be easy for this country
to get together in unity of spirit and action. It
ought to be the easiest thing in the world to agree
upon a good defense program and a good foreign-
aid program and a sound program to hold down
the cost of living. But it is not easy. It is one
of the most difficult things which any President
has ever faced. I am going to face it, and with
your help I am going to put it over. Now, we must
get the facts to the people, and that is hard to do.

One of the main reasons, I think, is that most
of our citizens — those who do the fighting and pay
the bills and keep the country going — are just too

occupied to make their voices heard. If they had
all the facts, and their representatives in AVashing-
ton knew how they felt, I don't think we would
have so much trouble with these great problems.

That is why the woi'k of this conference means
so much in the present crisis of the world. The
future depends on the opinions and the decisions
of the American people.

If you can develop ways of keeping our citizens
better informed, of helping them to understand the
increasing duties of their citizenship, I have no
doubt that this country will make the right deci-
sions, and that those decisions will lead the world
to a just and lasting peace. And that is what we
all want.

Travel by American Citizens
to Czeciioslovakia Prohibited

[Released to the press June 2]

Because of conditions now existing in Czecho-
slovakia the Department of State has decided that,
until furtlier notice, American passports of pri-
vate travelers are no longer valid to proceed to that
country. Passports issued or renewed in the
United States or in any United States Foreign
Service office will be stamped "not valid for travel
in Czechoslovakia". Those not so stamped should
not, however, be considered as valid for Czecho-
slovakia unless they have been presented for ap-
proval of special travel.

Point 4 Teclinicians Complete Training

The Department of State amiounced on May 31
that 19 technicians soon to undertake Point 4
work in 11 Latin American countries, India, Iran,
and Liberia are completing a 3-week course at J
the Foreign Service Institute of the Department '"
of State.

Five of them are experts in agriculture, the
others, in such basic fields as: health and sani-
tation, medical research, insect control, child wel-
fare, health and vital statistics, social work,
budgets, highways, rubber, and mineral develop-
ment.

There are three women: a public health nurse,
a child-welfare consultant, and a social-work edu-
cation specialist.

The experts and wives are receiving final orien-
tation, devoted largely to the understanding of
foreign peoples, their customs, religion, culture,
anil languages.

932

Department of Stale Bulletin

U. K., French, and Soviet Foreign Ministers
Invited To IVieet at Washington

U. S. NOTE OF MAY 31 TO U. S. S. R.

[Released to the press May 311

The folloichiff text of U. S. note regarding a proposed
meeting of the Foreign Ministers of the U.S., U.K.,
France, and the U.S.S.R. was communicated to the Somet
Oovemment on May 31, 1951.

The Secretary of State presents his compliments
to His Excellency the Foreign Minister of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics and has the
honor to refer to the current Four Power nego-
tiations in Paris.

Since March 5 the representative of the United
States together with the representatives of France
and the United Kingdom, has been engaged in
discussions with the representative of the Soviet
Union in a preliminary conference in Paris. This
preliminary conference was agreed upon as a re-
sult of an exchange of notes which ended with the
note of the United States^overnment dated Feb-
ruary 19, 1951,' and the reply of the Soviet Gov-
ernment dated March 1, 1951. As indicated in
that exchange of notes, the purpose of the confer-
ence was to reach agreement on a mutually accept-
able agenda for a meeting of the Foreign
Ministers of the United States, United Kingdom,
France and the Union of Soviet Socialist Repub-
lics. Such an agreement has not yet been reached.

In the course of the discussions, the views of
the four delegations were brought out and clari-
fied. Considering that the discussions had pro-
vided all the elements necessary for agi-eement
on an agenda, the representatives of the United
States, United Kingdom and France presented to
the Soviet representative on May 2 a new proposal
containing three alternative agenda. Tlie purpose
of these three alternatives was to assure the pos-
sibility of the meeting of the four Foreign Minis-
ters. It has been, and remains, the view of the
United States Government that such a meeting is
desirable in the interest of strengthening peace,
which is the constant objective of the foreign
policy of the United States.

In the course of the examination of these three
alternatives the representatives in Paris were un-

' Bulletin of Mar. 5, 1951, p. 366.

able to reach full agreement. As regards the first
alternative, the only difficulty was that the word-
ing proposed by the three delegations for the
sub-item concerning armaments was not acceptable
to the Soviet delegation. The third alternative
was not accepted by the Soviet delegation as a
basis for agi-eement. In the second alternative,
however, modifications were made in Item 1 and
there is now agreement among the four delegations
on the presentation of this item as well as on the
inclusion of four other items in the agenda and
on their wording. Apart from the final order of
these four items, which remains to be determined,
but ought not to present major difficulties, agree-
ment could have been reached on the second alter-
native if the Soviet delegation had not insisted on
the acceptance of their proposal relating to the
North Atlantic Treaty.

The United States Government for its part con-
siders that the amount of agreement so far reached
on the agenda makes possible a meeting of the
four Foreign Ministers which would permit dis-
cussion among others of all topics proposed by
the Soviet Government in the exchange of notes
preceding the Paris conference and on the 5th and
7th of March at the outset of that conference.
Accordingly, the United States Government is
pleased to invite the four Foreign Ministers to
meet in Washington and suggests that the meet-
ing begin on July 23. The United States Govern-
ment is prepared to participate in such a confer-
ence not only on the agenda (alternative B) de-
scribed above, but also on either of the two other
agenda ( alternatives A and C ) . The texts of these
three proposals are enclosed.

The United States Government hopes to receive
an early reply from the Soviet Government indi-
cating its readiness to accept this invitation and
stating which of the three agenda it finds accept-
able for the purpose of holding a meeting of the
four Foreign Ministers. Any further arrange-
ments for the meeting could be worked out on
receipt of a favorable reply from the Soviet
Government.

June 11, 1951

933

Enclosuro :

Alternative Ca>

I. Examination of the causes and effects of present inter-
national tensions in Europe and of the means to secure
a real and lasting improvement in the relations between
the Soviet Union, the United States, United Kingdom, and
France, including the following questions relating to:
the demilitarization of Germany; the existing level of
armaments and armed forces and measures to be pro-
posed jointly hy the U.S.S.R., United States. United
Kingdom, aiid France for the international control and
reduction of armaments and armed forces; fulfillment
of present treaty obligations and agreements ; the elimi-
nation of the threat of war and fear of aggression.

II. Completion of the treaty for the re-establishment
of an independent and democratic Austria.

III. Problems relating to the re-establishment of Ger-
man unity and the preparation of a treaty of peace.

IV. Fulfillment of the treaties of peace with Italy,
Rumania, Bulgaria, and Hungary: agreements of the
Four Powers concerning Germany and Austria.

V. Fulfillment of the treaty of peace with Italy in the
part concerning Trieste.

Alternative Cb)

Examination of the causes and effects of the present
international tensions in Europe and of the means nec-
essary to secure a real and lasting improvement in the
relations between the Soviet Union, the U.S., U.K. and
France, including the following questions relating to :
the demilitarization of Germany;

U.S., U.K. and France

the existing level of armaments and armed forces and
measures to be proposed jointly by the U.S.S.R., U.S., U.K.
and France for the international control and reduction
of armaments and armed forces ;

U.S.S.R.

measures for the reduction of armaments and armed forces
of the U.S.S.R., the U. K., the U.S. and France, the exist-
ing level of armaments and armed forces and the estab-
lishment of an appropriate international control;

the demilitarization of Germany;- fulfillment of pres-
ent treaty obligations and agreements ; the elimination of
the threat of war and fear of aggression.

Completion of the treaty for the re-establishment of
an independent and democratic Austria.

Problems relating to the re-establishment of German
unity and the preparation of a treaty of peace.

Fulfillment of the treaties of peace with Italy, Rumania,
Bulgaria and Huugai'y ; agreements of the Four Powers
concerning Germany and Austria.

Fulfillment of the treaty of peace with Italy in the part
concerning Trieste.

Alternative (c)

I. Examination of measures for the elimination of the
present international tensions in Europe, of the threat
of war, and of the fear of aggression.

II. Questions concerning armaments and armed forces.

III. Questions concerning Austria.

IV. Questions concerning Germany.

V. Fulfillment of treaties and agreements.

'There is agreement that "the demilitarization of Ger-
many" should be iiicluilod in the agi'iula under item I.
There is disngrecment whether it should be the first or
second sub-item. The Representatives of France, the
U.K., and the U.S. propose that it should be placed after
the sub-item "the existing level of armament . . ."; the
Representative of the Soviet Union proposes that it should
be pla<(Ml befiir(> the sub-item beginning "measures for the
reduction of armaments . . .".

934

U.S. Tariff Rates Increased
on Certain Products

[Released to the press May 31]

Increases in United States tariff rates on three
products will become effective July 6. These
changes are the results of United States negotia-
tions at Torquay. The products involved are dyed
stencil silk valued over $5.50 per pound, dehy-
drated onion powder, and women's and children's
leather gloves, not lined and not trimmed with
fur, other than those entirely machine-seamed or
entirely hand-seamed.

The rates of duty on these items which are now
to be superseded result from tariff concessions
granted by the United States in the General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade giving effect to
the Geneva negotiations in 1947. These conces-
sions are now to be withdrawn as a result of ne-
gotiations at Torquay, effective July 6, and the
products become dutiable, in the case of gloves,
at the rates applicable under a modified concession
granted at Torquay and in the case of the other
two items at statutory rates applicable in the ab-
sence of a concession.

The rate on dehydrated onion powder (tariff
paragraph 781) becomes 25 percent ad valorem
instead of 121/2 percent ; that on dyed stencil silk
valued over $5.50 per pound (tariff paragraph
1205) becomes 60 percent ad valorem if not ex-
ceeding 30 inches in width or 55 percent ad va-
lorem if exceeding 30 iyches in width instead of
25 percent ad valorem in both cases; that on the
women's and children's gloves described above
(tariff paragraph 1532 (a)) becomes 30 percent
ad valorem for gloves over 12 inches long and 35
percent ad valorem for gloves not over 12 inches
long instead of 25 percent ad valorem in both
cases.

Ambassador Dulles To Visit
England and France

The folloicing announcement loas made orally at the
White Souse on May 28.

The President discussed today with Secretary
Acheson and John Foster Dulles the trip to
England and France to be made by Mr. Dulles
next month.

The discussions covered matters likely to come
up in the course of Mr. Dulles' contemplated talks
with Foreign Secretary Morrison in London, and
Foi'eign Minister Schuman in Paris concerning
the Japanese peace treaty. Mr. Dulles is the
President's personal representative in this matter.

Deporfmenf of Sfafe BuUef'm

The Challenge of Today

hy Ambassador John Foster Dulles
Consultant to the Secretary '

You are graduating into the life of the nation
when there is greater division than ever before,
save during the Civil War period. For many
months there has been going on what is popularly
called "The Great Debate." If the words have
carried into your academic halls, they have per-
haps given you an impression of leadership that
is distraught and confused. You would not, how-
ever, be justified in condemning or belittling our
public leaders because of their disagreements.
They are not lacking in normal wisdom or patri-
otism. They are confronted by a new type of
challenge, for which the past provides no ready-
made formula of solution.

Heretofore, we have either had peace or we have
had war. When we have had peace we have had
a large degree of individual freedom and an ab-
sence of regimentation and militarism. When we
have had war there has been an enemy to conquer,
by all possible violence, and a considerable sur-
render of individual choice, in order better to
marshal our strength for a victory which would
restore peace and freedom. There was an end that
was in sight and a sure knowledge of how to reach
that end.

Now, we face a condition of "not war, not
peace." Trotsky coined that phrase in 1917, but
only during recent years have we felt the full
impact of its malignancy and subtlety.

Strategy To Meet the Triple Threat

The "not war, not peace," strategy carries a
triple threat. There is first of all the threat that
"not war" could, over night, become "war." The
Soviet bloc maintain vast land forces in constant
readiness and equipped with ample supplies of
modern tanks, artillery, and planes. That foi-ce is
poised at the hub of the Eurasian land mass,
whence it could strike anywhere, east, south, or

'Address made at tlie University of Arizona, Tuscon,
Ariz,, on May 30 and released to tlie press on the same date.

west, along a periphery of 25,000 miles. Its very
presence is a terror and petrifies creative efi'orts.

In the second place, there is the actuality of
satellite and civil wars, witli a ])otential of more
such wars. We met one guerrilla war in Greece.
It ended partly as a result of our aid, added to
heroic Greek efforts and partly as a result of Yugo-
slavia's defection from the Soviet Communist
camp. But now, we and other members of the
free world face warfare in Korea, Indochina,
Malaya, and, in a lesser way, in the Philippines.
Yugoslavia and West Germany face this satellite
threat in acute form.

In the third place, there is political warfare
against every free government. That warfare is
conducted, in its initial stage, largely through
propaganda and penetration designed to gain con-
trol of so-called "mass organizations" by promis-
ing great benefits through class warfare and the
eradication of so-called "imperialist" influences.
Iran is a case in point.

It is not easy to meet this triple threat. In the
hope of deterring general war, we are greatly en-
larging our political commitments. Also, we are
diverting much of our economic effort into the
production of war goods. This involves a serious
inflationary threat. As we pay out tens of bil-
lions of dollars to those who produce war goods,
the power to purchase is steadily increasing; but
consumers' goods are steadily shrinking. Also,
plans for construction for better material well
being have to be postponed.

To meet the second threat, satellite wars, we are
incurring in Korea casualties at the rate of per-
haps 100,000 a year plus expenditures of perhaps
20 billion dollars a year. The French have for
some years been putting much of their military
and financial strength into the Indochina war,
and the British are carrying a somewhat similar
burden in Malaya.

To meet the third threat, political warfare, we
try to match irresponsible promises with deeds,
such as economic aid and Point 4 Programs which

iune 11, 1951

935

will invigorate the free world. We do so when
meeting the other two threats requires us and
others to prepare for war, to dislocate our econo-
mies, to risk inflation, and to retard social welfare
advances. Thus, the measures being taken to meet
threats one and two expose the free world to threat
three.

Soviet Tactics To Defeat Peace Aims

The Soviet Union is dedicating about one-third
of its economic productivity to implement the "not
war, not peace" strategy of its rulei'S. That is a
cruel cost. But the Kussian people have become
calloused by centuries of cruel masters ; they have
never had more than bare subsistence, and the
present generation knows only complete regimen-
tation. Therefore, the Russian leaders can ex-
ploit their people in ways which, happily, are not
available to our leaders.

It seems that the Soviet Union, while posturing
as a lover of peace, can go on indefinitely main-
taining a formidable capacity for sudden armed
aggression. It seems that the Soviet Union can
go on indefinitely putting satellites into undeclared
wars, first here, then there. It seems that the So-
viet Communist Party, through its foreign aflBli-
ates can continue indefinitely to impair internal
unity and security within the free nations and,
wherever convenient, use strikes, sabotage, and
terrorism to break down orderly government.

To sum it up, we are engaged in a gigantic sacri-
ficial effort, of a kind which, in the past, we have
made only in the face of obvious and dire peril
and only to force an early decision which would
end the necessity for such sacrifices. Today, the
peril to our homeland seems to many to be some-
what speculative, while continuance of our present
measures could impair the very foundations of our
American way of life without forcing an aban-
donment of Soviet strategy.

These are some of the hard facets of the prob-
lem which provokes the great debate. There are
other aspects of the situation which are encourag-
ing from our standpoint and discouraging from
the standpoint of tlie Soviet Union. But, I have
deliberately chosen to present the problem in terms
of what, to the American temperament, is its most
baffling aspect, namely, indecisiveness.

Solution Requires Resourcefulness

You M'ill, I think, admit that the problem is a
difficult one, the solution of which calls for the
greatest resourcefulness of which we are capable.

I am confident that we shall find the ways to
paralyze the slimy, octopus-like tentacles that
reach out from Moscow to suck our life blood. I
shall not now attempt to forecast what those ways
will be. To clarify the issues, as the present debate
is doing, is already a large step toward solution.
I will, however, go further and suggest to you

what, it seems to me, must be the principles of
solution.

1. There are never quick or easy answers to the
challenges which primitive forms of society re-
currently hurl at the more highly developed so-
cieties. We must have patience and steadiness of
will, even when no sure solution has yet emerged.
Most defeats are inflicted upon those who have
first suffered the self-defeat of discouragement.
It is hard to go on walking, with poise and self-
control, a narrow path, with precipices on both
sides and no safe end in sight. But to plunge,
merely to find an end, is no acceptable solution.
Therefore let us be steady.

2. Wlien an opponent is mounting a grandiose
offensive, success is seldom won by accepting a
purely defensive role. As between opponents that
are even approximately matched, the one who can
consistently choose his weapons and the time and
place for using them, will win. It is necessary to
throw the aggressor off balance, to cre^ta doubts
and uncertainties in his mind, and to deny him un-
troubled leisure to consolidate his gains. We must
not and will not take the military offensive of gen-
eral war in which there could be no victory for
anyone. But there are many other types of offen-
sive. Atom bombs have, no doubt, a deterrent
power. But the cause of human liberty can find
positive expression without their use. Our dy-
namic faith in freedom has always been the
nemesis of despots. Therefore, let us not be satis-
fied with plans which reflect merely a defensive
mood.

3. We should plan in terms of our strength and
our opponent's weakness, rather than in terms of
our opponent's strength. A man does not defeat a
gorilla by going to a gymnasium to develop his
biceps. If the Russian type of society can con-
veniently produce 100,000 tanks a year that does
not mean that we, automatically, must produce
100,000 tanks a year. Let us use the qualities we
have and they have not, rather than feel bound
to try to match their precise forms of strength.
Despotic societies always look much more formi-
dable than they are. From without they seem
hard and invulnerable ; in reality, tlieir inner life
is corrupted by the excessive power of a few, by
fear and jealousy, and by tlie stifling of individual
initiative and responsibility. I have spoken of
what, it seems, is the capacity of the Soviet leaders
indefinitely to wage "not war, not peace." I am
confident that the apparent capacity could, in fact,
quickly be disintegrated by skillfully applied
pressures.

We need not dance to the tune of Russian
strength. We are sufficiently versatile to invent
some tunes of our own.

Freedom Can Prevail ^

As our Nation applies these tested principles, we
shall gradually develop the ways whereby we

936

Department of State Bulletin

can peacefully bring an end to the present night-
mare. I am absolutely confident of this. The
resourcefulness of freedom can always prevail
over the plottings of despotism. That is one thing
that our free world has proved.

I appeal to you to help to prove it again. You
have great advantages in the way of education
and training. These came to you primarily as a
legacy from your forebears, who not only found
a path through the many perils and vicissitudes

which faced them, but who also provided insur-
ance for the future by giving their youth such
training as would enable them, in turn, to carry
on.

Today, it is your turn. You, and others of
your generation, will probably bear the heaviest
burden of seeing our nation through its greatest
peril. Tomorrow, the opportunity is yours, may
you seize it; the responsibility is yours, may you
discharge it.

German Federal Republic's Monthly Economic Review

Latest reports of Western Germany's economic
efforts indicate considerable industrial expansion
despite continuing shortages. Industrial output
figures for April recorded sizable gains in pro-
duction with the index (excluding building,
stimulants, and food processing) climbing four
points to 139 percent of 1936, a new postwar
record.

Total exports in April reached a postwar peak
of $275,000,000,* surpassing imports (by $15,000,-
000) for the first time since the war. Basic mate-
rials prices dropped 0.4 percent in April while
industrial producer prices and consumer prices
rose 1.8 percent and 1.5 percent, respectively. Un-
employment, well below last year's level, continued
to decline, but at a slower rate than March's drop.

In March and April, the Western German econ-
omy continued the spring upward trend, but at a
pace somewhat slower than the earlier pronounced
rises recorded in March. The IVIarch industrial
production index rose three points, April labor
market developments already compared with June
1950, and the April increase in exports and de-
crease in imports brought the first positive bal-
ance of trade ($19,000,000) of the postwar era.
The consumer price index, however, rose by three
percent in March and another 1.5 percent in April,
and raw material shortages were frequently re-
ported in many industries. EPU trade again
showed a surplus, but future policy to be adopted
by the Oeec in regard to the (jerman balance
of payments has not as yet been determined.

Although the revision of the Prohibited and
Limited Industries Agreement (PLI) was antici-
pated and was well received by industry, present
and potential raw material shortages loomed to
offset immediate industrial expansion and resump-
tion of hitherto restricted pi'oduction. Coal, steel

^ Reprinted from the June 1951 issue of the Information
Bulletin; prepared by the Analytical Reports liranch of
the Program Review Division of the Office of Economic
Affairs, Hicoo.

*At otEcial rate of 23.8 cents to the Deutschemark,
DM 1,113,445,000.

June n, ?957

948795 — 51— — 3

sheets, metal scrap, non-ferrous metals and sul-
phur head the list of materials reported in short
suppl}' and affecting many industries, including
iron and steel, electrical appliance, mechanical en-
gineering, vehicle production, fine mechanics and
optics.

The Schuman Plan was formally signed in
April, but must be ratified within six months by
the national parliaments of each participating
country before becoming effective. The Allied
High Commission gave official non-disapproval of
the Schuman Plan later in the month. The Tor-
quay trade and tariff negotiations have been
completed, and announcement of concluded agree-
ments will be made in May. Germany's accession
to the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade
(Gatt) might be considered the most important
achievement of the Torquay conference. Most of
the original Gati members had been unwilling
to negotiate tariff concessions on products of wliich
Germany was the main supplier, principally in the
chemical field, until Germany herself could par-
ticipate in the negotiations.

Of the many programs which have been for-
warded to meet the problems of Western Ger-
many's economy, all are in unanimous agreement
on the necessity for finding immediate and ade-
quate investment funds for the German basic mate-
rial industries; on the necessity of export promo-
tion, and on the urgency for stabilization of prices
and wages. By the end of April, however, the
exact methods to achieve these aims had not been
defined clearly enough to consider drafting of a
final program by the government.

Foreign Trade

The major trade developments in the first quar-
ter of 1951 were : the maintenance of total exports
at a high level, the sharp decline from the previous
quarter in the trade deficit with the EPU coun-
tries, and the drastic curtailment of trade with the
Soviet bloc.

Western Germany's exports during the first

937

quarter of 1951, including the Soviet Zone, reached
$714,600,000, thus only slightly exceeding the pre-
ceding quarter and doubling the first quarter of
1950. Imports, however, decreased by 5.2 percent
from $941,300,000 in the fourth quarter of 1950 to
$892,800,000 in the first quarter of 1951 ($016,300,-
000 first quarter of 1950) . Apparently Western
Germany's restrictions on imports from the EPU
area have not yet affected the import total. There
were sufficient import licenses issued prior to the
imposition of restrictions in February which re-
mained available for use through March.

On a country of payments basis, the trade
deficit with the EPU area in January-March 1951
was $113,200,000, compared with $170,300,000 in
the previous quarter. This substantial ameliora-
tion was mostly produced by the rise in exports to
the Oeec participating countries both ster-
ling and non-sterling, and a decline of impoiis
from the non-sterling Oeec countries from
$489,200,000 in the fourth quarter of 1950 to $448,-
300,000 in January-March 1951.

Trade with the Soviet bloc was characterized by
decreasing exports ($27,400,000 fourth quarter of
1950 to $20,100,000 6rst quarter of 1951) and
sharply reduced imports ($32,500,000 fourth quar-
ter of 1950 to $22,600,000 first quarter of 1951).
The same trend in an even more drastic fashion was
noted in trade with the Soviet zone. Major rea-
sons for the sharp cut interzonal trade in recent
months have been the termination of the Frank-
furt Agreement, the increasing efforts of the Fed-
eral Republic and East zone officials to scrutinize
shipments to the other area, and retaliatory meas-
ures taken by the two trading partnei'S.

Industry

The index of industrial production during
March (excluding building, stimulants, and food
processing) rose by three points (up 1.7 percent)
to 135 of the 1936 level, thus equaling the postwar
high reached in November 1950. The per capita
rate of production rose to approximately 108 per-
cent of 1936 (about 91 percent of 1938). Indus-
trial demand continued on the upgi-ade as the value
of orders received by manufacturers rose 7
percent in February, and sales increased nine per-
cent. Total orders received in February averaged
22 percent higher than current sales, with invest-
ment goods orders averaging 135 percent of sales,
production goods 121 percent, and consumer goods
109 percent. Orders booked for investment goods
reached a new postwar high in February of 237
percent of the 1949 monthly average.

Monthly coal production for April continued
at a high level — with daily average output at
394,481 metric tons and total production at
10,019,861 tons, including 157,845 tons produced in
five Sunday shifts. Factors believed largely re-
sponsible for this sustained rate of production are
interim agreements for extra shift pay and in-

938

creased employment since Jan. 1 by 5,500 under-
ground workei-s (1,700 face workers) and 4,000
surface workers. During the firet half of April,
1,231 underground and 4,268 surface workers were
added to the mine books. There has been only
little improvement in output per mansliift during
the last year, as it stood at 1.40 metric tons in
March 1950; 1.46 MT in Febniary 1951; 1.45 MT
in March 1951, and remained approximately the
same in April.

Second quarter of 1951 consumption and de-
liveries of coal should about balance (estimated
by U.S. Element of Combined Coal Control
Group — Federal Government's original alloca-
tions program estimated at 2,000,000 tons less),
assuming that 22,000,000 tons are available and
that industrial production will continue at its
present rate. The danger lies in the low stockpile
position of the economy and there is little hope of
improving this position substantially in the second
quarter. During the winter months (October
1950 to April 1951) industrial and public utility
coal stocks decreased by some 2,000,000 tons. The
present stock positions are better than anticipated
last month, but are, nevertheless, at very low
levels. On April 1, the railways had a seven days
surplus on hand, power plants 12 days, gas plants
7 days, iron and steel 7 days, and other industry
11 days.

On April 3, 1951, the Allied High Commis-
sioners signed the Agreement on Industrial
Controls to replace the Prohibited and Limited
Industries Agreement (PLI) of April 1949, and
thereby facilitated the production in Germany of
items and materials for the common defense of
the West. By terms of the new agreement, the
limitations and restrictions hitherto in force con-
cerning the size and speed or tonnage of merchant
ships built or otherwise acquired by Germany,
primary aluminum, S3aithetic ammonia, chlorine,
styrene and certain types of machine tools are
removed. In addition, the High Commission
will authorize production of crude steel outside
the limit of 11,100,000 tons per annum where such
production will help provide steel for the common
defense effort. The prohibition on the production
of synthetic oil and rubber is removed and the
restrictions upon the capacity of these and of the
ball and roller bearing industries are now modi-
fied. Control is retained, but in a modified form,
over the production of electronic valves.

It is the desii-e of the Allied High Commission
to promote technological progress and modern-
ization of production which will tend to reduce
costs and promote economies in raw materials,
power and fuel. Consequently, in those few in-
dustries where a limitation of capacity is main-
tained, the High Commission will authorize the
substitution of more efficient oijuipment, the re-
arrangement of machinery and the introduction
of new processes or other technical changes which

Department of State Bulletin

i

may involve a minor increase in the capacity of
factory or equipment.

In authorizing the rehabilitation of plants (in-
cluding the installation of new equipment) and
the utilization of new processes for the production
of synthetic rubber and synthetic oil from coal
and coke, the High Commission will grant licenses
only to the extent that solid fuel exports are not
affected. Nevertheless, the application outstand-
ing for the use of the Ruhr area plants at Berg-
kamen, Kiktor, Scholven, and Ruhroel will be
granted promptly.

'Wliile a license is no longer required to manu-
facture certain machine tools listed under the PLI
agreement, the High Commission does require that
a system of declaration of manufacture by the pro-
ducer (indicating the intended destination of each
machine) and of reporting quantities of such ma-
chines in Germany shall be effected.

It is much too early to report on the effects of
the new agreement even though the affected indus-
tries had anticipated certain revisions.

The EGA guaranty program to cover losses on
American investment in Marshall Plan countries,
which ai-e incurred as a result of confiscation or
expropriation by a totalitarian government, does
not cover war damage or business risks. Germany
is the first Marshall Plan country to give assur-
ance that such claims filed with the U.S. Govern-
ment by American business men will be settled by
negotiations between the German and American
Governments.

In April, the first industrial guaranty granted
for investment in Western Germany was con-
tracted by the Gardner-Denver Co. of Quincy,
111., manufacturers of oil field and mining equip-
ment, and the Maschinenfabrik A. Beien, a coal
mining equipment manufacturer in Heme, Ger-
many. This was also the first guaranty contract
providing for royalty payments by a European
firm for an American company's manufacturing
processes and other technical know-how.

In Bavaria and in the upper Rhine district,
melting snow in the Alps and heavy rains pro-
vided water for an all-time record hydroelectric
power production. This increased hydro produc-
tion has enabled the chemical industry in Bavaria,
to continue to operate without restriction, and has
provided power for present requirements of the
aluminum industry. Also in Bavaria, the first
imit in the lowest step of the Schluchsee project
of Waldshut, which was completed recently with
counterpart funds, will add 35,000,000 kw.-hr.
yearly to the available storage capacity in Western
Germany.

An estimated 2,750,000 kw.-hr. of electricity
were used during the month, or 31 percent more
than in April 1950 — a record increase in consump-
tion. Gas consumption also increased.

Low stocks and short falls in coal deliveries are
stiU a matter of considerable concern to the power
companies. Since consumption of both electricity

and gas is well above expectations, there is an im-
mediate need for additional facilities and stocking
of coal to meet next winter's demand.

Labor

The estimated number of employed wage and
salary earners in the Federal Republic increased
by 150,000 to about 14,400,000 at the end of April
1951, thus equaling the October 1950 postwar peak.
Employment in non-manufacturing service estab-
lishments, in manufacturing, and in mining
achieved a new peacetime high sparked primarily
by the producer goods industries. Building activ-
ity, the principal factor in the April employment
increase, was accelerated particularly in the three
major agricultural-refugee states. By the end of
March, these states had still not recovered much
of their loss in building employment. Ali'eady in
April estimated employment in building and con-
struction had almost reached the June 1950 level.
Employment also rose in trade and coimnerce and
in agriculture.

Registered unemployment in the Federal Re-
public has shown a steady downward movement
since mid-January, with a sharp drop of 120,000
during April reducing the total to 1,446,000. In
terms of the wage and salary earning labor force,
unemployment dropped to 9.1 percent from 9.9
percent in March 1951.

An amendment version of the Federal Govern-
ment bill concerning labor participation (co-de-
termination) in the management of the mining in-
dustry and the severed iron and steel-producing
companies was enacted in April by the Federal
Parliament. Passage of the measure was hailed
"as a great success on the road toward social har-
mony" by the executive council of the Western
German Trade Union Federation (DGB).

Organized labor continued the general wage
drive as new collective agreements were negotiated
without any major work stoppages. Approxi-
mately 1,000,000 building trades workers in the
Federal Republic (excluding Bavaria which is
subject to a special agreement) were granted a
pay increase of 9.5 percent effective April 25 with
another boost of 3.5 percent due on July 15. The
wage dispute was settled by arbitration, as has
been customary in this industry since 1949.

Wage increases were also obtained in the Wuert-
temberg-Baden metal industry, for Bremen ship-
yard workers, in the entire clothing industry, for
farm labor in several states and in the Bavarian
woodworking and the Hesse chemicals industries.
The Mining Union announced that it will seek a
14 percent pay raise for wage earners and salaried
employes in the hard coal mining industry. Cur-
rent pay agreements expired on April 30.

Prices

During March the three major price indexes con-
tinued to rise, and at a more accelerated rate than

June IT, 7957

939

in February. Even more spectacular was the in-
crease of the thi'ee indexes during the first quarter
of 1951, an increase wliich was greater for each
index than during the last quarter of 1950, and,
except for the basic materials price index, greater
also than during the third quarter of 1950.

In March the index of industrial producer
prices rose by 2.8 percent to 218 percent of 1938.
The index of basic materials prices increased by
2.4 percent to 251 percent of 1938; the agricul-
tural component rose by 1.6 percent and the indus-
trial component by 6.3 percent. The index of con-
sumer prices, which climbed by 3 percent to
reach 161 percent of 1938 — the largest month-to-
month gain since October 1948, showed the highest
jumps in food (up 5.1 percent) ; household goods
(up 3.1 percent) and clothing (up 2.7 percent).
Consumer prices are still rising although at a
slower pace, and a 1 percent rise was expected
in the April index.

Food and Agriculture

Since the new Federal measures to increase the
breadgrain supply have been in effect only a few
weeks, it is difficult to estimate any immediate
results. Preliminary information indicates, how-
ever, that measures taken to encourage domestic
deliveries and continue U.S. shipments will
achieve favorable results. Although bread ration-
ing will not be necessary, the year end (June 30,
1951) stocks of breadgrains will be substantially
below last year's stock level. During April, the
Federal Government took additional steps to con-
serve gi'ain supplies, and is also considering new
legislation to force increased farm deliveries which
would prevent the use of breadgrains as fodder
and prohibit the creation of large farm stocks for
speculation.

During April, the edible fats and oils supply
position continued to deteriorate. Stocks had
fallen, and largely as a result of the EPU payment
crisis, trade-agreement imports in March declined
from the monthly average of approximately 50,000
tons to 29,000 tons. To stretch available stocks,
the oil and margarine industries have agreed to
make a substantial cut in production in April by
19,000 metric tons, and a reduction in May of
10,000 metric tons was planned. The Bank Deut-
scher Laender agreed to release by the end of April
$25,000,000 for food purchases, $12,000,000 of
which will be used in an "emergency program"
for purchasing edible oils, mainly low-priced
whale and fish oil from Norway.

Despite these measures, however, by June 30,
1951, stocks may be dangerously low — probably no
higher than 40,000 tons. To reduce consumption
somewhat and to enable importers to purchase
higher-priced fats and oils from variotis trade
agreement sources, the Federal Government is con-
sidering an immediate increase in the j)rice of
margarine.

940

Berlin

The value of deliveries of West Berlin industry
(excluding construction and energy production)
reached DM 208,500,000 ($49,623,000) in March,
a post-blockade record. February total delivery
value amounted to DM 186,000,000 ($44,268,000).
The electrical, machinei-y, and clothing industry
branches registered the largest gains. A part of
the increase was probably due to price rises. No
reliable general price index exists for the city,
but a new cost of living index (1938=100) in-
creased from 154.1 in February to 158.1 in March.
This may give some indication of general price
trends.

The index of industrial production (1936=100;
excludes construction, energy production, and food
and stimulants) reached a new postwar record
level as it rose from 46 to 50, the producers goods
section from 45 to 49, and the consumer goods
section from 50 to 56. These averages, based on
deliveries, rather than physical output, have not
been corrected for recent price increases.

Receipts of iron, steel, and non-ferrous metal
products, timber, paper and cardboard, and certain
other categories of industrial raw materials con-
tinue to lag behind requirements. Although
specific instances of shortages affecting plant out-
put have been reported, the general situation
appears to be no worse than in Western Germany.

Employment showed little net change during
the first half of April. Unsubsidized employment
increased by approximately 2,000 from March 31
to April 15. However, 5,000 fewer persons were
given work under the GARIOA work relief pro-
gram. As a result, total reported employment
stood at 882,000, a decrease of just under 3,000 as
compared with the end of March. The registered
labor force also increased somewhat, so that total
unemployment rose by approximately 6,500 during
the first half of the month. Data on industrial
employment are not yet available for April, but
a slight increase was reported during March.

The Present Order

of German Government

Letter From High C omimissioner McCloy to Rep-
resentative J. K. Javits'^

Dear Javits : Thank you for your letter of Feb-
ruary 8, 1951. Although I have replied to a later
letter from you, which reply in part covers some
of the material in this letter, 1 have thought it
wise to go over the field covered in your earlier

' Conff. Rec. of May 10, 1951, p. A2812.

Deparimenf of State Bulletin

letter in some detail. I am sorry of the delay in
answering, but these letters take time to prepare
and the pressures have been particularly heavy
in the past few months.

On the matter of a congressional investigation,
I have already given my views. I still believe
that such an investigation would not be in the
American interest in the present situation.

Most of the specific points raised in your resolu-
tion will be fully reported on at the appropriation
hearings in Congress in the next few weeks. They
are all fair and important questions, but I think
they can be satisfactorily answered either at that
time or found in the carefully prepared reports
whicli this office makes quarterly in Germany. As
I have said before, it is of the greatest importance
in Germany and Europe today that the United
States avoid giving the impression of disagi'ee-
ment and lack of clarity about its foreign policy —
and this I believe would be the inevitable effect
of the investigation you propose. However,
should it be decided to hold such an investiga-
tion, this office will naturally do everything to
cooperate with you.

Before I go into details of your letter and the
speech which you enclose, I should like to make
a few general observations regarding the j^roblem
of Germany. I have now been fairly directly con-
cerned with United States policy in this country
since 1941 when I became Assistant Secretary of
War. I think I have gained some understanding
of the problems we have to contend with, and I
have had some share in the development of the
policy to meet those problems. Though in
one or another respect there have been changes
in policy, there has been no change I'egarding our
over-all objective regarding the extirpation of
nazism and the fostering of democracy in Ger-
many. It has been very clearly realized that
stamping out nazism is not only a matter of de-
feating it in a war — it means changing the social
and cultural conditions out of which it developed,
and creating conditions which will lead to demo-
cratic developments.

This I take to be our major objective still. Any
policy which forgot what our stake in a democratic
Germany is, or which assumed that our demo-
cratic objective could be sacrificed to other more
expedient aims, would be criminally negligent and
dangerous.

This brings me to your letter, in which you place
great emphasis on General Eisenhower's report
on Germany. You apparently believe that the
policy as stated by General Eisenhower is dif-
ferent from the policy of Hicog in Germany. On
this, as I indicated in my earlier letter, I am unable
to agree with you. The policy of the United States
in Germany, as I have understood and carried it
out, has from the days of General Clay had as
one of its aims what General Eisenhower ad-
mirably summed up in the words "eventual and

earned equality." The London Conference of
1948, that at New York, and then at Brussels,
have all dealt with a Germany progressively re-
gaining her place in the family of nations. The
policy expressed by the Foreign Ministers at all
these meetings has each time made clear that the
progress which Germany makes toward equality
depends upon the German people themselves.

The present discussions concerning German
participation in western defense are wholly con-
sistent with this policy. It is still our objective
to prevent a militaristic Germany from coming
into being. It is still a matter of grave concern
to us that Germany be a peaceful and democratic
nation. We have no need to sacrifice these objec-
tives by proposing that Germany contribute to
the defense of the west.

It is true that in some quarters, both American
and German, there has arisen a feeling that the
present situation is such that the United States
is now inclined to "buy" or bid for German par-
ticipation in European defense at the cost of our
democratic objectives. I have taken every occa-
sion to combat this notion in public statements
and in practice. By this time, it is not a wide-
spread notion any longer in Germany, though it
still seems to be held in the United States, since
even the Landsberg decisions were treated in this
light by a section of the American press.

I should like to say a few words on this subject
too, because in your press release of February 2
you refer to the decisions as though they were
related to the political situation in Germany, and
the issue of German participation in particular.

The fact is that I appointed the Clemency Board
in March 1950, long before there was any thought
of German participation. I appointed the Board
because I considered it a fundamental principle of
American justice that persons accused shall have a
right of appeal. I call your attention to the fact
that unlike criminal cases in the United States or
England, there was no provision for these cases
to have further court review for possible errors
of law or fact after they had been passed on by the
court of first instance.

The Board's report and my own examination of
the cases were made entirely in the context of
"justice American style," as you put it, and with-
out regard to political pressures of any kind. I am
sending you a copy of a pamphlet which we have
prepared on the Landsberg decisions. I hope you
will look through it. I recommend especially to
your attention the introduction to the Clemency
Board's report which begins on page 13. I also
call your attention to the fact that the Board sub-
mitted its report in August 1950, a month before
the matter of German participation was first raised
at the New York Conference of Foreign Ministers.

As for the particular case of Alfried Krupp,
I find it difficult to understand the reaction on
any other basis than the effect of a notorious name.
After a detailed study of this case, I was con-

June II, I95I

941

vinced that Alfried Krupp deserved clemency.
Certainly there was reasonable doubt that he was
responsible for the policies of the Krupp Co., in
which he occupied a rather junior position. I
also found it very doubtful that he had any re-
sponsibility for the use of slave labor in the
Krupp plant. It is true that the name of Krupp
stands as a symbol of evil, of the German arma-
ments industry. I was not concerned with a sym-
bol. Instead, I had to decide on the extent of the
guilt of a specific individual, Alfried Krupp.
Others whose responsibility was greater than liis
had been given lighter sentences (and had been
released) for the same crimes for which he was
convicted. Moreover, it was this man's father, not
the defendant, who helped finance Hitler and who
was the directing force of the Krupp works. I
am inclined to think that the son took his place
in the dock largely because liis father was on
his death bed at the time. Certainly he would
not have occupied as prominent a place if his
father had likewise been tried.

Finally, I should like to say that by reason of
the Landsberg decisions, I believe that the true
nature of the Nazi crimes, their depth and extent
and their motivation, are better known and un-
derstood today in Germany than they have ever
been. We have sent out 780,000 copies of this
pamphlet in Germany. More people have read
and thought about the Nazi crimes than ever was
the case during the trials, and the latter can no
longer be dismissed as merely the law of the vic-
tor over the vanquished.

Germany is progressing. It has yet to meet the
great tests of its final status. They may not come
for 10 or 15 years. The new Government has been
in existence for little more than 1 year. Nazis
do not control the Government. It is controlled
by resistance people, former Weimar people, large
representations of labor. Socialists, and Conserva-
tives, but they are far from Nazis and just as
fine people as the Liberals. There are on the outer
fringes some Communists and some old Nazis.
That is the present order of the German
Government.

Sincerely,

John J. McClot.

Point 4 Agreement Signed

With American Farm School in Greece

[Released to the press May 15]

An agreement providing a Point 4 grant of
$181,400 to the Tliessalonica Agricultural and In-
dustrial Institute, (American Farm School), of
Greece, was announced today by Technical Co-
operation Administrator Henry G. Bennett.

The agreement was signed by Dr. Bennett and
President Craig R. Smith of the Board of Trustees

of the Institute. It provides scholarships for
farm youths, specialized training courees for
farmers, and an addition of two members to the
school's teaching staff. The Point 4 grant also
will enable the school to get badly needed voca-
tional training equipment and provide additional
scholarships for students.

Under today's agreement, covering a 2-year pro-
gram, 100 farm youths will receive scholarships
each year. A series of six 7-week courses will be
offered to train an additional 300 students yearly
in the use of farm equipment. Two technicians
will be added to the school's staff, one an American
and one a Greek, trained in American methods.
They will outline the courses and will help the
school to become a pilot plant for rural improve-
ment throughout Greece.

Dr. Bennett expects the new program to become
a factor in providing technical training in modern
agricviltural methods and skills required for
handling farm machinery and operating canning
and pasteurizing plants. Dr. Bennett stated:

Such skills will be spread among all the Greek villages,
through demonstrations on the farms by students trained
at the school. The short courses will teach the funda-
mentals of agricultural and industrial practices to a large
number of people. Greece's immediate problem Is to
grow more food for Its people. They have been living
in hardship since before World War II. One of the most
effective ways to help them raise their standard of living
is to train agricultural leaders and teachers.

We hope and believe that the young men trained in
the American Farm Scliool will form a nucleus for a
nation-wide farm extension service. Economic progress
begins on the farm. Increased production can come only
from spreading modern farm practices.

Today's agreement with the American Farm
School marks the seventh Point 4 grant to private
organizations with established reputations in tech-
nical and educational work. Three agreements
have been made with the Near East Foundation
for work in Iran and Syria, one with the Booker
T. Washington Institute in Liberia, one with the
American University of Beirut, and one with
Athens College, in Greece.

The Institute was incorporated in the State of
New York in 1904. Completely supported by vol-
untary contributions, it is a nonsectarian, nonpolit-
ical, and nongovernmental agency for practical
training. It provides a practical program to im-
prove rural economy by training Greeks in agri-
cultural sciences and vocational and technical
skills.

The teacher and the student till the fields, select
the seed, do tiie harvesting and marketing. The
results have been outstanding. The graduates
have settled in 193 communities where their skill
is helping othere. More than 80 percent are on
farms, in Government agricultural work, or with
private a^'icultural agencies. The Greek Gov-
ernment, in recognition of the services rendered,
has exempted the school from all taxes and import
duties. American specialists in economic recon-
struction have praised its work and usefulness.

942

Department of State Bulletin

U.S.-Denmark Sign Defense Agreement for Greenland

[Released to the press May 18}

The following is the text of the United States-Danish
agreement concerninij the defense of Greenland lohich was
signed on April 27, 1951, at Copenhagen. The agreement
was today submitted to the Danish Parliament for ap-
proval. The agreement will eome into effect upon notifica-
tion by the Danish Oovernment to the United States that
parliamentary approval has been given.

Agreement Between the Government of the United
States and the Government of the Kingdom of
Denmark, Pursuant to the North Atlantic Treaty,
Concerning the Defense of Greenland

Preamble

The Government of the United States of America and
the Government of the Kingdom of Denmark,

being parties to the North Atlantic Treaty signed at
Washington on April 4, 1949,

having regard to their responsibilities thereunder for
the defense of the North Atlantic Treaty area,

desiring to contribute to such defense and thereby to
their own defense in accordance with the principles of
self-help and mutual aid, and

having been requested by the North Atlantic Treaty
Organization (Nato) to negotiate arrangements under
which armed forces of the parties to the North Atlantic
Treaty Organization may make use of facilities in Green-
land in defense of Greenland and the rest of the North
Atlantic Treaty area,

have entered into an Agreement for the benefit of the
North Atlantic Treaty Organization in terms as set forth
below :

Article I

The Government of the United States of America and
the Government of the Kingdom of Denmark, in order to
promote stability and well-being in the North Atlantic
Treaty area by uniting tlieir efforts for collective defense
and for the preservation of peace and security and for
the development of their collective capacity to resist armed
attack, will each take such measures as are necessary or
appropriate to carry out expeditiously their respective
and joint responsibilities in Greenland, in accordance
with Nato plans.

Article II

In order that the Government of the United States of
America as a party to the North Atlantic Treaty may
assist the Government of tlie Kingdom of Denmark by
establishing and/or operating such defense areas as the
two Governments, on the basis of Nato defense plans, may
from time to time agree to be necessary for the develop-
ment of the defense of Greenland and the rest of the
North Atlantic Treaty area, and which the Government

of the Kingdom of Denmark is unable to establish and
operate slnglehanded, the two Governments in respect of
the defense areas thus selected, agree to the following:

1. The national flags of both countries shall fly over
the defense areas.

2. Division of responsibility for the operation and main-
tenance of the defense areas shall be determined from
time to time by agreement between the two Governments
in each case.

3. In cases where it is agreed that responsibility for
the operation and maintenance of any defense area shall
fall to the Government of the United States of America,
the following provisions shall apply :

(a) The Danish Commander-in-Chief of Greenland
may attach Danish military personnel to the staff of
the commanding officer of such defense area, under the
command of an officer with whom the United States com-
manding officer shall consult on aU important local matters
affecting Danish Interests.

(b) Without prejudice to the sovereignty of the King-
dom of Denmark over such defense area and the natural
right of the competent Danish authorities to free move-
ment everywhere in Greenland, the Government of the
United States of America, without compensation to the
Government of the Kingdom of Denmark, shall be entitled
within such defense area and the air spaces and waters
adjacent thereto :

(i) to improve and generally to fit the area for
military use ;

(il) to construct, install, maintain, and operate
facilities and equipment, including meteorological and
communications facilities and equipment, and to store
suppUes ;

(iii) to station and house personnel and to pro-
vide for their health, recreation and welfare;

(iv) to provide for the protection and internal
security of the area ;

(v) to establish and maintain postal facilities and
commissary stores ;

(vi) to control landings, take-offs, anchorages,
moorings, movements, and operation of ships, aircraft, and
waterborne craft and vehicles, with due respect for the
responsibilities of the Government of the Kingdom of Den-
mark in regard to shipping and aviation ;

(vii) to improve and deepen harbors, channels,
entrances, and anchorages.

(c) The Government of the Kingdom of Denmark
reserves the right to use such defense area in cooperation
with the Government of the United States of America for
the defense of Greenland and the rest of the North Atlan-
tic Treaty area, and to construct such facilities and under-
take such activities therein as will not impede the activi-
ties of the Government of the United States of America
in such area.

4. In cases where it is agreed that responsibility
for the oi)eration and maintenance of any defense area

June 7?, 1951

943

shall fall to the Government of the Kingdom of Denmark,
the following provisions shall apply :

(a) The Government of the United States of America
may attach United States military personnel to the staff of
the commanding officer of such defense area, under the
command of an officer with whom the Danish command-
ing officer shall consult on all important local matters
affecting United States interests pursuant to the North
Atlantic Treaty.

(b) The Government of the United States of Amer-
ica, without compensation to the Government of the King-
dom of Denmark, may use such defense area in coopera-
tion with the Government of the Kingdom of Denmark
for the defense of Greenland and the rest of the North
Atlantic Treaty area, and may construct such facilities
and undertake such activities therein as will not impede
the activities of the Government of the Kingdom of Den-
mark in such area.

Article III

1. The operation of the United States naval station at
Gr0nnedal will be transferred to the Government of the
Kingdom of Denmark as soon as practicable and there-
upon the Government of the Kingdom of Denmark will
take over the utilization of the United States installa-
tions at Gr0nnedal on the following terms :

(a) United States ships, aircraft and armed forces
shall have free access to Gr0nnedal with a view to the
defense of Greenland and the rest of the North Atlantic
Treaty area. The same right of access shall be accorded
to the ships, aircraft and armed forces of other Govern-
ments parties to the North Atlantic Treaty as may be
required in fulfillment of Nato plans.

(b) The Government of the Kingdom of Denmark will
assume responsibility for the operation, to the same ex-
tent as hitherto, of the meteorological reporting service
at Gr0nnedal, except for such future changes as might
be mutually agreed upon. The Government of the King-
dom of Denmark likewise will assume responsibility for
the maintenance of all United States buildings and equip-
ment at Gr0nnedal.

(c) Details regarding the use by the Government of
the Kingdom of Denmark of United States property re-
maining at Gr0nnedal, including provisions for reason-
able protection, thereof, the servicing of United States
ships and aircraft, and the disposition of fuels and other
stores, will be the subject of separate negotiations be-
tween representatives of the two Governments. It is
agreed in this connection that, provided notification is
given in each case to the Danish Commander-in-Chief of
Greenland, the Government of the Kingdom of Denmark
will have no objection to inspections of United States
property remaining at Gr0nnedal, so long as that sta-
tion is used by the Government of the Kingdom of Den-
mark.

2. If the obligations of either party under the North
Atlantic Treaty should necessitate activities at Gr0nnedal
in excess of what the Government of the Kingdom of
Denmark is able to accomplish alone it is agreed that the
Government of the Kingdom of Denmark will request that
this station shall become a defense area according to the
provisions of Article 11 of this Agreement.

Article IT

In connection with activities for the defense of Green-
land and the rest of the North Atlantic Treaty area, the
defense areas will, so far as practicable, be made avail-
able to vessels and aircraft belonging to other Govern-
ments parties to the North Atlantic Treaty and to the
armed forces of such Governments.

Article V

1. Under such conditions as may be agreed upon, the
Government of the Kingdom of Denmark will, so far as
practicable, provide such meteorological and communica-

tions services in Greenland as may be required to facili-
tate operations under this Agreement.

2. The Government of the Kingdom of Denmark agrees,
so far as practicable, to make and furnish to the Gov-
ernment of the United States of America topographic,
hydrographic, coast and geodetic surveys and aerial photo-
graphs, etc., of Greenland as may be desirable to facili-
tate operations under this Agreement. If the Govern-
ment of the Kingdom of Denmark should be unable to
furnish the required data, the Government of the United
States of America, upon agreement with the appropriate
Danish authorities, may make such surveys or photo-
graphs. Copies of any such surveys or photographs made
by the Government of the United States of America shall
be furnished to the Government of the Kingdom of Den-
mark. The Government of the United States of America
may also, upon similar agreement, make such technical
and engineering surveys as may be necessary in the
selection of defense areas.

3. In keeping with the provisions of Article VI of this
Agreement, and in accordance with general rules mutually
agreed upon and issued by the appropriate Danish au-
thorities in Greenland, the Government of the United
States of America may enjoy, for its public vessels and
aircraft and its armed forces and vehicles, the right of
free access to and movement between the defense areas
through Greenland, including territorial waters, by land,
air and sea. This right shall include freedom from com-
pulsory pilotage and from light or harbor dues. United
States aircraft may fly over and land in any territory in
Greenland, including the territorial waters thereof, with-
out restriction except as mutually agreed upon.

Article VI

The Government of the United States of America
agrees to cooperate to the fullest degree with the Gov-
ernment of the Kingdom of Denmark and its authorities
in Greenland in carrying out operations under this Agree-
ment. Due respect will be given by the Government of
the United States of America and by United States
nationals in Greenland to all the laws, regulations and
customs pertaining to the local population and the in-
ternal administration of Greenland, and every effort will
be made to avoid any contact between United States
personnel and the local population which the Danish
authorities do not consider desirable for the conduct of
operations under this Agreement.

Article VII

1. All materials, equipment, and supplies required in
connection with operations under this Agreement, in-
cluding food, stores, clothing, and other goods intended
for use or consumption by members of United States
armed forces and civilians employed by or under a con-
tract with the Government of the United States of America
for the performance of work in Greenland in connection
with operations under tliis Agreement, and members of
their families, and the personal and household effects of
such military and civilian personnel, shall be permitted
entry into Greenland free of inspection, customs duties,
excise taxes or otlier charges ; and no export tax shall be
charged on such materials, equipment, supplies or effects
in the event of shipment from Greenland.

2. The aforesaid military and civilian persoimel, and
members of their families, shall be exempt from all forms
of taxation, assessments or other levies by the Govern-
ment of the Kingdom of Denmark or by the Danish au-
thorities in Greenland. No national of the United States
of America or corporation organized under the laws of
the United States of America shall be liable to pay income
tax to the Government of the Kingdom of Denmark or to
the Danish authorities in Greenland in respix-'t of any
profits derived under a contract made with the Govern-
ment of the United States of America in connection with
operations under this Agreement or any tax in respect of
any service or work for the Government of the United
States of America in connection with operations under this
Agreement.

944

Department of State Bulletin

Article VIII

Tlie Government of the United States of America shall
have the right to exercise exclusive jurisdiction over those
defense areas in Greenland for which it is responsible
under Article II (3.) and over any offenses which may
be committed in Greenland by the aforesaid military or
civilian personnel or by members of their families, as well
as over other persons within such defense areas except
Danish nationals, it being understood, however, that the
Government of the United States of America may turn
over to the Danish authorities in Greenland for trial any
person committing an offense within such defense areas.

Article IX

The laws of the Kingdom of Denmark shall not operate
to prevent the admission to or departure from the defense
areas or other localities in Greenland of any military or
civilian personnel whose presence in such defense areas
or other localities in Greenland is required in connection
with operations under this Agreement, or of members of
their families.

Article X

Upon the coming into force of a Nato agreement to
which the two Governments are parties pertaining to the
subjects involved in Articles VII, VIII, and IX of this
Agi-eement, the provisions of the said articles will be
superseded by the terms of such agreement to the extent
that they are incompatible therewith. If it should appear
that any of the provisions of such Nato agreement may be
inappropriate to the conditions in Greenland, the two
Governments will consult with a view to making mutually
acceptable adjustments.

Article XI

All property provided by the Government of the United
States of America and located in Greenland shall remain
the property of the Government of the United States of
America. All removable improvements and facilities
erected or constructed by the Government of the United
States of America in Greenland and all equipment, ma-
terial, supplies and goods brought into Greenland by the
Government of the United States of America may be re-
moved from Greenland free of any restriction, or disposed
of in Greenland by the Government of the United States
of America after consultation with the Danish authori-
ties, at any time before the termination of this Agreement
or within a reasonable time thereafter. It is understood
that any areas or facilities made available to the Govern-
ment of the United States of America under this Agree-
ment need not be left in the condition in which they were
at the time they were thus made available.

Article XII

Upon the coming into force of this Agreement, the
Agreement Relating to the Defense of Greenland between
the two Governments signed in Washington on April 9,
1941, shall cease to be in force.

Article XIII

1. Nothing in this Agreement is to be interpreted as
affecting command relationships.

2. Questions of interpretation which may arise in the
application of this Agreement shall be submitted to the
Minister for Foreign Affairs of the Kingdom of Denmark
and to the United States Ambassador to Denmark.

.3. The two Governments agree to give sympathetic con-
sideration to any representations which either may make
after this Agreement has been in force a reasonable time,
proposing a review of this Agreement to determine
whether modifications in the light of experience or
amended Nato plans are necessary or desirable. Any
such modifications shall be by mutual consent.

Article XIV

1. This Agreement shall be subject to parliamentary
approval in Denmark. It shall come into force on the

day on which notice of such parliamentary approval Is
given to the Government of tlie United States of America.

2. This Agreement, being in implementation of the
North Atlantic Treaty, shall remain in effect for the
duration of the North Atlantic Treaty.

Signed in Copenhagen in duplicate in the English and
Danish languages, both texts being equally authentic, this
twenty-seventh day of April, 1951, by the undersigned
duly authorized representatives of the Government of the
United States of America and the Government of the
Kingdom of Denmark.

For the United States of America :

Eugenie Anderson
United States Ambassador

For the Kingdom of Denmark :

OLE Bj0RN Kraft

Foreign Minister

DDT to Iran for Malaria Control

[Released to the press May 29]

Twenty tons of DDT have left Idlewild Inter-
national Airport in New York for Iran to be used
in a malaria control program being conducted by
the Iranian Ministry of Public Health in coopera-
tion Mith the Point 4 administration. The air
shipments are being pick up by truck or another
airlift at Beirut and delivered in Iran in time to
continue the fight against malaria-carrying mos-
quitoes. Additional shipments of DDT will be
made at a later date to Beirut by ship, whence the
DDT will either be trucked or airlifted to Iran.

Technical Cooperation Administrator Henry G.
Bennett said that Point 4 is cooperating in the
campaign against malaria in the area near the Cas-
pian Sea at the request of the Iranian Govermnent.
Dr. Bennett said:

The program was started by the Iranian Ministry of
of Public Health last year, and it was extremely success-
ful. However, a malaria control project falls short of
its mark unless it is continued for at least 3 years, so
Point 4 was called in to help in the second year of the
operation.

About 2,500,000 people live in the affected area. This
means that approximately a half million dwellings must
be sprayed. Two Point 4 technicians. Dr. Emit E. Palm-
quist and Frederick A. Aldridge, both of Seattle, Wash-
ington, are cooperating with the Ministry in the program.
Dr. Palmquist is Deputy Director of the Point 4 Village
Improvement Program in Iran and Director of Its public
health activities. Mr. Aldridge is Chief Sanitary Engi-
neer.

Last year's campaign cut the Incidence of malaria
from 88 to 35 percent in the Caspian area. Experts pre-
dict that the continuation of the fight for another 2 years
will wipe out the malaria-carrying mosquito and greatly
improve the health of the people of the district. At present
malaria is sapping the energy of the people so that they
cannot produce enough food.

Dr. Franklin S. Harris, of Logan, Utah, Tech-
nical Director of the Iranian-United States Joint
Commission for Kural Development, said that
malaria control is vital to economic progress of
Iran, with which Point 4 is concerned.

June ?7, 795?

945

Radio Moscow Increases Foreign
Propaganda Output

The Department of State announced on May 26
that the new summer schedule of Radio Moscow—
in spite of the immense cost of Russia's radio
jamming operations — shows an increase in foreign
propaganda output of more than 25 percent over
a year ago.

Radio Moscow has doubled its English-language
service to North America during the last G months
and, also, has made substantial increases in its
propaganda output to Western European coun-
tries.

One of the largest increases has been in Radio
Moscow's German-language services for Germany,
which also has been doubled in recent months.

Other pi-incipal increases in Western European
output have been in English to the United King-
dom and in French programs.

The Kremlin appears satisfied with its propa-
ganda operations in the satellite countries, for
in those areas only the Hungarian-language serv-
ice is increased, and that to only a slight extent.

In Spanish-language services to Latin America,
there have been increases. However, the Portu-
guese service for Brazil remains at about its pre-
vious level.

Services in Indonesian Malay have been doubled
in the last 6 months. Other details on South East
Asian language services have not been reported.

In Yugoslav languages, the only reported in-
crease is in Slovene, which was slightly increased.

To the Middle East, Radio Moscow has in-
creased its Arabic broadcasts, while other lan-
guage services to that area apparently remained
unchanged.

VOA Broadcasts in Georgian Language

On May 24, the Department announced that the
Voice of America will inaugurate a daily 15-min-
ute broadcast to the Soviet Union in the Georgian
language starting Saturday, May 26.

The program will consist of news and commen-
tary and will supplement Voice of America broad-
casts beamed to the Soviet Union in Russian and
Ukrainian. Additional broadcasts to the Soviet
Union will be added within the next few weeks in
Tatar, Turkestani, Azerbaijani, and Armenian.

The Georgian program will be broadcast at
11:15 a.m. e.d.s.t. (7:15 p.m. Georgian time)
with simultaneous relays by transmitters at
Munich and Tangier. The program will be re-
broadcast over Munich, Tangier, and BBC facili-
ties at 9 : 30 ]).m. Georgian time.

The Georgian program will increase the Voice
of America broadcast output to approximately 46
program hours daily and its language service to 37.

New VOA Programs to South Asia

The Department of State announced on May 16
that the Voice of America has gained a new radio
relay for broadcasts beamed to South Asia under
an agreement just concluded between the Govern-
ment of Ceylon and the Government of the United
States.

Under terms of the agreement, the United
States Government will furnish and install cer-
tain radio transmission and associated equipment
for use by Radio Ceylon in return for certain
facilities to be accorded by the Government of
Ceylon for the broadcast of VOA programs over
Radio Ceylon.

Starting May 15, the Radio Ceylon facilities
will be used to relay daily 30-minute Voice of
America broadcasts in Hindi to India, Urdu to
Pakistan, and English to South Asia generally.

The inaugural programs included special mes-
sages from Vice President Barkley, Secretary
Acheson, George C. McGhee, Assistant Secretary
for Near Eastern, South Asian and African Af-
fairs, and Foy D. Kohler, Chief of the State
Department's International Broadcasting Divi-
sion.

Vice President Barkley said :

As we endeavor to build a lasting peace, we realize
more and more keenly the need for genuine understanding
not only among Governments but also amonj^ people who
suppox't these Governments.

Secretary Acheson said :

I am confident that the more we know about each other
the stronger will be the foundation for cooperation in
establishing peace throughout the world and in enabling
people everywhere to live happier and richer lives.

Mr. McGhee said :

It has been our experience in the past that Voice of
America broadcasts create a two-way street for the ex-
change of ideas and the growth of friendship. It is my
sincere hope that such a two-way street will develop
between the people of the United States and the people
of South Asia.

Mr. Kohler described the new programs as a
milestone in the growth of international friend-
ship.

The Voice of America also began new programs
this week in Thai and Albanian and added pro-
grams in Finnish and in English to the Far East.
The new programs increased the Voice of America
broadcast output to apjiroximately 45 hours daily
in 37 languages and dialects.

In the inaugural Albanian program, Secretary
Acheson said :

Your hopes for a free and sovereign country have yet
to be realized. In helping you develop your future as
a free and independent member of llie cuiiinuuiity of
nations, the United Stales Govennnent tliroiigli this radio
program will bring you tlic tools of .iudgnient — the facts.
The Voice of America will bring you what you have been
too long denied — truth from the free world.

The initial Thtii program included messages
from Vice President Barkley, Secretary Acheson,

946

Department of State Bulletin

Thai Ambassador Prince Wan Whot, and Dean
Rusk, Assistant Secretary for Far Eastern Affairs.

Mr. Rusk said :

The part Thailand is taking in the free world struggle
to preserve the peace and independence of all people is a
bright ray of hope in these darli hours.

VOA Inaugurates Programs
to Estonia and Latvia

The Voice of America inaugurated daily 15-
minute broadcasts in Estonian and Latvian on
Sunday, June 3.

On tlie same day, broadcasts in a third Baltic
language, Lithuanian, which began last February
IG, were increased from 15 to 30 minutes daily.

The inaugural Estonian and Latvian programs
included special messages from Edward W. Bar-
rett, Assistant Secretary of State for Public
Affairs.

The Estonian broadcast also included statements
by Joluinnes Kaiv, acting Consul-General of
Estonia in charge of the Legation ; and Senator
Paul Douglas of Illinois. The Latvian program
will include statements by Jules Feldmans, Lat-
vian Minister to Washington, and Representative
O. K. Armstrong of Missouri. Senator Douglas'
statement also was carried on the additional
Lithuanian program.

The Estonian and Latvian programs will in-
crease the output of the Voice of America to about
461/2 program hours daily in 39 language services.
Both programs will emanate from the United
States with simultaneous Munich and Tangier
relays. The Estonian program will start at 11 : 30
a. m. e. d. s. t. (6:30 p. m. Estonian time) and
the Latvian program at 11:45 a. m. e. d. s. t.
(6:45 p. m. Latvian time). The format of both
includes news, features, and siDecial events during
the week.

The inaugui'al progi-am in the expanded Lithu-
anian service will be beamed from the United
States at 5 : 45 p. m. e. d. s. t. ( 12 : 45 a. m.
Lithuanian time) with simultaneous Munich,
Tangier, and BBC relays.

Raymond Swing Appointed
to VOA Staff

The Department of State announced on May 26
that Raymond Swing, internationally known radio
news commentator, will join the staff of the Voice
of America in New York as special political com-
mentator effective May 28.

In addition to writing and voicing political com-
mentaries for overseas broadcasts, Sir. Swing will
serve as adviser on the entire news and commen-
tary output of the Voice of America.

Americans Detained in Communist
China Denied Access to Legal Counsel

[Released to the press Mail 21]

The Department of State has been extremely
concerned for an extended period of time over the
imprisonment by Chinese Communist authorities
of a number of American nationals, now believed
to number more than 30. At least some are defi-
nitely known to have been allowed no communica-
tion with anyone outside. In most cases, the local
Chinese Communist authorities have given no ex-
planation of the arrests or any information con-
cerning the welfare or whereabouts of the persons
arrested. Access has been denied to legal counsel
and to British officials, who have been represent-
ing American interests in Communist China since
the closure of our consulates. This Government
lias been in constant communication on this subject
with the British Government.

On April 30, the British Charge d'Affaires at
Peiping, acting on instructions of the Foreign
Office, made representations to the responsible
Chinese Communist authorities at Peiping on
behalf of all Americans arrested, as well as the
United Kingdom, Canadian, and Australian na-
tionals under arrest. He appealed to these au-
thorities to take appropriate steps to permit those
imprisoned to have access to legal counsel and to
friends outside. It was hoped that their speedy
release would be effected, on humanitarian no less
than on equitable grounds. No reply has yet been
received by the Britisli Government from the
Chinese Communist authorities.

The Department of State has also been con-
cerned for some time over the continued denial by
Chinese Communist authorities of exit permits
to certain Americans, including a number of
Shanghai businessmen, some of whom have been
endeavoring for over a year to leave China. Arbi-
trary refusal to permit aliens to depart from a
country is of course a violation of the elementary
principles of international law and practice.

President of Ecuador To Visit U.S.

[Released to the press June 1}

Galo Plaza, President of Ecuador, has accepted
President Truman's invitation to visit the United
States. The invitation was presented to President
Galo Plaza by Ambassador Paul C. Daniels.

President Galo Plaza will arrive in Washing-
ton on June 20, where he will remain until Sun-
day, June 24. He will then proceed to New York
for several days and then fly to San Francisco on
June 27, leaving the United States on June 29.

June 11, 1951

947

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Twentieth Report of U. N. Command Operations in Korea

FOR THE PERIOD APRIL 16^30, 1951>

U.N. doc. S/2170
Transmitted May 25, 1951

I herewith submit report number 20 of the
United Nations Command Operations in Korea
for the period 16-30 April, inckisive. United
Nations Command Communiques numbers 855-
8G9, inclusive, provided detailed accounts of these
operations.

Following an artillery preparation, Chinese
Communist Forces, composed primarily of fresh
troops, and massed along the western half of the
front, launched the initial assaults of a general
offensive during the night of 22-23 April. The
main effort was made on the twenty-five mile front
between Yonchon and Sachang. Simultaneously,
to the west and southwest of this sector, the enemy
bridged the Imjin River northeast of Seoul. To
the east of his main effort he made moderately
strong attacks whose only significant success was
to drive a salient approximately four miles deep
into United Nations lines to the east and southeast
of Inje.

United Nations Forces conducted an orderly

' Transmitted to tlie Security Council by Ambassador
Warren R. Austin, U.S. representative in the Security
Council, on May 25. For texts of the first, second, third,
fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, and
eleventh reports to the Security Council on U.N. command
operation in Korea, see Bulletin, of Au?. 7, 19.50, p. 203 ;
Aug. 28, 1950, p. 323; and Sept. 11, 1950, p. 403; Oct. 2,
19.50, p. 534; Oct. 16, 19.50, p. 603; Nov. 6, 1950, p. 729;
Nov. 13, 1950, p. 759 ; Jan. 8, 1951, p. 43, and Feb. 19, 1951,
p. 304, respectively. The reports whieli have been pub-
lished separately as Department of State publications
3935, 3955, 3062, 3978, 3986, 400(!, 4015, and 4108 resp<>c-
tively will apiiear hereafter only in the Bulletin. The
twelfth, tliirtoentli, fourteentli reports appear in tlie
Bulletin of Mar. 19, 1951, p. 470; the fifteenth and six-
teenth reports in the Bulletin of Apr. 16, 1951, p. 625;
the scvptiti'ciitli report in the Bulletin of Apr. 30, 1951,
p. 710; till' cinlitcciilli in Bulletin of May 7, 1951, p. 755;
a siK'ci.il report by tlio U.N. Commanding General, in
Bulletin of May 21, 1951, p. 828; and the nineteentli re-
port in Bulletin of .June 4, 1051, p. 910.

withdrawal maintaining the integrity of major
units and inflicting maximum casualties on the
enemy. Artilleiy concentrations and aggressive
local counter-attacks, including the use of Tank-
Infantry Task Forces, contributed to the piece-
meal destruction of the enemy's offensive potential.
In no instance during the period of tliis report \vas
the enemy able to achieve a significant penetration
in force. In the area of the enemy's main effort,
the British. Turkish and Greek contingents dis-
tinguished themselves in the forefront of the bat-
tle area. Ignoring casualties, the enemy strove
unsuccessfully to isolate and entrap United Na-
tions units. By 30 April, the hostile advance had
carried up to thirty-five miles southward on a forty
mile front extending from the immediate vicinity
of Seoul to the Hongchon area in central Korea.
Somewhat smaller gains had been scored to the east
and west of this sector.

For the current offensive, the enemy concen-
trated nine Chinese Communist Force Armies on a
fifty mile sector of the west, and established a re-
serve of three to five additional armies immedi-
ately in rear of this force, providing a total avail-
able force in the forward battle area of from thirty-
four to forty Cluncse Communist Force Divisions,
plus four North Korean divisions on the extreme
western flank. On the fifty mile front from
Hwachon to the east coast, there were one Ciiinese
Comnuinist Force Army and three Nortli Korean
Corps, totaling twelve to fotu'teen divisions. It
is thus a])parent that the enemy has nuistered al-
most the maximum forces avuilal)le to liim in
Korea for a ma jot- effort in (lie west. Not I'oiint-
ing the twelve batUy mauled Chinese Connnunist
Force Divisions, which are not considered im-
mediately available for combat, the enemy has
DOW expanded his effective forces in Korea to a
total of more than seventy divisions.

Front lines at the end of the iJcriod ran geii-

948

Department of State Bulletin

erally almost due east from the Han River, pass-
ing tliree miles north of Seoul, to Munye, and
thence northeast through Songdong, Chaun, and
Sori to Habong near the east coast.

Enemy guerrilla units remained on the defen-
sive, except for two minor incidents during the
period, though groups up to battalion size were
contacted by United Nations Security Forces in
south-central Korea. The present strength of
these forces is estimated at about 12,000.

Constant patrol and daily reconnaissance op-
erations by United Nations Naval Forces con-
tinued to deny to the enemy the use of Korean
waters and to prevent enemy interference with the
movements of United Nations shipping to and
fi-om Korea. The United Nations Fleet operating
in Korean waters now includes ships from Aus-
tralia, Denmark, Canada, The Republic of Korea,
Thailand, the United Kingdom, the Netherlands,
New Zealand and the United States.

A large United Nations Destroyer and Frigate
group concentrated at Wonsan shelling bridges,
highways and railroads as part of a highly effective
program of interdiction of main enemy lines of
communication. Further to the north Songjin
and Chongjin were subjected to heavy naval gun-
fire with emphasis on bridges, tunnels, roads and
rail crossings. On the west coast the United
Nations Naval interdiction progi-am ranged along
the front northwest of Seoul and along the Korean
coast from Inchon north.

The jH'incipal weight of United Nations carrier-
based air attacks was shifted to close support of
United Nations ground units as the enemy began
his long expected gi'ound offensive. As a result
of these air operations, the enemy has suffered
heavy losses of personnel and material.

Check minesweeping operations continued on
both coasts of Korea mainly for the protection of
ships engaged in shore bombardment. Drifting
mines continued to be sighted in substantial
numbers.

Continuous attacks upon the enemy immediately
confronting United Nations ground forces formed
the predominant role of United Nations Air
Forces during the period. Through intermit-
tently poor weather. United Nations Air Forces
attacked enemy forces exposed by movement in
attack resulting in large numbers of enemy
casualties.

There are continuing indications of possible
enemy intent to employ air power offensively
against the United Nations forces. For this rea-
son, enemy airfields in Korea are kept under con-
tinuing surveillance. There is, of course, no
means of preventing the enemy from launching at-
tacks from Manchurian bases if he elects to do so.

Communications targets continued under attack
with relatively light opposition by MIG-15's in
northwest Korea.

Beginning in mid-April large quantities of
United Nations leaflets were air-dropped over

enemy troops in front-line positions and in staging
areas to the rear, warning that their Communist
leaders were planning another massive attack in
which tliousands upon thousands of them would
be sacrificed without purpose except to further the
cause of aggression. When this attack was
launched late in April, leaflets and loudspeaker
broadcasts were used to tell enemy soldiers of the
exorbitant price in lives which their officers, all
along the line, were expending for every mile of
territory, and to show the enemy that the alterna-
tive to this certain death was surrender and hu-
mane treatment by the United Nations Forces.
More than 355 million leaflets have now been
disseminated in Korea. Radio broadcasts, in con-
junction with leaflets, have kept the Korean people
informed on the renewed Communist offensive and
its significance to Koi-ea in terms of added destruc-
tion of life and property.

In the past few weeks large numbers of enemy
prisoners of war formerly interned in enclosures
of United Nations prisoner of war camp number
one in the Pusan area have been transferred to
Koje-Do. At the present time there are over
90,000 prisoners of war interned at the Koje-Do
prisoner of war camp. The new prisoner of war
camp is nearing completion and many prisoners
of war are engaged in construction work which is
designed to improve living conditions and to raise
the sanitary standards within the camp area.
Koje-Do Island is a site which has been carefully
selected from the standpoint of the health and
welfare of prisoners of war. The geographical lo-
cations of the new enclosures have been trans-
mitted to the enemy through the International
Committee of the Red Cross, Geneva, Switzerland,
in accordance with the Geneva Convention rela-
tive to the treatment of prisoners of war, 12
August 1949.

Designs Selected for U.N. Stamps

Secretary-General Trygve Lie announced on
May 17 the results of the work of the special com-
mittee he had appointed to give final approval to
the designs for the first issue of United Nations
postage stamps.

Eight designs were approved, six to be used for
the eleven regular denominations and two for
the four air-mail denominations. The regular
stamps will be issued in 10, l%(t, 2<J, 3(f, 5^, 10^,
15?f, 200, 25^, 50^, and $1 values. The air-mail
stamps will be 60, 100, 150, and 250 values.

The date of issue of United Nations stamps will
depend on the time required for their production.
It is expected that they will be ready by the middle
of September of this year. However, all the de-
nominations will not be issued simultaneously but
in three groups with an interval of some weeks
between issues.

June I J, I95J

949

Current Status of Contributions for Korean
and Palestine Relief Programs

U.N. doc. A/1801
Dated May 16, 1951

Report hy the Sccretary-Oeneral to the Negotiating Com-
mittee ore Contrihutions to Programmes of Relief and
Rcliabilitation

The Negotiating Committee on Contributions to
Programmes of Relief and Rehabilitation in
Korea and Relief and Reintegration of Palestine
Refugees, in its report of 28 January 1951
(A/1769), recommended the following action by
the Secretary-General :

"The Secretary-General should request all Govern-
ments to place written statements regarding their contri-
butions to both funds In his hands not later than 20
February 1951, so that the results of both appeals may be
made public as soon as possible thereafter.

"(a) Where representatives have made offers be-
fore the Committee, the Secretary-General should request
their Governments formally to confirm and if possible to
increase these offers by the above date.

"(b) Where Governments have not yet made offers
to both funds, the Secretary-General should request them
to communicate to him the amounts of their proposed
contributions not later than the above date."

On or about 1 February 1951, the Secretary-
General addressed letters to all Member States
and a number of non-member States, enclosing the
report of the Negotiating Committee, and making
the requests recommended in it. A target date of
20 February 1951 was set though it was realized
that this would provide too short a period for
many Governments to take appropriate action.

The results to date can be summarized as fol-
lows, though a detailed list is attached to the
present report as Annexes I and II.

Programme of Relief and Rehabilitation
of Korea

A. Of the 13 Governments which made offers,
12 have formally confirmed them.

B. Of these contributions, one represents an in-
crease over the amount advised to the Negotiating
Conmiittee and 2, while not changed in amount,
are no longer subject to conditions which might
have reduced their maximum value.

C. E^ght additional Governments have replied
to tlie Secretary-General's request by making new
offers and formally confirming them at the same
time.

D. Including the offers made to the Secretary-
General under tlie Security Council resolutions on
Korea,* 43 Governments are to date participating
in the Korea programme of relief and rehabilita-
tion.

Programme of Relief and Reintegration
of Palestine Refugees

A. Of the 14 Governments which made offers,
13 have formally confirmed them.

B. Of these, one offer to the Committee has been
increased and one other, while not changed in
amount, is no longer subject to conditions which
might have reduced its value.

C. Seven additional Governments have replied
to the Secretary-General's request by making new
offers and formally confirming them at the same
time.

D. A total of 21 Governments are therefore par-
ticipating up to date in the Palestine programme.

Periodically during the past two months, the
Secretary-General has publicized all confinna-
tions of either old or new offers as they have been
received. Similarly, special efforts have been
made to obtain the widest publicity at the time of
the actual receipt of major contributions. The
Information Centres in both the areas to be as-
sisted have also endeavoured to publicize the offers
on every possible occasion.

The Secretary-General expresses the hope that
the result of the Negotiating Committee's earlier
work, as reflected in the present status of the
financing for both programmes, is sufficiently en-
couraging to warrant the continuation of its nego-
tiations throughout the present session of the
General Assembly.

ANNEX I

Contributions Made or Offers Formally Confirmed Toioards
the Relief of the Ciril Population of Korin, I'nder the
Seenriti/ Council Resolutions on Korea or Oencral Assent^
bly Resolution 1,10 (V) of 1 December liloO

The following should be noted :

1. This list does not include offers of military
aid or related items, such as militaiy hospitals and
strategic material.

Editok's Note: For text of the United States reply see
BuiJJiTiN of March 19, lO.'il, page 469.

950

*S/1511, S/1588, and SA657.

Departmenf of Sfate Bulletin

2. This list does not include the large amount
of civilian relief and rehabilitation assistance sup-
l)lied by tlie United States Government through
the Unified Command, estimated to be approxi-
mately 85 million dollars.

3. All offers are shown in dollar equivalents,
although most of them have been made in the
currency of the contributing Government or in
kind.

4. The indication "maximum" signifies that the
full offers are conditional on the target figure of
250 million dollars being reached or are otherwise
dependent on the contributions of other Govern-
ments.

5. In those cases where contributions in kind,
made or promised under the Security Council
resolutions on Korea, are marked by an asterisk*,

Offtrs to the
Secretary-

Qeneral

under

Secvrily

Council
resolutions

on Korea

the contributions have either been delivered to the
United Nations Command or are in process of

delivery,
tentative.

Valuations may, in certain cases, be

$500, 000
4, 020, 000

75, 000
' 2 7, 250, 000

Ojfers formaUy confirmed under
General Assemlily resolution
iW (V)of 1 December 1960

Member States:

1. Argentina

2. Australia

3. Belgium

4. Brazil

5. Burma

6. Canada

7. China

8. Colombia

9. Cuba

10. Denmark (Civilian use of hospital ship

J utlandia)

11. Dominican Republic . 10, 000

12. Ecuador

13. Egypt 28, 000

14. Ethiopia

15. France

16. Greece

17. Guatemala (several thou-

sands tons of timber)

18. Honduras

19. Iceland

20. India

21. Indonesia MOO, 000

22. Israel 33, 600

23. Lebanon

24. Liberia L5, 000

25. Luxembourg .... MO, 000

26. Mexico

27. Netherlands 260, 000

28. New Zealand

29. Nicaragua

30. Norway 900, 000

31. Pakistan

32. Paraguay

33. Peru

34. Philippines *3, 734, 000

35. Saudi Arabia 2 10, 000

36. Sweden 1,000,000

37. Svria ' 12, 000

38. Thailand *4, 368, 000

39. United Kingdom ... '28, 000, 000 *200, 000

40. United States .... 162, 500, 000

41. Uruguay "2, 140, 000

42. Venezuela 70,000 * 100, 000

Nonmember State:

43. Italy: 200-bed hospital and necessary personnel.*

1 Canadian.

> Funds already received.

» Not yet confirmed.

• Supplies to the estimated value ol $140,000 have already been shipped.

•Maximum.

June 7 J, 1957

*$380, 000

*50, 000

2, 700, 000

*615, 000

*500

*259, 000

*238, 000

*63, bob
2 41, bob

*75, 000
*115, 000

2,500

*45, 000

*171, 500

*63, bob

50, 000
*10, 000

*"35b, bob
*"i3'i, bob

*24, 000

*90, 000

*3S0, 000

2 10, 000

65, 000

ANNEX II

Coiitrihvtion Offers FormalUj Confirmed, for the Financing
of the Programme for the Relief and Reintegration of
Palestine Refugees

The following should be noted:

1. All offers are shown in dollar equivalents,
although most of them have been made in the
currency of the contributing Government or in
kind.

2. The indication "minimum" signifies that the
offer does not necessarily represent the entire con-
tribution which will be forthcoming.

3. In addition to the contributions made before
the Negotiating Committee and confirmed form-
ally to the Secretary-General, the following in-
formation will be of interest:

(a) The Government of Israel also offered a
contribution of 1,000,000 Israel pounds subject to
conditions beyond the competence of the Commit-
tee. This offer is now the subject of negotiation
between that Government and the United Nations
Conciliation Commission for Palestine as part of
a general settlement of refugee compensation.

(b) The Director of the United Nations
Relief and Works Agency reports that the direct
aid to the refugees and services to the agency likely
to be provided by Governments of the area for
the period 1 July 1951-30 June 1952 (based on
their own valuations) are estimated as follows :

Lebanon $1,800,000

Egypt 1,800,000

Syria 530,000

.lordan 500,000

Israel 50,000

Iraq 800,000

Member States:

1. Denmark ' $53, 000

2. Egypt 390, 000

3. France 2,856,000

4. Greece 50, 000

5. Honduras 2, 500

6. Indonesia 2 30, 000

7. Israel 50,000

8. Lebanon 33, 000

9. Luxembourg « 2, 000

10. Mexico 110,000

11. Norway 14,000

12. Pakistan 90, 000

13. Philippines 10, 000

14. Saudi Arabia '115,000

15. Svyeden 20,000

10. Svria 1 60, 000

17. United Kingdom 8, 000, OOO

18. United States < 25, 000, 000

19. Venezuela 20,000

20. Yemen (')

Additional contribution:

2L Southern Rhodesia 19,600

1 Not yet confirmed.

> Funds already received.

' Cash portion of $40,000 already received.

* Minimum.

• Large quantity of cereal.

951

Resettlement and Protection of Refugees

IRO GENERAL COUNCIL AND EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE MEET AT GENEVA

hy George L. Warren

The General Council of the International Eef-
ugee Organization (Iro) held its seventh session
at Geneva from April 9 through April 13, 1951.
The Executive Committee met concurrently from
April 4 through April 12, 1951.

Acting on recommendations of the Executive
Committee, the General Council decided to pro-
vide resettlement services for those refugees, previ-
ously excluded by earlier decisions, who arrive in
areas of Iro operations after October 1, 1950. Be-
cause of delays in processing refugees for admis-
sion to the United States and the possibility that
the United States Congress may extend the expir-
ing date of the United States Displaced Persons
Act of 1948, as amended, the Council authorized
the Director General to continue the planned pro-
gram of operations beyond September 30, 1951,
for so long as available resources permit and there
remain refugees for whom opportunities for re-
settlement are available. The Director General
announced that in his judgment realizable re-
sources available to the Organization would per-
mit continuing operations until approximately
December 31, 1951.

The Council was advised of the designation by
T^yg^'e Lie, Secretary-General of the United Na-
tions, of J. Donald Kingsley, Director General of
Iro, as Agent General of the United Nations Ko-
rean Reconstruction Agency (Unkra). In view
of the fact that the pattern of Iro operations has
been substantially established and that Mr. Kings-
ley's responsibilities as Director General of Iro
will decrease simultaneously with the increase in
his responsibilities as Agent General for Korea,
the Council decided that he should continue his
services as Director General of Iro while acting as
Agent General for Korea. Mr. Kingsley an-
nounced at the Council meeting the appointment
of Sir Artluir Rucker, former Deputy Director
General of Iro, as Deputy Resident Agent in
Korea of Unkra.

Tlie Council noted with satisfaction that plans
for tlie continuing care of 35,000 refugees includ-

ing family members who will require institutional
treatment after the termination of Iro had either
been concluded or were in process. At a previous
meeting, 22 million dollars had been allocated for
this purpose, of which over 19 million dollars had
already been spent or committed by March 31,
1951.

In modifying the previously adopted plan of
expenditure for the period from July 1, 1950, until
termination of operations now expected on De-
cember 31, 1951, the Council approved total ex-
penditures of $100,356,962. This total provided
$43,873,220 for resettlement expenditures, $19,-
435,082 for the care of refugees requiring institu-
tional treatment, and $1,300,000 for liquidation
expenditures during the 3-month period following
the termination of operations. The excess over
previous authorized expenditures, $13,448,929,
was made possible by the sale of surplus stocks
and equipment, the proceeds of which had not
been included in previous estimates of income.
Of the total expenditure authorized, $100,356,962,
$43,870,056 had been expended or committed prior
to December 31, 1950, leaving $56,486,906 available
for use in the calendar year 1951. No requests for
further contributions by governments are to be
made by the Organization.

The total numbers planned to be moved in re-
settlement were estimated at 222,400, of which ap-
proximately 130,000 had been moved by March 31,
1951, leaving 90,000 to be resettled in "the remain-
ing period. Of this latter number, it was expected
that 62,300 would be admitted to the United States
provided the Displaced Persons Act is extended
beyond June 30, 1951; 13,750 to Canada, 4,300 to
Australia ; and the balance to New Zealand, Latin
American, European, and other countries.

In its comments to the General Council on the
semiannual report of the Director General for the
period ending December 31, 1950, the Executive
Conunittee devoted attention to problems of the
termination of operations in outlying areas, sucli
as the Philippines, China, Turkey, the Near East,

952

Department of Slate Bulletin

and Greece, and urged the Director General to
intensify eft'orts to reduce the size of the remain-
ing problem in Italy and Austria particularly.

The Council in considering the report of the
Director General noted that substantial progress
iiad been made toward termination and that with
tlio planned extension of operations to December
Til, 1951, the Iro will remove from Europe vir-
tually all of the remaining refugees for whom re-
settlement opportunities become available. Prog-
ress toward termination was evidenced by the fact
(luit 998,270 refugees had been repatriated or re-
settled by March 31, 1951, the number of camp in-
stidlations had been reduced from 704 in July 19-17
lo 62, and the international staff from a peak of
2.400 to 1,291.

The function of the protection of refugees which
Ti!0 has performed since 1947 is in process of trans-
fer to the Office of the High Commissioner for
Kefugees established by the General Assembly of
the United Nations on January 1, 1951. An agree-
ment has been concluded with the Allied High
Commission for Germany under which the Com-
mission has taken over the activities of the Inter-
national Tracing Service which will be continued
in operation under the direction of the Commis-
sion. The International Tracing Service under Iko
has collected documents providing information on
over 20 million allied nationals. Records of over
a million persons were provided to interested gov-
ernments concerning their nationals. Tliis infor-
mation has proved invaluable in establishing
claims for indemnification and the receipt of bene-
fits provided under the laws of the home coun-
tries concerned. Death certificates were issued
with respect to 1,990 persons facilitating the ad-
ministration of estates and the provision of assist-
ance for dependent relatives.

The Iro still faces the responsibility of making
final plans for 1,393 unaccompanied children reg-
istered on March 31, 1951. The great majority of
these children, 1,088, remain in Germany. Of
the total, 592 are in the care or custody of other
agencies, sponsors, or guardians and do not re-
ceive care and maintenance directly from the Iro.
410 children are receiving temporary care only be-
cause their parents, guardians, or sponsors are ill
and unable to provide for them or because they
are waiting to join their parents who have already
preceded them to countries of resettlement. The
remaining 391 children are under the direct care
of Iro. The Council was assured that plans for
each individual child registered have been deter-
mined and that all children will be provided for
adequately befoi-e December 31, 1951.

Fifteen member governments of Iro were repre-
sented at this session of the Council : Australia,
Belgium, Canada, Denmark, France, Guatemala,
Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, New Zealand,
Norway, Switzerland, United Kingdom, United
States, and Venezuela.

China, the Dominican Republic, and Iceland
were not represented. Representatives of the Gov-
ernments of Austria, Israel, Mexico, and Sweden,
of the United Nations, the Vatican, the Interna-
tional Labor Organization, and the World Health
Organization attended as official observers, and
many voluntary agencies interested in refugees
were represented.

The United Nations High Commissioner for
Refugees, Dr. G. J. van Heuven Goedhart, at-
tended the meetings ofthe Executive Committee
and the Council and participated on occasion in
the discussions.

Robert Rochefort of France presided as chair-
man of the Council for the session. Prince del
Drago of Italy served as first vice chairman,
B. D. Zohrab oi New Zealand as second vice chair-
man, and Erik Dons of Norway as rapporteur.

The Council will reconvene at Geneva for its
final session on or about October 18, 1951. The
Executive Committee will reconvene a few days

Sfior to the meeting of the General Council in
ctober.

• 3/r. Warren, author of the above article, is
advi^ser on refugee and displaced persons, De-
partment of State. Mr. Warren was United
States representative to the meetings of the Gen-
eral Council and the Executive Committee-

Training for Care of Handicapped Children

A course was held in the United Kingdom between
March 3 and April 28, 1951 on the rehabilitation and
after-care of the handicapped child and was attended
by 49 fellows, coming from seven European countries :
Austria (8), Finland (7), Greece (6), Germany (7),
Berlin (7), Yugoslavia (6), France (6), Italy (2). Who
financed and administered 15 fellows and administered
an additional 5 fellows paid for by Unicef. The United
Nations financed and administered 13 fellows and
administered an additional 10 fellows paid for by Unicef.
UNicEiF financed the travel of 7 United Nations fellows.

The program for the course was under the direction of
Dr. Harold Balme, acting on behalf of the Ministry of
Education and the Ministry of Health, and the British
Council acted as agents for the Ministries in regard to
accommodation and Internal travel. Unicef is meeting
the administrative expenses in the United Kingdom that
are not covered by the allowance paid to the fellows.

The fellows attending the course were selected, as far
as possible, as a team covering all the aspects of re-
habilitation so that when they return to their countries,
they will help their Governments to build up programs
for physically-handicapped children, assist in training
personnel in the most up-to-date methods, and the use of
the equipment being supplied by Unicef. The quality
of the fellows was high, and they had a chance of seeing
what can be done along modern lines for the treatment,
the rehabilitation, the education, the vocational train-
ing, and the employment of physically handicapped
children. The fellows should return to their home lands
with their enthusia.sm kindled and their knowledge
greatly extended. It should be stressed that this
course was organized as a joint enterprise be-
tween Unicef, Who, United Nations Technical Assistance
Administration, Unesco, and Ilo.

From U. N. doc E/ICEF/ni,

June 11, 1951

953

International Commission for Nortliwest Atlantic Fisheries

Report on the First Meeting liy Edward Castleman

The International Commission for Northwest
Atlantic Fisheries was established in accordance
with the provisions of the International Conven-
tion for the Northwest Atlantic Fisheries con-
cluded at Washington on February 8, 1949. The
United States served as host Government for the
first meeting of the Commission in accordance
with a recommendation contained in the final act
of the conference at which the Convention was
concluded.^ The Convention, which entered into
force on July 3, 1950, established an International
Commission for the primary purpose of keeping
under continuous review all pertinent information
concerning the international fisheries of the
Northwest Atlantic Ocean. Among the major
responsibilities of the Commission will be the co-
ordination and dissemination of information con-
cerning such fisheries and, based upon such infor-
mation, recommendations to member governments
on conservation action by them deemed necessary
to maintain the international fisheries of the
Northwest Atlantic at a maximum level of sus-
tained production.

The United States has a substantial interest in
this Convention and its work because the fisheries
of the Convention area in most imminent need
of action for their conservation are those off the
New England coast. The United States fishing
industry which relies upon those fisheries is of
significant importance in the economy of the
country. The United States catch in the area
approximates over 900 million pounds a year
valued at over 70 million dollars to the fishermen,
and over 34 thousand fishermen are employed in
these fisheries. The value of the capital invest-
ment in the fisheries in the New England States
and New York is estimated at over 115 million dol-
lars. During recent years, there has been increas-
ing evidence of declines in abundance in important
commercial species of fish on the banks off of New
England, particularly the haddock. Since the
fisheries involved are on the high seas, the only

' For (he U.S. delegation, see Bulletin of Apr. 9, 1951,
p. 595.

effective method for their study and management
is through international cooperation.

Of the original signatory Governments, Canada,
Denmark, Iceland, the United Kingdom, and the
United States — having already deposited their in-
struments of ratification — were represented at the
first meeting of the Commission by fully par-
ticipating delegations. France, Italy, Norway,
Portugal, and Spain, not having as yet taken the
required action toward ratification, were repre-
sented by observer delegations. The Food and
Agriculture Organization of the United Nations
and the International Council for the Exploration
of the Sea also sent observers.

Dr. Hilary J. Deason, Chief, Office of Foreign
Activities, Fish and Wildlife Service, United
States Department of the Interior, and one of the
three United States Commissioners, was elected
chairman of the first meeting held at Washington
from April 2-10, 1951. A.^T. A. Dobson, Com-
missioner for the United Kingdom, was elected
vice chairman. Both are to serve for a term of 2
years.

The Commission was primarily concerned at its
fii'st meeting with organizational questions and
adopted rules of procedure, financial regulations,
and certain fiscal and administrative resolutions.
In accordance with the terms of the Convention,
which divides the over-all Convention area into
five subareas in order to make the studies and rec-
ommendations of the Commission more effective,
five panels with primary responsibility for the
five subareas also met, adopted rules of procedure,
and elected officers.

The United States, at the moment, is particu-
larly interested in subarea 5 (the banks off tlie
coast of New England) and, according]}' rec-
ommended that this panel give attention to pos-
sible conservation action in tiie subarea as soon as
))ossiblc. In accordance with this reconunenda-
tion, the panel agreed to meet in the fall to con-
sider all avaihible data on the lishei'ies of the
particular area and to determine what action
might be recommended to the Connnission, and
then to the (Jovernments of Canada and tlie

954

Department of State Bulletin

United States, wliich Governments for the mo-
ment are the only members of this panel. At the
next meeting the panel for subarea 5 will probably
consider the possible establishment of minimum
mesh-size regulations for the haddock fishery in
that area. Francis W. Sargent, one of the United
States Commissioners, was elected chairman of
this panel.

In accordance with the terms of Public Law
845, 81st Congress approved September 27, 1950,
which is the law designed to implement the Inter-
national Convention, the United States Commis-
sioners recently appointed an Advisory Committee
of 14 Tuembers representing labor, management,
tlie public-at-large, and the state Governments.
At their first meeting with their Advisory Com-
mittee at Boston shortly before the international
meeting, the United States Commissioners ob-
tained tlie concurrence of the Committee for a
discussion at the Commission meeting of the ques-
tion of applying minimum mesh-size regulations
for haddock in subarea 5. This concurrence was
obtained with tlie understanding that no final
decisions would be taken before further consulta-
tions had been held with the Advisory Committee.
Since the meeting of the panel for subai'ea 5 will
definitively consider the question of recommenda-
tions concerning mesh-size regulations for the sub-
area in question, it is contemplated that the United
States Commissioners will consult with their Ad-
visory Committee and perhaps hold open hear-
ings at key New England ports prior to the fall
meeting.

The Commission determined to establish tem-
porary headquarters at St. Andrews, New Bruns-
wick, Canada, and elected Dr. W. Robert Martin
of Canada as acting executive secretary for the
first fiscal year. Pending the assumption of such
duties by Dr. Martin on July 1, 1951, Richard S.

Wheeler, assistant chief. Division of International
Conferences, United States Department of State,
was designated to serve as executive secretary pro
tempore. A (inal decision for the Commission
headquarters and for an executive secretary was
deferred until the second annual meeting of the
Commission to be held in June of 1952. During
the interval between its annual meetings, head-
quarters offers made by Dalhousie University at
Halifax, Nova Scotia, and by the Government of
the Province of Newfoundland will be studied by
the chairman and vice chairman for recommenda-
tion at the second meeting. After deciding that
the Commission headquarters should be in Canada
for the time being, the Commission declined with
gratitude an oiler by Harvard University.

In accordance with the provisions of the Con-
vention, the Commission will consider at its next
meeting the question of affiliation with a special-
ized agency of the United Nations. During the
period prior to the second annual meeting, the
chairman and acting executive secretary will con-
sult with officials of the Food and Agriculture
Organization of the United Nations and the Inter-
national Council for the Exploration of the Sea in
order to develop recommendations as to the most
effective method for cooperation between the Com-
mission and those organizations, and the avoidance
of duplication of effort between the organizations.

The first meeting is considered to have been
highly successful, and the United States Commis-
sioner are of the opinion that a firm foundation
has been established for the effective operation
of the Commission.

• Mr. Castleman is Chief, Section of Interna-
tional Agreements Office of Foreign Activities,
Fish and Wildlife Service, Departmeint of the
Intenor.

U. S. Delegations to International Meetings

Economic Commission for Latin America
Fourth Session

On May 25, the Department of State announced
that Ambassador Merwin L. Bohan, United States
representative on the Inter-American Economic
and Social Council, has been designated to serve
as acting United States representative at the
fourth session of the United Nations Economic
Commission for Latin America which is to open
at Mexico City on May 28, 1951. Ambassador
Claude G. Bowers, the permanent United States
representative on the Commission, will be unable
to attend the session.

Named to serve as advisers on the United States
delegation to the session are :

Advisers

Winthrop G. Brown, Director, Office of laternational Ma-
terials rolicy, Department of State

James C. Corlis.s, Adviser, Office of Regional American
Affairs, Department of State

Jolin S. deBeers, Cliief, Latin American Division, Office
of International Finance, Department of tlie Treas-
ury

Edmund H. Kellogg, Office of United Nations Economic
Affairs, Department of State

Wilfred Malenbaum, Chief, Investment and Economic
Development Staff, Department of State

Harold M. Randall, Counselor of Embassy for Economic
Affairs, American Embassy, Mexico City

George Wytlie, Chief, American Republics Branch, Office
of International Trade, Department of Commerce.

June J J, 1951

955

Extensive study will be made at the forthcoming
session both of recent developments and trends
in the economy of Latin America and of the most
important economic development and foreign-
trade problems of the region. This study will be
based on examination of an Economic Survey of
Latin America^ 1950 and a number of reports
which have been prepared on such subjects as
effects of the United States Defense Program on
Latin American countries, foreign investments in
Latin America, the cotton textile industry in the
region, immigration, and the technical assistance
program. The economic survey contains, for ex-
ample, (1) analyses of the most important eco-
nomic developments in Latin America since World
War II in the fields of agriculture, industry, min-
ing, inflation, balance of payments, and foreign
exchange; (2) studies of recent economic develop-
ments in 10 Latin American countries; and (3) a
series of studies on certain basic raw materials.

The Commission will also deal with a number
of other topics. They include: measures to in-
crease the availability of educational, scientific and
cultural materials ; measures for the conservation
and use of nonagricultural resources ; coordination
of the activities of the Commission and of the
Inter-American Economic and Social Council;
cooperation with the Food and Agriculture Or-
ganization of the United Nations in the operation
of a work program on food and agriculture prob-
lems in Latin America; adoption of a report by
the Commission for submission to the thirteenth
session of the Economic and Social Council of the
United Nations ; and approval of the future work
programs of the Commission.

Governing Body, 115th Session (ILO)

Tlie Department of State announced on May 28
that the 115th session of the Governing Body of
the International Labor Office convened at Geneva,
Switzerland on that date.

Philip ]M. Kaiser, Assistant Secretary of Labor,
will attend the session in his capacity as United
States Government representative on the Govern-
ing Body. Arnold L. Zempel, executive director.
Office of International Labor Affairs, Department
of Labor, will also attend as the United States
Government substitute repiesentative on the Gov-
erning Body for this session.

Named to serve as advisers on the United States
delegation are:

Robert M. Barnett, Economic OfBcer (Labor), American
Legation, Bern, Switzerland

Otis E. Mullilicn, Officer in Charge of United Nations
Social Affairs

Edward H. Persons, Chief, Irx) Division, Office of Inter-
national Lal)or Affairs, Department of Lal)or

Clcon O. Swayzee, Office of the Assistant Secretary for
Economic Affairs

The Governing Body is composed of 32 per-
sons— 16 representing governments (of which the
United States is one), 8 representing emph)yers,

and 8 representing workers. Serving as the execu-
tive board of the International Labor Organiza-
tion, the Governing Body, which normally meets
four times annually, has general supervision of the
International Labor Office and the various com-
mittees and commissions of the Organization.

At its 115tli session, the Governing Body will
be primarily concerned with the examination of
reports by the Director General and those stand-
ing committees which have held meetings since
the 114th session of the Governing Body, held at
Geneva, last March. Tlie reports deal with such
matters as tlie application of conventions and rec-
ommendations, manpower, technical assistance,
staff questions, and allegations concerning in-
fringement of freedom of association. In addi-
tion, the Governing Body will consider reports
prepared at a meeting of experts on systems of
payment by results (Geneva, Apr. 10-20, 1951),
the 16th session of the Joint Alaritime Commission
(Geneva, May 21-26, 1951), and the Third Inter-
American Conference on Social Security (Buenos
Aires, Mar. 12-13, 1951).

Military Medicine and Pharmacy, 13th Congress

On May 28, the Department of State announced
that Maj. Gen. Harry G. Armstrong, Surgeon
General, United States Air Force, has been des-
ignated chairman of the United States delegation
to the 13th International Congress on Military
Medicine and Pharmacy, which is to be held at
Paris, June 17-23, 1951. Other members of the
United States delegation are :

Maj. Gen. George E. Armstrong. (MC) USA, Deputy
Surgeon General, United States Army

Capt. Alliort R. Behnke, Jr., (MC) USN, Staff Medical
Officer, Commander Naval Forces, Germany

Brig. Gen. Otis O. Benson, Jr., (MC) USAF, Commandant
United States Air Force, School of Aviation Medi-
cine, Randolph Air Force Base, Texas

Vice Adm. Joel T. Boone, (MC) USN, (Retired), Chief
Medical Director, Department of Medicine and Sur-
gery, Veterans Administration

Dr. Van M. Hoge, Associate Chief, Bureau of Medical
Services, Public Health Service, Federal Security
Agency

Maj. Gen. Edgar E. Hume, (MC) USA, Chief Surgeon,
Far East Command General Headquarters, Fec,
Tokyo, Japan

Dr. Walter G. Nelson, Medical Director, Foreign Quaran-
tine Activities, Public Health Service, American
Embassy, Paris

Dr. Isadore S. Ravdin, Professor of Surgery, School of
Medicine, University of Pennsylvania

Capt. Hilton W. Rose, (MC) USN, Executive Secretary,
Armed Forces Medical Policy Council, Office of the
Secretary of Defense, Department of Defense

The principal agenda items for the forthcoming
Congress relate to new military aiul social prob-
lems encountered by the military services. Atten-
tion will be given in i)articular to such nuitters
as (1) the paOiology and treatment of lesions
resulting from the use of atomic weapons, (2)
war psychosis, and (3) the care and evacuation
of the sick and wounded.

956

Deparfmen/ of State Bulletin

The First Conn^ress of Military Medicine and
Pharmacy was sponsored by the Belgian Govern-
ment in 1921 to bring together representatives of
the military medical services of the participating
states for the purpose of promoting the protection
of liuman life in the armed forces. The Twelfth
Congress of this series was held at Mexico, D.F.,
October 23-29, 1949.

Radio Consultative Committee, Sixth Assembly

The Department of State announced on May
28 that the sixth assembly of the International
Radio Consultative Committee (Coir) of the In-
ternational Telecommunication Union is to be
held at Geneva, June 5-July 6, 1951. The United
States Government will be represented at the sixth
assembly by the following delegation:

Cliairnian

Harvey B. Otterman, Associate Chief, Telecommuulca-
tions Policy Staff

Vice Chairmen

Newbern Smith, Ph.D., D.Sc, Chief, Central Radio Propa-
gation Laboratory, National Bureau of Standards,
Department of Commerce

George Turner, Chief, Field Engineering and Monitoring
Division, Engineering Department, Federal Communi-
cations Commission

Members of Delegation

Edward W. Allen, Jr., Technical Information D-ivislon,
Federal Communications Commission

Dana K. Bailey, Consultant to Chief, Central Radio
Propagation Laboratory, National Bureau of Stand-
ards, Department of Commerce

Edwin W. Bemis, Department of Operation and Engineer-
ing, American Telephone and Telegraph Company,
New York, N. Y.

Warren B. Burgess, Electronics Scientist, Radio Tech-
niques Branch of Radio Division Two, Naval Research
Laboratory, Department of the Navy

John B. Coleman, RCA Victor Division, Radio Corpora-
tion of America, Camden, N. J.

William Q. Crichlow, Radio Engineer, Central Radio
Propagation Laboratory, National Bureau of Stand-
ards, Department of Commerce

J. Howard Dellinger, Ph. D., RCA Frequency Bureau,
Radio Corporation of America, Washington, D. C.

Donald G. Fink, Editor, Electronics Magazine, McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company, New York, N. Y.

William D. George, Chief, High Frequency Standards Sec-
tion, Central Radio Propagation Laboratory, National
Bureau of Standards, Department of Commerce

Maj. Earl J. Holliman, USA, Assistant Chief, Communi-
cations Liaison Branch, Office of the Chief Signal
Officer, Department of the Army

Wayne Mason, Telecommunications Attach^, American
Legation, Bern, Resident at Geneva

Cornelius G. Mayer, European Technical Representative,
Radio Corporation of America, London, Eng.

Neal McNaughten, Director of Engineering, National Asso-
ciation of Broadcasters, Washington, D. C.

William F. Minners, Marine Radio and Safety Division,
Federal Communications Commission

Haraden Pratt, Vice President, American Cable and Radio
Corporation, New York, N. Y.

Charles C. Taylor, Member of the Technical Staff, Bell
Telephone Laboratories, New York, N. Y.

Florence A. Trail, Assistant to Associate Chief, Telecom-
munications Policy Staff

Administrative Secretary

Thomas M. Wittstock, Division of International Con-
ferences

The CciR was established through the action of
the International Radiotelegraph Conference held
at Washington, October 5-November 25, 1927. As
a permanent organ of the International Tele-
communication Union, the Ccui was directed in
the International Telecommunication Convention
of October 2, 1947 "to study technical radio ques-
tions and operating questions the solution of which
depends principally on considerations of a tech-
nical radio character and to issue recommendations
on them."

At the sixth assembly, the Ccir will consider the
results of the work of 13 international study
groups on such technical matters and, on the basis
of that consideration, draw up recommendations
as provided by the International Telecommunica-
tion Convention. Representatives of the United
States Government have participated actively in
the work of each of the 13 groups.

The Ccir was confronted, when its fifth assem-
bly convened at Stockliolm, Sweden, on July 12,
1948, with the need for developing new bases for
carrying on its work. During the 11 years which
had elapsed since the fourth assembly, and in par-
ticular as a result of the emergency needs of World
War II, many radio services had been dislocated;
radio practices had been altered or rendered ob-
solete; and tremendous technical advances had
been made in the field of radio. As efficient use of
the limited spectrum space was imperative, and as
such use was dependent upon the continued study
and development of new facilities and methods of
operation, the fifth assembly formulated 33 recom-
mendations and 37 questions for study and set up
13 international study groups to examine some of
the outstanding problems before the convening of
the sixth assembly.

The topics assigned to the international study
groups were: (1) radio transmitters; (2) radio
receivers; (3) complete radio systems employed
by different services; (4) ground wave propaga-
tion; (5) tropospherio propagation; (6) iono-
spheric propagation; (7) radio time signals and
standard frequencies; (8) monitoring; (9) gen-
eral technical questions; (10) broadcasting, in-
cluding questions relating to single sideband ; ( 11 )
television, including questions relating to single
sideband; (12) tropical broadcasting; and (13)
operation questions depending principally on tech-
nical considerations.

To assist in the preparation of Ccir studies, the
Department of State established a national pre-
paratory committee early in 1949. That prepara-
tory committee in turn established committees,
corresponding to the various Ccir study groups, to
study the assigned questions. The membership
of these national committees was broadly repre-
sentative of both government and private organi-
zations concerned with radio matters.

June I J, J95?

957

The United States in the United Nations

[June 1-8, 1951]

Trusteeship Council

The ninth session of the Trusteeship Council
convened on June 5 at United Nations head-
quarters. The members comprise: Argentina,
Australia, Belgium, China, Dominican Republic,
France, Iraq, New Zealand, Thailand, United
Kingdom, U.S.S.R., and the United States. In
addition, the Council welcomed a representative
from Italy, Gastone Guidotti, to participate in its
work as a nonvoting member. Francis B. Sayre
is the United States representative.

Sir Alan Burns (U. K.) was elected President
and Awni Khalidy (Iraq), Vice President.

Among the items on the adopted 15-point
agenda are :

1. Examination of the following annual reports
of administering authorities on the administra-
tion of trust territories: (a) First report on
Somaliland under Italian administration, April-
December 1950; (b) Tanganyika, for the years
1949 and 1950; (c) Euanda-Urundi, 1949-50;
(d) Cameroons under British administration,
1949-50; (e) Cameroons under French adminis-
tration, 1949-50; (f) Togoland under British
administration, 1949-50; (g) Togoland under
French administration, 1949-50.

2. Examination of petitions. The Councilwill
examine more than 100 petitions received from
individuals and organizations in the various trust
territories.

3. Arrangements for the United Nations visit-
ing mission to trust territories in East Africa
(1951).

4. Organization and methods of functioning of
visiting missions: revised report of the Com-
mittee on Visiting Missions.

5. Rural economic development of the trust
tein-itorics.

6. The Ewe problem.

7. Higher education in the trust territories in
Africa.

8. Administrative unions affecting trust terri-
tories.

9. Adoption of the report of the Trusteeship
Council to the General Assembly covering the
third special session and the eighth and ninth
sessions.

In reply to the U.S.S.R. motion to seat a rep-
resentative of the People's Republic of China in
place of the Chinese Nationalist representative,
Ambassador Sayre proposed that the Council
postpone discussion of this question indefinitely.
He said that the opposition of the United States
to the U.S.S.R. motion had been made clear "time
and again." Now he wished to reaffirm the view
of his Government that it was out of the question
to discuss the issue in an organ of the United Na-
tions while the Chinese Communist regime was
"at the very moment" engaged in aggression
against the United Nations and while it was seek-
ing to destroy United Nations troops in Korea.
The United States proposal was adopted by a
vote of 11-1 (U.S.S.R.)-O.

The Council, at the suggestion of the President,
approved the appointment of the following six
members to serve as the ad hoc Committee on
Petitions: Argentina, Belgium, New Zealand,
Thailand, U.S.S.R., and the United States. This
Committee will not examine petitions relating to
the Ewe problem.

The Council approved the membership of the
East African Visiting Mission: Dominican Re-
public, New Zealand, Thailand, and the United
States. Dr. Enrique de Marchena (Dominican
Republic) was appointed chairman of the mission.

A resolution was adopted (11-0-1, U.S.S.R)
concerning the revision of the provisional ques-
tionnaire, which was submitted in the second in-
terim report of the drafting committee. The
resolution requests those administering authori-
ties which have not yet submitted observations on
the revised questionnaire to do so by October 31,
1951, and extends the time limit for submission of
the conmiittee's final report until the beginning of
the Council's tenth session.

The present session is expected to last tlirough
July 31, 1951.

Specialized Agencies

International Labor Organization {ILO). —
The 34th annual session of the Ilo Conference
opened June 0 at Geneva. The agenda inoUules
the following items:

1. The annual report of the Director-General,
David A. Morse. In the foreword to this report
Mr. Morse states:

958

Department of State Bulletin

We need an open world. We need a wide understand-
ing between all people, the meeting of man with man, of
mind with rainil. No barrier shiiuUi exist to the free
movement of people and of ideas. Without an oiien world
we shall never be free from suspicion and fear, we shall
never move toward a society of prosperity and peace.

His report proposes that particular attention
be paid to the issue of wage policies to avoid
inflation.

2. The Governing Body of the International
Labor Office at its 115th session, wliich began on
May 28, proposed the sum of $6,196,922 for the
1952 budget for the Organization. This exceeds
the 1951 budget by $223,133 and must be approved
by the Conference.

3. Information and reports on the application
of conventions and recommendations.

4. Objectives and minimum standards of social
security. The Ilo Conference will examine a
total of nine types of social security benefits, in-
cluding medical, unemployment, old-age, family,
invalidity and survivors' benefits.

5. Industrial relations, including collective
agreements and voluntary conciliation and arbi-
tration. Two recommendations are before the
Conference for consideration — one on collective
agreements and one on conciliation and arbitra-
tion.

6. Regulations to set up international standards
of labor-management-government cooperation.
The Ilo has received replies from 32 countries to
a questionnaire sent out to all members on this
subject.

7. Equal remuneration for men and women
workers for work of equal value.

8. Minimum wage-fixing machinery in agricul-
ture. A proposed convention would require gov-
ernments to create or maintain machinery for the
fixing of minimiun wages in agriculture and
related occupations.

0. Holidays with pay in agriculture. The dele-
gates will discuss whether a convention or a
recommendation on paid vacations for farm
workers should be presented to next year's
Conference.

The Conference will consider requests from the
German Federal Republic and Japan for aclmis-
pion to membership in the International Labor
Organization.

World Health Organisation {'WnO).—1h.Q
Who Executive Board opened its eighth session
at Geneva on June 1. The Board is composed of
a technical, nonpolitical body of 18-member na-
tions elected for 3-year terms by the Who As-
sembly. It gives effect to the decisions and poli-
cies of the Assembly. The present elected
countries represented are Belgium, Ceylon, Chile,
Cuba, El Salvador, France, Greece, Italy, Leba-
non, Libera, Pakistan, Philippines, Sweden, Thai-
land, Turkey, the United Kingdom, the United
States, and Venezuela.

Prof. Jacques Parisot, Dean of the Medical
Faculty at Nancy University, France, was elected

chairman; A. L. Bravo (Chile) and J. N. Togba
(Liberia) vice chairmen; W. A. Karunaratne
(Ceylon) and Nail Karabuda (Turkey) rappor-
teurs. H. van Zile Hyde is the United States
representative.

The agenda includes (1) business arising from
decisions of the recent Woi-ld Health Assembly,
including those on sanitary regulations for world
travel and traffic, technical assistance, and finan-
cial problems; (2) review of reports of Who ex-
pert committees, including those on alcoholism
and nutrition which, if approved, will be released
for publication; (3) consideration of applications
from various nongovernmental organizations for
official relations with Who.

U.S. Armed Forces Elements for U.N.

The foUowirifi is the text of a letter transmitted to
Sccrctary-Oeticral Trygve Lie bii Ambassador Ernest A.
Gross, actiwj United States representative.

I have the honor to refer to paragraph 9 of Resolution
377 (V), adopted by the General Assembly on 3 Novem-
ber IO.jO, and in accordance therewith to request you to
advise the Collective Measures Committee of the meas-
ures taken by my Government in implementation of
paragraph 8 of that Resolution.

1. At the present time, elements of the National Armed
Forces of the United States are serving under the Unified
Command in Korea pursuant to the recommendations of
the Security Council and the General Assembly. A gen-
eral description of these elements as now constituted
follows :

Ground Forces : Three Army Corps and one Marine Di-
vision, with supporting elements.

Naval Forces : A fast Carrier Task Group with a block-
ade and escort force, an amphibious force, reconnaissance
and antisubmarine warfare units, and supporting ships.

Air Forces : One Tactical Air Force, one Bombardment
Command, and one Combat Cargo Command, all with
supporting elements.

The United States Government regards the maintenance
of these forces as fulfillment at this time of the purposes
of the recommendations of the General Assembly in the
Uniting for Peace Resolution. After termination of
hostilities in Korea and after the United States Armed
Forces now opposing aggression in Korea have been with-
drawn, the extent to which the United States will main-
tain armed forces which could be made available for
United Nations service will be reviewed.

2. The United States is maintaining elements of its
National Armed Forces in Europe, shortly to include the
equivalent of six Army Divisions, and Naval and Air
Force elements, in furtherance of the North Atlantic
Treaty and as a part of the efforts of the parties to the
Treaty for Collective Defense and for the preservation
of Peace and Security. The Treaty by its terms comes
within the framework of the Charter of the United Na-
tions, and the United States Forces maintained in further-
ance of the Treaty could, in appropriate circumstances,
pursuant to the Treaty and the Charter and in accordance
with due constitutional process, participate in collective
military measures to maintain or restore Peace and
Security in the North Atlantic Area in support of United
Nations action.

3. The United States will continue to keep this matter
under constant review in the light of changing circum-
stances and in furtherance of the policy, of the United
Nations to build up an effective collective security system.

Accept [etc.].

June n, 1951

959

June 11, 1951

Index

Vol. XXIV No. 623

947
945

934

950

948
950
923

946

927

American Republics

Economic Commission for Latin America Meets . 955
ECUADOR: President (Galo Plaza) Visits U.S. . 947
Arms and Armed Forces

Collective Security (Webb) 927

Decisions for American Citizens (Truman) . . 931

Asia

CHINA: Communist-Detained Americans De-
nied Communication

IRAN: Point 4 Sends DDT for Malaria Control .
JAPAN: Peace Treaty: Ambassador Dulles To

Visit England and France

KOREA:

Relief Program, U.N. Contributions ....
U.N. Command Operations, 20th Report (Apr.

16-30, 1951)

PALESTINE: Relief Program Contributions . .

U.S. Policy (Acheson, Cong, testimony) . . .

VOA Programs to South Asia Inaugurated Under

Ceylon Agreement

Canada

Partnership for Peace (Webb before Klwanls
Club, Montreal)

Communism

Challenge of Today (Dulles at Univ. of Arizona) .
Chinese-Detained Americans Denied Rights . .

Decisions for Americans (Truman)

Partnership for Peace (Webb)

Radio Moscow Increases Propaganda Output . .

Congress

CORRESPONDENCE: U.S. Policy In Germany
(McCioy Letter to Javlts)

Legislation Listed

Peace or War and the Survival of Human Free-
dom (Acheson, Cong, testimony) ....

Europe

Baltic-Language Programs Inaugurated by VOA .
CZECHOSLOVAKIA: American Passports Not

Valid

DENMARK: Defense Agreement Signed With U.S
ENGLAND: Ambassador Dulles To Visit . . .
FRANCE: Ambassador Dulles To Visit . . .
GERMANY:

Monthly Economic Review

U.S. Policy (McCloy Letter to Javlts) . .
GREECE: American Farm School Signs Point 4
U.S.S.R.:

Radio Moscow Increases Foreign Propaganda

U.S. Invitation to CFM Meeting. Text . .

VOA Georgian-Language Program . . .

Fisheries

Northwest Atlantic Fisheries Commission . . .

Foreign Service

Passports: American Travel Prohibited in

935
947
931
927
946

940
926

923

947

932
943
934
934

937
940
942

946
933
946

954

932
932

Czechoslovakia

Point 4 Technicians Complete Training . . .

Health

DDT to Iran for Malaria Control 945

Military Medicine and Pharmacy Congress . . 956

Industry

German Federal Republic's Monthly Review . . 937
Information and Educational Exchange Program

VOA:

Appointment (Swing) to Staff 947

Programs Inaugurated: Baltic; Georgian-
Language; South Asia 946, 947

International Meetings

Northwest Atlantic Fisheries Report .... 954
Council of Foreign Ministers: Proposed Meeting,

U.S. Invitation to U.S.S.R., Text 933

IRO: General Council, Report on 7th Session . 952

U.S. Delegations:

Economic Commission for Latin America . . 955

ILO Governing Body 956

Military Medicine and Pharmacy 956

Radio Consultative Committee 957

Labor

German Federal Republic's Monthly Review . . 937

ILO Governing Body, 115th Session 956

Mutual Aid and Defense

Decisions for American Citizens (Truman) . . 931

Partnership for Peace (Webb) 927

North Atlantic Treaty Organization

Defense Agreement, Denmark-U.S., Text . . . 943
Protection of U.S. Nationals and Property

Chinese Communist-Detained Americans De-
nied Communication 947

Refugees and Displaced Persons

Korean and Palestine Relief Programs, Current

Status of U.N. Contributions 950

Resettlement and Protection of Refugees, 7th

Session Report of lEO (Warren) .... 952

UNICEF: Care of Handicapped Children ... 953

Taxation

Decisions for American Citizens (Truman be-
fore Natl. Conference on Citizenship) . . . 931

Technical Cooperation and Development

Point 4:

American Farm School in Greece 942

DDT Sent to Iran for Malaria Control . . . 945

Telecommunications

Radio Consultative Committee, 6th Assembly . 957
Trade

GATT:

Certain U.S. Tariff Rates Increased .... 934

Germany's Accession 937

Treaties and Other International Agreements

CEYLON: VOA Agreement for South Asia . . . 946
GREECE: American Farm School Signs Point 4 . 942
GREENLAND: U.S.-Denmark Defense Agree-
ment, Text 943

JAPAN: Peace Treaty, Ambassador Dulles Visits

England and France 934

United Nations

Korean and Palestine Relief Programs, Current

Status of Contributions 950

Stamp Designs Selected 949

U.N. Command Operations in Korea, 20th Re-
port (Apr. 16-30. 1951) 948

UNICEF: Care of Handicapped Children . . . 953

U.S. In U.N. (Weekly Summary) 958

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 923

Anderson, Eugenie 945

Armstrong, Maj. Gen. Harry G 956

Austen, Warren R 948

Bennett, Henry G 942, 945

Bohan, Merwin L 955

Castleman, Edward 954

Dulles, John Foster 934,935

Javits, J. K 940

Kaiser, Philip M 956

Kraft. Ole BJurn 945

Lie, Trygve 949, 950

McCloy, John J 940

Otterman, Harvey B 957

Plaza, Galo 947

Swing, Raymond 947

Ti-uman, President Harry S 931

Warren, George L 952

Webb, James E 927

U. S. COVERNMENT PRINTINS OFFICCi 1911

^ne/ z2)eh€(/)^i^'y}^eni/ ^ t/taie^

AMERICAN POLICY TOWARD CHINA • Statenteivt by

Secretary Acheson ...•••••••••• 963

LATIN AMERICA'S ROLE IN THINKING AHEAD FOR

BUSINESS • by Assistant Secretary Miller ..... 975
ORGANIZING FOR PEACE • by Thomas D. Cabot . . 980

For index see back cover

^^V.fT O*,

0. s. <;mperintenden

OUl- «-> '"'«'*

^."» o.

%//ie -l^efut/yi^eivt /o^ C/Ca(e VJ W 1 1 \D LIU

Vol, XXIV, No. 625 • Publication 4258
June 18, 1951

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U. S. Oovernment Printing Office

Wasliington 25, D. C.

Price:

52 issues, domestic 7.50, foreign $10.25

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

IVote: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Department
or State Bxilletin as the .source will be
appreciated.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a weekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developmen ts in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the tThite House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as tcell as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluiled concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of tlie Department, as
well as legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

American Policy Toward China

Statement hy Secretary Acheson ^

Chairman Russell. The Committee will be in
order.

Mr. Secretary, you may proceed in your own
way.

Secretary Acheson. Thank you, Mr. Chairman.

Gentlemen, I will take advantage of the kind-
ness of the Committee in permitting me to make
a somewhat extended statement on Unit«d States
policy in regard to China.

I should like to state at the outset what I am
going to try to do, and that is I want to present
to the Committee the problem which confronted
the United States and China in 19-15 ; and in doing
that I shall have to give some of its roots in history.

I should like to point out what the times of
decision were. There were moments in this period
from 1945 on, moments of decision, and I should
like to point out those moments. I should like to
point out the considerations which were taken
under advisement when decisions were made, and
I should like to say what the decisions were and
how they were made.

One further preliminary observation I think is
important, and that is that American aid cannot
in itself insure the survival of a recipient govern-
ment or the survival of a people that this Govern-
ment is trying to help against aggression.

What our aid must do and can do is to supple-
ment the efforts of that recipient government and
of that people itself. It cannot be a substitute for
those efforts. It can only be an aid and a supple-
ment to them.

The United States Government, in aiding an-
other government, does not have power of decision
■within that country or within that government.
That power of decision remains with the govern-

' Made on June 4 before the Senate Armed Services and
the Foreign Relations Committees and released to the
press on that date. Part 1 of the hearings on the mili-
tary situation in the Far East covering May 3, 4, 5, 7, 8,
9, 10, 11, 12, and 14 has been printed. Also printed as
Department of State publication 4257^ for sale at Super-
intendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington 25, D.C. for 20^.

ment, the people in it. Those are thoughts I think
we should have in mind.

Our Relations With China in 1945

With those preliminary statements, we come to
the problem which faced the Chinese and American
Governments in 1945.

The Japanese had been defeated. The Chinese
Government was in the extreme southwestern jDart
of China. The task which had to be solved by the
Chinese Government was, in effect, how to create
a nation, and how to have the authority of the
Chinese Government exercised throughout that
nation.

Now, I do not say recreate a nation; I say, ad-
visedly, create a nation; because for almost an
indefinite period in the past there had not been in
our sense, a nation in the territory which we call
China, and I will come to and explain to you why
that is so, a nation in the sense of a government
in control throughout that area.

Therefore, the question which had to be faced
was how to create that nation and how to create
the authority of the nation in that area.

Senator Wiley. Wlio was Secretary of State
then at that time ?

Secretary Acheson. The Secretary of State at
that time was Mr. Byrnes. Mr. Stettinius was
Secretary until the middle of — until the spring of
1945 — and Mr. Byrnes became Secretary then.

The Chinese Government that we are talking
about — the Nationalist Government — had not had
authority — indeed, no Chinese Government had
had authority, by which I mean substantial
authority — throughout China since the period of
the Manchus.

Here is the picture which confronted everybody
at the time I am talking about. The great north-
ern area of China, Manchuria, was occupied by
the Soviet Union, with its own armed forces. In
the second place, the north central and southeast
parts of China were in the control of the Com-
munists and the Japanese.

June 18, 1 95 1

963

I say both the Conimunists and the Japanese
because the Japanese held the cities and the major
lines of communication ; whereas, the surrounding
areas were occupied by the Communists.

That part of China included what we call North
China, swinging down through central China, on
to the southeast and coming quite far south and
southeast in China.

The south central and southern part of China
was occupied by the Japanese, who had troops
along the coast and for considerable areas inland
and the government itself was, as I said before, in
the extreme southwestern part of China.

Another important fact, which must never be
lost sight of in our consideration, is that, in addi-
tion to these facts as to who actually occupied and
exercised authority in certain parts of China, all
of China was in the gi'ip of a very profound social
revolution.

Senator Smith. Might I ask just one question to
get my dates right ?

I wanted to ask the Secretary whether this was
prior to the Yalta conference, or afterwards ?

Yalta was in February, '45, and this period you
are speaking of was subsequent?

Secretary A cJieson. I am talking about V J-Day,
about the problem which faced us at the end of
the war.

Senator Smith. Thank you.

Secretary Acheson. General MacArthur has
spoken to you about the depth and strength of this
social revolution.

It grew out of a similar experience in almost all
wars, that as the governments concerned have to
make tremendous efforts, as, in some areas, the con-
trols of government become weakened and prom-
ises are made, people move forward in social
economic ways; at least they move forward in
acquiring new social and economic rights; and this
was going on in China, in the age-long battle be-
tween the peasants and the landlords.

The peasants had made advances and there was
a new idea of profound importance.

Communist Control in China

If I may speak briefly, on the general area of
Communist control :

The Communists conti'olled an area containing
116 million people, which was one-fourth of the
population of China. The geographical area was
15 percent of the country we call China, exclusive
of Manchuria.

This area included in it some of the most heavily
populated areas of China, the area which had most
of the railway communications, important indus-
trial developments, and important cities.

Now, let us take a look at Manchuria.

ManchuT'ia, except in a wholly nominal way,
and then only for a period of 2 or 3 years, part
of '28, '29, '30 and part of '31, had never been
in any way under the control of the present Na-

tionalist government of China ; and, until his death
in 1927 or '28, the old Marshal had been the war
lord of Manchuria, and controlled it absolutely.

Upon his death, the young Marshal took over
his authority, and in 1928 after Chiang Kai-shek
had taken Peking and defeated the Communists
and the northern war lords, the young Marshal an-
nounced his adherence to the National Govern-
ment. That was a pretty nominal adlierence.

It meant that he recognized the government of
Chiang Kai-shek as the National Government
of China, but the administration in Manchuria
did not change, and he continued to exei'cise the
authority.

However, that authority continued for a very
short period of time, and in 1931 the Japanese
invaded Manchuria and set up their puppet state,
and all Chinese authority disappeared from Man-
churia. I mention this to point out to you that
the National Government had no roots of any sort
in Manchuria, a very important thing for us to
remember.

When we come to North China, we find that in
1927 the struggle between the left wing of the
Kuomintang Party, which was established at Han-
kow, and the right wing of the party under Chiang
Kai-shek came to a head. The Chiang Kai-shek
forces won, the Russians, Borodin, who was then
advising the Government, had to flee from China,
and in 1928 Chiang Kai-shek moved into Peking
and there announced the official unification of
China. That was in 1928.

The battle with the Communists which began
in 1927 in open warfare continued until '36, and
in the period of '34 and '35 the Communists were
forced to make their long march from the south-
eastern portion of China to the northwestern por-
tion of China. There they established themselves
in the period '34-'35.

In the meantime, however, the Japanese who
were in Manchuria were moving into North China,
and in 1935 the Japanese undertook to set up
another puppet state in North China which would
comprise the five northern provinces of China;
and at that time they had sufficient physical con-
trol of the area to do that.

I point all of this out to make clear to you again
that in North China the authoritj' of Chiang
Kai-shek's government, which was established in
1928, had been in very large part eliminated by
1935, and instead of his government having power
in North China, that was in part controlled
through Japanese puppets, Japanese, and in part
was controlled by the Conimunists in the north-
west.

With this review then, let us just mention once
more the principal problems which confronted the
Chinese Government and confronted the Ameri-
can Government in its efforts to help the Chinese
Government.

These were: The Soviets in Manchuria, the
Japanese and the Chinese struggling against one

964

Department of State Bulletin

another to control a vast area in northwest, north
centi'al and southeast China — tlie Communists I
have ah-eady mentioned — and at the same time
this great problem of the I'evolution in thought
and in social relationships which was going on
throughout all China.

So the first period of decision, the first time after
the war when important decisions were made and
had to be made, was the period 1945 and 1940.
Now, I do not mean for a moment that important
decisions were not made before and after, but that
was the first great moment of decision.

Recommendations of General
Wedemeyer's Report

The situation was stated in a nutshell by Gen-
eral Wedemeyer in November 1945 very shortly
after VJ-Day, and I should like to read, not very
much, but I should like to read from General
Wedemeyer's report in November 1945.

He says :

Chinese Communist guerrillas and .saboteurs can, and
probably will, if present activities are a reliable indication,
restrict and harass the movements of National Covern-
ment forces to such an extent that the result will be a
costly and extended campaifoi. Logistical support for the
National Government forces, and measures for their se-
curity in the heart of Manchuria have not been fully
appreciated by the Generalissimo or his Chinese staff.
These facts, plus the lack of appropriate forces and trans-
port, have caused me to advise the Generalissimo that he
should concentrate his efforts on the recovery of North
China and the consolidation of his military and political
position there, prior to any attempt to occupy Manchuria.
I received the impression that he agreed with this concept.

Now, General Wedemeyer has five conclusions to
this report of 1945 :

1. That the Generalissimo will be able to stabi-
lize the situation in South China, provided he
accepts the assistance of foreign administrators
and technicians, and engages in political, economic,
and social reforms through honest, competent
civilian officials.

2. He will be unable to stabilize the situation in
North China for months, and perhaps, even years,
unless a satisfactory settlement with the Chinese
Comnumists is achieved, and followed up realis-
tically by the kind of action suggested in para-
graph one — that is the paragraph which has just
been talked about, the political, economic, and
social reforms.

3. He will be unable to occupy Manchuria for
many years unless satisfactory agreements are
reached with Russia and the Chinese Communists.

4. Russia is in effect creating favorable condi-
tions for the realization of Chinese Communist,
and possibly their own plans, in North China and
Manchuria. These activities are violations of the
recent Sino-Soviet treaty and related agi'eements.

5. It appears remote that a satisfactory under-
standing will be reached between Chinese Com-
munists and the National Government.

Now, in short, what General Wedemeyer re-
ported and advised was, first of all, that the
Generalissimo must consolidate his own position
in South China and to do that he must take into
consideration this revolution that I have been talk-
ing about. And General Wedemeyer stressed
then — and you will see over and over again he
stresses — the same point, that there must be po-
litical, economic, and social reforms in order that
tiie Chinese Government might put itself at the
head of this great demand for improvement, which
was existing in China, and not allow the Com-
munists or anybody else to take that advantage
away from them.

In the second place, he points out that to estab-
lish himself in North China he must come to
agreement with the Communists.

In the tliird place, lie points out the only way
to establish himself in Manchuria is through agree-
ment with the Russians.

He ends up by saying that the outlook on all of
these fronts is dark, and he points out that force
is not available to accomplish these efforts, partly
because force cannot accomplish some of them,
and secondly, because there is not enough force
available to take on the problems which I have
already mentioned.

Three Choices Open to United States

Now, in that situation the United States Gov-
ernment had three choices open to it.

One choice was to pull out of China and say,
"We have defeated the Japanese. The Chinese
from now on must paddle their own canoe, and we
have to wash our hands of it." That was an im-
possible choice to take because with the presence
of 1,235,000 armed Japanese troops in China, ex-
clusive of Manchuria, and of another 1,700,000
Japanese civilians — government officials, economic
people, clerks, and businessmen, one thing or an-
other— there was a Japanese force and a Japanese
influence so great in China that by throwing its
weight to either side in this civil war it could have
taken over the administration of the country, and
Japan in defeat would have found itself in actual
control of China, a result wliich we could not, of
course, help to bring about.

The second choice was that the United States
Government might have put into China unlimited
resources and all the necessary military power to
try and defeat the Communists, remove the Jap-
anese, and remove the Russians from Manchuria.

That was a task so great and so repugnant to
the American people that the Government could
not undertake it, and it was one which was not in
accord with American interests.

The third choice, and the one which was chosen,
was to give important assistance of all sorts to the
Chinese Government and to assist in every way in
the preservation of peace in China and the work-
ing out of the agreements which were so necessary

June 18, 1 957

965

to enable the Chinese Government to reestablish
itself in those parts of China where it had been
before and to get, for the first time, into areas of
China where it never had been.

Now, I should like briefly to talk about the Chi-
nese Communist situation and the background of
that as it existed in 1945, and then I will take up
each of the other elements of this problem.

The relations between the Nationalist Govern-
ment and the Communists have had a long history
in China. I shall not take time to go through it
all.

Prior to 1927, there was a period of collabora-
tion. From 1927 to 1937 there was a period of
war. From 1937 onward there was again a period
in which the official attitude of both the Govern-
ment and the Communists was that the differences
between them were political in nature, had to be
settled by political means ; beginning in 1937 they
worked out arrangements for collaboration in
fighting the Japanese, which never were very
effective, but were agreements between them.

Later on, as you will see, they began working
very vigorously at arrangements to bring. about a
settlement by negotiation in China. This official
view was stated by the Generalissimo on Septem-
ber 13, 1943, where he said — and this is one of
many times when he said this from 1937 on —

I am of the opinion that first of all we should clearly
recognize that the Chinese Communist problem is a purely
political problem and should be solved by political means.

As I said, there was an agreement reached be-
tween them in 1937 for their joint efforts against
the Japanese. That agreement did not work, and
reports were made over and over again that a very
large part of the Communist armed forces and a
very large part of the Nationalist armed forces
were immobilized so far as the war against Japan
was concerned because they stood facing one an-
other and maneuvering against one another.

It was tlie effort of our Government througliout
the war period to try and reach some kind of an
arrangement so that these two forces instead of
watching one another would both fight the Japa-
nese. In they did that, there was a very important
contribution to the war.

I will not go into all the efforts that were made
by General Stillwell and others in the early period.

In the spring of 1944 Vice President Wallace
went on a mission for President Koosevelt.
Among other places, he went to China, and there
he had talks with the Generalissimo, and they
talked about two of the great important problems
that I have been discussing. One was Manchuria
and the other was the Communists.

The Generalissimo was most anxious to get
help of the United States in improving relations,
as ho stated it, between China and the Soviet
Union, because, without that improvement, the
prosiXMls for Cliina wore very difficult indeed.
Tlioy discussed what could be done along that line.

They also discussed the Communist problem,

and the Generalissimo pointed out vigorously that
the Communists were, as he stated it, not people of
good faith, claimed that they were not Chinese,
that they had their interests with an alien power.
But, nevertheless, he said.

This is a political problem and we have got to settle
it by political means.

He stated that he would not regard any help
from the United States, in attempting that, to be
meddling into the internal affairs of China, and he
would be grateful for help.

And finally, before Vice President Wallace left
China, he reversed the position which he had taken
earlier in which he had opposed any American
military people having any relations with the
Communists, and withdrew his objection to that.

The Hurley Mission

Now in the fall of 1944 and after these discus-
sions, the President sent another personal repre-
sentative to China, and that was General Hurley.
General Hurley was not then ambassador. He
became ambassador in the early part of '45, but
he went out as the personal representative of the
President in order to try and unify this military
effort, and there, with the consent and approval of
the Generalissimo and of his cabinet, he under-
took to act as mediator between the Yenan Com-
munist authorities and the Chungking Nationalist
authorities, and they had meetings, some in Yenan
at which General Hurley was present, some in
Chungking in which they worked out a series of
agreements.

Some of these agreements had to do with the
conduct of the war, and then some of them went
beyond that, and a very important and basic agree-
ment was worked out.

The beginning of it was under the mediation of
General Hurley. It was announced on October
11, 1945, and that was the agreement on the gen-
eral principles of a peaceful settlement of the
differences between the Chinese Communists and
the Chinese Nationalists.

It was announced after General Hurley's de-
parture from China and was made public, as I
said, on October 11. This called for the convening
of the National Assembly and for a political con-
sultative conference of all party and nonparty
leaders.

It called for the inauguration of a constitutional
government for all of China ; for the formation of
a committee of government and Communist repre-
sentatives to discuss the reorganization of the
armies and the reduction of all the armed forces in
China.

Now, those agreements were of the greatest pos-
sible importance, and they established the basis
for the efforts which General Marshall later took

on.

May I just pause again for a moment to point

966

Department of Stale Bulletin

out that the problem between the Chinese Govern-
ment and the Cliinese Communists differed in one
important respect from the relations between —
from the problems of governments, say, in Europe
after the war with Communists in their country,
because in China the Communists were not scat-
tered through the population as an element of the
population. They were people who had a defined
area, with a large population subject to their con-
trol, 116 million.

They had a government of their own ; they had
any army of their own ; and, in effect, they had a
separate country within China, and the task was
to put these two things together so that there
would be one country and one government. Now,
that was what they were working on.

Senator Saltonstall. Mr. Secretary, I hate to
interrupt, but you said October 11, 1945.

Secretary Acheson. 1945.

Senator Saltonstall. You meant that? That
was a year after Hurley was there then?

Secretary Acheson. No; Mr. Hurley left in
1945 ; he left just before this.

Senator Saltonstall. Oh !

Secretary Acheson. Yes, sir.

Senator Wiley. Wlio signed those agreements —
those agreements? You said they worked out
agreements. Who signed them ?

Secretary Acheson. They were agi'eements be-
tween the Chinese Government, the Nationalist
Government, and the Communist authorities at
Yenan.

Senator Wiley. They both signed it?

Secretary Acheson. Yes, sir.

Now, I have dealt with the background of this
Communist business, and I am coming back to
that, when we get to the mission of General Mar-
shall.

I now want to go back and deal with a problem
that has to do with another important aspect of
this thing, and that is, Manchuria.

The Yalta Agreements

I want to talk about Yalta.

The Yalta agreements were made in the very
early part of 1945. Later on, in August of '45,
treaties were signed between the Chinese National-
ist Government, and the Soviet Union, which grew
out of and were based upon these Yalta agree-
ments.

Now, first of all, the Yalta agreements, from the
point of view of the wartime effort and the interest
of the United States and its major fighting allies —
I think this has been referred to many times and I
shall make it brief — at the time these agreements
were entered into at Yalta, we did not know
whether we had an atomic bomb or not. That was
not proved until some months later, that we had
one, and it was not used until considerably later.

It was the then military opinion, concurred in
by everyone, that the reduction of Japan would

have to be brought about by a large-scale landing
on the islands of Japan, and the forecast of that
fighting, which came from the fighting on the
other islands in the Pacific, indicat«cl that it would
be a very bloody and terrible battle.

It was of the utmost importance that the Rus-
sians should come into the war in the Far East, in
time.

Now, there was very little doubt that they would
come in, but the grave danger was that they would
really wait until the war was over and until we had
expended our effort and blood to win the war, and
they would come in and do what they wished.

It was very important, in the view of the mili-
tary people, and the others, too, present, that they
should come in in time, so that none of the 700,000
Japanese troops in Manchuria, and none, if possi-
ble, of the 1,235,000 Japanese troops in China,
would come back to strengthen the troops on the
main islands of Japan; but that they would be
occupied with the Russian effort on the mainland.

That was the purpose, and in making the agree-
ments, the price which was paid for the agreements
was that 3 months after the end of the European
war, the Russians would enter the Far East war;
that they should have the southern half of Sak-
halin, the Kuriles; that their former rights in
Port Arthur and Dairen should be returned to
them; and their former interest in the two rail-
ways in Manchuria.

The Russians took the same attitude toward
these rights that the Chinese took toward their
rights in Formosa.

The Russians had lost theirs to the Japanese by
war in 1904; the Chinese had lost theirs to the
Japanese by war in 1895.

Russia made its claim for those rights, and the
claims were granted at this meeting at Yalta.

Senator Hickenlooper. Would the Secretary
mind an interruption at this point?

Chairman Russell. He stated that he preferred
not to be —

Secretary Acheson. If I could get through, first.

Chairman Rmsell. Wliat is your preference in
the matter, Mr. Secretary ?

Secretai-y Acheson. I would very much appre-
ciate it if I could make my statement first, because
I might get badly off, if I got into side discussions.

It is hard to keep so much material in one's
mind.

One of the other things that I should like to
point out about Yalta was that unquestionably the
Russians had it in their power not only to take
what was conceded to them, but much more,
besides.

There was very little likelihood that anybody
would have the will, and few people could have
the power, to throw them out of any area on the
mainland which they might occupy, and where
they might wish to remain, so that this agreement
gave them the basis for a legal claim to some-

June J8, J95I

967

thing considerably less than they might have taken
without a legal claim.

I should also like to point out that at the time
the Chinese entered into this treaty with the
Eussians, a few months after Yalta, that is, in
August 1945, they regarded the arrangements
which they had made with the Kussians on the
basis of Yalta, as very satisfactory.

Such statements were expressed by the Gener-
alissimo, Chiang Kai-shek, and by the Chinese
Foreign Minister. In fact, in 1947 the Chinese
Foreign Minister expressed grave apprehension
that the Soviet Union might cancel the treaty with
China of 1945, in which China had conferred these
rights to the bases in Port Arthur, the interests in
Dairen, and the interest in the railway.

They regarded that as a very valuable treaty
because it also carried with it the obligation of the
Russians to evacuate Manchuria, to recognize the
Chinese Nationalist Government, and to aid in the
reestablishment of Chinese sovereignty in Man-
churia.

Now these agreements, as I shall point out later
on, did have a very important effect and bearing
when it came to the question of the reoccupation
of Manchuria by the Chinese, because it was on
the basis of these agreements that both the Chinese
Communists and the Russians agreed to occupation
by the National Government's forces.

Now may I speak briefly about the problem of
the Japanese, and here I shall have to get a little
bit out of the chronological order and perhaps
run this Japanese part through to its end.

I have pointed out to you the very great impor-
tance of the presence of the Japanese in China,
the 1,235,000 troops, 1,700,000 civilians. It was
decided very early in the game, between the Chi-
nese Government, the Nationalist Government and
ourselves, that one of our major efforts must be to
get these people out of China and back into Japan.

That wouldn't have been too hard a job to do if
they were all just marching on to ships. The
great difficulty about it was that these armed
soldiers controlled most of the important cities
in central China, in southeast China and east
China, and also the main lines of communication.

If they had been told to drop their guns on the
ground and march to the coast at once, those areas
would have been occupied by the Communists, and
the Nationalist Government forces would never
have gotten in there without fighting.

Therefore the task was to have the Japanese
evacuate the areas which they held at the time
when the Govermnent forces could be moved and
were moved by us into those areas. That was the
task to perform.

In order to do that we landed 50,000 Marines
in China. The function of these Marines was to
occupy the principal seaports, to guard the princi-
pal rail lines close to those seaports, and later to
take over the areas along the eastern coast where
coal was produced and guard the lines along which

the coal came to the principal consuming centers.
That was to allow the industrial life of China to
continue, and those coal areas and the coal rail-
roads were being constantly raided by the Com-
munists.

So the Marines had to go in there, hold coal,
which was the heart of the industrial life of China,
hold the seaports so that they would not be cap-
tured by Communists, and then receive the Japa-
nese as they were marched to the railheads and
down their railroads, and put them on ships and
take them back to Japan.

At the same time our armed forces airlifted Chi-
nese armies, whole armies, from South China into
the areas to be evacuated and which were being
evacuated by the Japanese. Now that was a tre-
mendous undertaking most skillfully carried out,
and it was that undertaking which permitted the
Chinese Government to really get back into areas
of China which it would have had the utmost diffi-
culty in even getting into without that colossal
effort.

By the end of '46 we had removed 3 million Jap-
anese, just a few thousand under 3 million, from
China to Japan — one of the great mass movements
of people.

After the agreements between the Chinese
Nationalists and the Chinese Communists that I
have spoken of in 1945, October 11, 1945, armed
clashes broke out again between the two parties;
and both the government authorities, the Chinese
Government authorities, and the American Gov-
ernment authorities, were gravely disturbed that
civil war would break out.

If that happened, then the whole chance of
dealing with any of the problems which you and
I have been discussing this morning would dis-
appear.

If there was civil war going on in China, fight-
ing between the Government forces and the Com-
munist forces, all possibility of removing the Jap-
anese either disappeared or was gravely dimin-
ished.

The possibility of occupying North China be-
came much dimmer ; the possibility of moving into
Manchuria became nonexistent; and the possi-
bility of really getting any reforms in South
China or any other part of China would be greatly
diminished. So, the peace became a ma]or ob-
jective of both the Chinese Government and the
United States Government in its efforts to help the
Chinese Government.

The Marshall Mission

It was in that situation that General Marshall
was asked by the President to go to China at the
end of 1945.

Senator Wiley. 1945?

Secretary Acfi<^son. At the end of 1945. He
went in December, arriving there early in January,
I believe, 1946.

968

Department of State Bulletin

At the outset I will go into a matter of detail
which really is quite out of place in the broad pic-
ture which I am trying to paint for you here; but,
since it iias been talked about a great deal, I think
it is important to clear it up, and that is the prepa-
ration of the instructions which were issued to
General Marshall.

I think he was questioned about that, and there
have been various charges and countercharges
having to do with the preparation of those instruc-
tions. The story is very simple.

At the end of November 1945, Secretary Byrnes
and General Marshall met. This was after Gen-
eral Marshall had been asked to go to China.

Secretary Byrnes read him a memorandum sug-
gesting the outline of instructions for him. Gen-
eral Marshall did not approve of it.

General Marshall said that he would wish to
try his own hand, assisted by some of his associates,
in drafting the instructions.

This he did ; and a draft was prepared by him,
in conjunction with four generals who were work-
in<i very closely witli General Marshall. This was
submitted to Secretai-y Byrnes.

On the 8tli of December Secretary Byrnes made
his suggestions to General Marshall — that is, sug-
gestions of changes or alterations or additions to
the draft prepared by General Marshall.

General Marshall's draft, with Secretary
Byrnes' suggestions, was discussed at a meeting in
Secretary Byrnes' office on Sunday morning, De-
cember 9, 1945, by Secretary Byrnes, General
Marshall, Mr. John Carter Vincent, General Hull,
and myself. I was then Undersecretary of State.

Those of us went over the instructions. General
Marshall approved the suggestions made by Secre-
tary Byrnes, and we then had a completely agi-eed
draft.

In the course of that meeting the outline of a
letter from the President to General Marshall was
discussed and directions were given for its prepa-
ration.

There was also approved at the meeting a memo-
randum from Secretary Byrnes to the Secretary of
War, requesting certain help in connection with
the removal of the Japanese and the movement of
Chinese armies into the North and laying down
certain restrictions on those movements.

There was also agreed upon the form of a press
release, I believe — it was agi'eed that clay or a few
days later — but the important papers were agreed
at that meeting.

They were taken up by Secretary Byrnes with
the President, who went over them; and they were
put in final shape, unchanged from the agreements
of December 9.

The President then had a meeting with General
Marshall, at which I was present — there were
three of us at that meeting, the President, General
Marshall, and myself — and at that point the signed
letter and the inclosures were handed to General
Marshall.

It was ascertained by the President at that meet-
ing that these papers were unanimously approved
and agreeable to all concerned, and to himself.

Now, that is the account of the preparation of
these instructions.

All the papers concerned are printed in the
White Book, with one exception. The press re-
lease, which I mentioned a moment ago, which was
given out on the 15th of December — everything in
the press release was in General Marshall's instruc-
tions. In other words, the press release was a ver-
batim statement of what was in the instructions to
General Marshall, except that certain paragraphs
in the instructions were omitted from the press
release.

One of those omissions had to do with what is
printed in the White Paper and in the memoran-
dum from Secretary Byrnes to the Secretary of
War. That was the discretion and authority given
to General Marshall in not moving Nationalist
Government troops into areas in which there was
fighting until he thought that that was a wise thing
to do.

That was not to be stated and released because
obviously it wouldn't work if it were.

Another omission, two other omissions had to do
with things which we would do if the Chinese Gov-
ernment asked us to do it. Obviously you do not
print in the newspapers that you will do something
if somebody else asks you to. You leave it to the
other person to ask you to do that if they wish.
That is the story of the instructions.

General Marshall arrived in China at the very
end of December 1945. By February 1946, three
major agreements had been reached between the
Chinese Government and the Communists. These
agreements grew out of the earlier agreements of
October 11, 1945, which discussed the general prin-
ciples for working out peacefully the differences
between the Communists and the Government.

The agreements of January and February 1946
carried into considerable detail how this should be
done. In regard to these three agreements which
I shall descrilje. General Marshall had a part only
in one, and that was in the first one.

The first agreement was for the cessation of hos-
tilities.- It provided that all fighting should cease,
and it provided for the setting up of an Executive
headquarters in which there would be American
chairmanship and Nationalist and Communist
representation, the purpose of this Executive
headquarters being to bring the fighting to an end,
and these tripartite teams were set up which went
to every area where there was any clashing between
the troops, and together they brought that fighting

'Mr. Acheson made a correction in subsequent testi-
mony, stating: "... I said, ttirough inadvertence, that
General Marshall participated only in the cessation of
hostilities.

"He also participated in the reorganization of the
Army . . .

"The one he did not participate in was the governmental
reorganization and the constitutional."

June 18, 1951

969

to an end and tried to have that truce develop into
a more substantial truce.

General Marsliall phiyed a very considerable
pai't in woi-king this out. The Executive head-
quarters was the really great instrumentality
whicli set up and workecl very well until the two
parties fell apart — then nothing worked.

The second agreement was an agreement for
governmental reorganization and for a constitu-
tional government, and the third agreement was
for a military reorganization and the integration
of the Communist forces into those of the National
Government.

As I said, General Marshall participated in the
negotiations for the cessation of hostilities, but he
did not participate in working out the second or
the third agreement.

The second agreement for working out a consti-
tutional government recognized the preponderant
strength of the Kuomintang position in the Na-
tional Government. It provided that there was to
be an interim state council, sort of a provisional
government, which would govern until the new
constitution was established and elections were
held throughout China and a constitutional gov-
ernment was set up in which all the people of
China would have their representatives, and which
would function on a two-party or multiparty
system.

The interim state council was to function in this
interim period as the supreme organ of the state.
The Kuomintang Party was given 20 of the 40
seats in this national council. The other 20 seats
were distributed among the Communists and the
other parties and to some nonparty people. It
was provided that the Generalissimo, Generalis-
simo Chiang Kai-shek, as the President of China,
should select all the members of the council, that
is, he would select those from his own party and
those from all the other parties. However, he
would have to appoint a certain number from
these other minority parties. That would leave
him with 20 people whom he had selected from his
own party, with 20 people whom he had selected
from the other parties, including the Comnuinists,
and it would also leave him with a veto over any
action of this council which could only be over-
ridden by a three-fifths vote, which could not be
done if his own party stayed with him.

Now, that, I say, was the temporary govern-
ment. That was to continue until the constitution
was to be agreed upon on May 4, through the Na-
tional Assembly, May 4, 1946, and it was hoped
that at an early date, sometime in '46 or '47, I
believe it was, there could be an election, and they
would then set u]) a regular constitutional gov-
ernment with legislative, judicial and executive
branches, in whicli all parts of China would be
represented, so that tins country would have a
government extending over all the area.

The tiiird agreement had to do with the amal-
gamation of the forces, and that was the most im-

portant one. It provided that there should be a
great reduction in forces on both sides, because
China could not support the tremendous military
establishment which existed on the Nationalist
side and on the Communist side together.

The army was to consist of 60 divisions. Of
those 60 divisions, 50 were to be National Govern-
ment divisions and 10 were to be Communist divi-
sions. These divisions were to be grouped to-
gether in armies, armies which would contain
three divisions or whatever the Chinese military
order of battle is. There would be several divi-
sions in each army.

The divisions were to be stationed in certain
numerical strengths in various parts of China.

The important thing here about the agreement,
as we look back on it, was that so far as Man-
churia was concerned, the agreement provided that
in Manchuria there should be 15 divisions of the
new government's troops. Of those 15 divisions,
14 should be national government divisions and
one should be a Communist division. That was of
the greatest possible importance. If that could
have been carried out, the whole situation might
have been very different.

In 1946 the situation of comparative peace
which had been brought about as a result of the
agreements in the eady part of the year began to
deteriorate. Fighting broke out in various places.

General Marshall, in trying to stop this fighting,
through the Executive headquarters, got drawn
into greater detail in some of the political negotia-
tions between the two parties, because this fighting
rapidly took on political aspects.

One side or the other would believe that it could
gain an advantage by capturing this or that city
or area, and believed it could strengthen itself in
the negotiations ; and then would start an attack.
Either the Communists would attack the National-
ists or the Nationalists would attack the Com-
munists, and in that way this situation became
worse and worse; and General Marshall's efforts
were unable to deal with it.

Therefore, the whole discussions between the
Communists and the Nationalists in the attempt to
work out the interim government, and the long-
term constitutional government, got into more and
more and more confusion and trouble.

The Prime Minister of China, Doctor Sun Fo,
has an interesting comment on this period. In a
New Year's message which he delivered on Janu-
ary 1, 1949, speaking of the period which I have
been discussing, he said :

The Government had decided to call this conference
because it was senerall.v realized that the country and the
fteople needed recuperation and jx^ace, so that rehabilita-
tion work could be started. Had these measures been
carried out at that time all of us would have seen more
prosperit.v and happiness in our midst. Unfortunately,
all the parties concerned could not completely abandon
their own seltisli end.s and tlie people in general did not
exert sufficient influence in promoting this jK'aoe move-
ment.

970

Department of State Bulletin

The result of the breakdown was that the situa-
tion developed into one of very considerable fin;ht-
inf^ by the end of 194G, and when General Marshall
left China in 1947, January 1947, to return to
Washington, the American effort to mediate in this
struggle between the Government and the Com-
munists ended.

General Marshall issued a long statement, which
I shall not bother to read to you now, but it sums
up very cleai'ly his understanding of the difficulties
wliich brought failure to his mission, and his un-
derstanding of the difficulties in the Chinese
Government, which could not really permit it to
function unless they were removed.

These difficulties, in some respects, had their
roots in the fact that the liberal elements in the
Kuomintang Party were the ones which were
dealt with much more severely by the war and
the inflation. Inflation and war tend to elimi-
nate the middle class, and that is where the liberal
elements came into the Kuomintang, and as the
inflation and the war went forward, the power in
the party shifted more to the extreme right wing ;
and General Marshall, in his farewell message,
spoke of the importance of more liberal leadership
in the Kuomintang Party itself.

But as I say, the effort to mediate came to an end
with his dejiarture. From then on we go into the
military period of the struggle between the two
Governments.

Military Struggle Between Nationalists
and Communists

The National Government reached a peak of
its military holdings toward the end of 1946. In
the middle of '46 it had approximately 3,000,000
men under arms. These were opposed by some-
thing over 1,000,000 Communist troops of whom
about 400,000 were not regulars but were guerrilla
troops.

Until the end of '46 and the early part of '47, the
gains, the military gains made by the Nationalist
Government appeared to be impressive, but in fact
they were not, and General Marshall repeatedly
pointed out to the Governmenl that what it was
doing was overextending itself militarily and po-
litically, since it neither had sufficient troops to
garrison this whole area nor did it have sufficient
administrators to administer the areas that it was
taking over.

Therefore what it was doing by this military ad-
vance was weakening itself both militarily and
through administrative ineptitude, because it
didn't have the necessary administrators; it was
not giving the people of the occupied areas what
they had been led to expect when the National
Government came in, so politically it was doing
itself hai-m, and militarily it was doing itself harm.

General Barr points out it was during this period
that what he calls the wall psychology took posses-
sion of the Chinese Nationalist Army. He had

pointed out over and over again that in modem
warfare the most disastrous of all things to do is to
retreat into a city behind walls and take a defen-
sive position. Modern warfare must be a war of
maneuver.

Therefore, time and time and time again, these
Nationalist lines got pushed way forward; finally
the troops at the end take up defensive positions
behind some kind of walls, a long line of communi-
cation has to be guarded, which eventually is cut,
and over and over again the troops at the end of
the line either go over to the side of the enemy
without firing a shot, or sufficient of them do so
that those who want to fight can't fight.

That was the story of the war from 1946 on.
At first, it looked very successful — lots of areas
occupied, important cities taken — but the armies
all go to garrison, they become immobilized, and
maneuver and initiative is left with the Commu-
nists.

At the end of '46 the Government had 2,600,000
men under arms and the Communists had about
1,100,000 of regulars.

However, in firepower, in rifle firepower, the
Government still enjoyed a superiority of 3 or
4 to 1 over the Communists.

In '46, when this fighting started, General Mar-
shall was acting as mediator. He called on both
sides to stop the fighting. Both professed to want
to do it, but did not do it.

Therefore, General Marshall asked for and ob-
tained from this Government an embargo on the
shipment of combat materiel into China. That
embargo lasted from the time it was imposed in
'46, the exact date I do not have with me —

/Senator Brewster. You don't have that date ?

Secretary Acheson. I have it here. We will
look it up and put it in in a minute — until May
1947. During that time the Nationalists were
winning the battles, they won the fights they had,
they occupied the cities, but they immobilized
themselves.

Need for Reform in China

We have talked from time to time here about
the great necessity for reform in China. General
Marshall, during his mission to China, stressed
that over and over again with the Generalissimo,
pointing out that the whole possibility of any kind
of armed action against the Communists must at
last rest upon a belief in the country and their own
belief that they had something which was worth
fighting for, and was progressive and good, and
that if we did not have reform in China, we were
never going to get this spirit which was necessary
to fight and defeat the Communists.

After General Marshall returned, in the summer
of 1947, the President, on the recommendation of
General Marshall, sent General Wedemeyer to
China on a fact-finding mission. General Wede-
meyer, before he left, stressed again, as he had in

iune 18, 1951

971

1945, the great importance and the necessity for
reform.

He said before he left China for the United
States :

To regain and maintain the confidence of the people,
the Central Government will have to effect immediately
drastic and far-reaching political and economic reforms.
I'romises will no longer suffice. Performance is absolutely
iiece.ssary. It should be accepted that military force in
itself will not eliminate communism.

General Wedemeyer went to China and re-
turned. He made recommendations, which are
printed in the Wliite Paper, in which he recom-
mended assistance of economic and military equip-
ment for a 5-year period, which would require
Congressional authorization. Although his actual
recommendations do not call for a grant of
military aid, it is possible to read that in. He does
talk about the desirability of that.

However, General Wedemeyer recognized the
desirability and importance of avoiding direct
United States involvement in the civil war in
China by stating:

Although advice indicated above [that is, technical
military advice] does provide advice indirectly to tactical
force, it should be carried on outside operational areas to
prevent the criticism that American personnel are actively
engaged in fratricidal warfare.

There are other recommendations in the Wede-
meyer report which I shall not dwell upon at the
present time. We are now directing our attention
to the aid part of it.

Consideration of Aid to China

The Secretary of State, General Marshall, then
had prepared, and with the approval of the Presi-
dent, sent to Congre.ss a recommendation for aid
to China. He made before the Foreign Relations
Committee a very frank statement of the problems
facing the United States Government in consider-
ing aid to China.

He made it clear that there were steps which
had to be taken and could only be taken by the
Chinese Government, which were essential to meet
the Communist threat.

And, he took the position strongly that the
United States Government had to be extremely
careful that it did not commit iself to a policy
involving the absorption of its resources to an
unpredictable extent by assuming a direct respon-
sibility for the civil war in China, and for the
Chinese economy.

He also pointed out that we must be prepared
to face tlie possibility that the Chinese Govern-
ment might not be able to maintain itself against
the Chinese Communist forces.

That was stated quite clearly by General Mar-
shall. In fact, lie said:

An attempt to underwrite the Chinese economy and the
Chinese Government's military efforts will result in a
burden on the United States economy and a military

responsibility which I cannot recommend as a course of
action for this Government.

Now, the program of aid which General Mar-
shall presented was a program of 570 million dol-
lars in economic assistance over a 15-month period.
He pointed out that the experience gained in the
program would throw light on the possibilities of
future programs.

The program was sufficient in size, it was
thought, to free the major portion of the Chinese
Government's own foreign exchange assets for the
purchase of such military supplies, from foreign
sources, as it might need.

It was not recommended that we should have
military advisers in combat areas.

It was not recommended that we should take
measures of military aid which would lead to
United States military intervention in China or
direct involvement in the civil war.

Now, this question was very carefully consid-
ered in the Executive branch, at a meeting in June
1948 attended by Secretary Marshall, Secretary of
the Army Royall, General Bradley and General
Wedemeyer, and the decision which I have just
spoken of was taken.

There was already a United States military ad-
visory group in China that had been established in
1946, and in 1947 the commanding officer of this
group had been authorized to give advice on a
confidential basis to the Generalissimo, advice of
a strategic nature, but the United States was not
willing to assume responsibility for the strategic
direction of the war.

General Marshall in a message to General Barr
pointed out one reason why. He said :

I think you will agree that implications of our accept-
ing that responsibility would be very far reaching and
grave, and that such resiwnsibility is in logic inseparable
from the authority to make it effective. Whatever the
Generalissimo may feel moved to say with respect to his
willingness to delegate necessary iwwers to Americans,
I know from my own experience that advice is always
listened to very politely but not infrequently ignored when
deemed unpalatable.

Therefore we did not take responsibility for the
strategic direction of the war, nor did we recom-
mend that American officers should be with troops
in combat areas.

This recommendation was considered by the
Eightieth Congress. Tlte Eightieth Congress —
and I shall not go through a whole long story — the
Senate bill reduced the period of time from 15
months to 12 months. It reduced, split the appro-
priations and recommended 3r$8 million dollars
for economic aid and 125 million dollars as a
special grant to be used at the discretion of the
Chinese Government.

The debate indicates that the Chinese Govern-
ment would probably use this 125 million dollars
for military aid. In the course of the legislative
history, the House put in a provision authorizing
military advice on the so-called Greek model, that

972

Department of Stale Bulletin

is having officers with trooire in combat areas and
strategic advice. That was stricken out by the
Senate, and in speaking about it Senator Vanden-
berg said :

As in tlie case of Greece and Turkey, your committee
recognizes that military aid is necessary in order to
nialie economic aid effective. It proposes to malre mili-
tary supplies available at China's option. Your Com-
mittee iielieves that as a matter of elementary prudence
that this process must be completely clear of any impli-
cation that we are underwriting the military campaign
of the Nationalist Government.

And, as I say, the House provision was stricken
out.

That was agreed to in conference, and tlie bill
was passed chiefly as written by the Senate.

I said that the bill authorized 338 million dollars
for economic aid. However, when it came to the
appropriation process, Congress only appro-
priated 275 million dollars for economic aid and
125 million dollars for military aid. So a total
was actually made available by the Congress of
400 million dollars as against 570 million dollars
requested.

I shall not go in detail through the campaigns
of 1947 more than I have already done. The real
collapse of the government in a military way
began in the latter part of 1948. The first large-
scale defection and collapse occurred in September
1948 with the fall of Tsinan, where government
forces without any effort at all went over to the
other side and surrendered with all their materiel.

The United States Army Intelligence Review of
Military Developments in 1948, in January 1949,
sums it up this way :

The Nationalists entered 1948 with an estimated
strength of 2,723,000 troops. Recruitment and replace-
ment of combat losses kept this figure constant through
mid-Septeml)er. By February 1, 1949, however, heavy
losses had reduced Nationalist strength to a million and
a half, of which approximately 500,000 are service troops.
This represents a reduction of 4.5 percent of the Nationalist
Government's total strength in a 4V2-month period.

Communist strength, estimated at 1,150,000 a year ago,
has mounted to 1,622,000, virtually all combat effectives.
Whereas the Nationalists began 1948 with almost a 3 to 1
numerical superiority, the Communist forces now outnum-
ber the total Nationalist strength and have achieved better
than a IVj to 1 superiority in combat effectives.

The events of the last year, and more specifically those
of the last 4% months, have resulted in such overwhelm-
ing losses to the National Government that, acting alone,
its military position has declined beyond possible
recoupment.

On the other hand, these same events have so enhanced
the position and capabilities of the Communists that they
are now capable of achieving a complete military victory
over the Communist forces.

Chairman Russell. Nationalist forces.

Secretary Acheson. I mean Nationalist forces.

In mid-I^ovember, 1948, General Barr, who was
the head of the military mission to China, reported
to the Department of the Army :

I am convinced that the military situation lias de-
teriorated to the point where only the active participation
of T'nited States troops could effect a remedy. No battle

has been lost since my arrival due to lack of ammunition
or equipment. Their military debacles, in my opinion, can
all be attributed to the world's worst leadership and
many other morale-destroying factors that led to a com-
plete loss of the will to fight.

In another report early in 1949, he explained
some of the causes for the National Government
negotiations for the cessation of hostilities but he
defeats. He says the Government committed its
first politico-military blunder by concentrating on
the military reoccupation of former Japanese-held
areas. It gave very little consideration to regional
sentiments or the creation of efficient local admin-
istrations. Its strategy was burdened by an un-
sound strategy concieved by a politically influenced
and militarily inept high command.

Throughout the structure and machinery of the
National Government there are interlocking ties
of interests, family, financial and political. No
Chinese, no matter how efficient, can hope for a
position of authority because he is the best qualified
man. He must have other backing. In too many
cases, such backing was the support and loyalty of
the Generalissimo and his army comrades, which
kept them in posts of responsibility regardless of
their qualifications. The direct result has been the
unsound strategy and faulty tactics of the Nation-
alists in their fight against the Communists.

Senator Wiley. Whose report was that?

Secretary Acheson. That is General Barr,
United States Army.

By the end of 1948 the struggle in North China
had virtually ended with the complete collapse of
the Nationalist armies. Eighty percent of all the
materiel which we had furnished, both during the
war and after, to the National Government, was
lost; and 75 percent of that is estimated to have
been captured by the Communists.^

One reason for this large capture. General Barr
points out, when he says that the Chinese National-
ist Government never destroyed any — the troops
never destroyed any of the materiel, when they
were about to surrender or run.

He says.

The Chinese seemed inherently unable to destroy
anything of value.

Summary of U. S. Policy in China

Now, at the very end of my remarks here, I
briefly sum up some of the things, material and
otherwise, which the United States did in aid of its
policy in China.

Speaking, first, of things on which it is im-
possibile to put a dollar value, first, is the aid ren-
dered by the United States forces in China in
planning and in carrying out the movement of the
Chinese Government forces into the areas occupied
by the Japanese.

' Exclusive of ammunition.

June 18, 7 95 J

973

Second, is the evacuation of the Japanese troops
from those areas.

Third, is the aid rendered by the United States
Marines in North China ; in occupying key areas
and maintaining control for the government of
essential railway lines until the government was
able to take over.

Fourth, the aid provided by the United States
Military Advisory Groirp.

Apart from this, the Iniited States Government,
in the period from VJ-Day until early 1949, au-
thorized grants and credits to China totaling
approximately 2 billion dollars, of which approxi-
mately a billion, six, were grants, 4 hundred mil-
lion were on credit terms.

This total is divided almost equally between
military and economic aid. The amounts do not
include United States surplus property, except
where the sales were on credit terms.

Surplus propei'ty, with a total estimated pro-
curement cost of over a billion dollars, has been
sold to China for the agreed realization to the
United States of 230 million dollars, of which 95
million were on credit terms.

V>y the spring of 1949, the military position of
the Chinese Government collapsed to the point
where the Chinese Communists controlled the
major centers of population, and railways from
Manchuria south to the Yangtze.

The military collapse of the Chinese Govern-
ment had, for the most part, been the consequence
of inept political and military leadership, and a
lack of the will to fight on the part of its armies,
rather than inadequate military supplies.

It was at that time the considered judgment of
responsible United States Government observers
in China that only the extension of unlimited
American economic and military aid involving the
use of our own troops and operations which might
require the extensive control of Chinese Govern-
ment operations would enable the Nationalist
Government to maintain a foothold in South
China.

It was believed that United States involvement
in Chinese civil war under the existing conditions
would be clearly contrary to American interests.

As the last note of this tragic story, I should
like to read you the message of the Acting Presi-
dent of China, General Li Tsung-jen.

Senator Wiley. Wliat is the date ?

Secretary Acheson. May 5, 1949, in a letter
which he addressed to President Truman. He
says:

This policy — [hp had described our help to China dur-
ing tlie war, and then he had discussed our aid to China
after the war as I have described it to you] — This policy
of friendly assistance was continued when some years ago
<!eneral Marshall under instructions from your good self
(ook up the difficult task of mediation in our conflict with
the Chinese Conununists to which he devoted painstaking
effort. All this work was unfortunately rendered fruit-
less by the lack of sincerity on the part of both the then
Kovernment and the Chinese Communists.

In spite of this your country continued to extend its aid
to our Government. It is regrettable that owing to the
failure of our then government to make judicious use of
this aid and to bring about appropriate political, economic
and military reforms, your assistance has not produced
the desired effect. To this failure is attributable the
present predicament in which our country finds itself.

PUBLICATIONS

Recent Releases

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, Oovernment
Printing Office, Washington 35, D. C. Address requests
direct to the Superintendent of Documents, except in the
case of free publications, which may be obtained from the
Department of State.

Fifth Session of the General Conference of UNESCO,
Florence, Italy, May 22-June 17, 1950. International
Organization and Conference Series IV ; United Nations
Educational, .Scientific and Cultural Organization 13.
Pub. 4050. 136 pp. 35(i;

Report of the United States delegation with selected

documents.

Health and Sanitation: Cooperative Program in Ecuador.

Treaties and Other International Acts Series 2147. Pub.
4063. 5 pp. 5«*.

Agreement between the United States and Ecuador —
Effected by exchange of notes signed at Quito Sep-
tember 15, 1950; entered into force September 20,
1950; operative retroactively from June 30, 1950.

Air Service: Facilities at Tan-Son-Nhut Airport in Indo-
china. Treaties and Other International Acts Series 2150.
Pub. 4067. 8 pp. 5((.

Agreement between the United States and France —
Signed at Saigon October 19, 1948; entered into force
October 19, 1948.

Agricultural Mission in Nicaragua. Treaties and Other
International Acts Series 2152. Pub. 4071. 8 pp. 5(t.

Agreement between the United States and Nica-
ragua— Effected by exchange of notes signed at
Managua January 25 and February 1, 1950; entered
into force February 1, 1950.

Food Production: Cooperative Program in Haiti.

Treaties and Other International Acts Series 2153. Pub.
4072. 3 pp. 5^.

Agreement between the United States and Haiti
modifying agreement of August 28, 1944, as modified
and extended — Effected by exchange of notes signed
at Port-au-Prince June 30, 1949; entered into force
June 30, 1949.

Food Production: Cooperative Program in Haiti.

Treaties and Other International Acts Series 2154.
Pub. 4073. 5 pp. 5^.

Agreement between the United States and Haiti —
Effected by exchange of notes signed at I'ort-au-
Prince September 18 and 27, 1950; entered into force
SeptemlK'r 29, J.950; operative retroactively from
June 30, 1950.

Health and Sanitation: Cooperative Program in Haiti.

Treaties and Other International Acts Series 2156. Pub.
4074. 5 pp. 5(f.

(Continued on page 998)

974

Department of State Bulletin

Latin America's Role in Thiniting Aliead for Business

by Edward G. Miller, Jr.

Assistant Secretary for Inter-American Affairs '

Few people in this country realize the impor-
tance of Latin America to United States business
as a whole. Last year 35 percent of our imports
came from Latin America and 27 percent of all
United States exports went to Latin America.
These exports totaled approximately 2.7 billion
dollars, which was very nearly as much as our
total of exports to Europe. United States exports
to Western Europe in 1950 were valued at roughly
2.9 billion dollars, just 210 million dollars more
than our Latin American exports, and nearly 2
billion dollars of United States trans-Atlantic
exports were paid for out of Marshall Plan funds.
Similarly, Latin America is extremely impor-
tant as a field for United States foreign invest-
ment. At the end of the year 1949, United States
private investment in Latin America totaled over
5.8 billion dollars. Dollar investments have
flowed to Latin America since the war at an un-
precedented rate. In the 3 years from 1947
through 1949, 1.7 billion dollars was added to
the total of private United States investment in
Latin America. The 1950 year end figures are
not yet complete, but it is safe to say we now have
well over 6 billion dollars invested in Latin Amer-
ica. In comparison, private American investment
outside the Western Hemisphere totals something
over 7 billion dollars.

The scope of United States economic involve-
ment in Latin America becomes particularly im-
£ressive when it is realized that the population of
latin America represents less than 7 percent of
the population of the world, having recently, like
the United States population, passed the 150 mil-
lion mark.

Even more impressive is the fact that not only
is the population comparatively small to have as-
sumed such an important role for United States
business, but that this importance has been at-
tained despite the fact that these countries are still,
in view of their great potential, only on the
threshold of their industrial development. For

' Address made before the Harvard Business School
Association at Boston, Mass., on June 9 and released to
the press on the same date.

example, in 1949, United States national income
was nine times as great as the combined incomes
cf all of the Latin American nations.

Comparing the United States and Mexico, for
example, the Mexican per capita income was the
equivalent of $121 when United States per capita
income was $1,453, in 1949. There were 5.5 pas-
senger cars in Mexico per thousand population in
1949. There were 243 per thousand in the United
States.

But perhaps the most significant aspect of what
we have been discussing from the standpoint of
United States business for the future is that Latin
America is not static; that economic growth is
proceeding at a very rapid pace even in relation
to this country. To my mind, this fact — that
Latin America is developing at a fast pace — is the
main fact in thinking ahead for business. In the
case of Mexican automobiles, for instance, accord-
ing to Mexican Government statistics, motor vehi-
cle registrations have climbed 140 percent since
1937. Registrations have increased 50 percent in
the United States in the same period.

The last 20 years have brought tremendous eco-
nomic growth in Latin America, and in many
ways more progress has occurred during this
j)eriod than in the preceding century, at least in
regard to industrial and commercial development.

It is reasonable to assume that this rate of
growth will be maintained in Latin America, pro-
vided always that the necessary imports of capi-
tal equipment will be forthcoming during the
period of shortages imposed by the present emer-
gency. I will go further and say that since de-
velopment in itself promotes development, the
rate of growth in Latin America should be even
greater in the future, all other things being equal.
A necessary consequence is that the standard of
living of Latin America and the per capita pur-
chasing power should continually increase in re-
lation to United States levels. An important fac-
tor in this connection is the progressive develop-
ment of efficient labor forces in these countries as
new industries are created. And, of course, as we

June 18, I 95 I

975

all know from the history of this country, more
growth means more opportimities.

A second fact to be remembered is that the
growth which has occurred in Latin America is
to a large extent the result of a factor which was
not operative in the economic growth of the United
States. In this country expansion of our econ-
omy has been fairly constant throughout our liis-
tory and, except for periods of war and national
emergency, has been a more or less "natural" proc-
ess, individual initiative applied in an uncoordi-
nated way to the development of resources. In
Latin America there is no such record of steady
growth. Eather, many of the economies were
relatively static for a long time in regard to in-
dustrial development, the principal effort having
been devoted to agriculture and real estate. In
the last 20 years, in most countries, a radical
change has occurred and industrial development
has surged ahead suddenly. This surge has come
about to an important degree by popular demand.
The people in Latin America, as in other parts of
the world, are not content with their lot and they
are no longer apathetic about it. They want a
greater share of the good things of life. They
want their countries to be prosperous, to offer
them greater opportunities for employment and
broader horizons for their children.

These are pressures to which the governments
of Latin America are subjected and, by and large,
these governments have become increasingly re-
sponsive to the will of the people. I think they
will become even more responsive in the future,
for the critical problem for governments in many
Latin American countries during the next few
decades may well be whether or not living stand-
ards and social development will advance rapidly
enough to keep discontent from boiling over into
blind destruction or from being utilized by inter-
national communism for its own ruthless and
antidemocratic ends.

Efforts Toward Economic Expansion

Wliat can be seen now in many countries of the
hemisphere are determined and conscious efforts
to bring about economic expansion. In some
cases, government agencies have been formed to
cope with the problem, as in the case of the
Chilean Development Corporation and the Mexi-
can Nacional Financiera. In Puerto Rico, where
the problem is the same as in the independent
countries of Latin America, we have the notable
example of Governor Munoz Marin's so-called
"Operation Bootstrap," wliere the Government
has not only taken direct action in stimulating
industrial activity but has also sought to create
the conditions which attract private capital in-
vestment from tlie United States.

It might be said parenthetically that our Gov-
ernment has seen fit on its own part to help eco-
nomic expansion in Latin America tlirougli means
appropriate for governmental activity. Our

976

programs of technical and economic cooperation
through such agencies as the Institute of Inter-
American Affairs, the Export-Import Bank, and
the International Bank are too well known to be
dealt with here. I shall only say that the ac-
tivities of these institutions have been directed
toward providing basic public services and par-
ticipating in programs of basic development
which in tui-n help promote private activity.

Recently our Government's efforts in the field
of economic development have been subject to a
searching review by a distinguislied group of
citizens under the chairmanship of Nelson Rocke-
feller. Their conclusions have been embodied in a
report which, in substance, recommends a con-
siderable intensification of this type of activity.
The report also recommends new methods by
which our Government can help stimulate the
increased flow of private capital abroad. These
include tax incentive measures, investment trea-
ties, and limited guaranties by the Export-Import
Bank of specific investment projects. These are
all measures which have been receiving active
study by our Government. A special value of
the report is that it rationalizes the relative par-
ticipation of public and private endeavor in the
expansion of economic activity in underdeveloped
areas.

Tliere are, then, two main facts to be borne in
mind in regard to the future in Latin America.
First, that economic growth in this area has been
proceeding rapidly and will probably continue
even more rapidly ; and, second, that this trend is
in large measure the result of a new awakening
and demand by the people for more economic
activity.

Naturally, these trends are characterized by cer-
tain aspects which are not entirely in accord with
classical doctrines of international economics. In
a number of cases we have seen the creation of
new industries which are economically unsound
to the extent that they depend upon undue tariff
protection or are uneconomic from the standpoint
of accessibility of raw materials. There has been
in some countries a tendency toward governmental
ownership of industry, where, again, the results
may be uneconomic from the standpoint of sucli
indices as productivity per man-hour. In still
other countries the climate may be hostile for the
entrance of foreign capital. The people and the
government of the country concerned may wish
to reserve for themselves exclusively the task of
developing their resources. There are numerous
other problems of a similar nature which could
be enumerated.

Attitude of U.S. Business

In considering the factors affecting private
business in Latin America, what should bo the
attitude of United States business'^ First, of
course, there is no question that there are tre-
mendous opportunities in the hemisphere — oppor-

Department of State Bulletin

I

tunities for constructive assistance on the part of
United States business in the sound development
of the economy of these countries. On the other
hand, the conditions under which foreign capital
is goinf^ to be allowed to participate in these op-
portunities will depend upon the freely exercised
sovereign will of the 20 independent countries
which comprise this area of the free world. We in
our Government, or you in business, may not ap-
prove of some of the economic theories and prac-
tices which we see in other countries. We may
think they are unwise even from the standpoint
of the long-range self-interest of the other coun-
try. We may deplore them in speeches and reso-
lutions. We — and now I am speaking of the
government alone — may do our best to bring about
better understanding of our motives, of our views
as to the functions of responsible capital invest-
ment in the modern world; we may and do try
through representations in individual cases and
through our eflForts to negotiate economic treaties
to bring about an improved climate for private
activity. We have consistently pointed out that
the problem of development is not one that can be
solved by government activities, that true and
balanced development can only happen by per-
mitting full play to the forces of private initiative
and skills, both domestic and foreign. We have
emphasized, and we shall continue to emphasize
that United States Government economic assist-
ance can be more effectively brought to bear in
countries where these conditions exist.

But I repeat : The terms and conditions under
which foreign capital will be admitted into an-
other country is up to that country. We as a gov-
ernment will most scrupulously respect the sov-
ereign right of each juridically equal nation of
the hemisphei'e to run its own affairs. We in the
Department of State — as much as we may admire
the achievements of individual enterprise — cannot
undertake the functions of sponsors of United
States capital investment. Unlike the Soviet
Union, the United States is not out to impose its
systems on other countries.

Therefore, it seems to me that the wisest attitude
business can assume in thinking about investment
in Latin America is to try to see things as they are
and to work within the existing scheme of things.
This may mean that business will stay entirely
out of situations that are precarious. In other
cases, it will mean putting up with certain difficul-
ties of the kinds which i have enumerated, but I
suppose that nowhere in the world are the condi-
tions for business exactly what business would like
to see, and that goes for the laws of our own Fed-
eral Union and its 48 component States.

This also means, I think, that the most effective
contribution to a favorable climate for private in-
vestment is for American business, both here and
abroad, to show that it represents the best system
in the world — the best system not only from the
standpoint of productivity but in the light of the

June 18, I 95 I

853008 — 51 3

desire of people everywhere to get a better share
of the good things of life. All business, in short,
must prove itseli. You and I believe that United
States private enterprise is the best system, but it
does not follow automatically that other people —
people with different habits and traditions — will
necessarily think as we do about this particular
aspect of our national life. The only way that
other people can be brought to believe in tliis sys-
tem is for them to be convinced that it works, and
that it works not only here but in their country,
whatever it may be. How, specifically, can busi-
ness prove itself in this way? There would be
no point in my lecturing you, who have wider ex-
perience than I have in this field, so I suggest that
the best guides are found in the records of the
American enterprises which have had the great-
est success in Latin America.

Almost without exception, if they have done
well, they have abided by the rules and regulations
of the other country. This may seem an obvious
precept, almost too obvious to mention. However,
real doubt from time to time is engendered abroad
as to the willingness of American capital to live
within the rules of the game in a particular
country.

Secondly, the American interests which have
been most esteemed and in general have been most
fairly treated in Latin America are those which
have shown a genuine concern for the general wel-
fare of the other country. It seems to have been
particularly, and understandably, difficult for
Americans to see eye-to-eye with Latin American
governments on what constitutes "general wel-
fare" where government-sponsored development
programs were under way. But to date nothing
has been achieved by bucking the plans of a sov-
ereign government. American enterprise has
made great contributions to the develoiDinent of
national steel enterprises in Brazil and Chile, and
in the latter over 150 American technicians, fur-
nished by American companies, are now contribut-
ing to the welfare of Chile and to our own rela-
tions with that country. In Colombia, an Ameri-
can oil company whose concession has expired is
assisting the Colombian Government to continue
to operate the concession. These examples will
go far to promote the interest of private enter-
prise as a whole.

In some cases great strides have been made by
improving public relations of American enter-
prises in general and labor relations in particular.
A number of American enterprises have decided
they could no longer content themselves with the
claim that they pay better wages than other coun-
tries. At this point, personnel management pro-
grams and similar devices prove to be very val-
uable aids to successful operation. The effort
that is being put forth by certain American inter-
ests to apply in Latin America the labor-manage-
ment procedures which we have developed here is,
to my mind, the most worthwhile effort of all.

977

Fostering a Labor Policy Abroad

It would be well to bear in mind that the in-
interests of capitalism and labor, far from being
irreconcilable, are in the true sense of the word
identical. One of the most eloquent statements
of this case is by William Green, President of the
American Federation of Labor, who on October
13, 1950 said :

Communism has sought to make a bogey of capitalism
by piiintins it as a system of exploitation and oppression,
imposed on the many for the tieneflt of the few. They
preach that capitalism is doomed, since it bears within
it the .seeds of its own cie.struction.

Trade unionism, on the other hand, has demonstrated
to the world that there has never been anything wrong
with capitalism that hijiher wages and shorter hours
could not cure. It has shown that capitalism can mean
more democracy, not less, and that it can bring material,
cultnnil and social progress and ini]>rovement to the many
rather than the few. Mcidern trade unionism Is an out-
growth of inihistrial capitalism and has provided the
mechanism whereby the fruits of capitalism have been
distributed over an ever widening area of the populace.
Far from being foredoomed, capitalism has thus borne
within It the seeds of its own salvation. This is the
revolutionary message that American labor Is placing
before the workers of the world today.

If, in their Latin American operations, United
States business can foster that type of labor phi-
losophy, we have no reason to fear for the future
of free enterprise, both local and foreign, in Latin
America. And it must be obvious to any one who
has been in Latin America that American con-
cerns, if they are given the chance and if they will,
can speed the growth of democratic labor leader-
ship. It is fortunately true that attention to labor
relations and personnel problems is coming to be
another characteristic of the United States con-
cerns in Latin America which have the most prom-
ising future. They abide by local laws, they evi-
dence a broader concern that the short-range
welfare of their own enterprise, and they put into
practice at least some of the lessons in labor-
management relations which business has learned
here at home.

There are other developments which I think
we should hope will become characteristic. There
are the number of cases in which United States
enterprises are working very hard to develop re-
sponsible local management and to reduce the
number of United States citizens occupying top
nianagerial positions, as well as top technical po-
sitions. Tliere are the signs of increasing interest
in incentive and bonus plans, as well as private
retirement plans along the lines of those which
have been successful in this country.

Also, American enterprises abroad are becoming
more and more aware of the advantages of stock
participation on the part of citizens of the other
country. The enlightened self-interest involved
in this type of program is evident when it is real-
ized that one of the principal obstacles to develop-
ment in Latin America has been the miavailability
of local risk capital. It is all too evident that one
of the principal deterrents to economic progress

in other countries is a tendency to invest in real
estate or family businesses and to expect a rate
of return on capital investment far higher than
our own investors and many times higher than
equity investors expect here. It is encouraging,
therefore, to see an American-owned public utility
in Brazil currently financing part of the local cur-
rency costs of a major expansion program through
sales of common stock to small investors who are
served by the company.

Finally, American businessmen abroad are he-
coming more flexible and are learning increasingly
to adjust to the requirements of the local scene
and to the shifts which occur from time to time.
They are becoming more farsighted and are learn-
ing to keep on the move.

In substance, the lesson which American busi-
ness abroad is teaching us is that business abi-oad
must act as part of the local community, not as
an absentee-owned organization interested only
in deriving profit, particularly not as an organiza-
tion seeking hit-and-run profits from its enter-
prise. The entire scope of our relations with our
neighbors is helped by such farsighted ventures
as the Pan American School of Agriculture at
Zamorano in Honduras which is supported by the
United Fruit Company and the work of the Rocke-
feller Foundation in many countries of this hem-
isphere.

Developing a Mutual Confldence

I hope what I have said will not be understood
as a Government spokesman urging American
capital to go abroad or urging other countries to
accept American capital. Private capital will
move only of its own free will — that is, only if
the investor finds that the risks in a particular
situation are compensated by the opportunities
over the long pull. There are still many oppor-
tunities for investment within the United States,
which will naturally have a higher priority for
the investor if the attractiveness of a situation out-
side of the country is less than the hazards with
which that situation is encumbered.

In other words, while it is true that all United
States business abroad must prove itself to other
countries, by the same token the other countries
must .show a real understanding of the problems
of business. In some countries, even those which
allege a desire for foreign capital, and even where
American private investment has made great con-
tributions to the general welfare, the conditions
do not exist which are essential to attract Ameri-
can investment away from the investment o])por-
tunities which this coinitry still presents and will
always present. So long as there is discrimina-
tion in foreign countries, so long as foreign com-
jianies are made the butt of local political ma-
neuvers, there will naturally be skepticism in the
business commimity of this country in regard to
any country in which such practices exist. In
these cases American capital will not go.

978

Department of State Bulletin

The problem of private capital working abroad
is, finally, one which depends npon mutual confi-
dence. In many countries, excellent progress has
been made in establishing a climate favorable for
private initiative. In some countries of the hemis-
phere, the requisite mutual confidence is today a
reality. In others, it exists to a lesser extent. In
some, it does not exist at all. In thinking ahead
for business, the great challenge is to prove over
the long pull that the countries having confidence
in Unitecl States private investment are following
the right approach from the standpoint of their
own self-interest.

Relations With Bolivia Resumed

[Released to the press June 7]

The Charge d'Affaires of the Embassy of the
United States in La Paz, Thomas J. Maleady, has
been instructed to resume diplomatic relations
with the Bolivian Government today.

This action is being taken in conformity with
the desire of the United States to carry on normal
diplomatic relations with tlie Bolivian Govern-
ment, and in accordance with our information that
the new Government there has established effective
control over Bolivian territory and has given sat-
isfactory indication of its intention to fulfill the
international obligations of Bolivia.

Letters of Credence

Australia

The newly appointed Ambassador of Australia,
P. C. Spender, K. C, presented his credentials to
the President on June 8, 1951. For a text of the
Ambassador's remarks and for a text of tlie Presi-
dent's reply, see Department of State press re-
lease 497 of June 8.

Colombia

The newly appointed Ambassador of Colombia,
Cipriano Jaramilio Restrepo presented his cre-
dentials to the President on June 5, 1951. For a
text of the translation of the Ambassador's re-
marks and the text of the President's reply, see
Department of State press release 476 of June 5.

Guatemala

The newly appointed Ambassador of Guate-
mala, Carlos H. Aldana Sandoval, presented his
credentials to the President on June 4, 1951. For
a text of the translation of the Ambassador's re-
marks and the text of the President's reply, see
Department of State press release 409 of June 4.

Point 4 Agreement With Lebanon

On June 5 the Department of State announced
that a Point 4 general agreement between the
United States and Lebanon was signed on May
29 in Beirut. American Charge d'Affaires John
H. Bruins signed for the United States and For-
eign Minister Husayn Uwayni for Lebanon. Tlie
agreement becomes effective upon ratification by
the Chamber of Deputies of Lebanon.

In making the announcement. Technical Co-
operation Administrator Henry G. Bennett ex-
plained that Point 4 is already at work in Lebanon
under a project agreement, signed last February,
for water-power and irrigation development of
the Litani Valley, Dr. Bennett said,

The General Agreement paves the way for a broader
program of economic development to furtlier Lebanon's
country-wide plans.

A mission of 10 specialists from the Bureau of Reclama-
tion, Department of Interior, headed by Robert F. Herd-
man, of Pueblo, Colorado, arrived in Beirut last month.
They are technicians in hydroelectric power, irrigation,
and reclamation. They are cooperating with the Gov-
ernment of Lebanon in surveying the 12.j-mile-long valley
of the Litani River.

This worlj is of prime importance in a country only
4,000 square miles in extent (about the size of Connecti-
cut) but with a population of 1,200,000 persons. Irriga-
tion, reclamation, and hydroelectric power together can
do much to increase both agricultural and industrial pro-
duction and raise the standard of living of the people.

The contract witli the American University of Beirut
means the establishment of a training center for students
from all the Arab states. The trainees are chosen by
their Governments and approved jointly by the University
and the Point 4 mission in Beirut. They must agree to
spend at least a year in the public service of their coun-
tries, after completing their cour.ses in the University.
The 118 students graduated yearly will form a nucleus of
experts and of teachers for the further spreading of
technical knowledge.

More than two-thirds of Lebanon's people live
on farms, and agriculture forms the principal sup-
port of the country. Fruits and garden products
are grown in quantities sufficient for the needs of
the people. Large quantities of cereals must be
imported. Development of the Litani River Val-
ley would bring more land into production and
would supply the power and irrigation for agri-
culture, industry, and sanitation work.

Dr. Bennett also announced the approval of
project requests for personnel to operate four
experimental laboratories to study improvement
in the selection of seeds, protection of jDlants
against disease and pests, increasing the number
of pedigreed livestock, introduction of plants of
economic value, augmenting tlie cooperative
movement, and the preparation of agricultural
statistics. American technicians will be assigned
to Lebanon in the fields of soil chemistry, plant
protection, fruit growing, farm mechanics, geo-
physics, agricultural cooperatives, marketing, ani-
mal and poultry husbandry, fisheries, forage crops,
and land taxation.

June 78, 195?

979

Organizing for Peace

iy Thomas D. Cabot

Director for International Security Affairs ^

It would have been pleasant to come to Tufts
today with some thoughts of new horizons and to
encourage those of you who are graduating to
work at the exciting problems of pioneering a
bold, new world. But you and I know that to-
day's horizons are cloudy and the future uncer-
tain. Those of you who will shortly enter the
armed services need no reminder that our nation
and the other free nations of the world face tre-
mendous problems which take precedence over
our usual activities.

I do not want to imply that the days of pioneer-
ing are over. Nor do I wish to suggest that the
kind of civilization we have now is good enough,
or that the members of this graduating class will
have no opportunity to improve it. I only wish
to point out that there are certain grim realities
which we must face before we can turn our atten-
tion to anything else. Our first task is to save our
existing civilization.

You are aware of the present threat. We are
confronted by a nation which makes no secret
of its intent to dominate the entire world or of its
faith in the inevitability of its victory. This na-
tion, in pursuing its aggressive designs, does not
restrict itself to any single method or tactic. It
uses every trick in the books. It maintains the
largest army on earth and threatens its neighbors
with militai-y destruction, while at the same time
posing as a champion of peace. It seeks to under-
mine existing governments by political subversion
and economic sabotage. It appeals to the legiti-
mate aspirations of peoples in all lands for an
improvement in social conditions, for freedom
from economic tyranny, for national independ-
ence— and, having gained their allegiance,
promptly subjects them to a tyranny and slavery
many times worse than that which they sought to
escape. Finally, it has now proved that, when
other methods fail and when the circumstances
seem a))propiiate, it is willing to resort to direct
military aggression.

A few years ago, in discussions of the Soviet

' Address before Tufts College at Medford, Mass., on
June 10 and released to the press on the same date.

980

timetable, 1952 and 1953 were generally regarded
as the critical years. These years once seemed a
long way off ; now they are upon us. The Soviets
are quickening the pace of their aggressive prepa-
rations ; they are growing more reckless, more im-
patient, less subtle. It is already later than we
think.

Our Two Major Tasks

Today, we Americans and our friends and al-
lies throughout the world face two fundamental
tasks. The first is to achieve and maintain peace,
if peace is at all possible. The second is simply
to survive.

Let us not regard lightly our first aim — the aim
of maintaining peace. The entire program of our
Government has been built around the principle
that peace is both possible and infinitely desirable.
At the same time, let no one make the mistake of
believing that the American people are afraid to
fight, or that we will accept peace at any price.
Our enemies, especially, should avoid the fatal
error of believing that our desire to avoid the sac-
rifice and destruction of war means that we are
"soft" or unwilling to defend ourselves.

Our desire for peace is based upon our funda-
mental respect for the well-being of individual
human beings and our knowledge that another
world war would be more devastating and more
terrible than anything the world has ever known.
We know that there are millions of men now liv-
ing who will die if war is forced upon us. Cities
will be utterly wiped from the face of the earth,
families will be broken, children will be left home-
less. These things may be unimportant to the
men in the Kremlin, but they are important to us.
Therefore, so long as there exists a reasonable hope
for an honorable peace, we must make the neces-
sary effort.

But, if the men in the Kremlin cannot bo per-
suaded that war will be as destructive for them as
for ourselves— if they insist on offering us no
choice except war or surrender— wo will not choose

Department of State BuUetin

surrender. Nor will we choose the gradual sur-
render, the creeping surrender, i-epi-esented by ap-
peasement, by giving up our allies, by permitting
the piecemeal conquest of the free world. Our
primary aim is peace, but an even more basic aim
is survival. We pray that the Soviet imperialists
will not force us to choose between these aims, but
if they do, we have left no doubt as to what our
choice will be.

The problem of survival today is at once mili-
tary, economic, and political. It is a problem for
science, for ethics, for religion, and even for the
arts. It is a problem of Europe, of Asia, of
Africa, of the Americas, and of every area of
the globe. In hard, cold, practical terms, the
problem of survival today is a problem of
strength — the total strength of the free world
against the total strength of the Soviet slave world.

Fortunately, it is possible for us to pursue our
two major aims — peace and survival — along the
same road. We have come to realize that strength
is both the best deterrent to a Soviet war and the
only remedy if M'ar is forced upon us. Several
experiences we have had in the last few years
helped us to come to this conclusion. The strug-
gle in Greece, for example. Communist-inspired
guerrilla warfare in Greece came to an end when
the Greek Government, with United States aid,
showed the strength to put it down. The Berlin
blockade is another example. When the Soviet
rulers saw they could not defeat our airlift, the
blockade was abandoned.

Strength, the Critical Factor

There is no question but that strength is the
critical factor in the Kremlin's aggressive designs.
The Soviet rulers well know that their ambitions
to conquer the world depend on the strength they
can commandeer, and they have used and will use
every ruthless method and technique to get the
resources and the manpower they think is neces-
sary.

In the free world, we cannot build strength that
way. We must meet the threat of a ruthless dic-
tatorship through volvuitary cooperative action
consistent with our philosophy of freedom. We
must seek new allies while retaining and strength-
ening those we have. It is a job which will re-
quire great skill and wisdom. Our social and
economic policies must appeal to those who still
control their own destiny. We must attract
strength by the appeal of our moral position.

Strength which is voluntarily mustered, and
supported by strong moral convictions among all
the contributing peoples, is a kind of strength
that no slave society can produce. The Soviet
rulers, in foi'cing their subjects into aggressive
action, destroy the most important component of
strength — the will of the people. Wliat we need
to meet Soviet strength is a greater sense of
urgency and more rapid action in the free world.

Soviet rulers and their puppets dominate about
800 million people — about one-third of the world
population. Tnat is their greatest potential
strength. There are roughly half as many people
in the United States and free Europe, but these
400-some million people are the most highly skilled
and the most productive in the world.

You all know how we lead the world in indus-
trial production and how we, in the United States,
are rapidly expanding our basic capacity while, at
the same time, converting a considerable part of
it to producing the weapons needed for defense.
Europe, too, is expanding its production. To-
gether, we have a capacity that far overtops any-
thing the Soviet world can produce.

Steel is one of the most important measures of
strength in either a peacetime or a wartime econ-
omy. Last year, the United States and free Eu-
rope produced more than four times as much crude
steel as the Soviet Union and its European satel-
lites. The use of electric power is another good
measure of strength. The United States and free
Europe turned out five times as much electric
energy last year as Russia and her satellites.

We are fortunate. The free world has many
resources and skills at its disposal and it has the
moral and spiritual values to hold firm and in-
spire support. The problem is to convert our great
assets into the only kind of strength which is an
effective deterrent to attack. It has not yet been
jjossible, either here or in Europe, to use our steel,
electric power, and industrial productivity of all
sorts for tanks and planes and guns to the full
extent needed to meet our present danger. Here
in the United States, despite the lessons of Korea,
we are, even today, devoting to defense a far
smaller percentage of our abundant income than
is extracted by the Soviets from the austere econ-
omy of Russia. In Western Europe, productive
capacity has been devoted to rehabilitation from
the disasters of the last war and to building a
viable economy. Now with our Marshall Plan
aid skillfully administered, the people of free
Europe have resolutely rebuilt their industries,
and production already exceeds that of prewar
times. But this capacity must and can be con-
verted in larger part to the production of weapons
needed for rearmament.

In the same way, the peoples of Europe have
undertaken to convert their human and moral re-
sources into active and effective armed forces.
We know that they can do this. Prior to 1939,
the countries west of the iron curtain had raised
and equipped armies considerably larger than
those now contemplated for its defense, and had
done so without outside help and without destroy-
ing the economic foundations of their societies. I
have little doubt that they could do the same to-
day, again without outside help, provided they
were assured of having enough time to complete
the task.

June 18, I 95 I

981

The Element of Time

But time is tlie key problem. During the course
of World War II, the armies of many free
European countries almost ceased to exist, making
it necessary to rebuild them from scratch. More-
over, the economic devastation of the war and the
occupation, and the slow and painful process of
economic recovery, made it extremely difficult for
these countries to initiate an adequate rearma-
ment program. Meanwhile, the Soviet Union,
disregarding all human values and giving full
priority to erecting a mighty military machine on
the foundations of slave labor, gained an enor-
mous and almost overwhelming military advan-
tage.

It is clear, therefore, why the free peoples of
Europe need our help. Given time, there can
be no doubt that these peoples can defend them-
selves. It is our task to help them get started —
to use our dollars to buy the precious time they
need. Once the European defense effort is fully
under way, we can expect ever greater reliance on
their own resources and facilities, and less and
less dependence on United States aid.

From a purely selfish standpoint, this is the
cheapest and perhaps the only way that we Ameri-
cans can protect ourselves. This does not mean
that we expect the Europeans to fight our battles
for us, any more than it means that we propose to
fight the Europeans' battles for them. It means
simply that we have recognized our mutual de-
pendence and realize that it is good business on
our part to help the free Europeans develop the
strength to defend themselves. To give the needed
impetus and to avoid the long disheartening delay
which Europe would have to face if it attempted
its own rearmament without our help, we have
been sending quantities of defense weapons, equip-
ment, and supplies across the Atlantic during the
past year, and the need for this mutual defense
aid during the coming year is frankly as great.
The bulk of Europe's need right now is for this
kind of assistance — tanks and guns and weapons
and supplies. But I do not want to underestimate
the need also for spiritual and moral help. We all
have to know that we can depend on each other,
that we are in this together, and that we have
equal determination to see it through.

Other areas, too, need our help. In Asia, the
Middle East, and Africa, people have lived for cen-
turies amidst great natural riches of the earth,
and yet lived in poverty and disease, in a vicious
circle of circumstances which did not allow them
to benefit from their resources. In the last few
years, a great change has come over many of
these areas. New means of communication have
awakened people to new possibilities. Many of
them have won political independence, and have
established governments determined to win a new
life for their peoples. In many of these areas,
they do not have tlie technical wherewithal to
break through the circle that has claimed them for

so long. They need technical help. They need
the technical knowledge that the United States can
supply.

How To Withstand Communist Pressure

Given a chance, there is every reason to believe
that these people can conquer their problems and
become stable and secure members of the free
world, contributing to its strength and to its se-
curity. The Soviet rulers have their eyes on these
areas, and on the manpower and strategic resources
they would gain through capturing them. They
are putting pressure on them now, and they will
continue to put pressure on them to try to force
them into the Soviet world. The Soviet rulers
would like to convince the people of Asia and the
Near East that the better life they want will flow
from Communist control. They are nsir^ every
propaganda device to put this lie across. Tliey see
in Asiiij in the Near East, and in Africa a means
to multiply their power.

To withstand the Communist pressure, these
areas need support. The particular problems
vary from area to area. In some places, military
aid is needed. Technical aid is needed almost
everywhere. Some economic aid is needed. They
need this help to make their efforts toward eco-
nomic development successful, and only if they are
successful in their quest for independence and
economic security will they become stable com-
ponents of a free society. Our own security de-
pends on the success they meet.

With Latin America, we have long had co-
operative arrangements to build the hemispheric
solidarity and friendship that insure mutual se-
curity ; and we have been able to see the effects of
the technical aid we have given. Over a period
of years, the Latin American governments have
made a great deal of progress in establishing new
economic standards and new production levels.
They still have many stubborn problems. They
still need technical and economic aid. They still
have problems of poverty, education, health and
social services. And they have a great deal to
do in building their defense. We are close neigh-
bors— and our security is very much interde-
pendent. Where we can help them, we are only
helping ourselves.

The problems of these people all over the world
are our problems as well as theirs. Where they
fail to solve them, the free world loses strength;
and wherever and whenever the free world loses
strength, the men in the Kremlin move to accom-
plisli their ambitions.

We cannot afford to go it alone. The path of
isolation leads neither to peace nor to victory. It
leads at best to a bleak existence in a storm cellar
under attack by an insuperable power bont on
world domination. We know that Russia prefers
to obtain its aims without war. At the same time,
we know that Russia will risk war if war appears
to offer the best chance of success, and we know

982

Deparfment of Sfafe Bulletin

that its williiifjiiess to take this risk may increase
now that our monopoly of atomic weapons is
ended. If, while there is still time, we can create
new deterrents, barriers to easy expansion, we can
keep the balance of power and expect peace and
a reasonable degree of prosperity.

Coordinating the Aid Programs

An understandinfj of our danger has led to the
establishment of the Marshall Plan, our participa-
tion in the North Atlantic Treaty, our Mutual
Defense Assistance Program, and the Point 4 Pro-
gram for technical assistance.

Because of the interdependence of these pro-
grams, and because of the need for coordination
and flexibility in them, we are now proposing to
combine our military, economic, and technical aid
into one program — a Mutual Security Program —
for the coming year. Under this proposed pro-
gram, we would provide to other free nations the
weapons, materials, economic and technical help
they need. The Mutual Security Program is not
new. It is essentially a continuation of the kind of
help we have already given, but it coordinates our
efforts and adapts them to the global problem. It
includes provisions for strengthening our partici-
pation in the United Nations so that that organi-
zation can continue to work for collective security.

The Mutual Security Program is a frank recog-
nition of the fact that our problem of survival
involves every area of the world and involves the
building of integrated economic, military, po-
litical, and moral strength.

The estimated cost of the program during the
next year is 8% billion dollars. This is an amount
that is economical in comparison to what the tax-
payers of the United States would have to spend
if we ignored the need now. It is actually an in-
vestment in the resources and resourcefulness of
other peoples, from which the dividends will be
eminently worthwhile. It means that Americans
will be somewhat more restricted in spending and
in consumption of civilian goods, but we will still
be living on a far higher standard than any other
peoples in the world. In terms of the security
we get, it is as solid an investment as the American
people can make and if it protects our right to live
the way we choose, its true value will be
immeasurable.

I hope that these sober thoughts I am leaving
with you do not prove discouraging. There is
every reason to be encouraged when a dangerous
situation is being met with boldness and courage.
We have shown a capacity for extraordinary bold-
ness and courage in meeting the dangers that have
come before. I am confident the iVmerican people
will show the same strength again. There is some-
thing about the way of life we have chosen that
gives us the initiative and the enterprise to survive
the pitfalls of the dynamic woi-ld in which we live.

Korean Envoy Presents Credentials

[Released to the press June 6]

The translation of the remarks of the newly appointed
Ambassador of Korea, Dr. You Chan Tang, upon the occa-
sion of the presentation of his letter of credence follows.

Mr. President: It is my great pleasure to de-
liver into your hands this letter of credence of the
President of the Republic of Korea, Dr. Syngman
Rhee, accrediting me as Korean Ambassador Ex-
traordinary and Plenipotentiary to the United
States of America.

This ceremony today is further evidence of the
bonds of sympathy and understanding existing
between our two countries.

I come to you, Mr. President, from my embat-
tled country where American troops and other
forces of the United Nations are engaged with my
countrymen, in resistance to the common foe of all
free mankind — armed Communist aggression.

The people of Korea and the Government of
Korea are proud to testify to the great debt they
owe the people of the United States and you, sir,
their President. For it was your inspired leader-
ship which summoned the United Nations to as-
sist the Republic of Korea in repelling the law-
less Communist invader and brought the free
world to a consciousness of the danger confront-
ing it.

Since then, it also has been your leadership and
farsighted statesmanship which has produced the
mobilization of this nation's resources and the
rearming of the free world for defense and the
insurance of peace. The Republic of Korea is
anxious to play its full part in this program and
my Government feels it can make a most substan-
tial contribution if adequate arms or the manufac-
turing means thereof are made available to it.

Please be assured, Mr. President, of our desire
to cooperate with your great people and Govern-
ment to the fullest extent in your proclaimed aim
to preserve and protect liberty and justice and
democracy.

The President's reply to the remarks of the Ambassador
of Korea follows.

Mr. Ambassador : It is with sincere pleasure that
I accept from you, the Ambassador Extraordinary
and Plenipotentiary of the Government of the
Republic of Korea to the United States, this Let-
ter of Credence from your President, Dr. Syng-
man Rhee.

This ceremony is indeed evidence of the con-
tinued and lasting friendship which exists be-
tween our two countries. The cementing of the
bonds of this friendship and understanding has
been one of the most gratifying of the milestones
marking the road to the solidarity of the free
world.

Mindful of its own history and traditions of

June 18, I95I

983

liberty, the United States of America has been
deeply impressed by the determination of the
Korean people to fulfill their aspirations to unity
and independence. The many nations throughout
the world which have sought the welfare of your
country were greatly heartened by the progress
made by the ETorean people under a government
of their own choosing. This very progress repre-
sented to Communist imperialism a threat to its
program for the domination of Asia and undoubt-
edly influenced its decision to strike without warn-
ing at the very existence of the Korean nation.

The response of your countrymen to this aggres-
sion at once provided clear proof of their dedica-
tion to the defense of those high principles upon
which the Republic of Korea has been founded
and evoked an echoing and immediate response
within the United Nations. The world will long
remember what is happening in your country, and
those who, anywhere, now struggle under oppres-
sion cannot fail to find hope and inspiration in
the example of Korea.

United by the ties of a common understanding
and a common purpose, I am confident that our
two nations, together with the other freedom-
loving peoples, will attain for Korea that peace
with justice to which we are all dedicated and for
which we fight. The American people are not
unmindful of the incalculable hardships and suf-
fering being endured by the Korean nation in its
struggle for survival. They are both anxious and
willing to assist in the alleviation of this suffering
and in repairing the ravages of this cruel war.

On behalf of the people and the Government of
the United States, may I convey to you, Mr. Am-
bassador, my deep appreciation for the expres-
sions of understanding and friendship which you
so generously have brought to me from the Korean
people and their Government. I offer my sincere
good wishes for your success in the performance
of the important mission which has been en-
trusted to you. You may be assured that the
Government of the United States and its officials
are prepared to cooperate with you in every way.

Communiques Regarding Korea
to tlie Security Council

The headquarters of the United Nations Com-
mand has transmitted communiques regarding
Korea to the Secretary-General of the United Na-
tions under the following United Nations docu-
ment numbers: S/2116, May 4; S/2128, May 8;
S/2129, May 8; S/2133, May 8; S/2134, May 2:
S/2144, May 10 ; S/2146, May 11 ; S/2147, May 14 ;
S/2149, May 15; S/2154, May 17; S/2155,
May 17 ; S/2156, May 18 ; S/2159, May 21 ; S/2160,
May 21 ; S/2162, May 22 ; S/2163, May 22 ; S/2165,
May 23; S/2166, May 23; S/2169, May 24.

Korean Memoriai Day Observed
for U.N. War Dead

On Mnji SI, the United Nations Department of Public
Information announced that the foUomng information has
been received fr.om the United Nations Commission for
the Unification and Rehabilitation of Korea (Uncuek)
at Tokyo.

Men of the United Nations forces who lost their
lives in Korea in the fight against aggression were
honored on May 30 in a Memorial Day service at a
rain-drenched United Nations cemetery near
Pusan.

Lt. Gen. John B. Coulter, newly appointed per-
sonal representative to Uncurk of the Com-
mander in Chief of United Nations forces, spoke
briefly in memory of fallen United Nations fight-
ing men and placed a wreath before an American
flagstaff directly behind a United Nations flag.
Ambassador A. H. C. Gieben of the Netherlands,
Uncuek Chairman, and Andrew Cordier on behalf
of the United Nations Secretai-y-General, placed
wreaths at a United States honor plot in the 15-
country cemetery. Mr. Cordier, Executive Assist-
ant to Secretary-General Trygve Lie, and Dra-
goslav Protitch, Principal Director of United
Nation's Department of Security Council Affairs,
are visiting Korea as part of their tour of United
Nations missions in the field.

Syngman Rhee, President of the Republic of
Korea, American Ambassador Jolin Muccio, and
representatives of all United Nations army, navy,
and air units also attended the military ceremony
which closed when taps were sounded by two army
buglers and echoed back by others at the far end
of the cemetery.

Cambodian Minister Arrives in U.S.

The first Cambodian Minister to the United
States, Nong Kimny, arrived in Washington on
June 4. The Minister made the following
remarks :

I wish to express the joy which I feel upon my arrival
in Washington where I shall have the pleasure and
duty to estal)lish for the first time a Legation of the
Royal Government of Cambodia in the United States
of America.

I wish to thank the Department of State for the cordial
welcome which it has accorded me upon arrival on
American soil. I thank also the French missions at
New York and Washington for their expressions of
courtesy.

In such an atmosphere of confidence and friendship
my mission can begin only in a most favorable manner.
Independent Cambodia now entering into the family of
nations, desires the peace and security which will per-
mit, th.nnks to American economic and military assist-
ance, as well as to the support of France and the
French Union, the improvement of her national economy
and the consolidation of her independence.

Designated as first Minister Plenipotentiary of the
Kingdom of Cambodia at Washington, I feel honored in-
deed, and will do all in my power to serve the cause of
friendship between Cambodia and the United States.

984

Department of State Bulletin

<'Amerika" Popularity of Concern to U.S.S.R.

[Released to the press June 91

Recent Soviet press attacks on the Depart-
ment of State's Russian-language magazine
Amet'ika are new evidence of its strong appeal for
the Soviet people. Assistant Secretary Edward
W. Barrett said today,

The Soviet articles — two witliiu the last week — offer
proof the magazine is continuing to make Itself felt
among Soviet peoples and that the Kremlin considers It
necessary to counteract the true picture of the United
States presented in Amerika.

These attacks merely corroborate a fact already proved
by Soviet obstruction to Amerika's distribution — that the
Soviet peoples want to read Ame7-ika, but the PoUtburo
does not want them to.

The attacks in question were a half-page article
June 4 in Pravda, the leading newspaper of the
Soviet Union, and a three-quarter page attack in
the Literary Gazette on June 2. These attacks
centered on a recent Amerika magazine lead arti-
cle on wages and prices in the United States which
was i^lanned by the magazine's staff and the United
States Embassy in Moscow to correct Soviet mis-
conceptions about life in the United States.

The American Embassy in Moscow has now been
requested to communicate with the Soviet distri-
bution agency, saying it is obvious that the read-
ing public in the U.S.S.R. would welcome a wider
opportunity to see the magazine and to judge for
themselves the accuracy of such criticisms as those
in Pravda and the Literary Gazette.

On this basis, the Department is again urging
the distributor to live up to its clear obligation
and distribute the full 50,000 copies of each issue
as called for by the existing agreement.

The Amerika article attacked by the Soviet
Press appeared in issue No. 46. Titled "Wages
and Prices in the United States, 1939-1950," the
article emphasized that the average standard of
living in the United States has risen 40 percent
since the beginning of World War II.

The magazine said that perhaps the most strik-
ing feature of this new prosperity is that it is
more widely and evenly shared than ever before
and that there are fewer rich, fewer poor, and
more people in the middle. Tliis in turn has
broadened mass markets, thus giving a new sta-

bility and strength to the economic system of the
United States.

Charts developed by the magazine's art staff
and based primarily on ^surveys by the United
States Departments of Conomerce and Labor show
the relative movement of wages and prices from
1939 to 1950; number of families in the different
income groups; growth of mass luxury income,
as evidenced by increased consumption of such
articles as automobiles, refrigerators, and tele-
vision sets.

In their efforts to counteract this picture, the
Soviet critics resorted to such extreme assertions
as the following from Pravda:

Almost three-quarters of the population of the United
States constitute indigent masses who are either starving
or under threat of starvation . . .

In a similar vein, the Literary Gazette declared :

Seventy percent of all Americans are deprived of
minimum living standards.

The Pravda article also stated that Amerika
gives readers "America in saccharine sj'rup" which
causes only "laughter and nausea," and the Lit-
erary Gazette stated that "from a mile away it
smells of the rottenness of an unpardonable lie."

Pravda's leading critic, David Zaslavsky, called
Amerika "miserable" and accused it of telling
fairly tales of wages and prices to the Soviet peo-
ple who, he says, "know no poverty or unemploy-
ment, but only grandiose peaceful construction."

The current attack on the magazine is regarded
by the Department as a part of the campaign by
which the Soviets are endeavoring to "jam" the
magazine as well as VOA broadcasts to the
U.S.S.R. The fact that the Department has suc-
ceeded since 1945 in distributing this official
medium of American information in the Soviet
Union is the result of the persistent efforts of three
successive United States Ambassadors to Moscow.
The original agreement to distribute 10,000 copies
of a United States Russian-language publication
in the U.S.S.R. was the result of negotiations
carried on by Ambassador Harriman with the
then Foreign Minister Molotov in 1944. Two years
later Ambassador W. Bedell Smith reopened ne-

June 18, I 95 I

985

gotiations and gained a commitment from the
Soviet Government to distribute 50,000 copies.

Since its inception, tlie magazine has enjoyed a
wide popularity with Soviet readere. Even in-
dividual pages with color illustrations sold for
as much as a dollar.

This popularity is obviously a source of concern
to the Soviet authorities. But until 1950 official
attacks on the magazine were limited to occasional
press comments. In January 1950, however, the
Soviet authorities made a direct move toward
strangling the magazine. Although the distribu-
tor had regularly reported for 5 years previously
that Amenka had sold out every issue, notification
was received that "sales had dropped" from 50,-
000 copies per month to approximately 25,000, and
that henceforth "unsold" copies would be returned
to the United States Embassy in Moscow.

Although the Soviet "jamming" of distribution
of Ainerika has thus reduced its distribution, the
Department is standing firm on its agreement with
the Soviet Goverimient and, accordingly, is con-

tinuing to deliver 50,000 copies a month to the
Soviet distributor.

The Department is doing this because it believes
it can insist on observance of the agreement only
if it is delivering the full quota called for by the
agreement and because a reduction in the number
delivered would inevitably result in a reduction
in the number offered for sale.

Returned copies are not wasted, but are utilized
to reach the large Russian-reading groups in other
areas of the world, such as Germany, Austria, etc.

The present circulation of 25,000 surpasses, of
course, Amerika's original distribution of 10,000
copies. Even at the latter figure the magazine,
as the sole United States publication directed to
the Soviet people, was considered very valuable,
since it reached at least 100,000 Soviet readers
(estimates vary from 10 to 20 readers per copy).
But the Department will continue to press for a
restoration of the long-established figui'e of 50,000
copies distributed monthly.

Protest to U.S.S.R. on Killing of American Military Policeman

[Released to the press June fi]

The following is the teat of a note protesting the recent
killing of an American military policeman on duty in the
international sector of Vienna by two nnknoipti Soviet
soldiers. The note was delivered to the Soviet Acting
Foreign Minister, Valerian A. Zorin, hy the United States
Ambassador at Moscow, Admiral Alan O. Kirk, on June
i, 1951.

The Ambassador of the United States of
America presents his compliments to the Minister
for Foreign Affairs of the Union of Soviet Social-
ist Republics and, under instructions, has the
honor to invite the attention of the Government
of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics to the
death of an American military policeman m
Vienna on May 4, 1951.

Early on that date two United States military
police were on patrol in the International District
of Vienna in accordance with accepted quadri-
partite procedure for troops of the element exer-
cising interallied command. When these police
endeavored to establish identity and status of two
armed Soviet soldiers behaving suspiciously, the
latter opened fire without provocation and killed
Corporal Paul J. Gresens. Immediately after the
shooting the United States Provost Marshal at-
tempted to report the tragedy to the Soviet Pro-
vost Marshal in an effort to expedite apprehension
of the assailants and launch at once joint exami-
nation by the American and Soviet authorities of
the evidence then avaihible. Neither the Soviet
member of the International Patrol nor the officer

on duty at the Soviet Kommandatura would as-
sist in establishing this important liaison.

The proposal was advanced early the same day
by the United States city commander to the Soviet
city commander for a joint United States-Soviet
investigation into the circumstances with the dual
purpose of establishing responsibility for the oc-
currence and adopting measures to prevent pos-
sible repetition. This request, which was made in
accordance with prior practice of interallied com-
mand, was reported by the United States High
Commissioner to the Soviet High Commissioner
on the same day, and subsequently reaffirmed by
letter on May 7. In his reply to this communica-
tion May 9 Soviet High Commissioner rejected
a proposal for a joint investigation on gi-ounds
that the Soviet soldiers themselves had been at-
tacked without reason. The Soviet High Com-
missioner refused to participate in a joint investi-
gation of the 11 witnesses who testified that the
Soviet soldiers fired first. He refused to consider
other available evidence or to make available for
joint questioning the two Soviet soldiers involved
in the killing.

After careful considei-ation of all available evi-
dence the United States Government is convinced
that Corp. Gresens was the victim of a sudden at-
tack while engaged in the correct execution of his
official duties. Refusal of tlie Soviet officials in
Vienna to permit joint inquiry supports this con-
clusion.

986

Department of State Bulletin

The United States Government holds the mem-
bers of the Soviet armed forces involved in the
shooting responsible — either through deliberate
intent or through negligence — of the death of Cor-
poral Gresens and considers that the Soviet High
Commissioner by his actions has condoned this
crime. The United States Government requests,
therefore, that the individual or individuals re-
sponsible be duly punished and that appropriate
indemnification be made to the bereaved family
of the slain soldier, as required by every con-
sideration of humane treatment and customary
usage between nations.

Consular Convention With U. K. Signed

Apart from those deletions, the deletion of
references to Newfoundland and Newfoundland
citizens (thereby eliminating the necessity for the
exchange of notes), and the deletion from the
protocol of the names of certain territories under
British jurisdiction, the only substantive changes
are the deletion of paragraph (3) from article 5
of the convention as signed in 1949 and the deletion
from article 29 (new art. 28) of the reference
to provisions in the 1899 property convention be-
tween the United States and the TInited Kingdom.

With a view to facilitating action toward ratifi-
cation, tlie newly signed convention and protocol
will be submitted to the Senate as soon as possible
for consideration in place of the 1949 instruments.

[Released to the press on June 7]

On June 6, 1951, Dean Acheson, Secretary of
State, and Sir Oliver Shewell Franks, British
Ambassador in Washington, signed a consular
convention, with an accompanying protocol of
signature, between the United States and the
United Kingdom of Gi'eat Britain and Northern
Ireland.

This convention and the accompanying protocol
are intended to be substituted for the consular
convention and protocol of signature signed at
Washington on February 16, 1949, and the ex-
change of notes of October 12, 1949, relating to
the nonapplication of the convention to New-
foundland and Newfoundland citizens. The con-
vention, protocol, and exchange of notes of 1949
were transmitted to the United States Senate with
the President's message of January 9, 1950, for
advice and consent to ratification and were printed
in a Senate document.'

In view of questions which have arisen, since
the convention and related documents of 1949
were transmitted to the Senate, concerning the
interpretation and application of certain provi-
sions of the convention, and in view of the fact
that appropriate legislative action taken in a
number of territories under British jurisdiction
has made it possible to amend the protocol so as
to delete therefrom the names of those territories,
the Governments of the two countries considered
the desirability of reformulating the convention
and protocol and substituting the new instruments
for the 1949 instruments.

The newly signed convention differs principally
from the 1949 convention in that article 18 of the
latter, relating to the authority of consular officers
in connection with the administration of estates,
is deleted. This entailed also the deletion of
references to that article 18, including such refer-
ences in article 2 (3) (b) and (c) and article 20.

' The text of the convention and the protocol are printed
in Documents and State Papers, March-April 1949, p. 717;
the report b.v the Secretary of State, in Bulletin of Jan.
30, 1050, p. 175 ; also see, S. Ex. A, 81st Cong., 2d sess.

Procedure for Filing War
Claims With Belgium

[Released to the press June 7]

American nationals seeking indemnification
from Belgium for war damage to private property
have until September 2, 1951, to file claims with
the proper Belgian authorities.

On March 12, 1951, the United States and Bel-
gium agreed to grant reciprocal treatment to the
nationals of the two nations for indemnification
of war damage.

The Department has been informed that the
agreement was officially published in Brussels on
Jime 2 and that a 90-day limit was set for the
filing of claims.

Reciprocal national treatment is given for in-
demnification of war damage sustained by Ameri-
can nationals in Belgium and by Belgian nationals
within the territorial limits of the United States,
including Hawaii and Alaska. In order to receive
Belgian national treatment, the interested persons
must qualify as American nationals, both on the
date of the war damage and on March 12, 1951.

The benefits are extended also to persons who
have the status of American nationals only on one
of the above-mentioned dates and that of a na-
tional either of Belgium or one of the other coun-
tries with which Belgium has concluded a recip-
rocal agreement concerning war damage on the
other date.

The Department is informed that the Belgian
Government has concluded reciprocal agi-eements
with Gi-eat Britain and Canada.

American nationals seeking indemnification for
war damage sustained in Belgium may file their
claims with the Ministry of Reconstxuction, 46
rue de la Loi, Brussels, Belgium. Appropriate
forms for filing a claim may be obtained at any
Belgian Consulate or the Ministry of Reconstruc-
tion. Belgian Consulates are located in New
York, Chicago, Boston, San Francisco, New Or-
leans, and Dallas, Texas.

June 78, 1957

987

Persons who already have war damage claims
on file with the Belgian authorities are not re-
quired to make new applications at this time.

Execution of Landsberg War Criminals

[Released to the press June 7]

Following is the text of a press release issued today hy
High Commissioner McCloy and General Handy on the
execution of the seven war criminals at Landsberg prison.

United States High Commissioner John J. Mc-
Cloy and Gen. Thomas T. Handy, Commander in
Chief, EuooM, jointly announced today that the
death sentences of seven war criminals in Lands-
berg prison have been carried out.

The war criminals were executed by hanging at
Landsberg prison today between the hours of
12 : 00 midniglit and 2 : 30 a.m. The sentences were
carried out after appeals had been made to and
denied by the United States federal courts.

Those executed were Oswald Pohl, Otto Ohlen-
dorf, Erich Naumann, Paul Blobel, Werner
Braune, Hans Schmidt, and George Schallermair.

These seven were the last prisoners at Lands-
berg prison under death sentence for war crimes
and the carrying out of these sentences marks the
last executions to be held at Landsberg for war
crimes committed during the war.

Pohl, Ohlendorf, Naumann, Blobel, and Braune
were sentenced by the military tribunals at Niirn-
berg established under the provisions of military
government ordinance No. 7. Pohl was sentenced
in the concentration camp case while the others
were convicted in the Einsatzgruppen case.
These sentences were reviewed by Mr. McCloy.

Schmidt and Schallermair were sentenced for
war crimes by military government courts which
were established by order of the Theater Com-
mander in October 1946 and which functioned at
Dachau. Their sentences were considered by
General Handy.

Proclamation Signed on Results of
Torquay Tariff Negotiations

On June 4, the Department of State announced
that the President signed on June 2, 1951, a procla-
mation to give effect to the tariff negotiations
undertaken by the United States at Torquay,
England, from September 1950 to April 1951,^
The results of these negotiations were made public
on May 8, 195 1.^

' I'roc. 2029, Ifi Fed. Rcii. .'iSSl.
'BuiXETiN of Miiy 21, 1951, p. 816.

988

Pursuant to procedure provided for in the proc-
lamation the President also signed on June 2 a
letter to the Secretary of the Treasury identifying
concessions in schedule XX (U. S.) to the Torquay
Protocol, which will become effective on June 6,
1951. These are for the most part the concessions
negotiated with the Benelux Customs Union,
Canada, France, and the Dominican Republic,
all of which countries have undertaken to give
effect to their concessions to us on June 6. Fur-
ther letters will be issued giving effect to other
concessions as and wlien other countries with
which we negotiated such concessions undertake
to give effect to the concessions they granted to
the United States.

The proclamation and the letter indicate cer-
tain resultant adjustments in the list of Cuban
products entitled to preferential treatment pur-
suant to the exclusive agreement of October 30,
1947, between the United States and Cuba. In
addition, the proclamation provides that adjust-
ments will be made, effective July 6, 1951, in parts
of three concessions negotiated at Geneva in 1947,
with the result that duties on the products involved
will increase. These products are dyed stencil
silk, dehydrated onion powder, and certain leather
gloves. It announces that, on account of the pro-
vision in the Philippine Trade Act of 1946 pre-
venting the conclusion of a trade agreement with
the Philippines at this time, the United States
has invoked article XXXV of the General Agree-
ment on Tariffs and Trade to prevent the appli-
cation of that agreement between the United
States and the Philippines, which it is expected
will accede to the agi'eement as a result of nego-
tiations at Torquay.

Locust Threat in India To Receive
Point 4 Aid

[Released to the press June 4]

The Governments of the United States and
India signed an agreement on June 2, in New
Delhi, for a cooperative locust-control campaign
under the President's Point 4 Program.

Dr. Henry G. Bennett, Technical Cooperation
Administrator, announced today that United
States planes and experts are going to India to
help repel an invasion of locusts threatening a
75,000 square mile area in Kajputana Province
and neighboring states in northwest India. Two
United States Air Force C-47 planes, no\y in Ger-
many, and three Piper Cubs, now finishing a
successful antilocust spraying operation in Iran,
are being rushed to the threatened area, and will
go into action there by July 1.

Two major food crops, jowar and bajra. are in
danger. Both are types of millet, the staple food
crop for this dry area of northern India. Large

Department of State Bulletin

rops of clover also lie in the path of the locusts.
The loss of these crops would aggravate the food
ihortage conditions already prevalent in India.

Dr. Bennett said that United States Overseas
l\.irlines, a private charter company, wliicli sup-
plied the planes and crews for spraying operations
I 'in Iran, under contract with the Technical Cooper-
ation Administration, will undertake the same
|Work in India.

William B. Ma bee, leading Department of Ag-
riculture expert on grasshopper control, now tech-
nical director of the Point 4 antilocust campaign
in Iran, is expected to join the similar project in
India early in June.

Ten tons of aldrin, the powerful new insecticide
which was used with remarkable success in Iran,
are being shipped to India. Two or three ounces
of the poison, diluted with kerosene or Diesel fuel,
are sufficient to spray an aci'e of land. Aldrin is
produced by Julius Hyman and Company, Den-
ver, and is distributed by the Shell Oil Company.

The Indian Government is providing gi-ound

I crews, landing strips, and transportation for all
members of the Point 4 spraying mission. It will
cooperate in the project through the Indian Min-
istry of Food and Agriculture.

The operation is being carried out under the
Point 4 general agreement signed by the United
States and Indian Governments on December 28,
1950. Other Point 4 projects now underway in
India are in the fields of food supply, agricultural
research, mineral and water development, and
child welfai'e.

Previous experience has shown that the Rajpu-
tana desert is a fertile breeding place of locusts.
Its sandy soil and moisture conditions are ideal
for locust breeding and egg laying. Swanns pro-
duced here during the summer monsoon rains fly
from India to the Middle East where they multi-
ply and migrate further.

Point 4 technicians will repeat the successful
air-spraying methods employed in Iran where the
same desert locust {Schistocerca gregaria) was
destroyed. A Government of India observer in
Iran will return to India to cooperate in the new
I program.

■ Locusts have caused great famines in India,
China, and other countries. The locust, well-
known in Biblical times, is still a periodic threat.
At least 77 countries have been either permanently
infested or frequently invaded. None of the five
continents has escaped this threat.

Point 4 Leaders To Visit U. S.

[Released to the press June 8]

The Teclinical Cooperation Administration an-
nounced on June 8 the names of 15 leading citizens
of India, Pakistan, and 4 Latin American coun-
tries who will spend 2 or 3 months in the United

States, under the Point 4 Program. The purpose
of their visit is to observe American methods of
agriculture, health work, education, industry, pub-
lic administration, and other fields of Point 4 ac-
tivity.

They will be the vanguard of 200 men and women
from 38 countries who are guiding the economic
development of their homelands. This Point 4
project constitutes an expansion of tlie existing
leader program under the Sinith-Mundt Act, with
new emphasis on people responsible, in their own
countries, for Point 4 cooperation with the United
States.

The project is designed to give these leaders a
first-hand impression of the American approach
to technical problems. At the same time, they will
have an opportunity to discuss with professional
leaders here the best ways of adapting new meth-
ods and techniques to their own needs.

Their visits are being planned and their itiner-
aries arranged by the agencies of the United States
Government concerned with their special fields of
interest. They will travel throughout the United
States. Plans already include visits to Boston,
New York, Detroit, Chicago, Denver, New Or-
leans, Atlanta, and the Tennessee Valley. Each
leader will spend about 3 weeks in Washington at
the beginning of the visit.

The first six — all agricultural leaders — are due
to arrive in the United States on June 10. They
are: Dr. Angel Florentin Pena, the Paraguayan
Minister of Agricidture; and a Pakistani Com-
mittee on Agi'icultural Extension Activity con-
sisting of Mohammed Said Hian, Director of
Extension Service, Ministry of Agricultui'e;
Abdul Mubin Chowdhury, Deputy Director of
Agricultural Administration, Ministry of Agri-
culture; Mohammed Husain Sufi, Deputy Secre-
tary, Ministry of Agriculture; Mohammed Amin
Bhatti, Assistant Professor of Animal Husbandry
and Dairying, George V Institute of Agriculture
at Sakrand, and Mrs. A. A. Hussain, Assistant
Registrar of Cooperative Societies for Women in
the Punjab. Their tour is being planned by the
United States Department of Agriculture.

Others expected to arrive during the summer
months, and the agencies responsible for planning
their tours, are :

M. S. Tliacker, Director of the Indian Institute of Science,

Bnnfjalore. (Department of Commerce)
Dr. Eduardo Colcano, Director of the Cartografia Nacional

of the Venezuelan Ministry of Public Works, Caracas.

(Department of Commerce)
Jos6 Antonio Jove, Chief Engineer, Division of Sanitary

Engineering, Venezuelan Ministry of Health, Caracas.

(Federal Security Agency)
Dr. Luis Felipe Vegas, Chief of the Division of Geodesy,

Venezuelan Ministry of Public Works, Caracas.

(U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey)
Federico Ruiz Huidobro, Peruvian Superintendent of

Banks, Insurance Companies and Corporations, Lima.

(Budget Bureau)
Alberto Rodriguez R. Carpi, Assistant Director of the

Peruvian Department of Finance, Lima. (Budget

Bureau)

June 18, 1951

989

Osvaldo Torres Ahumada, Income Tax Consultant, Santi-
ago, Chile. (Internal Revenue Bureau)

Dr. Roberto L. Petit, President of the Paraguayan De-
partment of Lands and Colonization, Asuncion.
(Department of Agriculture)

Zafar Hosain Khan, Cliairman of the Karachi Port
Trust, Pakistan. (Department of Commerce)

Other countries which have been invited to send
leaders in Point 4 fields of activity are Afghanis-
tan, Ceylon, Egypt, Eritrea, Iraq, Iran, Israel,
Jordan, Lebanon, Liberia, Libya, Nepal, Saudi
Arabia, Yemen, Burma, Indochina, Indonesia, the
Philippines, Thailand, Bolivia, Brazil, Colombia,
Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominican Republic, Ecuador,
El Salvador, Haiti, Honduras, Mexico, Nicaragua,
Panama, and Uruguay.

Agricultural Consultants Appointed

Dr. Henry G. Bennett, Technical Cooperation
Administrator, has appointed a seven-member
board of consultants for the food and natural
resources aspects of the Point 4 Program :

Harold B. Allen, Director of Education, Near East
Foundation, N. Y.

Edward J. Bell, Administrator, Oregon Wheat Commis-
sion, Pendleton, Oreg.

Abner Bowen, Farmer and Busines.sman, Delphi, Ind.

John H. Reisner, Executive Secretary, Agricultural Mis-
sions, Inc., N.Y.

J. Stewart Russell, Farm Editor, Des Moines Register,
Des Moines, Iowa.

Rev. L. G. Ligutti, Executive Secretary, Catholic Rural
Life, Des Moines.

William A. Shoenfield, Organization Consultant, Corvallis,
Oreg.

The board met yesterday with Clayton L.
Wliipple, chief of the Point 4 Food and Natural
Resources Division, who explained current Point
4 operations and told of plans for their expansion.
The board also heard from the directors of agi-i-
cultural programs of the Institute of Inter- Ameri-
can Affairs and the Department of Agriculture,
Point 4 agents, and representatives of the Food
and Agriculture Organization of the United Na-
tions and the Organization of American States.

Dr. Bennett stated that the board has been set
up under the Act for International Development,
which stipulated that advice should be sought
from competent authorities outside government.
The Point 4 administrator said he is particularly
plea,sed to obtain the assistance of outstanding
leaders in the field of agriculture, which he con-
siders one of the most important phases of the
Point 4 Program.

The consultants were in continuous session on
June 4 and 5 and will be available, both as a board
and as individuals for consultation as problems
arise. Most of the members have had wide for-
eign experience in fields in which the Point 4 Pro-
gram is active. Their advice should be of gi-eat
value in planning future projects and in evaluat-
ing those in operation.

Point 4 Contract for ,

Water Development in Jordan I

[Released to the press June 6]

The Point 4 Administration has contracted with
the Knappen, Tippetts, and Abbott Engineering i
Company, of New York, to carry out a water de- I
velopment project in the Kingdom of Jordan, at
the request of the Government of that country.

The company will send a team of experts,
headed by Mr. R. D. Gladding, of New York, to i
Jordan to conduct a 6-months demonstration and
training program for the restoration of existing
underground cisterns. The team will also direct
engineering work needed to restore and construct
village reservoirs and small catch basins.

"The training phase of the contract," Techni-
cal Cooperation Administrator Henry G. Bennett
said, "will provide local technicians to carry on
the program as a permanent part of Jordan's eco-
nomic development."

Some four centuries after the time of Christ,
the Roman and Byzantine emperors had cisterns
and small water storage basins constructed in the
district lying east of the River Jordan for the use
of tribesmen and their cattle. The rainfall in this
district seldom exceeds 16 inches annually and
the need for storage facilities was recognized cen-
turies ago. The ancient wells and catch basins
were allowed to deteriorate through neglect until
most of them were filled with silt, vegetation, and
debris or completely disintegrated.

The Government of Jordan requested Point 4
aid in rehabilitating this essential water supply
system. Thirty-nine existing cisterns will be re-
stored, 57 reservoirs will be cleaned and enlarged
and a number of new cisterns, reservoirs, and catch
basins will be constructed.

The Bedouin tribesmen feed their flocks on the
grass whicli flourishes briefly during the rainy
season and until the water holes are dry. Then
they move on to permanent water holes. There
the grass is sparse and overgrazed. As a result,
cattle are scarce and those which survive the rigors
of thirst and hunger provide inferior meat.

When the population pressure on East Jordan
increases as a result of nomadic movements, the
overflow presses into the drier areas east of the
river. In years of low rainfall, this situation
often leads to famine conditions.

The team of Point 4 experts expects to leave
June 17. The rainy season in Jordan starts about
December 1 and it is hoped, by then, trainees will
have the technical knowledge to supervise the con-
struction of catch basins for use in tlie dry season.

While the demonstration and training program
is under way, the American engineei-s also will be
drawing up a plan for long-term water conserva-
tion.

990

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

U.S. Urges New Commission for the
Control of Armaments and Armed Forces

STATEMENT BY FRANK C. NASH
DEPUTY U.S. REPRESENTATIVE'

The working paper which the United States
delegation is formally introducing today, is I
think, cx{)ressed in terms plain enough to carry
their own meaning without the need of detailed
explanation.

What may be desirable, however, is a word of
explanation as to why we think this an appropriate
time for introducing a proposal calling for the
establishment of a new forum in which to go for-
ward with renewed disarmament discussions.

Yesterday, the President of the United States
sent a message to Congress recommending the en-
actment of legislation providing foreign military
and economic assistance in a total amount of 8i/^
billions for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1952.-

Today, the United States delegation is bringing
forward a proposal which has as its aim the de-
velopment of a fresh and invigorated approach to
the problem of disannament.

To many this presents a paradox beyond com-
prehension.

But this paradox is more appai-ent than real.

The program to which President Truman ad-
dressed himself in his message to Congress yester-
day is a program for peace, not war — a program
which the President said he was recommending
to Congress "as another vital step along the road
to real security and lasting peace."

The struggle in Korea has made it plain that the
sole aim and purpose of those membei-s of the
United Nations which are engaged in that strug-
gle is to see to it that the principles of the Charter
are maintained in fullest integrity.

The efTorts of those nations to build their col-

' Made on May 25 before the Committee of Twelve and
released to the press by the U. S. Mission to the United
Nations on the same date. The Committee of Twelve was
established by the General Assembly on December 13,
1950, and is considering the advisability of a merger be-
tween the Atomic Energy Commission and the Commis-
sion for Conventional Armaments. The membership of
the Committee includes the members of the Security
Council plus Canada.

' Bulletin of June 11, 1951, p. 883.

lective strength are motivated solely by the firm
pui-pose to restrain and outlaw aggression.

Those efforts are succeeding. We have good
reason to hope that the resolute stand in Korea of
the forces of peace will make it plain that aggres-
sion is not going to be tolerated. If any would-be
aggressors can be convinced of this determina-
tion without having to go through the terrible
waste and destruction of another world war to
learn the lesson, then we may be approaching the
day when we can get down to the task of putting
an end to this costly business of having to main-
tain ourselves in the status of an armed camp.

In a very practical sense, therefore, our present
efforts toward the achievement of collective secur-
ity against aggression may be setting the stage for
at last making some real progress toward disarm-
ament.

It is the task of this Committee to help set the
stage for this drama to go forward.

It is unfortunate that we have to go through the
costly business of rearming in order to set the
stage.

After World War II, we hoped it might be pos-
sible to set a much simpler stage for a less involved
and protracted action. We hoped then that our
efforts could be restricted to, and concentrated
ui)on, a one act play to achieve some system for the
effective control of atomic energy so as to insure
its employment for purposes of peace rather than
war. It was further hoped that the problem of
disarmament in the related field of armed forces
and nonatomic armaments would find a more or
less automatic solution in the rapid demobiliza-
tion of the allied forces.

That is why we urged as one of the very first
acts of the First General Assembly the establish-
ment of the Atomic Energy Commission. We
thought that the control of atomic energy was the
problem of most pressing importance and that
undivided attention should be devoted to it. We
were then the only nation known to possess the
atomic bomb and, therefore, would hardly be re-
garded as having any selfish aims in pressing for
the development of some workable system under
which we could turn over our atomic resources
and facilities to international ownership and con-
trol.

June 18, 1951

991

As time went on, however, it became clear that
the problem of the reduction and regulation of
armed forces and nonatomic armaments was not
going to be resolved through voluntary demobili-
zation. Accordingly, it was decided to take up the
problem in the United Nations, and for this pur-
pose the Commission for Conventional Arma-
ments was set up — more than a year after the
establishment of the Atomic Energy Commission.
Although the establishment of a separate Com-
mission was strongly opposed by some at the time,
it was the view of most that to assign to the Atomic
Energy Commission the problems of reduction
and regidation of armed forces and nonatomic
armaments would inevitably result in retarding
the very substantial progress which that body was
then making in the development of a plan for the
control of atomic energy.

Events have borne out the wisdom of the de-
cision to leave the Atomic Energy Commission
free to devote its attention exclusively to the
atomic field. The plan of control which the Com-
mission succeeded in developing won the approval
of the great majority of the United Nations in
1948 — an approval which has several times been
reaffirmed, and most recently by the last General
Assembly in its peace-through-deeds resolution of
November 17, 1950.

In the Commission for Conventional Arma-
ments, somewhat less progress has been made, but
the Commission has proceeded through the first two
items of its plan of work ; and during the past year
it has carried on an examination of the problem
of developing an effective system of safeguards
which would insure compliance with an actual
plan of disarmament — item 3 of its plan of work.

In the view of the United States, the work of
the two present Commissions lias proceeded far
enough to demonstrate that it is possible to de-
velop a comprehensive system of armaments con-
trol which would be both safe and practicable.

From the very beginning, it has been recognized
that any system which might ultimately be de-
veloped would have to be a comprehensive one —
that is to say, a system which would embrace all
types of armed forces and extend to all kinds of
weapons and instrumentalities of war. In the
work of the two Commissions throughout the past
several years, this fact has been constantly borne in
mind, and it has been continuously recognized that
at some point it would be both necessary and de-
sirable to bring the efforts of the two Commissions
into closer coordination under a comprehensive
system of control.

In the view of the United States, the work of
the two Commissions has now reached a point
where it is appropriate to consider ways and
means of initiating the requisite coordination and
expansion into a comprehensive system of control.
In proposing the establishment of a new and
consolidated Commission to take over the M'ork
of the two present Commissions, the United

States delegation has in view the further impor-
tant objective of possibly relieving the atmos-
phere of stalemate which has prevailed in the
two Commissions for some time past.

We have, of course, no delusions that an impasse
growing out of such fundamental disagi-eements
as those which have prevailed in the past can be
resolved by the adoption of any merely procedural
device. It is, however, our hope that the demon-
stration by the peace-loving nations of the world
of their determination to stand together, strength-
ened and united in effective opposition against any
further aggression, may lead to a change in some
of these fundamental disagreements. Then, as I
have already said, we may have a chance of getting
ahead with our work toward disarmament. At
that time, in our view, it might prove to be of real
advantage to have available a new and fresh
forum for the pursuit of our objectives. It is to
this end that the United States delegation has in-
troduced this proposal here today.

WORKING PAPER SUBMITTED BY U.S.

U.N. doc. A/AC.50/1
Submitted May 25, 1951

General vieics of the United States with respect to the
coordination of the work of the Atomic Energy Commission
and the Commission for Conventional Armaments

Introduction

The United States believes that comprehensive
plans to include the international control of all
armaments and armed forces should be developed
by the United Nations, and, accordingly, that
present United Nations efforts should be directed
towards the preparation of co-ordinated plans of
control which would make possible with appro-
priate safeguards the regulations, limitation and
balanced reduction of all armaments and armed
forces, including internal security and police
forces. United Nations efforts in the field of
armaments and armed forces have to date been
assigned to two separate bodies, namely the United
Nations Atomic Energy Commission and tlie Com-
mission for Conventional Armaments. Mucli use-
ful work has been accomplished by the two Com-
missions and, in the view of the United States,
the appropriate time has now arrived for bring-
ing the respective efforts of the two Commis-
sions into closer co-ordination through the estab-
lishment of a single commission. In taking over
the functions of the two present Commissions, the
new commission would build upon the work al-
ready done by them. In particular, the United
States believes that the United Nations plan for ■
international control of atomic energy must con- ■
tinue to serve as the basis for the work of the new
connnission in the atomic energy phases of its
work. Nevertheless, the commission should be
empowered to consider any other proposals that

992

Department of State Bulletin

would be no less effective than the existing United
Nations plan.

A. Organization

The United States believes that a new commis-
sion whose primary task would be the development
of plans for the international control of all arma-
ments and armed forces — to be called the Commis-
sion for the Control of Armaments and Armed
Forces — should be established in place of the ex-
isting two Commissions in accordance with the
following terms and provisions :

1. Status. The new commission should be estab-
lished under and report to the Security Council,
which in turn should submit periodic progress re-
ports to the General Assembly.

2. Composition. Membership on the new com-
mission should correspond to the membership of
the Atomic Energy Commission and the Commis-

] sion for Conventional Armaments, and hence
would consist of the members of the Security
Council, plus Canada when Canada is not a mem-
ber of the Security Council.

3. Sub-committees. The new commission
should be expressly authorized to establish such
sub-committees as may be needed in order to carry
out the tasks assigned to it, recognizing that the
differences in the nature of atomic and non-atomic
weapons, as well as in the nature of biological and
other instrumentalities of warfare, require the de-
velopment of varying, but co-ordinated, systems
of regulation and control, specially adapted to
meet the problems peculiar to the different types
of weapons, or instrumentalities.

4. Technical advice. Technical advice should
be provided as necessary by experts appointed by
the member States to assist their representatives.

5. The Secretmiat. The Secretariat of the new
commission should be provided by the Secretary-
General of the United Nations.

6. Relationship to other organs of the United
Nations. As a sub-ordinate organ of the Security
Council, the new commission should have the nor-
mal relationship of such a body to other organs
of the United Nations.

7. Eules of procedure. With appropriate modi-
fications, the rules of procedure of the Atomic
Energy Commission would appear to be adequate
to serve as the rules of procedure of the new com-
mission.

B. Functions

1. The primary task of the new commission
should be to prepare comprehensive and co-ordi-
nated plans for the international control of all
armaments and armed forces, and accordingly,
would provide for the regulation, limitation, and
balanced reduction of all armaments and armed
forces, including internal security and police
forces.

2. The new commission should build upon the

work already developed by the Atomic Energy
Conunission and the Commission for Conventional
Armaments. The United Nations plan for the
international control of atomic energy and the
prohibition of atomic weapons should continue
to serve as the basis for any plan for the control
of atomic energy unless and until a better and no
less effective system can be devised.

3. The new commission should take into ac-
count the inter-relationship of control systems
and safeguards necessary to assure the regulation,
limitation, and balanced reduction of all arma-
ments and armed forces, including internal se-
curity and police forces, in order to assure that
the respective systems of control complement each
other.

4. The new commission should develop a com-
prehensive plan for phasing the implementation
of the component systems of control and regula-
tion of all armaments and armed forces.

5. The new commission should formulate a plan
for the regulation of the international traffic in
arms as part of the comprehensive plan for inter-
national control of all armaments and armed
forces.

United Nations Documents:
A Selected Bibliograpliy^

Economic and Social Council

Keport of the Ad Hoc Committee on Slavery (Second Ses-
sion). E/1988, E/AC.33/13, May 4, 1951. 36 pp.
mimeo.

Findings of Studies in the Relationships Between Popula-
tion Trends and Economic and Social Factors.
E/CN.9/86, April 23, 1951. 60 pp. mimeo.

Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East Com-
mittee on Industry and Trade (Third Session).
E/CN.11/I&T/40, January 3, 1951. 338 pp. mimeo.

Reports of the Committees to the Commission (Economic
Commission for Europe) on Their Activities Over the
Past Year, and a Note by the Executive Secretary,
Sixth Session. E/ECE/127, April 24, 1951. 18 pp.
mimeo.

Trusteeship Council

Examination of Petitions ; Trust Territory of the Pacific
Island (Observations of the Administering Author-
ity ) . T/837, February 16, 1951. 10 pp. mimeo.

' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27, N. Y. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.

The United Nations Secretariat has established an
Official Records series for the General Assembly, the
Security Council, the Economic and Social Council, the
Trusteeship Council, and the Atomic Energy Commission
which includes summaries of proceedings, resolutions, and
reports of the various commissions and committees. Pub-
lications in the Official Records series will not be listed in
this department as heretofore, but information on securing
subscriptions to the series may be obtained from the
International Documents Service.

June 18, I95I

993

Answer to Charges on Edith Cameron Wall's Interviews
With Union Labor Officials

[Released to the press May 25]

Correspondence Between Deputy Under Secretary
Humelsine and Representative Walter

Following is an exchange of correspondence between
Deputy Under Secretary Carlisle H. Humelsine and Repre-
sentative Francis E. Walter of Pennsylvania concerning
allegations regarding Miss Edith Cameron Wall appearing
in the New York Daily Mirror of May H, 1951, under the
'byline of Victor Riesel.

May 25, 1951.
My dear Mr. Walter : I have your letter of May
14, 1951, in wliich you requested the Deiiartment's
comment on an article appearing in the New York
Daily Mirror, May 14, 1951, under the byline of
Mr. Victor Riesel. This article alleges that Miss
Edith Cameron Wall, "a representative of the
State Department visited the most strategic
waterfront union headquarters in this country and
urged its leaders to have their followers refuse to
load guns and ammo on ships rushing military
supplies to our friends in Europe." A further
allegation is that Miss Wall "presented a letter
from Secretary of Labor Maurice Tobin, which,
in effect, urged union leaders to cooperate with
her." The union official whom Miss Wall is sup-
posed to have attempted to influence and to whom
she is supposed to have presented the letter is
identified in the Riesel article as Mr. Joseph P.
Ryan, President of the International Longshore-
men's Association.

The Department was considerably puzzled by
the Riesel article, particularly inasmuch as his
various charges against Miss Wall had never been
called to our attention, either officially or unoffi-
cially, by Mr. Ryan or any other union official.
Moreover, it is to be inferred from the article that
the alleged incident occurred fairly recently — yet
Miss Wall has been stationed in New Delhi, India
since July 1950. However, the Department imme-
diately instituted a thorough investigation of the
matter.

Thie investigation established to the Depart-
ment's complete satisfaction that Miss AVall did
have an interview with Mr. Ryan on March 9, 1950,
but except for this fact, there is no basis for Mr.
Riesel's allegations. With regard to the March 9,

1950, interview, Mr. Ryan took exception to some
of Miss Wall's questions as he understood them
and on the following day he wired Dr. Steelman,
evidencing dissatisfaction and inquiring of her
background. This led to an immediate investiga-
tion of Miss Wall : the Departments of State and
Labor not only examined her record — including
her previous security investigation — but investi-
gated with particular care her part in the inter-
view with Mr. Ryan. As part of this investiga-
tion, other labor leaders with whom Miss Wall
had talked during the week of March 7, 1950, were
questioned. These officials were emphatic that
Miss Wall had said nothing to them which would
corroborate Mr. Ryan's reaction and indeed were
high in their praise of her ability and conscien-
tiousness.

On the basis of the State and Labor Depart-
ments' investigations. Dr. Steelman informed Mr.
Ryan that he was convinced that Miss Wall was
"entirely in the clear". Since Mr. Ryan evidenced
no dissatisfaction with the report on the matter,
either at that time or subsequently, and since the
charges contained in the Riesel article of May
14 a year later were not specified in Mr. Ryan's
complaint to Dr. Steelman, I submit that the De-
partment's amazement at this article is under-
standable. As a matter of fact, the Department,
in view of the facts which I shall show in this
letter, is still at a loss to understand Mr. Riesel's
motives in making these unjustifiable and damag-
ing charges against an able and devoted public
servant. The actual facts in the mutter are the
following :

Early in the spring of 1950, Miss Wall returned
from her assignment in Copenhagen where she
had demonstrated exceptional aptitude in report-
ing on foreign labor movements. The Depart-
ment decided to give her further labor reporting
training preparatory to reassigning her abroad
as an Assistant Labor Attache. Therefore, Miss
Wall was given labor training both in the De-
partment of State and by the Department of
Labor. Part of this training involved acquainting

994

Department of State Bulletin

erself with the latest developments in the United
(tates Labor Jtlovenient by visiting union head-
'uarters and talking to union officials. In pur-
uing this course, she visited, among others, the
nternational Longshoremen's Association in New
fork and talked to Mr. Eyan, the Association's
rresident. This interview was arranged on Miss
ball's own initiative at the suggestion of several
)ther union officials to whom she had talked.

Some of the questions Miss Wall asked Mr. Ryan

ipparently antagonized him. The day after the

nterview, March 10, 1950, Mr. Ryan telegraphed

])r. John R. Steelman, the Assistant to the Presi-

lient, as follows:

I Was interviewed yesterday by one Etliel [Edith] Came-
Iron Wall purporting to represent both State and Labor De-
jpartments. Her personal views on longshoremen in this
■ Muntry loading arms for France did not coincide with
Iriews of the A. F. of L., I. T. F., or American Labor
I Movement. What is her background?

At Dr. Steelman's request, both the Department
of State and the Department of Labor thoroughly
investigated the incident and established to their
complete satisfaction that although Miss Wall
might liave asked some tactless questions in regard
to the internal operations of the union, she had
not expressed any views in regard to American
longshoremen's loading arms for France nor in
any way misrepresented United States policy in
"this matter. She did mention to Mr. Ryan
that there had been strike threats in French ports
in connection with Military Assistance Program
shipments and that generally such Communist-
directed action did not occur in isolated areas.
In this connection she asked him if he anticipated
agitation for sympathy strikes in American ports.
(This question could hardly be judged as an ex-
pression of views or as improper.) Dr. Steelman
tlien replied to Mr. Ryan who in turn aclcnowl-
edged this reply. Copies of Mr. Ryan's telegram
to Dr. Steelman, Dr. Steelman's reply and Mr.
Ryan's acknowledgment are enclosed for your in-
formation. I am also enclosing a copy of Miss
Wall's own report of her interview with Mr. Ryan.

Feeling that the case had been settled to the
satisfaction of all concerned, and having estab-
lished Miss Wall's part in the matter, the Depart-
ment assigned her to New Delhi, India, as Assist-
ant Labor Attache. She has been in New Delhi
since her arrival there, July 22, 1950. No more
was heard of the case until the publication of Mr.
Riesel's article on May 14, 1951.

The May 14, 1951 article charges, among other
things, (a) that Miss Wall urged leaders of the
longshoremen's union "to have their followers
refuse to load guns and ammo on ships rushing
military supplies to our friends in Europe"; and
(b) that she presented to Mr. Ryan a letter from
Secretary Tobin urging union officials to cooperate
with her.

Both of these charges are especially serious when
taken in the general context of the whole article
for it might reasonably be inferred that Miss Wall

was conducting some sort of pro-Communist ac-
tivity tinder the guise of official sanction. Yet
none of the other American labor officials whom
Miss Wall visited, either before or after her in-
terview with Mr. Ryan, have given any indication
whatsoever that her views, actions, or conduct
were questionable. Furthermore, at the Depart-
ment's request the United States Ambassador to
India, Mr. Loy Henderson, questioned Miss Wall
in regard to the charges and last week he wired
the Department that Miss Wall categorically
denies both charges. In this connection I should
like to point out that during the week of her visits
to various union headquarters last year, among
the union officials Miss Wall interviewed in addi-
tion to Mr. Ryan were the following:

Mark Starr, Educational Director of International Ladies

Garment Workers Union
Jay Lovestone, Director of International Activities of

I. L. G. W. U.
Julius Hockman, Director of the Joint Dress Board of

I. L. G. W. U.
Morris lushewitz, New York City C. I. O. Council
Willy J. Dorchain, International Transport Workers
Joseph Curran, National Maritime Union
Florence Marston, Associated Actors and Artists — Screen

Actors Guild
Eleanor Coit. Director, American Labor Education Service
Jacob S. Potofsky, Amalgamated Clothing Workers Union
Gus Tyler, I. L. G. W. U.
Hugh Brown, New England representative of the Textile

Workers Union

The Department has made a point of again
asking certain of these union officials whether any-
thing Miss Wall said in her conversation with
them would corroborate the charges contained in
the Riesel article or the implications of the article.
Again they have stated categorically that Miss
Wall's statements and conduct during her visits
with them could not possibly be construed to
corroborate the charges.

It should be a matter of record that Miss Wall
has had a complete security investigation, and I
can say that her security file does not show a single
derogatory reference. Miss Wall worked in
various private companies prior to accepting em-
ployment with the State Department, including:
Freeport Sulphur Company (New York) ; Arthur
Andersen and Company (New York) ; Barrett
Associates (New York) ; Francis H. Leggett and
Company (New York) ; Montgomery Ward and
Company (Illinois) ; Talon, Incorporated (Penn-
sylvania). All employees and officials of these
companies interviewed, including her immediate
superiors, speak well of her and her ability.

In view of the above, I should like to reiterate
that the Department considei"s the allegations
against Miss Wall, made by Mr. Riesel's article of
May 14, 1951, to be unwarranted and without
basis in fact.

I am enclosing for your information a chro-
nology of pertinent events bearing upon Miss
Wall's case, including certain documentation
which may be of interest.

I am glad to make this report to you for it is

June 18, 195 1

995

important for men in your position to be informed
of the facts in matters of this kind and that
attempts to besmirch conscientious and devoted
public servants do not go unchallenged.
Sincerely yours,

Carlisle H. Humelsine

Enclosure :

Chronology of Events re Edith Cameron Wall with

enclosures :
A — Miss Wall's report on interview with Ryan.
B — Telegram from Mr. Ryan to Dr. Steelman.
C — Letter from Dr. Steelman to Mr. Ryan.
D — Letter from Mr. Ryan to Dr. Steelman.
E — ^Telegram from New Delhi to Secretary of State.

May U, 1951.
Dear Mr. Humelsine: I have just read an article
from the New York Daily Mirror by Victor Riesel
in which he involves one of your employees, Edith
Cameron Wall.

Before making further investigation into this
matter I should like to have a detailed explana-
tion from the Department with particular ref-
erence to Miss Wall's authority to speak for the
Department, as well as any information which
you may furnish as to the validity of the state-
ment made in the article by Mr. Riesel.

Trusting I may have your prompt advice, I am.
Sincerely yours,

Francis E. Walter

Chronology of Events

1. Miss Edith Cameron Wall was born June 27, 1912 ;
graduated from Senn High School, Chicago, 1928 : from
Northwestern University, 1933, (Phi Beta Kaiipa).

2. Assignments :

a. Appointed clerk in the Foreign Service of the
United States and assigned at Algiers, November 8, 1941.

b. Assigned Rome, September 19, 1944.
e. Assigned Copenhagen, May 12, 1947.

d. Returned from Copenhagen to the United States
early in spring of 1950.

e. Assigned to New Delhi, India, as Assistant Labor
Attach^ and arrived in New Delhi, .luly 12, 19.50.

f. Still stationed in New Delhi as Assistant Labor
Attach^. Her duties are reporting on labor conditions.

3. Miss Wall in the early spring of 1950 returned home
from her asslgmnent in Copenhagen where she had dem-
onstrated exceptional aptitude in labor reiwrting. The
Department of State felt that she should specialize in
labor work and that her next field assignment should be
as an Assistant Labor Attach^. Therefore, she was given
labor training, both in the Department of State and by
the Department of Labor. Part of this training involved
acquainting herself with the new U. S. labor movement
by visiting union headquarters and talking to various
union officials. In pursuing this course of orientation,
she visited the International Longshoremen's Association
in Now York and talked to Mr. Ryan, the President of the
Association.

Some of the questions Miss Wall asked Mr. Ryan ap-
parently iintagonizeii him. It is reported that these cpies-
tions had to do with matters of internal operations of
the union. At any rate Mr. Ryan wired Dr. John B.
Steelman on the day following the interview that Miss
Wall's personal views on loading arms for shipment to
Europe did not coincide with those of the A. F. of L.,

I. T. F., or the American labor movement and requested
information on her background. The following clironol-
ogy traces the incident from Miss Wall's interview with
Mr. Ryan to the present :

a. March 9, 1950 — Miss Wall interviewed Mr. Ryan
in New York. Her report of the conversation between
them is attached as Enclosure "A".

b. March 10, 1950— Mr. Ryan wired Dr. John R. Steel-
man reporting on his interview with Miss Wall. (En-
closure "B" )

c. March 10 or 11, 1950 — Dr. Steelman's ofiice re-
ferred Mr. Ryan's telegram to the Departments of State
and Labor for investigation.

d. March 11-March 22, 1950— The Departments of
State and Labor conducted a thorough investigation and
advised Dr. Steelman that they were convinced that Miss
Wall may have asked some tactless questions in regard
to internal operations of the International Longshore-
men's Association but that otherwise she was clear of
making any ill-advised statements or any misrepresenta-
tions. Deputy Under Secretary of State Carlisle H.
Humelsine (then Deputy Assistant Secretary) personally
made the investigation for the Dei>artment of State.

e. March 23, 1950 — Dr. Steelman wrote to Mr. Ryan stat-
ing in essence that although Miss Wall might have asked
some tactless questions, he felt that she was otherwise
"in the clear." (Enclosure "0")

f. March 25, 1950 — Mr. Ryan replied to Dr. Steelman's
letter of March 23 in a tone which was interpreted as
meaning that he was satisfied with Dr. Steelman's report
on the matter. (Enclosure "D")

g. Mai/ H 1951 — (over a year later) — A story by Mr.
Victor Riesel appeared in the New York Daily Mirror
alleging that Edith Cameron Wall, representing the
State Department, urged Mr. Ryan to have the longshore-
men "refuse to load guns and ammo on ships rushing
military supplies to our friends in Europe." The news
story further alleged that Miss Wall presented to Mr.
Ryan a letter from the Secretary of Labor, urging union
leaders to cooperate with her. It was to be inferred from
the Riesel article that the incident had taken place very
recently. (His account mentioned March 13 as the date
of the interview, but gave no year.)

h. May 16, 1951— The Department of State, although
reasonably certain that the Riesel story was a distortion
and an exaggeration of an incident which occurred the
previous year, investigated the story and established (1)
that Miss Wall has been in New Delhi, India since July
1950 ; (2) that she neither possessed nor presented a letter
from Secretary Tobin at her interview with Mr. Ryan in
March 1950 or previously or sulisequently ; (3) that the
Riesel allegation in his May 14th article that Miss Wall
had urged Mr. Ryan to have longshoremen refuse to load
arms on ships has no basis in fact. (Ambassador Loy
Henderson's recent telegram from New Delhi may be of
interest. Enclosure "E")

Summary

The Department has thoroughly investigated the alle-
gations made by Mr. Motor Riesel in his column of May
14, 1951, in regard to Edith Cameron Wall and has estab-
lished to its complete satisfaction that the charges that
(1) she attempted in any way to persuade Mr. Ryan to
exert his influence to delay or stop tlie loading of arms and
ammunition on ships destined for Europe, or (2) she pre-
sented to Mr. Ryan a letter of introduction or any other
kind of letter from the Department of Labor are without
basis in fact. To the best of the Department's knowledge,
Miss Wall is an exceptionally capable officer of the Foreign
Service, and the Department regrets that an attempt has
been made to besmirch her well-established reputation
as a conscientious and devoted public servant.

Enclosures ;

"A" — Miss Wall's report of the Ryan interview
"B" — Telcj^ram from Mr. Ryan to Dr. Steelman
"C" — Letter to Mr. Ryan from. Dr. Steelman
"D" — Letter to Dr. .Steelman from Mr. Ryan
"E" — Telegram from. Ambassador Loy Ilenilerson
(New DelLl) to the Secretary of State

996

Deparimenf of State Bulletin

NCLOSURE "A" REPORT OF INTERVIEW
lllTH JOSEPH P. RYAN

Boston, March IS, 1950.

I wish to report in detail my conversation witli Mr.
flyan. This was an unpleasant experience which I should
lave reported immediately. However, in thinliinj; it
j)ver it seemed to me that I had inadvertently, and awk-
wardly, touched on a very sore point with him, which
•esulted in a rude outlnirst. Apparently I underestimated
he situation. Since the interview was relatively brief
(around 30 minutes), the following is a rather full
summary.

I had made an appointment to see Mr. Ryan, by tele-
ihone the day before, at 2 -.15 on Thursday, March 9.
Ls I had another appointment at 3:00, I left shortly
jefore the hour since he had not shown up. At 4 :30 I
;elephoned his office and was told that he had been de-
layed at lunch hut would see me then if I could come
immediately. This I did.

After I had waited about 15 minutes in his office, Mr.
Ryan walked in. He was very brusque and wanted to
know why 1 wanted to see him. I stated that I had been
acting as* assistant labor attach^ in Copenhagen and had
bet>n transferred to Paris in the same capacity but that
before proceeding to the new post I was on a brief orienta-
tion program in the American labor scene. Mr. Ryan's
only comment was what did that have to do with him.
I then referred to the strike threats in French ports in
connection with the MAP shipments and the Communist
exploitation of economic union demands for wage in-
creases for political ends. 1 made the comment that
generally such Communist-directed action did not occur
in Isolated areas and asked If he anticipated agitation
for sympathy strikes in American ports in connection
with the loading of such ships.

Mr. Ryan replied that there were always agitators In
port areas, but that the union's policy was to load the
ships ; the unloading problem in France was not their
affair. He said that no local agitation would stop such
loading of ships unless and/or until he received orders
from the Secretary of State not to load the ships.

Mr. Ryan's tone of voice and general attitude put an
end to any further discussion of this subject. Therefore,
as a second topic, I said I was very much interested in
his views on employment pro.spects within his union. I
asked whether (a) union member.ship was in a recession
from the peak of war and Immediate postwar years and
(b) what protective measures they were taking for the
future.

Mr. Ryan stated that, contrary to the NMU for ex-
ample, they had not Increased membership during the
war years but had allowed anyone able and available
to work without joining the union or even issuing a work
permit card. As a result, when cargo loading became
lighter in the postwar years they were not faced with
a swollen membership for the fewer jobs available. He
said that the union In effect was a closed union because
of the stiff Initiation ($50.00) and dues ($7.50 quarterly).
Although the 30-day clause of the T-H Act theoretically
hurt them, actually the stevedores who did the hiring
knew who were union members and who were not, and
only union members ever got jobs.

I then a.sked if present port operations were sufficient
to assure full-time jobs at least to all union members.
Mr. Ryan said categorically no. I then asked how jobs
were distributed — whether they were rotated or staggered
or what. Mr. Ryan then stated as his and the union's
view that, "It was better that some workers have enough
work to live on while others went on relief than that all
should be on relief." An equal distribution of the avail-
able work would not mean enough for any to live on
and all would be on relief." He said that the stevedores
who did the hiring knew the men, and that there was a
difference between men with families and single men or
those not too keen on working.

It was at this point that I made the awkward remark
which hit a sensitive point. This was not done as a

criticism, but because I felt that I had not understood
completely his exposition and wanted to clear up in
my own mind what appeared to be such a blatant looi)-
hfile. I therefore asked if he did not have many griev-
ances among members as a result of favoritism or possible
kick-backs to the hiring stevedores. He became quite
incensed at this point and .said that the fact that the
union had this hiring system was proof in itself that
it worked and that the men liked it. He added that
he had bi^n bothered enough by all kinds of reformists
and investigators who had tried to prove graft and kick-
backs but that they had gotten nowhere with their trouble.

In an effort to calm the waters I mentioned that on
my way home a few weeks ago I had stopped off In Italy
where the employment problem among seafaring trades
was particularly acute and chronic. The Italian method
of meeting the immediate situation was to Impose forcibly
rotation of jobs, but because the waiting period between
jobs was so long this was in effect no solution.

At this point Mr. Ryan jumped up from his desk and
shouted at me, "Is it the policy of the Department of
State to Impose a share-the-work program on me? Are
you here to tell me how to run my union?"

His violence shocked me and I answered that I was
not stating any official views but merely personal opinion.
Before I could continue further, Mr. Ryan said :

"I am not the least interested In your personal views
or opinions. I have received you as a representative of
the Department of Labor. I don't know who you are
and care less. I have already wasted too much time on
you. So long!" With this he walked out of the room,
Into the adjoining file room where I could still hear his
voice although I could not understand what he said. I
was very upset at his discourteous treatment and the
implied insult, but to avoid a further scene it seemed
the best thing to leave without further ado. This I did.

I am attaching herewith a brief summary of all Inter-
views thus far. Except for Ryan, I have been received
ver.v cordially in every case ; the interviews have been
extremely helpful, I have been furnished with all kinds
of printed material, other contacts suggested, interviews
arranged with other persons and I have been asked to
call again whenever I was In town and to write If I ever
needed anything. All in all, I think the tour has been
quite successful.

Edith Wall

ENCLOSURE "B": TELEGRAM FROM MR. RYAN
TO JOHN R. STEELMAN

to: Dr. .John R. Steelman (White House)

FROM : New York

DATE : March 10, 3 : 43 P. m., 1950

Was interviewed yesterday by one Ethel [Edith]
Cameron Wall purporting to represent both State and
Labor Departments. Her personal views on longshore-
men In this country loading arms for France did not
coincide with views of the A. F. of L., I. T. F., or Ameri-
can Labor Movement. What Is her background?

Joseph P. Ryan,
President, International Longshoremen's Association.

ENCLOSURE "C": REPLY FROM
DR. STEELMAN TO MR. RYAN

The Little White House
Key West, Florida, March 23, 19.50.
Dear Joe: Immediately upon receipt of your telegram of
March 10, which was forwarded to me here at Key West, I
returned it to Washington and asked the State Depart-
ment, by whom Edith Cameron Wall is employed, to give
me a report on the matter. I have now received that re-
port and the views of the Labor Department and I have
the distinct Impression that she perhaps asked some
tactless questions and did not make her position entirely
clear in her conference with you. At least her record

June 18, 1951

997

and contacts with other people with whom she had talked
seemed to put her entirely in the clear.

I am glad you called this to my attention. Although
in this case the record appears to be on the favorable
side there is always the possibility of something being
amiss, and in such cases a little checking might be a
very good thing.
Sincerely,

John R. Steelman

enclosure "d": message from
mr. ryan to dr. steelman

March 25, 1950
Dr. John R. Steelman
The White Souse,
Washington, D. C.
Friend John ; Many thanks for your nice communication
of March 23, 1950, regarding Edith Cameron Wall, and
altliough I do not usually go in for reporting people, I felt
it my duty in this case.

With best wishes, I remain,
Sincerely,

Joseph P. Rtan

ENCLOSURE "E": TELEGRAM FROM

AMBASSADOR HENDERSON TO SECRETARY ACHESON

May 1951
FROM : New Delhi
to: Secretary of State

Wall had no letter from Secretary Tobin or other
credentials from Department of Labor when she inter-
viewed Ryan. Neither did she exhibit State Department
credentials to Ryan. Appointment was arranged by phone
conversation in which she described her State Depart-
ment connection and duties. Upon arrival for the inter-
view she presented ordinary personal card containing only
her name.

Department cable is first she has heard of allega-
tion made liy New York Daily Mirror article that she
requested Ryan to cancel orders to longshoremen, etc.
Wall declares it completely untrue.

Lot Henderson

Continued from page 974

Recent Releases

Agreement between the United States and Haiti —
Effected by exchange of notes signed at Port-au-
Prince September 18 and 27, 1950; entered into force
October 12, 1950; operative retroactively from June
30, 1950.

Health and Sanitation : Cooperative Program in Uruguay.

Treaties and Other International Acts Series 2158. Pub.

4078. 13 pp. 5«f.

Agreement l)etween the United States and Uruguay
supplementing and extending agreement of October
1 and November 1, 1943, as modified and extended —
Effected by exchange of notes signed at Montevideo
November 10, 1947, and January 3, 1948; entered into
force January 3, 1948; operative retroactively Jan-
uary 1, 1948 ; and agreement between Uruguay and
the Institute of Inter-American Affairs — Signed at
Montevideo January 3, 1948.

Health and Sanitation: Cooperative Program in Uruguay.

Treaties and otlier International Acts Series 2159. Pub.

4079. 3 pp. Sdf.

Agreement between the United States and Uruguay
modifying and extending agreement of October 1 and
November 1, 1943, as mollified and extended— Ef-
fected by exchauKe of notes signed at Montevideo
June 25 and July 20, 1948 ; entered into force Octo-
ber 7, IMS; operative retroactively July 1, 1948.

Publications of the Department of State, January 1, 1951,

Pub. 4098. 28 pp. Free.

A cumulative list published semiannually.

Technical Cooperation. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 2186. Pub. 4120. 7 pp. 10^.

Agreement between the United States and Costa
Rica — Signed at San Jos6 January 11, 1951 ; entered
into force January 11, 1951.

Technical Cooperation. Treaties and Other International
Acts Series 2195. Pub. 4141. 4 pp. 5«(.

Agreement between the United States and Liberia —
Signed at Washington December 22, 1950; entered
into force January 22, 1951.

It Has Fallen to Us. General Foreign Policy Series 45,
Pub. 4144. 8 pp. [Bum:TiN Reprint]. Free.

A letter from the Secretary of State on the meaning
of Korea.

Second Semiannual Report to Congress on the Mutual
Defense Assistance Program, April 6 to October 6, 1950.

General Foreign Policy Series 47. Pub. 4190. 50 pp.
Limited Distribution.

Printed also as H. Doc. 119, 82d Congress, First
Session.

Aid to the Palestine Refugees. Near and Middle Eastern
Series 4. Pub. 4191. 18 pp. 100.

An over-all summary of the aid programs in the
Near East, including map, chart, and pictures.

United States Government International Exchange Op-
portunities. International Information and Cultural
Series 17. Pub. 419S. 24 pp. lO?*.

Discusses the various programs, qualifications, appli-
cation instructions for both American individuals
and foreign nationals. Illustrated.

Point Four Program. Economic Cooperation Series 26.
Pub. 4203. 12 pp. Free.

The sixth of a series of progress reports designed
to provide background information in summary form
on developments in the President's program for world
economic progress through cooperative technical
assistance.

Analysis of Torquay Protocol of Accession, Schedules,
and Related Documents, General Agreement on Tariffs
and Trade Negotiated at Torquay, England, September
1950-April 1951. (Preliminary.) Commercial PoUcy
Series 135. Pub. 4209. 474 pp. $1.00.

A preliminary analysis was prepared on the basis of
information supplied by the United States Govern-
ment agencies participating in the negotiations at
Torquay, England.

Mutual Security for the Free World. General Foreign
Policy Series 49. Pub. 4210. 12 pp. lO^*.

A background summary of the purpose and aims of
the Mutual Security Program. Map.

Why We Need Allies. General Foreign Policy Series 50.
Pub. 4218. 7 pp. Free. [Bulletin Reprint].

An address by President Harry S. Truman before
the Civil Defense Conference at Washington on May 7.

New Jersey and Foreign Trade. 14 pp. Limited dis-
tribution.

One of a series of reports prepared by the Depart-
ment of State in response to a large number of re-
quests. Charts.

998

Deparfment of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

U. S. Delegations to International Meetings

i

international Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
Fifth Session

On June 4, the Department of State announced
that J. Paul Barringer, Deputy Director, Office of
Transport and Communications and Rear Adm.
Paul A. Smith, United States representative on
the ICAO Council have been designated as dele-
gates to the fifth session of the Assembly of the
International Civil Aviation Organization which
will convene at Montreal, June 6, 1951. Mr.
Barringer and Admiral Smith will also serve as
chairman and vice chairman respectively of the
United States delegation to the forthcoming meet-
ing. Other members of the delegation are:

Alternate Delegate

David M. French, Division of International Administra-
tion, Department of State

Advisers

G. Nathan Calkins, Jr., Chief, International and Rules
Division, Bureau of L;iw, Civil Aeronautics Board

Charles O. Cary, Executive Secretary, Air Coordinating
Committee

Alfred Hand, Assistant to Deputy Administrator for Pro-
gram Planning, Civil Aeronautics Administration,
Department of Commerce

Henry T. Snowdon, Assistant Chief, Aviation Policy Staff,
Department of State

Joan H. Stacy, Aviation Policy Staff, Department of
State

The fifth session of the Assembly of Icao will
be of limited scope and will be concerned primarily
with administrative, budgetary and fiscal matters
necessary to the continuing operation of the Or-
ganization. Among the siibjects to be considered
will be : the budget for 1952 ; the apportionment of
expenses among the contracting states for 1952;
the election of a member state to fill a vacancy on
the Council ; a review of the section of the Coun-
cil's report to the Assembly dealing with adminis-
trative and financial questions ; and consideration
of the character and scope of future sessions of
the Assembly.

FAO Council, 12th Session

The Department of State announced on June 8
that Clarence J. McCormick, Under Secretary of
Agriculture and United States member on the
Fao Council will attend the twelfth session of the
Council, which is to begin at Rome, Italy, on June
11, 1951. Other menibers of the United States
delegation are :

Alternate United States Member

Fred J. Rossiter, Associate Director, Office of Foreign
Agricultural Relations, Department of Agriculture

Associate United States Member

John W. Evans, Acting Deputy Director, Office of Inter-
national Materials, Department of State

Advisers

James P. Anderson, Division of International Administra-
tion, Department of State

Philip V. Cardon, Administrator, Agricultural Research
Administration, Department of Agriculture

Howard R. Cottam, Counselor of Embassy, American Em-
bassy, Rome

Mrs. Ursula H. Duffus, Office of United Nations Economic
and Social Affairs, Department of State

Ralph S. Roberts, Director of Finance, Department of
Agriculture

Thomas E. Street, Office of Foreign Agricultural Rela-
tions, Department of Agriculture, Secretary of dele-
yation

Robert C. Tetro, Attach^, American Embassy, Rome

The forthcoming session, the first to be held since
the transfer of the Fao headquarters to Rome, will
review a statement, prepared by the Director Gen-
eral of the Organization, on the changes which
have taken place in the world food and agriculture
situation since the fifth session.

The Council will also make a detailed study of
reports and proposals relating to such matters as
the long-term objectives of Fao, international in-
vestment, full employment, commodity problems,
technical assistance, plans for the 6th session of the
Fao Conference next November, administrative
and financial matters, and nominations for Di-
rector General and Chairman of the Council.

June 78, 1957

999

June 18, 1951

Index

Vol. XXIV, No. 624

Aid to Foreign Countries Pa«e

CHINA: U.S. Policy (Acheson, Cong, testimony) . 963
Latin American Future Business (Miller) . . 975

Agriculture

Jordan Signs Point 4 Water Project Agreement . 990

Locust Threat in India Receives Point 4 Aid . . 988

Point 4 Consultants Appointed 990

American Republics

BOLIVIA: U.S. Relations Resumed 979

COLOMBIA: Ambassador to U.S. (Sandoval),

Credentials ^'°

GUATEMALA: Ambassador to U.S. (Restrepo),

Orpri fill tiols .....■••■•• *' '*'

Latin American Role In Future Business (Miller

before Harvard Business Sch. Assn., Boston) . 975

Point 4 Leaders Visit U.S 989

Arms and Armed Forces

New Commission for Armament and Armed

Forces Control Urged by U.S.:

Statement (Nash) 991

U.S. Working Paper, Text 992

U S S.R. Killing of American Soldier Protested,

Text of U.S. Note 986

Asia

CAMBODIA: Minister (Uwayni) Arrives in U.S. 984

CHINA: U.S. Policy (Acheson, Cong, testimony) . 963

INDIA: Point 4 Aid for Locust Threat .... 988

JORDAN: Point 4 Water Project 990

KOREA:

Ambassador (Yang) to U.S., Credentials . . 983

Communiques to Security Council .... 984

Memorial Day for U.N. War Dead .... 984

LEBANON : Point 4 Agreement Signed .... 979

Point 4 Leaders Visit U.S 989

Atomic Energy and Conventional Armaments
New Commission of Armament and Armed
Forces Control Urged by U.S.:

Statement (Nash) 991

U.S. Working Paper, Text 992

Australia

Ambassador (Spender) to U.S., Credentials . . 979

Claims and Property

War Claims-Piling Procedure With Belgium . . 987

Communism

Edith C. Wall's Labor Views Questioned and
Upheld. Exchange of Letters. (Humelsine,
Walter) 994

Organizing for Peace (Cabot before Tufts Col-
lege, Medford, Mass.) 980

U. S. Policy on China (Acheson, Cong, testi-
mony) 963

Congress

CORRESPONDENCE: Edith C. Wall's Labor
Views Questioned and Upheld. Exchange
of Letters. (Humelsine, Walter) .... 994

U.S. Policy on China (Acheson, Cong., testi-
mony) 963

Latin American Role in Future Business

(Miller) 975

Europe

BELGIUM: War Claims-Filing Procedure . . 987
GERMANY : Landsberg War Criminals Executed . 988
U.K. : Consular Convention Signed With U.S. . 987
U.S.S.R.:

Amerika Popularity Causes Concern .... 985
U.S. Note on the American Soldier's Death,

Text 986

Finance

Latin American Role in Future Business (Miller

before Harvard Business Sch. Assn., Boston) . 975

Foreign Service

BOLIVIA: U.S. Relations Resumed 979

Consular Convention Signed With U.K. ... 987

Information and Educational Exch. Program Page

Amerika Popularity of Concern to U.S.S.R. . . 985
International Meetings

U.S. Delegations:

FAO, 12th Session 999

ICAO, 5th Session 999

Labor

Edith Wall's Views Questioned and Upheld. Ex-
change of Letters. (Humelsine, Walter) . 994
Latin American Role In Future Business

(Miller) 975

Mutual Aid and Defense

Organizing for Peace (Cabot before Tufts Col-
lege, Medford, Mass.) 980

Presidential Documents

PROCLAMATION: Torquay Tariff Negotiations . 988

Prisoners of War

German War Criminals Executed 988

Protection of U.S. Nationals and Property

BELGIUM: War Claims-Filing Procedure . . . 987
U.S.S.R. Killing of American Soldier Protested,

Text of U.S. Note 986

Publications

Recent Releases 974

U.N. Bibliography: Selected Documents . . . 993

Technical Cooperation and Development

POINT 4;

Agricultural Consultants Appointed .... 990

India Receives Aid for Locust Threat . . . 988

Leaders Visit U.S 989

Lebanon Signs Agreement 979

Jordan Signs Water Project 990

Trade

GATT: Presidential Proclamation on Torquay

Tariff Negotiations 988

Treaties and Other International Agreements

BEHjGIUM: War Claims (Mar. 12, 1951) . . . 987
GATT: Presidential Proclamation on Torquay

Tariff Negotiations 988

INDIA: Point 4 Locust Control 988

JORDAN: Point 4 Water Project Signed . . . 990

LEBANON: Point 4 Agreement Signed .... 979

U.K.: Consular Convention Signed 987

United Nations

Korean Memorial Day for War Dead .... 984
New Commission for Armament and Armed
Forces Control Urged by U.S.:

Statement (Nash) 991

U.S. Working Paper, Text 992

Security Council : Communiques on Korea . . 984

U.N. Bibliography: Selected Documents . . . 993

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 963, 987

Bennett, Henry G 979,988,990

Bruins, John H 979

Cabot, Thomas D 980

Franks, Sir Oliver Shewell 987

Humelsine, Carlisle H 994

Kimny, Nong 984

Kirk, Admiral Alan G 986

Miller, Edward G. Jr 975

Nash, Frank G 991

Restrepo, Cipriano JaramlUo 979

Sandoval, Carlos Aldana H 979

Spender, P.C 979

Truman, President Harry S 983

Wall. Edith Cameron 994

Walter, Francis E 994

Yang, Dr. You Chan 983

Uwayni, Husayn 979

Zorln, Valerian A 986

U. S. SOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE, 1911

Jne^ u)eha/y/?}nen^ /O^ Cfuit0

RIDER IN THIRD DEFICIENCY APPROPRIATION
BILL CALLED DEFECTIVE • Statement by the
President 1027

PROMULGATING A MUTUAL SECURITY PROGRAM

• Statements by Under Secretary Webb and Ambassador
Myron M. Covoen 1015

ECONOMIC, SOCIAL, AND CULTURAL PROVISIONS
IN THE HUMAN RIGHTS COVENANT • Article by

James Simsarian ............... 1003

For index see back cover

Vol. XXIV, No. 626
June 25, 1951

U. S. SUP£RINT£NDENT OF DOCUMENTS

tJAe ^efut/y^e^ x)£ Cnale \u LA X 1 \J L 1 1 1

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents

U.S. Government Printing Office

Wttsliington 26, D.O.

Peice:

S2 Ijsue>, domestic $7.(0, foreign $10.25

Single copy, 20 cents

The printing of this publication has
been approved by the Director of the
Bureau of the Budget (July 29, 1949).

Note: Contents of this publication are not
copyrighted and items contained herein may
be reprinted. Citation of the Dkpartmeni
o» State BtniBTiN as the source will be
appreciated.

Vol. XXrV, No. 626 • Publication 4265
June 25, 1951

Note: The June 18 issue was num-
bered in error 625. No. 624 has been
omitted from this series.

The Department of State BULLETIN,
a teeekly publication compiled and
edited in the Division of Publications,
Office of Public Affairs, provides the
public and interested agencies of
the Government with information on
developments in the field of foreign
relations and on the work of the De-
partment of State and the Foreign
Service. The BULLETIN includes
press releases on foreign policy issued
by the White House and the Depart-
ment, and statements and addresses
made by the President and by the
Secretary of State and other officers
of the Department, as well as special
articles on various phases of inter-
national affairs and the functions of
the Department. Information is in-
cluded concerning treaties and in-
ternational agreements to which the
United States is or may become a
party and treaties of general inter-
national interest.

Publications of the Department, as
wellas legislative material in the field
of international relations, are listed
currently.

Economic, Social, and Cultural Provisions in the Human Rights Covenant

REVISIONS OF THE 1951 SESSION OF THE COMMISSION ON HUMAN RIGHTS

\y James Simsarian

The United Nations Commission on Human
Rights, at the seventh session, which met at Geneva
from Api'il 16-May 19, 1951, drafted provisions
3n economic, social, and cultural rights for in-
jlusion in the International Covenant on Human
Rights.' The Commission acted in accordance
vith the decision of the 1950 General Assembly
hat provisions on economic, social, and cultural
■ights should be included in the covenant.

The Commission on Human Rights also revised
. ihe implementation machinery provided in the
covenant with respect to the civil and political
rights in the covenant. It did not have time, how-
ever, during the 5-weeks session to revise the other
parts of the covenant.

At the end of the 1951 session, the Commission
forwarded the covenant to the members of the
United Nations and to the specialized agencies for
:heir comments before the Economic and Social
Council considered it at its next meeting at Geneva
Dn July 30, 1951.

The Council will then submit the revised draft
jf the covenant to the General Assembly as re-
i^uested by the General Assembly's resolution.^
\\ After the draft covenant is finally reviewed and
revised, it will be opened for signature and rati-
ication and will come into force, when 20 coun-
ties ratify it. The covenant is in contrast to the

' For additional materials on human rights, see the fol-
lowing Btn.T.FTiN references : An International Bill of
Human Rights, by James P. Hendrick, Feb. 15, 1948, p.
I 195 ; Progress Report on Human Rights, by James P. Hen-
1 Iricli, Aug. 8, 1948, p. 159; United Nations Actions on
I luman Rights in 1948, by James Simsarian, Jan. 2, 1949,
I 3. 18 ; Human Rights : Draft Covenant Revised at Fifth
I Session of Commission on Human Rights, by James
Simsarian, July 11, 1949, p. 3 ; Proposed Human Rights
Covenant Revised at 1950 Session of Commission on Hu-
nan Rights, by James Simsarian, June 12, 1950, p. 945.
Tor the U.S. delegation, see BxnXErriN of Apr. 23, 1951, p.
370.

' ' The General Assembly will convene at Paris the lat-
;er part of October or early in November 1951.

lune 25, 7951

Universal Declaration of Human Rights (ap-
proved by the General Assembly at Paris on Dec.
10, 1948) since the declaration was not drafted in
the form of a treaty but as a declaration without
legally binding force.

The basic civil and political rights set forth in
the draft covenant are well known in American
tradition and law and relate to the right to life,
protection against torture, slavery, forced labor,
arbitrary arrest or detention, freedom to leave
a country, freedom to return to one's country,
right to a fair and public hearing by an inde-
pendent and impartial tribunal, right to be pre-
sumed innocent until proved guilty, protection
against ex post facto laws, right to recognition
as a person before the law, freedom of religion,
expression, assembly and association, and equal
protection of the law.

The Commission decided that the covenant on
Humati Rights should authorize only states to
file complaints with respect to alleged violations
of the covenant. The Commission rejected a pro-
posal that individuals, groups, and nongovern-
mental organizations also be authorized to file
complaints.

The draft covenant on Human Rights now con-
sists of 5 parts. Parts I and II relate to civil
and political rights, part III sets forth the eco-
nomic, social, and cultural rights, part IV sets
forth the complaint machinery, part V sets forth
the new reporting requirements drafted at the
1951 session of the Commission, and part "VI
contains the federal state article, the teri'itories
article, and several procedural articles.

In the new part III articles were drafted on
most of the economic, social, and cultural rights
enumerated in the Universal Declaration of
Human Rights. The provisions of this part of the
covenant relate to the opportunity to work, con-
ditions of work, social security, housing, standard
of living, health, maternity, motherhood, children,

1003

young persons, trade unions, education, culture,
and science.

In drafting such provisions, tlie Commission
recognized that they differed in a number of re-
spects from the civil and political provisions of the
covenant. Those differences were acknowledged
in the covenant in a number of ways :

(1) The economic, social, and cultural rights
were recognized as objectives to be achieved "pro-
gressively." In the case of the civil and political
rights, states ratifying the covenant will be under
an obligation to take necessary steps within a rea-
sonable length of time to give effect to these rights.
A much longer period of time is clearly contem-
plated under the covenant for the achievement of
the economic, social, and cultural rights. The
term "rights" is used with respect to both the
civil and political provisions as well as the eco-
nomic, social, and cidtural provisions. This term
is used, however, in two different senses. The
civil and political rights are looked upon as
"rights" to be given effect almost immediately.
The economic, social, and cultural rights although
recognized as "rights" are looked upon as objec-
tives toward which states adhering to the covenant
would undertake to strive.

(2) It was recognized that the economic, social,
and cultural rights were to be achieved by many
means and methods, private as well as public, and
not solely through legislation. Article 19 provides
that States will take steps "with a view to achiev-
ing progressively the full realization of the rights
recognized in this Part of the present Covenant."
The phrase "with a view" was stressed as pointing
to the achievement of conditions in a state whereby
these rights could be secured through private ac-
tion as well as governmental action. The obliga-
tion of a state ratifying the covenant will be to
take steps for the promotion of conditions for eco-
nomic, social, and cultural progress and develop-
ment. The U.S.S.R. repeatedly urged that the
economic, social, and cultural rights be stated in
terms of state legislation only but the other mem-
bers of the Commission rejected this approach.

(3) Simple implementation arrangements were
drafted for the economic, social, and cidtural
rights in contrast to the implementation machin-
ery drafted for the civil and political rights. In
the case of the civil and political rights, the im-
plementation machinery established authorized one
state to complain against another state if the latter
was violating the covenant. There was wide senti-
ment in the Commission that this complaint pro-
cedure woidd not be appropriate for the economic,
social, and cultural rights since these rights were to
be achieved progressively, and the obligations of
states with respect to these rights were not so pre-
cise as those with respect to the civil and political
rights. The Commission wished to stress the im-
poi-tance of assisting states to achieve economic,
social, and cultural progress rather than com-
plaitits against states. Accordingly, a procedure
was devised whereby states would furnish reports

1004

concerning the progress made in the observance
of the economic, social, and cultural rights set
forth in the covenant.

(4) The economic, social, and cultural rights
were necessarily drafted in broad terms as con-
trasted to the provisions on civil and political
rights. It was felt in the Commission that since
these rights were stated in terms of broad objec-
tives, general language would be adequate. For
example, article 22 simply provides that —

The States Parties to the covenant recognize the right
of everyone to social security.

In view of the many differences recognized by
the Commission in drafting part III of the cove-
nant on economic, social, and cultural rights as
contrasted to parts I and II on civil and political
rights, India urged at the end of the 1951 session
that the General Assembly be requested to recon-
sider the decision that economic, social, and cul-
tural rights should be included in the same cove-
nant with civil and political rights.

The Indian representative proposed that the
civil and political rights constitute one covenant
and that the provisions on economic, social, and
cultural rights be set forth in a separate one.
This proposal was, however, rejected by a vote of
5-12, with 1 abstention. Countries voting to re-
ject this proposal recognized the different char-
acter of the economic, social, and cultural rights
as contrasted to the civil and political rights in
the covenant but vigorously pressed the view that
such provisions should be contained in the same
covenant with the provisions on civil and political
rights. This attitude was the same as that ex-
pressed in the 1950 General Assembly. The
United States favored the separation of the two
fields into two covenants in both the 1950 session
of the General Assembly and the 1951 session of
the Commission on Human Rights but was in a
minority in both organs of the United Nations on
this point.

Underdeveloped countries in particular ex-
pressed the view that it was important that the
economic, social, and cultural rights be contained
in the same covenant with the civil and political
rights to stress the equal importance of these two
fields. A separation of the two, it was felt, would
indicate the lesser importance of the economic,
social, and cultural rights.

The Commission adopted article 32 to recognizt
that such of the economic, social, and cultural
rights as are provided by a state ratifying tht
covenant may be subjected by the state to cer-
tain limitations if necessary for the purpose oi
promoting the general welfare in a democratic
society. The United States urged the inclusior
of this provision in the covenant to make it cleai
that the economic, social, and cultural rights rec
ognized would not be absolutei but subject to rea
sonable limitations. In the case of social security
for example, it is sonietinu's necessary to condi-
tion disability benefits payable to disabled workl

Departmenf of Sfate Bulletir

ers on their willingness to take vocational rehabili-
tation courses.

Representatives of the International Labor Or-
ganization (Ilo), the United Nations Educa-
tional, Scientific and Cultural Organization
f UNESCO), and the World Health Organization
(Who) participated in the drafting of the pro-
visions on economic, social, and cultural rights in
the Commission. The Director Generals of the
three organizations attended some of the meetings,
David Moi-se, Dr. Torres Bodet, and Dr. Brock
Chisholm, respectively. In addition, the Ilo was
represented by a tripartite delegation from the
Governing Body of the International Labor Of-
fice consisting of Sir Guildhaume Myrrdin-Evans,
representing the government group, Leon Jou-
haux, representing the workers, Gustav Bergen-
strom, representing the employers.

Articles on Economic, Social, and Cultural Rights

The following is a brief discussion of each of the
economic, social, and cultural articles adopted by
the Commission of Human Rights for inclusion
in part III of the draft covenant.

CONDITIONS OF WORK

Article 21 recognizes the right of everyone to
just and favorable conditions of work, stressing
safe and healthy working conditions, fair wages,
equal pay for equal work and reasonable limi-
tation of working hours, and periodic holidays
with pay. The Ilo urged that the language uti-
lized in this article be as general as possible since
detailed conventions on various aspects of this
subject are being developed separately in that

organization.

SOCIAL SECURITY

The following U.S.S.R. proposal was rejected :

Social security and social insurance for workers and
salaried employees shall be provided at the expense of the
State or of the employer, in accordance with each coun-
try's legislation.

The Commission decided instead to provide
simply in article 22 that the states parties to the
covenant recognize the right of everyone to social
security. The Ilo again urged that general lan-
guage be used since a number of conventions in
ihe field of social security are being developed in
that organization.

RIGHT TO WORK

Tlie first article considered in the field of eco-
nomic, social, and cultural rights was the right to
work. The U.S.S.R. proposed that this article
read as follows :

The State shall ensure to everyone the right to work
and a choice of profession, with the object of creating
conditions which will remove the threat of death by hunger
or by inanition.

This proposal was rejected by a vote of 10-2,
with 6 abstentions. Instead, the Commission
adopted the following as article 20 by a vote of
16-0, with 2 abstentions (U.S.S.R. and Ukraine) :

Work being at the basis of all human endeavor, the
States Parties to the Covenant recognize the right to
work, that is to say, the fundamental right of everyone
to the opportunity, if he so desires, to gain his living by
work which he freely accepts.

Most of the members of the Commission and
especially the United States representative were
particularly anxious to counteract any concept of
compulsion, i.e., forced labor, in the phrase "right
to work." The Commission accordingly voted to
include the phrase "if he so desires" and the word
"freely" to stress the noncompulsory character of
this provision. The U.S.S.R. asked for a separate
vote on the inclusion of the phrase "if he so de-
sires," but the effort to exclude this phrase was
unsuccessful. The Commission rejected the ini-
tial Soviet proposal particularly because it gave
unwaitanted stress to the role of the state. The
language adopted by the Commision is in terms
of the recognition of the right of everyone, if he
so desires, to gain his living by work which he
freely accepts.

June 25, J 95 1

HOUSING

The following U.S.S.R. proposal was rejected :

The State shall take all the necessary steps especially
legislative measures, to ensure to everyone living accom-
modation worthy of man.

Instead, the Commission adopted article 23 pro-
viding that —

States Parties to the Covenant recognize the right of
everyone to adequate housing.

STANDARD OF LIVING

This article 24 was adopted to recognize the
right of everyone to an adequate standard of liv-
ing and the continuous improvement of living
conditions.

HEALTH

The Who representative urged that provisions
in the covenant on the right to health be couched
in terms identical with those used in the Constitu-
tion of the organization, especially since they have
been recognized by the 75 members of that organi-
zation. The first sentence of this article 25 was
accordingly adopted to provide :

The states Parties to the Covenant recognize the right
of everyone to the enjoyment of the highest standard of
health obtainable.

The United States supported this language, but
objected to the inclusion of the second sentence of
this article which provides :

With a view to implementing and safeguarding this
right each State party hereto undertakes to provide
legislative measures to promote and protect health.

1005

The United States in opposing this sentence
pointed out that it mentioned only legislative
measures for the promotion and protection of
health and that obviously the promotion and pro-
tection of health should be achieved through
private means and methods also and not solely
through legislation. This sentence was, however,
adopted. It was recognized at the same time by
the Commission that in approving this provision,
it would be subject to review later in the light of
the over-all general promotional article expected
to be adopted with respect to all the provisions on
economic, social, and cultural rights in the cove-
nant. The over-all general promotional article
(later adopted as art. 19) is not limited to legisla-
tion for the achievement of the objectives set forth
in the field of economic, social, and cultural rights.
The Commission, however, did not have time to
review the various articles and to eliminate in-
consistencies. Accordingly, the second sentence of
article 25 was not eliminated at this session. It is
anticipated that, in the further review of the pro-
visions of the covenant, the United States will
urge that this inconsistency be corrected and that
the second sentence of article 25 be eliminated.

MATERNITY, MOTHERHOOD, AND CHILDREN

This article 26 was adopted to recognize (1)
that special protection should be accorded to ma-
ternity and motherhood and (2) that special meas-
ures of protection should be taken on behalf of
children and young persons and that in particular
they should not be required to do work likely to
hamper their normal development.

TRADE UNIONS

Although under article 16 of the draft covenant
the right of association is already recognized, the
Commission decided to include a separate provis-
ion on trade union rights under article 27 to
recognize expressly the right of everyone to form
and join local, national, and international trade
unions of his choice for the protection of his
economic and social interests. The Commission
decided to omit any reference to the right to strike
in this article. Several attempts were made to
include the right to strike subject to certain limita-
tions. It was felt, however, that to include such
provision with the limitations proposed would be
too restrictive. For example, Uruguay proposed
the following text, which was rejected :

It shall be understood that the right to strike is re-
stricted to circumstances where attempts at conciliation
have been exhausted. In the same way, the right to
Strike may be restricted by legislative measures in the
case of public officials.

EDUCATION

The first seven paragraphs of article 28 on edu-
cation were adopted on the recommendation of

Unesco representatives. Paragraphs 3 and 4 j)ro-
vide for compulsory primary education to be free
and for secondary education to be progressively
free. Paragraphs 5 provides that higher education
should also be made progressively free and equally
accessible to all on the basis of merit. Paragraph
6 calls for fundamental education for adults who
have not received or completed their primary edu-
cation.

Paragraph 8 recognizes that the obligations of
states to establish a system of free compulsory
primary education should not be deemed incom-
patible with the liberty of parents to choose for
their children schools other than those established
by the state provided that they conform to mini-
mum standards laid down by the state. Para-
graph 9 provides that in tlie exercise of any
functions which the state assumes in the field of
education it should have respect for the liberty of
parents to insure the religious education of their j
children in conformity with their own convictions.

Under article 29, each state would agree to work
out and adopt a detailed plan of action within 2
years after adlierence to the covenant for the pro-
gressive implementation of the principle of free
compulsory primary education if at the time it
adheres to the covenant it has not already done so.

CULTURE AND SCIENCE

Article 30 was adopted to recognize the right
of everyone to take part in cultural life and to
enjoy the benefits of scientific progress. The pro-
posal of Unesco to include a provision on copy-
right was rejected by the Commission. It provided
for the right of everyone —

to obtain protection for his moral and material interests
resulting from any scientific or artistic production of
which he is the author.

The Commission felt that this was a technical
subject more appropriate for consideration in a
separate convention than for inclusion in the
Covenant on Human Rights.

EQUALITY OF MEN AND WOMEN

In accordance with the General Assembly reso-
lution, the Commission included article 31 in part
III of the covenant to recognize the equal right of
men and women to the enjoyment of all economic,
social, and cultural rights, particularly those set
forth in the covenant.

PROPERTY

The United States proposed that an article be
included in the covenant recognizing the right of
everyone to own property. The Commission de-
cided for the present, however, not to include
such an article. At the end of the session, the
United States filed a statement in the report of
the Commission calling attention to the desira-
bility of including such an article. |

1006

Department of State Bulletin

Reports Concerning Economic
Social and Cultural Rights

The Commission drafted a new part V to pro-
vide that states ratifying the covenant would sub-
mit reports concerning progress made in achiev-
ing the observance of economic, social, and cul-
tural rights. At the same time, article 60 pro-
vides that these reports would be submitted in
conformity with the recommendations of the Eco-
nomic and Social Council and the General Assem-
bly in the exercise of their general responsibility
calling upon all members of the United Nations
to provide such reports.

There was strong sentiment in the Commission
that all members of the United Nations should be
called upon to submit these reports, whether or
not they ratified the Covenant on Human Rights.
It was recognized of course that only states rati-
fying the covenant could be obligated under the
covenant to furnish these reports and that other
members of the United Nations would not be under
a similar obligation to do so. It was felt, how-
ever, that since it was being provided in the cove-
nant that the reports would be considered by the
United Nations, all members of the United Na-
tions should be requested to submit the reports
by the adoption of recommendations to this effect
by the Economic and Social Council and the Gen-
eral Assembly.

Provision is made that reports concerning prog-
ress made in achieving the observance of the eco-
nomic, social, and cultural rights would be sub-
mitted by states in accordance with a program
to be established by the Economic and Social
Council after consultation with these states and
the specialized agencies concerned. It is contem-
plated that reports would be made to the special-
ized agencies as well ab to the United Nations.
Reports made by states through the specialized
agencies and directly to the United Nations would
be transmitted by the Economic and Social Coun-
cil to the Commission on Human Rights for study
and recommendations. The Commission would
submit recommendations to the Council and the
Council in turn would submit reports to the Gen-
eral Assembly indicating the progress made by
states in achieving the observance of the economic,
social, and cultural rights.

Implementation of Civil and Political Rights

The U.S.S.R. as usual proposed that all imple-
mentation machinery be omitted from the cove-
nant. In the opinion of the Soviet delegation,
these provisions should be omitted "on the grounds
that they envisage forms of control in implement-
ing the draft Covenant on Human Rights which
constitute an attempt to intervene in the internal
affairs of States and violate their sovereignty."
This Soviet proposal was rejected by the Com-
mission by a vote of 2-15, with 1 abstention.

As pointed out earlier, the Commission re-

jected the inclusion of a provision in the covenant
to extend the right of complaint to individuals,
groups, and organizations. This proposal was
rejected by a vote of 7-10, with 1 abstention.
The seven countries voting in favor of this pro-
posal were Chile, Egj-pt, Guatemala, India, Leb-
anon, Sweden, and Uruguay. The 10 countries
voting against this proposal were Australia,
China, France, Greece, Pakistan, Ukraine,
U.S.S.R., United Kingdom, United States, and
Yiu^oslavia. Denmark abstained.

Guatemala proposed that a provision be in-
cluded in the covenant referring to other interna-
tional instrument authorizing complaints to be
filed by individuals, groups, and organizations.
This proposal was also rejected by a vote of 7-9,
with 1 abstention.

The countries voting against and abstaining on
the question of including provisions in the cove-
nant to extend the right of complaint to individ-
uals, groups, and organizations expressed tlie view
that such provisions should be set forth in a sep-
arate protocol or protocols for separate ratifica-
tion, except the U.S.S.R. and the Ukraine who
were against the drafting of any such provisions
in any international instruments. The Commis-
sion intended to proceed with the drafting of a
protocol or protocols authorizing individuals,
groups, and organizations to file complaints of
alleged violations of the covenant, but did not
have adequate time to do so at its 1951 session.
These protocols may be considered by the General
Assembly at its 1951 session or by the Commission
on Human Rights at its 1952 session.

In reviewing the provisions of the draft cove-
nant providing for the establishment of a Human
Rights Committee to receive complaints from
states with respect to alleged violations of the civil
and political rights in the covenant, the Commis-
sion decided to increase the membership of this
Committee from 7 to 9 members. In addition,
the Commission decided that the Committee should
be elected by the International Court of Justice
instead of by states parties to the covenant. It
was felt that this method of election would tend
to make the Committee a more impartial body.
It was agreed, however, that the Court would elect
members only from a list of persons nominated
by states parties to the covenant. The nonjudi-
cial character of the Human Rights Committee
was stressed in a revision of article 33 to provide
that consideration should be given in the compo-
sition of the Committee —

to the usefulness of the participation of some persons
having judicial or legal erperience.

This provision indicates that it is not contem-
plated that all the members of the Committee will
be persons with judicial or legal experience.

Provision is made that the Human Rights Com-
mittee will meet at the permanent headquarters
of the United Nations at New York or Geneva.
The jurisdiction of the Committee was restricted

June 25, 1951

1007

by the adoption of article 53 which provides that
the Committee will not deal with any matter (1)
for which an organ or a specialized agency of the
United Nations competent to do so has established
a special procedure or (2) with which the Inter-
national Court of Justice is seized. Article 54
was retained without change to provide that nor-
mally the Human Rights Committee will deal with
a matter referred to it only if available domestic
remedies have been invoked and exhausted in the
case.

Article 56 was added to authorize the Human
Rights Committee to recommend to the Economic
and Social Council that the Council request the
International Court of Justice to give an advisory
opinion on any legal question connected with a
matter with which the Committee is seized. This
provision also stresses the nonlegal character of
the Human Rights Committee.

Under article 57, the Committee is authorized
to ascertain the facts in each case referred to it
and to make its good offices available to the states
concerned with a view to a friendly solution of
the matter on the basis of respect for human
lights as recognized in the covenant. The Com-
mittee will in each case prepare a report to be sent
to the states concerned and to the Secretary-Gen-
eral of the United Nations for publication.

Federal State Article

The Commission on Human Rights had been
requested by the General Assembly to study a fed-
eral state article and to prepare, for the considera-
tion of the 1951 session of the General Assembly,
recommendations which would have as their pur-
pose "securing the maximum extension of the
Covenant to the constituent units of Federal
States" and at the same time meeting the constitu-
tional problems of federal states. The Commis-
sion did not have sufficient time at its 1951 ses-
sion to study or make such recommendations.
Accordingly, the preparation of a federal state
article was postponed. The United States, during
the discussion of the economic, social, and cultural
provisions, pointed out that, in its view, the fed-
eral state article should be applicable to these pro-
visions as well as to the civil and political provi-
sions in the covenant. Under the language
proposed by the United States, the obligations
undertaken under the covenant by a federal state
such as the United States would be limited to
matters which are determined in accordance with
the constitutional jirocesses of the United States
to be appropriate for federal action.

DRAFT INTERNATIONAL COVENANT
ON HUMAN RIGHTS

[4« revised at the seventh session of the United NatioM
Commission on Human Riyltts. April-Mai/ llh'H. The
Commission at this session drafted the provisions on eco-

1008

nomic, social and cultural rights in part III and the im-
\)lementation provisions in part V and revised the imple-
mentation machinery in part IV. Due to the lack of time,
the Commission did not consider or make any changes in
parts I, II and VI except with respect to article 72. This
draft mil be considered by the United Nations Economic
and Social Council at its thirteenth session, July-Septem-
ber 1951.]

Prearnble

The States Parties hereto,

Considering the obligation under the Charter of the
United Nations to promote universal respect for, and
observance of, human rights and freedoms,

Bearing in mind the Universal Declaration of Human
Rights,

Kecognizinq that the rights and freedoms recognized
in tliis Covenant flow from the inherent dignity of the
human person,

By this Covenant agree upon the following articles with
respect to these rights and freedoms.

PART I

Article 1

[This article 1 was initially drafted by the Commission
to be applicable only to the articles on civil and political
rights in part II. The discussions in the April-May 1951
session of the Commission indicated that the Commission
did not intend to have this article applicable to the arti-
cles on econwnic and social rights in part III, except
possibly the nondiscrimination provisions of paragraph 1.
Due to the lack of time at its April-May 1951 session,
hmcever, the Commission did not have an opportunity to
clarify these matters by appropriate remsions in this
article.']

1. Each State Party hereto undertalces to respect and
to ensure to all individuals within its territory and sub-
ject to its jurisdiction the rights recognized in this Cove-
nant, without distinction of any kind, such as race, colour,
sex, language, religion, political or other opinion, national
or social origin, property, birth or other status.

2. AVhere not already provided for by existing legislative
or other measures, each State undertakes to take the
necessary steps, in accordance with its constitutional
processes and with the provisions of this Covenant, to
adopt within a reasonable time such legislative or other
measures as may be necessary to give effect to the rights
recognized in this Covenant.

3. Each State Party hereto undertakes to ensure :

(a) That any person whose rights or freedoms as
herein recognized are violate<l shall have an effective
remedy, notwithstanding that the viohition has been com-
mitted by persons acting in an official capacity ;

(b) That any person claiming such a remedy shall
have his right thereto determined by competent authori-
ties, political, administrative or judicial ;

(c) That the competent authorities shall enforce
such remedies when granted.

Article 2

1. In the case of a state of emergency oflScially pro-
claimed by the authorities or in the case of public disaster,
a State may take measures derogating, to the extent
strictly limited by the exigencies of the situation, from
its obligations under article 1, paragraph 1 and Part II
of this Covenant.

2. No derogation from articles 3, 4, .'i (paragraphs 1
and 2), 7, 11, 12 and 13 may be made under this provision.
No derogation which is otherwise incompatible with inter-
national law may be made l>y a State under this provision.

3. Any State Party hereto availing ilself of the right
of derogation shall inform immedialely the other States
Parties to the Covenant, through the intermediary of the
Secretary-General, of the provisions from which it has

Department of State Bulletin

I

derogated nnd the date on which it has terminated such
derogation.

PART II

[Civil and Political Rights]
> Article 3

1. Everyone's right to life shall be protected by law.

2. To take life shiill be a crime, save in the execution of
a sentence of a court, or in self-defence, or in the ease of
enforcement measures authorized by the Charter.

3. In countries where capital punishment exists, sen-
tence of death may be imposed only as a penalty for the
most serious crimes, pursuant to the sentence of a com-
petent court and in accordance with law not contrary
to the Universal Declaration of Human Rights.

4. Anyone sentenced to death shall have the right to
seek amnesty, or pardon, or commutation of the sentence.
Amnesty, pardon or commutation of the sentence of death
may be granted in all cases.

Article 4

No one shall be subjected to torture or to cruel. Inhuman
or degrading treatment or punishment. In particular, no
one shall be sub.1ected against his will to medical or .scien-
tific experimentation Involving risk, where such is not
required by his state of physical or mental health.

Article 5

1. No one shall be held in slavery ; slavery and the slave
trade in all their forms shall be prohibited.

2. No one shall be held in servitude.

3. (a) No one shall be required to perform forced or
compulsorv labour.

(b) The preceding sub-paragraph shall not be held
to preclude, in countries where imprisonnient with "hard
labour" may be imposed as a punishment for a crime, the
performance of "hard labour" in pursuance of a sentence
to such punishment by a competent court.

(e) For the purpose of this paragraph the term
"forced or compulsory labour" shall not include :

( i ) Any work or service, other than work performed
in pursuance of a .sentence of "hard labour" required to
be done in the course of detention in consequence of a law-
ful order of a court :

(ii) Any service of a military character or, in the
case of conscientious objectors, in countries where they
are recognized, service exacted in virtue of laws requiring
compulsory national service ;

(iii) Any service exacted in cases of emergency or
calamity threatening the life or well-being of the com-
munity :

(iv) Any work or service which forms part of
normal civil obligations.

Article 6

1. No one shall be subjected to arbitrary arrest or
detention.

2. No one shall be deprived of his liberty except on such
grounds and in accordance with such procedures as are
established by law.

3. Anyone who is arrested shall he informed, at the
time of arrest, of the reasons for his arrest and shall be
promptl.v informed of any charges against him.

4. Anyone arrested or detained on a criminal charge
shall be brought promptly before a Judge or other officer
authorized by law to exercise Judicial power and shall be
entitled to trial witjiin a reasonable time or to release.
Pending trial, detention shall not be the general rule, but
release may be subject to guarantees to appear for trial.

5. Anyone who is deprived of his liberty by arrest or
detention shall be entitled to take proceedings by which
the lawfulness of his detention shall be decided without
delay by a court and his release ordered if the detention
is not lawful.

6. Anyone who has been the victim of unlawful arrest
or deprivation of liberty shall have an enforceable right to
compensation.

Article 7

No one shall be imprisoned merely on the ground of
inability to fulfill a contractual obligation.

Article 8

1. Subject to any general law, consistent with the rights
recognized in this Covenant:

va) Everyone legally within the territory of a State
shall, within that territory, have the right to (i) liberty
of movement and (ii) freedom to choose his residence;

(b) Everyone shall be free to leave any country in-
cluding his own.

2. (a) No one shall be subjected to arbitrary exile;
(b) Subject to the preceding sub-paragraph, anyone

shall be free to enter the country of which he is a
national.

Article 9

No alien legally admitted to the territory of a Stata
shall be expelled therefrom except on established legal
grounds and according to procedure and safeguards which
shall in all cases be provided by law.

Article 10

1. In the determination of any criminal charge against
him, or of his rights and obligations in a suit at law,
everyone .shall be entitled to a fair and public hearing, by
an independent and impartial tribunal established by law.
The Press and public may be excluded from all or part
of a trial for reasons of morals, public order or national
security or where the interest of Juveniles so requires, or
to the extent strictly necessary in the opinion of the court
in special circumstances where publicity would prejudice
the interest of justice ; but the Judgment shall be pro-
nounced publicly except where the interest of Juveniles
otherwise re^iuires.

2. Everyone charged with a criminal offence shall have
the right to be presumed innocent until proved guilty
according to law. In the determination of any criminal
charge against him, everyone shall be entitled to the
following minimum guarantees, in full equality :

( a ) To be informed promptly of the nature and cause
of the accusation against him ;

(b) To defend himself in person or through legal
assistance of his own choosing ; to be informed, if he
does not have legal assistance, of this right ; and to have
legal assistance assigned to him, in any case where the
interests of Justice so require, and without payment by
him in any such case where he does not have suflBcient
means to pay for it;

(c) To examine, or have examined, the witnesses
against him and to obtain compulsory attendance of wit-
nesses in his behalf who are within the jurisdiction and
subject to the process of the tribunal ;

(d) To have the free assistance of an Interpreter if
he cannot understand or speak the language used in
court ;

(e) In the case of juveniles, the procedure shall be
such as will take account of their age and the desirability
of promoting their rehabilitation.

3. In any case where by a tinal decision a person has
been convicted of a criminal offence and where subse-
quently a new or newly discovered fact shows conclusively
that there has been a miscarriage of justice, the person
who has suffered punishment as a result of such convic-
tion shall be compensated. This compensation shall be
awarded to the heirs of a person executed by virtue of
an erroneous sentence.

Article 11

1. No one shall be held guilty of any criminal offence
on account of any act or omission which did not constitute
a criminal offence, under national or International law,
at the time when it was committed. Nor shall a heavier
penalty he imposed than the one that was applicable at
the time when the criminal offence was committed. If,
subsequent to the commission of the offence, provision is

June 25, 1 95 1

1009

made by law for the imposition of a lighter penalty, the
offender shall benefit thereby.

2. Nothing in this article shall prejudice the trial and
punishment of any person for the commission of any act
which, at the time when it was committed, was criminal
according to the generally recognized principles of law.

Article 12

Every one shall have the right to recognition everywhere
as a person before the law.

Article IS

1. Everyone shall have the right to freedom of thought,
conscience and religion. This right shall include freedom
to change his religion or beUef, and freedom, either alone
or in community with others and in public or private, to
manifest his religion or belief in teaching, practice, wor-
ship and observance.

2. Freedom to manifest one's religion or beliefs shall
be subject only to such limitations as are pursuant to
law and are reasonable and necessary to protect public
safety, order, health, or morals or the fundamental rights
and freedoms of others.

Article 14

1. Everyone shall have the right to hold opinions with-
out interference.

2. Everyone shall have the right to freedom of expres-
sion ; this right shall include freedom to seek, receive and
impart information and ideas of all kinds, regardless of
frontiers, either orally, in writing or in print, in the
form of art, or through any other media of his choice.

3. The right to seek, receive and impart information
and ideas carries with it special duties and responsibilities
and may therefore be subject to certain penalties, liabili-
ties and restrictions, but these shall be such only as are
provided by law and are necessary for the protection of
national security, public order, safety, health or morals,
or of the rights, freedoms or reputations of others.

Article 15

The right of peaceful assembly shall be recognized.
No restrictions shall be placed on the exercise of this
right other than those imposed in conformity with the
law and which are necessary to ensure national security,
public order, the protection of health or morals or the
protection of the rights and freedoms of others.

Article 16

1. The right of association shall be recognized.

2. No restrictions shall be placed on the exercise of
this right other than those prescribed by law and which
are necessary to ensure national security, public order,
the protection of health or morals or the protection of
the rights and freedoms of others.

3. Nothing in this article shall authorize States Parties
to the Freedom of Association and Protection of the
Right to Organize Convention, 1948, to take legislative
measures which would prejudice, or to apply the law in
such a manner as to prejudice, the guarantees provided
for in that Convention.

Article n

All are equal before the law ; all shaU be accorded equal
protection of the law without discrimination on any
ground such as race, colour, sex, language, religion, politi-
cal or other opinion, national or social origin, property,
birth or other .status.

Article 18

1. Nothing in this Covenant may be interpreted as im-
plying for any State, group or person any right to engage
in any activity or i)erf()rni any act aimed at the destruc-
tion of any of the rights and freedoms recognized herein
or at their limitation to a greater extent than is provided
for in this Covenant.

2. Nothing in this Covenant may be interpreted as lim-

iting or derogating from any of the rights and freedoms
which may be guaranteed under the laws of any Con-
tracting State or any conventions to which it is a party.

PAET III

[Economic, Social, and Cultural Rights]
Article 19

The States parties to the present Covenant,

1. bearing in mind the link between the rights and
liberties recognized and defined above, and the economic,
social and cultural rights proclaimed in the Universal
Declaration of Human Rights ;

2. resolved to combat the scourges, such as famine, dis-
ease, poverty, the feeling of insecurity and ignorance,
which take toll of or degrade men, and prevent the free
development of their personality ;

3. resolved to strive to ensure that every human being
shall obtain the food, clothing, shelter es.sential for his
livelihood and well-being, and shall achieve an adequate
standard of living aud a continuous improvement of his
living material and spiritual conditions ;

4. undertake to take steps, individually and through
International co-operation, to the maximum of their
available resources with a view to achieving progressively
the full realization of the rights recognized in this part
of the present Covenant.

Article 20

Work being the basis of all human endeavor, the
States Parties to the Covenant recognize the right to
work, that is to say, the fundamental right of everyone
to the opportunity, iif he so desires, to gain his living by
work which he freely accepts.

Article 21

The States Parties to the Covenant recognize the right
of everyone to just and favourable conditions of work,
including :

(a) safe and healthy working conditions;

(b) minimum remuneration which provides all work-
ers:

(i) with fair wages and equal pay for equal work,
and

( ii ) a decent living for themselves and their families ;
and

( c ) reasonable limitation of working hours and periodic
holidays with pay.

Article 22

The States Parties to the Covenant recognize the right
of everyone to social security.

Article 23

The States Parties to the Covenant recognize the right
of everyone to adequate housing.

Article 24

The States Parties to the Covenant recognize the right
of everyone to an adequate standard of living and tlie
continuous improvement of living conditions.

Article 25

The States Parties to the Covenant recognize the right
of everyone to the enjoyment of the highest standard of
health obtainable. With a view to implementing and
safeguarding thi.s right each State party hereto undertakes
to provide legislative measures to promote and protect
health and, In particular :

(i) to reduce infant mortality and provide for healthy
development of the child ;

(ii) to inijirove nutrition, housing, sanitation, recre-
ation, economic and working conditions and other aspects
of environmental hygiene;

(iii) to control epidemic, endemic and other diseases;

(iv) to provide conditions which would assure tlie right
of all to medical service aud medical attention in the j
event of sickness.

1010

Department of Stale Bulletin j

Article 26

The States Parties to the Covenant recognize that :

(1) special protection should be accorded to maternity
and motherhood ; and

(2) special measures of protection should be taken on
behalf of children and young persons, and that in par-
ticular they should not be required to do work likely to
hamper their normal development.

Article 27

The States Parties to the Covenant recognize the right
of everyone, in conformity with Article 16, to form and
join local, national, and international trade unions of his
choice for the protection of his economic and social
interests.

Article 28

The States Parties to the Covenant recognize:

1. the right of everyone to education ;

2. that educational facilities shall be accessible to all
in accordance witli the principle of non-discrimination
enunciated in paragraph 1 of Article 1 of this Covenant ;

3. that primary education shall be compulsory and
available free to all ;

4. that secondary education, in its different forms, in-
cluding technical and professional secondary education,
shall be generally available and shall be made progres-
sively free ;

5. that higher education shaU be equally accessible to
all on the basis of merit and thall be made progressively
free;

(). that fundamental education for tho.se persons who
have not received or completed the whole period of their
primary education shall be encouraged as far as possible ;

7. that education shall encourage the full development
of the human personality, the strengthening of respect
for human riglits and fundamental freedoms and the sup-
pression of all incitement to racial and other hatred. It
shall promote understanding, tolerance and friendship
among all nations, racial, ethnic or religious groups, and
shall further the activities of the United Nations for the
maintenance of peace and enable all persons to participate
effectively in a free society ;

8. the obligations of States to establish a system of free
and compulsory primary education shall not be deemed
incompatible with the liberty of parents to choose for their
children schools other than those established by the State
which conform to minimum standards laid down by the
State ;

9. in the exercise of any functions which the "State
assumes in the field of education it shall have respect
for the liberty of parents to ensure the religious educa-
tion of their children in conformity with their own con-
victions.

Article 29

Each State party to the Covenant which, at the time of
becoming a party to this Covenant, has not been able to
secure in its metropolitan territory or other territories
under its jurisdiction compulsory primary education, free
of charge, undertakes, within two years, to work out and
adopt a detailed plan of action for the progressive im-
plementation, within a reasonable number of years, to be
fixed in the plan, of the principle of compulsory primary
education free of charge for all.

Article SO

The States parties to the Covenant undertake to en-
courage by all appropriate means the conservation, the
development and the diffusion of science and culture.

They recognize that it is one of their principal alms to
ensure conditions which will permit everyone :

1. to take part in cultural life;

2. to enjoy the benefits of scientific progress and its
applications.

Article SI

The States parties to the Covenant recognize the equal
right of men and women to the enjoyment of all economic,

social and cultural rights, and particularly of those eet
forth in this Covenant.

Article S2

The States Parties to the Covenant recognize that In
the enjoyment of those rights provided by the State in
conformity with this Part of the Covenant, the State may
subject such rights only to such limitations as are deter-
mined by law only In so far as this may be compatible
with the nature of these rights and solely for the purpose
of promoting the general welfare in a democratic society.

[The implementation machinery set forth in this Part
of the Covenant was initialli/ drafted by the Commission
at its March-May 1950 session with respect to the civil
and political rights in Parts I and II. Due to the lack
of time at its April-May 1951 session, the Commission
did not decide tvhether this implementation machinery
should also apply to the economic, social and cultural
rif/hts in Part III. The discussions in the April-May
1951 session indicated, however, wide sentiment in the
Commission against the applical)ility of this Part of the
Covenant to the economic, social and cultural rights.']

Article 3S

1. With a view to the implementation of the provisions
of the International Covenant on Human Rights, there
shall be set up a Human Rights Committee, hereinafter
referred to as "the Committee", composed of nine members
with the functions hereinafter provided.

2. The Committee shall be composed of nationals of
the States Parties to the Covenant who shall be persons
of high moral standing and recognized competence in the
field of human rights, consideration being given to the
usefulness of the participation of some persons having
a judicial or legal experience.

3. The members of the Committee shall be elected and
shall serve in their personal capacities.

Article 34

1. The members of the Committee shall be elected from
a list of ijersons possessing the qualifications prescribed
in Article 33 and specially nominated for that purpose by
the States Parties to the Covenant.

2. Each State shall nominate at least two and not more
than four persons. These persons may be nationals of
the nominating State or of any other State Party to the
Covenant.

3. Nominations shall remain valid until new nomina-
tions are made for the purpose of the next election under
Article 39. A person shall be eligible to be renominated.

Article 35

At least three months before the date of each election
to the Committee, the Secretary-General of the United
Nations shall address a written request to the States Par-
ties to the Covenant inviting them, if they have not already
submitted their nominations, to submit them within two
months.

Article 36

The Secretary-General of the United Nations shall pre-
pare a list in alphabetical order of all the persons thus
nominated, and submit it to the International Court of
Justice and to the States Parties to the Covenant.

Article 37

1. The Secretary-General of the United Nations, on
behalf of the States Parties to the Covenant, shall request
the International Court of Justice to elect the members of
the Committee from the list referred to in Article 36 and
in accordance with the conditions set out below.

2. On receipt of the list from the Secretary-General of
the United Nations, the President of the International
Court of Justice shall fix the time of elections for mem-
bers of the Committee.

June 25, 7 95 J

1011

Article 38

1. No more than one national of any State may be a
member of the Committee at any time.

2. In the election of the Committee consideration shall
be (liven to e(iuitable geographical distribution of mem-
bership and to the representation of the main forms of
civilization.

The persons elected shall be those who obtain the largest
number of votes and an absolute majority of the votes
of all the members of the Court.

3. The quorum of nine laid down in Article 25, para-
graph 3, of the Statute of the Court shall apply for the
holding of the elections by the Court.

Article 39

The members of the Committee shall be elected for a
term of five years and be eligible for re-election. How-
ever, the terms of five of the members elected at the first
election shall expire at the end of two years. Immedi-
ately after the first election the names of the members
whose terms expire at the end of the initial period of
two years shall be chosen by lot by the President of the
International Court of Justice.

Article 40

1. Should a vacancy arise, the provisions of Articles 35,
36, 37 and 38 shall apply to the election.

2. A member of the Committee elected to fill a vacancy
shall, if his predecessor's term of office has not expired,
hold oflice for the remainder of that term.

Article 41

A member of the Committee shall remain in office until
his successor has been elected ; but if the Committee has,
prior to the election of his successor, begun to consider
a case, he shall continue to act in that case, and his suc-
cessor shall not act in that case.

Article 42

The resignation of a member of the Committee shall be
addressed to the Chairman of the Committee through the
Secretary of the Committee who shall immediately notify
the Secretary-General of the United Nations and the In-
ternational Court of Justice.

Article 4S

The members of the Committee and the Secretary, when
engaged on the business of the Committee, shall enjoy
diplomatic privileges and immunities.

Article 44

1. The Secretary of the Committee shall be appointed
by the International Court of Justice from a list of three
names submitted by the Committee.

2. The candidate obtaining the largest number of votes
and an absolute majority of the votes of all the members
of the Court shall be declared elected.

3. The quorum of nine laid down in Article 25, para-
graph 3, of the Statute of the Court shall apply for the
holding of the election by the Court.

Article 45

The Secretary-General of the United Nations shall con-
vene the initial meeting of the Committee at the Head-
quarters of the United Nations.

Article 46

The Committee shall, at its initial meeting, elect its
Chairman and Vice-Chairman for the period of one year.

Article 41

The Committee shall establish its own rules of proce-
dure, but these rules shall provide that :

(a) Seven members shall constitute a quorum;

1012

(b) The work of the Committee shall proceed by a
majority vote of the meml>ers present ; in the event of
an equality of votes the Chairman shall have a casting
vote ;

(c) All States parties to the Covenant having an
interest in any matter referred to the Committee under
Article .'52 shall have the right to make submissions to the
Committee in writing.

The States referred to in Article 52 shall further have
the right to be represented at the bearings of the Com-
mittee and to make submissions orally.

(d) The Committee shall hold hearings and other
meetings in closed session.

Article ^8

1. After its initial meeting the Committee shall meet

(a) at such times as it deems necessary;

(b) when any matter is referred to it under Article
52;

(c) when convened by its Chairman or at the request
of not less than five of its members.

2. The Committee shall meet at the permanent head-
quarters of the United Nations or at Geneva.

Article 49

The Secretary of the Committee shall attend its meet-
ings, make all necessary arrangements, in accordance
with the Committee's instructions, for the preparation
and conduct of the work, and carry out any other duties
assigned to him by the Committee.

Article 50

The members and the Secretary of the Committee shall
receive emoluments commensurate with the importance
and resiwnsibilities of their office.

Article 51

The Secretary-General of the United Nations shall pro-
vide the necessary staff and facilities for the Committee
and its members.

Article 52

1. If a State Party to the Covenant considers that
another State Party is not giving effect to a provision
of the Covenant, it may, by written communication, bring
the matter to the attention of that State. Within three
months after the receipt of the communication, the re-
ceiving State shall afford the communicating State an
explanation or statement in writing concerning the matter,
which should include, to the extent possible and pertinent,
references to domestic procedures and remedies taken or
pending, or available in the matter.

2. If the matter is not adjusted to the satisfaction of
both Parties within six months after the receipt by the
receiving State of the initial communication, either State
shall have the right to refer the matter to the Committee,
by notice given to the Secretary of the Committee and to
the other State.

3. Subject to the provisions of Article 54 below, in
serious cases, where human life is endangered the Com-
mittee may, at the request of a State Party to the Cove-
nant referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, deal forth-
with with the case on receipt of the initial communication
and after notifying the State concerned.

Article 53

The Committee shall deal with any matter referred to
it under Article 52 save that it .shall have no power to
deal with any matter,

(a) for which any organ or specialized agency of the
United Nation.s ccmipetent to do so has established a spe-
cial procedure by which the States concerned are gov-
erned ; or

(b) with which the International Court of Justice is
seized other than by virtue of Article ... of the present
Covenant.

Department of State Bulletin

Article 5i

Normally, the Committee shall deal with a matter re-
ferred to it only if available domestic remedies have been
invoked and exhausted in the case. This shall not be
the rule where the application of the remedies is un-
reasonably prolonged.

Article 55

In any matter referred to it the Committee may call
upon the States concerned to supply any relevant
information.
j Article 56

I The Committee may recommend to the Economic and
Social Council that the Council request the International
Court of Justice to give an advLsory opinion on any legal
question connected with a matter of which the Committee
is seized.

Article 57

1. Subject to the provisions of Article 54, the Commit-
tee shall ascertain the facts and make available its good
offices to the States concerned with a view to a friendly
solution of the matter on the basis of resi)ect for human
rights as recognized in this Covenant.

2. The Committee shall, in every case and in no event
later than eighteen months after the date of receipt of
the notice under Article .'>2, draw up a report wliich will
be sent to the States concerned and then communicated
to the Secretary-General of the United Nations for publi-
cation. The Committee shall complete its report as
promptly as possible, particularly when requested by one
of the States Parties where human life in endangered.

3. If a solution within the terms of paragraph 1 of this
article is reached the Committee shall confine its report
to a brief statement of the facts and of the solution
reached. If such a solution is not reached, the Com-
mittee shall state in its report its conclusion on the facts
and attach thereto the statements made by the parties
to the case.

Article 58

The Committee shall submit to the General Assembly,
through the Secretary-General, an annual report of its
activities.

Article 59

The States Parties to this Covenant agree not to submit,
by way of petition, to the International Court of .lustice,
except by special agreement, any dispute arising out of
the interpretation or application of the Covenant in a
matter within the comiietence of the Committee.

[The implementation provisions set forth in this Part of
the Covenant were drafted by the Commission at its April-
May 1951 session with respect to the economic, social and
cultural riiihts in Part III. The Commissicm left open
the question whether these itnplementation provisions
should also apply to the civil and political rights in Parts
I and II. Sentiment in the Commission was divided on
this issue.]

Article 60

The States Parties to this Covenant undertake to sub-
mit reports concerning progress made in acliieving the ob-
servance of these rights in conformity with the following
articles and the recommendations which the General As-
sembly and the Economic and Social Council, in the exer-
cise of their general responsibility may make to all the
Members of the United Nations.

Article 61

1. The States Parties shall furnish their reports in
stages, in accordance with a programme to be established
by the Economic and Social Council after consultation
with the States Parties to this Covenant and the special-
ized agencies concerned.

2. Reports may Indicate factors and difficulties affecting
the degree of fulfillment of obligations under this part
of the Covenant.

3. Where relevant information has already previously
been furnished to the United Nations or to any specialized
agency, the action required by this Article may take the
form of a precise reference to the information so fur-
nished.

Article 62

Pursuant to its responsibilities under the Charter in
the field of human rights, the Economic and Social Council
shall make si)ecial arrangements with the specialized
agencies in respect to their reporting to it on the progress
made in achieving the observance of the provisions of this
part of tlie Covenant falling within their competence.
These reports shall include particulars of decisions and
recommendations on such implementation adopted by their
competent organs.

Article 63

The Economic and Social Council shall transmit to the
Commission on Human Rights for study and recommenda-
tion the reports concerning human rights submitted by
States, and these concerning human rights submitted by
the competent specialized agencies.

Article 64

The States Parties directly concerned and the special-
ized agencies may submit comments to the Economic and
Social Council on the report of the Commission on Human
Rights.

Article 65

The Economic and Social C^nmcil may submit from time
to time to the General Assembly, with its own reports,
reports summarizing the information made available by
the States Parties to the Covenant directly to the Secre-
tary-General and by the specialized agencies under Article
. . . indicating the progress made in achieving general
observance of these rights.

Article 66

The Economic and Social Council may submit to the
Technical A.ssistance Board or to any other appropriate
international organ the findings contained in the report
of the Commission on Human Rights which may assist
such organs in deciding each within its competence, on
the advisability of international measures likely to con-
tribute to the progressive implementation of this Cove-
nant.

Article 67

The States Parties to the Covenant agree that inter-
national action for the achievement of these rights in-
cludes such methods as conventions, recommendations,
technical assistance, regional and technical meetings and
studies with governments.

Article 68

Unless otherwise decided by the Commission on Human
Rights or by the Economic and Social Council or requested
by the State directly concerned, the Secretary-General
of the United Nations shall arrange for the publication
of the report of the Commission on Human Rights, or
reports presented to the Council by specialized agencies
as well as of all decisions and recommendations reached
by the Economic and Social Council.

Article 69

Nothing in this Covenant shall be interpreted as im-
pairing the provisions of the Charter of the United Na-
tions and of the Constitutions of the specialized agencies,
which define the respective responsibilities of the vari-
ous organs of the United Nations and of the specialized
agencies in regard to the matters dealt with in this
Covenant.

June 25, T95J

1013

PABT VI

Article 70

1. This Covenant shall be open for signature and ratifi-
cation or accession on belialf of any State Member of
the United Nations or of any non-member State to which
an invitation has been extended by the General Assembly.

2. Ratification of or accession to this Covenant shall
be effected by the deposit of an instrument of ratification
or accession with the Secretary-General of the United
Nations, and as soon as twenty States have deposited
such instruments, the Covenant shall come into force
among them. As regards any State which ratifies or ac-
cedes thereafter the Covenant sliall come into force on
the date of the deposit of its instrument of ratification
or accession.

3. The Secretary-General of the United Nations shall
inform all Members of the United Nations, and other
States which have signed or acceded, of the deposit of
each instrument of ratification or accession.

Article 71
[The consideration of this article was postponed. The
United States proposed the following language for this
article in the Commission in 1950:

"In the case of a Federal State, the following provisions
shall apply:

(a) With respect to any articles of this Covenant
which are determined in accordance toith the constitu-
tional processes of that State to he appropriate in whole
or in part for federal action, the obligations of the federal
government shall to tliis extent he the same as those of
parties which are not Federal States;

(6) With respect to articles which are determined in
accordance with the constitutional processes of that State
to be appropriate in whole or in part for action by the
constitutent states, provinces or cantons, the federal
government shall bring such articles, with fwvorable
recommendation, to the notice of the appropriate authori-
ties of the states, provinces or cantons at the earliest
possible moment."]

Article 72

[Adopted by General Assembly at its 1950 session]

The provisions of the present Covenant shall extend to
or be applicable equally to a signatory metropolitan State
and to all the territories, be they Non-Self-Governing,
Trust, or Colonial Territories, which are being admin-
istered or governed by such metropolitan State.

Article 73

1. Any State Party to the Covenant may propose an
amendment and file it with the Secretary-General. The
Secretary-General .shall thereupon communicate the pro-
posed amendment to the States Parties to the Covenant
with a request that they notify him whether they favour
a conference of States Parties for the purpose of consider-
ing and voting upon the proposal. In the event that at
least one third of the States favour such a conference the
Secretary-General shall convene the conference under the
auspices of the United Nations. Any amendment adopted
by a majority of States present and voting at the con-
ference shall be submitted to the General Assembly for
approval.

2. Such amendments shall come into force when they
have been approved by the General Assembly and accepted
by a two-thirds majority of the States Parties to the
Covenant in accordance with their respective constitu-
tional processes.

3. When such amendments come into force they shall be
binding on these Parties which have accepted them, other
Parties lieing still bound by the provisions of the Covenant
and any earlier amendment which they have accepted.

• Mr. Simsarian is assistant officer in charge
of United Nations and HumMn Rights A fairs and
also adviser to tlie United States representative on
the Commission on Human Rights.

United Nations Documents:
A Selected Bibliography^

General Assembly

I. Plans for the Relief and Rehabilitation of Korea;
II. Assistance to Palestine Refugees. Report of the
Negotiating Committee on Contributions to Pro-
grammes of Relief and Rehabilitation. A/1769,
January 26, 1951. 11 pp. mimeo.

Resolutions of the International Law Association Con-
cerning Nationality and Statelessness, the Develop-
ment and Codification of International Law, and
the Illegal Use of Force. A/1785, March 6, 1951.
45 pp. mimeo.

United Nations Conciliation Commission for Palestine.
Ninth Progress Report. A/1793, March 22, 1951. 3
pp. mimeo.

Security Council

Letter Dated 27 March 1951 from the Acting Chief of
Staff of the Truce Supervision Organization to the
Secretary-General Transmitting an Interim Report
on the Status of Operations in the Syrian-Israel
Mixed Armistice Commission. S/2067, April 4, 1951.
12 pp. mimeo.

Letter Dated 10 April 1951 from the Acting Chief of Staff
of the Truce Supervision Organization to the Secre-
tary-General Transmitting an Interim Report on the
Status of Operations in the Syrian-Israel Mixed Ar-
mistice Commission. S/2084, April 12, 1951. 18 pp.
mimeo.

Cablegram Dated 12 April 1951 from the Acting Chief of
Staff of the Truce Supervision Organization Ad-
dressed to the President of the Security Council
Transmitting a Report covering the Period 11-12
April 1951. S/2088, April 13, 1951. 3 pp. mimeo.

Letter Dated 16 April 1951 from the Permanent Repre-
sentative of Israel to the United Nations Addressed
to the President of the Security Council. S/2089,
April 16, 1951. 5 pp. mimeo.

Letter Dated 3 April 1951 from the United Nations Com-
mission for Indonesia to the President of the Security
Council Transmitting a Report on the Commission's
Activities Since the Transfer of Sovereignty. S/2087,
April 13, 1951. 82 pp. mimeo.

Cablegram Dated 24 April 1951 from the Acting Chief of
Staff of the Truce Supervision Organization to the
Secretary-General Transmitting a Report Covering
the Period 18-24 April 1951. S/2101, April 24, 1951.
2 pp. mimeo.

Department of Public Information

Research Section

The International Law Commission. Background Pai)er
No. 64. ST/DPI/SER.A/64, February 14, 1951. 31
pp. mimeo.

' Printed materials may be secured in the United States
from the International Documents Service, Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 2960 Broadway, New York 27, N. Y. Other
materials (mimeographed or processed documents) may
be consulted at certain designated libraries in the United
States.

The United Nations Secretariat has established an 0/JI-
cial Records series for the General Assembly, the Security
Council, the Economic and Social Council, the Trusteeship
Council, and the Atomic Energy Commission, which in-
cludes summaries of proceedings, resolutions, and reports
of tlip various commissions and committees. Pul)lications
in the Official Records series will not be listed in this
department as heretofore, but information on securing
sub.scriptions to the series may be obtained from the
International Documents Service.

1014

Department of State Bulletin

Promulgating a Mutual Security Program

STATEMENT BY JAMES E. WEBB
UNDER SECRETARY OF STATE >

While you sit comfortably before your tele-
vision, at this evening hour, it is already dawn of
tomorrow, Saturday, June 9, in far-off Iran — 5,000
miles from you and me. And, in a short time now,
your Ambassador, Henry Grady, a distinguished
California businessman, will go to his office at the
United States Embassy in the capital city of that
country. He will find there a message from your
State Department at Washington which will tell
him the important things he needs to know about
happenings all over the world. He will also find
instructions based on the best judgment of all the
departments of your Government as to the things
he should do to make known to the Iranian Gov-
ernment, and to have considered, the concern we
all feel over the serious crisis that has developed
in that country.

Now, it is important to remember that the pres-
ent acute situation arises from the decision of the
Iranian Government to nationalize its oil fields in
spite of certain contractual obligations which are
felt to be infringed by the Anglo-Iranian Oil Com-
pany and by the Government of the United
Kingdom.

From the standpoint of the United States, we
must bear in mind that even though this situation
is fraught with gi-eat danger to peace, which affects
the whole world, it is primarily a situation for
negotiation between Iran and the United King-
dom. The position your Government has taken is
that everyone concerned must be as level-headed
as possible and stretch every point to preserve
peace. We must not interfere in the internal
affairs of Iran or in the details of the controversy,
but we have an obligation to make known to both
the British and the Iranians our concern about
this situation and to urge that they both approach
the problem in a spirit of moderation.

In carrying out this decision of your Govern-
ment, Ambassador Grady tomorrow will, I hope,
play a part in helping to work out a solution based
on patience and good faith. About the time you
finish your breakfast tomorrow morning, it will

' This statement and the one made by Ambassador
Cowen were made over an NBC-TV program on June 8
and released to the press on the same date.

be twilight in Iran, and he will have completed
another day's work. After he leaves his office,
his staff in the Embassy, including perhaps some-
one from your home town, will work on into the
night getting off to the State Department an esti-
mate of progress made and suggestions for future
action.

On the other side of the world is another crisis
area — Korea — and your Ambassador there, Jolin
J. Muccio, from Rhode Island, with his staff at the
United States Embassy, is dealing with a whole
cluster of j^roblems which are quite different from
those faced in Iran. The instructions which will
go out to Ambassador Muccio tonight through the
State Department are also based on the best judg-
ment of all the departments of your Government
and are based on policies which are quite clear. I
know you are asking, "How long will the fighting
go on, and what about these rumors of peace
negotiations?" Let me set the record straight.
We have received no peace feelers from the Com-
munists.

One of the most important things about Korea
is that we and the other free nations are carrying
on this fight in partnership. Aggression has been
stopped in its tracks. It has been stopped not
by one nation, but by the United Nations — by
collective action for collective security. Of course,
we are at all times looking to find a way to end the
Korean fighting. Wlien it ends, the next step is
the long-term United Nations' objective of estab-
lishing a united, free, and independent Korea.
We have made it clear that we believe this can be
accomplished by peaceful means if the fighting is
stopped.

Meantime, there are problems in other parts
of the world. The French and Vietnamese are
valiantly fighting the Communists in Indochina
in a major conflict. The British have thousands
of troops in Malaya fighting the Communists
there. And there are continuing threats by the
forces of international communism all along the
periphery of the Soviet Union and its satellites.
You know the trouble spots — Berlin, Western Ger-
many, Yugoslavia, Greece, and so on. The threat
of Communist aggression is seen everywhere.
And our answer, together with other free nations,
is collective action for collective security.

June 25, 795J

1015

Our first job within our collective security sys-
tem is to rebuild our military power. And we are
already taking the actions required. The second
job is to harness our power with that of other free
nations. We have laid a good foundation through
the Marshall Plan, Military Assistance, and the
Point 4 Program.

The means of going forward from where we
are is a program the President has called the
Mutual Security Program. He has submitted this
to the Congress and requested an authorization of
81/. billion dollars. This program includes many
different things. By it, we will provide arms to
free countries; we will give them some of the
things they need to produce arms ; we will share
with them our vast store of technical know-how ;
we will provide economic help to some countries
to achieve internal stability. We will keep on
cooperating with underdeveloped countries whose
peoples will be ripe for Communist promises if
they have no hope for a better future.

Now this is not just a one-way street. It is not
all give by the United States and all take by our
friends abroad. They are making their contribu-
tion, too. Through this program, we are taking
ont insurance— insurance for the collective se-
curity we must have to keep our freedom.

We and our allies have the capacity to create
the strength we need. We have the raw materials.
We have the know-how, we have the manpower,
we have the spiritual resources, and we have the
determination. It is going to take our best effort.

If we carry out these policies we can face the
future with confidence. Our strength and our
partnership with other nations can have a tre-
mendous impact to preserve the peace.

STATEMENT BY MYRON M. COWEN
AMBASSADOR TO THE PHILIPPINES

As a result of 50 years of American tutelage
and out of loyalty to and affection for the United
States, the Philippines unfalteringly stood by us
when Japan embarked on its program to conquer
Asia. The suri-ender of Japan found the Philip-
pines destroyed and laid waste to an extent which
has happened to few countries in modem history,
and of which few Americans can even begin to
conceive. Against this background of death and
destruction, the United States, in compliance with
its undertakings, transferred sovereignty to the
Philippines on July 4, 1946, and agreed to assist
in its rehabilitation. Tt was to be expected that
the first 5 years of Philippine independence would
encounter the most serious difficulties, particularly
in view of the growing menace of the international
Communist conspiracy.

We should remember that the end of hostilities
found the Philippines stripped of all producer and
consumer goods. It will still take many long
years to replace what was destroyed. It is diffi-
cult for us to realize what this meant to the econ-
omy of the country. Among other things, it
meant spending its dollar resources in order to
acquire once more the tools to produce wealth.

During this period, the Philippine economy was
of course unable to produce enough to pay for
necessary imports that it had to buy. The Phil-
ippine Government itself realized the danger of
its position when its dollar reserves during 1949
decreased from 400 million to 248 million dollars.
To remedy this situation the Philippine Govern-
ment imposed the most stringent import regula-
tions with the result that its reserves are now
back to the 400 million-dollar level. In addition,
improved collection of taxes and the imposition of
new taxes in the face of serious political opposi-
tion give us confidence that the Philippine budget
will be balanced this year.

And lastly, Philippine production, particularly
of such strategic and important commodities as
copra, abaca, sugar, lumber, and minerals is now
encouragingly close to the prewar level. I main-
tain that, in view of the obstacles which had to
be overcome and those which still remain, the
record of Philippine self-help and American as-
sistance is a good one. The purpose of the United
States now is to extend the assistance necessai-y to
preserve and extend the gains which have been
made.

Last year, the Bell Mission made a most excel-
lent survey and made recommendations for the
improvement of the Philippine economy. The
recommendations of the Bell Mission are now in
process of implementation, both by the Philip-
pines and by the United States.

With American military assistance, the rejuve-
nated Philippine armed forces are now making
significant inroads on the strength and capabilities
of the Communist-dominated Huk movement. The
presence of the Seventh Fleet in Philippine waters
has contributed significantly to Philippine morale.
American naval and air bases are being expanded.

These specific measures are giving the Philip-
pine people confidence that President Truman and
the Secretary of State have meant exactly what
they said when they categorically stated publicly
that the United States would never tolerate ag-
gression against the Philippines.

Philippine efforts at self-improvement and of
cooperation with the free world persuade me that
the Philippines is convinced the United States, as
in the past, will keep its pledged faith. Philippine
ti'oops have been fighting alongside our boys in
United Nations forces in Korea since last sunmier.
In return, we can know that in Asia we have no
more devoted or staunch friend and ally.

1016

Department of Stale Bulletin

Fulfillment of U.S. Pledge to the Philippines

Statement by Myron M. Cowen
American Ambassador to the Philippines

[Released to the press June 15]

I should like to give you a progi'ess report on
developments in the Philippines and our relations
with that gallant ally of ours. As a result of 50
years of American tutelage and out of loyalty to
and affection for the United States, the Philip-
pines unfalteringly stood by us when Japan em-
barked on its program to conquer Asia. The sur-
render of Japan found the Philippines destroyed
and laid waste to an extent which has happened
to few countries in modei'n history, and of which
few Americans can even begin to conceive.

Against this background of death and destruc-
tion, the United States, in compliance with its
undertakings transferred sovereignty to the Phil-
ippines on July 4, 1946, and agreed to assist in
its rehabilitation. It was to be expected that the
first 5 years of Philippine independence would
encounter the most serious difficulties, particularly,
in view of the growing menace of the international
Communist conspiracy.

Altogether too much is heard in this country of
what is wrong in the Philippines, and I would
be less than fair to our Filipino friends if I denied
that there is much wrong. Far more important,
however, is that there is much that is right and,
in all honesty, I can tell you that I am supremely
confident the Philippines is well on the way to
justifying the confidence we have placed in it.

Because of misleading publicity, I suspect that
the first and automatic reaction of the average
American when he thinks of the Philippines is,
"What happened to the 2 billion dollars the United
States gave the Philippines?"

I believe this is as good a time as any to dispel
once and for all the misconceptions about this
2 billion dollars worth of American aid. The best
way to do it is to show what the United States
has done and what this 2 billion dollars really
consists of.

In the first place, the United States paid out 400
million dollai-s for private war damage claims, of

which the majority were in amounts of less than
500 dollars each, and for the reconstruction of
public buildings. At tlie same time, the United
States spent roughly 118 million dollars in the
reconstruction of such essential public services as
roads and bridges, ports and harbors, public
health, fisheries, weather services, coast surveys,
interisland shipping, and civil air facilities.

Another category of American payments during
the first 5 years of independence fell into a more
strictly military category. An amount of 822
million dollars was paid out by the American
armed forces as back pay for Philippine armed
forces, civilian claims against the military, civil
relief, redemption of the guerrilla currency, miss-
ing persons benefits, and other items for military
pay and construction materials and services.

The Veterans Administration paid out 181 mil-
lion dollars as compensation to Filipino veterans.

An arrangement was also made to transfer sur-
plus property estimated at a fair value of 100 mil-
lion dollars. Other kinds of equipment and mate-
rial and technical assistance to the amount of 200
million dollars were also made available.

The foregoing adds up to a dollar value of less
than 1.9 billion but it should be noted that it was
all in the form of goods and services and payments
to individuals. Not a single centavo of this total
was paid to the Philippine Government in cash.
The only direct financial aid has been an RFC
budgetary loan of 60 million dollars and 89.5 mil-
lion dollars of processing and excise taxes which
the United States had collected on behalf of the
Philippine Commonwealth.

Two billion dollars can be made to sound like a
lot of aid if you interpret it to suit your own pur-
poses. Honest analysis makes it look like some-
thing else. It is true that what the United States
has done for the Philippines did make available to
it substantial amounts of United States dollar ex-
change, much of which could undoubtedly have

June 25, ?95J

1017

been spent more wisely than it was. We should
remember, however, that the end of hostilities
found the Philippines stripped of all consumer
goods. It will still take many long years to replace
what was destroyed.

The Philippine Government itself realized the
danger of its position when its dollar reserves, dur-
ing 1949, decreased from 400 million dollars to
248 million dollars. To remedy this situation the
Philippine Government imposed the most strin-
gent import regulations with the result that its
reserves are now back to the 400 million dollars
level. In addition, improved collection of taxes
and the imposition of new taxes in the face of
serious political opposition give us confidence that
the Philippine budget will be balanced this year.

And lastly, Philippine production, particularly
of such strategic and important commodities as
copra, abaca, sugar, lumber, and minerals is now
encouragingly close to the prewar level. I main-
tain that in view of the obstacles which had to be
overcome and those which still remain, the record
of Philippine self-help and American assistance is
a good one. The purpose of the United States
now is to extend the assistance necessary to pre-
serve and extend the gains which have been made.

Last year the Bell Mission made a most excellent
survey and made recommendations for the im-
provement of the Philippine economy. Pursuant
to the Quirino-Foster agreement, recommenda-
tions of the Bell Mission are now in process of
implementation, both by the Philippines and by
the United States.

With American military assistance, the rejuve-
nated Philippine armed forces are now making
significant inroads on the strength and capabilities
of the Communist-dominated Huk movement. The
presence of the Seventh Fleet in Philippine waters
has contributed significantly to Philippine morale.
American naval and air bases are being expanded.
These specific measures are giving the Philippine
people confidence that President Truman and the
Secretary of State have meant exactly what they
said when they categorically stated publicly that
the United States would never tolerate aggression
against the Philippines.

Philippine efforts at self-improvement and of
cooperation with the free world (for example, the
spendid showing of Filipino troops in Korea) per-
suade me that the Philippines is convinced the
United States, as in the past, will keep its pledged
faith. In return we can know that in Asia we
have no more devoted or staunch friend and ally.

Consular Offices

The combined American consulate and USIE Mission
at Bari, Italy was officially opened to the public on April
19, 1951.

The American Legation at Vientiane, Laos was opened
to the public on May IG, 1951.

Ambassador Griffis Claims
Misinterpretation of Remarks

[Released to the press June 15]

The Department's attention has been brought to
interpretations placed on reported remarks of Am-
bassador Stanton Griffis during the course of a
press conference held in Barcelona, Spain, on May
7. The United States Ambassador to Spain is al-
leged to have implied that he held out no hope of
the people now in slavery in satellite countries
ever again regaining their freedom.

After communicating with Ambassador Griffis
at Madrid, the Department wishes to make em-
phatically clear that the interpretation placed on
the Ambassador's remarks has no validity what-
soever. The constantly reiterated policy of this
Government is the desire to see established in the
countries of Eastern Europe independent and
democratic governments freely responsive to the
will of the people concerned, and the United States
Government regards these peoples themselves as
being deeply devoted to the ideals of personal free-
dom and national independence. On May 3, 1951,
on the occasion of the 160th anniversary of the
Polish Constitution, President Truman, in a mes-
sage to the Polish people carried by the Voice of
America bespoke the confidence of this Govern-
ment in the will of the Polish people ultimately to
regain their freedom when he said in part :

For more than a century and a half, in bondage and in
freedom, Poles have commemorated May 3 as the symbol
of their unflagging devotion to human rights and of their
indomitable resistance to foreign oppression. The Con-
stitution of May 3 has an additional meaning for Ameri-
cans because it was brilliantly defended against the for-
eign invader by Tadeusz Kosciuszko, a hero of our own
war for indei)endence.

At the Barcelona press conference of May 7,
questions and answers were handled through an
interpreter. Correspondents asked questions in
Spanish. Ambassador Griffis replied in English.
During the course of the conference, Mr. Griffis,
who has also served as United States Ambassador
to Poland, was asked his opinion of the relative
freedom of the average citizen behind the iron cur-
tain. The Ambassador replied that peoples be-
hind the curtain had relatively little control over
their governments which were subservient to the
will of Moscow. He added that in Poland, for ex-
ample, present Russian domination was attempt-
ing to crush the Polish spirit of independence.

The Ambassador was then asked his opinion of
the situation in the event of an understanding
between the Soviet Union and the United States.
He replied that, as jjuppet governments, existing
regimes behind the curtain would continue to fol-
low the orders of Moscow.

In both responses, the Ambassador emphasized
that he was speaking of the Soviet-controlled gov-
ernments of these countries, and not of the peoples
themselves. Tliis emphasis, however, was not
made in the reports carried in the Spanish press. /

1018

Department of State Bulletin

In certain quarters, reports of the Ambassador's
alleged remarks have been interpreted as indicat-
ing that he had abandoned hope that peoples now
under Soviet bondage will regain their independ-
ence. Ambassador Griffis has informed the De-
partment that at no time did he express or imply
any such opinion. The Ambassador wishes to
make clear that he fully shares the friendly in-
terest and sympathetic understanding of the
people of the United States in sustaining the spirit
of the peoples behind the iron curtain.

Mr. Dulles Reports on Tripartite
Views on Japanese Treaty

[Released to the press t>y the White House June iS]

John Foster Dulles, accompanied by Secretary
Acheson, reported to the President on the results
of the visit of the Japanese Peace Mission to Great
Britain and France, from which he returned this
morning.

His report covered the talks with the officials of
the French Foreign Office which had enabled the
Foreign Office publicly to announce that there
were no differences between the two countries as
regards all the questions of principle involved in
the preparation of the peace treaty.

Mr. Dulles also reported fully on the full ex-
changes of views which he had with representa-
tives of the British Government, including the
Prime Minister, the Secretary of State for Foreign
Affairs, the Chancellor of the Exchequer, the Pres-
ident of the Board of Trade, and the Minister of
State.

These talks resulted yesterday in full agreement
between Mr. Dulles and Mr. Morrison on the draft
treaty and all other main problems outstanding.
This agreement is subject to governmental con-
firmations.

Mr. Dulles pointed out that although there had
been initially considerable differences of opinion
on important matters, these had all been cleared
away, as a result of the better understanding of the
facts and the reasoning which underlay the atti-
tudes of the two Governments. The agreement
reached did not require any compromise of prin-
ciple by anyone, but represents free agreement
based upon mutual understanding and community
of purpose.

The President expressed gratification at the
progi-ess which had been made and the enlarge-
ment of the area of agreement in relation to the
prompt conclusion of a fair and just Japanese
peace treaty. He expressed the view that this
progress strikingly indicated the capacity of the
free nations to work together and to prove that in
matters of great moment they were able to unify
on a basis of the free working of reason and judg-
ment.

Missing Planes in Czechoslovakia

[Released to the press June 15']

The United States Air Force has issued a re-
lease on June 15, concerning two United States
jet fighter planes which have been missing since
tliey became lost on June 8 while on a normal train-
ing mission over the United States zone of Ger-
many. Eeliable reports have been received that
the missing planes landed in Czeclioslovakia.

The United States Embassy at Praha immedi-
ately upon receiving this information sent a note
to the Czechoslovak Ministry of Foreign Affairs
informing the Czechoslovak authorities that the
planes were missing and requesting assistance in
locating them. The Embassy has pressed repeat-
edly with respect to both the Ministry of Foreign
Atfairs and the Ministry of Defense to obtain veri-
fication that the planes landed in Czechoslovakia
and has stressed the responsibility of the Czecho-
slovak authorities to report the finding of lost
planes. The only response has been an indication
that the competent authorities had not yet replied
to the request for investigating the whereabouts
of the two planes and the promise that these au-
thorities would be pressed for a reply.

No further word has been received from the
Czechoslovak authorities. The United States Gov-
erimient cannot comprehend this dilatory action
and lack of cooperation on the part of the Czecho-
slovak Government in dealing with the matter of
lost aircraft and personnel.

Soviet Repatriation Commission
Leaves U.S. Zone of Austria

[Released to the press June 9]

The Department of State released today the
following statement in connection with the expul-
sion of the Soviet repatriation mission fi-om the
American zone in Austria.

On May 25, 1951, Amhassador Donnelly addressed the
following letter to the So-viet High Commissioner.

Dear General Sviridov : I have recently had occasion
to review the correspondence between our two offices re-
garding the Soviet Repatriation Mission in the United
States Zone of Austria. I have also reviewed in some
detail recent activities of the Mission, and my study has
convinced me that their objectives have been largely
achieved. I note that their initial purpose was to facili-
tate the return of Soviet citizens freed by forces operating
under the United States Command in the concluding
phases of the war and in the immediate postwar i)eriod.
These objectives have long since been fulfilled, and I
perceive no reasonable justification for continuation of a
permanent mission in the United States zone now that
six years have elapsed since the end of the war.

I am advised, for instance, that during 1950 only six
voluntary cases of displaced persons of Soviet nationality
were repatriated, and only one to date in 1951. This
would indicate to me that the task of assisting individuals

June 25, 1957

1019

displaced by the war to return to their homelands has
been accomplished. Those who remain have had ample
time in which to return, and no possible obstacle to their
repatriation exists which could not have been overcome in
that period of time.

As evidenced by the repeated complaints by our respec-
tive staffs, the prolonged and unfruitful maintenance of
the Soviet Mission in the United States zone has proved
a potential source of friction and misunderstanding both
between our elements and among the Austrian population.
By avoiding these tiresome incidents, its withdrawal would
certainly contribute to better relationships between the
United States and Soviet elements. Furthermore, the
presence of the Mission provides a considerable burden
to the United States military headquarters which is
obliged to provide escort personnel and liaison service,
quite aside from the question of furnishing quarters in
an area where housing is acutely short.

The United States Government considers that resettle-
ment, repatriation, and integration into the local popula-
tion have substantially reduced the displaced per.sons
problem, and looks forward to an early solution to the
entire question. Both the United States element and ap-
propriate international agencies have found it possible
to reduce their activities in this respect, and it seems
loi-'ical that the Soviet element might likewi.se find it
opportune to do so. I recall that the Soviet Repatriation
Mission was withdrawn from the United States Zone of
Germany nearly three years ago.

I wish to make it clear that I would have no objection to
individual trips to the United States zone to deal with
specific repatriation cases, on much the same plan as
United States Graves Registration activities are carried
out in the Soviet zone. At the same time, I extend my
assurance that any displaced person of Soviet nationality
who elects to return to the U.S.S.R. is free to cross into the
Soviet zone at any time.

I trust that you will find this arrangement acceptable ;
it would be convenient if the Soviet Repatriation Mis-
sion were withdrawn from permanent residence by Juue
8th when their present accreditation expires.

Sincerely yours,

Walter J. Donnelly,
TJ. S. High Commissioner for Austria.

On June 6, 1951. the Soviet High Commissioner
replied to the United States request of May 25
for the withdrawal of the Soviet Repatriation
Mission from the United States zone stating that
he cannot agree with the United States proposal
"since the activity of the mission to stay in the
United States zone is determined not by an order
of the United States authorities in Austria but by
the agreement of the two Governments made on
February 11, 1945." The United States High
Commissioner answered this letter immediately,
stressing that the 1945 United States-Soviet Yalta
pact has long since been fulfilled and is unrelated
to existing conditions. The second American
letter emphasized the absence of the necessity for
a resident mission and repeated the invitation for
individual trips to the United States zone to deal
with specific repatriation cases on the same basis
as United States Graves Registration activities
are cari'ied out in the Soviet zone. The second
United States letter concluded by extending an
offer of assistance in closing out the mission and
insisting upon evacuation by June 8, as originally
specified.

On June 8, 1951, the United States High Com-
missioner received from General Sviridov a reply
to his second letter again objecting to the termina-
tion of the Soviet mission and stressing again the
validity and application of the 1945 Yalta
protocol.

Ambassador Donnelly immediately dispatched
a reply to this second Soviet letter reaffirming the
United States position. The United States High
Commissioner offered to discuss the applicability
of the Yalta agreement but firmly insisted that the
Soviet mission depart on June 8.

The Soviet Repatriation Commission has left
Salzburg for the Soviet zone.

Sweden and Czechoslovakia Sign
Torquay Protocol

[Released to the press June 11]

The United States Government has been notified
by the headquarters of the United Nations that
Sweden, on June 7, 1951, signed the Torquay
Protocol to the General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade at New York. Czechoslovakia signed the
i:)rotocol on June 8.

The protocol provides that the United States
and Sweden shall put into effect on July 7, the
thirtieth day following signature by Sweden, the
tariff concessions negotiated between the two
countries at the recent conference at Torquay,
England. These concessions are in addition to
those exchanged between the two countries at
Annecy, France, in 1949.

Since the United States and Czechoslovakia did
not negotiate any new concessions at Torquay, no
changes in United States tariff rates will result
from Czechoslovakia's signature of the protocol.

At Torquay, Sweden granted to the United
States concession on 17 Swedish tariff items. On
one item Sweden removed its import duty; on
others it bound moderate rates of duty or duty-free
treatment. On some items dutiable at specific
rates, Sweden reserved the right to convert the
duties to an ad valorem basis.

Concessions negotiated by Sweden at Torquay
with a number of countries other than the United
States will, when put into effect, benefit additional
United States exports to Sweden.

Swedish concessions to the United States will
apply to a variety of American products, in-
cluding rubber, glass, and metal manufactures;
machinery and appliances; newspapers and peri-
odicals ; and chemicals and miscellaneous products.

Products on which United States concessions to
Sweden at Torquay apply include X-ray appa-
ratus and parts; tobacco machinery; steel ingots,
blooms, slabs, billets, bars, etc., valued at more than
IG^* per jiound; calculating machines and parts,
electrical and other; table and kitchen articles of
blown glass, valued at $3 or more each; and crude
horseradish.

1020

Department of State Bulletin

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND CONFERENCES

Four Power Meeting Proposed
by U.S. to Soviet Union

[Released to the press on June 15]

FoUowina is the text of the United States note to the
Soviet Union regarding a proposed Jour-power meeting
of Foreign Ministers.

Tlie Secretary of State presents his compliments
to His Excellency the Foreign Minister of the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics and has the
honor to refer to the current four-power negotia-
tions in Paris.

1. The United States Government communi-
cated on May 31 to the Soviet Government a note
designed to remove the deputies conference from
the deadlock in which it has been for some weeks.
To this end the United States Government pro-
posed, together with the Governments of France
and the United Kingdom, that a conference of
Ministers should meet on the basis of whichever
one of the three agenda which had been submitted
to it the Soviet Government should prefer.'

The negative reply of the Soviet Government
has put the deputies conference back to the point
at which it was before May 31.

The Soviet Government stated in its note of
June 4 that in its view it would be inexpedient to
interrupt the work of the conference. The United
States Government took account of this recom-
mendation. As a result the deputies have held
further meetings. These meetings have shown
again that it is impossible to make any progress.
The Soviet representative in fact continues to
make the meeting of Ministers of Foreign Affairs
conditional on a demand which it knows to be
unacceptable to the other delegates although the
Soviet delegate has obtained satisfaction insofar
as concerns the inclusion in the agenda of all the
questions which the Soviet Government stated that
it wished to have discussed in its notes leading up
to the conference or in the proposals which it
made for the agenda at the beginning of the
conference.

2. If the insistence of the Soviet Government
on including in the agenda some mention of "the
Atlantic Treaty and the American military bases"
is to be explained by its desire thus to secure di-

' Bulletin of June 11, 1951, p. 933.
June 25, 1 95 1

rectly or indirectly a decision of the Ministers
calling into question a treaty concluded by twelve
powers for tlie purpose of ensuring their common
defense and to which the U.S.S.R. is not a party,
it is clear that this insistence is entirely unjustified
since such a decision does not come within the
competence of the meeting of Ministers.

If on the other hand the purpose of the Soviet
Government is solely to reserve the right of the
Soviet Foreign Minister fully to give his inter-
pretation of the causes and effects of international
tension this insistence is unnecessary since it has
been agreed that the agenda should contain a
general heading which would permit each Min-
ister to express his point of view on these matters.

3. Considering that the further discussions be-
tween the deputies on this question which the
Soviet Government proposed in their note of June
fourth have not advanced the prospect of agree-
ment, the United States Government proposes that
tlie Foreign Ministers of the four powers without
further efforts by the deputies to complete an
agreement on the agenda should meet on the basis
of the large measure of agreement already reached
by the deputies in Paris. Taking into account
agenda B and the notes which have been exchanged
between the Soviet Government and the other gov-
ernments in which their respective points of view
are recorded, the four Foreign Ministers should
be able to proceed without delay to their task of
seeking to reduce the existing tensions in Europe.

Proposal on Television
for Purposes of UNESCO

[Adopted May 10. 1951]

Proposal

It is proposed that the U. S. National Commission pass
the following resolution : —

Aware of the enormous potential of television for pur-
poses consonant with the objectives of Unesco here and
abroad ; and

Considering the special responsibility of the U. S.
National Commission, in view of the phenomenal devel-
opment of the medium in this country, for keeping Unesco
informed of its technical progress and promoting its appli-
cation to education, science, and culture,

1021

The U. S. National Commission for Unesco Authorises:
The establishment of a Panel on Television for the fol-
lowing purposes:

1. To advise the National Commission on all appro-
priate means for the use and development of television for
purposes consonant with the objectives of Unesco.

2. To advise the National Commission on jwlicies
which it should recommend to Unesco for the development
of television as a means of promoting the free flow of
ideas, by word and image, including the international
exchange of scripts, kinescopes and visual materials in
UNESCO's fields of interest.

3. To advise National Commission organizations and
affiliated bodies how to use television in attaining the
objectives of Unesco in this country.

4. To prepare for the consideration of the Executive
Committee a statement of policy regarding the National
Commission's appropriate role in relation to possibilities
of obtaining private financial support for experiments
with, and production of, educational television programs
to be utilized by either commercial or educational facilities,
or both.

Discussion

There has been a phenomenal expansion of television
in this country, from 10,000 sets in January 1946 to an
estimated 13 million sets today. Although the develop-
ment in the United States has been the most spectacular,
a dozen countries are now telecasting on regular or exi)eri-
mental basis. Several more have given consideration to
the development and use of television for fundamental
education, perhaps with the realization that a picture in
the mind is one of the most effective ways of communicat-
ing an idea.

That television is likely to be tremendous force in edu-
cation in this country is evidenced by the attention it is
receiving from educators, industry, and foundations. The
recent hearings of the Federal Communication Commis-
sion relating to the allocation of channels for educational
purposes, while producing very divergent views on the way
educational television .should be developed, served to focus
public interest on its importance.

Typical of the serious problems presented :
— how many television channels should be allocated
for commercial use and how many should be reserved for
educational television ;

— how could any considerable number of educational
television stations be financed ;

— can commercial television devote suflicient and suit-
able time to educational purposes to meet what educators
consider television's educational potentials ;

— can educational programs be evolved which will
attract sufficient audiences to enable commercial television
stations to use them and survive financially ;

— what possibilities are there of obtaining private
funds for development of such programs or, at least, test-
ing the iwssibilities?

Since it is on the scene of this development, the Na-
tional Commission may be regarded as having a special
responsiliility for informing and advising Unesco about
the development and utilization of this new medium, espe-
cially in view of the interest expressed by Unebco in the
problem.

A number of Commission members and others affiliated
witli Commission programs have expressed strong interest
in the use of television for Unesco purposes, and have
provided informational and other materials to Unesco.
Some have participated in television programs on Unesco's
behalf and stimulated the development of programs in
UNESCO's fields.

The interest of Unesco in television has been expressed
b.v certain program resolutions, inquiries and requests
from the Unesco Secretariat, and additional emphasis on
television found in technical facilities reports.

The following are the resolutions in which television
now is specifically mentioned in the Unesco Program :
"The Director-General is authorized :

(Draft Program for 1952: Mass Communication)

"6.15 To investigate the possibility of making an
extensive use of television among the instruments of mass
communication devoted to the cause of international
understanding through education, science, and culture, and
particularly to bring to the attention of Member States
information and suggestions designed to stimulate the
more rapid development and application of television for
such a purpose."

(Note: The phraseology of this resolution was
changed from "investigate the possibility of utilizing" to
"investigate the possibility of making an extensive use of"
after action by the Executive Board at its Twenty-fifth
Session.)

"The Director-General is authorized :

(Program for 1951: Teaching and Popularization of
Science)

"2.3333 To prepare popular scientific articles for pub-
licati^m. in newspapers or magazines, scripts for broadcast-
ing by radio or television, and filmstrips for use by lec-
turers to non^scientiftc groups, and continue to encourage
the international exchange of such popular scientific ar-
ticles, scripts <yr films."

(Note: In this connection, through the cooperation of
Dr. Detlev Bronk, president of The Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, and Mr. Lynn Poole, Director of Public Relations
of the University, kinescoijes of The Johns Hopkins Science
Review, a half-hour weekly television network program
(which just received the Peabody award for educational
television ) have been made available through the National
Commission to Unesco for use by television stations in
other member states. An article "Education Via Tele-
vision" has been prepared for the Courier by Mr. Poole,
originator and producer of the program.

A number of scripts of the television program Science
in Action., created and produced by the California Acad-
emy of Sciences, also are being sent to Unesco in partial
implementation of this resolution.)

Proposal on Foreign Area Studies

[Adopted May 10, 1951]
Proposal

(1) Tliat the U. S. National Commission for Unesco
endorse the following statement and recommend that the
Executive Committee seek, so far as feasible, to gain
widespread consideration of this statement, and further,

(2) That the Executive Committee be alert to any
opportunities for appropriate, effective, practical, and
feasible action for forwarding the objective of the
statement.

Statement

The U. S. National Commission for Unesco expresses
its conviction that the people of the United States and
especially their scientists, scholars, and educators have a
special responsibility to contribute to peace and security
by tlie increase of knowledge of the history and cultures
of the other peoples of tlie world. Particularly, more
efforts must be devoted to the coordinated study of the
areas and peoples of the world of which our present knowl-
edge is inadequate.

Progress in this direction will require the concerted
attention by educational administrators on an intellectual
and planning problem — how to assure to the American
citizen of the coming generation the educational exiierience
which will lit him to participate fully in the world of which
a successful Unesco must be an important part.

A body of knowledge, constantly increased by research
and continually tested and revised is the only sure founda-
tion of mutual understanding and sound jiolicies. Such
knowledge must in<!u<le, for each people, their physical
environment and conditions, their history from remote

1022

Department of Sfafe Bulletin

times, their systems of thought, ideas, values, and behavior,
their varied modes of self expression in language and
the arts, and their folkvcays, the relations with other peo-
ples and cultures, and the reciprocal influences of such
relations.

To achieve and maintain such knowledge calls for the
correlated efforts of scientists and scholars trained in the
relevant disciplines and methods of research. It is chiefly
upon such knowledge, so acquired and so tested, that edu-
cators can rely for the trutli which it is their function
to communicate.

The U. S. National Commission for Unesco believes that
the concept of "foreign area studies" which has taken on
substance and definition among the scientists, scholars, and
educators of the United States during the past quarter of
of a ceutury, and which is now finding a place in the
curricula of many universities has a vital bearing upon
tlie problems of understanding, objectively and sympa-
thetically, peoples unlike ourselves aud cultures which
differ from our own.

The U. S. National Commission for Unesco expresses
the hope that such "foreign area studies" may he advanced
through continuing and progressive research, tlie develop-
ment of improved methods of investigation, and the train-
ing of competent investigators, an dthat the results of
such labors may be communicated through the various
channels of education at all levels to increasing numbers
of the people of the United States.

Judges Elected to Chamber
of Summary Procedure

The foUowing information from the Registry of the
International Court of Justice at The Hague was cowr
niunicated to the press on April 20, 1951.

On April 19th, 1951, the International Court of
Justice constituted its Chamber of Summary Pro-
cedure for the period May 3d, 1951, to May 3d,
1952. The Court elected the following Judges to
form the Chamber :

MEMBEBS : President Basdevant

Vice-President Guerrero
Judges Sir Arnold McNair, Krylov,
Hsu Mo

SUBSTITUTES : Judges Hackworth and De Visscher

The members of this Chamber, the constitution
of which is laid down in article 29 of the Court's
statute, are elected for 1 year. The Court has to
determine cases by summary procedure if the par-
ties to a dispute that has been referred to the Court
so request.

U. S. Delegations To International Conferences

Tripartite Commission on German Debts

On June 13, the Department of State announced
the appointment of H. Struve Hensel, as a con-
sultant to attend the meeting of the Tripartite
Commission on German Debts which will be held
in London, commencing June 25.

The London meeting will be attended by rep-
resentatives of principal creditor interests of
France, the United Kingdom, and the United
States, and by German Government officials and
representatives of German debtors.

The meeting will take up in a preliminary and
exploratory way the problem of the settlement of
the German prewar external debt in order to pre-
pare for a conference in the fall, at which all in-
terested parties, both governmental and private,
will be represented.

Mr. Hensel will advise on the problems which
will arise from the standpoint of United States
holders of German corporate dollar bonds.

Representation at the London meeting of other
categories of United States creditors are :

James Grafton Rogers, President of the Foreign
Bondholders Protective Coimcil, Inc., will attend
the meeting and represent holders of German Gov-
ernmental bonds and corporate bonds which are
govemmentally guaranteed.

Andrew L. Gomory, Chairman, American Com-
mittee for Standstill Creditors of Germany, will

attend the meeting to represent United States
holders of standstill credits. These credits were
extended by a number of American banks. For
some time prior to the war, payments on these
credits were deferred under agreements entered
into with the German Govermnent.

General Conference (UNESCO), Sixth Session

On Jime 6, the Department of State announced
that on May 29, the President had designated,
subject to confirmation by the Senate, the United
States representatives to the sixth session of the
General Conference of the United Nations Educa-
tional, Scientific and Cultural Organization,
Avliich is to convene at Paris on June 18, 1951.
They are :

Senior Representative

Howland H. Sargeant, Deputy Assistant, Secretary of
State for Public Affairs ; chairman,

Represen tativcs

George D. Stoddard, President, University of Illinois, and
Chairman of the United States National Commis-
sion for UNESCO; Vive Chairman,

Helen Crocker Russell, Director, Crocker First National
Bank, San Francisco, Calif. ; Vice Chairman of United
States National Commission for Unesco

Elvin C. Stakman, Vice Chairman, Division of Biology
and Agriculture, National Research Council

George F. Zook, former President, The American Council
on Education, Washington, D. C.

Juna 25, 7951

1023

Congressional Adviser

Prince H. Preston, House of Representatives

Member of Executive Board and Adviser

Luther Evans, Librarian of Congress, Wasliington, D. C.

Special Adviser to the Chairman

Ricliard Heindel, Unesco Relations Staff, Department of
State

Advisers

Jaime Benitez, Chancellor, University of Puerto Rico

John M. Cntes, Jr., OflBce of United Nations B^conomic and
Social Affairs, Department of State

Alice T. Curran, Office of Public Affairs, Department of
State

Emily Taft Douglas, Washington, D. C.

John M. Ekhiud, President, American Federation of
Teachers

Frank Fernback, Associate Director, Department of Edu-
cation and Research, CIO

Paul Eliot Green, Author and Playwright, University of
North Carolina, Chapel Hill, N. C.

George M. Ingram, Chief, Division of International Ad-
ministration, Department of State

Carol C. Laise, Division of International Administration,
Department of State

Roscoe C. Martin, Chairman, Department of Political
Science and Government, Maxwell Graduate School,
Syracuse University, Syracuse, N. T.

Samuel De Palma, Office of United Nations Economic
and Social Affairs, Department of State

Frederick D. G. Ribble, Dean of Law, University of
Virginia, Charlottesville, Va.

John Sihulman. Attorney, 120 Broadway, New York City

Charles A. Thomson, Counselor of Embassy for Unesco
Affairs, American Embassy, Paris

Howard F. Vickery, Unesco Relations Staff, Depart-
ment of State

Executive Secretary

David Persinger, Division of International Conferences,
Department of State

International Labor Conference, 34th Session

Tlie Department of State announced on June 5
that the thirty-fourtli session of the International
Labor Conference will convene at Geneva, on
June 6, 1951. The United States delegation to the
Conference is as follows :

GOVERNMENT KEPRESENTATIVES

Delegates

Philip M. Kaiser, Assistant Secretary of Labor, Chairman
James E. Murray, United States Senate

Alternate Delegate

Augustine B. Kelley, House of Representatives

Coordinator

Arnold Zempel, Executive Director, OfHce of International
Labor Affairs, Department of Labor

Adirisors

Artliur J. Altmeyer, Commissioner for Social Security,
Social Security Administration, Federal Security
Agency

John J. Bal)e, Assistant Solicitor in Charge of Trial Liti-
gation, Department of Labor

B. Harper Barnes, Assistant Solicitor in Charge of In-
ternational Labor Affairs, Department of Labor

Robert M. Barnett, Economic OflBcer (Labor), American
Legation, Bern, Switzerland, (resident at Geneva)

Clara M. Beyer, Associate Director, Bureau of Labor
Standards, Department of Lat)or

James L. Case, Commissioner of Labor, State Depart-
ment of Labor, Nashville, Tenn.

Louis J. Ducoff, Labor Economist, Bureau of Agricul-
tural Economics, Department of Agriculture

Ida Klaus, Solicitor, National Labor Relations B->ard

Frieda S. Miller, Director, Women's Bureau, Depai i

of Labor 'iC--

Otis E. MuUiken, Offlcer in Charge of United Nat' as
Social Affairs, Department of State

Robert J. Myers, Chief Actuary, Social Security Admin-
istration, Federal Security Agency

Edward B. Persons, Chief, Ilo Division, Office of Inter-
national Labor Affairs, Department of Labor

Cleon O. Swayzee, Labor Adviser, Office of the Assistant
Secretary for Economic Affairs, Department of State

EMPLOYERS REPRESENTATIVES

Delegate

Charles P. McCormick, McCormick and Company, In-
corporated, Baltimore 2

Advisers

William B. Barton, Director, Employer-Employee Rela-
tions, Chamber of Commerce of the United States,
Washington 6, D.C.

L. E. Ebeling, Director of Personnel, The Sherwin-
Williams Co., Cleveland

Carroll French, Director of Industrial Relations, Na-
tional Association of Manufacturers, New York City 20

L. Roy Hawes, Past Master, Massachusetts State
Grange, North Sudbury, Mass.

Donald Knowlton, Hill and Knowlton, Cleveland 5

A. D. Marshall, Assistant Secretary, General Electric
Company, Schenectady 5, N. Y.

W. L. McGrath, President, Williamson Heater Company,
Cincinnati 9, Ohio

Charles B. Shaw, Director, Employee Relations Overseas,
Standard Oil Company of New Jersey, New York
City

WORKERS' REPRESENTATIVES

Delegate

George Philip Delaney, International Representative,
American Federation of Labor, Washington, D.C.

Advisers

William Collins, Regional Director, American Federation
of Labor, New York City

Rudolph Faupl, Vice President, International Association
of Machinists, American Federation of Labor, Wash-
ington, D.C.

Edward Hillock, Secretary-Treasurer, United Association
of Journeymen ami Apprentices of the Plumbing and
I'ipe Fitting Industry of the United States and
Canada, American Federation of Labor, Washington,
D.C.

Martin Kyne, Vice President, Retail, Wholesale and De-
partment Stores Union, Congress of Industrial Or-
ganizations, New York City

John T. O'Brien, Vice President, International Brother-
hood Teamsters, Chauffeurs, Warehousemen and Help-
ers of America, American Federation of Labor, In-'
dianapolis

Jacob S. Potosfsky, President, Amalgamate<i Clothing
Workers of America, Congress of Industrial Organi-
zations, New York City

Michael Ross, Director, Department for International
Affairs, Congress of Industrial Organizations, Wash-
ington, D. C.

1024

Department of State Bulletin

Boyd Wilson. United Steelworkers of America, Congress
of Industrial Organizations, Pittsburgh

Secretary of Delegation

Ronald M. Ayer, Division of International Conferences,
Department of State

Administrative Secretary

Mason A. LaSelle, Division of International Conferences,
Department of State

'^"-'^lents Officer

■tn.)r.jt

' cehell Mura, Office of International Labor Affairs,
Department of Labor

Stenographers

Vivian L. Bombardier, Division of International Con-
ferences, Department of State

Sally Curtin, Office of International Labor Affairs, De-
partment of Labor

The agenda for the 34th session will include the
following subjects: the Director-General's report;
financial and budgetary questions; information
and reports on the application of conventions and
recommendations ; objectives and minimum stand-
ards of social security ; industrial relations, includ-
ing collective agreements and voluntary concilia-
tion and arbitration; cooperation between public
authorities and employers' and workers' organiza-
tions; equal remuneration for men and women
■workers for work of equal value ; minimum wage-
fixing machinery in agriculture; and holidays
with pay in agriculture.

The International Labor Organization (Ilo), a
specialized agency of the United Nations, is an
intergovernmental agency which seeks by inter-
national action to improve labor conditions, raise
living standards, and promote economic and social
stability.

The Organization, which has 60 member coun-
tries, has three basic parts. These are the In-
ternational Labor Conference, its highest author-
ity which usually meets each year ; the Governing
Body, its executive Council, which meets four
times a year ; and the International Labor Office,
its ' xecutive organ, which provides the secretariat
of the Organization.

Representation at the sessions of the Conference
is tripartita in nature, with two of the four dele-
gates from each member country serving as repre-
sentatives of the government and one each repre-
senting employers and workers.

Historically, the principal function of the
Organization has been the formulation of inter-
national social standards in the form of inter-
national labor conventions and recommendations.
Since the last war, the Organization has, with
strong United States support, greatly extended
its operational activities, including technical as-
sistance and direct advice to governments and
employers and workers groups on labor and social
matters.

Although the United States Government was
actively concerned in the establishment of the Ilo
in 1919, it did not become a member until 1934.

I\ine 25, 1 95 1

International Union of Crystallography
Second General Assembly

On June 11, the Department of State announced
that the second General Assembly of the Interna-
tional Union of Crystallography will be held at
Stockholm, Sweden, June 27^uly 5, 1951. The
United States Govermnent will be represented at
the Assembly by the following delegates:

Dr. Ralph W. G. Wyckoff, Director, Division of I'hysical
Biology, National Institute of Health, B'ederal Secu-
rity Agency I Chairman

Dr. Lawrence O. Hrockway, I'rofessor of Chemistry,
University of Michigan

Dr. Isidor Fankuchen, Professor of Applied Physics, Poly-
technic Institute of Brooklyn

Dr. Arthur Lindo Patterson, Institute for Cancer Re-
search, I'hiladelphia

Dr. William H. Zachariasen, Professor of Physics, Univer-
sity of Chicago.

Crystallography is one of the oldest and most
basic of the physical sciences, but it has assumed
considerable practical importance only during the
last generation. Fundamentally, it is the science
dealing with the properties of solids. Nearly all
solids — whether metals, rocks, and minerals of
inanimate nature, the purified products of syn-
thetic chemistry, wood, and textile fibers from
plants, or the bone, connective tissue, and muscle
frameworks of animals — have their atoms and
molecules in some measure of orderly array. The
physical properties of these solids — their mechan-
ical strengths, hardness, elasticity — depend on this
order in particle arrangement and vary as it is
altered. Modern research in crystallography has
been important in such varied fields as the study
of metals and alloys ; the recognition and analysis
of rocks and minerals; the development and
analysis of such diverse industrial products as
pigments, soaps, and greases; the production of
substitutes for natural quartz for use in radios and
electronic equipment; and, in the field of biology,
the study of why teeth decay and muscles and
tendons disintegrate as a result of disease and age.

The first General Assembly of the Union, held
at Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachu-
setts, July 28-August 3, 1948, reestablished the
working relationships that had existed before
World War II between the most important crystal-
lographers of different countries and revived
projects for the accumulation and publication of
information needed by all workers in the field.
One such project involved the preparation and
publication of voluminous tables to serve as a basis
for necessary mathematical and physical calcula-
tions. Another such project related to the collec-
tion and publication of critical summaries of all
the crystallographic work done throughout the
world.

The second General Assembly will assay the
progress of the projects initiated at the Harvard
meeting. In addition, it will appropriate from
the moneys available to the International Union
what is needed to carry out work over the next 3

1025

years, elect a new group of officers to administer
the affairs of the Union and supervise its projects,
and hold scientific sessions, at which more than 100
papers will be given.

The International Union of Crystallography,
which was accepted as a member of the Interna-
tional Council of Scientific Unions on April 7,
1947, was established pursuant to a proposal made
at an informal meeting of crystallographers held
at London in June 1946. Its work is directed by
the General Assembly, which normally meets every
3 years and which consists of delegates appointed
by the 15 member countries. The United States
became a member in 1949.

International Wheat Council, Fifth Session

The Department of State announced on June 11
that the fifth session of the International Wlieat
Council will convene at London on June 13, 1951.
The United States Government will be represented
at the session by the following delegation :

United States Delegate

Stanley Andrews, Director, Office of Foreign Agricultural
Relations, Department of Agriculture

Advisers

Maurice M. Benidt, Chief, International Wheat Agreement
Staff, Production and Marketing Administration, De-
partment of Agriculture

James C. Foster, Assistant Director, Office of International
Trade, Department of Commerce

L. Ingemann Highby, Agricultural Products Staff, Depart-
ment of State

Paul O. Nyhus, Agricultural Attach^, and United States
Representative on the Executive Committee of the In-
ternational Wheat Council, American Embassy, Lon-
don

Earl O. Pollock, Alternate United States Representative on
the Executive Committee of the International Wheat
Council, American Embassy, London

Adviser and Secretary

Robert L. Gastineau, Grain Division, Office of Foreign
Agricultural Relations, Department of Agriculture

The agenda for the fifth session provides for
(1) adjustment of the quotas of guaranteed pur-
chases and guaranteed sales stipulated in annexes
A and B to article III of the International Wheat
Agreement, (2) amendment of the rules of pro-
cedure of the Council, (3) review of reports by the
Secretary of the Council and the Executive Com-
mittee, (4) action on applications from Japan and
the Hashemite Kingdom of Jordan to accede to
the International 'Vflieat Agreement, (5) consid-
eration of proposals for preshipment and post-
shipment against annual quotas, (6) discussion of
special problems relating to the reporting and
recording of transactions in wheat and to the re-
newal of the International Wlieat Agreement, and
(7) the election for the 1951-52 crop year of officers
of the Council, officers of the Executive Commit-
tee, and members of the Executive Committee.

The International Wheat Council was estab-
lished in 1949 pursuant to the terms of the Inter-

1026

national Wlieat Agreement of March 23, 1949, an
instrument designed to assure supplies of wheat
to importing countries and markets for wheat to
exporting countries at equitable and stable prices.
Administration of the provisions of the Agree-
ment is the primary function of the Council, which
is composed of the exporting and inMortmg coun-
tries parties to the Agreement. Each member
country may be represented at sessions of the
Council by a delegate, an alternate delegate, and
such technical advisers as are necessary.

THE CONGRESS

Legislation

Expressing the Sympathy of the Congress and of the Peo-
ple of the United States to the President and the
People of El Salvador. H. Rept. 481, 82d Cong. 1st
sess. [To accompany H. Con. Res. 105] 2 pp.

Suspension of Deportation of Certain Aliens H. Itept.
491, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany S. Con. Kes.

26] 2 pp. ^ , ^

Authorizing the Settlement by the Attorney General and
the Payment of Certain of the Claims Filed Under the
Act of July 2, 1948, by Persons of Japanese Ancestry
Evacuated Under Military Orders. H. Rept. 496, 82d
Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R. 3142] 11 pp.

Department of State Appropriations for 1952. Hearings
before the Subcommittee of the Committee on Ap-
propriations, House of Representatives, 82d Congress
first session. 1136 pp.

Newsprint. Report of the Subcommittee on Study of
Monopoly Power of the Committee on the Judiciary
pursuant to H. Res. 95 (82d Cong., 1st sess.) Au-
thorizing the Committee on the Judiciary to Conduct
Studies and Investigations Relating_ to Matters
Within Its Jurisdiction. H. Rept. 50o, Part 1, 8_d
Cong. 1st sess. 132 pp. . . n u ,.f

Universal Military Training and Service Act. H. Kept.
535, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To Accompany S. 1] <ii pp.

Trade Agreements Extension Act of 1951. H. Rept. 537,
82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R. Ibl^J

Second^Semiannual Report on the Mutual Defense As-
sistance Program. Message from the President of the
United States transmitting the second semiannual
report on the mutual defense assistance program, cov-
ering the period from April 6, 1950, to Ortober 6. 19o0.
pursuant to provisions of public law 329 (blht Cong.
1st sess., Stat. 714) 50 pp. ..„-., „f

A Mutual Security Program. Message from the President
of the United States. H. Doc. 147, 82d Cong. 1st sess.

Permitting Free Entry of Articles Imported from Foreign
Countries for the Purpose of Exhibition at tUe Japa-
nese Trade Pair, Seattle, Wash^ f-.^^^}^ro?\^^
Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. J. Res. 2o3J - pp.

Relating to the Transfer of Payment of Tax on Votlka.
S. Rept. 320, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. R.

Amending the Tariff Act of 1930 so as to Extend to
Flaxseed and Linseed and Flaxseed and Linseed Oil
the Privilege of Substitution for Drawback of Duties.
S. Rept. 323, 82d Cong. 1st sess. [To accompany H. B.
2192] 2 pp.

Department of State Bulletin

Rider in Tliird Deficiency
Appropriation Bill Called Defective

Statement iy the President

[Releases, to the press by the White House June 2]

I have today approved H. R. 3587, the third
supplemental appropriation act for the fiscal year
1951. This act provides urgently needed funds
for carrying on important activities of the Govern-
ment.

Unfortunately, the act also contains a legislative
"rider" — that is, a piece of legislation quite unre-
lated to the major purpose of the act, which is to
appropriate funds. This rider — Section 1302—
makes broad and sweeping changes in our proce-
dures for restricting trade between the free world
and the Soviet Union and its satellites. It is thus
a major piece of legislation affecting our foreign
policy, but it was never considered by the House
Foreign Affairs Committee or the Senate Foreign
Relations Committee.

This rider is seriously defective. However, I
have signed this act because the appropriations it
carries are so urgently needed, and because Sec-
tion 1302 does authorize exceptions from its pro-
visions in the interest of national security. Unless
the power to make exceptions is broadly used, this
rider will result in weakening, rather than
strengthening, the security of the United States
and the collective security of the free world. I
strongly urge the Congress to replace this hasty
rider with more workable legislation at the earliest
possible moment.

Briefly, Section 1302 provides, first, that no eco-
nomic or financial assistance (other than military
assistance) may be given to any coimtry which
exports to the Soviet Union and its satellites arms,
armament, or military materiel.

Second, such aid may not be granted if a country
exports any article or commodity which "may be
used in the manufacture of arms, armaments or
military materiel." And third, aid must be with-
held if a country exports to the Soviet bloc any
article or commodity the shipment of which to
the Soviet bloc from the United States is pro-
hibited.

The section further provides that in order for
any country to be eligible for economic assistance
from the United States, it shall certify monthly
that it has not shipped any of these items to the
Soviet bloc since the 15th day after the enactment
of the act. The National Security Council is au-
thorized to grant exceptions to these provisions
in the security interests of the United States. Such
exceptions are to be reported to six committees of
the Congress.

I am sure that the Congress intended, in enact-
ing this section, to strengthen the security of the
United States and the rest of the free world by
preventing the Soviet bloc from acquiring goods,

through trade, which will enlarge Soviet military
strength in relation to that of the free world.

Section 1302

[Kem Amendment]

Sec. 1.'?02. (a) During any period in which the
Armed Forces of the United States are actively
engaged in hostilities while carrying out any deci-
sion of the Security Council of the United Nations,
no economic or financial assistance shall be provided,
out of any funds appropriated to carry out the pur-
poses of the Economic Cooperation Act of 1948, as
amended, or any other Act to provide economic or
financial assistance (other than military assistance)
to foreign countries, to any country which exports
or knowingly permits the exportation of, to the
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics or any of Its
satellite countries (including Communist China and
Communist Nortli Korea), arms, or armament or
military materiel or articles or commodities which
the Secretary of Defense shall have certified to the
Administrator for Economic Cooperation may be
used in the manufacture of arms, armaments, or
military materiel, or shipment of which to the Soviet
bloc is embargoed by the United States in the inter-
est of national security ; and the Secretary of De-
fense is hereby authorized and directed to so certify
to the Administrator for Economic Cooperation any
article or commodity of the nature or class de-
scribed : Provided, That after the 15th day follow-
ing the date of enactment of this Act and prior to
the termination of the period heretofore referred
to no country shall be eligible for economic or finan-
cial assistance under any such Act unless within
thirty days prior to the date on which such assistance
is to be provided such country shall have certified
to the United States that it has not, subsequent to
the 15th day following the date of enactment of this
Act, exported, or knowingly permitted the exporta-
tion of. arms, armaments, military materiel, articles,
or commodities, which are subject to the foregoing
provisions of this section, to any of the countries
referred to in such provisions : Provided further,
That such certification shall not relieve the Admin-
istrator for Economic Cooperation or any other
oflBcer of the United States Government of responsi-
bility for enforcing the foregoing provisions of this
section : Provided further. That exceptions to these
provisions may be made upon an oflScial determina-
tion of the National Security Council that such
exception is in the security interest of the United
States : Provided further. That the National Secu-
rity Council shall immediately report any exception
made with reasons therefor to the Appropriations
and Armed Services Committees of the Senate and
of the House of Representatives, the Committee on
Foreign Relations of the Senate, and the Committee
on Foreign Affairs of the House of Representatives,
and the National Security Council shall at least
once each quarter review all exceptions made previ-
ously and shall report its determinations to the
foregoing committees of the House and Senate,
which reports shall contain an analysis of the trade
with the Soviet bloc of countries for which an
exception is made.

(b) Section 1304 of the Supplemental Appropria-
tion Act, 1951, is hereby repealed.

June 25, 7951

1027

With that purpose, everyone a^ees. The
United States and other free nations have been
pursuing this objective for a long time, and much
greater progress has been made tlian has generally
been realized.

Section 1302 is of little practical importance
insofar as it applies to the shipment of arms,
ammunition, implements of war, and atomic-
energy materials. Long before the Korean con-
flict, shipments of these items to the Soviet bloc
were prohibited by the United States, by the
Western European countries, and by most of the
other free nations of the world. Prohibitions on
the shipment of these items are effective and
complete.

The difficulties with Section 1302 arise out of its
application to ordinary items of trade and com-
merce. As to these items, it is not well designed
to achieve its ostensible purpose. In fact, in
several important respects it will make it more
difficult to achieve that purpose.

First, the section fails to recognize that trade is
a two-way street.

Today, the free nations get from the Soviet bloc
substantial amounts of such commodities as coal,
grain, timber, manganese, chrome, asbestos and
iron and steel products which are of major im-

gortance to the common defense of the free world,
rincipal exports to the Soviet bloc consist of
some kinds, various foods and raw materials, and
a diversified list of miscellaneous commodities.

It is obvious that many of these items, "may be
used in the manufacture of arms, armaments or
military materiel," in the words of Section 1302.
But that is not sufficient reason for prohibiting
their export to the Soviet bloc, if the free world
receives in return goods of greater value.

Approach Oversimplified

Some free nations, as a result of trade patterns
of many years' standing, are more dependent on
imports from the Soviet bloc than others. Those
free nations most dependent upon the Soviet bloc
for imports contributing substantially to their
food supply and defense effort, naturally have
great difficulty in reducing exports to the Soviet
bloc. They are in a much more difficult situation
than are countries like the United States, which
are not so dependent upon imports from the Soviet
bloc.

The problem of trade between the Soviet bloc
and the free world is thus a matter of evaluating,
in terms of relative importance, what the free
world gets from the bloc for what it must give in
return. The oversimplified approach of Section
1302 is clearly wrong.

Second, Section 1302 attempts to achieve by
coercion what must be achieved by cooperation.
No one nation can successfully force its own sys-
tem of controls upon every other nation. Our ex-
Eerience so far shows that effective controls can
B accomplished by cooperation.

1028

The United States strictly controls its own ex-
ports to the Soviet bloc. The shipment of many
items is embargoed. All exports of any kind from
the United States to aiiy country in the Soviet
bloc I'equires licenses. Their type and quantity
are carefully scrutinized to make sure that they
will not be of strategic value to the Soviet bloc.

In addition to the controls that apply generally
to exports to countries in the Soviet bloc, shipment
of all commodities to China is forbidden and
United States ships are not allowed to call at
Chinese ports.

The United States has also been a leader in
urging other free nations to join in international
control of exports to the Soviet bloc. Of neces-
sity, publicity concerning control methods and re-
sults has been restricted. Much progress has been
made, however. The countries of Western Europe
which are cooperating with us in the common de-
fense program have taken action to prohibit or
control exports of strategic goods to the Soviet
bloc. These nations, together with Canada and
the United States, substantially control most of
the industrial products of the free world.

When aggression broke out in Korea, approxi-
mately 145 categories of articles had already been
embargoed t« the Soviet bloc from these Western
European countries as well as from the United
States and Canada. Many of these categories in-
clude dozens of individual articles. The quanti-
ties which could be shipped in numerous other
categories were limited.

Through continuing cooperative efforts since
that time, further restrictions have been worked
out. At present, about 90 percent of the items
which the United States regards as being of pri-
mary strategic significance are subject to virtual
embargo by the Western European countries.

In addition to these steps, the United Nations
on May 18, 1951, by a vote of 47 to 0, agreed to a
complete embargo on the shipment of strategic
materials to Communist China.^ The United
States will continue to work in the United Nations
for increasingly effective international action to
deny materials of value to the Chinese aggressors.

We have come a long way in our efforts to
achieve international controls over exports to the
Soviet bloc, and these controls are becoming in-
creasingly effective.

A third major defect with Section 1302 is that if
we cut off our aid to a friendly country, we might
hurt ourselves more than we hurt the Soviet Union.

Free World Defenses Endangered

The indiscriminate approach of Section 1302 for
cutting off economic aid to other coimtries ignores
the vital interest which the United States has in
the contribution that aid makes to the security of
the whole free world. Cutting oft' this aid could

' Bulletin of May 28, 1951, p. 849.

Department of State Bulletin

strike a death blow at tlie tremendous defense ef-
fort in which the free nations are now en<xaged.

The success of our defense effort depends upon
the ability of the free world to maintain and ex-
pand its economic strength. Our programs for
economic and financial assistance are directed to
that end.

In some countries, they are directed toward help-
ing other nations build the industrial facilities
required to produce weapons for defense. In cer-
tain underdeveloped countries, they are directed
to assuring the basic economic stability which is
essential if those countries are to resist both inter-
nal and external threats to their independence.

In other countries, they are aimed at expanding
the capacity of the free world to produce vitally
needed strategic materials — for example, copper,
steel, aluminum and uranium.

The security of the United States, as well as the
other free nations, is deeply involved in the suc-
cess of these efforts. The defense structure we are
striving to create — both here at home and in
Europe under General Eisenhower — will rot and
topple unless it rests on a sound economic foun-
dation.

In addition to these major defects, Section 1302
also contains certain technical provisions which
are unfortunate. For example, the provision for
certification is complicated and difficult to apply
and does not add to our ability to carry out the
ostensible purpose of the section.

Because of the defects I have described, Section
1302 will make it more difficult for this country to
make further progi-ess in its effort to bring about
effective international controls over trade with the
Soviet bloc.

The National Security Council has been guid-
ing the work of the Executive agencies in this ef-
fort. The council has been carrying on a con-
tinuous scrutiny of the trade of every country in
the free world with the Soviet bloc. Information
on the quantities and types of commodities ship-
ped to and received from the Soviet bloc by every
free country has been examined. The trade con-
trols exercised by tliese countries have been
considered.

Against this background, the council has de-
cided the actions that the United States should
take. In doing so, the council has viewed the
United States security in its broadest tenns. It
has taken into account the security value of im-
ports received from the bloc, the contribution of
each country to the collective security of the free

world and the importance of United States aid in
facilitating their defense efforts.

For the most part, there are very few articles
left of any real strategic importance that are mov-
ing to the Soviet bloc in any significant quantity.
There are still a number of trade situations with
which we are not yet satisfied.

Control of trade at certain transhipment points
is difficult of solution. As would be expected, not
all friendly nations agree with us precisely as to
which articles are of the most strategic value to the
Soviet bloc. We are constantly endeavoring, how-
ever, to correct all of these weak si^ots and prog-
ress is constantly being made.

Improved Legislation Recommended

We will continue these endeavors and will make
every possible effort to administer Section 1302
to accomplish the purposes which the Congress in-
tended without impairing the security interests
of the United States. In order to do this, I think
it likely that the National Security Council will
find it necessary to make exceptions on a broad
scale until the Congress has an opportunity to
give this matter fui-ther consideration.

I am sure that the Congress and tlie Executive
have the same general objective in mind in pro-
hibiting trade that is injurious to the security in-
terests of the United States and in finding the most
practical and effective method of doing so.

Because of the compelling objections to Section
1302 in its present form, I urge the Congress to
enact improved legislation to replace it at an early
date. Such improved legislation should be based,
I believe, on the following principal considera-
tions :

1. The purpose of the legislation should not be
blindly to cut off as much trade as possible, but to
cut off trade only when such action will add to the
security of the United States and the rest of the
free world.

2. The legislation should take account of the
offsetting value of what we receive from the So-
viet bloc as compared with what we send to them ;
it should take account of the differing importance
of different commodities and not treat all com-
modities alike; and it should take account of the
value to us of the increased strength for freedom
which our economic aid brings about.

3. The legislation should provide for simple,
effective, and straightforward administration.

Legislation of this type would be helpful to the
Nation's security. I strongly urge that the Con-
gress enact such legislation to replace Section
1302.

June 25, J 95 J

1029

The United States in the United Nations

[June 15-21, 1951]

General Assembly

Additional Measures Comnvittee. — In compli-
ance with the embrago resolution adopted by the
General Assembly on May 18 against the People's
Eepublic of China and the North Korean authori-
ties, reports have been received by the Committee
from tlie following 37 countries : United Nations
members — Australia, Belgium, Brazil, Byelorus-
sia, Canada, China, Colombia, Czechoslovakia,
Denmark, Ethiopia, France, Greece, Honduras,
India, Iran, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway,
Pakistan, Panama, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines,
Poland, Sweden, Thailand, Turkey, Ukraine,
South Africa, U. S. S. R., United Kingdom, United
States, Uruguay, Yugoslavia ; nomnembers — Cam-
bodia, Italy, Rumania.

In submitting the United States report, Ambas-
sador Ernest A. Gross commented :

The practical effectiveness of the collective effort to
deprive the aggressors of imports useful to their war
making power is clearly shown by reports such as this
from the member countries. In addition, discussion and
review by the United Nations of these reports are a posi-
tive method of achieving the purpose of tlie United Na-
tions resolution.

... I believe that this procedure Is an important
expression of the United Nations in action. It will demon-
strate to the world the effectiveness of collective action
and the value of continuous collaboration through inter-
national machinery.

... By denying the aggressors the means to wage war,
the 53 members of the United Nations who support United
Nations action in Korea help bring closer the day when
hostilities will be ended and United Nations objectives
achieved through i)eaceful processes.

The report states, briefly :

The controls applied by the United States on shipments
to the Chinese Communists and the North Korean authori-
ties are more comprehensive than those called for by
Hesolution 500 (V) and were placed in effect before that
Resolution was passed. Exports from the United States
of arms, ammunition, and implements of war and atomic
energy materials to North Korea and to Communist China
have not been authorized at any time, and exports of a
niinil)er of oilier strategic articles were severely restricted
and in some instances embargoed for some time prior to
June 1!).")0. Since the end of June 1!)50, the United States
Government has permitted no shiinuents to North Korea

and applied an embargo on shipments to Communist
China not only of arms and munitions but also of atomic
energy materials, petroleum products, and other items of
strategic value included in the United States Positive
List.

The scope of the economic measures applied against
the Chinese Communists by the United States was greatly
extended when it became unmistalsably clear that they
were engaged in large-scale military operations against
United Nations forces in Korea. Since December 1950,
the United States has not exported any materials what-
ever to Communist China. . . . All Communist China and
North Korea assets within the United States have been
blocked and subjected to stringent controls. . . . The
United tStates will prevent by all means within its juris-
diction the circumvention of controls on shipments ap-
plied by other States under the Resolution and cooperate
fully with other States and the Additional Measures
Committee in carrying out the purposes of this embargo.

New Appeal for Forces for Korea

On June 21, the acting representative of the
United States to the United Nations presented to
the Secretary-General in behalf of the unified com-
mand a communication concerning the need for
additional ground troops from member govern-
ments of the United Nations for the collective
effort in Korea. It states :

The unified command has conducted and is now con-
ducting extensive bilateral conversations in connection
with this problem with various member states and, in
particular, is conducting conversations with states which
have already contributed armed forces.

In order to further efforts of the unified command in
this respect, the Secretary.General is requested to send
communications on behalf of the unified command to
member governments which previously gave a favorable
reply either to the Security Council's resolution of June
25, 1950, or to its resolution of June 27, 1950, but which
have not yet contributed armed forces for the collective
effort in Korea, advising the aforementioned memliers
of the need for further ground assistance in Korea. There
is a real need for additional forces from member states
in the light of massive Chinese Communist concentrations
in the area and of their continuing aggression. . . .

United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultu-
ral Organizatian (UNESCO)

Delegations from 5!) member nations arc attend-
ing the 6th session of the General Conference of
UNESCO whicli is being held June IS to July 11 in
Paris. The live countries which liave submitted

1030

Deparfmenf of State Bulletin

applications for membership have been admitted
as observers — Japan, German Federal Republic,
Cambodia, Laos, and Vietnam. Three other non-
members have also been admitted as observers,
Iceland, Finland, and Spain. In addition repre-
sentatives from United Nations specialized agen-
cies, intergovernmental organizations, and 93
international nongovernmental organizations
representing the church, labor, social welfare,
scientific, educational, and cultural groups are
attending.

The Chairman and Vice Chairman of the United
States delegation are Howland H. Sargeant,
Deputy Assistant Secretary of State for Public
Affairs, and George D. Stoddard, President, Uni-
versity of Illinois and Chairman of the United
States National Commission for Unesco.

Two important items on the agenda of the
plenary meetings of the General Conference are
the Director General's report on the activities of
the Organization from April 1950 to March 1951,
and the Unesco di-af t progi-am for 1952.

In his report, the Director General, Jaime
Torres Bodet, states :

From now on the important thing is not so much how
UNESCO should be run, hut what it can do. Its activities
are tending to become less generalized and more concrete.

In addressing the plenary meeting, he stated :

UNESCO is a technical institution and as such is not
responsible for establishing political security, but it is
responsible (or establishing a more general form of se-
curity— peace in its deepest sense — without which politi-
cal security is no more than a truce between wars. To
fight for collective security means, therefore, that we
must fight for something else at the same time — for uni-
versal progress, which means economic and social security.

The proposed 1952 program of activities are
classified into seven major fields : education, nat-
ural science, social science, cultural activities, ex-
change of persons, mass communications, and re-
lief assistance. Specific proposals include :

(1) The establishment over a 12-year period
of six regional fundamental education centers
in the Far East, India, the Middle East, Latin
America, and Equatorial Africa, where teams of
teachers would be trained and educational mate-
rials prepared.

(2) The sending of educational missions to
various countries.

(3) Education of industrial workers. Specific
recommendations call for the establishment of an
international center for the training of specialists,
the improvement of methods in workers' educa-
tion, and the organization of educational courses
for workers, particularly in relation to interna-
tional understanding.

(4) Establishment of a new kind of public
library in under developed areas of the world
especially designed to meet the needs of readers
using books for the first time in their adult lives.

Other items on the plenary agenda include :

1. Establishment of the other five units of the
General Conference: Procedure Committee,
Budget Committee, Program Connnission. the Ad-
ministrative Commission, and the Official and Ex-
ternal Relations Commission.

2. Presentation by the Director General of the
budget estimates for 1952. The proposed budget
for the regular activities of Unesco for 1952
amounts to $9,666,500. This will be reviewed by
the Conference and is subject to reduction.

3. Consideration of the world problem of news-
print and its effect of limiting the free flow of
information and knowledge.

4. The creation of a European Regional Labora-
tory for Nuclear Physics.

Mr. Sargeant (U.S.) was unanimously elected
president of the General Conference. He stated
it was the United States view that Unesco should
not become a propaganda vehicle or the instru-
ment of any nation or group of nations; that it
should remain "a truly international agency" dedi-
cated to the attainment of peace and security for
mankind. He added :

It must develop a living sense of the interdependence
of all peoples and of the identity of their common inter-
ests. UNESCO, among all of the specialized agencies of
the United Nations, deals in ideas and in the Influence
of ideas on the behavior and attitudes of mankind.
Ideas are far more potent than bullets. We do not need
to be great prophets to see that now we must quicken
our pace and synchronize the resources of Unesco.

He stressed the support the United States gives
to the Unesco programs for abolishing, illiteracy
and improving education. He also pledged sup-
l^ort of the proposed project for extending funda-
mental education and urged that Unesco techni-
cal aid programs be stepped up.

Secretary-General Trygve Lie, who addressed
lening session, stated,

oecretary-General Irygi
the opening session, stated,

In the present state of the world, it is very important
that the international agencies should close their ranks
against the forces of .skepticism and despair and should
persist in their great — and seldom spectacular — task of
making possible a peaceful world.

UNESCO has a key position in the effort which the United
Nations organizations must now make to realize in an
unsettled world the great purposes for which they were
established. Through the wide scope and diversity of
its activities, it has an immense range of contacts through-
out the world. Through the nature of its work, it has
the possibility of influencing the minds of men and tlig
ideas which motivate men's actions. It has a vital role
to play in support of the total United Nations effort for
peace, a role with many different aspects.

Mr. Lie also noted that Unesco is now being
asked, in accordance with the proposal adopted
by tlie Economic and Social Council (Ecosoc) at
its twelfth session, to take appropriate measures
to bring its relationship with the United Nations
ever more closely into line with the collective
security proposals adopted last year by the Gen-
eral Assembly in the "Uniting for Peace" reso-
lution.

June 25, J 95 1

1031

June 25, 1951

Agriculture

International Wheat Council,

Index

Vol. XXIV, No. 626

5th Session

1026

Aid to Forei^ Countries

PHILIPPINES :

U.S. Pledge FtilflUed (Cowen) 1017

U.S. Relations (Cowen over NBC-TV) . . . 1015

Arms and Armed Forces

Missing U.S. Planes In Czechoslovakia .... 1019

Asia

INDOCHINA: U.S. Legation at Vientiane, Laos,

Opened 1018

IRAN: U.S. Policy (Webb over NBC-TV) . . . 1015

JAPAN: Peace Treaty, Tripartite Views .... 1019

PHILIPPINES:

U.S. Pledge Fulfilled (Cowen) 1017

U.S. Relations (Cowen over NBC-TV) . . . 1016

Communism

Mutual Security Program (Webb over NBC-TV) . 1015
Stanton Griffls' Press Remarks Misinterpreted . 1018

Congress

Appropriation Act. H. R. 3587: Rider Defective

(Truman); Rider (Section 1302), Text . . 1027
Legislation Listed 1026

Europe

AUSTRIA: Soviet Repatriation Commission in
U.S. Zone Leaves (Donnelly Letter to Svlrl-

dov) 1019

CZECHOSLOVAKIA :

Missing U.S. Planes Reported 1019

Torquay Protocol (GATT) Signed 1020

FRANCE: Japan Peace Treaty, Tripartite Views . 1019
GERMANY: Tripartite Commission on German

Debts. Meeting 1023

ITALY: U.S. Consulate at Bari Opened .... 1018
SWEDEN: Torquay Protocol (GATT) Signed . . 1020
U.K.: Japan Peace Treaty, Tripartite Views . . 1019
U.S.S.R.:

CFM Proposed Meeting, U.S. Note, Text . . . 1021
Repatriation Commission in U.S. Zone of
Austria Leaves (Donnelly Letter to Svlrl-
dov) 1019

Foreign Service

Consular Offices: Bari, Italy, Opening .... 1018

Missions: Legation, Vientiane, Laos, Opening . 1018

Stanton Griffls' Press Remarks Misinterpreted . 1018

Human Rights

COVENANT: Economic, Social, Cultural Provl-

, slons: 1951 Revisions (Slmsarlan) .... 1003

International Meetings

COUNCIL OF FOREIGN MINISTERS: Proposed

Meeting. U.S. Note to U.S.S.R., Text . . . 1021

Report of:

U.N. Comnrilssion on Human Rights, 7th Ses-
sion 1003

U.S. Delegations:

UNESCO, 6th General Conference 1023

International Union of Crystallography . . . 1025
International Wheat Council, 5th Session . . 1026

ILO, 34th Session 1024

Tripartite Commission on German Debts . . 1023

Labor

ILO: 34th Session

1024

Mutual Aid and Defense

Mutual Security Program (Webb over NBC-TV) . 1015
Rider to Appropriation Act Defective (Truman) ;

Rider (Section 1302), Text 1027

Publications

Legislation Listed 1026

U.N. Bibliography: Selected Documents . . . 1014

Refugees and Displaced Persons

Soviet Repatriation Commission in U.S. Zone of
Austria Leaves (Donnelly Letter to Svlrl-
dov) 1019

Strategic Materials

Rider to Appropriation Act Defective (Truman);

Rider (Section 1302), Text 1027

Telecommunications

UNESCO Proposal on Television Uses (Res.,
Text)

1021

Trade

GATT: Sweden %nd Czechoslovakia Sign Tor-
quay Prototnjl 1020

Rider to Appropriation Act Defective (Truman) ;

Rider (Section 1302), Text 1027

Treaties and Other International agreements

GATT: Sweden and Czechoslovakia Sign Tor-
quay Protocol 1020

JAPAN: Peace Treaty, Tripartite Views . . . 1019

United Nations

Bibliography: Selected Documents 1014

Economic, Social, and Cultural Provisions in
Human Rights Covenant, 1951 Revisions

(Slmsarlan) 1003

International Court of Justice: Judges Elected

to Chamber of Summary Procedure .... 1023
Resolutions:

UNESCO Foreign Area Studies ( 5-10-51 ) , Text . 1022

UNESCO Television Uses (5-10-51), Text . . 1021
UNESCO: Proposals on:

Foreign Area Studies 1022

Television Uses 1021

U.S. in U.N. (Weekly Summary) 1030

Name Index

Acheson, Secretary Dean 1021

Andrews, Stanley 1026

Cowen, Myron M 1016, 1017

Donnelly, Walter J 1019

Dulles, John Poster 1019

Griffls, Stanton 1018

Hensel, H. Struve 1023

Kaiser, Philip M 1024

Sargeant, Howland H 1023

Slmsarlan, James 1003

Svirldov, General 1019

Truman, President Harry S 1027

Webb, James E 1015

Wyckoff, Ralph W. G 1025

U. S. GOVERNMENT PRINTINS OFFICEi 1911

%

f<

BOSTON PUBLIC 1-10"*"^

lllllllllilllll ,

3 9999 06352 748 3